Narayana Physics ADV Material
Uploaded by
Shailesh MishraNarayana Physics ADV Material
Uploaded by
Shailesh MishraJEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I PHYSICAL WORLD
PHYSICAL WORLD
SYNOPSIS
PHYSICS
Physics deals with the study of the basic laws of nature and their manifestation in different phenomena. The
basic laws of physics are universal and are applied in widely different contexts and conditions.
Physics, Technology and Society
Science,Technology and Society have strong relationships among one on other. Science is the mother of
technology and both of them are the reasons for the creation and development of the society.
Science and technology issues are actually discussed worldwide today. Progress in this has led to produce
the ability to integrate different types of physical products.
Physics is a basic discipline in the category of natural sciences which also includes other disciplines like
Chemistry and Biology. The word physics comes from a Greek word meaning nature.
(1) Some physicists from different countries of the world and their major contributions
Name Major contribution /Discovery Country of
Origin
Archimedes Principle of buoyancy; Principle of the lever Greece
Galileo Galilei Law of inertia Italy
Christiaan Huygens Wave theory of light Holland
Isaac Newton Universal law of gravitation ; Laws of motion ;
Reflecting telescope U.K.
Michael Faraday Laws of electromagnetic induction U.K.
James Clerk Maxwell Electromagnetic theory; Light - an electromagnetic wave U.K.
Heinrich Rudolf Hertz Generation of electromagnetic waves Germany
J.C. Bose Short radio waves India
W.K.Roentgen X-rays Germany
J.J. Thomson Electron U.K.
Marie sklodowska Curie Discovery of radium and polonium;
Studies on natural radio activity poland
Albert Einstein Explanation of photoelectric effect;Theory of relativity Germany
Victor Francis Hess Cosmic radiation Austria
R.A. Millikan Measurement of electronic charge U.S.A.
Ernest Rutherford Nuclear model of atom New Zealand
Niels Bohr Quantum model of hydrogen atom Denmark
C.V. Raman Inelastic scattering of light by molecules India
Louis Victor de Broglie Wave nature of matter France
M.N. Saha Thermal ionisation India
S.N. Bose Quantum statistics India
NARAYANA GROUP 1
PHYSICAL WORLD JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - I
Name Major contribution /Discovery Country of
Origin
Wolfgang Pauli Exclusion principle Austria
Enrico Fermi Controlled nuclear fission Italy
Werner Heisenberg Quantum mechanics; Uncertainity principle Germany
Paul Dirac Relativistic theory of electron; Quantum statistics U.K.
Edwin Hubble Expanding universe U.S.A.
Ernest Orlando Lawrence Cyclotron U.S.A.
James Chadwick Neutron U.K.
Hideki Yukawa Theory of nuclear forces Japan
Homi Jehangir Bhabha Cascade process of cosmic radiation India
Lev Davidovich Landau Theory of condensed matter; Liquid helium Russia
S.Chandrasekhar Chandrasekhar limit, structure and evolution of stars India
John Bardeen Transistors ; Theory of super conductivity U.S.A.
C.H. Townes Maser; Laser U.S.A.
Abdus Salam Unification of weak and electromagnetic interactions Pakistan
2) Link between technology and physics
Technology Scientific prionicple(s)
Steam engine Laws of thermodynamics
Nuclear reactor Controlled nuclear fission
Radio and Television Generation,propagation and detection of electromagnetic
waves
Computers Digital logic
Lasers Light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation
Production of ultra high Superconductivity
magnetic fields
Rocket propulsion Newton’s laws of motion
Electric generator Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction
Hydroelectric power Conversion of gravitational potential energy into electrical
energy
Aeroplane Bernoulli’s principle in fluid dynamics
Particle accelerators Motion of charged particles in electromagnetic fields
Sonar Reflection of ultrasonic waves
Optical fibres Total internal reflection of light
Non-reflecting coatings Thin film optical interference
Electron microscope Wave nature of electrons
Photocell Photoelectric effect
Fusion test reactor (Tokamak) Magnetic confinement of plasma
Giant Metrewave Radio Detection of cosmic radio waves
Telescope ( GMRT)
Bose-Einstein condensate Trapping and cooling of atoms by laser beams and
magnetic fields
2 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I PHYSICAL WORLD
Fundamental forces in nature : 7) What is the principle involved in the working
There are four fundamental forces in nature. They of Rocket?
are the ‘gravitational force’, the ‘electromagnetic 1) Newton’s laws of motion
force’, the ‘strong nuclear force’, and the ‘weak 2)Bernoulli’s principle
nuclear force’. Unification of different forces/ 3) Photoelectric effect
domains in nature is a basic quest in physics. 4) Faraday’s laws of EMI
Nature of physical laws : 8) Name the branch of science which deals with
the study of stars?
(i) The physical quantities that remain unchanged
1) Astronomy 2) Biology
in a process are called conserved quantities. Some
3) Geology 4) Chemistry
of the general conservation laws in nature include
9) Who Discovered the principle of inertia?
the laws of conservation of mass, energy, linear
1) Newton 2) Galileo
momentum, angular momentum, charge, etc. 3) Tycho Brahe 4) Kepler
Some conservation laws are true for one 10) Who invented wireless telegraphy?
fundamental force but not for the other. 1) Maxwell 2) Marconi
(ii) Conservation laws have a deep connection 3) Hertz 4) Faraday
with symmetries of nature. Symmetries of space 11) Match the following
and time, and other types of symmetries play a A-Force B-relative strength
central role in modern theories of fundamental 1) Gravitational force a) 1
forces in nature. 2) Weak force b) 1025
C.U.Q 3) Electromagnetic c) 1036
force
1) What is the discovery of CV. Raman? 4) Nuclear force d) 1038
1) Inelastic scattering of light by molecules 1) 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d 2) 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
2) Steam engine 3) 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a 4) 1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d
3) Propagation of EM Waves 12) Match the technology in column A to its
4) Reflection of Ultrasonic waves related scientific principle in column B
2) What is the contribution of S.Chandra Sekhar A- Technology B-Scientific Principle
to physics? 1) Steam engine a) Faraday’s laws
1) cosmic radiation 2) Nuclear model & atom 2) Nuclear Reactor b)Thermodynamic laws
3) LASER 3) Computer c) Nuclear Fission
4) structure and evolution of stars 4) Electric generation d) Digital logic
3) Who discovered electron? 1) 1-b;2-d;3-c;4-a 2) 1-b;2-c;3-d;4-a
1) Albert Einstein 2) J.C. Bose 3) 1-a;2-c;3-d;4-b 4) 1-d;2-a;3-c;4-b
3) J.J.Thomson 4) Bohr 13) Match the scientist’s name against discovery
4) Who discovered Neutron? A-Scientist B-Discovery
1) James chadwick 2) Fermi 1) Faraday a) Expansion of Universe
3) S.N.Bose 4) Millikan 2) Newton b) Law of EMI
5) What is the working principle of Steam 3) Einstein c) Law of gravitation
engine? 4) Hubble d) Theory of relativity
1) Digital logic 2) Super conductivity 1) 1-b;2-c;3-d;4-a 2) 1-b;2-d;3-c;4-a
3) Laws of thermodynamics 3)1-b;2-c;3-a;4-d 4) 1-b;2-a;3-c;4-d
4) Nuclear fission
6) Photocell works on the principle of C.U.Q- KEY
1) Raman effect 2) Compton effect 1)1 2) 4 3) 3 4) 1 5) 3
3) Seebeck effect 4) photoelectric effect 6) 4 7) 1 8)1 9) 2 10) 2
11) 1 12)2 13)1
NARAYANA GROUP 3
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Fundamental Quantities and their SI Units
SYNOPSIS There are seven fundamental quantities and two
Physical Quantity: supplementary quantities in S. I. system. These
Any quantity which can be measured directly (or) quantities along with their unit and symbols are given
indirectly (or) interms of which the laws of physics below:
can be expressed is called physical quantity. S.No Physical Quantity SI unit Symbol
There are two types of physical quantities
1) Fundamental quantities2) Derived quantities 1. Length metre m
Fundamental Quantities: Physical quantities 2. Mass kilogram kg
which cannot be expressed interms of any other 3. Time second s
physical quantities are called fundamental physical 4. Thermo dynamic
quantities. temperature kelvin K (or)
Ex. length, mass, time, temperature etc.. 5. Luminous
Derived Quantities: Physical Quantities which intensity candela Cd
are derived from fundamental quantities are called 6. Electric current ampere A
derived quantities. 7. Amount of
Ex. Area, density, force etc... substance
Unit of physical quantity: (or) quantity of
A unit of measurement of a physical quantity is the matter mole mol
standard reference of the same physical quantity Supplementary quantities
which is used for comparison of the given physical 1. Plane angle radian rad
quantity. 2. Solid angle steradian sr
Fundamental unit :The unit used to measure the
fundamental quantity is called fundamental unit. Measurement of length
Ex: metre for length, kilogram for mass etc.. The length of an object can be measured by using
Derived unit : The unit used to measure the different units. Some practical units of length are
derived quantity is called derived unit.
Ex: m2 for area, gm cm-3 for density etc... angstrom( Ao )=10 10 m=108 cm
The numerical value obtained on measuring a nanometre(nm) 109 m 10 A0
physical quantity is inversely proportional to the fermi 1015 m
magnitude of the unit chosen.
micron 106 m
1
U n
n U = constant X-ray unit 1013 m
1 A.U. = distance between sun & earth
n1U n2U
1 2
= 1.496×1011 m
Where n1 and n2 are the numerical values and One light year is the distance travelled by light in
U1 and U 2 are the units of same physical quantity one year in vacuum . This unit is used in astronomy.
in different systems. Light year 9.46 1015 m
System of units parsec 3.26 light years 30.84 1015 m
There are four systems of units Bohr radius 0.5 1010 m
1) F.P.S 2) C.G.S Mile=1.6 km
3) M.K.S 4) SI
Based on SI system there are three categories of
Measurement of mass:
The mass of an object can be measured by using
physical quantities. different units.Some practical units of mass are
1)fundamental quantities Quintal = 100 kg
2)supplementary quantities and Metric ton = 1000 kg
3)derived quantities
Atomic mass unit (a.m.u) = 1.67 10 27 kg
4 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Measurement of time: Some physical constants and their values:
One day = 86400 second 1 amu = 1.67 1027 kg 931.5MeV
Shake 108 second 1 atm pressure = pressure exerted by 76cm of
Abbreviations for multiples and sub multiples: Hg column 1.013 105 Pa
MACRO Prefixes Avagadro number (N)= 6.023 1023
Multiplier Symbol Prefix
101 da Deca Permittivity of free space= 8.854 1012 Fm 1 or
102 h Hecto C 2 / Nm2
103 k Kilo Permeability of free space
106 M Mega 0 4 107 Hm1
109 G Giga
1012 T Tera Joule’s constant (J)= 4.186 Jcal 1
10 15 P Peta Planck’s constant(h)= 6.62 1034 Js
1018 E Exa Rydberg’s constant(R)= 1.0974 107 m 1
1021 Z Zetta Boltzmann’s constant(KB)=1.38 10 23 JK 1
10 24 Y Yotta Stefan’s constant 5.67 108Wm 2 K 4
MICRO Prefixes Universal gas constant(R)= 8.314Jmol 1 K 1
Multiplier Symbol Prefix
10-1 d deci = 1.98cal mol 1 K 1
10-2 c centi Wien’s constant(b)= 2.93 10 3 metre kelvin
-3
10 m milli Accuracy and precision of instruments :
10-6 micro The numerical values obtained on measuring
10-9 n nano physical quantities depend upon the measuring
10-12 p pico instruments, methods of measurement.
10 15 f femto Accuracy refers to how closely a measured value
a atto agrees with the true value.
10 18 Precision refers to what limit or resolution the given
10 21 z zepto physical quantity can be measured.
10 24 y yocto Precision refers to closeness between the different
Some important conversions: observed values of the same quantity .
High precision does not mean high accuracy.
5 The difference between accuracy and precision
1kmph ms 1
18 can be understood and by the following example:
1 newton=105 dyne Suppose three students are asked to find the length
of a rod whose length is known to be 2.250cm.The
1 joule= 107 erg
observations are given in the table .
1 calorie=4.18 J
Measurement- Measurement- Measurement- Average
1eV= 1.6 1019 J Student
1 2 3 length
1gcm 3 1000kgm 3 A 2.25cm 2.27cm 2.26cm 2.26cm
1 lit=1000cm3 10 3 m 3 B 2.252cm 2.250cm 2.251cm 2.251cm
C 2.250cm 2.250cm 2.250cm 2.250cm
1KWH 36 105 J
1 HP=746 W It is clear from the above table , that the
1 degree=0.017 rad observations taken by a student A are neither
1cal g 1 4180JKg 1 precise nor accurate. The observations of student
1kgwt= 9.8 N B are more precise . The observations of student
1 telsa= 104 gauss C are precise as well as accurate.
Error:
1Am 1 4 103 oersted The result of every measurement by any measuring
1 weber=108 maxwell instrument contains some uncertainty. This
uncertainty in measurement is called error.
NARAYANA GROUP 5
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
Mathematically 1
Error = True value - Measured value probable error
no. of readings
Correction =-error
Ex: Parallax error
True value means, standard value free of errors.
Errors are broadly classified into 3 types : Random Errors:
i) Systematic errors They are due to uncontrolled disturbances which
ii) Random errors influence the physical quantity and the instrument.
iii) Gross errors these errors are estimated by statistical methods.
Systematic Errors 1
Random error
The errors due to a definite cause and which follow no. of observations
a particular rule are called systematic errors. They Ex-:The errors due to line voltage changes and
always occur in one direction (either +ve or -ve ) backlash error.
Systematic errors with a constant magnitude are Backlash errors are due to screw and nut.
called constant errors. Gross Errors
The constant arised due to imperfect design, zero The cause for gross errors are improper recording,
error in the instrument or any other such defects. neglecting the sources of the error, reading the
These are also called instrumental errors. instrument incorrectly, sheer carelessness
Example for the error due to improper designing Ex: In a tangent galvanometer experiment, the coil
and construction. is to be placed exactly in the magnetic meridian
If a screw gauge has a zero error of -4 head scale and care should be taken to see that no any other
divisions, then every reading will be 0.004cm less magnetic material is present in the vicinity.
than the true value. No correction can be applied to these gross errors.
The error arised due to external conditions like When the errors are minimised, the accuracy
changes in environment, changes in temperature, increases.
pressure, humidity etc. The systematic errors can be estimated and
Ex: Due to rise in temperature, a scale gets observations can be corrected.
expanded and this results in error in measurement Random errors are compensating type. Aphysical
of length. quantity is measured number of times and these values
Imperfection in Experimental lie oneitherside ofmean value. These errors are estimated
technique or Procedure: by statistical methods and accuracy is achieved.
The error due to experimental arrangement, Personal errors like parallax error can be avoided
procedure followed and experimental technique by taking proper care.
is called imperfection error. The instrumental errors are avoided by calibrating
Ex: In calorimetric experiments, the loss of heat the instrument with a standard reference and by
due to radiation, the effect on weighing due to applying proper corrections.
buoyancy of air cannot be avoided. Errors in measurement.
Personal errors or observational errors: True Value :
These are entirely due to the personal peculiarities In the measurement of a physical quantity the
of the experimenter. Individual bias, lack of proper arithmetic mean of all readings which is found to
setting of the apparatus, carelessness in taking be very close to the most accurate reading is to
observations (without taking the required be taken as True value of the quantities.
necessary precautions.) etc. are the causes for
If a1, a2 , a3 ..................an are readings then true
these type of errors. A person may be habituated
to hold his eyes (head) always a bit too far to the 1 n
right (or left) while taking the reading with a scale. value amean ai
n i 1
This will give rise to parallax error.
Absolute Error :
If a person keeps his eye-level below the level of The magnitude of the difference between the true
mercury in a barometer all the time, his readings value of the measured physical quantity and the
will have systematic error. value of individual measurement is called absolute
error.
These errors can be minimised by obtaining Absolute error =|True value - measured values|
several readings carefully and then taking their
ai amean ai
arithmetic mean..
The absolute error is always positive.
6 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Mean absolute error: WE-2 : The length and breadth of a rectangle are
The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is (5.7 0.1) cm and (3.4 0.2) cm. Calculate
considered as the mean absolute error of the the area of the rectangle with error limits.
physical quantity concerned.
Sol. Here l 5.7 0.1 cm, b 3.4 0.2 cm
a1 a2 an 1 n
amean
n
ai
n i1 Area : A l b 5.7 3.4 19.38 cm 2 19 cm 2
The mean absolute error is always positive. (rounding off to two significant figures)
Relative error: A l b 0.1 0.2
The relative error of a measured physical quantity
A l b 5.7 3.4
is the ratio of the mean absolute error to the mean 0.34 1.14 1.48
value of the quantity measured.
5.7 3.4 19.38
a m ean
Relative error= 1.48 1.48
a mean A A 19.38 1.48 1.5
19.38 19.38
It is a pure number having no units. (rounding off to two significant figures)
Percentage error:
So, Area 19.0 1.5 cm 2
a
a mean 100 % WE-3: The distance covered by a body in time
amean
Relative error and percentage error give a measure
5.0 0.6 s is 40.0 0.4 m. Calculate the
of accuracy i.e. if percentage error increases speed of the body. Also determine the
accuracy decreases. percentage error in the speed.
WE- 1:Repetition in the measurements of a certain Sol. Here, s 40.0 0.4 m and t 5.0 0.6 s
quantity in an experiment gave the following s 40.0 s
values: 1.29, 1.33, 1.34, 1.35, 1.32, 1.36, 1.30, Speed v 8.0 ms 1 As v
and 1.33. Calculate the mean value, mean t 5.0 t
absolute error, relative error and percentage v s t
error. v s t
Here s 0.4 m, s=40.0 m, t 0.6 s, t=5.0 s
Sol. Here, mean value
v 0.4 0.6
1.29 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.32 1.36 1.30 1.33 0.13
xm v 40.0 5.0
8 v 0.13 8.0 1.04
= 1.3275=1.33 (rounded off to two places of decimal)
Absolute errors in measurement are Hence, v 8.0 1.04 ms 1
x1 1.33 1.29 0.04; x2 1.33 1.33 0.00; v
Percentage error v 100 0.13 100 13%
x3 1.33 1.34 0.01; x4 1.33 1.35 0.02; WE- 4 : A screw gauge gives the following reading
x5 1.33 1.32 0.01; x6 1.33 1.36 0.03; when used to measure the diameter of a wire.
Main scale reading : 0 mm
x7 1.33 1.30 0.03; x8 1.33 1.33 0.00; Circular scale reading : 52 divisions
mean absolute error Given that 1 mm on main scale corresponds
0.04 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.03 0.03 0.00 to 100 divisions of the circular scale.
xm
8 [AIEEE 2011]
= 0.0175 Sol. Main scale reading = 0 mm
= 0.02 (rounded off to two places of decimal) Circular scale reading = 52 divisions
xm 0.02 value of 1 main scale division 1
Relative error 0.01503 0.02 Least count = mm
xm 1.33 Total divisions on circular scale 100
(rounded off to two places of decimal) Diameter of wire = M.S.R +( C.S.R x L.C)
Percentage error = 0.01503100 1.503 1.5%
1
0 52 mm 0.52mm 0.052cm
100
NARAYANA GROUP 7
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
WE-5:The current voltage relation of diode is given Whether it is addition or subtraction, absolute error
is same.
by I e1000V /T 1 mA,where the applied In subtraction the percentage error increases.
Error due to Multiplication:
voltage V is in volt and the temperature T is
Z A B
in kelvin.If a student makes an error If Z = AB then
Z A B
measuring 0.01V while measuring the Z
current of 5mA at 300K,what will be the is called fractional error or relative error..
Z
error in the value of current in mA? Z A B
(JEE MAIN-2014) Percentage error 100 100 100
Z A B
Here percentage error is the sum of individual
Sol. I e 1 mA
1000V / T
percentage errors.
dV= 0.01V, T=300K,I=5mA A
1000V / T Error due to division: if Z
I 1 e B
1000V Z A B
log I 1 Maximum possible relative error
T Z A B
Max. percentage error in division
dI 1000 A B
dV dI=0.2mA 100 100
I 1 T A B
WE-6 : In an experiment the angles are required
Z A
to be measured using an instrument. 29 Error due to Power: If Z= An ; n
divisions of the main scale exactly coincide Z A
p q
with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If A B
the smallest division of the main scale is half- In more general form : If Z
Cr
a-degree(= 0.50 ), then the least count of the then maximum fractional error in Z is
instrument is (AIEEE-2009) Z A B C
p q r
Valueof main scaledivision Z A B C
Sol. Least count = No.of divisions of vernier scale As we check for maximum error a +ve sign is to
C
1 1 1 1 0 0 be taken for the term r
= MSD 1 min C
30 30 2 60 Maximum Percentage error in Z is
Combination of Errors: Z A B C
Error due to addition 100 p 100 q 100 r 100
Z A B C
If Z A B ; WE-7: A physical quantity is represented by x
Z A B (Max. possible error) =Ma LbT-c. The percentage of errors in the
Z Z A B A B measurements of mass,length and time are
A B %, %, % respectively then the maximum
Relative error= percentage error is
A B
A B x M L T
100 Sol. 100 a. 100 b. 100 c. 100
Percentage error= x M L T
A B
Error due to subtraction a b c
If Z=A-B WE-8:Resistance of a given wire is obtained by
Z A B (Max. possible error ) measuring the current flowing in it and the
Z Z A B A B voltage difference applied across it. If the
A B percentage errors in the measurement of the
Relative error = current and the voltage difference are 3%
A B
A B each, then error in the value of resistance of
Percentage error = 100 the wire is [AIEEE 2012]
A B
8 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
V The significant figures indicate the extent to which
Sol. R log R log V log I the readings are reliable.
I
Rules for determining the number of
R V I significant figures:
R 100 V I 100
All the non-zero digits in a given number are
= 3% + 3% = 6% significant without any regard to the location of
WE-9: Two resistors of resistances R1 100 3 the decimal point if any.
Ex: 18452 or 1845.2 or 184.52 all have the
ohm and R2 200 4 ohm are connected (a) same number of significant digits,i.e. 5.
in series, (b) in parallel. Find the equivalent All zeros occurring between two non zero digits
resistance of the (a) series combination, (b) are significant without any regard to the location
parallel combination. Use for (a) the relation of decimal point if any.
Ex: 106008 has six significant digits.
R R1 R2 and for (b) 106.008 or 1.06008 has also got six significant
digits.
1 1 1 R' R1 R2 If the number is less than one, all the zeros to the
2 2
R ' R1 R2 and R'2 R1 R2 right of the decimal point but to the left of first
non-zero digit are not significant.
Sol. (a) The equivalent resistance of series Ex: 0.000308
combination In this example all zeros before 3 are insignificant.
a)All zeros to the right of a decimalpoint are significant
R R1 R2 100 3 ohm 200 4 ohm if they are not followed by a non-zero digit.
= 300 7 ohm. Ex: 30.00 has 4 significant digits
b) All zeros to the right of the last non-zero digit
(b) The equivalent resistance of parallel after the decimal point are significant.
combination Ex: 0.05600 has 4 significant digits
c) All zeros to the right of the last non-zero digit in
' R1 R2 200
R 66.7 ohm a number having no decimal point are not
R1 R2 3 significant.
Ex: 2030 has 3 significant digits
1 1 1
Then, from R ' R R Rounding off numbers:
1 2 The result of computation with approximate
numbers, which contain more than one uncertain
R ' R1 R2
we get, R '2 R 2 R 2 digit,should be rounded off.
1 2 Rules for rounding off numbers:
R1 R The preceding digit is raised by 1 if the immediate
R ' R '2 2
R '2 22 insignificant digit to be dropped is more than 5.
R1 R2
Ex: 4728 is rounded off to three significant figures as
2 2 4730.
66.7 66.7 The preceding digit is to be left unchanged if the
3 4 1.8
100 200 immediate insignificant digit to be dropped is less
than 5.
Then, R ' 66.7 1.8 ohm
Ex: 4723 is rounded off to three significant figures
as 4720
Significant Figures : If the immediate insignificant digit to be dropped
A significant figure is defined as the figure, which is 5 then there will be two different cases
is considered reasonably, trust worthy in number. a) If the preceding digit is even then it is to be
Ex: = 3.141592654 unchanged and 5 is dropped.
(upto 10 digits) Ex: 4.7253 is to be rounded off to two decimal
=3.14 (with 3 figures ) places. The digit to be dropped here is 5 (along
=3.1416 (upto 5 digits ) with 3) and the preceding digit 2 is even and hence
to be retained as two only 4.7253=4.72
NARAYANA GROUP 9
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
b)If the preceding digit is odd, it is to be raised by 1 Dimensionless Quantities:
Ex: 4.7153 is to be rounded off to two decimal Dimensionless quantities are those which do not
places. As the preceding digit ‘1’ is odd, it is to have dimensions but have a fixed value.
be raised by 1.
(a):Dimensionless quantities without units.
4.7153=4.72
Rules for Arithmetic Operations with Ex:Pure numbers,angle trigonometric functions ,
significant Figures: logarthemic functions etc.,
In multiplication or division, the final result should (b)Dimensionless quantities with units.
retain only that many significant figures as are there Ex:Angular displacement - radian, Joule's
in the original number with the least number of constant etc.,
significant figures. Dimensional variables:
Ex: 1.2 2.54 3.26 9.93648 .But the result Dimensional variables are those physical
should be limited to the least number of significant quantities which have dimensions and do not have
digits-that is two digits only. So final answer is fixed value.
9.9. Ex:velocity, acceleration, force, work, power.etc.
In addition or subtraction the final result should Dimensionless variables:
retain only that many decimal places as are there
Dimensionless variables are those physical
in the number with the least decimal places.
Ex:2.2+4.08+3.12+6.38=15.78.Finally we quantities which do not have dimensions and do
should have only one decimal place and hence not have fixed value.,
15.78 is to be rounded off as 15.8. Ex: Specific gravity, refractive index, Coefficient
WE-10:The respective number of significant of friction, Poisson's Ratio etc.,
figures for the numbers 23.023,0.0003and Limitations of dimensional analysis method:
21 103 are (AIEEE-2010) Dimensionless quantities cannot be determined by
Sol.(i)All non -zero numbers are significant figures. Zeros this method. Constant of proportionality cannot
occurring between zero digits are also significant. be determined by this method. They can be found
(ii) If the number is less than one,zero between the either by experiment (or) by theory.
decimal and first non zero digit are not significant. This method is not applicable to trigonometric,
(iii) Powers of 10 is not a significant figure. logarithmic and exponential functions.
5,1,2 In the case of physical quantities which are
Dimensions of physical quantities: dependent upon more than three physical
Dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers quantities, this method will be difficult.
to which the fundamental quantities are to be In some cases, the constant of proportionality also
raised to represent that quantity. possesses dimensions. In such cases we cannot
Dimensional Formula : use this system.
An expression showing the powers to which the If one side of equation contains addition or
fundamental quantities are to be raised to subtraction of physical quantities, we cannot use
represent the derived quantity is called dimensional this method.
formula of that quantity.
In general the dimensional formula of a quantity
can be written as M x Ly T z . Here x,y,z are
dimensions.
Dimensional Constants:
The physical quantities which have dimensions and
have a fixed value are called dimensional constants.
Ex:Gravitational constant (G), Planck's constant
(h), Universal gas constant (R), Velocity of light in
vacuum (c) etc.,
10 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
The following is the list of some physical quantities
with their formulae and dimensional formulae with units
S.No. Physical Quantity Explanation or Formulae Dimensional S.I.Unit
Formulae
1. Distance ,
Displacement,
Wave length,
Radius of gyration, M 0 L1 T 0 m
Circumference,
Perimeter,Light year,
2. Mass M 1 L0 T 0 kg
total time
3. Period of oscillation, no.of oscillations
Time, M 0 L0 T 1 s
Time constant T = Capacity Resistance
1
4. Frequency Reciprocal of time period n M 0 L0T 1 hertz ( Hz)
T
5. Area A = length breadth M 0 L2T 0 m2
6. Volume V=length breadth height M 0 L3T 0 m3
mass
7. Density d= M 1 L3T 0 kgm-3
volume
mass
8. Linear mass density λ= M 1 L1T 0 kgm-1
length
displacement
9. Speed, Velocity v= M 0 L1T 1 ms-1
time
change in velocity
10. Acceleration a= M 0 L1T 2 ms-2
time
11. Linear momentum P= mass velocity M 1 L1T 1 kgms-1
12. Force F = Mass acceleration M 1 L1T 2 N
1 1 1
13. Impulse J= Force time M L T Ns
14. Work,Energy,PE, KE, W = Force displacement
Strain energy, P.E= mgh
1
Heat energy KE = (Mass) (velocity)2 M 1 L2T 2 J(or) N.m
2
1
SE= ×Stress×Strain×volume
2
Work
15. Power P= M 1 L2T 3 watt
time
Force
16. Pressure , Stress,
Area
Stress
Modulus of elasticity (Y, , k) Y= M 1 L1T 2 pascal or Nm 2
Strain
NARAYANA GROUP 11
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
change in dimension
17. Strain = original dimension M 0 L0T 0 no units
work
18. Strain energy density E= M 1 L1T 2 Jm-3
volume
length of arc
19. Angular displacement θ= M 0 L0T 0 rad
radius
angular dispacement
20. Angular velocity ω= M 0 L0T 1 rads-1
time
changein angular velocity
21. Angular acceleration α= M 0 L0T 2 rads-2
time
22. Angular momentum L=linear momentum
perpendicular distance M 1 L2T 1 Js
energy
23. Planck's constant h= M 1 L2T 1 Js
frequency
24. Angular impulse Torque time M 1 L2T 1 Js
1 2 2
25. Torque τ=force× distance M L T Nm
26. Acceleration due to
weight
gravity(g) g= M 0 LT 2 ms-2 or Nkg-1
mass
2
Force distance
27. Universal gravitational G= M 1 L3T 2 Nm2 kg-2
Mass1 Mass 2
Constant
28. Moment of inertia I=Mass (radius of gyration)2 M 1 L2T 0 kgm2
dv
29. Velocity gradient = M 0 L0T 1 S 1
dx
surface energy force
30. Surface tension, S= = M 1 L0T 2 Nm-1 or Jm-2
changein area length
Surface energy
Spring constant
force
Force constant K=
elongation
tangential stress
31. Coefficient of viscosity η= velocity gradient M 1 L1T 1 Pa s (or) Nm 2 s
32. Gravitational potential Gravitational field distance M 0 L2T 2 J/Kg
33. Heat energy msθ M 1 L2T 2 joule
34. Temperature θ M 0 L0T 0 1 kelvin( K)
heat energy
35. Specific heat capacity S (or) C= mass×temp. M 0 L2T 2 1 Jkg-1 K-1
dQ
36. Thermal capacity =mass×specific heat M 1 L2T 2 1 JK-1
dθ
12 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
37. Latent heat (or)
heat energy
Calorific value L= M 0 L2T 2 Jkg-1
mass
38. Water equivalent W=Mass specific heat M 1 L0T 0 kg
l A V
39. Coefficient of thermal ; ; V M 0 L0T 0 1 K -1
l A
expansion
PV
40. Universal gas constant R= M 1 L2T 2 1mol 1 Jmol-1K-1
nT
R
41. Gas constant (for 1 gm) r= M 0 L2T 2 1mol 1 Jkg-1K-1
Mol.wt
42. Boltzmann’s constant
R
(for 1 Molecule) k= M 1 L2T 2 1 JK-1molecule-1
Avagadro number
W
43. Mechanical equivalent J M 0 L0T 0 no SI units
H
of heat
Qd
44. Coefficient of thermal K= M 1 L1T 3 1 Js-1 m-1 K-1 (or) Wm-1 K-1
A Δθt
conductivity
dQ heat energy
45. Entropy = M 1 L2T 2 1 JK-1
T temperature
ΔE
46. Stefan's constant σ= M 1 L0T 3 4 Js-1m-2K-4 (or) Wm-2K-4
ΔAΔTθ 4
dθ temp×time
R= =
47. Thermal resistance dQ Heat M 1 L2T 3 1 KsJ-1
dt
d
( or) R=
KA
Change in temp dθ
48. Temperature gradient = M 0 L1T 0 1 Km-1
length dl
Change in pressure dp
49. Pressure gradient = M 1 L2T 2 pascal m-1
length dl
Energy ΔE
50. Solar constant = M 1 L0T 3 Js-1m-2 (or) Wm-2
area × time AT
51. Enthalpy heat ( Q ) M 1 L2T 2 joule
0 0
52. Pole strength m =IL ( or) M LT A Am
Magnetic Momement
Mag.Length
53. Magnetic moment M= 2 l ×m M 0 L2T 0 A Am2
NARAYANA GROUP 13
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
m
54. Magnetic intensity (or) H= M 0 L1T 0 A Am-1
4πd 2
Magnetising field
Magnetic moment
55. Intensity of magnetisation I= M 0 L1T 0 A Am-1
Volume
56. Magnetic flux = B×A M 1 L2T 2 A1 Wb
=(Magnetic induction Area)
Magnetic flux F
57. Magnetic induction B = M 1 L0T 2 A1 Tesla (or) Wbm-2 (or) NA-1m-1
A Area il
4πFd 2
58. Magnetic permeability µ= M 1 L1T 2 A2 Hm-1
m1 m 2
I
59. Magnetic susceptibility χ= M 0 L0T 0 no units
H
60. Electric current I M 0 L0T 0 A A
61. Charge Q =Current Time M 0 L0TA C
62. Electric dipole moment P=Charge Distance M 0 L1 AT Cm
63. Electric field strength (or)
Force
Electric field intensity E= M 1 LT 3 A1 NC -1
Charge
64. Electrical flux ( E ) Electrical intensity area M 1 L3T 3 A1 Nm2 C-1
Work
65. Electric potential (or) V= M 1 L2T 3 A1 V
Charge
Potential difference
Pot.diff
66. Electrical resistance R= M 1 L2T 3 A2
Current
1 1
67. Electrical conductance C= = M 1 L2T 3 A2 mho (or) Siemen (S)
R Resistance
68. Specific resistance (or
RA
Resistivity (or) s ρ= M 1 L3T 3 A2 Ohm-m
l
1
69. Electrical conductivity = R esistivity M 1 L3T 3 A2 Ohm-1 m-1 (or) Siemen m-1
70. Current density
( current per unit area J = Electrical intensity
of cross section) Conductivity M 0 L2T 0 A Am-2
Current
or Area
Q Charge
71. Capacitance C= = M 1 L2T 4 A2 F
V Potential
dε Voltage×Time
L= =
72. Self (or) Mutual dI Current M 1 L2T 2 A2 H(or) Wb/amp
dt
inductance
14 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
q 1q 2
73. Electrical permittivity ε= M 1 L3T 4 A2 farad/m
4πFd 2
74. Surface charge density M 0 L2T 1 A1 Cm-2
Charge
Area
Light energy
75. Luminous flux M 1 L2T 3 lumen
Time
ΔE Luminous flux
76. Intensity of illumination I= = M 1 L0T 3 lumen m-2 (or) lux.
ΔtΔA Area
(or) Iluminance
1
77. Focal power P= M 0 L1T 0 dioptre
Focal length
1
78. Wave number = M 0 L1T 0 m-1
λ
(Propagation constant)
Z2e4m
79. Rydberg’s constant R= M 0 L1T 0 m-1
8ε 20 ch 3
Physical Quantities Having Same
WE-11: Let 0 denote the dimensional formula Dimensional Formulae:
of permittivity of vacuum .If M is mass ,L is Distance, Displacement, radius,wavelength, radius
length,T is time and A is electric current,then of gyration [L]
(JEE-MAIN 2013) Speed, Velocity, Velocity of light LT 1
acceleration ,acceleration due to gravity, intensity
1 q1q2
Sol: From coulomb’s law F 4 R 2 of gravitational field, centripetal acceleration
0
L T 2
q1q2 Impulse, Change in momentum M LT 1 -size
0
4 FR 2 changed
Substituting the units Force, Weight, Tension,energy gradient, Thrust
2 M LT 2
c2 AT -- size changed
0 2
Work, Energy, Moment of force or Torque,
N m MLT 2 L2
Moment of couple M L2 T 2 -- size changed
1 3 4 2
M L T A Force constant, Surface Tension, Spring constant,
surface energy i.e. Energy per unit area M T 2 -
WE-12:The dimensional formula of magnetic field size changed
strength in M, L, T and C (coulomb) is given Angular momentum, Angular impulse, Planck's
as (AIEEE 2008)
constant M L2 T 1 - size changed
Sol: From F = Bqv
Angular velocity, Frequency, angular
2
F MLT frequency,Velocity gradient,
B M 1 L0T 1C 1 Decay constant, rate of disintegration [T–1]
qv C LT 1
Stress, Pressure, Modulus of Elasticity, Energy
density M L1 T 2
Latent heat, Gravitational potential L2 T 2
NARAYANA GROUP 15
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
Specific heat, Specific gas constant L2 T 2 1 a
Thermal capacity, Entropy, Boltzmann constant, bx should represent pressure
Molar thermal capacity, M L2 T 2 1 a 1 a 2
b L ML T b MT
1 2
Wave number, Power of a lens, Rydberg’s constant
L1
Uses of dimensional analysis method:
L To check the correctness of the given equation.
Time, RC, , LC ,[T ]1
R (This is based on the principle of homogeneity)
Power, Rate of dissipation of energy, ML2T 3 To convert one system of units into another
Intensity of sound, Intensity of radiation [ MT 3 ] system.
Electric potential, potential difference, electromotive To derive the equations showing the relation
force [ ML2T 3 I 1 ] between different physical quantities.
Intensity of magnetic field, Intensity of magnetization
1 2
I L1 WE-14:Check whether the relation S ut at
2
3 1 is dimensionally correct or not, where symbols
Electric field and potential gradient MLT A have their usual meaning.
Rydberg’s constant and propagation constant
1 2
M 0 L1T 0 Sol: We have S ut at . checking the dimensions
2
Strain , Poisson’s ratio, refractive index, dielectric
constant, coefficient of friction, relative permeabil- on both sides, LHS= S M 0 L1T 0 ,
ity, magnetic susceptibility, electric susceptibility, 1 2
RHS= ut 2 at LT T LT T
1 2 2
angle, solid angle, trigonometric ratios,logarithm func-
tion, exponential constant are all dimensionless.
If L,C and R stands for inductance, capacitance and M 0 LT
1 0
M 0 LT
1 0
M 0 LT1 0
L we find LHS=RHS.
resistance respectively then , LC , RC and time
R Hence, the formula is dimensionally correct.
0 0
M L T WE-15:Young’s modulus of steel is 19 1010 N / m 2 .
Coefficient of linear expansion, coefficient of super- Express it in dyne / cm 2 . Here dyne is the CGS
ficial expansion and coefficient of cubical unit of force.
expansion,temperature coefficient of resistance
Sol: The SI unit of Young’s modulus is N / m 2 . .
M 0 L0T 0 K 1
5
Solar constant and poynting vector ML T
0 3
10 N 19 10
10 10 dyne
Given Y 19 10 102 cm 2
Principle of homogeneity: m2
It states that only quantities of same dimensions can
be added, subtracted and equated. dyne
19 1011 2
cm
a
WE-13: The dimensional formula of in the WE-16 : For a particle to move in a circular orbit
b uniformly, centripetal force is required,
2
a ct which depends upon the mass (m), velocity
equation P where P = pressure, (v) of the particle and the radius (r) of the
bx
x = displacement and t = time circle. Express centripetal force in terms of
these quantities
2
a ct Sol: According to the provided information,
Sol : P bx bx
let F m a vb r c . F km a vb r c
By principle of Homogeneity, M a LT 1 Lc
b
M 1 LT
1 2
16 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
M 1 LT
1 2
M a Lb cT b EJ 2
Sol : D.F. of
using principle of homogeneity we have M 5G 2
a = 1 ,b + c = 1 ,b = 2 Substituting D.F. of E, J, M, and G in above formula
on solving we have a = 1, b = 2, c = -1 ML2T 2 ML2T 1
2
using these values we get F = km1v 2 r 1 2 M 0 L0T 0
M 5 M 1 L3T 2
mv 2
F k 1 y
r WE20: In the equation p k T where p is the
B
Note: The value of the dimensionless constant k
is to be found experimentally. pressure, y is the distance, k B is Boltzmann
WE-17: Derive an expression for the time period constant and T is the temperature. Dimen-
of a simple pendulum of mass(m), length (l) at sions of are (Med- 2013)
a place where acceleration due to gravity is (g). 1 y
Sol: Let the time period of a simple pendulum depend Sol.
p k BT
upon the mass of bob m, length of pendulum l , Dimension of
and acceleration due to gravity g, then Dimensional formula of kB Dimensional formula of T
t m a l b g c t km a l b g c Dimensional formula of p Dimensional formula of y
c ML2T 3 T
0 0 1 a b
M L T M L LT 2 M 0 L2T 0
ML1T 2 L
M 0 L0T 1 M a Lb cT 2 c Dimensions of M,L,T in are 0,2,0
comparing the powers of M, L, and T on
both sides, we get a = 0, b + c = 0, -2c=1 WE21: The vander Waal’s equation for n moles of
a = 0, b = 1/2 and c = -1/2. Putting these values, a
1 a real gas is p V 2 V b nRT where p is pres-
2
0 l l
we get T km 12 T k g , sure, V is volume, T is absolute temperature, R
g is molar gas constant a, b and c are vander
which is the required relation. Waal’s constants. The dimensional formula for
ab is (Med- 2012)
WE18: If C is the velocity of light, h is Planck’s Sol.By principle of homogenity of dimensions P can
constant and G is Gravitational constant are
taken as fundamental quantities, then the di- a
added to P only. It means 2 also gives pressure.
mensional formula of mass is.(Eamcet - 2014) V
1 2 1
Sol: C LT (1) ; h ML T (2) Dimension formulae for pressure P M 1L1T 2
G M 1 L3T 2 (3) and Volume V M 0 L3T 0
Solving (2) and (3)
a
h ML2T 1 Since = pressure
M 2 L1T 1 V2
G M 1 L3T 2
a a
Substituting (1) in above M 1L1T 2 0 6 0 M 1L1T 2
M L T
0 30
M LT
1 1 1
h M 2 M h 2 G 2 C 2 a M 1 L5T 2
G C similarly, b will have same dimensions as
WE19: If E, M, J and G respectively denote energy, volume V b volume
mass, angular momentum and universal gravi-
tational constant, the quantity, which has the b M 0 L3T 0
same dimensions as the dim ensions of ab M 1 L5T 2 M 0 L3T 0 M 1 L8T 2
2
EJ
(Eamcet - 2013)
M 5G 2
NARAYANA GROUP 17
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
W.E-22:A screw gauge having 100 equal divisions 2. The error due to resolution of a measuring
and a pitch of length 1 mm is used to measure instrument is
the diameter of a wire of length 5.6 cm. The 1) personal error 2) random error
main scale reading is 1 mm and 47th circular
division coincides with the main scale. Find the 3) systematic error 4) gross error
3. The error due to resolution of a measuring
curved surface area of the wire in cm 2 to
appropriate significant figures.(Use = 22/7) instrument is
1) random error 2) personal error
1 mm
Sol. Least Count = 0.01 mm 3) gross error 4) least count error
100 4. The random error which exists invariably in
Diameter = MSR + CSR(LC) = 1 mm+47 (0.01)
mm = 1.47 mm screw gauge is
22
1) least count error 2) Zero error
Surface area = Dl 1.47 56 mm 2 3) gross error 4) backlash error
7
5. The errors which are estimated by statistical
= 2.58724 cm 2 = 26cm 2
methods are
W.E-23: In Searle’s experiment, the diameter of the
wire as measured by a screw gauge of least 1) systematic errors 2) random errors
count 0.001 cm is 0.050 cm. The length, 3) theoretical errors 4) gross errors
measured by a scale of least count 0.1 cm, is 6. The measure of accuracy is
110.0 cm. When a weight of 50 N is suspended 1) absolute error 2) relative error
from the wire, the extension is measured to be 3) percentage error 4) both 2 and 3
0.125 cm by a micrometer of least count 0.001 7. The decrease in percentage error
cm. Find the maximum error in the 1) increases the accuracy
measurement of Young’s modulus of the
material of the wire from these data. 2) does not effect the accuracy
Sol.Maximum percentage error in Y is given by 3) decreases the accuracy
W L Y
4) both 1 and 3
Y D x L
2
D x 2 8. In a measurement, both positive and negative
Y D x L
4 errors are found to occur with equal
0.001 0.001 0.1 probability. The type of errors is
2 0.0489
0.05 0.125 110 1) proportional errors 2) systematic errors
W.E24:The side of a cube is measured by vernier 3) determinate errors 4) random errors
calipers (10 divisions of the vernier scale 09. The errors that always occur in the
coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale, measurement with screw gauge is
where 1 division of main scale is 1 mm). The 1) random errors 2) systematic errors
main scale reads 10 mm and first division of
vernier scale coincides with the main scale. 3) gross errors 4) negligible errors
Mass of the cube is 2.736 g. Find the density of 10. A physicist performs an experiment and takes
the cube in appropriate significant figures. 200 readings.He repeats the same experiment
Sol.Least count of vernier calipers and now takes 800 readings. By doing so
1 division of main scale 1 1) the probable error remains same
0.1 mm
Number of divisions in vernier scale 10 2) the probable error is four times
The side of cube = 10 mm + 1 0.1 mm 1.01 cm 3) the probable error is halved
Mass 2.736 g 4) the probable error is reduced by a factor ¼
3
Now, density = Volume 1.013 cm3 2.66 g cm 11. More the number of significant figures shows
more the
1)accuracy 2)error 3)number of figures 4)value
C.U.Q
12. If a measured quantity has n significant
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS figures, the reliable digits in it are
1. The reliability of a measurement depends on 1) n 2) n-1 3) n 1 4) n/2
1) precision 2) accuracy
3) systematic error 4) random error
18 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
13. If the significant figures are more, 21. In determining viscosity by the equation
1)percentage error is more and accuracy is less
2)percentage error is less and accuracy is more pr 4
3)percentage error is less and accuracy is less which of the quantities must be
8vl
4)percentage error is more and accuracy is more measured more accurately
14. The mathematical operation in which the
accuracy is limited to least accurate term is 1) P 2) r 3) v 4) l
1) addition 2) subtraction 22. The number of significant figures in 0.007 is
3) multiplication & division 4) both 1 and 2 1) 4 2) 2 3) 3 4) 1
15. The time period of a seconds pendulum is 23. Round off 20.96 to three significant figures
measured repeatedly for three times by two stop 1) 20.9 2) 20 3) 21.0 4) 21
watches A,B. If the readings are as follows, then UNITS AND DIMENSIONAL FORMULA
S.NO A B 24. The dimensional formula for strain energy
1. 2.01 sec 2.56 sec density is
2. 2.10 sec 2.55 sec 1) [ M 1 L2T 3 ] 2) [ M 1 L2T 3 ]
3. 1.98 sec 2.57 sec 3) [ M L T ]
1 1 2 4) [ M 1 L2T 2 ]
1) A is more accurate but B is more precise 25. The dimensional formula for areal velocity is
2) B is more accurate but A is more precise 1) [ M 0 L2T 1 ] 2) [ M 0 L2T 1 ]
3) A,B are equally precise 3) [ M L T ]
0 2 1 4) [ M 0 L2T 1 ]
4) A,B are equally accurate 26. The physical quantity having the same
16. If Y = a + b, the maximum percentage error in dimensional formula as that of force is
the measurement of Y will be 1) Torque 2)work 3) pressure 4) thrust
a b
a b 27. Nm-1 is the SI unit of
1) 100 2) a b a b 100
a b 1) velocity gradient 2) Rydberg’s constant
a b a b 3) coefficient of viscosity 4) Spring constant
3) a b 100 4)
a b
a
100
b 28. If P is the X-ray unit and Q is micron then P/Q
17. If Y = a - b, the maximum percentage error in is
the measurement of Y will be 1) 105 2) 105 3) 107 4) 107
a b a b 29. The dimension of mass is zero in the following
1) 100 2) a b a b 100 physical quantities.
a b
1)Surface tension 2)coefficient of viscosity
a b a b
3)heat 4) Specific heat capacity
3) a b 100 4) a b a b 100
30. The SI unit of a physical quantity is
18. If Y = a x b, the maximum percentage error in [J m-2 ]. The dimensional formula for that
the measurement of Y will be quantity is
a b a b 1)[ M 1 L2 ] 2)[ M 1 L0T 2 ]
1) a 100 / b 100 2) 100 3)[ M 1 L2T 1 ] 4)[ M 1 L1T 2 ]
a b -2
31. [Jm ] is the unit of
a b a b
1) Surface tension 2) Viscosity
3) 100 100
100 4)
3) Strain energy 4) Intensity of energy
a b a b
19. If Y = a/b, the maximum percentage error in 32. The set of quantities which can form a group
the measurement of Y will be of fundamental quantities in any system of
measurement is
a b a b 1) Length,mass and time
1) a 100 / b 100 2) 100
a b 2)Length,mass and velocity
a b 3)Length,velocity and time
3) 100 100 4)velocity,mass and time
a b 33. The fundamental unit which is common in
a b C.G.S. and S.I system is
4) 100
a b 1) metre 2) second 3) gram 4) all the above
20. Of the following the dimensionless error is 34. 1 a.m.u is equal to
1) Systematic error 2) Gross error 1) 1.66 x 10-24 g 2) 1.66 x 10-27 g
24
3) Random error 4) Relative error 3) 1.66 x 10 g 4) 1.66 x 1027 g
NARAYANA GROUP 19
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
35. Modulus of Elasticity is dimensionally 49. Which one of the following is not measured in
equivalent to (1996 E) the units of energy
1) Stress 2) Surface tension 1) (couple) x (angle turned through)
3) Strain 4)Coefficient of viscosity 2) moment of inertia x ( angular velocity)2
36. If x times momentum is work, then the 3) force x distance 4) impulse x time
dimensional formula of x is 50. An example to define length in the form of
1) [L1T] 2) [LT 1] 3) [ML1T1] 4) [MLT 1 1
] time at a place is
37. The following does not give the unit of energy 1) Wrist watch 2) Linear expansion of iron rod
1) watt second 2) kilowatt hour 3) Frequency of ripples on the surface of water
3) newton metre 4) pascal metre 4) Seconds pendulum
38. 1 fermi is equal to 51. The one which is not the unit of length is
1) Angstrom unit 2) Micron
1) 1012 m 2) 109 m 3) 106 A0 4)10-9 micron 3) Par-sec 4) Steradian
39. "Impulse per unit area " has same dimensions 52. The physical quantity having the same
as that of dimensional formula as that of entropy is :
1)coefficient of viscosity 2) surface tension 1) Latent heat 2) Thermal capacity
3) bulk modulus 4) gravitational potential 3) Heat 4) Specific heat
40. The following pair does not have same 53. Js is the unit of
dimensions 1) Energy 2) Angular Momentum
1) Pressure, modulus of elasticity 3) Momentum 4) Power
2) Angular velocity, velocity gradient 54. Which of the following cannot be expressed
3) Surface tension and force constant as dyne cm-2?
4) Impulse and torque 1) Pressure 2) Longitudinal stress
41. Dimensions of solar constant are 3) Longitudinal strain
1) M 0 L0T 2) M 1 LT
1 2
4) Young's modulus of elasticity
55. The unit of atmospheric pressure is :
3) M 1L1T 2 4) M 1T 3 1) Metre 2) kgwt 3) g cm-2 4) bar
42. The following is a unitless and dimensionless 56. The ratio between pico and giga is
quantity 1) 1021 2) 10-21 3) 1014 4) 108
1) Angle 2) Solid angle 57. 1 micron =___ nanometer
3) Mechanical equivalent of heat 1) 10-6 2)10-10 3) 103 4) 10-3
4) Coefficient of friction 58. Which of the following has smallest value?
43. The unitless quantity is 1) peta 2)femto 3) kilo 4)hecto
1) Velocity gradient 2) Pressure gradient 59. The physical quantity having dimension 2 in
3) Displacement gradient 4) Force gradient length is
44. If the unit of tension is divided by the unit of 1) Power 2) Acceleration
surface tension the derived unit will be same 3) Force constant 4) Stress
as that of 60. If m is the mass of drop of a liquid of radius 'r'
1) Mass 2) Length 3) Area 4) Work mg
45. Atto is ___________ then r has the same dimensions of :
1) An instrument used to measure gradient 1) Surface tension 2) Tension
2) An instrument used to measure the altitude 3) Young's Modulus 4) Coefficient of viscosity
3) 1018 4) 10-18 61. The intensity of a wave is defined as the energy
-1
46. N m s is the unit of transmitted per unit area per second. Which of
1) Pressure 2) Power the following represents the dimensional
3) Potential 4) Pressure gradient formula for the intensity of the wave?
47. Which one of the following represents the
correct dimensions of the coefficient of 1) ML0T 2 2) ML0T 3
viscosity? (AIEEE 2004)
3) ML0T 1 4) [ ML4T ]
1) [ ML1T 2 ] 2) [ MLT 1 ]
62. The fundamental unit which has the same
3) [ ML1T 1 ] 4) [ ML2T 2 ]
power in the dimensional formula of surface
48. Stefan's constant has the unit as tension and coefficient of viscosity is(1989 E)
1) J s-1 m-2 K4 2) Kg s-3 K4 1) mass 2) length 3) time 4) none
-2 -4
3) W m K 4) Nms-2 K-4
20 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
63. Electron volt is the unit of (1988 E) 77. Of the following quantities which one has the
1) Power 2) Potential difference dimensions different from the remaining
3) Charge 4) Energy three?
64. One shake is equal to 1) energy density2) force per unit area
1) 10 8 s 2) 10 9 s 3) 10 10 s 4) 109 s 3) product of charge per unit volume and voltage
65. Torr is the unit of physical quantity 4) Angular momentum per unit mass
1) density 2) pressure 78. The dimensional formula of resistivity in terms
3) torque 4) None of M, L, T and Q, where Q stands for the di-
66. The S.I. value of Mechanical equivalent of mensions of charge is
heat is: 1) [ ML3T 1Q 2 ] 2) [ ML3T 2Q 1 ]
1) 4.2 2) 1 3) 2.4 4) 2
67. The physical quantity that has no dimensions is: 3) [ ML2T 1Q 1 ] 4) [ MLT 1Q 1 ]
1) angular velocity 2) linear momentum 79. The dimensional formula for Magnetic
3) angular momentum 4) strain induction is (2000 M)
68. The physical quantities not having same di- 1) [ MT A ]
1 1 2) [ MT 2 A1 ]
mensions are 3) [ MLA ] 1 4)[ MT 2 A ]
1) torque and work 80. The dimensional formula for magnetic flux is
2) momentum and Planck’s constant (2003M)
3) stress and Young’s modulus 1) [ ML T I ] 2) [ ML2T 2 I 2 ]
2 2 1
1/ 2
3) [ ML2T 2 I 1 ]4) [ ML2T 2 I 2 ]
4) speed and 0 o 81. The SI unit of a physical quantity having the
69. A pair of physical quantities having the same dimensional formula of [ ML0T 2 A1 ]
dimensional formula are (1992 M) 1) tesla 2)weber
1) Force and Work 2) Work and energy 3)amp metre 4)amp m2
3) Force and Torque 4) Work and Power
70. The dimensional formula of calorie are 82. What are the units of 0
1) [ ML2T 2 ] 2) [ MLT 2 ] 4
3) [ ML T ]
2 1 4)[ ML T 1 ] 1) NA m 1 2 2) NA2
71. The dimensional formula for coefficient of 3) Nm 2C 2 4) unitless
kinematic viscosity is :(2002M) 83. If is the permeability and is the
1. [ M 0 L1T 1 ] 2. [ M 0 L2T 1 ] 1
3. [ ML2T 1 ] 4. [ ML1T 1 ] permittivity then is equal to
72. The product of energy and time is called action. 1. speed of sound
The dimensional formula for action is same 2. speed of light in vacuum
as that for 3. speed of sound in medium
1) force velocity 2) impulse distance 4. speed of light in medium
3) power 4) angular energy
73. Specific heat is in joule per kg per 0C rise of Permeability
84. Permittivity will have the dimensional
temperature. Its dimensions are:
1) [ MLT 1 K 1 ] 2) [ ML2T 2 K 1 ] formula of :
3)[ M LT K ]
0 2 2 1 4) [ MLT 2 K1 ] 1) [ M 0 L0T 0 A0 ] 2) [ M 2 L2T 4 A2 ]
74. The dimensional formula for Magnetic 3) [ M 2 L4T 6 A4 ] 4)[ M 2 L4T 6 A4 ]
Moment of a magnet is 85. Siemen is the S.I unit of (1991 E)
1) [ M 0 L2T 0 A1 ] 2) [ M 0 L2T 0 A1 ] 1)Electrical conductance 2) Electrical conductivity
3)[ M 0 L2T 0 A1 ] 4) [ M 0 L2T 0 A1 ] 3)Potential difference 4)Inductance
75. Dimensions of C x R (Capacity x Resistance) 86. Which of the following quantities has the units
is (1995 E) Kg m2 s-3 A-2?
1) frequency 2) energy 1) Resistance 2) Inductance
3) time period 4) current 3) Capacitance 4) Magnetic flux
76. Dimensional formula for capacitance is (1997E) 87. The SI unit of magnetic permeability is
1) [ M 1 L2T 4 I 2 ] 2) [ M 1 L2T 4 I 2 ] 1) Am1 2) Am 2 3) Hm 2 4) Hm 1
3) [ M 1 L2T 2 ] 4) [MLT–1 ] 88. The dimensions of time in Electrical intensity is
1) -1 2) -2 3) -3 4)3
NARAYANA GROUP 21
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
89. SI Unit of a physical quantity whose 1) l / g 2) I / PmB 3) k / m 4) R / g
dimensional formula is M 1 L2T 4 A2 is
1.ohm 2. volt 3. siemen 4. farad 101. Given that I= moment of inertia,
1 Pm magnetic dipole moment and
90. B= magnetic induction, then the dimensional
Capacitance Inductance have the same
unit as formula for I / Pm B is same as that of
1) time 2) velocity 1) time 2) length 3) time2 4) length 2
3)velocity gradient 4) none of the above 102. Given that m = mass, l = length, t = time and i
1 = current. The dimensional formula of ml 2 / t 3i
91. What are the units of K 4 ? (AIEEE 2004) are the same as that of
1) electric field 2) electric potential
1) C N m
2 1 2 2) C N m
2 1 2
3) capacitance 4) inductance
3) C N m
2 1 2 4) unitless 103. If F is the force, is the permeability, H is the
92. [M1L2T-3A-2] is the dimensional formula of : intensity of magnetic field and i is the electric
1) electric resistance 2) capacity F
3) electric potential 4) specific resistance current, then Hi has the dimensions of
93. If L is the inductance, 'i' is current in the
1) mass 2) length 3) time 4) energy
1
circuit, Li 2 has the dimensions of 104. If e,0 , h and c respectively represent electric
2
1. Work 2. Power 3. Pressure 4. Force charge, permittivity of free space, Planck’s
94.The dimension of length in electrical resistance is e2
1) 2 2) 1 3) -2 4) -1 constant and speed of light then has the
95. If m is the mass, Q is the charge and B is the 0 hc
magnetic induction, m/BQ has the same dimensions of
dimensions as :(1999 M) a) angle b) relative density
1)Frequency 2)Time 3)Velocity 4)Acceleration c) strain d) current
96. If L has the dimensions of length, V that of 1) a & b are correct 2) d & c are correct
3) a, b & c are correct 4) a,b,c & d are correct
potential and 0 is the permittivity of free space 105. Two physical quantities are represented by P
then quantity 0 LV V has the dimensions of and Q. The dimensions of their product is
1) current 2) charge 3) resistance 4) voltage [ M 2 L4T 4 I 1 ] and the dimensions of their ratio
97. Dimensional formula of ‘ohm’ is same as is [ I 1 ]. Then P and Q respectively are
h h2 h h2 1. magnetic flux and Torque acting on a magnet.
1) 2) 3) 2 4) 2 2. torque and Magnetic flux.
e e e e 3. magnetic moment and Pole strength
98. If 'm' is the mass of a body, 'a' is amplitude of 4. magnetic moment and Magnetic permeability
vibration, and ' ' is the angular frequency,, C.U.Q-KEY
1 1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 4 5) 2 6) 4
ma 2 2 has same dimensional formula as
2 7) 1 8) 4 9) 2 10) 4 11) 1 12) 2
1) impulse 2) moment of momentum 13) 2 14) 4 15) 1 16) 2 17) 2 18) 2
3) moment of inertia 4) moment of force 19) 2 20) 4 21) 2 22) 4 23) 3 24) 3
99. If C, R, L and I denote capacity, resistance, 25) 3 26) 4 27) 4 28) 4 29) 4 30) 2
inductance and electric current respectively, 31) 1 32) 1 33) 2 34) 1 35) 1 36) 2
the quantities having the same dimensions of 37) 4 38) 4 39) 1 40) 4 41) 4 42) 4
time are (2006 E) 43) 3 44) 2 45) 4 46) 2 47) 3 48) 3
49) 4 50) 4 51) 4 52) 2 53) 2 54) 3
a) CR b) L/R c) LC d) LI 2 55) 4 56) 2 57) 3 58) 2 59) 1 60) 1
1) a and b only 2) a and c only 61) 2 62) 1 63) 4 64) 1 65) 2 66) 2
3) a and d only 4) a, b and c only 67) 4 68) 2 69) 2 70) 1 71) 2 72) 2
100. Which of the following do not have the same 73) 3 74) 1 75) 3 76) 1 77) 4 78) 1
dimensions as the other three? Given that 79) 2 80) 1 81) 1 82) 2 83) 4 84) 3
l = length, m = mass, k= force constant, 85) 1 86) 1 87) 4 88) 3 89) 4 90) 3
I = moment of inertia, B = magnetic 91) 2 92) 1 93) 1 94) 1 95) 2 96) 2
induction, Pm magnetic dipole moment, 97) 3 98) 4 99) 4 100) 3 101) 3 102) 2
R= radius, g = acceleration due to gravity 103) 2 104) 3 105) 1
22 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
SIGNIFICANT FIGURES & ROUNDING OFF
LEVEL-I (C.W) 10. If the value of 103.5 kg is rounded off to three
significant figures, then the value is
ACCURACY, PRECISION, TYPES OF 1) 103 2) 103.0 3) 104 4) 10.3
ERRORS AND COMBINATION OF 11. The number of significant figures in
ERRORS 6.023 10 23 mole 1 is
1) 4 2) 3 3) 2 4) 23
1. The accuracy in the measurement of the 12. The side of a cube is 2.5 metre. The volume
diameter of hydrogen atom as 1.06 x 10-10 m is of the cube to the significant figures is
1 1) 15 2) 16 3) 1.5 4) 1.6
1) 0.01 2)106 x 10-10 3) 4)0.01 x 10-10 13. When a force is expressed in dyne, the number
106
2. The length of a rod is measured as 31.52 cm. of significant figures is four. If it is expressed
Graduations on the scale are up to in newton, the number of significant figures
1) 1 mm 2) 0.01 mm 3) 0.1 mm 4) 0.02 cm will become ( 105 dyne =1N )
1) 9 2) 5 3)1 4) 4
3. If L 20 0.01 m and B 10 0.02 m
then L/B is 14. 2.0 is
1) 1.414 2) 1.4 3)1.0 4) 1
1) 2 0.03 m 2) 2 0.015 m 15. The mass of a box is 2.3 kg. Two marbles of
3) 2 0.01 m 4) 2 0.005 m masses 2.15 g and 12.48 g are added to it. The
4. The radius of a sphere is measured as total mass of the box is
1) 2.3438 kg 2) 2.3428 kg
10 0.02% cm . The error in the 3) 2.34 kg 4) 2.31 kg
measurement of its volume is 16. The number of significant figures in 0.010200 is
1) 25.1cc 2)25.12cc 3)2.51cc 4)251.2cc 1) 6 2) 5 3) 3 4) 2
5. If length and breadth of a plate are 17. When the number 0.046508 is reduced to 4
40 0.2 cm and 30 0.1 cm , the absolute significant figures, then it becomes
error in measurement of area is 1) 0.0465 2) 4650.8 x 10-5
-2
3) 4.651 x 10 4) 4.650 x 10-2
1) 10 cm 2 2) 8 cm 2 3) 9 cm 2 4) 7 cm 2 18. With due regard to significant figures, the
6. If the length of a cylinder is measured to be value of (46.7 – 10.04) is
4.28 cm with an error of 0.01 cm, the 1) 36.7 2) 36.00 3) 36.66 4) 30.6
percentage error in the measured length is 19. The value of / 53.2 with due regard to
nearly
1) 0.4 % 2) 0.5 % 3) 0.2 % 4) 0.1 % significant figures is,
7. When 10 observations are taken, the random 1) 0.0591 2) 0.0590 3) 0.590 4) 0.5906
error is x. When 100 observations are taken, 20. By rounding off, a) 20.96 and b) 0.0003125
the random error becomes to 3 significant figures, we get
1) x/10 2) x 2 3) 10 x 4) x 1) 21.0 ; 312 × 104 2) 21.0 ; 3.12 × 104
3) 2.10 ; 3.12 × 104 4) 210; 3.12 × 104
8. If L1 2.02 0.01 m and L2 1.02 0.01 m
then L1 2 L2 is (in m)
UNITS AND DIMENSIONAL
1) 4.06 0.02 2) 4.06 0.03 FORMULAE
3) 4.06 0.005 4) 4.06 0.01 21. If the unit of length is doubled and that of mass
9. A body travels uniformly a distance of and time is halved, the unit of energy will be
1) doubled 2)4 times 3)8 times 4) same
20.0 0.2 min time 4.0 0.04 s . The 22. Given M is the mass suspended from a spring
velocity of the body is of force constant. k. The dimensional formula
1) 5.0 0.4 ms 1 2) 5.0 0.2 ms 1 1/ 2
for M / k is same as that for
3) 5.0 0.6 ms 1 4) 5.0 0.1 ms 1 1) frequency 2) time period
3) velocity 4) wavelength
NARAYANA GROUP 23
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
23. The dimensional formula for the product of two 31. If minute is the unit of time, 10 ms-2 is the unit
physical quantities P and Q is [ ML2T 2 ]. The of acceleration and 100 kg is the unit of mass,
P the new unit of work in joule is
dimensional formula of Q is [ MT 2 ]. Then P 1) 105 2) 106 3) 6 x 106 4) 36x 106
and Q respectively are(2001 M) 32. The magnitude of force is 100 N. What will
1) Force and velocity be its value if the units of mass and time are
2) Momentum and displacement doubled and that of length is halved?
3) Force and displacement 1) 25 2)100 3) 200 4) 400
4) Work and velocity 33. A motor pumps water at the rate of V m3 per
24. The fundamental physical quantities that have second, against a pressure P Nm-2. The power
same dimension in the dimensional formula of of the motor in watt is
Torque and Angular Momentum are(2000 E) 1) PV 2) (P / V) 3) (V/P) 4) V P
1) mass, time 2) time, length 34. If the units of length and force are increased
3) mass, length 4)time, mole by four times the unit of energy will be
25. The physical quantity which has the increased by
energy 1) 16% 2)1600% 3)1500% 4) 400%
dimensional formula as that of mass length 35. SI unit and CGS unit of a quantity vary by 103
times, it is : (1994 E)
is (2000 M) 1) Boltzmann constant 2)Gravitational constant
1) Force 2) Power 3) Pressure 4) Acceleration 3) Planck's constant 4) Angular Momentum
26. If J and E represent the angular momentum 36. The value of universal gravitational constant
J2 G in CGS system is 6.67 108 dyne cm2 g-2. Its
and rotational kinetic energy of a body, value in SI system is
2E
represents the following physical quantity. 1)6.67 x 10-11Nm2 kg-2 2)6.67 x 10-5 Nm2 kg-2
1) Moment of couple 2) Moment of force 3)6.67 x 10-10Nm2 kg-2 4)6.67 x 10-9 Nm2 kg-2
3) Moment of inertia 4) Force TO CHECK THE CORRECTNESS OF
27. If the fundamental units of length, mass and
time are doubled, the unit of force will PHYSICAL RELATION AND DERIVING
1) doubled 2)halved THE EQUATIONS
3) remain same 4) four times
37. The final velocity of a particle falling freely
PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENEITY under gravity is given by V 2 u 2 2 gx where
B C x is the distance covered. If v = 18 kmph,
28. A is dimensionally correct. The
2 g = 1000 cm s-2, x = 120 cm then u = ----ms-1.
dimensions of A, B and C respectively are ( , 1) 2.4 2) 1.2 3) 1 4) 0.1
A, B, C are constants) where is wave length 38. The equation which is dimensionally correct
of wave among the following is
1)No dimensions, L, L2 2)L2, No dimensions, L 1) v u at 2 2) s ut at 3
3) L, L2, No dimensions 4)L,No dimensions,L2
29. According to Bernoulli’s theorem 3) s ut at 2 4) t s av
p v2 39. The dimensions of 'k' in the relation V = k avt
gh constant. The dimensional (where V is the volume of a liquid passing
d 2 through any point in time t, 'a' is area of cross
formula of the constant is ( P is pressure, d is
section, v is the velocity of the liquid) is
density, h is height, v is velocity and g is
acceleration due to gravity) (2005 M) 1) [ M 1 L2T 1 ] 2) [ M 1 L1T 1 ]
3) [ M 0 L0T 1 ] 4) [ M 0 L0T 0 ]
1) [ M 0 L0T 0 ] 2) [ M 0 LT 0 ] 40. If force (F), work (W) and velocity (V) are
3) [ M 0 L2T 2 ] 4) [ M 0 L2T 4 ] taken as fundamental quantities then the
CONVERSION OF UNITS dimensional formula of Time (T) is (2007 M)
30. The surface tension of a liquid in CGS system 1) [ W 1 F 1V 1 ] 2) [ W 1 F 1V 1 ]
is 45 dyne cm-1. Its value in SI system is 3) [ W 1 F 1V 1 ] 4) [ W 1 F 1V 1 ]
1) 4.5 Nm-1 2) 0.045 Nm-1
-1
3) 0.0045 Nm 4) 0.45 Nm-1
24 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
41. If Force F, Mass M and time T are chosen as From 13 to 20 follow the rules of significant figures
fundamental quantities the dimensional and rounding off numbers
formula for length, is 2
E2 M 2 L2 T2
2
-1 2 2 -2 -1 -2 -2
1)[FMT] 2)[FM T ] 3)[FL T ] 4)[F L T ] 21.
42. If force F, Length L and time T are chosen as E1 M 1 L1 T1
fundamental quantities,the dimensional 22. Here [k] = force/ length = ML0T 2
1/ 2
formula for Mass is M 0 0
Hence k M LT
-1 -1 -2
1) [FLT] 2) [F L T ]
3) [F-2L-2T-2] 4) [F1L-1T2]
P
LEVEL-I(C.W)-KEY 23. PQ ML2T 2 ----(1); Q MT
2
-----(2)
01)3 02)3 03)4 04)3 05)1 06)3
07)1 08)2 09)4 10)3 11)1 12)2 (1) × (2) = P 2 M 2 L2T 4
13)4 14)2 15)4 16)2 17)3 18)1 P MLT 2 FORCE
19)2 20)2 21)3 22)2 23)3 24)3 (1) (2) = Q2 = L2
25)4 26)3 27)3 28)1 29)3 30)2 24. By dimensional formula
31)4 32)1 33)1 34)3 35)2 36)1 25. Substitute D.F. of quantities
37)3 38)3 39)4 40)4 41)2 42)4 26. J ML2T 1 ; E ML2T 2
27. n1u1 n2u2 28. Substitute D.F. of quantities
LEVEL-I (C.W) - HINTS 29. Use principle of homogenity
d 0.0110 10 1 Dyne 10 5 N N
1. 10
30. 2 103
d 1.06 10 106 cm 10 m m
2. 0.01cm is the least count of varnier caliperse. W2 M 2 a2 2T2 2
31. 2 2 ;
x L B L B W Ma T W1 M1a12T12
3. x x
x L B L B 32. n1[ M1L1T12 ] n2 [M 2 L2T22 ]
20 0.01 0.02 33. Power P aV b 34. Energy = Force x length
10 20 10 35. n1u1 n2u2
x x 2 0.005 m 36. 6.67 10 8 dyne cm 2 gm
2
4 v r 2 2
4. V r3 100 3 100 6.67 108 105 N 102 m 103 kg
3 v r
r 37. v 2 u 2 2gx and change into S.I
v 3 v 38. Substitute D.F. of quantities
r
39. Substitute D.F. of quantities
A l b l b
5. A lb A A 40. 0 0 1 2 x 2 2 y 1 z
T F xW yV z ; M L T [MLT ] [ ML T ] [ LT ]
A l b l b
41. L F a M bT c 42. M Fa Lb Tc
A bl l b 10cm 2
l 0.01
6. 100 100 0.2% LEVEL - I (H.W)
l 4.28
1 X1 N2 10
7. X X N 100 ACCURACY, PRECISION, TYPES OF
N 2 1
ERRORS AND COMBINATION OF
8. L1 2 L2 2.02 2 1.02 4.06
ERRORS
L1 2L2 0.01 2 0.01 0.03
1. The Accuracy of a clock is one part in 1010 .
S V S T The maximum difference between two such
9. V
T V S T clocks operating for 1010 seconds is ______
10. If last digit is 5, if the preceding digit is odd then it
should be increased by adding 1 and last digit 5 1) 1 s 2) 5 s 3)10 s 4) 1010 s
has to be ignored. 2. The length of a rod is measured as 35.3 cm
11. Use limitation of significant figures then the graduations on the scale are up to
12. V l 3 and rounded off to minimum significant 1) 1 cm 2) 1 mm 3)0.01 mm 4)0.1 mm
NARAYANA GROUP 25
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
3. If L 2.06cm 0.02cm, 13. The radius of disc is 1.2 cm, its area
according to idea of significant figures is ___
B 1.11cm 0.03cm, then L+B equals to
1) 4.5216cm 2 2) 4.521cm 2
1) 3.17cm 0.05cm, 2) 2.06cm 0.05cm,
3) 4.52cm 2 4) 4.5cm 2
3) 3.17cm 0.02cm, 4) 3.17cm 0.03cm, 14. When Energy is expressed in erg the no of
4. The radius of sphere is measured as significant figure is four. If it is expressed in
5.2 0.2 cm then the percentage error in joule the no of significant figures will become
1) 9 2) 5 3) 1 4) 4
volume of the ball is _
1) 11% 2) 4% 3) 7% 4) 9% 15. 58.97 is
5. If the length and breadth of a plate are 1) 7.679 2) 7.68 3)7.6 4)7.7
16. A stick has a length of 12.132 cm and an-
5.0 0.2 cm and 4.0 0.1 cm then the other stick has a length of 12.4 cm then the
absolute error in measurement of area is _ total length of the stick is ___
1) 10cm 2 2) 11cm 2 3) 12cm 2 4) 1.3cm2 1)24.53 cm 2)24.5 cm 3)2.45 cm 4)2.453 cm
17. The respective number of significant figures for
6. If the length of a cylinder is measured to be
the number 23.023, 0.0003 and 21 x 10-3 are
8.28 cm with an error of 0.01 cm then the 1)5,1,2 2)5,1,5 3)5,5,2 4)4,4,2
percentage error in measured length is nearly 18. The Number of significant figures in
1) 0.4 % 2)0.2 % 3) 0.1 % 4) 0.5%
7. A student performs experiment with simple 5.69 1015 kg is
pendulum and measures time for 10 1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4
vibrations. If he measures the time for 100 19. The value of 124.2 + 52.487 with due regard
vibrations, the error in measurement of time to significant places is ___
period will be reduced by a factor of _ 1) 176.69 2) 176.7 3)176 4)177
1) 10 2) 90 3) 100 4)1000 9.27
20. The value of with due regard to signifi-
41
8. If L1 (3.03 0.02)m and L2 (2.01 0.02)m cant figures is ___
then L1 2 L2 is (in m) 1)0.226 2)0.23 3) 0.2 4)0.2261
21. When 57.986 is rounded off to 4 significant
1) 7.05 0.06 2) 6.05 0.06 figures, then it becomes ___
3) 6.05 0.02 4) 7.05 0.02 1) 58 2) 57.00 3) 57.90 4) 57.99
9. A body travels uniformly a distance of UNITS AND DIMENSIONAL FORMULAE
13.8 0.2 m in a time 4.0 0.3 s then the 22. If ‘L’ is length of simple pendulum and ‘g’ is
velocity of the body is ___ acceleration due to gravity then the dimen-
1
1) 3.45 0.2 ms 1 2) 3.45 0.3 ms1 l 2
sional formula for is same as that for
g
3) 3.45 0.4 ms 1 4) 3.45 0.5 ms 1 1)Frequency 2)Velocity3)Time period 4)wavelength
10. The pressure on a square plate is measured by 23. The dimensional formula for the product of
measuring the force on the plate and the length
of the sides of the plate. If the maximum error two physical quantities P and Q is L2T 2
in measurement of force and length are respec- the dimensional formula of P/Q is T 2 the P
tively 4% and 2% then the maximum error in
Measurement of pressure is _____ and Q respectively are ___
1) distance and velocity
1) 1% 2) 2% 3) 6% 4) 8%
2) distance and acceleration
SIGNIFICANT FIGURES & 3) displacement and velocity
ROUNDING OFF 4) displacement and force
11. 2.34 is obtained by rounding off the number 24. The fundamental physical quantities that have
1) 2.346 2) 2.355 3) 2.335 4) 2.334 same dimensions in the dimensional formula
12. The number of significant figures in 0.0006032 of force and Energy are ___-
is 1) mass, time 2) time, length
1) 7 2) 4 3) 5 4) 2 3) mass, length 4) time, mole
26 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
25. If is rigidity modulus, r is the radius, l is 34. The initial velocity of a particle is given by
the length and C is the moment of the couple u 2 v 2 2 gx where x is the distance
2lc covered. If u = 18 km h 1 , g = 1000 cm / s 2 x
then has the dimensions of _
r 4 = 150 cm then v = ____ m/s
1) Angle 2) Mass 3) Length 4) Frequency 1) 45 2) 55 3) 35 4) 65
PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENEITY 35. The equation which is dimensionally correct
26. The acceleration of an object varies with time among the following is
as a AT 2 BT C taking the unit of time 1
1) v u at 2) v ut at
as 1 sec and acceleration as ms 2 then the 2
units of A,B,C respectively are __ 3) s ut at 3 4) t s av
1) ms 3 , ms 2 , ms 1 2) ms 2 , ms 1 , ms p
36. The dimensions of in the relation v
3) ms 1 , ms 2 , ms 3 4) ms 4 , ms 3 , ms 2
(where v is velocity, p is pressure , is
A density)
27. If log( Bx C ) is dimensionally true,
B 1) Dimensionless 2) LT 1
then (here is the coefficient of viscosity and
x is the distance) 3) ML1T 2 4) ML3
1) C is dimensionless constant 37. Taking frequency f, velocity (v) and Density
2) B has dimensions of -1 in length ( ) to be the fundamental quantities then the
3) The dimensional formula of A is ML2T 1 Dimensional formula for momentum will be
4) All are true
28. If the velocity (v) of a body in time ‘t’ is 1) v4 f 3 2) v3 f 1
given by V AT 3 BT 2 CT D then the 3) vf 2 4) 2 v2 f 2
dimensions of C are ____ 38. If momentum (p), Mass (M), Time (T) are
1 2 3 4
1) LT 2) LT 3) LT 4) LT chosen as fundamental quantities then the
dimensional formula for length is ___
pr 4 1) P1T 1 M 1 2) P1T 1M 2
29. In the relation V where the letters
8 l
3) P1T 1M 1 4) P T M
2 2 1
have there usual meanings the dimensions of
V are ___ 39. If pressure (P), velocity (V) and time (T) are
1) M L T
0 3 0 2) M L T
0 3 1 taken as the fundamental quantities, then the
dimensional formula of force is ___
3) M L T
0 3 1 4) M 1L3T 0
1) P1V 1T 1 2) P1V 2T 1
30. If the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms 2
and the units of length and time are changed 3) P1V 1T 2 4) P1V 2T 2
to kilometre and hour respectively the
numerical value of acceleration is _____ LEVEL-I (H.W) - KEY
1) 36000 2) 72000 3) 36000 4) 129600 01)1 02) 4 03) 1 04) 1 05)4 06)3
31. The magnitude of Energy is 100J. What will 07)1 08) 1 09) 2 10)4 11)3 12)2
be its value if the units of mass and time are 13)4 14)4 15) 1 16) 2 17)1 18)3
doubled and that of length is halved? 19)2 20)2 21)4 22)3 23)2 24)1
1) 100 J 2) 200 J 3) 400 J 4) 800 J 25)1 26)4 27)4 28)2 29)2 30)4
32. If the units of mass and velocity are increased 31)4 32)3 33)3 34)2 35)1 36)1
by two times then the unit of momentum will 37)1 38)3 39)4
be increased by __
1) 400% 2) 200% 3) 300% 4) 100%
33. SI unit and CGS unit of a quantity vary by LEVEL-I (H.W) - HINTS
107 times, it is ___ d
1. 2) 0.01cm is the L.C of vernier caliperse.
1) Boltzmann’s constant2) Gravitational constant d
3) Planck’s constant 4) Angular momentum. 3. Let x=L+B=3.17 ; x L B 0.05
NARAYANA GROUP 27
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
x x 3.17 0.05 2. The least count of a stop watch is (1/5) s. The
time of 20 oscillations of a pendulum is
4 V r
4. V r3 & 100 3 100 measured to be 25 s. The maximum
3 V r percentage error in this measurement is
A l b l b 1) 8 % 2) 1 % 3) 0.8 % 4) 16 %
5. A lb A A
A l b l b 3. The diameter of a wire as measured by a
l X1 N2 screw gauge was found to be 1.002 cm, 1.004
6. 100 7.
l X 2 N1 cm and 1.006 cm. The absolute error in the
third reading is
8. x L1 2 L2 7.05 ; x L1 2L2 1) 0.002 cm 2) 0.004 cm
S V S T S T 3) 1.002 cm 4) zero
9. V ; V V S T 4. Force and area are measured as 20 N and
T V S T
F F P F 2L
5m2 with errors 0.05 N and 0.0125m2. The
10. P = 2 ; P 100 = F L 100 maximum error in pressure is (SI unit)
A L
1) 4 0.0625 2) 4 0.05
11. If last digit is 5 and if the preceding digit is odd
then it should be increased by adding 1 and last 3) 4 0.125 4) 4 0.02
digit 5 has to be ignored. 5. The length and breadth of a rectangular
12. Use limitation of significant figures 13) A r 2 object are 25.2cm and 16.8cm respectively
and have been measured to an accuracy of
From 14 to 21 follow the rules of significant
0.1cm. Relative error and percentage error
figures and rounding off numbers in the area of the object are
1/2 1/2
l M 0 L1T 0 1) 0.01 & 1% 2) 0.02 & 2%
22. Hence g 0 1 2 M 0 L0T 1
M LT 3) 0.03 & 3% 4) 0.04 & 4%
P 2
SIGNIFICANT FIGURES &
23. PQ L2T 2 ----(1) ; T -----(2)
Q ROUNDING OFF
24. Use dimensional analysis 6. The velocity of light in vacuum is 30 crore m/
25. Using dimensional formula s. This is expressed in standard form up to 3
26. Principle of homogenity significant figures as
27. Using dimensional formula 1) 0.003 x 1011 m/s 2)300 x 106 m/s
28 & 29. Use principle of homogenity 3) 3.00 x 108 m/s 4) 0.030 x 1010 m/s
a LT 2 ML2 7. The length, breadth and thickness of a
30. 31. E 32. P MV
T2 rectangular lamina are 1.024 m, 0.56 m, and
33. N1 U1 N 2 U 2 34. v 2 u 2 2 gx 0.0031 m. The volume is …………..m3
1) 1.8 x 10-3 2) 1.80 x 10-3
p 3) 0.180 x 10 -4
4) 0.00177
35. using dimensional analysis 36. V
8. The initial and final temperatures of a liquid
1 a 1 b 3 c 0
37. P f a v b c ; MLT 1 k T LT ML are measured to be 67.7 0.2 c and
0
a b c
76.3 0.3 c then rise in temperature with
38. L P M T 39. F P a V b T c error limit is
0
2) 8.6 0.3 C
0
LEVEL - II (C.W) 1) 8.6 0.2 C
0
3) 8.6 0.5 C
0
4) 8.6 0.6 C
ACCURACY, PRECISION,TYPES OFERRORS 9. Less accurate of the four options given below
AND COMBINATION OFERRORS 1) 9.27 2)41 3) 1.01 4) 9.00 100
1. The error in the measurement of the length UNITS AND DIMENSIONAL
of the simple pendulum is 0.2 % and the error
in time period 4%. The maximum possible FORMULAE
L 10. If the ratio of fundamental units in two
error in measurement of 2 is systems is 1 :3, then the ratio of momenta in
T the two systems is
1) 4.2% 2) 3.8% 3) 7.8% 4) 8.2% 1) 1:3 2) 1:9 3) 1:27 4) 3:1
28 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
11. The velocity of the waves on the surface of 19. The length of pendulum is measured as 1.01m
water is proportional to g where and time for 30 oscillations is measured as
one minute 3 seconds. Error in length is 0.01
=wave length, = density and g = m and error in time is 3 secs. The percentage
acceleration due to gravity. Which of the error in the measurement of acceleration due
following relation is correct? to gravity is. (Eng - 2012)
1) 2) 1) 1 2) 5 3) 10 4) 15
3) 4) 1 2
20. The dimensional formula of 0 H ( 0 -per--
PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENITY 2
meability of free space and H-magnetic field
12. The work done ‘w’ by a body varies with intensity) is: (Eng - 2011)
B 1) MLT 1 2) ML2T 2 3) ML1T 2 4) ML2T 1
displacement 'x' as w Ax . The
C x 2 21. If the force is given by F at bt 2 with t as
dimensional formula for 'B' is time.The dimensions of a and b are (Eng-10)
1. [ ML2T 2 ] 2. [ ML4T 2 ] 3. [ MLT 2 ] 4. [ ML2T 4 ] 1) MLT 4 , MLT 2 2) MLT 3 , MLT 4
CONVERSION OF UNITS 3) ML2T 3 , ML2T 2 4) ML2T 3 , ML3T 4
13. If the units of mass, time and length are 100 22. When a wave traverses a medium, the displace-
g, 20 cm and 1 minute respectively the ment of a particle located at ‘x’ at a time ‘t’ is
equivalent energy for 1000 erg in the new given by y a sin bt cx , where a,b and c are
system will be constants of the wave, which of the following is
1. 90 2. 900 3. 2 x 106 4. 300 a quantity with dimensions? (Eng - 2009)
14. The ratio of SI unit to the CGS unit of planck's 1) y/a 2) bt 3) cx 4) b/c
constant is 23. The Energy (E), angular momentum (L) and
1. 107:1 2. 104 :1 3. 106 :1 4. 1 :1 universal gravitational constant (G) are
TO CHECK THE CORRECTNESS OF chosen as fundamental quantities. The
dimensions of universal gravitational constant
PHYSICAL RELATION & DERIVING in the dimensional formula of Planks constant
THE EQUATIONS (h) is (Eng - 2008)
15. The velocity of a body is expressed as 1) 0 2) -1 3) 5/3 4) 1
V = G a M b R c where G is gravitational 24. If the absolute errors in two physical quantities
A and B are a and b respectively, then the
constant. M is mass, R is radius. The values absolute error in the value of A-B is(Med- 2014)
of exponents a, b and c are :
1) a-b 2) b-a 3) a b 4) a+b
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1) , , 2) 1, 1, 1 3) , , 4)1,1, 25. If the velocity v (in cm/s) of a particle is
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 given in terms of time t (in sec) by the
16. The velocity of a spherical ball through a
viscous liquid is given by v= v0(1-ekt), where b
equation v at , then the dimensions
v0 is the initial velocity and t represents time. tc
If k depends on radius of ball (r), coefficient of a, b and c are (Med- 2011)
of viscosity ( ) and mass of the ball (m), then a b c
1) k = mr/ 2) k = m/r 1) 2
L T LT 2
3) k = r /m 4) k = mr
17. Dimensional analysis of the equation 2) LT 2 LT L
3 -3
x
Velocity = Pressure difference 2 . density 2 3) LT 2 L T
gives the value of x as: (1986 E) T 2
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4)-3
4) L LT
18. For the equation F =Aavbdc where F is force, 26. A body weighs 22.42 g and has a measured
A is area, v is velocity and d is density, with volume of 4.7 cc the possible errors in the
the dimensional analysis gives the following measurement of mass and volume are0.01g
values for the exponents. (1985 E) and 0.1 cc. Then the maximum percentage
1) a=1, b = 2, c =1 2) a =2, b =1, c= 1 error in the density will be(Med- 2010)
3)a =1, b =1, c= 2 4) a = 0, b =1 , c = 1 1) 22% 2) 2.2% 3) 0.22% 4) 0.022%
NARAYANA GROUP 29
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
27. If energy E, velocity v and time T are taken 1 a 1 1 c b
as fundamental quantities, the dimensional
16. k r a b m c ; T L ML T M
formula for surface tension is (Med-2009)
17. Substitute dimension formulae
1) Ev 2T 2 2) E 2 vT 2 a b c
18. F = Aa vb d c ; MLT 2 L2 LT 1 ML3
3) Ev 2T 1 4) E 2 v 2T 1
comparing the powers on both sides
28. If power (p), surface tension (T) and Planck’s
constant (h) are arranged, so that the dimen- l g l T
19. T 2 ; 100 100 2 100
sions of time in their dimensional formulae g g l T
are in ascending order, then which of the fol-
lowing is correct? (Med- 2008) 20. Substitute dimensional formula of µ 0 and H
1) P. T, h 2) P, h, T 3) T, P, h 4) T, h, P 21. MLT 2 at ; MLT 2 bt 2
22. by dimensional formulae
LEVEL-II (C.W) - KEY 23. h E , L, G
1) 4 2) 3 3) 1 4) 4 5) 1 6) 3 a b c
7) 1 8) 3 9) 4 10) 1 11)3 12) 2 ML2T 1 ML2T 2 ML2T 1 M 1 L3T 2
13) 1 14) 1 15) 1 16) 3 17) 3 18) 1 Comparing the powers on both sides we get a,b,c
19) 3 20) 3 21) 2 22) 4 23) 1 24) 4 24. If Z A B ; Z A B (Max possible error)
25) 3 26) 2 27) 1 28) 1 Z a b
25. Use principal of homogenity
LEVEL-II (C.W) - HINTS M
26. The density of d ; % Error of density
L x L T V
1. Let x 2 ; x = 2
T L T Δd ΔM ΔV
1/ 5 25 T ×100= ×100+ ×100
2. T and T ; % error 100 d M V
20 20 T a b c
27. S E v T
3. x3 x3 xmean
a b c
MT 2 ML2T 2 LT 1 T
F P F A F A Comparing the powers on both sides we get a,b,c
4. P P P
A P F A F A
A l b 28. Use dimensional analysis
5. A l b ; A l b
A l b LEVEL - II (H.W)
100 100
A l b
8. t t2 t1 ACCURACY, PRECISION, TYPES OF
9. Less no. of significant figures represent less
accuracy. ERRORS AND COMBINATION OF
M 1 L1 T1 1 P1 M1 L1 T1 1 ERRORS
10. M L T 3 ; P M L T 1. The error in the measurement of length of a
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
simple pendulum is 0.1 % and error in the
11. v g ; LT 1 L M L3 L T 2 . time period is 2% . The possible maximum
Comparing the powers on both sides, we get error in the quantity having dimensional
, and formula LT 2 is
B 1) 1.1 % 2) 2.1 % 3) 4.1 % 4) 6.1 %
12. w = Ax C x 2 ( principle of homogenity) 2. The length of a cylinder is measured as 5cm
using a vernier calipers of least count 0.1mm.
13. n1[ M 1 L12T12 ] n2 [ M 2 L2 2T2 2 ]
The percentage error in the measured length
a
1
14. h ML2T 1 15. [ LT ] M L T M L 1 3 2 b c is nearly
1) 0.5 % 2) 2 % 3) 20 % 4) 0.2 %
30 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
3. The diameter of a wire as measured by a 12. Hydrostatic pressure ‘P’ varies with
screw gauge was found to be 1.002 cm, A
1.000cm, 1.006cm, the absolute error in the displacement 'x' as P log Bx 2 C where
B
first reading. A, B and C are constants. The dimensional
1) 0.001cm 2)0.004 cm 3)0.006m 4)0.003cm formula for 'A' is
4. The number of particles crossing per unit area 1) [ M 1 L1T 2 ] 2) [ MLT 2 ]
perpendicular to x-axis in unit time is
3) [ ML2T 2 ] 4) [ ML3T 2 ]
n n 13. The units of force, velocity and energy are
N D 2 1 Where n and n are
x2 x1 1 2 100 dyne, 10 cm s-1 and 500 erg respectively.
number of particles per unit volume for the The units of mass, length and time are
1) 5 g, 5 cm, 5 s 2) 5 g, 5 cm, 0.5 s
value of x1 and x2 respectively.The 3) 0.5 g, 5 cm, 5 s 4) 5 g, 0.5cm, 5 s
dimension of diffusion constant D is 14. The ratio of SI unit to CGS unit of
1) M 0 L1T 2 2) M 0 L2T 4 3) M 0 LT
1 3 4)
M 0 L2T 1 gravitational constant is
5. The external and internal diameters of a hollow 1) 1:103 2) 103 :1 3) 1:1 4) 1:107
cylinder are determined with vernier calipers 15. The frequency f of vibrations of a mass m
and the results are recorded as (4.23 0.001)cm suspended from a spring of spring constant k
and (3.89 0.01)cm. The thickness of the cylinder is given by f Cm x K y , where C is a
wall within the limits of error is dimensionless constant. The values of x and
1) 0.34 0.01 cm 2) 0.34 0.02 cm y are, respectively.
3) 0.34 0.04 cm 4) 0.17 0.01 cm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6. The density of a cube can be measured by 1) , 2) , 3) , 4) ,
measuring its mass and the length of its side. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
16. If the time period 'T' of a drop under surface
If the maximum errors in the measurement
of mass and length are 3% and 2% tension 's' is given by T = d a r b s c where
respectively, the maximum error in the d is the density, r is the radius of the drop.
measurement of the density of the cube is If a =1, c = -1 then the value of b is (1993 E)
1) 9% 2) 19% 3) 10% 4) 90% 1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) -1
7. the diameter of a sphere is 3.34m Calculate 17. If the velocity (V), acceleration (A), and force
its volume with due regard to significant (F) are taken as fundamental quantities instead
figures ( in m3 ) . of mass (M), length (L), and time (T), the
1)19.5169 2)9.516 3)19.5 4) 19.51 dimensions of Young’s modulus (Y) would be.
8. The length, breadth and thickness of a metal 1) FA2V 4 2) FA2V 5 3) FA2V 3 4) FA2V 2
sheet are 4.234 m, 1.005m, and 2.01 cm 18. The time dependence of a physical quantity
respectively then the volume of the sheet is
2
1) 0.08 m3 2) 0.0855 m3 P is given by P P e t , where is a
0
3)0.085 m3 4) 0.087 m3 constant and t is time. Then constant
9. The sides of rectangle are 10.5 0.2 cm 1)is dimensionless 2)has dimensions of T 2
3)has dimensions of P 4)has dimensions of T 2
and 5.2 0.1 cm then its perimeter with
error limit. 2mgl x
19. The value of x in the formula Y
1) 31.4 0.6 cm 2) 31.4 0.2 cm 5bt 3e
where m is the mass, 'g' is acceleration due
3) 31.4 0.1 cm 4) 31.4 0.9 cm to gravity, l is the length, 'b' is the breadth,
10. If the ratio of fundamental units in two ‘t’ is the thickness and e is the extension
systems are 2:3 the ratio of force in these and Y is Young's Modulus, is
two systems is 1) 3 2) 2 3) 1 4) 4
1) 1:3 2) 1:1 3) 3:1 4) 1:27 20. The velocity of sound in air (V) pressure (P)
11. If L, R, C, and V, respectively, represent and density of air (d) are related as V p x d y .
inductance, resistance, capacitance and The values of x and y respectively are
potential difference, then the dimensions of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
L/RCV are the same as those of 1) 1, 2) , 3) , 4) ,
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1) Charge 2)1/Charge 3)Current 4)1/Current
NARAYANA GROUP 31
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
LEVEL-II (H.W) - KEY 2. A vernier calipers has 1 mm marks on the
1) 3 2) 4 3) 1 4) 4 5) 4 6) 1 main scale . It has 20 equal divisions on the
vernier scale,which match with 16main scale
7) 3 8) 2 9) 1 10) 2 11)4 12)4 divisions. For this vernier calipers the least
13)2 14) 1 15) 4 16) 3 17)1 18)2 count is
19) 1 20) 4 1) 0.02mm 2) 0.05 mm 3) 0.1mm 4) 0.2mm
LEVEL-II (H.W) - HINTS 3. The resistance of metal is given by V=IR.
L T l The voltage in the resistance is V 8 0.5
1. 2 2. 100
L T l V and current in the resistance is
a a a3 I 2 0.2 A, the value of resistance with
3. amean 1 2 ; a3 amean a3
3 its percentage error is
d 2 d1
5. t ; t t2 t1 1) 4 16.25% 2) 4 2.5%
2
M M d M 3L 3) 4 0.04% 4) 4 1%
6. d ; d 100 M L 100
3
V L 4. In an experiment, the values of refractive
7. 4
V 3R 3
8. V lbw indices of glass were found to be 1.54, 1.53,
1.44, 1.54, 1.56 and 1.45 in successive
9. p 2 l b p 2 l b measurements i) mean value of refractive
M 1 L1 T1 2
index of glass ii) mean absolute error
F1 M 1 L1T12
10. and iii) relative error and iv) percentage error
M 2 L2 T2 3 F2 M 2 L2T2 2
L L
are respectively,
RCV
di
1)1.51,0.04,0.03,3% 2)1.51,0.4,0.03,3 %
11. t L. 3)15.1,0.04,0.03,3% 4)15.1,0.04,0.3,3 %
dt
5. A student performs an experiment for
A
12. Bx C Constant ; BL2 M 0 L0T 0 ; P B
2
4 2 L
13. determination of T 2 ,L 1m, and he
g
F MLT 2 100 dyne ;
V LT 1 10 cm / sec ; E ML2T 2 commits an error of L for T he tajes the
1 k
time of n oscillations with the stop watch of
1
14. n n1u1 n2 u2 15. f least count T .For which of the following
u 2 m data the measurement of g will be most
3 a c
16. T ML .Lb MT 2 accurate?
1) L 0.5, T 0.1, n 20
Y V a Ab F c ; ML T LT LT MLT
1 a 2 b 2 c
17. 1 2
18. 2) L 0.5, T 0.1, n 50
t 2 M 0 L0T 0
19. Dimensional formula of Y ML1T 2 3) L 0.5, T 0.01, n 20
Dimension of L,b,t,e=L 4) L 0.5, T 0.05, n 50
p 6. A rectangular metal slab of mass 33.333 has
20. V ; LT1 V its length 8.0 cm, breadth 5.0 cm and thickness
d 1mm. The mass is measured with accuracy
up to 1 mg with a sensitive balance. The
LEVEL - III length and breadth are measured with vernier
calipers having a least count of 0.01 cm. The
thickness is measured with a screw gauge of
ACCURACY, PRECISION, TYPES OF least count 0.01 mm. The percentage
accuracy in density calculated from the above
ERRORS AND COMBINATION OF measurements is
1) 13 % 2)130 % 3)1.6 % 4)16 %
ERRORS 7. The initial and final temperatures are
1. The measured mass and volume of a body
are 53.63 g and 5.8 cm3 respectively, with recorded as 40.6 0.30 C and 50.7 0.2 0 C .
possible errors of 0.01 g and 0.1 cm3. The The rise in temperature is
maximum percentage error in density is about 1) 10.10 C
0
2) 10.1 0.3 C
1) 0.2% 2) 2% 3) 5% 4) 10%
0 0
3) 10.1 0.5 C 4) 10.1 0.1 C
32 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
8. In the measurement of a physical quantity pendulum is 112 s with an accuracy of 0.01s.
AB2 The percentage accuracy in g is
X . The percentage errors introduced 1) 1 2) 2.8 3) 1.3 4) 2.1
C1/ 3 D 3
in the measurements of the quantities A,B,C and SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
D are 2%, 2%, 4% and 5% respectively. Then 16. Three pieces of silver have masses 2.3 kg,
the minimum amount of percentage of error in 41.15 g and 30.19 g. The total mass of correct
the measurement of X is contributed by significant figures is ( in kg)
1) A 2) B 3) C 4) D 1)2.37032 2)2.370 3)2.37 4) 2.4
9. There are atomic (Cesium) clocks capable of 17. The sum of the given two numbers with
measuring time with an accuracy of 1 part in regard to significant figures is
1011 . If two such clocks are operated to
precision, then after running for 5000 years, 5.0 10 4.5 10
8 6
these will record a difference of 1) 4.55 10 6 2) 4.5 10 6
1) 1 day 2) 1 s 3) 1011 s 4) 1year 3) 4.6 10 6 4) 4 106
10. If the length of a simple pendulum is
18. The dimensions of a wooden block are
recorded as 90.0 0.02 cm and period as 1.1m 2.36m 3.1m . The number of
1.9 0.02 s, the percentage of error in the significant figures in its volume should be
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4
measurement of acceleration due to gravity is
1) 4.2 2) 2.1 3) 1.5 4) 2.8 PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENITY
11. In the determination of the Young’s modulus z / K
of a given wire, the force, length, radius and 19. In the relation P e ; P is
extension in the wire are measured as
pressure, K is Boltzmann’s constant, Z is
100 0.01 N , 1.25 0.002 m, distance and is temperature. The
0.001 0.00002 m, and 0.01 0.00002 m, dimensional formula of will be
respectively. The percentage error in the 0 2
1) M L T
0
2) M 1 L2 T 1
measurement of Young’s modulus is
1) 4.37 2) 2.37 3) 0.77 4) 2.77 3) ML0 T 1 4) M 0 L2 T 1
12. The radius ( r ) , length ( / ) and resistance
(x) of a thin wire are 20. The Richardson equation is given by
I AT 2 e B / kT . The dimensional formula for
0.2 0.02 cm, 80 0.1 cm, and 30 1
respectively . The percentage error in the AB 2 is same as that for A and B are constants
specific resistance is 1) IT 2 2) k T 3) Ik 2 4) Ik 2 / T
1) 23.4% 2) 25.4% 3) 26% 4) 27.5 % 21. The heat generated in a circuit is given by
Q = i2 Rt joule , where ‘i’ is current, R is
13. When a current of 2.5 0.5 ampere flows resistance and t is time. If the percentage
through a wire, it develops a potential errors in measuring i, R and t are 2%, 1%
difference of 20 1 volt, the resistance of and 1% respectively, the maximum error in
measuring heat will be
the wire is 1) 2 % 2) 3 % 3) 4 % 4) 6 %
1) 8 2 2) 10 3
LEVEL - III -KEY
3) 18 4 4) 20 6 1)2 2)4 3)1 4)1 5)4 6)3
14. Two objects A and B are of lengths 5 cm and 7)3 8)3 9)2 10)2 11)1 12)1
7 cm determined with errors 0.1 cm and 0.2 13)1 14)1 15)4 16)4 17)3 18)2
cm respectively. The error in determining (a) 19)1 20)3 21)4
the total length and (b) the difference in their
lengths are
LEVEL - III - HINTS
1) 12 0.3 , 2 0.3 2) 7 0.3 , 2 0.3 M M V
1. Density ; 100 M V 100
3) 12 0.3 , 12 0.3 4) 12 0.3 , 2 0.6 V
15. In a simple pendulum experiment, length is 2. 16 M.S.D = 20 V.S.D 1V .S .D 4 / 5 M .S .D
measured as 31.4 cm with an accuracy of L.C = 1M.S.D - 1 V.S.D
1mm. The time for 100 oscillations of
NARAYANA GROUP 33
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
V R V I
3. R ; 100 R V I 100
I LEVEL - IV
R
Resistance = R R 100
Matching Questions
4. mean
;
mean i
; 1. Column-I Column-II
mean
6 6 a) Backlash error p) Always subtracted
mean b) Zero error q)Least count
relative % error in = 100
mean
=1M.S.D-1V.S.D
g l T c) Vernier callipers r) May be -ve or +ve
5. 2 ( l and T are least, and the d) Error in screw gauge s) Due to loose fittings
g l T 2. There are four vernier scales, whose specifi-
number of readings are maximum) cation are given in column-I and the least
m count is given in column-II ( S=value of main
6. Percentage error gives percentage accuracyd scale division,n=number of marks on vernier)
lbh
d m l b h Column-I Column-II
relative error, a) S=1 mm ,n=10 p) 0.05 mm
d m l b h
b) S=0.5mm,n=10 q) 0.01 mm
d c) S=0.5 mm,n=20 r) 0.1 mm
and calculate 100
d d) S=1 mm , n=100 s) 0.025 mm
7. t2 t1 50.7 40.6 0.3 0.2 3. Using signification figures, match the following
Column-I Column-II
X A B a) 0.12345 p) 5
8. 100 2 100 100
X A B b) 0.1210 cm q) 4
1 C 3D c) 47.23/2.3 r) 3
100 100
3 C D d) 3 108 s) 2
1 t) 1
09. t 5000 years rounded off to minimum 4. Match List I with List II and select the correct
1011
significant figures answer using the codes given below the Lists.
List - I List - II
l g l 2T A) Distance between earth and stars I) Micron
10. g 4 2 2 ; 100 100 100
T g l T B) Inter atomic distance in a solid II) angstrom
FL FL Y F L 2r e C) Size of the nucleus III) Light year
11. Y 2 ;
Y
100
F
L
r
100
e D) Wave length of infrared laser IV) fermi
Ae r e
V) kilometre
r2x 5. Some physical constants are given in
12. Specific Resistance
L List - I and their dimensional formulae are
2r L x given in List- 2.Match the following (2007 E)
Total % error is 100 List - I List - II
r L x 1 2
a) Planck’s constant e) ML T
V V I
13. R R R
I V I b) Gravitational constant f) ML1T 1
14. x a b and x a b c) Bulk modulus g) ML2T 1
x a b and x a b d) Coefficient of Viscosity h) M 1 L3T 2
2 l g l 2 T 6. Names of units of some physical quantities
15. g 4 ; 100 100 100 are given in List - I and their dimensional
T2 g l T formulae are given in List - II. Match the
From 16 to 18 follow the rules of significant figures correct pair of the lists. (2005 E)
and rounding off numbers List - I List - II
z a) Pa s e) L2T 2 K 1
19. 1 ; 20)Here A IT 2 and B KT
k b) NmK-1 f) [ MLT 3 K 1 ]
Q 2 i R t 1 1
21. Q i 2 Rt ; Q 100 i 100 R 100 t 100 c) J kg K g) [ ML1T 1 ]
d) Wm1K 1 h) ML2T 2 K 1
34 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
7. Match List I with List II and select the Reason(R) : The numerical value of physical
correct answer using the codes given below quantity is inversely proportional to unit.
the lists. 15. Assertion(A) : Surface tension and spring con-
List - I List - II stant have the same dimensions.
a) joule e) henry amp/s Reason(R) : Both are equivalent to force per
b) watt f) farad volt unit length
c) volt g) coulomb volt 16. Assertion(A) : Method of dimensions cannot
d) coulomb h) oersted cm be used for deriving formulae containing trigo-
i) ampere gauss nometrical ratios.
j) (ampere)2 ohm Reason(R) : Trigonometrical ratios have no di-
8. Match List I with List II and select the mensions.
correct answer using the codes given below Statement Type Questions
the lists. Options :
List - I List - II 1. Statement-1 is true and statement-2 is true
a) Same negative I) pressure, 2. Statement-1 is true and statement-2 is false
dimensions of mass Rydberg’s constant 3. Statement-1 is false and statement-2 is true
b) same negative II) Magnetic 4. Statement-1 is false and statement-2 is false
dimensions of length induction field,potential 17. Statement-1: Plane angle is a dimensionless
c) same dimensions III) Capacity, universal quantity.
of time gravitational constant Statement-2: All supplementary quantities are
d) Same dimension IV) Energy density, dimensionless.
of current surface tension
18. Statement-1 :The size (u) of the unit of physical
Assertion & Reasoning Questions quantity and its numerical magnitude (n) are
Options : related to each other by the relation
1. A and R are correct and R is correct nu = constant
explanation of A Statement-2: The choice of mass, length and time
2. A and R are correct and R is not correct as fundamental quantities is not unique.
explanation of A 19. Statement-1: The MKS system is a coherent
3. A is true and R is false system of units
4. Both A and R are false Statement-2:In SI, joule is the unit for all forms
9. Assertion(A) : The equation y = x + t cannot be of energy
true where x,y are the distances and t is time 20. Statement-1: Two quantities which are to be
Reason(R) : quantities with different dimensions added must have the same dimensions
can not be added Statement-2: Two quantities which are to be mul-
10. Assertion(A) : Plane angle is dimensionless tiplied may have the same dimensions.
quantity. 21. Statement-1:Susceptibility is expressed as Am-1.
Reason(R) : All unitless quantities are Statement-2:Magnetic flux is expressed as JA-1
dimensionless 22. Statement-1 :Electromotive force is expressed
11. Assertion(A) : Dimensions of constant of in newton.
Statement-2:Electric intensity is expressed in NC-1
proportionality of constants can be derived from
dimensional method e2
23. Statement-1:The quantity ch is dimensionless
Reason(R) : Numerical value of constant of 0
proportionality can be found from experiments only 1
12. Assertion(A) : Solid angle is dimensionless Statement 2: has the dimensions of ve-
0 0
quantity and it is a supplementary quantity. locity and is numerically equal of velocity of light.
Reason(R) : All supplementary quantities are 24. Statement-1 : Electric current is a scalar
dimensionless. Statement-2 : All fundamental physical quantities
13. Assertion(A) : When we change the unit of mea- are scalars
surement of a quantity, its numerical value changes. 25. Statement-1 : Pressure can be subtracted from
Reason(R) : Smaller the unit of measurement, pressure gradient
smaller is its numerical value. Statement-2: Only like quantities can be added
or subtracted from each other
14. Assertion(A) : If u1 and u2 are units and n1 , n2 26. Statement-1 : Energy cannot be divided by
are their numerical values in two different systems volume
then n1 n2 u1 u2 . Statement-2 : Dimensions of energy and volume
are different
NARAYANA GROUP 35
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL -- III
PHYSICS-VOL
27. Statement-1: Light year is a unit of time 39. Statement-I: If error in measurement of mass is
Statement-2: Light year is the distance traveled 2% and that in measurement of velocity is 5% than
by light in vacuum in one year. error in measurement of kinetic energy is 6%.
28. Statement-I: Dimensional analysis can give us the Statement-II:Error in kinetic energy is
numerical value of proportionality constants that K m v
may appear in an algebraic expression. 2 .
Statement-II: Dimensional analysis make use of K m v
the fact that dimensions can be treated as alge- More than One Answer Questions
braic quantities. 40. A book with many printing errors contains
29. Statement-I: The product of the numerical value four different expressions for the displace-
and unit of physical quantity remains same in ev- ment ‘y’ of a particle executing simple
ery system of unit. harmonic motion. The wrong formula on di-
Statement-II: magnitude of a physical quantity mensional basis (v=velocity)
remains same in every system of units.
30. Statement-I: Systematic errors can be removed i. y A sin 2 t / T ii. y A sin Vt
completely. A
Statement-II: the cause of systematic errors can iii. y A/ T sin t / A iv.. y sin t cos t
2
be known. 1)ii only 2)ii and iii only 3)iii only 4)iii and iv only
31. Statement-I: Random errors can be positive or 41. Three of the quantities defined below have
negative. the same dimensional formula. Identify them.
Statement-II: Cause of random errors are un-
certain. i) Energy / mass ii) pressure / density
32. Statement-I:In the measurement of g using simple iii) Force / linear density
pendulum generally we take central position (mean
position) of the oscillation as reference position iv) Angular frequency / radius
for measuring time of oscillation. 1) i,ii,iii 2) ii,iii,iv 3) iii,iv,i 4) iv,i,ii
Statement-II: This reduces the human error in 42. Which of the following is not a unit of time?
measurement of time. a) parsec b)light year c) micron d) sec
33. Statement-I: When a length of 2.0 m is converted 1) a and c 2) a and b 3) a,b and c 4) all
into centimeter, the result is 200cm 43. Which of the following is dimensionless?
Statement-II: The numerical value of a measure- a)Boltzmann’s constant b)Planck’s constant
ment is proportional to reciprocal of the size of c) Poisson’s ratio d) Relative density
unit used. 1) a and b 2) c and b 3) c and d 4) d and a
34. Statement-I:The length of an object is measured 44. Which of the following pairs have same
with two instruments as l =4.01cm and dimensions.
l =4.009cm.The second instrument 1
has a better a) Torque and work
2
resolution. b) Angular momentum and work
Statement-II: More value is the least count of c) Energy and Young’s modulus
an instrument , better is the resolution. d) Light year and wavelength
35. Statement-I:If a physical quantity has a unit , it 1) a and b 2) b and c 3) c and d 4) a and d
must not be dimensionless. 45. The pair of physical quantities that have the
Statement-II: No physical quantity exists which same dimensions are
has dimension but no unit. a) Reynold’s number and coefficient of friction
36. Statement-I: A formula derived using dimensional b) Latent heat and gravitational potential
analysis obeys principle of homogenity . c)angular velocity and frequency of light wave
Statement-II: A physically correct relation is d) Planck’s constant and torque
always in accordance with principle of homogenity 1) b and c are correct 2) a and b are correct
37. Statement-I: Mass, length and time are funda- 3) a,b and c are correct 4) all are correct
mental quantities. 46. Choose the false statement from given
Statement-II:Mass,length and time are indepen- statements.
dent of on another. I.Relative permittivity is dimensionless variable
38. Statement-I: The number of significant figures in II. Angular displacement has neither units nor
0.001 is 1 while in 0.100 it is 3. dimensions
Statement-II:Zeros before a non-zero significant III.Refractive index is dimensionless variable
digit are not counted while zeros after a non-zero IV. Permeability of vacuum is dimensional
significant digit are counted. constant
1)only I and II 2)Only II 3)Only III 4)Only IV
36 NARAYANA GROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL -I UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
47. The SI unit of inductance, henry can be 54. The correct order in which the dimensions of
written as “time” increases in the following
a) weber/ampere b) volt second/ampere physical quantities is
c) joule/(ampere)-2 d) ohm/second a) Stress b) Period of revolution of satellite
1) a & c are correct 2) a & d are correct c) Angular displacement
3)a, b, & c are correct 4) a & b are correct d) Coefficient of thermal conductivity
Ascending & Descending Order 1) a b c d
48. Arrange the following lengths in increasing 2) d c b a
order 3) a d c b
I. 1 angstrom II. 1 Micron 4) d a c b
III. 1 fermi IV. 1 light year LEVEL-IV- KEY
1. III, I, II, IV 2. I, II, III, IV Matching Questions
3. III, II, I, IV 4. II, III, I, IV 1) a-s, b-p,r, c-q, d-r,s
49. Arrange the following multiples in 2) a-r, b-p, c-s, d-q
decreasing order 3) a-p, b-q, c-s, d-t
I. milli II. centi III. nano IV. pico 4) a-III, b-II, c-IV d-I
1. IV, II, I, III 2. II, I, III,IV 5) a-g b-h c-e d-f
3. I, III, II, IV 4. II,I,IV,III 6) a-g b-h c-e d-f
50. Arrange the following physical quantities in 7) a-g b-j c-e d-f
increasing order of their magnitudes 8) a-III b-I c-IV d-II
I. 106 dyne II. 1 N Assertion & Reason Type
III. 3 kg ms 2 IV. 107 gm cm s 2 9)1 10)2 11)2 12)1 13)3 14)1
15)1 16)1
1. II I III IV
2. IV I III II
Statement Type
3. II III I IV 17)1 18)3 19)1 20)1 21)3 22)3
4. I II III IV 23)1 24)1 25)3 26)3 27)3 28)3
51. Arrange the following physical quantities in 29)1 30)1 31)1 32)1 33)1 34)2
the decreasing order of dimension of length 35)3 36)1 37)1 38)1 39)3
I. Density II. Pressure More than one answer type questions
III. Power IV. Impulse 40)2 41)1 42)3 43)3 44)4 45)1
1. I, II, III, IV 2. III, II, I, IV 46)2 47)4
3. IV, I,II, III 4. III, IV, II, I Ascending & Descending Order
52. The correct order in which the dimensions of 48) 1 49)2 50)3 51)4 52)3 53)1
length increases in the following physical 54)4
quantities is LEVEL - IV - HINTS
a) permittivity b) resistance 9. from principle of homogenity.
c) magnetic permeability d) stress arc length
1) a, b, c, d 2) d, c, b, a 10. Plane angle = M 0 L0T 0
radius
3) a, d, c, b 4) c, b, d, a 11. dimensional method is not useful for deriving
53. The correct order in which the dimensions of proportional constants.
“length “ decreases in the following 12. supplementary quantities have no dimensional
physical quantities is formula.
a) Coefficient of viscosity 1
b) Thermal capacity c) Escape velocity 13 & 14 N1U1 N 2 U 2 and N
U
d) Density 15. by dimensional method
1) b,c,a,d 2) a,b, c,d 3) c,d,b,a 4) a,d,c,b 16. Method of dimensions can not be used for
trignometric ,logarthemic and exponential
functions
NARAYANA GROUP 37
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
VECTORS
unit vector is dimensionless physical quantity.
SYNOPSIS
The unit vector along R = xi$ + y $j + zk$ is given
Physical Quantities: ur
R xiˆ + yj+zk
ˆ ˆ
Ø The quantities that are measurable are called physical R̂ = ur =
by R x2 + y2 +z2
quantities
Ex: Length, Mass, Time, Velocity, Force, etc.. Orthogonal Unit Vectors / Base Vectors
Physical quantities are mainly classified into three $i, $j and k$ are called orthogonal unit vectors.
types. a) Scalars b) Vectors c) Tensors
(It is an X, Y and Z axes of Cartesian co-ordinate
Ø Vectors are those which have both magnitude and system )
direction and also obey laws of vector addition. Position Vector
Ex : Velocity, Force, Momentum , Torque etc It is a vector that represents the position of a particle
Ø Scalars are those which have only magnitude. with respect to the origin of a coordinate system.
The Position Vector of a point (x, y, z) is
Ex : Mass, Time, Distance, Flux etc ur
Note : A physical quantity having magnitude and R = x ˆi + y ˆj + z kˆ
direction but not obeying laws of vector addition is y
treated as a scalar. P
Ex : Electric current is a scalar quantity.
Electric current is always associated R
with direction, but it is not a vector quantity.It does O x
not obey laws of vector addition for its addition.
z
i1
Null Vector (or) Zero Vector
(i1+i2)
θ It is a vector of zero magnitude.
Its direction is indeterminate
r
i2 It is represented as 0
The resultant of i1 and i2 is ( i1 + i2 ) by Kirchhoff’s
f’s Ex: velocity of simple pendulum at extreme position,
current law.The resultant does not depend on angle acceleration of particle moving with uniform velocity
between currents i1 and i2 . etc
Ø Tensors are those quantities having different Representation of angle between the
magnitudes in different directions. These do not obey two vectors :
the laws of vector addition. Ø The angle between two vectors is represented by
Ex: Moment of inertia , Stress etc.. the smaller of the two angle between the vectors when
Ø Unit Vector :It is a vector whose magnitude is they are placed tail to tail by displacing either of the
ur vectors parallel to it self.
unity. A unit vector parallel to a given vector R is
ur ur ur
Ex: The angle between A and B is correctly
µ = ur
R
R
represented in the following figures
given by R
ur
µ gives the sense of direction of the vector R.
R
196 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
Sol. To find the angle between two vectors we connect
the tails of the two vectors. We can shift the vectors
B ur ur ur
parallel to themselves such that tails of A , B and C
θ
are connected as shown in figure.
A
y
B
B
θ θ
(or ) B
A A
A
ur ur 30
0
a) If the angle between A and B is θ , then the x
ur ur
0
45 0
angle between A and K B is also θ . Where `K’ is 30
a positive constant. B
C
KB ur ur
Now we observe that angle between A and B
B ur ur ur ur
is 600 , B and C 150 ,between A and C is 750
θ θ ur ur ur
W.E-2: If A , B , C represents the three sides of an
A A
ur ur equilateral triangle taken in the same order
b) If the angle between A and B is θ , then the
ur ur then find the angle between
ur ur ur ur ur ur
angle between A and - K B is (180- θ ). `K’ is i) A and B ii) B and C iii) A and C .
positive constant.
B
B
θ A
B 0
180 -θ
0
θ 120
− KB C B 0
A 120
c) Angle between collinear vectors is always zero or A
1800 0 A
C 120
Q
Q Sol. From the diagram the angle between vectors
ur ur ur ur
A and B is 1200 , between B and C is 1200 and
or ur ur
θ = 180 P
0
θ=0
0
P between A and C is 1200
Note: Angle between vectors in anticlockwise direction
is taken as positive and clockwise direction as W.E-3 : A man walks towards east with certain
negative velocity. A car is travelling along a road
ur ur ur which is 300 west of north.While a bus is
W.E-1:Three vectors A , B , C are shown in the
figure. Find angle between travelling in another road which is 600 south
ur ur ur ur ur ur of west.Find the angle between velocity vector
(i) A and B (ii) B and C (iii) A and C .
of
a) man and car b) car and bus
0 c) bus and man.
A 30 x
x 0 x 0
30 45
B C
NARAYANAGROUP 197
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
VC North
0
30
Vm
West 0
60 O East
Vb
South
Sol. From the diagram the angle between velocity vector ur
of man and car is 900 + 300 = 1200 ( )
The projection of R along x-axis is called
The angle between velocity vector of car and bus is
horizontal component (Rx) R x =Rcos?
600 + 600 = 1200 ur
The angle between velocity vector of bus and man ( )
The projection of R along y-axis is called vertical
is 300 + 900 = 1200
ur component (Ry) R y =Rsin?
W.E -4 : A vector A makes an angle 300 with the
Component of a vector is a scalar quantity.
Y-axis in anticlockwise direction.Another
ur r
vector B makes an angle 300 with the x-axis Magnitude of the resultant R = R x 2 + R y 2
in clockwise direction. Find angle between Direction of the resultant with x-axis is
ur ur
vectors A and B . R
y θ = tan −1 y
Rx
0
30 Ø Note :
A y
0 x B
30 A
B
-x o x
D
C
ur ur
Sol. From the diagram the angle between A and B is -y
r
a) If the vector A is in first quadrant then it can be
300 + 900 + 300 = 1500 r
written as A = Ax iˆ + Ay ˆj
Resolution of a Vector into Components r
b) If the vector B is in second quadrant then
in two Dimensions r
ur B = − Bx iˆ + By ˆj
( )
A vector R can be resolved into two mutually r
c) If the vector C is in third quadrant then
perpendicular components Rx and Ry in a plane say x - y r
C = −C xiˆ − C y ˆj
r
d) If the vector D is in fourth quadrant then
r
D = Dxiˆ − Dy ˆj
Applications on resolution of vector :
198 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
than integral multiple of 2 π (or 360 0 ) its direction
changes, but magnitude does not change. so vector
changes.
1)
A book is placed on smooth horizontal surface and
ur
pulled by a force F making an angle ` θ ’ with
horizontal.
Component of force along horizontal =Fcosθ . Ø Note : If the frame of reference is rotated the vector
Component of force along vertical =Fsin θ . does not change (though its components may
change).
2)
vector
S
O
WE-5: The components of a vector along the x
and y directions are (n+1) and 1 respectively. If
A block of mass `m’ is placed on an inclined plane the coordinate system is rotated by an angle 600
of angle ` θ ’then the component of weight parallel then the components changes to n and 3. Find
to the inclined plane is `mg sin θ ’ , the component the value of n.
of weight perpendicular to the inclined plane is Sol. Length of the vector does not change on rotation.
mgcosθ . 7
( n + 1) + 12 = n2 + 32 ⇒ n = 2 = 3.5
2
3)
O
θ l
WE-6: A weight mg is suspended from the middle
T
l −x
2 2 of a rope whose ends are rigidly clamped at
x
F the same level.The rope is no longer
mg horizontal.What is the minimum tension
A simple pendulum having a bob of mass `m’ is required to completely straighten the rope
suspended from a rigid support and it is pulled by a Sol. From the diagram
horizontal force `F’ . The string makes an angle θ θ θ
with the vertical as shown in figure. T T
The horizontal component of tension = T sin θ θ
θ
The vertical component of tension = T cos θ
when the bob is in equilibrium mg
T sin θ =F ................(1)
mg
T cos θ = mg .................(2) 2T sinθ = mg ⇒ T =
2sinθ
The rope will be straight when θ = 00
mg mgl
T= = mg
cos θ l 2 − x2 T= =∞
2sin 00
The tension required to completely straighten the
From equation (1) and (2
rope is infinity.
F x
Tanθ = ⇒ F = mgTanθ = mg
mg l 2 − x2 WE-7: The sum of magnitudes of two forces acting
at a point is 16 N.If their resultant is normal
T = F + ( mg )
2
2 to the smaller force and has a magnitude of
Ø Note: If a vector is rotated through an angle other
NARAYANAGROUP 199
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
8N.Then the forces are R
R R
cosa = urx , cosß = ury and cos? = urz
R R R
sum of the squares of direction cosines = 1
F2 F i.e cos 2 a + cos2 ß + cos 2 ? = 1
θ
90
0
If l = cos α , m = cos β and n = cos γ ,
F1 then l 2 + m 2 + n 2 = 1 .
ur uur uur
Sol. let F be the resultant of two forces F1 and F2 Now, sin 2 a + sin 2 ß+ sin 2 ?=2
W.E-8: A bird moves with velocity 20m/s in a
as shown in figure with F2 > F1 direction making an angle of 600 with the
F2 sin θ = F1 ...(i) F2 cos θ = F = 8 ...(ii) eastern line and 600 with the vertical upward.
Squaring and adding Eqs (i) and (ii), we get Represent the velocity vector in rectangular
form
F2 2 = F12 + 64 ...................(iii) Sol. Let eastern line be taken as x-axis, northern as y-
Given F1 + F2 = 16 ..............(iv) axis and vertical upward as z-axis.
r
Solving Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get Let the velocity v makes angle α , β and γ with
F1 = 6 N and F2 = 10 N . x,y and z axis respectively, then α = 600 , γ = 600
Resolution in 3D Space we have
A point in space can be specified by a position vector cos 2 α + cos 2 β + cos 2 γ = 1
ur
R = Rx $i + R y $j + Rz k$ where Rx , Ry and Rz being cos 2 600 + cos 2 β + cos 2 600 = 1
the coordinates of the point in Cartesian coordinate 1
1
system.
ur
cos 2 β = ; cos β =
2 2
Magnitude of position vector R is r
so v = v cos α i$ + v cos β $j + v cos γ kˆ
R = Rx2 + Ry2 + Rz2
1 1 $ 1 ˆ
y = 20 $i + j + k
2 2 2
= 10$i + 10 2 $j + 10kˆ
Mathematical operations with vectors
r r
Consider two vectors A and B in x-y plane
r r
Ry R A = Ax $i + Ay $j and B = Bx $i + By $j
β 1) Vector Addition ( Analytical Method )
γ α Rx ur ur ur ur
x Let R be their sum. We have R = A + B
r
RZ ( ) ( )
R = Ax $i + Ay $j + Bx $i + By $j
z
Direction Cosines = ( Ax + Bx ) $i + ( Ay + By ) $j
ur
( )
2) Vector Subtraction ( Analytical Method)
If the position vector R makes angles a, ß, ? with ur ur ur ur
Let R be their difference. We have R = A − B
x,y and z axes respectively, then r
cosa , cosß, cos? are called direction cosines. ( )(
R = Ax $i + Ay $j − Bx $i + By $j)
= ( Ax − Bx ) $i + ( A y − By ) $j
200 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
Laws of Vector Addition y A
Vector addition follows commutative, associative and x
distributive laws.
ur ur ur ur A
Ay
a) Commutative law : A + B = B + A 0
ur ur ur ur ur ur 60
b) Associative law : A+ (B+C) = (A + B) + C -x O 600 x
ur ur ur ur By
c) Distributive law : m(A+ B) = mA + mB B
where m is a scalar.
WE-9: Find the resultant of the vectors shown in Bx
-y
figure. ur ur ur
y C R = A+ B
A
4cm R = 2cos600$i + 2sin600 $j + 2cos600$i − 2sin600 $j
B
R = 4cos 600 $i
0
37
o x
ur uuur uuur uuur ∴ R = 2cm, along x-axis
Sol: R = OA + AB + BC W.E-12: Find the resultant of the vectors shown
0$ 0$
R = (5cos37 i + 5sin 37 j ) in fig by the component method.
ur y
R = 4iˆ + 3 ˆj + 3iˆ + 4 ˆj = 7iˆ + 7 ˆj
b
c
∴R = 7 2cm and α = 45 0 with horizontal.
5 3
0
37 1
W.E-10: Find the resultant of the vectors -x x
uuur uuur uuur 53
0 O a
OA, OB , OC as shown in figure. The radius of 6
the circle is r. d
C -y
0
B Sol.
45 0
45
Rx = 1$i − 5 cos 370 $i − 6 cos 530 $i
O A
uur uur
ur uuur uuur uuur Rx = 1iˆ − 4iˆ − 3.6iˆ ∴ Rx = −6.6 iˆ
Sol. R = OA + OB + OC
ur R y = 3 $j + 5sin 37 0 $j − 6 sin 530 $j
R = riˆ + r cos 450 iˆ + r sin 450 ˆj + rjˆ uur uur
R y = 3 ˆj + 3 ˆj − 4.8 ˆj ∴ R y = 1.2 ˆj
ur r ˆ r ˆ
R = r + i + r + j R = Rx2 + Ry2 = ( −6.6 ) + (1.2 ) = 6.7
2 2
2 2
ur uuur ur ur
( )
R = 2r + r along OB . W.E - 13 : If vectors A and B are 3$i − 4 $j + 5k$
ur and 2$i + 3 $j − 4k$ respectively then find the unit
W.E-11: Vector A is 2 cm long and is 60 above
0 ur ur
ur vector parallel to A + B
the x - axis in the first quadrant, vector B is ur ur
2cm long and is 60 below the x -axis in the
0
n̂ =
A
ur
+B
ur =
( ) (
3i$ − 4$j + 5k$ + 2i$ + 3j$ − 4k$ )
ur ur
5i$ − $j + k$
Sol: A+B
fourth quadrant. Find A + B .
(5i$ - $j + k$ )
=
27
NARAYANAGROUP 201
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
ur ur ur ur ur ur
W.E - 14: If A = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj and B = 7iˆ + 24 ˆj, find a given by A. B = A B cos? = ABcosθ
ur ur ur
vector having the same magnitude as B and
ur where θ is angle between A and B
parallel and same direction as A . ur ur
ur A cos θ is component of A along B and
Sol . The vector parallel to A and having magnitude ur ur
ur ur ur B cos θ is component of B along A
of B is C = B Aˆ
The dot product of two vectors is a scalar.
Properties of Scalar Product
B = 7 2 + 242 = 25 Ø a) Scalar product is commutative
ur ur ur uurur
A 3iˆ + 4 ˆj
µ
A= =
A 3 +4
2 2
( 1
)
= 3iˆ + 4 ˆj
5
i.e. A.B = B. A
b) Scalar product is distributive
ur ur ur ur ur ur ur
ur
(
1 ˆ
)
C = 25 × 3i + 4 ˆj = 15iˆ + 20 ˆj
i.e. A. ( B + C ) = A.B + A.C
5 c) It does not obey associative law
ur ur
W.E -15: The resultant of two vectors A and B is Ø Scalar product of two parallel vectors is maximum
ur ur ur ur ur
perpendicular to A and equal to half of the A.B = A B cos? = AB (Q ? = 00 )
ur ur
magnitude of B .Find angle between A and
ur The scalar product of two opposite vectors is
B? negative and minimum
ur ur The scalar product of two perpendicular vectors is
Sol : Since R is perpendicular to A .
ur ur ur zero
fig shows the three vectors A , B and R . ur ur
ur ur i.e. A.B = ABcos? = 0 ( Q ?=900 )
angle between A and B is π − θ
Scalar product is negative if θ>900 and <1800
R B 1 In case of orthogonal unit vectors
sin θ = = = $i.i$ = $j. $j = k$ .k$ = 1 ; $i. $j = $j.k$ = k$ .$i = 0
B 2B 2
Ø In terms of Components of vectors
ur
If A = Ax $i + Ay $j + Az k$
ur
and B = Bx $i + B y $j + Bz k$
B ur ur
R Then, A.B=A x B x +A y B y +A z B z
uruur 2
π−θ A.A=A x +A 2 y +A 2 z = A2
θ and magnitude of any vector is
A A r
A = A = A 2 x +A 2y +A 2z
for perpendicular vectors
⇒ θ = 300 A x Bx +A y By +A z Bz = 0
ur ur
⇒ angle between A and B is 1500 . Applications of Dot Product
ur
Multiplication of Vectors i) Angle between two vectors ur
A and B can be found
Ø A vector multiplied by another vector may give ur ur
a scalar or a vector. Hence there are two types of A.B
from cos θ = A ur ur
products for multiplication of two vectors. B
a) dot product or scalar product r r
ii) Vector component of A along B is
b) cross product or vector product r r
r
Ø
Scalar Product or Dot Product
ur ur
The scalar product of two vectors A and B is
A. B ˆ
B
B = A. Bˆ Bˆ ( )
r r
iii) Vector component of B along A is
202 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - VI-I VECTORS
r r
r Ø Properties of vector product:
A. B ˆ
A
(
A = B . Aˆ Aˆ ) a) Cross product does not obey commutative law.
ur ur ur ur ur ur ur ur
ur ur
iv) The component of A perpendicular to B in A× B ≠ B × A but A× B = −B × A
ur ur ur
the same plane is C = A - A . B µ B
µ
( ) b) Cross product obeys distributive law.
ur ur ur ur ur ur ur
ur ur
v) The component of B perpendicular to A in
( )
A × B + C = A× B + A × C
ur ur ur
the same plane is D = B - B . µ (
A µA ) c) cross product do not obey associative law
ur ur ur ur ur ur
A´( B ´C ) ¹ ( B´ A)´C
r r r r r r r r r r
vi) A + B = A. A + B.B + A.B + B. A Ø If $i, $j , k$ are unit vectors then
r
= A2 + B 2 + 2 AB cos θ $i × $i = $j × $j = k$ × k$ = 0
Examples of dot product : $i × $j = k$ , $j × k$ = $i, k$ × $i = $j
r r r r
Work W = F . S , Power P = F . V $j × $i = − k$ , k$ × $j = −$i, i$ × k$ = − $j
ur ur ur
Magnetic Flux f = B . A etc Ø If A = Axiˆ + Ay ˆj + Az kˆ
ur
Vector Product or Cross Product B = Bx iˆ + By ˆj + Bz kˆ
ur ur
If A and B are two vectors and the angle between iˆ ˆj kˆ
ur ur
them is θ then the cross product of these two then A´ B = Ax Ay Az
ur ur
vectors is given by A× B = ( AB sin θ ) n$ .
Bx By Bz
= ( Ay Bz - Az By ) iˆ - ( Ax Bz - Az B x ) ˆj + ( Ax By - Ay Bx ) kˆ
Where n$ is unit vector perpendicular to the plane
ur ur ur ur
ur ur A´ B
containing A & B . ØUnit vector normal to both A and B is n$ = ur ur .
A´ B
Case-I: If two vectors are parallel (θ = 0 ) or
0
ur ur
ur ur Ø If two vectors A and B are parallel
anti parallel ( θ = 180 0 ) then A× B = 0
Ax Ay Az ur ur
Case-II: If two vectors are perpendicular to each = = = constant or A ´ B = 0
ur ur BX B y B z
other θ = 900 then A× B = AB (maximum) W.E16: If 2$i − 3 $j + 4kˆ and 3i$ + λ $j + µ kˆ be collinear
Cross product of two vectors is a vector. vectors, then find the values of λ and µ .
Ø Direction is given by right hand cork screw rule r r
(OR) Right Hand thumb rule Sol. Let a = 2$i − 3 $j + 4k$ and b = 3$i + λ $j + µ k$
Ø Right handed screw rule : r r
Given a & b are collinear
Imagine a right handed screw to be placed along the
normal of the plane containing the two vectors. Rotate $i $j k$
the cap of the screw from first vector to second vector
r r 2 −3 4 = 0
through small angle between them, the direction of ∴ a ×b = 0 ;
motion of the tip of the screw gives the direction of 3 λ µ
their vector product.
Ø Right hand thumb rule : ( − 3µ − 4λ ) $i − ( 2 µ − 12 ) $j + ( 2λ + 9 ) kˆ = 0
Imagine the normal to the plane of the two vectors
to be held in the right hand with the thumb erect. Equating the coefficients of $i, $j and k̂ on both sides
If the fingers are whirling in the direction from we have 2µ − 12 = 0 ∴µ =6
first vector to second vector through small angle
9
between them, the direction of the thumb gives 2λ + 9 = 0 ⇒ λ=−
the direction of their vector product. 2
NARAYANAGROUP 203
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r
Ø Examples of cross product : W.E 19: If ar and b are two unit vectors such that
i) Angular momentum L = r × P
→ → → r r r r
a + 2 b and 5 a − 4 b are perpendicular to each
r
other, then the angle between ar and b is
→ → →
ii) Linear velocity V = ω × r
→ → →
iii) Torque τ = r × F Sol. a = b = 1
uur r r r r
iv) Torque on a magnet of magnetic moment M in
ur → → → ( a + 2b ). (5a − 4b ) = 0
magnetic field induction B is τ = M × B
v) Force on a conductor of length l carrying current i 5a2 − 4ab cos θ+ 10ab cos θ− 8b2 = 0
ur → → →
5 – 4 cosθ + 10 cosθ – 8 = 0
in magnetic field induction B is F = i l × B
– 3 + 6 cosθ = 0 ⇒ cosθ = 1/2, θ = 600
r
vi) Force on a charge q moving with velocity v in r
F = i$ + 2 $j − 3k$ and rr = 2$i − $j + $ r r
W.E 20: If k find r × F
ur → → →
magnetic field induction B is F = q v× B r r
i j k
r × F = 2 −1 1
ur Sol.
1 2 −3
vii) Torque on a coil of area A carrying current i in
ur →
→ → = ( 3 − 2 ) $i − ( −6 − 1) $j + ( 4 + 1) k$ = i$ + 7 $j + 5k$
magnetic field induction B is τ = i A× B
W.E 21: Find the vector components of vector
r r r
viii) A force F acts at P and τ is torque produced
r A = 2 î + 3 ĵ along the directions of
about Q. If position vector of P is r1 and position vector r
ur r r r ur ur r B = î + ĵ .
(
of Q is r2 then τ = r × F = r1 − r2 × F . ) r
r r r
A.B B
Sol. C= ( Acosθ ) B= Br Br
Ø Applications of cross product : ˆ
ur ur
(i) The area of triangle formed by A & B as
1 ur ur r 2+3 ˆi+jˆ 5
adjacent sides is A × B C= = ˆi+jˆ .
1+1 1+1 2
( )
2
ur ur
(ii) The area of parallelogram formed by A& B W.E 22: Find the unit vector perpendicular to
ur ur ur ur
as adjacent sides is A× B A = 3$i + 2 $j − k$ and B = $i − $j + k$ .
ur ur
A × B i$ − 4 $j − 5k$ $i − 4 $j − 5k$
(iii) The area of parallelogram formed by
uur uur 1 uu
r uu
r Sol : ˆ
n = ur u
r = =
d1 & d 2 as its diagonals is d1 × d 2 A× B 1 + 16 + 25 42
2
W.E 17: Find the angle between two vectors W.E 23 : Find the angle between the diagonals of
r r
$ $ a cube with edges of length “a”.
A = 2i$ + $j − k$ and B = i − k
r r Z
A.B 2 + 0 +1 3 3
Sol : cos θ = r r = = = ⇒ θ = 300
A B 6 2 2 3 2
r r A F
W.E 18: If a1 and a2 are two non collinear unit
vectors inclined at 600 to each other then the
r r r r B G
value of ( a1 − a2 ).(2 a1 + a2 ) is E
Sol. a1 = a2 = 1 Sol. O Y
r r r r
Now ( )( )
a 1 − a 2 . 2a 1 + a 2 = 2a12 − a22 − a1 a2 cos θ C D
1 1
= 2 −1− =
2 2 X
204 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
From the diagram 8. Choose the correct statement.
uuur uur uuur uur
OG = d1 = ai$ + a $j + ak$ , CF = d 2 = − ai$ + a $j + ak$
1) Scalar + vector = scalar/vector
vector
\ The angle between the diagonals is 2) = scalar
vector
r r 3) Scalar/vector = scalar (or) vector
d1. d 2 1 1
cos θ = r r = ⇒ θ = cos −1 4) vector - vector = vector.
d1 d 2 3 3 r r p
9. If angle between a and b is , then angle
r r 3
between 2a and -3b is
C.U.Q p 2p p 5p
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 6 3
SCALARS,VECTORS AND 10. If component of one vector in the direction of
RESOLUTION OF VECTORS another vector is zero, then those two vectors
1. Of the following the vector quantity is 1) are parallel to each other
1) Time 2) Electric Current 2) are perpendicular to each other
3) Velocity of light 4) Gravitational force 3) are opposite to each other
2. Of the following the scalar quantity is 4) are coplanar vectors.
1) Temperature 2) Moment of force
3) Moment of couple 4) Magnetic moment 11. The component of a vector is
3. Choose the correct statement 1) always less than its magnitude
1) Temperature is a scalar but temperature gradient 2) always greater than its magnitude
is a vector 3) always equal to its magnitude
2) Velocity of a body is a vector but velocity of light 4) less than or equal to its magnitude
is a scalar 12. The horizontal component of the weight of a
3) Electric intensity and Electric current density are body of mass m is
vectors
mg
4) All the above 1) mg 2) 3) zero 4) infinity
2
4. Choose the false statement :
1) Electric current is a vector because it has both
DOT PRODUCT AND CROSS PRODUCT
magnitude and direction 13. Cross product of vectors obeys
2) Time is a vector which has direction always in the 1) commutative law 2) associative law
forward direction 3) distributive law 4) all the above
3) All quantities having magnitude and direction are 14. Distributive law is obeyed by
vector quantities 1) scalar product 2) vector product
4) All the above 3) both 4) none
5. Which of the following units could be associated 15. Choose the false statement
1) Scalar product and vector product obey
with a vector quantity ? commutative law
1) newton/metre 2) newton metre / second 2) Scalar product does not obey distributive law where
3) kg m2 s-2 4) newton second as vector product obeys commutative law
6. A vector is not changed if 3) Scalar product and vector product obey
1) it is rotated through an arbitrary angle associative law
2) it is multiplied by an arbitrary scalar 4) All the above
ur ur
3) it is cross multiplied by a unit vector 16. Three vectors satisfy the relation A . B = 0 and
4) it slides parallel to itself uur ur ur
A . C = 0 , then A is parallel to
7. Which of the following is meaningful? ur ur ur ur ur ur
1) C 2) B 3) B ´C 4) B.C
1) Vector / Vector 2) Scalar / Vector
3) Scalar + Vector 4) Vector / Scalar
NARAYANAGROUP 205
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r
→ 27. The position vector rr and linear momentum P are
17. Let F be the force acting on a particle having r $ r
r = i and P = 4 $j the angular momentum vector is
→ → perpendicular to
position vector r and τ be the torque of this
1) x-axis 2) y-axis 3) z-axis 4) xy-plane
foce about the origin. Then (AIEEE-2003) rr r
28. The vector area of triangle whose sides are a, b, c is
→ → →
1) →r . F = 0 and →r . → 1r r r r r r
→ →
τ ≠ 0 2) r . τ ≠ 0 and F . τ = 0 1r r r r r r
1) b´ c + c ´a + a´b 2) b´ c + c ´a + a´b
→ → → → → 6 2
3) →r . →τ ≠ 0 and F . →τ ≠ 0 4) r . τ = 0 and F . τ = 0 1r r r r r r 1 r r r r r r
r r r r 3) 3 b´ c + c ´a + a´ b 4) 2 -b´ c + c ´a + a´b
18. ( A´ B) + ( B´ A) is equal to 29. Set the following vectors in the increasing order of
1) 2 AB 2) A2 B2 3) zero 4) null vector their magnitude.
r r r r
19. If C = A´ B , then C is a ) 3$i + 4 $j b ) 2i$ + 4 $j + 6k$ c )2$i + 2 $j + 2 k$
r r 1) a, b, c 2) c, a, b 3) a, c, b 4) b, c, a
1) parallel to A 2) parallel to B
r r 30. Arrange the vectors additions so that their magnitudes
3) perpendicular to A and parallel to B are in the increasing order.
r r r r
a) Two vector A and B are parallel
4) perpendicular to both A and B
r r r r
b) Two vectors A and B are antiparallel
20. If A and B are two vectors, then which of the r r
following is wrong ? c) Two vectors A and B making an angle 600
r r r r r r r r r r
1) A.B = B. A 2) A + B = B + A d) Two vectors A and B making 1200.
r r r r r r r r 1)b, d, c, a 2)b, c, d, a 3)a, c, d, b 4)c, d, a, b
3) A´ B = B ´ A 4) A´ B = -B ´ A
r r r r 31. Arrange the vector subtractions so that their magnitudes
r r
21. The angle between ( A´ B) and ( B ´ A) is (in are in decreasing order. If the two vectors A and B
ur ur
radian) are acting at an angle (| A |>| B |) .
1) π / 2 2) π 3) π / 4 4) zero a) 600 b) 900 c) 1800 d) 1200
ur ur ur 1) d,c,b,a 2) a,b,d,c 3) c,d,b,a 4) c,d,a,b
22. If none of the vectors A, B and C are zero and 32. Set the angles made by following vectors with
ur ur ur ur ur ur
if A´B = 0 and B´C = 0 the value of A´C is x-axis in the increasing order.
1) unity 2) zero 3) B 2 4) AC cos q a ) 3$i + 4 $j b ) 4i$ + 3 $j c )i$ + $j
23. Choose the false statement 1) a, b, c 2) c, b, a 3) b, c, a 4) a, c, b
1) A vector having zero magnitude can have a 33. Arrange the dot products in increasing order
direction ur ur
a) A and B are parallel
r r → r r ur ur
2)If A´ B = 0 , then either A or B or both must b) A and B are making an angle 600
ur ur
have zero magnitude c) A and B making, an angle 1800
3)The component of a vector is a vector 1) c, b, a 2) a, b, c 3) b, c, a 4) c, a, b
4)all the above 34. Arrange the magnitude of cross products in the
r r r decreasing order.
24. If A , B and C are coplanar vectors, then ur ur
r r r r r r
1) ( A.B)´C = 0 2) ( A´ B).C = 0
a) A and B making angle zero
ur ur
r r r b) A and B making angle 300
ur ur
3) ( A.B).C = 0 4) all the above are true c) A and B making angle 1200
r r 1) a, b, c 2) b, c, a 3) c, a, b 4) c, b, a
25. If A along North and B along vertically upward
→ → C.U.Q - KEY
then the direction of A × B is along 01) 4 02) 1 03) 4 04) 4 05) 4 06) 4
1) west 2) south 3) east 4) vertically downwards
r r r r 07) 4 08) 4 09) 2 10) 2 11) 4 12) 3
26. The angle between (A + B) & (A ´ B ) 13) 3 14) 3 15) 4 16) 3 17) 4 18) 4
1) 0 2) π / 4 3) π / 2 4) π 19) 4 20) 3 21) 2 22) 2 23) 4 24) 2
25) 3 26) 3 27) 4 28) 1 29) 2 30) 1
31) 3 32) 3 33) 1 34) 4
206 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
B
LEVEL - I (C.W)
ADDITION,SUBTRACTION AND 6N
0
RESOLUTION OF VECTORS
r r 53 A
1. If A = 3iˆ − 4 ˆj and B = −iˆ − 4 ˆj , calculate the di- 10N
r r O
rection of A + B
1) tan −1 ( 4 ) with positive X − axis in clock wise
2) tan −1 ( 4 ) with negative X − axis in clock wise P
3) tan −1 ( 4 ) with positive X − axis in anticlock wise 1) 16N 2) 4N 3) 208N 4) 232N
4) tan −1 ( 4 ) with negative X − axis in anticlock wise 8. Two billiard balls are moving on a table and the
r component velocities along the length and
r vectors are givenr by ar = r−2i + j − 3k and
2. Two ˆ ˆ ˆ
b = 5iˆ + 3 ˆj − 2kˆ . If 3a + 2b − c = 0 then third breadth are 5,5 ms-1 for one ball 2 3 , 2ms-1 for
vector cr is the other ball the angle between the motion of
1) 4iˆ + 9 ˆj − 13 kˆ 2) −4iˆ − 9 ˆj + 13kˆ balls is
1) 300 2)600 3)400 4) 150
3) 4iˆ − 9 ˆj − 13kˆ 4) 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 13kˆ r
3. The vector sum of two vectors of magnitudes 9. If A = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 4kˆ , its components in YZ - plane
10 units and 15 units can never be and ZX- plane are respectively
1) 28 units 2) 22 units 3) 18 units 4) 8 units 1) 13 and 5 2) 5 and 2 5
4. The car makes a displacement of 100 m towards 3) 2 5 and 13 4) 13 and 29
east and then 200 m towards north. Find the 10. A car weighing 100kg is on a slope that makes an
magnitude and direction of the resultant. angle 300 with the horizontal. The component of
1) 223.7m, tan −1 ( 2 ) , N of E
car’s weight parallel to the slope is ( g = 10ms −2 )
2) 223.7m, tan −1 ( 2 ) , E of N
3) 300m, tan −1 ( 2 ) , N of E 1) 500N 2) 1000N 3) 15,000N 4) 20,000N
11. A room has dimensions 3m × 4m × 5m. A fly
4) 100m, tan −1 ( 2 ) , N of E
starting at one corner ends up at the
5. If a vector has an x -component of -25.0units diametrically opposite corner. The magnitude
and a y- component of 40.0 units, then the of the displacement of the fly is
magnitude and direction of this vector is
1) 12m 2) 60 m 3) 2 5m 4) 5 2m
−1 5 r
1) 5 89 units;sin with -ve x-axis 12. If P = iˆ + 2 ˆj + 6kˆ , its direction cosines are
89
−1 5 1 2 6 1 2 6
2) 5 89 units; cos with -ve x-axis 1) , and 2) , and
89 41 41 41 41 41 41
−1 −5
3 8 7
3) 45 units; cos with x-axis 3) , and 4) 1, 2 and 6
9 41 41 41
−1 −5 MULTIPLICATION OFA VECTOR BYA
4) 45 units;sin with x-axis
9 SCALAR
6. A force of 10N is resolved into the perpendicular
components. If the first component makes 300 with 13. The value of 'm', if $i+2 $j-3k$ is parallel to
the force, the magnitudes of the components are $
3i+m $j-9 k$ is
1) 5N, 5N 2) 5 2 N, 5 N 1) 12 2) 9 3) 6 4) 3
3) 5 3 N, 5N 4) 10 N, 10 3 N 14. A force 2i + j − k newton acts on a body which
ˆ ˆ ˆ
7. If the system is in equilibrium is initially at rest. If the velocity of the body at
(cos 530 = 3/5), then the value of 'P' is
the end of 20seconds is 4iˆ + 2 ˆj − 2kˆ ms −1 , the
mass of the body
1) 20kg 2) 15kg 3) 10kg 4) 5kg
NARAYANAGROUP 207
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
SCALAR PRODUCT (OR) DOT PRODUCT VECTOR PRODUCT (OR )CROSS
ur
( )
15. When a force vector F= $i+2$j+k$ N acts on a PRODUCT
body and produces a displacement of 23. Find the torque of a force Fr = −3i$ + 2 $j + k$
r
(
S= 4i+ )
$ $j+7k$ m , then the work done is
acting at the point rr = 8$i + 2 $j + 3k$ about origin
1) 9J 2) 13J 3) 5J 4) 1J
16. The angle between the two vectors 1) 14$i − 38 $j + 3k$ 2) 4$i + 4 $j + 6k$
ur ur
A = i$ + 2 $j − k$ and B = −$i + $j − 2k$ is 3) −14$i + 38 $j − 16k$ 4) −4$i − 17 $j + 22k$
0 0 0 0
1) 90 2) 30 3) 45 4) 60
r 24. The area of the triangle whose adjacent sides
17. In a right angled triangle the three vectors ar, b
r r r (
are represented by the vectors 4$i + 3$j + 4k$ and )
and c add to zero. Then a. b is
5$i in sq. units is
1) 25 2) 12.5 3) 50 4) 45
25. The magnitude of scalar and vector products of
c two vectors are 48 3 and 144 respectively. What
5 3 b
is the angle between the two vectors ?
4 1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 900
a 26. The adjacent sides of a parallelogram are
r r
1) −9 2) +9 3) 0 4) −3 A = 2$i − 3 $j + k$ and B = − 2i$ + 4 $j − k$ What is the
18. A vector perpendicular to the vector $i + 2 $j( ) area of the parallelogram ?
1) 4 units 2) 7 units 3) 5 units 4) 8 units
and having magnitude 3 5 units is 27. What is the condition for the vectors
1) 3 iˆ + 6 ĵ 2) 6 iˆ –3 ĵ 3) 4 iˆ –2 ĵ 4) iˆ –2 ĵ
r ur 2$i + 3 $j − 4k$ and 3i$ − a $j + bk$ to be parallel ?
19. If A = 2i$ + 3$j and B = 2 $j + 3k$ the component 1) a = –9/2, b = – 6 2) a = –6, b = –9/2
ur ur 3) a = 4, b = 5 4) a = 8, b = 2
of B along A is
1 6 6 LEVEL -I (C.W) - KEY
1) 6 2) 3) 4) 01) 1 02) 1 03) 1 04) 1 05) 2 06) 3
6 13 13
r r 07) 3 08) 4 09) 2 10) 1 11) 4 12) 2
20. If the vectors A = aiˆ+ ajˆ + 3k and B = aiˆ −2ˆj −kˆ are
ˆ 13) 3 14 ) 3 15) 2 16) 4 17) 3 18) 2
perpendicular to each other then the positive 19) 4 20) 4 21) 3 22) 1 23) 4 24) 2
value of 'a' is 25) 3 26) 3 27) 1
1) Zero 2) 1 3) 2 4) 3 LEVEL-I (C .W) - HINTS
21. A force of 2i +3j + 2k N acts on a body for 4 s ur ur ur ur R
R = A + B , R = Rxiˆ + Ry ˆj ; Tanα = y
and produces a displacement of 3i$ + 4$j + 5k$ m
1.
Rx
r r r
calculate the power ? 2. c = 3a + 2b
1) 5 w 2) 6 w 3) 7 w 4) 9 w ur ur
r 3. P, Q are two vectors ; P + Q ≥ R ≥ P − Q
22. If θ is the angle between unit vectors A and 4.
r r s1 = 100iˆ , s2 = 200 ˆj
r (1 − A.B
r r
)
B , then (1 + A.B ) is equal to s
s = s12 + s2 2 , Tanθ = 2 → N of E
s1
1) tan2 ( θ / 2) 2) sin2 ( θ / 2)
y
3) cot2 ( θ / 2) 4) cos2 ( θ / 2) 5. A = x + y , Tanθ =
2 2
208 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
6. x1 y1 z1
27. x = y = z
F2
F 2 2 2
F1 = F cos 300 , F2 = F sin 30 0 LEVEL - I (H.W)
0
30
F1 ADDITION,SUBTRACTION AND
7.
RESOLUTION OF VECTORS
ur ur
6N
0 10 N
1. If A = 3iˆ − 4 ˆj and B = −iˆ − 4 ˆj , calculate the
ur uur
53 0
37
direction of A − B.
1) along positive x- axis 2) along negative x-axis
3) along positive y- axis 4) along negative y -axis
2. The resultant of the forces
p
ur r uur uur
6 ˆj + 10 cos 53 ˆj + 10 cos 37iˆ + P = 0 solve for P F1 = 4iˆ − 3 ˆj and F2 = 6iˆ + 8 ˆj is
ur uur
8. V 1 = 5iˆ + 5 ˆj , V2 = 2 3iˆ + 2 ˆj 1) 5 5 2) 10iˆ − 5 ˆj 3) 125 4) −2iˆ − 3 ˆj
Y 3. The vector sum of two vectors of magnitudes 10
V1 units and 15 units can never be
1) 20 units 2) 22 units 3) 18 units 4) 3 units
4. A car moves 40m due east and turns towards
V2 y1 y
Tanθ1 = ,Tan θ 2 = 2 north and moves 30m then turns 450 east of north
x1 x2 and moves 20 2m. The net displacement of car
θ1 θ2 is ( east is taken positive x -axis, North as positive
9. → InYZ plane x = 0 , ur
X
y - axis)
A = Ay + Az
2 2
1) 50iˆ + 60 ˆj 2) 60iˆ + 50 ˆj 3) 30iˆ + 40 ˆj 4) 40iˆ + 30 ˆj
ur
→ In XZ plane y = 0 , A = Ax + Az
2 2 5. A bird moves in such a way that it has a
displacement of 12 m towards east, 5 m towards
north and 9 m vertically upwards. Find the
magnitude of its displacement
10. mg sin θ 1) 5 2m 2) 5 10m 3) 5 5m 4) 5m
θ
6. An aeroplane is heading north east at a speed
11. S = x + y 2 + z 2
2
of 141.4 ms −1 . The northward component of its
A A A velocity is
cos α = urx , cos β = ury , cos γ = urz 1) 141.4 ms −1 2) 100 ms −1 3) zero 4) 50 ms −1
12. A A A 7. The unit vector parallel to the resultant of the
ur ur
x1 y1 z1 r r r r vectors A = 4i$ + 3j$ + 6k$ and B = −$i + 3j$ − 8k$ is
13. x = y = z 14. Ft = mV 15. W = F .S
r r2 1 ^ ^ ^ 1 ^ ^ ^
1) 7 3 i + 6 j− 2 k 2) 7 3 i + 6 j+ 2 k
2 2
A.B rr
16. cosθ = Ar Br 17. a.b = ab cos 900 1 ^ ^ ^ 1 ^ ^ ^
3) 49 3 i + 6 j− 2 k 4) 49 3 i − 6 j+ 2 k
r r
r r r
a .b
18. a .b = 0 , b = 3 5 19. b cos θ = 8. The vector parallel to 4iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ and whose
a
r r 2 length is the arithmetic mean of lengths of two
20. A . B = a − 2a − 3 = 0 ⇒ ( a − 3 )( a + 1) = 0
r r r r vectors 2iˆ − 4 ˆj + 4kˆ and iˆ + 6 ˆj + 3kˆ is
r r F .S 1 − A . B 1 − cos θ
21. P = F .V = 22. r r= 1) 4iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ 2) (4iˆ − 3 ˆj + 5kˆ) / 3
t 1 + A . B 1 + cos θ
r r ur 3) (4iˆ − 3ˆj + 5kˆ)/ 2 4) (4iˆ − 3ˆj + 5kˆ) / 5
23. Torque of the force, τ = r × F
r
1 r r 9. The direction cosines of a vector A are
24. Area of triangle = A × B
2 4 1 3
cos α = , cos β = and cos γ = then the
25. ab cos θ = 48 3 , ab sin θ = 144 5 2 2 5 2
r r r
vector A is
26. Area of parallelogram = A × B
1) 4iˆ + ˆj + 3kˆ 2) 4iˆ + 5 ˆj + 3kˆ
NARAYANAGROUP 209
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r
3) 4iˆ − 5 ˆj − 3kˆ 4) iˆ + 5 ˆj − kˆ 20. If the vectors A = aiˆ + ˆj − 2kˆ and
r r
10. Given two vectors A = ˆi - 2 ˆj - 3kˆ and B = aiˆ − ajˆ + kˆ are perpendicular to each
r r r
B = 4iˆ - 2ˆj + 6kˆ . The angle made by (A + B) other then the positive value of 'a' is
with the X - axis is (2007 M) 1) Zero 2) 1 3) 2 4) 3
1) 30 0 2) 45 0 3) 60 0 4) 900
(
11.To go from town A to town B a plane must fly 21. When a force 8iˆ + 4 ˆj newton displaces a )
about1780 km atan angleof300 West of north.
How far West of A is B ?
( )
particle through 3iˆ − 3 ˆj metre, the power is
1) 1542km 2) 1452 km 3) 1254 km 4) 890 km 0.6W. The time of action of the force is
12. A vector iˆ + 3 ˆj rotates about its tail through
an angle 600 in clockwise direction then the new 1) 20s 2) 7.2s 3) 72s 4) 2s
r
vector is 22. If ar and b are two unit vectors and the angle
1) iˆ + 3 ˆj 2) 3$i - 4 $j 3) 2 ˆj 4) 2iˆ r r
(1 + a.b)
r r is
between them is 600 then
(1- a.b )
MULTIPLICATION OFA VECTOR BYA
SCALAR
r r 1) 2 2) 3 3) 0 4) 1/2
13. If a = 2iˆ + 6 ˆj + mkˆ and b = niˆ + 18 ˆj + 3kˆ are
parallel to each other then values of m,n are
1) 1,6 2) 6,1 3) -1,6 4) -1,-6
VECTOR PRODUCT (OR) CROSS
14. A particle has an initial velocity (6iˆ +8 ˆj) ms–1 PRODUCT
ur r
ˆ + 3 ˆj − kˆ and r = iˆ − ˆj + 6kˆ find rr × ur
(
$ $ –2
)
and an acceleration of 0.8i + 0.6 j ms . Its
23. If F = 2 i F
speed after 10s is 1) −17$i + 13 $j + 5k$ 2) −17$i − 13 $j − 5k$
1)20 ms–12) 7 2 ms–1 3) 10 ms–1 4) 14 2 ms-1
3) 3$i + 4 $j − 5k$ 4) −3$i − 4 $j + 5k$
SCALAR PRODUCT (OR) DOT PRODUCT
15. A motor boat is going in a river with velocity 24. Two sides of a triangle are given by $i + $j + k$
ur
V = 4$i − 2 $j + k$ ms −1 If the resisting force due and −$i + 2j$ + 3k$ , then area of triangle is
ur
( )
to stream is, F = 5$i − 10 $j + 6k$ N . Then the 1) 26 2) 26 / 2 3) 46 4) 26
power of the motor boat is. 25. The magnitude of scalar and vector products of
1) 100 w 2) 50 w 3) 46 w 4) 23 w
two vectors are 144 and 48 3 respectively. What
16. The angle between the two vectors -2i$ + 3j- $ kˆ
is the angle between the two vectors ?
and ˆi + 2jˆ + 4kˆ is 1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 900
1) 00 2) 900 3)1800 4)450
ur ur 26. Area of a parallelogram formed by vectors
17. If a vector A = 2i + 2 j + 3k, and B = 3i + 6 j + nk ,
ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ
are perpendicular to each other then the value of
ˆ ˆ
( ) ( )
3iˆ - 2jˆ + kˆ m and ˆi + 2jˆ + 3kˆ m as adjacent sides
`n’ is is
1) 4 2) 12 3) 6 4) -6 1) 3 8 m2 2) 24 m2 3) 8 3m2 4) 4 3m 2
18. A vector parallel to the vector (i + 2 j ) and
$ $
27. Find the values of x and y for which vectors
having magnitude 3 5 units is ur ur
A = 6$i + x $j - 2k$ and B = 5$i - 6 $j - yk$ may be
1) 3 iˆ + 6 ĵ 2) 6 iˆ –3 ĵ 3) 4 iˆ –2 ĵ 4) iˆ –2 ĵ
r r parallel
19. If A = 5iˆ − 2 ˆj + 3kˆ and B = 2iˆ + ˆj + 2kˆ ,
r r 1) x = 0, y =
2
2) x =
−36
,y =
5
component of B along A is 3 5 3
14 28 28 14
1) 2) 3) 4) −15 23 36 15
38 38 38 38 3) x = ,y= 4) x = , y =
3 5 3 14
210 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
LEVEL -I (H.W) - KEY r r
iˆ ˆj kˆ
r × F = 1 −1 6
01) 1 02) 1 03) 4 04) 2 05) 2 06) 2 23.
2 3 −1
07) 1 08) 3 09) 2 10) 2 11)4 12)4
13)1 14) 4 15) 3 16) 2 17) 4 18)1 1 r r
19)4 20) 3 21) 1 22) 2 23)1 24) 2 24. Area of triangle = A× B
2
25)1 26) 3 27)2
25. ab cos θ = 144 , ab sin θ = 48 3
r r
LEVEL -I (H.W) - HINTS 26. Area of parallelogram = A × B
ur ur 6 x −2
1. Ar− Buur= 4iˆ
uu 27. 5 = −6 = − y
2. F +F
ur1 ur 2
3. P, Q are two vectors ; P + Q ≥ R ≥ P − Q LEVEL - II (C.W)
Y
30 ˆj 20 2
4. ADDITION,SUBTRACTION AND RESO-
450
40iˆ
X LUTION OF VECTORS
5. S = x 2 + y2 + z 2 1. A man travels 1 mile due east, then 5 miles
due south, then 2 miles due east and finally 9
6. 141.4r sinr 450 miles due north. His displacement is
A+ B 1) 3 miles 2) 5 miles
7. nˆ = r r ;
A+ B 3) 4 miles 4) between 5 and 9 miles
ur ur ur r
ur r
8. K=
| B|+|C |
and D = K
A
ur
A
2.
r
( )
Three forces F1 = a iˆ − ˆj + kˆ , F2 = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 4kˆ
2
r and F3 = 8iˆ − 7 ˆj + 6kˆ act simultaneously on a
9. A = Ax iˆ + Ay ˆj + Az kˆ particle. If the particle is in equilibrium, the
x value of a is
10. cos θ = x 2 + y2 + z 2 1) 10 2) -10 3) 8 4) 2
11. x = d sin θ 3. If a particle is displaced from (0,0,0) to a point
r in XY - plane which is at a distance of 4 units in
12. w.r.t x-axis initially θ = 60 , A = 2 units
0
a direction making an angle clock wise 600 with
r1 the negative x-axis. What is the final position
on rotation θ1 = 00 , A = 2 units vector of the particle ?
2 6 m
13. = = 1) −2iˆ + 2 3 ˆj 2) 2iˆ + 2 3 ˆj
r n 18 3
14. V = ur + at
r
3) 2 ˆj + 2 3kˆ 4) 2 3 ˆj + 2kˆ
ur ur
15. P = F .V
r r 4. Cosines of angles made by a vector with X, Y
A.B r r axes are 3 / 5 2 , 4 / 5 2 respectively. If the
16. cos θ = 17. A . B = 0
rAB magnitude of the vector is 10 2 then that
r A
18. B = K Ar vector is
r r 1) 8iˆ + 6 ˆj − 10kˆ 2) 6iˆ − 8 ˆj − 10kˆ
a .b
19. b cos θ =
r r
a 3) −6iˆ − 8 ˆj + 10kˆ 4) 6iˆ + 8 ˆj + 10kˆ
20. A . B = a − a − 2 = 0 ; ( a − 2 )( a + 1) = 0
2
ur
r r 5. If a vector A makes angles 450 and 600 with x
F .S and y axis respectively then the angle made
21. t =
P
r r
by it with z - axis is
1+ a .b 1 + cos θ 2 θ
22. 1 − ar . br = 1 − cos θ = cot 2 1) 300 2) 600 3) 900 4) 1200
NARAYANAGROUP 211
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r
6. A vector Q which has a magnitude of 8 is added 13. Velocity and acceleration vectors of charged
r particle moving perpendicular to the direction
to the vector P which lies along the
of magnetic field at a given instant of time are
X-axis. The resultant of these two vectors is a r r
r v = $ + cj$ and a = 3i$ + 4$j respectively. Then
2i
third vector R which lies along the Y-axis and
r the value of ‘c’ is (2007 E)
has a magnitude twice that of P . The magnitude
r 1) 3 2) 1.5 3) – 1.5 4) –3
of P is
14. Dot product is used in the determination of
6 8 12 16 a) Work done by a force
1) 2) 3) 4) b) Power developed by an automobile moving with
5 5 5 5
uniform velocity.
SCALAR PRODUCT (OR) DOT PRODUCT c) The normal flux linked with a coil kept in magnetic
ur field.
ˆ ˆ
7. If V = 3i + 4j then, with what scalar ‘C’ must d) The force acting on a conductor carrying current
it be multiplied so that C V = 7 . 5 kept in a magnetic field.
1)a,d aretrue 2)b,d aretrue
1) 0.5 2)2.5 3)1.5 4)3.5 3)a,b,c aretrue 4)c,d aretrue
8. The angle between the diagonals of a cube with
edges of unit length is VECTOR PRODUCT OR CROSS PRODUCT
15. The unit vectorur perpendicular to
1) sin −1 (1 3) 2) cos−1 (1 3) ur
A = 2i + 3 ˆj + kˆ and B = iˆ − ˆj + kˆ is
ˆ
3) tan −1 (1 3) 4) cot −1 (1 3) 1)
4 iˆ − ˆj − 5 kˆ
2)
4 iˆ − ˆj + 5 kˆ
ur 42 42
9. The angle made by the vector A = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj 4 iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ 4iˆ + ˆj − 5kˆ
with Y-axis is 3) 4)
42 42
r r r r
−1
1) tan 2
3 −1 2
2) tan 3
r r r r
(
16. Find the value of a + b × a − b = ) ( )
(
1) a × b
rr
) 2) 2 a × b
r r
( )
−1 2
3) sin 3
−1 3
4) cos 2
3) −2 a.b ( ) 4) −2 a × b ( )
10. If l1,m1,n1 and l2,m2,n2 are the directional cosines LEVEL -II (C.W) - KEY
of two vectors and θ is the angle between
1) 2 2) 2 3) 1 4) 4 5) 2 6)2
them,then their value of cos θ is 7) 3 8) 2 9)2 10) 1 11) 3 12) 1
13) 3 14) 3 15) 1 16) 4
1) l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2
2) l1m1 + m1n1 + n1l1 LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS
3) l2 m2 + m2 n2 + n2 l2 9m
4) m1l2 + l2 m2 + n1m2 4m 5m
ur ur ur ur =
11. If A + B = C , then magnitude of B is 1. 1m 5m 3m
ur ur
1) C − A 2) C - A
r r r2m
uur ur ur ur uurur ur ur 2. F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
3) C.B − A.B 4) C. A − B.A
r r r 3. ( x, y, z ) = (−4cos 600 , 4 sin 600 , 0)
12. If a = mb + c . The scalar m is
ur r r r ur r r r 4. cos 2 α + cos 2 β + cos 2 γ = 1
a.b - b.c c.b - a.c A Ay A
1)
b2
2)
a2 where cos α = x , cos β = , cos γ = z
ur r r r ur r r r ur A A A
c.a - b.c a.b - b.c ∴ A = Ax i + Ay j + Az k
ˆ ˆ ˆ
3) 4)
c2 a2 5. cos 2 α + cos 2 β + cos 2 γ = 1
212 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
r r r r 3. O is a point on the ground chosen as origin. A
6. Q = 8, P + Q = R ;
body first suffers a displacement of 10 2 m
Ry = 2 Px ; ( Px + Qx ) + Qy = Ry North - East, next 10 m north and finally 10 2
North-West. How far it is from the origin ?
Qx2 + Qy2 = 64 ⇒ Px2 + 4 Px2 = 64 1) 30 m north 2) 30 m south
3) 30 m west 4) 30 m east
r 7.5 3
7. V = 32 + 42 = 5 ; CV = 7.5 ⇒ C = = 4. If the two directional cosines of a vectors are
5 2 1 1
uur uur
uur uur d1.d 2 and then the value of third directional
d1 = $i + $j + k$ ; d 2 = $i + $j − k$ ; cosθ = d d
8. 2 3
1 2
cosine is
cos θ =
( 2 iˆ + 3 ˆj ) . ( ˆj ) 1.
1
2.
1
3.
1
4.
1
9. 6 5 7 10
4+9
ur ur
A.B SCALAR PRODUCT (OR) DOT PRODUCT
10. cos θ = uAr uBr ur
5. A force F = 3iˆ + cjˆ + 2kN
ˆ acting on a particle
ur ur ur ur ur ur rr r r r ur
11. A.B + B.B = C.B 12. mb.b = ( a − c ) .b causes a displacement S = −4iˆ + 2 ˆj − 3kˆ m . If
r r the workdone is 6 joule, the value of c is
13. v . a = 0 1) 0 2) 1 3) 12 4) 6
r r r r r r r r r r r r
14. a ) W = F .S ; b) P = F .vr c ) φ = B. A; b) F = idl × B 6. If a and b are two unit vector such that a + 2b
r r r r
A× B and 5a − 4b are perpendicular to each other
15. n = Ar × Br r r
ˆ
then the angle between a and b is.
16.properties of vector product 1) 1200 2) 900 3) 600 4) 450
ur ur
7. If A = 9i$ − 7$j + 5k$ and B = 3i$ − 2j$ − 6k$
LEVEL - II (H.W) ur ur ur ur
( )(
then the value of A + B . A − B is )
1)206 2)128 3)106 4) -17
ADDITION,SUBTRACTION &RESOLU-
8. The work done by a force 2i$ − $j + 5k$ when it
TION OF VECTORS displaces the body from a point (3,4,6) to a point
1. A particle has a displacement of 12 m towards (7,2,5) is
east then 5 m towards north and then 6 m verti- 1)5units 2) 7units 3)1units 4)15units
cally upwards the resultant displacement is nearly ur ur
1) 10.04 m 2) 12.10 m 3) 14.32 m 4) 13.06 m 9. The component of A along B is 3 times that
ur ur
2. Four co-planar concurrent forces are acting on of the component of B along A .Then A:B is
a body as shown in the figure to keep it in
equilibrium. Then the values of P and θ are. 1) 1: 3 2) 3 :1 3) 2: 3 4) 3 : 2
ur ur
( ) ( )
10. If A = 2i$ + 3j$ and B = $i - $j then
ur
3N
component of A perpendicular to vector
P
ur
θ 0
90
1N
1) P = 4N , θ = 00 B and in the same plane is
( )
0
O
2) P= 2N, θ =900 5 $ $
( )
60
5 $ $ i+ j
1) i+ j 2)
3) P = 2N , θ = 00 2 2
( )
5 $ $
( )
5 $ $
2N
4) P= 4N, θ =900 3) i+ j 4) i+k
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 213
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r r r r r ur ur ur ur
11. If A + B = R and 2A + B is perpendicular to A.B A.B
r 9. A cos θ = ur and Bcos θ = ur ;
B then B A
1) A = R 2) B = 2R 3) B = R 4) B = A
A cos θ = 3B cos θ
ur ur ur
( )
Vector product (or) cross product µ Bµ
10. C = A - A.B
ur
sin θ ˆj , what will be the 11. ( 2 Ar + Br ) . Br = 0 ⇒ 2 AB cosθ = − B 2
1 1
12. If A = cos θ ˆi +
2 2 r ur
unit vector perpendicular to A ur ur B
12. A × B = ABnˆ ; B = ˆ
B
1) cos θiˆ + sin θˆj 2) − cos θˆi + sin θˆj 13. properties of vector product
cos θˆi + sin θˆj 1 r r
3) 4) sin θiˆ − cos θˆj 14. area of parallelogram = d1 × d 2
2 2
(iˆ + ˆj ) × (iˆ − ˆj ) =
NOTE : LEVEL-III MODELS ARE INCLUDED IN MOTION
13. IN A PLANE CHAPTER
1) -2 k̂ 2) 2 k̂ 3) zero 4) 2 iˆ
LEVEL - IV
14. The
r diagonals of ra parallelogram are
A = 2i − 3 ˆj + kˆ and B = − 2iˆ + 4 ˆj − kˆ What is
ˆ Matching Type
r r
the area of the parallelogram ? 1. Given two vectors a = xi$ − 4 $j and b = 6$i + 2 $j .
For value of x match the following
5 Column-I Column-II
1) 2 units 2) 4 units 3) 5 units 4) units r r
2
LEVEL - II (H.W) - KEY a) a is perpendicular to b p) x = −12
r
b) a is either parallel or
1) 3 2) 2 3) 1 4) 1 5) 3 6) 3 r
7) 3 8) 1 9) 2 10)1 11)1 12) 4 antiparallel to b q) x = 2 6
13) 1 14) 4 r r
( )
c) a + b is perpendicular
r r
to ( a − b )
LEVEL - II (H.W) -HINTS 4
r) x =
3
1. S = x 2 + y2 + z 2 r r
d) ( a + b ) is parallel to
2. P cos θ + 3 = 2sin 600 r r
P sin θ = 1 + 2cos 600
(a − b) s) x = −6
r r r
2. If a , b and c represent the sides of a
3. s1 = 10$i + 10 $j , s2 = 10 $j , s3 = −10$i + 10 $j uur uur
→ → →
triangle and d1 and d 2 are the diagonals of
→ → → → a parallelogram generated by the triangle
s = s1 + s 2 + s3 r r r
formed by the vectors a , b and c .
4. cos 2 γ = 1 − cos 2 α − cos2 β ; Column-I Column-II
r r
5.
→ → a) a + b p) Diagonal
W = F.S r r r
→
→ →
→ b) ( a × b ) .c q) Area
6. a + 2b . 5a − 4b = 0
1 uur uur
ur ur ur ur c) d1 × d 2 r) zero
7. ( ) (
A + B . A − B = A2 − B 2 ) 2
r r r r
ur ur ur ur ur
8. W = F .S = F . r2 − r1 ( ) d) a − b s) a × b
214 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
ur
3. The component of A = 5$i + 4 $j + k$ along 7. Column-I Column-II
rr r r
Column-I Column-II a) a .b = 1 p) a ⊥ b
a) x-axis p) 1 unit rr r r
b) y-axis q) 5 units b) a .b = 0 q) a ↑↑ b
c) z-axis
ur
r) 4 units rr r r
c) a .b = ab r) a ↓↓ b
d) B = 2$i − 2 $j + k$ s) 2 units
rr r r
4. Column-I Column-II d) a .b = − ab s) a ↑↑ b & both are unit
r r
a) a, b are unit p) 0 vectors
r r r r
( ) ( )
8. Column-I Column-II
vectors and a + 2b ⊥ 5a − 4b , r r r r
rr a) a + b = a - b p) Not possible either
( )
then 2 a.b is equal to r r r r
b) a + b = a - b q) θ = 900
b) The points (1,0,3),(-1,3,4), q) -1
(1,2,1) (t,2,5) are coplanar, r r rr
c) a × b = a.c r) b=0
then t is equal to
c) The vectors (1,1,m), r) 1 r r rr
d) a × b = a.c s) θ = 450
(1,1,m+1), (1,-1,m) are coplanar,
then value of m is 9. Column-I Column-II
r r r r r r r r r r
r a
( ) ( ) (
d) a × b × c + b × c × a + c a × b s) 2 ) a) a = $
r r
p) If θ1 = θ 2 , b = c
is equal to a
rr rr
5. Column-I Column-II b) a.b = a.c q) Not possible
π r r r r
a) Volume of the parallelepiped p)
4 c) a + b = b − a r) θ = 900
with its edges represented q)
π r r r r
3 d) a × b = b × a s) For any angle θ
π between two vectors
by the vectors $i + $j, $i + 2 $j r)
2 10. Column-I Column-II
and $i + $j + π k$ r r
a) a × b = c$ p) Not possible
b) Angle between vectors s) π r r r r
r r r r r b) a × b = ab q) a ↑↑ b
a and b , where a, b and c r r
r r r r c) a × b = 0 r) Both are unit vectors mutually
are unit vectors satisfying a + b + 3 c = 0 perpendicular
r r r r r r
6. If a = ax $i + a y $j + az k$ , b = bx $i + by $j + bz k$ , we d) a × b = −b × a s) Any angle θ between
have r r
Column-I Column-II a and b
rr 11. Column-I Column-II
a) a .b p) a x = bx , a y = b y , a z = bz
rr rr
r r a) Parallel vectors p) a.b = 0
b) a = b q) a.b = 0
r r r r
c) a ↑↑ b r) a x bx + a y b y + a z b z b) Perpendicular vectors q) a × b = 0
r
r r a x a y az $a = a
d) a ⊥ b s) b = b = b c) Axial vector r) a
x y z
d) Unit vector s) a$ = b$ × c$
NARAYANAGROUP 215
VECTORS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
12. Column-I Column-II 18. Statements -1: If the magnitude of the sum of
two unit vectors is a unit vector, then magnitude
a) $j.i$ p) −k$ of their difference is 3
r r r r
b) $j + $i q) 2 Statements -2: a + b = a + b
c) k$ + k$ r) 2 19. Statements -1:Angle between $i + $j and $i is 450 .
Statements -2: $i + $j is equally inclined to both
d) $j × $i s) 0
$i and $j and the angle between $i and $j is 900
Statement Type Questions
rr rr r
1.Statement I is true and statement II is true 20. Statements -1: If a.b = b.c , then a may not
r
2.Statement I is true and statement II is false always be equal to c .
3.Statement I is false and statement II is true Statements -2: The dot product of two vectors
4.Statement I is false and statement II is false involves cosine of the angle between the two
vectors.
13. Statements -1: A physical quantity cannot be
called as a vector if its magnitude is zero. 21. Statements-1: The value of
Statements -2: A vector has both magnitude and ( ) ( ) ( )
$i. $j × k$ + $j. k$ × $i + k.
$ $i × $j is equal to 3
direction
r r $ b,
Statements-2: If a, $ c$ are mutually
14. Statements -1: a × b is perpendicular to both
r r r r $ b,
$ c$ = 1
a + b as well as a − b . perpendicular unit vectors, then a,
r r r r uur uur uur
Statements -2: a + b as well as a − b lie in the 22. Statements -1: In ∆abc , ab + bc + ca = 0
r r r r
plane containing a and b , but a × b lies uur r uur r
r r Statements-2: If oa = a,ob = b , then
perpendicular to the plane containing a and b uur r r
15. Statements -1: Minimum number of non-equal ab = a + b (triangle law of addition)
vectors in a plane required to give zero resultant r r r r
is three. 23. Statements -1 : If a + b = a − b , then angle
r r
r r r between a and b is 900
Statements -2: If a + b + c = 0 , then they must
lie in one plane r r r r
Statements -2: a + b = b + a
r r r r r r r r r
16. Let a + b + c = 0, a = 3, b = 5, c = 7 24. Statements -1 : Let a = $i + $j and b = $i − $j be
r r 2π two vectors. Angle between a$ + b$ and
a$ − b$ = 900
Statements -1: Angle between a and b is
3
r r2 r2 r2 rr r r r r
Statements -2: a + b = a + b + 2 a.b Statements -2: Projection of a + b on a − b is
zero.
17. Statements -1: The cross product of a vector r r
with itself is a null vector. 25. Statements -1 : a = b does not imply that
Statements -2: The cross product of two vectors r r
a=b
results in a vector quantity.
r r r r
Statements -2: If a = b , then a = b
216 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI VECTORS
r r
26. Statements -1 : If θ be the angle between a 33. Statements -1: The vector product of a force F
r r r
and displacement r is equal to the work done.
r a×b
and b , then tan θ = r r Statements -2: Work done is not a vector.
a.b
r r
r r rr 34. Statements -1: If a is perpendicular to b and
Statements -2: a × b is perpendicular to a.b r r r r
r r r r r r
(
c , then a × b × c = 0 )
27. Statements -1 : τ = r × F and τ ≠ F × r r r
Statements -2: If b is perpendicular to c , then
r r
Statements -2: Cross product of vectors is b× c = 0
commutative. 35. Statements -1: The sum and difference of two
r vectors will be equal in magnitude, when the two
28. Statements -1 :The scalar product of a force F vectors are perpendicular to each other.
r
and displacement r is equal to the work done. Statements -2: If either of the two vectors is a
null vector.
Statements -2: Work done is not a scalar.
29. Statements -1:If dot product and cross product
r r LEVEL-IV-KEY
of a and b are zero, it implies that one of the
r r Matching Type Questions
vector a and b must be a null vector..
1) a → r,, b → p, c → q, d→p
Statements -2: Null vector is a vector with zero 2) a → p, b → r,, c → s, d→p
magnitude. 3) a → q, b → r, c → p, d → p
r 4) a → r,, b → q, c → p, d→p
30. Statements-1: a = $i + pj$ + 2k$ and
r 5) a → s, b → q,
b = 2i$ + 3j$ + qk$ are parallel vectors if
6) a → r,, b → p, c → s, d →q
3
p = ,q = 4 . 7) a → s, b → p, c → q, d →r
2
8) a → r,, b → q, c → s, d→p
r
Statements -2: If a = a1 $i + a 2 $j + a 3 k$ and 9) a → q, b → p, c → r,, d→s
r 10) a → r,, b → p, c → q, d→ s
b = b1 $i + b 2 $j + b 3 k$ are parallel, then
11) a → q, b → p, c → s, d →r
a1 a 2 a 3
= = 12) a → s, b → q, c → r,, d→p
b1 b 2 b 3
Statement type questions
31. Statements -1: A null vector is a vector whose
magnitude is zero and direction is arbitrary. 13) 3 14) 1 15) 1 16) 1 17) 1
18) 2 19) 1 20) 1 21) 1 22) 2
Statements -2: A null vector does not exist.
23) 1 24) 1 25) 1 26) 2 27) 2
r r
32. Let a and b be two vectors inclined at an angle 28) 2 29) 1 30) 1 31) 2 32) 1
π 33) 3 34) 2 35) 1
θ , where 2 < θ < π .
r r r r
Statements -1: a + b < a − b
r r2 rr
Statements -2: a + b = a 2 + b 2 + 2a.b
NARAYANAGROUP 217
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
SYNOPSIS x
x
Motion in a straight line deals with the motion of
an object which changes its position with time
s h
along a straight line. h
The study of the motion of objects without
considering the cause of motion is called
( c)
kinematics. (d)
Rest and Motion: Distance = s distance = h + 2x
If the position of a body does not change with Displacement = s displacement = h
time with respect to the surroundings then it is The magnitude of displacement is equal to minimum
said to be at rest, if not it is said to be in motion. possible distance between two positions; so
Distance Displacement
Distance and Displacement: For motion between two points displacement is
Distance is the actual path covered by a moving single valued while distance depends on actual path
particle in a given interval of time while and so can have many values.
displacement is the change in position vector,i.e., For a moving particle distance can never decrease
a vector joining initial to final position. If a particle with time while displacement can.
moves from A to B as shown in Fig. the distance Decrease in displacement with time means body
travelled is s while displacement is is moving towards the initial position.
For a moving particle distance can never be
r rf ri negative or zero while displacement can be
negative.
In general, magnitude of displacement is not equal
R =A+B to distance. However, it can be so if the motion is
B along a straight line without change in direction.
Magnitude of displacement is less than the distance
travelled in case of curvilinear motion.
A Ex : If an object turns through an angle along a
Distance is a scalar while displacement is a vector, circular path of radius r from point A to point B
both having same dimensions[L] and SI unit is then
metre. i) distance d r
x
ii)displacement 2 x 2r sin / 2 sin 2 r
d
h B x x A
A r O B
r r
(a) – –
AB 22
Distance = r
(b) O
Displacement = 2r
Distance = 2h
Displacement = 0
38 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
WE-1: An athlete completes one round of a circular For a given time interval average velocity is single
track of radius R in 40 s. What will be his valued while average speed can have many val-
displacement at the end of 2 min 20 s? (2010E) ues depending on path followed.
Sol. The time = 2 min 20s = 140s During the motion if the body comes back to its
initial position.
V avg = 0 ( r 0 )
A R R B but Vavg 0 and finite ( r 0 )
For a moving body average speed can never be
negative or zero while average velocity can be
In 40 seconds athlete completes = 1 round negative.
In 140 seconds athlete will completes If a graph is plotted between distance (or displace-
ment) and time, the slope of chord during a given
140 interval of time gives average speed (or ) average
= round =3.5 rounds
40 velocity
The displacement in 3 rounds = 0 Δr
So net displacement =2R Vavg = = tan = slope of chord
W.E-2 : If the position of a particle along Y axis is Δt
represented as a function of time t by the Instantaneous speed and Instantaneous velocity :
equation y(t)=t3 then find displacement of the Instantaneous velocity is defined as rate of change
particle during the period t to t t of position of the particle with time. If the posi-
Sol. Position at time t is y t t 3
tion r of a particle at an instant t changes by
3
Position at time t t is y t t t t r in a small time interval t
r dr
displacement of the particle from t to t t is V lim
t o t dt
3
y t t y t t t t 3 The magnitude of velocity is called speed,i.e
2 3
t 3 3t 2 t 3t t t t 3 Speed= velocity i.e, V V
2 3
Velocity is a vector while speed is a scalar , both
3t 2 t 3t t t
having same units (m/s) and dimensions LT -1 .
Average Speed and Average Velocity:
Average speed or velocity is a measure of overall If during motion velocity remains constant
throughout a given interval of time, then the
'fastness' of motion during a specified interval of time.
The average speed of a particle for a given 'interval motion is said to be uniform and for uniform
of time' is defined as the ratio of distance travelled to motion, V=constant=Vavg
the time taken while average velocity is defined as If velocity is constant, speed will also be constant.
the ratio of displacement to time taken. However , the converse may or may not be true,i.e,
Thus, if a particle in time interval t after if speed=constant,velocity may or may not be
constant as velocity has a direction in addition to
travelling distance r is displaced by r
magnitude which may or may not change,e.g, in
Distance travelled case of uniform rectilinear motion
Average speed = ,
Time taken V constant and V constant
r While in case of uniform circular motion
i.e., Vavg ........(i)
t V=constant but V is not constant , due to
Displacement change in direction.
Average velocity = Time , velocity can be positive or negative as it is a vec-
tor but speed can never be negative as it is magni-
r
i.e, Vavg ............(ii) tude of velocity, i.e, V V
t
Average speed is a scalar while average velocity dr
is a vector both having same units (m/s) and As by definition V , the slope of displace-
dt
dimensions LT -1 . ment-versus time graph gives velocity , i.e,
NARAYANAGROUP 39
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
dr If an object travels with speeds v1, v2, v3 etc.,
V tan slope of r t curve during time intervals t1, t2, t3 etc.,
dt
v1t1 v2 t 2 v3t 3 ....
then its average speed t t t ....
1 2 3
velocity
If t1 = t2 = t3 = .... = t, then
v t v2 t v3 t ..... v1 v2 ...
dA vavg 1
v nt n
i.e.The average speed is equal to the arithmetic
t Time dt Time mean of individual speeds.
(a) (b) The actual path length traversed by a body is
called distance.
dr
As by definition V
dt
; i.e, dr Vdt Note : If v = v x i + v y j + v z k varies with time t then
and from fig. Vdt dA
dr
dr = vdt v =
So, dA dr i.e, r dA Vdt dt
i.e, area under velocity-time graph gives displace- Integrating on both sides then
ment while without sign gives distance. rf
t2
Average speed is the total distance divided by total time ri dr = t1 vdt
Total distance travelled
v avg = displacement of the particle from time t1 to t2
Total time taken
is given by
If a body travels a distance s 1 in time t1 , s 2 in t2
ˆ + t 2 v ˆjdt + t 2 v kdt
time t2 and s 3 in time t3 then the average speed
s = rf - ri = v x idt
t1 t1 y t1 z ˆ
s1 + s 2 + s 3 WE-3: A particle starting from point A, travelling
is v avg = t + t + t upto B with a speed S, then upto point ‘C’
1 2 3
If an object travels distances s1, s2, s3 etc. with speeds with a speed 2S and finally upto ‘A’ with a
v1, v2, v3 respectively in the same direction. Then speed 3S, then find its average speed.
s1 s 2 s 3 C
O
Average speed = s 1 s 2 s 3 120
v1 v2 v3 B
If an object travels first half of the total journey
with a speed v1 and next half with a speed v2
then its average speed is A
s +s 2s 2 2v1 v 2 Total dis tan ce travelled
v avg = = = =
s s s s 1 1 v + v Sol. Average speed =
+ + + 1 2 Total time taken
v1 v 2 v1 v 2 v1 v 2 2S t2
If a body travels first 1/3 rd of the distance with a C
speed v1 and second 1/3rd of the distance with a
speed v2 and last 1/3rd of the distance with a speed 2/3
v3, then the average speed B
5/6 /2
s s s t
+ + 3
S
v avg = 3 3 3 3S t1
s s s
+ + A
3v1 3v 2 3v3
3v1v2 v3 Total distance travelled
vavg = AB + BC + CA = 2r
v1v2 v2 v3 v3v1
40 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Total time taken is Sol.
AB BC CA
A
t1 t /2
2 t /2
2
T t1 t 2 t 3 B
V1 V2 V3 v0 C v1 D v2
r 2r 5r S
(arc length = radius angle) S
2S 6S 18S S
For AC; v0 t1 t1 ---(1)
2 r 3 3v0
Vavg 1.8 S
r 2 r 5 r 2S
For CB; CD DB
2S 6S 18S 3
WE-4.For a man who walks 720 m at a uniform 4S
2S t t
speed of 2 m/s, then runs at a uniform speed v1 2 v2 2 t 2
of 4 m/s for 5 minute and then again walks 3 2 2 3 v1 v2
at a speed of 1 m/s for 3 minutes. His average Since, average velocity is defined as
speed is S 2S
s1 v avg
Total Displacement
3 3
S
=
Sol. Where s1 = 720 m and t1 v 360s 6 min . Total Time t t
t1 2 2 t1 + t 2
1 2 2
s2 = (4)(5)(60) = 1200m, t2 = 300 s
s3 = (1)(3)(60) = 180 m, t3 = 180 s 3v0 v1 v2
vavg
s s s 4v0 v1 v2
vavg 1 2 3 = 720 1200 180 Acceleration
t1 t 2 t 3 360 300 180
The rate of change of velocity is equal to
v avg 2.5m / s acceleration.
WE-5. A particle is at x = +5 m at t = 0, x = -7m at Average and Instantaneous acceleration
t = 6s and x = +2m at t = 10s. Find the average If the velocity of a particle changes ( either in mag-
velocity of the particle during the interval (a) nitude or direction or both) with time the motion
t = 0 to t = 6s; (b) t = 6s to t = 10s, (c) t = 0 to is said to be accelerated or non-uniform. In case
t = 10s.
of non-uniform motion if change in velocity is V
Sol. x1 = +5m, t1 = 0, x2 = -7m; t2 = 6s, x3 =+2m, t3=
10s in time interval t , then
a) The average velocity between the times t = 0 Δv v - v
to t = 6s is a avg = = 2 1 .......(1)
Δt t 2 - t1
x x1 7 5
v1 2 2m / s Instantaneous acceleration or simply acceleration
t 2 t1 60 is defined as rate of change of velocity with time
b) The average velocity between the times t2 = 6s at a given instant. So if the velocity of a particle v
to t3 = 10s is
at time t changes by V in a small time interval
x x 2 2 7 9
v2 3 2.25m / s t then
t3 t2 10 6 4
ΔV dV
c) The average velocity between times t1 = 0 to t3 a = lim = .......... (2)
Δt 0 Δt dt
= 10s is
Regarding acceleration it is worth noting that:
x x 25
v3 3 1 0.3m / s
-2
It is a vector with dimensions LT and SI units
t 3 t1 10 0
WE-6. A particle traversed one third of the distance m / s 2 .
with a velocity v0. The remaining part of the
If acceleration is zero, velocity will be constant
distance was covered with velocity v1 for half
and the motion will be uniform. However, if
the time and with a velocity v 2 for the
acceleration is constant(uniform), motion is non-
remaining half of time. Assuming motion to
uniform and if acceleration is not constant then
be rectilinear, find the mean velocity of the
both motion and acceleration are non-uniform.
particle averaged over the whole time of
motion. As by definition V ds / dt
NARAYANAGROUP 41
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
dv d ds d 2 s s t
ds = u + at dt or
So, a = dt = dt dt = dt 2 .........(3)
or
0 0
1
s = ut + at 2 ........(2A)
i.e., if s is given as a function of time, second 2
derivative of displacement w.r.t. time gives accel- 1 2
eration. In vector form s = ut + at .............(2B)
If velocity is given as a function of position, then 2
by chain rule From eqns. (1A) and (2A), we get
2
dv dv dx dv dx s=u
v - u + 1 a v - u
a= = . or a = v as = v
dt dx dt dx dt a 2 a
As acceleration a = dv / dt , the slope of ve- or 2as = 2uv - 2u 2 + v 2 + u 2 - 2uv
locity-time graph gives acceleration. i.e., v 2 = u 2 + 2as .......(3)
Velocity - Time Graph In scalar form
V v.v = u.u + 2a.s or v 2 = u 2 + 2a.s
Distance travelled = average speed x time
uv
B s t .............(4)
V2 2
Distance travelled in nth second
1
V s n = u + a n - ..... (5)
V1 A 2
If acceleration and velocity are not collinear, v can
t be calculated using
2 1/ 2
t v = u 2 + at + 2uat cosθ
O
t1 t2
at sinθ
with tan = .......(6)
V u + atcosθ
a avg tan
t
aavg = slope of the line joining two points in v-t graph.
da v at
The slope of a versus t curve, i.e, is a
dt
measure of rat e of non-uniformity of
acceleration(usually it is known as JERK).
Acceleration can be positive or negative. Positive u
GRAPHS
acceleration means velocity is increasing with time Characteristics of s-t and v-t graphs
while negative acceleration called retardation means Slope of displacement time graph gives velocity.
velocity is decreasing with time. Slope of velocity-time graph gives acceleration.
Equations of motion : Area under velocity-time graph gives displacement
If a particle starts with an initial velocity u, Let us plot v-t and s-t graphs of some standard
acceleration a and it gains velocity v in time t then results. To draw the following graphs assume
dv v t V t that the particle has got either a one-dimensional
a= or dv = a dt or dv = a dt or Vu = a t 0 motion with uniform velocity or with constant
dt u 0
or v = u + at .......(1A) acceleration.
In vector form v = u + a t ........(1B)
Now again by definition of velocity, Eqn. (1A)
ds
reduces to = u + at
dt
42 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
S.No Situation v-t graph s-t graph Interpretation
1 Uniform motion v-t graph s-t graph i)Slope of s-t graph =
v s v = constant.
s=vt ii) In s-t- graph s = 0 at
v= constant t=0
t
I) u=0, i.e.,v=0 and t=0
2 Uniformly v s ii) u=0, i.e., slope of s-t
accelerated graph at t=0, should
motion with v= at be zero
u=0 and iii) a or slope of v-t
s=0 at t = 0 t
graph is constant
3 Uniformly I) u 0 , i.e., v or
accelerated v slope of s-t graph at
s 2
motion with v=u+at s=ut+1/2 at t=0 is not zero
u 0 and u ii) v or slope of s-t
s s0 at t 0 graph gradually
goes on increasing
4 Uniformly v I) s = s0 at t=0
s
accelerated v=u+at
motion with u
s0 _
u 0 and
s s0 at t 0
5 Uniformly v I)Slope of s-t graph at
s t=0 gives u.
retarded motion
till velocity be u ii) Slope of s-t graph at
v=u-at
comes zero t=t0 becomes zero
t0 iii) In this case u can’t
t0 be zero.
6 Uniformly I)At time t=t0, v=0 or
v
retarded then s slope of s-t graph is
accelerated in zero.
u
opposite ii) In s-t graph slope or
direction t0 velocity first decreases
O then increases with
t0
opposite sign.
NARAYANAGROUP 43
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
If a particle starts from rest and moves with uniform u2 1
acceleration ‘a’ such that it travels distances m 2
2
2 u 1
sm and sn in the mth and nth seconds u u 1 1
n n
a
then Sn = 0 + 2n -1 1 (u=0) 1 n2
2 m 2
a n 1 n 2 n 2 1 2n
Sm = 0 + 2m -1 2 1
2 n
sn sm n2
subtracting eq (2) from eq (1) a n m . m
2n 1
A particle starts from rest and moves along a 1
straight line with uniform acceleration. If ‘s’ is the The velocity of a bullet becomes
n
of the initial
distance travelled by it in n seconds and sn is the velocity while penetrating a plank. The number of
such planks required to stop the bullet.
distance travelled in the nth second, then
u u
u
sn 2n 1 n v=0
2 (fraction of distance fallen in nth
s n x x x
second during free fall ) u
2
2
Moving with uniform acceleration, a body crosses - u = 2ax 1
a point 'x' with a velocity 'u' and another point ‘y’ n
with a velocity ‘v’. Then it will cross the mid point 2
0 2 - u 2 = 2amx
of
‘x’ and ‘y’ with velocity
u v1 n2
x v y From eq (1) and eq (2) ; m
S S n2 1
1
v 2 - u 2 v 2 - v12 A bullet loses of its velocity while penetrating
In this case acceleration a = 1 = n
2S 2S a distance x into the target. The further distance
travelled before coming to rest.
v2 u 2
on solving, v1 . u
2 u
u
If a bullet loses (1/n)th of its velocity while passing n v=0
through a plank, then the minimum no. of such
planks required to just stop the bullet is . x y
u u
u Let x is the distance covered by the bullet to lose
n v=0
1
x x x the th of initial velocity
n
Let m be the no of planks required to stop the v 2 - u 2 = 2as
bullet 2
u 2
u - - u = 2ax 1
2
u 2
n
u - - u = 2ax 1
n Let y is the further distance covered by the bullet
2 to come to rest
0 2 - u 2 = 2amx
2 2
Dividing eq (2) with eq (1) 0 - u = 2a x + y 2
02 - u 2 2amx From eq (1) and (2)
2
= n 1 2
u 2
2ax y x
u - n -u 2n
44 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
1
th 1 2 2u
at = ut t
If the velocity of a body becomes of its initial 2 a
n
velocity after a displacement of ‘x’ then it will come 2u 2u 2
s bike ut u
to rest after a further displacement of a a
v car at 2u
u
u v=0 vcar w.r.t. bike at the t ime of meeting,
n
v cb = vcar - v bike = 2u - u = u
x y
2 W.E-9: What does d v /dt and d v / dt repre-
u 2
- u = 2ax 1 sent? can these be equal ? can:
n
2 (a) d v /dt=0 while d v / dt 0
2 u
0 - = 2ay 2
n (b) d v / dt 0 while d v / dt 0 ?
x
From eq. (1) and eq (2) ; y 2 Sol. d v / dt represents time rate of change of speed
n 1
WE-7. A body covers 100cm in first 2 seconds and as v u , while d v / dt represents magnitude
128cm in the next four seconds moving with of acceleration.
constant acceleration. Find the velocity of If the motion of a particle has translational
the body at the end of 8sec? acceleration (without change in direction)
Sol. distance in first two seconds is
dv d
1 S1 S2 as v v n , v n
s1 = ut1 + at12 dt dt
2 t1 t2
dv d
1
100 = 2u + a 4 or n v [as n is constant]
......(1) dt dt
2
distance in (2+4)sec from starting point is dv d
1 2 or dt dt v 0
s1 + s 2 = u t1 + t 2 + a t1 + t 2
2 In this case both these will be equal and not
1 equal to zero.
228 = 6u + a 36 ......(2) (a) The given condition implies that:
2
from eq (1) and (2) d v / dt 0, i.e., acc. 0 while d v / dt 0 ,
2
We get a = -6 cm/s , sub a=-6 in eq - (1)
i.e., speed =constant.
1
100 2u 6 4 This actually is the case of uniform circular
2 motion. In case of uniform circular motion
2u = 112 u = 56 cm/s
d v u2
v = u + at = 56 - 6 x 8 v 8cm / s = a = = constant
WE-8. A car starts from rest and moves with dt r
uniform acceleration ‘a’. At the same instant d
from the same point a bike crosses with a while v =constant. i.e., v 0
uniform velocity ‘u’. When and where will dt
they meet ? What is the velocity of car with (b) d v / dt 0 means a = 0 , i.e., a = 0
respect to the bike at the time of meeting ?
1 2
s = at 1 , s = ut 2
or d v /dt 0 or v = constant
Sol. car
2 bike
And when velocity v is constant speed will be
if they meet at the same point
constant,
s = s
car bike
NARAYANAGROUP 45
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
d WE-12 : An particle travels inside a straight
i.e., speed v =constant or v 0 hollow tube 2m long of a particle accelerator
dt
under uniform acceleration. How long is the
dv particle in the tube if it enters at a speed of
So, it is not possible to have dt 0 1000 m/s and leaves at 9000 m/s. What is its
acceleration during this interval ?
d Sol. Let ‘a’ be the uniform acceleration of -particle.
whilev 0. According to given problem s = 2m,
dt
v = 9000 m/s and u = 1000 m/s.
WE-10:In a car race, car A takes time t less than Since v2 - u2 = 2aS,
car B and passes the finishing point with a 2 2
velocity v more than the velocity with 9000 1000 2a 2
7 2
which car B passes the point . Assuming a = 2 x 10 m/s
Let the particle remains in the tube for time ‘t’,
that the cars start from rest and travel with
then v u at
constant accelerations a 1 and a 2 respec- v u 9000 1000
V
t 7
4 10 4 s
tively , the value of is a 2 10
t
Sol. The distance covered by both cars is same WE-13:A car starts from rest and moves with
Thus, s1=s2=s uniform acceleration of 5 m/s2 for 8 sec. If the
If the cars take time t1 and t2 for the race and their
acceleration ceases after 8 seconds then find
velocities at the end of race be v1 and v2 , then it is
given that the distance covered in 12s starting from rest.
Sol. The velocity after 8 sec v = 0 + 5 x 8 = 40 m/s
v1 v2 v and t 2 t1 t Distance covered in 8 sec
v v1 v2 2a1s 2a 2s 1
s 0 0 5 64 160m
2
Now, t t 2 t1 2s
2s
After 8s the body moves with uniform velocity
a2 a1 and distance covered in next 4s with uniform ve-
a1 a 2
locity.
v
a 1a 2 s = vt = 40 x 4 = 160 m
1 1 t The distance covered in12 s =160 +160 =320m.
a2 a1
WE-11 : A drunkard walking in a narrow lane takes WE-14 : A car is moving with a velocity of 40 m/s.
5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, followed The driver sees a stationary truck ahead at a
again by 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, distance of 200 m. After some reaction time
and so on. Each step is 1m long and requires t the breaks are applied producing a
1sec. How long the drunkard takes to fall in a (reaction) retardation of 8 m / s 2 . What is the
pit 13m away from the start? maximum reaction time to avoid collision ?
Sol. Distance of the pit from the start =13-5=8m Sol. The car before coming to rest (v = 0)
Time taken to move first 5m=5sec 2
5 steps (i.e., 5m) forward and 3steps(i.e.,3m) v 2 u 2 2as 0 40 2 8 s
backward means that net distance moved =5-
s 100m
3=2m The distance travelled by the car is 100m
and time taken during this process =5+3=8sec To avoid the clash, the remaining distance 200 -
8×8 100 = 100m must be covered by the car with uni-
Time taken in moving 8m = = 32sec
form velocity 40 m/s during the reaction time t .
2
Total time taken to fall in the pit =32+5=37sec 100
40 t 2.5s
t
The maximum reaction time t 2.5s
46 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
WE-15 : Two trains one travelling at 54 kmph and b) Displacement = area under the v-t graph
the other at 72 kmph are headed towards one = area of OAB
another along a straight track. When they 1 1 1
are 1/2 km apart, both drivers simultaneously = base height t1 t 2 v max tv max
2 2 2
see the other train and apply their brakes. If
1 2
each train is decelerated at the rate of 1 m/s2, = t
will there be a collision ? 2
Sol. Velocity of the first train is 54 kmph = 15 m/s total displacement 1 v max
Distance travelled by the first train before coming v avg t
to rest total time 2 2
u 2 225 WE-17: A body starts from rest and travels a distance
s1 112.5m
2a 2 S with uniform acceleration, then moves
Velocity of the second train is 72 kmph= 20 m/s uniformly a distance 2S and finally comes to
Distance travelled by the second train before com- rest after moving further 5S under uniform
ing to rest retardation. Find the ratio of average
2
u 400 velocity to maximum velocity
s2 200m Sol.
2a 2
Total distance travelled by the two trains before v
coming to rest = s1 + s2 = 112.5 + 200 = 312.5m
Because the initial distance of separation is 500m Vmax
which is greater than 312.5m, there will be no
collision between the two trains.
WE-16. A bus accelerates from rest at a constant rate O t1 t2 t3 t
‘ ’ for some time, after which it decelerates
at a constant rate ‘ ’ to come to rest. If the area of ΔOAC S 1 Vmax t1 (or) t1 2S ;
total time elapsed is t seconds. Then evalu- 2 Vmax
ate following parameters from the given graph
a) the maximum velocity achieved 2S
area of ABCD 2S Vmax t 2 (or) t 2
b) the total distance travelled graphically and Vmax
c) Average velocity
area of ΔBDE 5S 1 Vmax t 3 (or) t 3 10S
V 2 Vmax
Totaldisplacement
A Vavg ;
Vmax Total time
S 2S 5S 8S
Vavg
2S 2S 10S 14S
Vmax Vmax Vmax V m ax
O t1 t2 B t
vmax vmax V av g 8S 4
Sol. a) = Slope of line OA = t t1 V m ax 14S 7
1
vmax vmax WE-18: The acceleration-displacement (a - x) graph
= Slope of line AB = t t 2 of a particle moving in a straight line is as
2
shown. If the particle starts from rest,then
vmax vmax find the velocity of the particle when displace-
t t1 t 2 v max
ment of the particle is 12m.
v max t
NARAYANAGROUP 47
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
WE-20: A particle starts from rest and accelerates
a m / s2
as shown in the graph. Determine
a) the particle’s speed at t = 10s and at t = 20s
4 C b) the distance travelled in the first 20s.
2
a m/s
2 A B
2
E F G D 1
O 2 8 10 12 x(m) 15 20
Sol. v - u = 2ax
2 2 t sec
-1 5 10
v2 - u 2 v 2 u 2
ax = ( u=0 ) -2
2 2 2
-3
v 2 area under a x graph
Area under a-x graph = Sol. a) Upto 10 sec the particle moves with uniform
Area of OAE + Area of rectangle ABEF acceleration, hence the velocity at t = 10s,
+ Area of trapezium BFGC + Area of CGD v1 = u + at = 0 + 2 x 10 = 20m/s
1 1 1 From t = 10s to t = 15s the acceleration is zero,so
Area 2 2 6 2 2 4 2 2 4 24 The velocity of the particle at t=15s is 20m/s
2 2 2 Velocity at t = 20sec, v2 = v1 + at
v 2 24 4 3m / s = 20 + (-3)5 = 5 m/s
b) Distance travelled in first 10 sec
WE-19: Velocity-time graph for the motion of a 1 1 2
certain body is shown in Fig. Explain the s1 ut a1t 2 0 10 2 10 100m
nature of this motion. Find the initial 2 2
velocity and acceleration and write the Distance travelled when t = 10 sec to t = 15 sec
equation for the variation of displacement s 2 vt 20 5 100m
with time. What happens to the moving body Distance travelled when t = 15 sec to t = 20 sec
at point B ? How will the body move after 1
this moment ? s 3 20 5 3 52 62.5m
v 2
Total distance travelled in 20 sec = s1 + s2 + s3 =
100 + 100 + 62.5 = 262.5 m
A W.E-21: Velocity (v) versus displacement (x) plot
7
11 15 of a body moving along a straight line is as
t shown in the graph. The corresponding plot
B
C of acceleration (a) as a function of displace-
Sol. The velocity -time graph is a straight line with ment (x) is (EAM-2014)
-ve slope, the motion is uniformly retarding one
upto point B and uniformly accelerated after v
with-ve side of velocity axis .
At point B the body stops and then its direction of
Velocity
velocity reversed.
The initial velocity at point A is v 0 = 7ms -1
The acceleration
Δv vt - v0 0-7 0 100 200 x
a= = = = -0.6364ms-2 -0.64ms-2
Δt Δt 11 Displacement
The equation of motion for the variation of
displacement with time is
1
s = 7t - 0.64t 2 7t 0.32t 2
2
48 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
a a WE-22: A particle located at x = 0, at time t = 0,
starts moving along the positive x-direction
with a velocity v that varies as v = α x . The
1) 2) displacement of particle varies with time as
x O x dx dx
0 100 200 100 200 Sol. x dt
Displacement Displacement dt x
x t
dx
a On integrating, we get dt
0 x 0
[ at t = 0, x = 0 and let at any time t, particle be at x]
x
100 200 x x1/ 2
3) O 4) 1/ 2
t or x t x t 2
1 / 2 0 2
x
O
100 200
Displacement Displacement WE-23 : The acceleration (a) of a particle moving
Sol. From the given graph equation for velocity v = kx in a straight line varies with its displacement
on differentiation (S) as a = 2S. The velocity of the particle is
dv zero at zero displacement. Find the
kv ------ (i) corresponding velocity-displacement
dt
equation.
dv 2
= k(kx) = k x; dv
dt
2
Sol. a = 2S v 2S vdv 2SdS
a=kx and v = -kx + v0 ds
v s v S
dv v2 S2
on differentiation kv k kx v 0 vdv 2SdS 2
dt
2
a = k x - kv0 -------(ii) 0 0 2 0 2 0
So, according to the eq. (ii) the shape of a-x graph v 2
is as below S2 v 2S
2
WE-24: An object moving with a speed of 6.25
m/s, is decelerated at a rate given by
0 x dv
= -2.5 v , where v is instantaneous
dt
speed. The time taken by the object, to come
to rest, would be (AIEEE-2011)
Equations of Motion for Variable
Acceleration : dv 1
Sol. 2.5 v (or) dv 2.5dt
When acceleration ‘a’ of the particle is a function dt v
of time i.e., a = f(t) On integrating, within limits
dv
f t dv f t dt (v1 = 6.25 m/s to v2 = 0)
dt
Integrating both sides within suitable limits, we have v2 0 t
1/ 2
v t t
v dv 2.5 dt
dv f t dt v u f t dt
u 0
v1 6.25m/s 0
0
0
When acceleration ‘a’ of the particle is a function 2 v1/2 2.5 t (or)
of distance a = f(x) 6.25
dv dv dx 2 6.25
1/ 2
f x f x
dt dx dt t 2s
v x x 2.5
2 2
vdv f x dx v u 2 f x dx
u x0 x0
NARAYANAGROUP 49
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
WE-25:The velocity of a particle moving in the MOTION UNDER GRAVITY
positive direction of the X-axis varies as Equation of motion for a body projected
V K S where K is a positive constant. vertically downwards :
When a body is projected vertically downwards
Draw V-t graph. with an initial velocity u from a height h
Sol. V K s then a = g, s = h
dS S dS t 1 2
K S K dt a) v = u + gt b) h = ut + gt
dt 0
S 0 2
1 g
2 S Kt and S= K 2t 2 c) v2 - u2 = 2gh d) Sn = u + (2n-1)
4 2
In case of freely falling body u = 0, a = +g
dS 1 2 1
V K 2t K 2t 1 2
dt 4 2 a) v = gt b) S gt
2
V t
1
c) v 2 2gS d) Sn g n
2
For a freely falling body, the ratio of distances
V travelled in 1 second, 2seconds, 3 seconds, .... =
1 : 4 : 9 : 16....
For a freely falling body, the ratio of distances
travelled in successive seconds = 1 : 3 : 5 : 9 ....
O t A freely falling body passes through two points A
V t and B in time intervals of t1 and t2 from the start,
The V-t graph is a straight line passing through then the distance between the two points A and
the origin. g 2 2
B is = t 2 t1
2
ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY A freely falling body passes through two points A
The uniform acceleration of a freely falling body and B at distances h1 and h2 from the start, then
towards the centre of earth due to earth’s gravitational the time taken by it to move from A to B is
force is called acceleration due to gravity 2h 2 2h 1 2
It is denoted by ‘g’ t=
g
g
g
h 2 h1
Its value is constant for all bodies at a given place.
It is independent of size, shape, material, nature Two bodies are dropped from heights h1 and h2
of the body. simultaneously. Then after any time the distance
Its value changes from place to place on the between them is equal to (h2~ h1).
surface of the earth. A stone is dropped into a well of depth ‘h’, then
It has maximum value at the poles of the earth. the sound of splash is heard after a time of ‘t’.
2
The value is nearly 9.83 m/s . 2h
It has minimum value at equator of the earth. The Time taken by the body to reach water, t1
value is nearly 9.78 m/s2. g
g Time taken by sound to travel a distance ‘h’,
On the surface of the moon, g moon earth 6 h
The acceleration due to gravity of a body always t2
Vsound
directed downwards towards the centre of the
earth, whether a body is projected upwards or Time to hear splash of sound is
downwards. 2h h
When a body is falling towards the earth, its t t1 t2 = +
g Vsound
velocity increases, g is positive.
The acceleration due to gravity at the centre of A stone is dropped into a river from the bridge
earth is zero. and after ‘x’ seconds another stone is projected
50 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
down into the river from the same point with a
velocity of ‘u’. If both the stones reach the water A body is projected vertically up with a velocity
‘u’ from ground in the presence of constant air
simultaneously, then S1 t S 2 t x resistance ‘R’. If it reaches the ground with a
1 2 1 2
velocity ‘v’, then
gt u t x g t x a) Height of ascent = Height of descent
2 2
A body dropped freely from a multistoried building mu
can reach the ground in t1 sec. It is stopped in its b) Time of ascent t a
mg R
path after t2 sec and again dropped freely from
the point. The further time taken by it to reach the mv
c) Time of descent t d
mg R
ground is t 3 t12 t 2 2 .
d) t a t d
H1 t2 H2 v mg R
e) v u
u mg R
t1 H3 t3=? f) For a body projected vertically up under air
resistance, retardation during its motion is > g
At any point of the journey, a body possess the
We know that H1 = H2 + H3 same speed while moving up and while moving
1 2 1 2 1 2 down.
gt1 gt 2 gt 3 Irrespective of velocity of projection, all the
2 2 2
g
t12 t 2 2 t 32 t 3 t12 t 22 bodies pass through a height in the last second
2
of ascent. Distance traveled in the last second of
Equations of motion of a body Projected g
Vertically up : its journey u .
2
Acceleration (a) = -g The change in velocity over the complete journey
1 2 is ‘2u’ (downwards)
a) v = u - gt b) s = ut - gt If a vertically projected body rises through a height
2
‘h’ in nth second, then in (n-1)th second it will rise
g through a height (h+g) and in (n+1)thsecond it
c) v2 - u2 = -2gh d) sn = u - (2n-1)
2 will rise through height (h-g).
Angle between velocity vector and acceleration If velocity of body in nth second is ‘v’ then in
vector is 1800 until the body reaches the highest th
point. n 1 second it is (v + g) and that in
At maximum height, v = 0 and a = g th
n 1 second is (v - g) while ascending
u2
H max H max u 2 (independent of mass A body is dropped from the top edge of a tower
2g of height ‘h’ and at the same time another body is
of the body) projected vertically up from the foot of the tower
A body is projected vertically up with a velocity with a velocity ‘u’.
‘u’ from ground in the absence of air resistance u=0
‘R’. then. t a t d h
u
i) t a t d
g
a) The separation between them after ‘t’ seconds
2u
ii) Time of flight T t a t d is = h ut
g
NARAYANAGROUP 51
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
h A body is projected vertically up with velocity u1
b) The time after which they meet t
u and after ‘t’ seconds another body is projected
vertically up with a velocity u2 .
c) The height at which they meet above the
a) If u2 u1 , the time after which both the bodies
gh 2
ground = h will meet with each other is
2u 2
h1 h2
d) The time after which their velocities are equal
1 1 2
u u1 x gx 2 u 2 x t g x t
in magnitudes is t 2 2
2g
1
e) If they meet at mid point, then the velocity of u 2 t gt 2
thrown x 2 for the first body..
body is u gh and its velocity of meeting is u 2 u1 gt
zero b) If u1 u 2 u , the time after which they meet
f) Ratio of the distances covered when the
magnitudes of their velocities are equal is 1 : 3. u t u t
A body projected vertically up crosses a point P is for the first body and
g 2 g 2
at a height ‘h’ above the ground at time ‘ t1 ’ for the second body.
seconds and at time t2 seconds ( t1 and t2 are u 2 gt 2
measured from the instant of projection) to same Height at which they meet =
point while coming down. 2g 8
A rocket moves up with a resultant acceleration
a. If its fuel exhausts completely after time ' t '
seconds, the maximum height reached by the
rocket above the ground is
t2
h h1 h2
h t1 1 2 1 2 2 v2 a 2t 2
= at + a t 2 2g = 2g , v at
h =
2 2g
h ut 1/ 2 gt 2 ; gt 2 2ut 2h 0
This is quadratic equation in t 1 a
h at 2 1
2u 2 g
Sum of the roots, t1 t2 (time of flight) An elevator is accelerating upwards with an
g
acceleration a. If a person inside the elevator
1
Velocity of projection , u g t1 t 2 throws a particle vertically up with a velocity u
2
2u
2h relative to the elevator, time of flight is t
Product of the roots, t1t2 ga
g
In the above case if elevator accelerates down,
1
Height of P is h gt1t 2 2u
2 time of flight is t
Maximum height reached above the ground ga
1 2 The zero velocity of a particle at any instant does
H g t1 t 2 not necessarily imply zero acceleration at that
8
Magnitude of velocity while crossing P is instant. A particle may be momentarily at rest and
yet have non-zero acceleration.
g t 2 t1 For example, a particle thrown up has zero velocity
2 at its uppermost point but the acceleration at that
instant continues to be the acceleration due to
gravity.
52 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
WE-26: Drops of water fall at regular intervals from V = gt = 10 2 = 20 m/s
the roof of a building of height h = 16m. Now at this instant gravity ceases to act,
The first drop striking the ground at the same there after velocity becomes constant.
moment as the fifth drop is ready to leave from The remaining distance which is 125 - 20 = 105m
the roof. Find the distance between the is covered by body with constant velocity20 m/s
successive drops. Time taken to cover 105 m with constant velocity
Sol. Step-I : Time taken by the first drop to touch the is given by
2h S 105
t1 t1 5.25s
ground = t V 20
g
Total time taken = 2 + 5.25 = 7.25 s
16 2 2 WE-28: A parachutist drops freely from an
For h = 16m, t 4 aeroplane for 10 seconds before the parachute
g g opens out. Then he descends with a net
Time interval between two successive drops is retardation of 2 m/s2. His velocity when he
1 1 2 reaches the ground is 8 m/s. Find the height
t t t at which he gets out of the aeroplane ?
n 1 4 g Sol. Distance he falls before the parachute opens is
Where n = number of drops
1
Step-II : S1 g 100 490m
Distance travelled by 1st drop 2
Then his velocity , u=gt = 98.0 m/s
1 2 1 2
S1 g 4t g 16 16m Velocity on reaching ground = v=8 m / s
2 2 g retardation = 2 m / s2
nd
Distance travelled by 2 drop
v 2 u 2 2aS 2 S2 2385m
1 2 1 2
S2 g 3 t g 9 9 m Total distance S S1 S 2 = 2385 + 490
2 2 g =2875 m( height of aeroplane)
Distance travelled by 3rd drop
1 2 1 2 WE-29: If a freely falling body covers half of its
S3 g 2 t g 4 4 m
2 2 g total distance in the last second of its journey.
th
Distance travelled by 4 drop Find its time of fall
Sol. Suppose t is the time of free fall
1 2 1 2
S4 g t g 1m g g
2 2 g S n 2n 1 and S n2
st
Distance between 1 and 2 drops=nd 2 2
g
S1 S 2 16 9 7m 2n 1
Distance between 2nd and 3rd drops= Sn 2 1
2 g 2
S 2 S 3 9 4 5m S n
2
Distance between 3rd and 4th drops=
S 3 S 4 4 1 3m
n 2 4n 2 0 and n 2 2 sec
Distance between 4th and 5th drops= WE-30:A body is projected vertically up with a velocity
S 4 S 5 1 0 1m u. Its velocity at half of its maximum height and
WE-27: A body falls freely from a height of 125m at 3/4th of its maximum height are
2
(g = 10 m/s ). After 2 sec gravity ceases to Sol. From v2 - u2 = 2aS, here a = –g; when S = H/2, then
act Find time taken by it to reach the
u2 u
ground ? v 2 u 2 2 g v
Sol. 1) Distance covered in 2s under gravity 4g 2
1 1 2 When S = 3H/4, then
S1 gt 2 10 2 20m
2 2 3u 2 u
Velocity at the end of 2s v 2
u 2
2 g v
4 2g 2
NARAYANAGROUP 53
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
WE-31 : A stone is allowed to fall from the top of a Body Projected Vertically up from a Tower
tower 300m height and at the same time an- A body projected vertically up from a tower of
other stone is projected vertically up from the height ‘h’ with a velocity ‘u’ (or) a body dropped
ground with a velocity 100 m/s. Find when from a rising balloon (or) a body dropped from
and where the two stones meet ? an helicopter rising up vertically with constant
velocity ‘u’ reaches the ground exactly below the
point of projection after a time ‘t’. Then
300-x
300 m +X -X
Sol.
x T
O -h
height of the tower, h= 300m h W
E
Suppose the two stones meet at a height x from R
ground after t seconds 1
(a) Height of the tower is h ut gt 2
Sr 2
t (b) Time taken by the body to reach the ground
ur , u r u 0 u , S r h
u u 2 2 gh
h 300 t=
g
t 3sec
u 100 (c) The velocity of the body at the foot of the tower
height of the stone from the point of projection is v = u 2 2gh
1 2 1 (d) Velocity of the body after ‘t’ sec. is
X = u t- g t 100 3 9.8 9 255.9m v u gt
2 2
(e) Distance between the body and balloon after
WE-32: A stone is dropped from certain height
1 2
above the ground. After 5s a ball passes this time = gt
2
through a pane of glass held horizontally and
WE-33:A ball is thrown vertically upwards from
instantaneously loses 20% of its velocity. If
the top of a tower. Velocity at a point ‘h’ m
the ball takes 2 more seconds to reach the
vertically below the point of projection is
ground, the height of the glass above the
twice the downward velocity at a point ‘h’ m
ground is
vertically above the point of projection. The
Sol. In 5s velocity gained v = gt = 50 m/s. Velocity
maximum height reached by the ball above
after passing through the glass pane
the top of the tower is (MED-2012)
80
50 40m / s Sol. If AB is the tower then according to the problem,
100 velocity at ‘P’ is given as twice the velocity at ‘Q’
VP u 2
2 gh ; VQ u 2
2 gh ; VP 2 VQ
H Q
h
A
T h
O
W P
Height of the glass pane above the ground is E
R
1 1 2
h ut gt 2 = 40 2 10 2 = 100m B
2 2
54 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
10gh Three bodies are projected from towers of same
u 2
2gh 2
2
2
u 2gh u
3
height as shown. 1st one is projected vertically up
with a velocity ‘u’. The second one is thrown down
From the top of the tower maximum height reached vertically with the same velocity and the third one
is dropped as a freely falling body. If t1, t2, t3 are
10gh the times taken by them to reach ground, then,
u 2
3 5h
H H
2g 2g 3
WE-34: From a tower of height H, a particle is
thrown vertically upwards with a speed u. u=u u=0
The time taken by the particle to hit the
ground is n times that taken by it to reach
the highest point of its path. The relation h h h
between H, u and n is ( jee main- 2014)
u
Sol. Time taken to reach the maximum height t1 1 2 3
g
1 2
If t2 is the time taken to hit ground For 1st body, h ut1 gt1 1
2
1 2
i.e., H ut 2 gt 1 2
2 For 2nd body, h ut2 gt2 2
2
nu 1 n 2 u 2
But t2 = nt1 ; So, H u g 2 1 2
g 2 g For 3rd body, h gt3 3
2
nu 2 1 n 2 u 2
H 2 gH nu 2 n 2 from 1 t2 + 2 t1
g 2 g
WE-35 : A balloon starts from rest, moves verti- 1
h t1 t2 gt1t2 t1 t2
cally upwards with an acceleration g/8 ms-2. 2
A stone falls from the balloon after 8 s from 1
i) Height of the tower h gt1t2 4
the start. Further time taken by the stone to 2
reach the ground (g = 9.8 ms-2) is ii) From eq (3) & (4),
Sol. The distance of the stone above the ground about t3 t1t2 5
which it begins to fall from the balloon is iii) Equating R.H.S of (1) & (2),
1g 2 1
h 8 4g velocity of projection u g t1 t 2 6
28 2
The velocity of the balloon at this height can be iv) Time difference between first two bodies to
g 2u
obtained from v = u + at; v 0 8 g reach the ground t
g
7
8
This becomes the initial velocity (u) of the stone Relative Motion in one dimension
as the stone falls from the balloon at the height h. Velocity of one moving body with respect to other
u ' g moving body is called Relative velocity.
A and B are two objects moving uniformly with
1 1 2 average velocities vA and vB in one dimension, say
For the total motion of the stone h = -u t + gt
2 along x-axis having the positions xA(0) and xB(0)
1 2 at t = 0.
4g gt gt and t 2 2 t 8 0 If xA(t) and xB(t) are positions of objects A and
2
Solving for ‘t’ we get t = 4 and -2s. Ignoring nega- B at time t then
tive value of time, t = 4s. x A t x A 0 vA t ; x B t x B 0 vB t
NARAYANAGROUP 55
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
The displacement from object A to B is given by
v v 2 2ad
x BA t x B t x A t at 2 2vt 2d 0 t
a
x B 0 x A 0 v B v A t
for minimum velocity v 2 2ad 0 v 2ad
x BA 0 v B v A t WE.37. Two trains, each travelling with a speed of
Velocity of A w.r.t B is v AB = v A - vB 37.5kmh 1 , are approaching each other on
v AB = v 2A + v 2B - 2v A v B cosθ the same straight track. A bird that can fly at
60kmph flies off from one train when they
Two bodies are moving in a straight line in same
are 90 km apart and heads directly for the
direction then, v AB = v A - v B ( 00 ) other train. On reaching the other train, it
Two bodies are moving in a straight line in opposite flies back to the first and so on. Total
distance covered by the bird before trains
direction then, v AB = v A + v B , ( 1800 ) collide is
If two bodies move with same velocity and in same
direction, then position between them does not Sol. Relative speed of trains 37.5 37.5 75kmh
1
vary with time.
S r 90 6
If two bodies move with unequal velocity and in Time taken by them to meet t u h
same direction, then position between them first r 75 5
decreases to minimum and then increases.
If the particles are located at the sides of n sided Distance travelled by the bird, x Vbird t
symmetrical polygon with each side a and each
6
particle moves towards the other, then time after 60 72km ( Vbird 60kmh 1 ) ,
which they meet is 5
Initial separation WE.38: On a two-lane road, car A is travelling with
T a speed of 36 kmph. Two cars B and C
Re lative velocity of approach approach car A in opposite directions with
a speed of 54 kmph each. At a certain instant,
a when the distance AB is equal to AC, both
T T
being 1 km, B decides to overtake A before
v v cos v 1 cos
n n C does. What minimum acceleration of car
B is required to avoid an accident?
a
and T Sol. Velocity of a car A, VA 36km / h 10m / s
2
2v sin Velocity of car B, VB 54km / h 15m / s
n
Shortcut to solve the problems Velocity of car C, VC 54km / h 15m / s
2a Relative velocity of car B with respect to car A,
For Triangle n = 3 T ;
3v VBA VB VA 15 10 5m / s
a Relative velocity of car C with respect to car A,
For Square n = 4 T
v
VCA VC VA 15 10 25m / s
2a
For hexagon, n = 6 T At a certain instance, both cars B and C are at the
v same distance from car A i.e., s 1km 1000m
WE.36: A passenger is at a distance ‘d’ from a bus,
Time taken (t) by car C to cover 1000m is
when the bus begins to move with a con-
stant acceleration a. Then find the minimum 1000
t 40s
constant velocity with which the passenger 25
should run towards the bus so as to catch is The acceleration produced by car B is
1 2 1 1600
Sol. S passenger d Sbus ; vt d at 1000 5 40 at 2 a 1m / s 2
2 2 1600
56 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
WE.39: A body is at rest at x = 0. At t = 0, it starts
moving in the positive x-direction with a C.U.Q
constant acceleration. At the same instant
another body passes through x = 0 moving in DISTANCE AND DISPLACEMENT
the positive x-direction with a constant speed.
1. The numerical ratio of displacement to
The position of the first body is given by x1 t distance is
after time ‘t’ and that of the second body by 1) always less than 1 2) always greater than 1
3) always equal to 1
x2 t after the same time interval. Which of 4) may be less than 1 or equal to one
the following graphs correctly describes 2. The location of a particle is changed. What
can we say about the displacement and
x1 x2 as a function of time ‘t’ ?[AIEEE - distance covered by the particle?
2008] 1) Both cannot be zero
2) One of the two may be zero
x1 x2 x1 x2 3) Both must be zero 4) Both must be equal
3. Consider the motion of the tip of the minute
hand of a clock. In one hour
a) the displacement is zero
1) 2)
b) the distance covered is zero
c) the average speed is zero
O t O t d) the average velocity is zero
1) a & b are correct 2) a,b & c are correct
x1 x2 x1 x2 3) a & d are correct 4) b,c & d are correct
SPEED AND VELOCITY
3) 4) 4. The numerical value of the ratio of average
velocity to average speed is
O t t 1) always less than one 2) always equal to one
O
3) always more than one
1 2
Sol. As, x1 t = at and x2 t vt 4) equal to or less than one.
2 5. If a particle moves in a circle describing equal
1 2 angles in equal intervals of time, then the
x1 - x 2 = at - vt (parabola) velocity vector
2 1) remains constant. 2) changes in magnitude.
Clearly, graph (2) represents it correctly. 3) changes in direction.
4) changes both in magnitude and direction.
WE.40.A particle has an initial velocity 3iˆ 4ˆj and 6. In which of the following examples of motion,
can the body be considered approximately a
an acceleration of 0.4iˆ 0.3jˆ . It speed after point object
10s is (AIEEE-2009) a) a railway carriage moving without jerks
between two stations.
Sol. v = u + at
b) a monkey sitting on top of a man cycling
3iˆ 4 ˆj 0.4iˆ 0.3 ˆj 10 smoothly on a circular track
c) a spinning cricket ball that turns sharply
3iˆ 4 ˆj 4iˆ 3 ˆj 7iˆ 7 ˆj on hitting the ground
d) a trembling beaker that has slipped off the
v = 49 + 49 7 2 edge of a table
1) a,b 2) b,c 3)a,c 4)b,d
NARAYANAGROUP 57
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
7. An object may have 13. Mark the incorrect statement for a particle
a) varying speed without having varying ve- going on a straight line.
locity 1) If the velocity and acceleration have opposite
b) varying velocity without having varying sign, then the object is slowing down.
speed 2) If the position and velocity have opposite sign,
c) non zero acceleration without having vary- then the particle is moving towards the origin.
ing velocity 3) If the velocity is zero at an instant, then the
acceleration should also be zero at that instant.
d) non zero acceleration without having vary-
4) If the velocity is zero for a time interval,then
ing speed. the acceleration is zero at any instant within the
1) a,b & c are correct 2) b & d are correct time interval.
3) a,b & d are correct 4) a & d are correct
8. The distance travelled by a particle in a MOTION UNDER GRAVITY
straight line motion is directly proportional 14. B 1, B2 and B3 are three balloons ascending
to t1/2, where t = time elapsed. What is the with velocities v, 2v and 3v, respectively. If
nature of motion ? a bomb is dropped from each when they are
1) Increasing acceleration at the same height, then
2) Decreasing acceleration 1) bomb from B1 reaches ground first
3) Increasing retardation
4) Decreasing retardation 2) bomb from B2 reaches ground first
3) bomb from B3 reaches ground first
ACCELERATION 4) they reach the ground simultaneously
9. If a body starts from rest, then the time in 15. The distances moved by a freely falling body
which it covers a particular displacement with during 1st, 2nd, 3rd,......nth second of its motion
are proportional to
uniform acceleration is
1) even numbers 2) odd numbers
1) inversely proportional to the square root of the 3) all integral numbers
displacement 4) squares of integral numbers
2) inversely proportional to the displacement 16. To reach the same height on the moon as on
3) directly proportional to the displacement the earth, a body must be projected up with
4) directly proportional to the square root of the
displacement 1) higher velocity on the moon.
10. Check up only the correct statement in the 2) lower velocity on the moon.
following. 3) same velocity on the moon and earth.
1) A body has a constant velocity and still it can
have a varying speed 4) it depends on the mass of the body.
2) A body has a constant speed but it can have a 17. At the maximum height of a body thrown
varying velocity vertically up
3) A body having constant speed cannot have any 1) velocity is not zero but acceleration is zero.
acceleration.
4) None of these. 2) acceleration is not zero but velocity is zero.
11. When the speed of a car is u, the minimum 3) both acceleration and velocity are zero.
distance over which it can be stopped is s. If 4) both acceleration and velocity are not zero.
the speed becomes nu, what will be the
minimum distance over which it can be 18. A ball is dropped freely while another is
stopped during the same time ? thrown vertically downward with an initial
1) s/n 2) ns 3) s/n2 4) n2s. velocity ‘v’ from the same point
12. The distance covered by a moving body is simultaneously. After ‘t’ second they are
directly proportional to the square of the time. separated by a distance of
The acceleration of the body is vt 1 2 1 2
1) increasing 2) decreasing 1) 2) gt 3) vt 4) vt gt
3) zero 4) constant 2 2 2
58 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
19. The average velocity of a freely falling body quantities, which one of the following is
is numerically equal to half of the acceleration correct?
due to gravity. The velocity of the body as it 1) x<0, v<0, a>0 2) x>0, v<0, a<0
reaches the ground is 3) x>0, v<0, a>0 4) x>0, v>0, a<0
g g GRAPHS
1) g 2) 3) 4) 2g 26. Choose the correct statement :
2 2
20. Two bodies of different masses are dropped 1) The area of displacement - time graph gives
simultaneously from the top of a tower. If air velocity.
resistance is proportional to the mass of the 2) The slope of velocity - time graph gives
body, then, acceleration.
1) the heavier body reaches the ground earlier. 3) The slope of displacement - time graph gives
2) the lighter body reaches the ground earlier. acceleration.
3)both the bodies reach the ground simultaneously. 4) The area of velocity - time graph gives average
4) cannot be decided. velocity.
21. A man standing in a lift falling under gravity 27. Velocity-time graph of a body thrown
releases a ball from his hand. As seen by vertically up is
him, the ball 1) a straight line 2) a parabola
1) falls down 2) remains stationary 3) a hyperbola 4) circle
3) goes up 4) executes SHM 28. Velocity - displacement graph of a freely
22. A particle is dropped from certain height. The falling body is
time taken by it to fall through successive 1) straight line passing through the origin
distances of 1 m each will be 2) straight line intersecting ‘x’ and ‘y’ axes
3) parabola 4) hyperbola
1) all equal, being equal to 2 / g second 29. Displacement - time graph of a body projected
2) in the ratio of the square roots of the integers vertically up is
1,2, 3, ........... 1) a straight line 2) a parabola
3) in the ratio of the difference in the square roots 3) a hyperbola 4) a circle
of the integers, i.e., 30. The displacement - time graphs of two bodies
A and B are OP and OQ respectively. If
1,
2 1 , 3 2 ,
4 3 ,......
POX is 600 and QOX is 450, the ratio of
4) in the ratio of the reciprocals of the square roots the velocity of A to that of B is
1 1 1 P
of the integers, i.e., , , ,...... Y
1 2 3 Q
23. A body, freely falling under gravity will have
uniform
1)speed 2)velocity 3)momentum 4)acceleration d 0
24. A person standing near the edge of the top of 60
0
a building throws two balls A and B. The ball 45
A is thrown vertically upward and B is thrown O t X
vertically downward with the same speed, The
ball A hits the ground with a speed VA and 1) 3 : 2 2) 3 : 1 3) 1: 3 4) 3:1
the ball B hits the ground with a speed VB . 31. If the distance travelled by a particle and
then corresponding time be laid off along y and x
axes respectively, then the correct statement
1) VA VB 2) VA VB 3) VA VB of the following is
4) the relation between VA and VB depends on 1) the curve may lie in fourth quadrant
height of the building above the ground 2) the curve lies in first quadrant
25. A lift is coming from 8th floor and is just about 3) the curve exhibits peaks corresponding to
maxima
to reach 4th floor. Taking ground floor as 4) the curve may drop as time passes
origin and positive direction upwards for all
NARAYANAGROUP 59
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
32. In relation to a velocity - time graph 1) a,c,d 2) b,c,d 3) a,b 4) c,d
1) the curve can be a circle 37. The displacement-time graph of a moving
2) the area under the curve and above the time particle is shown in Fig. The instantaneous
axis between any two instants gives the average velocity of the particle is negative at the point
acceleration
3) the slope at any instant gives the rate of change
Displacement
of acceleration at that instant
4) the area under the curve and above the time
axis gives the displacement
33. The displacement - time graph of a particle
moving with respect to a reference point is a D
C E F
straight line
1)the reference point is stationary with zero velocity
2) the acceleration of the object is zero O
3) body moves with uniform velocity Time
1) D 2) F 3) C 4) E
4) all the above 38. Which of the following option is correct for
34. For a uniform motion having a straight line motion represented by
1) the velocity - time graph is a straight line parallel displacement-time graph.
to time axis t
2) the position - time graph is a parabola
3) the acceleration - time graph is a straight line D
inclined with time axis
4) the position - time graph is a straight line C
35. Figure shows the displacement- time graph
of a particle moving on the x-axis B
x
A
O s
1) The object moves with constantly increasing
velocity from O to A then it moves with constant
velocity.
2) Velocity of the object increases uniformly.
O 3) Average velocity is zero.
t0 t 4) The graph shown is impossible.
1) the particle is continuously going in positive X 39. The displacement of a particle as a function of
direction time is shown in the figure. The figure shows that
2) the particle is at rest
3) the velocity increases up to a time t0 and then
Displacement
becomes constant. 2
4) the particle moves at constant velocity up to a
time t0 and then stops.
1
36. The variation of quantity A with quantity B.
plotted in the Fig. describes the motion of a
particle in a straight line.
a) Quantity B may represent time.
b) Quantity A is velocity if motion is uniform.
c) QuantityA is displacement if motion is uniform. 1 2 3 4
d) Quantity A is velocity if motion is uniformly
accelerated. Time in seconds
1) the particle starts with certain velocity but the
v motion is retarded and finally the particle stops
2) the velocity of the particle is constant through out
3) the acceleration of the particle is constant
A throughout
4) the particle starts with constant velocity, then
t motion is accelerated and finally the particle moves
O B with another constant velocity.
60 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
40. A uniform moving cricket ball is turned back
by hitting it with a bat for a very short time LEVEL - I (C.W)
interval.Show the variation of its acceleration
with time. (Take acceleration in the back ward DISPLACEMENT AND DISTANCE
direction as positive) 1. A body is moving along the circumference of
a a a circle of radius ‘R’ and completes half of
the revolution. Then, the ratio of its
displacement to distance is
1. 2. 1) : 2 2) 2:1 3) 2 : 4) 1:2
2. A body completes one round of a circle of
t t radius ‘R’ in 20 second. The displacement of
the body after 45 second is
a a
R
1) 2) 2 R 3) 2 R 4) 2R
2
3. 4.
SPEED AND VELOCITY
t t 3. If a body covers first half of its journey with
RELATIVE VELOCITY uniform speed v1 and the second half of the
journey with uniform speed v2, then the
41. A small body is dropped from a rising balloon. average speed is
A person A stands on ground, while another 2 v1v 2
person B is on the balloon. Choose the correct 1) v1 v2 2) v v
statement : Immediately, after the body is 1 2
released. v1v 2
1) A and B, both feel that the body is coming 3) v v 4) v1v2
1 2
(going) down. 4. A car is moving along a straight line, say OP
2) A and B, both feel that body is coming up. in figure. It moves from O to P in 18 s and
return from P to Q in 6 s. What are the aver-
3) A feels that the body is coming down, while B age velocity and average speed of the car in
feels that the body is going up going from O to P and back to Q?
4) A feels that the body is going up, while B feels
that the body is going down.
42. Seeta is moving due east with a velocity of 1) 10 m s 1 , 20 m s 1 2) 20m s 1 ,10 m s 1
v1 m / s and Geeta is moving due west with a
3) 10 m s 1 ,10 m s 1 4) 20m s 1 , 20m s 1
velocity of v 2 m / s . The velocity of Seeta with 5. For a body moving with uniform acceleration
respect to Geeta is ‘a’, initial and final velocities in a time inter-
1) v1 v 2 due east 2) v1 v 2 due east val ‘t’ are ‘u’ and ‘v’ respectively. Then, its
average velocity in the time interval ‘t’ is
3) v1 v 2 due west 4) v1 v 2 due west
at at
1) v at 2) v 3) v at 4) u
2 2
C.U.Q - KEY ACCELERATION
1) 4 2) 1 3) 3 4) 4 5) 3 6) 1
7) 2 8) 4 9) 4 10) 2 11) 4 12) 4 6. A body moves with a velocity of 3m/s due
13) 3 14) 1 15) 2 16) 2 17) 2 18) 3 east and then turns due north to travel with
19) 1 20) 3 21) 2 22) 3 23) 4 24) 3 the same velocity. If the total time of travel
25) 1 26) 2 27) 1 28) 3 29) 2 30) 2 is 6s, the acceleration of the body is
31) 2 32) 4 33) 4 34) 1 35) 4 36) 1 1) 3 m/s2 towards north west
37) 4 38) 3 39) 1 40) 1 41) 4 42) 1 1
2) m/s2 towards north west
2
3) 2 m/s2 towards north east 4) all the above
NARAYANAGROUP 61
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
7. If a body travels 30m in an interval of 2s and 16. A ball is dropped on the floor from a height of
50m in the next interval of 2s, then the 10m. It rebounds to a height of 2.5m. If the
acceleration of the body is ball is in contact with the floor for 0.01 s, then
1) 10 m/s2 2) 5 m/s2 3) 20 m/s2 4) 25 m/s2 the average acceleration during contact is
8. A bullet travelling horizontally looses 1/20th nearly
of its velocity while piercing a wooden plank. 1) 500 2m / s 2 upwards
Then the number of such planks required to 2) 1800 2m / s2 downwards
stop the bullet is
1) 6 2) 9 3) 11 4) 13 3) 1500 2m / s2 upwards
9. If S n 2 0.4n find initial velocity and 4) 1500 2m / s2 downwards
acceleration 17. A body falling from rest has a velocity ‘v’ af-
1) 2.2 units, 0.4 units 2) 2.1 units, 0.3 units ter it falls through a distance ‘h’. The distance
it has to fall down further, for its velocity to
3) 1.2 units, 0.4 units 4) 2.2 units, 0.3 units
become double, is ..... times ‘h’.
10. A particle starts moving from rest under 1) 5 2) 1 3) 2 4) 3
uniform acceleration. It travels a distance ‘x’
RELATIVE VELOCITY
in the first two seconds and a distance ‘y’ in 18. A ball is dropped from a building of height
the next two seconds. If y = nx, then n= 45m. Simultaneously another ball is thrown
(1993 E) up with a speed 40m/s. The rate of change of
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4 relative speed of the balls is
11. A particle is moving in a straight line with ini-
1) 20 ms 1 2) 40 ms 1 3) 30 ms 1 4) 0 ms 1
tial velocity ‘u’ and uniform acceleration ‘a’.
If the sum of the distances travelled in tth and 19. Two cars 1 & 2 starting from rest are moving
(t+1)th second is 100cm, then its velocity af- with speeds v1 and v 2 m/s (v1 > v 2 ) . Car 2 is
ter ‘t’ seconds in cm/s is ahead of car ‘1’ by s meter when the driver
1) 20 2) 30 3) 80 4) 50 of the car ‘1’ sees car ‘2’. What minimum re-
12. A particle is moving with uniform accelera- tardation should be given to car ‘1’ to avoid
tion along a straight line ABC. Its velocity at collision. (2002 A)
‘A’ and ‘B’ are 6 m/s and 9 m/s respectively.
If AB : BC = 5 : 16 then its velocity at ‘C’ is v v v v
1) 1 2 2) 1 2
1) 9.6 m/s 2) 12 m/s 3) 15 m/s 4) 21.5 m/s s s
13. A car moving on a straight road accelerates 2 2
from a speed of 4.1 m/s to a speed of 6.9 m/s 3)
v1 v 2 4)
v1 v 2
in 5.0 s. Then its average acceleration is 2s 2s
1) 0.5m/s2 2) 0.6m/s2 3) 0.56m/s2 4) 0.65m/s2 20. Two cars are travelling towards each other
MOTION UNDER GRAVITY on a straight road at velocities 15 m/s and 16
14. A body projected vertically upwards with a m/s respectively. When they are 150m apart,
velocity of 19.6 m/s reaches a height of 19.8 both the drivers apply the brakes and the cars
m on earth. If it is projected vertically up with decelerate at 3 m/s2 and 4 m/s2 until they stop.
the same velocity on moon, then the maxi- Separation between the cars when they come
mum height reached by it is to rest is
1) 19.18 m2) 3.3 m 3) 9.9 m 4) 118.8 m 1) 86.5 m 2) 89.5 m 3) 85.5 m 4) 80.5 m
15. A ball is thrown straight upward with a speed
v from a point h meter above the ground. The LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY
time taken for the ball to strike the ground is 01) 3 02) 2 03) 2 04) 1 05) 2 06) 2
v 2hg v 2hg 07) 2 08) 3 09) 1 10) 3 11) 4 12) 3
1) g 1 1 v 2 2) g 1 1 v2 13) 3 14) 4 15) 1 16) 3 17) 4 18) 4
19) 4 20) 4
v 2hg v 2hg
3) g 1 1 v 2 4) 2 2
g v
62 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
LEVEL - I (C.W) - HINTS t t
C 11. st u 2t 1 ; st 1 u 2t 1
2 2
1. st st 1 100 ; v u ft
A B A s B s2 C
1 v22 v12 v32 v22
12. ; a
Displacement : Distance R : 2R v1 5x v2 16x v3 2s1 2 s2
2. In 40sec body completes two revolutions.
In 5 sec it covers 1/4 th of the circle and angle vu
13. a
t
traced is . So displacement s 2 R sin u 2
1 hE gM
2 2 14. h ; h h g
s1 s 2 2v1 v 2 2g g M E
3. Average speed = t t v = v + v 1 2
1 2 1 2
15. h vt gt ; gt 2 2vt 2h 0
total displacement s1 s 2 2
4. v avg = = t t
2gh 2 2gh1
total time 1 2 16. a= 17. v 2 2gh ; 4v 2 2gx
t
v u v v at 18. Relative acceleration is zero as ‘g’ is downwards
5. vavg for the both the bodies.
2 2 2 2
6. 19. urel v1 v2 ; vrel 0 ; vrel urel 2as
u1 v1=0 v2=0 u2
N 20. s1 s s2
4j s
W v12 u12 2a1 s1 ; v22 u22 2a2 s2
E
-3i s s s1 s2 .
3i
S
vu LEVEL - I (H.W)
a ; v i = v1 i, vf = v 2 j
t
v2 DISPLACEMENT AND DISTANCE
Δv = vf - vi = v 2 j- v1 i ; tan θ = v 1. A body moves from one corner of an
1
equilateral triangle of side 10 cm to the same
s2 corner along the sides. Then the distance and
s1 1 displacement are respectively
7. t1 ; s1 ut1 t12
t2 2 1) 30 cm & 10 cm 2) 30 cm & 0 cm
3) 0 cm & 30 cm 4) 30 cm & 30 cm.
1 2
s1 s2 u t1 t2 a t1 t2 SPEED AND VELOCITY
2 2. For a train that travels from one station to
1 1 n2 another at a uniform speed of 40 kmh–1 and
8. n 20 ; no. of planks =
n 20 2n 1 returns to final station at speed of 60 kmh–1,
1 1 then its average speed is
9. sn u an a u a an ..........(1) 1) 98 km/hr 2) 0 km/hr
2 2
3) 50 km/hr 4) 48 km/hr
sn 2 0.4n ..........(2) 3. If the distance between the sun and the earth
1 is 1.5x1011 m and velocity of light is 3x108 m/
from (1) and (2) 0.4n an ; u a 2 s, then the time taken by a light ray to reach
2
1 2 1 2
the earth from the sun is
10. x a 2 ; x y a 4 1) 500 s 2) 500 minute 3) 50 s 4) 5 103s
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 63
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
ACCELERATION 12. Two bodies are projected simultaneously with
the same velocity of 19.6 m/s from the top of
4. A body is moving with velocity 30ms 1
a tower, one vertically upwards and the other
towards east. After 10s its velocity becomes
vertically downwards. As they reach the
40ms1 towards north. The average ground, the time gap is
acceleration of the body is [AIPMT 2011] 1) 0 s 2) 2 s 3) 4 s 4) 6 s
1) 7 ms 2 2) 7 ms 2 3) 5 ms 2 4) 1ms 2 13. Two bodies begin to fall freely from the same
5. A body starting with a velocity ‘v’ returns to height. The second one begins to fall s af-
its initial position after ‘t’ second with the ter the first. The time after which the 1st body
same speed, along the same line. begins to fall, the distance between the bod-
Acceleration of the particle is ies equals to l is
2v v t l g
1) 2) zero 3) 4) 1) 2)
t 2t 2v g 2 l
6. A body starting from rest moving with uniform
2 g
acceleration has a displacement of 16 m in 3) 4)
first 4 s and 9 m in first 3 s. The acceleration lg l 2
of the body is 14. A balloon is going upwards with velocity 12
–2 –2 –2 –2
1) 1 ms 2) 2 ms 3) 3 ms 4) 4 ms m/sec. It releases a packet when it is at a
7. A body starts from rest and moves with an height of 65 m from the ground. How much
uniform acceleration. The ratio of distance time the packet will take to reach the ground
covered in the nth second to the distance g 10m / sec
2
covered in ‘n’ second is
1) 5 sec 2) 6 sec 3) 7 sec 4) 8 sec
2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 15. A body thrown up with some initial velocity
1) n n 2 2) n 2 n 3) n 2 n 4) 2
n n reaches a maximum height of 50m. Another
8. A bus accelerates uniformly from rest and body with double the mass thrown up with
acquires a speed of 36kmph in 10s. The double the initial velocity will reach a
acceleration is maximum height of
1) 1 m/s2 2) 2 m/s2 3) 1/2 m/s2 4) 3 m/s2 1) 100m 2) 200m 3) 400m 4) 50m
9. Speeds of two identical cars are U and 4U at 16. The distance moved by a freely falling body
a specific instant. The ratio of the respective (starting from rest) during the 1st, 2nd and
distances in which the two cars are stopped 3rd ... nth second of its motion, are
from that instant is proportional to
1) 1:1 2) 1:4 3) 1:8 4) 1:16 1) (n-1) 2) (2n-1) 3) (n2-1) 4) (2n-1)/n2
10. A car moving along a straight highway with 17. A ball released from a height ‘h’ touches the
speed of 126Kmh 1 is brought to a stop with ground in ‘t’s. After t/2s since dropping, the
in a distance of 200m. what is the retardation height of the body from the ground
of the car
1) 3.06ms -2 2) 4ms -2 3) 5.06ms -2 4) 6ms -2 h h 3h 3h
1) 2) 3) 4)
MOTION UNDER GRAVITY 2 4 4 2
11. Two balls are projected simultaneously with 18. A boy standing at the top of a tower of 20 m
the same velocity ‘u’ from the top of a tower, height drops a stone Assuming g 10 ms 2 ,
one vertically upwards and the other
the velocity with which it hits the ground is
vertically downwards. Their respective times
of the journeys are t1 and t2. At the time of [AIPMT 2011]
reaching the ground, the ratio of their final 1) 20 ms 1 2) 40 ms 1 3) 5 ms 1 4) 10 ms 1
velocities is
1) 1:1 2) 1:2 3) 2:3 4) 2:1 19. A ball thrown vertically upwards with an ini-
tial velocity of 1.4 m/s returns in 2s. The to-
64 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
tal displacement of the ball is vi = v1i ; vf = v 2 j ; Δv = vf - vi = v 2 j - v1 i
1) 22.4 cm 2) zero 3) 44.8 m 4) 33.6m
20. A stone is dropped from a certain height which Δv
Δv = v12 + v22 ; a=
can reach the ground in 5s. It is stopped mo- Δt
mentarily after 3s and then it is again re- vu 1 1 2
5. a ; 6. s n a n 2 ; s an
leased. The total time taken by the stone to t 2
reach the ground will be a a s 2n 1
7. sn 2n 1 : s n 2 ; n
1) 6s 2) 6.5s 3) 7s 4) 7.5s 2 2 s n2
RELATIVE VELOCITY 8. v = u + at ;
21. What are the speeds of two objects if, when 9. v 2 u 2 2as ; v = 0 both the cases
they move uniformly towards each other, they 2
u1 s1
get 4 m closer in each second and when they u2 s ;
move uniformly in the same direction with the u2 s2
original speeds, they get 4 m closer each 10s? 10. v 2 u 2 2as
1) 2.8 m/s and 12 m/s 11. v u 2 2gh is same for both the bodies.
2) 5.2 m/s and 4.6 m/s
3) 3.2 m/s and 2.1 m/s 2u
12. t
4) 2.2 m/s and 1.8 m/s g
22. Two trains are each 50m long moving 2
parallel towards each other at speeds gt 2 g t
13. H1 ; H2 ; l H1 - H2
10 m/s and 15 m/s respectively, at what time 2 2
will they pass each other? 1 2 u2
1) 8 s 2) 4 s 3) 2 s 4) 6 s 14. h ut gt H
15. max ( independent of mass)
2 2g
23. A ball is dropped from the top of a building
100 m high. At the same instant another ball 1 g 3g 5 g g
16. sn g n ; Ratio = : : ..... 2n 1
is thrown upwards with a velocity of 40 ms 1 2 2 2 2 2
form the bottom of the building. The two balls sn 2n 1
will meet after. 1 2
1) 5 s 2) 2.5 s 3) 2s 4) 3 s 17. h gt 18. v 2gh
2
19. Since the ball returns back to its initial position,
LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY the displacement is zero.
01) 2 02) 4 03) 1 04) 3 05) 1 06) 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
20. h h1 h 2 , gt gt 1 gt 2 ; t tot t1 t 2
07) 1 08) 1 09) 4 10) 1 11) 1 12) 3 2 2 2
13) 1 14) 1 15) 2 16) 2 17) 3 18) 1 4
19) 2 20) 3 21) 4 22) 2 23) 2 21. v A v B 4m /s ; v A v B m/s
10
l1 l2 l1 l2
LEVEL - I (H.W) -HINTS 22. t
1. Displacement = shortest distance between initial vr v1 v2
point and final point d h
2v1 v 2 23. t r a r 0 ; u1 0
s v r u1 u 2
2. v avg 3.s = vt , t =
v1 v 2 v
4. LEVEL - II (C.W)
N
DISPLACEMENT AND DISTANCE
40j
1. A person moves 30m north and then 20m
W E
-30i towards east and finally 30 2 m in south-
30i west direction. The displacement of the
S person from the origin will be
NARAYANAGROUP 65
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
1) 10m along north 2) 10 m along south 9. A police party is moving in a jeep at a constant
3) 10m along west 4) zero speed v. They saw a thief at a distance x on a
SPEED AND VELOCITY motorcycle which is at rest. The moment the
2. If a car covers 2/ 5th of the total distance with police saw the thief, the thief started at
constant acceleration . Which of the
v1 speed and 3/ 5th distance with v2 then following relations is true if the police is able
average speed is to catch the thief? [2011-E]
1 v v 2v1v 2 5v1v 2 1) v2 x 2) v 2 2x
1) v1v 2 2) 1 2 3) 4)
2 2 v1 v 2 3v1 2v 2
3) v 2 2x 4) v 2 x
3. Four persons A, B,C and D initially at the 10. Velocity of a body moving with uniform
corners of a square of side length ‘d’. If every
acceleration of 3m/s2 is changed through
person starts moving with same speed v such
30m/s in certain time. Average velocity of
that each one faces the other always, the
body during this time is 30m/s. Distance
person will meet after time
covered by it during this time is
d 2d d d 1) 300 m 2) 200 m 3) 400 m 4) 250 m
1) 2) 3) 4) 11. A person is running at his maximum speed of
v v 2v 2v 4 m/s to catch a train. When he is 6m from
4. A man walks on a straight road from his home the door of the compartment the train starts
to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 to leave the station at a constant accelera-
km/h. Finding the market closed, he instantly
turns and walks back home with a speed of tion of 1 m / s 2 . Find how long it takes him to
7.5 km/h. What is the (a) magnitude of aver- catch up the train
age velocity and (b) average speed of the man 1. 2sec 2. 3 sec 3. 4 sec 4. none
over the time interval 0 to 50 min (in kmph). 12. A body is moving along the +ve x-axis with
1) 0,4 2) 0,6 3) 0,8 4)0,12 uniform acceleration of 4ms 2 . Its velocity
ACCELERATION
at x=0 is 10 ms 1. The time taken by the body
5. A starts from rest and moves with acceleration
a1. Two seconds later, B starts from rest and to reach a point at x=12m is
moves with an acceleration a 2 . If the 1) 2s, 3s 2) 3s, 4s 3) 4s,8s 4) 1s, 2 s
displacement of A in the 5th second is the MOTION UNDER GRAVITY
same as that of B in the same interval, the 13. A freely falling body takes ‘t’ second to travel
ratio of a1 to a2 is first (1/x)th distance. Then, time of descent is
1) 9:5 2) 5:9 3) 1:1 4) 1:3
6. A body travels 200cm in the first two seconds t x 1
1) 2) t x 3) 4)
and 220cm in the next 4 seconds with x t t x
deceleration. The velocity of the body at the 14. The distance travelled by a body during last
end of the 7th second is second of its upward journey is ‘d’, when the
1) 20 cm/s 2) 15 cm/s 3) 10 cm/s 4) 0 cm/s body is projected with certain velocity vertically
7. A bullet moving at 20 m/sec. It strikes a up. If the velocity of projection is doubled, the
wooden plank and penetrates 4 cm before
distance travelled by the body during the last
coming to stop. The time taken to stop is
1) 0.008 sec 2) 0.016 sec second of its upward journey is
3) 0.004 sec 4) 0.002 sec 1) 2d 2) 4d 3) d/2 4) d
8. An automobile travelling with a speed of 15. A rocket is fired and ascends with constant
60km/h can brake to stop within a distance vertical acceleration of 10m/s2 for 1 minute.
of 20m. If the car is going twice as fast i.e., Its fuel is exhausted and it continues as a free
120km/h the stopping distance will be particle. The maximum altitude reached is
1) 20 m 2) 40 m 3) 60 m 4) 80 m (g=10m/s2)
1) 18 km 2) 36 km 3) 72 km 4) 108km
66 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
16. A parachutist after bailing out falls 50m first second of its free fall, it passes through
without friction. When parachute opens, it ‘n’ stare then ‘n’ equal to
decelerates at 2m / s 2 . He reaches the 1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4
RELATIVE VELOCITY
ground with a speed of 3m / s . At what 24. Two particles P and Q simultaneously start
height, did he bail out ? moving from point A with velocities 15m/s
1) 91m 2) 182m 3) 293m 4) 111m and 20 m/s respectively. The two particles
17. A body is thrown vertically upwards with an move with accelerations equal in magnitude
initial velocity ‘u’ reaches a maximum height but opposite in direction. When P overtakes
in 6s. The ratio of the distance travelled by Q at B then its velocity is 30m/s. The veloc-
the body in the first second to the seventh ity of Q at point B will be
second is 1) 30 m / s 2) 5 m / s 3) 10 m / s 4) 15 m / s
1) 1:1 2) 11:1 3) 1:2 4) 1:11 25. Two trains A and B, 100m and 60m long, are
moving in opposite directions on parallel
18. A body is thrown vertically up to reach its
maximum height in t seconds. The total time tracks. The velocity of the shorter train is 3
from the time of projection to reach a point times that of the longer one. If the trains take
at half of its maximum height while return- 4s to cross each other, the velocities of the
ing( in seconds ) is (2008 E) trains are
1 3t t 1) vA 10ms 1 , vB 30ms 1
1) 2 t 2) 1 t 3) 4)
2 2 2 2) v A 2.5ms 1 , vB 7.5ms 1
19. Water drops fall from a tap on to the floor 5.0m
below at regular intervals of time. The first drop 3) v A 20ms 1 , v B 60ms 1
strikes the floor when the fifth drop beings to 4) vA 5ms1 , v B 15ms1
fall. The height at which the third drop will be
from ground, at the instant when the first drop LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY
strikes the ground is (Take g = 10ms-2) 01) 3 02) 4 03) 1 04) 2 05) 2 06) 3
1) 1.25m 2) 2.15m 3) 2.75m 4) 3.75m 07) 3 08) 4 09) 3 10) 1 11) 1 12) 1
20. A boy throws n balls per second at regular 13) 2 14) 4 15) 2 16) 3 17) 2 18) 2
time intervals. When the first ball reaches the 19) 4 20) 2 21) 3 22) 4 23) 1 24) 2
maximum height he throws the second one 25) 1
vertically up. The maximum height reached LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS
by each ball is
20 i
g A
g g g N
1) 2 n 1 2 2) 2 3) 4)
2n n 2
n 30j
21. A body is thrown vertically upward from a W E
point ‘A’ 125m above the ground. It goes up -30i O
to a maximum height of 250 m above the C
ground and passes through ‘A’ on its 1. -30 j
S
downward journey. The velocity of the body
when it is at a height of 70m above the ground
is (g = 10 m/s2) (MED-2013) B
Total displacement from the origin,
1) 20 m/s 2) 50 m/s 3) 60 m/s 4) 80 m/s
22. A body is released from the top of a tower of s 20i 30 j 30 j 30i =-10i
height H m. After 2s it is stopped and then s1 s 2
instantaneously released. What will be its 2. total distance s s
avg speed= 1
2
height after next 2s (in metres)? total time v1 v2
1)H-5 2) H-10 3)H-20 4)H-40
23. A ball dropped from 9th stair of a multistoried
building reaches the ground in 3 sec. In the
NARAYANAGROUP 67
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
a g
T height in the first second, h1 u
3. 2
2v sin 2 , (n=4)
height covered in the first second of downward
n
s1 s2 s1 s 2 g
journey, h 2
4. (a) vavg = t t ; (b) v avg = t t 2
1 2 1 2
1 2 H 1
a a 18. H = gt ; g(t ) 2 ; find t = ?
5. s1 2n 1 ; s 2 2n 1 2 2 2
2 2 Total time = t + t
According to given prob. S1 S 2 5th
s1 s2 x
6. t1 t2 4th
1 2 3x
s1 ut1 t1
2 h 3rd
1 2 19. 5x
s1 s2 u t1 t2 a t1 t2 2nd
2
7x
v-u u+v
7. v 2 - u 2 = 2as ; t = a ; s = 2 t 1st
h 5
8. h x 3x 5x 7 x 16 x ; x
v 2 - u 2 = 2as ; as, v=0 16 16
2 Distance of 3rd drop from the ground = 12x
u1 s1 20. Time interval between two balls = Time of ascend
u 2 s ; u s
2 2
1 u g u2
= = u ; h
9. Distance travelled by the police party in ‘t’ sec. is vt. n g n 2g
21. The body is freely falling from a height of 250m. Its
1 2 velocity at a height of 70m from the ground means
Distance travelled by thief x t
2 velocity of freely falling body after travelling 180m.
2
1 αt
s1 s2
x t 2 vt - vt + x = 0 v = 2gh .
2 2
αt 2 - 2vt + 2x = 0 t=2v ± 4v 2 - 8αx
4v 2 > 8αx ; v 2 > 2αx
vu 1 2
10. a ;s v avg t 11. d at vt
t 2
12. s ut at
1 2
2
h 1 2
13. gt h gt d
x 2
14. distance covered in the last second of upward
1 2
2
journey = distance covered in 1st second of down-
ward journey. This is independent of velocity of
22.
1 2
t1 t21
projection. h1 gt1 t 2sec ; h2 gt22 t 2sec
2 2
1 2 v2 1
h H h1 h2
15. h at , v at : max.height = H = 2g
2
total distance from the ground = (H + h) 1 2
23. nh gt , h= height of each story (constant)
1 2 a 2
at 1
2 g n t2
16. u = 2g H (g = 9.8 m/s2) 24. v rel at ; For P , 30 = 15 + at
v2 – u2 = 2as ; height at which he bails out= (H + s) For Q, v = 20 - at
u 25. 3v A v B ; vrel = vA + vB
17. ta , u gta , u 6 g l +l
g t= A B ;
vrel
s1 s 2 v A v B t
68 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
MOTION UNDER GRAVITY
LEVEL - II(H.W) 9. The splash of sound was heard 5.35s after
dropping a stone into a well 122.5m deep.
1. Two particles move along x-axis in the same Velocity of sound in air is
direction with uniform velocities 8 m/s and 1) 350 cm/s 2) 350 m/s 3) 392 cm/s 4) 0 cm/s
4 m/s. Initially the first particle is 21m to the 10. Two stones are thrown vertically upwards with
left of the origin and the second one is 7m to
the same velocity of 49m/s. If they are thrown
the right of the origin. The two particles meet
from the origin at a distance of one after the other with a time lapse of 3
1) 35 m 2) 32 m 3) 28 m 4) 56 m second, height at which they collide is
2. A moving car possesses average velocities of 1) 58.8 m 2) 111.5 m 3) 117.6 m 4) 122.5 m
5ms1 ,10ms1 and 15ms 1 in the first, second, 11. A stone projected upwards with a velocity ‘u’
and third seconds respectively. What is the reaches two points ‘P’ and ‘Q’ separated by
total distance covered by the car in these 3s? a distance ‘h’ with velocities u/2 and u/3. The
1) 15m 2) 30m 3) 55m 4) 45m maximum height reached by it is
ACCELERATION
9h 18h 36 h 72h
3. The average velocity of a body moving with 1) 2) 3) 4)
uniform acceleration after travelling a 5 5 5 5
distance of 3.06 m is 0.34 m/s. If the change 12. A ball is dropped from the top of a building.
in velocity of the body is 0.18 ms-1 during this The ball takes 0.5s to fall past the 3m length
time, its uniform acceleration is ( in ms-2 ) of a window at certain distance from the top
1) 0.01 2) 0.02 3) 0.03 4) 0.04 of the building. Speed of the ball as it crosses
4. If a body looses half of its velocity on penetrating
the top edge of the window is (g=10m/s2)
3cm in a wooden block, then how much will it
penetrate more before coming to rest 1) 3.5 ms-1 2) 8.5 ms-1 3) 5 ms-1 4) 12 ms-1
1) 1 cm 2) 2cm 3) 3cm 4) 4cm 13. A body thrown vertically up with a velocity ‘u’
5. A car moving with a speed of 50km/hr can be reaches the maximum height ‘h’after‘T’ second.
stopped by brakes after atleast 6m. If the Correct statement among the following is
same car is moving at a speed of 100km/hr, 1) at a height h/2 from the ground its velocity
the minimum stopping distance is is u/2
1) 12m 2) 18m 3) 24m 4) 6m 2) at a time ‘T’ its velocity is ‘u’
6. A particle moving with a constant accelera- 3) at a time ‘2T’ its velocity is ‘-u’
tion describes in the last second of its motion 4) at a time ‘2T’ its velocity is ‘-6u’
36% of the whole distance. If it starts from 14. A ball is projected vertically upwards with a
rest,how long is the particle in motion and velocity of 25 ms-1 from the bottom of a tower.
through what distance does it moves if it de- A boy who is standing at the top of a tower is
scribes 6 cm in the first sec.? unable to catch the ball when it passes him in
the upward direction. But the ball again
1) 5 s;150 cm 2) 10 s;150 cm
reaches him after 3 sec when it is falling. Now
3) 15 s;100 cm 4) 20s ; 200cm the boy catches it Then the height of the tower
7. A bus starts from rest with a constant accel- is (g=10ms-2)
eration of 5 m / s 2 .At the same time a car 1) 5 m 2) 10 m 3) 15 m 4) 20 m
15. A person sitting on the top of a tall building is
travelling with a constant velocity 50 m/s over dropping balls at regular intervals of one
takes and passes the bus. How fast is the bus second. When the 6th ball is being dropped,
travelling when they are side by side? the positions of the 3rd, 4th, 5th balls from
1) 10 m/s 2) 50 m/s 3) 100 m/s 4) 150m/s the top of the building are respectively
8. A particle moving with uniform retardation 1) 4.9m, 19.6m, 44.1m 2) 4.9m, 14.7m, 24.5m
covers distances 18m, 14m and 10m in 3) 44.1m, 19.6m, 4.9m 4) 24.5m, 14.7m, 4.9m
successive seconds . It comes to rest after
travelling a further distance of
1)50 m 2) 8 m 3) 12 m 4) 42 m
NARAYANAGROUP 69
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
16. A stone projected vertically up from the 23. A boy throws a ball in air in such a manner
ground reaches a height y in its path at t1 that when the ball is at its maximum height
he throws another ball. If the balls are thrown
seconds and after further t 2 seconds reaches with the time difference 1 second, the maxi-
the ground. The height y is equal to mum height attained by each ball is
1 1 2 1) 9.8 m 2) 19.6 m 3) 4.9 m 4) 2.45 m
1) gt1 t 2 2) gt1 t 2
2 2 RELATIVE VELOCITY
1 24. Two cars are travelling in the same direction
3) g t1t 2 4) g t1t 2
2 with a velocity of 60 kmph. They are
17. A person standing on the edge of a well throws separated by a distance of 5 km. A truck
a stone vertically upwards with an initial moving in opposite direction meets the two
velocity 5 ms-1. The stone gone up, comes down cars in a time interval of 3 minute. The
and falls in the well making a sound. If the velocity of the truck is (in kmph)
person hears the sound 3 second after 1) 20 2) 30 3) 40 4) 60
throwing, then the depth of water (neglect time 25. A police van moving on a highway with a
travel for the sound and take g = 10ms-2) speed of 30 kmph fires a bullet at a thief’s
1) 1.25 m 2) 21.25 m3) 30m 4) 32.5 m car speeding away in the same direction with
18. A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a a speed of 192 kmph. If the muzzle speed of
the bullet is 150 m/s, with what speed does
speed of 10 m/s from the top of a tower 200m
the bullet hit the thief’s car? (Note: Obtain
height and another is thrown vertically
that speed which is relevant for damaging the
downwards with the same speed
thief’s car).
simultaneously. The time difference between 1) 25m/s 2) 50m/s 3) 75m/s 4) 105m/s
them on reaching the ground is (g=10m/s2) 26. Two cars are moving in same direction with
1) 12s 2) 6s 3) 2s 4) 1s speed of 30kmph. They are separated by a
19. A body is projected vertically upwards with a distance of 5km. What is the speed of a car
velocity ' u ' . It crosses a point in its journey moving in opposite direction if it meets the
at a height ' h ' twice , just after 1 and 7 sec- two cars at an interval of 4 min?
1) 60 kmph 2) 5 kmph
onds .The value of u in ms 1is g 10 ms 2 3) 30 kmph 4) 45 kmph
1) 50 2)40 3) 30 4) 20 LEVEL - II(H.W)-KEY
20. A stone thrown vertically up from the ground 01) 1 02) 2 03) 2 04) 1 05) 3 06) 1
reaches a maximum height of 50m in 10s. 07) 3 08) 2 09) 2 10) 2 11) 3 12) 1
Time taken by the stone to reach the ground 13) 3 14) 4 15) 3 16) 3 17) 3 18) 3
from maximum height is 19) 2 20) 2 21) 4 22) 2 23) 3 24) 3
1) 5s 2) 10s 3) 20s 4) 25s 25) 4 26) 4
21. A freely falling body travels-- of total distance LEVEL - II(H.W)-HINTS
in 5th second 1. x 21 u1t ; x 7 u2t
1) 8% 2) 12% 3) 25% 4) 36% 2. s u1t1 u2t2 u3t3
22. A body is projected with a velocity u. It passes distance changein velocity v u
through a certain point above the ground in t1 3. t= , a =
v ave total time t
sec. The time after which the body passes through
2
the same point during the return journey x n 1
4. y= 5. v 2 u 2 2as , v=0 ; u 2 s
u 2 u 2n 1
1) t1 2) 2 t1
g g 1 2 2n 1 36
6. s at ;
u2 u2 2 n2 100
3) 3 g t1 4) 3 g 2 t1
70 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
1 2
7. s= at , s = vt , v=at
2 LEVEL-III
1 2h h
8. s u a n 9. t SPEED AND VELOCITY
2 g vsound
1. A motorist drives north for 35.0 minutes at
u 2 gt 2 u2 85.0 km/h and then stops for 15.0 minutes.
10. h 11. v 2 u 2 2as ; H
2g 8 2g He next continues north, travelling 130 km
1 1 2 in 2.00 hours. What is his total displacement
12. S ut at 2 3 v 0.5 10 0.5 1) 85 km 2)179.6 km 3)20 km 4)140 km
2 2
13. After a time 2T, body returns to the point of projec- 2. The coordinates of a moving particle at any
tion with the same velocity in opposite direction. time ‘t’ are given by x t 3 and y t 3 . The
2v speed of the particle at time ‘t’ is given by
14. t ; v 2 u 2 2gh
g
6 1) 2 2 2) 3t 2 2
g
2 3) 3t 2 2 2 4) t 2 2 2
5
3g
ACCELERATION
2
4 3. The relation between time t and distance x is
5g
2 t ax 2 bx where a and b are constants. The
3 acceleration is
15. 7g
2 1) 2av 3 2) 2av 2 3) 2abv 2 4) 2bv3
9g
2 4. Two cars start in a race with velocities u1 and
2 u 2 and travel in a straight line with
1
1 1 2 accelerations ‘ ’ and . If both reach the
16. h = y = gt1t 2 17. h = –ut + gt finish line at the same time, the range of the
2 2
2u 1
race is
18. t 19. u g(t 2 t1 )
g 2 2( u1 u 2 )
1) ( u1 u 2 )
sn 2 n 1 ( ) 2
20. ta td 21.
h n2 2( u1 u 2 )
2) ( u1 u 2)
u
t1
g
ta P u 2( u 1 u 2 ) 2 2 u 1u 2
3) 4)
22. ; ta ( ) 2
g
t1 5. A point moves with uniform acceleration
v1 ,v2 and v3 denote the average velocities in
g three successive intervals of time t1, t2 and
23. h
2n 2 t3. Correct relation among the following is
u u 1) (v1-v2) : (v2-v3) = (t1-t2) : (t2-t3)
d d 2) (v1-v2) : (v2-v3) = (t1+t2) : (t2+t3)
24. d ; t v uv
v rel 3) (v1-v2) : (v2-v3) = (t1-t2) : (t2+t3)
25. The relative velocity of bullet with respect to thief 4) (v1-v2) : (v2-v3) = (t1+t2) : (t2-t3)
v bt v b v p v t 6. A train starts from rest and moves with uniform
u u acceleration for some time and acquires a
velocity ‘v’. It then moves with constant
d d
26. ; t = v = u+v velocity for some time and then decelerates
d
v rel
NARAYANAGROUP 71
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
at rate and finally comes to rest at the next height of each storey is 4m, the number of
station. If ‘L’ is distance between two stations storeys in the building is (take g 10ms 2
then total time of travel is and neglect air resistance)
L v 1 1 L v 1 1 1) 20 2) 25 3) 30 4) 35
1) 2) 13. A body is projected vertically up with veloc-
v 2 v 2
ity 98ms 1 . After 2 s if the acceleration due
L v 1 1 L v 1 1 to gravity of earth disappears , the velocity
3) 4) of the body at the end of next 3 s is
v 2 v 2
1)49ms-1 2)49.6ms-1 3)78.4ms-1 4)94.7ms-1
7. A car, starting from rest, accelerates at the
rate f through a distance S, then continues at 14. The velocity of a particle is v v 0 gt ft 2 .
constant speed for time t and then decelerate If its position is x = 0 at t = 0, then its dis-
at the rate (f/2) to come to rest. If the total placement after unit time (t = 1) is (AIE-2007)
distance travelled is 15S, then
g f
1 2 1) v 0 2g 3f 2) v 0
1) S ft 2) S ft 2 3
6 g
1 2 1 3) v 0 g f 4) v 0 f
3) S ft 4) S ft
2
2
72 4 15. A ball A is dropped from the top of a building
8. An express train moving at 30 m/s reduces and at the same time an identical ball B is
its speed to 10 m/s in a distance of 240 m. If thrown vertically upward from the ground.
the breaking force is increased by 12.5% in When the balls collide the speed of A is twice
the beginning find the distance that it travels that of B. At what fraction of the height of the
before coming to rest building did the collision occur?
1) 270 m 2) 240 m 3) 210 m 4) 195 m
9. For motion of an object along the x-axis, the 1 2 5 7
velocity v depends on the displacement x as 1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 3 3
v 3x 2 2x, then what is the acceleration at 16. An object falls from a bridge that is 45m
above the water.It falls directly into a small
x 2m .
row-boat moving with constant velocity that
1) 48ms2 2) 80ms 2 3) 18ms 2 4) 10ms 2
was 12m from the point of impact when the
MOTION UNDER GRAVITY object was released. What was the speed of
10. The friction of the air causes a vertical
retardation equal to 10% of the acceleration the boat? g 10 ms 2
due to gravity. Take g 10m / s 2 . The 1. 2 m / s 2. 3 m / s 3. 5 m / s 4. 4 m / s
maximum height and time to reach the GRAPHS
maximum height will be decreased by 17. An elevator is going up. The variation in the
1) 9%, 9% 2) 11%, 11%
velocity of the elevator is as given in the
3) 9%, 10% 4) 11%, 9%
11. A parachutist after bailing out falls for 10s graph. What is the height to which the eleva-
without friction. When the parachute opens tor takes the passengers
he descends with an acceleration of 2 m/s2 velocity
against his direction and reached the ground
with 4 m/s. From what height he has dropped
himself ? (g = 10m/s2) 3.6
1) 500m 2) 2496m 3) 2996m 4) 4296m
12. A body is dropped from the roof of a multi-
storied building. It passes the ceiling of the O 2 10 12
1
15th storey at a speed of 20 ms . If the Time
1) 3.6 m 2) 28.8 m 3) 36.0 m 4)72.0 m
72 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
18. The velocity time graph of a body moving in
a straight line is shown in the figure. The dis- x
placement and distance travelled by the body
in 6 sec are respectively (in metres) .
v(m/s)
2 4 6
1 5 0 10 15 20 t
5 v
v
t(sec)
1) 8,16 2) 16,8 3)16,16 4) 8,8
19. The velocity-time graph of a stone thrown 1) 0 t 2) 0 t
5 10 15 20 5 10 15 20
vertically upward with an initial velocity of
30ms 1 is shown in the figure. The velocity in v
the upward direction is taken as positive and v
that in the downward direction as negative.
What is the maximum height to which the
stone rises? 3) 0 t 4) 0 5 10 15 20 t
5 10 15 20
30 A
20 22. Velocity -time (v-t) graph for a moving object
velocity (ms )
10
-1
B is shown in the figure . Total displacement of
0
10 1 2 3 Time (s) the object during the time interval when there
4 5
20 is non-zero acceleration and retardation is
30 C
1) 30 m 2) 45 m 3) 60 m 4) 90 m 4
v(m/s)
20. The variation of velocity of particle moving 3
along a straight line is shown in the figure.
The distance travelled by the particle in 4s is 2
20 1
0
V(ms )
10 20
-1
30 40 50 60
t(sec)
10
1) 60m 2) 50m 3) 30m 4) 40m
2 3 1 4
t(s)
1) 55 m 2) 30 m 3) 25 m 4) 60 m
21. Figure shows the displacement-time (x-t)
graph of a body moving in a straight line.
Which one of the graphs shown in figure
represents the velocity-time (v-t) graph of the
motion of the body.
NARAYANAGROUP 73
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
RELATIVE VELOCITY 1 1
s t u1 t t u 2 t
23. An armored car 2m long and 3 m wide is 2 2
moving at 10 ms 1 when a bullet hits it in a solve for t and substitute in the above equation.
change in average velocity
1 3 a
direction making an angle tan 4 with the 5. average time
length of the car as seen by a stationary
observer. The bullet enters one edge of the v
car at the corner and passes out at the v v
= =
diagonally opposite corner. Neglecting any t1 t3
interaction between the car and the bullet and
effect of gravity, the time for the bullet to 6. v
cross the car is O t3
t1 t2
1) 0.20 s 2) 0.15 s 3) 0.10 s 4) 0.50 s
24. Two particles start simultaneously from the Time
same point and move along two straight lines.
1 1
One with uniform velocity v and other with a T t1 t 2 t 3 ; weknow L = vt1 + vt 2 + vt 3
uniform acceleration a. If is the angle be- 2 2
tween the lines of motion of two particles then vt vt L 1
L = 1 + vt 2 + 3 ; t 2 = - t1 + t 3 ......(1)
the least value of relative velocity will be at 2 2 v 2
time given by
v v v v
1) sin 2) cos 3) tan 4) cot
a a a a
25. A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500 7.
km/h ejects its products of combustion at the
speed of 1500 km/h relative to the jet plane.
What is the speed of the later with respect to s
an observer on ground?
v 2 - o 2 = 2fs
1) 100kmph 2) 1000kmph
2 2 f ® s3 = 2s
o - v = -2 .s3
3) 10kmph 4) 11kmph 2
LEVEL - III - KEY s 2 = 12s ; 12s = vt also v = 2fs
1) 2 2) 3 3) 1 4) 1 5) 2 6) 1
7) 3 8) 1 9) 2 10) 1 11) 3 12) 1 1 2
13) 3 14) 2 15) 2 16) 4 17) 3 18) 1 12s = 2fs.t ;144s2 = 2fs.t ; s = ft
72
19) 2 20) 1 21) 4 22) 2 23) 1 24) 2 8. v 2 u 2 2as
25) 2
dv dv
9. Diff. eq. (1) w.r.t x is = 6x - 2 ; a v
LEVEL - III - HINTS dx dx
1 h2 g1 h2 h1 g g
1. s1 v1t ; s s s
1 2 10. h ; ; 100 1 2 100
g h1 g 2 h1 g2
dx dy g 11g
2. vx , v y ; v v2x v2y g1 g
dt dt 10 10
dx dv 1 2
3. v , a 11. s1 gt , v = gt ; v12 - v 2 = 2as 2 ; s = s1 + s 2
dt dt 2
4. Range = dist. covered before they meet 12. Distance traveled when it gains velocity of 20m/s
74 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
second car is v = v + at = 0 + at
v 2 400
2
v - 0 = 2gh ; h = = =20m 2
2g 20 v rel = v 2 + at - 2vat cosα
20 d 2 vcosα
Number of stories = 5
4 v rel is minimum if
dt
vr = 0 ; t =
a
Total no.of stories 15 5 20
25. Velocity of jet aeroplane = 500 j
13. v = u - gt . after g disappears body moves up
with uniform velocity. velocity of fuel w.r.to plane 1500 j
Given velocity of particle ; v = v0 + gt + ft 2
14. v f - v p = -1500 j ; v f = v p -1500 j
displacement s = vdt 500 j 1500 j 1000 j
1 2 speed of fuel w.r.to ground is -1000km/hr..
hB ut gt
2
15. hA hB 1 2 1 LEVEL-IV
gt ut gt 2
2 2
Matching Type Questions
2h 1. Match the following
16. t ; s = v×t Column I Column II
g
dv
17. area of v t graph; 18.area of v t graph a) p) Acceleration
dt
u2 30
19. h ; From graph u=30m/s; a 10m / s
2 dv
2a 3 b) q) Magnitude of acceleration
dt
20. area of under v-t graph
21. o to 5s - velocity is +ve and constant dr
c) r) Velocity
5 to 15s - slope is zero dt
15 to 20s - velocity is -ve and constant dr
22. Area under trapezium gives displacement. d) s) magnitude of velocity
dt
RELATIVE VELOCITY
23. 2. A particle moves in a straight line with zero
2m initial velocity. Then, match the following
terms :
Column I Column II
1
3m vb sin 37
0 a) (slope of v 2 - x ) graph p) Speed
10m/s 2
b) slope of v - t graph q) Acceleration
vb -1 3
c) Slope of x t graph r) Area under v-t
=tan
4 graph
=370
0
v b cos 37 2m d) 2 Area under a x graph s) Velocity
Relative velocity along x-axis is v b cos37 -10 0
Statements Type Questions
Distance travelled by bullet along x- axis is Mark your answer as
1) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, State-
v cos37
b
0
-10 t = 2 .........(1)
ment II is a correct explanation for Statement I
Distance travelled by bullet along y-axis is 2)If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, State-
ment II is not a correct explanation for Statement I
v sin37 t = 3 ..........(2)
b
0
3) If Statement I is true, Statement II is false
Solving equation (1) and (2) we get t=0.20s 4) If Statement I is false, Statement II is true
24. At any time velocity of first car is V and that of
NARAYANAGROUP 75
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
3. Statement I : An object may have varying speed Statement II: In last second distance travelled is
without having varying velocity. 4.9m. (take g 9.8m / s 2 )
Statement II : If the velocity is zero at an instant, 13. Statement I: Distance between two particles
the acceleration may not be zero at that instant. moving with constant velocities always remains
4. Statement I : A body is momentarily at rest at constant.
the instant it reverses the direction.
Statement II : A body cannot have acceleration Statement II: In the above case relative motion
if its velocity is zero at a given instant of time. between them is uniform.
5. Statement I : On a curved path average speed 14. Statement I: For one dimensional motion, the angle
of a particle can never be equal to average veloc- between acceleration and velocity should be zero.
ity.
Statement II: One dimensional motion is on a
Statement II : Average speed is total distance
straight line.
travelled divided by total time. Whereas average
velocity is, final velocity plus initial velocity divided 15. Statement I: If displacement is a linear function
by two. of time, its average and instantaneous velocity will
6. Statement I : Particle A is moving eastwards and be same.
particle B northwards with same speed. then, Statement II: If the acceleration of a moving
velocity of A with respect to B is in south -east particle is zero, the particle moves linearly.
direction.
Statement II : Relative velocity between them is 16. Statement I: If two particles are moving with
zero as their speeds are same. same speed but their velocity vectors are oppo-
7. Statement I : A lift is ascending with decreasing site, then the distance between the particles must
speed means acceleration of lift is downwards. be changing.
Statement II : A body always moves in the Statement II:If the velocity of one particle w.r.t.
direction of its acceleration. other is zero, then separation between the par-
8. Statement I : Two balls of different masses are ticle must be constant.
thrown vertically upwards with the same speed.
17. Statement I: If the magnitude of acceleration of
They will pass through their point of projection in
a particle is constant then speed must change.
the downward direction with the same speed.
Statement II : The height and the downward Statement II: In uniform circular motion speed
velocity attained at the point of projection are of the particle is constant but it has some accel-
independent of the mass of ball. eration.
9. Statement I: The v-t graph perpendicular to time 18. Statement I: A bus moving due north takes a turn
axis is not possible in practice. and starts moving towards east with same speed.
Statement II: Infinite acceleration can’t be There will be no change in the velocity of bus.
realized in practice.
10. Statement I: Magnitude of average velocity is Statement II:Velocity is a vector quantity.
equal to average speed, if velocity is constant. 19. Statement I:When a particle is moving on a
Statement II: If velocity is constant , then there straight line, its velocity is constant.
in no change in the direction of motion.
11. Statement I: The average velocity of a particle Statement II: The net acceleration of a moving
particle may change its direction of motion or
v1 v 2
having initial and final velocity v1 and v2 is magnitude of velocity or both.
2
Statement II: If r1 and r2 be the initial and final 20. Statement I:The direction of velocity vector is
r -r always along the tangent to the path therefore its
displacement in time t, then vavg = 1 2 .
t magnitude may be given by its slope.
12. Statement I: If a particle is thrown upwards then
distance travelled in last second of upward journey Statement II:The slope of tangent to path always
is independent of the velocity of projection. measure the magnitude of velocity at that point.
76 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
LEVEL - IV - KEY 12. If a particle is thrown upwards then distance trav-
Matching type elled in last second of upward journey is equal to
1) a -p; b-q; c-r; d-s distance travelled in first second of a freely falling
2) a-q; b-q; c-s; d-p
Statement Type g
body. s= = 4.9m
3) 4 4)3 5)3 6)3 7)3 8) 1 2
9) 1 10)1 11)4 12)1 13)4 14) 4 It is independent of velocity of projection.
15)2 16)2 17)4 18)4 19)4 20)2
13. If distance between two particles moving with con-
LEVEL - IV - HINTS stant velocities always remains constant v r 0
3. If speed varies, then velocity will definitely vary. 14. In one dimension motion angle between velocity
and acceleration becomes zero and 1800 in dif-
At highest point of a particle thrown upwards ferent situation. These are two possible value only.
a 0 but v=0.
15. If displacement is linear function of time then ve-
4. Any body momentarily at rest must change its di- locity is constant that is motion will be of uniform
rection, when a particle is released from rest,
nature.
v 0 but a 0
16. Correct speed same but direction of velocity op-
5. On a curved path, distance>displacement
posite than distance between particle will be
average speed > average velocity changing. Statement-(1) correct statement-(2)
Further, correct but (2) is not the correct explanation of
Statement-(1).
displacement
average velocity = Total time 17. acceleration = constant ; velocity changes
speed must changes statement-(1)-false
6. v = u j, v = v - v = ui - u j
v A = ui, B AB A B In uniform circular motion
tan 1 , 450 in S-E direction. speed = constant but it has some acceleration
statement-(2) correct.
7. Ascending means velocity is upwards. Speed is de-
creasing. It means acceleration is downwards. Fur- 18. Velocity change either by changing its magnitude
ther, the body moves in the direction of velocity. or by direction
8. Both maximum height and time of flight are inde- Statement-(1)-false. ; Statement-(2) - correct.
pendent on masses.
19. In st. line motion particle may move with constant
v velocity but it is not necessary acceleration
velocity changes either by magnitude or by direc-
v tion or both.
9. , Slope = = =a
o t
t
20. Statement -(1) correct
10. In one dimensional motion vavg is numerically equal Yes it may not have variable speed when have
to vavg velocity, since there is no change in direction. constant velocity
v1 + v 2 Statement-(2) correct
11. If acceleration is not constant v avg ¹ But Statement-(2) is not the correct explanation
2
for Statement -(1).
s r2 - r1
v avg = =
t t
NARAYANAGROUP 77
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
A. MOTION ALONG HORIZONTAL AXIS : 6. In 1.0 s, a particle goes from point A to point
B, moving in a semicircle (see figure). The
LEVEL - V magnitude of the average velocity is
A
SINGLEANSWER TYPE
1. A body moving along a straight line traversed
one third of the total distance with a velocity 1.0
m
4 m/sec in the first stretch. In the second
stretch the remaining distance is covered with
a velocity 2 m/sec for some time t0 and with B
(A) 3.14 m/s (B) 2.0 m/s (C) 1.0 m/s (D) zero
4m / s for the remaining time. if the average
velocity is 3 m/sec, find the time for which MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
body moves with velocity 4 m/sec in second 7. The velocity of a particle along a straight line
stretch: increases according to the linear law v =
3 t0 v0+kx, where k is a constant. Then
a) t 0 b) t0 c) 2t0 d) a) the acceleration of the particle is k v0 kx
2 2
2. For motion of an object along the x-axis, the 1 1
v
velocity v depends on the displacement x as b) the particle takes a time k log e v to attain a
0
v 3 x 2 2 x , then what is the acceleration at velocity v1
x = 2 m? c) velocity varies linearly with displacement with
slope of velocity displacement curve equal to k.
A) 48 ms 2 B) 80 ms 2 C) 18 ms 2 D) 10 ms 2 d) data is insufficient to arrive at a conclusion.
3. A police party is chasing a dacoit in a jeep 8. Two particles P and Q move in a straight line
which is moving at a constant speed v . The AB towards each other. P starts from A with
velocity u1 and an acceleration a1 . Q starts
dacoit is on a motorcycle. When he is at a
from B with velocity u2 and acceleration a2 .
distance x from the jeep, he accelerates from They pass each other at the midpoint of AB
rest at a constant rate ? Which of the and arrive at the other ends of AB with equal
following relations is true if the police is able velocities.
to catch the dacoit ?
2 2u u
1
A) v 2 x B) v 2 2 x a) They meet at midpoint at time t a a
1 2
C) v 2 2 x D) v 2 x b) The length of path specified i.e., AB is
4. A point moves in a straight line so that its 4 u 2 u 1 a 1 u 2 a 2 u 1
l 2
displacement x metre time t second is given a 1 a2
by x 2 1 t 2 . Its acceleration in ms 2 at time c) They reach the other ends of AB with equal
t second is velocities if u 2 u1 a1 a 2 8 a 1u 2 a 2 u1
1 t 1 t2 1 1 d) They reach the other ends of AB with equal
A) 3/ 2 B) 3 C) 3 D) 2 velocities if
x x x x x x
5. A 2m wide truck is moving with a uniform u 2 u1 a1 a 2 8 a 2u1 a1u 2
speed v0 8 ms 1 along a straight horizontal 9. Which of the following statements is/ are
correct ?
road. A pedestrain strarts to cross the road A) If the velocity of a body changes, it must have
with a uniform speed v when the truck is 4 m some acceleration.
away from him. The minimum value of v so B) If the speed of a body changes, it must have
that he can cross the road safely is some acceleration
C) If the body has acceleration, its speed must
A) 2.62 ms 1 B) 4.6 ms 1
change
C) 3.57 ms 1 D) 1.414 ms 1 D) If the body has acceleration, its speed may
change.
78 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
10. A particle moves along a straight line so that PASSAGE TYPE QUESTIONS
its velocity depends on time as v 4t t . PASSAGE-1
2
Then for first 5s. A train starts from rest with constant
A) Average velocity is 25 / 3 ms 1 acceleration, a 1m / s 2 . A passenger at a
distance ‘S’ from the train runs at his
B) Average speed is 10 ms 1 maximum velocity of 10 m/s to catch the train
C) Average velocity is 5 / 3 ms 1 at the same moment at which the train starts.
14. If S=25.5 m and passenger keeps running, find
D) Acceleration is 4 ms 2 at t 0 the time in which he will catch the train:
11. A particle moves with an initial velocity v0 and a) 5 sec b) 4 sec c) 3 sec d) 2 2 sec.
retardation v , where v is velocity at any time 15. Find the critical distance ‘S ’ for whcih passenger
c
t. will take the ten seconds time to catch the train:
v0 a) 50m b) 35m c) 30m d) 25m
(A) The particle will cover a total distance 16. Find the speed of the train when the passenger
catches it for the critical distacne:
1 a) 8 m/s b) 10 m/s c) 12 m/s d) 15m/s
(B) The particle will come to rest after time PASSAGE-2
(C) The particle will continue to move for a long A body is moving with uniform velocity of
time. 8 ms 1 . When the body just crossed another
v body, the second one starts and moves with
(D) The velocity of particle will become 0 after uniform acceleration of 4 ms 2 .
e
1 17. The time after which two bodies meet will be
time A) 2 s B) 4 s C) 6 s D) 8 s
18. The distance covered by the second body
12. A particle is moving along X–axis whose when they meet is
t3 A) 8 m B) 16 m C) 24 m D) 32 m
position is given by x 4 9t . Mark the
3 MARTIX MATCHING QUESTION
correct statement(s) in relation to its motion. 19. A particle moves along a straight line such
(A) direction of motion is not changing at any of the that its displacement S varies with time
instants
as S t t 2 .
(B) direction of motion is changing at t = 3 s
Column-I
(C) for 0 < t < 3 s, the particle is slowing down
i. Acceleration at t= 2 s
(D) for 0 < t < 3 s, the particle is speeding up.
ii. Average velocity during 3rd sec
13. A particle of mass m moves on the x-axis as
follows : it starts from rest at t = 0 from the iii. Velocity at t 1 s
point x = 0, and comes to rest at t = 1 at the iv. Initial displacement
point x = 1. No other information is available Column-II
about its motion at intermediate times a. 5
0 t 1 . If a denotes the instantaneous b. 2
acceleration of the particle, then [1993] c.
(A) a cannot remain positive for all t in the interval d. 2
0 t 1 INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
(B) |a| cannot exceed 2 at any point in its path 20. In a car race, car A takes 4 s less than car B at
(C) |a| must be 4 at some point or points in its the finish and passes the finishing point with a
path velocity v more than the car B. Assuming that
(D) a must change sing during the motion, but no the cars start from rest and travel with constant
other assertion can be made with the information accelerations a1 4 ms 2 and a2 1 ms 2
given.
respectively, find the velocity of v in ms 1 .
NARAYANAGROUP 79
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
21. A police jeep is chasing a culprit going on a 26. A stone is dropped from the 25th storey of a
motorbike. The motorbike crosses a turning multistoried building and it reaches the
at a speed of 72 kmh 1 . The jeep follows it at ground in 5s. In the first second, it passes
through how many storeys of the building
a speed of 90 kmh 1 , crossing the turning 10
s later than the bike. ( g= 10 ms 2 )
Assuming that they travel at constant A)1 B)2 C) 3 D) None
speeds, how far from the turning will the jeep 27. A body is projected upwards with a velocity
catch up with the bike ? ( in km) u , It passes through a certain point above
22. A particle moves in a straight line such that the ground after t1 . The time after which the
the displacement x at any time ‘t’ is given by body passes through the same point during
2 3
x 6t t 3t 4. x is in m and t is in second the return journey is
calculate the maximum velocity (In ms-1) of the
u 2 u
particle. A) t1 B) 2 t1
B. MOTION UNDER GRAVITY g g
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS u2 u2
3
C) g 1 t D) g 2 t1
3
23. A ball is thrown upwards with speed v from
the top of a tower and it reaches the ground 28. A ball is dropped vertically from a height d
with speed 3v . What is the height of the above the ground. It hits the ground and
tower ? d
bounces up vertically to a height .
v 2
2v 2 2
A) B) Neglecting subsequent motion and air
g g resistance, its velocity v varies with height h
above the ground as: [2004]
4v 2 8v 2
C) D) V
g g
V
24. An elevator in which a man is standing is
d
moving upwards with a speed of 10 ms 1 . If h
the man drops a coin from a height of 2.45 m A) B)
from the floor of elavator, it reaches the floor
d h
of the elavator after time ( g 9.8 ms 2 )
A) 2 s B) 1/ 2 s C) 2 s D) 1/ 2 s V
V
25. A body is thrown vertically upwards from A,
d
the top of a tower. It reaches the ground in h d
h
time t1 . If it is thrown vertically downward C) D)
from A with the same speed, it reaches the
ground in time t2 . If it is allowed to fall freely
29. A small block slides without friction down an
from A, then the time it takes to reach the inclined plane starting from rest. Let sn be the
ground is given by distance traveled from t =n – 1 to t = n. Then
t1 t2 t1 t2 sn
A) t B) t sn 1
is : [2005]
2 2
2n – 1 2n 1
t1 (A) (B) 2n – 1
C) t t1t2 D) t t 2n
2
2n – 1 2n
(C) 2n 1 (D) 2n 1
80 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS Column-I Column-II
30. S1,S2 and S3 are the different sizes of windows 1,2 a) 0 p) Acceleration at t= 5 s
and 3 respectively, placed in avertical plane. A b) 2 q) Average speed from t =0 to t =6s
particle is thrown up in that vertical plane. Find the c) 3 r) Velocity at the point of reversal of
correct options: motion
a) average speed of the particle d) 18 s) Total distance travelled from t =0 to
S3 t=6s
passing the windows may be equal if
s1 s2 s3 t) Displacement from t =0 to t=6s
b) average speed of the particle passing
S2 the windows may be equal if 34. For a body projected vertically up with a
S1 S2 S3 velocity v0 from the ground, match the
c) If S1 S2 S3 , the change in speed following
of the particle while crossing the Column-I
windows will satisfy V1 V2 V3 .
A. V av (Average velocity)
d) If S1 S2 S3 , the time taken by
S1 B. U av ( Average speed)
particle to cross the windows will
satisfy t1 t 2 t 3 . C. Tascent
31. At t 0 , an bullet is fired vertically upward
D. Tdescent
with a speed of 100 ms 1 . A second bullet is
fired vertically upwards with the same speed
Column-II
at t 5 s. Then
i. Zero for round trip
A) The two bullets will be at the same height
above the ground at t 12.5 s v1 v 2
ii. over any t ime interval where
B) The two bullets will reach back their strarting 2
points at t 20 s and at t 25 s
v1 & v 2 are the intial and final velocities in the time
C) The ratio of the speeds of the first and second interval
bulletsat t 20 s will be 2: 1 v0
D) The maximum height attained by either bullet iii. over the total timeof its flight
2
will be 1000 m
32. From the top of a tower of height 200 m, a v0
1 iv.
ball A is projected up with 10 ms , and 2 s g
later another ball B is projected vertically INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
down with the same speed Then 35. From a lift moving upwards with a uniform
A) Both A and B will reach the ground
simultaneously acceleration a 2ms 2 , a man throws a ball
B) Ball A will hit the ground 2 s later than B hitting vertically upwards with a velocity v 12 ms 1
the ground. relative to the lift. The ball comes back to the man
C) Both the balls will hit the ground with the same after a time t. Find the value of t in second
velocity (g=10ms-2).
D) Both the balls will hit the ground with the
different velocity 36. A body is thrown up with a velocity 100 ms 1 . It
MATRIX MATCH QUESTIONS travels 5 m in the last second of upword journey.
If the same body is thrown up with a velocity
33. A particle moves such that , t x 3 , where
200 ms 1 , how much distance ( in metre ) will it
x is in metre, t is in second. Based on this
travel in the last second of its opward journey
information, match the value in Column-I (in
SI units) to their respective quantities for the g 10ms
2
particles motion given in Column-II
NARAYANAGROUP 81
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
C. GRAPHS
6
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS V 2
37. The following graph shows the variation of
0 30 40
velocity of a rocket with time. Then the t(s)
–2 10 18 24
maximum height attained by the rocket is –6
A) The maximum value of the position coordinate
of the particle is 54 m.
B) The maximum value of the position coordinate
of the particle is 36 m.
C) The particle is at the position of 36 m at
t 18 s .
D) The particle is at the position of 36 m at
t 30 s
LEVEL - V - KEY
1. D 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. B 7.A,B,C
A) 1.1 km B) 5 km C) 55 km D) None 8.A,B,C 9. A,B,D 10. C,D 11. A,C,D 12. B,C
38. The velocity-time graph of a particle moving 13. A,C 14.C 15. A 16. B 17. B 18. D
in a straight line is shown in figure. The 19. i - b, ii - a, iii - d, iv - c
acceleration of the particle at t 9 is 20. 8 21. 1 22. 9 23. C 24. B 25. C
v(ms–1) 26. A 27. B 28. A 29. C 30. B,C,D
31. A,B,C 32. A,C
15 33. a- (r,t) b-(p) c-(q) d-(s)
10 34. A - i,ii B - iii, C - iv, D - iv
35. 2 36. 5 37. C 38. C 39. A,B,C,D
5
40. A,C,D
t(s)
2 4 6 8 10 12
LEVEL - V - HINTS
2 2 2
A) Zero B) 5 ms C) 5 ms D) 2 ms s/3 s
1. Sol: t1
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 4 12
39. Figure shows the velocity( v) of a particle 2s 2s
plotted against time ( t). 2 t 0 4 kt 0 t 0 2 4k or t 0
3 3 2 4k
v s
T Average velocity = t t t k
O 1 0 0
2T
t
s 6 2 4k
A) The particle changes its direction of motion at s 2s 1 k 5 6k
some point 12 3 2 4k
B) The acceleration of the particle remains
constant . 1
v av 5 6k 12 24k gives k
C) The displacement of the particle is zero 2
D) The initial and final speeds of the particle are t0
the same. Required time = kt 0 .
40. A particle moves in astraight with the velocity 2
as shown in figure. At t 0, x 16 m . 2. Given v 3 x 2 2 x; differentiating v , we get
dv dx
6 x 2 6 x 2 v
dt dt
82 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
a 6 x 2 3 x 2 2 x Now put x= 2 m 6. |Average velocity| =
displacement
time
2
a 6 2 2 (3 2 2 2) 80 ms 2 AB 2
= time 1 = 2 m/s.
3. If police is able to catch the dacoit after time t, then
1 dv
vt x t 2. This gives t 2 vt x 0 7. Acceleration = v 0 kx
2 2 dt
dx
v v 2 2 x x v v a kv k v kx
or t For t be real, v 2 2 x dt 0
dv dv dv
2 1/ 2 Further, a kv kv kdt
4.SOL: x 1 t or x 1 t
2 2
dt dt v
v1 t
dx 1 1/ 2 1/ 2 dv 1 v
1 t 2 2t t 1 t 2 v v k 0 dt t k log e v10
dt 2 0
d 2x 1/ 2 1 3/ 2 Since, v=v 0+kx. Hence slope of velocity
a 2 1 t2
dt
t 1 t2
2
2t
dv
displacement curve is k
dx
1 t2 u1a1 u2a2
3
x x 8.
v sin l/2 l/2
l 1 l 1
2m 8
u1 t a1 t 2 ...(1) and u1t a 2 t 2
2 2 2 2
5.
4m l 1
u 2 t a 2 t 2 ....(2)
v cos 2 2
2
Time of crosing v sin u 2 u1
subtracting (1) and (2) , we get t 2 a a ....(3)
Time in which truck just able to catch the man = 1 2
Substituting (3) in (1) or(2) and rearranging, we get.
4
4 u 2 u1
2 1 2
8 v cos l a u a 2 u1 ...(4)
2 4 a1 a 2
For safe crosing v sin = 8 v cos Since the particle P & Q reach the other ends of
A and B with equal velocities say v
8 For particle P v 2 u12 2a 2 l ... (5)
or 16 2 v cos 4v sin or v cos 2sin
For particle Q v 2 u 22 2a 2 l ...(6)
For v minimum cos 2sin is maximum Substracting and then substituting value of l and
d rearranging, we get
so , cos 2sin 0
d u 2 u1 a1 a 2 8 a1u 2 a 2 u1
sin 2 cos 0 dv
tan 2 9. a , If velocity changes, definiety there will
dt
1 2 be acceleration. If speed changes, then velocity
cos , sin also changes, so definietely there will be
5 5 acceleration.
8 5 8 Acceleration may be due to change in the
v min direction of velocity only and not magnitude.
Now 5 5 If body has acceleration, its speed may changes
3.57 m / s if acceleration is due to change in magnitude of
velocity.
NARAYANAGROUP 83
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
5 5 13. Since, the body is at rest at x = 0 and x = 1. Hence,
4t t dt
2
vdt a cannot be positive for all time in the interval 0 t
1
0 0
v 5
5
10. Average velocity Therefore, first the particle is accelerated and then
dt
0
dt
0
retarded. Now, total time it = 1 s (given)
S = Area under v – t graph
2 t3 125 2s
2t 3 50 \Height or vmax = t = 2 m/s is also fixed.
0
3 25 5
1
5 5 35 3 Area or S = 2 t vmax
For average speed, let us put v= 0, which gives
V
t 0 amd t 4s
average speed =
Vmax = 2m/s
2
4 5 4 5 1 3
2
vdt vdt
0 4
(4t t )dt vdt
0 4
5
O
t
5 1
dt If height and base is fixed, area is also fixed
0 I n case 2 : A cceleration = Retardation = 4 m/s2
4 5 In case 1 : Acceleration > 4 m/s2 while Retardation
2 t3 2 t3 < 4 m/s2.
2t 3 2t 3
0 4 Hence, a ³ 4 at some point or points in its path.
5 14. At time t, Xt and Xp are coordinates of train and
4 5 passenger respectively.
2 t3 2 t3
2t 3 2t 3 1
0 4 13 1
ms
X t a1 t 2 and X p v P t S
5 5 2
For acceleration : If passenger catches the train,
Xt = Xp
dv d
a 4t t 2 4 2t At t 0, a 4 ms 2 v P v P2 2a1S
dt dt 1 2
or a1t vP t S or t
dv
0 x0 2 a1
11. v. dx v or dv dx 2
v0 0 10 10 2 1 25.5
3seconds
v 1
v0 x0 x0 0 ; 15. The critical distacne ‘Sc’ for which passenger will
v t
take the ten seconds time to catch the train is given
dv dv
v (or ) dt v 2P
dt v0
v 0 by Sc
2a1
v v0 e t or v 0 for t The time is 10 seconds, if v 2P 2a1S 0
v0 1 . 2
v when t v 2P 10
e Sc 50m
12. The particle’s velocity is getting zero at t = 3 s, 2a t 2 1
where it changes its direction of motion. 16. For critical distance, passenger catches the train in
For 0 < t < 3 s, V is negative, a is positive, so vP
particle is slowing down. time, t a So, required velocity of train = a t .t
For t < 3, both V and a are positive, so the particle t
is speeding up. v
a t P VP / 2 10m / sec
at
17. Let they meet after time t , then the distance
travelled by both in time t should be same
84 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
1 2
s 8t 4t t 4 s
v 2 9 ms 1 .
2 23. According to the third equation of motion
18. s 8t 8 4 32 m
v 2 u 2 2as Given v 3v, u v and a g
dS dv
19. v 2 t , a 2 So, i b 2 2 4v 2
dt dt or 3v v 2 gs or s
3 g
vdt 3 2 9 4 24. Let the initial relative velocity, rerlative
v 2
3
5 So , ii a . acceleration and relative displacement of the with
1
dt
2
respect to the floor of the lift be ur , ar and sr ,
Velocity at then sr ur t 1/ 2 ar t 2
t 1 s : v 2 1 2 , So , iii d
Initial displacement i.e., and ur uc ul 10 10 0
t 0, S a, So, iv c ar ac al 9.8 0 9.8 ms 2
1 1 1 2 sr sc sl 2.45m
20. t1 t2 t , v1 v2 v, S a1t2 , S a2t2
2 2
v1 a1t1 , v2 a2t2 v2 v a1t1 2.45 0 t 1/ 2 9.8 t 2
v a1t 2 1
a2t2 v a1t1 a1t2 t2 or t 1 / 2 or t sec
2
a1 a2
25. Suppose the body be projected vertically
a2 t1 t a t a1 a2 upwards from A with a speed u0 .
1 2 1
a1 t2 t2 a1 v a1t 1 2
Using equation s ut at , we get
a2 v a2 t 2
a2 v a1 a2t v a1 a2 a1t
a1 v a1t 1 2
For first case: h u0 t1 gt1 ( i )
2
v
a1a2 t 8 ms 1
1 2
21. Vp 90 kmh 1 25 ms 1 For second case: h u0t2 gt2 ( ii )
1 1
2
Vc 72 kmh 20 ms
1
( i )- ( ii ) 0 u0 t2 t1 g t2 t1
2 2
In 10 s culprit reaches point B from A. Distance
covered by culprit, S vt 20 10 200 m . 2
At time t 10 s , the police jeep is 200 behind 1
u0 g t1 t2 ( iii )
the culprit. Relative velocity between jeep culprit 2
is 25-20 = 5 ms 1 . Putting the value of u0 in ( ii ), we get
S 200
Time 40 s ( Relative velocity is 1 1
V 5 h g t1 t2 t2 gt22
considered ) 2 2
In 40 s, the police jeep will move from A to a 1
distance S. Where h gt1t2 ( iv)
2
S vt 25 40 1000 m 1.0 km away.
For third case: u 0, t ?
The jeep will catch up with the bike 1 km far from
the turning. 1 1
h 0 t gt 2 or h gt 2 ( v)
22. x 6t 2 t 3 3t 4 v 12t 3t 2 3 2 2
dv Combining Eq. ( iv ) and ( v), we get
V= max when 0 t 2sec
dt 1 2 1
gt gt1t2 or t t1t2
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 85
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
26. Suppose h be the height of each storey, then t1 t 2 t 3 if S3 S2 S1
1 1 31. Let they meet at hieght h after time t.
25h 0 10 t 2 10 52 or h 5m
2 2 1
In first second, let the stone passes through n h 100t gt 2 for first bullet
storey. 2
1 2
1 2 100 t 5 g t 5 for second bullet
So n 5 10 1 or n 1 2
2
27. Suppose v be the velocity attained by body after t 12.5sec (after solving) So (a) is correct.
Time of flight of first bullet
time t1 . Then v u gt1 (i)
2u 2 100
Let the body reach the samepoint at time t2 . Now T 20 s
g 10
velocity will be downwards with same magnitude Second bullet will reach after 5 s of reaching first
v , then v u gt2 ( ii) . So ( b) is correct.
( i) -( iii ) 2v g t2 t1 v1 100 10 20 100 ms 1
2v 2 u v2 100 10 15 50 ms 1
or t2 t1 u gt1 2 t1
g g g v1
ratio: 2 :1 So ( c) is correct.
28. (i) For uniformly accelerated/decelerated motion v2
2 2
v = u 2gh maximum height attained
i.e., v – h graph will be a parabola (because 2
equation is quadratic). u 2 100
(ii) Initially velocity is downwards (–ve) and then H 2 g 2 10 500 m . Hence ( d ) is incorrect
after collision it reverses its direction with lesser 32. Ball
magnitude. I.e., velocity is upwards (+ve). Graph A will return to the top of tower after
(A) satisfies both these conditions. 2u 2 10
T 2s
Therefore, correct answer is (A). g 10
Note that time t = 0 corresponds to the point on With speed of 10ms 1 downward.
the graph where h = d
v
And this time, B is also projected downwards
at t = 0, h = d with 10ms 1 .
2 So both reach ground simultaneously. Also they
d 1 2: increases
h downwards will hit the ground with the same speed.
3 1
At 2 velocity changes dx
2
Collision takes its direction 33. x t 3 x t 2 6t 9 v 2t 6
place here 2 2 3V decreases upwards dt
29. Distance traveled in tth second is, At the point of reversal, v=0, so 2t 6 0 t 3s
st = u + at –
1
a Given : u = 0 t 0 1 2 3 4 5
2 x 9 4 1 0 1 4
1 v -6 -4 -2 0 2 4
an – a
sn 2 2n – 1
= a 2 2 2 2 2 2
s 1 = 2n 1
n 1 a n 1 – a Nature
2 Decele Decele Decele Accele Accele Accele
of
Hence, the correct option is (C). rating rating rating rating rating rating
30. As going up, speed of the particle is decreasing Motion
and hence time taken in crossing the windows Displacement of the particle from t =0 to t =6s is
(if S1 S2 S3 ) will be t1 t 2 t 3 . Since, zero Distance travelled by the particle from t =0 to
t=6 is 9+9=18m Average speed of the particle is
v u at u t (as acceleration is same) Total Distance Travelled
So, v1 v 2 v3 (as for equal windows v av
Total Time Taken
t1 t 2 t 3 ) For unequal windows. 18
vav 3ms 1
6
86 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Average Velocity of the particle is 200 5 20 2 1 5 m
Displacement
v av 0 In the last second of upward journey , the bodies
Time will travel same distance.
Acceleration of the particle over the entire duration 37. Maximum height will be attained at 110 s.
-2.
of motion is 2ms Because after 110 s, velocity becomes negative
Displacement of the particle from t =0 to t =6s is and rocket will start coming down. Area from 0
zero Distance travelled by the particle from t =0 to
t=6 is 9+9=18m 1
to 110 s is 110 1000 55, 000 m 55 km
Average speed of the particle is 2
Total Distance Travelled 38. Acceleration between 8 to 10 s( or at t= 9 s) .
v av v v 5 15
Total Time Taken a 2 1 5m / s 2
t2 t1 10 8
18 1
vav 3ms 39. Particle changes direction of motion at t T .
6
Average Velocity of the particle is Acceleration remains constant, because the
velocity-time graph is a straight line. Displacement
Displacement is zero, because net area is zero. Initial and final
v av 0
Time speeds are equal.
Acceleration of the particle over the entire duration 40. Maximum value of position coordinate = initial
of motion is 2ms-2. coordinate+area under graph up to t 24 s ( As
34. For a round trip, displacement is zero; hence up to t= 24 s, the displacement of the particle will
v av 0. Also be positive )
v1 v 2
v av , when v1 is initial, v2 is final. 6
2 2
Hence i. a, b V 0 30 40
t(s)
–2 10 18 24
Average speed
–6
Total dis tan ce 2 v0 / 2 g v0
2
( vav ) = Maximum value of position coordinate
Time of flight 2v0 / g 2
26 1 6
v 16 2 10 18 10 2 24 18
Tascent Tdescent 0 Henace iii d ., iv d 2
g
35. Taking upward direction as positive, let us work in LEVEL - VI
the frame of lift. Acceleration of ball relative to
A. MOTION ALONG HORIZONTAL AXIS
lift = ( g+ a) downwards, so areal g a , SINGLE QUESTION TYPE
initial velocity; urel v , final velocity vrel v as 1. The decelaration experienced by a moving
the ball will reach the man with same speed w.r.t motor boat, after its engine is cut-off is given
lift. dv
by kv 3 , where k is constant.If v0 is the
Apply vrel urel arel t v v g a t t 2s dt
magnitude of the velocity at cut-off, the
a
36. s u 2n 1 magnitude of the velocity at a time t after
2 the cut-off is
u 100ms 1 , a 10 ms 2 and s 5m
v0
5 10 5 2n 1 gives n 10 s a) v0 / 2 b) v c) v0 e kt d) 2v02 kt 1
Body when thrown up with velocity 200 ms 1 2. A jet plane starts from rest at S = 0 and is
will take 20 s to reach the highest point. Distance subjected to the acceleration shown.
travelled in 20th second is Determine the speed of the plane when it has
travelled 60 m.
NARAYANAGROUP 87
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
a(m/s)
2 6. A train stops at two stations s distance apart
and takes time t on the journey from one station
22.5 to the other. Its motion is first of uniform
acceleration a and then immediately of uniform
retardation b, then
1 1 t2 1 1 t2
a) b)
a b s a b s
150 S(m)
1 1 t2 1 1 t2
A) 46.47 m / s B) 36.47 m / s c) d)
a b 2s a b 2s
C) 26.47 m / s D) 16.47 m / s 7. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously with
3. Velocity versus displacement graph of a initial speeds of u1and u2 (u2>u1). They hit the
particle moving in a straight line is shown in ground after 6 s and 10 s respectively. Which
figure. Corresponding acceleration versus graph in fig.correctly represents the time
velocity graph will be : variation of x (x 2 x1 ) , the relative
v(m/s) position of the second stone with respect to
the first upto t=10 s? Assume that the stones
do not rebound after hitting the ground.
10
A
x x
10 s(m)
a(m/s2) a(m/s2)
A) B B) B
0 0
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
10 10 t t
A) B)
A A
10 v(m/s) 10 v(m/s)
x x
a(m/s2) a(m/s2)
C) B D) B
10 10 0 0
C) D) 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
t t
10 v(m/s) 10 v(m/s) 8. A particle moving along x - axis has
4. The relation between time t and distance x acceleration a at time t given by
is t a x 2 b x . Where a and b are t
a a0 1 where a0 and T are constants.
constants. The retardation is T
a) 2av 3 b) 2b v 3 The particle at t 0 has zero velocity. The
c) 2ab v3 d) 2b 3 v 3 particles velocity when acceleration reduces
5. The motion of a body falling from rest in a to zero.
resisting medium is described by the equation 1
dv a) a 0T 2 b) a0T 2
= a -b v where a and b are constants. 2
dt
The velocity at any time t is given by 1
c) a0T d) a0T
a b -bt 2
(a) v = 1 -e (b) v= e
-b t
b a 9. A cone falling with a speed v0 strikes and
a b bt penetrates the block of a packing material. The
(c) v = 1 + e
-bt
(d) v= e accelertation of the cone after impact is
b a
88 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
a g cx 2 . Where c is a positive constant s
and x is the penetration distance. If maximum
penetration depth is x m then c equals
2 gx m v02 2 gx m v02
a) b)
x m2 x m2 t
5s t1 t2
6 gx m 3v02 6 gx m 3v02
c) d) 15. The maximum hight reached by the stone is
2 x m3 2 x m3
A) 30m B) 40m C) 45m D) 28m
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 16. t1 is
10 If the velocity of the particle is given by v x A) 4s B) 6s C) 2s D) 1s
and intially particle was at x=4m, then which 17. t2 is
of the following are correct. A) 4s B) 4.45s C) 3.45s D) 9.45s
(A) at t=2 sec, the position of the particle is x= 9 m MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
(B) Particle acceleration at t= 2 sec. is 1 m/s2. 18. Study the following.
(C) Particle acceleration is ½ m/s2 through out the
List - I
motion
(D) Particle will never go in negative direction from a) A body covers first half of distance with a speed v1
its starting position.
and second half of distance with a speed v2
11. Starting from rest a particle is first accelerated
for time t1 with constant acceleration a1 and b) A body covers first half of a time with a speed v1
then stops in time t2 with constant retardation
a2. Let v1 be the average velocity in this case and second half of time with a speed v2
and s1 the total displacment. In the second c) A body is projected vertically up from ground
case, it is accelerated for the same time t1 with
with a speed gh .Considering its total motion
constant acceleration 2a1 and comes to rest
with constant retardation a2 in time t3. If v2 is d) A body freely released from a height h
the average velocity in this case and s2 the List - II
total displacement. Then
(a) v2 = 2v1 (b) 2v1 < v2 < 4v1 gh
i) Average speed is
(c) s2 = 2s1 (d) 2s1 < s2 < 4s1 2
PASSAGE TYPE QUESTIONS v v2
Comprehension - 1 ii) Average speed is 1
2
Two particles A and B start from rest at the
origin x=0 and move along a straight line such 2v1v2
-2 2
that aA=(6t-3)ms and aB=(12t -8)ms , where-2 iii) Average speed is v1 v2
t is in seconds. Based on the above facts,
answer the following questions. gh
12. Total distance travelled by A at t=4 s is iv) Average speed is
2
A) 40m B) 41m C) 42m D) 43m
19. For a particle moving along X - axis if
13. Total distance travelled by B at t=4 s is
A) 192m B) 184m C) 196m D) 200m acceleration (constant) is acting along -ve X-
14.. Total distance between them at t = 4 s is axis, then match the entires of Column I with
A) 144m B) 148m C) 152m D) 156m entires of Column II.
Comprehension - 2 Column -I
A balloon is start rising with constant (A) Initial velocity > 0
acceleration 2m/s2 from ground at t=0s. A stone (B) Initial velocity < 0
is dropped at t=5s. s-t graph for the given (C) x > 0
situation is shown in figure. Answer the following. (D) x < 0
NARAYANAGROUP 89
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
Column -II shortest time in which the train can travel
i) Particle may move in +ve X - direction with between two stations 8 km apart is x minutes
increasing speed. and 10 s, if it stops at both stations. The value
ii) Particle may move in +ve X-direction with of x is.
decreasing speed. 24. A body starts from rest with uniform
iii) Particle may move in -ve X - direction with acceleration. Its velocity after 2n second is
increasing speed. v0. the displacement of the body in last n
iv) Particle may move in -ve X - direction with 3v0 n
decreasing speed. second is . Determine the value of ?
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
B. MOTION ALONG VERTICAL AXIS :
20. A train starts from station A with uniform
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
acceleration a1 for some distance and then 25. A ball is thrown from the top of a tower in
goes with uniform retardation a2 for some vertically upward direction. Velocity at
more distance to come to rest at station B. apoint h metre below the point of projection
The distance between stations A and B is 4 is twice of the velocity at a point h metre
km and the train takes 1/15 h to complete above the point of projection. find the
maximum height reached by the ball above
this journey. Acceleration are in km/ min 2
the top of tower.
1 1 a) 2 h b) 3 h c) (5/3) h d) (4/3) h
unit. If a a x , find the value of x.
1 2 26. A parachutist drops first freely from an
aeroplane for 10 s and then his parachute
21. A cat, on seeing a rat a distance d 5 m,
opens out. Now he descends with a net
starts with velocity u 5 ms 1 and moves retardation of 2.5 ms 2 . If he bails out of the
with acceleration 2.5 ms 2 in order to plane at a height of 2495 m and g 10 ms 2 ,
catch it, while the rat with acceleration his velocity on reaching the ground will be
starts from rest. For what value of will the a) 5 ms 1 b) 10 ms 1 c) 15 ms 1 d) 20 ms 1
cat overtake the rat ? (in ms 2 ) MORE THAN ONE QUESTION TYPE
22. On a two-lane road, car A is travelling with 27. A particle is projected vertically upward with
velocity u from a point A, when it returns to
a speed of 36 kmh 1 . Two cars B and C
point of projection
approach car A In opposite directions with a a) Its average speed is u /2
1
speed of 54 kmh each. At a certain instant, b) Its average velocity is zero
when the distance AB is equal to AC, both c) Its displacement is zero
being 1 km, B decides to overtakes A before d) Its average speed is u
C does. What minimum acceleration of car B 28. A particle is thrown vertically in upward
(in m / s 2 ) is required to avoid an accident ? direction and passes three equally spaced
–1 –1 –1
windows of equal heights then
vB = 15ms vA = 10ms vC = 15ms (A) average speed of the particle while passing the
windows satisfies the relation u av u av u av
1 2 3
B A C (B) the time taken by the particle to cross the
windows satisfies the relation t1 < t2 < t3
1000 m 1000 m (C) the magnitude of the acceleration of the particle
23. The accelerator of a train can produce a while crossing the windows satisfies the relation a1
uniform acceleration of 0.25 ms-2 and its brake = a2 a3
-2
can produce a retardation of 0.5 ms . The
90 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
(D) the change in the speed of the particle while C. GRAPHS:
crossing the windows would satisfy the relation SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
u1 u 2 u 3 . 37. The velocity-time graph of abody is given in
COMPREHENSION QUESTION figure. The maximum accceleration in ms 2
An elevator car whose floor to ceiling distance in is
–1
v(ms )
equal to 2.7 m starts ascending with constant
2
acceleration 1.2m/s , 2 sec. after the starts a bolt
begins falling from the ceiling of the car. Answer the 60
2
following questions. (g=9.8 m/s )
29. The bolt’s free fall time 20
(A) 0.3 s (B) 0.5 s (C) 0.7 s (D) 0.9 s
0 t(s)
30. The velocity of bolt at instant it loses contact is 20 30 40 70
(A) 1.2 m/s(B) 2.4 m/s (C) 4 m/s (D) 10 m/s a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1
31. Distance moved by elevator car w.r.t. ground 38. The velocity-time graph of a body is shown
frame during the free fall time of the bolt. in figure. The ratio of magnitude of average
acceleration during the intervals OA and AB
(A) 1.44 m (B) 1.63 m (C) 1.68 m (D) 1.97 m is
32. Distance covered by the bolt during the free v(ms )
–1
fall time w.r.t. ground frame.
(A) 0.7 m (B) 0.9 m (C) 1.1 m (D) 1.3m
33. The displacement by the bolt during its free D C
40
fall time w.r.t. ground frame
(A) 0.3 m (B) 0.7 m (C) 0.9 m (D) 1 m 30° E 60°
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS O A B t(s)
34. A stone is dropped from a height h. a) 1 b) 1/2 c) 1/3 d) 3
Simultaneously another stone is thrown up 39. The displacement-time graph of a moving
particle with constant acceleration is shown
from the ground with such a velocity that it can in the figure. The velocity time graph is given
reach a height of 4h. The time when two stones by
x(m)
h
cross each other is kg where k = ______
35. A particle moves along x-axis satisfying the
equation x t t 1t 2 (t is in seconds
and ‘x’ is in meters). Find the magnitude of 0 1 2
t(s)
initial velocity of the particle in m/s. v v
36. The position vector of a particle varies with
time as r r0t 1 t where r 0 is a constant
vector and is a positive constant. The A) t B) t
distance travelled by particle in a time interval 1 2
0 0 2
1
in which particle returns to its initial position
v v
Kr0
is . Determine the value of K?
16
C) t D) t
0 1 2 0 1 2
NARAYANAGROUP 91
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
40. The displacement-time graph of a moving
x x
particle is shown in figure. The instantaneous
velocity of the particle is negative at the
point.
t t
displacement
D
C F x x
E
a) D b) F c) C d) E
t t
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
41. The velocity-time plot a particle moving on a
straight line is shown in figure. 43. The particle is moving with constant speed
v(ms )
–1
a) In graphs( i ) and ( iii )
b) In graphs ( i ) and ( iv )
10
c) In graphs ( i ) and ( ii )
d) In graphs ( i )
0 t(s)
10 20 30 44. The particle has negative acceleration
–10 a) In graph ( i ) b) In graph ( ii )
c) In graph ( iii ) d) In graph ( i v)
–20
a) The particle has a constant acceletration MATRIX MATCHING QUESTION
b) The particle has never tuned around 45. The displacement versus time is given
c) The particle has zero displacement figure. Sections OA and BC are parabolic.
d) The average speed in the interval 0 to 10 s is CD is parallel to the time axis.
the same as the average speed in the interval 10 s C D
to 20 s
42. The displacement of a particle as a function
S A B
of time is shown in figure. It indicates
S
O t
Column-I
A. OA
B. AB
O t C. BC
1 2 4 5
D. CD
a) The particle starts with a certain velocity, but
the motion is retarded and finally the particle stops Column-II
b) The velocity of the particle decreases i. Velocity increases with time linearly
c) The acceleration of the particle is in opposite ii. Velocity decreases with time
direction to the velocity iii. Velocity is independent of time
d) The particle starts with a constant velocity, the iv. Velocity is zero
motion is accelerated and finally the particle 46. Study the following v t graphs in Column I
moves with another constant velocity. carefully and match appropriately with the
statements given in Column II. Assume that
PASSAGE TYPE QUESTION motion takes place from time 0 to T .
PASSAGE-1:
Study the following graphs:
92 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Column-I v 75 22.5 45 13.5 46.47
v v
1
v0 4. t x 2 x; 1 2 xv v v 2 x
T 0 2 x.a v.v a 0 2 x a 2 v 2
A) O B) O
t T t
–v0 2 v 2 2 v 2
a 2 v3
v v 2 x 1
v
v0 v0 dv v dv t
T/2 T 5. a bv dt
C) O D) O i dt 0 a bv 0
T t 2 v a bv
–v0 ln a bv 0 t ln bt
b a
Column-II
i. Net displacement is positive, but not zero a bv ae bt
ii. Net displacement is negative, but not zero a
v 1 e bt
iii.Particle returns to its initial position again b
iv. Acceleration is positive. v 2
v2 v2 1 1
LEVEL - VI - KEY 6. s
2a 2b 2 a b
1. D 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. C
ab
7. A 8. C 9. D 10. A,C,D 1.A,D Again t v t
12) B 13) D 14) C 15) A 16) B 17) D a b ab
18. A-iii, B- ii, C-iv, D-i t2 1 1
19. A-ii, B-iii, C-ii, D- ii,iii s 2
t2 1 1
20. 2 21. 5 22. 1 23. 5 24. 4 25. C 1 1 a b
2 2s a b
26. A 27. ABC 28. ABD 29. C 30. B 31. D a b
32. D 33. B 34. 8 35. 2 36. 8 37. A 1 2
38. C 39. A 40. D 41. AD 42. ABC 7. x1 u1t gt
2
43. B 44. C
1
45. A - i, B - iii, C - ii, D - iv x2 u2t gt 2
46. A - ii,iv, B - i,iv C - iii, D - i 2
It is valid up t=6sec only
LEVEL - VI - HINTS a0t a0T
dv 8. a a0 a 0, at t a T
1. Here kv 3 T 0
dt v T T
dv vdv t
a0
dv a0 dt t dt
or 3 kdt or
v v0 v 0 kdt
3
0 0
T 0
v
1 1 2 a0 T 2 a0T
or 2v 2 kt or 2v 2 2v 2 kt , or v a0T
V0 0 T 2 2
v02 v0 dv
2
v or v 9. v g cx 2
2
1 2v0 kt 2v02 kt 1 dx
0 x x
dv s v
2. a v a.ds v.dv v 2 u 2
ds 0 u
v dv g dx c x2 dx
v0 0 0
Area under as curve v2 u 2
v02 3
cx
1 1 2 gx
2 150 22.5 2 90 13.5 v 0 2 3
2
v 75 22.5 45 13.5
NARAYANAGROUP 93
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
x 3c v2 3 g 3v 2 The positions of particle B at t 2 s and 4s
gx 0 c 2 03 4 2
3 2 x 2x
are X B t 2
2 4 2 4m
10. v x 4 2
XB t 4 4 4 4 192m
dx dx
x 1/2 dt 2 x t c Particle B has travelled a total distance given by
dt x dB = 2(4)+192=200m
But at t 0, x 4, c 4 At t = 4 s the distance between A and B is
2 2
t 4 6 36 X AB 192 40 152m
x x 9
4 4 4 1 2
dv 1 15. s ut at ; a g ; v 0
av x ½m / s2 . 2
dx 2 x 16. At t t1; v 0
11. Valid relations are: v2 2v1; 17. At t t2 ; s 0
2 s1 s2 4 s1 18. Equation of motion
19. Equation of motion
12,13,14 20. t1 t2 4 min, v a1t1 a2t2
For A 1
VA t S 4v 4 2v v 2
2
dvA a A dt dv (6t 3)dt
0
A
0
VA 3t 2 3t v
For B
V0 t
2
a1 a2
dvB aB dt dvB (12t B)dt
0 0
VB 4t 8t 3 t
t1 t 2
Let us now calculate the times when A and B
1 1 1 1 1 1
are at rest. The particle A is at rest (VA=0), t1 t2 v 4 2 2
when a
1 a 2 a
1 a
2 a1 a2
2
3t -3t=0 t = 0 s and t = 1 s 1 2
The particle B is at rest (VB=0), when 21. For rat S t (i)
3
2
4t - 8t = 0 t = 0 s and t = 2 s 1 2
The position of particles A and B can be detemined For cat S d ut t 0 ( ii )
2
dx Putting the value of S from Eq. ( i ) in Eq ( ii ),
using v , so dxA= vA dt
dt a b t 2 2ut 2d 0
XA t
dx A (3t 2 3t ) dt 2u 4u 2 8d (
0 0 t
2
3
X A t 3 t 2 Similarly dXB = vBdt u2 u2
2 For t to be real,
XB t 2d 2d
3
dx (4t
B 8t )dt X = t 4 - 4t 2 Substituting a, d and u we get
B
0 0 52
The positions of particle A at t = 1 s and 4s are 2.5 2.5 2.5 5 ms 2
2 5
3 22. The situation can be roughly shown in the figure.
X A t 1s 13 (12 ) 0.5m
2 Let C take time t to overtake A.
–1 –1 –1
vB = 15ms vA = 10ms vC = 15ms
3
X A t 4 s 43 (4 2 ) 40m
2
Particle A has travelled a total distance given by B A C
dA=2(0.5)+40=41m 1000 m 1000 m
94 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
d rel 1000 m, vrel 10 15 25 ms 1 26. The velocity v acquired by the parachutist after
10 s.
d rel 1000 v u gt 0 10 10 100ms 1
Here t v 25 40 s
rel
1 2 1
Let acceleration of B be a for overtaking. Then, s1 ut gt 0 10 102 500m
2 2
d rel 1000 m; vrel 15 10 5 ms 1 The distance travelled by the parachutist under
retadation is
d rel a and t 40 s
s2 2495 500 1995 m
1
Using d rel urel t arel t 2 Let vg be the velocity on reaching the ground.
2
1 2
Then vg2 v 2 2as2
100 5 40 a 40 a 1 ms 2
2 2
or vg2 100 2 2.5 1995 or vg 5 ms 1
1/ 2 1
2 l 2 l 2 27. For vertically projected body, if it returns to the
23. tmin vmax starting point, displacement and average velocity
become zero. As acceleration is constant,
average speed during upward or downward
0 .2 5 0 .5 8 1 0 3 2
t m in 3 10 s 5 m in 1 0 s . motion is u 0 / 2 u / 2 . The same will be the
0 .2 5 0 .5
average speed for the whole motion.
v0 1 2 1
24. v 0 2na a s 2n an 2 28. As the particle is going up, it is slowing down, i.e.,
2n 2 2 speed is decreasing and hence we can say that time
3 2 3 v 0 2 3v 0 n taken by the particle to cover equal distances is
an n increasing as the particle is going up.
2 2 2n 4
Hence, t1 < t2 < t3.
u2
25. H ; given v2 2v1 Distance 1
2g As u av , we have u av
time time
(i) A to B: v12 u 2 2 gh Acceleration throughout the motion remains same
from equation,
(ii) A to C v22 u 2 2 g h
v u at, u t . So, u1 u 2 u 3 .
(iii) solving (i), (ii),(iii) we get the value of u 2 as 1 1
10g/h/3 and then we get the value of H by using 29. yrel urel t arel t 2 2.7 0 9.8 1.2 t 2 t 0.7 sec
2 2
u2
H 30. v = u + at = 0+(1.2)(2) = 2.4 m/s
2g
1 2 1 2
31. y ut at 2.4 0.7 1.2 0.7
v 2 2
1 H
2
B 2u 2 2.4 1.3m
u h
32. Distance s | y | 0.7
2g 9.8
A
33. Sb Sbe Se Sb 2.7 1.97 Sb 0.7m .
h
C 1 2 1
34. S1 gt ; S 2 ut gt 2
v2 2 2
u2
S1 S2 h; 4h u 8 gh
2g
NARAYANAGROUP 95
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII
ut h 41. Since the graph is astraight line, its slope is
constant, it means acceleration of the particle is
8gh t h constant.
Velocity of the particle changes from positive to
h negative at t 10 s , so particle changes direction
t
8g at this time.
The particle has zero displacement up to 20 s,
2
35. x t t 3t 2 but not for the entire motion.
The average speed in the interval of 0 to 10 s is
t 3 3t 2 2t the same as the average speed in the internal of
10 s to 20 s because distance covered in both
v 3t 2 6t 2 v0 2 time interval is same.
42. Initially at orogin, slope is not zero, so the particle
36. r r0 t 1 t has some initial velocity but with time we see that
slope is decreasing and finally the slope necomes
v r0 2 t r0 zero, so the particle stops finally.
1 PASSAGE TYPE
v 0 at t
2 43,44.
distance travelled before coming to original 1) For the graphs ( i ) and ( iv ), slope is constant
position hence the velocity is constant
r0 r 2) For The graph ( iii ), the particle’s velocity first
r 2 0 decreases and then increases in negative directio.
4
2 It means negative acceleration is involved in this
motion.
k 8
2 dS
45. In OA, S t , v 2t
dt
37. Maximum acceleration will be from 30 to 40 s,
because slope in this interval maximum i. e., v t
v2 v1 60 20 i.e., velocity increases with time
2
a 4 ms
t2 t1 40 30 dS
In AB, S t , v 1
dt
0 1
38. During OA , acceleration = tan 30 ms 2 46. 1) Area of v t graph lies below the time axis, so
3
displacement is negative, but slope is positive, so
0
During AB , acceleration = tan 60 3 ms . 2 accceleration is also positive.
2) Area of v t graph lies above the time axis, so
1/ 3 1 displacement is positive, and slope is positive, so
required ratio =
3 3 accceleration is also positive.
39. At t 0 , slope of the x-t graph is zero; hence, 3) Displacement is zero, because half area is
velocity is zero at t 0 . As time increases, slope above time axis and half below. Slope is negative,
so acceleration is negative
increases in negative direction; hence, velocity
increases in negative deirection. At point’I’, slope 4) Area of v t graph lies above the time axis, so
changes suddenly from negative to positive value: displacement is positive, and alope is negative,
hence, velocity changes suddenly from negative so acceleration is also negative.
to positive and then velocity starts decreasing and
becomes zero at’2’, option ( a) represents all
these clearly.
40. The slope of the graph is negative at this point.
96 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
MOTION IN A PLANE
SYNOPSIS Special Cases
a) If P and Q are in the same direction i.e.
Addition of Vectors
θ=00 then R = P + Q
Two Vectors A and B of same kind are added
geometrically as shown. b) If P and Q are in opposite direction i.e.
θ=1800 then R = P Q ; for P > Q
R = A+B c) If P and Q are perpendicular to each other
B 0
2 2
i.e. θ=90 then R = P +Q
θ θ
d) If P Q then R = 2Pcos & α = = .
A 2 2
i) If 60 then R 3P and 30
0
Resultant of number of vectors
Resultant is a single vector that gives the total effect ii) If 900 then R 2 P and 45
of number of vectors. iii) If 1200 then R P and 60
Resultant can be found by using
Triangle Law of Vectors: If two given vectors of
a) Parallelogram law of vectors
same kind are represented both in magnitude and
b) Triangle law of vectors
direction by the two adjacent sides of a triangle,
c) Polygon law of vectors
taken in order then the closing side taken in the
Parallelogram Law of vectors reverse order will give the resultant both in
P magnitude and direction.
B
R
Q Q (Q sin ) R PQ
Q
O D O
P P A
If P and Q are two vectors with angle between Law of equilibrium of forces:
If three forces represents the three sides of a
them, then the resultant vector R P Q . triangle taken in order then their resultant is zero.
Magnitude of resultant : If such forces acts on a particle simultaneously
then they keep that particle in equilibrium.
R = P 2 +Q 2 + 2PQcosθ
Direction of resultant :
Qsinθ
α = tan -1
w.r.t P F3 F2
P + Qcosθ
Psinθ
β = tan -1 w.r.t Q
Q + Pcosθ
The resultant of two vectors always lie in the plane O A
F1
containing the vectors, closer to vector of larger
magnitude. F1 F2 F3 0
NARAYANAGROUP 97
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
Lami’s theorem E D
If a body is in equilibrium under the action of three
coplanar concurrent forces P,Q,R at angles 2x x
3x
, , as shown in the figure. 0
Then the ratio of magnitude of one of the F 90 C
force to sine of angle between the other two 3x
vectors is always constant 0
60
P Q R
i.e: A B
sin sin sin
AB x, AC 3 x, AD 2 x, AE 3 x, AF x
P Q
WE -1 : ABCDEF is a regular hexagon with point
‘O’ as centre. Find the value of
AB AC AD AE AF .
E D
O
R F C
Polygon Law of Vectors 3x
" If number of vectors of same kind acting at a
point in the same plane in different directions are
represented both in magnitude and direction by A B
the adjacent sides of a polygon taken in order, Sol. From the diagram AB DE ,
BC EF
then the closing side taken in the reverse order
will give the resultant both in magnitude and AB AC AD AE AF
direction".
AB AB BC AD AD DE AD DE EF
D D C
3 AD 3 2 AO 6 AO
Applications of Polygon Law
E C If 'n' equal forces act on a body such that each
A+B+C+D
2
B+
E B force makes an angle with the previous one then
A+
n
B they form a closed polygon. So the resultant is zero.
A+
R B If each force of magnitude 'F' makes an angle
with previous one, then
O A A
a) the resultant is zero, if the number of forces is
OA + AB + BC + CD + DE = OE 2
n=
If many vectors form a closed n sided polygon 2
b) If the number of forces are n = 1 , then
with all the sides in the same order then the resultant
the resultant force is ‘F’.
is 0 .
Note :If x is the side of a regular hexagon
ABCDEF as shown in figure.
98 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
Subtraction of Vectors:
If two vectors P and Q represents adjacent sides
Subtraction of a vector Q from vector P is the of a parallelogram both in magnitude and direction
addition of P and -Q .
S P Q P Q then the two diagonals of parallelogram are
represented as
d1 P Q , d2 P Q
Q
P d1
Q 0 A Q
180-
Q
S d2
P B C P
here S P Q 1 1
The magnitude of P Q is
P d1 d 2 ; Q d1 d 2
2 2
S P 2 Q 2 2 PQ cos 1800 P, Q are two sides and R , S are two diagonals
S P 2 Q 2 2 PQ cos and of a parallelogram then R 2 S 2 2 P 2 Q 2
Q sin 1800
tan W.E - 2: A particle is moving eastwards with a
P Q cos 180 0
velocity of 5 m/s. In 10s the velocity changes
Q sin to 5 m/s northwards.Find the average
acceleration in this time.
w.r.t P
P Q cos
Δv vf - vi
Sol . a avg = =
Note: If P Q then P Q 2 P sin . Δt Δt
2
Subtraction of vectors is used to find v f 5m / s
i) change in velocity of a particle. V N
5 2m/s
ii) the relative velocity of one body with respect W E
to another body. 450
S
iii) change in momentum. V i 5m / s V i 5m / s
iv) acceleration of a particle etc.
Applications 5 ˆj 5iˆ 5 2 1
a avg m / s2
When a particle is performing uniform circular 10 10 2
motion with a constant speed v, then the Along north-west direction
magnitude of change in velocity when it describes
θ
an angle at the centre is Δv = 2vsin . W.E -3: Two vectors A and B have precisely equal
2
magnitudes. For the magnitude of A B to
v
be larger than the magnitude of A B by a
factor of n, what must be the angle between
0 them?
v Sol : A B n A B
If velocity of a particle changes from vi to vf in
time ‘t’ then
the
acceleration of the particle is given 2 A cos n2 A sin A B
v -v 2 2
by a = f i . 1 1 1 1 1
t tan ; tan 2 tan
2 n 2 n n
NARAYANAGROUP 99
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
W.E-4: The resultant of two forces whose AB
magnitudes are in the ratio 3:5 is 28 N. If Clearly, tan150 or AB OB tan150
OB
the angle of their inclination is 600 , then Thus, distance travelled by the aircraft in 10s,
find the magnitude of each force. AC=2AB=2(OB tan 150 ) = 2 3400 0.2679 1822m
speed of the aircraft
Sol . Let F1 and F2 be the two forces. 1822m
0 v= = 182.2m / s .
Then F1 3x; F2 5 x; R 28 N and 60 10s
R F12 F22 2 F1 F2 cos Position vector : Position vector of point A
2 2 with respect to O
28 3x 5x 2 3x 5 x cos 600
Y
28 9 x 2 25 x 2 15x 2 7 x A(x,y)
28
x 4.
7
F1 3 4 12 N , F2 5 4 20 N. O X
W.E - 5: What is the displacement of the point of a r x iˆ y ˆj
wheel initially in contact with the ground
when the wheel rolls forward half a Displacement vector in two dimensional Plane
revolution ? Take the radius of the wheel as
Y
R and the x-axis as the forward direction ?
Sol . From figure, during half revolution of the wheel,
the point A covers AC = R in horizontal A
B
direction, and BC =2R in vertical direction r1
B
r2
y O X
A x C If r1 , r2 are the initial and final position vectors
x R and y 2 R;
2
of a particle then AB represents the displacement
AB x 2 y 2 R (2 R ) 2 2
R 4
vector of a particle.
y 2R
and Tan 1 Tan 1 AB r 2 r1. AB x2 x1 iˆ y2 y1 ˆj
x R
The magnitude of the displacement vector is
2
Tan 1 with x- axis. 2 2
AB x2 x1 y2 y1
W.E -6: An aircraft is flying at a height of 3400 m Application : Condition for collision
above the ground.If the angle subtended at a Two particles 1 and 2 move with constant velocities
point on the ground by the aircraft positions
v1 and v2 . At ‘t = 0’ their position vectors are
10 s apart is 300 , then what is the speed of
the aircraft ? (tan 150 0.2679) r1 and r2 .If particles collide at the point `P’ after
time `t’.
A t 0S B t 5S C t 10S Y
S2 = V2 t
1 P
3400m r2 r S2 = V1 t
2
0
15 150 r1
O X
30
0 From the diagram
ground
Sol . Let O be observation point on the ground, and
A,B,C be the positions of the aircraft at t=0s, t=5s
and t =10s respectively.
100 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV
JEE MAINSPHYSICS-VOL
- VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
r = r1 + s1 = r2 + s 2 vA
v 2B = 2gd = cosα
Along OB vB
r1 + v1t = r 2 + v 2 t
W.E -9: Velocity and acceleration of a particle at
r1 - r 2 = v 2 - v1 t
W.E 7 : A frictionless wire is fixed between A and
tim e t=0 are u 2iˆ 3 ˆj m / s and
B inside a circle of radius R. A small bead
a (4iˆ 2 ˆj ) m / s 2 respectively. Find the
slips along the wire.Find the time taken by
the bead to slip from A to B. velocity and displacement of particle at t=2s.
1 2
A Sol. From v = u + at and s = ut + at
O 2
g
gcos
v = 2iˆ + 3jˆ + 2 4iˆ + 2jˆ = 10iˆ + 7jˆ m / s
A d 1 ^
B
90° s = 2 2 ˆi + 3jˆ + (2 ) 2 4 i + 2ˆj = 1 2 ˆi + 1 0ˆj m
B 2
O W.E -10: A particle starts from origin at t = 0 with
a velocity 5 iˆ m/s and moves in x-y plane
1 2 under action of a force which produce a
Sol.: S = at
2
constant acceleration of 3i 2 j m / s 2 .
1 a) What is the y -coordinate of the particle
i.e. AB g cos t 2 ......... (1) at the instant its x-coordinate is 84m?
2
b) what is speed of the particle at this time
From diagram AB 2 R cos ..........(2) Sol.: The position of the particle is given by
1
r t = v0 t + at 2
R 2
From eq (1) and eq (2) t 2
g
5 iˆ t 1/ 2 3 iˆ 2 ˆj t 2
Note: Time is independent of inclination of the wire. 5t 1.5t 2 iˆ t 2 ˆj
2
WE 8: Two particles 1 and 2 are allowed to descend Therefore, x t 5 t 1.5 t 2 , y t t
on the two frictionless chord OA and OB of
a vertical circle, at the same instant from point 5 t 1.5 t 2 84 t 6 s
O. The ratio of the velocities of the particle 1 2
and 2 respectively, when they reach on the A t t 6 s , y 6 36 m
circumference will be (OB is the diameter).
dr
v= = 5 + 3 t ˆi + 2t ˆj
O dt
Sol :
O 1 2 At t = 6s, v = 23 ˆi + 12 ˆj
speed = v = 23 2 + 12 2 = 26ms -1
d
os
gc
R g W.E -11: The coordinates of a body moving in a
A
B A plane at any instant of time t are x t 2 and
B
y t 2 . The speed of the body is.
OA = dcosα, a OA = gcosα 2 dx
Sol. x = αt v x = = 2αt
dt
Along OA v 2A = 2 gcosα dcosα
NARAYANAGROUP 101
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
2) The relative velocity of body 'B' w.r.t. 'A' is given
2 dy
y = βt v y = = 2βt by VBA = VB -VA
dt
3) Both VA -VB and VB -VA are equal in magnitude
speed v = v 2x + v 2y = 2t α 2 + β2 but opposite in direction.
W.E -12: Figure shows a rod of length l resting V AB = -V BA and
against a wall and the floor. Its lower end A
V AB = VBA = VA 2 +VB 2 -2VA VB cosθ
is pulled towards left with a constant
velocity v. Find the velocity of the other end 4) For two bodies moving in same direction,
B downward when the rod makes an angle magnitude of relative velocity is equal to the
difference of magnitudes of their velocities.
with the horizontal.
(θ = 00 , cos 0 = 1)
B
VAB =VA -VB , VBA =VB VA
5) For two bodies moving in opposite directions,
magnitude of relative velocity is equal to the sum
l of the magnitudes of their velocities.
( 1800 ; cos 1800 -1)
v V AB V BA = VB VA
A 6) Relative displacement of A w.r.t. B is
Sol. In such type of problems, when velocity of one
X AB X AG X BG
part of a body is given and that of other is required,
first find the relation between the two displacement, Where X AG displacement of ‘A’ w.r.t ground
then differentiate them with respect to time. Here
and X BG displacement of ‘B’ w.r.t ground
if the distance from the corner to the point A is x
7) Relative velocity of A w.r.t. B is
and upto B is y, then x 2 y 2 l 2
V AB V AG V BG
Differentiating with respect to time t 8) Relative acceleration of A w.r.t. B is
dx dy
2x 2y 0 a AB a AG a BG
dt dt
9) Two trains of lengths l1 and l2 are moving on
dx dy
where vA = v = & vB = - parallel tracks with speeds v1 and v2 (v1 > v2 )
dt dt
(- sign denotes that y is decreasing) w.r.t ground. The time taken to cross each other
when they move in same direction is
x v = yv B
S l l
x t1 = rel = 1 2
v B = v = v c o tθ Vrel v1 - v2
y
when they move in opposite direction is
Change in velocity S l l
If Vi is the initial velocity of a particle, Vf is its t2 = rel = 1 2
Vrel v1 + v2
final velocity, V is the change in velocity, and Application:
θ is the angle between Vi and Vf then Relative Motion on a moving train
If a boy in a train is running with velocity V BT
V = Vf - Vi .
relative to train and train is moving with velocity
V = Vf 2 +Vi 2 -2Vf Vi cosθ V TG relative to ground, then the velocity of the
Relative Velocity boy relative to ground V BG will be given by
If body A is moving with a velocity VA w.r.t. V BG V BT V TG
So, if boy in a train is running along the direction
ground and body B is moving with velocity VB
w.r.t. ground then of train.
1) The relative velocity of body 'A' w.r.t. 'B' is given V BG V BT V TG
by VAB = VA -VB
102 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
If the boy in train is running in a direction opposite
Velocity of B relative to A is V BA V B V A
to the motion of train, then
2 2
V BG V BT V TG V BA 20 20 20 2km / h
W.E-13: When two objects move uniformly towards
each other, they get 4 metres closer each i.e., V BA is 20 2 km/h at an angle of 450 from
second and when they move uniformly in east towards north.
the same direction with original speed, they
get 4 metres closer each 5s. Find their A is at rest and B is moving with VBA in the
individual speeds.
direction shown in Fig.
Sol. Let their speeds be v1 and v2 and
Therefore the minimum distance between ships
let v1 > v2 .
In First case : 1
S min AC AB sin 450 10 km 5 2km
4 2
Relative velocity, v1 + v 2 = = 4 m / s ....(1)
1 and time taken is
In Second case:
4 BC 5 2 1
Relative velocity = v1 - v 2 = = 0.8 m / s...(2) t h 15min
5 V BA 20 2 4
solving eqns.(1) and (2), we get
v1 =2.4ms -1 ,v 2 =1.6ms -1 Rain umbrella Concept
W.E - 14 : A person walks up a stationary escalator If rain is falling with a velocity V R and man moves
in time t1 . If he remains stationary on the
escalator, then it can take him up in time t2. with a velocity V M relative to ground, he will
How much time would it take for him to walk observe the rain falling with a velocity
up the moving escalator?
Sol. Let L be the length of escalator . V RM VR VM .
L Case - I : If rain is falling vertically with a velocity
Speed of man w.r.t. escalator is v ME = t
1 V R and an observer is moving horizontally with
L
Speed of escalator v E = t velocity V M , then the velocity of rain relative to
2
Speed of man with respect to ground would be observer will be :
1 1
v M = v ME + v E = L +
VR
t1 t 2 V RM
L t1 t 2 VR
The desired time is t = = .
v M t1 + t 2 V M
W.E -15: Two ships A and B are 10km apart on a VM VM
line running south to north. Ship A farther
north is streaming west at 20km/h and ship V RM VR VM
B is streaming north at 20km/h. What is their
distance of closest approach and how long The magnitude of velocity of rain relative to man is
do they take to reach it?
Sol. VRM VR2 VM2
VB 20km / h If is the angle made by the umbrella with
A C
V BA horizontal, then, tan VR
10km VM
0
45
V BA 20 2km / h B If is the angle made by the umbrella with vertical,
450 then, tan V M
VA 20 km / h VR
NARAYANAGROUP 103
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
Case - II : When the man is moving with a W.E-16: Rain is falling vertically with a speed of
velocity VM1 relative to ground towards 20ms 1 ., A person is running in the rain with
east(positive x-axis), and the rain is falling with a a velocity of 5 ms 1 and a wind is also
blowing with a speed of 15 ms 1 (both from
velocity V R relative to ground by making an angle
the west) The angle with the vertical at which
with vertical(negative z-axis). Then the velocity the person should hold his umbrella so that
of rain relative to man V RM is as shown in figure. he may not get drenched is :
1
VR VRx iˆ VR y kˆ ; V M 1 V M 1 iˆ Sol. V
Rain V R 20 -k
ˆ
V M an V M 5 ˆ , VWind VW 15iˆ
i
VR VM
and ta n x
...... ( 2 )1
Resultant velocity of rain and wind is
VR
y
VRW 20kˆ 15 iˆ
N Now, velocity of rain relative to man is
VR
W E VRW VM 20kˆ 15iˆ 5iˆ
VRy VR
M1 S 20kˆ 10iˆ
vertical
VRM
1
VM 1
VM 1 VM 1
VR 20kˆ
x
Case - III : If the man speeds up, at a particular
velocity V M 2 , the rain will appear to fall vertically
10 iˆ
with V RM 2 , then V RM 2 V R VM 2 as shown in
1 1
figure. Tan Tan 1
2 2
VRM W.E -17: To a man walking at the rate of 3km/h
2 the rain appears to fall vertically.When he
VRM VR increases his speed to 6km/h it appears to
2 meet him at an angle of 450 with vertical.
VM Find the angle made by the velocity of rain
2
with the vertical and its speed.
VM Sol :
VM 2
2
Case - IV : If the man increases his speed further, VR
he will see the rain falling with a velocity as shown
VRM 450
in figure. y
V RM VR
3 3
VRM 6
3 VM 3kmph
VRM 0 3
3 VR y From the diagram Tan45 .........(1)
VR y
VM VR x
3 3
and Tan y ..............(2)
VM 3
VM 0 3 1 3
3 From (1) and (2) 450 sin 45 V , 2 V
R R
VM VR
V RM 3 V R V M 3 ; tan 3 x
VR 3 2kmph
VR y
104 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
W.E -18: Rain is falling, vertically with a speed Motion of a Boat in the River
of 1m/s .Wind starts blowing after sometime Boat motion is classified into three categories
with a speed of 1.732 m/s in east to west
direction.In which direction should a boy based on angle between VBR and VR they are
waiting at a bus stop hold his umbrella.? 1) Down stream( 00 ):
vw N
VBR
VR
W E
Resultant velocity of the boat = VBR VR
vr
R The time taken for the boat to move a distance
S `d’ along the direction of flow of water is.
Sol. If R is the resultant of velocity of rain ( Vr ) and d
t1
velocity of wind ( Vw ) then VBR VR .............(1)
2
R = v 2r + v 2w = 12 + 1.732 ms-1 = 2ms-1 2) Up stream ( 1800 ) :
The direction that R makes with the vertical is Resultant velocity of the boat = VBR VR
The time taken for the boat to move a distance
vw 3
given by tanθ = = = 600 `d’ opposite to the direction of flow of water is.
vr 1
d
Therefore, the boy should hold his umbrella in the t2
vertical plane at an angle of about 600 with the VBR VR .......................(2)
vertical towards the east. t1 VBR VR
W.E - 19 : Rain is falling vertically with a speed of From equation (1) and (2) t V V
1m/s . A woman rides a bicycle with a speed 2 BR R
of 1.732 m/s in east to west direction. What time taken by person to go down stream a
is the direction in which she should hold her distance `d’ and come back is
umbrella ? d d
Sol. In Fig. vr represents the velocity of rain and vb , T t1 t2
VBR VR VBR VR
the velocity of the bicycle, the woman is riding.
Both these velocities are with respect to the 3) General approach :
ground.Since the woman is riding a bicycle, the Suppose the boat starts at point A on one bank with
velocity of rain as experienced by velocity VBR and reaches the other bank at point D
vb N
C VR B D
VBRcos
W E
vr d V BR
v rb
-v b S
here is the velocity of rain relative to the velocity VBRsin A
of the bicycle she is riding. That is vrb = vr - vb The component of velocity of boat anti parallel to
This relative velocity vector as shown in Fig. the flow of water is VBR sin
makes an angle with the vertical.It is given by The component of velocity of boat perpendicular
v to the flow of water is VBR cos
3
Tan θ = b = θ = 60o The time taken by the boat to cross the river is,
v 1
r d
Therefore,the woman should hold her umbrella at an t
angle of about 600 with the vertical towards the west. VBR cos
NARAYANAGROUP 105
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
Along the flow of water, distance travelled by the
V
boat (or) drift is x (VR VBR Sin )t θ = tan-1 R with the normal.
VBR
d iv)The distance (BC) travelled downstream
x (V R V B R sin )
V B R cos d
=VR is called drift
(a) The boat reaches the other end of the river to vBR
the right of B if VR >VBRsin
Motion of a Boat Crossing the River in
(b) The boat reaches the other end of the river to Shortest Distance
the left of B if VR < VBRsin
C VR B
(c) The boat reaches the exactly opposite point
on the bank if VR = VBRsin
Motion of a Boat Crossing the River in
Shortest Time
VBR d
B VR C
VBR A
d
i) The boat is to be rowed upstream making some
angle ' θ with normal to the bank of the river which
V
is given by θ = sin-1 R
A VBR
If V BR , V R are the velocities of a boat and river ii) The angle made by boat with the river flow (or)
flow respectively then to cross the river in shortest bank is = 900 +θ
time, the boat is to be rowed across the river i.e., iii) Velocity of boat w.r.t. ground has a magnitude
along normal to the banks of the river.
of VB= VBR2 -VR2
d
i) Time taken to cross the river, t= V where d d
BR
iv) The time taken to cross the river is t = V 2 -V 2
= width of the river. This time is independent of BR R
velocity of the river flow
Note : VBR = Relative velocity of the boat w.r.t
ii) Velocity of boat w.r.t. ground has a magnitude river (or) velocity of boat in still water.
of VB= VBR2 +VR2
iii) The direction of the resultant velocity is
106 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
W.E -20: A boat is moving with a velocity Sol : Let v be the river velocity and u be the velocity of
swimmer in still water. Then
v = 5 km/hr relative to water. At time
bw
d
t = 0. the boat passes through a piece of cork t1 2 .....(i )
2 2
floating in water while moving down u v
stream.If it turns back at time t1 30 min. d d 2ud
a) when the boat meet the cork again ? t2 2 2 ........(ii )
u v u v u v
b) The distance travelled by the boat during
this time. 2d
and t 3 ..............(iii)
u
t=0
from equation (i) ,(ii) and (iii)
t12 t2t3 t1 t2t3
W.E - 22: Two persons P and Q crosses the river
starting from point A on one side to exactly
Sol. opposite point B on the other bank of the
C river.The person P crosses the river in the
VW VW shortest path. The person Q crosses the river
in shortest time and walks back to point B.
Let AB =d is the distance travelled by boat along Velocity of river is 3 kmph and speed of each
down stream in ` t1 ’ sec and it returns back and person is 5kmph w.r.t river.If the two persons
reach the point B in the same time, then the
it meets the cork at point C after ` t2 ’ sec.
speed of walk of Q is.
Let AC=x is the distance travelled by the cork Sol :
during t1 t2 sec. For person (P) : For person(Q) :
d VB VW t1................(1) C B B x C
d x VB Vw t2 ............. 2
and x Vw t1 t2 ............. 3 VB VB
Substitute (1) and (3) in (2) we get t1 t2 A VW
The boat meets the cork again aft er A VW
T 2t1 60 min and the distance (AB+BC)
d d d
travelled by the boat before meets the cork is tP
2
VB Vw
2
52 32 4
D 2d x
D 2(VB Vw ) t1 Vw 2t1 d d
tQ , tP tQ t
VB 5
D 2VBt1 2Vwt1 2Vwt1
30 d d x d
D 2VBt1 2 5 5km , But x VW
60 4 5 Vman VB
W.E- 21: A swimmer crosses a flowing stream of d d VW d d d 3d
,
width `d’ to and fro normal to the flow of the 4 5 VBVman 4 5 5 Vman
river in time t1 . The time taken to cover the
1 1 3 1 3
same distance up and down the stream is t2. ,
4 5 5Vman 20 5Vman
If t3. is the time the swimmer would take to
Vman
3 20 12kmph
swim a distance 2d in still water, then relation
5
between t1 , t2. & t3.
NARAYANAGROUP 107
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
When a body is moving in a plane Here vx = u cosθ and
a) A body can have any angle between velocity
and acceleration v y = u y + a y t = usinθ - gt
b) If the angle between velocity and
Hence v = ucosθ ˆi + ( usinθ - gt) ˆj
acceleration is acute, velocity increases.
c) If the angle between velocity and acceleration magnitude of velocity is given by
is obtuse, velocity decreases. 2
v = v2x +v2y = ucosθ + usinθ-gt
2
d) If the angle between velocity and
acceleration is a right angle, velocity remains direction of velocity is given by
constant.
e) A body can have constant speed and vy u sin - gt
changing velocity tan -1 tan -1
f) A body cannot have constant velocity and vx u cos
changing speed.
Displacement vector ( s )
Projectiles :
displacement s x i y j here
Oblique Projectile : horizontal displacement during a time t
Any body projected into air with some velocity
x u xt u cos t
at an angle ‘ ’ [ (900 and 00)] with the
horizontal is called an oblique projectile. vertical displacement during a time t
1 1
y u y t gt 2 u sin t gt 2
y vy 2 2
Equation of projectile
v g 2 2
y tan x 2 2 x Ax Bx
u sin 2u cos
Where A and B are constants
u vx H
g
A tan , B 2
x 2u cos2
u cos
R Time of flight (T)
Horizontal component of velocity u x u cos , Time of ascent ta = Time of descent td
remains constant throughout the journey. uy u sin
Vertical component of velocity u y u sin ,
g g
gradually decreases to zero and then gradually
2u y 2u sin
increases to u sin . It varies at the rate ‘g’. Time of flight T = ta + td =
g g
horizontal component of acceleration, ax 0
During time of flight
vertical component of acceleration , a y g 1) angle between velocity and acceleration
At the Point of Projection vectors changes from 900 to 900 .
(a) Horizontalcomponent ofvelocity u x = u cos 2) change in momentum is 2 mu sin .
(b)Vertical component of velocity u y u sin (In general, change in momentum P mgT )
3) vertical displacement is 0.
(c) velocity vector u u cos i u sin j 4) The angle between velocity and acceleration
(d) Angle between velocity and acceleration during the rise of projectile is 1800> >900
is 90 5) The angle between velocity and acceleration
At any instant ‘t’ during the fall of projectile is 00< <900
Velocity vector ( v ) is v = v x i + v y j
108 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
Maximum height (H) are respectively x at and y bt ct 2 then
2 2 2
u u sin
y b
H 1) angle of projection tan 1
2g 2g a
At maximum height 2) velocity of projection u a 2 b 2
1) The vertical component of velocity becomes 3) acceleration of projectile = 2c
zero.
2) The velocity of the projectile is minimum b2
4) maximum height reached =
at the highest point and is equal to u cos 4c
and is horizontal. ab
3) Acceleration is equal to acceleration due to 5) horizontal range =
gravity ‘g’, and it always acts vertically c
downwards. In case of complimentary angles of projection
4) The angle between velocity and 1) If T1 and T2 are the times of flight then
acceleration is 900. T1 2R
Range (R): i) T tan ii) T1T2 T T R
2u u 2 g 1 2
R u xT x y (or) 2)If H1 and H 2 are maximum heights then
g
2u sin u 2 sin 2 H1 2 u2
R u cos T u cos i) H tan H
ii) 1 H 2
g g 2 2g
1) Range is maximum when 45 0
iii) R 4 H1 H 2 iv) Rmax 2 H1 H 2
u2 If a man throws a body to a maximum distance ‘R’
2) Maximum range, max R then he can project the body to maximum vertical
g
height R/2.
R u2 If a man throws a body to a maximum distance ‘R’
3) When ‘R’ is maximum, HMax= 4Max = 4g
then maximum height attained by it in its path is R/4.
4) For given velocity of projection range is same
for complimentary angles of projection At the point of striking the ground
1) Horizontal component of velocity = u cos
i.e 1 2 90
0
2) Vertical component of velocity = -u sin
Relation between H, T and R
3) Speed of projection is equal to striking
H g H tan R g speed of projectile.
1) 2
(b) (c) 2
T 8 R 4 T 2 tan 4) Angle of projection is equal to the striking
gT 2 angle of projectile
2) R and if 450 then 5) If the angle of projection with the horizontal is
2 tan
gT 2 2R
then angle of deviation is 2
R T The projectile crosses the points A, D in time
2 g
interval t1 seconds and B,C in time interval
If y Ax Bx 2 represents equation of a
projectile then 2 2 8h
t2 seconds then t1 t2
1) Angle of projection = tan-1(A) g
(h is the distance between BC and AD)
2) Initial velocity
u
g 1 A2
2B
A
3) Range of the projectile R =
B
A2
4) Maximum height H =
4B
B C
2A2 h
5) Time of flight T
D
Bg
A
If horizontal and vertical displacement of projectile
NARAYANAGROUP 109
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
A projectile is fired with a speed u at an angle ii) If u1 cos 1 u 2 cos 2 ( initial horizontal
with the horizontal. Its speed when its direction components)
of motion makes an angle with the horizontal.
y
v = u cos sec
y
Then slope
u sin u x
v cos x
v The path is a vertical straight line
u cos 1
For a projectile, ‘y’ component of velocity at
v cos u cos v u cos sec nth
If a body is projected with a velocity u making an u sin
angle with the horizontal, the time after which of the maximum height is
n
direction of velocity is perpendicular to the initial
1
u cosecθ u Resultant velocity at a height of
velocity is t g
g sin
nth
of maximum height
and its velocity at that instant is v = u cot
2
The path of projectile as seen from 2 2 2 usinθ
v= v +v =
x y ucosθ +
another projectile n
Suppose two bodies A and B are projected
simultaneously from the same point with initial (n 1) cos2 1
u
velocities u1 and u2 at angles 1 and 2 with n
horizontal. If n = 2, velocity of a projectile at half of maximum
The instantaneous positions of the two bodies 1 cos 2
are given by height = u
2
1 2
Body A : x1 u1 cos 1t , y1 u1 sin 1t gt For a projectile, w.r.t stationary frame path (or)
2 trajectory is a parabola.
1 2 Path of projectile w.r.t frame of another projectile
Body B : x2 u2 cos 2t , y2 u2 sin 2t gt is a straight line
2
Acceleration of a projectile relative to another
1
x u cos u cos t
1 2 2 projectile is zero
y u1 sin 1 u2 sin 2 t A body is projected vertically up from a topless
car relative to the car which is moving horizontally
y u1 sin 1 u2 sin 2 relative to earth
slope = x u cos u cos a) If car velocity is constant, ball will be caught by
1 1 2 2
the thrower.
i) If u1 sin 1 u 2 sin 2 ( initial vertical b) If car velocity is constant, path of ball relative
y to the ground is a parabola and relative to this car
components) then slope 0 is straight up and then straight down
x
c) If the car accelerates, ball falls back relative to
y the car
d) If the car retards ball falls forward relative to
the car
If a gun is aimed towards a target and the bullet is
fired, the moment when the target falls, the bullet
x will always hit the target irrespective of the velocity
The path is a horizontal straight line of the bullet if it is with in the range.
110 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
Note : If air resistance is taken into consideration then g 9.8ms 2 , ?
a) trajectory departs from parabola.
b) time of flight may increase or decrease. u02 sin 2
R
c) the velocity with which the body strikes the g
ground decreases Rg
d) maximum height may decrease. sin 2 2 300 or 600
e) striking angle increases u0
f) range decreases. 2u0 sin
using, T
A particle is projected with a velocity u ai b j g
then the radius of curvature of the trajectory of 2 240 0.5
the particle at the When 300 , T1 24.5s
9.8
3/2
(i) point of projection is r=
a 2
+b2 When 600 , T2
2 240 0.867
42.46s
9.8
ga W.E -25: The ceiling of a long hall is 20 m high.
a 2 What is the maximum horizontal distance
(ii) Highest point is r= that a ball thrown with a speed of 40 ms 1
g
Expression for radius of curvature is can go without hitting the ceiling of the
hall g 10ms ?
2
velocity 2
r Sol. : Here, H =20 m, u 40ms 1.
normalacceleration
Suppose the ball is thrown at an angle with the
u 2 cos2 horizontal.
r 2
g cos3 u 2 sin 2 40 sin 2
Now H 20
α is angle made by v with horizontal 2g 2 10
0
W.E - 23 : A bullet fired at an angle of 300 with the or, sin 0.5 30
horizontal hits the ground 3.0 km away. By 2
u 2 sin 2 40 sin 60
0
adjusting its angle of projection, can one Now R
hope to hit a target 5.0 km away? Assume g 10
2
the muzzle speed to be fixed, and neglect air
40 0.866 138.56m
resistance. 10
Sol . We are given that angle of projection with the W.E -26: A ball projected with a velocity of 10m/s
horizontal, 300 , horizontal range R = 3km. at angle of 300 with horizontal just clears two
vertical poles each of height 1m. Find
u 2 s in 2
R 0 separation between the poles.
g Y
2 0 2
u s in 6 0
0 u0 3
3
g g 2 P R
u02
or 2 3km
g 0
30
Since the muzzle speed (u0 ) is fixed X
O Q S
2
u 1 1
h uyt gt 2 10sin300 t 10 t 2
0
Rmax 2 3 2 1.732 3.464km Sol.
g 2 2
so, it is not possible to hit the target 5km away. 1 5t 5t 2 t 0.72 s, 2.76s are the
W.E -24: A cannon and a target are 5.10 km instants at which projectile crosses the poles.
apart and located at the same level. How soon separation between poles = OS - OQ
will the shell launched with the initial
velocity 240 m/s reach the target in the u cos t2 t1
absence of air drag ?
= 10 cos300 2.76 0.72 17.7m
Sol . Here, u0 =240 ms 1 , R =5.10 km =5100m,
NARAYANAGROUP 111
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
W.E -27 : A body is projected with velocity u at an
x
angle of projection with the horizontal.The But equation of trajectory is y x tan 1
R
body makes 300 with horizontal at t = 2
second and then after 1 second it reaches yR
tan (ii )
the maximum height. Then find
xR x
a) angle of projection b) speed of projection.
Sol. During the projectile motion, angle at any instant From Eqs. (i) and (ii), tan tan tan
t is such that
usinθ-gt W.E -29: The velocity of a projectile at its greatest
tanα=
ucosθ 2
height is times its velocity, at half of itss
For t = 2 seconds, 300 5
1 usinθ-2g greatest height, find the angle of projection.
= --------- (1)
3 ucosθ
For t = 3 seconds, at the highest point 0o 2 1 cos2
Sol.: u cos u
5 2
usinθ-3g
0= Squaring on both sides
ucosθ
usinθ=3g ------------(2) 2 1 cos2
u 2 cos 2 u 2
using eq. (1) and eq. (2) 5 2
ucosθ= 3g......................(3) 10 cos 2 2 2 cos 2
Eq. (2) eq.(3) give 600 squaring and 1
adding equation (2) and (3) 8cos2 2 cos2 600
4
u 20 3 m / s.
W.E-28: A particle is thrown over a triangle from W.E -30: A foot ball is kicked off with an initial
one end of horizontal base and grazing the speed of 19.6 m/s to have maximum range. Goal
vertex falls on the other end of the base.If keeper standing on the goal line 67.4 m away
and are the base angles and be the angle in the direction of the kick starts running
of projection, prove that opposite to the direction of kick to meet the ball
at that instant. What must his speed be if he is
tan tan tan . to catch the ball before it hits the ground?
Sol.: The situation is shown in figure.From figure,we have 2
Y u 2 sin 2 19.6 sin 90
Sol.: R
g 9.8
or R= 39.2 metre.
Man must run 67.4 m -39.2m=28.2m in the time
taken by the ball to come to ground Time taken
A(x,y) by the ball.
2u sin 2 19.6 sin 450 4
y t
g 9.8 2
x R-x x t 2 2 2 1.41 2.82sec.
O
28.2m
y y Velocity of man 10m / sec.
tan tan 2.82sec
x Rx
yR
tan tan _______(1)
x R x
112 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
2vy 25
W.E -31: A body projected from a point `0’ at an t 1s
g 10
angle , just crosses a wall `y’ m high at a W.E - 33: A projectile of 2 kg has velocities
distance `x’ m from the point of projection 3 m/s and 4 m/s at two points during its flight
and strikes the ground at `Q’ beyond the wall in the uniform gravitational field of the
as shown, then find height of the wall earth. If these two velocities are to each
Y other then the minimum KE of the particle
during its flight is
Sol. v1 cos v2 cos (90 )
-1
3 ms
3 cos 4 sin
3
tan
y 4
0
1 90 -
x (R - x) KE min mv12 cos 2 -1
X 2 4 ms
O Q
R=range
2
Sol . We know that the equation of the trajectory is 1 4 9 16
2 32 5.76 J
2 5 25
gx 2
y x tan can be written as
2u 2 cos 2
W.E-34: In the absence of wind the range and
gx 2 sin maximum height of a projectile were R and
y x tan 2 2
2u cos sin H. If wind imparts a horizontal acceleration
x 2 tan
a =g/4 to the projectile then find the
gx 2 tan y x tan 2 maximum range and maximum height.
y x tan 2 u sin 2
u (2sin cos ) g Sol : H 1 H ( u sin remains same )
x
y x tan 1 [ R
u 2 sin 2
]
T1 T
R g 1 1g 2
R1 u xT aT 2 R T
W.E - 32: A particle is projected with a velocity of 10 2 2 24
m/s at an angle of 450 with the horizontal . Find 1 2
= R gT RH
the interval between the moments when speed is 8
125 m/s g 10m / s
2
R1 R H H1 H
Sol.
If a body is projected with a velocity
t u ai bj ck
v 125 m / s
( i east j north k vertical ) then
u x 10 2 cos 450 10m / s, u y 10 2 sin 450 10m / s
v 2 v x2 v 2y
125 100 v y2 v y 5m / s vx ux ux a 2 b2 ; u y c
The required time interval is
NARAYANAGROUP 113
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
e) The angle at which it strikes the ground
T
2c
;H
c 2
,R
2 a 2 b2 c 2 gh
g 2g g tan 1
u
W.E-35: A particle is projected from the ground f) If is angle of elevation of point of projection
from the point where body hits the ground then
with an initial speed v at an angle with
horizontal.The average velocity of the h gt 2 /2 gt
tanα = = =
particle between its point of projection and R ut 2u
highest point of trajectory is [EAM 2013] tanθ
tanα =
Y 2
is the angle with which body reaches the
ground
Case (i) : If the body is projected at an angle
in upward direction from the top of the tower,then
Sol. u
H
X
R/2
h
v + u ucosθiˆ + (ucosθiˆ + usinθj)
ˆ
v avg = =
2 2
v x
v av = 1+ 3cos 2 θ a) The time taken by projectile to reach same level
2 2u sin
Horizontal projectile as point of projection is T
g
When a body is projected horizontally with a
b) The time taken by projectile to reach ground is
velocity from a point above the ground level, it is
called a Horizontal Projectile. 1 2
calculated from h u sin t gt
Path of the Horizontal Projectile is parabola 2
u c) The horizontal distance from foot of the tower
h where t he projectile lands is given by
x u cos t
d) The velocity with which it strikes the ground
R
v u 2 2 gh
2h
a) Time of descent t (is independent ofu) e) The angle at which it strikes the ground
g
b) The horizontal displacement (or) range
-usinθ + gt
α = tan -1
Ru
2h ucosθ
g u 2 sin 2 θ + 2gh
-1
c) The velocity of projectile at any instant of time (or) α = tan
ucosθ
is v = u 2 + g 2 t 2
Case (ii) : If the body is projected at angle
1 gt from top of the tower in the downward direction,
The direction of velocity tan then
u
d) The velocity with which it hits the ground
v = u 2 + 2gh
114 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
with each other is
u
2 u1u2
h x u1 u2 cot
g 2
Two tall towers having heights h1 and h2 are
separated by a distance d. A person throws a ball
x
a) The time taken by projectile to reach ground horizontally with velocity u from the top of the first
tower to reach the top of the second tower then
1 2
is calculated from h u sin t gt u
2
b) The horizontal distance from foot of the h1 h2
tower where the projectile lands is given by
h1
x u cos t
c) The velocity with which it strikes the ground h2
v u 2 2 gh d
d) The angle at which it strikes the ground 2 h1 h2
a) Time taken t
u 2 sin 2 2 gh g
tan 1 b) Horizontal distance travelled d ut
u cos
A ball rolls off from the top of a stair case with a
When an object is dropped from an aeroplane horizontal velocity u. If each step has a height ‘h’
moving horizontally with constant velocity and width “b” then the ball will just hit the nth step,
a) Path of the object relative to the earth is directly if n equal to
parabola
1 2
b) Path of the object relative to pilot is a straight nb = ut and nh = gt
line vertically down. 2
Two bodies are projected horizontally from top
of the tower of height h in opposite directions u
with velocities u1 and u2 then b
h
a) The time after which their velocity vectors 1
are making an angle with each other 2
u1u2 n
t cot
g 2 R
b) The distance between them when their
velocity vectors are making an angle with
2hu 2
u1u 2 n=
gb 2
each other x u1 u2 cot
g 2 From the top of the tower of height h , one stone
c) The time after which their position vectors is thrown towards east with velocity u 1 and
are making an angle with each other another is thrown towards north with velocity u 2 .
The distance between them after striking the
2 u1u2
cot ground,
g 2
d) The distance between them when their 2h
d t u12 u22 , t g
displacement vectors are making an angle
NARAYANAGROUP 115
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
W.E -36: A ball is thrown from the top of a tower of W.E - 38: A golfer standing on the ground hits a
61 m high with a velocity 24.4 ms 1 at an ball with a velocity of 52 m/s at an angle
elevation of 300 above the horizontal . What 5
is the distance from the foot of the tower to above the horizontal if tan find the
12
the point where the ball hits the ground? time for which the ball is at least 15m above
Sol. :
the ground?
u sin
u g 10m / s 2
u cos Sol. v y = u y 2 - 2gy , u y = usinθ
5 5
vy 52 52 2 10 15
h 13 13
= 16 × 25 - 300 = 10
2v y
2 ×10
1 Δt = = = 2s
h gt 2 (u sin )t t 5 sec onds 10 10
2
W.E - 39: Two paper screens A and B are separated
Also, d u cos t 105.65m by a distance of 100m. A bullet pierces A and
W.E -37: A particle is projected from a tower as B. The hole in B is 10 cm below the hole in
shown in figure, then find the distance from A. If the bullet is travelling horizontally at
the foot of the tower where it will strike the the time of hitting the screen A, calculate
ground. g 10m / s 2 the velocity of the bullet when it hits the
screen A. Neglect resistance of paper and air.
37 0 Sol. : The situation is shown in Fig.
1500 m 500 P u Q
m/s
3
0.1 m
R
Sol.:
500 100 m B
sin 37 0 A
u y u sin
3
2 h1 h2 2 0.1
1 d u 100 u 9.8 u 700m / s.
s = ut + at 2 g
2
W.E -40: A boy aims a gun at a bird from a point,
500 1 at a horizontal distance of 100m. If the gun
1500 sin 37 t 10t 2
3 2 can impart a velocity of 500m/sec to the
500 3 2 bullet, at what height above the bird must he
1500 t 5t aim his gun in order to hit it?
3 5
300 20t t 2 t 20 s Sol : x = vt or 100 = 500× t ; t 0.2sec.
horizontal distance = ( u cos ) t 1 2
Now h 0 10 0.2 = 0.20m = 20cm.
500 4 4000 2
10 m
3 5 3
116 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
W.E - 41:An enemy plane is flying horizontally at WE- 43: From points A and B, at the respective
an altitude of 2 km with a speed of 300 ms-1. heights of 2m and 6m, two bodies are thrown
An army man with an anti - aircraft gun on simultaneously towards each other, one is
the ground sights enemy plane when it is thrown horizontally with a velocity of 8m/s
directly overhead and fires a shell with a and the other, downward at an angle 450 to
-1
muzzle speed of 600ms . At what angle with the horizontal at an initial velocity v0 such
the vertical should the gun be fired so as to that the bodies collide in flight. The
hit the plane? horizontal distance between points A and B
Sol. Let G be the position of the gun and E that of the equal to 8m . Then find
enemy plane flying horizontally with speed. a) The initial velocity V0 of the body thrown
E P at an angle 450
u b) The time of flight t of the bodies before
colliding
v0 c) The coordinate (x,y) of the point of
collision (consider the bottom of the tower A
vy as origin) is
B
450
4m
V0
A
0
(90 -) Sol : 2m 2m
Ground 8m
a) From diagram
G 4 1
vx tan tan .................(1)
-1 8 2
u = 300ms , when the shell is fired with a speed
v0 , vx v0 cos v A = 8i, v B = -v 0cos450 ˆi - v0sin450 ˆj
ˆ
The shell will hit the plane, if the horizontal distance v v
EP travelled by the plane in time t = the distance v BA = - 0 - 8 i - 0 j
travelled by the shell in the horizontal direction in 2 2
the same time, i.e. Direction of vBA
u × t = v x × t or u = v x u = v0 cosθ v0 2
tanθ =
or cosθ = =
u 300
= 0.5 or 600 2 v0 + 8 2 .................(2)
v0 600 From eq (1) and eq (2)
Therefore, angle with the vertical 900 300.
W.E -42: From the top of a tower, two balls are 2v0 = v0 + 8 2 , v0 = 11.28m / s
thrown horizontally with velocities u1 and u2
in opposite directions. If their velocities are v0 v
perpendicular to each other just before they b) v BA = - - 8 iˆ - 0 ˆj
strike the ground, find the height of tower. 2 2
2h v0 = 8 2 Þ v BA = -16iˆ - 8jˆ
Sol. Time taken to reach ground t
g | v BA | t = SBA
at time of reaching ground respective velocities
are v1 = u1 i + gt j, v 2 = -u 2 i + gt j 16
2
8
2
t 82 42
u1u2 80 1
t t 0.5s
Given v1.v 2 = 0 , t 320 4
g c)
2h uu uu x = v x t = 8 0.5 = 4
1 2 h 1 2
g g 2g 1 2 1 1
is the height of the tower. y' = gt = ×10× = 1.25
2 2 4
y = 2 - y' = 0.75
NARAYANAGROUP 117
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
Motion of a Projected Body on an inclined Down the plane : Here, x and y-directions are
plane : down the plane and perpendicular to plane
A body is projected up the inclined plane from respectively
y
the point O with an initial velocity v0 at an angle
with horizontal. x
x u
v 0
x
A g sin
g g cos
O
u x u cos( ), ax g sin
O B
x' u y u sin( ), a y g cos
y' Proceeding in the similar manner , we get the
x following results
y 2u sin( )
g sin T ,
g cos
g cos
u2
R sin 2 sin
g cos 2
O g B W.E -44: A particle is projected horizontally with a
x1 speed “u” from the top of plane inclined at
y1 an angle “ ” with the horizontal. How far
a) Acceleration along x axis , a x = -gsin α from the point of projection will the particle
strike the plane ?
b) Acceleration along y axis , a y = - g c o s α u
c) Component of velocity along x axis
u x = v0cos θ - α
d) Component of velocity along y axis y
R
u y = v0sin θ- α
2v0sin θ - α
e) Time of flight T = x
gcosα
x
f) Range of projectile (OA) y
R x2 y 2 tan
v 20 x
R= sin 2θ - α - sinα . (or)
gcos2α 2
x 2 x tan x 1 tan 2 x sec
2v02sin θ - α cosθ
R= 1 2 y 1 gt 2
gcos 2 α x ut ; y gt ;
2 x 2 ut
gt 2u
For maximum range 2 tan ; t tan
2 2u g
v 20 1- sinα 2u 2
R max = x ut tan ;
gcos 2 α g
g) T 2 g 2 R max 2u 2
R tan sec
horizontal range (OB) x R cos g
118 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
W.E 45: A projectile has the maximum range of
500m. If the projectile is now thrown up on Average angular velocity av
t
an inclined plane of 300 with the same instantaneous angular velocity is
speed , what is the distance covered by it d
along the inclined plane? Lt
t 0 t
dt
Sol:
SI unit rad S1
2
u 1
R max = Dimensional Formula T
g
Angular velocity is an axial vector.
u2 Its direction is given by right hand screw rule
500 = or u = 500g
g Its direction is along axis of rotation
v 2 - u 2 = 2as Note:
When a body makes ‘N’ revolutions in ‘t’ sec then
0 - 500g = 2× -gsin300 x
2πN
x = 500m. its average angular velocity is ω =
t
Circular Motion If a particle makes ‘n’ rotations per sec its angular
Radius Vector : The line joining the centre velocity is 2 n
of rotation to position of particle in circular path is 2
2 n
called radius vector T
Angular displacement : The angle turned by the Angular velocity of hands of a clock:
radius vector in a given time interval is called angular Angular velocity of seconds hand
displacement 2 2 1
rad S
T 60 30
Angular velocity of minutes hand
arc length 2
d rad S 1
radius 60 60 1800
d Angular velocity of hours hand
B
A 2
SI unit : Radian rad S 1
Small angular displacements are vectors 12 3600 21600
Large angular displacements are scalars as they In case of self rotation of earth about its own axis
do not obey commutative law 2
rad / sec
The direction of angular displacement is along the axis 24 60 60
of rotation and it is given by right hand screw rule. P
When a particle completes one revolution the
angular displacement is 2 radian
When a particle completes N revolutions in a circle A
O
the angular displacement is N 2
When an object moves in circular path at a
constant speed, the motion is uniform circular
motion In the above fig, let the angular velocity of particle
(P) about the point ‘O’ is 0 , Let the angular
Angular Velocity
The time rate of change of angular displacement velocity of particle about A is A then 0 A
of particle is called angular velocity
If is angular displacement in small interval of
time t then
NARAYANAGROUP 119
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL - -VI-I II
A of angular velocity.
If a particle rotates with uniform angular velocity
then 0
B If the particle has constant angular acceleration
O
( constant ), then we use following equations
of motion
In the above fig. if two particles A and B are 1 2
moving in same circular path in the same direction, 0 t , 0 t t
2
for a person at the centre of the circle 2 2
BA B A 0 2
Time taken by one particle to complete one WE 46: When a motor cyclist takes a U-turn in 4s
rotation with respect to another particle is what is the average angular velocity of the
motor cyclist.
2 2 TT Sol. When the motor cyclist takes a U-turn, angular
T A B
rel B A TA TB displacement, rad and t = 4 s.
vB The average angular velocity,
vA
0.7855rad s 1
rA t 4
rB Note:In general we can also use the following
equations to solve the problems
If two particles A and B are moving in concentric av , av
t t
circles as shown in the fig. , if they are nearer to
d d d 2 d
each other. , 2
dt dt dt d
rrel rB rA , vrel = vB - vA
v
ωrel = rel = B A
v -v d dt , d dt , d d
rrel rB - rA Relation between linear and angular
Angular acceleration ( ) variables
The time rate of change of angular velocity of a Relation between linear and angular displacement
particle is called angular acceleration is ds rd
If be the change in angular velocity of the Relation between linear and angular velocities is
particle in time interval ‘ t ’ while moving v r , v r
on a circular path, then Relation between tangential and angular
Average angular acceleration av acceleration is a t = rα , a t = α × r
t
Instantaneous angular acceleration Linear acceleration of a particle moving in a circle.
d We know v r diff. w.r.t time, we get
inst Lt
t 0 t dt d v d d r
r
d d 2 d dt dt dt
Note: 2
SI units rad.sec-2
dt dt d
a = α× r + ω× v
Dimensional formula T 2
but r a t , it is tangential acceleration
Its direction is in the direction of change in angular v a c , it is centripetal acceleration
velocity and it is given by right hand screw rule. Due to change in direction of velocity there is an
When angular velocity increases the direction of acceleration and is always directed towards the
angular acceleration is in the direction of angular centre. This is called centripetal or radial
velocity acceleration and the corresponding force acting
When angular velocity decreases the direction of towards the centre is called centripetal force
angular acceleration is in the opposite direction
120 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - VOL - -VII MOTION IN A PLANE
W.E -47: What is the linear velocity of a person at If is the angle made by ‘a’ with a c
equator of the earth due to its spinning
motion? ( Radius of the earth = 6400km). at
then Tan = a
Sol. The earth completes one rotation in 24 hour. Its c
angular velocity.
Net force F Fc2 Ft 2
2 N 2 1 Uniform circular motion:
rad s 1 In the above case if a c 0 , a t 0 , then the
t 24 60 60 43, 200
particle under go uniform circular motion (or)
The linear velocity , When a particle moves in a circular path with
constant speed then it is said be in uniform circular
v R 6.4 106 465.5m / s motion. in this case the acceleration of the particle
43, 200
Centripetal Acceleration a r or a c is a v v 2 / r r 2 ,
When a particle is moving along a circle of radius In uniform circular motion
r with a uniform speed v, then the centripetal (a) magnitude of velocity does not change
acceleration is a r . (b) direction of velocity changes
(c) velocity changes
ar v r (d) angular velocity is constant
v2 2 2
(e) centripetal acceleration changes (only in
a r v r2 = 4 f r direction)
r
(f) linear momentum changes
The directions of a r , and v are mutually
(g) angular momentum w.r. to centre does not
perpendicular.
Position vector is always perpendicular to velocity change
vector. i.e, r.v 0 Non Uniform Circular motion:
Velocity vector is always perpendicular to the In a circular motion if a c 0 , a t 0 then the
particle undergo non uniform circular motion, in
centripetal acceleration vector is v.a c 0
this case the acceleration of particle is given by
Position vector r and centripetal acceleration
a = a c2 + a t2
a r are always antiparallel. If is the angle made by ‘a’ with ac then
Tangential acceleration a
Due to change in magnitude of velocity (speed) Tan = t
of a particle in circular motion, it has tangential ac
acceleration and the corresponding force is called For a particle in non uniform circular motion, the
tangential force
resultant force on the particle is F Fc2 Ft 2
dv
at = also at r ( a t = α × r ) In non uniform circular motion
dt (a) both magnitude and direction of velocity
dv changes
Ft = ma t = m = mrα
dt (b) angular velocity changes
Net linear acceleration of particle in circular motion (c) linear momentum and angular momentum are
not conserved
a = a 2c + a 2t Note: In circular motion
at a c is towards centre
a v, a t are along tangential direction
d , , are along axis of rotation
ac p
O
NARAYANAGROUP 121
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
1) North - East 2) North - West
C.U.Q 3) South - West 4) South - East
r r r r 9. A bus moves over a straight level road with a
1. If A + B = C and the angle between A and constant acceleration a. A boy in the bus drops
r r a ball out side. The acceleration of the ball
B is 1200, then the magnitude of C
r r w.r.t the bus and the earth are respectively
1) must be equal to A − B
r r 1) a 2 + g 2 ,g 2) g, a 2 + g2
2) must be less than A − B
r r 3) a, g 4) g, a
3) must be greater than A − B 10. A particle P moves with speed ‘v’ along AB and
r r
4) may be equal to A − B BC, sides of a square ABCD. Another particle
r r Q also starts at A and moves with the same
2. When two vectors A and B of magnitudes‘a’ speed but along AD and DC of the same square
and ‘b’ respectively are added, the magnitude
ABCD. Then their respective changes in
of resultant vector is always
velocities are
1) Equal to (a+b) 2) Less than (a+b)
3) Greater than (a+b) 4) Not greater than (a+b) 1) equal in magnitude but different in directions
r r r 2) different in magnitude but same in directions
3. If C = A + B then 3) different both in magnitude and direction
r r
1) C is always greater than A 4) same both in magnitude and direction
2) C is always equal to A+B 11. A river is flowing from west to east at a speed
3) C is never equal to A+B of 5 m/s. A man on the south bank of the river
r r r r capable of swimming at 10 m/s in a still water
4) It is possible to have C < A and C < B
wants to swim, across the river in a shortest
4. Three forces start acting simultaneously on a
ur time. He should swim in a direction
particle moving with velocity V . The forces 1) Due north 2) 300 east of west
are represented in magnitude and direction by 0
3) 30 west of north 4) 600 east of north
the three sides of a triangle ABC (as shown). 12. A hunter aims his gun and fires a bullet directly
The particle will now move with velocity at a monkey on a tree. At the instant the bullet
leaves the gun, the monkey drops. The bullet
A B 1) cannot hit the monkey
2) may hit the monkey it its weight is more than 30
C kg.wt
ur ur 3) may hit the monkey if its weight is less than 30
1) less than V 2) greater than V
ur kg.wt
3) V in the direction of largest force 4) hits the monkey irrespective of its weight.
ur 13. Keeping the speed of projection constant, the
4) V remaining unchanged angle of projection is increased from 0º to 90º.
5. The minimum number of forces of equal Then the horizontal range of the projectile
magnitude in a plane that can keep a particle 1) goes on increasing up to 900
in equilibrium is 2) decreases up to 90º
1) 4 2) 2 3) 3 4) 5
3) increases up to 450 and decreases afterwards
6. The minimum number of unequal forces in a
4) decreases up to 450 and increases afterwards
plane that can keep a particle in equilibrium is
1) 4 2) 2 3) 3 4) 6 14. Keeping the speed of projection constant, the
7. The minimum number of non coplanar forces angle of projection is increased from 0° to 90º.
that can keep a particle in equilibrium is Then the maximum height of the projectile
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4 1) goes on increasing upto 900
8. A train is moving due east and a car is moving 2) decreases upto 900
due north with equal speeds. A passenger in 3) increases upto 450 and decreases beyond it
the train finds that the car is moving towards 4) decreases upto 450 and increases beyond it
122 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
15. The path of one projectile as seen from another 1) equal horizontal and equal vertical ranges
projectile is a ( if horizontal components of 2) equal vertical ranges but different horizontal
velocities are equal ) ranges
1) straight line 2) parabola 3) different vertical ranges but equal horizontal
3) hyperbola 4) circle ranges
16. Two particles are projected with same speed 4) different vertical and different horizontal ranges
but at angles of projection ( 45 − θ ) and 22. For body thrown horizontally from the top of a
0
tower,
( 450 + θ ) . Then their horizontal ranges are in 1 ) the time of flight depends both on h and v
the ratio of 2 ) the horizontal Range depends only on v but not
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 3) 1 : 1 4) none of the above on h
17. The acceleration of a projectile relative to 3) the time of flight and horizontal Range depend
another projectile is on h but not on v
1) -g 2) g 3) 2g 4)0
4) the horizontal Range depends on both v and h
18. A stone is just dropped from the window of a
23. A body is projected from a point with different
train moving along a horizontal straight track
with uniform speed. The path of the stone is angles of projections 200, 350, 450, 600 with the
1) a parabola for an observer standing by the side horizontal but with same initial speed. Their
of the track respective horizontal ranges are R1, R2, R3 and
2) a horizontal straight line for an observer inside R4. Identify the correct order in which the
the train horizontal ranges are arranged in increasing order
3) both (1)&(2) are true 1) R1, R4, R2, R 3 2) R2, R1, R4, R 3
4) (1) is true but (2) is false 3) R 1 , R 2 , R ,
4 3R 4) R 4, R 1, R 2, R 3
19. A bomb is dropped from an aeroplane flying 24. Two particles are projected from the same
horizontally with uniform speed. The path of point with the same speed at different angles
the bomb is
θ1 and θ2 to the horizontal. If their respective
1) a vertical straight line for a stationary observer
on the ground times of flights are T1 and T2 and horizontal
2) a parabola for the pilot of the aeroplane ranges are same then
3) a vertical straight line for the pilot and parabola a) θ1 + θ2 = 900 b) T1 = T2 tan θ1
for a stationary observer on the ground
4) a horizontal straight line for the pilot and c) T1 = T2 tan θ2 d) T1 sin θ2 = T2 sin θ1
parabola for a stationary observer on the ground 1) a, b, d are correct 2) a, c, d are correct
20. A and B are two trains moving parallel to each 3) b, c, d are correct 4) a, b, c are correct
other. If a ball is thrown vertically up from the 25. Two bodies are projected at angles 300 and 600
train A, the path of the ball is to the horizontal from the ground such that the
1) parabola for an observer standing on the ground maximum heights reached by them are equal.
2) vertical straight line for an observer in B when Then
B is moving with the same speed in the same
direction of A a) Their times of flight are equal
3) a parabola for an observer in B when B is b) Their horizontal ranges are equal
moving with same speed but in opposite c) The ratio of their initial speeds of projection
direction is 3 : 1
4) all the above are true d) Both take same time to reach the maximum
21. A ball is thrown from rear end to the front end height.
of a compartment of a train which is moving at 1) a, b, c and d are correct
constant horizontal velocity. An observer
sitting in the compartment and another 2) only a, b and c are correct
observer standing on the ground draw the 3) only a and c are correct
trajectory of the ball. They will have 4) only a, c and d are correct
NARAYANAGROUP 123
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
26. A body is projected with an initial speed of 4) none of the above is correct
−1 at an angle of 60 0 above the Answer 31 to 33 based on following information
100 3ms
-2
horizontal. if g = 10ms then velocity of the ur ur ur ur ur ur
A, B , C , D , E and F are coplanar vectors
projectile
having the same magnitude each of 10 units
a) Is perpendicular to it's acceleration at the
instant t = 15 sec. and angle between successive vectors is 600
b) Is perpendicular to initial velocity of 31. The magnitude of resultant is
projection at t = 20 sec. 1) 0 units 2) 1 units 3) 2 units 4) 3 units
ur
c) Is minimum at the highest point 32. If A is reversed the magnitude of resultant is
d) Changes both in magnitude and direction, 1) 10 units 2) 20 units 3) 30 units 4) 40 units
during its flight. ur ur ur
33. If A , B & C are reversed magnitude of
1) a, b, c and d are correct
resultant is
2) only a, c and d are correct
1) 10 units 2) 20 units 3) 30 units 4) 40 units
3) only b, c and d are correct
Answer 34 to 36 based on following information
4) only a, b and d are correct
27. A particle is moving along a circular path with On an open ground, a motorist follows a track
uniform speed . Through what angle does its that turns to his left by an angle of 60° after
angular velocity change when it completes every 500 m. Starting from a given turn, The
half of the circular path ? path followed by the motorist is a regular
1) 00 2) 450 3)1800 4)3600 hexagon with side 500 m, as shown in the given
28. A car of mass m moves in a horizontal circular
path of radius r metre. At an instant its figure specify the displacement of the motorist
speed is V m / s and is increasing at a rate of
a m / sec2 . then the acceleration of the car is T 600 S
V2 V 2
2
V2 600
2) a 3) a + 4) a +
2
1)
r r r
29. Consider the following two statements A and 600
B and identify the correct choice U V R
A)When a rigid body is rotating about its own 60
0
axis, at a given instant all particles of body
possess same angular velocity. 600
β 600
B)When a rigid body is rotating about its own
P Q
axis, the linear velocity of a particle is directly 34. at the end of third turn.
proportional to its perpendicular distance
1) 500 m 2) 250 m 3) 1000 m 4) 1500 m
from axis
35. at the end of sixth turn.
1) A is true but B is false
1) 3000 m 2) 1500 m 3) 0m 4) 1000 m
2) A is false but B is true
36. at the end of eighth turn.
3) Both A and B are true
4) Both A and B are false 1) 3000 m 2) 1500 m 3) 0 4) 866 m
30. Suppose a disc is rotating counter clockwise
in the plane of the paper then C.U.Q-KEY
1) It’s angular velocity vector will be perpendicu- 01)2 02) 4 03) 4 04) 4 05) 2 06) 3
lar to the page pointing up out of the page 07)4 08) 2 09) 1 10) 1 11) 1 12) 4
2) It’s angular velocity vector will be perpendicu- 13)3 14) 1 15) 1 16) 3 17) 4 18) 3
lar to the page pointing in wards 19)3 20) 4 21) 2 22) 4 23) 1 24) 1
3) It’s angular velocity vector acts along the tan- 25)4 26) 1 27) 1 28) 3 29) 3 30) 1
gent to the disc. 31)1 32) 2 33) 4 34) 3 35) 3 36) 4
124 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
8. Five equal forces each of 20N are acting at a
LEVEL - I (C.W) point in the same plane. If the angles between
them are same, the resultant of these forces
is
PARALLELOGRAM LAW
1) 0 2) 40N 3) 20N 4) 20 2 N
1. The maximum resultant of two concurrent
forces is 10N and their minimum resultant is 9. A boy is hanging from a horizontal branch of
4N. The magnitude of large force is a tree. The tension in the arms will be maxi-
1) 5N 2) 7N 3) 3N 4) 14N mum when the angle between the arms is
2. The resultant of two vectors of magnitudes3 1) 00 2) 300 3) 600 4) 1200
units and 5 units is perpendicular to 3 units.
The angle between the vectors is 10. A 10 kg body is suspended by a rope is pulled
1) 127 0 2) 1200 3) 750 4) 1500 by means of a horizontal force to make 600
3. The sum of two unit vectors is also a vector by rope to vertical. The horizontal force is
of unit magnitude, then the magnitude of the 1) 10 kgwt 2) 30 kgwt
difference of the two unit vectors is
3) 10 3 kgwt 4) 30 3 kgwt
1) 1 unit 2) 2 units 3) 3 units 4) zero
4. Which of the following sets of forces acting T1
11. If ‘P’ is in equilibrium then T is
simultaneously on a particle keep it in 2
equilibrium?
1) 3N, 5N, 10N 2) 4N, 5N, 12N T1 T2
3) 2N, 6N, 5N 4) 5N, 8N, 1N
r r 300 600
5. The magnitude of two vectors P and Q dif-
P
fer by 1. The magnitude of their resultant
−1 3 ur
makes an angle of tan with P . The
4
ur ur
angle between and Q isP
900 N
1) 450 2) 00 3) 1800 4) 900 1 1
6. Two vectors inclined at an angle θ have mag- 1) 3 2) 2 3) 4)
3 2
nitude 3 N and 5 N and their resultant is of
MOTION IN A PLANE
magnitude 4 N. The angle θ is
12. A body starts with a velocity
−1 3
−1 3
( 2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 11kˆ ) m / s and moves with an accel-
4
4) cos − 5
−1
1) 900 2) cos 3) cos
5 5
eration ( 5iˆ + 5 ˆj − 5kˆ ) m / s . What is its ve-
TRIANGLE LAW, POLYGON LAW 2
&LAMI’S THEOREM
locity after 0.2 sec?
7. The plane which can be formed with the ) )
1) 7iˆ + 8 ˆj + 6k 2) 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 11k
) )
_ _ _
vectors a = 3 i − 4 j + 2 k ,
3) 3iˆ − 4 ˆj − 10k 4) 3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 10k
_ _ _ _ _ _ 13. The position vector of a particle is given by
b = 2 i − j − 6 k , c = 5 i − 5 j − 4 k is. r
1) Quadrilateral 2) Triangle ( )
r = 3t 2iˆ + 4t 2 ˆj + 7kˆ m at a given time t . The
3) Circle 4) Hyperbola net displacement of the particle after 10 s is
1) 500m 2) 400m 3) 300m 4) 700m
NARAYANAGROUP 125
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
CONCEPT OF RELATIVE stream. The ratio of times taken are
1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 1 : 4 4) 4 : 1
VELOCITY 20. The velocity of water in a river is 2 kmph,
14. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity while width is 400 m. A boat is rowed from a
5 ms-1, changes its direction northwards in 10 point rowing always aiming opposite point at
seconds and moves with same magnitude of 8 kmph of still water velocity. On reaching
velocity. The average acceleration is the opposite bank the drift obtained is
1 1) 93 m 2) 100.8 m 3) 112.4 m 4) 100 m
1) zero 2) ms −2 towards N-E
2 21. A man can swim in still water at a speed of 4
kmph. He desires to cross a river flowing at
1
3) ms −2 towards S-E a speed of 3 kmph in the shortest time inter-
2 val. If the width of the river is 3km time taken
1 to cross the river (in hours) and the horizon-
4) ms −2 towards N-W
2 tal distance travelled ( in km) are respec-
15. A man is going due east with a velocity of tively
5 ms-1. It is vertically raining downwards with 3 9 3 1 15 3
a velocity of 4 ms-1. At what angle should he 1) , 2) ,3 3) , 4) ,7
4 4 5 4 4 7
hold the umbrella to the vertical so as to
protect him self from the rain? OBLIQUE PROJECTILE
−1 5 22. A particle is projected in xy plane with y-axis
1) tan
4
in anti-clockwise direction along vertical, the point of projection is origin.
5
2) tan −1
in clock-wise direction g 2
4 The equation of the path is y = 3x − x .
4
2
3) tan − 1 North of East where y and x are in m. Then the speed of
5
4 projection in m s −1 is
4) tan −1 5 East of North
16. Rain drops are falling down ward vertically 3
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4)
at 4kmph. For a person moving forward at 2
3kmph feels the rain falling at 23. If a body is thrown with a speed of 19.6m/s
1)7 kmph 2)1 kmph 3)5 kmph 4)25 kmph making an angle of 300 with the horizontal,
17. A man travelling at 10.8 kmph in topless car then the time of flight is
on a rainy day. He holds an umbrella at angle 1) 1 s 2) 2 s 3) 2 3 s 4) 5 s
of 370 with the vertical so that he does not 24. A particle is projected with an initial velocity
wet.If rain drops falls vertically downwards of 200 m/s in a direction making an angle of
what is rain velocity. 300 with the vertical. The horizontal distance
1) 1 m/s 2) 2 m/s 3) 3 m/s 4) 4 m/s. covered by the particle in 3s is
MOTION OF A BOAT IN A RIVER 1) 300 m 2) 150 m 3) 175 m 4) 125 m
18. A man can row a boat in still water with a 25. A body is projected with an initial velocity
velocity of 8 kmph. Water is flowing in a river 20 m/s at 600 to the horizontal. Its initial
with a velocity of 4 kmph. At what angle velocity vector is ____(g=10 m / s 2 )
should he row the boat so as to reach the
exact opposite point 1) 10iˆ − 20 ˆj 2) 10 3 iˆ + 10 ˆj
1) 1500 to flow of water
3) 10iˆ + 10 3 ˆj 4) 5iˆ + 5 3 ˆj
2) 1200 to flow of water.
3) 300 to flow of water. 26. A body is projected at an angle of 30° with the
0
4) 90 to flow of water. horizontal with momentum P. At its highest
19. A person can swim in still water at 5 m/s. He point the magnitude of the momentum is:
moves in a river of velocity 3 m/s, first down 2 P
3 P
the stream and next same distance up the 1) P 2) 3) P 4)
2 3 2
126 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
27. The potential energy of a projectile at its HORIZONTAL PROJECTILE
maximum height is equal to its kinetic energy
35. A body projected horizontally with a velocity ‘v’
there. If the velocity of projection is 20 ms −1 , from a height ‘h’ has a range ‘R’. With what
its time of flight is (g=10 ms −2 ) velocity a body is to be projected horizontally
1 from a height h/2 to have the same range ?
1
1) 2s 2) 2 2 s 3) s 4) s
2 2 1) 2 v 2) 2v 3) 6v 4) 8v
28. From a point on the ground a particle is 36. A stone is thrown horizontally with velocity g
projected with initial velocity u , such that its ms-1 from the top of a tower of height g metre.
horizontal range is maximum. The magnitude The velocity with which it hits the ground is
of average velocity during its ascent. (in ms-1)
1) g 2) 2g 3) 3g 4) 4g
5u 5u 3
1) 2) 3) 4) none 37. A body is thrown horizontally from the top of
2 2 4 2 2 a tower. It reaches the ground after 4s at an
29. The horizontal and vertical displacements of angle 450 to the ground. The velocity of
a projectile are given as x = at & projection is
y = b t − ct 2 . Then velocity of projection is 1)9.8ms-1 2)19.6ms-1 3)29.4ms-1 4) 39.2ms-1
38. Two cliff of heights 120 m and 100.4 m are
1) a 2 + b2 2) b 2 + c2 separated by a horizontal distance of 16 m if a
car has to reach from the first cliff to the second
3) a 2 + c2 4) b 2 − c 2 the horizontal velocity of car should be
30. Two bodies are thrown from the same point with 1) 16 m/s 2) 4 m/s 3) 2 m/s 4) 8 m/s
the same velocity of 50ms-1. If their angles of
projection are complimentary to each other and
CIRCULAR MOTION
the difference of maximum heights is 30m, the 39. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis
minimum and maximum heights are(g=10 m/s2) at the rate of 200 revolutions per minute. Two
1) 50 m & 80 m 2) 47.5 m & 77.5 m particles P,Q of disc are at distances 5cm,
3) 30 m & 60 m 4) 25 m & 55 m 10cm from axis of rotation. The ratio of
31. A missile is fired for maximum range with an angular velocities of P and Q is
1) 1:2 2) 1:1 3) 2:1 4) 4:1
initial velocity of 20 m s −1 , the range of the 40. A stationary wheel starts rotating about its
missile is ( g = 10 m / s 2 ) [AIPMT 2011] own axis at uniform angular acceleration 8rad/
1) 50m 2) 60 m 3) 20m 4) 40 m s2. The time taken by it to complete 77
r rotations is
32. If u = a $i + b $j + c k$ with $i, $j , k$ are in east, 1) 5.5 sec 2) 7 sec 3) 11 sec 4) 14 sec
north and vertical directions, horizontal 41. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis at
component of velocity of projectile is uniform rate completes 30 rotations in one
1) a 2) b 3) a 2 + b 2 4) b 2 + c2 minute.The angular velocity of disc in rad s–1 is
p p
33. If the time of flight of a projectile is doubled, 1) 2p 2) p 3) 4)
what happens to the maximum height at- 2 4
tained? 42. A particle is moving at uniform speed
1) halved 2) remains unchanged 2 ms–1 along a circle of radius 0.5m. The
3) doubled 4) become four times centripetal acceleration of particle is
r 1) 1ms-2 2) 2ms-2 3) 4ms-2 4) 8ms-2
34 If u = a $i + b $j + c k$ with $i, $j , k$ are in east,
north and vertical directions, the maximum 43. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius
height of the projectile is ' a ' with a uniform speed v . C is the centre
of the circle and AB is a diameter. when
a2 b2 c2 b 2 c2 passing through B the angular velocity of P
1) 2) 3) 4) about A and C are in the ratio
2g 2g 2g 2g
1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 3
NARAYANAGROUP 127
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
LEVEL -I (C.W) - KEY 10.
01)2 02)1 03)3 04)3 05)4 06)4 ///////////////////////////////////
θ
07)2 08)1 09)4 10)3 11)3 12)4
13)1 14)4 15)2 16)3 17)4 18)2 T
19)3 20)4 21)1 22)1 23)2 24)1
25)3 26)1 27)2 28)1 29)1 30)2 F
31)4 32)3 33)4 34)3 35)1 36)3
37)4 38)4 39)2 40)3 41)2 42)4
43)2
LEVEL -I (C.W) - HINTS
1. F1 + F2 = 10 , F1 − F2 = 4 mg
F = mgTanθ
11. T1 cos 300 = T2 cos 600 12. V¼ ) )
= u + a .t
r r
5 13. At t = 0 , r1 = 7 k
r r r r r r r
4 At t = 10, r2 = 300i + 400 j + 7k ; s = r2 − r1
2. aavg N
1 θ vf
θ N-W ) )
3 ) v f − vi
14. a=
θ = 53 ; θ = 180 − θ 1
1 0
t
θ θ -vi O v i
3. R = 2 P cos , S = 2 P sin O
2 2
-Vm Vm
4. f − f < f <f + f θ
1 2 3 1 2 v
15. Tanθ = m (clockwise)
r r 3 −1
vr
5. P − Q = 1; α = tan Vrm V
4 R
6. R = P + Q + 2 PQ cos θ
2 2 2 16. VRM = VR − V M
) ) ) O
7. a + b + c = 0 (triangle law) -Vm Vm
8. If polygon is closed, resultant becomes zero. If
r
0
37
Tan ( 370 ) =
VM
resultant of 5 forces is Q and magnitude of each 17.
r r r r r r Vrm
VR
vector is P then Q + P = 0 ⇒ P = Q VR
18.
9.
B
VR
T cos θ
Vb
T T cos θ T θ
θ
0
θ 90
VR
A
T sin θ T sin θ Vriver
sin θ =
Vboat ; α = 90 + θ with stream
d d
19. t1 = and t2 =
v+u v−u
mg
mg
2T cos θ = mg ; T=
2 cosθ
128 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
B x C
Vb LEVEL - I (H.W)
d θ x = VW .
d
20. VB PARALLELOGRAM LAW,
Vw TRIANGLE LAW & POLYGON LAW
A 1. Two forces each of 20N act on a body at 1200.
d d
21. t= ; x = VW . The magnitude and direction of resultant is
VB VB
1) 20N;φ =60 0 2) 20 2N;φ =600
22. Compare the equation with
y = x tan θ −
g
x2
3) 10 2N;φ =00 4) 10 2N;φ =1200
2u cos2 θ
2
2. Two forces whose magnitudes are in the ratio
2u sin θ 3:5 give a resultant of 35N. If the angle
23. T= g
24.x = ( u cos θ ) t between them is 600, the magnitude of each
r force is
25. u = u cos θ ˆi + usin θ ˆj 26. Px = P cos θ , Py = 0 1) 3N, 5N 2) 9N, 25N
1 2 2 1 2 2 3) 15N, 25N 4) 21N, 35N
27. P.E = K .E ⇒ 2 mu sin θ = 2 mu cos θ
3. The resultant of two forces 2P and 2P is
2u sin θ
use T = 10P . The angle between the forces is
g
1) 300 2) 600 3) 450 4) 900
u
28. avg velocity = 1 + 3cos2 θ 4. Which one of the following cannot be
2 represented by the three sides of a triangle?
dx dy 1) 5,9,11 2) 5,7,13 3) 7,10,13 4) 3,8,9
29. ux = , u y = and u = u x2 + u y2 r r r
dt dt 5. Figure shows three vectors a, b and c where
u2
30. H 2 − H1 = 30 ; 2
H + H 1 = = 125 R is the mid point of PQ. then which of the
2g following relations is correct.
P
u2
31. Rmax = 32.East and north are taken as ground.
g
gT 2 a R
33. H= 34. u x = a 2 + b 2 , u y = u sin θ = c c
8
2h
35. R=u ; given R is same
g O Q
b
gt r r r r r r
36. V = u 2 + 2 gh 37. Tanα = 1) a + b = 2c 2) a + b = c
u r r uur r r r
u. 2 ( h1 − h2 ) 3) a − b = 2c 4) a − b = c
38. R=
g 6. Eleven forces each equal to 5N act on a par-
39. Angular velocity ω = Constant ticle simultaneously. If each force makes an
2θ angle 300 with the next one, the resultant of
40. θ = 2π N ; t = all forces is
α
1) 15 N 2) 55 N 3) 5 N 4) zero
41. ω = 2π n ;where n = no.of revolutions per sec
7. A body of mass 3 kg is suspended by a
v2
42. Centripetal acceleration a = string to rigid support.The body is pulled
r horizontally by a force F until the string
v makes an angle of 300 with the vertical. The
43. Angular velocity of P about A , ω A = value of F and tension in the string are
2a
1) 9.8 N,9.8N 2) 9.8 N, 19.6 N
v
Angular velocity of P about C, ωC = 3) 19.6 N, 19.6 N 4) 19.6 N, 9.8 N
a
NARAYANAGROUP 129
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
8. Two light strings of length 4cm and 3 cm are which angle he should hold the umbrella with
tied to a bob of weight 500 gm. The free ends vertical if he moves forward, if it is raining
of the strings are tied to pegs in the same vertically downwards
horizontal line and separated by 5 cm.The 1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 900
ratio of tension in the longer string to that in
the shorter string is 15. When it is raining vertically down, to a man
1) 4:3 2) 3:4 3) 4:5 4) 5:4 walking on road the velocity of rain appears
to be 1.5 times his velocity . To protect
MOTION IN A PLANE himself from rain he should hold the umbrella
9. A force 2iˆ + ˆj − kˆ newton acts on a body at an angle θ to vertical. Then tanθ =
which is initially at rest. If the velocity of the 2
body at the end of 20seconds is 5 2 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 2 3 2
4iˆ + 2 ˆj + 2kˆ ms −1 , the mass of the body
16. A motor car A is travelling with a velocity of
1) 20kg 2) 15kg 3) 10kg 4) 5kg
20m/s in the north - west direction and another
10. The position vector of a moving particle at t
r motor car B is travelling with a velocity of
seconds is given by r = 3iˆ + 4t ˆj − t kˆ. Its
2 3
15 m/s in the north-east direction. The
displacement during an interval of 1s to 3s is magnitude of relative velocity of B with
1) ĵ − kˆ 2) 3iˆ + 4 ˆj − kˆ respect to A is.
1) 25 m/s 2) 15 m/s 3) 20 m/s 4) 35 m/s
3) 9iˆ + 36 ˆj − 27 kˆ 4) 32 ˆj − 26kˆ
r r r r
11. If initial velocity of a body is u = 2i − 2 j + 3k MOTION OF A BOAT IN A RIVER
r r r r
and the final velocity is v = 2i − 4 j + 5k and 17. A man can swim in still water at a speed of 6
kmph and he has to cross the river and reach
it is changed in time of 10 sec. Find the just opposite point on the other bank. If the
acceleration vector? river is flowing at a speed of 3 kmph, and the
r r r r r r width of the river is 2km, the time taken to
3i − 2 j + 2k −3i + j + 2k
1) 2) cross the river is (in hours)
10 10
r r r r r 1)
2
2)
2
3)
2
4)
2
−3i − 2 j + 2k −j+k 27 27 3 45
`3) 4)
10 5 18. A boat moves perpendicular to the bank with
a velocity of 7.2 km/h. The current carries it
CONCEPT OF RELATIVE VELOCITY
150m downstream, find the velocity of the
12. A particle is moving eastwards with a current(The width of the river is 0.5 km).
−1
velocity 15 ms . Suddenly it moves towards 1) 0.4 m s − 1 2)1.2 ms −1
north and moves with the same speed in a 3) 0.5ms −1 4) 0.6 ms −1
time 10 sec. The average acceleration dur--
ing this time is 19. A swimmer is capable of swimming 1.65 ms −1
in still water. If she swims directly across a
1) 3 / 2 NE 2) 3 2 NE
180m wide river whose current is 0.85 ms −1 ,
3) 3 / 2 NW 4) 3 2 NW how far downstream(from a point opposite her
13. A Person crossing a road with a certain starting point) will she reach?
velocity due north, sees a car moving 1) 92.7m 2) 40m 3) 48m 4)20m
towards east. The relative velocity of the car 20. A person swims at
1350 to current of river, to
w.r.t the person is 2 times that of the ve- meet target on reaching opposite point. The
locity of the person . The angle made by the ratio of person’s velocity to river water ve-
relative velocity with the east is locity is
1) 30 0 2) 45 0 3) 60 0 4) 90 0
1. 3 :1 2. 2 :1 3. 1: 2 4. 1: 3
14. A Person is walking in rain feels the
velocity of rain as twice to his velocity . At
130 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
OBLIQUE PROJECTILE 29. A stone is thrown with a velocity v at an
21. The parabolic path of a projectile is angle θ with the horizontal. Its speed when it
x x2 makes an angle β with the horizontal is
represented by y = − in MKS units :
3 60 v
Its angle of projection is (g = 10ms-2) 1) v cos θ 2)
cos β
1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 900
22. A body is projected at angle 300 to horizontal v cos θ
3) v cos θ cos β 4) cos β
with a velocity 50 ms −1 . Its time of flight is
1) 4 s 2) 5 s 3) 6 s 4) 7 s 30. A body is projected with a certain speed at
23. A body is projected with velocity 60 m / s at angles of projection of θ and 90– θ . The maxi-
mum heights attained in the two cases are 20
300 to the horizontal. The velocity of the body
m and 10 m respectively. The maximum pos-
after 3 seconds is
sible range is
1) 20iˆ + 20 3 ˆj 2) 30iˆ 1) 60 m 2) 30 m 3) 20 m 4) 80 m
3) 10 3 ˆj 4) 30 3iˆ 31. The launching speed of a certain projectile is
24. A body is projected with velocity u such that five times the speed it has at its maximum
in horizontal range and maximum vertical height. Its angle of projection is
heights are same.The maximum height is 1) θ = cos-1(0.2) 2) θ = sin-1(0.2)
u2 3u 2 16u 2 8u 2 3) θ = tan-1(0.2) 4) θ = 00
1) 2) 3) 4) 32. A person throws a bottle into a dustbin at the
2g 4g 17 g 17 g
25. A cricket ball is hit for a six leaving the bat at same height as he is 2m away at an angle of
an angle of 600 to the horizontal with kinetic 450 . The velocity of thrown is
energy ‘k’. At the top, K.E. of the ball is 1) g 2) g 3) 2g 4) 2g
[JEE MAIN-2007]
HORIZONTAL PROJECTILE
k k
1) Zero 2) k 3) 4) 33. A body projected horizontally from the top of
4 2
a tower follows y = 20 x 2 parabola equation
26. A bomb at rest is exploded and the pieces
where x , y are in m ( g = 10 m s ) .Then the
−2
are scattered in all directions with a maximum
velocity of 20ms-1. Dangerous distance from velocity of the projectile is (ms-1)
that spot is (g = 10 m/s2) 1) 0.2 2) 0.3 3) 0.4 4) 0.5
1) 10 m 2) 20 m 3) 30 m 4) 40 m 34. A bomb is dropped from an aeroplane flying
27. A boy can throw a stone up to a maximum horizontally with a velocity of 720 kmph at
height of 10 m. The maximum horizontal an altitude of 980m. Time taken by the bomb
distance that the boy can throw the same to hit the ground is
stone up to will be [JEE MAIN-2012] 1) 1 s 2) 7.2 s 3) 14.14 s 4) 0.15 s
1) 20 2 m 2) 10 m 3) 10 2 m 4) 20 m 35. A body is projected horizontally from a height
28. A grass hopper can jump a maximum of 78.4 m with a velocity 10 ms −1 . Its velocity
horizontal distance of 0.3 m. If it spends after 3 seconds is (g=10 ms −2 )(Take direction
negligible time on the ground, its horizontal
component of velocity is (g=10 m/s2) of projection as i and vertically upward
direction as j)
3
1) 3/2 m/s 2)
2
m/s 1) 10$i − 30 $j 2) 10$i + 30 $j
3) 1/2 m/s 4)
2
m/s 3) 20$i − 30 $j 4) 10$i + 10 3 $j
3
NARAYANAGROUP 131
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
36. Two thin wood screens A and B are separated
by 200 m a bullet travelling horizontally at speed LEVEL -I (H.W)-HINTS
of 600 m/s hits the screen A penetrates through θ
it and finally emerges out from B making holes 1. R = 2F cos 60 = F , α = 2
in A and B the resistance of air and wood are makes equal angle with both vectors
negligible the difference of heights of the holes P 3
2. = ( given) ;Let P = 3x and Q = 5x
in A and B is. Q 5
49 7 R = P 2 + Q 2 + 2 PQ cos θ
1) 5 m 2) m 3) m 4)zero
90 90 3. R 2 = P2 + Q 2 + 2 PQ cos θ
CIRCULAR MOTION 4. To get a closed ∆ le , the sum of any two vectors
in magnitude must be either equal or large in
37. A fly wheel is rotating about its own axis at magnitude of the third.
an angular velocity 11 rad s–1, its angular
velocity in revolution per minute is
1) 105 2) 210 3) 315 4) 420
38. A stationary wheel starts rotating about its own a c
axis at constant angular acceleration. If the 5.
wheel completes 50 rotations in first 2 seconds,
then the number of rotations made by it in next b
two seconds is r r r
∴ b + a = 2c
1) 75 2) 100 3) 125 4) 150
360
39. A point size body is moving along a circle at an 6. No. of forces = 11; n= = 12
θ
angular velocity 2.8rads-1 . If centripetal polygon formed with 1 side absent, resultant is
acceleration of body is 7ms-2 then its speed is closing side.
1) 1.25ms-1 2) 2.5ms-1 7. F = mgTanθ , T = F 2 + ( mg ) 2
5 cm
3) 3.5ms-1 4) 7ms-1
40. A circular plate is rotating about its own axis at θ2 θ1
an angular velocity 100 revolutions per minute. T1 4 cm 3 cm
The linear velocity of a particle P of plate at a T2
distance 4.2 cm from axis of rotation is
1) 0.22 m/s 2) 0.44 m/s 3) 2.2 m/s 4) 4.4 m/s θ2 θ1
41. An aircraft executes horizontal loop of radius 8.
1 km with steady speed of 900 kmph. The
ratio of centripetal acceleration with accel-
500 g
eration due to gravity is
1) 6.0 2) 6.4 3) 5 4) 7
θ2
LEVEL -I (H.W)-KEY 5
01) 1 02) 3 03) 3 04)2 05) 1 06) 3 4
07) 2 08) 2 09) 3 10)4 11) 4 12) 3
13) 2 14) 1 15) 1 16)1 17) 2 18) 4 θ1
19) 1 20) 2 21) 1 22)2 23) 4 24) 4 3
25) 3 26) 4 27) 4 28)2 29) 4 30) 1 T1 T2
=
31) 1 32) 4 33) 4 34)3 35) 1 36) 2 sin(90 + θ1 ) sin(90 + θ )
37) 1 38) 4 39) 2 40)2 41) 2 → → → →
9. v = ( a )t , and f = m a
132 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
ur
10. Position vector at (t = 1 sec) is r1 d d Vw
ur 18. x = VW . 19. x = VW . V 20. sin θ = V
Position vector at (t = 3 sec) is r3 VB B b
r ur ur
Displacement s = r3 − r1 1
r r 2u sin θ
r v−u 21. y = Ax − Bx 2 , θ = tan −1 ( A ) 22. T =
11. a= g
t
N 23. V = u cos θ i + ( u sin θ − gt ) j
NW
v2 4H
r r Tanθ =
W E v 2 − v1 R 17
12. -v1 v1 a=
t R = H max 4
24.
S ∴ Tanθ = 4
N
vP 1
r r u sin θ
2 2
W H max =
13. vC E , v c − v p = 2v p 2g
θ
-vp u2
S 25. k = k cos θ
1 2 26. R=
O g
-vm vm
u2 u2
θ 27. H max = ; R max =
vm 2g g
14. sin θ =
vRm u 2
vRm 28. Rmax = & u x = u cos θ
vR g
O V cosθ
Vm ∴V 1 =
-Vm r 29. V cos θ = V 1 cos β
v Rm = 1.5 v m cos β
; tan θ = vm u2 u2
15. 30. = H1 + H 2 , Rmax =
Vrm vR 2g g
VR 1
16. 31. u = 5u cos θ ⇒ cos θ =
5
VA = 20 VB = 15 u 2 sin 2θ u2
32. R= ; 2= ; u = 2g
g g
g 2 2h
33. y= x 34. T =
2u 2 g
2h
35. Vx = U Vy = −gt 36. R = u , h = h1 − h2
g
ω
37. ω = 2π n ; n = ( rps); n( rps) = 60 × n (rpm)
2π
2θ1
θ = 2π n θ = 2π n , α =
uur −20 20 ˆ uur 15 ˆ 15 ˆ
38. ; 1 1
t12
VA = iˆ + j;VB = i+ j;
2 2 2 2 1 θ
uuur uur uur θ 2 = α t 2 ;θ = θ 2 − θ1 , n =
VAB = VA − VB 2 2π
a
d 39. Centripetal acceleration ; a = vω ⇒ v =
17. Vm = 6 kmph, Vw = 3 kmph , t = ω
v 2 −v m w
2
ac v 2
40. Linear velocity v = rω 41. =
g rg
NARAYANAGROUP 133
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
nearly
LEVEL - II (C.W) 1) 980 N 2) 490 N 3) 245 N 4) 112.5 N
r r
7. Three forces A = (iˆ + ˆj + kˆ ) , B = (2iˆ − ˆj + 3kˆ )
r
PARALLELOGRAM LAW and C acting on a body to keep it in
1. The greatest and least resultant of two forces r
equilibrium. Then C is ( 2008 - M)
acting at a point are 29 Kg wt. and 5 Kg wt.
1) −(3iˆ + 4kˆ ) 2) −(4iˆ + 3kˆ )
respectively. If each force is increased by 3
Kg wt. the magnitude of the resultant of new 3) (3iˆ + 4 ˆj ) 4) (2iˆ − 3kˆ )
forces acting at right angles to each other is
MOTION IN A PLANE
1) 45 kg wt. 2) 35 kg wt.
8. The displacement of the point of a wheel
3) 25 kg wt. 4) 15 kg wt.
initially in contact with the ground when the
2. Two forces P and Q act at an angle of 1200 wheel rolls forward quarter revolution where
with each other. If the resultant is at right perimeter of the wheel is 4π m, is (Assume
angles to P and P is equal to 4 kg-wt, then the the forward direction as x-axis)
value of Q is
−1 2
1) 4 kgwt 2) 8 kgwt 3) 6 kgwt 4) 3 kgwt 1) (π + 2) 2 + 4 along tan with x - axis
π
→ →→
3. The resultant of two vectors P&Q is R . If −1 2
2) (π − 2) 2 + 4 along tan with x - axis
→ π −2
the magnitude of Q is doubled the new
−1 2
3) (π − 2) 2 + 4 along tan with x - axis
resultant becomes perpendicular to → π
P then
→ −1 2
magnitude of R is 4) (π + 2)2 + 4 along tan with x - axis
π −2
P 2 − Q2 P+Q P 9. A particle starts from the origin at t = 0s with
1) 2) 3) Q 4)
2PQ P−Q Q a velocity of 10.0 ˆj m/s and moves in the
r r r r xy − plane with a constant acceleration of
4. P, Q, R, S are vector of equal magnitude. If
r r r r r
P + Q − R = 0 angle between P and Q is θ1 .
(8iˆ + 2 ˆj ) ms −2
. Then y − coordinate of the
r r r r r particle in 2 sec is
If P + Q − S = 0 angle between P and S is 1) 24 m 2) 16 m 3) 8 m 4) 12 m
10. A car moving at a constant speed of 36 kmph
θ2 . The ratio of θ1 to θ2 is moves north wards for 20 minutes then due
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 3) 1 : 1
4) 1: 3 1
to west with the same speed for 8 minutes.
TRIANGLE LAW, POLYGON LAW OF 3
VECTORS AND LAMI’S THEOREM what is the average velocity of the car during
this run in kmph
5. If ABCD is quadrilateral whose sides
uuur 1) 27.5 2) 40.5 3)20.8 4) 32.7
represent vectors in cyclic order, AB is 11. Velocity of a particle at time t = 0 is 2ms −1 .
equivalent is
uuur uuur uuur A constant acceleration of 2 ms −2 acts on the
1) CA + CB 2) CD
uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur particle for 1 second at an angle of 600 with
3) AD + DC + CB 4) AD + BD
its initial velocity . Find the magnitude of
6. An iron sphere of mass 100 kg is suspended velocity at the end of 1 second.
freely from a rigid support by means of a rope
of length 2m. The horizontal force required 1) 3 m / s 2) 2 3 m / s
to displace it horizontally through 50cm is 3) 4 m / s 4) 8 m / s
134 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
RELATIVE VELOCITY 1) 5 m/s 2) 10 m/s 3) 20 m/s 4) 40 m/s
19. A particle is projected from ground at an
12. An aeroplane moving in a circular path
with a speed 250 km/h. The change in angle 45° with initial velocity 20 2 m s −1 .
velocity in half of the revolution is. The magnitude of average velocity in a
1) 500km/h 2) 250km/h time interval from t = 0 to t = 3 s in m s −1 is
3) 120 km/h 4) zero
13. A car starting from a point travels towards 1) 20.62 2) 10.31 3) 41.14 4) 5.15
east with a velocity of 36 kmph. Another car 20. A ball is thrown with a velocity of u making
starting from the same point travels towards an angle θ with the horizontal. Its velocity
north with a velocity of 24 kmph. The relative vector normal to initial vector (u) after a time
velocity of one with respect to another is interval of
1) 12 13 kmph 2)30 kmph u sin θ u u u cos θ
1) 2) 3) 4)
3) 12 kmph 4) 20 kmph g g cos θ g sin θ g
14. A ship is moving due east with a velocity of
21. A stone is projected with a velocity 20 2 m/
12 m/sec, a truck is moving across on the ship
s at an angle of 450 to the horizontal. The av-
with velocity 4m/sec. A monkey is climbing
erage velocity of stone during its motion from
the vertical pole mounted on the truck with a
starting point to its maximum height is
velocity of 3m/sec. Find the velocity of the
monkey as observed by the man on the shore 1) 10 5 m/s 2) 20 5 m/s
(m/sec) 3) 5 5 m/s 4) 20 m/s
1) 10 2) 15 3) 13 4)20
22. A player kicks a foot ball obliquely at a speed
15. A man is walking due east at the rate of
of 20 m/s so that its range is maximum.
2kmph. The rain appears to him to come down
Another player at a distance of 24m away in
vertically at the rate of 2kmph. The actual
the direction of kick starts running at that
velocity and direction of rainfall with the
instant to catch the ball. Before the ball hits
vertical respectively are (2008 M)
the ground to catch it, the speed with which
1 the second player has to run is (g=10 ms-2)
1) 2 2kmph, 450 2) kmph,30 0
2 1) 4 m/s 2) 4 2 m/s
0
3) 2 kmph, 0 4) 1kmph, 900
MOTION OF A BOAT IN A RIVER 3) 8 2 m/s 4) 8 m/s
23. A particle is fired with velocity u making
16. A boat takes 2 hours to travel 8km and back
in still water lake.With water velocity of 4 angle θ with the horizontal . What is the
kmph, the time taken for going upstream of change in velocity when it is at the highest
8km and coming back is point ?
1) 160 minutes 2) 80 minutes 1) u cos θ 2) u 3) u sin θ 4) ( u cos θ − u )
3) 320 minutes 4) 180 minutes 24. Two projectiles A and B are thrown from the
17. The velocity of water in a river is 2 kmph,
while width is 400 m. A boat is rowed from a v
same point with velocities v and respec-
point rowing always aiming opposite point at 2
8 kmph of still water velocity. On reaching tively. If B is thrown at an angle 45° with
the opposite bank the drift obtained is horizontal. What is the inclination of A. when
1) 93 m 2) 100.8 m 3) 112.4 m 4) 100 m their ranges are the same?
OBLIQUE PROJECTILE
−1 1 1 −1 1
18. A particle is projected from ground with some 1) sin 2) sin
4 2 4
initial velocity making an angle of 450 with
the horizontal. It reaches a height of 7.5 m −1 1 1 −1 1
above the ground while it travels a horizontal 3) 2sin 4) sin
4 2 8
distance of 10 m from the point of projection.
The initial speed of the projection is
NARAYANAGROUP 135
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
25. A particle is projected with a velocity v such 31. A ball is thrown horizontally from a cliff such
that its range on the horizontal plane is twice that it strikes the ground after 5s. The line of
the greatest height attained by it, The range sight makes an angle 37° with the horizontal.
of the projectile is (when it is acceleration due The initial velocity of projection in ms-1 is
to gravity is ‘g’) [PMT 2010] 100 100 100
1) 50 2) 3) 4)
4v 2 4g v2 4v 2 3 2 3
1) 2) 2 3) 4) 32. An object is launched from a cliff 20 m above
5g 5v g 5g
26. A number of bullets are fired in all possible the ground at an angle of 300 above the hori-
directions with the same initial velocity u. zontal with an initial speed of 30 m/s. How far
The maximum area of ground covered by does the object travel before landing on the
bullets is ground? (in metre)
2 2 1) 20 2) 20 3 3) 60 4. 60 3
u u u
2
u2
2
1) g 2) π 2 g 3) π 4) π
π 33. A bomber flying upward at an angle of 53°
g 2g with the vertical releases a bomb at an altitude
27. A ball is projected from the ground with a of 800 m. The bomb strikes the ground 20 s
velocity ‘u’ such that its range is maximum.
after its release. If g = 10 m s −2 , the velocity
Then
at the time of release of the bomb in ms-1 is
3 1) 400 2) 800 3) 100 4) 200
1) Its velocity at half the maximum height is u
2 34. Two particles move in a uniform gravitational
2) Its velocity at the maximum height is ‘u’. field with an acceleration g. At the initial
3) Change in its velocity when it returns to the moment the particles were located at same
ground is ‘u’. point and moved with velocities u1 = 9 m s −1
4) all the above are true. and u2 = 4 m s −1 horizontally in opposite
HORIZONTAL PROJECTILE directions. The time between the particles at
28. A stair case contains ten steps each 10 cm the moment when their velocity vectors are
high and 20 cm wide. The minimum horizontal mutually perpendicular in s is (take
velocity with which the ball has to be rolled g = 10 m s−2 )
off the upper most step, so as to hit directly 1) 0.36 2) 3.6 3) 0.6 4) 6
the edge of the lowest step is (approximately) 35. An aeroplane is flying horizontally at a height
of 980 m with velocity 100 ms-1 drops a food
1) 42ms-1 2)4.2ms-1 3) 24ms-1 4)2.4ms-1 packet. A person on the ground is 414 m
29. From certain height 'h' two bodies are pro- ahead horizontally from the dropping point.
jected horizontally each with velocity v. One At what velocity should he move so that he
body is projected towards North and the other can catch the food packet.
body is projected towards east. Their sepa- 50 −1
ration on reaching the ground 1) 50 2ms −1 2) ms
2
2v2h 4v2 h v2 h 8v 2 h 3) 100ms −1 4) 200ms −1
1) 2) 3) 4)
g g g g
CIRCULAR MOTION
30. An object is projected horizontally from a top
of the tower of height h. The line joining the 36. A cyclist riding with a speed of 27kmph. As
point of projection and point of striking on he approaches a circular turn on the road of
the ground makes an angle 450 with radius 80m, he applies breaks and reduces
ground,Then with what velocity the object his speed at the constant rate of 0.50 m/s
strikes the ground every second. The net acceleration of
11gh 9gh 7gh 5gh cyclist on the circular turn is
1) 2) 3) 4) 1) 0.5m/s2 2)0.87m/s2 3)0.56m/s2 4)1m/s2
2 2 2 2
136 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
37. The length of minute hand in a pendulum clock 43. A body is projected horizontally from the top
is 10cm the speed of tip of the hand is (in m/s) of a tower with a velocity of 10 m/s. If it hits
the ground at an angle 450 , the vertical
π π π π component of velocity when it hits ground in
1) 2) 3) 4)
6000 18000 3600 1200 m/s is (2014 - M)
PREVIOUS EAMCET QUESTIONS 1) 10 2) 10 2 3) 5 2 4)5
38. Equations of motion of a projectile are given 44. A body is projected with an angle θ . The
by x = 36t and 2 y = 96t − 98t 2 m .The angle of maximum height reached is h. If the time of
projection is equal to (2011 - M) flight is 4 sec and g = 10m / s 2 , then the value
−1 3 −1 4 of h is ( 2014 - M)
1) sin 4 2) sin 3 1) 10m 2)40m 3)20m 4)5m
45. A person reaches a point directly opposite on
4 −1 3
3) sin −1 4) sin 5 the other bank of a river. The velocity of the
5 water in the river is 4 m/s and the velocity of
39. A and B are two vectors of equal magnitude and the person in still water is 5 m/s. If the width
of the river is 84.6m, time taken to cross the
'θ ' is the angle between them. The angle
river in seconds is ( 2013 -M )
between A or B with their resultant is(E - 2010) 1) 9.4 2) 2 3) 84.6 4) 28.2
θ θ LEVEL -II (C.W)-KEY
1) 2) 3) 2θ 4)0
4 2 01) 3 02) 2 03) 3 04) 2 05) 3 06)3
40. If a body is projected with an angle θ to the 07) 1 08) 2 09) 1 10) 1 11) 2 12) 1
horizontal then (E - 2008) 13) 1 14) 3 15) 1 16) 1 17) 4 18) 3
1) it’s velocity always perpendicular to its
19) 1 20) 3 21) 1 22) 2 23) 3 24) 2
acceleration
2) its velocity becomes zero at its maximum height 25) 1 26) 1 27) 1 28) 2 29) 2 30) 4
3) it’s velocity makes zero angle with the horizontal 31) 4 32) 4 33) 3 34) 3 35) 1 36) 3
at its maximum height 37) 2 38)3 39) 2 40)3 41)3 42)4
4) the body just before hitting the ground, the 43)1 44)3 45) 4
direction of velocity coincides with the LEVEL -II (C.W)-HINTS
acceleration.
1. a + b = 29; a − b = 5 ; a1 = a + 3, b1 = b + 3
41. A body is projected at an angle θ so that its
R ' = a1 + b1
2 2
range is maximum. If T is the time of flight
then the value of maximum range is
(acceleration due to gravity = g) ( 2014 - E) R
2 2 2 2
gT gT gT gT
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
42. The path of projectile is given by the equation
300 900
y = ax − bx 2 , where ‘a’ and ‘b’ are constants 2. Q
and x and y are respectively horizontal and
vertical distances of projectile from the point P
of projection. The maximum height attained Q sin 30 = P
by the projectile and the angle of projection
are respectively. ( 2014 - E )
3. R 2 = P 2 + Q2 + 2PQ cosθ when Q is doubled
2Q sin θ
2a 2 b2 tan 90 =
1) , Tan −1 (a ) −1
2) , Tan (b) P + 2Q cos θ
b 2a ur ur ur ur ur ur
4. P+Q = R ; P+Q = S,
a2 a2 Q sin θ1 θ1
3) , Tan −1 (2b) 4) , Tan −1 (a ) θ2 = tan −1 ; θ =?
b 4b P + Q cos θ1 2
NARAYANAGROUP 137
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur r
5. AB + BC = AC ; AC + CD = − AD 23. u = u cos θ iˆ + u sin θ ˆj
uuur uuur uuur uuur r uur r r
(
AB = − BC + CD + AD ) v = u cos θ iˆ ; Vv = v − u
F = mg Tan θ =
mgx v 2 v 2 sin 2θ
6. 24. =
ur ur ur ur l ur ur 4g g
7. A + B + C = 0 ; C = −( A + B )
Given R = 2 H ; Tanθ = 2 ; R = u 2Sinθ Cosθ
2
25.
P g
2
Max area π ( Rmax )
2
26.
r
8. θ
27. At half of max height
P
π cm 1 + cos 2 θ
−1 y
velocity (V) = u
S= y 2 + x 2 and θ = tan x 2
2h
r r 1r2 28. R=u
9. r = v0t + at , y ( t ) = t 2 + 10t g
2
→ → 2h $ 2h $
Rx = v i; Ry = v
vavg = v1 t1 + v2t2 29. j ; R = Rx2 + Ry2
10. g g
t1 + t2
r h 2h
v = vx iˆ + v y ˆj : vx = u x + axt , v y = u y + a y t Tanθ = , R=u
g V = u + 2 gh
2
11. 30. ,
R
ax = a cos θ , a y = a sin θ
h 2h
θ 31. Tan θ = , T= and R = uT
12. ∆V = 2V sin 13. ∆v = v12 + v22 R g
2 1 2
32. − h = u sin θ t − g t , R = (u cos θ )t
V = Vx + Vy + Vz
2 2 2
14. 2
Vm 1 u1u2
15. VR = V 2 + Vm2 ; Tanθ = 33. − h = u sin θ t − g t 2 34. t =
V 2 g
8+8
16. VB = = 8kmph 2h 2h
2 35. T= ,R =u
g g
d d
t = t1 + t2 = + R − 414
v B + vr v B − v r Remaining distance = R − 414 ; v =
T
d g
17. Drift = v Vr 18. y = x tan θ − 2 x2 36. a = ac2 + ar2 37. v = lω
b 2u cos θ
2
38. u cos θ = 36 − − − (1) ; u sin θ = 48 − − − (2)
19. u i = u xi + u y j
Asinθ sin θ
ui + u f 39. Tanα = =
u f = u x i + ( u y − gt ) j , Vavg = A + Acosθ 1 + cos θ
2 40. At maximum height of projectile velocity =
r horizontal component of velocity
20. u = (u cos θ )iˆ + (u sin θ ) ˆj
r 41. for max imum rangeθ = 450
v = (u cos θ )iˆ + (u sin θ − gt ) ˆj ; u .v = 0
u2 2u sin θ
u Rmax =
Vav = (Vav ) x + (Vav ) y ; v = 1 + 3cos 2 θ when θ = 450 , T =
2 2
21. g g
2
u2 a2
22. Rmax = ; distance = Rmax – x 42. Tanθ = a ⇒ θ = Tan (a) , H =
−1
g 4b
2u sin θ v d
Tan450 = y ; 44. h = gT 2 45. t = 2 2
1
T= ; Distance = V x T 43.
g u 8 vb − vw
138 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
LEVEL - II (H.W) 7. The position of a particle is given by
r
r = 3 t $i − 2 t 2 $j + 4 k$ m where t is in second
PARALLELOGRAM LAW and the co-efficients have proper units for r
1. The greatest and least resultant of two to be in m. The magnitude and direction of
forces are 7 N and 3N respectively. If each velocity of the particle at t = 2 s is
of the force is increased by 3 N and applied 1) 8.54 m s−1 , 20° with x - axis
at 600 .The magnitude of the resultant is 2) 10.54 m s −1 , 70° with x - axis
1) 7 N 2) 3 N 3) 10 N 4) 129N 3) 8.54 m s−1 , 70° with x - axis
TRIANGLE LAW, POLYGON LAW OF
4) 10.54 m s −1 , 20° with x - axis
VECTORS AND LAMI’S THEOREM 8. A particle starts from origin at t = 0 with a
2. In an equilateral triangle ABC, AL, BM and
CN are medians. Forces along BC and BA constant velocity 5 $i ms −1 and moves in xy
represented by them will have a resultant plane under action of a force which produces
( )
a constant acceleration of 3$i + 2 $j ms . The
represented by
uuur uuuur uuur uuur −2
1) 2 AL 2) 2BM 3) 2CN 4) AC
r r r y - coordinate of the particle at the instant its
3. Given that A + B + C = 0 , out of three vec-
x co-ordinate is 84 m in m is
tors two are equal in magnitude and the mag-
1) 6 2) 36 3) 18 4) 9
nitude of third vector is 2 times that of ei-
RELATIVE VELOCITY
ther of two having equal magnitude. Then
angle between vectors are given by 9. When two bodies approach each other with
the different speeds, the distance between
1) 300 , 600 ,90 0 2) 450 ,1350 ,150 0
them decreases by 120 m for every 1 min.
3) 900 ,1350 ,150 0 4) 900 ,1350 ,1350 The speeds of the bodies are
4. A and B are the two pegs separated by 1) 2 m/s and 0.5 m/s 2) 3m/s & 2m/s
13 cm. A body of 169 kgwt is suspended by 3) 1.75m/s & 0.25 m/s 4) 2.5m/s&0.5m/s
thread of 17 cm connecting to A & B, such 10. An aeroplane is flying with the velocity of
that the two segments of strings are perpen- V1 = 800kmph relative to the air towards
dicular. Then tensions in shorter and longer
parts of string are south. A wind with velocity of V2 = 15ms −1 is
1) 100 kgwt, 69 kgwt 2) 65 kgwt, 156 kgwt blowing from west to east. What is the veloc-
3) 156 kgwt, 65 kgwt 4) 69 kgwt, 100 kgwt ity of the aeroplane with respect to the earth.
MOTION IN A PLANE 1) 221.7ms −1 2) 150ms −1 3) 82ms −1 4) 40ms −1
5. Two particles having position vectors MOTION OF A BOAT IN A RIVER
ur r r ur r r
r1 = (3i + 5 j ) m and r2 = (−5i + 3 j )m are 11. A boat takes 4 hr upstream and 2 hr down
ur
moving with velocities V1 = (4$i − 4 $j )ms −1
the stream for covering the same
uur distance.The ratio of velocity of boat to the
and V2 = (ai$ − 3 $j )ms −1 . If they collide after water in river is.
2 seconds , the value of ‘ a’ is 1) 1:3 2) 3:1 3) 1: 3 4) 3 :1
1) 2 2) 4 3) 6 4) 8 12. The width of a river is 2 3km. A boat is rowed
6. A body is projected up such that its position in direction perpendicular to the banks of
vector varies with time as
r river. If the drift of the boat due to flow is 2
{ }
r = 3ti$ + ( 4t − 5t 2 ) $j m. Here t is in second.
km, the displacement of the boat is.
The time when its y-coordinate is zero is 1) 3 km 2) 6km 3) 5 km 4) 4 km
1) 3 s 2) 1 s 3) 0.8 s 4) 1.25 s
NARAYANAGROUP 139
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
13. Person aiming to reach the exactly opposite taken to reach the highest point of its path is
point on the bank of a stream is swimming
H 2H H 2H
with a speed of 0.5ms −1 at an angle of 1200 1) 2) 3) 4)
g g 2g g cos β
with the direction of flow of water. The speed
of water in the stream is 20. The maximum height attained by a projectile
is increased by 5%.Keeping the angle of pro-
1) 1ms −1 2) 0.25ms −1 3) 0.67ms −1 4) 3ms −1
jection constant, What is the percentage in-
OBLIQUE PROJECTILE crease in horizontal range?
14. A particle projected from the level ground just 1)5% 2)10% 3)15% 4)20%
clears in its ascent a wall 30 m high and 21. A gardener wants to wet the garden without
120 3 away measured horizontally. The time moving from his place with a water jet whose
since projection to clear the wall is two velocity is 20 m s −1 the maximum area that
he can wet ( g = 10 m s −2 ) ( in metre2 )
second. It will strike the ground in the same
horizontal plane from the wall on the other
side at a distance of (in metres) 1) 1600 π 2) 40 π 3) 40 0 π 4) 20 0 π
1)150 3 2)180 3 3) 120 3 4) 210 3 22. A particle is projected with speed u at angle
θ to the horizontal. find the radius of
15. A stone is projected with a velocity 20 2 m/ curvature at highest point of its trajectory
s at an angle of 450 to the horizontal. The av-
erage velocity of stone during its motion from u 2 cos2 θ 3u 2 cos 2 θ
1) 2)
starting point to its maximum height is (g=10 2g 2g
m/s2)
u 2 cos 2 θ 3u 2 cos 2 θ
1)10 5 m/s 2)20 5 m/s 3)5 5 m/s 4)20m/s 3) 4)
g g
16. A ball is thrown with velocity 8 ms −1 making HORIZONTAL PROJECTILE
an angle 60° with the horizontal. Its velocity 23. From the top of a tower of height 78.4 m two
will be perpendicular to the direction of initial stones are projected horizontally with 10 m/s
velocity of projection after a time of and 20 m/s in opposite directions. On reach-
1.6 4 ing the ground, their separation is
1) s 2) s 3) 0.6 s 4) 1.6 3 s 1) 120 m 2) 100 m 3) 200 m 4) 150 m
3 3
24. A body is projected vertically upwards. At its
17. The range of a projectile, when launched at
highest point it explodes into two pieces of
an angle of 150 with the horizontal is 1.5m. masses in the ratio of 2:3 and the lighter piece
The additional horizontal distance the flies horizontally with a velocity of 6 m s−1 .
projectile would cover when projected
The time after which the lines joining the point
with same velocity at 450 is of explosion to the position of particles are
1) 3 km 2) 4.5 km 3) 1.5 km 4) 2.5 km perpendicular to each other is
18. A body is projected obliquely from the ground
such that its horizontal range is maximum.If the 6 12 24
1) s 2) s 3) s 4) 2 s.
change in its linear momentum, as it moves from 25 15 25
half the maximum height to maximum height, 25. From the top of a building 80 m high, a ball is
is P, the change in its linear momentum as it thrown horizontally which hits the ground at
travels from the point of projection to the a distance. The line joining the top of the
landing point on the ground will be building to the point where it hits the ground
1) P 2) 2 P 3) 2 P 4) 2 2 P makes an angle of 450 with the ground. Initial
velocity of projection of the ball is
19. A projectile is thrown at angle β with vertical. (g =10 m/s2)
It reaches a maximum height H. The time 1) 10 m/s 2) 15 m/s 3) 20 m/s 4) 30 m/s
140 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
26. A stone is thrown from the top of a tower of 31. An insect trapped in a circular groove of radius
height 50 m with a velocity of 30 ms −1 at an 12 cm moves along the groove steadily and
complete 7 revolutions in 100 seconds.The
angle of 300 above the horizontal . Find the linear speed of the motion in cm/s
time during which the stone will be in air 1) 5.3 2) 4 3) 3 4) 5
1) 2 sec 2) 3 sec 3) 4 sec 4) 5 sec
27. From the top of a tower 40 m high a ball is LEVEL - II (H.W) - KEY
projected upwards with a speed of 20 m s −1 01) 4 02) 2 03) 4 04) 2 05) 3 06) 3
at an angle 30° with the horizontal. The ratio 07) 3 08) 2 09) 3 10) 1 11) 2 12) 4
of the total time of flight to hit the ground to 13) 2 14) 2 15) 1 16) 1 17) 3 18) 4
the time taken by it to come back to the same 19) 2 20) 1 21) 1 22) 3 23) 1 24) 3
25) 3 26) 4 27) 1 28) 3 29) 2 30) 3
initial elevation is ( g = 10 m s −2 ) 31) 1
1) 2:1 2) 3:1 3) 3:2 4) 4 :1
28. A body is thrown horizontally with a velocity LEVEL - II (H.W) - HINTS
u from the top of a tower.The displacement
of the stone when the horizontal and vertical 1. P+Q=7,P-Q=3 ; P1 =P+3, Q1 = Q + 3
velocities are equal is
R = P1 + Q1 + 2 P1Q1 cos θ
2 2
u2 u2 u2 2u 2
1) 2) 3) 2g
5 4) 2.
g 2g g A
CIRCULAR MOTION
29. A ball is projected with 20 2 m/s at angle M
N
45 with horizontal. The angular velocity of
0
the particle at highest point of its journey
about point of projection is
1) 0.1 rad/s 2) 1 rad/s L
B C
3) 0.3 rad/s 4) 0.4 rad/s → → →
30. A particle is moving along a circular path in from figure AB + BC = 2 BM
xy − plane. When it crosses x − axis, it has
an acceleration along the path of 1.5m / s 2 ,
and is moving with a speed of 10 m/s in −ve θ2
y − direction. The total acceleration is C
B
y
3.
θ1
2m
A
→ → → → → → →
x A+ B = − C , A = B , 2 A = C
→ →
anglebetween A and B is 90 0
→ → → → →
10 m/s B + C = A anglebetween B and C is 135 0
1) 50iˆ − 1.5 ˆjm / s 2 2) 10iˆ − 1.5 ˆjm / s 2
3) −50iˆ − 1.5 ˆjm / s 2 4) 1.5iˆ − 50 ˆjm / s 2
NARAYANAGROUP 141
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
4.
1 2
A 13 cm
B 26. h= gt − u sin θ .t
2
T
x 1
T2 1 2u sin θ t1
17-x 27. h = gt12 − u sin θ .t1 ; t2 = , =?
2 g t2
w
169 kgwt u u2
2 T T T 28. s = x 2 + y 2 , x = u. , y =
132 = x 2 + (17 − x ) ; 1 = 2 = 3 g 2g
ur ur ur uur x 17 − x 13
ω = v ; 30. a = ar − i + at − j
^ ^
5. r1 + v1t = r2 + v2t ; 6. 4t − 5t 2 = 0 29.
r
→ → s 2π rN
dr
v = 31. v= =
7. dt t t
t = 2 s
→
8. r = ut + 1 at 2 LEVEL - III
2
equate x coordinate to 84 to find time t
120 1. BC is divided into four equal parts by P, Q
9. v1 + v2 = , verify options uuur uuur
60 and R. The resultant of AB and 3AC is
→ → 5 ^
10. v AW = v 1 = 800 × j B
P
18
→ → ^ → → →
v W = v 2 = 15 i ; v W = v AW + v W Q
AB
vB t1 + t2 vw R
= 2 13. sin 30 =
11. vR t1 − t2 12. s= d +x2
vm
1 2 A
14. x = u cos θ .t ; y = u sin θ t − 2 gt C
AC
2u cos θ .u sin θ uuur uuur uuur uuur
R= ; x1 = R − x 1) AR 2) 4AR 3) 4AP 4) PQ
g 2. A particle moves in the XY plane under the
u u
15. v= 1 + 3cos 2 θ 16. t = action of a force →
2 g sin θ F such that the value of its
u sin 2θ1
2
u sin 2θ 2
2
→
17. R1 = , R2 = linear momentum P at any time 't' is
g g
2
uy Px = 2 cos t , Py = 2 sin t . The angle ' θ '
R2 − R1 ; H =
2g
between → →
F and P at a given time 't' will be
mv sin θ 1 2H
18. p= , p = 2mv sin θ 19. t = 1) θ = 0° 2) θ = 30°
2 g
u2 3) θ = 90° 4) θ = 180°
21. A = π R , R =
2
20. Hα R g
3. Three particles A,B & C start from the origin
at the same time; A with a velocity ‘a’ along
u 2 cos 2 θ 2h x - axis, B with a velocity ‘b’ along y-axis and
22. r= 23. x = ( u1 + u2 ) C with velocity ‘c’in XY plane along the line
g g
x = y. The magnitude of ‘c’ so that the three
m1 v2 2 v1v2 2h
24. = , t= 25. h = R = u always remain collinear is :
m2 v1 g g
a +b ab 2ab
1) 2) ab 3) a + b 4)
2 a +b
142 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
4. Two forces F1 and F2 are acting at a point, 8. Resultant of two vectors of magnitude P and
Q is of magnitude `Q’. If the magnitude of
whose resultant is F . If F2 is doubled F is ur
Q is doubled now the angle made by new re-
also doubled. If F2 is reversed then also F ur
sultant with P is
is doubled. Then F1 : F2 : F is 1) 300 2) 900 3) 600 4) 1200
1) 2: 2: 3 2) 3: 3: 2 9. The two forces 2 2N and x N are acting at
3) 3 : 2 : 3 4) 2 : 3 : 2 a point their resultant is perpendicular to x̂N
5. Two vectors of equal magnitude P are and having magnitude of 6 N . The angle
inclined at some angle such that the differ- between the two forces and
ence in magnitude of resultant and magnitude magnitude of x are.
of either of the vectors is 0.732 times either
of the magnitude of vectors. If the angle be- 1) θ = 1200 , X = 2 N 2) θ = 300 , X = 2 N
tween them is increased by half of its initial 3) θ = 1500 , X = 3 N 4) θ = 1500 , X = 2 N
value then find the magnitude of difference 10. The square of the resultant of two forces 4 N
of the vectors and 3 N exceeds the square of the resultant
1) 2P 2) 2P 3) 3P 4) 3P of the two forces by 12 when they are mutu-
6. If ‘O’ is at equilibrium then the values of the ally perpendicular.The angle between the
vectors is.
tension T1 and T2 are, (20 N is acting
vertically downwards at O). 1) 300 2) 600 3) 900 4) 1200
11. An aeroplane flies along a straight line from
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| A to B with a speed v0 and back again with
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
0
60 the same speed v0 . A steady wind v is blowing.
If AB = l then
T1 2v0l
a) total time for the trip is v 2 − v 2 if wind
0
0
150 blows along the line AB
0
2l
O 60 b) total time for the trip is v 2 − v 2 , if wind
0
T2 blows perpendicular to the line AB
20 N
c) total time for the trip decrease because of
the presence of wind
d) total time for the trip increase because of the
presence of wind
1) 20N, 30N 2) 20 3N,20N 1) a , b , d are correct
3) 20 3N,20 3N 4) 10N, 30N 2) a , b , c are correct
3) only a , d are correct
7. A particle starts from the origin at t = 0 s with 4) only b , d are correct
a velocity of 10.0 ˆj m/s and moves in the xy − 12. Two particles A and B move with constant
ur uur
plane with a constant acceleration of velocity v1 and v2 along two mutually
(8.0iˆ + 2.0 ˆj ) ms −2
.What time is the x − coor-- perpendicular straight lines towards
intersection point O as shown in figure. At
dinate of the particle 16m? moment t = 0 particles were located at
1) t = 2s 2) t = 4s 3) t = 3s 4) t = 1s distance l1 and l2 respectively from O. Then
NARAYANAGROUP 143
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
minimum distance between the particles and 15. Two stones are projected from the top of a
time taken are respectively tower in opposite direction, with the same
1 velocity V but at 300 & 600 with horizontal
A Vt respectively.The relative velocity of first
1 stone relative to second stone is
2V V
S l1 1) 2v 2) 2v 3) 4)
3 2
16. A motor boat going down stream comes over
a floating body at a point A. 60 minutes later
2 B
l2 O it turned back and after some time passed
V 2t the floating body at a distance of 12 km from
the point A. Find the velocity of the stream
l1v2 − l2 v1 l1v1 + l2 v2 assuming constant velocity for the motor boat
1) , in still water.
v12 + v22 v12 + v22 1) 2 km/hr 2) 3 km/hr
3) 4 km/hr 4) 6 km/hr
l1v1 − l2v2 l1v2 + l2 v1 17. It is raining at a speed of 5 m / s −1 at an angle
2) ,
v +v
2
1
2
2
v +v
2
1
2
2 370 to vertical, towards east.A man is moving
to west with a velocity of 5 m / s −1 . The angle
l1v2 − l2v1 l1 ( l1v1 + l2 v2 ) l1 with the vertical at which he has to hold the
3)
v12 + v22 (
l2 , v12 + v22 l2 ) umbrella to protect himself from rain is.
1) tan −1 ( 2 ) to west 2) tan −1 ( 2 ) to east
l1v2 − l2 v1 l2 ( l1v1 + l2v2 ) l2
−1 1 −1 1
4)
v +v
2
1
2
2
(
l1 , v12 + v22 l1 ) 3) tan to south 4) tan to east
2 2
13. The distance between two moving particles P 18. Rain, pouring down at an angle α with the
and Q at any time is a. If vr be their relative vertical has a speed of 10ms −1 . A girl runs
velocity and if u and v be the components of against the rain with a speed of 8ms −1 and
vr , along and perpendicular to PQ.The closest sees that the rain makes an angle β with the
distance between P and Q and time that vertical, then relation between α and β is
elapses before they arrive at their nearest
8 + 10sin β 8 + 10sin α
distance is 1) tan α = 2) tan β =
10 cos β 10 cos α
a ( v + vr ) vr
2
1) , a 1 + 3) tan α = tan β 4) tan α = cot β
v u 19. A man can swim directly a stream of width
2 100 m in 4 minutes, when there in no current
av u
2) ( v + v , a 1 + of water and in 5 minutes when there is
r ) vr current of water. The velocity of the current
of water in the stream is
avr avr av au
3) , 2 4) v , v 2 1) 15ms −1 2) 5ms −1 3) 2.5ms −1 4) 0.25ms −1
v u r r 20. The velocity of a boat in still water is 10 m/s. If
14. Two ships are 10 km apart on a line from south water flows in the river with a velocity of 6 m/s
to north. The one farther north is moving what is the difference in times taken to cross
towards west at 40 kmph and the other is the river in the shortest path and the shortest
moving towards north at 40 kmph. Then time. The width of the river is 80 m.
distance of their closest approach is
3
10 1) 1s 2) 10s 3) s 4) 2s
1) 10 km 2) 10 2 km 3) km 4) 20 km 2
2
144 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
21. A boat takes 4 hrs to travel certain distance 26. A projectile has initially the same horizontal
in a river in down stream and it takes 6 hrs to velocity as it would acquire if it had moved
travel the same distance in upstream. Then from rest with uniform acceleration of 3ms −1
the time taken by the boat to travel
for 0.5 minutes. If the maximum height
the same distance in still water is reached by it is 80m then the angle of
1) 4.8 hrs 2) 9.8 hrs 3) 24 hrs 4) 10 hrs. projection is [ g = 10 ms −2 ]
22. A boats man finds that he can save 6 sec in
−1 3
crossing a river by quicker path, then by 1) tan −1 (3) 2) tan ( )
2
shortest path if the velocity of boat and river
be respectively 17 m/s and 8 m/s, then river
−1 4 −1 4
width is 3) tan 4) sin
9 9
1) 675 m 2) 765 m 3) 567 m 4) 657 m
23. A boy playing on the roof of a 10 m high build- 27. A ball is thrown from a point with a speed V0 ,
ing throws a ball with a speed of 10 m s −1 at an at an angle of projection θ . From the same
point and at the same instance a person starts
angle of 300 with the horizontal. How far from
V0
the throwing point will the ball be at a height of running with a constant speed to catch
2
10 m from the ground?
the ball will the person be able to catch the
1) 5.2 m 2) 4.33 m 3) 2.66 m 4) 8.66 m ball ? If yes, what should be the angle of
24. At a given instant of time the position vector projection
of a particle moving in a circle with a velocity 1) yes, 60° 2) yes, 30°
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
3 i − 4 j + 5 k is i + 9 j − 8 k .Its angular veloc- 3) No 4) yes, 45°
ity at that time is:
28. The coach throws a baseball to a player with
^ ^ ^ −1
^ ^ ^ an initial speed of 20 m s at an angle of 45°
(13i − 29 j − 31k ) (13i− 29 j− 31k ) with the horizontal. At the moment the ball is
1. 2.
146 146 thrown, the player is 50 m from coach. The
speed and the direction that the player has
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ to run to catch the ball at the same height at
(13i + 29 j − 31k ) (13i + 29 j+ 31k )
3. 4. which it was released in m s −1 is
146 146
25. A projectile is given an initial velocity 5
1) away from coach
^ ^ 2
i + 2 j .The cartesian equation of its path is
5
−2
(g = 10ms ) (JEE MAIN - 2013) 2)
2
towards the coach
1) y = 2x − 5x 2 2) 9y = 12x − 5x 2
2
3) towards the coach
3) y = 9x − 5x 2 4) 5y = x − 9x 2 5
2
4) away from the coach
5
NARAYANAGROUP 145
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
29. If a stone is to hit at a point which is at a
distance d away and at a height h (see fig) u2 h 2u2h
2) d =
2 2
above the point from where the stone starts, 1) d =
2 g
then what is the value of initial speed u if the
3) d = h 4) gd2 = u2h
stone is launched at an angle θ ?
32. A ball is projected from the top of a tower
with a velocity 3i$ + 4 $j + 5 k$ m s −1 , where
$i, $j & k$ are unit vectors along east, north
and vertical upwards respectively. If the
height of the tower is 30 m, its range is
h (g = 10ms )−2
1) 12 m 2) 9 m 3) 15 m 4) 25 m
θ 33. A ball is projected from the top of a tower
d with a velocity 3i$ + 4 $j + 5 k$ m s −1 , where
$i, $j & k$ are unit vectors along east, north and
d g d g
2 ( d tan θ − h ) cosθ
1) sin θ 2) vertical upwards respectively. If the height
2(d tan θ − h)
of the tower is 30 m, its time of flight is
3)
gd 2
4)
gd 2 (g = 10ms )−2
h cos 2 θ ( d − h) 1) 5 2) 3 3) 0.3 4) 0.5
30. If a projectile crosses two walls of equal 34. A cricketer of height 2.5 m throws a ball at an
height h symmetrically as shown in the fig. angle of 300 with the horizontal such that it is
Choose the correct statement (s) received by another cricketer of same height
standing at distance of 50 m from the first one.
( g = 10m / s ) 2
Find the maximum height attained by the ball.
1) 10 m 2) 9 m 3) 10.7 m 4) 9.7 m
u 35. A particle when fired at an angle
θ = 600 along the direction of the breadth of
a rectangular building of dimension
t = 2s t = 6s 9m × 8 m × 4 m so as to sweep the edges. Find
h the range of the projectile.
θ 8 4
1) 8 3 2) 4 3 3) 4)
120 m 3 3
36. A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m above
1) The time of flight is 8 sec the ground and throws a stone horiozontally with
2) The height of each wall is 60 m an initialspeed of15m s-1 neglecting air resistance.
3) The maximum height of projectile is 80m The time taken by the stone to reach the ground in
4) All the above seconds is (g=9.8ms-2 )
31. A particle is dropped from a height h. Another 1) 5 2) 10 3) 1 4) 15
particle which is initially at a horizontal 37. A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m
distance ‘d’ from the first is simultaneously above the ground and throws a stone
projected with a horizontal velocity u and the horizontally with an initial speed of 15ms-1
two particles just collide on the ground. Then Neglecting air resistance, the speed with
which it hits the ground in ms-1 is (g=9.8ms-2 )
1) 9.8 2) 99 3) 4.9 4) 49
146 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
38. The direction of projectile at certain instant the two fragments, when their displacement
is inclined at angle α to the horizontal after t
vectors is inclined at 600 relative to each
sec.If it is inclined at an angle β then the
horizontal component of velocity is other is ( g = 10ms −2 )
g gt 1) 40 3 2) 80 3 3) 120 3 4) 480 3
1) 2)
tan α − tan β tan α − tan β
43. An object in projected up the inclined at the
t gt
3) 4) angle shown in the figure with an initial
g(tan α − tan β ) (tan α + tan β )
velocity of 30ms −1 . The distance x up the
39. Two bodies are projected from the same point
with same speed in the directions making an incline at which the object lands is
angle α1 and α 2 with horizontal and strike A
at the same point in the horizontal plane
through a point of projection. If t1 and t2 30 ms-1
X
300
t −t
2
1
2
2
are their time of flights. Then 300
t +t
2
1
2
2
tan (α1 − α 2 ) sin (α1 + α 2 ) 1) 600 m 2) 104m 3) 60 m 4) 208 m
( 1 2)
1) tan α + α
( 1 2)
2) sin α − α
44. A projectile fired with velocity u at right
angle to the slope which is inclined at an angle
sin (α1 − α 2 ) sin 2 (α1 − α 2 )
θ with horizontal. The expression for R is
( 1 2)
3) sin α + α
( 1 2)
4) sin 2 α + α
40. At a certain height a body at rest explodes 2u 2 2u 2
into two equal fragments with one fragment 1. tan θ 2. sec θ
g g
receiving a horizontal velocity of 10 ms −1 The
time interval after the explosion for which the
velocity vectors of the two fragments become u2 2u 2
3. tan 2 θ 4. tan θ sec θ
perpendicular to each other is ( g = 10 ms −2 )
g g
1) 1s 2) 2s 3) 1.5s 4)1.7s 45. In figure shown below, the time taken by the
41. At a certain height a shell at rest explodes into projectile to reach from A to B is t then, the
two equal fragments one of the fragments distance AB is equal to
receives a horizontal velocity u.The time interval
after which the velocity vectors will be inclined B
at 1200 to each other is
u 3u 2u u
1) 2) 3) 4) 0
3g g 3g 2 3g 60 0
30
42. A bomb at rest at the summit of a cliff breaks A C
into two equal fragments.One of the
fragments attains a horizontal velocity of ut 3ut
1) 2) 3) 3ut 4) 2ut
20 3ms −1 .The horizontal distance between 3 2
NARAYANAGROUP 147
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
r
46. A particle moves on a circle of radius r with 2. p = 2 cos tiˆ + 2 sin tjˆ
centripetal acceleration as function of time r dpr
F= = −2 sin tiˆ + 2 cos tjˆ
as a c = k 2 rt 2 where k is a positive constant. dt
r r r r
Find the resultant acceleration. p.F = 0 ⇒ p ⊥ to F
1) kt 2 2) kr
3) kr k 2 t 4 + 1 4) kr k 2 t 2 − 1
B
47. A particle moves in a circular path such that (0,b) c c
,
its speed v varies with distance as v = α s 2 2
where α is a positive constant. Find the 3. C
acceleration of particle after traversing a 450 A
distance S? 0 (a, 0 )
1 S2 1 S2 c
1) α − 2) α + b−
2 2
4 R2 4 R2 2 = b−0
comparing the slopes
0−
c 0−a
1 S2 1 S2 2
3) α + 4) α +
2
2 R2 2 R2 4. F = F1 + F2 + 2 F1 F2 cos θ ...(1)
2 2 2
48. A particle moves in a circle of radius 20 cm. 4F 2 = F12 + 4F22 + 4F1F2 cosθ ...(2)
Its linear speed is given by v = 2t where t is 4 F 2 = F12 + F22 − 2 F1 F2 cos θ ...(3)
in s and v in m/s. Then
a) the radial acceleration at t = 2s is 80ms–2 5. R − P = 0.732 P ; R = 1.732 P = 3P
b) tangential acceleration at t = 2s is 2 ms–2 θ θ
But 2 P.cos = 3P ; θ = θ +
1
c) net acceleration at t = 2 s is greater than 2 2
80 ms–2 6. T1 sin 30 = T2 cos 30 ; T1 = 3T2 ...(1)
0 0
d) tangential acceleration remains constant in
magnitude. T1 cos 300 = 20 + T2 ...(2) ; solving (1) and (2)
r r 1r r r r
r ( t ) = v0t + at 2 ; r ( t ) = 4t 2 i + (10t + t 2 ) j
1) only a,b,c are correct 2) only a,b,d are correct
3) only a,c,d are correct 4) all a,b,c,d are correct 7.
2
LEVEL - III - KEY 4t = 16
2
01) 2 02) 3 03) 4 04) 4 05) 2 06) 2 8. Q 2 = P 2 + Q 2 + 2 PQ cos θ ;
07) 1 08) 2 09) 1 10) 2 11) 1 12) 1 P 2Q sin θ
13) 4 14) 3 15) 2 16)4 17) 1 18) 2 cosθ = − ;Tan α =
2Q P + 2Q cos θ
19)4 20) 4 21) 1 22) 2 23) 4 24) 2 9.
25) 1 26) 3 27) 4 28) 2 29) 2 30) 4 x
31) 2 32) 3 33) 2 34) 4 35) 1 36) 2
37) 2 38) 2 39) 3 40) 1 41) 1 42) 4
43) 3 44) 1 45) 1 46) 3 47) 2 48) 4
6
2 2
LEVEL - III - HINTS
uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur θ 900
1. AC + CB = AB ; AC + 4CR = AB
uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur
(
uuur uuur uuur
)
AC + 4 AR − AC = AB ; 4 AR − 3 AC = AB x
∴ AB + 3 AC = 4 AR
148 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
x Since OB = l2 − v 2t and OA = l1 − v 1t and
x 2 + 6 = 8;sin θ =
2 2
AB 2 = OB 2 + OA2 ⇒ s = ( l1 − v1t ) + ( l2 − v2t )
2 2 2
2 2
10. 4 + 3 + 24cos θ = 12 + 4 + 3 ds d 2
( )
2 2 2 2
For s to be minimum = 0 or s =0
11. a,b,d are correct dt dt
When wind blows along the line AB, ds
t = t A→ B + t B → A ⇒ 2s = 2(l1 − ν 1t ) −ν 1 + 2(l2 − ν 2 t ) −ν 2 = 0
dt
l l 2lv lv +l v
⇒t = + ⇒t = 2 02 −l1v1 + v12t − l2 v2 + v22t = 0 ⇒ t = 1 12 2 2 2
v + v0 v0 − v v0 − v v1 + v2
If wind blows perpendicular to AB
2 2
l v +l v l v + l v
S 2
= l − 1 12 22 2 v1 + l2 − v2 1 12 22 2
v1 + v2 v1 + v2
min
v0
v v v0
( l1v2 − l2v1 ) ⇒ S = l1v2 − l2 v1
2
B A B ⇒ S min =
2
min
A
v1 v1 v12 + v22 v12 + v22
t = t A→ B + t B → A 13. Assuming P to be at rest, particle Q is moving
v = v −v
t 2
0
2
v = v −v
t 2
0
2 with velocity vr , in the direction shown in
l l figure. components of vr along and perpendicular
t A→ B = t B→ A = to PQ are u and v respectively, In the figure
v02 − v 2 v02 − v 2
u v
2l sin α = , cos α =
Hence t = v 2 − v 2 vr vr
0
P
If the wind were not present then total time
2l α
taken for the trip would have been t = v
0
i.e. the total time for the trip increases because
of the presence of wind. a
u v1
12. Let the separation between the particles be
minimum at time t, Then
1
V1t
A α
Q
The closest distance between the particles is PR.
S
l1
v av
S min = PR = PQ cos α = ( a ) ⇒ Smin =
vr vr
B
2 Time after which they arrive at their nearest
O distance is
l2
V2t
NARAYANAGROUP 149
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
v
(a)
QR ( PQ ) sin α vr = au β
t= = = VR − VG
vr vr vr vr2 α
VR=10
14. S min = d × sin θ y
15.
V V
x
−VG = 8
x
30
0 0
60 sin α = ; x = VR sin α
VR
y x + VG
cos α = ; y = VR cos α ; Tanβ =
VR y
d d
19. t1 =
VB , t2 = V 2 − V 2
B W
d d
20. t1 = , t2 =
ur VB − VW
2 2
VB
V 1 = V cos 30iˆ + V sin 30 ˆj
ur t1 =
d
t2 =
d
t3 =
d
V 2 = −V cos 60iˆ + V sin 60 ˆj 21. VB + VW , VB − VW , VB
ur ur ur
V 12 = V 1 − V 2 d d
22. Given t1 − t2 = 6 ; t1 = , t2 =
16. d = (v B
+ vW ) t1 − − (1) ; VB 2 − VW 2 VB
( B − v w ) t2 − − ( 2 ) ;
d − 12 = v
u 2 sin 2θ →
→
r× v
→
12 = v ( t + t ) − − − ( 3 ) 22. R= 24. ω = →2
w 1 2 g
r
solve above equations
25. u cos θ = 1 , u sin θ = 2
use equation of the projectile
θ u 2 sin 2 θ
0 VR-VM 26. V = at ; V = u cos θ ; H =
37 2g
VR=5 V 2 sin 2θ 2V0 sin θ
and T =
y R= 0
17. 27. for projectile
g g
S = Vt for the person
For angle, equate range of the projectile with the
x -VM=5 distance travelled by the person.
x 3 y x + VM u 2 sin 2θ
sin 37 = = ; cos 37 = ; Tanθ = 28. R ball = , s = vt
VR 5 VR y g
18.
1
29. h = (u sin θ )t − gt 2 , d = ( u c o s θ ) t
2
T = 6 + 2 = 8sec ; h = 8 ( 8 − 4 )
g 2 2
30.
150 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
39. α1 + α 2 = 900 ⇒ sin (α1 + α 2 ) = 1
H=
8
(8 )
g 2
2u sin α1 2u sin α 2
t1 = , t2 =
2h 2h g g
31. t= and R = u
g g
u1u2 u1u2
40. t= 41. t= cot(θ / 2)
u sin θ + ( u sin θ ) + 2 gH g g
2
32. T = ; R = u cos θ .T 2 u1u2 θ
g 42. x = ( u1 + u2 ) cot
g 2
u sin θ + ( u sin θ ) + 2 gH From figure α = 30 , θ = 600
2 0
43.
33. T=
g 2u 2 cos θ sin (θ − α )
R=
tan θ =
4H
, H max = H + hcrickter , R = 50m g cos 2 α
34.
R θ 1 = 900 + θ , θ 1 − θ = 900
35. 44. α =θ
2u 2 cos θ 1 sin (θ 1 − θ )
R=
g cos 2 θ
(x,h) (x+b,h) 45. u x = u cos θ = u cos 600
w AC
x = AC = u x .t; from figure cos 300 =
θ AB
AC
x b = 2h x AB =
cos 300
46. From given equation ω = kt;
R dω
gx 2 α= = k ; at = rα ; a = ac 2 + at 2
y = h = x tan θ − 2 , dt
2u cos 2 θ
2
dv v
2 2
R u sin 2θ 2
a = a +a = +
2 2
R = x + x + 2h ⇒ x = − h and R = 47. t t
dt R
2 g
using the above equations v2 (2t)2
2 48. v = 2t, a c = = = 20t 2 = 20 × 22 = 80 m / s 2
R 1R r 0.2
h = − h tan θ − − h tan θ dv
2 R 2 at = = 2 m / s2
dt
θ
⇒ R = 2h cot Net acceleration : a = a 2c + a 2t > 80 m / s 2
2
putting θ = 600 , h = 4m then R = 8 3m
LEVEL-IV
2h
36. t= 37. V = Vx + Vy ; Vy = 2 gh
2 2 2
g
Matching Type Questions
Vy Vy − gt
38. Tanα = ; Tanβ = ;
1. The relations between the three vectors
u cos α u cos β → → →
gt A, B and C are given in column I. The angles
Tanα − Tanβ =
u cos β between the vectors are given in column II in
a random order.
gt
u cos β = u cos α ⇒ u cos β = Column - I Column - II
Tanα − Tanβ
→ → →
a) A − B = C and e) π
NARAYANAGROUP 151
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
A–B=C c) If ar ≠ 0, at = 0 r) motion is accelerated
translatory
→ → → 2π
b) A + B = C and f) d) If ar ≠ 0, at ≠ 0 s) no conclusion can be
3 drawn regarding motion
A–B=C 5. A projectile is launched at angle θ to
→ → →
horizontal from A and it hits the target B on
c) A − B = C and g) 0
level ground.
A2 + B2 = C2
Column-I Column-II
→ → →
d) A + B = C and h) π /2 a) Magnitude of radial p) Increases
A= B =C acceleration
b) Magnitude of tangential q) Decreases
acceleration
2. The path of projectile is represented by y=Px-
c) Power delivered by gravity r) First increases,
Qx2. then decreases
List-I List-II d)Torque of gravity about B s)First decreases,
(A) Range (P) P/Q then increases
(B) Maximum height (Q) P 6. Considering a projectile motion..
(C) Time of flight 2
(R)P /4Q Column-I Column-II
a) Change in magnitude p) At highest point of
2 2 of momentum the parabolic path
(D) Tangent of angle (S) P
Qg b) Maximum angular q)2mv sin θ between
momentum about the point of throw
of projection is the point of throw and target
3. Angle between velocity and acceleration
2mv3 sin2 θ cosθ
vectors in the following cases. c) Minimum velocity r) L =
g
List - I List - II
d)Magnitude of change s)Present along vertical
a) Vertically projected e) 900
in momentum direction
body The correct match is
b) For freely dropped f) changes from 7. Motion is defined as rate of change of
body point to point position.
c) For projectile g) zero Column-I Column-II
Position r changes
d) In uniform circular h) 1800 a) Magnitude only p) A coin dropped from
motion roof of house
4. Acceleration a in case of circular motion is b) Direction only q) A coin thrown at any
given by a = a r 2 + at 2 where ar , is radial angle with horizontal
c) Both in magnitude r) A coin held in your
component of acceleration and a t the
and direction hand
tangential component of acceleration.
d) Remains invariant s) A coin is rotated in
a t governs the magnitude of velocity v and circular path with
variable speed
ar its direction of motion.
8. In uniform circular motion a body moves with
Column-I Column-II constant speed v on a circular path of constant
a) If ar = 0, at = 0 p) motion is non-uniform radius r. In this motion
circular
Column-I Column-II
b) If ar = 0, at ≠ 0 q) motion is uniform
circular
152 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
a) The acceleration of p) tangent to path at Reason(R): The resultant of two vectors of
body is every point unequal magnitude can be zero.
15. Assertion(A): Two bodies thrown with same
b) The kinetic energy q) along axis of rotation
speed from the same point at the same instants
angle with horizontal but at different angles never collide in air.
c) The angular displac- r) constant in magnitude Reason(R): x and y co-ordinates of the two
projectiles always differ
ement of body at any but changing in direction 16. Assertion(A): In projectile motion, the angle
instant is directed along between the instantaneous velocity and
acceleration at the highest point is 1800.
d) The velocity of body s) constant always
Reason(R): At the highest point, velocity of
always directed along projectile will be vertically upward.
ASSERTION AND REASON 17. Assertion(A): If a bomb is dropped from an
Options : aeroplane moving horizontally with constant
1) If both Assertion and Reason are true and velocity then the bomb appears to move along a
vertical straight line for the pilot of the plane.
the Reason is correct explanation of the
Reason(R): Horizontal component of velocity of
Assertion. the bomb remains constant and same as the
2) If both Assertion and Reason are true, but velocity of the plane during the motion under
Reason is not correct explanation of the gravity.
Assertion. 18. Assertion (A) :- Two particles of different mass,
3) If Assertion is true, but the Reason is false. projected with same velocity at same angles. The
4)Both Assertion and Reason are false. maximum height attained by both the particle will
9. Assertion(A): Two forces 7N and 5N are acting be same.
at a point and their resultant can be 3N. Reason(R) :- The maximum height of projectile
Reason(R): If two vectors P and Q are acting at is independent of particle mass.
a point, then magnitude of their resultant can have 19. Assertion(A) :- The maximum horizontal range
a value between P–Q to P + Q. of projectile is proportional to square of velocity.
Reason(R):-The maximum horizontal range of
10. Assertion(A): Electric current and velocity of light projectile is equal to maximum height attained by
both have direction as well as magnitude but still projectile.
are not considered as vectors. 20. Assertion(A) :- A body of mass 1kg is making 1
Reason(R): Electric current and velocity of light rps in a circle of radius 1m. Centrifugal force acting
do not follow laws of vector addition. on it is 4π 2 N
11. Assertion(A):A vector is not changed if it is slide Reason(R) :- Centrifugal force is given by
parallel to itself. mυ 2
F= [AIIMS 2008]
Reason(R):Two parallel vectors of same r
21. Assertion(A) :- A coin is placed on phonogram
magnitude are said to be equal vectors.
turn table. The motor is started, coin moves
12. Assertion(A):Angle between iˆ + ˆj and iˆ is 450 along the moving table.
Reason (R) :- The rotating table is providing
Reason(R): iˆ + ˆj is equally inclined to both iˆ and necessary centripetal force to the coin.
22. Assertion(A) :- The trajectory of projectile is
ĵ and the angle between iˆ and ĵ is 900 . quadratic in y and linear in x.
13. Assertion(A): Finite angular displacement is not Reason (R) :- y component of trajectory is
a vector quantity. dependent of x-component.
23. Assertion(A) :- Two similar train are moving
Reason(R): It does not obey the laws of vector
along the equatorial line with the same speed but
addition. in opposite direction. They will exert different
14. Assertion(A): The minimum number of non pressure on the rails.
coplanar vectors whose resultant can be zero is four.
NARAYANAGROUP 153
MOTION IN A PLANE JEEJEE
MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL
PHYSICS-VOL
MAINS - VOL --III
- VI
Reason (R) :- In uniform circular motion the the value of limiting velocity.
magnitude of velocity remains constant but the 33. Assertion(A) :- If both the speed of a body
direction continuously changes. and radius of its circular path are doubled, then
24. Assertion(A) :- When a body is dropped or centripetal force also gets doubled.
thrown horizontally from the same height, it Reason (R) :- Centripetal force is directly
would reach the ground at the same time. proportional to both speed of a body and radius
Reason (R) :- Horizontal velocity has no of circular path.
effect on the vertical direction. 34. Assertion(A) :- In circular motion, the centrip-
25. Assertion(A) :- When the velocity of projec- etal and centrifugal force acting in opposite
tion of a body is made n times, its time of flight direction balance each other.
becomes n times.
Reason (R) :- Centripetal and centrifugal
Reason (R) :- Range of projectile does not
forces don’t act at the same time.
depend on the initial velocity of a body.
26. Assertion (A):- Improper banking of roads LEVEL-IV KEY
causes wear and tear of tyres. Matching Type Questions
Reason (R) :- The necessary centripetal 1) a → g; b → e; c → h ; d → f
force is provided by the force of friction be- 2) A → P, B → R, C → S, D → Q
tween the tyres and the road.
3) a → h; b → g ; c → f ; d → e
27. Assertion(A) :- When range of a projectile is
maximum, its angle of projection may be 450 or 4) a → s; b → r ; c → q; d → p
1350.
5) a → r ; b → s; c → p; d → q
Reason (R) :- Whether θ is 450 or 1350,
value of range remains the same, only the sign 6) a → s; b → r; c → p; d → q
changes. 7) a → p; b → s; c → q; d → r
28. Assertion(A) :- In order to hit a target, a man
should not point his rifle in the same direction as 8) a → r ; b → s; c → q; d → p
target.
Reason (R) :- The horizontal range of the ASSERTION AND REASON
bullet is dependent on the angle of projectile 09) 1 10) 1 11) 2 12) 1 13) 1 14) 3
with horizontal direction. 15) 1 16) 4 17) 1 18) 1 19) 3 20) 1
29. Assertion(A) :- When an automobile while 21) 4 22) 4 23) 2 24) 1 25) 3 26) 1
going too fast around a curve overturns, its inner 27) 1 28) 2 29) 2 30) 1 31) 3 32) 2
wheels leave the ground first. 33) 3 34) 4
Reason (R) :- For a safe turn the velocity of LEVEL - IV - HINTS
automobile should be less than the value of safe ASSERTION AND REASON
limit velocity. 11. Magnitude and direction of vector does not change
30. Assertion(A) :- During a turn, the value of when it is displaced parallel to itself.
centripetal force should be less than the limiting 16. At maximum height of projectile velocity is
frictional force. horizontal and acceleration is vertically
Reason(R) :- The centripetal force is downwards.
provided by the frictional force between the u 2 sin 2 θ
18. H= i.e. it is independent of mass of
tyres and the road. 2g
31. Assertion (A):- When a vehicle takes a turn on projectile.
the road, it travels along a nearly circular path. u 2 sin 2θ u2
19. R= ∴ Rmax = whenθ = 450
Reason (R) :- In circular motion, velocity of g g
vehicle remains same. ∴ Rmaxα u 2
32. Assertion(A) :- As the frictional force in- u 2 sin 2 θ u2
H= ⇒ H max = when θ = 900
creases, the safe velocity limit for taking a turn 2g 2g
on an unbanked road also increases. Rmax
Reason (R) :- Banking of roads will increase It is clear that H max =
2
154 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
mυ 2 m ( rω ) υ 2h M υ 2h
2
M
From relation F = = = mrω 2 Rinner = − = +
ra and 2 ra
20. g Router g
r r 2
= mr ( 2π v ) = 4π 2 mrv 2
2
gra
Here, m = 1kg, v = 1rps, r = 1m In critical condition υ safe =
h
∴ F = 4π 2 × 1× 1× 12 = 4π 2 N If υ is equal or more than the critical value then
21. Within a certain speed of the turn table the reaction on inner wheel becomes zero. So it
frictional force between the coin and the turn leaves the ground first.
table supplies the necessary centripetal force 30. The body is able to move in a circular path due
required for circular motion. On further increase to centripetal force. The centripetal force in case
of speed, the frictional force cannot supply the of vehicle is provided by frictional force. Thus if
necessary centripetal force. Therefore the coin the value of firctional force µ mg is less than
flies off tangentially. centripetal force, then it is not possible for a
gx 2 vehicle to take a turn and the body would
22. y = x tan θ − 2 overturn.
2u cos 2 θ thus condition for safe turning of vehicle is,
23. Due to earth’s axial rotation, the speed of the
trains relative to earth will be different and hence mυ 2
the centripetal forces on them will be different. µ mg ≥
r
mυ 2 31. In circular motion the frictional force acting
Thus their effective weights mg − and towards the centre of the horizontal circular path
r provides the centripetal force and avoid over-
mυ 2 turning of vehicle. Due to the change in direction
mg + will be different. So they exert of motion, velocity changes in circular motion.
r
different pressure on the rails. 32. On an unbanked road, friction provides the
24. Both bodies will take same time to reach the necessary centripetal force
earth because vertical downward component of mυ 2
= µ mg ∴υ = µ rg .
2h r
velocity for t = . Horizontal velocity has Thus with increase in friction, safe velocity limit
g
no effect on the vertical direction. also increases.
When the road is banked with angle of θ then
25. T α u and Rα u 2 its limiting velocity is given by
When velocity of projection of a body is made n
times, then its time of flight becomes n times and rg ( tan θ + µ )
range becomes n2 times. υ=
26. When roads are not properly banked, force of 1 − µ tan θ
friction between tyres and road provides Thus limiting velocity increase with banking of
partially the necessary centripetal force. This road.
cause wear and tear of tyres. 33. Centripetal force is defined from formula
u 2 sin 2θ mυ 2 υ2
R = F= ⇒ Fα
27. Range, r r
g If υ and r both are doubled then F also gets
u2 u2 doubled.
when θ = 45 , max
0 R = sin 900
= 34. While moving along a circle, the body has a con-
g g
stant tendency to regain its natural straight line path.
u 2
−u 2 This tendency gives rise to a force called centrifu-
when θ = 135 , max
0 R = sin 270 0
= gal force. The centrifugal force does not act on
g g
Negative sign shows opposite direction. the body in motion, the only force acting on the
28. The man should point his rifle at a point higher body in motion is centripetal force. The centrifu-
than the target since the bullet suffers a vertically gal force acts on the source of centripetal force to
displace it radially outward from centre of the path.
1
downward deflection y = 2 gt due to gravity..
2
29. When automobile moves in circular path then
reaction on inner wheel and outer wheel will be
different.
NARAYANAGROUP 155
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
4. A boat moves relative to water with a velocity
LEVEL - V which is 1/2 times the river flow velocity. At
SINGLE CORRECT ANSWERS QUESTIONS what angle to the stream direction must the
boat move to minimize drifting.
A) RELATIVE MOTION a) 450 b) 600 c) 1200 d) 900
1. An aeroplane A is flying horizontally due east 5. Two bodies were thrown simultaneously from
at a speed of 400 km/hr. Passengers in A, the same point one straight up and the other
observe another aeroplane B moving at an angle of θ =600 to the horizontal. The
perpendicular to direction of motion at A. initial velocity of each body is equal to
Aeroplane B is actually moving in a direction
v 0 = 25m / s. Neglecting the air drag, find the
300 north of east in the same horizontal plane
as shown in the figure. Determine the distance between the bodies t =1.70 s later.
velocity of B a) 20m b) 18m c) 22m d) 24m
N 6. A sailor in a boat, which is going due east with
a speed of 8m/s observes that a submarine is
B heading towards north at a speed of 12 m/s
E and sinking at a rate of 2 m/s. The
commander of submarine observes a
30° helicopter ascending at a rate of 5 m/s and
heading towards west with 4 m/s. Find the
A
speed of the helicopter with respect to boat.
400 ˆ
A) 400 3 $i + 400 3 $j B) 4 0 0 iˆ + j a) 10m/s b) 11m/s c) 12m/s d) 13m/s
3 7. Consider a collection of a large number of
400 $ particles each with speed v in a plane.
C) 400 $i + 400 $j D) i + 400 $j The direction of velocity is randomly
3 distributed in the collection. The magnitude
2. A boat moves relative to water with a velocity of the average relative velocity of a particle
which is n times less than the river flow with velocities of all other particles is
velocity. At what angle to the stream a) > v b) < v c) = v d) none of these
direction must the boat move to minimize
8. A man in a row boat must get from point A to
drifting? (u is velocity of water, v is velocity
point B on the opposite bank of the river (see
of boat)
figure). The distance BC=a. The width of the
−1 v
a) θ = sin from normal direction river AC=b. At what minimum speed u relative
u to the still water should the boat travel to reach
−1 v the point B? The velocity of flow of the river is
b) θ = cos from normal direction v0.
u
−1 v C a B
c) θ = tan from normal direction v0 b v 0a
u a) b)
a +b
2 2
a 2 + b2
−1 u
d) θ = sin from normal direction b V0
v
3. A man wishes to cross a river flowing with v0 b v 0a
c) d)
velocity u swims at an angle θ with the river A
2a 2b
flow. If the man swims with speed v and if the
width of the river is d, then the drift travelled 9. A man standing on a road has to hold his
by him is umbrella at 530 with vertical to keep the rain
away. He throws the umbrella and starts
b) ( u − v cos θ )
d d
a) ( u + v cosθ ) running at 12 km/h. He finds that rain drops
v sin θ v sin θ are falling on his head vertically. Find the speed
c) ( u − v cos θ ) d) ( u + v cos θ )
d d ( in km/hr) of raindrops w.r.t the moving man
v cos θ v cos θ a) 12km/hr b) 14 km/hr
c) 16km/hr d) 18 km/hr
156
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
B) BODY PROJECTED FROM THE GROUND
10. A motor boat has a speed of 5 m/s. At time t 13. From a point on the ground at a distance a from
=0, its position vector relative to a origin is the foot of a pole, a ball is thrown at an angle
( )
−11iˆ + 16ˆj m, having the aim of getting as of 450, which just touches the top of the pole
and strikes the ground at a distance of b, on
close as possible to a steamer. At time t =0, the other side of it.Find the height of the pole.
( )
the steamer is at the point 4iˆ + 36jˆ m and is P (a,h)
( )
moving with constant velocity 10iˆ − 5jˆ m/s. h
Find the direction in which the motorboat α = 45°
must steer O x
a b
a) 3$i + 3 $j b) 3$i + 4 $j ab ab 2ab ab
a) b) c) d)
c) 4$i + 3 $j d) 4$i + 4 $j a −b a +b a +b a + 2b
14. A heavy particle is projected with a velocity at
11. A river 400 m wide is flowing at a rate 2.0 m/ an angle with the horizontal into the uniform
s. A boat is sailing at a velocity of 10.0 m/s gravitional field. The slope of the trajectory of
repect to the water, in a direction the particle varies as
perpendicular to the river.
Slope
Slope
(a) Find the time taken by the boat ot reach a) b)
the opposite bank.
(b) How far from the point directly opposite O O
to the starting point does the boat reach the t t
opposite bank?
a) 40 sec, 80 m b) 30 sec, 40 m
Slope
Slope
c) 20 sec, 20 m d) 35 sec, 80 m c) d)
12. A block of mass m is floating in a river
flowing with a velocity of 2m/s. A boat is
moving behind the block with a velocity of 5 O O
t t
m/s with respect to the block as shown. From
the boat a stone is thrown with a velocity
v = v1 i$ − v2 $j + v3 k$ with respect to the river
15. A fixed mortar fires a bomb at an angle of 530
above the horizontal with a muzzle velocity of
such that it hits the block. If v1 : v2 : v3 = 80m/s–1. A tank is advancing directly towards
the mortar on level ground at a constant speed
2 3 : 2 : 3 then the velocity of the stone with of 5m/s. The initial separation ( at the instant
respect to the ground is(g=10m/s2 ) mortar is fired) between the mortar and tank,
Boat y so that the tank would hit is [Take g=10ms–2]
2m/sec a) 662.4 m b) 526.3 m c) 486.6 m d) 678.4 m
16. The angular elevation of an enemy’s position
x on a hill ‘h’ ft high is α . What should be the
10m
minimum velocity of the projectile in order to
30° Block hit the enemy?
a) u = gh (cos α + 1) b) u = gh (sin α + 1)
$ 10 $ $ $ 10 $ $
a) 10i − j + 5 3 k b) 12i − j + 5 3k
c) u = gh(cosecα + 1) d) u = gh (sec α + 1)
3 3
17. Two particles are projected simultaneously
$ 10 $ $
c) 10$i − 10 $j + 5 3 k$ d) 10 3 i − j + 5 3k with the same speed v in the same vertical
3 plane with angles of elevation θ , and 2θ ,
where θ <450. At what time will their velocities
be parallel?
157
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
v1 v2
v θ 3θ v θ 3θ P1 a) 250 m
a) t = tan cos ec b) t = cos cot 60°
g 2 2 g 2 2 b) 500 m
A P2
v θ 3θ v θ 3θ 90°
c) t = d) t = cos cos ec
cos tan B c) 750 m
g 2 2 g 2 2 45° 30°
O d) 1000 m
18. Figure shows a sphere moving in a steady flow
of air in the x-direction on a horizontal plane . 22. A particle is projected with a certain velocity
The air stream exerts an essentially constant at an angle a above the horizontal from foot
2
acceleration 1.8 m/sec on the sphere in the x- of an inclined plane of inclination 30o . If the
direction. If at t = 0 the sphere is moving as particle strikes the plane normally then a is
shown in figure, determine the time t required equal to
for the sphere to cross the y-axis again.
1 3
Air flow (a) 30o + tan −1 (b) 3 0 o + tan − 1
y a) 1/3 sec 2 3 2
b) 2/3 sec
(c) 60o
−1
(d) 30 + tan 2 3
o
( )
3 m/s 23. A particle is projected at an angle 600 with
30°
speed 10 3 m/s from the point A, as shown in
c) 4/3 sec the figure. At the same time the wedge is made
x to move with speed 10 3 m/s towards right as
d) 5/3 sec shown in the figure. Then the time after which
500 g
19. A very broad elevator is going up vertically particle will strike with wedge is
with a constant acceleration of 2m / s 2 . At the
instant when the velocity is 4 m / s a ball is
projected from the floor of the lift with a speed 10 3m / s
of 4 m / s relative to the floor at an elevation 10 3m / s
of 30o . The time taken by the ball to return
the floor is (g = 10m / s 2 ) 30° 60°
1 1 1 A
(a) s (b) s (c) s (d) 1s
2 3 4 a) 2s b) 2 3s
20. A boy throws a ball with velocity v0 = 20m / s
The wind impart horizontal acceleration of 4m/ 4
c) s d) None of these
s2 to the left. The angle θ (with vertical )at 3
which the ball must be thrown so that the ball D) COLLISIONS BETWEEN PROJECTILES
returns to the boy’s hand is (g=10m/s2) :
24. A particle is projected from a point A
a) tan −1 (1.2) b) tan −1 (0.2) c) tan −1 (2) d) tan −1 (0.4)
withvelocity u 2 at an angle of 45o with
C) PROJECTILE MOTION ON INCLINED horizontal as shown in figure. It strikes the
PLANE plane BC at right angles. The velocity of the
21. A particle is projected from an inclined plane particle at the time of collision is
OP1 from A with velocity v1 =8ms–1 at an angle C
600 with horizontal. An another particle is u 2
projected at the same instant from B with
velocity v2 =16ms–1 and perpendicular to the 60°
45°
plane OP2 as shown in the figure. After time
10 3 sec there separation was minimim and 3u u 2u
found to be 70m. Then find distance AB. (a) (b) (c) (d) u
2 2 3
158
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
25. A particle is dropped from point P at time t 10 m/s B
= 0. At the same time another particle is 10 2m / s
thrown from point O as shown in the figure and
it collides with the particle P. Acceleration due 45°
A 20 m
to gravity is along the negative y-axis. If the
10 m
two particles collide 2s after they start, find
the initial v0 of the particle which was projected d
from O. Point O is not necessarily on ground. a) 10 m b) 20 m c) 30 m d) 40 m
y 28. In the figure shown, the two projectiles are fired
2m P
simultaneously. The minimum distance
between them during their flight is
10 m v0
20 3 m / s
θ x
O
20 m/s
a) 6 m / s −1 , θ = tan −1 (1) with X − axis
b) 26 m / s −1 , θ = tan −1 (5) with X − axis 60° 30°
c) 2 m / s −1 , θ = tan −1 (2) with X − axis 20 3 m / s
d) 13m / s −1 , θ = tan −1 (4) with X − axis a) 20 m b) 10 3 m c) 10 m d) zero
26. Shots are fired simultaneously from the top and 29. In the direction shown in figure with velocities
bottom of a vertical cliff at angles α and β and v A = 20m / s and vB = 10m / s respectively..
they strike an object simultaneously at the
1
same point. If the horizontal distance of the They collide in air after s . Find the distance x.
object from the cliff is a, the height of the cliff 2
is vB = 10 m/s
U
vA = 20 m/s
α 1
o'
A θ B
m x
P
v a a) 2 3 m b) 3 3 m c) 4 3 m d) 5 3 m
2 n E) NON UNIFORM TWO DIMENTIONAL
β MOTION
o 30. A particle starts from origin of co-ordinates at
a(cot α − cot β ) time t = 0 and moves in the xy plane with a
(a) (b) a(sin β − tan α ) constnat acceleration α in the y direction .It’ss
cot α cot β
a tan α equation of motion is y = β x 2 . It’s velocity
(c) (d) a(cot α − cot β ) component in the x direction is
tan β
27. Two particles A and B are projected 2α α α
simultaneously from the two towers of height (A) Variable (B) (C) (D)
β 2β 2β
10m and 20m respectively. Particle A is
31. Motion of a particle is governed by following
projected with an initial speed of 10 2m / s at
x
an angle of450 with horizontal, while particle relations y = ; V x = b − ct . (α , b , c are + ve const )
B is projected horizontally with speed 10m/s. α
If they collide in air, what is t h e The displacement (S) verson from (t) graph os
distane d between the towers?
159
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
(A) (B) 34. A motor boat is to reach at a point 30°
upstream on other side of a river flowing with
s s
velocity 5 m/s. Velocity of motor boat with
respect to water is 5 3 m/sec. The driver
t t should steer the boat at an angle of
(D) (A) 30° up w.r.t. the line of destination from the
s s starting point
(B) 60° up w.r.t. normal to the bank
(C) 150° w.r.t. stream direction
t t (D) none of these
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 35. A car is moving rectilinearly on a horizontal
32. At the instant a motor bike starts from rest in path with acceleration a 0 . A person sitting
a given direction, a car overtakes the motor inside the car observes that an insect S is
bike, both moving in the same direction. The crawling up the screen with an acceleration a.
speed time graphs for motor bike and car are
If θ is the inclination of the wind screen with
represented by OAB and CD respectively.
Then the horizontal, then the acceleration of the
insect.
A a) perpendicular to screen is a 0 tan θ
60 bike B
speed (in m/s)
b) perpendicular to screen is a 0 sin θ
40 car D
c) along the horizontal is a 0 − a cos θ
20
d) parallel to screen is a + a 0 cos θ
O 36. Three particles A, B and C and situated at the
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27
time (in s) vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of side
of length l at time t = 0 , Each of the particles
a) at t=18s the motor bike and car are 180m apart.
m ove w ith constant speed u. A always has its
b) at t=18s the motor bike and car are 720m apart.
velocity along AB, B along BC and C along
c) the relative distance between motor bike and
CA.
car reduce to zero at t =27 s and both are 1080m
far from origin A
d) the relative distance between motor bike and
car always remains same.
l
33. A man in a boat crosses a river from point A. l
If he rows perpendicular to the bank he
reaches point C(BC=120m) in 10 minutes. If
the man heads at a certain angle α to the B
straight line AB (AB is perpendicular to the l
banks)against the current he reaches point 2l
B in 12.5 minutes. a) The time after which they meet is
3u
B C b) Total distance travelled by each particle before
2l
they meet is
α v W 3
3u
A c) Average velocity during the motion is
a) The width of the river is 300m 2
b) The width of the river is 200m d) Relative velocity of approach between any two
c) The rowing velocity is 20m/min 3u
d) The rowing velocity is 30m/min particles is
2
160
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
37. A man crosses a river in a boat. If he crosses (b) x-t graph is a straight line passing through origin
the river in minimum time he takes 10 minutes (c) y-t graph is a straight line passing through origin
with a drift 120 m. If he crosses the river taking d) ? x − t graph is a straight line
shortest path, he takes 12.5 minute:(Assume
41. Two particles are projected from ground with
vb/r > vr )
same intial velocities at angles 600 and 300
(a) width of the river is 200 m (with horizontal). Let R1 and R2 be their
(b) velocity of the boat with respect to water 12 m/ horizontal ranges, H 1 and H 2 their maximum
min heights and T1 and T2 are the time of flights.
(c) speed of the current 20 m/min Then
(d) velocity of the boat with respect to water 20 m/ H1 H 2 H1 H 2 H1 H 2 H1 H 2
(a) > (b) < (c) > (d) <
min R1 R 2 R1 R 2 T1 T2 T1 T2
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 42. A particle is projected from the ground with
velocity u at angle ? with horizontal. The
38. The co-ordinates of a particle moving in a plane
horizontal range, maximum height and time of
are given by x ( t ) = a cos ( pt ) and flight are R, H and T respectively. Now
y ( t ) = b sin ( pt ) where a, b ( < a ) and p are keeping u as fixed, ? is varied from 30o to
positive constant of appropriate dimensions. 60o . Then
Then (a) R will first increase. H will increase and T will
(A) The path of the particle is an ellipse. decrease
(B) The velocity and acceleration of the particle (b) R will first increase then dcrease while H and T
both will increase
π
are normal to each other at t = (c) R will decrease while H and T will increase
2p (d) R will increase while H and T will decrease
(C) The acceleration of the particle is always 43. Two projectiles A and B are fired
directed towards a fixed position simultaneously as shown in figure. They collide
(D) The distance travelled by the particle in time in air at point at time t. Then
π
internal t = 0 to t = is ‘a’ y(m)
2p
θ2 B
39. Trajectories of two projectiles are shown in 20
figure. Let T1 and T2 be the time periods and
u and u their speeds of projection. Then u1 P
1 2
y
θ1
10
A
u1 x(m)
1 2 0 10 20
u2
x
(a) T2 > T1 (b) T1 = T2 (c) u1 > u 2 (d) u1 < u 2 (a) t ( u1 cos ?1 − u 2 cos ? 2 ) = 20
40. In a projectile motion let ? x and ? y are the (b) t ( u1 sin ? 1 − u 2 sin ? 2 ) = 10
horizontal and vertical components of velocity (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
at any time t and x and y are displacements (d) Both (a) and (b) are wrong
along horizontal and vertical from the point of
projection at any time t. Then
(a) ? y − t graph is a straight line with negative slope
and positive intercept
161
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
44. Suppose in the abscence of air resistance, (a) t1 will decrease while t 2 will increase
R = OB, H = AC, t1 = t OA and t 2 = t AB . If air (b) H will increase
resisitance is taken into consideration and the (c) R 1 will decrease while R 2 will increase
corresponding values are R ' , H ' , t1' and t 2 ' (d) T may increase or decrease
then 47. A projectile is projected from the ground
y
making an angle of 30o with the horizontal. Air
exerts a drag which is proportional to the
velocity of the projectile
A
(a) at highest point velocity will be horizontal
(b) the time of ascent will be equal to the time of
x descent
O C B (c) the time of descent will be greater than the time
(a) R < R,H < H, t1 > t1 and t 2 > t 2
' ' ' '
of ascent
(d) the time of ascent will be greater than the time
(b) R ' < R,H ' < H, t1' > t1 and t '2 < t 2
of descent
(c) R < R,H > H, t1 > t1 and t 2 < t 2
' ' ' '
48. A particle is fired from a point on the ground
(d) R < R,H < H, t1 < t1 and t 2 > t 2
' ' ' ' with speed u making an angle ? with the
horizontal. Then
45. From an inclined plane two particles P, Q are
(a) the radius of curvature of the projectile at the
projected with same speed at same angle ? ,
one up and other down the plane as shown in u 2 cos 2 ?
figure. Which of the following statement(s) is/ highest point is
g
are correct ? (b) the radius of curvature of the projectile at the
θ Q u 2 sin 2 ?
highest point is
g
θ (c) at the point of projection magnitude of tangential
θ
P acceleration is g sin ?
(a)The particles will collide the plane with same (d) at the point of projection magnitude of tangential
speed acceleration is g cos ?
(b) The times of flight of each particle are same 49. A particle is projected from ground with velocity
(c) Both particles strike the plane perpendicularly
(d) The particles will collide in mid air if projected 40 2 m / s at 45o . At time t = 2 s
simultaneuosly and time of flight of each (a) displacement of particle is 100 m
particle is less than the time of collision (b) vertical component of velocity is 20 m/s
46. In a projectile motion let t OA = t1 and t AB = t 2 . (c) velocity makes an angle of tan −1 ( 2 ) with
The horizontal displacement from O to A is R1 vertical
and from A to B is R 2 . Maximum height isH d) particle is at height of 60 m from ground
and time of flight is T. If air drag is to be
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
considered, then choose the correct Comprehension -I
alternative(s). A motor cyclist is riding North in still air at
y 36 kmh−1 . The wind starts blowing West ward
with a velocity 18 kmh−1
50. The direction of apparent velocity is
A
a) tan−1 (1/2) West of North
H B x b) tan−1 (1/2) North of West
O
c) tan−1 (1/2) East of North
R1 R2
d) tan−1 (1/2) North of East
162
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
51. If the wind velocity becomes 36 kmh−1 due
West, then how much more distance the motor
cyclist would cover in 10 min P
45° 45° Q
a) 10 km b) 1.8 km c) 3.6 km d) 8.5 km
12.5 m
Comprehension-II A B
15 m
A river of width ‘a’ with straight parallel banks 20 m
flows due north with speed u. The points O and A
are on opposite banks and A is due east of O. 57. The speed of the particle at point P will be :
Coordinate axes OX and OY are taken in the east
a) 5 10m / s b) 10 5m / s
and north directions respectively. A boat, whose
speed is v relative to water, starts from O and c) 5 15m / s d) 5 5m / s
crosses the river. If the boat is steered due east 58. The speed of projection of the particle at A will
v be :
and u varies with x as u = x ( a − x ) 2 find a) 5 10m / s b) 10 5m / s
a
52. equation of trajectory of the boat c) 5 15m / s d) 5 5m / s
x x 2
x 2
x 3 59. The range that is AB will be :
a) y = − b) y = − 2
a 2a 2a 3a a) 5 10m b) 25 3m c) 5 15m d) 25 5m
x 2 x3 x 2 x3 Passage: 3
c) y = − d) y = − Two projectiles are projected simultaneously from
a a2 a 3a 2 the top and bottom of a vertical tower of height h at
53. Time taken to cross the river angles 450 and 600 above horizontal respectively.
a v 2a 2v Body strike at the same point on ground at distance
a) b) c) d) 20m from the foot of the tower after same time.
v a v a 60. The speed of projectile projected from the
54. The direction of absolute velocity of boat bottom is
man when he reaches the opposite bank 20
20 m/ s
a) west b)south c)east d) north a) 40 m/s b) m / s c) 40 3m / s d)
Comprehension-III 3 3
A car is moving towards south with a speed of 20 61. The ratio of the speed of the projectile projected
ms-1. A motorcyclist is moving towards east with from the top and the speed of the projectile
-1 projected from the bottom of tower is
a speed of 15 ms . At a certain instant, the
motorcyclist is due south of the car and is at a a) 1: 2 b) 1: 3 c) 5 :1 d) 7 :1
distance of 50m from the car. 62. The time of flight of projectiles is
55. The shortest distance between the 1 1 1 1
a) (3) 4 b) 2(3) 4 c) 3(3) 4 d) 4(3) 4
motorcyclist and the car is
a) 10m b) 20m c) 30m d) 40m Passage:4 (IIT JEE 1996)
56. The time after which they are closest to each Two guns situated on top of a hill of height 10m fire
other one shot each with the same speed 5 3 m/s at some
a) 1/3s b) 8/3s c) 1/5s d) 8/5s interval of time. One gun fires horizontally and the
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS other fires upwards at an angle of 600 with the
Passage:1 horizontal. The shots collide in air at a point P.
A particle is fired from ‘A’ in the diagonal plane of Find
63. The time interval between the firings and
a building of dimension 20m (length) x 15m(breadth)
a) 1 s b) 2s c) 3 s d) 4s
x 12.5m (height), just clears the roof diagonally & 64. the coordinates of point P. Take the origin of
falls on the other side of the building at B. It is coordinate system at the foot of the hill right
observed that the particle is traveling at an angle below the muzzle and trajectories in the xy-
450 with the horizontal when it clears the edges P plane.
and Q of the diagonal. Take g=10m/s2.
a) ( 5 m , 5 m ) b) 5 3 m,5 3m ( )
(
c) 5 3 m ,5m ) d) ( 5 m ,5 3m )
163
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE its horizontal velocity component reverses the
direction without change in magnitude and the
65. Vr ,Vw ,Vm are the velocities of rain, wind and vertical velocity component remains same.
man are given in Column-I Vrm in Column-II Ball stops after hitting the ground.Match the
match Column-I withColumn-II statement of column I with the distance of the
wall from the point of throw in column II.
Column-I Column-II
Column-I Column-II
$ $
a) Vr = −5 j , Vw = 5i, Vm = 0 p) Vm = 5i $ a) Ball strikes the wall directly p) d = 8m
b) Ball strikes the ground q) d = 10 m
b) Vr = −5 $j, Vw = 5$i, Vm = 5$i q) Vrm = 5i$ − 5$j at x = 12 m from the wall
c) Ball strikes the ground at r) d = 15 m
c) Vr = −5 $j , Vw = 5$i − 5 $j r) Vrm = −5$j x = 10 m from the wall
d) Ball strikes the ground s) d = 25 m
Vm = 5$i at x = 5 m from the wall
68. Trajectories are shown in figure for three
d) Vr = −5 $j , Vw = −5$i − 5 $j, s) Vrm = − 10i$ − 10 $j kicked footballs. Initial vertical and horizontal
Vm = 5$i velocity components are u y and u x
respectively. Ignoring air resistance, choose
the correct statement from column-2 for the
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS value of variable in column-1.
66. A particle is projected on an inclined plane which
is inclined at 300 with the horizontal as shown in
fig. Initial speed of the particle isv0,and inclined A B
plane is sufficiently large. Match the Column –
I and Column – II C
v0 O
Column-1 Column-2
A) Time of flight P) greatest for A only
30° B) u y / u x Q) greatest for C only
30° C) ux R) equal for A and B
Column – I Column – II
D) u x u y S) equal for B and C
v0
a) Range on the inclined plane p) INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
g 3
69. Three points are located at the vertices of
2v0 an equilateral triangle whose sides equal to
b) Velocity of the particle is q)
g 3 a =3m. They all start moving simultaneously
parallel to the inclined plane at time with speed v =1 m/s, with the first point
heading continually for the second, the
4v0
c) Time after which particle r) second for the third, and the third for the
3g first. How soon will the ponits meet?
strikes the plane is 70. The slopes of wind screen of two cars are
2v02 α1 = 300 and α 2 = 150 respectively. At what
d) For the given velocity s) v1
3g
ratio of v of the velocities of the cars will
maximum range on the inclined plane 2
(angle of projection changing) their drivers see the hail stones bounced back
67. A ball is thrown at an angle 750 with the by the wind screen on their cars in vertical
horizontal at a speed of 20 m/s towards a high direction assume hail stones fall vertically
wall at a distance d. If the ball strikes the wall, downwards and collisions to be elastic
164
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
71. A heavy particle is projected from a point at
the foot of a fixed plane, inclined at an angle 90°
450 to the horizontal, in the vertical plane H
containing the line of greatest slope through
90°
the point. If φ (> 450 ) is the inclination to the 30°
horizontal of the initial direction of projection,
LEVEL-V - KEY
for what value of tan φ will the particle strike
the plane horizontal. SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
72. A projectile is fired from the base of cone- 1)b 2)a 3)A 4)C 5)C 6)D 7)A
shaped hill. The projectile grazes the vertex 8)A 9) C 10) C 11)A 12) B 13) b 14) a
and strikes the hill again at the base. If α be 15) d 16)c 17) d 18) d 19) b 20) d 21) a
the half - angle of the cone, h its height, u the 22) b 23) a 24) c 25) b 26) a 27) b 28) b
initial velocity of projection and θ angle of 29) d 30) d 31) d
projection, then tan θ tan α is MULTI ANSWER TYPE
32)AC 33)BC 34) ABC 35)BC
u 36)A,B,C,D 37)A,D 38) a,b,c 39) b,d
40) a,b,d 41) a,c 42) b 43) b
44) d 45) b,d 46) a,d 47) a,d
48) a,c 49) a,b,c,d
α h COMPREHENSION TYPE
θ 50) A 51) B 52)B 53)A 54)C 55)C 56)D
57) a 58) b 59) b 60) d 61) a 62) b 63) a 64)c
2h tanα MATRIX MATCH TYPE
73. Three balls A,B and C are projected from 65) a-q,b-r,c-p,d-s
ground with same speed at same angle with 66) a → s, b → p, c → q, d → s
the horizontal. The balls A, B and C collide with 67) A → p, q, r ; B → p ; C → q ; D → r , s
the wall during a flight in air and all three collide
68) a-r b-p c-q d-s
perpendicularly and elastically with the wall as
shown in figure. If the time taken by the
INTEGER TYPE
ball A to fall back on ground is 4 seconds and 69) 2 70)3 71) 2 72) 2 73) 6 74) 4
that by ball B is 2 seconds. Then the time taken
by the ball C to reach the ground after LEVEL - V - HINTS
projection will be .... r
1. VA = 400iˆ ;
r
A VB = υ B cos 300 iˆ + υ B sin 300 ˆj
θ r υ 3 υB
B VB = B iˆ + ˆj ;
2 2
r r r
VB / A = VB − VA
C
r υ 3 υb
θ VB / A = B iˆ + ˆj − 400iˆ
2 2
74. In the given figure, the angle of inclination of
ur υ 3 υ
− 400 $i + B $j
the inclined plane is 300. A particle is projected
with horizontal velocity V0 from height H. Find V B / A = B
the horizontal velocity V0(in m/s) so that the 2 2
particle hits the inclined plane perpendicularly. 800 r 400 ˆ
Given, H = 4m, g =10 m/s2 υ
3 υB − 800 = 0, B = ; VB = 400iˆ + j
3 3
165
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
2. In this problem, one think should be carefully l v
meted that the velocity of boat is less than the x = ( v cos θ + vr ) ; Here v= r , vr = 2v
river flow velocity. In such a case, boat cannot v sin θ 2
reach the point directly opposite to its starting v cos θ + 2v cos θ + 2
x= l = l
point. i.e. drift can never be zero. Thus, to v sin θ sin θ
minimize the drift, boat starts at an angle θ from
the normal direction up stream as shown. x = ( cot θ + 2cosec θ ) l For minimum drifting
B drift = x C dx
= 0 ⇒ θ = 1200
y
dθ
u
d
v θ vcosθ x v0 v0
r
A µ–vsinθ 5. At t = 0, rrel = 0 θ
Now, again if we find the components of velocity
of boat along and perpendicualr to the flow, these
r r r r
are, velocity along the river, vx = u − v sin θ . u1 − u 2 = ( v0 − v 0 sin θ ) ˆj − v0 cos θˆi ; a rel = 0
r r r
d d After time t = 1.7 second, Seperation is srel = r1 − r2
time taken to cross the river is t = v = v cosθ r r 1 r r r
y srel = u rel t + a rel t 2 ; srel = ( u1 − u 2 ) t
2
ud r
or x =
v
secθ − d tan θ {
srel = ( v 0 − v0 sin θ ) ˆj − v 0 cos θiˆ t }
r
{( v − v 0 sin θ ) t} + ( − v 0 t cos θ )
2
dx srel =
2
The drift x is minimum, when = 0, 0
dθ
= v 0 t 2 (1 − sin θ ) = 22m
ud
( secθ .tan θ ) − d sec θ = 0
2
or Let us take î along east ˆj along north and k̂
v 6.
r
u v l u vertically downwards v s b = 1 2 ˆj + 2 kˆ
or sin θ = 1 or sin θ = = as v = r r r r
v u n n vhs = −4iˆ − 5kˆ ; v hb = vsb + v hs
r
v hb = ( 4 ) + (12 ) + ( −3 ) = 13m / s
2 2 2
B x C'
r r
C
7. Let v1 and v 2 are the velocity of any two
d u particles and θ is the angle between them. As
3.
each particle has same speed, so v1 = v2 = v
v
φ θ
x The relative velocity of particle 2 w.r.t. 1 is given
r r r
A
d by v 21 = v 2 − v1 or v 21 = v 2 + v 2 − 2v v cos θ
iii) x = ( u + v cosθ ) t = ( u + v cosθ )
v sin θ
−V1
4. x = ( v cos θ + v r ) t 0 ( Diagram)
V2
θ V21
v = 2vsin .
2
θ θ
V1
vr
As the velocities of the particles are randomly
distributed, so θ varies from 0 to 2π . The
166
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
magnitude of average velocity when averaged over r
υS = 10iˆ − 5jˆ
all such pairs, Thus
r r r
2π υBS = υB − υS = ( a − 10 ) ˆi + ( b + 5 ) ˆj
∫v dθ r r r r
21
Now υB ⊥ υBS or υB .υBS = 0
v 21 = 0
4v
2π
= = 1.273v ⇒ > v . or a ( a − 10 ) + b ( b + 5 ) = 0 ..(1)
∫ dθ
0
π
But we know that speed of the motorboat is
8. Suppose u is the speed of the boat relative to water, 5 m/s, so a 2 + b2 = 25 ...(2)
then velocity of the flow (w.r.t. bank) V0 Solving (1) and (2), we get a = 0 or 4
when a = 0, b=-5 and a=4, b=3 Hence either
v x = ( u cos θ + v0 ) , and perpendicular to flow will r r
υ = −5jˆ or υ = 4iˆ + 3jˆ
B B
be v y = u sin θ Time to cross the river,, r
However a diagram shows that when υB = −5jˆ ,
b the motorboat is moving further away from the
t= . In the time the distance travelled by
u sin θ r
steamer. So υ = 4iˆ + 3jˆ
B
the boat in the direction of flow
C a B
Y
(4,36)
b u v0 (−11,16 ) 10iˆ − 5 ˆj
4iˆ + 3 ˆj
θ X
A −5iˆ
b
a = v x t = ( u cos θ + v 0 ) 11. As it is given that boat is sailing in a direction
u sin θ
normal to current. Crosing velocity of boat is =
or au sin θ = ub cos θ + v0 b 10 m/s. So time taken by the boat to reach the
v0 b 400
∴u = other bank is = 40 s. Drift due to flow of river
( a sin θ − b cos θ ) ..(i) u to be minimum, duld 10
is = Drift velocity x time to cross the river Here
d v0 b boat is sailing in normal direction so direction so
θ = 0 or dθ a sin θ − b cos θ = 0 drift velocity is the river current velocity. Thus,
dirft is x = 2.0 × 40 = 80 m
a b
or tan θ = − ∴ cos θ =
b a + b 2 12. Let v1 = 2 3k v2 = 2k v3 = 3k ; (2k)t = 10
2
On substituting these values in equation (i), we get 1 3k 5
v0 b
( 3k ) t − × 10 × t 2 = 0 ; t = , k =
5 3
2
u min = uur uuur uuv
2 .
a +b
2
vb = vb / r + vr
v RM 4 13. Let h be the height of the pole. We have
9. v = tan 53 = 3 When the man is running
0
x
MG
y = x tan α 1 − Since top of pole, lie on
4 4 r
⇒ v RM = v MG = × 12 = 16km / hr
3 3 curve(1),
10. In order to approach as close as possible to y
steamer, the direction of motion of motorboat P (a,h)
should be perpendicular to the relative motion.
Let the optimum velocity of motorboat is h
r α = 45°
υB = ai + bj Velocity of steamer is
ˆ ˆ
O x
a b 167
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
18. The motion of the sphere is similar to projection
a a + b − a ab
h = a tan 450 1 − =a = motion. The components of its acceleration are
a +b a+b a+b
ax = 1.80m / s 2 , a y = 0 . When the sphere
14. Vx = U cosθ Vy = U sin θ − gt
crosses the y-axis, its displacement component
U sin θ − gt sin θ g 1
Tanα = ; Tanα = − t along x-axis is zero. 0 = vixt + ax t2 ;
U cos θ cos θ U cos θ 2
Comparing with y = c − mx 1
15. 0 = 3sin 300 t − (1.8)t 2 or t = 1.667 s
2
19. Components of velocity of ball relative to lift are:
u x = 4 cos 30o = 2 3 m / s
and u y = 4sin 30o = 2 m / s
O x y
R A B
d u = 4m/s
d = R+x
R = 614.4
30°
T = 12.8 sec x
A B = ( 5 )12.8 sec = 64 m
and acceleration of ball relative to lift is 12 m / s 2 in
d = 614.4 + 64 negative y-direction or vertically downwards. Hence
= 678.4 m . time of flight is 1/3 sec.
16. ‘O’ is the point of projection of the shell and ‘A’ is y
the position of enemy at a height ‘h’ above the level
A
u
a
h a
of ‘O’. 20. tan θ = = 0.4
α u g
O B θ
If ‘u’ is the minimum initial velocity of the projectile g
x
to shell the enemy, then ‘OA’ must be the maximum
range up the inclined plane of angle α . 21. (VB. A )horizontal = v2 cos 60 + v1 cos 60 = 12m / s
u2
So OA = --------- (i) (VB. A )vertical = v2 sin 60 − v1 sin 60 = 4 3m / s
g (1 + sin α )
(12 ) ( )
2
From ∆OAB , OA = h cosecα ---------- (ii) VB. A =
2
+ 4 3 = 192
From eqn. (i) and (ii), u = gh(cosecα + 1)
17. Velocity of particle after time t is X
m
70
ur ∧ ∧ ∧
V1 = (v cos θ i + v sin θ j) − ( g j)t
A B
uur ∧ ∧ ∧
V2 = (v cos2θ i + v sin2θ j) − ( g j)t
To be parallel of V 1 and V 2 45° 30°
v cos θ v sinθ − gt
⇒ =
v cos 2θ v sin 2θ − gt
Solving the above equation, we get,
v θ 3θ
168 t = cos cos ec
g 2 2
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
x = v21t = 192 × 10 3 = 240m
from Vle ABC vsin 60°
60°
AB 2 = Ac 2 + Bc 2
AB = 250m. vcos 60°
60°
u
( u 2 ) 1 3?
= 2 ∴ ?=
2
2
3
u (or)
B
22. u
At the moment of collision tan 60 = ( gt − u ) = 3
0
α
30°
2u
v = u 2 + ( gt − u ) =
2
t AB = time of flight of the projectile 3
2u sin ( a − 30o ) 25. x = ( U cos θ ) t = 2 ; U cos θ = 1
=
g cos 30o 1
Now component of velocity along the plane
( U sin θ ) t − gt 2 = −10 U sin θ = 5
2
becomes zero at point B.
V = ( U cosθ ) + ( U sin θ ) = 26 ; Tanθ = 5
2 2
26. Coordinates of P w.r.t O and O' as origins are (a,
∴ 0 = ucos( a −30o ) − ( gsin30o ) T n) and (a, -m) The height of the cliff = h = m + n
2usin( a −30o ) gx 2
or ucos ( a −30 ) = ( gsin30
o o
) y = x tan α −
2u 2 cos 2 α
gcos30o
ga 2
tan ( a − 30o ) =
1
=
3 ∴ −m = a tan α − 2
or o 2u cos 2 α
2tan30 2
3 2 gh ga 2
v0 = ; − n = a tan β −
∴ a = 30o + tan−1 2 + cot 2 θ 2v 2 cos 2 β
2
∴ ( m + n) = a (tan β − tan α )
because u cos α = v cos β because both the shots
reach P simultaneously. This is possible only If the
horizontal components of the velocities are equal.
∴ Ans. (a),
23. θ= 27. In the frame of B
30 rest
α = 30
10m/s 10m
In the frame of wedge the particle appears to be
projected up the plane as shown in figure.
20m/s
2Usin θ
g cos α = 2s
Its time of flight is 10m 10m
24. Let ? be the velocity at time of collision. Then,
d
u 2 cos 45o = ? sin 60o
10
t= = 1s d = 20 ×1 = 20m.
10
28. In a reference frame, take a differentiation of
distance between projectiles is zero.
169
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
B C
1
29. From 2 20sin θ = 10 ; sin θ =
2 u
1 u α
θ = 30 ; ( 20 cos 30 ) 2 = x
o
v
A v
x = 5 3m 34. The velocity of motor boat is given as
r r r
30. y = β x 2 v m = v mw + v w
⇒ Vy = 2xβVx ⇒ Vy = 2βVx .t.Vx ⇒ αt = 2β t.Vx2 5
α α 120°
⇒ Vx2 = ⇒ Vx =
2β 2β 30°
x x 1
31. y = , Vx = b − ct ; y = . ⇒ x = bt − ct 2 5 3 θ
α α 2
x2 1
s = x2 + y 2 = x 2 + 2 ;
x 1+ 2 5 5 3 1
α α ⇒ = ⇒ sin θ = ⇒ θ = 30°
sin θ sin120° 2
1 1 2 ∴ (a), (b) and (c)
S = 1+ bt − ct
α2 2 35. ( a S ) HOR = a 0 − a cos θ ; ( a S )VER = a 0 sin θ
kc 2 1 a
= kbt − .t k = 1 + 2
2 α
Parabolic curve a0
MULTIPLE TYPE a sin θ
Sc
32. Distance travelled by motor bike at t= 18 s ree
n
1
Sbike = S1 = (18 )( 60 ) = 540m
2 θ
Distance travelled by car at t= 18s So, (B) and (C) are correct.
Scar = S 2 = (18 )( 40 ) = 720m A
Therefore, seperation between them at t=18s is
180m. Let seperation between them decreases to
zero at time t beyond 18s. u
Hence, Sbike = 540 + 60t and Scar = 720 + 40t 36.
Scar − Sbike = 0 ⇒ 720 + 40t = 540 + 60t B C
120° u
t=(18+9) s=27s from start and distance travelled
by both is Sbike = Scar = 1080m l l 2l
33. In the first case BC=vt 1 and w=ut1. In the second t= = =
urcl u + u 3u
caste u sin α =v and w=u cos α t 2
Solving these four equations with proper 2
substitution, we get w= 200m, u = 20m/min, 2l 2l
v = 12 m /m in and α ; 370 Distance = ∫ vdt = u × =
3u 3
l
total disp 3u
vavg = = 3 =
total time 2l 2
170 3u
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
VAB = u + u cos 60 =
3u H1 = H 2 ⇒ u y1 = u y2 ;Hence, T1 = T2
u 2 sin 2÷ 2 ( u sin ÷ )( u cos ÷ ) 2u x u y
2
Range R = = =
g g g
37. θ W
R 2 > R1 ∴ u x2 > u x1 or u 2 > u1
Shortest time Shortest path
w vr 40. If u is the initial speed and ? the angle of projection.
10m = 12.5 =
vbr vbr cos θ Then ? y = u sin ? − gt i.e., ? y -t graph is a straight
120 = 10 × vr 12.5 = 10 secθ line with negative slope and positive intercept.
4 x = ( ? cos ? ) t i.e., x-t graph is a straight line
vr = 12 m / min cos θ =
1 2
passing through the origin. y = ( u sin ? ) t − gt
5
x2 y2 2
38. + = 1 ; So the path is an ellipse i.e., y-t graph is parabola i.e., ? x -t graph is a straight
a 2 b2
line parallel to t-axis.
Vx = − ap sin pt , V y = bp cos pt
41. At 30o and 60o , R 1 = R 2
ax = − ap 2 cos pt a y = −bp 2 sin pt
ur r ur r Further, H ∝ sin 2 ? and T ∝ sin ?
So V − a = 0 when V ⊥ a
H H
So a 2 p3 sin pt.cos pt − b 2 p 3 sin pt.cos pt ∴ ∝ sin 2 ? and ∝ sin ?
R T
⇒ a 2 p3 sin pt.cos pt = b2 p3 sin pt.cos pt sin 60 > sin 30
o o
as a ≠ b So sin pt.cos pt = 0 H1 H 2 H H
∴ > and 1 > 2
π R1 R 2 T1 T2
⇒sin p2t = 0 ⇒ p2t = π ,2π ⇒ t = −−−−−
2P
The motion is similar to motion of earth around sun 42. R ∝ sin 2?, H ∝ sin ? and T ∝ sin ? , sin 2? will
2
So force always towards focus and hence first increase, then decrease. While sin ? will only
acceleration. At t = 0 particle is at ( a, o ) increase.
43.
π
At t = particle is at ( o, b ) XA = XB
2p
∴ 10 + ( u1 cos ?1 ) t = 30 − ( u 2 cos? 2 ) t
(o,b)
or t (u 1 cos ?1 + u 2 cos ? 2 ) = 20
yA = yB
(a,o) 1
∴ 10 + ( u1 sin ? 1 ) t − gt 2
2
So distance travelled along X axis is a not the actual 1
distance, which is the length of the part of the ellipse = 20 + ( u 2 sin ? 2 ) t − gt 2
2
between ( a, o ) to ( o, b ) you can try out for ∴ ( 1 1 2
u sin ? − u sin ? 2 ) t = 10
distance by following method ds = dx 2 + dy 2 44. During upward journey gravity and air fraction both
will oppose the motion. Hence, t1' < t1
2 2
dy s 0 dy
⇒ ds = 1 + ⇒ ∫ ds = ∫ 1 + .dx 45.
dx 0 a dx
39. Maximum height and time of flight depend on the
vertical component of intial velocity.
171
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
θ Q v2 v2
∴ a = an = ∴ a = an =
R R
θ a =g a =g
θ but but
P
( u cos ? ) ( u cos ? )
2 2
u
∴ g= ∴ g=
R R
u 2 cos 2 ? u cos 2 ? 2
or R= or R=
g g
β α
u u
α
Q
θ
β θ
Time of flight of P is 90°
g
2u sin ( 2÷ − ÷ )2u tan ÷ At point of projection component of acceleration
T1 = =
g cos ÷ g ( = g ) along velocity vector is −g cos ( 90o − ? ) or
and time of flight of Q is −g sin ? .
2u sin (÷ )2u tan ÷ 49. u x = 40 m / s, u y = 40 m / s ; At t = 2s.
T2 = = ∴ T1 = T2
g cos ÷ g ? x = 40 m / s and ? y = 40 − 10 × 2 = 20 m / s
Further acceleration of both the particles is g x = ? x t = 80 m
downwards. Therefore, relative acceleration
between the two is zero or relative motion between 1
y = u x t − gt 2 = 60 m
the two is uniform. Now relative velocity of P with 2
respect to Q is towards PQ. Therefore, collision
will take place between the two in mid air. ∴ s = x 2 + y 2 = 100m
46. In the upward journey resistance due to air will be ?
? = tan −1 x = tan ( 2 )
−1
in downward direction. While in downward motion
?
resistance will be upwards. Therefore, t1 will y
decrease, while t 2 will increase. Hence, T = t1 + t 2 COMPREHENSION TYPE
may increase or decrease. H will decrease. In AC 5 1
50. From figure tan β = = =
horizontal direction air resistance is opposite to the OA 10 2
motion.Therefore, R 1 will decrease while R 2 may 1
So β = tan−1 West of North
decrease or increase. 2
47. During upward journey acceleration due to gravity N
and vertical component of retardation are in same
direction. While during downward journey they are
in opposite directions. Hence, time of descent will C
A
be greater than time of ascent
r r
48. At highest point angle between a and v is zero. R β 10ms-1
B
Hence, total acceleration is only normal or radial
W -1
5ms O E
v = ucosθ
acceleration. a=g
172
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
51. New apparent velocity, R ' = 102 + 102 North P
= 10 2ms −1
( )
C d
Distance covered, s ' = 10 2 × (10 × 60 ) m V mc
53°
= 6 2 km = 8.5km 50m B
Extra distance covered = 8.5–6.7 = 1.8 km −Vc
uur 53° East
52. Let v br be the velocity of boatman relative to M
uur uur
Vm x-axis
river, v r the velocity of river and v b is the
absolute velocity of boatman. Then −1 20
v mC = 152 + 20 2 = 25ms −1 ; θ = tan 15 = 53
0
Y N
j
with x-axis
Vr W E
The motorcyclist appears to move along the line
O
A
X
S
i MP with speed 25 ms-1 . The shortest distance=
Vbr perpendicular distance of MP from
C = d ⇒ d = 50 cos 530 ⇒ d = 30m . Time taken
a to come closest = time taken by motorcyclist to
uur uur uur uur uur
v b = vbr + vr Given; v br = v and vr = u MB 50sin 530
reach B. t = = ⇒ t = 1.6s
dy v v mC 25
Now u = v y = = x ( a − x ) 2 ..(1)
dx a U 2 sin 2θ
57. PQ length ; = 25 ; U = 5 10 m / s.
dx g
and v = v x = = v ..(2)
dt
58. Vy2 − U2y = 2a ys y
Dividing (1) by (2), we get
dy x ( a − x ) x (a − x ) 125 − ( U sin θ ) = −2 (10 ) 125 → (1)
2
= or dy = dx
→ ( 2)
2
dx a a2 5 10 cos 45 = V cos θ
x (a − x ) x x 2 3
∫ dy = ∫
y y
or 2
dx or y = − 2 ..(3) On solving U = 500m / s ; θ = Tan −1 3 = 60o
0 0 a 2a 3a
This is the desired equation of trajectory. U 2 sin 2θ
59. Range =
a a g
53. Time taken to cross the river is t = v = v (60, 61, 62)
x
54. When the boatman reaches the opposite side, U
x=a or vy = 0 (from equation 1) R1 = ( U cos θ ) t = 2 3
55,56Taking North as +y-axis and East as +x Axis 2
Imagine yourself as an oberver sitting inside the U 10 2 U 1
car.You will regard the car as being at rest (at C). 2 3 = 20 ; U = =
2 4
3 V 2
Relative to you, the speed of the motorcyclist is
obtained by imposing the reversed velocity of the (63,64)
car on motorcyclist as shown in figure. Let gun 1 and gun 2 to be fired at an interval ∆t ,
v m = 15ms −1 , v C = 20ms −1 such that t1 = t2 + ∆t ---------- (1)
Where t1 and t2 are the respective times taken by
the two shots to reach point P.
For gun 1 :
x-component y-component
1
x − xi = vi cos 600 t1 y − yi = vi sin 600 t1 − gt12
2
173
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
2v0 sin a
Time of flight T =
1 3 1
or x = xi + vi t1 y = yi + vi t1 − gt12
g cos b
2 2 2
For gun 2 : v02
x-component y-component R =
Maximum range g (1 + sin b )
1 2
x − xi = vi cos 00 t2 y − yi = vi sin 00 t2 − gt2
2 67. Range of the ball in absence of the wall
1 u 2 sin 2θ 20 2 sin1500
x = xi + vi t2 y = yi − g t 22 = = m = 20 m
2 g 10
(a) Now we can equate x- and y-coordinates of shots When d < 20m, ball will hit the wall when d = 25
1 3 1 1 m, ball will fall 5m short of the wall.
i.e., vi t1 = vi t2 or t1 = 2t2 and vi t1 − gt12 = − gt22 When d < 20 m , the ball with hit the ground, at a
2 2 2 2 distance, x = 20 m - d in front of the wall.
3 1 INTEGER TYPE
or vi t1 + g (t22 − t12 ) = 0 On substituting t1
2 2 69. The mutual velocity of approach
from eqn. (2) into eqn. (3), we get
= v − ( − v cos 600 ) =
3v
3 1 3 . The initial relative
vi (2t2 ) + g (−3t2 ) = 0 or t2 3vi − gt2 = 0
2 2
2 2 2 separation a is reduced to zero at this rate
2 vi 2 5 3 3v
a = ∫ dt ⇒ a =
3v
or 2 t = 0 and t = = ×
= 1s t
2 2 2
3 g 3 10
Therefore, t1 = 2t2 = 2(1) = 2s V
∆t = t1 − t2 = 2 − 1 = 1s
2a 2 × 3
(b) The coordinates of P at which the two shots collide ⇒t= = = 2s
are x = xi + vi t2 = 0 + (5 3)(1) = 5 3 m
V 3v 3 × 1
V
1 2 1
and y = yi − gt2 = 10 − (10)(1) 2 = 5 m The points will meet at the incentre of the triangle.
2 2
MATRIX MATCH TYPE 70. v absolute in vertically downward v Hc after collision
vertically upwards since collision is elastic so
65. a) VResultant = vr + vw = −5 j + 5i velocity of tailstones w.r.t. car before and after
vrm = vR − 0 = 5i − 5j collision will make equal angles
b) vR = vr + vw = 5i − 5j vHc/1 = vH − v c = v − v1 ; β + 90 − 2β + α1 = 90
vrm = vR − vm = 5i − 5j − 5i = −5 j a1 = β . 2β = 2α1 tan v1
2β = tan 2α1 =
c) vR = 5 j + 5i − 5j = 5i − 10 j v
71. Let the particle be projected from O with velocity
vrm = 5i − 10 j − 5i = −10 j u and strike the plane at a point P after time t.
d) vR = −5 j − 5i − 5j = −5i − 10j Let ON=PN=h; then OP= h 2 .
vrm = −5i − 10j − 5i = −10i − 10j If the particle strikes the plane horizontally, then
its vertical component of velocity at P is zero.
2v02 sin 300 cos 600 Along horizontal direction
66. Range R = h = (u cos φ )(t )
g cos 2 300 --------------- (1)
Time when velocity is parallel to plane v0 Along vertical direction, 0 = u sin φ − gt
v0 or u sin φ = gt ---------------(2)
sin 300 - gcso300 t = 0 ; t = g 3
174
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
P v0 v0
u cos φ a) cot α = b) tan α =
rω rω
rω v0
c) cot α = v d) tan α =
u h 0 rω
2. A man standing, observes rain falling with
φ velocity of 20 m/s at an angle of 30 0 with the
45° vertical. Find out velocity of man so that rain
O N again appears to fall at 300 with the vertical.
1 2 a) 20 m/s b) 30 m/s c) 40 m/s d) 10 m/s
and h = u sin φ t −
gt ---------(3) 3. A person standing on a road has to hold his
2
Using eqns. (1) and (2) in (3) umbrella at 600 with the vertical to keep the
rain away. He throws the umbrella and starts
1 running at 20 ms-1. He finds that rain drops
(u cos φ )(t ) = (u sin φ )(t ) − (u sin φ )t ;
2 are falling on him vertically. Find the speed
tan φ = 2 of the rain drops with respect to
1. The road 2. The moving person
u 2 sin 2θ
72. Here range = 2h tan α = and 40 20 40 22
g a) m/s, m/s b) m/s, m/s
3 3 3 3
u 2 sin 2 θ 2 sin 2θ
h= Dividing 2 tan α = ⇒ c)
40 3
m/s,
20 3
m/s d)
40 3
m/s,
20
m/s
2g sin 2 θ 3 3 3 3
tan α = 2 cot θ 4. Two swimmers leave point A on one bank of
2 gh 2 gh 2 gh (1+ 4cot 2 α ) 1
the river to reach point B lying right across
∴u 2 = = = gh tan 2 α + 2
sin 2 θ 2cot α 4cot 2 α 2 on the other bank. One of them crosses the
2
1+ 4cot α
river along the straight line AB while the
other swims at right angles to the stream and
tan θ = 2cot α the walks the distance that he has been
73. S = 10 × 4 = 40m . carried away by the stream to get to point B.
v0 cos300 What was the velocity u of his walking if both
74. 0 = v0 cos 30 − g sin30 t ⇒ t =
0 0
.....(1) swimmers reached the destination
g sin 300
sumultaneously The stream velocity v 0 = 2.0
1
− H cos 30 0 = −v0 sin 300 t − g cos 30 0 t 2 ..(2) km/hour and the velocity v1 of each swimmer
2
By equation (1) and (2), we get with respect to water equals 2.5km per hour.
a) 3km/hr b) 3.5km/hr c) 4km/hr d) 5km/hr
v02 cot2 α
= 4m / s (α = 300 )
2gH 5. A ball is thrown vertically upward from the
H= 1+ ⇒ v0 =
g 2 5 12m level in an elevator shaft with an initial
velocity of 18m/s. At the same instant an open
LEVEL - VI platform elevator passes the 5m level,
moving upward with a constant velocity of 2
m/s. Determine (a) when and where the ball
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS will hit the elevator, (b) the relative velocity
A) RELATIVE MOTION of the ball with respect to the elevator when
1. An open merry go round rotates at an angular the ball hits the elevator.
velocity ω . A person stands in it at a distance a) 10.2m 9.8m/s b) 12.3m 19.8m/s
r from the rotational axis. It is raining and c) 12m 10.2m/s d) 12.5m 22m/s
the rain drops falls vertically at a velocity v 0. 6. From a point A on bank of a channel with still
How should the person hold an umbrella to water a person must get to a point B on the
prorect himself from the rain in the best way. opposite bank. All the distances are shown
Angle made by umbrella with the vertical is in figure. The person uses a boat to travel
175
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
across the channel and then walks along the 10. A stone is projected from the point of a ground
bank to point B. The velocity of the boat is in such a direction so as to hit a bird on the top
v1 and the velocity of the walking person is of a telegraph post of height h and then attain
the maximum height 2h above the ground. If
v 2 . Prove that the fastest way for the person at the instant of projection, the bird were to
to get from A to B is to select the angles α1 fly away horizontally with a uniform speed. Find
the ratio between the horizontal velocities of
and α 2 in such a manner that the bird and the stone, if the stone still hits
A
sin α1 v 2 bird while decending.
a) sin α = v y
2 1
a sin α1 v1
α1 b) sin α = v M
2 2
cos α1 v 2 uQ Q
c) =
x α2 B b cos α 2 v1
cos α 2 v1
d) cos α = v
x
O
1 2 N
d 2 1
7. On morning Joy was walking on a grass-way
a) b)
in a garden. Wind was also blowing in the 2 +1 2 +1
direction of his walking with speed u. He 2 1
suddenly saw his friend Kim walking on the c) d)
2 −1 2 −1
parallel grass-way at a distance x away. Both 11. The benches of a gallery in a cricket stadium
stopped as they saw each other when they are 1 m high and 1 m wide. A batsman strikes
were directly opposite on their ways at a the ball at a level 1 m about the ground and
distance x. Joy shouted “Hi Kim”. Find the hits a ball. The ball starts at 35 m/s at an angle
time after which Kim would have heard his of 53o with the horizontal. The benches are
greeting. Sound speed in still air is v. perpendicular to the plane of motion and the
x 2x x x first bench is 110 m from the batsman. On which
a) 2 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) bench will the ball hit.
v −u v −u
2
2 v −u
2
4 v −u
2 2
a) 4th step b) 5th step c) 6th step d) 7 th step
B) BODY PROJECTED FROM THE GROUND 12. If R is the horizontal range for inclination
θ
8. A projectile is fired with velocity v0 from a gun and h is the maximum height reached by the
adjusted for a maximum range. It passes projectile, Then maximum range is
through two points P and Q whose heights R2 R2 R2 R2
above the horizontal are h each. The a) + 2 h b) + 2 h c) + 8 h d) +h
h 8h 8h h
separation of the two points is 13. The acceleration of gravity can be measured
v0 2 v0 2 by projecting a body upward and measuring
a) v0 − 4 gh b) v0 + 4 gh the time it takes to pass two given points in
g g
both directions. Show that if the time the body
v0 2 v0 takes to pass a horizontal line a in both
c) 2 v0 − 4gh d) v 02 − gh directions is t A antime to go by a second line B
g g
in both direction is t B , then assuming that the
9. A shot is fired with a velocity u at a very high acceleration is constant, its magnitude is
vertical wall whose distance from the point of
projection is x. The greatest height above the
g = (where h is the height of the line B above
level of the point of projection at which the line A.)
bullet can hit the wall is . h 8 h
a) tA − tB
2 2 b) tA − tB 2
2
u 4 + g 2 x2 u 4 − g 2 x 2 u 4 − g 2 x2 u 4 − g 2 x2
a) b) c) d) 8 h 4 h
2 gu 2 gu 2 4 gu 2 2 gu 2
c) t 2 + t 2 d) t 2 + t 2
A B A B
176
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
C) BODY PROJECTED FROM TOP OF A D) PROJECTILE MOTION ON INCLINED
TOWER PLANE
14. A particle is released from a certain height H
= 400 m. Due to the wind the particle gathers 16. A body has maximum range R1 when projected
the horizontal velocity component up the inclined plane. The same boby when
ν x = ay where a = 5 s −1 and y is the vertical projected down the inclined plane. it has
displacement of the particle from point of maximum range R2 . Find its maximum
release, then find the horizontal drift of the horizontal range. Assume the equal speed of
particle when it strikes the ground projection in each case and the boby is
a) 2.67 km b) 5.67 km c)12.67 km d) 4.97 km projected onto the e greatest slope.
14(a) A fighter plane enters inside the enemy v0 2R1 R2
territory, at time t = 0, with velocity a) R = R − R
v0 1 2
υo = 250 m / s a moves horizontally with P O
R =
2R1 R2
b) R1 + R2
constant acceleration a = 20 m / s2 (see figure). R1 R2
An enemy tank at theborder, spot the plane Q c) R = R − R
and fire shots at an angle θ = 60o with the 1
4R1 R2
2
horizontal and with velocity u = 600 m/s. At β d) R = R + R
what altitude H of the plane it can be hit by the 17. A particle P is projected from a point
1 2
on the
shot? surface of smooth inclined plane.
Simultaneously another particle Q is released
on the smooth inclined plane from the same
position. P and Q collide on the inclined plane
600 m/s after t = 4 second. The speed of projection of
P is (Take g = 10 m/s2)
H P
Q
θ = 60°
a) 1500 m b) 2473 m c) 1650 m d) 1800 m 60°
15. A bomber plane moving at a horizontal speed a) 5 m/s b) 10 m/s c) 15 m/s d) 20 m/s
of 20 m/s releases a bomb at a height of 80 m 18. A particle is projected from surface of the in
above ground as shown. At the same instant a clined plane with speed u and at an angle ?
Hunter starts running from a point below it, to with the horizontal. After some time the particle
catch the bomb at 10 m/s. After two seconds collides elastically with the smooth fixed
he realized that he cannot make it, he stops inclined plane for the first time and
running and immediately hold his gun subsequently moves in vertical direction.
and fires in such direction so that just before Starting from projection, find the time taken
bomb hits the ground, bullet will hit it. What by the particle to reach maximum height.
should be the firing speed of bullet. (Take g = (Neglect time of collision)
2
10 m/s )
θ
20 m/s
45°
80 m
2ucos? 2u sin? u ( sin ?+cos ? ) 2u
Ground a) b) c) d)
g g g g
19. A perfectly elastic particle is projected with a
10 m/s velocity v on a vertical plane through the line
a) 10 m/s b) 20 10m / s of greatest slope of an inclined plane of
elevation α . If after striking the plane, the
c) 10 10m / s d) None of these particle rebounds vertically, show that it will
177
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
return to the point of projection at the end of 23. Two particles are projected from the same
time equal to point on ground simultaneously with speeds
6v 6v and 20 m / s and 20 / 3 m / s at angles 30o and
a) b)
g 1 + 8sin 2 α g 1 + sin 2 α 60 o with the horizontal in the same direction.
v v The maximum distance between them till both
c) d) of them strike the ground is approximately (g
g 1 + 8sin 2 α g 1 + sin 2 α = 10m/s2)
20. Two bodies A and B are projected from the (a) 23.1 m (b) 16.4 m (c) 30.2 m (d) 10.4 m
same place in same vertical plane with veloci 24. Two particles A and B are projected
ties v1 and v2 .From a long inclined plane as simultaneously from a point situated on a
shown Find the ratio of their times of flight horizontal plane.The particle A is projected
v2
vertically up with a velocity ? A while the
v1 particle B is projected up at an angle of 30o
A B
θ with horizontal with a velocity ? B . After 5 s
v1 sin θ 2v1 sinθ v1 sin θ v1 cos θ the particles were observed moving mutually
a) b) c) d) perpendicular to each other. The velocity of
v2 v2 2v2 v2
projection of the particle ? A and ? B
E) COLLISIONS BETWEENPROJECTILES respectively are
21. A particle A is projected from the ground with (a) 5ms −1 ,100ms −1
an initial velocity of 10 m/s at an angle of 60°
(b) 100ms −1 ,50 ms−1
with horizontal. From what height should an
another particle B be projected horizontally with (c) ? A can have any value grater than
velocity 5 m/s so that both the particles collide
in ground at point C if both are projected 25ms −1 ,100 ms −1 (d) 20ms −1 , 25ms −1
simultaneously g = 10 m/s2. 25. An aircraft moving with a speed of 250 m/s is
B 5m/s at a height of 6000m, just overhead of an
antiaircraft gun. If the muzzle velocity is 500
m/s, the firing angle θ should be:
250m/s
h 10m/s
500m/s
6000m
60°
A C
(A) 10 m (B) 15 m (C) 20 m (D) 30 m θ
0
22. A smooth square platform ABCD is moving (a) 30 (b) 450 (c) 600 (d) none of these.
towards right with a uniform speed ?. At what 26. A cannon fires successively two shells with
angle ? must a particle be projected from A velocity v0 =250 m/s, the first at an angle
with speed u so that it strikes the point B? θ1 = 600 and the second at an angle θ 2 = 450 to
B C
the horizontal, the azimuth being the same.
u Neglecting the air drag, find the time interval
V
between firings leading to the collision of the
θ shells
A D
a) 4 sec b) 7 sec c) 17 sec d) 11 sec
−1 u −1 ?
(a) sin (b) cos 27. A shell is projected from a gun with a muzzle
? u velocity v. The gun is fitted with a trolley car
−1 u −1 ?
at an angle θ as shown in the fig. if the trolley
(c) cos (d) sin car is made to move with constant velocity v
? u
towards right, find the horizontal range of the
shell relative to ground.
178
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
MULTI ANSWER QUESTIONS
u
V 30. A child in danger of drowing in a river is being
θ carried downstream by a current that flows
uniformly at a speed of 2.5km/h. The child is
0.6km from shore and 0.8km upstream of a
2u sin θ ( u cos θ + v ) boat landing when a rescue boat sets out. If
a) R = the boat proceeds at its maximum speed of
g
20km/h with respect to the water, what angle
2u sin θ ( u cos θ − v ) does the boat velocity v make with the
b) R = shore? How long will it take boat to reach
g
the child.
u sin θ ( u cos θ + v ) a) The angle made by the boat with the shore is 530
c) R = b) The angle made by the boat with the shore is
2g
370
u sin θ ( u cos θ + v ) c) The time taken by boat to reach the child is 4
d) R = min
g
d) The time taken by boat to reach the child is 3
28. Two guns are projected at each other, one min
upward at an angle of 300and the other at the 31. A launch plies between two points A and B on
same of depression, the muzzles being 30m the opposite banks of a river always
apart as shown in the figure. If the guns are following the line AB. The distance S
shot with velocities of 350m/s upward and 300 between points A and B is 1,200m. The
m/s downward respectively. where the bullets velocity of the river current v =1.9m/s is
may meet. constant over the entire width of the river.
The line AB makes an angle α = 600 with the
B direction of the current. With what velocity
30 m u and at what angle β to the line AB should
P the launch move to cover the distance AB
y and back in a time t =5 min? The angle β
30° remains the same during the passage from A
A X to B and from B to A.
a) x = 14m,y = 8.07m b) x = 4m,y = 4.07m B
c) x = 10m,y = 10.07m d) x=5m,y = 1 8.07m u
29. Two particles A and B are projected in same β v
vertical plane as shown in the figure. Their
α
initial positions (t = 0), initial speed and angle
A
of projections are indicated in the diagram. If a) The velocity of the boat is 8m/s
initial angle of projection qB = 370 , what b) The velocity of the boat is 6m/s
should be initial speed of projection of particle c) The angle made by u with the line AB is 120
d) The angle made by u with line AB is 100
B, so that it hits particle A. U A = 60m / s 32. The current velocity of river grows in
proportion to the distance from its bank and
reaches the maximum value v 0 in the middle.
53° θB Near the banks the velocity is zero. A boat is
A B moving along the river in such a manner that
it always perpendicular to the current. The
100m speed of the boat in still water is u. Find the
1) 80 m/s 2) 75 m/s 3) 40 m/s 4) 45 m/s distance through which the boat crossing the
river will be carried away by the current if the
width of the river is c. Also determine the
trajectory of the boat.
179
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
2cu relative velocity. River is flowing with speed
a) The distance carried by the boat is X max = v of 2km/hr and is 100m wide. speeds of A and B
0 on the ground are 8km/hr and 6km/hr
cv 0 respectively.
b) The distance carried by the boat is x max =
2u C
v0 c 2km/hr
c) The trajectary of the boat is y =
2
x
u
100m
uc
d) The trajectary of the boat is y = v x
2
0
33 Two swimmers A and B start swimming from A
37° B 127°
different positions on the same bank as shown
300m 125m
in figure. The swimmer A swims at angle 900
with respect to the river to reach point P. He (A) A will win the race (B) B will win the race
takes 120 seconds to cross the river of width (C) the time taken by A to reach the point C is 165 sec
10m. The swimmer B also takes the same time (D) the time taken by B to reach the point C is 150
to reach the point P sec
36. Two trains A and B are moving with same speed
y of 100km/hr. Train ‘A’ moves towards east and
30m
P train B moves towards west. At an instant when
the trains are moving side by side, an aeroplane
x files above the trains horizontally. For the
10m passengers in the train A, the plane appears
to fly from North to South direction. For the
passengers in the train B, the plane appears
to fly in a direction making an angle 600 to
A B North – South direction.
5m (A) The speed of the plane with respect to ground
a) velocity of A with respect to river is 1/6 m/s 7
b) river flow velocity is ¼ m/s. is 100 km / hr
3
c) Velocity of B along y-axis with respect to earth (B) The speed of the plane with respect to ground
is 1/3 m/s.
is 100 3 km / hr
d) velocity of B along x-axis with respect to earth
is 5/24 m/s. (C) The plane moves in a direction at an angle of
34. Two frames of reference P and Q are moving 3
relative to each other at constant velocity. Let tan −1 to North-South direction (with respect
r r 2
v OP and a OP represent the velocity and the to ground)
acceleration respectively of a moving particle (D) The plane moves in a direction at an angle of
O as measured by an observer in frame P and 5
r r tan −1 to North-South direction (with respect
vOQ and a OQ represent the velocity and the 2
acceleration respectively of the moving to ground)
particle O as measured by an observer in frame 37. Two shells are fired from cannon with speed u
Q, then each, at angles of α and β respectively with
r r r r r the horizontal. The time interval between the
(A) v OP = vOQ (B) v OP = vOQ + v QP
r r r r r shots is T. They collide in mid air after time t
(C) a OP = a OQ (D) a OP = a OQ + a QP from the first shot. Which of the following
35. Two swimmers start a race. One who reaches conditions must be satisfied?
the point C first on the other bank wins the a) α > β b) t cos α = (t − T ) cos β
race. A makes his strokes in a direction of c) (t − T ) cos α = t cos β
370 to the river flow with velocity 5km/hr 1 2 1
d) ( u sinα ) t − gt = (u sin β )(t −T) − g(t −T )
2
relative to water. B makes his strokes in a
2 2
direction 1270 to the river flow with same
180
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
38. Two inclined panes OA and OB having inclina 4m/s
tion 300 and 600 with the horizontal respectively
intersect each other at O, as shown in figure. A 3m/s
particle is projected from point P with a velocity
u = 10 3m / s along a direction perpendicular
to plane OA. If the particle strikes plane OB 53°
perpendicular at Q 37°
x
y a) Their relative velocity is along vertical direction
b) Their relative acceleration is non-zero and it is
v B along vertical direction
u c) They will hit the surface simultaneously
Q d) Their relative velocity is constant and has
A magnitude 1.4 m/s
42. A particle moves along x-axis with constant
h P acceleration and its x-position depend on time
30° 60° ‘t’ as shown in the following graph (parabola);
O then in interval 0 to 4 sec.
Which of the following is/are correct
(a) The time of flight 2s
(b) The velocity with which the particle strikes the
plane OB=10 m/s
(c) The height of the point P from point O is 5m
(d) The distance PQ = 20m
39. Two balls are thrown from an inclined plane at x
angle of projection α with the plane, one up (m)
45° 45°
the incline and other down the incline as shown 4 t(sec)
in figure (T stands for total time of flight) : a) relation between x- coordinate & time is
v0 v1
v0 x = t − t2 / 4 .
b) maximum x-coordinate is 1m
α c) total distance traveled is 2m
h1 h2
v1
d) average speed is 0.5 m/s
α R1 R1 43. A railway compartment is 16 m long, 2.4 m wide
θ θ
and 3.2 m high. It is moving with a velocity ‘v’.
A particle moving horizontally with a speed ‘u’,
v02 sin 2 α 2v0 sin α perpendicular to the direction of ‘v’ enters
a) h1 = h2 = b) T1 = T2 = through a hole at an upper corner A and strikes
2 g cos θ g cos θ
the diagonally opposite corner B. Assume g =
c) R2 = R1 = g (sin θ )T12 d) vt2 = vt1 10 m/s2.
40. An aeroplane at a constant speed releases a 2.4 m
v
bomb. As the bomb drops away from the
O A
aeroplane, u
B
a) It will always be vertically below the aeroplane 3.2 m
b) It will always be vertically below the aeroplane
only if the aeroplane was flying horizontallly. 16 m
c) It will always be vertically below the aeroplane a) v = 20 m/s b) u = 3 m/s
only if the aeroplane was flying at an angle of c) To an observer inside the compartment, the path
450 to the horizontal of the particle is a parabola
d) It will gradually fall behind the aeroplane if the d) To a stationary observer outside the
aeroplane was flying horizontally. compartment,the path of the particle is parabola
41. Two particles are projected with speed 4 m/s 44. Two particles A and B are projected from the
and 3 m/s simultaneously from same point as same point with the same speed but at different
shown in the figure. Then : angles α and β with the horizontal, such that
181
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
the maximum height of A is two–third of the Passage-2
horizontal range of B. Then which of the A man is riding on a flat car travelling with a constant
following relations are true ? speed of 10m/s. He wishes to throw a ball through
a) range of A = maximum height of B a stationary hoop 15 m above the height of his
b) 3(1 – cos 2 α ) = 8 sin 2 β hands in such a manner that the ball will move
c) maximum value of β is sin–1 (3/4) horizontally as it passes through the hoop. He throws
d) maximum horizontal range of A = u2/g and this the ball with a speed of 12.5 m/s w.r.t. himself.
48. How many seconds after he release the ball
1 −1 3
occurs when β = sin will it pass through the hoop ?
2 8 a) 1 sec b) 2 sec c) 3 sec d) 4 sec
45. Two particles are projected from the same 49. At what horizontal distance in front of the hoop
point , with the same speed, in the same must he release the ball ?
vertical plane, at different angles with the a) 12.5 m b) 15.5 m c) 17.5 m d) 20 m
horizontal. A frame of reference is fixed to one Passage-3
particle. The position vector of the other
r A cannon is fixed with a smooth massive trolley car
particle as observed from this frame is r at an angle θ as shown in the figure. The trolley car
Which of the follwing satements are correct?
r slides from rest down the inclined plane of angle of
a) direction of r does not change inclination β .
r
b) r changes in magnitude and direction with time The muzzle velocity of the shell fired at t = t0 from
r
c) The magnitude of r increases linearly with time the cannon is u, such that the shell moves
r perpendicular to the inclined plane just after the
d) The direction of r changes with time; its
magnitude may or may not change, depending on t=0
the angles of projection θ
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
Passage-1 firing.
A river of width w is flowing such that the stream
β
3 −1
velocity varies with y as v R = v 0 1 + w y ; 50. The value of t0 is:
where y is the perpendicular distance from one u cos θ u cos θ u cos θ u sin θ
(a) (b) (c) (d)
bank. A boat starts rowing from the bank with g g cos β g sin β g cos β
constant velocity v =2v0 in such a way that it 51. the time of flight of the shell is:
always moves along a straight line perpendicular u cos θ 2u sin θ u u sin θ
to the banks. (a) (b) (c) (d)
46. At what time will he reach the other bank g sin β g cos β g g sin β
52. the difference in range of the shell relative to
wπ wπ the trolley car and ground is:
a) t = 6v
0
b) 6 2 − 1 v ( 0 ) u 2 sin 2θ u 2 cos 2 θ
(a) (b)
wπ wπ g cos β 2 g sin β
(
c) 6 3 − 1 v )0
d) (
3 − 1 v0 ) (c)
u 2 sin θ sin β
(d)
2U 2 sin θ cos(θ − β )
47. What will be the velocity of the boat along 2g g cos 2 β
the straight line when he reaches the other 53. after what time should the shell be fired such
bank that it will go vertically up?
v0 u cos θ u sin (θ + β )
a) v 0 b) 2v0 c) d) 2c0 (a) (b)
2 g sin β g cos θ sin β
u cos (θ + β ) u cos (θ + β )
(c) (d)
g cos β g sin β cos β
182
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
Passage: 4 58. The magnitude of the velocity of the point as a
When we analyse the projectile motion from any function of time is
uur uur uur
acccelerated frame O as rO , u O and aO (A) a 1 + (1 − α t ) (B) a 1 + (1 − 2α t )
2 2
respectively, express the following terms;
r r r r r r r r r
(C) 2a 1 + (1 − α t ) (D) 2a 1 + (1 − 2α t )
2 2
rpO = rp − rO , u pO = u p − uO and apO = ap − aO ,
where P stands for projectile. Then using the Passage - 6:
following kinematical equations of the projectile (For At time t = 0 , the position vector of a particle
constant acceleration) relative to the accelerating
r r 1r 2 r moving in the x − y plane is 5i$ m. By time t = 0 .
frame, we have s pO = u pOt + a pO t , v pO 62 sec , it’s position vector has become
2
r r rr
= u pO + a pOt and v 2pO = u 2pO + 2a.s pO ( )
5.1 $i + 0.4 $j m. with this data answer the
Using the above expressions, answer the following following questions.
question: A projectile has initial velocity v0 relative 59. The magnitude of the average velocity during
to the large plate which is moving with a constant the above time interval.
upward accelertion a. (A) . 0206 m / sec (B) 0.206 m / sec
v0 (C) 20.6 m / sec (D) 2.06 m / sec
60. The angle θ made by the average velocity with
A B rest the positive x axis
θ0 a
(A) tan −1 ( 2 ) (B) tan −1 ( 3)
54. Which of the following remain/s equal for the
observers A and B ? (C) tan −1 (1) (D) tan −1 ( 4 )
(a) Maximum height (b) Range Passage - 7:
(c) Time of flight (d) Angle of projection The position vector of a particle at time t is given
r
r = 2t $i + 5t $j + 4sin ωt k$ where ω is a
55. Refering to Q.1, velocity of the projectile
relative to B ofter some time by
constant . Answer the following questions
(a) < v0 at an angle θ < θ0 61. Velocity vector of the particle is
(b) > v0 at an angle θ > θ 0 (A) Constant in magnitude but with variable direction
(B) constant in direction must variable with
(c) > v0 at an angle θ = θ 0 magnitude
(d) v0 at an angle θ = θ 0 (C) constant
(D) varying with magnitude an well as direction
Passage - 5:
62. Velocity vector is perpendicular to ...... vector
A point moves in the plane xy according to the law,
(A) 2 $i + 4 $j (B) 3 $i + 2 $j
x = a sin ωt , y = a (1 − cos ωt ) Answer the
following question taking a and ω as positive (C) 5 $i − 2 $j (D) None
constant 63. Acceleration of the particle is
56. The distance travelled by the point during the (A) Constant in magnitude but variable with direction
time T is (B) constant
(A) 2aωT (B) 3aωT (C) 4aωT (D) aωT (C) Constant in direction but variable with magnitude
57. The equation of the trajectory of the particle is (D) Varying with magnitude as well as direction
x 2α x 2α MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
(A) y = x − (B) y = 2 x − 64. Two particles A and B moving in x-y plane
a a
are at origin at t=0sec. The initial velocity
x 2α 2x 2α
(C) y = x − (D) y = x − vectors of A and B are vA = 8i m / s and
2a a
vB = 8j m / s . The acceleration of A and B aree
183
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
constant and are a A = −2i m / s 2 and V R / M = 4m / s
a B = −2 j m / s . Column-I given certain
2
statements regarding particle A and B M
r)
Column-II given corresponding results. 4m/s
Match the statements in Column-I with 30°
corresponding results in Column-II.
°
Column-I Column-II
30
(a) The time ( in secs) at which (p) 16 2 V R / M = 5m / s
velocity of A relative to B is zero
s) M
(b) The distance (in m) between A (q) 8 2
2m/s
and B when their relative velocity is zero 60°
(c) The time (in sec) after t =0 at (r) 8
which A and B are at same position
(d) The magnitude of relative V R / M = 5m / s
velocity of A and B at the instant
they are at same position (s) 4 M
t)
65. Consider 5 different situations a man M 3m/s
ur 60°
moving and rain as observed by him. V R →
ur
velocity of rain, V R / M → velocity of rain relative 66. A particle projected onto an inclined plane:
ur
to man, V M → velocity of man The situations vx''
are shown on right hand column v′x
Column - I C
a) VR lies in which of the following ranges B
3.3 m/s ≤ VR ≤ 4.3 m/s x vy'
vx
b) 4.3 m/s < VR ≤ 5.3 m/s vy
c) 5.3 m/s < VR ≤ 6.3 m/s A θ x
d) 6.3 m/s < VR ≤ 7.3 m/s
Column - II Column-I Column-II
V R / M = 4m / s v 'y
(a) v (p) > 1
y
30° 2v y
p) (b) t AC (q)
g cos θ
M 3m/s
x vx − v ' x
(c) (r)
V R / M = 4m / s x' g sin θ
t AB
(d) t (s) 1
BC
q)
67. A projectile is thrown at an angle θ with the
M 2m/s horizontal with a initial velocity v0. If the
magnitude of velocity of the projectile and time
2
v2 b c2
−
are related as 2 t − = , then
a a a2
184
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
Column-I Column-II 72. A body is projected up from the bottom an
(a) Range is (p) c inclined plane with a velocity 3 3 m/sec which
2b makes an angle 600 if the horizontal. The angle
(b) Height (q) of projection is 300 with the plane then the time
a
of flight when it strikes the same plane is 0.1x.
2bc Then the value of x is
(c) Time of flight is (r) 73. A ball is thrown with a velocity whose horizontal
a
component is 12ms -1 from a vertical wall
2
b 18.75m high in such away that it just clears
(d) Velocity at highest point (s) the wall. At what time will it reach the ground
2a
? (g = 10ms-2)
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS 74. A golfer standing on level ground hits a ball
68. The distance between two moving particles with a velocity of u = 50ms −1 at an angle α
at any time is a= 32m. If v be their relative
velocity and v1 = 4 m/s and v 2 =8m/s be the 5
above the horizontal. If tan α = , then the
components of v along and perpendicular 12
to a. The time when they are closest to each time for which the ball is at least 15 m above
other is ( in meter) the ground will be (take g g = 10ms −2 )
69. Airplanes A and B are flying with constant 75. A particle is projected from a stationary trolley.
velocity in the same vertical plane at angles After projection, the trolly moves with velocity
0 and 0 with respect to the horizontal
30 60 2 15m / s. For an observer on the trolley, the
respectively as shown in figure. The speed direction of the particle is as shown in the figure
of A is 100 3m / s. At time t=0 s, an observer while for the observer on the ground, the ball
rises vertically. The maximum height reached
in A finds B at a distance of 500 m. The
by the ball from the trolley is h metre. The
observer sees B moving with a constant
value of h will be
velocity perpendicular to the line of motion
V
of A. If at t = t0 , A just escapes being hit by (W.r.t Trolley)
B, t0 in seconds is (adv 2014) 60°
10m/s
A
76. A projectile is launched at time t = 0 from point
B A which is at height 1m above the floorw i t h
speed v m/sec and at an angle θ = 450 with
the floor. It passes through a hoop at B which
is 1 m above A and B is the highest point of
the trajectory. The horizontal distance
30° 60° between A and B is d metres. The projectile
0
70. A rock is launched upward at 45 . A bee moves then falls into a basket, hitting the floor at C a
along the trajectory of the rock at a constant horizontal distance 3d metres from A. Find l
speed equal to the initial speed of the rock. (in m).
B
The magnitude of acceleration of the bee at
the top point of the trajectory is xg ? For the
rock, neglect the air resistance. Find the value A
45°
of x . l
71. A balll is thrown horizontally from a height of C
O d 3d
20 m. If hits the ground with a velocity of ‘3’
times the velocity of projection. The velocity
of projection is 3.5x m/s, then x is
185
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
LEVEL-VI - KEY r uuur
v r/p = OB = velocity of rain w.r.t. person.
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
1) A 2)A 3) C 4) A 5) B 6) A 7)A
8) a 9) d 10) a 11) c 12) b 13) b 14) a 60°
14(a) b 15) c 16) b 17) b 18) c 19) a 20) a D −V p Vp A
21) b 22) b 23) a 24) c 25) c 26) d O
27) a 28) a 29) a Vr
MULTIPLE TYPE Vr / p
30)BD 31)AC 32)BD 33)B,D B C
34)B,C,D 35) A,D 36) A,C 37) a,b,d
38) a,b,c,d 39) a,b,c,d 40) a 41) a,d r uuur
v r = OC = velocity of rain w.r.t .earth
42)a,b,c,d 43) a,b,c,d 44) b,d 45) a,c r r
COMPREHENSION TYPE Values of v r and v r/p can be obtained by using
46)C 47)A 48) b 49) c 50) c 51) b 52) d simple trignometric relations
53) d 54) d 55) b 56) d 57) a 58) b 59) c r uuur
60 ) d 61) d 62) c 63) d 1. Speed of rain drops w.r.t.earth v r = OC from
MATRIX MATCH CB
64)a-s,b-p,c-r,d-q 65) A – p, B – q,t, C – s, D – r ∆OCB, = sin 60 0
OC
66) a-s b-q,r c- p d-s 67) a-r b-s c- q d-p
INTEGER TYPE CB 20 40 40 3 -1
68)3 69)5 70) 2 71) 4 72) 6 73) 3 74) 5 75) 9 ⇒ OC = 0
= = = ms .
sin 60 3/2 3 3
76) 3 r r
LEVEL-VI - HINTS 2. Speed of rain w.r.t.the person v r/p = OB
1. Let the velocity of the drops above the person OB
rel. to the merry go round be at an angle α to the From ∆OCM, = cot 600
vertical. This angle can be determined from the CB
v 0 = vrel + v m.g.r , 20 20 3 −1
velocity triangle ⇒ OB = CBcot 600 = = ms
3 3
v0
v rel = v0 − v m.g.r vm.g.r = rω , cot α = . 4. According to problem,
rω t A = t B + time taken in walking from C to B.
10 CB vt
t A = tB + = tB + r B
30° 30° walking speed u
V R = 20m / s V RM
d d vr t B d vd
10 3 = + = + r
2. v A cos θ vB u vB u vB
60° vx 60° d d vr d
= +
Vm v 2 − v r2 v B uv B
vA × A
r r
vA
∧ ∧ ∧
v R = 10 i − 10 3 j ; vm = vx i ; v0
u= = 3.0km / hr
r ∧ ∧
v 2 −
1
v RM = (10 − v x ) i − 10 3 j
2
1 − −1
0
2
Angle with the vertical = 30r v
5. a) Let the two meet at a distance s from ground.
10 − vx
tan 300 = ⇒ v x = 20 m / s 1
Then s − 12 = 18t − x9.8xt ...(i)
2
10 3
2
3. Given θ = 600 and velocity of person
uuur and s − 5 = 2t ...(ii) Solving these two equations,
r
v P = OA =20ms -1. This velocity is same as the we get t = 3.65s and s= 12.30m
velocity of person w.r.t.ground. First of all let’s b) vb = 18-(9.8)(3.65) = - 17.8 m/s i.e, velocity
see how the diagram works out. of ball is 17.8 m/s(downward) at the time of
impact or relative velocity= 19.8 m/s (downward)
186
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
x d−x S x
6. S1 = ,S2 = ; t1 = 1 =
sin α1 sin α 2 v1 v1 sin α1
S2 d−x
and t 2 = v = v sin α
2 2 2
1 y wall
1 d
t = x − + u
v1 sin α1 v 2 sin α 2 v 2 sin α 2
dt θ
For t be minimum = 0 or x
dx
1 1 v1 sin α 2 gx 2 sec 2 θ
= , = y= x tan θ − ---------(i)
v1 sin α1 v 2 sin α 2 v 2 sin α1 2u 2
7. The situation is shown in figure. When Joy dy gx 2
shouted, the sound which is going directly toward = x sec 2 θ − 2 2sec θ (sec θ tan θ )
Kim will not reach her as due to wind drift is dθ 2u
added to it. The sound which is going in the xg tan θ
= x sec θ 1 −
2
direction at an angle θ , to their line joining will
u 2
reach to Kim as when drift is added to it as shown
in figure, the resultant is in the direction of their dy
For y to be maximum, =0
line joining. dθ
xg tan θ u2
∴ x sec 2 θ 1 − = 0 tan θ =
u 2
or
gx
Joy θ Kim Substituting this value in equation (i), we get
vR
u
v u 2 1 gx 2 u4
ymax = x − 1 +
gx 2 u 2 x 2 g 2
x u 2 gx 2 u 2 2u 4 − g 2 x 2 − u 4
= − − =
The resultant velocity of sound is vR = v2 − u 2 g 2u 2 2 g 2u 2 g
x u4 − g 2 x2
Time taken by sound to reach Kim is t = or ymax =
v2 − u 2 2 gu 2
8. Gun is adjusted for maximum range; 10. Let the stone is projected with a velocity u at an
therefore α = 450 ; angle θ with the horizontal, we have
(u sin θ )2
2 2
x2 v v
y = x−g 2 or
x2 − 0 x + 0 h = 0 (2h) = or u sin θ = 2 gh
v0 g g 2g
If x1 and x2 are roots of the above equation Suppose t is the time taken by the stone to reach
v02 v02 the height h above the ground. Then
x1 + x2 = and x1 x2 = h
g g 1 2 gt 2
h = u sin θ t − gt or − u sin θ t + h = 0
2 2
( x1 − x2 ) 2 = ( x1 + x2 ) 2 − 4 x1 x2
2 As we have u sin θ = 2 gh
v02 v02 v0 2
= − 4 h ; x1 − x2 = v0 − 4 gh gt 2
g g g ∴ − 2 gh t + h = 0
2
9. Let θ the angle of projection, suppose y is the height Solving above equation for t, we get
at which bullet hit the wall. We have, from equation
of trajectory.
187
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
u2 u2
2 gh ± (2 gh ) 2 − 4 ×
g
h
h
2h
=
g
( cos 2
θ + sin 2
θ ) g = Rmax
=
t= & t2 = ( 2 + 1)
g
2× g 13. Suppose height of line A is y from the ground.For
2 the motion of body along vertical direction we have,
Where t 1 and t 2 correspond to P and Q in the figure.
Suppose v is the horizontal velocity of the bird. Height
Then PQ = vt2 .
B
11. Equation of ball, TB
h
y
N
A tA
p
time
1 2 g t2
y = ut − g t or − u t + y = 0 ...(i)
2 2
O 53° M
X g
ground Ist (110, 0) u ± u2 − 4 × ×y
level 100m t= 2
g ...(ii)
2 2×
gx 2
y = x tan θ − Substituting the values,
2u cos2 θ
2
Let t1 and t2 are time the body passes the two
y = 1.33x − 0.0113x 2
..... (1) points of the same horizontal line,
Slope of line MN is 1 and it passes through point Then t A = t2 − t1 From (ii),
(110 m, 0). Hence the equation of this line can be
written as, y = x − 110 ..... ( 2 ) u − u 2 − 2 gy u + u 2 − 2 gy
t1 = and 2t =
Point of interrsection of two curves is say P. Solving g g
(1) and (2) we get positive value of y equal to 4.5 u + u 2 − 2 gy u − u 2 − 2 gy
2
y P = 4.5 ∴ t A = ( t2 − t1 ) = −
2
m. i.e., 2
g g
Height of one step is 1 m. Hence, the ball will collide
somewhere between y = 4 m and y = 5m. which 2
2 2
u − 2 gy = 2 ( u 2 − 2 gy )
4
comes out to be 6th step =
u 2 sin 2θ g g
12. We know that horizontal range, R = 4 2
Similarly, t B = 2 u − 2 g ( h + y )
g 2
u 2 sin 2 θ g
and maximum height h = 8h
2g
Now t A − tB = −
2 2
2 g
u sin 2θ
2
u 2 sin 2 θ
8h
∴ Magnitude of g = t 2 − t 2
2
∴ + 2h = 2 2 + 2
R g
8h u sin θ 2 g B A
8
2g dy
.... (1)
14. ν y = = 2gy
dt
u 4 ( 2sin θ cos θ ) u 2 sin 2 θ
2
= +
u 2 sin 2 θ g νx =
dx
= ay .... ( 2 )
g ×8
2
dt
2g
188
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
1
Dividing (1) by ( 2 ) ,weget travelled by bomb = ´10´ 2 = 20m.
2
2
dy 2gy 2 In 2 sec. horizontal distance travelled by Hunter
= = = 10 ´ 2 = 20 m.
dx ay y
Time remaining for bomb to hit ground
( g = 10 m / s 2
and a = 5 s −1 ) 2´80
= - 2 = 2 sec.
or y.dy = 2dx 10
or ∫ 0400m y .dy = 2 dx Let V x and Vy be the velocity components of bullet
along horizontal and vertical direction. Thus we use.
2 3 / 2 400m
or ( y )0 = 2x 2Vy
3 = 2 Þ Vy = 10 m/s and
1 g
x = ( 400 )
3/2
or
3 20
= 2 Þ Vx = 30 m/s
or
8
x = × 10 3 m Vx - 20
3 Thus velocity of firing is
or x = 2.67 km
V = Vx2 + Vy2 = 10 10 m/s.
X C) projectile motion on inclined plane
y 16. As derive earlier,
υx v02
H = 400m
for upward projection, max g 1 − sin β = R1
R =
( )
υy ...(i)
For downward projection,
Y
v02
Rmin = = R2 ...(ii)
1 2 g (1 + sin β )
14(a). If it is being hit then d = ν o t + at = ( u cos θ ) t For a projection of horizontal surface substituting
2
v02
β = 0, Then, we have Rmax = = R ( say ) ...(iii)
Q g
To establish a relation between R, R1 and R2 , we
600m/s
H 1
need to eliminate sin β . Adding R form eq.(i)
1
θ = 60° 1 2 1 1
with R from eq.(ii) we have R = R + R Then,
d 2 1 2
u cos θ − νo v0
or t=
a/2 P O v0
R1
∴ t = 5s 2R1 R2
1 ans. R = R + R
H = ( u sin θ ) t − g t 2 1 2
R2 Q
2
β
H = 1500 3 − 125
⇒ H = 2473 m 17. It can be observed from figure that P and Q shall
collide if the initial component of velocity ‘P’ on
15. In 2 sec. horizontal distance travelled by bomb
inclined plane i.e. along incline u = 0 that is particle
= 20´ 2 = 40m. In 2 sec. vertical distance is projected perpendicular to incline.
189
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
2u gT cos q cos θ 2sin θ tan α
\ Time of light T = g cos q \ u = = 10m / s tan α = = cot θ − 2 tan α
2 sin θ
18. After the elastic collision with inclined plane the 3 tan α
projectile moves in vertical direction. The inclination ∴ cos θ =
of plane with horizontal is 45o. Hence velocity of 1 + 9 tan 2 α
particle just before collision should be horizontal.
Time required to reach maximum height 1 + 9 tan 2 α
1
C
45° θ
uy = ucosθ 3tanα
45° Total time taken by paticle is equal to the sum of
B time taken from O to P and P to Q and then from Q
to P to Q. Thus total time
u = 2 T + 2t=2(T+t) For t, we hae 0 = v
θ
v
A - gt or t =
g
45°
2v sin θ v
u sin q u cos q ∴ = 2 +
= t AB + t BC = + Total time
g cos α g
g g
19. The path of the motion of particle is as shown in 2v sin θ 1 v cos θ 2v sin θ
= 2 + −
figure. g cos α g sin α cos α
Q
3tan α
y v 2v
v α 2v cos θ 1 + 9 tan 2 α
x = =
p g sin α g sin α
g sinα
θ α g cosα 6v
o After solving, we get Total times =
g 1 + 8sin 2 α
Let particle is projected at an angle θ with the plane.
Its displacement along y-axis becomes zero in time 2vy 2v1 sinθ 2v
T. Then we have T = = , T2 = 2
g cosθ g cosθ
1
ay
1 2v sin θ 20. T1 v1 sinθ
y = uy T + ayT 2 or T = . .. (i) =
2 g cos α T2 v2
Let v is the velocity with which particle strikes the
plane α is the angle which it makes with the vertical. 2Usin θ 1
21. t = = 3 S = gt 2 h = 15m
Then we have, v sin α = v cosθ − g sin θ T ...(ii) g 2
and v cos α = v sin θ − g cos θ T ...(iii) 22. Particle will strike the point B if velocity of particle
with respect to platform is along AB or component
2v sin θ
From(ii), v sin α = v cosθ − g sin α ×
of its relative velocity along AD is zero. i.e.,
or
g cos α u cos ? = ?
v cos θ 2v sin θ ?
v= − ...(iv) or ? = cos −1
sin α cos α u
Substituting the value of T in equation (ii) and (iii), 23. Components of velocities of both the particles in
2v sin θ vertical direction are equal. Therefore, their time
v cos α = v sin θ − g cos α ...(vi) of flights are equal and their relative motion is in
g cos α horizontal direction only. Thus, the maximum
Dividing equation (v) by (vi), we have distance between them is equal to the difference
in their horizontal ranges.
190
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
( 20 )
2
sin 60o ( 400 ) 3 2u sin θ ( u cos θ + v )
R1 = = = 34.64 m R= Ans.
g 10 × 2 g
20 o
2
28. Conceptual
sin120 400 × 3 60 sin 53 vB sin37
R2 = 3
= = 11.55 m
g 10 × 3 × 2
∴ Smax = 34.64 − 11.55 = 23.09 m = 23.1m
29.
2U 5g
24. TA = = 5s TA > 5s U> U > 25 m / s. vB cos37
g 2 60 cos53
V in along line joining the particles 60 sin 53
For any value U > 25 the projectile will move only rel
= VBsin 37 VB=80m/s
in vertical direction.So B should move in horizontal
MULTI ANSWER TYPE
direction at maximum height it is horizontal. r r r
30. v b = velocity of boatman = v br + v r
2Usin θ U r r r r r r
Ta = =5= θ = 30o v c = velocity of child = v r ; v bc = v b − vc = vbr
g 2 ×10
r r
U = 100m / s v bc should be along BCi .e, v br should be along
(25, 26) Conceptual 0.6 3
27. The velocity of projection of the shell is BC, where tan α = = , α = 37 0
r r r 0.8 4
v s = v sc + v c . Substituting BC 1
r r Further, t = vr = 20 hr = 3 minute
v sc = u cos θ ˆ ˆ
i + u sin θ j ˆ
and v c − v i br
Child
y
u C 0.8km A
α
θ φ
1.0km
0.6km
v br
x α
B Boat
R 31. In the order that the moving launch is always on
For horizntal range R of the shell its displacement the straight lineAB, the components of velocity of
r the current and of the launch in the direction
can be given as s = Riˆ Substituting perpendicular to AB should be equal, i.e
r r r r
a = − g ˆj, s = Riˆ, and u = vs u sin β = vsin α.. ( i )
r r 1r
= ( u cos θ + v ) iˆ + u sin θ ˆj in s = ut + at 2 S = AB = ( u cos β + v cos α ) t1 ...(ii)
Further BA = ( u cos β − v cos α ) t 2 ...(iii)
2
1
Riˆ = ( u cos θ + v ) tiˆ + ut sin θ − gt 2 ˆj t1 + t 2 = t ..(iv)
2 Solving these equations after proper substitution,
Compating the coefficients of iˆ and ĵ ,we obtain we get u = 8m / s and β = 120 .
R = ( u cos θ + v ) t ...(i) and B B
1 2 u
ut sin θ − gt = 0 ...(ii) From eq.(ii), β
2
α α
2u sin θ u
we find t = . Finally, substituting v β v
g
2u sin θ
t= eq.(i), we have A A
g
191
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
r dy vP = ai + bj ; VA = 100i
32. Given that v br = v y = = u ..(i)
dt VPA = ( a − 100 ) i + ( b − 100 ) j ; a = 100 ;
r dx 2v0
v br = v x = = y ...(ii) vB = −100i ; vP = 200i + bj
dt c
200 200 200
From Eq.(i) and (ii) we have, tan 60 = :B = ; VP = 100i − j
dy uc 2 ucx B 3 3
= y = 37. For collision
dx 2v0 y v0
T1 > T2 sin α > sin β α >β
c cv cv
At y = , x = 0 or x net = 2x = 0 x1 = x 2 t cos α = ( t − T ) cos β
2 4u 2u
y1 = y2
1 2 1
v br
( U sin α ) t −
gt = U sin β ( t − T ) − g ( t − T )
2
C y
2 2
y 38. Consider the motion of particle along the axes
y x shown in figure. We have
30m P
x u x = u, ax = − g sin 600
10m u y = 0, a y = − g cos 600
33.
A
(a) As the particle strikes the plane OB
B
5m perpendicularly, ∴ vx = 0 as vx = ux + ax t
Drift – A : Vr × t ⇒ 30 = Vr × 120
u 10 3
;Vr = 1/ 4 m / s t= 0
= = 2s
or 0 = u − g sin 600 t ⇒ g sin 60
10 ×
3
5
Drift B : 25 = ( vr − vbr ) × t ; vbx = m / sec 2
24 (b) Initial velocity along y-axis is zero. The velocity
P
Q along y-axis after 2 s; v y = u y + a y t
1
= 0 − g cos 600 × 2 = −10 × × 2 = −10m / s
2
O
r OP (c) We have, vx = u x + 2ax s
2 2
34.
r PQ Since vx = 0 and
r OQ
ax = g sin 600 , u = 10 3m / s
rOQ = rPQ + rOP ; vOQ = vPQ + vOP ; aOQ = o + aOP ∴ 0 = (10 3) 2 − 2 × g sin 600 × (OQ )
100 10 2 × 3
= 120 sec OQ = = 10 3m
35. time to cross river = 5 × sin 37 × 5 or 3
18 2 × 10 ×
2
5
Drift covered = ( 2 + 5 × cos 37 ) × × 120 = 200 1
18 Distance PO = 0 + g sin 300 × (2) 2
2
Distance covered by walk = 100 meters and time
1 1
taken = 20seconds And similarly for swimmer B = × 10 × × 4 = 10m
N 2 2
vPA Therefore height h of point P,
1
vA
E
h = PQ sin 300 = 10 × = 5m
2
(d) Distance PQ = PO 2 + OQ 2
36.
vB = PQ = (10) 2 + (10 3)2 = 20m
b 60° (39,40,41) Conceptual
vPB
200
192
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
dx t t B
42. = 1− 1− = 0 t = 2s Y
dt 2 2 v
t 2 α
x=t− x = 1m w vR X
4
total distance = 2m.
2
Average speed Vav = = 0.5 m / s . A
Resultant velocity of boatman should be along AB
24 r uur
43. (a, b, c, d) consider the vertical motion of the particle or perpendicular to AB components of v and v R
after entering the compartment. Let it reach the floor
in time ‘t’ should be zero. Hence v cos α = v R
3 −1
3.2 = (10) t 2
1
2
or t = 0.8 s or ( 2v 0 ) cos α = v0 1 + w y
Due to the velocity component ‘u’, which remain Therefore, resultant velocity along AB is
constant, it covers a distance of 2.4 m in 0.8 s
v y = v sin α or
2.4m 16 m
u= = 3m / s Also v = = 20 m / s
{ ( )}
2
0.8 s 0.8 ( 2v0 ) 4w 2 − w + 3 −1 y
= ( 2v 0 ) sin α =
dy
v 2 sin 2 α 2 2 sin 2 β 4
44. = U sin 2 α = sin 2 β dt 2w
{ ( )}
2g 3 g 3 v 2
3 = 0 4w 2 − w + 3 − 1 y
0 ≤ sin 2 α ≤ 1 0 ≤ sin 2 β ≤ 1 β ≤ sin −1 w
4 dy v0
∫ ∫ dt
w t
s i n 2α =
{ ( )}
2
U
RA = or 0 2 w 0
g 4w 2 − w + 3 −1 y
3sin2 α = 4sin2β R max a t α =
T
wπ
4 t=
3(1− cos2α ) = 8sin2β 1 3 6 3 − 1 v0
Solving this,we get ( )
β = sin − 1
2 8
47. When the boatman reaches the opposite bank
RA ≠ H max.B
y=w or v R = 3v 0 or v cos α = v R
45. Let u = the speed of projection, θ1 and θ2 = the
ur ur Hence, ( 2v 0 ) cos α = 3v0
angles of projection. Let r1 and r2 be the position
ur Hence resultant velocity will be
v = vsin α = ( 2v 0 ) sin 300 , v y = v 0 .
vectors of the two particles in a ground frame . r1
$ 1 2 $
= (u cos θ1 ) ; t i + ( u sinθ1 ) t − gt j
Passage-2. (48 & 49)
2 Two important aspects to be noticed in this problem
are : (1) Velocity of projection of ball is relative to
ur $ + ( u sinθ ) t − 1 gt 2 $j man in motion
r2 = (u cos θ2 ) t i 2
2
(2) Ball clears the hoop when it is at the topmost
The position vector of one particle with respect to point
r ur ur ur ur ur ur ur ur
another is r = r1 − r2 = u ( cos θ1 − cos θ 2 ) t i $ V ball , man = V ball − V man ; V ball = V ball , man + V man
Now we apply the above relation to x- as well as
$
+ u ( sin θ1 − sin θ 2 ) t j = at $
i + bt $
j = a $
i + b $
j t , y-component of velocity. If ball is projected with
where a and b are constants. velocity v0 and angle θ , then x-component of
ur
COMPREHENSION TYPE V ball = (v0 cos θ + 10)m / s y-component of
uur ur
3 −1 r ball = ( v0 sin θ ) m / s . Since vertical component
46. Given R v = v 0 1 + y and v = 2v0 V
w of ball’s velocity is unaffected by horizontal motion
of car, we can use formula for time of flight.
(12.5sin θ )2 5 × (2 × 10)
i.e., = 5m ; or sin 2 θ =
2g 12.5 × 12.5
193
MOTION IN A PLANE JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI
4 3 As motion is uniform circular motion velocity is
or sin θ = and cos θ = always perpendicular to accelaration.
5 5 (59 , 60)
4 x = at ⇒ Vx = a ⇒ ax = 0
and v0 sin θ = (12.5) × = 10m / s
5 y = at (1 − α t ) ⇒ Vy = a − a 2α t ⇒ a y = −2α a
2v0 sin θ
Time taken to reach maximum height = x x x 2α
g Again y = a 1 − .α ⇒ y = x−
2 × 10 a a
= = 2 seconds ur r a
If V and a makes an angle 450 with each other
10 ur
Horizontal distance of loop from point of projection V must be making an angle 450 with X- a x i s
= (12.5 cos θ + 10) × 1 = 17.5 m 1
Passage-3. So Vx = V y ⇒ a = a − 2 aα t0 ⇒ t0 =
α
50. Velocity along tralley is zero i.e., Vx = U x + a x t uur
U cos θ (
Displacement ∆x = .1$i + .4 $j m
ur
)
0 = U cos θ − ( g sin β ) t ; t = . V avg = Average velocity
g sin β
.1$i + .4 $j
( )
x
y m / sec = 5 $i + 20 $j m / sec
.02
uuuur
51. So Vavg = 425 m / sec = 20.6 m
β
20
a x = −g sin β U x = U cos θ θ = tan −1 = tan −1 4
5
a y = −g cos β Vy = V sin θ ( 61,62,63 )
r
2Vy 2Vsin θ r = 2t $i + 5t $j + 4ω sin ωt k$
= = ur r
⇒ V = 2 i$ + 5 $j + 4sin ωt k$ ⇒ a = −4ω2 sinωtk$
Time of flight T
ay g cos β
1 We can earliy acc/ is varify with magnitude but along
52. Distance moved by shell = ( Vo cos θ ) t + g sin β t
2
a constant direction. As velocity is not changing
2 along x axis and y axis , we can early realise a vector
2Usin θ 2U sin θ
2
parallel to XY plane which is ⊥r to velocity . say
t= on solving x = cos (θ − β ) ur ur ur ur ur
g cos β g cos 2 β (
x . $i + y $j = A Hence V . A = 0 for V ⊥ A )
53. Vx = U x ; ( ( a x ) cos β ) t = U cos (θ + β ) The above equation gives are solution
U cos (θ + β ) x = 5 and y = −2 or x = 10 and y = −4 and so
g sin β cos β t = U cos (θ + β ) ; t = on ( Realise the above solution in 3D and you will
g sin β cos β get a clear idea).
(54,55) Conceptual MATRIX MATCH
(56,57,58) 64. The initial relative velocity of A w.r.t B is
x = a sin ωt ⇒ Vx = aω cos ωt ⇒ a x = aω 2 sin ωt u AB = 8j − 8i m / s , u AB = 8 2m / s
y = a (1 − cos ωt ) ⇒ Vy = aω sin ωt a AB = ( −2i + 2j) m / s , a AB = 2 2m / s 2
⇒ a y = aω 2 cos ωt Since B observes initial velocity and constant
acceleration of A in opposite directions. Hence B
Again x 2 + ( y − a ) = a 2
2
observes A moving along a straight line From
So the motion is a circular motion with centre at frame of B
( 0, a) and radius of ‘a’. We can also realise that u AB
Hence time when u AB = 0 in t = a = 4 sec .
AB
speed at any instant V = V x2 + V y2 = aω = The distance between A & B when u AB = 0
Constant. So distance travelled in a time T = aωT
u 2AB
g= = 16 2m
2a AB
194
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS -I
- VOL - VI MOTION IN A PLANE
The time when both are at same position is 73. u t
2u
T = AB = 8sec θ
a AB 6m
Magnitude of relative velocity when they are at 18.75m
15m
same position in u AB = 8 2m .
T
65. v R = ai + bj ; v RM = vR − vM u cos θ = 12.6 = u cos θ t ⇒ t = 0.5s
(66,67) Conceptual 1
INTEGER TYPE 3.75 = u sin θ t − gt 2
2
AC a cos θ 32 ×
2
1 1 1
2
68. t = = Q v cos θ = v1 , t = 5 = 2s 15
⇒ = u sin θ × − 10 ⇒ u sin θ = 10
v v 4 5
4 2 2 2
69: υ1 = υ 2 cos 300 1
−15 = 10T − 10T 2 ⇒ T 2 − 2T − 3 = 0 ⇒ T = 3s
3 2
⇒ 100 3 = υ2 × ⇒ υ2 = 200m / s 1 2
2 74. y = u sin α .t − gt
d 500 2
∴ t0 = = = 5s V
υ sin 30 0
200 ×
1 (w.r.t. Trolley)
2 60°
75. 10m/s
υ1 υ2
vx = v cos 600 = 2 15m / s ; ∴ v = 4 15m / s
υ2sin30° cos30°
30° 3
30° ∴ v y = v sin 600 = 4 15 = 2 45m / s
u2 2
70. Acceleration of bee = → (1)
R v y2 4 × 45
H max = = = 9m
u
2 2g 20
2
76. The horizontal and vertical components of the
At highest postion, R = 2 = u → ( 2 ) velocity are the same, let it be u = v cos 450 .
B(d,l + 1)
g 2g y v
From (1) & (2) (o,l) 1
abee = 2g ∴ x = 2 l
(u = projection speed of rock) C
O
71. v = 3u; v + v = ( 3u ) ; u + 2 gh = au
2 2 2 2 2 (d, O) (3dox)
x u
u2
4 From A to B : 1 = ⇒ u2 = 2g
2g
d g d g d2
At B : d = ut1 ⇒ t1 = ; 1 = ut1 − t12 = u −
h u 2 u 2 u2
2 gh
vx u = = 49 g d2 gd 2
2
8 ⇒1= d − ⇒1= d −
v 2 u2 4g
vy ⇒ 4 = 4d = d ⇒ d − 4d + 4 = 0 ⇒ d = 2m
2 2
u = 7 m/s = 3.5 x; x = 2 3d
3d = ut2 ⇒ 1t2 =
2V0 sin (θ − α ) 2 × 3 3 sin ( 60 − 30 ) u
72. T = = 1 2 3d g 9d 2 9 gd 2
g cos α 10 cos 30 −1 = ut2 − gt2 = −u. − = 3d −
1 2 4 2 42 4g
2 ×3 3 × 2
2 = 0.6 = 0.1x ; x = 6 9d 9
=
3 = 3d − = 3 × 2 − × 4 = 6 − 9 = −3
10 × 4g 4
2
⇒ l = 3m .
195
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
NEWTONS LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION
& UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø Linear momentum is a vector.It has the same
SYNOPSIS
direction as the direction of velocity of the body.
SI unit: kg m s-1 , CGS unit: g cm s-1
Inertia : Ø D.F: MLT-1
Ø It is the inability of a body to change its state of Change in momentum of a body in
rest or of uniform motion or its direction by itself.
Ø Mass is a measure of inertia in translatory motion
different cases
Ø Consider a body of mass m moving with velocity
Ø Heavier the mass, larger the inertia & vice–versa. ur r
Types of inertia: There are three types of inertia. vi and momentum Pi . Due to a collision (or) due
(i) Inertia of rest (ii) Inertia of motion and (iii)Inertia to the action of a force on it suppose its velocity
of direction. uur r
changes to v f and momentum changes to Pf in a
Ø Inertia of rest: It is the inability of a body to change
its state of rest by itself . small time interval Dt .
r r r
Ex:When a bus is at rest and starts suddenly moving Change in momentum of body = DP = Pf - Pi
forward the passengers inside it will fall back.
Inertia of motion: It is the inability of a body to Where Pi = initial momentum
change its state of uniform motion by itself. Pf = final momentum
Ex: Passengers in a moving bus fall forward, when
r uur ur
brakes are applied suddenly. DP = mv f - mvi
Inertia of direction: It is the inability of a body to r r r
change its direction of motion by itself . DP = Pf - Pi = Pf2 + Pi 2 - 2 Pf Pi cos q
Ex:When a bus takes a turn, passengers in it experience r r
an outward force. where q = angle between Pf and Pi
Ø A person sitting in a moving train, throws a coin Consider a body of mass ‘m’ moving
vertically upwards, then r
with velocity ‘ v ’along a straight line
i) it falls behind him, if the train is accelerating
ii) it falls infront of him, if the train is retarding Ø Case (i) : If it hits a wall and comes to rest,
iii) it falls into the hand of the person, if the train is Change in momentum of the body
moving with uniform velocity.
iv) It falls into the hand of the person if the train is at
rest
m
Newton's First Law ( law of Inertia) v
Ø Every body continues to be in its state of rest (or)
uniform motion in a straight line unless it is acted
upon by a net external force to change its state
Ø ur r r r
D P = Pf - Pi = 0 - (mv ) iˆ
It defines inertia,force and mechanical equilibrium.
Ø If the net external force on an object is zero , then
r ur
= -mviˆ ; DP = mv , along the normal and
acceleration of object is zero.
Linear momentum :
Ø Linear momentum is the product of the mass of a away from the wall.
r r Ø Case(ii) : If the body rebounds with same speed
body and its velocity. p = mv
‘ v ’ then q = 1800
NARAYANAGROUP 1
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Ø Case(v) : In the above case if q is the angle made
ur
with wall then D P = 2 mv sin q , along the nor-
m v
mal and away from the wall.
Ø Case(vi) : Projectile motion :
v
ur r r
y
r r r
D P = Pf - Pi = éê-(mv ) iˆùú - éê(mv )iˆùú = -(2mv )iˆ
ë û ë û r
ur u
\ D P = 2mv , along the normal and away from
the wall.
Ø Case (iii) : If the body hits a rigid wall normally u sinθ
with speed v1 and rebounds with speed v2 then
θ = 180 0 , θ ucos θ
x
θ
u cosθ r
usinθ u
a)In case of projectile motion the change in
m v1 momentum of a body between highest point and
point of projection is
r
v2 Pi = ( mu cos θ ) iˆ + ( mu sin θ ) ˆj
uur uuur
ur r r Pf = ( mu cos θ ) iˆ + 0 , ∆P = - ( mu sin θ ) ˆj
D P = P f - Pi b) The change in momentum of the projectile be-
r r
= − ( mv2 ) iˆ − ( mv1 ) iˆ , tween the striking point and point of projection is
ur
ur Pi = ( mu cos θ ) iˆ + ( mu sin θ ) ˆj
DP = m (v2 + v1 ) , along the normal and a w a y uur
from the wall. Pf = ( mu cos θ ) iˆ − ( mu sin θ ) ˆj
Ø Case (iv) : A body of mass ‘m’ moving with speed uuur
‘ v ’ hits a rigid wall at an angle of incidence q and ∆P = - ( 2mu sinθ ) ˆj
rebounds with same speed ‘ v ’ Ø A particle of mass ‘m’ is moving uniformly with a
ur speed ‘ v ’ along a circular path of radius ‘r’. As it
∆P ur
is along the normal,away from the wall
moves from a point A to another point B, such that
∆ P x = − mv cos θ i − mv cos θ i
ur the arc AB subtends an angle θ at the centre, then
∆ P y = mv sin θ j − mv sin θ j the magnitude of change in momentum is 2 m v sin(θ /
ur ur ur
∆ P = ∆ P x + ∆ P y = 2mv cos θ ( −i ) 2) and is directed towards the centre of the circle.
ur
D P = 2mv cos q Pf
B
r
θ
A
Pi
mv cos θ mv cos θ Newton's second law:
Ø The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly
proportional to the resultant (or) net external force
mv sin θ acting on the body and takes place along the
direction of force.
mv sin θ
2 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
ur r
ur ( )
Pf
dp ur d mv B r r r
Ø F net = (or) F net = F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
dt dt r r r
Ø In a system if only velocity changes and mass remain
r
θ (
F1 = − F2 + F3 )
r
ur r F + F = F1
2 2
dv 2 3
constant , F net = m = ma A
Pi
dt
Ø In a system, if only mass changes and velocity Obviously if F1 is removed then the mass will have
ur r dm F22 + F32 F1
remians constant F net = v acceleration, a =
m
( or ) a =
m
dt
Ø Force is a vector and the acceleration produced in W.E-3:A body of mass m=3.513 kg is moving along
the body is in the direction of net force, the x-axis with a speed of 5ms-1.The magnitude
Ø SI unit : newton (N). CGS unit :dyne. of its momentum is recorded as (AIEEE - 2008)
Sol. m=3.513kg,v=5ms-1 momentum,
Ø One newton = 105 dyne.
p = mv=3.513×5 =17.565kgms-1
Ø D.F=MLT-2 W.E-4:A very flexible chain of length L and mass
Gravitational units of force: Kilogram weight M is vertically suspended with its lower end
(kg wt) and gram weight (gm wt); 1 kg.wt = 9.8 just touching the table. If it is released so that
N, 1 gm.wt= 980 dyne. each link strikes the table and comes to rest.
Ø A metallic plate of mass ‘M’ is kept held in mid air What force the chain will exert on the table
by firing ‘n’ bullets in ‘t’ seconds each of mass ‘m’ at the moment ‘y’ part of length falls on the
with a velocity ‘v’ from below. table ?
(a) If the bullet falls dead after hitting the plate then Sol. Since chain is uniform , the mass of ‘y’ part of the
M
mnv chain will be L y . When this part reaches the
= Mg
t table, its total force exerted must be equal to the
(b) If the bullet rebounds after hitting the plate with weight of y part resting on table + Force due to the
2m n v momentum imparted
same velocity then = Mg M
t dy 2 gy Mg M
F = yg + L
M = y + v. 2 gy
W.E-1: A force produces an acceleration16 ms −2 L dt L L
dy
Q = v =
in a mass 0.5 kg and an acceleration 4 ms −2 Mg M My
y+ 2 gy . 2 gy = 3 g
dt L L L
in an unknown mass when applied separately.
W.E-5: A body of mass 8kg is moved by a force
If both the masses are tied together, what will
F =(3x)N, where x is the distance covered.
be the acceleration under same force?
Initial position is x = 2 m and final position
Sol. Force F=ma=0.5×16=8Ν when both masses are
joined and same force acts, acceleration is given is x =10m. If initially the body is at rest, find
the final speed. [2014E]
F 8
by a =
1
= = 3.2ms −2 dv dv dx
m + m 0.5 + (8 / 4)
1
Sol: F=ma ⇒ F=m ⇒ 3 x =m
dt dx dt
W.E-2:When the forces F1 , F2 , F3 are acting on a
dv
3x = 8 v ⇒ 3xdx = 8vdv
particle of mass m such that F2 and F3 are dx
mutually perpendicular, then the particle re- 10 v 10 v
2 2
main stationary. If the force F1 is now removed, ∫
2 0
∫
3 xdx = 8 vdv ⇒ 3 x = 8 v
2 2 2 0
then find the acceleration of the particle .
Sol. If mass 'm' is stationary under three forces, 3 × 96
3[100-4]=8 v ⇒ v = = 36 ⇒ v =6ms-1
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 3
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
W.E-6:Sum of magnitudes of the two forces acting time.
at a point is 16 N. If their resultant is normal v t
F F0 − bt dv F0 − bt ⇒ dv = F0 e −bt dt
to the smaller force, and has a magnitude 8N, a= = e ⇒
m m
= e
dt m
∫0 ∫0 m
then the forces are ( 2012E)
t 0
Sol. F1 + F2 = 16 ——(1) Resultant force is perpen- F 1 F 1
⇒ v = 0 e −bt = 0 e− bt
dicular to F1, then F22 − F12 = F 2 m −b 0 m b t
F2 2 − F12 = 82 ⇒ ( F2 − F1 )( F2 + F1 ) = 64 =
mb
(
F0 0 − bt
e −e ) =
F0
mb
( )
1 − e −bt
( F2 − F1 ) ×16 = 64 ————(2) So, velocity increases continuously and attains a
F
Solving(1) &(2),we get F1 = 6 N , F2 = 10 N maximum value, vmax = 0 Ans: 3
mb
ur br W.E-9:A bus moving on a level road with a velocity
W.E-7:A particle is at rest at x=a. A force F = − 2 i
x v can be stopped at a distance of x , by the
begins to act on the particle. The particle starts application of a retarding force F. The load
its motion, towards the origin, along X–axis. on the bus is increased by 25% by boarding
Find the velocity of the particle, when it the passengers. Now, if the bus is moving with
reaches a distance x from the origin. the same speed and if the same retarding force
b d b is applied, the distance travelled by the bus
Sol. F = − ⇒ ( p) = − 2
x 2
dt x before it stops is [2014E]
d b dv dx b Sol :By using equations of motion v - u2 = 2as
2
( mv) = − 2 ⇒ m = − 2
dt x dx dt x F F
v 2 − u 2 = −2 s −u 2 = −2 s
b b m m
mv dv = − 2
dx ⇒ vdv = − 2 dx
x mx Fs 2Fs m1 s1
v x
b v2 b 1
x u2 = 2 ⇒ m= 2 ⇒m∝s ⇒ m = s
∫ v dv =∫ −
0 a mx 2
dx ⇒ =
2 m x a
m u
Given s1 = x ,m1 = m, and
2 2
b 1 1
2
25 m 5m
v
= −
2 m x a ∴v =
2b a − x
m2 = m + ( m) = m + =
m xa 100 4 4
m x 5x
⇒ 5m / 4 = s ⇒ s2 = = (1.25x ) m
W.E-8:A particle of mass m is at rest at the origin
at time t=0. It is subjected to a force 2 4
F(t)= F0 e − bt in the X-direction. Its speed V(t) Applications of variable mass :
is depicted by which of the following curves. Ø When a machine gun fires ‘n’ bullets each of mass
(AIEEE-2012) ‘m’ with a velocity v in a time interval ‘t’ then
nmv
F0 F0b force needed to hold the gun steadily is F =
t
mb m Ø When a jet of liquid coming out of a pipe strikes a
wall normally and falls dead , then force exerted
1) v(t) 2) v(t) by the jet of liquid on the wall is F=Adv2 A = Area
t t of cross section of the pipe v = Velocity of jet d =
density of the liquid
F0b F0 Ø If the liquid bounces back with the same velocity
m mb then the force exerted by the liquid on the wall is
F = 2 Adv 2
3) v(t) 4) v(t) Ø If the liquid bounces back with velocity v ' then
t t the force exerted on the wall is F = Adv(v + v′)
Sol: As the force is exponentially decreasing, its Ø When a jet of liquid strikes a wall by making an
acceleration, i.e,rate of increase of velocity will angle 'θ ' with the wall with a velocity ‘ v ’ and
decrease with time.Thus, the graph of velocity will rebounds with same velocity then force exerted by
be an increasing curve with decreasing slope with the water jet on wall is F = 2 Adv 2 sin θ
4 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø If gravel is dropped on a conveyor belt at the rate W.E-12:A flat plate moves normally with a speed
dm v1 towards a horizontal jet of water of uniform
of ,extra force required to keep the belt moving area of cross section. The jet discharges water
dt at the rate of volume V per second at a speed of
dm v2 . The density of water is r . Assume that water
with constant velocity ' u ' is F = u
dt splashes along the surface of the plate at right
W.E-10:A gardener is watering plants at the rate angles to the original motion. The magnitude
0.1litre/sec using a pipe of cross- sectional area of the force acting on the plate due to the jet is
dp dm
1 cm2. What additional force he has to exert Sol. Force acting on the plate F = = ur
if he desires to increase the rate of watering dt dt
two times? dm V
Since Av2 = V ⇒ = A(v1 + v2 )ρ = (v1 + v2 ) ρ
dt v2
( Av )
2
d
Sol :F = Ad v 2 = . If rate of watering of ( ur = v1 + v2 = velocity of water coming out of jet
A
plant (A v ) is doubled, it means that the amount of w.r.t plate)
V V
water poured/sec is doubled which is possible only F = (v1 + v2 ). (v1 + v2 ) ρ = (v1 + v2 )2 ρ N
if velocity is doubled. Hence, force is to be made 4 v2 v2
times. ur
Impulse ( J ) :
∴ Additional force = 3 times initial force
Ø It is the product of impulsive force and time of act
( Av )
2
ion that produces a finite change in momentum of
= 3 Adv 2
=3 d body.
A
Ø J=Ft = m(v-u) = change in momentum. SI unit: Ns
3 × 0.1× 0.1×103 (or)K g -m s-1; DF: MLT-1
= −4
= 3 ×105 N Ø It is a vector directed along the force
10
Ø change in momentum and Impulse are always in
W.E-11: A liquid of density ρ flows along a the same direction.
horizontal pipe of uniform cross – section A Ø For constant force, J=Ft,
with a velocity v through a right angled bend Ø Impulsive force is a variable, then
as shown in Fig. What force has to be exerted ur
ur d p t2
at the bend to hold the pipe in equilibrium? F= J = ∫ Fdt
Sol :Change in momentum of mass ∆m of liquid as it dt , t1
passes through the bend Ø The area bounded by the force-time graph
measures Impulse.
v
45° F
t1 t2
dP = Pf − Pi = 2d ∆mv ∆t
F=
dP
dt
= 2 v ( )
dm
dt
; [ as dm = ρ AdL ]
Application of Impulse :
a) shock absorbers are used in vehicles to reduce
the magnitude of impulsive force.
( ρ . AdL ) ;
F = 2v [ as dL / dt = v] b) A cricketer lowers his hands, while catching the
ball to reduce the impulsive force.
dt
F = 2 ρ Av 2
NARAYANAGROUP 5
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
W.E-13:Find the impulse due to the force W.E-16:A bullet is fired from a gun. The force on
r
F = ai$ + bt $j , where a=2 N and b=4 Ns-1 if this a bullet is, F = 600 − 2 × 105 t newton. The
force acts from ti=0 to tf=0.3s force reduces to zero just when the bullet
tf
ur 0.3 leaves barrel.Find the impulse imparted to the
Sol: J = Fdt = (ai$ + bt $j )dt
∫ ti
∫ 0
bullet.
Sol. F = 600 – 2 × 105 t , F becomes zero as soon as
0.3 the bullet leaves the barrel.
t2
0.3 0.3
J = a ∫ dt $i + b ∫ t dt $j = a [ t ]0 $i + b $j
0.3
0 = 600 – 2 × 105 t ⇒ 600 = 2 × 105 t
0 0 2 0 t
( 0.3) × $j = $
2
t = 3 × 10–3 s ⇒ Impulse = ∫ Fdt
= 2 × 0.3 × $i + 4 × 0.6i + 0.18 $j NSec 0
2 3×10 −3
t2
t
W.E-14:A ball falling with velocity
∫ (600 − 2 × 10 t ) = 600t − 2 × 105
5
= dt
r 2 0
v i = (−0.65$i − 0.35 $j ) ms-1 is subjected to a net
0
= 600 × 3 × 10–3 – 105 × 9 × 10–6 = 0.9Ns
r
(
impulse I = 0.6$i + 0.18 $j Ns. If the ball has ) Equilibrium: The necessary and sufficient
conditions for the translational equilibrium of the
a mass of 0.275kg, calculate its velocity rigid body.
immediately following the impulse
r ∑ F = 0 ; ∑ Fx = 0 , ∑ Fy = 0, ∑ Fz = 0 For
r r r r r I rotational equilibrium
Sol: mv f − mvi = I ; v f = vi +
m ∑ τ = 0 ; ∑ τ x = 0 , ∑ τ y = 0, ∑ τ z = 0
r 0.6iˆ + 0.18 ˆj r
v f = −0.65iˆ − 0.35 ˆj +
0.275 Ø As for, F = 0 mar = 0 (or) m ( dv / dt ) = 0
r
v f = −0.65iˆ − 0.35 ˆj + 2.18iˆ + 0.655 ˆj
= 0 (or) vr =constant or zero
dv
r as m ± 0,
(
v f = 1.53iˆ + 0.305 ˆj m s − 1 ) dt
W.E-15:A body of mass 2kg has an initial speed 5 Ø If a body is in translatory equilibrium it will be either
at rest or in uniform motion.If it is at rest, the
ms −1 . A force acts on it for some time in the equilibrium is called static,otherwise dynamic.
direction of motion. The force–time graph is Ø If ‘ n ’coplanar forces of equal magnitudes acting
shown in figure. Find the final speed of the body simultaneously on a particle at a point, with the angle
between any two adjacent forces is ‘ θ ’ and keep
F(N)
360
it in equilibrium, then θ =
A B
n
4
C D
Lami’s Theorem :
2.5 Ø If an object O is in equilibrium under three
F G H E uur uur uur
O 2 4 4.5 6.5
concurrent forces F1 , F2 and F3 as shown in
t → (sec) F1 F F
figure. Then, = 2 = 3
1 sin α sin β sin γ
Sol. Area of OAF = × 2 × 4 = 4
2
Area of ABG F = 2 × 4 = 8 F2
1
Area of BGHC = ( 4 + 2.5) × 0.5 = 1.625
2
Area of CDEH = 2 × 2.5 = 5
Total area under F-t graph = Change in momentum α γ
⇒ m(v – u) = 18.625 F1
β
18.625
⇒ v= + 5 = 14.25ms −1 F3
2
6 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø If the bob of simple pendulum is held at rest by WE-18:A mass M is suspended by a weightless
applying a horizontal force ‘F’ as shown in fig string. The horizontal force required to hold
the mass at 600 with the vertical is (2013E)
Sol :
θ
l
T T cos θ θ l T cosθ
θ T θ
T sin θ T sin θ
F F
X X
mg Mg
If body is in equilibrium F = T sin θ - - - - - (1)
T sin θ = F , T cosθ = mg , Mg = T cos θ - - - - - (2)
Dividing Eq.(1) and Eq.(2)
F = mg tan θ , F 2 + (m g ) = T
2
F T sin θ
= ; F = Mg tan θ
x l l −x 2 2
Mg T cos θ
= =
F T mg
F = Mg tan 600 ; F = 3Mg
WE-17:A mass of 3kg is suspended by a rope of W.E.19:A chain of mass 'm' is attached at two
length 2m from the ceiling. A force of 40N in points A and B of two fixed walls as shown in
the horizontal direction is applied at midpoint the figure. Find the tension in the chain near
P of the rope as shown. What is the angle the the walls at point A and at the mid point C.
rope makes with the vertical in equilibrium
and the tension in part of string attached to A B
the ceiling? (Neglect the mass of the rope, θ θ
g = 10m/s2)
Sol :Resolving the tension T1 into two mutually
perpendicular components, we have C
Sol.
T1 cos θ = W = 30 N T1 sin θ = 40 N i) At point A
T sin θ T sin θ
4 4
∴ tan θ = (or) θ = tan −1 = 530
3 3 2T sin θ
T T
T1cos? θ θ
T1 T cos θ θ T cos θ
1m
θ θ θ T cos θ
T cos θ
T1sin? P
T 40 N
1m 2 1
2T sin θ = mg ⇒ T = mg cos ecθ
2
w ii) Tension along horizontal direction is same ev-
erywhere
Q(no external force is acting on it in horizontal di-
30 N rection.)
At point C
The tension in part of string attached to the ceiling
mg cos θ mg cot θ
T1 = W 2 + F 2 = 302 + 402 = 50 N T 1 = T cosθ = =
2sin θ 2
NARAYANAGROUP 7
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Newton's third law: Ø When the body lies on a horizontal surface N = mg
Ø For every action there is always an equal and N
opposite reaction
Ø Action and reaction do not act on the same body
and they act on different bodies at same instant of
time
Ø Action and reaction, known as pair of forces, are
equal in magnitude and opposite in directions acting mg
on different bodies in interaction. So they never
cancel each other Ø When the body lies on an inclined surface
Ø Newton’s third law is not applicable to pseudo N = mg cos ? .
forces. N
Ø Newton’s third law defines nature of force and gives
the law of conservation of linear momentum.
Examples:
Ø When we walk on a road we push the road θ mg sinθ
mg cosθ mg
backwards and road applies equal (in magnitude) θ
and opposite force on us, so that we can move Free Body Diagram:- When several bodies
forward. are connected by strings, springs, surfaces of
Ø When we swim on water we push water backward contact, then all the forces acting on a body are
and water applies equal (in magnitude) and opposite
considered and sketched on the body under
force on us,so that we can move forward.
Ø A bird is in a wire cage hanging from a spring consideration by just isolating it . Then the diagram
balance. When the bird starts flying in the cage, so formed is called Free Body Diagram (FBD).
the reading of the balance decreases. Some examples:
Ø If the bird is in a closed cage (or) air tight cage and i) A block is placed on a table and the table is kept
it hovers in the cage the reading of the spring on earth.Assuming no other body in the universe
balance does not change. exerts any force on the system,make the FBD of
Ø In the closed cage if the bird accelerates upward block and table.
the reading of the balance is R = Wbird + ma m1
Limitations of newton’s third law:-
m2
Ø Newton’s third law is not strictly applicable for the
interaction between two bodies separated by large
distances, of the order of astronomical units.
Ø It does not apply strictly when the objects move
with velocity nearer to that of light FBD of block, N1 = m1 g
Ø It does not apply where the gravitational field is
FBD of table
strong.
Normal reaction/force : Normal force acts N 2 = N1 + m2 g = m1 g + m2 g = ( m1 + m2 ) g
perpendicular to the surfaces in contact when one N1
body tries to press on the surface of the second
m1
body.In this way second body tries to push
away the first body.
N1
m1g
N2
A m2g
ii) A block of mass M is suspended from the ceiling
A A by means of a uniform string of mass m.Find the
A N
tension in the string at points A,B and C. B is the
B B B B mid point of string. Also find the tensions at A,B
and C if the mass of string is negligible or it is
massless.
8 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
d) Equation of motion of mass ‘m’ moving with
A
acceleration ‘a’ relative to an observer in an inertial
r
frame is ∑ Freal = ma
B m
Examples:
1) A lift at rest,
C
2) Lift moving up(or)down with constant velocity,
3) Car moving with constant velocity on a straight
M road.
Real Force : Force acting on an object due to
Tension at any point will be weight of the part its interaction with another object is called a real
below it. force.
Ex: Normal force, Tension, weight, spring force,
m
So, TA = ( M + m) g,TB = + M g,TC = Mg .
muscular force etc.
2 a) All fundamental forces of nature are real.
b) Real forces form action, reaction pair.
Now if the string is massless: m=0 then
Non-Inertial frames :
TA = TB = TC = Mg . So in a massless string, a) Frames of reference in which Newton Laws are
tension is the same at every point. not applicable are called non-inertial frames.
b) Accelerated frames move with either uniform
(iii) Find the tension in the massless string
acceleration or non uniform acceleration.
connected to the block accelerating upward. c) All the accelerated and rotating frames are non-
T inertial frames of reference.
a d) Examples:
T
m m 1) Accelerating car on a road.
2) Merry go round.
mg mg 3) Artificial satellite around the earth.
Net force : Pseudo force :
a) In non-inertial frame Newton’s second law is
Fnet = T − mg Now apply Fnet = ma not applicable. In order to make Newton’s second
law applicable in non-inertial frame a pseudo force
⇒ T − mg = ma ⇒ T = mg + ma = m ( g + a )
r
is introduced.
Note: If ‘a’ is downward, then replace a with b) If a is the acceleration of a non-inertial frame,
the pseudo force acting on an object of mass m, as
-a; we get T = m ( g − a ) measured by an observer in the given non-inertial
ur r
In free fall a=g then T=0. frame is F Pseudo = −ma
Frames of Reference: i.e. Pseudo force acts on an object opposite to the
direction of acceleration of the non-inertial frame.
Ø A system of coordinate axes which defines the c) Pseudo forces exist for observers only in non-
position of a particle or an event in two or three inertial frames, such forces have no existence relative
dimensional space is called a frame of reference. to an inertial frame.
There are two types of frames of reference d) Equation of motion relative to non-inertial frame
ur ur ur
is ∑ ( F real + F Pseudo ) = ma′
a) inertial or unaccelerated frames of reference
b) non-inertial or accelerated frames of reference
Inertial frames of reference : Where a′ is the acceleration of body as measured
a) Frames of reference in which Newton’s Laws in non-inertial frame.
of motion are applicable are called inertial frame. e) Earth is an inertial frame for an observer on the
earth but it is an accelerated frame for an observer
b) Inertial frames of reference are either at rest or
at centre of earth (or) in a satellite.
move with uniform velocity with respect to a fixed
imaginary axis. Examples : (i) Centrifugal force and deflection
of pendulum relative to accelerating car.(ii) Gain or
c) In inertial frame, acceleration of a body is caused loss of weight experienced in an accelerating
by real forces. elevator.
NARAYANAGROUP 9
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Apparent weight of a body in a moving elevator Case (iv) : If lift is in freely falling, Then a=g ,
Weight of a body on a surface comes due to the So mg − R = mg i.e., R = 0 . So, Wapp = 0
reaction of a supporting surface, i.e.,Apparent
weight of a body in a lift v v
Wapp = Reaction of supporting surface. Consider Satellite
a=g
a=g
a person standing on a spring balance , or in a lift.
The following situations are possible: Planet
Case(i) :If lift is at rest or moving with constant a=g
velocity then the person will be in translatory
( a) (b) (c)
equilibrium. So, R = mg
( a ) Freely falling lift
∴ Wapp = mg [as Wapp = R ]
( b ) Satellite motion
or Wapp = W0 [as W0 = mg = true weight] ( c ) Projectile motion
i.e., apparent weight of a freely falling body is zero.
R R R Ø This is why the apparent weight of a body is zero,
a
or body is weightless if it is in a (i) lift whose cable
a
has broken, (ii) orbiting satellite.
W.E.20-: A mass of 1kg attached to one end of a
70 kg 80 kg 60 kg string is first lifted up with an acceleration
mg mg mg 4.9m/s 2 and then lowered with same
(a) (b) (c) acceleration. What is the ratio of tension in
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be string in two cases.
equal to true weight. Sol :When mass is lifted up with acceleration 4.9m/s2
Case(ii) : If lift is accelerated up or retarding down
with acceleration a from Newton's II law we have T1 = m( g + a) =1 (9.8 + 4.9)=14.7N
R − mg = ma or R = m ( g + a ) When mass is lowered with same acceleration
T2 = m( g − a) =1(9.8 – 4.9)=4.9 N
or Wapp = m ( g + a )
T1 14.7
a a ∴ = = 3 :1
= mg 1 + = W0 1 + or Wapp >W0 T2 4.9
g g
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be W.E.21:The apparent weight of a man in a lift is
more than true weight. W1 when lift moves upwards with some
Case (iii) : If lift is accelerated down or retarding acceleration and is W2
up with acceleration ‘a’ mg − R = ma i.e., when it is accelerating down with same
R = m ( g − a) acceleration. Find the true weight of the
man and acceleration of lift.
a
or Wapp = m ( g − a ) [as Wapp = R ] = mg 1 − g Sol :(a) W1 = m( g + a), W2 = m( g − a)
W1 + W2 = 2mg ⇒ W1 + W2 = 2W (QW = mg )
a
i.e., Wapp = W0 1 − Wapp <W0 W1 + W2
g =W
⇒
i.e., apparent weight (reading of balance) will be 2
lesser than true weight. W1 m( g + a) g + a
Note: If a > g ,Wapp will be negative; negative (b) W = m( g − a ) = g − a
2
weight will mean that the body is pressed against
g W1 + W2 W − W2
the roof of the lift instead of floor (as lift falls more = ⇒a = g 1
faster than the body) and so the reaction will be a W1 − W2 W1 + W2
downwards, the direction of apparent weight will
be upwards.
10 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Connecting Bodies: T2
Ø If masses are connected by strings then acceleration
of system and tension in the strings on smooth
horizontal surface are M1
T2 = T1 + M 1 g ............(2)
T M2 T1
Free body diagram for M2 M1g
T=M2a .....(1) From (1) and (2), T2 = F + (M 1 + M 2 ) g
T M2
WE.22: Three blocks connected together by strings
Free body diagram for M1 are pulled along a horizontal surface by
applying a force F. If F= 36N, What is the
F M1 T F-T=M1a ....(2) tension T2?
27kg
8kg
from (1) and (2) 1kg
T1 T2
F M 2F
a= and T = F
( M1 + M 2 ) ( M1 + M 2 ) Sol :Suppose the system slides with acceleration ‘a’.
T1 T1 T2 T2
b) F M M3 m1 = 1kg , m2 = 8kg , m3 = 27 kg
M1 2
F − T2 = m3 a , T2 − T1 = m2 a , T1 = m1a
F (M 2 + M3 ) F
a= ; T1 = Solving the above equations ,we get
M1 + M2 + M 3 (M1 + M2 + M3 )
F
M3F a=
T2 = m1 + m2 + m3
( M1 + M 2 + M 3 )
36 36
Ø If masses are connected by a string and suspended = = = 1 ms −2
1 + 8 + 27 36
from a support then tension in the string when force
F is applied downwards as shown in the figure From the above equation, T2 = F − m3 a
T2 T2 = 36 − 27 × 1 =9 N
Contact Forces : When two objects are in contact
M1 with each other, the molecules at the interface
T1 interact with each other. This interaction results in
a net force called contact force. The contact force
M2 can be resolved into two components.
(a) Normal force (N): Component of the contact
force along the normal to the interface. Normal
F
Free body diagram for M2 force is independent of nature of the surfaces in
contact.
T1
(b) Friction (f): Component of the contact force
along the tangent at the interface. Friction depends
on the roughness of the surfaces in contact. This
M2
component can be minimised by polishing the
T1 = F + M 2 g ............(1)
surfaces.
F Ø The tension and contact forces are self adjustable
M2g forces. Their magnitude and direction change when
other forces involved in a physical arrangement
Free body diagram for M1
change.
NARAYANAGROUP 11
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Ø Masses are in contact on a smooth horizontal
surface:
F
f2 f1
M1 M2 T T
T T
f1=f M2
M2 M1
(M 1 − M 2 ) g
contact force f1= f2= f = M2a Acceleration of the system, a = M1 + M 2
free body diagram forM1
2M M
Tension in the string , T = M + M g
1 2
F f2=f
M1 1 2
4M M
Thrust on the pulley , 2T = M + M g
1 2
F-f = M1a .........(1) 1 2
free body diagram for M2 r
Ø If the pulley begins to move with acceleration a
f1=f then
M2 i) If the pulley accelerates upward , then
M − M2 2M1M2
f = M2a ...........(2) anet = 1 (g + a) and Tnet = ( g + a)
M1 + M2 M1 + M2
From (1) and (2)
ii) If the pulley accelerates downward, then
F M2F
a= ; contact force, f= M − M2
(M1 + M 2 ) M1 + M 2 anet = 1 ( g − a ) and
Ø Contact forces are as shown in the figure M1 + M 2
2M 1M 2
Tnet = ( g − a)
F M1 + M 2
M1 M2 M3 Ø Thrust on the pulley when it comes downward with
4 M1 M 2
a) Acceleration of system, acceleration ‘a’ is T = ( M + M ) ( g − a)
1 2
F
a= W.E-23:The maximum tension a rope can
(M 1 + M 2 + M 3 ) withstand is 60 kg-wt.The ratio of maximum
b) Contact force between M 1 and M 2 acceleration with which two boys of masses
f = (M2+M3)a 20kg and 30kg can climb up the rope at the
same time is (2011E)
c) Contact force between M2 and M3, f 1 = M3a
Atwood’s Machine : Sol. m1 = 20kg , m2 = 30kg , T = 60kgwt = 600 N
Ø Masses M1 and M 2 ( M1 > M 2 )are tied to a string For ‘ m1 ’; T − m1 g = m1a1
, which passes over a frictionless light pulley The 600 − 20 ×10 = 20 × a1 ⇒ a1 = 20ms −2
string is light and inextensible.
For ‘ m2 ’; T − m2 g = m2 a2
600 − 30 ×10 = 30 × a2 ⇒ a2 = 10ms −2
a1 : a2 = 20:10 = 2:1
12 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E-24:Figure shows three blocks of mass ‘m’ each
hanging on a string passing over a pulley.
Calculate the tension in the string connect-
ing A to B and B to C?
Sol. Net pulling force = 2 mg – mg = mg
Total mass = m+ m + m = 3m T T
T1 T1
B a
a A Sol. we know that Normal reaction = scale reading
T2
T2 For man , T = Mg − R
mg C a
mg T
T
m R
mg g
Acceleration, a = =
3m 3
R
T2 T1 Mg
mg
For box : T = mg + R
a C a A
Mg − R = mg + R ; 2 R =(M –m)g
(60 - 30)´10
R= = 150 N
mg mg 2
W.E.26:Two unequal masses are connected on two
sides of a light string passing over a light and
smooth pulley as shown in figure. The system
Considering block A, is released from rest. The larger mass is
T1 − mg = ma ; T1 = mg + ma stopped for a moment, 1sec after the system is
g 4 set into motion. Find the time elapsed before
T1 = mg + m ⇒ T1 = mg the string is tight again . (g = 10 m/s2)
3 3
Considering block C,
mg − T2 = ma ⇒ T2 = mg − ma
mg 2
⇒ T2 = mg − = mg .
3 3
W.E-25:A man of mass 60 kg is standing on a
weighing machine kept in a box of mass 30 1kg
kg as shown in the diagram. If the man man-
ages to keep the box stationary, find the read-
ing of the weighing machine. 2kg
NARAYANAGROUP 13
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Sol. Net pulling force = 2g – 1g = 10N Mass being M 2 g − T = M 2 a and T = M 1a
pulled = 2 + 1 = 3 kg M2g
⇒a=
Acceleration of the system is a =
10
3
m / s2 Velocity ( 1 + M2 )
M
of both the blocks at t = 1 s will be M 1 M2 g
T = M 1a =
10 10 ( M1 + M 2 )
v0 = at = 3
(1) = m/s. Now, at this moment
3 Ø Acceleration and Tension in the string when bodies
velocity of 2kg block becomes zero, while that of are connected as shown in the figure if
10 M1 > M3.
1kg block is m/s upwards. Hence, string becomes
3 T2 T1
M2
tight again when displacement of 1 kg block =
displacement of 2 kg block.
1 2 1 2
v0t − gt = gt ⇒ gt 2 = v0 t T2 T1
2 2
v (10 / 3) 1 a M3 M1 a
t= 0 = = s
g 10 3
W.E.27:In the figure, if m 1 is at rest, find the relation
among m1 , m2 and m3 ? M 1 g − T1 = M 1a ; T1 − T2 = M 2 a
Sol. m1 is at rest ⇒ point B does not move, m2 and m3
move with acceleration T2 − M 3 g = M 3a
⇒a=
( M1 − M 3 ) g
( M1 + M 2 + M 3 )
A
M 3 g (2M 1 + M 2 ) M g (2M 3 + M 2 )
T2 = T1 = 1
1
T
1
M1 + M 2 + M 3 ; M1 + M2 + M3
T B
T T
Ø Masses are attached to a string passing through
m1 m2 m3
the pulley attached to the edge of an inclined plane,
acceleration of system and tension in the string if
m − m2 M2 moves down
a= 3
m 2 + m 3
g ; m3 > m2
M − M 1 sinθ
a= 2 g;
2m2 m3 g
T= m +m ; T 1 = 2T =
4m2 m3 g M1 + M 2
m2 + m3
M M (1 + sin θ )
2 3
4 1 1 T = 1 2 g
m1 g =
4 m 2 m3 g
= + (M1 + M 2 )
m2 + m3 m1 m2 m3
Ø Two blocks are connected by a string passing over
a pulley fixed at the edge of a horizontal table then
T
the acceleration of system and tension in the string
a
( M 2 > M1 ) M1 T
a
a
T
M1
θ M2
T
Thrust on the pulley : Resultant Tension =
M2 a
Tg = T 2 + T 2 + 2T 2 cos(90 − θ )
Tg = 2T 2 (1 + sin θ ) = T 2(1 + sin θ )
M2g
14 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E.28:By what acceleration the boy must go up so
T T
that 100 kg block remains stationary on the wedge. a
a
Thewedge isfixed and issm ooth.(g = 10m /s2) M2
M1
180−(α+ β)
0 kg
10
M α β
50 kg
Ø If M2 slides down then M1 moves up on smooth
m
53°
inclined planes then the acceleration of system and
tension in the string are given by, acceleration ,
Sol :For the block to remain stationary,
M 2 sin β − M 1 sin α
T = Mg sin θ = 100 × 10 × sin 53 a= g
M1 + M 2
4
= 100 × 10 × = 800N M 1 M2 g
Tension T = ( M + M ) (sin α + sin β )
5
For man ; T – mg = ma 1 2
T = m(g + a ) ⇒ 800 = 50 (10 + a ) a = 6m/s2 Resultant Tension
W.E.29:The system as shown in fig is released from TR = T 2 + T 2 + 2T 2 cos [180 − (α + β )]
rest. Calculate the tension in the strings and
force exerted by the strings on the pulley. = 2T 2 1 − cos (α + β )
Assuming pulleys and strings are massless
3 kg
Note:- If M 2 sin β = M1 sin α ⇒ a = 0
⇒ System does not accelerate
W.E.30:In the adjacent fig, masses of A, B and C
2 kg 1 kg are 1kg, 3kg and 2kg respectively. Find a)
the acceleration of the system b) tension in
Sol: T1-1g=1a — (1) the string (g = 10m/s2)
T2-T1=3a — (2)
2g- T2=2a —(3)
Solving the above equations,
B 90°
g C
we get , a = m / s
2
6
P2 T2 T2 T1 T1 A
3kg P1
60° 30°
T2 T1
T2 F2 F1 Sol .a) In this case net pulling force
T1
2 kg 1 kg = mA g sin 600 + mB g sin 600 − mC g sin 300
3 3 1
2g 1g
=(1)(10) +(3)(10) 2 -(2)(10) 2 =24.64N
2
7g 5g
T1 = N , T2 = N Total mass = 1 + 3 + 2 = 6kg
6 3 ∴ Acceleration of the system
Force on pulley P1 is F1 = T12 + T12 24.64
a= = 4.1 m / s 2
7g 6
= 2T1 = N b) For the tension in the string between A and B.
3 2
FBD of Body A
Force on pulley P2 is F2 = T22 + T22 T1
5 2g
= 2T2 =
N
3 a A
Ø If position of masses is interchanged,then the tension
in the string and acceleration remains unchanged.
Acceleration and Tension in the string when bodies mAg sin 60
are connected as shown in the figure.
NARAYANAGROUP 15
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
mA g sin 60 − T1 = m Aa General Constraints:
i) A body placed on floor : The floor acting as
T1 = mA g sin 60 − m Aa = mA ( g sin 60 − a ) a constraint restricts the kinematical quantities in
3 the downward direction such that
T1 = (1) 10 × − 4.1 = 4.56 N m
2 x
For the tension in the string between B and C
FBD of body C y
T2 y = 0 ; v y = 0 and a y = 0 for the body placed
a
on the floor.
C ii) Two bodies connected with a string or rod.
inextensible string inextensible rod
mcg sin 30 A B A B
T2 − mC g sin 300 = mC a ; T2 = mC ( g sin 30 + a )
0 a b
The string / rod is inextensible.
∴ Displacements of A and B are equal in horizontal
1 direction ⇒ s A = s B
T2 = 2 10 + 4.1 = 18.2 N
2 Differentiating w.r.t time,
Ø A force F is applied on the massless pulley as shown ds A dsB
in the figure and string is connected to the block on = ⇒ v A = vB
smooth horizontal surface. Then dt dt
Again differentiating
dv A dvB
T T = ⇒ a A = aB
dt dt
T T F iii)Two bodies in contact with each other
m Ø Displacement of A and B are equal in horizontal
direction.
F= 2T and T = mablock
A
Ø If the block moves a distance ‘x’ the pulley moves B
x/2 (Total length of the string remains constant)
a ⇒ s A = sB
Therefore acceleration of the pulley = block
2 By differentiating, we will get
T
=
F /2 F
= .
v A = vB and a A = aB in horizontal direction
=
2m 2m 4m Pulley Constraints:
Constrained Motion: Ø For example, the motion of block A is downwards
Ø (a) Constraint : Restriction to the free motion along the inclined plane in fig. will cause a
of body in any direction is called constraint. corresponding motion of block B up the other
(b) Constrained Body : A body, whose inclined plane.Assuming string AB length is
displacement in space is restricted by other bodies, inextensible, i.e., length of AB is constant.
either connected to or in contact with it, is called a
constrained body.
(c) Kinematic Constraints : These are
equations that relate the motion of two or more xA A B xB
particles.
(d) Types of Constraints : A B
i) General constraints ii) Pulley constraints α β
iii) Wedge constraints iv) Mixed constraints |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
∴ The displacements of A ( x A ) and B ( xB ) are
equal ∴ x A = xB
Differentiating w.r.t. time, ⇒ v A = vB
Once again differentiating w.r.t. time, ⇒ a A = aB 2)
i.e., if one body (A) moves down the inclined plane
with certain acceleration, then the other body will A B
move up inclined plane with an equal acceleration
(magnitude). x A = xB ⇒ v A = v B ⇒ a A = a B
Alternate Method : First specify the location Mixed constraints :
of the blocks using position co-ordinates S A and Ring sliding on a smooth rod :
SB. Ø Consider a ring of mass m connected through a
C D
string of length L with a block of mass M. If the
SA SB ring is moving up with acceleration am and aM is the
O acceleration of block. As the length of the string is
constant,
A B L = d 2 + y2 + x
α β
d
From the fig. the position co-ordinates are related
y
by the equation s A + lCD + sB = L θ
where lCD = the length of the string over arc m x
CD = constant L = total length of the string =
constant Differentiating w.r.t. time, we get
ds A dsB
+ = 0 ⇒ vB = −v A M
dt dt
The negative sign indicates that when block A has
a velocity downward, i.e., in the direction of positive Since, L is constant, differentiating with respect to
s A , it causes a corresponding upward velocity of time t, we get
block B, i.e., B moves in the negative s B direction. dL 1 2y dy dx
Again differentiating w.r.t. time, = + =0
dt dt
(d )
1
dt 2
dvB dv
2
+y 2 2
=− A ⇒ aB = −a A
dt dt
dy dx
Similarly Since = vm and = vM and
a dt dt
y
A cosθ = so vM = −vm cosθ .
d 2 + y2
By differentiating, relation between am and aM can
1) be obtained, however, while doing so remember
that cosθ is not constant, but it is variable.
a
Two blocks connected with pulley : If the
B
blocks are connected as shown in fig, then the
x A = xB ⇒ v A = v B ⇒ a A = a B length of the string is
NARAYANAGROUP 17
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
d d W.E-32:In the fig, find the acceleration of mass
m2
y Sol: l1 + 2l 2 = constant
θ θ x on differentiating
v1 + 2v2 = 0
Again differentiating
1 2 a1 + 2a2 = 0 ⇒ a1 = −2a2
L = 2 d 2 + y2 + x |||||||||||||||||||
Since, L is constant, differentiating with respect to
time t, we get T
T T l
dL 2× 2y dy dx
1
= + =0 l2 T
2( d + y dt dt
)
1
dt 2 2 2 T
m1
⇒ 2v1 cosθ + v2 = 0 ; v 2 = − 2 v1 cos θ
2T
W.E.31:A rod of length ‘ l ’is inclined at an angle 2T
‘ θ ’with the floor against a smooth vertical
wall.If the end A moves instantaneously with m2
velocity v1 ,what is the velocity of end B at
'- ve' sign indicates that the accelerations are in
the instant when rod makes ‘ θ ’ angle with
the horizontal. opposite direction.Suppose acceleration of m2 is
Sol: Let at any instant,end B and A are at a distance x a2 downward and then acceleration of m1 will be
and y respectively from the point ‘O’.
y a1 upwards.
A T − m1 g = m1a1
v1 T = m1 g + m1a1
l
y m2 g − 2T = m2 a2
θ a1
O x B v2 x T 2T
Thus we have, x 2 + y 2 = l 2 .............(1) m1 m2
Here l is the length of the rod,which is constant. a2
Differentiating eq (1) with respect to time,we get m1g m2g
d 2 d dx dy m2 g − 2(m1 g + m1a1 ) = m2 a2
( x + y 2 ) = (l 2 ) ; 2 x + 2 y =0
dt dt dt dt m2 g − 2m1 g = m2 a2 + 4m1a2 (∴ a1 = 2a2 )
dx dy
If = v2 and = −v1 '–' sign should not be substituted
dt dt
( m2 − 2m1 ) g
x(v2 ) + y (−v1 ) = 0 a2 = ms −2
4m1 + m2
y
⇒ v2 = v1 = v1 tan θ
x
18 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E-33:In the fig, find the acceleration of m1 and m2 Sol : T sin θ = ma0 ...... ( i ) ; T cos θ = mg ...... ( ii )
m1 ||||||||||||||
a1 a0
T dividing (i)&(ii) tan θ =
g
−1 a
l1 ∴The string is making an angle θ = tan g0 with
T l2
T the vertical at equilibrium
Squaring and adding (i) and (ii)
2T T 2 sin 2 θ + T 2 cos 2 θ = m 2 ( a02 + g 2 )
m2
a2 T = m a02 + g 2
m2g W.E.35: For what value of ‘a’ the block falls freely?
a1
Sol. l 1 + 2l 2 = constant m1 T
a1 = 2a2 ; T = m1a1
m2 g − 2T = m2 a2 ; m2 g = 2m1a1 + m2 a2
h
a
2T
m2 θ
m2 g = 2m1 ( 2a2 ) + m2 a2 a2 x
Sol :In the time the wedge moves a distance ‘x’ towards
m2g left with an acceleration a the block falls from a
m2 g 2m2 g height ‘h’ with acceleration ‘g’
a2 = , a1 = a
4m1 + m2 4m1 + m2 x=
1 2 1 x a
at , h = gt 2 ⇒ = , ⇒ cot θ = ⇒ a = g cot θ
W.E.34:A pendulum is hanging from the ceiling 2 2 h g g
of a car having an acceleration a 0 with respect W.E.36:A block of mass m is placed on a smooth
to the road. Find the angle made by the string wedge of inclination q . The whole system is
with vertical at equilibrium. Also find the accelerated horizontally so that the block does
tension in the string in this position.
not slip on the wedge.Find the i) Acceleration
of the wedge ii) Force to be applied on the wedge
θ iii) Force exerted by the wedge on the block.
a0
Sol. (i). For an observer on the ground :
R cos θ
R
θ
R sin θ
F
T cos θ
mg a
M θ
T R sin θ = ma, R cos θ = mg
θ
⇒ a = g tan θ
ma0 ii) F = (M + m)a = (M + m) g tan q
T sin θ
iii) Force exerted by the wedge on the block
mg
⇒ R= or R = mg sec θ
cos θ
1
Note :If inclination is given as 1 in x, sin θ =
mg x
NARAYANAGROUP 19
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
ma cos θ
tan q =
1 xq 1 a
x 2 -1
ma θ
g
Þ Acceleration a = g tan q = mg sin θ
x -1 2
ma sin θ θ
W.E.37:Two fixed frictionless inclined planes mg
making an angles 300 and 600 with the verti- mg cos θ
cal are shown in the figure. Two blocks A and
B are placed on the two planes. What is the W.E.39:A solid sphere of mass 2kg rests inside a
relative vertical acceleration of A with respect cube as shown. The cube is moving with ve-
to B? (AIEEE-2010) r
locity υ = (5ti$ + 2tj)ms
ˆ −1
where 't' is in sec
A
and ' u ' is in m/s. What force does sphere exert
B on cube?
60° 30°
Sol: mg sin θ = ma ⇒ a = g sin θ
where a is along the inclined plane
O X
∴ vertical component of acceleration is g sin 2 θ
r
ar = a AB = a A − aB Sol. As given, υ = 5ti$ + 2t $j ;
∴ relative vertical acceleration of A with respect
dυ x dυ y
∴ ax = = 5, a y = =2
to B is g ( sin 60 − sin 30 ) = = 4.9 ms
2 0 2 0 g −2
dt dt
2
(in vertical direction)
W.E.38:For what value of 'a' block slides up the
ay
plane with an acceleration 'g' relative to the
inclined plane.
ax
mg
a
Sol. When cube is moving with above accelerations
along x and y-axes, the forces that exert on cube
Fnet = ma cos θ − mg sin θ
are
ma′ = ma cos θ − mg sin θ
Fx = − max = −2 × 5 = −10 N
If a′ = g , mg = ma cos θ − mg sin θ
1 + sin θ
( )
Fy = − mg + ma y = − ( 20 + 2 × 2 ) = −24 N
a cos θ = g + g sin θ ⇒ a = g
cos θ Net force, F= ( Fx )2 + ( Fy )
2
⇒ a = g (sec θ + tan θ )
= (10) 2 + ( 24) 2 = 26N
20 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E.40:A block is placed on an inclined plane
moving towards right with an acceleration
a0 = g. The length of the inclined plane is l0 . a0
All the surfaces are smooth. Find the time
taken by the block to reach from bottom to θ
top.
ma cos θ L
Sol. Let us solve the problem in the elevator frame. The
free body diagram is shown. The forces are
30° N
ma0
mg sin θ
30° a0
θ
Sol. ma = ma0 cos300 − mg sin 300 ma0sinθ mg
ma0
ma cos300 − mg sin300 mgsinθ
a= 0 θ
m (i) N normal reaction to the plane,
3
- mg
1 æ 3 -1÷ö (ii) mg acting vertically downwards,
= g ççç ÷
ma0
a= 2 2 çè 2 ÷÷ø (iii) ma0 ( pseudo force).acting vertically down
m If a is acceleration of the body with respect to
1 2 1
from s = ut + at ; l 0 = at 2 inclined plane, taking components of forces
2 2 parallel to the inclined plane.
1 æ 3 -1÷ö 2
l 0 = g ççç ÷÷ t 4l 0 mg sin θ + ma0 sin θ = ma ∴ a = ( g + a0 ) sin θ
2 çè 2 ÷ø ⇒ t =
(
g 3 -1
sec
) This is the acceleration with respect to the elevator
W.E.41:A pendulum of mass m hangs from a sup- L
The distance travelled is . If ‘t’ is the time for
port fixed to a trolley. The direction of the cos θ
string when the trolley rolls up a plane of reaching the bottom of inclined plane
inclination a with acceleration a0 is
= 0 + ( g + a0 ) sin θ .t 2
L 1
a0 cos θ 2
1 1
T cos θ T θ 2L 2 4L 2
T sin θ t= =
( g + a0 ) sin θ cos θ ( g + a0 ) sin 2θ
Sol. mg sin α
α Law of conservation of momentum:
ma0 cos Ø When the resultant external force acting on a system
mg α
T sin q = ma0 + mg sin a -------------(1) is zero, the total momentum (vector sum) of the
system remains constant. This is called “law of
T cos q = mg cos a -------------(2)
conservation of linear momentum”.
a + g sin a
tan q = 0 Ø
1 Newton’s third law of motion leads to the law of
2 ⇒ g cos a conservation of linear momentum.
é a + g sin a ù Ø Walking, running, swimming, jet propulsion, motion
q = tan -1 ê 0 ú
êë g cos a úû of rockets, rowing of a boat, recoil of a gun etc.,
W.E.42:A block slides down from top of a smooth can be explained by Newton’s third law of motion.
Ø Explosions, disintegration of nuclei, recoil of gun,
inclined plane of elevation q fixed in an
collisions etc., can be explained on the basis of the
elevator going up with an acceleration a 0.The
law of conservation of linear momentum.
base of incline has length L. Find the time
Applications:
taken by the block to reach the bottom.
NARAYANAGROUP 21
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
r r
Ø When a shot is fired from a gun, while the shot (π − α ) = angle between P3 , P1
moves forwards, the gun moves backwards. This
motion of gun is called recoil of the gun. When a P2 sin θ
tan α =
gun of mass ‘M’ fires a bullet of mass ‘m’ with a P1 + P2 cos θ
muzzle velocity ‘v’, the gun recoils with a velocity Explosion of a shell travelling in a
‘V’ given by V = mv/M. parabolic path at its highest point:
Ø When a bullet of mass ‘m’ moving with a velocity (into two fragments)
‘v’ gets embedded into a block of mass M at rest Ø Consider a shell of mass M as a projectile with
and free to move on a smooth horizontal surface,
velocity u and angle of projection θ . Suppose
then their common velocity` V = mv/ (M + m).
Ø the shell breaks into two fragments at maximum
A boy of mass ‘m’ walks a distance ‘s’ on a boat ur uur
of mass ‘M’ that is floating on water and initially at height and their initial velocities are v1 and v2
rest. If the boat is free to move, it moves back a M = m1 + m2
distance d = ms / (M + m).
u (m1 + m2)u cos θ
Explosion of Bomb
Ø A shell of mass ‘M’at rest explodes into two
fragments and one of masses ‘m’ moves out with a θ
velocity ‘ v ’ the other piece of mass (M– m) moves
Total momentum of the two parts is constant just
in opposite direction with a velocity of V = m v / before and just after the explosion.
(M – m). r r r
Ø Suppose a shell of mass m at rest explodes into [ m1 + m2 ] u cos θ i = m1v1 + m2 v2
three pieces of masses m1 , m2 and m3 , moving Case : (i) If the fragments travel in opposite direc-
ur uur ur tion after explosion then
r r r
with velocities v1 , v2 and v3 respectively..
r r r r r r
( m1 + m2 ) u cosθ i = m1v1i − m2 v2 i
m1v1 = p1 ; m2 v2 = p2 ; m3 v3 = p3 Case : (ii) If one fragment retraces its path and
r r r ur uur ur falls at the point of projection
p1 + p2 + p3 = m1 v1 + m2 v2 + m3 v3 = 0 r r r
r r r ( m1 + m2 ) u cos θ i = − m1u cos θ i + m2 v2
(as shell is at rest initially) ∴ p3 = − ( p1 + p2 )
Case:(iii) If one fragment falls freely after explosion
So the third piece moves with the same magnitude r r
of the resultant momentum of the other two pieces ( m1 + m2 ) u cos θ i = m1 0 + m2v2
r r
but in opposite direction. ( m1 + m2 ) u cos θ i = m2v2
P2 W.E.43:A bomb moving with velocity(40i+50j-25k)m/s
explodes into two pieces of mass ratio1:4.After
explosion the smaller piece moves away with
velocity(200i+70j+15k)m/s.The velocity
of larger piece after explosion is (EAM-2010)
θ Sol: From Law of conservation of linear momentum
α
P1 Mu = m1v1 + m2v2 ; M = 5 x, m1 = x, m2 = 4 x
u = 40$i + 50 $j − 25kms
$ −1 ;
π−α
( )
v1 = 200$i + 70 $j + 15k$ ms −1
P3
here v2 is the velocity of the larger piece
P3 = P12 + P22 + 2 P1 P2 cos θ
( )
5 x 40$i + 50 $j − 25k$ =
r r
θ = angle between P1 , P2
( )
x 200$i + 70 $j + 15k$ + 4 x ( v2 )
On simplification, we get v2 = 45 $j − 35k$
22 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E.44:A particle of mass 4 m explodes into three r r r r r
Pf = Pi (along x-axis) ; mu + MV = 0
pieces of masses m,m and 2m. The equal
masses move along X-axis and Y- axis with x1 = forward distance moved by the block along
velocities 4ms-1 and 6 ms-1 respectively . The X-axis.
magnitude of the velocity of the heavier mass x2 = backward distance moved by the wedge along
X-axis.
is (E - 2009)
r r
Sol: M=4 m ,u=0, m1 = m, m2 = m, m3 = 2m mu = − MV ;
x x
v1 = 4ms −1 , v2 = 6ms −1 , v3 = ? m 1 =M 2
According to law of conservation of momentum, t t
ur ur ur ML M l cos θ
P1 + P2 + P3 = 0 mx1 = Mx2 , x1 = =
ur ur ur ur ur ur M +m M +m
( )
P 3 = − P1 + P 2 , P 3 = P1 + P 2
mL ml cos θ
x2 = =
P3 = P12 + P2 2 + 2 P1 P2Cosθ M +m M +m
W.E.47: A bomb of 1 kg is thrown vertically up
P1 and P2 are perpendicular to each other
with speed 100 m/s. After 5 seconds, it
P3 = P12 + P22 , m3v3 = (m1v1 ) 2 + (m2 v2 ) 2 explodes into two parts. One part of mass
400gm goes down with speed 25m/s. What will
2mv3 = (m × 4)2 + ( m × 6 )
2
happen to the other part just after explosion
2v3 = 16 + 36 ⇒ v3 = 13ms −1 Sol :After 5 sec, velocity of the bomb,
v = u + at
r
v = u $j – gt $j = (100 – 10 x 5) $j = 50 $j m/s
W.E.45:A rifle of 20kg mass can fire 4 bullets/s.
The mass of each bullet is 35 ×10−3 kg and its
m = 1kg , m1 = 0.4kg , m2 = 0.6kg , v1 = 25ms −1
final velocity is 400ms −1 . Then, what force According to law of conservation of
must be applied on the rifle so that it does not momentum mv = m1v1 + m2 v2
r
move backwards while firing the bullets? 1 × 50 $j = −0.4 × 25 $j + 0.6v2
(2007E)
Sol :Law of conservation of momentum MV + 4mv = 0 ⇒ v = 100 $j = v = 100ms −1 ,vertically upwards
2 2
−3
4mv 4 × 35 × 10 × 400
⇒V = − M = − = -2.8 ms −1 W.E-48:A particle of mass 2m is projected at an
20 angle 450 with horizontal with a velocity of
Force applied on the rifle
MV 20 × 2.8 20 2 m/s. After 1sec, explosion takes place
F= =− = -56 N and the particle is broken into two equal
t 1 pieces. As a result of explosion one part comes
W.E.46:All surfaces are smooth.Find the to rest. The maximum height attained by the
horizontal displacements of the block and the other part from the ground is (g = 10m/s2)
wedge when the block slides down from top to Sol : M = 2m, θ = 450 , u = 20 2ms −1
bottom.
1
u x = u cos θ = 20 2 × = 20 ms − 1
m 2
1
u y = u sin θ = 20 2 × = 20 ms −1
h l 2
But height attained before explosion , H1
M θ 1 2 1
= ut − gt = 20 × 1 − × 10 × 12 = 15 m
2 2
L
Sol : When the block slides down on the smooth wedge, After 1sec, v x = 20 ms −1
the wedge moves backwards. In the horizontal
r v y = u y − gt = 20 − 10 = 10ms −1
direction there is no external force ; Fx = 0
r Due to explosion one part comes to rest,
∴ Px =constant
NARAYANAGROUP 23
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
m1 = m2 = m, v1 = 0 frictional force on the rear wheels will be in the
direction of motion and on the front wheels in the
M ( v x i + v y j ) = m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 opposite direction of motion
2 m (20 i + 10 j ) = m (0) + m v 2 Note-iii:In cycling ,the force exerted by rear wheel
v 2 = 40 i + 20 j
on the ground makes the force of friction to act on
it in the forward direction. Front wheel moving by
v y1 = 20ms −1 itself experience force of friction in backward
direction.
Height attained after explosion = Note-iv: If the pedaling cycle is accelarating on
the horizontal surface, then the forward friction on
H2 =
(v )
y
1 2
=
20 × 20
= 20m the rear wheel is greater than the backward friction
2g 2 ×10 on the front wheel.
H TOT = H1 + H 2 = 15 + 20 = 35m Note-v:When pedaling is stopped,the frictional
force is in backward direction for both the wheels.
Friction: If we slide or try to slide a body over
another surface, the motion of the body is resisted Laws of Friction:
by bonding between the body and the surface.This Ø Friction is directly proportional to the normal
resistance is called friction. reaction acting on the body.
Ø The force of friction is parallel to the contact surfaces Ø The law of static friction may thus be written as
and opposite to the direction of intended or relative f s α N . ⇒ ( f s )max = µ s N = fl
motion.
Ø There are three types of frictional forces Generally 0 ≤ static friction ≤ f l
i. Static friction ii. Dynamic friction
iii. Rolling friction Where the dimensionless constant µ s is called the
Ø If a body is at rest and no pulling force is acting on coefficient of static friction and N is the magnitude
it,force of friction on it is zero. of the normal force.
Ø If a force is applied to move the body and it does
not move,the friction developed is called static ( fs )max = fl = µsN ;
f l = Limiting friction
friction, which is equal in magnitude and opposite Ø Coefficient of static friction ( µ s) depends on the
in direction to the applied force (static friction is nature of the two surfaces in contact and is
self adjusting force). independent of the area of contact.
Ø If a force is applied to move the body and it
moves,then the friction developed is called dynamic Ø Static friction is independent of the area of contact
or kinetic friction. between the two surfaces
Ø When a body rolls on the surface of another fk
body friction developed is called as rolling Ø Coefficient of kinetic friction ( µ k) = .
N
friction. It is independent of velocity of the body.
Ø It is due to the deformation at the point of contact
fR
and depends on area of contact. Ø Coefficient of rolling friction ( µ R ) =
F N
Ø Rolling friction depends on the area of the
A surfaces in contact.
B Note : µ S > µ K > µ R
Frictional force
Ø
Static friction
State of Friction depends on the nature of the two surfaces
t
es
Dynamic
in contact i.e., nature of materials, surface finish,
fr
motion
friction
eo
temperature of the two surfaces etc.
at
Ø
St
Pulling Angle of Friction:
O D C force Ø Angle made by the resultant of f and N with the
Note-i: If you are walking due east, then the friction normal reaction N is called angle of friction.
on the feet is due east and the friction on the surface Ø Friction is parallel component of contact force to
is due west. the surfaces.
Note-ii: Engine is connected to rear wheels of a Ø Normal force is perpendicular component of
car. When the car is accelerated, direction of contact force to the surfaces.
24 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
N F1ext − fk
R a= Here F 1ext > f l
m
φ Ø If the block slides with an acceleration ‘ a ’under
the influence of applied force ‘F’,
FR = F − f k ; ma = F − fk
f mg F − f k F − µk mg
∴a = = ( f k = µ K N = µ K mg )
m m
R= f 2 + N2 N
a
f
Ø When the block is static tan φ = ; φ ≤ φs
N F
Ø When the block is in impending state, fk
µN |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
tan φs = s = µs
N
Where φs → maximum angle of friction. mg
Bodies in contact with vertical surfaces:
µk N Ø
Ø When block is sliding, tan φk = = µk A block of mass m is pressed against a wall
N without falling, by applying minimum horizontal
Since µ s > µk , it follows that φs > φk . mg
force F. Then F = µ
FR = fl + N = ( µs N ) + N = N µ +1
2 2 2 2 2
s s
fs
FR = mg tan 2 φs + 1 (∴ µs = tan φs )
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FR = mg sec φs
Motion on a horizontal rough surface:
Consider a block of mass ‘m’ placed on a N
horizontal surface with normal reaction N. F
Case (i) :If applied force F = 0, then the force of
friction is also zero.
F(Applied
force) mg
As the body is in vertical equilibrium
f m f s = mg ; µ s N = mg
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| mg
Case (ii) :If applied force F < ( f s ) max , the block µ s F = mg (Q N = F ) ⇒ F = µ
s
does not move and the force of friction is fs = F Ø A block is pressed between two hands without
falling, by applying minimum horizontal force
Case (iii) : If applied force F = ( f s ) max block just
mg
ready to slide and frictional force ‘F’ by each hand. Then F = 2 µ
( f s ) max = fl = µ s N s
fs fs
F = µ s mg (Q N = mg ) ; (at time t=0 )
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Case(iv) : If the above applied force continues to
act ( t > 0 ) the body gets motion, static friction
converts as kinetic friction and body possesses F F
acceleration
F − fk f − fk
a = ext = l = ( µs − µk ) g
m m
Case (v) :If the applied force is greater than limiting
friction the body starts moving and gets
acceleration mg
NARAYANAGROUP 25
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
mg 1) The maximum acceleration of the truck for which
W=2 fs, ; mg = 2 µs F ⇒ F = 2µ block does not slide on the floor of the truck is
s
a = µs g
Note : Here in the above two cases, by applying
any amount of horizontal force ‘F’, the frictional 2) If a < µs g block does not slide and frictional
force f s can never be greater than ' mg ' force on the block is f=ma.
Sliding block on a horizontal rough surface 3) If a > µs g block slips or slides on the floor the
coming to rest : acceleration of the block relative to the truck is
N a′ = a − µk g
4) If l is the distance of the block from rear side
v=0 of the truck, time taken by the block to cover a
u 2l
fk distance l . t=
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| a - µkg
4) Acceleration of the block relative to ground is
S
a′′ = µk g
mg Body placed in contact with the front
a) The acceleration of the block is a = − µ k g surface of accelerated truck:
Ø When a block of mass ‘m’ is placed in contact with
b) Distance travelled by the block before coming the front face of the vehicle moving with acceleration
u2 ‘a’ then a pseudo force ‘Fpf ‘ acts on the block in a
to rest is S = 2µ g direction opposite to the direction of motion of the
k
vehicle
c) Time taken by the block to come to rest is fl
u
t=
mk g a
ma
Ø An insect is crawling in a hemispherical bowl of N
radius ‘r’. Maximum height upto which it can
crawl is
fs=µs N
O
θ mg
N
r r sin θ |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
P
h θ Under equilibrium, fl = mg; N = ma
mg cos θ g
mg sin θ µ S N = mg ⇒ µ S ma = mg ⇒ amin = µ
s
mg W.E.49:A man of mass 40 kg is at rest between the
walls as shown in the figure. If ‘ m ’ between
1 the man and the walls is 0.8, find the normal
h = r (1- cosθ ) = r 1 −
µs + 1
2 reactions exerted by the walls on the man.
Sol. Since man is at rest,
Maximum angular displacement upto which it can µN1 µN2
crawl is ‘ ? ’. Then µ s = tan θ
Ø A block is placed on rear horizontal surface of a
truck moving along the horizontal with an
acceleration ‘a’. Then F2
mg N2
F1 N1
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
26 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
W.E.52:A block on table shown in figure is just on
N1 − N 2 = 0 ( horizontal equilibrium )
the edge of slipping. Find the coefficient of
\ N1 = N2 = N , F1 = F2 = F (say) static friction between the block and table
T cos 30
\ 2m N = mg ( vertical equilibrium ) O
30 T
= 2´ 0.8´ N = 400 \ N = 250N
40N
W.E.50:A 2 kg block is in contact with a vertical T sin 30
f
wall having coefficient of friction 0.5
between the surfaces. A horizontal force of
40N is applied on the block at right angles
to the wall. Another force of 15N is applied,
on the plane of the wall and at right angles
to 40N force. Find the acceleration of the 80N
block. Sol.
Sol.
fl = T sin θ
µ mg = T sin θ
.........(1)
f=20N
80 = T cos θ ...........(2)
F=15N T sin 30 0 µ mg
15N = ;
T cos30 0 80
F=40N F=40N
20N µ 40 1 µ 2
25N=FR Tan 300 = ; = ⇒µ= = 1.15
80 3 2 3
W=20N
WE.53:When a car of mass 1000 kg is moving with
a velocity of 20ms-1 on a rough horizontal road,
its engine is switched off. How far does the
Resultant of W=20N and 15N car move before it comes to rest if the
coefficient of kinetic friction between the road
FR = 20 2 + 152 = 25N and tyres of the car is 0.75 ?
frictional force f = m N = 0.5 x 40 = 20N Sol. Here v = 20ms −1 , µk = 0.75, g = 10ms −2
This acts in a direction, opposite to 25N force.
v2
\ Net force acting on the block, Fnet = 25–20=5 Stopping distance S = = 26.67m
2 µk g
5
\ acceleration of the block a = = 2.5ms–2 W.E.54:A horizontal conveyor belt moves with a
2
constant velocity V. A small block is projected
W.E.51:A block of mass 4 kg is placed on a rough
with a velocity of 6 m/s on it in a direction
horizontal plane. A time dependent
opposite to the direction of motion of the belt.
horizontal force F = kt acts on the block (k =
The block comes to rest relative to the belt in
2 N/s). Find the frictional force between the
a time 4s. µ = 0.3 , g = 10 m/s2. Find V
block and the plane at t = 2 seconds and t = 5 ur
seconds (µ = 0.2) Sol. V b,c = Vb + Vc = 6 + V
Sol. Given F = kt f = µmg = 0.3 × m × 10 = 3m
When t = 2sec ; F = 2(2)=4N ..... case (i)
F 3m
f ms = ms mg = 0.2 × 4 × 10 = 8N Retardation a = = = 3m / s 2
m m
Here F < f ms ∴ friction = applied force=4N ur = 6 + V,Vr = 0, t = 4 sec , ar = - 3ms -2
When t = 5 sec ; F = 2 (5) = 10N......case(ii)
F > f ∴ frictional force < 8N Vr = ur + ar t , 0 = (6+V) – 3 x 4,V = 6 m/s
NARAYANAGROUP 27
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
WE.55:The rear side of a truck is open. A box of N
40 kg mass is placed 5m away from the open L−
end as shown in figure. The coefficient of fs |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
friction between the box and the surface is
0.15. On a straight road, the truck starts from m
rest and accelerating with 2 m/s2. At what m− g
n
distance from the starting point does the box
fall off the truck? (Ignore the size of the box).
N m
g
n
Fpf Weight of the chain lying on the table =
fk a = 2m/s 2
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| mg 1
mg − = mg 1 −
5m n n
mg
When the chain is about to slide from edge of the
table,
The weight of the hanging part of the chain =
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
frictional force between the chain and the table
Sol :Because of the acceleration of the truck the pseudo surface.
force on the box = m x a = 40 x 2 = 80N.
mg 1
This force acts opposite to the acceleration of the = µ s mg 1 −
truck. The frictional force on the truck which acts n n 1
∴ µs =
in the forward direction f k = µ N = 0.15 x 40g ⇒
mg n −1
= µ s mg ( n − 1)
n n
= 58.8N Since pseudo force is greater than frictional
force, the block will accelerate in backward If l is the length of the hanging part, then
direction relative to truck with a magnitude
L
80 − 58.8 n= Substituting this in the above expression we
a= = 0.53 m / s 2 l
40
l L µs + 1
The time taken by box to cover the distance 5m is get, µ s = L − l ( or ) n = l = µ
given by s
∴The maximum fractional length of chain
1 2s
s = 0 + at 2 ⇒ t = = 4.34sec hanging from the edge of the table in
2 a
l µs
The distance travelled by truck in this time equilibrium is L = µ + 1
s
is , a ′ = 2 ms − 2
Ø Fractional length of chain on the table
1 1
s′ = a′t 2 = × 2 × (4.34)2 = 18.87 m L−l 1
2 2 =
Sliding of a chain on a horizontal table: L µs + 1
Ø Consider a uniform chain of mass “m” and length Connected Bodies :
“L” lying on a horizontal table of coefficient of Ø A block of mass m1 placed on a rough horizontal
surface, is connected to a block of mass m2 by a
friction “ µ s ”. When 1/nth of its length is hanging
string which passes over a smooth pulley.The
from the edge of the table, the chain is found to be
about to slide from the table. Weight of the hanging coefficient of friction between m1 and the table is
µ.
mg
part of the chain =
n
28 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
a W.E.57:A block of mass ‘m’ is placed on a rough
N x3
surface with a vertical cross section of y = . If
T 6
the coefficient of friction is 0.5, the maximum
height above the ground at which the block
m1g T a can be placed without slipping is(JEE MAIN -2014)
Y
m2g
For body of mass m2
θy
X
m2 g − T = m2 a ————— (i) x
Sol:
For body of mass m1
T − f k = m1a ⇒ T − µk N = m1a —— (ii)
Solving Eqs (i) and (ii), we get
m − µk m1 m1m2 g
a= 2 g; T = (1 + µ )
Tanθ =
dy d x3
= ( ) ⇒ Tanθ =
x2
1m + m 2 m 1 + m2 dx dx 6 2
WE.56:A block of mass 10kg is pushed by a force F x2
on a horizontal rough plane is moving with At limiting equilibrium,we get µ = Tanθ ⇒ 0.5 =
2
acceleration 5ms −2 . When force is doubled, x 2 = 1 ⇒ x = ±1
its acceleration becomes 18ms −2 .Find the x3
Now putting the values of ‘ x ’in y = , we get
coefficient of friction between the block and 6
1 1
rough horizontal plane. ( g = 10ms ) .
−2 When x = 1 ⇒ y = ; x = −1 ⇒ y = −
6 6
Sol : So the maximum height above the ground at which
N 1
a the block can be placed without slipping is y = m
6
Motion of a body on an inclined plane :
F Case (i) :Body sliding down on a smooth
fk
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| inclined plane :
Let us consider a body of mass ‘m’ kept on a
mg smooth inclined plane. .
On a rough horizontal plane, acceleration of a block Ø Normal reaction N = mg cos θ
F
of mass ‘m’ is given by a = − µ k g ..........(i) Ø Acceleration of sliding block a = g sin θ
m
Ø If l is the length of the inclined plane and h is the
Initially, a = 5 ms −2 height. The time taken to slide down starting from
F
5=
10
− µk (10 ) ............ ( ii ) (Q m = 10kg ) rest from the top is t =
2l
=
1 2h
When force is doubled a = 18 ms −2 . g sinθ sinθ g
h
Q l =
2F
18 = − µ k (10 ) .......... ( iii )
10 sin θ
Multiplying Eq(ii) with 2 and subtracting from Eq.(iii) Ø Sliding block takes more time to reach the bottom
8 than to fall freely in air from the top of the inclined
8 = µ k (10 ) ⇒ µ k = = 0.8 plane to the ground.
10
NARAYANAGROUP 29
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
Ø
When θ 2 = α and ( t > 0 ) the same inclination is
Velocity of the block at the bottom of the inclined
plane is same as the speed attained if block falls 3.
freely from the top of the inclined plane. continued the block moves downwards with
V = 2 gl sin θ = 2 gh accleration a.
Case(ii) :Body projected up on a mg sin θ 2 > µk mg cos θ 2 acceleration
smooth inclined plane : mg sin θ 2 − µ k mg cos θ 2
a=
v=0 m
B µ s mg cos θ 2 − µ k mg cos θ 2
a= = g cos θ 2 ( µs − µk )
m
s h
u 4. When θ > α , the body slides f k = µk mg cos θ
A θ C The resultant force acting on the body down the
Ø If a block is projected up the plane with a velocity plane is FR = mgsinθ -f K ,
u, the acceleration of the block is a = − g sin θ
FR = mg ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
Ø Distance travelled by the block up the plane before
u2 The acceleration of the body a = g ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
its velocity becomes zero is S = 2 g sin θ N A
u=0 fk
u
Ø Time of ascent t = g sin θ mg sinθ
θ mg cosθ
Case (iii) Motion of a body down the
mg
rough inclined plane: h
Ø Let a body of mass ‘m’ be sliding down a rough B
inclined plane of angle of inclination ? and coefficient θ
v
of kinetic friction µ k. Ø Velocity of the body at the bottom of the plane
N
fk V = 2 g ( sin θ − µk cos θ ) l
Ø If ‘t’is the time taken to travel the distance ‘l’ with
θ initial velocity u = 0 at the top of the plane,
mg sinθ mg mg cosθ
θ 2l
t=
Angle of Repose ( α ) : Angle of repose is the g (sin θ − µk cosθ )
minimum angle of the rough inclined plane for Ø The time taken by a body to slide down on a rough
which body placed on it may just start sliding inclined plane is ‘n’ times the time taken by it to
down. It is numerically equal to the angle of friction. slide down on a smooth inclined plane of same
Ø Let ? be the angle of inclination of a rough inclined inclination and length, then coefficient of friction is....
plane, α be the angle of repose, m be the mass
of the body and µ be the coefficient of friction. 2l
At limiting equilibrium (about to slide) trough g (sin θ − µ k cos θ )
n= =
mg sin α = µs mg cosα ⇒ tan α = µs ⇒ α = tan −1 ( µs ) tsmooth 2l
1. When θ1 < α ; the block remains at rest on the g sin θ
inclined plane. Frictional force mg sin θ1 (self sin θ
n2 =
adjusting), acceleration a=0 sin θ − µ k cos θ
2. When θ 2 = α ; the block remains at rest on inclined
⇒ n 2 sin θ − n 2 µ k cos θ = sin θ
plane or impending state of motion is achieved.
mg sin θ 2 = µ s mg cos θ 2 (at time t=0) 1
⇒ µk = Tanθ 1 − 2
n
Here θ 2 > θ1 and f s = fl acceleration a=0
30 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Body projected up a rough inclined plane: Time taken with friction is
If a body is projected with an initial velocity ‘u’to
2l T1 sin θ − µ cos θ
slide up the plane, the kinetic frictional force acts T2 = ⇒ =
down the plane and the body suffers retardation g ( sin θ − µ cos θ ) T2 sin θ
due to a resultant force
sin θ
FR =(mg sin θ +fk ) T2 = T1
sin θ − µ cos θ
Ø acceleration a = - g(sin ? + µ k cos ? )
Ø Time taken to stop after travelling a distance l along
sin 450
2l
=2
the plane, t = g (sin θ + µ k cos θ )
sin 450 − (0.5) cos 450
Ø Force required to drag with an acceleration ‘a’ is (1/ 2)
F = ( µ k mg cos ? + mg sin ? + m a ) =2 = 2 × 2 = 2.828s
(1/ 2) − (0.5)(1/ 2)
WE.58:A body is moving down a long inclined
WE.60:Two blocks of masses 4 kg and 2 kg are in
plane of angle of inclination ‘ θ ’for which the
contact with each other on an inclined plane
coefficient of friction varies with distance x
of inclination 300 as shown in the figure.
as µ ( x ) = kx , where k is a constant. Here x is The coefficient of friction between 4 kg mass
the distance moved by the body down the and the inclined plane is 0.3, where as
plane. The net force on the body will be zero between 2 kg mass and the plane is 0.2. Find
at a distance x0 is given by the contact force between the blocks.
f
N
θ
g
Sol :
2k
mg sinθ mg cosθ
g
4k
mg
θ
F = mg sin θ − f
300
N = mg cos θ ; f = µ N = µ mg cos θ
Sol :The acceleration of 4 kg mass,
F = mg sin θ − µ mg cos θ
If θ = 300 , µk = 0.3
F = mg ( sin θ − kx cos θ )
1 3 −2
a4 = g (sin θ − µ k cos θ ) = 10 − 0.3 × = 2.6ms
tan θ 2 2
If F = 0 ; sin θ − kx0 cos θ = 0 ⇒ x0 =
k The acceleration of 2 kg mas
WE.59:A body of mass ‘m’ slides down a smooth
inclined plane having an inclination of 450 1 3 −2
a2 = 10 − 0.2 × = 3.27 ms
with the horizontal. It takes 2s to reach the 2 2
bottom. If the body is placed on a similar plane ∴ a2 > a4
having coefficient of friction 0.5 Then what is
the time taken for it to reach the bottom? Thus, there will be contact force between the blocks
and they move together. If ‘a’ is the common
Sol : Mass = m, θ =450, µ =0.5 Time taken by the body acceleration,
to reach the bottom without friction is
(m1 + m2 )a =
2l
T1 = (m1 + m2 ) gsin θ − ( µ1 m1 + µ2 m2 ) g cos θ
g sin θ = 2sec
NARAYANAGROUP 31
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
WE.63:In the given figure, the wedge is acted upon by
1 3
6a = 6 × 10 × − (0.3 × 4 + 0.2 × 2) ×10 × a constant horizontal force 'F'. The wedge is
2 2 moving on a smooth horizontal surface. A ball of
6a = 30 − 13.856 ⇒ a = 2.7 ms −2 mass 'm' is at rest relative to the wedge. The ratio
of forces exerted on 'm' by the wedge when 'F' is
For, 4 kg mass; mg sin θ + f contact − f friction = ma acting and 'F' is withdrawn assuming no friction
between the edge and the ball,is equal to
1 3
4´10´ + f c - 0.3´10´10 ´ = 4 x 2.7
2 2 F
fc = 10.8 + 10.4 – 20 Þ f c = 1.2N
WE.61:A 30kg block is to be moved up an inclined
plane at an angle 300 to the horizontal with a Sol.
velocity of 5ms–1 . If the frictional force
retarding the motion is 150N, find the θ
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
horizontal force required to move the block up
the plane. (g=10ms–2.) When Force F is applied
ma cosθ
Sol. N
P θ
ma
mg
300
ma sinθ
The force required to move a body up an inclined plane is mg sinθ
mg cosθ
F = mg sin q + f k
N1 = mgcos θ + Fsin θ
f k = µk ( mg cos θ + P sin θ ) = 150 N
( F cos θ = mg sin θ ⇒ F = mg tan θ )
= 30(10) sin 300 +150 = 300N. N F sin θ
If F=0 ; N2 = mgcos θ , N = 1 + mg cos θ
1
If P is the horizontal force, F = P cos q 2
F 300 300´ 2 N1 mg tan θ sin θ
P= = = = 200 3 = 346 N =1+
cos q cos300 mg cos θ = 1 + tan q = sec q
2 2
3 N2
WE.62: A body is sliding down an inclined plane Ø Two blocks of mass m and M are placed on a rough
having coefficient of friction 0.5. If the normal inclined plane as shown, when (θ > α )
reaction is twice that of resultant downward force
i)Minimum value of M for which m slides upwards is
along the inclined plane, then find the angle
between the inclined plane and the horizontal M = m ( sin θ + µs cosθ )
Sol : µ = 0.5 , N = mg cos θ
N = 2 F , F = mg (sin θ − µ cos θ )
m
N = 2 mg ( sin θ − µ cos θ )
mg cos θ = 2 mg ( sin θ − µ cos θ )
mg sinθ
M
c os θ = 2 cos θ ( tan θ − µ )
θ
1 1 Mg
= tan θ − ⇒ tan θ = 1 ⇒ θ = 450
2 2 mg
32 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
ii) Maximum value of M for which m slides N
downwards: M = m ( sin θ − µs cosθ ) F
Ø A body is released from rest from the top of an
inclined plane of length ‘L’ and angle of inclination θ F cos θ
L F
‘ θ ’. The top of plane of length ( n > 1) is fr ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
n
smooth and the remaining part is rough. If the F sin θ
body comes to rest on reaching the bottom of the
plane then find the value of coefficient of friction of
rough surface mg
N Ø When a lawn roller is pushed by a force ‘F’,which
makes an angle θ with the horizontal, then
u=0
Ø Normal reaction N = mg + F sin θ .
mg sinθ Ø Frictional force f r = µr N = µr ( mg + F sin θ )
θ mg cosθ
∴The net horizontal pushing force is given by
L mg
h
F1= F(cos θ – sin θ ) – µ rmg
n ii) A Lawn Roller on a Horizontal Surface
n −1 Pulled by an Inclined Force
n L
θ N
v
For smooth part : F sin θ F
L
Using v 2 − u 2 = 2as ; V = 2a1 ,
2
n θ
F cos θ
a1 = g sin θ , a2 = g (sin θ − µ cos θ )
n −1 |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
For rough part 0 − V 2 = 2a2 L fr
n
L n −1
2a1 = −2a2 L mg
n n Ø Let a lawn roller be pulled on a horizontal road by
a force ‘F’, which makes an angle θ with the
g sin θ = − g [sin θ − µ cosθ ] ( n − 1) horizontal.
n Ø Normal reaction N =mg – Fsin θ
µ = Tanθ Ø Frictional force fr = µrN = µr(mg – Fsin θ )
n − 1 Ø The net horizontal pulling force is
Ø A body is pushed down with velocity ‘u’ from the
top of an inclined plane of length ‘L’ and angle of F2 = F (cos θ + sin θ )-µ r mg Pulling is easier than
inclination ‘ θ ’. The top of plane of length Pushing.
L Applying an Inclined Pulling Force :
( n > 1) is rough and the remaining part is smooth. Let an inclined force F be applied on the body so
n
If the body reaches the bottom of the plane with a as to pull it on the horizontal surface as shown in
velocity equal to the initial velocity ‘u’, then the the figure.
value of coefficient of friction of rough plane N
is µ K = n ( tan θ ) F sin θ F
Note : If the top surface is smooth and the remaining
θ
n−2 F cos θ
is rough, then µ k = tan θ
n −1
Pushing & Pulling of a Lawn Roller : |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
fr
i) A Roller on Horizontal Surface Pushed by
an Inclined Force : mg
NARAYANAGROUP 33
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
The body is in contact with the surface,and j u s t The body is in contact with the surface, and just
ready to move ready to move, N=mg+Fsinθ
N + F sinθ =mg ⇒ N = mg - F sin θ
frictional force f l = Fcos θ
frictional force f r = F cos θ
Fcosθ = µr N ,Fcosθ = µr (mg - F sinθ ) Fcosθ = µs N ⇒ Fcosθ = µs ( mg + Fsinθ )
µr mg µs mg
F= F=
( cos θ + µr sinθ ) ( cos θ − µs sinθ )
mgsinφ
mgsinφ
cos (θ − φ ) (Q Tanφ = µr )
⇒F=
F= (Q Tanφ = µs )
cos (θ + φ )
For F to be minimum cos (θ − φ ) should be For F to be minimum θ = 0
maximum ⇒ cos (θ − φ ) = 1 ⇒θ − φ = 0, θ = φ mg sin φ
∴ Fmin = = mg tan φ = µ mg
φ = angle of friction. cos φ s
(since µ s = tan φ )
WE.64: A block of mass m kg is pushed up against a
wall by a force P that makes an angle ‘ θ ’ with
µ2r + 1 the horizontal as shown in figure. The coefficient
µr
of static friction between the block and the wall
is µ . The minimum value of P that allows the
φ block to remain stationary is
P sin θ
1 P
∴ Fmin = mgsinθ = mgsinφ From the figure, f
µr µ mg θ
sinφ = , Fmin = r N P cos θ
µr + 1
2
µr2 + 1 Sol : θ
Minimum horizontal pulling force, whenθ = 0
cos ( 0 − φ ) = cos φ mg
mg sin φ At equilibrium, P sin θ + f = mg N = P cos θ ,
F= = mg tan φ
cos φ
N = P cos θ f = ( mg − P sin θ)
Applying an Inclined Pushing Force :
Let an inclined force F is applied on the body so µN = ( mg − P sin θ)
as to push it on the horizontal surface as shown in µPcos θ = mg − Psin θ ; P [ sin θ + µ cos θ ] = mg
the figure.
mg
P=
N ( sin θ + µ cos θ)
Fcosθ
Block on Block:
Ø Case I: Bottom block is pulled and there is no
friction between bottom block and the horizontal
θ surface.
Fcosθ
f mu
f
mB F
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
mg Ø When the bottom block is pulled upper block is
Fsinθ
34 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
accelerated by the force of friction acting upon it. hence they have different accelerations.The
Ø The maximum acceleration of the system of two mu
blocks to move together without slipping is acceleration of the bottom block is aB = µ K m g
amax = µ s g , where µs is the coefficient of static
B
and the acceleration of the upper block is
friction between the two blocks. The maximum
F − µ k mu g
applied force for which both the blocks move au =
together is Fmax = µs g ( mu + mB )
mu
Ø A number of blocks of identical masses m each
Ø If a < µs g blocks move together and applied force are placed one above the other. Force required
is F = (m B + mu )a In this case frictional force to pull out N th block from the top is
F = (2N–1) µ mg
between the two block f = mu a . WE.65:A block of mass 4kg is placed on another
Ø If a > µs g , blocks slip relative to each other and block of mass 5kg, and the block B rests on a
smooth horizontal table, for sliding the block
have different accelerations. The acceleration of A on B, a horizontal force 12N is required to
the upper block is au = µ k g and that for the bottom be applied on it .How much maximum
horizontal force can be applied on ‘B’ so that
F − µk mu g both A and B move together? Also find out
block is aB = mB the acceleration produced by this force.
Ø Case - II:Upper block pulled and there is no M1 A
friction between bottom block and the horizontal
surface. F M2 B
mu F Sol: Here M 1 =4kg and M 2 =5kg
f
Limiting friction between the blocks is flim
mB Acceleration of system is
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| F F F
a= = = m / s2
Ø When the upper block is pulled, bottom block is M1 + M 2 4 + 5 9
accelerated by the force of friction acting on it. Because of this acceleration the block A
Ø The maximum acceleration of the system of two experiences a pseudo force of magnitude
blocks to move together without slipping is F
Fpseudo = M1a = 4 ×
mu 9
amax = µs
mB where , µs =coefficient of static
g
M1a
friction between the two blocks The maximum force M1 A
for which both blocks move together is 12N
F B
mu M2
Fmax = µs g ( mu + m B )
mB
As block A move together with B, Fpseudo ≤ flim For
Ø If a < a , blocks move together and frictional maximum value of applied force
max
4F
force between the two blocks is f = mB a The Fpseudo = f lim ; = 12 ⇒ F = 27 N
9
applied force on the upper block is 27
The acceleration of blocks = = 3m / s 2
F = (m B + mu )a 9
Ø If a > amax blocks slide relative to each other and
NARAYANAGROUP 35
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
WE.66:Two blocks of masses ‘m’ and ‘M’ are
arranged as shown in the figure. The F = µ R1 + µ R2 = 3 + 0.25 ( 4 ) = 4 N
coefficient of friction between the two blocks (c) In this situation for dynamic equilibrium of B
is ‘ µ ’, where as between the lower block and
the horizontal surface is zero. Find the force F = µ R1 + µ R2 + T ...........(i)
‘F’ to be applied on the upper block, for the While for the uniform motion of A,
system to be under equilibrium?
F T = µ R2 ............(ii)
m Substituting T from eqn (ii) in (i) we
M get F = µ R1 + 2 µ R2 = 3 + 2 × 1 = 5 N
Uniform circular motion
F m T Ø When a particle moves in a circular path with con-
Sol :
µ mg stant speed then it is said to be in uniform circular
motion. In this case the acceleration of the particle
m T
µ mg v2
is a = v ( ω ) = = rω 2 ,Where v, r & ω are linear
On the upper block, r
F=T+f=T+ µ N; F = T + µ mg ……(1) velocity, radius and angular velocity of the particle.
On the lower block T = µ mg ……… (2) In uniform circular motion
from (1) and (2), we get, F = 2 µ mg (a) magnitude of linear velocity does not change
W.E-67 : Block A weighs 4N and block B weighs (b) direction of linear velocity changes
8N.The coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.25 (c) Linear velocity changes
for all surfaces.Find the force F to slide B at (d) Angular velocity is constant
a constant speed when (a) A rests on B and (e) Linear momentum changes
moves with it (b) A is held at rest and (c) A and (f) Angular momentum w.r.t to centre does not
B are connected by a light cord passing over a change
smooth pulley as shown in fig (a),(b) and (c) Centripetal force ( FC ):
respectively Ø It is the force required to keep the body in uniform
circular motion. This force changes the direction of
A A
R2
linear velocity but not its magnitude
R2 f2
F F mv 2
R1 f1 B
( v = rω )
B R1 f1
FC = = mrω 2 = mvω
S S r
(a) (b) Ø Direction of centripetal force is always perpendicu-
A
T lar to the direction of linear velocity. The work done
f2 R2
f2 by centripetal force is always zero, as it is perpen-
F dicular to velocity and instantaneous displacement
B R1 T Ex1: When an electron moves around the nucleus
S f1 in a circular orbit, the electrostatic force of attrac-
(C) tion between the electron and nucleus is the cen-
tripetal force.
Sol :(a) When A moves with B the force opposing the Ex2: If an electron of mass m and charge e moves
motion is the only force of friction between B and around the nucleus of atomic number Z in a circu-
S the horizontal and as velocity of system is lar orbit of radius r , centripetal force on it is
constant, mv 2 1 Ze 2
=
F = f1 = µ R1 = 0.2 ( 4 + 8 ) = 3 N r 4πε 0 r 2
(b) When A is held stationary, the friction opposing the Ex3: When planet of mass m moves around the
motion is between A and B. So sun in a circular orbit of radius r , centripetal force
36 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø Let θ be the angle through which the outer edge is
mv 2 GMm
on it is = 2 raised relative to the inner edge. This angle is also
r r called “angle of banking”. The normal reaction N
Ex4: When a stone is whirled round in horizontal exerted by the road on the vehicle is directed nor-
circle by attaching it at the end of string, tension in mal to the surface as shown in the figure.
the string provides the centripetal force. N cos θ balances the weight of the vehicle.
mv 2 N cos θ = mg
=T
r N sin θ is directed towards the centre of the cir-
Centrifugal force: cular path. Which provides the centripetal force.
Ø The Pseudo force which acts radially outward on mv 2
the body moving along a circle is called centrifugal N sin θ =
r
force.
From the above equations, we get
Even though centripetal and centrifugal forces are
equal in magnitude and opposite in direction, they v2
tan θ = (or) v = rg tan θ .
do not form action - reaction pair because they act rg
on the same body in two different frames. Motion of a vehicle on a rough banked road:
Circular turning on roads: Ø If friction is present between the road and the
Ø The necessary centripetal force while taking a cir-
tyres,the components of friction and normal reac-
cular turn is being provided to a vehicle by follow-
tion provide the centripetal force.
ing three ways
1) by friction only mv 2
2) by banking of roads only Case-I:If N sin θ > ,the vehicle possesses
r
3) by both friction and banking of roads
the tendency to slip down the plane. The minimum
Ø Friction only:
In this case the necessary centripetal force is pro- speed for avoiding slipping down the plane can be
vided by static friction obtained by taking friction up the plane.
v
r N cos θ
N f sin θ
o f f
θ
N sin θ θ f cos θ
v ≤ µs gr ; vmax = µ s gr
Ø For a given radius of curvature and coefficient of
friction, the safe maximum velocity of the vehicle is
mg
θ
given by vmax = µ s rg
fig - (i)
Ø Banking of roads only:
To find minimum speed we can use fig (i),
N cos θ
2
mvmin
N
θ N sin θ − f cos θ = .... (1)
r
N cos θ + f sin θ = mg.... ( 2 ) (f = µN )
N sin θ From (1) and (2) we get
A
rg ( sin θ − µ cos θ ) rg (tan θ − µ )
θ Mg vmin = =
O X ( cos θ + µ sin θ ) (1 + µ tan θ )
NARAYANAGROUP 37
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
radius 18m without the danger of
mv 2
Case-II:If N sin θ < ,the vehicle possesses skidding.The coefficient of friction between
r the tyres of the car and the surface of the
the tendency to skid up the plane. The safe maxi- curved path is 0.2. What is the maximum
mum speed for avoiding skidding can be obtained speed in kmph of the car for safe driving? (g=10
by taking friction acting down the plane. ms −2 )
N N cos θ Sol : Maximum speed. v = µ s gr
θ v = 0.2 ×10 ×18 = 36 = 6ms −1
N sin θ W.E.70:A point P moves in a counter clock wise
f cos θ θ direction on a circular path as shown in fig.
f f sin θ The movement of ‘P’ is such that it sweeps
out a length S=t3+5, where ‘S’ is in metres
θ mg
and ‘t’ is in seconds. The radius of the path
fig - (ii) is 20m. The acceleration of ‘P’ when t=2s is
nearly. (AIEEE - 2010)
To find maximum safe speed, we have to consider
figure (ii).
B
mv 2
N sin θ + f cos θ = max .... (1) P(x, y)
r
N cos θ − f sin θ = mg .........(2)
From (1) and (2) we get
O A
rg ( sin θ + µ cos θ ) rg (tan θ + µ )
vmax = = dS
( cosθ − µ sin θ ) (1 − µ tan θ ) Sol: S = t + 5 ⇒ v =
3
dt
= 3t 2
Ø A cyclist is taking a turn of radius r with speed v For t=2s, v = 3 × 4 = 12ms −1
then he should bend through an angle θ with the
dv
v2 Tangential acceleration, at = = 6t
dt
vertical such that tan θ =
rg For t=2s, at = 12ms −2
W.E.68:Two cars of masses m 1 and m 2 are moving Centripetal acceleration
in circles of radii r1 and r2 respectively. Their
v 2 144
speeds are such that they make complete circle ac = = = 7.2ms −2
in the same time t. The ratio of their R 20
centripetal acceleration is (AIEEE - 2012)
net acceleration = at 2 + ac 2 ≈ 14ms −2
Sol :As their time period of revolution is same,angular
speed is also same.centripetal acceleration is WE.71:A turn of radius 20m is banked for the
vehicle of mass 200kg going at a speed of
a = ω 2r ;
10m/s. Find the direction and magnitude
a1 ω 2 r1 r1 of frictional force acting on a vehicle if it
= =
a2 ω 2 r2 r2 moves with a speed a) 5 m/s b) 15 m/s
Assume that friction is sufficient to
WE.69: A car is driven round a curved path of
prevent slipping (g=10m/s2)
38 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Sol : v = 10m/s g tan θ
ω=
(10 ) = 1
2
v 2
1 r
tan θ = = ⇒ θ = tan−1
rg ( 20 )(10 ) 2 2 2π
but r = l sin θ and ω = T ( T0 is the time period
Now, as speed is decreased, force of friction 0
f acts upwards. Using the equations of pendulum)
2
mv
N sin θ − f cos θ = ; N cos θ + f sin θ = mg Time period of the pendulum is T0 = 2π
l cos θ
r g
−1 1 Ø For the coin not to fly off on the turn table, the
Substituting θ = tan , v = 5m/s, m=200kg
2 condition is
and r = 20m, in the above equations, we get
f = 300 5 N ω
b) In the second case force of friction f will act
downwards
mv 2
N sin θ + f cos θ = ; N cos θ − f sin θ = mg
r
−1 1
Substituting θ = tan , v = 15m/s,
2
m=200kg and r = 20m, in the above
equations, we get f = 500 5 N
Conical pendulum:
A bob of mass M is given a horizontal push a little
through angular displacement θ and arranged such mv 2
⇒ ≤ µ s mg
that the bob describes a horizontal circle of radius r
‘ r’ with uniform angular velocity ω in such a way
Ø Motion of a Cyclist in a Death Well:
that the string always makes an angle θ with the
vertical and T is the tension in the string. For equilibrium of cyclist in a death well, as shown
Suppose the body is in rotational equilibrium,then in the figure, the normal reaction N provides the
centripetal force needed and the force of friction
T cos θ = Mg ------(1)
balances his weight mg.
T sin θ = Mrω 2 ----(2)
mv 2
rω 2 Thus, N=
From (1) and (2) tan θ = r
g
and f = µ N = mg
O
rg
⇒ Vmax =
θ µ
T
T cos θ T
r mv 2 f
A N
T sin θ r mg
Mg r
NARAYANAGROUP 39
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
1) the same as the direction of its velocity
C.U.Q 2) the same as the direction of its acceleration
3) the same as the direction of its net force
1. The behaviour of a body under zero resultant 4) the same as the direction of its kinetic energy
force is given by 10. Inside a railway car a plumb bob is suspended
1) first law of motion 2) second law of motion from the roof and a helium filled balloon is tied
3) third law of motion 4) law of gravitation by a string to the floor of the car. When the
2. Which law of Newton defines an ‘inertial railway car accelerates to the right, then
frame of reference’? 1) both the plumb bob and balloon move to the left
1) First law of motion 2) Second law of motion 2) both the plumb bob and balloon move to the right
3) Third law of motion 4) Law of gravitation 3) plumb bob moves to the left and the balloon
3. The statement “acceleration is zero if and only moves to the right
if the net force is zero” is valid in 4) plumb bob moves to the right and the balloon
1) non-inertial frames 2) inertial frames moves to the left
3) both in inertial frames and non-inertial frames 11. A constant force (F) is applied on a stationary
4) neither inertial frames nor non-inertial frames particle of mass ‘m’. The velocity attained by
4. You move forward when your car suddenly the particle in a certain displacement will be
proportional to
comes to a halt and you are thrown backward
when your car rapidly accelerates. Which law 1
1) m 2) 1/m 3) m 4)
of Newtons is involved in these? m
1) third law 2) second law 12. A constant force (F) is applied on a stationary
particle of mass ‘m’. The velocity attained by
3) first law 4) law of gravitation the particle in a certain interval of time will be
5. You are thrown outer side when your car suddenly proportional to
takes a turn. Which law of Newton is involved in 1
this? 1) m 2) 1/m 3) m 4)
m
1) Third law 2) Second law
13. A force produces an acceleration of a1 in a
3) First law 4) Law of gravitation
body and the same force produces an
6. An object is thrown vertically upward with
some velocity. If gravity is turned off at the acceleration of a2 in another body. If the two
instant the object reaches the maximum height, bodies are combined and the same force is
applied on the combination, the acceleration
what happens? produced in it is
1) The object continues to move in a straight line
a1 + a2 a1a2
2) The object will be at rest 1) a1 + a2 2) a a 3) a + a 4) a1a2
3) The object falls back with uniform velocity 1 2 1 2
4) The object falls back with uniform acceleration 14. To keep a particle moving with constant
7. Which of the following is the most significant velocity on a frictionless surface, an external
law of motion given by Newton? force
1) First law of motion 2) Second law of motion 1) should act continuously
3) Third law of motion 4) Zeroth law of motion 2) should be a variable force
3) not necessary
8. The quantity of motion of a body is best
4) should act opposite to the direction of motion
represented by
15. If action force acting on a body is gravitational
1) its mass 2) its speed
in nature, then reaction force
3) its velocity 4) its linear momentum
1) may be a contact force
9. A certain particle undergoes erratic motion.
2) may be gravitational force
At every point in its motion, the direction of
3) may be a gravitational or contact force
the particle’s momentum is always
4) may be a force of any origin
40 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
16. Action and reaction can never balance out 23. While we catch a cricket ball, we catch it at
because the front and make the hands move with the
1) they are equal but not opposite always ball backwards. Why is that?
2) they are unequal in magnitude even though 1) To reduce the impulse
2) To increase the time of contact, there by increase
opposite in direction
the force
3) though they are equal in magnitude and opposite 3) To increase the impulse
in direction they act on different bodies 4) To increase the time of contact, there by decrease
4) they are unequal in magnitudes the force
17. The propulsion of a rocket is based on the 24. The change in momentum per unit time of a
principle of conservation of body represents
1) linear momentum 2) energy 1) impulse 2) force
3) angular momentum 4) mass 3) kinetic energy 4) resultant force
18. An automobile that is towing a trailer is 25. A father and his seven years old son are facing
each other on ice skates. With their hands,
accelerating on a level road. The force that they push off against one another. Regarding
the automobile exerts on the trailer is the forces that act on them as a result of this
1) equal to the force the trailer exerts on the and the acceleration they experience, which
automobile of the following is correct?
2) greater than the force the trailer exerts on the 1) Father exerts more force on the son and
automobile experiences less acceleration
3) equal to the force the trailer exerts on the road 2) Son exerts less force on the father and
4) equal to the force the road exerts on the trailer experiences more acceleration
19. A man is standing in the middle of a perfectly 3) Father exerts as much force on the son as the
son exerts on the father, but the father experiences
smooth ‘island of ice’ where there is no friction
less acceleration
between the ground and his feet. Under these 4) Father exerts as much force on the son as the
circumstances son exerts on the father, but the father experiences
1) he can reach the desired corner by throwing more acceleration
any object in the same direction 26. A student initially at rest on a frictionless
2) he can reach the desired corner by throwing frozen pond throws a 2 kg hammer in one
any object in the opposite direction direction. After the throw, the hammer moves
3) he has no chance of reaching any corner of the island off in one direction while the student moves
4) he can reach the desired corner by pursuing on off in the other direction. Which of the
the ground in that direction following correctly describes the above
20. Which law of Newton reveals the underlying situation?
symmetry in the forces that occur in nature? 1) The hammer will have the momentum with
1) First law 2) Second law greater magnitude
3) Third law 4) Law of gravitation 2) The student will have the momentum with greater
21. You hold a rubber ball in your hand. The magnitude
Newton’s third law companion force to the 3) The hammer will have the greater kinetic energy
force of gravity on the ball is the force exerted 4) The student will have the greater kinetic energy
by the 27. A ball falls towards the earth. Which of the
following is correct?
1) ball on the earth 2) ball on the hand
1) If the system contains ball, the momentum is
3) hand on the ball 4) earth on the ball
conserved
22. A lift is going up with uniform velocity. When 2) If the system contains earth, the momentum is
brakes are applied, it slows down. A person in conserved
that lift, experiences 3) If the system contains the ball and the earth, the
1) more weight 2) less weight momentum is conserved
3) normal weight 4) zero weight 4) If the system contains the ball and the earth and
the sun, the momentum is conserved
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
28. A block moving in air breaks into two parts 35. A stretching force of 10N is applied at one end
and the parts separate of a spring balance and an equal force is
1) the total momentum must be conserved applied at the other end at the same time. The
2) the total kinetic energy must be conserved reading of the balance is
3) the total momentum must change 1) 5 N 2) 10 N 3) 20 N 4) 0
4) the potential energy must be conserved 36. A ball is dropped from a spacecraft revolving
29. Regarding linear momentum of a body around the earth at a height of 1200 km. What
a) It is a measure of quantity of motion will happen to the ball?
contained by the body 1) It will continue to move with velocity V along
b) Change in momentum is the measure of the original orbit of spacecraft
impulse 2) It will move with the same speed tangential to
c) Impulse and acceleration act in opposite the space craft
direction to the change in momentum 3) It will fall down to the earth gradually
d) In the case of uniform circular motion the 4) It will go far in space
linear momentum is conserved. 37. A body is under the action of three forces
1) a& b are true 2) b & c are true uur uur uur
3) c & d are true 4) a,b & c are true F1 , F2 and F3 . In which case the body cannot
30. Compare the impulses exerted on a wall by undergo angular acceleration?
the two objects, a golf ball and a lump of mud, uur uur uur
both having the same mass and the velocity. 1) F1 , F2 and F3 are concurrent
1) the golf ball imparts greater impulse uur uur uur
2) the lump of mud imparts the greater impulse 2) F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
3) both impart equal impulse uur uur uur
3) F1 , F2 is parallel to F3 but the three forces are
4) nothing can be said
31. Two objects X and Y are thrown upwards not concurrent
simultaneously with the same speed. The mass uur uur uur
4) F1 and F2 act at the same point but F3 acts at
of X is greater than that of Y. The air exerts
equal resistive force on two objects, then different point.
1) X reaches maximum height than Y 38. In the system shown in figure m1 > m2 .
2) Y reaches maximum height than X System is held at rest by thread BC. Just
3) the two objects will reach the same height
after the thread BC is burnt.
4) cannot say
32. A man drops an apple in the lift. He finds that
the apple remains stationary and does not fall.
The lift is
1) going down with constant speed
2) going up with constant speed
3) going down with constant acceleration
4) going up with constant acceleration
33. Internal force can change
1) linear momentum as well as kinetic energy
2) linear momentum but not the Kinetic energy 1) acceleration of m1 will be equal to zero
3) the kinetic energy but not linear momentum 2) acceleration of m2 will be downwards
4) Neither the linear momentum nor the kinetic 3) magnitude of acceleration of two blocks will be
energy non–zero and unequal
34. A man is standing on a spring platform. 4) magnitude of acceleration of both the blocks
Reading of spring balance is 60 kg wt. If man
jumps outside the platform, then the reading m1 − m 2
of the spring balance will be m + m g
1) remains same 2) decreases 1 2
3) increases
4) first increases and then decreases to zero
42 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
39. A lift is ascending with a constant speed “V”. A 48. A block ‘B’ rests on ‘A’. A rests on a
passenger in the lift drops a coin. The horizontal surface ‘C’ which is frictionless.
acceleration of the coin towards the floor will be There is friction between A and B. If ‘B’ is
1) Zero 2) g 3) <g 4) >g pulled to the right
40. A reference frame attached to the earth with 1) B moves forward and A to the left
respective to an observer in space 2) ‘B’ only moves to the left
1) is an inertial frame because Newton’s laws of 3) ‘B’ does not move
motion are applicable in it 4) ‘A’ and ‘B’ move together to the right
2) is an inertial frame by definition 49. Sand is dusted to the railway tracks during
3) cannot be an inertial frame because earth is rainy season to
rotating about its axis
1) make it always wet 2) increase friction
4) can be an inertial frame because earth is
3) to reduce consumption of fuel
revolving around the sun.
4) make it always dry
41. A Stationary railway platform on earth is
50. With increase of temperature, the frictional
1) an inertial frame of reference for an observer on
force acting between two surfaces
earth.
1) increases 2) decreases
2) a Non inertial frame of reference for an observer
3) remains same 4) may increase or decrease
on moon
3) both are true 4) both are false 51. If we imagine ideally smooth surfaces and if
42. A rotating platform for a stationary observer they are kept in contact, the frictional force
outside it is acting between them is
1) inertial frame of reference 1) zero 2) a finite value but not zero
2) non inertial frame of reference 3) both 3) very large 4) we can’t predict
4) some times inertial (or) some times non inertial 52. If man is walking, direction of friction is
43. The acceleration of a particle is found to be 1) opposite to the direction of motion
non zero when no force acts on the particle. 2) same as that of direction of motion
This is possible if the measurement is made 3) perpendicular to that of direction of motion
from 4) 45º to the direction of motion
53. Aeroplanes are streamlined to reduce
1) inertial frame 2) non inertial frame
1) fluid friction 2) sliding friction
3) both
3) kinetic friction 4) limiting friction
4) some times inertial (or) some times non inertial 54. The limiting friction between two surfaces
44 Frictional force between two bodies does not depend
1) increases the motion between the bodies 1) on the nature of two surfaces
2) destroys the relative motion between the 2) on normal reaction
bodies 3) on the weight of the body
3) sometimes helps and sometimes opposes 4) on volume of the body
the motion 55. While walking on ice one should take small
4) increases the relative velocity between the steps to avoid slipping. This is because
bodies smaller steps ensure
45. Maximum value of static friction is 1) larger friction 2) smaller friction
1) limiting friction 2) rolling friction 3) larger normal force 4)smaller normal force
3) static friction 4) normal reaction 56. In order to stop a car in shortest distance
46. A good lubricant should be highly on a horizontal road, one should
1) viscous 2) non-volatile 1) apply the brakes very hard so that the wheels
3) both (1and 2) 4) transparent stop rotating
47. Theoretically which of the following are best 2) apply the brakes hard enough to just prevent
lubricants? slipping
1) Solids 2) Liquids 3) pump the brakes (press and release)
3)Gases 4) Both 2 and 3
4) shut the engine off and not apply brakes
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
57. A body rests on a rough horizontal plane. A 63. The maximum speed of a car on a curved
force is applied to the body directed towards path of radius ‘r’ and the coefficient of friction
the plane at an angle ? with the vertical. µ k is
The body can be moved along the plane
1) only if ? is greater than the angle of friction µk
1) v = 2) v = µ k gr
2) only if ? is lesser than the angle of friction gr
3) only if ? is equal to the angle of friction
gr 1
3) v = 4) v =
4) for all values of ?
58. A lift is moving down with an acceleration µk µ k gr
equal to the acceleration due to gravity. A 64. The angle which the rough inclined plane
body of mass M kept on the floor of the lift makes with the horizontal when the body
is pulled horizontally. If the coefficient of placed on it just starts sliding down is called
friction is µ , then the frictional resistance 1) angle of Friction 2) angle of repose
offered by the body is 3) critical angle 4) brewster’s angle
1) µ k Mg 2) Mg 3) Zero 4) µ kMg2 65. A body of mass M is placed on a rough
59. A body is struck to the front part of the truck. inclined plane of inclination ? and coefficient
The coefficient of friction between the body of friction µ k. A force of (mg sin ? + µ k mg
and truck is µ . The minimum acceleration
cos ? ) is applied in the upward direction, the
with which the truck should travel so that
the body does not fall down is acceleration of the body is
1) g sin ? 2) g (sin ? + µ kcos ? ) 3) g
1) µ / g 2) µ g 3) g / µ 4) µ 2 g
60. When a bicycle is in motion, the force of (sin ? – µ k cos ? ) 4) Zero
friction exerted by the ground on the two 66. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it
wheels is such that it acts because pulling
1) in the backward direction on the front wheel 1) involves sliding friction
and in the forward direction on the rear wheel 2) involves dry friction
2) in the forward direction on the front wheel 3) increases the effective weight
and in the backward direction on the rear wheel 4) decreases normal reaction
3) in the backward direction on both the front 67. A block of mass m and surface area A just
and rear wheels
begins to slide down an inclined plane when
4) in the forward direction on both the front and
rear wheels the angle of inclination is p /5. Keeping the
61. A boy of mass M is applying a horizontal mass of the block same, if the surface area
force to slide a box of mass M 1 on a rough is doubled, the inclination of the plane at which
horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction the block starts sliding will be
between the shoe of the boy and the floor is
µ and that between the box and the floor is 1) p /5 2) p /10 3) 2 p /5 4) p / 5 2
‘ µ 1’In which of the following cases is it 68. A block X kept on an inclined surface just
certainly not possible to slide the box?
1) µ < µ 1; M < M1 2) µ > µ 1; M > M1 begins to slide if the inclination is θ 1. The
3) µ < µ 1; M > M1 4) µ > µ 1; M < M1 block is replaced by another block Y and it
62. When a person walks on a rough surface is found that it just begins to slide if the
1) the frictional force exerted by the surface inclination is θ 2 ( θ 2 > θ 1). Then
keeps him moving
2) reaction of the force applied by the man 1) Mass of X = mass of Y
on the surface keeps him moving 2) Mass of X < mass of Y
3) the force applied by the man keep him 3) Mass of X > mass of Y
moving
4) All the three are possible
4) weight of the man keeps him moving
44 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
69. A Particle is acted upon by a force of constant C.U.Q - KEY
magnitude which is always perpendicular to the 01) 1 02) 1 03) 2 04) 3 05) 3 06) 2
velocity of the particle. The motion of the 07) 2 08) 4 09) 1 10) 3 11) 4 12) 2
particle takes place in a plane. It follows that 13) 3 14) 3 15) 2 16) 3 17) 1 18) 1
1) the Kinetic energy of the particle changes with 19) 2 20) 3 21) 1 22) 2 23) 4 24) 4
25) 3 26) 3 27) 4 28) 1 29) 1 30) 1
time.
31) 1 32) 3 33) 3 34) 4 35) 2 36) 1
2) the acceleration of the particle is constant. 37) 1 38) 1 39) 2 40) 3 41) 3 42) 2
3) the velocity of the particle is constant 43) 2 44) 3 45) 1 46) 3 47) 3 48) 4
4) the speed of the particle is constant 49) 2 50) 2 51) 3 52) 2 53) 1 54) 4
70. The direction of angular acceleration of a body 55) 3 56) 2 57) 1 58) 3 59) 3 60) 1
moving in a circle in the plane of the paper is 61) 1 62) 1 63) 2 64) 2 65) 4 66) 4
1) along the tangent 67) 1 68) 4 69) 4 70) 4 71) 1 72) 1
73) 3
2) along the radius inward
3) along the radius outward
LEVEL–I (C.W)
4) perpendicular to the plane of the paper
71. Suppose a disc is rotating counter clockwise
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
in the plane of the paper then
1) Its angular velocity vector will be perpendicular 1. n balls each of mass m impinge elastically in
to the page pointing up out of the page each second on a surface with velocity u. The
2) Its angular velocity vector will be perpendicular average force experienced by the surface will
to the page pointing inwards be
3) Its angular velocity vector acts along the tangent 1) mnu 2) 2mnu 3) 4mnu 4) mnu/2
to the disc 2. A ball reaches a racket at 60 m/s along + X
direction, and leaves the racket in the opposite
4) None of the above
direction with the same speed. Assuming that
72. A Particle of mass’M’ moves in a uniform
the mass of the ball as 50gm and the contact
circular path of radius ‘r’ with a constant speed
time is 0.02 second, the force exerted by the
‘ v ’, then its centripetal acceleration is
racket on the ball is
v2 v2 1) 300 N along + X direction
1) 2) 3) v 2 r 4) Zero 2) 300 N along - X direction
r r2
3) 3,00,000 N along + X direction
73. A vehicle moves safe on rough , curved and
4) 3,00,000 N along - X direction
unbanked road. Then
3. 'P' and 'Q' horizontally push in the same
a) The direction of static friction is radially
direction a 1200 kg crate. 'P' pushes with a
out wards
force of 500 newton and 'Q' pushes with a force
b) The direction of static friction is radially
of 300 newton. If a frictional force provides
inwards
200 newton of resistance, what is the
c) The direction of kinetic friction is tangential acceleration of the crate?
to curved path
1) 1.3 m / s 2 2) 1.0 m / s 2
d) Static friction does not exist
1) a & b are correct 2) c & d are correct 3) 0.75 m / s 2 4) 0.5 m / s 2
3) b & c are correct 4) a & c are correct
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
4. A ball of mass 'm' moves normal to a wall 1) 5kg ms −1 2) 10 5 kgms −1
with a velocity 'u' and rebounds with a
velocity 'v'. The change in momentum of the 3) 20 kg ms −1 4) 15 kg ms −1
ball during the rebounding is
10. A ball of mass’m’ is thrown at an angle is ‘ θ ’
1) m ( u + v ) towards the wall with the horizontal with an initial velocity
2) m ( u − v ) towards the wall ‘u’.The change in its momentum during its
flight in a time interval of ‘t’ is
3) m ( u + v ) away from the wall 1) mgt 2) mgt cosθ
4) m ( u − v ) away from the wall. 3) mgt sin θ 4) ½ mgt.
11. A body of mass 2kg has an initial speed
5. If a force of 250N acts on a body,the 5ms–1. A force acts on it for 4 seconds in the
momentum required is 125kgms −1 .The period direction of motion. The force time graph is
for which the force acts on the body is shown in figure. The final speed of the body
is
1) 0.1 s 2) 0.3 s
3) 0.5 s 4) 0.2 s
6. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40g with
a velocity 1200 ms–1 . The man holding it can
exert a maximum force of 144 N on the gun.
How many bullets can he fire per second at
the most?
1) One 2) Three 3) Two 4) Four 1) 8.5 ms–1 2) 11 ms–1
–1
3) 14.31 ms 4) 4.31 ms–1
7. A truck of mass 500kg is moving with
12. A force time graph for the motion of a body is
constant speed 10 ms −1 .If sand is dropped into as shown in figure. Change in linear
the truck at the constant rate momentum between 0 and 6s is
10kg/min,the force required to maintain the
motion with constant velocity is
3 5 7 5
1) N 2) N 3) N 4) N
2 4 5 3
8. A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The
exhaust speed is 800ms −1 . To give an upward
acceleration of 20ms −2 , the amount of gas 1) zero 2) 8 Ns 3) 4 Ns 4) 2 Ns
ejected per second to supply the needed 13. An object of mass 3 kg is at rest. Now a force
thrust is ( g = 10ms −2 ) F = 6t 2 iˆ + 2tjˆ N is applied on the object. Find the
velocity of the object at t = 3 sec.
1) 127.5 kg s −1 2) 137.5 kg s −1 r r r r
1)18i + 3 j 2) 18i − 3 j
3) 187.5 kg s −1 4) 185.5 kg s −1 r r r r
3) 3i − 18 j 4) 3i + 18 j
IMPULSE
14. An impulse "I" given to a body changes its
9. A small sphere of mass m = 2kg moving with
velocity from " v1 to v2 ". The increase in the
a velocity u = 4$i − 7 $j m / s collides with a kinetic energy of the body is given by
smooth wall and returns with a velocity
1) I ( v1 + v2 ) 2) I ( v1 + v2 ) / 2
v = −$i + 3$j m / s . The magnitude of the impulse
3) I ( v1 − v2 ) 4) I ( v1 − v2 ) / 2
received by the ball is
46 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
OBJECTS SUSPENDED BY
STRINGS & APPARENT WEIGHT
15. A 60kg man is inside a lift which is moving up
with an acceleration of 2.45 ms −2 . The appar--
ent percentage change in his weight is, 1) 6 N to the right 2) 12 N to the right
1) 20% 2) 25% 3) 50% 4) 75% 3) 6 N to the left 4) 12 N to the left
16. The apparent weight of a person inside a lift 21. Two masses m1 and m2 are attached to a spring
is W 1 when lift moves up with certain balance S as shown in Figure. If m1 > m2 then
acceleration and is W 2 when lift moves down the reading of spring balance will be
with same acceleration. The weight of person
when lift moves up with constant speed is
W1 + W2 W1 − W2
1) 2) 3) 2W1 4) 2 W2
2 2
17. A person of mass 60 kg is in a lift. The change
in the apparent weight of the person, when the
lift moves up with an acceleration of 2ms −2 and
then down with an acceleration of 2ms −2 , is
(take g = 10 m/sec2)
1) 120 N 2) 240 N 3) 480 N 4) 720 N 1) ( m1 − m2 ) 2) ( m1 + m2 )
18. A rope of length 10m and linear density 0.5kg/
m is lying length wise on a smooth horizontal 2m1m2 m1m2
3) m + m 4) m + m
floor. It is pulled by a force of 25 N. 1 2 1 2
The tension in the rope at a point 6m away 22. Two masses (M+m) and (M-m) are attached
from the point of application is to the ends of a light inextensible string and
1) 20 N 2) 15 N 3) 10 N 4) 5 N the string is made to pass over the surface of
19. Three blocks of masses m1, m2 and m3 are a smooth fixed pulley. When the masses are
connected by a massless string as shown in released from rest, the acceleration of the
figure on a frictionless table. They are pulled system is
with a force T3 = 40N. If m1 = 10kg , m2 = 6kg 1) gm/M 2) 2gM/m
and m3 = 4kg , then tension T 2 will be 3)gm/2M 4) g ( M 2 -m 2 ) /2M
23. Two bodies of masses 5kg and 4kg are tied to
a string as shown. If the table and pulley are
smooth, then acceleration of 5kg mass will be
1) 10 N 2) 20 N 3) 32 N 4) 40 N
20. A horizontal force F pushes a 4 kg block (A)
which pushes against a 2 kg block (B) as
shown. The blocks have an acceleration of
3m/s 2 to the right. There is no friction between
the blocks and the surfaces on which they slide. 1) 19.5m/s2 2) 0.55 m/s2
What is the net force B exerts on A? 3) 2.72 m/s2 4) 5.45m/s2
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
LAW OF CONSERVATION OF 28. A mass of M kg is suspended by a weightless
MOMENTUM string.The horizontal force that is required to
24. The object at rest suddenly explodes into three displace it until the string makes an angle 450
parts with the mass ratio 2:1:1.The parts of with the initial vertical direction is
equal masses move at right angles to each Mg
other with equal speed ‘ v ’.the speed of the 1) Mg 2)
third part after explosion will be 2
v v 3) Mg ( 2 + 1) 4) 2Mg
1) v 2) 2v 3) 4)
2 2 LAWS OF FRICTION
25. A man and a cart move towards each other. 29. The coefficients of static and dynamic friction
The man weighs 64 kg and the cart weighs are 0.7 and 0.4. The minimum force required
32kg. The velocity of the man is 5.4 km/hr and to create motion is applied on a body and if it
that of the cart is 1.8 km/hr. When the man is further continued, the acceleration attained
approaches the cart, he jumps on to it. The by the body in ms–2 is (g = 10m/s2)
velocity of the cart carrying the man will be 1) 7 2) 4 3) 3 4) Zero
1) 3 km/hr 2) 30 km/hr 30. The coefficient of static friction between
3) 1.8 km/ hr 4) zero contact surfaces of two bodies is 1. The
26. A bomb of mass 6 kg initially at rest explodes
contact surfaces of one body support the
in to three identical fragments. One of the
other till the inclination is less than
fragments moves with a velocity of
1) 30º 2) 45º 3) 60º 4) 90º
∧
10 3 i m / s , another fragment moves with a MOTION ON A HORIZONTAL
∧ ROUGH SURFACE
velocity of 10 j m / s , then the third fragment 31. Brakes are applied to a car moving with
moves with a velocity of magnitude. disengaged engine, bringing it to a halt after
1) 30 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 15 m/s 4) 5 m/s 2s. Its velocity at the moment when the
EQUILIBRIUM OF A PARTICLE breaks are applied if the coefficient of
27. A mass of 10 kg is suspended by a rope of friction between the road and the tyres is
length 2.8m from a ceiling. A force of 98 N is 0.4 is
applied at the midpoint of the rope as shown 1) 3.92 ms–1 2) 7.84 ms–1
in figure. The angle which the rope makes with 3) 11.2ms–1 4) 19.6 ms–1
the vertical in equilibrium is 32. A book of weight 20N is pressed between
two hands and each hand exerts a force of
40N. If the book just starts to slide down.
Coefficient of friction is
1) 0.25 2) 0.2 3) 0.5 4) 0.1
33. A car running with a velocity 72 kmph on a
level road, is stopped after travelling a
distance of 30m after disengaging its engine
(g = 10ms–2). The coefficient of friction
between the road and the tyres is
1) 0.33 2) 4.5 3) 0.67 4) 0.8
34. In the above problem car got a stopping
1) 300 2) 600 3) 450 4) 900 distance of 80m on cement road then µ k is
(g = 10 m/sec2)
1) 0.2 2) 0.25 3) 0.3 4) 0.35
48 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
35. A 10kg mass is resting on a horizontal 44. A brick of mass 2kg just begins to slide down
surface and horizontal force of 80N is applied. on inclined plane at an angle of 45º with the
If µ = 0.2, the ratio of acceleration without horizontal. The force of friction will be
and with friction is (g = 10ms–2) 1) 19.6 sin 45º 2) 9.8 sin 45º
1) 3/4 2) 4/3 3) 1/2 4) 2 3) 19.6 cos 45º 4) 9.8 cos 45º
36. A block of mass 20 kg is pushed with a 45. The lengths of smooth & rough inclined planes
horizontal force of 90N. If the coefficient of of inclination 450 is same. Times of sliding of
static and kinetic friction are 0.4 and 0.3, the
a body on two surfaces is t1 , t2 and µ = 0.75 ,
frictional force acting on the block is
then t1 : t2 =
( g = 10ms −2 )
1) 90N 2) 80N 3) 60N 4) 30N 1) 2 : 1 2) 2 : 3 3) 1 : 2 4) 3 : 2
37. A force of 150N produces an acceleration PULLING / PUSHING A BODY
of 2ms–2 in a body and a force of 200N 46. A block of weight 200N is pulled along a
produces an acceleration of 3ms–2. The mass rough horizontal surface at constant speed
of the body and the coefficient of kinetic by a force of 100N acting at an angle 30º
friction are above the horizontal. The coefficient of
1)50kg; 0.1 2)25kg; 0.1 kinetic friction between the block and the
surface is
3)50kg; 0.5 4)50kg; 0.2
1) 0.43 2) 0.58 3) 0.75 4) 0.83
38. A heavy uniform chain lies on horizontal table
top. If the coefficient of friction between the UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
chain and the table surface is 0.25, the 47. The centripetal force required by a 1000
maximum percentage of the length of the chain kg car that takes a turn of radius 50 m at a
speed of 36 kmph is
that can hang over one edge of the table is
1) 1000 N 2) 3500 N
1) 20% 2) 25% 3) 35% 4) 15% 3) 1600 N 4) 2000 N
MOTION OF A BODY ON THE 48. A stone of mass 0.5 kg is attached to a string
of length 2m and is whirled in a horizontal
INCLINED PLANE circle. If the string can withstand a tension of
39. The angle of inclination of an inclined plane is 9N, the maximum velocity with which the stone
60º. Coefficient of friction between 10kg body can be whirled is
on it and its surface is 0.2, g = 10 ms–2. The 1) 6ms −1 2) 8ms −1 3) 4ms −1 4) 12ms −1
acceleration of the body down the plane in ms–2 is
1) 5.667 2) 6.66 3) 7.66 4) Zero
LEVEL- I (C.W) - KEY
40. In the above problem the resultant force on 1) 2 2) 2 3) 4 4) 3 5) 3 6) 2
7) 4 8) 3 9) 2 10) 1 11) 3 12) 1
the body is
13) 1 14) 2 15) 2 16) 1 17) 2 18) 3
1) 56.6 N 2) 66.6 N 3) 76.6 N 4) 86.6 N
19) 3 20) 3 21) 3 22) 1 23) 4 24) 4
41. In the above problem, the frictional force on
25) 1 26) 2 27) 3 28) 1 29) 3 30) 2
the body is
31) 2 32) 1 33) 3 34) 2 35) 2 36) 3
1) Zero 2) 5 N 3) 7.5 N 4) 10 N 37) 1 38) 1 39) 3 40) 3 41) 4 42) 3
42. In the above problem, the minimum force
required to pull the body up the inclined plane 43) 4 44) 1 45) 3 46) 2 47) 4 48) 1
1) 66.6 N 2) 86.6 N 3)96.6 N 4)76.6 N LEVEL- I (C.W) - KEY
43. When a body slides down an inclined plane v−u v−u
with coefficient of friction as µ k, then its 1. Favg = ma, a = 2. Favg = ma, a =
t t
acceleration is given by Fnet ( FP + FQ ) − f
1) g( µ k sin ? + cos ? ) 2) g( µ k sin ? – cos ? ) 3. Fnet = ma , a = =
m m
dp dp
4. ∆P = Pf − Pi = m (V − u ) 5. F =
3) g(sin ? + µ k cos ? ) 4) g(sin ? – µ k cos ? ) ⇒ dt =
dt F
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
dp mnv n F F
6. F= ,F = ⇒ = 28. Tanθ =
dt t t mv mg
7. F =
dp
,F =u
dm 29. Fnet = ma , FR = f s − f k , a = ( µ s − µ K ) g
dt dt 30. µ = tan θ 31. v = u + at , a = µ g
dp dm dm m( g + a)
8. F = , m( g + a) = v ⇒ = f mg
dt dt dt v 32. f s = µs N , µ = s =
9. J = m(v − u ) N 2F
10. J = Ft = ∆P
11. Area under F-t curve gives impulse. 33. v 2 − u 2 = 2as , a = µ g
J =V p = m(v − u ) 34. v 2 − u 2 = 2as , a = µ g
12. Area under F-t curve gives impulse. F F − µk mg
J =V p = m(v − u ) 35. Fnet = ma , a1 = , a2 =
m m
t
36. fk = µ k N , N = mg 37. F − f = ma , f = µk mg
13. J = ∫ F .dt , . J = m(v − u )
l µ
×100 = ×100
0
38.
1 L µ +1
14. ∆KE = m (v22 − v12 ), J =V p = m(v − u )
2 39. F = ma , a = g ( sin θ − µ K cos θ )
15. 0 0 of Apparent Change in weight
40. F = ma , a = g ( sin θ − µ K cos θ )
w − w1
= 2 × 100 , w = mg , w = m( g + a) 41. f k = µk N , f = µ K mg cos θ
w1 1 2
16. w1 = m( g + a ), w2 = m( g − a) , w3 = mg 42. F 1 = F − f k , F = mg ( sin θ + µ K cos θ )
17. w1 = m( g + a ), w2 = m( g − a) 43. F = mg sin ? – µ k mg cos ? ,
F a = g (sin ? – µ k cos ? )
18. Force on unit length = ; 44. f = mg sin ?
L
F 2l 2l
Force on l units of length = l 45. tsmooth = ; trough = g sin θ − µ cos θ
L g sin θ ( k )
F
Tension at ( L − l ) length = ( L − l ) 46. F cos θ = f k , f k = µk N , N = mg − F sin θ
L
19. Fnet = ma , T3 − T2 = m3 a , T2 − T1 = m2 a , T1 = m1a mv 2 mv 2 mv 2
47. F = 48. F = ,T =
solving the above equations,we get r r r
20. F = ma , Fnet = F − f , f = ma
T3 LEVEL – I (H.W)
a=
m1 + m2 + m3 , T2 = (m1 + m2 ) a
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
21. Fnet = ma ,From FBD of m1 , m1 g − T1 = m1a 1. A horizontal force "F" produces an
From FBD of m2 , T2 − m2 g = m2 a acceleration of 6 m / s 2 on a block resting on a
take T1 = T2 ,solving the above eq’s,we get ‘ a ’ smooth horizontal surface. The same force
m 2 − m1 m2 g
22. a = g m + m 23. F = ma , a = m + m produces an acceleration of 3 m / s 2 on a
1 2 1 2 second block resting on a smooth horizontal
24. mu = m1v1 + m2 v2 + m3v3 surface. If the two blocks are tied together
25. m1u1 + m2u2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v and the same force acts, the acceleration
produced will be
26. P3 = − ( P1 + P2 ) , P3 = P12 + P2 2 ,
1) 9 m / s 2 2) 2 m / s 2
m3v3 = (m1v1 ) + (m2 v2 )
2 2
3) 4 m / s 2 4) 1/ 2 m / s 2
F1 F2
27. According to Lami’s theorem sin α = sin β
50 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
2. A 0.2 kg object at rest is subjected to a force 1) 2mu towards the wall
( )
0.3iˆ − 0.4 ˆj N . What is its velocity vector
2) 2mu away from the wall
3) zero
after 6 sec 4) mu away from the wall
( )
1) 9iˆ − 12 ˆj ( )
2) 8iˆ − 16 ˆj
9. Bullets of 0.03 kg mass each hit a plate at the
rate of 200 bullets per second with a velocity
( )
3) 12iˆ − 9 ˆj ( )
4) 16iˆ − 8 ˆj
of 30 m/s. The average force acting on the
plate in newton is
3. A body of mass 2 kg is moving with a velocity 1) 120 2) 180 3) 300 4) 480
r
of u = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj m / s . A steady force 10. A vehicle of mass 10kg is moving with a
ur −1
velocity of 5 ms .To stop it in 1/10 sec the
F = iˆ − 2 ˆj N begins to act on it. After four
required force in opposite direction is
seconds , the body will be moving along.
1) 5000N 2) 500N 3) 50N 4) 1000N
1) X-axis with a velocity of 2 m/s
2) Y-axis with a velocity of 5 m/s IMPULSE
3) X-axis with a velocity of 5 m/s 11. An impulse is supplied to a moving object with
4) Y-axis with a velocity of 2 m/s the force at an angle1200 with the velocity
4. Three forces F 1 , F2 and F 3 are vector. The angle between the impulse vector
and the change in momentum vector is
simultaneously acting on a particle of mass 'm'
1) 1200 2) 00 3) 600 4) 2400
and keep it in equilibrium. If F 1 force 12. A 20 kg body is pushed with a force of 7N for
is reversed in direction only, the acceleration 1.5 sec then with a force of 5N for 1.7 sec and
of the particle will be. finally with a force of 10N for 3 sec, the total
1) F1 / m 2) 2 F1 / m impulse applied to the body and change in
3) − F1 / m 4) −2 F1 / m velocity will be
5. A block of metal weighing 2kg is resting on a 1) 49 Ns,12.5ms −1 2) 49 Ns, 2.45ms −1
frictionless plane. It is struck by a jet releasing 3) 98 Ns, 4.9ms −1 4) 4.9 Ns , 2.45ms −1
water at a rate of 1 kg/s and at a speed of 5 m/ 13. A body of mass 5 kg is acted upon by a net
s. The initial acceleration of the block will be force F which varies with time t as shown in
1) 2.5 m/s2 2) 5 m/s2 3) 10 m/s2 4)20 m/s2 graph, then the net momentum in SI units
6. A body of mass 2kg moving on a horizontal gained by the body at the end of 10 seconds is
surface with an initial velocity of 4 ms–1, comes
to rest after 2 second. If one wants to keep
this body moving on the same surface with a
velocity of 4ms–1, the force required is
1) zero 2) 2 N 3) 4 N 4) 8 N m1
7. Ten coins are placed on top of each other on a 8kg
horizontal table. If the mass of each coin is
10g and acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms −2 ,
30° m2
what is the magnitude and direction of the
th 1. 0 2. 100
force on the 7 coin (counting from the bottom) 3. 140 4. 200
due to all the coins above it? 14. A body is acted on by a force given by
1) 0.3 N downwards 2) 0.3 N upwards
3) 0.7 N downwards 4) 0.7 N upwards F = (10 + 2t ) N . The impulse received by the
8. A ball of mass ’m’ moves normal to a wall with body during the first four seconds is
a velocity ‘u’ and rebounds with the same 1) 40 N s 2) 56 N s
speed. The change in momentum of the ball 3) 72 N s 4) 32 N s
during the rebounding is
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
15. A unidirectional force F varying with time t as 21. Three equal masses A, B and C are pulled with
shown in the Fig. acts on a body initially a constant force F. They are connected to each
at rest for a short duration 2T. Then the other with strings. The ratio of the tension
velocity acquired by the body is
between AB and BC is
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 3) 3 : 1 4) 1 : 1
22. A coin is dropped in a lift. It takes time t1 to
π F0T π F0T FT reach the floor when lift is stationary. It takes
1) 2) 3) 0 4) zero time t2 when lift is moving up with constant
4m 2m 4m
16. If the average velocity of a body moving with acceleration. Then
uniform acceleration under the action of a
force is “v” and the impulse it receives during 1) t1 > t2 2) t2 > t1 3) t1 = t2 4) t1 ≥ t 2
a displacement of “s” is “I”, the constant force
acting on the body is given by 23. A light string passing over a smooth light
I ×v 2I × v I ×v I ×s pulley connects two blocks of masses m1 and
1) 2) 3) 4) m2 (vertically). If the acceleration of the
2s s s v
system is g/8, then the ratio of masses is
OBJECTS SUSPENDED BY
1) 8:1 2) 4:3 3) 5:3 4) 9:7
STRINGS AND APPARENT WEIGHT
17. A 6.0kg object is suspended by a vertical 24. A pendulum bob is hanging from the roof of
string from the ceiling of an elevator which is an elevator with the help of a light string. When
accelerating upward at a rate of 2.2 ms −2 .the the elevator moves up with uniform
tension in the string is acceleration ‘a’ the tension in the string is
1) 11N 2) 72N 3) 48N 4)59N T1 .When the elevator moves down with the
18. A young man of mass 60 kg stands on the floor
of a lift which is accelerating downwards at same acceleration, the tension in the string
1 m / s 2 then the reaction of the floor of the lift is T2 .If the elevator were stationary, the
on the man is (Take g = 9.8 m / s 2 ) tension in the string would be
1) 528 N 2) 540 N 3) 546N 4) none
19. Three masses of 16 kg, 8 kg and 4kg are T1 + T2 T1T2 2T1T2
placed in contact as shown in Figure. If a force 1) 2) T1 + T2 3) T + T 4) T + T
2 1 2 1 2
of 140 N is applied on 4kg mass, then the force
on 16kg will be 25. Three bodies are lying on a frictionless
horizontal table and these are connected as
shown in the figure. They are pulled towards
right with a force T3 = 60 N If m1, m2 and m3 are
1) 140 N 2) 120 N 3) 100 N 4) 80 N equal to 10 kg,20kg and 30kg respectively,
20. A body of mass M is being pulled by a string
then the values of T1 and T2 will be
of mass m with a force P applied at one end.
The force exerted by the string on the body is
Pm PM
1) ( M + m ) 2) ( M + m )
P 1)10N,10N 2)30N,10N
3) Pm ( M + m ) 4) ( M − m ) 3)10N,30N 4)30N,30N
52 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
LAW OF CONSERVATION OF 34. A block of weight 100N is pushed by a force
F on a horizontal rough plane moving with
MOMENTUM an acceleration 1 m/s2, when force is doubled
26. A bullet of mass 20gm is fired from a riffle of its acceleration becomes 10m/s2. The
mass 8 kg with a velocity of 100m/s. The coefficient of friction is (g=10ms–2)
velocity of recoil of the rifle is 1) 0.4 2) 0.6 3) 0.5 4) 0.8
1) 0.25 m/s 2) 25 m/s 3) 2.5 m/s 4) 250 m/s
35. A block of mass 5kg is lying on a rough
27. A space craft of mass 2000 kg moving with a
horizontal surface. The coefficient of static and
velocity of 600m/s suddenly explodes into two
pieces. One piece of mass 500 kg is left kinetic friction are 0.3 and 0.1 and g = 10ms −2 .
stationary. The velocity of the other part must If a horizontal force of 50N is applied on the
be ( in m/s) block, the frictional force is
1) 600 2) 800 3)1500 4) 1000 1)25N 2)5N 3)10N 4)Zero
28. A person weighing 60 kg in a small boat of
36. A heavy uniform chain lies on horizontal table
mass 140 kg which is at rest, throws a 5 kg
stone in the horizontal direction with a velocity top. If the coefficient of friction between the
of 14 ms -1 . The velocity of the boat chain and the table surface is 0.5, the maxi-
immediately after the throw is ( in m/s) mum percentage of the length of the chain that
1) 1.2 2) 0.5 3) 0.35 4) 0.65 can hang over one edge of the table is
LAWS OF FRICTION 1) 20% 2) 33.3% 3)76% 4) 50%
29. A body of mass 60kg is pushed with just MOTION OF A BODY ON THE INCLINED
enough force to start it moving on a rough
surface with µ s = 0.5 and µ k = 0.4 and the
PLANE
force continues to act afterwards. The 37. A body is sliding down an inclined plane
acceleration of the body is ( in m/sec2 ) forming an angle 300 with the horizontal. If
1) 0.98 2) 3.92 3) 4.90 4) Zero the coefficient of friction is0.3 then acceleration
30. If the coefficient of friction is 3 , the angle of of the body is
friction is 1)1.25. ms −2 2) 2.35ms −2 3) 3.4ms −2 4) 4.9ms −2
1) 300 2) 60 0 3) 450 4) 37 0 38. In the above problem its velocity after 3
MOTION ON A HORIZONTAL ROUGH seconds in ms −1 is
SURFACE 1)7.05 2)14.7 3)29.4 4) zero
31. The coefficient of friction between a car wheels 39. In the above problem its displacement after 3
and a roadway is 0.5 The least distance in seconds is
which the car can accelerate from rest to a 1)78.4m 2)44.15m 3)10.57m 4)Zero
speed of 72 kmph is (g=10 ms −2 ) 40. A block sliding down on a rough 450 inclined
1)0m 2)20m 3)30m 4)40m plane has half the velocity it would have been,
32. An eraser weighing 2N is pressed against the the inclined plane is smooth.The coefficient
black board with a force of 5N. The coefficient of sliding friction between the block and the
of friction is 0.4. How much force parallel to inclined plane is
the black board is required to slide the eraser
upwards 1 3 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) 2N 2)2.8N 3)4N 4) 4.8N 4 4 2 2 2
33. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when 41. A cube of weight 10N rests on a rough inclined
given a velocity of 6ms −1 is stopped by friction plane of slope 3 in 5. The coefficient of friction
in 10 s. Then the coefficient of friction is is 0.6. The minimum force necessary to start
( g = 10ms −2 ) the cube moving up the plane is
1) 0.02 2)0.03 3)0.06 4)0.01 1)5.4N 2)10.8N 3) 2.7N 4) 18N
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
CIRCULAR MOTION 12. J = F × t , J = F1t1 + F2 t2 + F3t3 , J = m(v − u )
42. A body moves along a circular path of radius 13. Impulse=Area under F-t curve ; J = m(v − u )
5 m.The coefficient of friction between the 14. J = ∫ F .dt
surface of the path and the body is 0.5.The
angular velocity in rad/s with which the body 15. From O to T, area is ( + ) ve and from T to 2T,,
should move so that it does not leave the path area is ( − ) ve , net area is zero, hence, no chang in
is (g=10 ms–2) momentum.
1) 4 2) 3 3) 2 4) 1 s
43. A van is moving with a speed of 72 Kmph on a 16. J = F × t , t = 17.T=m(g+a)
v
level road,where the coefficient of friction F
between tyres and road is 0.5.The minimum 18. R = m( g − a ) 19. F = ma , a =
m1 + m2 + m3
radius of curvature,the road must have,for safe
F F
driving of van is 20. F = ma , a = = ;T = Ma
1) 80 m 2) 40 m 3) 20 m 4) 4 m M M +m
44. What is the smallest radius of a circle at which 21. F − T1 = m1a, T1 − T2 = m2 a, T2 = m3 a
a bicyclist can travel if his speed is 2h
7 m/s and the coefficient of static friction the 22. For stationary lift t1 = g
and when the lift is mov-
between tyres and road is 0.25 2h
1) 10 m 2)20 m 3)5 m 4)15 m ing up with constant acceleration t2 = g + a
LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY m −m
23. a = m + m g
1 2
1) 2 2) 1 3) 3 4) 4 5) 1 6) 3
1 2
7) 1 8) 2 9) 2 10) 1 11) 2 12) 2
24. T1 = m( g + a), T2 = m( g − a ), T = mg
13) 3 14) 2 15) 4 16) 3 17) 2 18) 1
19)4 20)2 21)2 22) 1 23) 4 24) 1 25. T3 − T2 = m3 a ,
25) 3 26) 1 27) 2 28) 3 29) 1 30) 2 T3
T2 − T1 = m2 a , T1 = m1a , a = m + m + m
31) 4 32) 3 33) 3 34) 4 35) 2 36) 2 1 2 3
37) 2 38) 1 39) 3 40) 2 41) 2 42) 4 26. MU = m1v1 + m2v2 27. MU = m1v1 + m2v2
43) 1 44) 2 28. m1u1+m2u2=m1v1+m2v2
LEVEL - I (H.W) - HINTS 29. FR = f s − f k ,a = ( µ s – µ k) g 30. µ = tan θ
ur 31. v 2 − u 2 = 2as , a = µk g
1 1 1 r F r r r
1. F = ma , a = a + a 2. a = , v = u + at . 32. F 1 = f s + mg , f s = µ s mg 33. v = u + at , a = µk g
1 2 m
3. v = u + at , F = ma 34. FR = F − f , f = µ k mg
r r r 35. f s = µ S N , f k = µ k N , N = mg
4. Under equilibrium condition F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
l µ 37. a = g (sin θ − µk cosθ )
− F1 + F2 + F3 36. × 100 = × 100
µ +1
F1 = −( F1 + F2 ) , a = L
m 38. v = u + at , a = g (sin θ − µk cos θ )
dp dm F
5. F = ,F =v ,a= 1
39. S = ut + at , a = g (sin θ − µk cosθ )
2
dt dt m 2
6. v = u + at , F = ma 40. v 2 − u 2 = 2as
7. Force on the seventh coin = weight of the three
coins above it. F = 3mg VR = 2 gl (sin θ − µk cos θ ), VS = 2 gl sin θ
dp mnv 41. F = ma , F = mg ( sin θ + µk cos θ )
8. ∆P = m ( v − u ) 9. F= ,F =
dt t mv 2 2
mv
dp m (v − u ) 42. F = µ s N , = µ mg 43. F = µ s N , = µ mg
10. F = ,F = r 2
r
dt t v
⇒r=
44. mv = µ mg , v = µ rg
2
11. Both the impulse and change in momentum are in µs g
same direction. r
54 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
LEVEL-II (C.W) 5. If F = F0 (1 − e −t / λ ) , the F-t graph is
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
1. The momenta of a body in two perpendicular
directions at any time't' are given by
3t 2
PX = 2t 2 + 6 and PY = + 3 .The force acting
2
on the body at t = 2 sec is
1) 5 units 2) 2 units 3) 10 units 4) 15 units
2. When a force F acts on a body of mass m,
the acceleration produced in the body is a.
If three equal forces F1 = F2 = F3 = F act on
the same body as shown in figure the 6. Three forces 2 0 2 N , 2 0 2 N and 40N are
acceleration produced is acting along X, Y and Z – axes respectively
on a 5 2 k g mass at rest at the origin. The
magnitude of its displacement after 5s is,
1) 50m 2) 25m 3) 60m 4) 100m
7. A horizontal jet of water coming out of a pipe
of area of cross-section 20cm 2 hits a vertical
wall with a velocity of 10ms −1 and rebounds
with the same speed. The force exerted by
water on the wall is,
1) 0.2 N 2) 10 N 3) 400 N 4) 200 N
8. A rocket of mass 40 kg has 160 kg fuel.The
1) ( )
2 − 1 a 2) ( )
2 + 1 a 3) 2a 4) a
exhaust velocity of the fuel is 2 kms −1 .The rate
of consumption of fuel is 4 kgs −1 .Calculate the
3. Two blocks of masses m and M are placed on ultimate vertical speed gained by the rocket.
a horizontal frictionless table connected by −1
1)2.82 kms −1 2)4.82 kms 3)3.61 kms −1 4)5.62 kms
−1
light spring as shown in the figure . Mass M 9. A body of mass 5kg starts from the origin with
is pulled to the right with a force F. If the an initial velocity ur = 30iˆ + 40 ˆjms −1 . If a con-
acceleration of mass m is a ,then the r
acceleration of mass M will be (AIEEE-2007) ( )
stant force F = − iˆ + 5 ˆj N acts on the body,,
the time in which the y − component of the
velocity becomes zero is
1) 5s 2) 20s 3) 40s 4) 80s
( F − ma ) ( F + ma )
F am 10. A professional diver of mass 60 kg performs
1) 2) 3)
4) a dive from a platform 10 m above the water
M M M M
surface. Find the magnitude of the average
4. The displacement of a body moving along a
impact force experienced by him if the impact
straight line is given by : S = bt n , where 'b' is time is 1s on collision with water
a constant and 't' is time. For what value of 'n' surface.Assume that the velocity of the diver
the body moves under the action of constant just after entering the water surface is
force? 4 ms −1 .(g=10 ms −2 )
1) 3/2 2) 1 3) 2 4) 1/2
1) 240N 2) 600N 3) 300N 4) 60N
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
11. An open knife edge of mass 200 g is dropped m M
from height 5m on a cardboard. If the knife + M .F + m .F
edge penetrates distance 2m into the card 1) 2 2) 2
board, the average resistance offered by the m+M m+M
cardboard to the knife edge is (g = 10m/s2) M .F
3) zero 4)
1) 7 N 2) 25 N 3) 35 N 4) None m+M
12. six forces lying in a plane and forming angles 16. A ball is suspended by a thread from the ceiling
of 600 relative to one another are applied to of a tram car. The brakes are applied and the
the centre of a homogeneous sphere with a speed of the car changes uniformly from 36
mass m=6kg. These forces are radially kmh–1 to zero in 5 s. The angle by which the
outward and consecutively 1N,2N,3N,4N,5N ball deviates from the vertical is (g = 10 ms–2)
and 6N. The acceleration of the sphere is −1 1 −1
1
1) 0 2) 1/2 m/s2 3) 1m/s2 4) 2 m/s2 1) tan 3 2) sin 5
IMPULSE −1 1 −1 1
3) tan 5 4) cot 3
13. A particle of mass m, initially at rest is acted
upon by a variable force F for a brief interval 17. A block is kept on a frictionless inclined
of time T. It begins to move with a velocity u surface with angle of inclination α . The
after the force stops acting. F is shown in the incline is given an acceleration ‘a’ to keep the
graph as a function of time. The curve is a block stationary. Then ‘a’ is equal to
semicircle. Then
g
1) 2) g cos ecα
tan α
π F02 πT 2 3) g 4) g tan α
1) u = 2) u = 18. A man sits on a chair supported by a rope
2m 8m
passing over a frictionless fixed pulley. The
π F0T π F0T
3) u = 4) u = man who weighs 1,000 N exerts a force of 450
4m 2m N on the chair downwards while pulling the
14. A ball of mass 0.2kg strikes an obstacle and rope on the other side. If the chair weighs
moves at 600 to its original direction. If its speed 250N, then the acceleration of the chair is
also changes from 20m/s to 10m/s, the magnitude 1) 0.45 m / s 2 2) 0
of the impulse received by the ball is
1) 2 7 N s 2) 2 3 N s 3) 2 5 N s 4) 3 2 N s 3) 2 m / s 2 4) 9 / 25 m / s 2
OBJECTS SUSPENDED BY 19. A balloon of mass M is descending at a constant
acceleration α . When a mass m is released from
STRINGS AND APPARENT WEIGHT the balloon it starts rising with the same
15. The block is placed on a frictionless surface in acceleration α . Assuming that its volume does
gravity free space. A heavy string of a mass m
is connected and force F is applied on the string, not change, what is the value of m?
then the tension at the middle of rope is α 2α
1) M 2) M
α+g α+g
α+g α+g
3) M 4) M
α 2α
56 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
20. A monkey of mass 40 kg climbs on a massless 25. In the following figure, the pulley is massless
rope of breaking strength 600 N. The rope will and frictionless. There is no friction between
break ifthe m onkey. (Take g = 10 m /s2) the body and the floor. The acceleration
1) climbs up with a uniform speed of 6m / s produced in the body when it is displaced
through a certain distance with force ‘P’ will be
2) climbs up with an acceleration of 6 m / s 2
3) climbs down with an acceleration of 4 m / s 2
4) climbs down with a uniform speed of 5 m / s
21. Two persons are holding a rope of negligible
weight tightly at its ends so that it is horizontal.
A 15 kg weight is attached to rope at the P P P P
midpoint which now no more remains 1) 2) 3) 4)
M 2M 3M 4M
horizontal. The minimum tension required to
completely straighten the rope is 26. Two identical blocks each of mass “M” are
1) 150 N 2) 75 N 3) 50 N 4) Infinitely large tied to the ends of a string and the string is
22. A straight rope of length 'L' is kept on a laid over a smooth fixed pulley. Initially the
frictionless horizontal surface and a force 'F' masses are held at rest at the same level. What
is applied to one end of the rope in the direction fraction of mass must be removed from one
of its length and away from that end. The block and added to the other , so that it has an
tension in the rope at a distance 'l' from that acceleration of 1/ 5th of the acceleration due
end is to gravity
F LF l l 1.1/10 2.1/5 3.2/5 4.1/20
1) 2) 3) 1 − F 4) 1 + F
l l L L 27. In the given arrangement, n number of equal
masses are connected by strings of negligible
23. Consider three blocks of masses m1 , m2 , m3
masses. The tension in the string connected
interconnected by strings which are pulled by
to nth mass is :
a common force F on a frictionless horizontal
table as in the figure. The tension T1 and T2
are also indicated
a) T2 > T1 if m2 > m1
b) T2 = T1 if m2 = m1 c) T2 > T1 always
F mMg mMg
d) acceleration of the system = m + m + m 1) 2) 3) mg 4) mng
1 2 3 nm + M nmM
1) a, b 2) b, d 3) a, d 4) c, d 28. A 40 N block is supported by two ropes. One
24. A railway engine of mass 50 tons is pulling a rope is horizontal and the other makes an angle
wagon of mass 40 tons with a force of 4500N. of 300 with the ceiling. The tension in the rope
The resistance force acting is 1N per ton. The
attached to the ceiling is approximately :
tension in the coupling between the engine
1) 80 N 2) 40 N 3) 34.6 N 4) 46.2 N
and the wagon is
1) 1600 N 2) 2000 N 3) 200 N 4) 1500N
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
29. The pulley arrangements shown in figure are 32. A block of mass 3kg which is on a smooth
identical, the mass of the rope being negligible. inclined plane making an angie of 300 to the
In case I,the mass m is lifted by attaching a horizontal is connected by cord passing over
mass 2m to the other end of rope with a light frictionless pulley to second block of
constant downward force F = 2mg, where g is
mass 2kg hanging vertically. What is the
acceleration due to gravity. The acceleration
acceleration of each block and what is the
of mass m in case I is
tension of the cord?
1) 0.98 m/s2; 17.6N 2) 1.98 m/s2; 19.6N
3) 0.49 m/s2; 9.8N 4) 1.47 m/s2; 4.9N
33. If m 1 = 10kg,m 2 = 4kg,m3 = 2kg, the
acceleration of system is
F = 2mg
m
m
2m
1) zero 2) more than that in case II
3)less than that in case II 4)equal to that in case II
30. Two masses of 10 kg and 5 kg are suspended
from a rigid support as shown in figure. The
system is pulled down with a force of 150 N 1) 5g/2 2) 5g/3 3) 5g/8 4)5g/14
attached to the lower mass. The string
attached to the support breaks and the system 34. The string between blocks of masses ‘m’ and
accelerates downwards. ‘2m’ is massless and inextensible.The system
is suspended by a massless spring as shown. If
the string is cut, the magnitudes of accelerations
of masses 2m and m (immediately after cutting)
In case the force continues to act.what will be
the tension acting between the two masses?
1) 300 N 2) 200 N 3) 100 N 4) zero
31. Two bodies of masses 3kg and 2kg are
connected by a long string and the string is
made to pass over a smooth fixed pulley. g g g g
1) g , g 2) g , 3) ,g 4) ,
Initially the bodies are held at the same level 2 2 2 2
and released from rest. The velocity of the 3kg
body after one second is (g=10m/ s 2 )
1)2m/s 2) 1m/s 3) 0.4m/s 4) 4m/s
58 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
35. All surfaces are smooth. The acceleration of while still moving in air. The value of
mass m relative to the wedge is
( m1vr11 + m2vr21 ) − ( m1vr1 + m2vr2 ) is
1) zero 2) ( m1 + m2 ) gt0
1
3) 2 ( m1 + m2 ) gt0 4) ( m1 + m2 ) gt0
2
EQUILIBRIUM OF A PARTICLE
40. Two masses M 1 and M 2 connected by means
of a string which is made to pass over light,
1) g sin θ 2) g sin θ + a cos θ smooth pulley are in equilibrium on a fixed
smooth wedge as shown in figure. If θ = 600
3) g sin θ − a cosθ 4) a cos θ
and α = 300 ,then the ratio of M 1 to M 2 is
LAW OF CONSERVATION OF
MOMENTUM
36. A bullet of mass 10 gm moving with a
horizontal velocity 100m/s passes through a
wooden block of mass 100 gm. The block is
resting on a smooth horizontal floor. After
passing through the block the velocity of the
bullet is 10m/s. the velocity of the emerging
bullet with respect to the block is
1) 10 m/s 2) 9 m/s 3) 1 m/s. 4) 5 m/s 1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 3
37. A shell is fired from the ground at an angle θ
3) 1: 3 4) 3 :1
with horizontal with a velocity 'v'. At its highest
point it breaks into two equal fragments. If one 41. If ‘O’ is at equilibrium then the values of the
fragment comes back through its initial line of tension T1 and T2 respectively.
motion with same speed, then the speed of the
second fragment will be
T1
1) 3v cos θ 2) 3v cos θ / 2
3) 2v cos θ 4) 3v cos θ / 2
38. Two trolleys of masses m and 3m are con-
nected by a spring. They are compressed and
released, they move off in opposite direction 1500
O
and come to rest after covering distances s1 600
and s2 respectively. If the frictional force be- T2
tween trolley and surface is same in both the
cases then the ratio of distances s1 : s2 is
1) 1:9 2) 1:3 3) 3:1 4) 9:1 20N
39. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 in projec- 1) 20N, 30N 2) 20 3 N,20N
r r
tile motion have velocities v1 and v2 respec- 3) 20 3 N,20 3 N 4) 10N, 30N
tively at time t = 0 . They collide at time t0 .
r r
Their velocities become v11 and v21 at time 2t0
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
42. A 1N pendulum bob is held at an angle θ erating with 1m / s 2 . If µ s is 0.2, the net force
from the vertical by a 2 N horizontal force F on the man and the maximum acceleration of
as shown in the figure. The tension in the string the belt so that the man is stationary relative
to the belt are ( g = 10m / s )
supporting the pendulum bob (in newton) is 2
(2011E)
1) zero, 2m / s 2 2) 65 N , 2m / s 2
3) zero, 1m / s 2 4) 65 N ,1m / s 2
48. A man of mass 60kg sitting on ice pushes a
block of mass of 12kg on ice horizontally with
a speed of 5ms −1 .The coefficient of friction
between the man and ice and between block
and ice is 0.2. If g = 10ms −2 ,the distance
between man and the block, when they come
to rest is
2 1)6m 2)6.5m 3) 3m 4)7m
1) cosθ 2) 3) 5 4)1
cosθ 49. A vehicle of mass M is moving on a rough
MOTION ON A HORIZONTAL horizontal road with a momentum P. If the
coefficient of friction between the tyres and
ROUGH SURFACE the road is µ , then the stopping distance is
43. The coefficient of friction between a (EAM-2012)
hemispherical bowl and an insect is 0.44 P2
P P2 P
and the radius of the bowl is 0.6m. The 1) 2) 3) 2 4)
2µ Mg 2µ Mg 2µ M g 2µ M 2 g
maximum height to which an insect can crawl
in the bowl will be 50. The rear side of a truck is open and a box of
1) 0.4m 2) 0.2m 3) 0.3m 4) 0.1m 40 kg mass is placed 5 m away from the open
44. A 500 kg horse pulls a cart of mass 1500 kg end as shown in figure. The coefficient of fric-
along a level road with an acceleration of tion between the box the surface below it is
1 m/s2. If coefficient of sliding friction is 0.2, 0.15. On a straight road, the truck starts from
then force exerted by the earth on horse is rest and accelerates with 2ms −2 . At what dis-
1)3000N 2)4000N 3)5000 N 4)6000N
tance from the starting point does the box fall
45. An aeroplane requires for take off a speed
of 108 kmph the run on the ground being from the truck? (Ignore the size of the box.)
100m. Mass of the plane is 104kg and the
coefficient of friction between the plane and
the ground is 0.2. Assuming the plane
accelerates uniformly the minimum force
required is ( g = 10ms −2 )
1) 2 x 104 N 2) 2.43 x 104 N
1) 20m 2) 10m 3) 20m 4) 5m
3) 6.5 x 10 N 4) 8.86 x 104 N
4
46. A duster weighs 0.5N. It is pressed against a 51. A grinding machine whose wheel has a radius
vertical board with a horizontal force of 11N. If 1
of is rotating at 2.5 rev/sec. A tool to be
the co-efficient of friction is 0.5 the minimum π
force that must be applied on the duster parallel sharpened is held against the wheel with a
to the board to move it upwards is force of 40N. If the coefficient of friction be-
1) 0.4 N 2) 0.7 N 3) 6 N 4) 7 N tween the tool and the wheel is 0.2, power re-
47. A man of mass 65 kg. is standing stationary quired is
with respect to a conveyor belt which is accel- 1) 40 W 2) 4 W 3) 8 W 4) 10 W
60 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
52. A block A of mass 3kg and another block B of tion is doubled for the same length of the plane,
mass 2 kg are connected by a light inextensible what will be the velocity of the body on reach-
string as shown in figure. If the coefficient of ing the ground
friction between the surface of the table and A
1 1
is 0.5. What maximum mass C is to be placed 1)v 2) 2v 3) ( 2cos θ ) 2 v 4) ( 2sin θ ) 2 v
on A so that the system is to be in equlibrium?
57. The force required to move a body up a rough
inclined plane is double the force required to
prevent the body from sliding down the plane.
The coefficient of friction when the angle of
inclination of the plane is 600 is (EAM - 2014)
1 1 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 3 2 3
58. A smooth block is released from rest on a 450
1) 3kg 2) 2kg 3) 1kg 4) 4kg
inclined plane and it slides a distance ‘d’. The
Motion Of A Body On The Inclined Plane time taken to slide is n times that on a smooth
53. A block slides down a rough inclined plane of inclined plane. The coefficient of friction
slope angle θ with a constant velocity. It is (2010E)
then projected up the same plane with an initial
velocity v. The distance travelled by the 1 1
block up the plane before coming to rest is 1) µ k = 1 − 2) µ k = 1 −
n2 n2
2
v2 v2 v 4 gv 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 1 1
4gsin? 2gsin? gsin? sin? 3) µ k = 4) µ k =
1− n 2
1 − n2
54. The minimum force required to start pushing
a body up a rough (frictional coefficient µ ) 59. The upper half of an inclined plane of
inclination ‘ θ ’ is perfectly smooth while the
inclined plane is F1 while the minimum force
lower half is rough. A block starting from rest
needed to prevent it from sliding down is F2 . at the top of the plane will again come to rest
If the inclined plane makes an angle θ with at the bottom. The coefficient of friction
between the block and the lower half of the
the horizontal such that tan θ = 2 µ , then the
plane is given by (2013E)
F1 2
ratio F is (AIEEE-2011) 1) µ = 2 tan θ 2) µ =
2 tan θ
1) 4 2) 1 3) 2 4) 3 1
55. The horizontal acceleration that should be 3) µ = tan θ 4) µ =
tan θ
given to a smooth inclined plane of angle
60. A 30 kg box has to move up an inclined plane
1 of slope 300 to the horizontal with a uniform
sin–1 to keep an object stationary on the
l velocity of 5 ms-1.If the frictional force retarding
plane, relative to the inclined plane is the motion is 150N, the horizontal force required
to move the box up is(g=10ms-2)
g l2 −1 g
1) 2) g l 2 − 1 3) 4)
l 2 −1 g l +1
2 2 3
1) 300× N 2) 300× N
56. A body is released from the top of a smooth 3 2
inclined plane of inclination θ . It reaches the 3) 300N 4) 150N
bottom with velocity v . If the angle of inclina-
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
PULLING / PUSHING A BODY v 2b rb vb 2 vb
61. A block weighing 10kg is at rest on a 1) 2) 3) 4) 2
Rg Rg Rg R g
horizontal table. The coefficient of static 66. The centripetal force required for a 1000 kg
friction between the block and the table is car travelling at 36 kmph to take a turn by 900
0.5. If a force acts downward at 60º with the in travelling along an arc of length 628 m is
horizontal, how large can it be without 1) 250 N 2) 500 N 3) 1000 N 4) 125 N
causing the block to move? (g = 10ms–2) 67. A small coin is placed on a flat horizontal turn
1) 346 N 2)446 N 3) 746 N 4)846 N table. The turn table is observed to make three
62. A pulling force making an angle θ with the revolutions in 3.14 sec. What is the coefficient
horizontal is applied on a block of weight W of static friction between the coin and turn
placed on a horizontal table. If the angle of table if the coin is observed to slide off the
turn table when it is greater than 10cm from
friction is φ , the magnitude of the force
the centre of turn table
required to move the body is equal to 1) 0.4 2) 0.36 3) 4 4) 0.004
WCosφ W sin φ 68. A particle of mass m is suspended from the
1) Cos(θ − φ ) 2) Cos(θ − φ ) ceiling through a string of length L. The par-
ticle moves in a horizontal circle of radius r .
WTanφ WSinφ The speed of the particle is
3) Sin (θ − φ ) 4) Tan(θ − φ )
r g r g mgL
rg 1
( L2 − r ) ( L2 − r ) 4) ( L2 − r 2 ) 2
1
63. A block of mass 3 kg is kept on a frictional 1) 2) 3) 1
L2 − r 2
2 4 2 2
1
surface with µ = . The minimum force to 69. Three point masses each of mass m are joined
2 3 together using a string to form an equilateral
be applied as shown to move the block is triangle of side a . The system is placed on a
smooth horizontal surface and rotated with a
constant angular velocity ω about a vertical
axis passing through the centroid. Then the
tension in each string is
maω 2 maω 2
1) maω 2 2) 3maω 2 3) 4)
3 3
1) 5N 2) 20 N 3) 10 N 4) 20/3 N
PREVIOUS EAMCET QUESTIONS
70. A steel wire can withstand a load up to 2940N.
CIRCULAR MOTION
A load of 150kg is suspended from a rigid
64. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of
support. The maximum angle which the wire
radius 10 m with a constant speed of 10ms −1 .A can be displaced from the mean position , so
plumb bob is suspended from the roof of the that the wire does not break when the load
car by a string of length 1m. The angle made passes through the position of equilibrium is
by the string with vertical is ( g = 10ms −2 ) (EAM - 2008)
0 0
1) 30 2) 60 3) 80 4) 850
0
1) 00 2) 300 3) 450 4) 600 71. A car is travelling along a curved road of
65. A vehicle is moving with a velocity v on a radius r. If the coefficient of friction between
curved road of width b and radius of curva- the tyres and the road is µ , the car will skid
ture R . For counteracting the centrifugal force
if its speed exceeds (2010M)
on the vehicle the difference in elevation re-
quired in between the outer and inner edges 1) 2 µ rg 2) 3µ rg 3) 2 µ rg 4) µ rg
of the road is
62 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
72. A boy of mass 50 kg is standing on a weighing 14. ∆Px = m(vx − ux ) , ∆Py = mv y ,
machine placed on the floor of a lift. The
J = ∆P = ∆px2 + ∆p y2
machine reads his weight in newtons. The
reading of the machine if the lift is moving F m
15. F = ma , a = , T = + M a
upwards with uniform speed of 10 ms-1 M +m 2
(2009M) a
1) 510 N 2) 480 N 3) 490 N 4) 500 N 16. v = u + at , tan θ = 17. ma cos α = mg sin α
g
LEVEL-II (C.W) - KEY 18. For man : T + F − W p = m p a
01) 3 02) 1 03) 1 04) 3 05) 3 06)4
07) 3 08) 1 09) 3 10) 2 11) 1 12)3 For chair : T − F − Wc = mc a
13) 3 14) 2 15) 1 16) 3 17) 4 18)3 19. While descending, Mg − FB = M α
19) 2 20) 2 21) 4 22) 3 23) 4 24)2 While ascending FB − ( M − m ) g = ( M − m ) α
25) 2 26) 2 27) 1 28) 1 29) 3 30)3 Where ‘ FB ’is the buoyant force
31) 1 32) 1 33) 3 34) 3 35) 2 36)3 20. To move up with an acceleration a the monkey
37) 1 38) 4 39) 3 40)3 41) 2 42)3 will push the rope downwards with a force of ma.
43) 4 44) 4 45) 3 46)3 47) 1 48)2 Tmax = mg + mamax
49) 3 50) 1 51) 1 52)3 53) 1 54)4
55) 1 56) 3 57) 2 58) 1 59) 1 60)1
21. T = F , 2T cos θ = mg
To make rope straight, θ = 900
61) 3 62) 2 63)2 64) 3 65) 1 66)1
67) 2 68) 2 69) 3 70) 2 71) 4 72)3 22. F − T = m1a , T = m2 a
Fnet
23. F = ma a = M , T1 = m1a , T2 = ( m1 + m2 ) a
LEVEL-II (C.W) - HINTS
Fnet
1. Fx =
dPx dP
, Fy = y , F = Fx 2 + Fy 2
24. F = ma , a = m + m ,
1 2
dt dt
For engine F − f − T = m1a
2.
F
m
( )
a = , FR = F12 + F22 − F3 , a1 = R
F
m 25. F = ma , 2T = p, a = m
T
3. For mass ‘m’ , F 1 = ma
For mass ‘M’ F − F 1 = Ma1 m1 − m2
26. F = ma , a = g
d 2S m1 + m2
4. F = ma , F = m 2 = constant
dt
5. For t=0,F=0 ; For t = λ , F = 0.63F0
F 1 2 dp
6. a = R , S = ut + at 7. F = , F = 2 ρ AV 2
m 2 dt
m0
8. u0 = − gt , V = uo + u log e 27.
m
F
9. V = u + at , a =
m
dp m(v − u ) from diagram mg − T = ma → (1) , T = nma → (2)
10. v − u = 2as , F = =
2 2
dt t for nth block Tn = ma
11. u = 2 gh ,using v − u = 2as retardation due to air
2 2
28. T1 = F cos θ , T2 = F sin θ , T = T12 + T2 2
resistance a1 = g + a m1 − m2
Force due to air resistance = Ma ' 29. F = ma , a = g m + m ,F –T = 0 and
12. Find net force and hence, a=Fnet/m 1 2
T = 2mg also T–mg = ma1 Finally a < a1
13. Impulse = Area of semi circle
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
F FUp = mg ( sin θ + µ k cos θ ) ,
30. F = ma , a = , T = m (a − g ) 54. .
m Fdown = mg ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
m1 − m2 55. Resolve mg and pseudo force into components
31. F = ma , a = g , v=u+at At equilibrium mg sin θ = ma cos θ
m1 + m2
32. m1 g − T = m1a, T − m2 g sin θ = m2 a 56. v = 2 gl sin θ , v1 = 2 gl sin 2θ
33. F = ma ; m1 g − T1 = m1a, T1 + m2 g sin θ − T2 = m2 a FUp = mg ( sin θ + µk cos θ ) ,
Fdown = mg ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
57.
T2 − m2 g = m3 a
34.For m1 , F = ma = m1 g ;For m2 , T − m2 g = m2 a1 58. µ k = tan θ (1 −
1
)
n2
35. F = ma , a = g sin θ + a cos θ
59. Vrough = 2 gl ( sin θ − µk cos θ ) ,
36. m1u1 =m1 v1 +m 2 v 2 , vrel = v1 − v2
2 Vsmooth = 2 gl sin θ
s1 v1
37. mu = m1v1 + m2v2 38. m1v1 = m2v2 , = 60. F cos θ = mg sin θ + f , f = µ s N
s2 v2
61. F cos θ = f , f = µ s N , N = mg + F sin θ
39. mv1 = m(u + at )
62. N + P sin θ = mg , f = µk N
m1v11 + m2v12 = m [ v1 + 2 gt0 ] + m [ v2 + 2 gt0 ] 63. N = mg + F sin θ , F cos θ = f , f = µ N
40. m1 g sin θ = m2 g sin α v2 h v2
64. tan θ = 65. sin θ = , tan θ =
41. T1 sin θ1 = T2 cos θ 2 , T1 cos θ1 = T2 sin θ 2 + mg rg b rg
42. T cos θ = W , T sin θ = F , T = W 2 + F 2 66. F =
mv 2
,r =
l
67. f = mrω 2 , f = µ mg
r θ
1 F mg
43. h = r (1 − cos θ ) = r 1 − 68. r = 2 2 69. F = mrω 2 , F = 3T
µs 2 + 1 L −r
70. In equilibrium, T cos θ = mg
44. Force of friction F1 = µ ( m1 + m2 ) g mv 2
force producing acceleration 71. = µ mg , vmax = µ s rg
r
F2 = ( m1 + m2 ) a 72. When lift moves up or down with uniform speed
The apparent weight = real weight
Total force applied by the horse = F1 + F2 W=mg
45. F − µ k mg = ma, v 2 − u 2 = 2as
46. Fup = f + mg , f = µ N , N = F 47. amax = µ g LEVEL-II (H.W)
v2
48. S1 = ,according to law of conservation of NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
2µ g
2 1. A ball of mass 2 kg is thrown vertically
v1
momentum, find v ; 21 S = , S = S1 + S2 upwards by applying a force by hand. If the
2µ g hand moves 0.2m while applying the force and
49. P = mv, v 2 − u 2 = 2as , a = µ k g the ball goes upto 2m height further, find the
−2
1 2 2l magnitude of the force. ( g = 10ms )
50. s = at , a1 = a − µ g , t = 1
2 a 1) 20N 2) 22N 3) 4N 4) 16N
51. p = τω = fRω = µ FRω 2. A body of mass 3 kg is moving along a straight
52. For equilibrium f = µ mB g , f = µ (mA + mC ) g line with a velocity of 24 ms −1 . When it is at a
53. ad = g ( sin θ − µk cos θ ) point 'P' a force of 9 N acts on the body in a
direction opposite to its motion. The time
au = g ( sin θ + µk cos θ ) , v 2 − u 2 = 2as after which it will be at 'P' again is,
1) 8s 2) 16s 3) 12s 4) 24s
64 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
3. A ball of mass 10 gm dropped from a height of mu 2mu mu 3mu
5m hits the floor and rebounds to a height of 1) 2) 3) 4)
1.25m. If the ball is in contact with the ground T T 2T 2T
9. The position-time graph of a body of mass
for 0.1s, the force exerted by the ground on
the ball is (g=10 m/s2) 0.04kg is shown in the figure. The time be-
1) 0.5 N 2) 1.5 N 3) 0.15N 4) 2.5 N tween two consecutive impulses received by
4. A stream of water flowing horizontally with a the body and the magnitude of each impulse
speed of 15 ms-1 pushes out of a tube of cross is (AIEEE-2010)
sectional area 10-2m2 and hits a vertical wall
near by what is the force exerted on the wall
by the impact of water assuming. that it does
not rebound? (Density of water=1000 kg m -3)
1)1250N 2)2250N 3)4500N 4) 2550N
5. What is the magnitude of the total force on a 1) 4 sec, 4 × 10−4 kgm / s
driver by the racing car he operates as it 2) 2 sec, 8 × 10 −4 kgm / s
accelerates horizontally along a straight line 3) 6 sec, 4 × 10−4 kgm / s
from rest to 60m/s in 8.0s (mass of the
4) 8 sec, 8 × 10 −4 kgm / s
driver=80kg)
1) 0.06KN 2)0.78KN 3)1.4KN 4) 1.0KN OBJECTS SUSPENDED BY STRINGS
6. A base ball of mass 150 gm travelling at speed AND APPARENT WEIGHT
of 20 m/s is caught by a fielder and brought to 10. The elevator shown in figure is descending
rest in 0.04 s.The force applied to the ball and with an acceleration of 2m/s2. The mass of
the distance over which this force acts are the block A = 0.5 kg. The force exerted by
respectively the block A on block B is
1) 75 N, 0.8 m 2) 37.5 N,0.4 m
3) 75 N,0.4 m 4) 37.5 N, 0.8m
7. A dynamometer D is attached to two blocks
of masses 6 kg and 4 kg. Forces of 20 N and
10N are applied on the blocks as shown in Fig.
The dynamometer reads
1) 10N 2) 20N 3) 6N 4) 14N 1) 2 N 2) 4 N 3) 6 N 4) 8 N
Impulse 11. A block of mass m is pulled by a uniform chain
8. A particle of mass m moving with velocity u of mass m tied to it by applying a force F at
makes an elastic one-dimensional collision the other end of the chain. The tension at a
with a stationary particle of mass m. They are
in contact for a very brief time T. Their force point P which is at a distance of quarter of the
of interaction increases from zero to F0 linearly length of the chain from the free end, will be
1
in time T . The magnitude of F 0 is
2
3F 7F 6F 4F
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 8 7 5
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
12. Two masses of 8 kg and 4 kg are connected
by a string as shown in figure over a
frictionless pulley. The acceleration of the
system is
1) 6.15 N 2) 4.92 N 3) 9.84N 4) 2.46N
16. Three blocks of equal masses (each 3kg) are
suspended by weightless strings as shown. If
applied force is 100N,then T1 is equal to
( g = 10m / s 2 )
m1
8kg
30° m2
1) 4m / s 2) 2m / s 3) zero 4) 9.8m / s 2
2 2
13. Consider the system shown in figure. The 1)130N 2)190N 3)100N 4)160N
pulley and the string are light and all the 17. Pulleys and strings are massless. The
surface are frictionless. The tension in the horizontal surface is smooth.What is the
string is (Take g = 10 m/s2) acceleration of the block
1) 0 N 2) 1 N 3) 2 N 4) 5 N
14. In the figure, a smooth pulley of negligible
weight is suspended by a spring balance. F F 2F m
Weights of 1 kg and 5kg are attached to the 1) 2) 3) 4)
2m m m 2F
opposite ends of a string passing over the 18. When a train starting from rest is uniformly
pulley and move with an acceleration due of accelerating, a plumb bob hanging from the roof
gravity. During their motion, the spring of a compartment is found to be inclined at an
balance reads a weight of
angle of 450 with the vertical . The time taken by
the train to travel a distance of ½km will be nearly
1) 7s 2)10s 3)15s 4) 25s
19. The pulley and strings shown in the figure are
smooth and of negligible mass. For the system
to remain in equilibrium, the angle ‘ θ ’ should be
1) 6 kg 2) less than 6 kg
3)more than 6 kg 4)may be more or less than 6kg
15. A chain consisting of 5 links each of mass 0.1
kg is lifted vertically up with a constant
acceleration of 2.5m/s 2 . The force of
interaction between 1st and 2nd links as shown
1)00 2) 300 3) 450 4) 600
66 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
20. Two bodies of masses 4kg and 6kg are
attached to the ends of a string which passes 2 iˆ m/s and the other with a velocity 3 ĵ m/s.
over a pulley,the 4kg mass is attached to the If the explosion takes place in 10-5 sec, the
table top by another string.The tension in this average force acting on the third piece in
Newtons is:
string T1 is equal to ^ ^ −5
2 i + 3 j 10 ^ ^
1)
+5
2) − 2 i + 3 j 10
^ ^
−5 ^ ^
−5
T 3) 3 j − 2 i 10 4) 2 j − 2 i 10
T
4kg
MOTION ON A HORIZONTAL ROUGH SURFACE
T1 6kg
26. A particle is placed at rest inside a hollow
hemisphere of radius R. The coefficient of
1) 10N 2) 10.6N 3) 25N 4) 20N friction between the particle and the hemisphere
21. Acceleration of block m is (θ < 45 ) 1
0
is µ = . The maximum height up to which
3
A
the particle can remain stationary is
a0=g m
R 3 3 3R
1) 2) 1 − 2 R 3) R 4)
M 2 2 8
B
θ 27. A horizontal force is applied on a body on a
C rough horizontal surface produces an accel-
1) g sin θ 2) g cos θ eration ‘a’. If coefficient of friction between
the body and surface which is µ is reduced
3) g ( cos θ + sin θ ) 4) g ( cos θ − sin θ ) to µ /3, the acceleration increases by 2 units.
LAW OF CONSERVATION OF The value of ‘ µ ’ is
1) 2/3g 2) 3/2g 3) 3/g 4) 1/g
MOMENTUM 28. A block of mass 4kg is placed in contact with
22. A stationary shell breaks into three fragments. the front vertical surface of a lorry. The co
The momentum of two of the fragments is P efficient of friction between the vertical sur-
each and m ove at 600 to each other. The face and block is 0.8.The lorry is moving with
momentum of the third fragment is an acceleration of 15m / s 2 .The force of fric-
P
1) P 2) 2P 3) 3P 4) tion between lorry and block is ( g = 10ms −2 )
3
23. An object initially at rest explodes, 1) 48N 2) 24N 3) 40N 4) Zero
disintegrating into 3 parts of equal mass. Parts 29. A person of mass 72kg sitting on ice pushes a
1 and 2 have the same initial speed 'v', the block of mass of 30kg on ice horizontally with a
velocity vectors being perpendicular to each speed of 12ms −1 . The coefficient of friction be-
other. Part 3 will have an initial speed of tween the man and ice and between block and
1) 2 v 2) v / 2 3) v / 2 4) 2v ice is 0.02. If g = 10ms −1 ,the distance between
24. A man of 50 kg is standing at one end on a man and the block,when they come to rest is
boat of length 25m and mass 200 kg. If he 1) 360m 2) 10m 3) 350m 4) 422.5m
starts running and when he reaches the other 30. Consider a 14- tyre truck, whose only rear 8
end, has a velocity 2ms-1 with respect to the wheels are power driven (means only these 8
boat. The final velocity of the boat is wheels can produce an acceleration). These 8
2 2 8 8 wheels are supporting approximately half of the
1) ms-1 2) ms-1 3) ms-1 4) ms-1 load. If coefficient of friction between road and
3 5 5 3 each tyre is 0.6, then what could be the maxi-
25. A stationary body of mass 3 kg explodes into mum attainable acceleration by this truck is
three equal pieces. Two of the pieces fly off 1) 6ms-2 2) 24ms-2 3) 3ms-2 4)10ms-2
at right angles to each other, one with a velocity
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
31. A block is sliding on a rough horizontal sur- 37. Sand is piled up on a horizontal ground in the
form of a regular cone of a fixed base of ra-
face. If the contact force on the block is 2 dius R. The coefficient of static friction be-
times the frictional force, the coefficient of fric- tween sand layers is µ . The maximum vol-
tion is ume of sand that can be piled up, without the
1 sand slipping on the surface is
1) 0.25 2) 3) 2 4) 1 πR µπ R3
3
2 µ R3 µ R3
1) 2) 3) 4)
32. A block is in limiting equilibrium on a rough 3π 3 3µ 3
horizontal surface. If the net contact force is MOTION OF A BODY ON THE
3 times the normal force, the coefficient of INCLINED PLANE
static friction is 38. A body is allowed to slide from the top along a
1 1 smooth inclined plane of length 5m at an angle
1) 2 2) 3) 0.5 4) of inclination 300. If g=10ms-2, time taken by
2 3 the body to reach the bottom of the plane is
33. A block of mass 2kg is placed on the surface 1
3 s 4) 2s
of trolley of mass 20kg which is on a smooth 1) s 2) 1.414s 3)
surface. The coefficient of friction between 2 2
the block and the surface of the trolley is 0.25. 39. A body slides down a smooth inclined plane
If a horizontal force of 2 N acts on the block, of height h and angle of inclination 30º
reaching the bottom with a velocity v. Without
the acceleration of the system in ms −2 is changing the height, if the angle of inclination
( g = 10ms )
−2 is doubled, the velocity with which it reaches
the bottom of the plane is
1) 1.8 2) 1.0 3) 0.9 4) 0.09 1) v 2) v/2 3) 2v 4) 2 v
34. A man slides down on a telegraphic pole with 40. A body is projected up along an inclined plane
an acceleration equal to one-fourth of from the bottom with speed is 2v. If it reaches
acceleration due to gravity. The frictional the bottom of the plane with a velocity v, if θ
force between man and pole is equal to (in is the angle of inclination with the horizontal
terms of man’s weight W) and µ be the coefficient of friction.
W 3W W 5 3 1 2
1) 2) 3) 4) W 1) tan θ 2) tan θ 3) tan θ 4) tan θ
4 4 2 3 5 5 5
35. A box is placed on the floor of a truck moving 41. The minimum force required to move a body
with an acceleration of 7 ms −2 . If the up on an inclined plane is three times the
coefficient of kinetic friction between the box minimum force required to prevent it from sliding
down the plane. If the coefficient of friction
and surface of the truck is 0.5,find the
between the body and the inclined plane is
acceleration of the box relative to the truck
1
1)1.7 ms −2 2)2.1 ms −2 3)3.5 ms −2 4)4.5 ms −2 , the angle of the inclined plane is
2 3
36. A block is placed at a distance of 2m from the
1) 60º 2) 45º 3) 30º 4) 15º
rear on the floor of a truck (g=10ms-2). When
42. Starting from rest, the time taken by a body
the truck moves with an acceleration of 8ms-2,
the block takes 2 sec to fall off from the rear of sliding down on a rough inclined plane at 450
the truck. The coefficient of sliding friction with the horizontal is, twice the time taken to
between truck and the block is travel on a smooth plane of same inclination
and same distance. Then the coefficient of
1) 0.5 2) 0.1 3) 0.8 4) 0.7
kinetic friction is (2008 E)
1) 0.25 2) 0.33 3) 0.50 4) 0.75
68 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
43. A body is sliding down a rough inclined plane. CIRCULAR MOTION
The coefficient of friction between the body
and the plane is 0.5. The ratio of the net force 49. A ball of mass 0.5kg is attached to the end of
required for the body to slide down and the a string having length 0.5m. The ball is rotated
normal reaction on the body is 1 : 2. Then the on a horizontal circular path about vertical
angle of the inclined plane is axis. The maximum tension that the string can
1) 150 2) 300 3) 450 4) 600 bear is 324N. The maximum possible value of
1 angular velocity of ball in (rad/s)
44. A body takes 1 times as much time to slide 1) 9 2) 18 3) 27 4) 36
3
down a rough inclined plane as it takes to slide 50. A disc rotates at 60 rev/min around a vertical
down an identical but smooth inclined plane. axis. A body lies on the disc at the distance of
If the angle of inclination is 450, find the 20cm from the axis of rotation. What should
coefficient of friction. be the minimum value of coefficient of friction
1 3 5 7 between the body and the disc, so that the body
1) 2) 3) 4) will not slide off the disc
16 16 16 16
45. A body is sliding down an inclined plane having 1) 8π 2 2) 0.8π 2 3) 0.08π 2 4) 0.008π 2
coefficient of friction 1/3. If the normal reaction 51. A car is moving on a circular level road of
is three times that of the resultant downward radius of curvature 300m. If the coefficient of
force along the inclined plane, the angle between
friction is 0.3 and acceleration due to gravity
the inclined plane and the horizontal is
is 10m/s2. The maximum speed the car
−1 1
1) tan 2) tan −1 ( 2 ) can have is
2 1) 30km/h 2) 81km/h
−1 2 −1 3
3) 108km/h 4)162km/h
3) tan 4) tan KEY-LEVEL-II (H.W)
3 2
46. A box of mass 4 kg is placed on a rough inclined 1) 2 2)2 3) 2 4) 2 5)3 6)3
plane of inclination 600. Its downward motion 7)4 8) 2 9) 2 10) 2 11) 2 12)3
can be prevented by applying an upward pull
is F and it can be made to slide upwards by 13) 4 14) 2 15) 2 16) 1 17) 1 18)2
applying a force 3F. The coefficient of friction 19) 3 20) 4 21) 4 22) 4 23) 1 24)2
between the box and inclined plane is 25) 2 26)2 27) 3 28) 3 29) 4 30)3
2 3 1 1 31) 4 32) 1 33) 4 34) 2 35)2 36)4
1) 2) 3) 4) 37) 4 38) 2 39) 1 40) 2 41) 3 42)4
3 2 2 2
PULLING / PUSHING A BODY 43) 3 44) 4 45) 3 46) 2 47) 4 48)4
47. A block of weight 100N is lying on a rough 49) 4 50) 3 51) 3
horizontal surface. If coefficient of friction
HINTS - LEVEL – II (H.W)
1
. The least possible force that can move 1. v − u 2 = 2as ; F − mg = ma
2
3 2. When it reaches the point ‘P’again S=0,
the block is F 1 2
100 Using a = ; S = ut + at
m 2
1) N 2) 100 3 N
3 dp m( v−u)
3. F= = where v = 2 gh2 , u = 2 gh1
3) 50 3 N 4) 50N dt t
48. A weight W rests on a rough horizontal plane. dp
4. F= = Aρ v 2
If the angle of friction is θ , the least force dt
that can move the body along the plane will be m (v − u )
1) W cos θ 2) W tan θ 5. F = ma , F1 = t
; F2 = mg , F = F1 + F2
3) W cot θ 4) W sin θ
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
m (v − u ) Mg
6. F = ma , F = ; v 2 − u 2 = 2as 30. f = µ N , N = 31. R = N 2 + f 2
, N = mg
t 2
F1 − F2 32. R = N 2 + f 2 , N = mg
7. F = ma , a = ; F1 − T = m1a
m1 + m2 33. f = µs N = µ s mg
8. Area under F-t curve=J=FT
F
Block does not move a =
9. Area of F-t graph gives impulse m+M
10. R = m( g − a ) 34. f = wapp = m ( g − a )
F 3 35. f k = µk N , N = mg ; a1 = µ k g , arel = a − a1
11. a = m + m ; T = m1 + m2 a
1 2 4
1 2
12. m2 g − T = m2 a; T − m1 g sin θ = m1a 36. s = ut + at , a1 = µ k g , arel = a − a1
2
13. For the block on the surface T = m 1 a h 1
37. tan θ = = µ ; V = π R h
2
For the hanging block m2 g − T = m2 a R 3
14. m1 g − T = m1a ; T − m2 g = m2 a ; T 1 = 2T 2l
38. t =
15. T − mg = ma 16. T1 = F + mg g sin θ
17. T = ma; F = 2T 39. V = 2 gh and V does not depends on θ when h
1 2 = constant
18. a cos θ = g sin θ ; s = ut + at
2 40. V1 = 2 gl ( sin θ + µk cosθ )
19. Draw FBD of m is T=mg
Draw FBD of 2 m is 2Tcos θ = 2 mg V2 = 2 gl ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
20. T = m1 g; T = m2 g + T1 41. F1 = mg (sin θ + µk cos θ ) ,
21. FR = mg cos θ − mg sin θ F2 = mg (sin θ − µ k cos θ )
− − − 2l 2l
22. P = −( P + P ) ; p3 = p12 + p22 + 2 p1 p2 cos θ 42. tr = g sin θ − µ cos θ ; ts =
3 1 2 ( ) g sin θ
uur
k
uur uur uur P3 43. F = mg ( sin θ − µk cosθ ) , N = mg cos θ
23. P3 = −( P1 + P2 ) ; V3 =
m3
1
24. m1u1+m2u2=m1v1+m2v2 44. µ = Tanθ 1 − 2
n
uur uur uur
( )p
25. p3 = − p1 + p2 ; F = 3
t
45. F = mg ( sin θ − µk cosθ ) ; N = mg cos θ
26. h = R − R cos θ ; µ = Tanθ 46. F1 = mg ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
27. Fr = F − f ; f = µk mg F2 = mg ( sin θ + µk cos θ )
28. W = mg , f = µ ma, w < f µs mg µ s mg
v2 47. F = µ 2 + 1 48. F = µ 2 + 1 , µ s = tan θ
29. S1 = ,From L.C.M find v1 S s
2µ g 49. T sin θ = mrω 2 ; r = l sin θ
2
v1 50. f = mrω 2 ; µ s N = mrω 2
S2 = ; S = S1 + S2
2µ g
mv 2
51. f = mrω 2 ; µ s N =
r
70 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
LEVEL-III
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
1. A rope is stretched between two boats at rest. A
sailor in the first boat pulls the rope with a
constant force of 100N. First boat with the sailor A
has a mass of 250kg where as the mass of second
boat is double of this mass. If the initial distance B
between the boats was 100m, the time taken for
two boats to meet each other in seconds (neglect
water resistance between boats and water) C
1) 13.8 2) 18.3 3) 3.18 4) 31.8 1) zero 2) 13 N 3) 3.3 N 4) 19.6 N
2. In order to raise a block of mass 100kg a man 5. In the figure show n a3 = 6m/s2 (downwards)
of mass 60kg fastens a rope to it and passes and a2 = 4m/s2 (upwards). Find acceleration
the rope over a smooth pulley. He climbs the of 1.
5g
rope with an acceleration relative to rope.
4
The tension in the rope is ( g = 10ms )
−2
1) 1432N 2) 928 N 3) 1218N 4) 642N
3. In the pulley-block arrangement shown in
figure.Find the relation between acceleration
of block A and B. 1
2
3
1) 1m/sec2 upwards 2) 2m/sec2 upwards
3) 1m/sec2 downwards 42m/sec2 downwards
6. A man of mass m stands on a platform of equal
mass m and pulls himself by two ropes passing
B over pulleys as shown in figure. If he pulls
each rope with a force equal to half his weight,
A his upward acceleration would be
1) aB=-3aA 2) aB=-aA 3) aB=-2aA 4) aB=-4aA
4. Three equal weights A, B and C of mass
2 kg each are hanging on a string passing over
a fixed frictionless pulley as shown in the fig.
The tension in the string connecting weights
B and C is
g g
1) 2) 3) g 4) zero
2 4
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
7. A block is sliding along inclined plane as shown
in figure. Ifthe acceleration ofcham beris‘a’ 2F (a 2
− x2 ) 2F x
as shown in the figure. The time required to 1)
m x
2) m
(a 2
− x2 )
cover a distance L along inclined plane is
a
F x F x
M
3) 2m
(a 2
− x2 ) 4) m
(a 2
− x2 )
10. A lift is going up, the total mass of the lift and
the passengers is 1500 kg. The variation in
θ
the speed of lift is shown in fig. Then the
2L 2L tension in the rope at t = 1 s will be
1) 2)
g sin θ − a cos θ g sin θ + a sin θ m1=1kg m2=2kg
2L 2L F = 2t F = 15N
3) 4)
g sin θ + a cos θ g sin θ
8. An inclined plane makes an angle 300 with the
horizontal. A groove (OA) of length 5 m cut, in µ1=0.6 µ2=0.5
the plane makes an angle 300 with OX. A short 1)17400N 2)14700N 3)12000N 4)10000 N
smooth cylinder is free to slide down under 11. In the above problem the tension in the rope
the influence of gravity. The time taken by the will be least at
1) t = 1 s 2) t = 4 s 3) t = 9 s 4) t = 11 s
cylinder to reach from A to O is (g = 10 m/s2)
12. A piece of wire is bent in the shape of a
Cylinder
A parabola y = kx 2 (y-axis vertical) with a bead
of mass m on it. The bead can slide on the
30° X
wire without friction. It stays at the lowest
O
point of the parabola when the wire is at rest.
1) 4 s 2) 2 s 3) 3 s 4) 1 s
The wire is now accelerated parallel to the x-
9. Two masses each equal to m are lying on X- axis with a constant acceleration a. The
axis at (-a, 0) and (+a, 0), respectively, as distance of the new equilibrium position of the
shown in fig. They are connected by a light bead, where the bead can stay at rest with
string. A force F is applied at the origin along respect to the wire, from the y-axis is :
vertical direction. As a result, the masses move a a 2a a
towards each other without loosing contact 1) 2) 3) 4)
gk 2 gk gk 4 gk
with ground. What is the acceleration of each
Friction
mass? Assume the instantaneous position of
13. A block of mass m = 4kg is placed over a rough
the masses as (-x, 0) and (x, 0), respectively inclined plane having coefficient of friction
y
µ = 0.6 as shown in fig. A force F = 10N is
applied on the block at an angle 300 . The contact
F force between the block and the plane is
F
30°
-a, 0 a, 0
-x x
m m
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
45°
1)10.65N 2)16.32N 3) 27.15 N 4) 32.16 N
72 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
14. A block of mass m slides down an inclined m1=1kg m2=2kg
plane of inclination θ with uniform speed. The F = 2t F = 15N
coefficient of friction between the block and
the plane is µ . The contact force between
the block and the plane is µ1=0.6 µ2=0.5
1) mg sin θ 1 + µ 2 2) ( mg sin θ ) + ( µ mg cosθ )
2 2 1) 4N( → ), 5N( ← ) 2) 2N( → ), 5N( ← )
3) 0N( → ), 10N( ← ) 4) 1N( ← ), 10N( ← )
3) mg sin θ 4) mg
15. In the pulley arrangement shown, the pulley Passage:
P2 is movable.Assuming coefficient of friction Coefficient of friction between two blocks
between m and surface to be µ , the minimum shown in figure is µ = 0.4 . the blocks are
value of M for which m is at rest is given velocities of 2 m/s and 8 m/s in the
m P1 directions shown in figure. Find.
2 m/s
P2 1 kg
M 8 m/s
2 kg
µm µM m M
1) M = 2) m = 3) M = 4) m = 20. The time when relative motion between them
2 2 2µ 2µ will stop
16. On an inclined plane of inclination angle 300, 1) 1 sec 2) 2 sec 3) 3 sec 4) 4 sec
a block is placed. It is observed that the force
to drag the block along the plane upwards is 21. The common velocities of blocks upto that
smaller than the force required to lift it. The instant.
maximum value of coefficient of friction is 1) 4m/sec 2) 6m/sec 3) 8 m/sec 4) 10 m/sec
22. Displacements of 1 kg and 2 kg blocks upto
3 1 1 2
1) 2) 3) 4) that instant (g = 10 m/s2)
2 2 3 3 1) 4 m towards right, 7 m towards right
17. A body slides over an inclined plane forming 2) 4 m towards left, 7 m towards right
an angle of 450 with the horizontal. The 3) 4 m towards left, 7 m towards left
distance x travelled by the body in time t is
4) 4 m towards right, 7 m towards left
described by the equaiton x = kt2, where k =
1.732. The coefficient of friction between the 23. A 2kg block is pressed against a rough wall
body and the plane has a value by a force F = 20N as shown in figure. find
1) µ = 0.5 2) µ = 1 3) µ = 0.25 4) µ = 0.75 acceleration of the block and force of friction
18. The system is pushed by a force F as shown in acting on it. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
the figure. All surfaces are smooth except
between B and C. Coefficient of friction
between B and C is µ . Minimum value of F
to prevent block B from downward slipping is
F A B C
m 20N
2m 2m 2 kg µs= 0.8
µk= 0.6
3 5
1) mg 2) mg
2µ 2µ
5 3
3) µ mg 4) µ mg wall
2 2
19. Two blocks A and B are separated by some 1) 4 m/sec2 downward, 12N upward
distance and tied by a string as shown in the 2) 2 m/sec2 downward, 6N upward
figure. The force of friction in both the blocks 3) 12 m/sec2 downward, 4N upward
at t = 2s is. 4) 8 m/sec2 downward, 12N upward
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
24. Three blocks are kept as shown in figure.
3 kg
Acceleration of 20 kg block with respect to B
ground is
6 kg
100 N A F
10 kg
µ = 0.5
20 kg 1) 72 N 2) 40 N 3) 36 N 4) 20 N
µ = 0.25 28.Find the least horizontal force P to start motion
of any part of the system of the three blocks
30 kg resting upon one another as shown in fig. The
µ=0 weights of blocks are A = 300 N, B = 100 N and
C = 200 N. Between A and B, coefficient of
1) 5ms-2 2) 2 ms-2 3) 1 ms-2 4) 0 friction is 0.3, between B and C is 0.2 and
25. A suitcase is gently dropped on a conveyor between C and the ground is 0.1.
belt moving at a velocity of 3 m/s. If the
coefficient of friction between the belt and the A P
suitcase is 0.5, find the displacement of the
B
suitcase relative to conveyor belt before the
slipping between the two is stopped C
( g = 10m / s )
2
1) 2.7 m 2) 1.8 m 3) 0.9 m 4) 1.2 m 1) 60 N 2) 90 N 3) 80 N 4) 70 N
26. Blocks A and B in the fig, are connected by a 29.Determine time in which the smaller block reaches
other end of bigger block as shown in the fig.
bar of negligible weight. Mass of each block
is 170 kg and µ A = 0.2 and µ B = 0.4, µ=0.3
2 kg
where µ A and µ B are the coefficients of 10N µ=0
8 kg
limiting friction between blocks and plane.
Calculate the force developed in the bar
L=3.0m
( g = 10m / sec ) .
2
1) 4 s 2) 8 s 3) 2.19 s 4) 2.13 s
30.A block of weight W is kept on a rough horizontal
surface (friction coefficient µ ). Two forces
B W/2 each are applied as shown in the figure.
choose the correct statement.
w/2
w/2
8
A µ 30°
w
15
3
1) For µ > block will move
5
1) 150 N 2) 75 N 3) 200 N 4) 250 N 3
2) For µ < , work done by frictional force is zero
27. Two blocks A and B of masses 6 kg and 3 kg 5
rest on a smooth horizontal surface as shown (in ground frame)
in the fig. If coefficient of friction between A 3
3) For µ > , frictional force will do positive work
and B is 0.4, the maximum horizontal force 5
which can make them without separation is 3
(in ground frame) 4) For µ < block will move
5
74 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
31. A 2kg block is placed over a 4kg block and LEVEL-III-kKEY
both are placed on a smooth horizontal sur- 1) 2 2) 3 3) 1 4) 2 5) 1 6) 4
face. The coefficient of friction between the 7) 3 8) 2 9) 3 10) 1 11) 4 12) 2
blocks is 0.20. The acceleration of the two 13) 3 14) 4 15) 1 16) 3 17) 1 18) 2
blocks if a horizontal force of 12N is applied 19) 4 20) 1 21) 2 22) 1 23) 1 24) 3
to the lower block is (g= 10ms–2) 25) 3 26) 1 27) 3 28) 1 29) 3 30) 4
1) 2 ms–2, 2 ms–2 2) 2 ms–2, 1 ms–2 31) 1 32) 1 33) 1 34) 1
3) 3 ms–2, 1 ms–2 4) 4 ms–2, 1 ms–2
32. Blocks A and B shown in the figure are HINTS - LEVEL-III
connected with a bar of negligible weight. A 1. F = 100N, m1 = 250kg, m2 = 500kg,S = 100m
Force acts on both the boats is same.
and B each has mass 170Kg, the coefficient
of friction between A and the plane is 0.2 and using F = ma; F = m1a1 ; F = m2 a2
that between B and the plane is 0.4. What is F 100 F 100
a1 = = a2 = =
the total force of friction between the blocks m1 250 m2 500
and the plane (g = 10 ms-2)
a1 = 0.4 ms −2 a2 = 0.2 ms −2
Relative acceleration arel = a1 + a2
arel = 0.4 + 0.2 = 0.6 ms −2
1
using s = ut + arel t ,u=0
2
2
2s 2 ×100
t= = = 18.3s
arel 0.6
2. mm = 60kg , mB = 100kg
‘a’ be acceleration of rope.
1) 900N 2) 700N 3) 600N 4) 300N
5g
33. From the above problem what is the force arel = , arel = am + a ; am = arel − a
acting on the connecting bar ? 4
5g
1) 150N 2) 100N 3) 75N 4) 125N am = −a
34. A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal 4
plane is acted upon by a horizontal force P and T − mB g = mB a → (1)
another force Q, inclined at an angle θ with ver-- T T
tical. The block will remain in equilibrium, if co-
efficient of friction between it and surface is
mB mm
mBg mmg
T − mm g = m2 am → ( 2 )
solving (1) & (2), we get
T - 100g = 100a -------(3)
(P + Q sin θ ) (P cos θ + Q) 5g
1. 2. T - 60g = 60 − a ------(4)
(mg + Q cos θ ) (mg − Q sin θ ) 4
(3 ) - (4) , −40 g = 100a − 75 g + 60 a
(P+ Q cos θ ) (P sin θ − Q ) 35
3. 4.
(mg + Q sin θ ) (mg − Q cos θ ) 160a = 350 ⇒ a = ms −2
16
35
T = 100g + 100a = 1000 + 100 × = 1218 N
16
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
3. x1 + x4 = l1 ; ( x2 − x4 ) + ( x3 − x4 ) = l 2
Differentiating twice w.r.t time, we get
a1 + a 4 = 0 ⇒ a1 = − a 4 → (1)
a2 − a4 + a3 − a4 = 0
x3
⇒ a 2 + a3 − 2 a 4 = 0 → ( 2 )
x1 a2 = −4ms −2 , a3 = 6 ms −2 ; −4 + 6 − 2a4 = 0
x2 2a4 = 2 ⇒ a4 = 1ms −2 ; From (1),
B
a1 = − a4 ; a1 = −1ms ; −2
a1 = 1ms −2 upwards
A mg
F = 4 → upwards
x1 + x3 = l1 6.
2
differentiating with respect to time, W = 2mg → downwards
we get v1 + v3 = 0 F = W ,∴ a = 0
Again differentiating w.r.to to time, 7. f net (downward) = mg sin θ + ma cos θ
a1 + a3 = 0 ⇒ a1 = − a3 , a3 = − a1
= m ( g sin θ + a cos θ )
( x1 − x3 ) + ( x2 − x3 ) = l 2
2L
x1 + x2 − 2 x3 = l 2 ∴ g eff = g sin θ + a cos θ ; T=
g eff
differentiating w.r.to time, v1 + v2 − 2v3 = 0
8. Acceleration of the cylinder down the plane is
Again differentiating w.r.to time, a1 + a2 − 2a3 = 0
2s
a1 + a2 + 2a1 = 0 ; 3a1 + a2 = 0 a = ( g sin θ1 )( sin θ 2 ) ; t =
a
a2 = −3a1 ; aB = −3aA 9. F = 2T sin θ ; ma1 = T cos θ
4. For A, T1 − m1a = m1 g F
For B, (m 2 + m3 ) g − T2 = (m 2 + m3 )a
A
Fnet Tcos Tcos
a=
m1 + m2 + m3 ;For C , m3 g − T2 = m3 a
5.
a 2T sin θ T
T
(-x,0) (x,0)
m
m O
F
x1 10. Acceleration a = ; T = m( g + a )
x4 m
1 11. Tension will be the least during downward
x2 acceleration from t = 10s to t=12s.
x3 12. Looking for tangential equilibrium
a dy
mg sin θ =ma cosθ ⇒ tan θ = , tan θ =
g dx
2
13. Draw FBD, N + F sin α = mg cos θ
3
Since the points 1,2,3 and are movable, so let their f = µN , R = N 2 + f 2
14. Block slides down with constant velocity. Hence,
displacements are x1 , x2 , x3 and x4 We observe net force on the block is zero.
that the length of the strings between 1 and 4 and 2
and 3 are constants. f = mg sin θ ; N = mg cos θ ; R = f 2 + N2
76 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
15. On displacing ‘m’ through ‘x ‘towards right, ‘M’
Fnet
gets displaced downward by 2x a=
For equilibrium m A + mB
T1 = µ mg ; T1 = 2T2 ; T2 = Mg Consider the motion of A,
16. F1 = mg sin θ + f , f = µ N , N = mg cos θ mA g sin θ − f A − T = mA a
F2 = mg ∴ It is given that F1 < F2 27. Maximum frictional force on block B
17. Differentiating the equation x = kt2, we get f max
the value of a = g ( sin θ − µk cos θ ) f max = µ mB g ; a = m ; F = (m A + mB ) a
B
28. f l = µ1m A g , fl2 = µ2 ( mA + mB ) g
F
18. a = m + m + m ;FBD of A, F − N1 = m A a 1
A B C
FBD of B, N1 − N 2 = mB a f l3 = µ3 ( mA + mB + mC ) g
19. At t = 2s, F1 = 4N 29. f = µ m A g ;For smaller block, F− f = mA a1
F1=4N T F2=15N For larger block, f = mB a2
1kg 2kg
1 2
arel = a1 − a2 ; s = ut + at
f1 µ1 = 0.6 f2 µ2 = 0.5 2
f1 = µ1m1 g = 0.6 ×1 × 10 = 6 N w w
30. N + sin θ = w + ; f max = µ N
f 2 = µ2 m2 g = 0.5 × 2 × 10 = 10 N 2 2
Fnet = F2 − F1 = 15 − 4 = 11N 31. F is greater than µ s mg ,The blocks move with
As, Fnet > f1 + f 2 . different acceleration
The system will remain at rest and the values of F − µ k mu g
frictional forces on the blocks will be, au = µk g , a L =
mL
T = 4 + f1 and T = 15 − f 2 ; 4 + f1 = 15 − f 2
f1 + f 2 = 11N → (1) 32. f = µ mg cosθ ; f = f1 + f2
4th option, 33. For A mg sin θ − f A − T = ma
f1 = +1N , f 2 = +10 N ; f1 + f 2 = 11N For B, mg sin θ + T = ma
20. a = µ g ; v = u + at ;
34 f = p + Q sin θ ; µ N = p + Q sin θ
21. a = µ g ; v = u + at
N = mg + Q cos θ
1 2
22. a = µ g ; v = u + at ; s = ut + at
2 LEVEL - IV
F
23. f s = µ s mg ;W > f s ; f k = µ k mg ; a = net
m Matching Type
24. f1 = µ1mA g , f 2 = µ2 (m A + mB ) g ; f1 < F , f1 < f 2 1. Match list (I) with List (II)
1 2 LIST – I LIST –II
25. a = µ g , v = u + at , s1 = ut + at , s2 = vt a) Recoil of gun e) Newton’s first law
2
b) Acceleration in one f) Newton’s second
srel = s1 − s2 direction and motion law
26. f A = µ A N A , N A = mA g cos θ in two dimensions
f B = µ B N B , N B = mB g cos θ c) Definition of force g) Projectile motion
d) Measurement of force
Fnet = mA g sin θ − f A + mB g sin θ − f B
h) Newton’s third
law
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
2. A man of mass m is on the floor of a lift then Reason (R) :It is the force exerted by the road
match the following on the person that causes the motion.
LIST – I LIST –II 9. Assertion (A):Coefficient of friction can be greater
a) lift is moving up with e) apparent weight than unity.
acceleration a is greater than Reason (R) :Force of friction is dependent on
b) lift is moving down f) apparent weight is normal reaction and ratio of friction and normal
with acceleration a zero reaction cannot exceed unity.
c) lift is moving with g) apparent weight is 10. Assertion (A): Inertia is the property by virtue of
uniform velocity which the body is unable to change by itself the
equal to true weight state of rest or uniform motion.
Reason (R): The bodies do not change their state
d) lift is freely falling h) apparent weight is
unless acted upon by an unbalanced external force.
less than true weight
11. Assertion (A): If the net external force on the body
Assertion & Reason is zero, then its acceleration is zero
(1) A and R are true and R is the correct Reason (R): Acceleration does not depend on
explanation of A force
(2) A and R are true and R is not the correct 12. Assertion (A): A man in a closed cabin falling
explanation A freely does not experience gravity
(3) A is true and R is false Reason (R): Inertial and gravitational mass have
(4) A is false and R is true equivalence
3. Assertion (A): A body in equilibrium has to be at 13. Assertion (A): Force is required to move a body
rest only uniformly along a circle
Reason (R): A body in equilibrium may be moving Reason (R): When the motion is uniform, accel-
with a constant speed along a straight line path. eration is zero
4. Assertion (A): If net force on a rigid body is zero, 14. Assertion (A): A body subjected to three con-
it is either at rest or moving with a constant linear current forces can be in equilibrium.
velocity. Reason (R): If large number of concurrent forces
Reason (R): Constant velocity means linear acting on the same point, then the point will be in
acceleration is zero equilibrium, if sum of all the forces is equal to zero.
5. Assertion (A): A cricket player while catching a 15. Assertion (A): Aeroplanes always fly at low alti-
tudes.
ball lowers his hands to save himself from getting
Reason (R): According to Newton's third law of
hurt.
motion, for every action there is an equal and op-
Reason (R) : The impulsive force on hands is
posite reaction.
reduced by increasing the time of action
16. Assertion (A): A table cloth can be pulled from a
6. Assertion (A): When a ball of mass m hits
table without dislodging the dishes.
normally a wall with a velocity ' v ' and rebounds
Reason (R): To every action there is an equal
with same velocity v , impulse imparted to the wall
and opposite reaction.
is 2mv . 17. Assertion (A): Mass is a measure of inertia of the
Reason (R) : Impulse = change in linear body in linear motion.
momentum Reason (R): Greater the mass, greater is the force
7. Assertion (A):A concept of pseudo forces is valid
required to change its state of rest or of uniform
both for inertial as well as non-inertial frame of
motion
reference
18. Assertion (A): The slope of momentum versus
Reason (R) : A frame accelerated with respect to
an inertial frame is a non-inertial frame. time curve give us the acceleration.
8. Assertion (A):When a person walks on a rough Reason (R): Acceleration is given by the rate of
surface,the frictional force exerted by surface on change of momentum.
the person is opposite to the direction of his motion.
78 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
19. Assertion (A): A cyclist always bends inwards 28. Statement A: When a person is on the floor of a
while negotiating a curve. lift which is at rest, the resultant force on him is
Reason (R): By bending, cyclist lowers his cen- equal to his weight
tre of gravity. Statement B: When the lift is moving with uniform
20. Assertion (A): The work done in bringing a body velocity, then the apparent weight of the man is zero
29. Statement A: If the force varies with time in a
down from the top to the base along a frictionless complicated way then the net force is measured by
incline plane is the same as the work done in bring- the total change in momentum of the body
ing it down the vertical side Statement B: Change in momentum and impulsive
Reason (R): The gravitational force on the body force are numerically equal
along the inclined plane is the same as that along 30. Statement A: Shock absorbers reduce the
the vertical side. magnitude of change in momentum
21. Assertion (A): Linear momentum of a body Statement B: Shock absorbers increase the time
changes even when it is moving uniformly in a circle. of action of impulsive force
Reason (R): Force required to move a body uni- 31. Statement A:For a body resting on a rough
formly along a straight line is zero. horizontal table, it is easier to pull at an angle
than push at the same angle to cause motion
22. Assertion (A): A bullet is fired from a rifle. If the Statement B:A body sliding down a rough
rifle recoils freely, the kinetic energy of rifle is more inclined plane of inclination equal to angle of
than that of the bullet. friction has non–zero acceleration
Reason (R): In the case of rifle bullet system the Other models
law of conservation of momentum violates. 32. If µ s, µ k and µ R are the coefficients of
23. Assertion (A): A reference frame attached to earth limiting, kinetic and rolling frictions between
is an inertial frame of reference. two given surfaces. Arrange them in ascending
Reason (R): The reference frame which has zero order
acceleration is called a non inertial frame of reference. 1) µ R, µ S , µ K 2) µ R, µ K , µ s
24. Assertion (A): The apparent weight of a body in 3) µ S, µ K , µ R 4) µ K, µ R , µ S
an elevator moving with some downward accel- 33. Let F, FN and f denote the magnitude of the
eration is less than the actual weight of body. contact force, normal force and the friction
Reason (R): The part of the weight is spent in exerted by one surface on the other kept in
contact. If none of these is zero
producing downward acceleration, when body is a. F > FN b. F > f
in elevator. c. FN > f d. FN– f < F < FN+ f
25. Assertion (A): When the lift moves with uniform 1) a & c are correct 2) b & c are correct
velocity the man in the lift will feel weightlessness. 3) a, b & d are correct 4) a & b are correct
Reason (R): In downward accelerated motion of 34. Two blocks A and B are pressed against a
lift, apparent weight of a body increases. rough vertical wall by applying a horizontal
26. Assertion (A): Newton's third law of motion is force ‘F’. There is no friction between A
applicable only when bodies are in motion or rest. and B. Then
Reason (R): Newton's third law applies to all
a. both blocks A and B can be at rest for any
types of force, e.g. gravitational, electric or mag-
netic forces etc. magnitude of F
b. B can be at rest A moves down for smaller
27. Assertion (A): Linear momentum of a body magnitude of F
changes even when it is moving uniformly in a circle. c. both A and B will move down for smaller
Reason (R): In uniform circular motion velocity magnitude of F
remain constant. d. A can be at rest and B moves down for larger
magnitude of F
Statement Type Questions F
Options : AB
1. Statement-A is true and statement-B is true
2. Statement-A is true and statement-B is false
3. Statement-A is false and statement-B is true 1) a & b are correct 2) c & d are correct
4. Statement-A is false and statement-B is false 3) a & d are correct 4) b & c are correct
NARAYANAGROUP
LAWS OF MOTION, FRICTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
35. A block is thrown up an inclined plane with HINTS - LEVEL-IV
certain velocity to reach the top of it. If the
length of the inclined plane is l and its angle 3. In equilibrium,net force on the body is
of inclined plane is equal to angle of repose, zero.Therefore,its acceleration ‘a’ is zero.If the body
then is at rest ,it will remain at rest.If the body is moving
a. the retardation is 2g sin ? with a constant speed along a stright line path,it
b. the retardation is 2g tan ? will continue to do so.
l
c. the time of ascent is g sin θ 4. If net force is zero,rotational motion takes place.
l
d. the time of ascent is 2 g tan θ
dp 1
5. F= , Fα If ‘ dt ’is more then F will be less.
1) a & c are correct 2) a & d are correct dt dt
3) b & c are correct 4) b & d are correct
36. Two blocks of masses m and 4m connected 6. J = m(v− u), u = v, v = −v ⇒ J = 2mv
by a spring of negligible mass are
compressed and released. They move off in 7. Pseudo force is applied only for non inertial frames.
opposite direction with velocities V 1 and V 2
immediately after release and come to rest 8. Frictional force is in the direction of motion.
after covering distances S 1 and S 2. Then
9. Coefficient of friction µ = Tanθ .The value of
V1 4
a. V = 1 Tanθ may exceed unity..
2
S1 16 10. Inertia is the property by virtue of which the body
b. S = 1 (if coefficient of friction is same
2 is unable to change by itself not only the state of
for both blocks) rest, also the state of motion.
S 4
c. S = 1 (if friction is same for both blocks)
2
1
11. According to Newton's second law
S2 16
d. S = 1 ( if coefficient of friction is same) Acceleration =
Force
i.e. if net external force on
1 M ass
for both blocks the body is zero then acceleration will be zero
1)only a & c are correct 2)only a & b are correct
3)only b & c are correct 4) c & d are correct
12. m grav . g − N = minertial .a For freely falling a=g.
KEY - LEVEL-IV Since m grav = minertial ⇒ N = 0
Matching Type
1) a → h, b → g , c → e and d → f 13. When a body is moving in a circle, its speed re-
2) a − e, b − h , c − g , d − f mains same but velocity changes due to change in
Assertion & Reason Type the direction of motion of body. According to first
03) 4 04) 2 05) 1 06) 1 07) 4 08) 4 law of motion, force is required to change the state
09) 3 10) 1 11)3 12)1 13)2 14)1 of a body. As in circular motion the direction of
15)1 16)2 17)1 18)4 19)3 20)3 velocity of body is changing so the acceleration
21)2 22)4 23)4 24)3 25)4 26)2 cannot be zero.But for a uniform motion accelera-
27)3
tion is zero (for rectilinear motion).
Statement Type Questions
14. A body subjected to three concurrent forces is
28)2 29)3 30)4 31)2 found to in equilibrium if sum of these forces is equal
Other Models to zero.
32)2 33)3 34)2 35)1 36)2 uur uur uur
i.e. F1 + F2 + F3 + ........ = 0
80 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
15. The wings of the aeroplane pushes the external air On the other hand, if the body is moving uniformly
backward and the aeroplane move forward by re- along a straight line then its velocity remains con-
action of pushed air. At low altitudes density of air stant and hence acceleration is equal to zero. So
is high and of pushed air. At low altitudes density force is equal to zero.
of air is high and so the aeroplane gets sufficient
force to move forward. 22. Law of conservation of linear momentum is cor-
rect when no external force acts. When bullet is
16. According to law of inertia (Newton's first law), fired from a rifle then both should possess equal
when cloth is pulled from a table, the cloth come in
p2
state of motion but dishes remains stationary due momentum but different kinetic energy. E =
to inertia. Therefore when we pull the cloth from 2m
table the dishes remains stationary. ∴ Kinetic energy of the rifle is less than that of
bullet because E ∝ 1/ m
17. According to Newton's second law of motion
a=F/m i.e. magnitude of the acceleration produced 23. An inertial frame of reference is one which has zero
by a given force is inversely proportional to the acceleration and in which law of inertia hold good
mass of the body. Higher is the mass of the body, i.e. Newton's law of motion are applicable equally.
lesser will be the acceleration produced i.e. mass Since earth is revolving around the sun and earth is
of the body is a measure of the opposition offered rotating about its own axis also, the force are act-
by the body to change a state, when the force is ing on the earth and hence there will be accelera-
applied i.e. mass of a body is the measure of its tion of earth due to these factors. That is why earth
inertia. cannot be taken as inertial frame of reference.
24. The apparent weight of a body in an elevator mov-
dp
18. F = =Slope of momentum-time graph ing with downward acceleration a is given by
dt
W = m( g − a) .
i.e. Rate of change of momentum = Slope of mo-
mentum-time graph =force. 25. For uniform motion apparent weight = Actual weight
19. The purpose of bending is to acquire centripetal For downward acceleration motion,
force for circular motion. By doing so component
of normal reaction will counter balance the cen- Apparent weight < Actual weight
trifugal force. 26. According to third law of motion it is impossible
20. Work done in moving an object against gravitational to have a single force out of mutual interaction be-
force (conservative force) depends only on the initial tween two bodies, whether they are moving or at
and final position of the object, not upon the path taken. rest. While, Newton's third law is applicable for all
But gravitational force on the body along the inclined types of force.
plane is not same as that along the vertical and it var- 27. In uniform circular motion, the direction of motion
ies with the angle of inclination. changes, therefore velocity changes.
21. In uniform circular motion of a body the speed re-
As P = mv therefore momentum of a body also
mains constant but velocity changes as direction of
changes in uniform circular motion.0
motion changes.
As linear momentum=mass × velocity, therefore lin-
ear momentum of a body changes in a circle.
NARAYANAGROUP
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
F
LEVEL - V
θ
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. The car A is used to pull a load B with the mg 2 cos θ mg 3conθ
pulley arrangement shown. If A has a forward A) 2
m / s ,
6c 2 sin3 θ
m
velocity v A determine an expression for the 2c sin θ
upward velocity vB , of the load in terms of mg 2 cos θ m2 g 3 cos θ
VA and θ. θ is angle between string and B) 2
m/s ,
6c2 sin 3 θ
m
2c sin θ
horizontal
mg cos θ m2 g 3 sin θ
1 C) m / s, m
A) VA cos θ 2θ 6c2 cos3 θ
2 2 c sin
mg 2 cos θ m2 g 3 sin θ
B) VA sin θ D) 2
m / s,
6c 2 cos3 θ
m
h
l 2c sin θ
4. The vertical displacement of block A in meter
B C) VA cos θ t2
is given by y = where t is in second.
A 4
1
X D)VA tan θ Calculate the downward acceleration aB of
2 block B.
2. Identify the relationship which governs the
velocities of the four cylinders. Assume all
velocities as positive downward.
A
D A y B
A)2ms2 B)1ms2
2
C)4ms D) 9ms2
C B
5. Find the acceleration of block B relative to
A) 3v A + 6vB + 4vC + vD = 0 the block A and realtive to the ground, if the
blcok A moves to the left with an acceleration
B) 4vA + 8vB + 4vC + vD = 0 a0
C) 3v A + 6vB + 2vC + vD = 0
D) 3v A + 10vB + 2vC + vD = 0
3. At t = 0, force F = ct is applied to a small body A
of mass m resting on a smooth horizontal
plane (c is a constant). The force is at an angle
θ with the horizontal .The velocity of the body
at the moment of its breaking off the plane B
and the distance travelled by the body up to
60°
this moment are
A) 31a0 B) 25a0 C) 30a0 D) 30a0
82
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
6. Under the action of force P, the constant 9. If A and B moves with acceleration a. block c
acceleration of block B is 3ms-2 to the right. moves up with acceleration b. calculate
At the instant when the velocity of B is 2ms-1 acceleration of D with respective A.
to the right, determine the velocity of B a a
relative to A, the acceleration of B relative to b
A and the absolute velocity of point C of the
cable A B
θ θ
C
A B P D C E
A) 2 B) 1 C) 3 D) 4 A) 2a+b B) 2a + b cos θ
7. Block B has a mass m and is released from C) b cos θ + a sin θ D) bsin θ + a cos θ
rest when it is on top of wedge A, which has a 10. Three identical rigid circular cylinders A,B and
mass 3m. Determine the tension in cord CD C arranged on smooth inclined surfaces as
required to hold the wedge from moving while shown in figure. The least value of θ that
B is sliding down A. Neglect friction prevents the arrangement from collapsing is
B
C
D C A B
θ
θ A
θ
−1 1 −1 1
A) tan B) tan
mg
sin ( 2θ )
mg
sin ( 3θ ) 2 2 3
A) B)
2 2
−1 1 −1 1
mg mg C) tan D) tan
C) sin ( 3θ ) D) sin ( 2θ ) 3 3 4 3
3 2
11. In the arrangement shown, blocks A and B
8. Find the acceleration of the body of mass m2
connected with an inextensible string move
in teh arrangement shown in figure. If the mass
with velocities v1 and v2 along horizontal
m2 is η times great as the mass m1 and the
angle that the inclined plane forms with the v2
direction. The ratio of v is
horizontal is equal to θ . The masses of the 1
pulleys and threads, as well as the friction, are
assumed to be negligible.
2 g ( 2η − sin θ )
A)
2η + 1
2 g ( 2η − sin θ )
B)
m1 4η + 1
α β
2 g ( 2η − sin θ )
C) A V1 B V
3η + 1 2
θ m2
4 g ( 2η − sin θ )
D)
3η + 1 sin α sin β cos β cos α
A) B) C) D)
sin β sin α cos α cos β
83
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
12. In the arrangements shown, the pulleys, MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
strings and springs are weightless and the
systems can move freely without friction. The 15. In the figure small block m is kept on planck
of mass M and a force F is applied on planck
extension of spring in figure 1 is x1 and that in
figure 2 is x2. Then as shown in diagram then which of the following
statements is /are correct.
µ=0 m µ=0
M F
A l B
k k F
(A) the acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is .
m
(B) the acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is zero
2lm
5 kg 10 kg 5 kg 5 kg (C) the time taken by m to separate from M is
F
Fig 1 Fig 2
2lM
(D) the time taken by m to separate from M is
A) x1=x2 B) x2>x1>0 C) x1>x2=0 D) x1>x2>0 F
13. Figure shows a system of four pulleys with two 16. A particle of mass m starts moving at t = 0
masses m A = 3 kg and mB = 4 kg. At an instant, due to a force F = F0 sin ωt where F0 and ω are
force acting on block A, if block B is going up constant. Then correct statement is/are
at an acceleration of 3 m/s2 and pulley Q is
π
going down at an acceleration of 1 m/s2 is (A) it will stop first time at
ω
(A) 7 N acting upward F0
(B) It will travel distance S = during this time
mω2
Q (C) During this distance maximum velocity of
(B) 7 N acting downward F0
particle is v max =
mω
(D) it will stop for first time at 2π / ω
R (C) 10.5 N acting upward
P 17. From the given diagram, choose the correct
option
B
A (D) 10.5 N acting downward.
A
14. If A and B moves with acceleration a as shown
in diagram calculate acceleration of C with
respect to B P1
a a P3
P2
A B B
C (A) acceleration of block A is zero
(B) acceleration of B is g
(C) acceleration of block A is non zero
(A) 2a (B) a 2 (C) 3a (D) 4a (D) tension in the string connecting A is zero
84
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
18. In the diagram shown, the acceleration of the 20. A block of mass m is placed on a wedge. The
block B as shown in figure relative to the block wedge can be accelerated in four manners
A and relative to ground is aBA and a BG marked as (1), (2), (3) and (4) as shown. If the
respectively. If the block A is moving towards normal reactions in situation (1), (2), (3) and
left with an acceleration a 0, then (4) are N1, N2, N3 and N4 respectively and
acceleration with which the block slides on the
wedge in situation are b 1, b2, b3 and b 4
respectively then :
(1) (2)
B A
θ m m
a a
A) aBA = 2a0 B) aBG = 3a0
37° 37°
C) aBA = 3a0 D) aBG = a0 10 + 6cos θ
19. In the pulley system shown the movable (4)
a
pulleys A,B and C have mass m each, D and E (3)
are fixed pulleys. The strings are vertical, light m
and inextensible. Then, m
37°
D E a
37°
A (A) N3 > N1 > N2 > N4 (B) N4 > N3 > N1> N2
(C) b2 > b3 > b4 > b1 (D) b2 > b3 > b1 > b4
B
PASSAGE TYPE QUESTIONS
PASSAGE : 1
C
A body of mass m = 1.8 kg is placed on an inclined
plane, the angle of inclination is α = 370 , and is
A) the tension throughout the string is the same and attached to the top end of the slope with a thread
which is parallel to the slope. Then the plane slope
2mg
equals T = is moved with a horizontal acceleration of a. Friction
3 is negligible.
g
B) pulleys A and B have acceleration each in
3
downward direction and pulley C has acceleration
g
in upward direction a
3
g m
C) pulleys A,B and C all have acceleration in α
3
downward direction
21. The acceleration, if the body pushes the plane
g
D) pulley A has acceleration in downward 3
3 with a force of mg is :
4
direction and pulleys B and C have acceleration
5 5
g A) m / s 2 B) 0.5m / s 2 C) 0.75 m / s 2 D) m / s 2
each in upward direction. 43 6
3
85
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
22. The tension in thread in the above question is
MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
:
A) 12 N B) 10 N C) 8 N D) 4 N 27. In the diagram strings, springs and the pulley
23. At what acceleration will the body lose contact are light and ideal. The system is in equilibrium
with plane : with the strings taut (T>0), match the column.
40 Masses are equal.
A) m / s2 B) 7.5 m / s 2
3
C) 10 m / s 2 D) 5 m / s 2
PASSAGE-2
m B
Two smooth blocks are placed at a smooth corner
as shown. Both the blocks are having mass m. We X y
apply a force F on the small block m. Block A m A
presses the block B in the normal direction, due to z
W
which pressing force on vertical wall will increase,
and pressing force on the horizontal wall decrease,
as we increase F. ( θ = 37° with horizontal). As Column - 1 Column- 2
soon as the pressing force on the horizontal wall A) Just after string W breaks P) a A = 0
by block B becomes zero, it will lookse the contact B) Just after spring X breaks Q) aB = 0
with the ground. If the value of F is further increase,
the block B will accelerate in upward direction and C) Just after string Y breaks R) aC = 0
simultaneously the block A will move toward right D) Just after spring Z breaks S) aB = aC
Y 28. In the situation shown, all surfaces are
frictionless and triangular wedge is free to
B
move, In column-2, the direction of certain
m vectors are shown. Match the direction of
A smooth quantities in Column-1 with possible vector in
F m 0=37° Column-2.
X
24. What is minimum value of F, to lift block B
from ground :
25 5 3 4
(A) mg (B) mg (C) mg (D) mg
12 4 4 3 θ
25. If both the blocks are stationary, the force Column - 1 Column-2
exerted by ground on block A is : A) acceleration of the block
3F 3F θ
(A) mg + (B) mg −
4 4 X relative to ground (P)
4F 4F B) acceleration of block X
(C) mg + (D) mg −
3 3
26. If acceleration of block A is a rightward, then relative to wedge (Q)
acceleration of block B will be :
C) normal force by block
3a 4a
(A) upwards (B) upwards
4 3 θ
3a 4a on wedge (R)
(C) upwards (D) upwards
5 5
D) net force on the wedge (S)
86
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
29. See the diagrams carefully in Column-1 and 30. In the system shown in figure, masses of the
match each with the obeying relation(S) in blocks are such that when system is released,
column-2, The string is massless, inextensible acceleration of pulley P1 is a upwards and
and pulley is frictionless in each case. acceleration of block 1 is a1 upwards. It is
a = g / 3, m = mass of block T = tension in a found that acceleration of block 3 is same as
that of 1 both in magnitude and direction.
given string, a pulley = acceleration of movable
pulley in each case, acceleration due to gravity
is g.
Column -1 Column -2
(A)
a
P1 P2
a
T1
T P) ablock ≤ a
m a1 1 3
2 4
(B)
a Column - I Column - II
T1 A) Acceleration of 2 P)2a+ a1
B) Acceleration of 4 Q) 2a – a1
C) Acceleration of 2 w.r.t. 3 R) upwards
T Q) apulley ≤ a D) Acceleration of 2 w.r.t. 4 S) downwards
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
m
31. Under the action of a constant force F = 10
N , a body moves in a straight line so that the
(C) relation between the distance S moved by
T1
the body and the time t is described by the
equation S = A- Bt +Ct2. Find the mass of the
body if C = 1m/s2.
32. In the arrangement shown, by what
R) T > mg acceleration (in ms–2) the boy of mass 50 kg
T
must go up so that 100 kg block remains
m stationary on the wedge. The wedge is fixed
a and friction is absent everywhere. Take g =
10 m/s2.
(D)
T1
S)Force on fixed 100 kg m = 50 kg
T
m a
53°
support T1 > ( 3/ 2 ) mg
87
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
33. Two blocks of mass 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are 36. The pull P is just sufficient to keep the 14 N
suspended from a rigid support S by two block in equilibrium as shown. Pulleys are
inextensible wires each of length 1 m (see Fig.) ideal. Find the tension (in N) in the cable
The upper wire has negligible mass and the connected with ceiling.
lower wire has a uniform mass of 0.2 kg/m.
The whole system of blocks, wires and support
have an upward acceleration of 0.2 m/s2. The
acceleration due to gravity is 9.8 m/s2. If
tension at the midpoint of upper wire is 10x .
Find x.
S
2.8 kg m = 1.4 kg
P
37. In the given figure find the and acceleration
of B, if instantaneous velocity and acceleration
1.9 kg of A are as shown in the Fig.
34. If the tension T needed to hold the cart
3W A
equilibrium is , there is no friction. Find
x
value of x 1m/s
2m/s2
T 30° B
38. In Fig. shown, both blocks are released room
35. The elevator is going up with an acceleration rest. Length of 4 kg block is 2 m and of 1 kg is
of g/10, the pulley and the sting are light and 4 m. Find the time they take to cross each other
the pulley is smooth.If reading of spring ? Assume pulley to be light and string to be
balance shown is 0.8x. Calculate x light and inelastic.
( take g = 10m/s ) 2
g
10
2m
4 kg
1.5 kg 4m
3 kg
1 kg
88
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
LEVEL -V - KEY So, the distance traversed till the time of break off,
SINGLE ANSWER mg
i.e., in the time interval t = is given by
1) A 2) B 3)B 4) C 5) A 6) B 7) A c sin θ
c cos θ m g m 2 g 3 cos θ
3
8) B 9) C 10)C 11)D 12) D 13)D 14) C
S = =
MULTI ANSWER 6 m c sin θ 6 c 2 sin 3 θ
15) A,C 16) C,D 17)A,B,D 18) C,D
d2y 1
19) A,B 20) A,C 4. = m / sec 2 ; −TVB + 8TVA = 0
PASSAGE TYPE dt 2 2
21) D 22) A 23) A 24) C 25) C 26) A 1
VB = 8VA = 8x = 4ms 2 ;
MATCHING 2
27. A-q,r,s, B-s, C-p, D-p,s
5. 5T a 0 − Ta BA = 0 ; a BA = 5a 0
28. A-q, B-p, C-r, D-s
29. A-q,r,s; B-p, q, r; C-p,q,r,s; D-p,q a B = a 20 + ( 5a 0 ) + 2a 0 5a 0 cos 600 ; a B = 31a 0
2
30. A - qr; B - ps; C - s; D -r
INTEGER 3 3
6. −3T VB + 4T VA = 0 ; VA = VB =
31) 5 32) 6 33) 5 34) 4 35) 6 36) 2 37) 1 38) 1 4 2
LEVEL-V - HINTS VB + VC
= VA ; VC = 2VA − VB ; VC = 3 − 2 = 1
2
1. Let θ angle between string and horizontal T is
mg
tension in string 7. T = mg sin θ cos θ , T = sin 2θ
2
T 8. Ta 2 − 2Ta1 = 0 a 2 = 2a1 ....(i)
2T θ
VB VA m 2 g − T = m 2a 2 ...(ii)
2T − m1g sin θ = m1a1 ...(iii)
∑ T.V = 0 ; −T cos θVA + 2T VB = 0 2g ( 2η − sin θ )
solving three equations a2 =
1
VB = VA cos θ 4η + 1
2 9. Let T be the tension in string
2. Let T be the tension
T cos θb + T sin θa − Ta D = 0
TVD + 4TVC + 8TVB + 4TVA = 0
a D = b cos θ + a sin θ .
VD + 4VC + 8VB + 4VA = 0 10.
dv
3. Since F cos θ =ma or ct cos θ = m N N
dt
A
60
v c cos θ t c cos θ 2
∫0 dv =
m ∫0
t dt or v =
2m
t
60 60 θ
B
C
But velocity at the time of breaking off or at 60
N
mg mg
t =
c sin θ F.B.D of A
c cos θ m g m g 2 cos θ
2 2N cos 300 = mg
∴ v= x = F.B.D. of C
2m c sin θ 2 c sin 2 θ
net force along the inclined plane =0
dS c cos θ 2
Now, v = = t N cos ( 60 + θ ) = mg sin θ
dt 2m
c cos θ c cos θ 3 1
solving tan θ =
s t
∫0
dS =
2m ∫0 t dt or S = 6m t 3 3
89
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
11. −T cos β V2 = T cos αV1 = 0 17. If we consider free body diagram of p1 and p3
same string having tension 2T and T/2 this is
V2 cos α
cos β V2 = cos αV1 ; = possible only when T is zero.So acceleration of
V1 cos β block A is zero and acceleration block B is
12. In Figure I Tension T 1 = 20g/3, in figure II Tension T
T2 = 5 g So, x1 > x2 > 0..
13. Writing constraint for the string
2xA + 2xB – xQ + k = l T T
Differentiating twice w.r.t. time 2aA + 2aB–aQ=0 P1
Taking downward direction to be positive
2aA + 2 (–3) – 1 = 0 ; 2aA = 7; aA = 3.5 m/s2. P2
Positive sign indicates that block is accelerating at
3.5 m/s2 in downward direction.
So, force acting F = 3 x 3.5 = 10.5N (downward)
T/2 T/2
14. T a B + 2Ta A − Ta C = 0 ; T a + 2Ta − Ta C = 0 2T
18. Let T be the tension ; 3T a 0 − Ta BA = 0
a C = 3a
a BA = 3a 0 ; a BG = a 20 + ( 3a 0 ) + 2.a 0 .3a 0 cos θ
2
MULTI ANSWER
15. Since there is no horizontal force on m in ground
frame. Therefore, acceleration of m in ground frame a BG = a 0 10 + 6c os θ
19. Let T be the tension in string
F
is zero. Acceleration of M is
M
. −2Ta C + Ta B − Ta A = 0
T T T T T T
F 1 2
∴ Relative acceleration = from s = ut + at
M 2
2l
∴t = F/M C
B A
v t
mdv ⇒ dv = F0 sin ωt dt aC aB aA
16. F = F0 sin ωt =
dt
∫0 ∫0 m
T T
F
V = 0 [1 − cos ωt ] so at t = π / w a A + 2a C = a B ...(i) mg − 2T = ma C ...(ii)
mw
T − mg = ma B ...(iii) mg- T = ma A ...(iv)
2F
V = 0 ∴ (a) is wrong. The max value of
mω
F
V = 0 when cos ωt = 0 . ∴ ( C ) is correct.
mw N1
macos37°
dS F a
Now = 0 [1 − cos ω t ] ma
dt mω 20 (inertial force)
s t mgsin37°
F0
[1 − cos ωt ] dt
mgsin37°
∫ dS = ∫
0 0 mω mg
mgcos37°
F0
S= [ωt − sin ωt ] at t = π / ω . Balancing forces perpendicular to incline N1 = mg
mω 2 4 3
Fπ cos37° + ma sin37° ; N1 = mg + ma and
S = 0 2 ∴ ( B ) is wrong. 5 5
mω along incline mg sin 37° - ma cos 37° = mb1
3 4
b1 = g − a
5 5
90
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
4 4
Similarly for this case get N 4 = mg − ma
5 5
3 3
and b 4 =
g− a
masin37° N2 5 5
a PASSAGE: 1 Question no: 21-23
(Pseudo force)
ma N T
(2)
macos37°
mgsin37°
mgcos37° ma
mg
mg
Similary for this case get N 2 =
4 3
mg − ma α
5 5
3 4 4 3 N T
and b 2 = g+ a ; N 2 = mg − ma
5 5 5 5
a a
α
F.B.D with respect to plane F.B,D
with respective to ground
N3
N + ma sin α = mg cos α ---(1)
T = ma cos α + mg sin α ---(2)
(3)
m(g+a)cos37° 3
m(g+a)sin37° solving equation (1) and (2) for N = mg
ma 4
mg g 5
⇒a = or a = m / sec 2 and T=12 N
12 6
4 4 The body will loose contact for N=0 For N=0
Similarly for this case get N 3 = mg + ma
40
5 5
a = g cot α [From eq(i)] a = m / sec 2
3 3 3
and b 3 = g+ a 24. Solving equations acceleration can be calculated
5 5
m
ma
N4
F m
N
N cos 370 = mg ...(1) N sin 37 0 = F
m(g–a)sin37° m(g–a)cos37°
(4) F 3 F
tan 370 = =
mg mg 4 mg
3
a F= mg
4
91
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
4 7mg 7 mg
25. F = N sin 37 0 ; N A = mg + N cos 37 0 = mg + F ;T = ; T1 = ; B − P, Q, R
3 6 12
26. As bodies remain in contact a sin 37 0 = b cos 370
T1
3 4 3
a =b ; b= a.
5 5 4
27. Following F B D explains the options
Kx
2
T1 T1 T' T'
7mg 7 mg
a/2 T' ; T= ; T1 = ; C − P, Q, R, S
6 4
T
A B C a/2 a
T1
mg T2 mg Kx2 mg Kx1
a
a T 14mg 7 mg
; T1 = ; T1 = ; D − P,Q
28. 9 9
b a
a/3 m
a is acceleration of wedge with respect ground. b
is acceleration of block with respect wedge. 30. Let accelerations of various blocks are as shown
r r
( )
a + b acceleration of block with respect ground.
in figure. Pullet P2 will have downward acceleration
a +a
a. Now a = 1 2 ⇒ a2 = 2a − a1 > 0
a 2
T
29. T1
P1 P2
a a
2a
1 3
T1 = 5mg / 3 T = 5mg / 3 A − Q, R , S a1 4
2 a1 a4
a2
So acceleration of 2 is upwards. Hence (a) → (q,r)
−a + a
and a = 1 4 ⇒ a4 = 2a + a1 > 0
2
So acceleration of 4 is downwards
a/2 a/2 Hence (b) → (p, s)
Acceleration of 2 w.r.t. 3:
T a2/3 = a2 – a3 = a2 –a1 = 2(a – a1) < 0
This is downwards. Hence (c) → (s)
m Acceleration of 2 w.r.t. 4a2/4 = a2 – (–a4) = 4a >0
This is upwards Hence (d) → (r)
92
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
31. Given S = A − Bt + Ct 2 ; 1 3
W cos θ sin θ = T or T = W 3 / 2 × 2 = T = 4 W
d s2
∴ a= 2
= 2C = 2m / s 2 since F = ma
dt 2m1m2
10 35. Applying pseudoforce T = m + m ( g + a )
⇒m=Fa= = 5kg 1 2
2 2T
32. By the definition of inertial and non-inertial frame. Reading is
g
4
50 (10 + a ) = 100 × 10 × ⇒ a = 6ms −2
5
33. (i) To find tension at mid-point of the lower wire
we cut the string at this point draw the free body g
10
diagram of lower portion.
T1
a
0.1kg 1.5 kg
1.9 kg 3 kg
36. T1 = P ; T2 = 2T1 = 2P ; T3 = 2T2 = 4 P
(1.9 + 0.1) g = 2.0 g
Upper
The equation of motion gives T 1 – 2.0g = (2.0) a cable T
or T1 = (2.0) (g + a) = (2.0) (9.8 + 0.2) = 20 N T3
(ii) To find tension at mid-point of upper wire : The
T3
equation of motion gives : T3
T2
T2
a T2 T2 W (=14N)
T3
Massiess
1.9 kg T2
T1 T1
1.9 kg P
For equilibrium of block
(2.9 + 0.2) g = 5 g T1 + T2 + T3 = 14 ⇒ 7 P = 14 ⇒ P = 2 N .
T2 – 5g = 5a Therefore, 37. Concept : We use the fact that string is inextensible
T2 = 5(g + a) = 5 (9.8 + 0.2) = 50 N
34. and length of string is constant. l1 + l2 + l3 + l4 =
constant. differentiate to get
N T
dl1 dl2 dl3 dl4
+ + + =0
dt dt dt dt
W sin θ v A + v A + ( −vC ) + ( −vC ) = 0
W cos θ
θ l1
W N sin θ
A I4
θ N l2
N cos θ l3 I6
1
N uA = –1m/s
θ C
T uC
aA = – 2m/s2
mg uB
aC
N = W cos θ ; N sin θ = T B
93
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
or vC = v A ⇒ vC = 1m / s ↑ LEVEL - VI
where vC is velocity of pulley C.
Similarly aC = a A SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. In the figure the heavy mass m moves down
∴ aC = 2m / s ↓
2
the smooth surface of a wedge making an angle
Now l4 + l5 = l6 α with the horizontal. The wedge at rest t = 0
dl4 dl5 dl6 is on a smooth surface. The mass of the wedge
∴ + = is M. The direction of motion of the mass m
dt dt dt
makes an angle β with the horizontal, then
∴ −vC + ( vB ) = −vB
' Tanβ ' is
∴ vB = 0.5m / s ↑
aC m
Similary, aB = ∴ aB = 1m / s ↓
2
2 M
38. Solution : α
m M m M
A) tan α B) tan α C) 1 + tan α D) 1 + tan α
M m M m
2. A weightless inextensible rope rests on a
stationary wedge forming an angle α with a
T horizontal. One end of the rope is fixed to the
T T wall at point A. A small load is attached to the
T
a rope at point B. The wedge starts moving to
the right with a constant acceleration a. The
a 2m B a acceleration of the load is given by :
4 kg a
A
A 4m 4g B
1g
1 kg
a
From FBD of blocks A and B solve acceleration of
each block 4 g − T = 4a
.......(1)
T − 1g = 1× a .......(2) ( )
A) a B) 2a sin α 2 C) a sin α D) sin α 2 ( )
3g 3. Block is attached to system of springs.
After solving eqns. (1) and (2), a = Calculate equivalent spring constant.
5
6g
acceleration of A w.r.t B aA / B = = 12m / s 2
5
If A will cross B then distance travelled by A w.r.t. K
B is 6m K
1
6 = 0 + × 12 × t 2 , t = 1sec
2
For
F0 = 4m2 g m
A) K B) 2K C) 3K D) 4K
94
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
4. Block A and C start from rest and move to 7. In the figure , the wedge is pushed with an
the right with acceleration a A = 12t m/s and 2
acceleration of 10 3 m / s 2 . It is seen that the
a C = 3m / s 2 . Here t is in seconds. The t i m e block starts climbing upon the smooth inclined
face of wedge. What will be the time taken by
when block B attain comes to rest is the block to reach the top?
A B
1m a = 10 3m / s 2
m
30°
C 2 1
(A) s (B) s
5 5
(A) 2 s (B) 1 s (C) 3/2 s (D) 1/2 s
5. In the arrangement shown in fig. m1 = 1kg , 5
s
(C) 5s (D)
m 2 = 2kg . Pulleys are massless and string are 2
8. In the above diagram system is in equilibrium.
light. For what value of M the mass m 1 moves
If applied force F is doubled how much mass
with constant velocity (neglect friction)
less block will more towards right before new
equilibrium is achieved.
M 1 K
massless
F
block
2
B
m2 F 2F
B A) B)
K K
m1
F F
(A) 6 kg (B) 4 kg (C) 8 kg (D) 10 kg C) D)
3K 9K
6. Find equivalent spring constant for the system 9. In the above diagram all surface friction less
what horizontal force has to be applied on
wedge such that in equilibrium steady state
K mg sin θ
sping is compressed by
K
m m
A) 2mg tan θ B) 2mg sin θ
C) 4mg tan θ D) 2mg tan θ
A) k B) 2K C) 64K D) 8K
95
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
10. If the above diagram initially there is not 13. In the above situation all surface are
elongation in spring if the block is displaced frictionless system is released from rest. Then
towards right by x0. Calculate the elongation which of the following statements is/are
of spring A. correct.
C D
m m
K
3K
A A B
B
60° 60°
M M
x0
A) acceleration of wedges are zero
3 x x x B) wedges accelerate towards right
A) x 0 B) 0 C) 0 D) 0
7 4 7 3 C) Normal force exerted by ground on A is more
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS than normal force exerted by ground on B
D) Tension in connecting string is nonzero.
11. A book leans against a crate on a table. 14. Two blocks of masses m 1 and m -2 (m1 > m2) are
Neither is moving. Which of the following connected by a massless threads, that passes
statements concerning this situation is/are over a massless smooth pulley. The pulley is
incorrect ? suspended from the ceiling of an elevator. Now
Book Crate the elevator moves up with uniform velocity
V0. Now, select the correct options.
A) The force of the book on the crate is lessthan
that of crate on the book
B) Although there is no friction acting on the crate,
there must be friction acting on the book or else it
will fall V0
C) The net force acting on the book is zero
D) The direction of the frictional force acting on
the book is in the same direction as the frictional
acting on the crate. m1 m2
12. An iron sphere weighing 10 N rests in a V
shaped smooth trough whose sides form an A) Magnitude of acceleration of m1 with respect to
angle of 600 as shown in the figure. Then the ( m1 − m2 ) g
reaction forces are : ground is greater than
m1 + m2
B
B) Magnitude of acceleration of m1 with respect to
B A B
A
60° ( m1 − m2 ) g
60°
ground is qual to
A
60° 60°
m1 + m2
(I) (II) (III)
C) Tension in the thread that connects m1 and m2 is
A) RA = 10 Nand RB = 0 in case ( i ) 2m1 m2 g
B) RA = 10N and R3 = 10 N in case (ii ) equal to m + m
1 2
20 10 D) Tension in the thread that connects m1 and m2 is
C) RA = N and RB = N in case ( iii )
3 3 2m1m2 g
greater than m + m
D) RA = 10 N and RB = 10 N in all the 3 cases 1 2
96
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
15. A horizontal bar of mass m1 and Prism of mass 4m1 m2 g
m2 can move as shown. There is no friction at A) Tension on the string is m + m
any contact point. During the motion, the 1 2
length of the rod is always horizontal. Now, 2m1 m2 g
magnitude values of B) Tension on the string is m + m
1 2
m1 C) The acceleration of mass m1 with respect to
Smooth
wall 3m 2 − m1
m2 ground is m + m g
1 2
θ D) The acceleration of mass m1 with respect to
Smooth surface
2 ( m 2 − m1 )
A) Acceleration of m1 is g / (1 + η cot 2 θ ) , where ground is
m1 + m 2
g
η = m2 / m1 18. In the arrangement shown in the figure all
g tan θ contact surfaces are smooth strings and
B) Acceleration of m1 is η 1 + tan 2 θ , where pulleys are massless.
Given M1 = 1kg, M 2 = 2kg, M 3 = 4kg and
η = m2 / m1 g=10ms-2
C) Acceleration of m2 is g / ( tan θ + η cot θ ) , where
η = m2 / m1 T' T' T a↓
g tan θ 2
M1 T' M2
T'
D) Acceleration of m2 is η 1 + tan 2 θ , where T
M3
η = m2 / m1
16. Which of the following regarding frame of A) The acceleration of block of mass M3 is 4ms-2
reference is correct B) The acceleration of block os mass M1 is 4ms-2
A) Newton’s third law is valid from both inertial C) The tension (T) in the string connecting blocks
and non inertial frame. of masses M3 and M2 is 24N.
B) Natural forces like tension, normal force are D) The tension (T) in the string connecting block
same from all inertial frame of mass M1 and M2 is 24N
C) sun can be considered perfectly inertial frame 19. In the figure shown, two blocks, one of mass
D) Acceleration of a body measured from different 5kg and the other of mass 2kg are connected
inerital frames are different. by light and inextensible string. Pulleys are
17. Two masses m1 and m 2 are connected by light light an d frictionless. Choose the correct
inextensible string passing over a smooth statement
pulley. P. If the pulley moves vertically
upwards with an acceleration equal to g then.
↑g
P
m1
a↑ 5kg
Y m2
ground 2kg ↓a2
97
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
5g −2 23. The acceleration of m 1 with respect to ground
A) The acceleration of 5kg mass is ms is
11
5g −2 ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ
ms A) B)
B) The acceleration of 2kg mass is
11 m2 + m1 sin 2 θ m1 + m2 sin 2 θ
C) Tension in the string is
12g
N ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ
C) D)
11 m2 − m1 sin 2 θ m1 − m2 sin 2 θ
10g 24. The acceleration of m2 with respect to ground
D) Tension in the string is
11 is
PASSAGE TYPE QUESTION ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ ( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ
A) B)
PASSAGE : I m2 + m1 sin θ 2
m2 + m1 sin 2 θ
A shot putter with a mass of 80 kg pushes the iron
ball of mass of 6 kg from a standing position ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ ( m1 + m2 ) g sin 2 θ
C) D)
accelerating it uniformly form rest at an angle of m2 − m1 sin 2 θ m1 − m2 sin 2 θ
450 with the horizontal during a time interval of 25. Normal reaction on m1- is:
0.1 seconds. The ball leaves his hand when it is 2m
high above the level ground and hits the ground 2 A) m1 g B) ( m1 + m2 ) g
seconds later. ( g = 10m / s ) m1m2 g cos 2 θ
2
C)
20. The accleration of the ball in shot putter’s m2 + m1 sin 2 θ
hand:
2 2
m1 g 1 − ( m1 + m2 ) sin 2 θ
A) 11 2 m / s B) 100 2 m / s D)
m1 + m2 sin 2 θ
2 2
C) 90 2 m / s D) 9 2 m / s MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
21 The horizontal distance between the point of
release and the point where the ball hits the 26. Two blocks of masses m1 =5kg and m2 = 2kg
ground: are connected by threads which pass over the
A) 16 m B) 18 m C) 20 m D) 22m pulleys as shown in the figure. The threads
22. The minimum value of the static coefficient of are mass less and the pulleys are mass less
friction if the shot putter does not slip during and smooth. The blocks can move only along
the shot is closest to : the vertical direction. T1 and T2 are the
A) 0.28 B) 0.40 C) 0.48 D) 0.58 tensions in the string as shown. Now match
PASSAGE : II the following: [take g = 10m/s2]
m1
FIXED
m2
T2 T1
θ
m1
Two blocks m1 and m2 are allowed to move without
friction. Block m1 is on block m-2 and m2 slides on m2
smooth fixed incline as shown. The angle of
inclination of inclined plane is θ .
98
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
Column-I Column-II
29. Two smooth blocks of same mass are
A) Magnitude value of p) 500
acceleration of m1 with SI units connected by an inextensible and massless
19
respect to ground. string which is passing over a smooth pulley
B) Magnitude value of q) 250 are kept in a lift. The lift is going down with
acceleration of m2 with SI units acceleration ‘a’ as shown in the figure. What
19
respect to ground. should be the value of a (in m/s2) so that
C) The value of tension T 1 r) 60 acceleration of block A w.r.t. ground will be
SI units
19 minimum ? (g = 10 m/s2)
D) The value of tension T 2 r) 40
SI units
19
t) None of these
A
27. In thediagram show n,m atch the follow ing (g m
= 10m/s2) a
F2 = 18N
B
m
1kg
2kg
3kg
F1 = 60N Smooth 30. Fig. shows a block of mass 0.1 kg placed on a
1
smooth wedge of mass kg . If the block
30° 5 3
Blocks are on smooth incline. F1 and F2 are of mass m will move vertically downward with
parallel to the inclined plane. The motion of acceleration 10 m/s2 . Then the value of
the blocks is along the incline the surface. tension (in newton) in the string is
Column I Column II (q = 300 ).
SI UNITS
A) Acceleration of 2kg block (p)39
B) Net force on 3kg block (q)25
C) Normal reaction between m
2kg and 1kg (r) 2 M
D) Normal reaction between 3kg θ
and 2kg (s) 6
28. Column - I Smooth
(A) When lift is accelerated up then apparent weight
(B) When lift is accelerated down, then apparent
weight
(C) When lift is moving up or down constant velocity, 31. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 20 kg are
(D) When lift is free falling then apparent weight connected by a massless spring and are placed
Column - II on a smooth horizontal surface. A force of 200
(P) Less than actual weight N is applied on 20 kg mass as shown in the
(Q) Greater than actual weight diagram. At the instant, the acceleration of 10
(R) Zero kg mass is 12 ms–2, the acceleration of 20kg
(S) Equal to actual weight. mass is.
(T) Negative 200N
10kg 20kg
99
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
32. Two block A and B having masses 34. A bead C can move freely on a horizontal rod.
m1 = 1kg , m2 = 4kg are arranged as shown in The bead is connected by blocks B and D by a
string as shown in the figure. If the velocity of
the figure. The pulleys P and Q are light and
B is v. The velocity of block D is 4v/x, find
frictionless. All the blocks are resting on a
the value of x
horizontal floor and the pulleys are held such
that strings remains just taut . At moment
t = 0 a force F = 30t ( N ) starts acting on the
pulley P along vertically upward direction as
shown in the figure. The time when the blocks
A and B loose contact with ground is 4/x sec
then x is
37° 53°
F – 30t(N) D B
35. A lift goes up with 10m / s. A pulley P is fixed
p to the celling of the lift. To this pulley other
two pulley P1 and P2 are attached. P1 moves
up with velocity 30m / s. A moves up with
velocity 10m / s. D is moving downwards with
Q
velocity 10m / s. at same instant of time.
Assume that all velocities are relative to the
ground. If velocity of v is 10x, calculate x
B A
10m/s
33. In the figure shown, friction force between the P
mg nl
bead and the light string is . If t =
4 7g
where t is the time in which the bead loose
contact with the string after the system is P1 P2
released from rest, find n
B D
A C
36. In the situation given, all surfaces are
frictionless. pulley is ideal and string is light if
F = Mg / 2, the acceleration of the big block
is g/x then x is
m
↑ x
l
↓ M
y
m
M
100
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
37. Three blocks shown in figure, move vertically 40. A system is shown in the figure. End B of
with constant velocities, The relative velocity string is moving upwards with 3 m/s. Pulley
of A w.r.t C is 100m / s upward and the relative
is moving with speed 2 3 m/s in direction
velocity of B w.r.t A is 50m / s downward. All
shown in the figure. The velocity of the block
the string are ideal. The velocity of C with
respect to ground is 125/x calcualte x A is x + 2 3 (m/s) find x
B
u = 3m / s
60°
30°
A
2 3m / s
A
41. If at t = 0 right spring in (A) and right string in
(B) breaks. The ratio of magnitudes of
B
instantaneous acceleration of blocks A & B is
C 5x
, calculate x
38. Block A of mass m is placed over a wedge of 24
same mass m. Both the block and wedge are 37° 37° 37° 37°
placed on a fixed inclined plane. Assuming all
surfaces to be smooth, the displacement of the
g sin 2 θ 2kg 2kg
block A in ground frame in 1s is
x + sin 2 θ (A) (B)
then the value of x is 42. In the figure shown P1 and P2 are massless
N
N pulleys. P 1 is fixed and P 2 can move. Masses
y
Block N1 9m
mg B of A,B and C are , 2m and m
x A 64
wedge
B Fixed
incline
respectively. All contacts are smooth and
mg
θ
−1 3
the string is massless. θ = tan . (Take
(a) (b)
39. A small , light pulley is attached with a block 4
2
C of mass 4 kg as shown in Fig . A block B of g = 10m/s )
mass 1.5 kg is placed on the top horizontal
surface of C.Another block A of mass 2kg is
hanging from a string , attached with B and P1
passing over the pulley. Taking g = 10 ms-2
and neglecting friction, acceleration of block
C when the system is released from rest is x/
vertical wall
4 calculate x. B
P2
A θ
C
horizontal floor
12.5cm the tension in string connecting pulley P 2 and
C
13
block C is , Calculate x (Take m = 1 kg)
x
101
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
43. In the arrangement shown in the figure,
N
pulleys are light, small and smooth. Mass mA sinα
of blocks A, B and C is m1 = 14 kg, m2 = 11
kg and M = 52 kg respectively. The block A m a
can slide freely along a vertical rail, fixed
to left vertical face of block C. Assuming
all the surfaces to be smooth, magnitude of mg sinα
10 α mA cosα
acceleration of block A is , Calculate x.
x mg cosα
From free body diagrams
N sin α = Ma ----- (1)
N + mA sin α = mg cos α ----- (2)
mg sin α + mA cos α = ma ------(3)
on solving equations (1) (2) (3)
A=
mg cos α sin α ( M + m ) g sin α
; a=
M + m sin α 2
M + m sin 2 α
uuuur uuuuuuuuur uuuuur
Now ablock = ablock / wedge + awegde
r
LEVEL -VI - KEY ( $
∴ block = a cos α i − a sin α j − Ai
a $
)
$
SINGLE ANSWER ( a cos α − A ) $i − a sin α $j
1.C 2.B 3.B 4.D 5.C 6.C 7.B
a sin α m
8.D 9.C 10.A ∴ tan β = a cos α − A = 1 + M tan α
MULTI ANSWER
11.A,B,D 12.A,B,C 13.A,C,D 14. B,C
2. Resultant acc. of B
= a 2 + a 2 + 2aa cos (180 − α) = 2a sin ( α / 2 )
15. A,C 16. ABD 17.A,D 18.A,C
19. B,C 20.C 21.B 22.B 23.A
24.B 25.C a
MATCHING
26. A – s;B – r;C – q;D – p (180 – α)
a
27. A - r ; B - s; C - q ;D – p α
28. A-q B-p C-s D-r α
INTEGER TYPE
29.2 30. 2 31.4 32.2 33.8 34. 3 35.5 1 1 1 1
= + =
36.4 37.2 38. 1 39.5 40. 3 41.5 42.2 43.5 3. K eq 4K 4K 2K ; K eq = 2K .
LEVEL -VI - HINTS 4. From constraint relation we can see that
a A + aC
acceleration of block B is a B = with
2
A
3 − 12t
N sinα 90 – α proper signs. Hence a B = = 1.5 − 6t or
2
M vB t
1.
∫ dvB = ∫ (1.5 − 6t ) dt o r
α
dv B
= 1.5 − 6t or
dt 0 0
1
N v B = 1.5t − 3t 2 or v B = 0 at t = s
2
102
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
5. Mass m1 moves with constant velocity if tension in 9. applying newtons law among incline
the lower string T1 = m1g = (1)(10 ) = 10N ….(i)
kx
∴ Tension in the upper string is
N
T2 = 2T1 = 20N ….(ii)
Acceleration of block M is therefore, a
θ
T 20
a= 2 = …..(iii)
M M
This is also the acceleration of pulley 2. mg
T = 10N kx + mg sin θ = ma cos θ
40
Pseudo force = m 2 a = F
M 2mg sin θ =
cos θ ; 4mg tan θ = F .
2
a B 1 1 1 7 12K
10. K = 3K + 4K = 12K ; T = x0
eq 7
m2g = 20N 12 3
T = 4K x1 ; K / x 0 = 4K / x1 ; x1 = x0
Absolute acceleration of mass m1 is zero. Thus, 7 7
acceleration of m1 relative to pulley 2 is a upwards MULTI ANSWER TYPE
or acceleration of m2 with respect to pulley 2 is a
downwards. Drawing free body diagram of m2 with 11. Application of newton’s first law and second law
respect to pulley 2. Equation of motion gives 12. A,B,C
RA
40 40
20 − − 10 = 2a = solving this we get M=8kg
M M
6. Refering the method to solve eqivalent spring RB sin60
T T T T 60°
consant Tx = x1 = ; 64K =
8 8 8K x
W
RB
3
7. 10 3 cos 30° = 10 3 = 15 m / s 2 RB cos60
2
Since the sphere is not moving ∑ FH = 0
10 3m / s 2 RB sin 60 = 0
30° ∴ RB = 0
g sin30° = 5m/s2 & RA = W = 10 N
1 2
∴ a = 15 − 5 = 10 m / s 2 ∴ S = at Fig-2
2
1 1
1 = (10)t 2 or t = S
2 5 RA
8. equivalent spring constant is 9K. 60°
RAsin60
9K
2F F F
displacement is − =
9K 9K 9K
∑F H =0
103
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
∴ RA sin 60 = RB sin 60 ⇒ RA = RB = R 16. Basic definition of frame of reference.
4m1 m2 g
Now ∑ FU = 0 ∴ 2R cos 60 − W = 0 17. T = m + m
1 2
R = W = 10 N
2 ( m 2 − m1 ) g 3m 2 − m1
a= ⇒ a ground = g
RAsin60
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
18. x 2 + ( x 2 − x ) = l ; 2x 2 − x1 = l ; 2v 2 = v1
60
RAcos60
x2
figure -3
T'
∑F V =0 ∴ RA sin 60 = W
M1
M2
20 → 2a T
⇒ RA =
3
N also ∑F H = 0; ←x1→
10 M3
RA − RB = 0 So RB = N
2 3
13. Force required to stop acceleration of wedges are 2a 2 = a1
mg sin 30 cos 60 which will be provided by string But acceleration of M 3 = acceleration of M 2=a
N A = Mg + mg cos 2 30 N B = Mg + mg cos 2 60 So acceleration of M 1 =2xa = 2a
14. Draw FBD and use Newtons equations M 3g − T = M 3a ...(1) T − 2T ' = M 2 a .....(2)
N cosθ T ' = M1 ( 2a ) ........(3) M3g = ( M3 + 4M1 + M 2 ) a
acceleration of M3
N' M 3g 4x10
15. N sinθ
m1 A a= = = 4ms −2
a M 3 + M 2 + 4M1 4 + 2 + 4
mg Acceleration of M 1 =2a=2x4=8ms-2
N''
From (1) T = M3 g -M3 a =4x6=24N
From (3) T ’ =M1 (2a) =1x8=8N
A
Nsinθ 19. 5T − 5g = 5a1... (1)
Ncosθ mg
From F.B.D m1 g − N cos θ = m1a ---------- (1)
N sin θ = m2 A ---------------------- (2)
also by constrain equation A sin θ = a cos θ -- (3) T
on solving (1), (2) and (3)
a1↑ 5kg
g m2
a= where η = m
1 + η cot θ
2
1
g m2 2kg ↓a2
A= , where η = m
tan θ + η cot θ 1
104
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
2g − T = 2a 2 ...( 2 ) 5a1 = a 2 .... ( 3) F cos 450 540
⇒µ= 0 ;
µ=
10g − 5T = 10a 2 mg + F sin 45 800 + 540
5T − 5g = a 2 5g = 11a 2 ∴ F = 540 2 N µ = 0.4
5g −2 g N1
a2 = ms a1 = ms −2
11 11
PASSAGE-I QUESTION NO: 20-22
Passage-2: 23-25.
u
mg
45°
m1 g − N1 = m1a1 ( Vertically down)—— (1)
h = 2m
N2
R
1 2
Time of flight T = 2sec From S = ut + at
2
(N1 + m2g)sinθ
1 1
−2 = u × × 2 − ×10 × ( 2 )
2
2 2 N1 + m2g
⇒ u = 9 2 m / sec ......(i) ( N1 + m2 g ) sin θ = m2 a2 (along incline) ——(2)
The shot putter is gaining momentuim to threom From (1) and (2)
ball by applying force (F) for times ( ( ∆t ) ( m1 g − m1a1 ) + m2 g sin θ = m2 a2
F ∆t = mu
( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ − m1a1 sin θ = m 2 a2 — (3)
u 9 2
⇒ a∆t = u ⇒ a = = = 90 2 m / sec2
∆t 0.1
Range (R) = u cos 450 × time of flight
y
1 x θ
=9 2× × 2 = 18m
2
The force exerted by shot putter to the ball, in
horizontal direction the same force experienced by
shot putter in horizontal direction. This force is θ
balanced by friction to the shot putter
x
Fcos45° Fsin45° sin θ =
y
F x = y sin θ
Man
a1 = a2 sin θ ———— (4)
From (3) and (4)
+
( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ = a2 m2 + m1 sin 2 θ
F
mg N ( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ
a2 = ——— (5)
F sin 450 = f -----(1) m2 + m1 sin 2 θ
N = mg + f sin 450 -------(2) ( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ
∴ a1 =
f = µN -------(3) m2 + m1 sin 2 θ
From eq (1) (2) and (3)
105
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
26. 29. Rightword acceleration of A w.r.t lift is
m ( g − a) g − a
a1 = = w.r.t. ground,
m+ m 2
g − a
2
5a 2 ga g 2
aA = a 2 + = − +
T2 T1 2 4 2 4
da A
m1 y aA is min. when =0
x da
5a g
m2 − = 0 ⇒ a = g / 5 = 2ms −2
2 2
m1 g − T2 − T1 = m1a1 ; m1 g − 2T1 − T1 = m1a1 30. Accelerating to the given problem, m is a freely
falling body i.e. Contact force between M and m is
50 − 3T1 = 5a1 ———— (1) zero. Under this condition, acceleration of M
2T1 − m2 g = m2 a2 2T1 − 20 = 2 a2 ——— (2) leftwords will be a = g cot θ = g × 3
x 3x 1
y= +x y= ; 2a2 = 3a1 ———— (3) tension T = Ma = × 3g = 2 N
2 2 5 3
40 31. Spring force Fs = Net force on 10kg mass
By solving, we will get the answer a1 = m / s2
19 200N
27. A − R, B − S , C − Q, D − P = 10 × 12 = 120N 120N 20 kg For 20
kg, 200 - 120 = 20 a ⇒ a = 4 ms-2
18N
32. Concept : When blocks loose contact with ground
1 normal reaction on them becomeszero.
2 (i) When A looses contact T = 10 N ; F = 3t
3
30t = F
60N P
∴ 60 − 18 − 6 g sin 30 = 6a ; 12 = 6a
a = 2m / s 2 ; This is the acc of all three blocks up T T T
the incline. Now ∑ F = Ma = 3 × 2 = 6 N is the Q
net force acting on 3kg block. 2T
a B A
18N 4kg 1kg
N1 or 30t = 30 , t = 1sec , When B looses contact
2T = 40 or T = 20, F = 3T or 30t = 60 or t = 2sec
0 33. acceleration of bead =
3g
(↓)
1g sin3 4
acceleration of thread = g ( ↑ )
N1 − 1g sin 30 − 18 = 1a , ∴ N1 = 25 N is the
normal reaction between 2kg and 1kg blocks
28. The apparant weight of a body in a lift in given by
relative acceleration =
7g
4
(↓)
w ' = µ ( g + a ) is accordance with a w ' will vary 1 2 8l
∴ l = 2 at , t = 7g
.
106
JEE MAIN-JR-VOL
JEE-ADV -I
PHYSICS-VOL - II NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION
34. Concept : along the length of string velocity r r
37. Let velocity of blocks, A, B and C are v A , v B and
component is same for all the points on string.. r r r r r
vC ; v A − v C = 100 ˆj ...(1) v B − v A = 50 ˆj .(2)
uB 53° Y
vp uC
uC 37°
uB X
uCcos37° VA A VP VA
(a)
vB = vC cos 530 ........ (1) vC cos 37 0 = vD .......(2)
B
from eqns. (1) and (2) we get
vB cos 37 0 vB ( 4 / 5 ) 4 C
vD = = vD = v
cos 53 0
( 3 / 5) ;
3 Now write constraint equation for pulley to get
r r r r r r r
35. Apply constraint on pulley P
r r r r r r ( )
v B − v p = − v C − v p or,, 2v p = v B + v C
v p1 / p = −v p2 / p ; v p1 − v p = − v p2 − v p( ) r r r
(
also v p = −v A Thus we get v A = 37.5 ˆj m / s )
r r r
v p1 , v p , v p2 are respective velocity w.r.t. ground, r r
r r r
v p2 = 2v p − v p1 ; = 2 10 ˆj − 30 ˆj = −10 ˆj
(
v B = ( −12.5 g ) m / s ; v C = −62.5 ˆj m / s )
38. Let acceleration of wedge in ground frame is a down
Now apply constraint eqn. on pulley P2 the plane. The acceleration of block A will be a
r r r r r r
(
v C − v p2 = − vp − vp2 ) sinθ vertically downward a A / g = a A / B + a B / g .(1)
r r r r a A / g = [a A/ B ]x + a B / g .......(2)
v C = 2v p2 − v D = 2 −10 ˆj − −10 ˆj v C = 10 ˆj x x
From FBD of A it is clear that Block A cannot
Apply constraint eqn. on pulley P1 to get accelerate horizontally. i.e., in x-direction because
r r r r r r r
( )
v A − v p1 = − v B − v p1 ; v B = 2v p1 − v A there is no force in x-direction. Block A can
accelerate in y-direction only. a A / g x = 0 There
= 2 30 ˆj − 10 ˆj = 50 ˆj
36. First consider both the blocks as system force that fore a A / g x = − aB / g x That means for an
we apply at one end of string is tension in the string. observation on wedge block moves only x > 0.
System
T For block A ; mg − N = m ( a sin θ ) .......(3)
aB/g F = Mg/2
N For block B; ( N + mg ) sin θ = ma .......(4)
ar A
B
aA /B 2 g sin θ
mg On solving eqns. (3) and (4), we get a =
1 + sin θ
2
Mg The acceleration of block A, aA = a sin θ
For system block ( A + B ) = 2 Ma a = g / 4
2
2 g sin θ 2 g sin 2 θ
Thus, a = g / 4iˆ = sin θ = 1 + sin 2 θ
1 + sin θ
Mg
For system block A : Mg − = Mar Displacement of block A in 1 s is
2
r 1 2 g sin 2 θ 2 g sin θ
2
a r = g / 2 jˆ 1
S = 0 + a At = × × (1)
2 1 + sin 2 θ
2
r 1 + sin θ
2
2
Thus, a A = g / 4iˆ + g / 2 ˆj
r 39. Let vertically downward component of acceleration
a3 = g / 4 ˆj of A be a and let acceleration of C be c (right ward)
107
NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL- -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Then horizontal component of acceleration of A i c
4
(right ward) and acceleration of B, relative to C is ma2 = 20cos37 0 = 20 = 16 N
a leftward. Hence resultant acceleration of B is (a 5
-c) left ward. Now considering free body diagram T
(Fig ) ⇒ a2 = 8
1.5(a–c)
1.5g
2
25
a1 25
T B ∴ = 3 =
T a2 8 24
N
H A T N 20 N
2a
2c
2g T 4g
←H T T T
aB↓
42. B
N
aA A N 2T
4c
V C ↑aC
For block A, H = 2c ....(1) 2g-T=2a .....(2)
3
N1 = m A .a A → (1) mB g − T − N1 = mBα B → ( 2 )
For horizontal forces on block B, 4
T= 1.5 (a-c) ....(3) from above equations, 5 5
a = 6.25ms-2 and c = 1.25ms-2 3
∴ Vertical acceleration of A=a=6.25ms-2 (downward) 2T − mC g = mC aC → ( 3) aB = a A → ( 4 )
4
Horizontal acceleration of A
= c = 1.25 ms-2 (right ward) aB = 2aC → ( 5) after solving above equations we get
Acceleration of B = ( a - c) = 5ms-2 (left ward) 13
Acceleration of C = C = 1.25 ms-2 (right ward) a A = 8 m / sec 2 , aB = 6 m / sec 2 ; aC = 3 m / sec 2 ;T = N
2
40. Use pulley constant equation: 2T T
3 V
−VA + VP + VB + P = 0 aA aB
2 2
mA A NA B NB
where: VP = 2 3 , VB = 3 m / sec 43. mBA
(
∴ VA = 3 + 2 3 m / sec ) 140 110
2T T
50 C
41. 37° 37° ⇒ Fr = N NA NB
3
Fr Fr A
Equations are : 2T − 140 = 14a A → (1)
N A = 14 A → ( 2 ) 110 − T = 11aB → ( 3)
2
N B = 11A → ( 4 ) T − N A − N B = 52 A → ( 5 )
37°
constraint relation is : aA + aA − aB = 0
50
⇒ aB = 2aA → ( 6 ) after solving equations 1 to 6
3
we get resultant acceleration of A =
50
37° FR = N ; 1 + 1 = 2 m / s 2 resultant acceleration of B =
2 3
9 + 1 = 10 m / s 2 resultant acceleration of C =
20 1 m / sec 2 ∴ slipping between A & B both move
25 25 20
acceleration ; a1 = with common acceleration a = = 4m / s 2
3 3 5
108
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
WORK, ENERGY, POWER & VERTICAL
CIRCULAR MOTION
uur uur uur ur
or W = ∫ FR .ds as FR = Σ F
SYNOPSIS
Work done in displacing a particle under the action
Work done by constant force: of a number of forces is equal to the work done by
ur the resultant force.
Ø When a constant force F acts on a particle and Ø Nature of Work: Work done by a force may
ur
the particle moves through a displacement S , then be positive or negative or zero.
the force is said to do work W on the particle. Ex:(a) If we lift a body from rest to a height h
ur ur F
W = F .S
ur ur h
The scalar (dot) product of F and S , can be
ur ur
evaluated as W = F .S = FS cos θ
ur
Where F is the magnitude of F ,S is the magnitude
ur ur ur mg
of S and θ is the angle between F and S . Ø Work done by lifting force F
W = FS cosθ = F ( S cosθ ) W1 = Fh cos 00 = Fh ( + ve)
= magnitude of the force × component of Ø Work done by gravitational force
displacement in the direction of force
W2 = mgh cos1800 = − mgh ( −ve)
W = (F cosθ ) S So, net work
= component of the force in the direction W = W1 + W2 = Fh − mgh = ( F − mg ) h
of displacement × magnitude of the displacement
Now, if the body is in equilibrium F = mg ,W = 0
Ex: (b) If a body is pulled on a rough horizontal
road through a displacement S
N
S
Ø Work is a scalar quantity. F
Ø SI Unit is Nm or joule (J). f
////////////////////////////
Ø CGS unit is erg.
1J = 1N ×1m ; 1 erg = 1 dyne x 1cm mg
Ø Work done by normal reaction and gravity
Dimensional formula of work is ML2T −2 .
W1 = 0 as force is ⊥ to S
Ø Relation between joule and erg:1 joule = 107 erg Ø Work done by pulling force F,
Other units of work:
W2 = FS cos 0o = FS ( +ve )
Electron Volt ( eV ) = 1.6 × 10 −19
J
Ø Work done by frictional force f ,
Kilowatt hour = 3.6 × 106 J
W3 = fs cos180 0 = − µ mgs ( − ve )
Ø Work done by multiple forces:
If a number of forces act on a body or particle then: Net work W = W1 +W2 +W3 = 0 + FS − fS = ( F − f ) S
W = W1 + W2 + W3 + ...... Now, if the body is in dynamic equilibrium f = F
uur uur uur uur
or W = ∫ F1 .ds + ∫ F2 .ds +...... So, W = 0
uur uur uur Zero Work:
( )
or W = ∫ F1 + F2 + ..... .ds Ø Work done is zero if
NARAYANAGROUP 145
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
1. Force and displacement are perpendicular. Graphical representation of work done:
2. Displacement of point of application of
Ø The area enclosed by the F-S graph and
force is zero. displacement axis gives the amount of work done
3. Net force acting on the body is zero.
ur r r
by the force.
Ø As W = ∫ F .d s so, if d s = 0 , W=0 i.e., if the F
displacement of a particle or body is zero whatever P Q
be the force , work done is zero (except non-
conservative force)
(a) When a person tries to displace a wall or stone
by applying a force and it (actually its centre of mass
) does not move, the work done is zero. O R S
(b) A weight lifter does work in lifting the weight from Work = FS = Area of OPQR
the ground but does not work in holding it up. Ø Work done by variable force.
F
Ø As W = ∫ F ds cos θ , so W = 0 , if θ = 900 , i.e.,
if force is always perpendicular to motion, work
done by the force will be zero though neither force
nor displacement is zero. This is why:
(a) When a porter moves with a suitcase on his
head on a horizontal level road, the work done by xi dx xf S
the lifting force or force of gravity is zero. Ø For a small displacement dx the work done will be
(b) When a body moves in a circle the work done the area of the strip of width dx
xf xf
by the centripetal force is always zero.
(c) When the bob of a simple pendulum swings, W= ∫ dW = ∫ F dx
the work done by tension in the string is zero. xi xi
Ø If area enclosed above X-axis, work done is +ve
WORK DONE BY VARIABLE FORCE: and if the area enclosed below X-axis, work done
is –ve.
F
xi xf
O
Negative work
Applications on work
Ø If a force is changing linearly from F1 to F2 over a
Ø When the magnitude and direction of a force varies displacement S then work done is
with position, then the work done by such a force F + F2
for an infinitesimal displacement ds is given by W = 1 S
ur uur 2
dW = F .ds Ø If a force displaces the particle from its initial
The total work done in going from A to B is r uur
B ur uu
position ri to final position rf then displacement
r B ur uur ur
WAB = ∫ F .ds = ∫ ( F cos θ ) ds vector is S = rf − ri .
A A
y
In terms of rectangular components
r uur F
F = Fx iˆ + Fy ˆj + Fz kˆ ; ds = dxiˆ + dyjˆ + dzkˆ S
rf
x2 y2 z2
W = ∫ F dx + ∫ F dy + ∫ F dz
x1
x
y1
y
z1
z
ri
ur ur ur uur ur X
(
W = F .S = F . rf − ri )
146 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø Work done in pulling the bob of mass m of a simple Ø A block of mass m is suspended vertically using a
pendulum of length L through an angle θ to vertical rope of negligible mass. If the rope is used to lift the
by means of a horizontal force F. block vertically up with uniform acceleration ‘a’,
work done by tension in the rope is
W = m ( g + a ) h (h= height)
If block is lowered with acceleration ‘a’, then
L-h θ T
W = − m( g − a ) h
L Ø A uniform chain of mass M and length L is kept on
C 1
A smooth horizontal table such that th of its length
F n
is hanging over the edge of the table.
h mg The work done by the pulling force to bring the
B hanging part onto the table is
L−h h h
cos θ = = 1− ; = 1 − cos θ
L L L
L
h = L (1 − cos θ ) 2n L
Work done by gravitational force C.G n
W = −mgh = −mgL (1 − cos θ )
Work done by horizontal force F is W = FL sin θ
Work done by tension T in the string is zero.
M
M L MgL
Ø Work done by gravitational force in pulling a uniform W = n gh = n g 2n = 2n 2
rod of mass m and length l through an angle θ is
given by M
Mass of hanging part is
n
Ø A uniform chain of mass M and length L rests on a
θ 1
C.G
smooth horizontal table with n th part of its length
1
h is hanging from the edge of the table. Work done in
C.G pulling the chain partially such that
1
n2 th part is hanging from the edge of the table is
l
W = − mg (1 − cos θ ) , Where l is the distance given by W=
MgL 1
1
− 2
2 2 2
2 n1 n2
of centre of mass from the support.
Ø A uniform chain of mass ‘M’ and length L is
Ø A ladder of mass ‘m’ and length ' L' resting on a suspended vertically. The lower end of the chain is
level floor is lifted and held against a wall at an lifted upto point of suspension
angle θ with the floor
Work done by gravitational force is
L G2
Wg = − mgh = −mg sin θ
2 l/4
G1
G1
l/4
G2
L/ 2
θ L L L
h= + = = raise in centre of mass of
4 4 2
Ø A bucket full of water of total mass M is pulled by lower half of the chain .
using a uniform rope of mass m and length l. Work Work done by gravitational force is
M L MgL
done by pulling force W = Mgl + mg
l Wg = − g = −
2 2 2 4
NARAYANAGROUP 147
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Ø The Work done in lifting a body of mass ‘m’ having N
F cos θ
density ' d1 ' inside a liquid of density ' d 2 ' through
F
a height ‘ h ’ is
mg sin θ θ mg cos θ
mg F sin θ
FB h
θ
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is sliding down on rough inclined
plane of inclination θ . If L is the length of incline and
mg
d2
µK is the coefficient of kinetic friction then work done
W = mg |h = mgh 1 − d by the resultant force on the body is
1 N
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is placed on a frictionless fk
horizontal surface. A force F acts on the body
parallel to the surface such that it moves with an
acceleration ‘a’, through a displacement ‘S’. The mg sin θ θ mg cos θ
work done by the force is
mg
W = F S = ma S (Qθ = 0 ) 0
θ
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is placed on a rough horizontal W = ( mg sinθ − fk ) L = ( mg sin θ − µ k mg cos θ ) L
surface of coefficient of friction µ . A force F acts
on the body parallel to the surface such that it moves = mgL ( sin θ − µk cos θ )
with an acceleration ‘a’, through a displacement Ø A uniform solid cylinder of mass m, length l and
‘S’. The work done by the frictional force is radius r is lying on ground with curved surface in
contact with ground. If it is turned such that its
f = µ mg cos θ ; but θ = 00 circular face is in contact with ground then work
∴ f = µ mg cos 0 = µ mg ⇒ W f = µ mgs
0 done by applied force is
Wnet = ( f + ma ) S = ( µ mg + ma ) S = m ( µ g + a ) S
If the body moves with uniform velocity then
W = f S = µ mg S l
Ø A body of mass m is sliding down on a smooth
inclined plane of inclination θ . If L is length of l/2
inclined plane then work done by gravitational force r
is
N l l
L W = mgh = mg − r Qh = −r
2 2
Ø A gas at a pressure P is enclosed in a cylinder with
a movable piston. Work done by the gas in
mg sin θ θ producing small displacement dx of the piston is
mg cos θ
mg
θ
Wg = F S = mg sin θ L
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is moved up the smooth inclined
plane of inclination θ and length L by a constant
horizontal force F then work done by the resultant
force is
W = ( F cos θ − mg sin θ ) L
148 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
r ur ur ur ur
dW = Fdx = PA dx = PdV
Total work done by the gas during the change in its
Sol. Work done W = F .S ; W = F . rB − rA ( )
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
V2
W =2i+3 j−k .6i− 4 j+2k −2i+ 4 j−6k
volume from V1 to V2 is W = ∫ PdV
Ø Two blocks of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2)
V1
( ˆ )(
W = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj − k . 4iˆ − 8 ˆj + 8k
ˆ )
W = 8 – 24 – 8 = -24 units
connected by an inextensible string are passing over r
WE-2: A force F = 2 xiˆ + 2 ˆj + 3z 2 kˆ N is acting on a
a smooth, massless pulley. The two blocks are
particle. Find the work done by the force in
released from the same level. At any instant ‘t’, if
displacing the body from (1,2,3)m to (3,6,1)m.
‘x’ is the displacement of each block then x2 y2 z2
Sol. Work done W = ∫ Fx dx + ∫ Fy dy + ∫ Fz dz
x1 y1 z1
. 3 6 1
W = ∫ 2 xdx + ∫ 2dy + ∫ 3z 2 dz
1 2 3
3 1
x2 z3
W = 2 + 2[ y ] + 3 = - 10 J
6
2 2 3
T T 1 3
WE-3:The force acting on an object varies with the
m2 distance travelled by the object as shown in
x the figure.Find the work done by the force in
moving the object from x = 0m to x = 14m.
m2g F(N)
x
m1
4
m1g
S
Work done by gravity on block m1 ,W1 = + m1 gx O 6 10 14
Sol. Work done = Area under F - S curve.
Work done by gravity on block m2 ,W2 = - m2 gx
1 1
Work done by gravitational force on the W = × 6 × 4 + ( 4 × 4 ) + × 4 × 4 = 36J.
2 2
system, Wg = m1 gx − m2 gx
WE-4: When a rubber band is stretched by a
1
Wg = ( m1 − m2 ) gx = ( m1 − m2 ) g at 2 distance ‘x’, it exerts a restoring force of
2 magnitude F = ax + bx 2 , where a and b are
Qv 2 − u 2 = 2as constants. Find the work done in stretching
the unstretched rubber band by ‘L’.(JEE MAIN
( m1 − m2 ) g 2t 2
2
( m1 − m2 ) g
Q a =
2014)
Wg =
2 ( m1 + m2 ) m1 + m2 Sol:The restoring force exerted by the rubber
Note: In this case work done on the two blocks band when it is stretched by a distance ‘x’is
by tension is zero.
F = ax + bx 2 .
W = T ( x) + T (−x) = 0
The small amount of work done on the rubber band
r
WE-1:A body is displaced from rA = 2i + 4 j − 6k
ˆ ˆ ˆ ( )
in stretching through a small distance ‘dx’ is
r
(
to rB = 6iˆ − 4 ˆj + 2kˆ )
under a constant dW = Fdx = (ax + bx 2 )dx
r
( )
The total work done in stretching the unstretched
force F = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj − kˆ .Find the work done. rubber band by ‘L’ is
NARAYANAGROUP 149
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
L L L L WE-7: A uniform chain of length 2 m is kept on a
W = ∫ Fdx = ∫ ( ax + bx 2 )dx = axdx + bx dx ∫ ∫
2
table such that a length of 60 cm hangs freely
0 0 0 0 from the edge of the table. The total mass of
L L the chain is 4 kg. What is the work done in
x2 x3 aL2 bL3 pulling the entire chain back onto the table?
W=a
+b
= + Sol:M = 4 kg, L = 2 m, l = 0.6 m, g = 10 m/s2
2 0 3 2 3 0
l M l
WE-5: A particle of mass ‘m’ is projected at an angle Work done W = mg = l g
2 L 2
α to the horizontal with an initial velocity u.
4 0.6
Find the workdone by gravity during the time it W = × 0.6 × 10 × = 3.6 J
reaches the highest point. 2 2
Y
WE-8: Find the work done in lifting a body of mass
20 kg and specific gravity 3.2 to a height of 8
m in water? (g = 10 m/s 2 )
ρb
Sol:Given specific gravity ρ = 3.2
r
w
H ρ b = 3.2 × ρ w = 3.2 × 1000 = 3200
Sol:
α
Workdone W = mgh 1 − ρw = 20×10 × 81−
X 1000
ρb 3200
O x
ur r 2200
Fy = − mg $j; ry = H max = u sin α ˆj W = 20 × 10 × 8 = 1100 J
2 2
3200
2g
WE-9: A block of mass ‘m’ is lowered with the help
r r u sin α ˆ 2 2
(
W = Fy .ry = −mgjˆ .
2g )
j
of a rope of negligible mass through a distance
‘d’ with an acceleration of g/3. Find the work
done by the rope on the block?
1
W = − mu 2 sin 2 (α ) Sol:During lowering a block, tension in rope is
2
T = m ( g − a ) and S = d
WE-6: A 10 kg block is pulled along a frictionless
surface in the form of an arc of a circle of work done W = − m( g − a) d
radius10 m. The applied force is 200 N. Find
g 2 mgd
the work done by (a) applied force and W = −m g − d =−
(b) gravitational force in displacing through 3 3
0
an angle 60 WE-10: If the system shown is released from rest.
Find the net workdone by tension in first one
second (g=10m/s2)
0 r
60
r F
3 kg B
Sol: Work done by applied force W = Fr sin θ
A 2 kg
3
W = 200 ×10 × sin60 = 200 ×10 × = 1732 J
0
m − m1 3− 2
2 Sol. a = 2 g = 10 = 2m/s2
1
m + m 2 2 + 3
work done by gravitational force
2 m1m 2 g 2 × 2 × 3 × 10
W = − mgr (1 − cosθ ) T = = = 24N
m1 + m 2 2+3
W = − 10 × 9.8 × 10 (1 − cos 600 ) 1 2 1
for each block S = at = × 2 × 1 = 1m
1 2 2
W = − 98 × 10 1 − = − 490 J
2 ∴ Wnet = W1 +W2 = TS − TS = 0
150 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Energy: Examples for bodies having K.E
Ø Energy is the ability or capacity to do work. Greater 1) A vehicle in motion.
the amount of energy possessed by the body, greater 2) Water flowing in a river.
the work it will be able to do. 3) A bullet fired from a gun.
Ø Energy is cause for doing work and work is Ø Kinetic energy depends on frame of reference.
Ex: kinetic energy of a person of mass m sitting in
effect of energy. a train moving with speed v is zero in the frame of
Ø Energy is a scalar. Energy and work have same
units and dimensions. 1 2
train but mv in the frame of earth.
Ø The different forms of energy are Mechanical energy, 2
Light energy, Heat energy, Sound energy, Electrical Relation between K.E. and linear momentum
energy, Nuclear energy etc.
Ø 1 2 P2 1
Mechanical energy is of two types Ø KE = mv = = Pv (Q P = mv )
a) Potential Energy b) Kinetic Energy 2 2m 2
Potential energy (U) Ø If two bodies of different masses have same
momentum then lighter body will have greater KE
Ø Potential energy of a body is the energy possessed
1
by a body by virtue of its position or configuration Q K E α
in the field. m
Ø Potential energy is defined only for conservative Ø When a bullet is fired from a gun the momentum of
the bullet and gun are equal and opposite.
forces. It does not exist for non-conservative
forces. In case of conservative forces. K E bullet M gun
i.e =
dU ur uur U2 r2
ur uur K E gun M
F = − ∴ dU = − F .dr ⇒ ∫ dU = −∫ F .dr
bullet
Hence, the KE of the bullet is greater than that of
dr U 1r 1 the gun
r2
ur uur Ø A body can have energy without momentum. But it
U 2 − U1 = − ∫ F . dr = −W can not have momentum without energy.
r1
Ø A bullet of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity ‘v’ stops
in wooden block after penetrating through a distance
r ur uu
r ‘x’. If F is resistance offered by the block to the
If r1 = ∞ , U 1 = 0 ∴ U = ∫ F .dr = −W bullet
∞
(Assuming F is constant inside the block)
Ø P.E can be +ve or -ve or can be zero.
Ø 1 2 mv 2
P.E depends on frame of reference. mv = Fx ; F = ∴v 2α x
Ø Ex: Water stored in a dam , A stretched bow, 2 2x
A loaded spring etc., possesses P.E Ø For a given body
Ø In case of conservative force (field) potential energy 1) The graph between KE and P is a parabola.
KE
is equal to negative of work done in shifting the
body from some reference position to given position
Ø A moving body may or may not have potential
energy.
Ø Potential energy should be considered to be a P
property of the entire system, rather than assigning 2) The graph between KE and P is a straight line
it to any specific particle. 1
Kinetic energy passing through the origin.Its slope =
Ø Kinetic energy is the energy possessed by a body 2m
by virtue of its motion. K
Ø Kinetic energy of a body of mass ‘m’ moving with
1 2
a velocity ‘v’, KE = mv
2
Ø Kinetic energy is a scalar quantity.
Ø The kinetic energy of an object is a measure of the P
1
work an object can do by the virtue of its motion. 3) The graph between KE and is a rectangular
P
hyperbola.
NARAYANAGROUP 151
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
1
K and slope =
2m
P 2 = 2mK
K
1
p
Ø A particle is projected up from a point at an angle
' θ ' with the horizontal. At any time ‘t’ if ‘P’ is linear 2
momentum, ‘y’ is vertical displacement and ‘x’ is P
horizontal displacement, then nature of the curves
drawn for KE of the particle (K) against these P 2 αK
parameters are
i) K - y graph: Conservative and non - Conservative forces
K = Ki − mgy ; It is a straight line Ø If work done by a force around a closed path is
zero and is independent of path then the force is
said to be conservative force.
dU
Ø Under conservative force F = − where U is
dr
Potential Energy. ur uur
U = ∫ dU = − ∫ F .dr
y ur
( F = Fx $i + Fy $j + Fz k$ and
ii) K - t graph uur
1
dr = dxi$ + dy $j + dzk$ )
K = K i − mg uy t − gt 2
ur ∂u ∂u $ ∂u $
F = − i$ +
2
j+ k
∂x ∂y ∂z
1
Q y = u yt − gt 2 ; It is a parabola
2 Ex1: Gravitational force is a conservative force
K
Ex2: Elastic force in a stretched spring is a
conservative force
Non-Conservative Forces:
Ø If the work done by a force around a closed path is
not equal to zero and is dependent on the path
t then the force is non-conservative force
Ex:-Force of friction , Viscous force.
iii) K - x graph Ø Work done by the non-conservative force will not
be stored in the form of Potential energy.
gx 2
K = K i − mg x tan θ − Ø Potential energy is defined only for conservative
2u2x forces.
g
Q y = ( tan θ ) x − 2 x 2 ; It is also a parabola Spring force
2u x Ø Spring force is an example of a variable force which
K is conservative.
Ø In an ideal spring, the spring force Fs is directly
proportional to ‘x’. Where x is the displacement of
the block from equilibrium position. i.e.,
Fs = − Kx .The constant K is called spring
X
2 constant.
iv) K - P graph Ø The work done on the block by the spring force as
It is a straight line passing through origin the block moves from undeformed position
x = 0 to x = x1
152 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
ur uur
dW = F .dx = − Kxdx WE-13: An athlete in the Olympic games covers a
x1
distance of 100 m in 10s. His kinetic energy can
W = ∫ dW = ∫ − Kxdx = − 1 K ( x2 ) 1 = − 1 Kx12
x
0 2 0 2 be estimated to be in the range(JEE MAIN 2008)
Ø If the block moves from x = x1 to x = x2 the work 1) 200 J - 500 J 2) 2 × 105 J − 3 × 105 J
x2 3) 20,000J - 50,000J 4) 2,000 J - 5, 000 J
done by spring force is W = ∫ −Kxdx Sol:Approximate mass of the athlete = 60 kg
x1
Average velocity = 10 m/s.
1
2
(
W = K x1 − x2 = Kx1 − Kx2
2 2 1 2 1 2
2
) 2
1 2 1
Approximate K.E. = mv = × 60 ×10 = 3000 J
2
2 2
Potential energy stored in a spring: Range of KE = 2000 J to 5000J
Ø The change in potential energy of a system W.E-14:Kinetic energy of a particle moving along
corresponding to a conservative internal force is
a circle of radius ‘r’ depends on the distance
x
r uur
dU = −∫ F . dx , as KE = cs2, (c is constant,s is displacement).
0 Find the force acting on the particle
dU = - (work done by the spring force)
1 2 2c
− Kx 2 1 2 Sol. KE = 2 mv = cs 2
⇒ v = s
dU = − ; U f − U i = Kx m
2 2
dv 2c ds 2c
since U i is zero when spring is at its natural length at = = × =v
dt m dt m
1 2
∴U f = Kx 2c 2c 2c
2 Ft = mat = mv = m s = 2cs
W.E-11:Two spheres whose radii are in the ratio m m m
1 : 2 are moving with velocities in the ratio
2
3 : 4. If their densities are in the ratio 3 : 2, mv 2
Total force F = Ft + Fc = ( 2cs ) +
2 2 2
then find the ratio of their kinetic energies.
r
r1 1 v1 3 ρ1 3
Sol. r = 2 , v = 4 , ρ = 2 s2
2 2 2 F = 2cs 1 +
r2
1 2 1 14
K .E = mv = (V ρ ) v 2 = π r 3 ρ v 2 W.E-15: A rectangular plank of mass m1 and height
2 2 23 ‘a’ is on a horizontal surface. On the top of it
3 2
KE1 ρ1 r1 v1 3 1
3 2
3 another rectangular plank of mass m2 and
= × × = × ×
KE2 ρ2 r2 v2 2 2 4 height ‘b’ is placed. Find the potential energy
of the system?
KE1 3 1 9 27
= × × = m2
KE2 2 8 16 256 b
W.E-12:A particle is projected at 600 to the horizontal
with a kinetic energy ‘K’.Find the kinetic m1 a
energy at the highest point ?(JEE MAIN 2007)
1 2 Sol: Total potential energy of system U = U1 + U2
Sol.Initial kinetic energy is K = mu
2 a b m1 b
The velocity at highest point vx = u cos θ . = m1 g + m2 g a + = 2 + m2 a + m2 2 g
2 2
kinetic energy of a particle at highest point WE-16: A rod of mass m and length L is held
1 1 K vertical. Find its gravitational potential
KH = mvx 2 = mu 2 cos2 θ = K cos 2 60 0 = energy with respect to zero potential energy at
2 2 4
the lower end?
NARAYANAGROUP 153
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
1 2
Sol: Initial potential energy U i = kx
2
1
dy Final potential energy U f = k ( x + y )
2
2
y
1 1 2
Work done W= Uf - Ui = k ( x + y ) − kx
2
Sol.Choose a small element of length dy, then 2 2
1
m W = ky ( 2 x + y )
mass of the element dm = dy . 2
L
The potential energy of the element dU= (dm)g(y) Work - energy theorem
Ø Work done by all forces acting on a body is equal
Potential energy of the entire rod
to change in its kinetic energy.
m
L L L
m
U = ∫ ( dm ) gy = ∫ ( dy ) . gy = g ∫ ydy 1 2 1
i.e., W = K f − K i = mv − mu
2
0 0 L L 0 2 2
L Where Kf and Ki are the final and initial kinetic
m y2 mgL
U = g = energies of the body.
L 2 0 2 Ø Work energy theorem is applicable not only for a
WE-17: A chain of length l and mass ‘m’ lies on single particle but also for a system of particles.
the surface of a smooth hemisphere of radius Ø When it is applied to a system of two or more
R > l with one end tied to top of the particles change in kinetic energy of the system is
equal to work done on the system by the external
hemisphere.Find the gravitational potential
as well as internal forces.
energy of the chain? Ø Work-energy theorem can also be applied to a
Sol. system under the action of variable forces, pseudo
(Rd θ) forces, conservative as well as non-conservative
forces.
R Applications of work-energy theorem:
θ dθ Ø A body of mass m starting from rest acquire a
y = Rcosθ
velocity ‘v’ due to constant force F. Neglecting air
Consider a small element of chain of width resistance.
dθ at an angle θ from the vertical 1 2
Work done =change in Kinetic energy = mv
m 2
The mass of the element dm = Rdθ
l Ø A particle of mass ‘m’ is thrown vertically up with a
speed ‘u’. Neglecting the air friction, the work done
The gravitational potential energy of the
by gravitational force, as particle reaches maximum
element du= (dm)gy
height is Wg = ∆K = K f − K i
The gravitational potential energy of total chain
1 1 1
Wg = m ( 0) − m × u 2 = − mu 2
2
l
m 2 2 2
R l
U = ∫ ( dm )gy = ∫ Rdθ g ( R cos θ )
R
Ø A particle of mass ‘m’ falls freely from a height ‘h’
0 l 0
in air medium onto the ground. If ‘v’ is the velocity
mgR 2 l
mgR 2 l with which it reaches the ground, the work done
U= [sin θ ]0R = sin by air friction is Wf and work done by gravitational
l l R
1 1
WE-18: A spring of force constant ‘k’ is stretched force Wg then , Wg + W f = mv 2 − 0 = mv 2
2 2
by a small length ‘x’. Find work done in
stretching it further by a small length ‘y’? Ø A block of mass ‘m’ slides down a frictionless
incline of inclination ‘ θ ’ to the horizontal. If h is
the height of incline, the velocity with which body
154 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
reaches the bottom of incline is h
mg ( h + s ) + ( − Rs ) = 0 ; R = mg 1 +
1 2 s
Wg = ∆K ; mgh = mv − 0 u=0
2
h air
1 2
mgh = mv ; v = 2 gh v1 = 2 gh
2
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ starts from rest from the top of s soil
a rough inclined plane of inclination ‘ θ ’ and length
‘l’. The velocity ‘v’ with which it reaches the bottom v=0
of incline if µk is the coefficient of kinetic friction is Here time of penetration is given by impulse
Wg + W f = ∆k equation ( R − mg ) t = 0 − m 2 gh
1 2 Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is initially at rest. By the
( mg sin θ ) l + ( − µk mg cosθ ) l = mv − 0
application of a constant force, its velocity changes
2
to v0 in time to the kinetic energy of the body at
v = 2 gl ( sin θ − µ k cosθ )
time ‘t’ is
Ø A bob of mass m suspended from a string of length W = ∆K = K f − K i = K f − 0
l is given a speed u at its lowest position then the 2 1 1
speed of the bob v when it makes an angle θ with K f = W = mas = ma at = ma 2t 2
2 2
the vertical is 2
v 1 v
Since a = t ; K f = m 0 t 2
o
Wg + WT = ∆K ⇒ −mgl (1 − cosθ ) + 0 = m ( v2 − u2 )
1 2 t0
o
2
WE-19: Under the action of force 2kg body moves
v = u 2 − 2 gl (1 − cos θ ) such that its position ‘x’ varies as a function
Ø A bullet of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity ‘v’ stops t3
of time t given by x = , x is in metre and t in
in a wooden block after penetrating through a 3
distance x. If ‘f ’ is the resistance offered by the second. Calculate the workdone by the force
block to the bullet. in first two seconds.
W f = K f − K i ; − fx = 0 − KEi Sol. From work-energy theorem W = ∆KE
KE mv 2 P2 t 3
dx
i.e., stopping distance x= f i = 2 f = 2mf x = , Velocity v = = t 2
3 dt
Ø A block of mass ‘m’ attached to a spring of spring At t = 0, v1 =0, At t = 2s, v2 = 4m/s
constant ‘K’ oscillates on a smooth horizontal table.
W = m ( v22 − v12 ) = × 2 ( 4 2 − 0 ) = 16 J
1 1
The other end of the spring is fixed to a wall. It has 2 2
a speed ‘v’ when the spring is at natural length. The
WE-20: A uniform chain of length ‘l’ and mass’M’
distance it moves on a table before it comes to rest is on a smooth horizontal table, with (1/n)th
is calculated as below part of its length hanging from the edge of the
WS .F + Wg + WN = ∆K (S.F=spring force) table. Find the kinetic energy of the chain as
Let the mass be oscillating with amplitude ‘x’. it completely slips off the table.
On compressing the spring WS . F = − 1 Kx 2
2
L
Wg = FS cos 900 = 0 ; WN = NS cos 900 = 0
n
1 1 m
⇒ − 2 Kx = 0 − 2 mv ⇒ x = v K
2 2
WS .F = K f − K i
Ø A pile driver of mass ‘m’ is dropped from a height ‘h’ Sol: Work done ∆W = Ui − U f = K f − K i
above the ground. On reaching the ground it pierces
through a distance ‘s’and then stops finally. If R is the Mgl Mgl 1 1
− 2 = Mv 2 ; v = gl 1 − 2
average resistance offered by ground then 2 2n 2 n
1 1
Wg + WR = K f − Ki = mu 2 − mv 2
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 155
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
WE-21:Two blocks having masses 8 kg and 16kg WE-23: In the below figure, what constant force
are connected to the two ends of a light spring. ‘P’ is required to bring the 50kg body, which
The system is placed on a smooth horizontal starts from rest to a velocity of 10m/s in moving
floor. An inextensible string also connects B 7m along the plane? (Neglect friction)
with ceiling as shown in figure at the initial
moment. Initially the spring has its natural p 0
length.A constant horizontal force F is applied 30
to the heavier block as shown. What is the 50 kg
maximum possible value of F so that lighter
block doesn’t loose contact with ground.
0
30
5m 4m A Sol. Work done by force P in displacing the
block by 7m, W1 = ( F cos θ )( S )
8kg 16kg F
B
W1 = ( P cos 300 ) 7 =
7 3
PJ
Sol: Draw FBD of B to get extension in spring. 2
When block B just looses contact with ground
resultant force on it is zero. W2 = − mgh = −50 × 9.8 × 7 sin 300 = −1715 J
N According to work energy theorem
T
θ W1 + W2 =
1
2
(
m v22 − v12 )
kx
P − 1715 = × 50 × (10 2 − 0 2 ) ⇒ P = 607 N
7 3 1
2 2
mg WE-24: Figure shows a spring fixed at the bottom
Kx
Kx − T cos θ = 0 ⇒ T = ; T sin θ + N − mg = 0 end of an incline of inclination 370. A small
cos θ
block of mass 2 kg starts slipping down the
Kx
When N = 0 then T sin θ = mg ⇒ cos θ sin θ = mg incline from a point 4.8 m away from the
x=
mg
=
80
=
60 spring. The block compresses the spring by 20
K tan θ K × (4 / 3) K cm, stops momentarily and then rebounds
If spring has to just extend till this value then
through a distance 1 m up the incline. Find
from work energy theorem we get
(i) the friction coefficient between the plane
1 2
Fx = Kx ⇒ F = 30 N and the block and (ii) the spring constant of
2
WE-22: A 2kg block slides on a horizontal floor the spring. (g = 10 ms-2 )
with a speed of 4 m/s. It strikes an
uncompressed spring and compresses it
till the block is motionless.The kinetic
frictional force is 15 N and spring constant is
10,000 Nm -1. Find the compression in the
spring?(JEE MAIN 2007) 37
0
1 1
Sol: KE = mv 2 =W friction + Kx 2
2 2
Sol: Applying work energy theorem for
1 1
⇒ × 2 × 4 2 = 15 x + × 10000 × x 2 downward motion of the body W = ∆KE
2 2
⇒ 5000 x 2 + 15 x − 16 = 0 mg sin θ ( x + d ) − f × l1 −
1 2
Kx = ∆KE
⇒ x = 0.055 m or x = 5.5 cm 2
156 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
1 dU
20sin370 ( 5) − µ × 20 cos370 ×5 − K ( 0.2) = 0 = 0 (or) slope of U-r graph is zero
2
2.
2 dr
3. When displaced from its equilibrium position, a net
80 µ + 0.02 K = 60 → (1) force starts acting on the body which moves the
For the upward motion of the body body in the direction of displacement or away from
1 the equilibrium position
−mg sin θ l2 + ( f × l2 ) + Kx 2 = ∆KE 4. PE in equilibrium position is maximum as compared
2
1 d 2U
−2 ×10sin370 ×1 − µ × 20 cos370 ×1 + K ( 0.2) = 0
2
to other positions as is negative
2 dr 2
5. When displaced from equilibrium position the centre
16µ − 0.02 K = − 12 → ( 2 ) of gravity of the body goes up
Adding equations (1) and (2), we get
96µ = 48 ⇒ µ = 0.5
Now, use the value of µ in equation (1),
we get K = 1000 N/m.
Neutral equilibrium
Types of Equilibrium 1. Net force is zero
A body is said to be in translatory equilibrium, if net
ur 2.
dU
= 0 or slope of U-r graph is zero
force acting on the body is zero i.e., F net = 0 dr
3. When displaced from its equilibrium position the
dU body has neither the tendency to come back nor
If the forces are conservative F = −
dr move away from the original position.
and for equilibrium F = 0 , 4. PE remains constant even if the body is moving to
d 2U
dU dU neighbouring points =0
so − = 0 or = 0 , ∴ At equilibrium position dr 2
dr dr 5. When displaced from equilibrium position the centre
slope ofU -r graph is zero or the potential energy is of gravity of the body remains constant
optimum (maximum or minimum or constant)
There are three types of equilibrium Potential energy and Equilibrium
(i) Stable equilibrium (ii) Unstable equilibrium U
(iii) Neutral equilibrium. B
Stable equilibrium
1. Net force is Zero 1. A
dU
2. = 0 or slope of U-r graph is zero x
dr
3. When displaced from its equilibrium position, a net In the figure, at A :
retarding forces starts acting on the body, which dU d 2U
= 0 , and is positive
has a tendency to bring the body back to its dx dx 2
equilibrium position Thus at A the particle is in stable equilibrium.
4. PE in equilibrium position is minimum as compared dU d 2U
to its neighbouring points as At B; = 0 , and is negative
dx dx 2
d 2U Thus at B the particle is in unstable equilibrium
is positive
dr 2 WE-25: In a molecule, the potential energy between
5. When displaced from equilibrium position the centre a b
of gravity of the body comes down two atoms is given by U(x) = 12
− 6 . Where
x x
‘a’ and ‘b’ are positive constants and ‘x’ is the
distance between atoms. Find the value of ‘x’
at which force is zero and minimum P.E at that
Unstable equilibrium point. (JEE MAIN 2010)
1. Net force is zero
NARAYANAGROUP 157
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
dU Sol. By conservation of mechanical energy
Sol: Force is zero ⇒ =0
1
dx mg ( h + y ) = Ky 2
i.e., a ( −12) x −13 − b( −6) x −7 = 0 2
h = height of particle
−12a 6b 12a 6b
13
+ 7 = 0 ⇒ 13 = 7 y = compression of the spring
x x x x
1 As here particle and spring remain same
2a 2a 6 2
h1 + y1 y1 0.24 + 0.01 0.01
⇒x = ∴x =
6 2
= ; =
b h2 + y2 y2 h2 + 0.04 0.04
b ; h2 = 3.96 m
Substituting the value of x
12 6 WE-27: A small mass ‘m’ is sliding down on a
b 6 b 6
⇒ U min = a − b
smooth curved incline from a height ‘h’ and
2a 2a finally moves through a horizontal
b2 b2 − b2 smooth surface. A light spring of force
U min = − ⇒ U =
4a 2a constant K is fixed with a vertical rigid stand
min
4a
Law of conservation of Mechanical on the horizontal surface, as shown in the
figure.Find the value for the maximum
energy: compression in the spring if mass ‘m’ is
Ø Total mechanical energy of a system remains released from rest from height ‘h’ and hits the
constant, if only conservative forces are acting on a
system of particles and the work done by all other spring on the horizontal surface.
forces is zero. A
∴ U f − U i = −W m
From work energy theorem W = k f − ki h
∴ U f − U i = − ( k f − ki ) C K
∴U f + k f = U i + ki ⇒ U + K = constant
The sum of potential energy and kinetic energy Sol. Conservation of energy b/w positions A and C
remains constant in any state.
Ø A body is projected vertically up from the ground. ( PE A )block + KE A = ( PEC )spring + KEC
When it is at height ‘h’ above the ground, its
1 2 1 2 2mgh
potential and kinetic energies are in the ratio x : y. If mgh + 0 = Kx + 0 ;mgh = Kx ; x =
H is the maximum height reached by the body, then 2 2 K
x h h x WE-28:A vehicle of mass 15 quintal climbs up a
= or =
y H −h H x+ y hill 200m high. It then moves on a level road
WE-26: A massless platform is kept on a light with a speed of 30ms −1 .Calculate the potential
elastic spring as shown in figure. When a sand
particle of 0.1kg mass is dropped on the pan energy gained by it and its total mechanical
from a height of 0.24m, the particle strikes the energy while running on the top of the hill
pan and the spring compresses by 0.01m. From −2
what height should particle be dropped to Sol. m = 15 quintal = 1500kg, g= 9.8ms ,h = 200m
cause a compression of 0.04m. P.E.gained,U=mgh =1500 x 9.8 x 200=2.94 x 106 J
0.1 kg
1 2 1
K.E. = mv = x 1500 x (30)2= 0.675 x 106J
2 2
Total mechanical energy
E = K + U = (0.675 + 2.94) x 106= 3.615 x 106J
WE-29: A particle is released from height H.At
certain height from the ground its kinetic
energy is twice its gravitational potential
energy. Find the height and speed of particle
at that height
158 NARAYANAGROUP
2
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Sol. K.E = 2PE But KE = TE – PE WE-31: The potential energy of 1 kg particle free
mg(H – h) = 2mgh; mgH = 3mgh to move along X - axis is given by
H x4 x2
⇒h= ; Also K.E = 2P.E , U (x) = − J. The total mechanical
3 4 2
1 2 H gH energy of the particle is 2 J. Find the
mv = 2mg ⇒ v = 2 maximum speed of the particle.
2 3 3 dU
Sol:For maximum value of U, = 0.
WE-30: A heavy flexible uniform chain of length dx
π r and mass λπ r lies in a smooth 4 x3 2 x
semicircular tube AB of radius ‘r’. Assuming ∴ − = 0 or x = 0, x = ± 1.
a slight disturbance to start the chain in 4 2
motion, find the velocity v with which it will d 2U d 2U
emerge from the end of the tube? At x = 0, = − 1 and At x = ± 1, =2
dx 2 dx 2
Hence U is minimum at x = ± 1 with value
1 1 1
2r/π U min = − = − J
C.G 4 2 4
B A
1 9
Reference level Kmax + Umin = E or K max − = 2 or K max =
4 4
1 9 3
⇒ mv 2 = ⇒ vmax = ms −1
2 4 2
WE-32:Figure shows a particle sliding on a
Sol: frictionless track which terminates in a straight
horizontal section. If the particle starts slipping
from the point A, how far away from the track
will the particle hit the ground?
B A
A
πr
__
2 B
C.G 1.0 m
0.5 m
Sol: Applying the law of conservation of
Centre of gravity of a semicircular arc is at a mechanical energy for the points A and B,
1 2
distance
2r
from the centre . mgH = mv + mgh
π 2
v2 g
Initial potential energy U i = ( λπ r ) g 2r g− = or v 2 = g ⇒ v = g = 3.1 ms −1
π
2 2
After point B the particle exhibits projectile motion
−π r
Final potential energy U f = ( λπ r ) g with θ = 00 and y = − 0.5 m
2 Horizontal distance travelled by the body
When the chain is completely slipped off the tube,
2h 2 × 0.5
all the links of the chain have the same velocity v. R=u = 3.1× = 1m
g 9.8
1 2 1
kinetic energy of chain k = mv = ( λπ r ) v
2
2 2 POWER
From conservation of energy , Ø The rate of doing work is called power.
Power or average power is given by
2r −π r 1
λπ rg = ( λπ r ) g + ( λπ r ) v
2
Pavg =
work done
π 2 2 time
, Power is a scalar
SI Unit: watt(W) (or) J/s, CGS Unit : erg/sec
2 π
0n solving we get, v = 2 rg + Other Units : kilo watt, mega watt and horse power
π 2 One horse power (H.P)=746 watt
NARAYANAGROUP 159
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Ø Instantaneous Power: Ø When a liquid of density ‘ ρ ’ coming out of a hose
∆W pipe of area of cross section ‘A’ with a velocity ‘v’
P = Lt strikes the wall normally and stops dead. Then
∆t →.0
∆t
ur ur 1 mv 2 1
It is also calculated by P = FV cos θ = F .V power exerted by the liquid is P= = ?Av 3
2 t 2
Ø Relation Between Pavg and Pins : (Q mass=density x volume = m = ρ × A × l )
Ø
1 ur ur
A vehicle of mass ‘m’ is driven with constant
W mv 2 = 1 mv v 1
Pavg = = = mav = F .V acceleration along a straight level road against a
t 2t 2 t 2 2 constant external resistance ‘R’ when the velocity
1
Pavg = Pinst is ‘v’, power of engine is P = F v = ( R + m a ) v
2 Ø If P is a rated power of a device and if its efficiency
Ø The area under P − t graph gives work done x
is x% , useful power is (output power) P =
1
P
dW
P= ∴W = ∫ P.dt 100
dt Ø If a motor lifts water from a well of depth ‘h’ and
The slope of W-t curve gives instantaneous power delivers with a velocity ‘v’ in a time t then power of
dW 1
P= = tan θ mgh+ mv 2
dt the motor P= 2
t
Ø If a body of mass ‘m’ starts from rest and accelerated
Work
uniformly to a velocity v0 in a time t0 , then the work
power
done on the body in a time ‘t’ is given by
θ 1 2 1 vo t
2
v0 v
x W= mv = m ; a= ; v=at= 0 t
x O time 2 2 to to to
O time
Applications on power Instantaneous power, P = F v = m a v
Ø The power of a machine gun firing ‘n’ bullets each v0 v0 v 02
of mass ‘m’ with a velocity ‘v’ in a time interval ‘t’ ∴ P = m t = m 2 t
to to t0
1
n mv 2 2 Ø A motor pump is used to deliver water at a certain
is given by P= 2 = nmv rate from a given pipe. To obtain ‘n’ times water
t 2t from the same pipe in the same time by what amount
Ø A crane lifts a body of mass ‘m’ with a constant of (a) force and (b) power of the motor should be
velocity v from the ground, its power is increased.
P=Fv=mgv If a liquid of density ‘ ρ ’ is flowing through a pipe
Ø Power of lungs of a boy blowing a whistle is of cross section ‘A’ at speed ‘v’ the mass coming
1 dm
P= ( mass of air blown per sec) (velocity) 2 out per second will be = Av ρ .
2 dt
Ø Power of a heart pumping blood To get ‘n’ times water in the same time
= (pressure) (volume of blood pumped per sec) 1
Ø A conveyor belt is moving with a constant speed dm dm
= n ⇒ A' v ' ρ ' = n ( Avρ )
‘v’ horizontally and gravel is falling on it at a rate of dt dt
dm As the pipe and liquid are not changed,
. Then additional force required to maintain
dt ρ | = ρ ; A' = A &v ' = nv
dm dm
1
dm
speed v is F = v and additional power v| ( nv ) n
dt dm F'
= dt = dt = n 2
2 dm as F = v ⇒ F dm dm
required to drive the belt is, P = F v = v dt v v
dt dt dt
160 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
as P = Fv ⇒ WE-34: The 50 N collar starts from rest at A and is
P ' F ' v ' ( n F ) ( nv )
2 lifted with a constant speed of 0.6 m/s along
= = = n3 the smooth rod. Determine the power
P Fv Fv developed by the force F at the instant shown.
∴ F ' = n2 F ∴ P ' = n3 P 0.9 m
To get ‘n’ times of water force must be increased
F
n 2 times while power n3 times. T
1.2 m θ T
Position and velocity of an automobile
w.r.t.time: A
An automobile of mass ‘m’ accelerates starting from
rest, while the engine supplies constant power,its Sol: Since the collar is lifted with a constant speed
position and velocity changes w.r.t time as
T cos θ − mg = 0 ⇒ T cos θ = mg = 5 × 10
Velocity : As F v = P = constant ur r
Now, P = F .v = T cos θ × v ; Here T = F
dv dv
i.e. m v=P F=m P = 50 × v = 50 × 0.6 = 30W
dt dt
WE-35: A machine delivers power to a body which is
P
or ∫ v dv= ∫ dt on integrating we get directly proportional to velocity of the body. If
m the body starts with a velocity which is almost
v2 P negligible, find the distance covered by the body
= t+C 1 in attaining a velocity v.
2 m
As initially the body is at rest, dv
ie. v = 0 at t = 0 ⇒ C 1 = 0 ; Sol. Power P = Fv cos 0 = Fv = m v ∝ v
dt
1/2
2Pt dv
v= ⇒ v a t1/2 mv = K 0 v , Where K0 =constant
m dt
Position: From the above expression dv dv dx
m = K 0 ; m = K0
dx dt
1/2 1/2
2Pt ds 2 Pt dt
v= (or) =
m dt m dv K
mv = K 0 ; vdv = 0 dx
m
1
2Pt
1/2
dx
dt = 2 p ∫ t 2 dt
1
∫ ds = ∫ m
2
v x K
integrating on both sides we get
m Integrating ∫
0
vdv = ∫ 0
0
m
dx ;
1/2
2P 2 3/2 v2 K0 1 mv 2
S = . t + C2 = x ⇒ x =
m 3 2 m 2 K0
Now at t = 0, S = 0 ⇒ C2 = 0
1/2
WE-36: Find the power of an engine which can
8P 3/2 draw a train of 400 metric ton up the inclined
S = t , ∴S α t 3/2
9m plane of 1 in 98 at the rate 10 ms-1.The
WE-33: An automobile is moving at 100 kmph and resistance due to friction acting on the train
is exerting attractive force of 3920 N. What is 10 N per ton.
horse power must the engine develop, if 20 % 1
So1. Given sin θ = ; m = 400 × 103 kg
of the power developed is wasted? 98
5 frictional force f = 10 × 400 = 4000 N ;
Sol :Velocity = 100 kmph = 100 × m/s
18 velocity v = 10 ms-1
Force = 3920 N;;Useful power = 80%
80 5
∴ Power P = (mg sinθ + f) v
W F.S
Power = = =F.v ⇒ 100 P = 3920 × 100 × 18 1
t t ∴ P = 400 × 10 × 9.8 ×
3
+ 4000 × 10
98
100 5
P= × 3920 × 100 × = 13.16 × 104 W = 182.5hp = 440000W=440KW
80 18
NARAYANAGROUP 161
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
WE-37: A hose pipe has a diameter of 2.5cm and is Ø Velocity of the body at any point on the vertical
required to direct a jet of water to a height of
atleast 40m. Find the minimum power of the circle:
pump needed for this hose. TE A = TE P ;
1 1
mV12 + 0 = mVθ2 + mgh
Sol.Volume of water ejected per sec 2 2
Vq = V1 - 2 gh , but h = r (1- cos q )
2 2 2
d
Av = π × 2 gh m3 / s; ∴ v = 2 gh
Vq = V1 - 2 gr (1 - cos q ) ; Vq = V12 - 2 gr (1- cos q )
2 2
2
1 If V2 is the velocity of the body at highest point
Mass ejected per sec is M = π d 2 × 2 gh ρ Kg/s ( q = 180 0 )
4
Kinetic energy of water leaving hose / sec
3
V2 = V 1 - 2 g r (1 + 1 )
2
= V12 - 4 g r
1 1
K .E = mv2 = π d 2 × ( 2 gh ) 2 × ρ Tension in the string at any point :
2 8
Ø
= × 3.14 × ( 2.5 ×10−2 ) × ( 2 × 9.8 × 40) ×1000 =21.5KJ
1 2 3
2
Let Tq be the tension in the string when the string
8
makes an angle q with vertical.
WE-38: A body of mass m accelerates uniformly
from rest to velocity v0 in time t0 , find the mVq 2
instantaneous power delivered to body when Tq = + mg cos q
r
v0 Ø 1) At the lowest point q = 00 tension in the string is
velocity is .
2 mV12
v0 mv0 TL= + mg (maximum).
Sol.Acceleration a = t ; Force F = t r
0 0 Ø 2) At the highest point q = 180 0 .
2
v0 mv0 v0 mv mV 2 2
Instantaneous power P= F . 2 = t 2 =
0
The tension in the string is TH = - mg (minimum)
0 2t0 r
Ø 3) When the string is horizontal, q = 900 , tension
Vertical circular motion with variable speed: 2
mV horz
in the string at this position is T(hor ) =
r
Ø 4) The difference in maximum and minimum tension
in the string is
O
mV12 mV 2
Tmax–Tmin= + mg - 2 + mg
r r r
= (V1 -V2 ) + 2mg
m 2 2
V1 r
A
= ( 4 gr ) + 2mg = 4mg + 2 mg = 6 mg
m
Consider a body of mass ‘m’ tied at one end of a
string of length ‘r’ and is whirled in a vertical circle r
by fixing the other end at ‘O’. Let V1 be the velocity Ø 5) Ratio of maximum tension to minimum tension in
of the body at the lowest point. the string is
V2 mV12
+ mg V 12 + r g
Tmax
= r 2 =
V 22 - r g
mg
Tmin mV 2
- mg
r
TH Vhor Ø When the particle is at ‘P’
O Thor a) Tangential force acting on the particle is
θ Tθ
Ft = mg sin q .
P
mVθ2 Tangential acceleration a t = g sin q
r
TL θ
mg cos θ b) Centripetal force acting on the particle is
mg æ mV 2 ö÷
Fc = ççç
V1 q ÷
A = Tq - mg cos q .
mg çè r ø÷÷
162 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
V2
Centripetal acceleration ac = q
From the Law of conservation of energy
r total energy at point ‘A’ = total energy at point P
c) Net acceleration of the particle at the point
U A + KEA = UP + KEP
‘P’ is a = at2 + ac2 . 1 1
O + mV12 = mgh + mVθ2
d) The net force acting on the particle at point 2 2
‘P’ is F = Ft 2 + Fc2 1 1
m ( 5 gR ) = mgR (1 − cos θ ) + mVθ2
Ø Angle made by net force or net acceleration with 2 2
at
centripetal component is f and tan f = F = a
Ft 5gmR 1
= mgR − mgR cosθ + mVθ2
c c 2 2
Condition for vertical circular motion of 5gmR 1
a body − mgR + mgR cos θ = mVθ2
B 2 2
V2 mgR 1
mg
T2
[3 + 2cos θ ] = mVθ2
2 2
O Vθ = gR ( 3 + 2cosθ )
T1 Minimum tension in the string to just
V1
A mg complete vertical circle:
mV2 2 Ø Let Tθ be the tension in the string when the string is
We know that 2T = − mg
r making an angle θ from lowest point
The body will complete the vertical circular path
when tension at highest point is such that
mV2 2
T2 ≥ 0 , − mg ≥ 0 ; V2 min = gr O
Vθ
r Tθ
Hence the minimum speed at highest point to just
θ
complete the vertical circle is gr P
From the law of conservation of mechanical energy θ
total energy at lowest point A = total energy at mg cos θ
highest point B mg sinθ mg
U A + KE A = U B + KE B mvθ2 m
= mg cosθ + gR ( 3 + 2 cosθ )
Tθ = mg cos θ +
1 1 R R
O + mV12 = mg ( 2r ) + mV22 = mg cos θ + 3mg + 2mg cosθ
2 2
1 1 = 3mg cos θ + 3mg = 3mg (1 + cos θ )
mV12 = 2mgr + mgr Q V2 = gr
2 2 Ø In case of non uniform circular motion in a vertical
5 plane if velocity of the body at the lowest point is
= mgr ⇒ V1 = 5 gr
2 less than 5gr , the particle will not complete the
For the body to continue along a circular path the circle in vertical plane, the particle may either
critical velocity at lowest point is 5gr oscillate about the lowest point or it leaves the circle
with out looping.
Critical velocity at any point on the vertical circle: Condition for oscillating about the
lowest position:
O 1) If 0 < VL < 2 gr , in this case, velocity becomes
R-h θ Tθ Vθ zero before tension vanishes and the particle
P oscillates about its lowest position with angular
B
θ amplitude 0 0 < θ < 90 0
AV
1 mg
NARAYANAGROUP 163
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
2) If velocity of the body at the lowest point mv 2
VL < 2gr , then the maximum height reached by Centripetal force = mgcos? - N=
r
mv 2
the body just before its velocity becomes zero is and normal reaction N=mgcos? -
r
VL2 Ø A ball of mass ‘M’ is suspended vertically by a string
given by h = . of length ‘L’. A bullet of mass ‘m’ is fired horizontally
2g with a velocity ‘u’ onto the ball, sticks to it. For the
3) The angle made by the string with the vertical when system to complete the vertical circle, the minimum
its velocity becomes zero is given by ( M + m)
value of ‘u’ is given by u = 5 gL
m
VL2
cos q = 1-
2gr
Note: If 0 < VL ≤ 2 gr then the particle oscillates
such that 00 < θ ≤ 900 0
Condition for leaving the circular path L
without looping:
Ø If 2 gr < VL < 5 gr . the particle is not able to u m M
complete the vertical circle, it goes to certain height Ø A nail is fixed at a certain distance ‘x’ vertically
and leaves the circular path (90o< θ <180o ) below the point of suspension of a simple pendulum
while leaving the circular path T = 0 but V ≠ 0 of length L. The bob is released when the string
Ø The angle made by the string with downward vertical makes an angle θ with vertical. The bob reaches
when the tension in the string becomes zero is given the lowest position then describes a vertical circle
2 VL
2 whose centre coincides with the nail. Then
by cos θ = − L ( 3 + 2 cosθ )
3 3 gr
Ø The height at which the tension in the string becomes xmin =
5
VL + gr
2
zero is given by h =
3g
Ø When car moves on a concave bridge of radius
N
x
θ
L o
nail
θ v
mg cos θ Concave Bridge
L-x
mg
Ø A body of mass ‘m’ is allowed to slide down from
mv 2 rest, from the top of a smooth incline of height ‘h’.
Centripetal force = N - mgcos?=
r For the body to move in a loop of radius ‘r’ on
mv 2 arriving at the bottom.
and normal reaction N=mgcos?+
r
Ø When car moves on a convex bridge of radius r
h r
N
V
5r
a) Minimum height of smooth incline h =
2
θ
b) ‘h’ is independent of mass of the body
mg
164 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø A small body is freely sliding down from the top of To complete vertical circle
a smooth convex hemisphere of radius r, placed on
a table with its flat face on the table then Vmin = 5 gr = 5 g ( l − d ) — (2)
Equating ,equations (1) and (2), we get
4l 4
gl = 5 g ( l − d ) ⇒ d = = = 0.80m
5 5
h WE-40: A body slides without friction from a height
θ r H = 60cm and then loops the loop of radius R =
20cm at the bottom of an incline. Find the ratio
a) Normal reaction on the body is zero at the instant of forces exerted on the body by the track at the
positions A, B and C ( g = 10ms )
the body leaves the hemisphere. −2
b) the vertical height from table at which the body
leaves the hemisphere is h=2r/3 C
c) If the position vector of the body with respect to
the centre of curvature makes an angle θ with
vertical when the body leaves the hemisphere, then
cos θ = 2 / 3 B
H
2 gr R
d) velocity of block at that instant is V =
3
e) If the block is given a horizontal velocity ‘u’ from
the top of the smooth convex hemisphere then the A
Sol. From data H = 3R
angle θ with vertical at which the block leaves
Velocity at A, VA = 2 gH = 2 g ( 3R ) = 6 gR
2 u2
hemisphere is cos θ = +
3 3 gr Velocity at B, V B = 4gR
WE-39: A nail is located at certain distance vertically Velocity at C, VC = 2 gR
below the point of suspension of a simple
+ mg cos ( 00 )
pendulum. The pendulum bob is released from mVA2
0 Reaction force at A = R =
the position where the string makes an angle 60 1
R
from the vertical. Calculate the distance of the m × 6 gR
nail from the point of suspension such that the = + mg =7mg
bob will just perform revolutions with the nail R
+ mg cos ( 900 )
as the centre. Assume the length of the pendulum mVB2
to be 1m. Reaction force at B = R 2
=
R
m × 4 gR
= + 0 = 4mg
R
600 mVC2
Reaction force at C = R3 = + mg cos (1800 )
R
P
m × 2 gR
= − mg =mg
R
∴ R1 : R2 : R3 = 7 : 4 :1
Sol.Velocity of bob at lowest position WE-41: A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by
a light inextensible string of length l is projected
V = 2 g l (1 − cos θ )
horizontally with a speed of gl .Find the speed
l
= 2 g × l (1 − cos60 ) = 2 g = g l ..(1)
0
of the particle and the inclination of the string to
2 the vertical at the instant of the motion, when the
Let ‘d’ be the distance of nail from the tension in the string is equal to the weight of the
point of suspension. The bob will have to
particle.
complete the circle of radius r = l − d
NARAYANAGROUP 165
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Oblique Collision:
Ø It is the collision in which the velocities of the
T colliding bodies are not confined to same straight
θ B
line before and after collision.
Sol: Ø Oblique collision may be two dimensional or three
h u
mg mg cos θ dimensional.
u = gl A
Ø When a particle hits elastically and obliquely another
mg sin θ
stationary particle of same mass, then they move
Let T = mg at an angle ‘ θ ’as shown in the perpendicular to each other after collision.
figure and h = l (1 − cos θ ) à (i) Types of Collision:Based on conservation of
kinetic energy collisions are classified into
Applying law of conservation of mechanical energy (i) Elastic Collision (ii) Inelastic collision
between the points A and B, Elastic Collision:It is the collision in which both
momentum and kinetic energy are conserved.
we get m ( u − v ) = mgh
1 2 2
Forces involved during collision are conservative
2 in nature
Here u = g l à (ii)
2
Ex.1. Collision between atomic particles.
and v 2 = u 2 − 2 gh à (iii) 2. Collision between two smooth billiard balls.
3. Collision of α particle with nucleus.
mv 2 Inelastic collision:It is the collision in which
Further T − mg cos θ = (T = mg)
l momentum is conserved but not kinetic energy. Some
or all the forces involved during collision are non
v 2 = g l (1 − cos θ ) à(iv) conservative.
From equations (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) Ex: Collision between two vehicles.
Perfectly inelastic collision:
we have g l (1 − cos θ ) = g l − 2 g l (1 − cos θ ) Ø It is the collision in which the colliding bodies stick
2 2−1
together and move as a single body after collision.
cosθ = ; θ = cos Ø In perfectly inelastic collision the momentum
3 3 remains conserved but the loss of kinetic energy is
gl maximum.
From equation (iv) v = Ex: A bullet is fired into a wooden block and
3 remains embedded in it.
Collisions Line of impact:The line passing through the
Ø The strong interaction among bodies involving common normal to the surfaces in contact during
exchange of momentum in a short interval of time impact is called line of impact. The force during
is called collision. collision acts along this line on both bodies.
Ø During collision bodies may or may not come into Ex 1: Two balls A and B are approaching each
physical contact. other such that their centres are moving along line
Ex: In the collision of α particle with nucleus, due CD.
to coulombic repulsive forces α particle is scattered Line of impact and
away without any physical contact. A line of motion
B
Ø Based on the direction of motion of colliding bodies,
collisions are classified into C D
(i) Head on or one dimensional collision A
B
(ii) oblique collision Head on Collision
Ex 2: Two balls A and B are approaching each
Head on (or) one dimensional collision other such that their centres are moving along dotted
Line of impact and lines as shown in figure.
A line of motion B
B
C D Line of motion
A
B of ball B
Ø It is the collision in which the velocities of the A
colliding bodies are confined to same straight line
before and after collision.
Oblique collision
166 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Ex 3: Ball is falling on a stationary wedge Applications:
Line of motion Ø A body of mass m1 moving with a velocity v1
of ball
Line of impact collides elastically with a stationary mass m2
r m -m r
Velocity of first body after collision v1 = m +m u1
1 2
1)
1 2
2) Velocity of second body after collision
r 2m1 r
Oblique Collision v2 = u1
m1 + m2
Elastic collision in one dimension: 3) KE of first body after collision (or) KE retained by
When two particles of masses m1 and m2 are 2
1 1 m − m2 2
moving along the line joining their centers with first body K .E1 = m1v12 = m1 1 u1
2 2 m1 + m2
velocities u1 and u2 ( u1 > u2 ) before collision. m − m2
2
m1 − m 2
2
1
K.E ret = m1u12 1 = KE i
Then v1 and v2 are their velocities after collision 2 1
m + m 2 m1 + m 2
u1 u2
m1
v1
m2
v2
4) Fraction of KE retained by 1st body
2
m1 m2 K .Eret m1 − m2
During After collision =
K .Ei m1 + m2
Before collision Collision
From the conservation of linear momentum
r r r r 5) KE of second body after collision (or) KE
m1 ( u1 - v1 ) = m 2 ( v 2 - u 2 ) transferred to the second body
From Law of conservation of K.E 2
1 1 2 m1 2
KE 2 = m 2 v 2 = m 2
2
1 1 1 1 u1
m1u12 + m 2 u 22 = m1v12 + m 2 v22 2 2 m1 + m 2
2 2 2 2
r r r r 4m m 1
∴ u1 - u 2 = v 2 - v1
KE2 = 1 2
m u2
i.e Relative velocity of approach before collision ( m + m ) 2 2 1 1
1 2
= Relative velocity of separation after collision
Ø Velocities after collision are 4m m
KEtra = 1 2
KEi
r m -m r 2m 2 r ( m + m )2
v1 = 1 2 u 1 + 1 2
u2
m1 +m2 m1 +m2 6) Fraction of KE transferred from 1st body to second
body (or) Fraction of KE lost by 1st body is
r 2m1 r m 2 -m1 r
v2 = u1 + u2 KEtra 4m1m2
m1 +m 2 m1 +m 2 =
( m1 + m2 )
2
Special cases: KEi
1) If colliding particles have equal masses
r r
7) Fraction of momentum retained by m1
r r
i.e m1 = m2 = m ; v1 =u 2 , v 2 =u1 P1 m1v1 m1 − m2
= =
2) If two bodies are of equal masses and the second Pi m1u1 m1 + m2
r r
body is at rest ie., m = m =m and u2 = 0 then 8) Fraction of momentum transferred from 1st body
1 2
to second body
r r r r
v1 =0 ; v 2 =u 1 P2 Pi − P1 P m − m2 2m2
3) A lighter particle collides with heavier particle which = = 1− 1 = 1− 1 =
r r Pi Pi Pi m1 + m2 m1 + m2
is at rest m1 <<< m 2 , u 2 = 0 WE-42: A bullet of mass ‘m’ moving at a speed ‘v’
r r r hits a ball of mass ‘M’ kept at rest. A small
v 1 =-u 1 , v2 =0
4) A heavier body collides with lighter body at rest part having mass m1 breaks from the ball and
r r sticks to the bullet. The remaining ball is found
m1 >>> m 2 , u 2 = 0 ;
r r r r to move at a speed v2 in the direction of the
v1 = u 1 , v 2 =2u1
bullet.Find the velocity of the bullet after the
collision.
NARAYANAGROUP 167
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Sol:Mass of bullet = m and speed = v. WE-45: n elastic balls are placed at rest on a
Mass of the ball M and fractional mass of the ball m1 smooth horizontal plane which is circular at
According to law of conservation of linear the end with radius ‘r’ as shown in the figure.
momentum m m m
mv+0 = ( m+m 1 ) v1 + ( M -m 1 ) v 2 The masses of the balls are m, ,
2 2 2
,........
2n −1
Where v1 = final velocity of the respectively. Find the minimum velocity that
should be imparted to the first ball of mass
(bullet + fractional mass)
‘m’ such that the ‘ nth ’ ball will complete the
mv- ( M-m1 ) v 2
v1 = vertical circle.
( m+m1 )
WE-43: Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are 1 2 n r
moving with velocities 1ms −1 and 3ms −1
respectively in opposite directions. If the
bodies undergo one dimensional elastic Sol:Let speed to be imparted to the first ball be v0 .
Consider the impact between the first two balls and
collision, the body of mass m1 comes to v1 and v 2 be the velocities of balls 1 and 2 after
rest.Find the ratio of m1 and m 2 the impact respectively.
According to law of conservation of linear
Sol. u1 = 1m / s, u 2 = -3m / s, v1 = 0
m
m1 -m 2 2m 2 momentum mv0 =mv1 + v 2 → (1)
v1 = u1+ u2 2
m1 +m2 m1 +m 2 According to law of conservation of kinetic energy
m − m2 2 m2 1 1 1m
0= 1 1 + ( −3) mv0 2 = mv12 + v 2 2 → ( 2 )
m1 + m2 m1 + m2 2 2 2 2
m1 7 4
m1 − m2 = 6m2 ; m1 = 7m2 ; m = 1 Solving equations (1) and (2), we get v2 = v0
3
2
n-1
WE-44: Two identical balls A and B are released 4
from the positions as shown in the figure. They Similarly, for nth ball v n = v 0 → ( 3 )
3
collide elastically on the horizontal portion.
The ratio of heights attained by A and B after For the n ball to complete the vertical circular
th
collision (neglect friction) motion vn = 5gr → ( 4 )
A From equations (3) and (4), we have
n-1 n-1
B 4 3
4h v 0 = 5gr ; v 0 = 5gr
h 3 4
0
45 600 Coefficient of restitution
Ø Newton introduced a dimensionless parameter
Sol.As mass of two balls are equal, they exchange their called the coefficient of restitution (e) to measure
velocities after collision. the elasticity of collision. It is defined as the ratio of
u A2 the relative velocity of separation to the relative
u A = 2 gh , u B = 2 g ( 4h ) = 8 gh ; hA = = h; velocity of approach of the two colliding bodies
2g r r
Relative velocity of separation v 2 -v1
v B 2 sin 2 600 9h 13h e= = r r
hB = h + =h+ = Relative velocity of approach u1 -u 2
2g 4 4 Ø This formula is applied along the line of impact. Here
(Q( vB ) − uB2 = −2gh ⇒ vB 2 = uB2 − 2 gh ⇒ vB2 = 6gh )
2
the velocities mentioned in the expression should
be taken along the line of impact.
hA 4 For a perfectly elastic collision e = 1
=
hB 13 For an inelastic collision o < e < 1
For completely inelastic collision e = 0
168 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Ø A body dropped freely from a height ‘h’ strikes the Ø Change in momentum in 1st collision
floor and rebounds to a height h1
⇒ mv1 − ( −mu ) = ( m v1 + mu )
h
e = 1 and after nth rebound hn = e2n h = meu + mu = mu (1 + e )
h
Change in momentum in 2nd collision
t ⇒ m ( v2 + v1 ) = m ( e2u + eu ) = meu (1 + e )
Total change in momentum before it stops is
t1
t2 ∆p = mu (1+ 2e + 2e2 + ......) u = 2 gh
h
h1 t3 1 + e 1 + e
= mu = m 2 gh
h2 1 − e 1 − e
h3 Ø Distance travelled before second impact is
Ø When a freely falling ball strikes the ground with a d 2 = h + 2h1 = h (1 + 2e 2 )
velocity ‘v’ and rebounds with a velocity v1 then Distance travelled before third impact is
d3 = h + 2h1 + 2h2 = h (1+ 2e2 + 2e4 )
v
e = 1 and after nth rebound v n = e n v
v Time taken for second impact is
Ø Total distance travelled by the ball before it stops
bouncing 2h
d = h + 2h1 + 2 h2 + 2 h3 + ........
t2 = t + 2t1 = (1 + 2e )
g
= h + 2e 2 h + 2e4 h + 2 e6 h + ...... Time taken for third impact is
= h + 2e 2 h 1 + e 2 + e 4 + ...... t3 = t + 2t1 + 2t2 =
2h
g
(1 + 2e + 2e 2 )
1 + e 2
d = h 2
Application
1 − e Ø A particle of mass m moving with a speed u strikes
Ø Total time taken by the ball to stop bouncing a smooth horizontal surface at an angle α . The
T = t + 2t1 + 2t 2 + 2t3 + ........ particle rebounds at an angle β with a speed v..
2h 2 h1 2 h2 2 h3 The coefficient of restitution is ‘e’.
= +2 +2 +2 + ..........
g g g g m m
2h 2h
= + 2e 1 + e + e 2 + .......
g g
2h 1 + e
=
g 1 − e θ φ
Ø Average speed of the ball during its entire β
journey is given by
Total distance travelled
Average speed = Since no external impulse acts in the horizontal
Total timetaken direction, momentum of the ball is conserved in
é1 + e 2 ù the horizontal direction.
h ê ú
ê 1 - e 2 ûú g h (1 + e ) mu cos α = mv cos β
2
= ë =
2 h é1 + e ù 2 (1 + e )2 u cos α = v cos β .......(1)
ê ú By def of coefficient of restitution we get
g êë 1 - e úû
eu sin α = v sin β − (2)
Ø Average velocity of the ball during its entire
journey is given by from (1) and (2) , tan β = e tan α
Net displacement tan β
Average velocity = Total time taken tan α =
e
gh (1- e)
On squaring eq (1) and (2) and adding we get
h
= = v 2 = u 2 ( cos 2 α + e 2 sin 2 α )
2 h é1 + e ù 2 (1 + e)
ê ú
g êë 1- e úû v = u cos2 α + e 2 sin 2 α
NARAYANAGROUP 169
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
Ø A ball is projected with an initial velocity u at an angle 11) The sum of maximum heights reached by the ball is
θ to the horizontal surface. If ‘e’ is the coefficient of H 1 = H + H1 + H 2 + ........
restitution between the ball and the surface then
= H + e 2 H + e 4 H + ........
Y
u H
= H 1 + e2 + e 4 + ....... , H =
1
1 − e2
If the collision is elastic e = 1 and H ′ = ∞
θ
x Head on inelastic collision
1st 2nd 3rd
2u sin θ Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 moving with
Time taken for 1st collision, T = g r r
1) initial velocities u1 and u2 ( u1 > u2 ) collide. After
2) Time interval between 1st and 2nd collisions, r
collision two bodies will move with velocities v1 and
T1 = 1
2v sin θ (Q v1 = eu ) r
v2 .
g
From Law of conservation of linear momentum
2 ( eu ) sin θ r r r r
T1 = = eT m 1 ( u 1 -v 1 ) = m 2 ( v 2 -u 2 )
g
3) Time interval between 2nd and 3 rd collisions, By the definition of coefficient of restitution
r r r r
2v sin θ 2 ( e u ) sin θ
2 v 2 -v1 = e ( u1 − u 2 )
T2 = 2
g
=
g
2
=e T (Q v
2
2 = e u)
r m − em2 r (1 + e ) m2 r
4) The total time of flight is v1 = 1 u1 + u2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
T 1 = T + T1 + T2 + ......... r (1 + e ) m1 r m2 − em1 r
v2 = u1 + u2
= T + eT + e2T + e3T + ...... m1 + m2 m1 + m2
= T [1 + e + e 2 + e 3 + ........] Ø If m1 = m2 = m, u2 = 0 then
T
T1 = u u
1− e v1 = (1 − e ) 1 ; v 2 = (1 + e ) 1
2 2
If collision is elastic, e = 1 then T 1 = ∞
5) The horizontal distance covered by the ball before v1 1 − e
=
1st collision is v2 1 + e
u 2 sin 2θ Loss of kinetic energy of the system:
R= = u cos θ × T
g ∆ KE = KE I − KE F
6) The horizontal distance covered by it between 1 st
1 m1m2 r r 2
and 2nd collisions, R1 = u cos θ × eT = eR ∆KE = ( u1 − u2 ) (1 − e )
2
7) horizontal distance covered between 2nd and 3rd 2 m1 + m2
collisions, R2 = u cos θ × e 2T = e 2 R In case of perfectly in-elastic collision, e = 0
8) Total horizontal distance covered by the ball is ∴ loss in KE of system is
R1 = R0 + R1 + R2 + R3 + ......... 1 mm r r 2
∆KE = 1 2 ( u1 − u2 )
= R + eR + e 2 R + ...... 2 m1 + m2
= R 1 + e + e 2 + ....... Ø If two bodies are approaching each other then
loss in KE of the system is maximum
R 1 mm
R1 = ∆KEmax = 1 2 ( u1 + u2 )
2
1− e 2 m1 + m2
For perfectly elastic collision e = 1 and R1 = ∞ WE-46: Ball 1 collides with an another identical
9) The maximum height reached by the ball before 1 st ball 2 at rest as shown in the figure. For what
value of coefficient of restitution e, the velocity
u 2 sin 2 θ ( u sin θ )
2
collision H = = of second ball becomes two times that of first
2g 2g ball after collision?
st nd
10) Maximum height it reaches between 1 and 2
1 2
( eu sin θ )
2
collisions is H 1
= =e H
2
2g
170 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Sol.Here m1 = m2 and u2 = 0 Sol : Let ‘u’ be the velocity of ball before collision.
Speed of the ball after collision will become
1+ e 1− e
After collision, v 2 = u & v1 = u v = u 2 sin 2 θ + e 2 u2 cos2 θ
2 2 2 2
1+ e 1− e u u 5
= + = .u
Given v 2 =2v1 ; u = 2 u 2 2 2 8
2 2
\ Fraction of KE lost in collision
1
1+e = 2 – 2e ; 3e = 1; e = 1 1
3 mu 2 − mv 2 2
WE-47: A body ‘A’ with a momentum ‘P’ collides =2 2 v 5 3
1 = 1 − = 1− =
with another identical stationary body ‘B’ one mu 2
u 8 8
dimensionally. During the collision, ‘B’ gives 2
an impulse ‘J’ to the body ‘A’ . Then the WE-50: Two equal spheres A and B lie on a smooth
coefficient of restitution is horizontal circular groove at opposite ends of a
Sol : From the law of conservation of linear momentum, diameter. At time t = 0 , A is projected along the
groove and it first impinges on B at time t =T1
m1u1 +m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 and again at time t = T2 . If ‘e’ is the coefficient of
mu + m(0) = mv1 + mv2
Þ P – P1 = P2 where P 2 = J, (given) restitution, find the ratio of T
T2
v 2 -v1 mv 2 -mv1 P2 -P1 1
\ u -u
e= =
mu-0
=
P t=T 1
v 1
1 2
P2 -( P - P2 )2P2 - P 2 J - P 2 J A
= = = = -1
u 1 u2 =0
A
P P P P B B
v2
WE-48: A ball of mass m collides with the ground
at an angle a with the vertical . If the collision
lasts for time t, the average force exerted by πR
Sol : T1 = ...... (1)
the ground on the ball is : (e =coefficient of u1
restitution between the ball and the ground)
v2 − v1
= e ⇒ v 2 − v1 = eu1
u1
Time taken for A to collide with B again is
2πR 2 πR
T2 − T1 = ⇒ T2 − T1 = .... (2)
u v 2 − v1 eu1
α T2 2+e
from (1) and (2), T = e
1
Sol : Impulse = change in linear momentum. WE-51: After perfectly inelastic collision between
eu cos α two identical particles moving with same speed
in different directions, the speed of the
combined particle becomes half the initial
u sin α u sin α
speed of either particle . The angle between
the velocities of the two before collision is
Sol : In perfectly inelastic collision between two particles,
linear momentum is conserved . Let θ be the angle
u cos α u cos α between the velocities of the two particles before
(Before Collision) (After Collision) collision. Then
mucos α (1 + e )
\ Ft = m ( eu cos α + u cos α ) or F =
t P 2 = P12 + P22 + 2 P1 P2 cos θ or
WE-49: A ball strikes a horizontal floor at an angle
2
θ = 45 0 with the normal to floor.The v
2 m = ( mv ) + ( mv ) + 2 ( mv )( mv ) cos θ
2 2
coefficient of restitution between the ball and 2
the floor is e = 1/2 . The fraction of its kinetic 1
energy lost in the collision is or 1 = 1 + 1 + 2 cosq or cos θ = − ; (or) θ = 1200
2
NARAYANAGROUP 171
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE MAINS
JEE-ADV - C.W - VOL - -IIII
PHYSICS-VOL
WE-52: A bullet of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity
‘u’ passes through a wooden block of mass Y
V
M = nm as shown in figure. The block is resting
on a smooth horizontal floor. After passing V1 h
through the block, velocity of the bullet
becomes ‘v’ . Its velocity relative to the block is 3) t
O t1 2t1 3t1 t
m -V1
u M=nm
V Y
Sol : Let v' be the velocity of block. Then from V1
conservation of linear momentum. h
3t1
t1
u − v 4) O t
mu = mv + mnv' (or) v' = 2t1 4t1
n -V1 t
\ velocity of bullet relative to block will be
u − v (1 + n ) v − u Sol: When ball strikes the surface its velocity
v r = v − v' = v − =
n n will be reversed so correct option is (3).
WE-53: A block of mass 0.50Kg is moving with a Ballistic pendulum :
speed of 2.00 m/s on a smooth surface. It strikes It is an arrangement used to determine the velocities
another mass of 1.00 kg and then they move of bullets .A log of wood of mass ‘M’ is suspended
together as a single body. Find the energy loss by a string of length ‘l’ as shown in the figure. A
during the collision (JEE MAIN 2008)
bullet of mass ‘m’ is fired horizontally into the
Sol: From LCLM, m1u1 + m2 u2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v wooden block with a velocity ‘u’
2 Case I : Let the bullet gets embedded in the block and
0.50 × 2 + 1× 0 = ( 0.5 + 1) v ⇒ v = ms
−1
system rises to a height ‘h’ as shown in the figure.
3
1 1
∴ Energy loss ∆KE = 2 m1u1 − 2 ( m1 + m2 ) v
2 2
2 θ
( 0.5)( 2 ) − (1.5)
1 1 2
∆KE = = 0.67 J
2
2 2 3
WE-54: Consider a rubber ball freely falling from
m
a height h = 4.9 m on a horizontal elastic plate. M
h
Assume that the duration of collision is
negligible and the collision with the plate is m u M
totally elastic. Then the velocity as a function From the law of conservation of linear momentum
of time and the height as a function of time
will be; (JEE MAIN 2009) m1u1 + m2u2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v
V Y mu
mu + 0 = ( m + M ) v ⇒ v = .......(1)
m+M
h KE of the system after collision is given by
V1
1
1) KE = ( m + M ) v 2
2
PE at highest point = ( m + M ) gh
t t1
O O
1
From LCE, ( m + M ) v = ( m + M ) gh
Y 2
V 2
V1 v 2 = 2 gh ( or )v = 2 gh ....(2)
h From (1) and (2) velocity of the bullet
2) t M +m M +m
O u= 2 gh = 2 gl (1 − cos θ )
-V1 t m m
Loss in KE of the system = K E 1 − KE 2
172 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL- II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
1 1
mu 2 − ( m + M ) v 2
Y
∆KE = Tangential axis
2 2
1 2 m 2u 2
∆KE = mu − ( m + M ) 2 X
2 ( m + M )
m1 m2 Normal
1 mM 2
∆ KE = u axis
2 m + M
Case II : v1 v2
If the bullet emerges out of the block with β1 β2
velocity ‘v’ then
mu = mv + MV Where V = 2 gh m1 m2
WE-55: A pendulum consists of a wooden bob of
mass ‘m’ and of length l . A bullet of mass m 1 is
From law of conservation of linear
fired towards the pendulum with a speed v1
momentum along x-axis:
and it emerges out of the bob with a speed v1 .
3 m1u1 cos θ1 + m2u2 cos θ 2 = m1v1 cos β1 + m2 v 2 cos β 2
Find the initial speed of the bullet if the bob
just completes the vertical circle. Along y-axis:
Sol: From the Law of conservation of momentum m1u1 sin θ1 + m2u2 sin θ 2 = m1v1 sin β1 + m2 v 2 sin β 2
v m 2v Coefficient of restitution
mv = m1 v1 − 1 or v = 1 × 1
3 m 3 v cos β1 − v 2 cos β 2
e=− 1
u1 cos θ1 − u2 cos θ2
To describe a vertical circle v = 5gl
WE-56:Two billiard balls of same size (radius r)
m1 2v1 m 3 5 gl and same mass are in contact on a billiard
hence 5 gl = × ⇒ v1 = m × 2 table. A third ball also of the same size and
m 3 1
mass strikes them symmetrically and remains
Collisions in two dimensions (oblique at rest after the impact. The coefficient of
collisions) restitution between the balls is
v
1. A pair of equal and opposite impulses act along
common normal direction.Hence,linear momentum
of individual particles changes along common θ
normal direction. u
2. No component of impulse acts along common Sol: :
tangent direction. Hence, linear momentum (or)
linear velocity of individual particles remains v
unchanged along this direction. r 1
sin θ = = ; \ θ = 30 0
3. Net impulse on both the particles is zero during 2r 2
collision. Hence, net momentum of both the From conservation of linear momentum
particles remain conserved before and after collision u
in any direction. mu = 2mv cos30 0
or v =
3
4. Definition of coefficient of restitution can be applied
relative velocity of separation
along common normal direction. Now e =
u1 u2 relative velocity of approach
θ1 θ2 in common normal direction
v u/ 3 2
Hence, e = 0
= =
m1 m u cos30 u 3 / 2 3
1
NARAYANAGROUP 173
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
CONSERVATIVE AND
C.U.Q NON-CONSERVATIVE FORCES
WORK 8. Potential energy is defined for
1) non-conservative forces only
1. In which of the following, the work done by 2) conservative forces only
the mentioned force is negative? 3) both conservative & non-conservative forces
The work done by 4) neither conservative nor non-conservative
1) the tension in the cable while the lift is forces
ascending 9. Which of the following forces is called a
2) the gravitational force when a body slides conservative force?
down an inclined plane 1) Frictional force 2) Air resistance
3) the applied force to maintain uniform motion 3) Electrostatic force 4) Viscous force
of a block on a rough horizontal surface 10. Identify the non-conservative force in the
following
4) the gravitational force when a body is thrown 1) Weight of a body 2) Force between two ions
up 3) Magnetic force 4) Air resistance
2. A man pushes a wall and fails to displace it. 11. If x , F and U denote the displacement, force
He does acting on and potential energy of a particle,
1) negative work then
2) positive but not maximum work dU dU 1 dU
3) maximum work 4) no work at all 1) U = F 2) F = + 3) F = − 4) F = x dx
dx dx
3. A bucket full of water is drawn up by a person. 12. In the case of conservative force
In this case the work done by the gravitational 1) work done is independent of the path
force is 2) work done in a closed loop is zero
1) negative because the force and displacement are 3) work done against conservative force is stored
in opposite directions is the form of potential energy
2) positive because the force and displacement are 4) all the above
in the same direction KINETIC ENERGY
3) negative because the force and displacement are 13. The change in kinetic energy per unit ‘space’
in the same direction (distance) is equal to
4) positive because the force and displacement are 1) power 2) momentum 3) force 4) pressure
14. When the momentum of a body is doubled, the
in opposite directions kinetic energy is
4. A man is rowing a boat upstream and inspite 1) doubled 2) halved
of that the boat is found to be not moving with 3) becomes four times 4) becomes three times
respect to the bank. The work done by the man 15. For the same kinetic energy, the momentum
is shall be maximum for which of the following
1) zero 2) positive particle?
3) negative 4) may be +ve or –ve 1) Electron 2) Proton 3) Deuteron 4) Alpha particle
5. A ball is thrown vertically upwards from the 16. If the momentum of a particle is plotted on
ground. Work done by air resistance during X-axis and its kinetic energy on the Y-axis,
its time of flight is the graph is a
1) straight line 2) parabola
1) positive during ascent and negative during 3) rectangular hyperbola 4) circle
descent 17. When two identical balls are moving with equal
2) positive during ascent and descent speeds in opposite direction, which of the
3) negative during ascent and positive during following is true? For the system of two bodies
descent 1) momentum is zero, kinetic energy is zero
4) negative during ascent and descent 2) momentum is not zero, kinetic energy is zero
6. An agent is moving a positively charged body 3) momentum is zero, kinetic energy is not zero
towards another fixed positive charge. The 4) momentum is not zero, kinetic energy is not
work done by the agent is zero
18. The product of linear momentum and velocity
1) positive 2) negative of a body represents
3) zero 4) may be positive or negative 1) half of the kinetic energy of the body
7. Workdone by force of friction 2) kinetic energy of the body
1) can be zero 2) can be positive 3) twice the kinetic energy of the body
3) can be negative 4) any of the above 4) mass of the body
174 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
19. The KE of a freely falling body 26. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 have equal
1) is directly proportional to height of its fall KE. Their momenta is in the ratio
2) is inversely proportional to height of its fall 1) m2 : m1 2) m1:m23) m1 : m2 4) m12 : m22
3) is directly proportional to square of time of its fall 27. A body can have
4) 1 and 3 are true 1) changing momentum and finite kinetic energy
20. Consider the following statements 2) zero kinetic energy and finite momentum
A) Linear momentum of a system of particles 3) zero acceleration and increasing kinetic energy
is zero 4) finite acceleration and zero kinetic energy
B) Kinetic energy of a system of particles is 28. A rock of mass m is dropped to the ground
zero then from a height h. A second rock with mass 2m
1) A does not imply B & B does not imply A is dropped from the same height. When
2) A implies B and B does not imply A second rock strikes the ground, its kinetic
3) A does not imply B but B implies A energy wii be
4) A implies B and B implies A 1) twice that of the first rock
21. Internal forces can change 2) four times that of the first rock
1) Linear momentum as well as kinetic energy 3) the same as that of the first rock
2) Linear momentum but not the kinetic energy 4) half that of the first rock
3) Kinetic energy but not linear momentum POTENTIAL ENERGY
4) neither the linear momentum nor the kinetic 29. These diagrams represent the potential
energy energy U of a diatomic molecule as a function
22. If the force acting on a body is inversely of the inter-atomic distance r. The diagram
proportional to its speed, then its kinetic corresponds to stable molecule found in
energy is nature is
1) linearly related to time
2) inversely proportional to time
3) inversely proportional to the square of time U
U
4) a constant 1) 2)
23. Which of the following graphs depicts the r
r
variation of KE of a ball bouncing on a
horizontal floor with height? (Neglect air
resistances)
K K
U
U
3) 4)
1) 2)
r r
h h 30. In the fig. the potential energy U of a particle
plotted against its position x from origin.
Which of the following statement is correct?
U
K
3) 4) None of these
h O x1 x2 x3 x
24. Which of the following statement is correct? 1) at x1 particle is in stable equilibrium
1) KE of a system cannot be changed without 2) at x2 particle is in stable equilibrium
changing its momentum 3) at x3 particle is in stable equilibrium
2) KE of a system can be changed without changing 4) at x1 ,x2 and x3particle is in unstable equilibrium
its momentum
3) Momentum of a system cannot be changed POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SPRING
without changing its KE 31. When a spring is wound, a certain amount of
4) A system cannot have energy without having PE is stored in it. If this wound spring is
momentum dissolved in acid, the stored energy
25. Two bodies of different masses have same linear 1) is completely lost
momentum. The one having more KE is 2) appears in the form of electromagnetic waves
1) lighter body 2) heavier body 3)appears in the form of heat raising the
3) both 4) none temperature of the acid
4) appears in the form of KE by splashing acid
drops
NARAYANAGROUP 175
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
32. Two springs have their force constants K1 40. Internal forces can change
and K2 and they are stretched to the same 1) Kinetic energy 2) mechanical energy
extension. If K 2>K1 work done is 3) Momentum 4) 1 and 2
1) same in both the springs 41. Negative of work done by the conservation
2) more in spring K1 3) more in spring K2 forces on a system is equal to
4) independent of spring constant K 1) the change in kinetic energy of the system
33. Two springs have their force constants K1 2) the change in potential energy of the system
and K 2 (K2>K1). When they are stretched by 3) the change in total mechanical energy of the
the same force, work done is system
1) same in both the springs 2) more in spring K1 4) the change in the momentum of the system
3) more in spring K2 42. Which of the following statement is wrong?
1) KE of a body is independent of the direction of
4) independent of spring constant K motion
WORK ENERGY THEOREM 2)In an elastic collision of two bodies, the
34. A lorry and a car moving with the same KE momentum and energy of each body is conserved
are brought to rest by applying the same 3) If two protons are brought towards each other,
retarding force. Then the PE of the system increases
1) lorry will come to rest in a shorter distance 4) A body can have energy without momentum
2) car will come to rest in a shorter distance 43. When a body falls from an aeroplane there is
3) both come to rest in same distance increase in its:
4) any of above 1) acceleration 2) potential energy
CONSERVATION OF MECHANICAL 3) kinetic energy 4) mass
ENERGY POWER
35. A shell is fired into air at an angle θ with the 44. A body is moved along a straight line by a
machine delivering constant power. The
horizontal from the ground. On reaching the distance moved by the body in time t is
maximum height, proportional to
1) its kinetic energy is not equal to zero 1) t1/2 2) t3/4 3) t3/2 4) t 2
2) its kinetic energy is equal to zero 45. A particle is projected at t = 0 from a point on
3) its potential energy is equal to zero the ground with certain velocity at an angle
4) both its potential and kinetic energies are zero with the horizontal. The power of
36. A cricket ball and a ping-pong ball are gravitational force is plotted against time.
dropped in a vacuum chamber from same Which of the following is the best
height. When they have fallen half way representation?
down, they have the same
1) velocity 2) potential energy P
3) kinetic energy 4) mechanical energy 1) 2) P
37. A cyclist free-wheels from the top of a hill, t
gathers speed going down the hill, applies his t
brakes and eventually comes to rest at the
bottom of the hill. Which one of the following
energy changes take place. P
1) Potential to kinetic and to heat energy 3)
P
4) t
2) Kinetic to potential and to heat energy t
3) chemical to heat and to potential energy
4) Kinetic to heat and to chemical energy 46. A body starts from rest and acquires a
38. If ‘E’ represents total mechanical energy of velocity V in time T. The instantaneous power
a system while ‘U’ represents the potential delivered to the body in time ‘t’ is
energy, then E - U is proportional to
1) always zero 2) negative V V2 2 V2 V2 2
3) either positive or negative 4) positive 1) t 2) t 3) 2 t 4) 2 t
39. For a body thrown vertically upwards, its T T T T
direction of motion changes at the point 47. A car drives along a straight level frictionless
road by an engine delivering constant power.
where its total mechanical energy is Then velocity is directly proportional to
1) greater than the potential energy
2) less than the potential energy 1
3) equal to the potential energy 4) zero 1) t 2) 3) t 4) t 2
t
176 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
48. A particle is projected with a velocity u making 54. A vehicle is moving with uniform speed along
an angle θ with the horizontal. The horizontal, concave and convex surface
instantaneous power of the gravitational force roads. The surface on which, the normal
1) varies linearly with time reaction on the vehicle is maximum is
2) is constant throughout the path 1) concave 2) convex
3) is negative for complete path 3) horizontal 4) same at all surfaces
COLLISIONS
4) varies inversly with time ur
MOTION IN A VERTICAL CIRCLE 55. A ball with initial momentum P collides with
uur
49. A motor car of mass m travels with a uniform rigid wall elastically. If P1 be its momentum
speed v on a convex bridge of radius r . after collision then
When the car is at the middle point of the uur ur uur ur uur ur uur ur
bridge, then the force exterted by the car on 1) P1 = P 2) P1 = − P 3) P1 = 2 P 4) P1 = −2 P
the bridge is 56. Choose the false statement
1) In a perfect elastic collision the relative velocity
mv 2 mv 2 mv 2 of approach is equal to the relative velocity of
1) mg 2) mg + 3) mg − 4) mg ±
r r r separation
50. A gramphone record is revolving with an 2) In an inelastic collision the relative velocity of
angular velocity ω . A coin is placed at a approach is less than the relative velocity of
distance R from the centre of the record. separation
The static coefficient of friction is µ . The 3) In an inelastic collision the relative velocity of
coin will revolve with the record if separation is less than the relative velocity of
µg µg approach
µg µg
1) R > 2 2) R = 2 only 3) R < 2 4) R ≤ 2 4) In perfect inelastic collision relative velocity of
ω ω ω ω separation is zero
51. A small sphere of mass ‘m’ is attached to a 57. Two particles of different masses collide head
cord and rotates in a vertical plane about a on. Then for the system
point O . If the average speed of the sphere 1) loss of KE is zero, if it was perfect elastic
is increased, the cord is most likely to break collision
at the orientation when the mass is at : 2) If it was perfect inelastic collision, the loss of
A KE of the bodies moving in opposite directions is
m more than that of the bodies moving in the same
l direction
C D 3) loss of momentum is zero for both elastic and
O inelastic collision
4) 1, 2 and 3 are correct
58. A 2 kg mass moving on a smooth frictionless
B surface with a velocity of 10ms −1 hits another
1) bottom point B 2) the point C
3) the point D 4) top point A 2kg mass kept at rest, in a perfect inelastic
collision. After collision, if they move
52. A car is moving up with uniform speed along a together
fly over bridge which is part of a vertical circle.
The true statement from the following is 1) they travel with a velocity of 5ms −1 in the same
1)Normal reaction on the car gradually decreases direction
and becomes minimum at highest position of 2) they travel with a velocity of 10ms −1 in the
bridge same direction
2)Normal reaction on the car gradually increases 3) they travel with a velocity of 10ms −1 in
and becomes maximum at highest position opposite direction
3) Normal reaction on car does not change 4) they travel with a velocity of 5ms −1 in opposite
4)Normal reaction on the car gradually decreases direction
and becomes zero at highest position 59. A body of mass ‘m’ moving with a constant
53. A bottle of soda water is rotated in a vertical velocity v hits another body of the same mass
circle with the neck held in hand. The air moving with the same velocity v but in
bubbles are collected opposite direction and sticks to it. The
velocity of the compound body after the
1) near the neck 2) near the bottom collision is
3) at the middle 4) uniformly in the bottle 1) 2v 2) v 3) v/2 4) zero
NARAYANAGROUP 177
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
60. In an inelastic collision, the kinetic energy 3) all the balls will start moving to the right with
after collision speed v/8
1) is same as before collision 4) all the six balls originally at rest will move on with
2) is always less than before collision speed v/6 and the incident balls will come to rest
3) is always greater than before collision 67. A lighter body moving with a velocity v
4) may be less or greater than before collision collides with a heavier body at rest. Then
61. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an 1) the lighter body rebounced with twice the
inelastic collision. In this case velocity of bigger body
1) the momentum of the ball just after the collision 2) the lighter body retraces its path with the same
is same as that just before the collision velocity in magnitude
2) The mechanical energy of the ball remains the 3) the heavier body does not move practically
same in the collision 4) both (2) and (3)
3) The total momentum of the ball and the earth is 68. A heavier body moving with certain velocity
conserved collides head on elastically with a lighter body
4) the total kinetic energy of the ball and the earth at rest, then
is conserved 1) smaller body continues to be in the same state
62. About a collision which is not correct of rest
1) physical contact is must 2) smaller body starts to move in the same
2) colliding particles can change their direction of direction with same velocity as that of bigger body
motion 3) the smaller body start to move with twice the
3) the effect of the external force is not considered velocity of the bigger body in the same direction
4) linear momentum is conserved 4) the bigger body comes to rest
63. In one– dimensional elastic collision, the 69. A perfectly elastic ball P1 of mass ‘m’ moving
relative velocity of approach before collision with velocity v collides elastically with three
is equal to
1) relative velocity of separation after collision exactly similar balls P2 , P3 , P4 lying on a
2) ‘e’ times relative velocity of separation after smooth table. Velocity of the four balls after
collision collision are
3) ‘1/e’ times relative velocity of separation after
collision P1 P2 P3 P4
4) sum of the velocities after collision 1) 0,0,0,0 2) v, v, v, v 3) v, v, v,0 4) 0, 0, 0, v
64. Two identical bodies moving in opposite
70. Two bodies P and Q of masses m1 and m2
direction with same speed, collide with each
other. If the collision is perfectly elastic then ( m2 > m1 ) are moving with velocity v1 and v2
1) after the collision both comes to rest respectively, collide with each other. Then the
2) after the collision first comes to rest and force exerted by P on Q during the collision is
second moves in the opposite direction with same 1) greater that the force exerted by Q on P
speed. 2) less than the force exerted by Q on P
3) after collision they recoil with same speed 3) same as the force exerted by Q on P
4) both and 1 and 2 4) same as the force exerted by Q on P but
65. A body of mass ‘m’ moving with certain opposite in direction
velocity collides with another identical body 71. The coefficient of restitution (e) for a
at rest. If the collision is perfectly elastic and perfectly elastic collision is
after the collision both the bodies moves 1) −1 2) 0 3) ∞ 4)1
1) in the same direction 2) in opposite direction 72. A ball of mass M moving with a velocity v
3) in perpendicular direction 4) at 45° to each other collides perfectly inelastically with another
66. Six steel balls of identical size are lined up ball of same mass but moving with a velocity
along a straight frictionless groove. Two v in the opposite direction. After collision
similar balls moving with speed v along the 1) both the balls come to rest
groove collide with this row on the extreme 2) the velocities are exchanged between the two
left end. Then balls
1) one ball from the right end will move on with 3) both of them move at right angles to the original
speed v line of motion
2) two balls from the extreme right end will move 4) one ball comes to rest and another ball travels
on with speed v and the remaining balls will be at back with velocity 2v
rest
178 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
73. A ball of mass ‘m’ moving with speed ‘u’
undergoes a head-on elastic collision with a LEVEL - I (C.W)
ball of mass ‘nm’ initially at rest. Find the
fraction of the incident energy transferred to
the second ball. WORK DONE BY CONSTANT FORCE
n 2n 4n ur ^ ^ ^
n 1. If F = 2 i + 3 j + 4 k acts on a body and
1)
( ) ( ) ( )
2) n + 1 3) 1 + n 4) 1 + n 2
2 2
n +1 ur ^ ^ ^
74. A small bob of a simple pendulum released displaces it by S = 3 i + 2 j + 5 k , then the work
from 30° to the vertical hits another bob of done by the force is
the same mass and size lying at rest on the 1) 12 J 2) 20 J 3) 32 J 4) 64 J
table vertically below the point of suspension. 2. A force of 1200 N acting on a stone by means of
After elastic collision, the angular amplitude a rope slides the stone through a distance of
of the pendulum will be 10m in a direction inclined at 600 to the force.
1) 30° 2) 60° 3) 15° 4) zero The work done by the force is
75. Two spheres ‘X’ and ‘Y’ collide. After
collision, the momentum of X is doubled. Then 1) 6000 3J 2) 6000J 3) 12000J 4) 8000J
1) the initial momentum of X and Y are equal 3. A man weighing 80 kg climbs a staircase
2) the initial momentum of X is greater then that carrying a 20 kg load. The staircase has 40
of Y steps, each of 25 cm height. If he takes 20
3) the initial momentum of Y is double that of X seconds to climb, the work done is
4) the loss in momentum of Y is equal to the initial 1) 9800J 2) 490 J 3) 98x105J 4) 7840J
ur
momentum of X 4. The work done by a force F = 3$i − 4$j + 5k$
76. A bullet is fired into a wooden block. If the
displaces the body from a point (3,4,6) to a
bullet gets embedded in wooden block, then
1) momentum alone is conserved point (7,2,5) is
2) kinetic energy alone is conserved 1) 15 units 2) 25 units 3) 20 units 4) 10 units
3) both momentum and kinetic energy are ur
conserved 5. A force F = (6$i − 8 $j ) N , acts on a particle and
4) neither momentum nor kinetic energy are displaces it over 4 m along the X-axis and 6m
conserved along the Y-axis. The work done during the
77. During collision, which of the following total displacement is
statement is wrong? 1) 72 J 2) 24 J 3) - 24 J 4) zero
1) there is a change in momentum of individual 6. A lawn roller is pulled along a horizontal
bodies surface through a distance of 20 m by a rope
2) the change in total momentum of the system with a force of 200 N. If the rope makes an
of colliding particle is zero angle of 60° with the vertical while pulling, the
3) the change in total energy is zero amount of work done by pulling force is
4) law of conservation of momentum is not valid
1) 4000 J 2) 1000 J 3) 2000 3 J4) 2000 J
C.U.Q-KEY WORK DONE BY VARIABLE FORCE
01) 4 02) 4 03) 1 04) 1 05) 4 06) 1 7. An object has a displacement from position
r r
07) 4
13) 3
08) 2
14) 3
09) 3
15) 4
10) 4
16) 2
11) 3
17) 3
12) 4
18) 3 ( ) (
vector r1 = 2$i + 3 $j m to r 2 = 4$i + 6 $j m )
ur
( )
19) 4 20) 3 21) 3 22) 1 23) 1 24) 1
under a force F = 3x $i + 2 y $j N, then work
2
25) 1 26) 3 27) 1 28) 1 29) 1 30) 4
31) 3 32) 3 33) 2 34) 3 35) 1 36) 1
done by the force is
37) 1 38) 4 39) 3 40) 4 41) 2 42) 2
1) 24J 2) 33J 3) 83J 4) 45J
43) 3 44) 3 45) 3 46) 3 47) 3 48) 1
49) 3 50) 4 51) 1 52) 2 53) 1 54) 1 KINETIC ENERGY
55) 2 56) 2 57) 4 58) 1 59) 4 60) 2 8. A shot is fired at 30° with the vertical from a
61) 3 62) 1 63) 1 64) 3 65) 3 66) 2 point on the ground with kinetic energy K. If
67) 4 68) 3 69) 4 70) 4 71) 4 72) 1 air resistance is ignored, the kinetic energy
73) 4 74) 4 75) 4 76) 1 77) 4 at the top of the trajectory is
1) 3K/4 2) K/2 3) K 4) K/4
NARAYANAGROUP 179
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
9. A body starts from rest and is acted on by a POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SPRING
constant force. The ratio of kinetic energy 18. A spring when compressed by 4 cm has 2 J
gained by it in the first five seconds to that energy stored in it. The force required to
gained in the next five seconds is extend it by 8 cm will be
1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 1 3) 3 : 1 4) 1 : 3 1) 20 N 2) 2 N 3) 200 N 4) 2000 N
10. The mass of a simple pendulum bob is 100 19. The elastic potential energy of a stretched
gm. The length of the pendulum is 1 m. The spring is given by E = 50x2. Where x is the
bob is drawn aside from the equilibrium displacement in meter and E is in joule, then
position so that the string makes an angle of the force constant of the spring is
60° with the vertical and let go. The kinetic 1)50Nm 2)100N m-1 3)100 N/m²4) 100 Nm
energy of the bob while crossing its WORK ENERGY THEOREM BY
equilibrium position will be CONSTANT FORCE
1) 0.49 J 2) 0.94 J 3) 1 J 4) 1.2 J 20. A body of mass 2 kg is projected with an
11. A body starts from rest and moves with initial velocity of 5 ms -1 along a rough
uniform acceleration. What is the ratio of horizontal table. The work done on the body
kinetic energies at the end of 1st, 2nd and by the frictional forces before it is brought to
3rd seconds of its journey? rest is
1)1 : 8 : 27 2)1 : 2 : 3 3)1 : 4 : 9 4)3 : 2 1) 250 J 2) 25 J 3) -250 J 4) -25 J
:1 21. An object is acted on by a retarding force of
12. A liquid of specific gravity 0.8 is flowing in a 10 N and at a particular instant its kinetic
pipe line with a speed of 2 m/s. The K.E. per energy is 6 J. The object will come to rest
cubic meter of it is after it has travelled a distance of
1) 160 J 2) 1600 J 3) 160.5 J 4) 1.6 J 1) 3/5 m 2) 5/3 m 3) 4 m 4) 16 m
13. A 60 kg boy lying on a surface of negligible 22. By applying the brakes without causing a
friction throws horizontally a stone of mass 1 skid, the driver of a car is able to stop his car
kg with a speed of 12 m/s away from him. As with in a distance of 5 m, if it is going at
a result with what kinetic energy he moves 36 kmph. If the car were going at 72 kmph,
back? using the same brakes, he can stop the car
1) 2.4 J 2) 72 J 3) 1.2 J4) 36 J over a distance of
14. Two stones of masses m and 2 m are projected 1) 10 m 2) 2.5 m 3) 20 m 4) 40 m
vertically upwards so as to reach the same 23. A bullet fired into a trunk of a tree loses 1/4 of
height. The ratio of the kinetic energies of their its kinetic energy in travelling a distance of 5
projection is cm. Before stopping it travels a further
distance of
1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4 1) 150 cm 2) 1.5 cm 3) 1.25 cm 4) 15 cm
15. A neutron, one of the constituents of a WORK ENERGY THEOREM FOR
nucleus, is found to pass two points VARIABLE FORCE
60 metres apart in a time interval of
1.8 × 10-4 sec. The mass of the neutron is 1
24. A bead of mass kg starts from rest from
1.67 × 10-27 kg. Assuming that the speed is 2
constant, its kinetic energy is “A” to move in a vertical plane along a
1) 9.3 × 10-17 joule 2) 9.3 × 10-14 joule smooth fixed quarter ring of radius 5m, under
3) 9.3 × 10-21 joule 4) 9.3 × 10-11 joule the action of a constant horizontal force F = 5
POTENTIAL ENERGY N as shown. The speed of bead as it reaches
16. A tank of size 10 m × 10 m × 10 m is full of point “B” is
F A
water and built on the ground. If g = 10 ms-2, the
potential energy of the water in the tank is
1)5 × 107J 2)1 × 108 J 3)5 × 104J 4)5 × 105 J
17. A bolt of mass 0.3kg falls from the ceiling of
an elevator moving down with an uniform R=5m
speed of 7m/s. It hits the floor of the elevator
(length of the elevator = 3m) and does not
rebound. What is the heat produced by
impact?
1)8.82J 2)7.72J 3)6.62J 4)5.52J B
1) 14.14 m/s 2) 7.07 m/s 3) 5 m/s 4) 25 m/s
180 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
CONSERVATION OF 33. An electric motor creates a tension of 4500
MECHANICAL ENERGY newton in a hoisting cable and reels it at the
25. A cradle is ‘h’ meters above the ground at the rate of 2m/s. What is the power of the motor?
lowest position and ‘H’ meters when it is at 1) 15 kW 2) 9 kW 3) 225 W 4) 9000 kW
the highest point. If ‘v’ is the maximum speed 34. A juggler throws continuously balls at the rate
of the swing of total mass ‘m’ the relation of three in each second, each with a velocity
between ‘h’ and ‘H’ is of 10 ms-1. If the mass of each ball is 0.05 kg
1) ½ mv2 + h = H 2) (v2/2g) + h = H his power is
3) (v2/g) + 2h = H 4) (v2/2g) + H = h 1) 2 W 2) 50 W 3) 0.5 W 4) 7.5 W
26. AB is a frictionless inclined surface making an
angle of 300 with horizontal. A is 6.3 m above the MOTION IN A VERTICAL CIRCLE
ground while B is 3.8 m above the ground. A 35. A body of mass 2 kg attached at one end of light
block slides down from A, initially starting from string is rotated along a vertical circle of radius
rest. Its velocity on reaching B is 2 m. If the string can withstand a maximum
A tension of 140.6 N, the maximum speed with
which the stone can be rotated is
1) 22 m/s 2) 44 m/s 3) 33 m/s 4) 11m/s
6.3m
300 B 36. A pilot of mass m can bear a maximum
3.8 m
apparent weight 7 times of mg. The
1) 7 m s-1 2)14 m s-1 3)7.4 m s-1 4) 4.9 m s-1 aeroplane is moving in a vertical circle. If the
27. A stone of mass “m” initially at rest and velocity of aeroplane is 210 m/s while diving
dropped from a height “h” strikes the surface up from the lowest point of vertical circle,
of the earth with a velocity “v”. If the then the minimum radius of vertical circle
gravitational force acting on the stone is W, should be
then which of the following identities is 1) 375 m 2) 420 m 3) 750 m 4) 840 m
correct? 37. The length of a ballistic pendulum is 1 m and
1) mv - mh = 0 2) ½ mv2 - Wh2 = 0 mass of its block is 0.98 kg. A bullet of mass 20
3) ½ mv2 - Wh = 0 4) ½ mv2 - mh = 0 gram strikes the block along horizontal
POWER direction and gets embedded in the block. If
28. A motor boat is going in a river with a velocity
ur block + bullet completes vertical circle of radius
( )
ˆ ˆ ˆ ms-1 . If the resisting force due
V= 4i-2j+k 1m, then the striking velocity of bullet is
r 1) 280m/s 2) 350m/s 3) 420m/s 4) 490m/s
ˆ ( ˆ ˆ)
to stream is F= 5i-10j+6k N, then the power 38. A simple pendulum is oscillating with an angular
of the motor boat is amplitude 60o . If mass of bob is 50 gram, then
1) 100 W 2) 50 W 3) 46 W 4) 23 W the tension in the string at mean position is (g =
29. Two riffles fire the same number of bullets in 10ms–2)
a given interval of time. The second fires 1) 0.5 N 2) 1 N 3) 1.5 N 4) 2N
bullets of mass twice that fired by the first 39. A body is moving in a vertical circle such that
and with a velocity that is half that of the first. the velocities of body at different points are
The ratio of their powers is
1) 1 : 4 2) 4 : 1 3) 1 : 2 4) 2 : 1 critical. The ratio of velocities of body at
30. A car weighing 1000 kg is going up an incline angular displacements 60o and120o from
with a slope of 2 in 25 at a steady speed of 18
kmph. If g= 10 ms-2, the power of its engine is lowest point is
1) 4 kW 2) 50 kW 3) 625 kW 4) 25 kW 1) 5: 2 2) 3: 2 3) 3:1 4) 2 : 1
31. A crane can lift up 10,000 kg of coal in 1 hour 40. A ball of mass 0.6kg attached to a light
from a mine of 180 m depth. If the efficiency inextensible string rotates in a vertical circle
of the crane is 80 %, its input power must be of radius 0.75m such that it has speed of 5ms–
(g = 10 ms-2) 1
when the string is horizontal. Tension in the
1) 5 kW 2) 6.25 kW 3) 50 kW 4) 62.5 kW
32. A man carries a load of 50 kg through a height string when it is horizontal on other side is
of 40 m in 25 seconds. If the power of the man (g =10ms–2) [2007M]
is 1568 W, his mass is 1) 30N 2) 26N 3) 20N 4) 6N
1) 5 kg 2) 1000 kg 3) 200 kg 4) 50 kg
NARAYANAGROUP 181
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
ELASTIC AND INELASTIC 49. An 8 gm bullet is fired horizontally into a
COLLISIONS IN ONE DIMENSION 9 kg block of wood and sticks in it. The block
which is free to move, has a velocity of 40 cm/
41. A 6 kg mass travelling at 2.5 ms −1 collides s after impact. The initial velocity of the
head on with a stationary 4 kg mass. After the bullet is
collision the 6 kg mass travels in its original 1)450 m/s 2)450 cm/s 3)220 m/s 4) 220 cm/s
direction with a speed of 1 ms −1 . The final 50. A block of wood of mass 9.8 kg is suspended
velocity of 4 kg mass is by a string. A bullet of mass 200 gm strikes
1) 1 ms − 1 2) 2.25ms −1 3) 2 ms −1 4) 0 ms −1 horizontally with a velocity of 100 ms −1 and
42. A body of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity gets embedded in it. The maximum height
of 5 ms −1 hits a body of 1 gm at rest. The (
attained by the block is g = 10 ms −2 )
velocity of the second body after collision, 1) 0.1 m 2) 0.2 m 3) 0.3 m 4) 0 m
assuming it to be perfectly elastic is 51. A 15 gm bullet is fired horizontally into a 3 kg
1) 10 ms −1 2) 5 ms −1 3) 15 ms −1 4) block of wood suspended by a string. The bullet
0.10 ms −1 sticks in the block, and the impact causes the
43. A block of mass 1 kg moving with a speed of block to swing 10 cm above the initial level. The
velocity of the bullet nearly is ( in ms-1)
4 ms −1 , collides with another block of mass 2 1)281 2)326 3)184 4)58
kg which is at rest. The lighter block comes 52. A body of mass 20 gm is moving with a certain
to rest after collision. The loss in KE of the velocity. It collides with another body of
system is mass 80 gm at rest. The collision is perfectly
1) 8 J 2) 4 × 10 −7 J 3) 4 J 4) 0 J inelastic. The ratio of the kinetic energies
44. A marble going at a speed of 2 ms −1 hits before and after collision of the system is
1) 2 : 1 2) 4 : 1 3) 5 : 1 4) 3 : 2
another marble of equal mass at rest. If the
collision is perfectly elastic, then the velocity COEFFICIENT OF RESTITUTION
of the first marble after collision is 53. A rubber ball drops from a height ‘h’. After
rebounding twice from the ground, it rises to
1) 4 ms −1 2) 0 ms −1 3) 2 ms −1 4) 3 ms −1 h/2. The co - efficient of restitution is
45. A massive ball moving with a speed v collides 1/ 6
1
1/ 2
1
1/ 4
head on with a fine ball having mass very much 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
smaller than the mass of the first ball at rest. 2 2 2 2
The collision is elastic and then immediately 54. A body dropped freely from a height h o n t o
after the impact, the second ball will move with a a horizontal plane, bounces up and down and
speed approximately equal to finally comes to rest. The coefficient of
1) v 2) 2v 3) v/3 4) infinite restitution is e. The ratio of velocities at the
46. A 1 kg ball moving at 12 m/s collides head on beginning and after two rebounds is
with a 2 kg ball moving in the opposite 1) 1 : e 2) e : 1 3) 1 : e² 4) e² : 1
direction at 24 m/s. The velocity of each ball 55. In the above problem, the ratio of times of
after the impact, if the coefficient of two consecutive rebounds is
restitution is 2/3 is 1) 1 : e 2) e : 1 3) 1 : e² 4) e² : 1
1) -28 m/s ; -4 m/s 2) 28 m/s ; -4 m/s 56. In the above problem the ratio of distances
3) 20 m/s ; 24 m/s 4) -20 m/s ; -4 m/s travelled in two consecutive rebounds is
47. A 6 kg mass collides with a body at rest. After 1) 1 : e 2) e : 1 3) 1 : e² 4) e² : 1
the collision, they travel together with a 57. A ball is dropped onto a horizontal floor. It
velocity one third the velocity of 6 kg mass. reaches a height of 144 cm on the first bounce
The mass of the second body is and 81 cm on the second bounce. The
1) 6 kg 2) 3 kg 3) 12 kg 4) 18 kg coefficient of restitution is
48. A body of mass m moving at a constant 1) 0 2) 0.75 3) 81/144 4) 1
velocity v hits another body of the same mass 58. A ball is dropped onto a horizontal floor. It
moving with a velocity v/2 but in the opposite reaches a height of 144 cm on the first bounce
direction and sticks to it. The common and 81 cm on the second bounce. The height it
velocity after collision is attains on the third bounce is
1) v 2) v/4 3) 2v 4) v/2 1) 45.6 cm 2) 81 cm 3) 144 cm 4) 0 cm
182 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
59. A ball is dropped from height 'H' onto a
K1 t2
horizontal surface. If the coefficient of = 2 1 2 where t =5sec and t =10sec
restitution is 'e' then the total time after which K 2 t2 − t1 1 2
10. K .Emean = P.Eextreme = mgl (1 − cosθ )
it comes to rest is
2H 1 − e 2H 1 + e
1) 2) 1 1
g 1+ e g 1− e 11. KE = mv = mg t (Q v = gt )
2 2 2
2 2
2H 1 + e 2 2H 1 − e 2
1 2 1
12. KE = mv = ( ρV ) v ;
2 K .E 1
3) g 1 − e 2
4) g 1 + e 2 = ρv2
2 2 V 2
60. A stationary body explodes into two 1
fragments of masses m1 and m 2. If momentum 13. m1v1 = m2 v2 ; KE = m2 v22
of one fragment is p, the energy of explosion 2
is 1
14. KE = mv , when two bodies reach the same
2
p2 2
p2
( )
KE m
( 1 2)
1) 2 m + m 2) 2 m m height, v1=v2; KE = m Q v = 2 gh
1 1
1 2
2 2
p 2 ( m1 + m2 ) p2 1 1 s
2
KE = mv 2 = m
3)
2m1m2 ( 1 2)
4) 2 m − m 15. 2 2 t
h
LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY 16. P.E=mgh1; here h1 = and m = ρ × V
2
01)3 02)2 03)1 04)1 05)3 06)3 17 Heat produced = loss of potential energy
07)3 08)4 09)4 10)1 11)3 12)2 = mgh
1 2 2U
18. U = 2 Kx1 ⇒ K = x 2 and F = Kx2
13)3 14)2 15)1 16)1 17)1 18)3
19)2 20)4 21)1 22)3 23)4 24)1 1
1
25)2 26)1 27) 3 28)3 29)4 30)1 19. U = K x --(1),U=50x 2--(2),
2
compare
2
31)2 32)4 33)2 34)4 35)4 36) 3 equation (1) and (2) to find K
37) 2 38)2 39) 4 40)3 41)2 42)1 1 2 1
20. W f = m v − m v i
2
f
43)3 44)2 45)2 46)1 47)3 48)2 2 2
49)1 50)2 51) 1 52) 3 53)3 54)3 21. According to work energy theorem
W= ∆ KE= -FS
55)1 56) 3 57) 2 58) 1 59)2 60) 3
∆KE1 W1 FS1
LEVEL - I (C.W) - HINTS
ur ur 22. W = ∆KE ; ∆KE = W = FS
W = F .S 2. W = FS cos θ
2 2 2
1.
ur ur S1 ∆ KE 1
3 W = F .S = FS = ( M + m ) g ( n × heach step ) 23. W= F .S = ∆ K E ; S = ∆ KE
ur ur ur ur ur
( )
2 2
4. W = F .S = F . r2 − r1 24. Applying the work - energy theorem, we get
ur ur 1
5. W=Wx+Wy Wx= F . x $i , Wy = F . y $j × mv 2 − 0 = W1 + W2
ur ur 2
;
6. W = F .S = FS cos θ = Horizontal force × displacement + Vertical force
x2 y2 × displacement.
7. W = ∫ dw = ∫ Fx dx + ∫ Fy dy = F × R + mg × R
x1 y1 25. K.E at mean= P.E at extreme position
1 26. gain in K.E=Loss of P.E = mg ( h1 − h2 )
8. At projection, K = mu2
r r
2 27. gain in K.E=Loss of P.E 28. P = F .V
1
At maximum height, K = mu cos θ
1 2 2
P1 m1 v12 ur r
2 29. P = m v 2 30. P = F.v = Fv = mg sin θ v
1 1
KE = mv 2 = m ( gt ) (Q v = gt )
2 2 2
2
9.
2 2 31. η = Pout , where P = W = mgh
out
Pin t t
NARAYANAGROUP 183
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
W ( m + M ) gh ur ur
KEi =
1 1
m1u12 ; KE f = ( m1 + m2 ) v 2
32. P = = 33. Pinst = F .V = FV cos θ 2
t t 2
1 v2 53. h = e 2 n h 54. vn = env 55. tn = e nt
35. Tmax = m +g
n mv2 n
34 P = W = 2
t t r h
57. e =
2n 2
36. At lowest point of vertical circle, 56. hn = e h h
mv 2 1
Tmax = + mg 58. hn = e 2nh
rmin
t=
37. According to law of conservation of linear 2h 2h1 2h 2
59. +2 +2 + − − and h = e2n h
momentum mu=(M+m)v g g g n
u=
( M + m) 5 gr
60. E = E1 + E 2 =
p12 p2
+ 2
m 2 m1 2 m 2
mv 2 m
38. T = mg + = mg + 2 gl (1 − cos θ ) LEVEL-I (H.W)
r l
v1 3 + 2 cos θ1 WORK DONE BY CONSTANT FORCE
39. v = gR ( 3 + 2 cos θ ) ⇒ v = 3 + 2 cos θ ur r r r
2
2 2 1. ( )
If a force F = i + 2 j + k N acts on a body
mv produces a displacement of
40. T = where vH = 3gr
H
ur r r r
r
41. According to law of conservation of linear ( )
S = 4i + j + 7 k m, then the work done is
momentum, m1u1+m2u2=m1v1+m2v2 1) 9J 2) 13J 3) 5J 4) 1J
2m1 2. Work done by the gravitational force on a
42. v2 = m + m u1 body of mass “m” moving on a smooth
1 2 horizontal surface through a distance ‘s’ is
43. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 1) mgs 2 -mgs 3) 0 4) 2mgs
3. A body of mass 1 kg is made to travel with a
1 1
∆KE = m1u12 − m2 v22 uniform acceleration of 30 cm/s2 over a
2 2 distance of 2m, then work to be done is
r m1 − m 2 r 2m 2 r 1) 6J 2) 60J 3) 0.6J 4) 0.3J
44. v1 = u1 + u2 4. A uniform cylinder of radius ‘r’ length ‘L’ and
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 mass ‘m’ is lying on the ground with the
curved surface touching the ground. If it is to
45 m2 <<< m1 and be oriented on the ground with the flat
r 2m1 r m 2 − m1 r circular end in contact with the ground, the
v2 = u1 + u2
m1 + m2 m1 + m 2 work to be done is
1)mg[(L/2)-r] 2) mL[(g/2)-r] 3) mr(gL-1) 4)mgLr
r m1 − em2 r m 2 (1 + e ) r 5. A meter scale of mass 400 gm is lying
46. v1 = m + m u 1 + m + m u 2
1 2 1 2 horizontally on the floor. If it is to be held
r m (1 + e ) r m 2 − em1 r vertically with one end touching the floor, the
v2 = 1 u1 + u2 work to be done is
m1 + m 2 m1 + m2 1) 6 J 2) 4 J 3) 40J 4) 2 J
47. m1u1 + m2u2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v 6. A force F is applied on a lawn mover at an angle
of 600 with the horizontal. If it moves through a
48. m1u1 − m2u2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v 49. mu = ( m + M ) v distance x, the work done by the force is
v2 1) Fx/2 2) F/2x 3) 2Fx 4) 2x/F
50. mu = ( m + M ) v and h = 7. A weight lifter jerks 220 kg vertically through
2g 1.5 metre and holds still at that height for two
v2 minutes. The work done by him in lifting and
51. mu = ( m + M ) v and h = in holding it still are respectively
2g 1) 220J, 330J 2) 3234 J, 0 J
52. m1u1=(m1+m2)v
3) 2334 J, 10 J 4) 0 J, 3234 J
184 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
8. A tennis ball has a mass of 56.7 gm and is this energy could be utilized by her, she can
served by a player with a speed of 180 kmph. ascend a height of
The work done in serving the ball is nearly 1) 1m 2) 67m 3) 100m 4) 42m
1) 710J 2) 71J 3) 918J 4) 91.8J POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SPRING
9. A body of mass 2kg is projected vertically up 20. A spring of spring constant 5x103 N/m is
with velocity 5ms-1.The work done on the stretched initially by 5cm from the unstretched
body by gravitational force before it is position. Then the work required to stretch it
brought to rest momentarily is further by another 5cm is.
1) 250J 2) 25J 3) 0J 4) -25J 1) 6.25Nm 2) 12.50Nm 3) 18.75Nm 4) 25Nm
WORK DONE BY VARIABLE FORCE 21. A spring with spring constant K when
10. A force F = (2+x) N acts on a particle in x - stretched through 1cm, the potential energy
direction where ‘x’ is in metre. The work is U. If it is stretched by 4cm, the potential
done by this force during a displacement energy will be
from x = 1 m to x = 2 m is 1) 4U 2) 8U 3) 16U 4) 2U
1) 2 J 2) 3.5 J 3) 4.5 J 4) 5 J WORK ENERGY THEOREM
BY CONSTANT FORCE
KINETIC ENERGY
22. A body moving with a kinetic energy of 6J
11. On increasing the speed of a body to 2 ms-1, comes to rest at a distance of 1m due to a
its kinetic energy is quadrupled. Then its retarding force of
original speed must be 1) 4 N 2) 6 N 3) 5 N 4) 8 N
1) 0.25ms-1 2) 1ms-1 3) 4ms-1 4) 2ms-1 23. A ship of mass 3x107 kg initially at rest is
12. A bullet of mass 10 gm strikes a target at 400 pulled by a force of 5x104 N through a
m/s velocity and loses half of its initial velocity. distance of 3 meters. Assuming that the
The loss of kinetic energy in joules is resistance due to water is negligible, the
1) 800 2) 200 3) 400 4) 600 speed of the ship is
13. An object is acted on by a retarding force of 1) 0.1m/s 2) 1.5 m/s 3) 5m/s 4) 60 m/s
10 N and at a particular instant its kinetic 24. A vehicle of mass 1000 kg is moving with a
energy is 6J. The object will come to rest velocity of 15 ms-1 .It is brought to rest by
after it has travelled a distance of applying brakes and locking the wheels. If
1) 3/5m 2) 5/3m 3) 4m 4) 16m the sliding friction between the tyres and the
14. A man standing on the edge of the roof of a road is 6000N, then the distance moved by
20 m tall building projects a ball of mass 100 the vehicle before coming to rest is
gm vertically up with a speed of 10ms-1. The 1) 37.5 m 2) 18.75 m 3) 75 m 4) 15 m
kinetic energy of the ball when it reaches the 25. The workdone to accelerate a body from 30
ground will be [g=10 ms-2] ms-1 to 60 ms-1 is three times the work done to
1)5J 2) 20J 3) 25J 4) Zero accelerate it from 10 ms-1 to ‘v’ . The value of
15. A river of salty water is flowing with a ‘v’in ms-1 is
velocity 2 m/sec. If the density of water is 1.2 1) 30 2) 20 2 3) 30 3 4) 10 10
gm/cc, the kinetic energy of each of cubic WORK ENERGY THEOREM
metre of water is FOR VARIABLE FORCE
1) 2.4 J 2) 24 J 3) 4.8 KJ 4) 2.4 KJ 26. A block of mass 4 kg is initially at rest on a
16. If the kinetic energy of a body increases by horizontal frictionless surface. A horizontal
125% , the percentage increase in its ur
momentum is force F = ( 3 + x ) $i newtons acts on it, when the
1) 50% 2) 62.5% 3) 250% 4) 200% block is at x=0. The maximum kinetic energy of
17. The kinetic energy of a body is ‘K’. If one- the block between x=0 and x=2m is
fourth of its mass is removed and velocity is 1) 6J 2) 8J 3) 9J 4) 10J
doubled, its new kinetic energy is CONSERVATION OF
1) K 2) 3K 3) 4K 4) 9K/4 MECHANICAL ENERGY
POTENTIAL ENENGY 27. A block of mass 4 kg slides on a horizontal
18. An inelastic ball falls from a height of 100 frictionless surface with a speed of 2m/s. It is
meters. It loses 20% of its total energy due to brought to rest in compressing a spring in its
impact. The ball will now rise to a height of path. If the force constant of the spring is 400
1) 80 m 2) 120m 3) 60m 4) 9.8m N/m, by how much the spring will be
19. A woman weighing 63 kg eats plum cake compressed
whose energy content is 9800 calories. If all 1) 2x10-2m 2) 0.2m 3) 20 m 4) 200m
NARAYANAGROUP 185
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
28. At what height above the ground must a mass MOTION INA VERTICAL CIRCLE
of 5 kg be to have its PE equal in value to the 36. A body of mass m is rotated in a vertical circle
KE possessed by it when it moves with a of radius R by means of light string. If the
velocity of 10 m/s? (g=10 m/s2)
1)1m 2) 5m 3) 10m 4) 50m velocity of body is gR while it is crossing
29. A body slides down a fixed curved track that highest point of vertical circle then the
is one quadrant of a circle of radius R, as in tension in the string at that instant is
the figure. If there is no friction and the body mg
starts from rest, its speed at the bottom of the 1) 2mg 2) mg 3) 4) Zero
2
track is 37. A body of mass m is rotated in a vertical circle
with help of light string such that velocity of
body at a point is equal to critical velocity at
that point. If T1, T2 be the tensions in the
string when the body is crossing the highest
R and the lowest positions then the following
relation is correct
1) T 2-T1=6mg 2) T 2-T1=4mg
3) T 2-T1=3mg 4) T 2-T1=2mg
1) 5gR 2) 38. A vehicle is travelling with uniform speed
5gR 3) 2gR 4) gR along a concave road of radius of curvature
POWER 19.6m. At lowest point of concave road if the
30. An electric motor in a crane while lifting a normal reaction on the vehicle is three times
load produces a tension of 4000 N in the cable its weight, the speed of vehicle is
attached to the load. If the motor is winding 1) 4.9m/s 2) 9.8m/s 3) 14.7m/s 4) 19.6m/s
the cable at the rate of 3ms-1, the power of the 39. A car is travelling along a flyover bridge
motor expressed in kilo watt units must be which is a part of vertical circle of radius 10m.
1) 4 2) 3 3) 12 4) 6 At the highest point of it the normal reaction
31. An electric motor operates with an efficiency on the car is half of its weight, the speed of
of 90%. A pump operated by the motor has an car is
1) 7m/s 2) 10m/s 3) 14m/s 4) 20m/s
efficiency of 80%. The overall efficiency of 40. A very small particle rests on the top of a
the system is hemisphere of radius 20 cm. The smallest
1) 85% 2) 100% 3) 72% 4) 60% horizontal velocity to be given to it, if it has to
32. A machine gun fires 420 bullets per minute. leave the hemisphere without sliding down its
The velocity of each bullet is 300ms-1 and the surface (g=9.8 ms-2 )is
mass of each bullet is 1gm. The power of the 1) 9.8 m/s2) 4.9 m/s3) 1.96 m/s4) 3.92 m/s
machine gun is
1) 315W 2) 315000W ELASTIC AND INELASTIC COLLISIONS
41. A ball of 4 kg mass moving with a speed of
3) 630W 4) 3150W
33. A 1 kg mass at rest is subjected to an 3 ms −1 has a head on elastic collision with a 6
acceleration of 5 m/s2 and travels 40m. The kg mass initially at rest. The speeds of both
average power during the motion is the bodies after collision are respectively
1) 40W 2) 8W 3) 50W 4) 200W 1) 0.6 ms −1 , 2.4 ms −1 2) −0.6 ms −1 , − 2.4 ms −1
34. If the power of the motor of a water pump is 3) −0.6 ms −1 , 2.4 ms −1 4) −0.6 ms −1 , − 2.4 ms −1
3kW, then the volume of water in litres that
can be lifted to a height of 10m in one minute 42. A ping - pong ball strikes a wall with a
by the pump is (g=10 ms-2) velocity of 10 ms −1 . If the collision is
1) 1800 2) 180 3) 18000 4) 18 perfectly elastic, find the velocity of ball after
35. A particle moves with a velocity impact
( )
1) − 20 ms −1 2) − 5 ms −1 3) 1.0 ms −1 4) − 10 ms −1
5$i + 3 $j + 6k$ m/s under the influence of a 43. Two identical balls collide head on. The initial
( )
velocity of one is 0.75 ms-1, while that of the
constant force 5$i + 5 $j + 10k$ N. The other is -0.43ms-1 . If the collision is perfectly
elastic, then their respective final velocities
instantaneous power applied to the particle is are
1) 100W 2) 40W 3) 140W 4) 170W 1) 0.75ms-1;-0.43ms-1 2) -0.43ms-1;0.75ms-1
3) -0.75ms-1;0.43ms-1 4) 0.43ms-1;0.75ms-1
186 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
44. A truck of mass 15 tons moving with 1 ms-1 LEVEL-I ( H.W)-KEY
collides with a stationary truck of mass 10 01) 2 02) 3 03) 3 04) 1 05) 4 06) 1
tons and automatically connected to move 07) 2 08) 2 09) 4 10) 2 11) 4 12) 4
together. The common velocity is 13) 1 14) 3 15) 4 16) 1 17) 2 18) 1
1) 1ms-1 2) 0ms-1 3) 0.4ms-1 4) 0.6ms-1 19) 2 20) 3 21) 3 22) 2 23) 1 24) 2
45. In the above problem the total KE before 25) 4 26) 2 27) 2 28) 2 29) 3 30) 3
collision is 31) 3 32) 1 33) 3 34) 1 35) 1 36) 4
1) 4500J 2) 7500J 3) 3000J 4) 0J 37) 1 38) 4 39) 1 40) 3 41) 3 42) 4
46. In the above problem loss of KE during
collision is 43) 2 44) 4 45) 2 46) 3 47) 1 48) 2
1) 4500J 2) 7500J 3) 3000J 4) 0J 49) 1 50) 3 51) 2 52) 1
47. A bullet of mass ‘x’ moves with a velocity y, LEVEL-I ( H.W)-HINTS
hits a wooden block of mass z at rest and ur ur ur ur
1. W = F .S 2. W = F . S = FS cosθ and θ = 900
gets embedded in it. After collision, the ur ur
wooden block and bullet moves with a 3 W = F .S = FS = maS
velocity 4. W = U i − U f ; where U i = mgh1 ; U f = mgh2 ;
x+ y
y 4) x + y y ∴W =mg ( h1 − h2 )
x z
1) y 2) y 3)
x+z x+ y
x z ur ur L
48. A railway truck of mass 16000kg moving 5. W = F .S = FScom ;where F = mg and S com =
with a velocity of 5ms-1 strikes another truck ur ur 2
of mass 4000kg at rest. If they move 6. W = F .S =FScos θ
together after impact, their common velocity ur ur
7. W= F .S = FS cos θ
is In lifting the weight F=mg,θ =00 ;
1) 2ms-1 2) 4ms-1 3) 6ms-1 4) 8ms-1 in holding the weight, S=0
COEFFICIENT OF RESTITUTION
49. A ball falls from a height of 10m on to a 1 1
8. W = mvi2 ; 9. W = − mgh = − mu 2
horizontal plane. If the coefficient of 2 2
restitution is 0.4, then the velocity with which 2
it rebounds from the plane after second
collision is
10. W = ∫1
F dx
1) 2.24ms-1 2) 5.6ms-1 3) 2.8ms-1 4)
0.9ms -1 11. K = 1 Mv 2 and 4 K = 1 M ( v + 2 )2
50. A ball is dropped from a height of 3m. If 2 2
( )
coefficient of restitution between the surface
12. ∆KE = 1 m v12 − v2 2 v1
and ball is 0.5, then the total distance covered , v2 =
by the ball before it comes to rest is 2 2
13. ∆ KE = W ⇒ KE = FS
1) 3m 2) 4m 3) 5m 4) 6m i
51. A glass sphere of mass 5mg, falls from a 14. K .E = K .E + P.E
f i i
height of 3 meters on to a horizontal surface. 1
If the coefficient of restitution is 0.5, then K E mv2 1
15. = 2 = ρv2
after the impact the sphere will rise to a
V V 2
height of
1) 0.075m 2) 0.75m 3) 7.5m 4) 75m 16. P = 2 mKE
52. A particle falls from a height ‘h’ upon a fixed
P2 − P1 KE2 − KE1
horizontal plane and rebounds. If ‘e’ is the
× 100 = × 100
coefficient of restitution, then the total P1 KE1
distance travelled before it comes to rest is
m v 2 , K E ' = m ' (v ' )
1 1 2
17. K E =
1+ e
2
1− e
2
2 2
1) h 1 − e 2 2) h 1 + e 2 3 m
m' = , v' = 2v
4
h 1 − e2 h 1 + e2 18. with 80% of available energy it can rise to height
3) 2 1 + e 2 4) 2 1 − e 2
h' = 0.8h
NARAYANAGROUP 187
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
19. W = JQ ⇒ mgh = JQ ( 1cal= 4.2J ) r m1 − m2 r 2m2 r
43. v1 = m + m u1 + m + m u 2
20. W = K ( x2 − x1 ) 21. U = 2 Kx ⇒ U = x 2
1 2 2 1 2 U1 x12 1 2 1 2
2 2 2
r 2m1 r m2 − m1 r
22. W = ∆KE ⇒ KEi = Fret S v2 = u1 + u2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
23. W= FS = ∆KE 24. W= FS = ∆KE r r
r m1u1 + m2u2 1 1
x2
ur uur 44. v= ; 45.KEbefore= m1u1 + m2u2
2 2
m1 + m2
∫x .dx
1 2 1 2 ∆ = =
25. W = mv − mu 26. KE W F 2 2
2 2 46. Loss in KE=KEbefore -KEafter
r r
1
27. K.E of block is converted into elastic P.E in spring r m u + m2u2
1 2 1 2 47. v= 1 1
i.e mv = kx mr1 + m2 r
2 2 r m1u1 + m2u2
1 2 48. v=
28. mgh = mv m1 + m2
2
49. v n = e n v where v= 2gh
1 2
29. Loss of P.E= gain in K.E ; mgh = mv 1 + e2
ur ur 2 =
50. d h 2
30. P = F .V 31.η =η1 ×η 2 1− e
1 51. hn = e2n h
n mv2
32. P =
W
= 2 52. d=h+2h1+2h2+------and hn=e2nh
t t
W FS maS v
33. Pavg = = = ;v= 2 as , t = LEVEL-II (C.W)
t t t a
W mgh
34. P = = and m = V ρ 35. WORK DONE BY CONSTANT FORCE
ur ur
t t
1. A body of mass 5 kg is moved up over 10 m
P = F .V
along the line of greatest slope of a smooth
36. Tension at the highest point inclined plane of inclination 30° with the
horizontal. If g = 10 m/s2 , the work done will
mv 2 be
T = − mg where v = gr
r 1) 500 J 2) 2500 J 3) 250 J 4) 25 J
2. A particle of mass 0.5 kg is displaced from
m v12 m v 22 ur ur
37. T1 = − m g , T2 = + mg position r1 (2,3,1) to r2 (4,3, 2) by applying a
r r force of magnitude 30 N which is acting along
v22 − v12 = 4 gr , v1 = gr
^ ^ ^
mv 2 i + j + k . The work done by the force is
38. Normal reaction, N = mg + ;Given N=3mg
r 1) 10 3 J 2) 30 3 J 3) 30 J 4) 40 J
mv 2 3. Kinetic energy of a particle moving in a
39. Normal reaction, N = mg −
r straight line varies with time t as K = 4t 2 .
mg The force acting on the particle
Given that N = 1) is constant 2) is increasing
2
40. Vmin = rg 3) is decreasing
4) first increases and then decreases
r m1 − m 2 r 2m 2 r 4. A block of mass 5 kg initially at rest at the
41. v1 = m + m u1 + m + m u 2 origin is acted upon by a force along the
1 2 1 2
positive X - direction represented by
r 2m1 r m2 − m1 r F=(20 +5x)N. Calculate the work done by the
v2 = u1 + u2 force during the displacement of the block
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 from x = 0 to x = 4m.
42. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 1) 100 J 2) 150 J 3) 120 J 4) 75 J
188 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
5. A force F acting on a particle varies with the 12. Under the action of a force, a 2 kg body
position x as shown in the graph. Find the moves such that its position ‘x’ in meters as a
work done by the force in displacing the function of time ‘t’ in seconds given by:
particle from x = -a to x=+2a x = t2/2. The work done by the force in the
first 5 seconds is
+2b 1) 2.5 J 2) 0.25 J 3) 25 J 4) 250 J
13. A body of mass 5 kg at rest under the action
(F) of a force which gives its velocity given by
v = 3×t m/s, here ‘t’ is time in seconds. The
-a work done by the force in two seconds will be
(x) +2a 1) 90 J 2) 45 J 3) 180 J 4) 30 J
-b
KINETIC ENERGY
3ab 4ab 2 2 14. A body freely falls from a certain height onto
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 3ab 4ab the ground in a time ‘t’. During the first one
ur
6. ( )
A force F = 2$i + 3 $j − 4k$ N acts on a particle
third of the interval it gains a kinetic energy
which is constrained to move in the XOY plane ∆K1 and during the last one third of the
along the line x = y. If the particle moves 5 2m , interval, it gains a kinetic energy ∆ K 2 . The
the work done by force in joule is ratio ∆K1 : ∆K 2 is
1) 25 2 2) 5 58 3) 25 4) 10 1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 3 3) 1 : 4 4) 1 : 5
7. Two forces each of magnitude 10 N act 15. A man has twice the mass of a boy and has half
simultaneously on a body with their directions the kinetic energy of the boy. The ratio of the
inclined to each other at an angle of 120° and speeds of the man and the boy must be
displaces the body over 10 m along the bisector 1) 2 : 1 2) 4 : 1 3) 1 : 4 4) 1 : 2
of the angle between the two forces. Then the 16. The speed of a car changes from 0 to 5 ms-1 in
work done by each force is the first phase and from 5 ms-1 to 10 ms-1 in the
1) 5 J 2) 1 J 3) 50 J 4) 100 J second phase and from 10 ms-1 to 15 ms-1 during
8. ‘n’ identical cubes each of mass ‘m’ and edge the third phase. In which phase the increase in
‘L’ are on a floor. If the cubes are to be kinetic energy is more?
arranged one over the other in a vertical 1) first phase 2) second phase
stack, the work to be done is 3) third phase 4) same in all the three phases
1) Lmng (n-1)/2 2) Lg(n-1)/mn POTENTIAL ENERGY
3) (n-1)/Lmng 4) Lmng/2(n-1) 17. A rubber ball falling from a height of 5m
9. A chain of mass m and length ‘L’ is over rebounds from a hard floor to a height of
hanging from the edge of a smooth horizontal 3.5m. The % loss of energy during the impact
table such that 3/4 th of its length is lying on is
the table. The work done in pulling the chain 1) 20% 2) 30% 3) 43% 4) 50%
completely on to the table is 18. When a long spring is stretched by x cm, its
1) mgL/16 2) mgL/32 3) 3mgL/32 4) mgL/8 P.E is U . If the spring is stretched by Nx cm,
WORK DONE BY VARIABLE FORCE the P.E stored in it will be
10. A body is displaced from (0,0) to (1m, 1m) U U
1) 2) NU 3) N 2U 4) 3
along the path x = y by a force N N
19. An elastic spring is compressed between two
^ ^
F = x 2 j + y i N. The work done by this blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg resting on a
smooth horizontal table as shown. If the
force will be spring has 12J of energy and suddenly
4 5 3 7 released, the velocity with which the larger
1) J 2) J 3) J 4) J block of 2 kg moves will be
3 6 2 5
11. A particle moves under the effect of a force 1kg compressed spring
2kg
F = C x from x = 0 to x = x1. The work done in A B
the process is (treat C as a constant) 1) 2 m/s 2) 4 m/s 3) 1 m/s 4) 8 m/s
1) C2 / x12 2) Cx12 3) ½ Cx12 4) ½ C2/x12
NARAYANAGROUP 189
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
20. A block of mass 2 kg is on a smooth horizontal 26. A vertically projected body attains the
surface. A light spring of force constant 800 N/ maximum height in 6s. The ratio of kinetic
m has one end rigidly attached to a vertical energy at the end of 3rd second to decrease in
wall and lying on that horizontal surface. Now kinetic energy in the next three seconds is
the block is moved towards the wall 1) 1: 1 2) 1 : 3 3) 3 : 1 4) 9 : 1
compressing the spring over a distance of 27. Two identical blocks A and B, each of mass
5 cm and then suddenly released. By the time ‘m’ resting on smooth floor are connected by
the spring regains its natural length and looses a light spring of natural length L and the
contact with the block, the velocity acquired by spring constant k, with the spring at its
the block will be natural length. A third identical block C
1) 200m/s 2) 100 m/s 3) 2m/s 4) 1m/s (mass m) moving with a speed v along the line
joining A and B collides with A. The maximum
WORK ENERGY THEOREM FOR compression in the spring is:
CONSTANT FORCE m v mv mv
21. A bullet of mass 10gm is fired horizontally 1) v 2) m 3) 4)
2k 2k 2k 2k
with a velocity 1000ms -1 from a riffle 28. A block of mass m=25kg on a smooth
situated at a height 50 m above the ground. If r
horizontal surface with a velocity v = 3ms −1
the bullet reaches the ground with a velocity meets the spring of spring constant
500ms −1 , the work done against air k = 100 N/m fixed at one end as shown in
resistance in the trajectory of the bullet is (in figure. The maximum compression of the
joule) ( g = 10ms −2 )
spring and velocity of block as it returns to
the original position respectively are
1) 5005 2) 3755 3) 3750 4) 17.5
22. A drop of mass 1.00 g falling from a height
1.00 km. It hits the ground with a speed of K
50.0ms -1 . What is the work done by the
unknown resistive force? V
1) -8.75J 2) 8.75J 3) -4.75J 4) 4.75J m
23. A block of mass 5 kg is initially at rest on a
rough horizontal surface. A force of 45 N acts
on it in a horizontal direction and pushes it 1) 1.5m, −3ms −1 2) 1.5m, 0ms −1
over a distance of 2 m. The force of friction 3) 1.0m,3ms −1 4) 0.5m, 2ms −1
acting on the block is 25 N. The final kinetic 29. A body is thrown vertically up with certain
energy of the block is initial velocity, the potential and kinetic
1) 40 J 2) 90 J 3) 50J 4) 140 J energies of the body are equal at a point P in
WORK ENERGY THEOREM FOR its path. If the same body is thrown with
VARIABLE FORCE double the velocity upwards, the ratio of
potential and kinetic energies of the body
24. A block of mass 2 kg is initially at rest on a when it crosses the same point, is
horizontal frictionless surface. A horizontal
1) 1:1 2) 1: 4 3) 1 : 7 4) 1:8
force F = (9 − x 2 ) i newton acts on it, when POWER
the block is at x = 0. The maximum kinetic 30. A machine rated as 150W, changes the
energy of the block between x = 0m and velocity of a 10kg mass from 4 ms −1 to
x = 3 m in joule is
1) 24 2) 20 3) 18 4) 15 10 ms −1 in 4s. The efficiency of the machine
is nearly
Conservation of mechanical energy 1) 70% 2) 30% 3) 50% 4) 40%
25. A freely falling body takes 4s to reach the 31. A pump is required to lift 600 kg of water per
ground. One second after release, the minute from a well 25m deep and to eject it
percentage of its potential energy, that is still with a speed of 50 ms −1 . The power required
retained is to perform the above task is
1) 6.25% 2) 25% 3) 37.5% 4) 93.75% 1) 10 kW 2) 15 kW 3) 20 kW 4) 25 kW
190 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
32. A tank on the roof of a 20 m high building can ELASTIC AND INELASTIC
hold 10 m3 of water. The tank is to be filled
from a pond on the ground in 20 minutes. If COLLISIONS
the pump has an efficiency of 60 %, then 40. A body of mass 5kg moving with a speed of
the input power in kW is 3ms-1 collides head on with a body of mass
1) 1.1 2) 2.74 3) 5.48 4) 7.0 3kg moving in the opposite direction at a
33. An electric fan, with effective area of cross- speed of 2ms-1. The first body stops after the
section ‘A’, accelerates air of density ‘ ρ ’ to a collision. The final velocity of the second
speed ‘v’. What is the power needed for this body is
1) 3ms-1 2) 5ms-1 3) -9ms-1 4)30ms-1
process? 41. Three identical particles moving with velocities
1) ρ Av 2) ½ ρ Av 3) ρ Av v2 4)½ ρ Av v3
v0 i$, − 3v0 $j and 5v0 k$ collide successively with
MOTION IN A VERTICAL CIRCLE each other in such a way that they form a single
34. A point size mass 100 gm is rotated in a particle. The velocity of resultant particle in i, j,
vertical circle using a cord of length 20cm. k form is
( ) ( )
When the string makes an angle 60° with the
1) v0 $i − 3 $j + 5k$ 2) 0 $i − 3 $j + 5k$
v
vertical , the speed of the mass is
1.5m/s. The tangential acceleration of the 3
1) 4.9 2) 4.9 2 3) 4.9 3 4) 9.8
–2
mass in that position is ( in ms ) 3)
v
2
o $
( )
i − 3 $j + 5k$
v
(
3
)
4) 0 $i + 3 $j + 5k$
42. From the top of a tower of height 100m a 10
35. A vehicle is travelling along concave road gm block is dropped freely and a 6gm bullet
then along convex road of same radius of is fired vertically upwards from the foot of
curvatures at uniform speed. If the normal the tower with velocity 100ms -1
reactions on the vehicle as it crosses the simultaneously. They collide and stick
lowest point of concave surface, highest point together. The common velocity after
of convex surface are 1.5 × 104 N , 3 × 103 N collision is (g=10ms-2)
respectively, then the mass of vehicle is(g=10 1) 27.5ms-1 2) 150ms-1 3) 40ms-1 4) 100ms-1
m/s–2) 43. A steel ball of radius 2cm is initially at rest. It
is struck head on by another steel ball of
1) 400 kg 2) 450 kg 3) 800 kg 4) 900kg radius 4cm travelling with a velocity of 81 cm/
36. The length of a simple pendulum is 1 m. The s. If the collision is elastic their respective
bob is given a velocity 7 ms-1 in horizontal final velocities are
direction from mean position. During upward 1) 63 cm/s, 144 cm/s 2) 144 cm/s, 63 cm/s
motion of bob, if the string breaks when the 3) 19 cm/s, 100 cm/s 4) 100 cm/s, 19 cm/s
bob is horizontal, then the maximum vertical 44. A steel ball of radius 2cm is initially at rest. It
height of ascent of bob from rest position is is struck head on by another steel ball of
1. 2.5 m 2. 2 m 3. 3 m 4. 3.5 m radius 4cm travelling with a velocity of
37. A body is allowed to slide down a frictionless 81cm/s. The common velocity if it is perfectly
track from rest position at its top under inelastic collision
gravity. The track ends in a circular loop of 1)144 cm/s 2)61 cm/s 3)81 cm/s 4) 72 cm/s
diameter D. Then, the minimum height of the COEFFICIENT OF RESTITUTION
inclined track ( in terms of D ) so that it may 45. A tennis ball bounces down a flight of stairs,
complete successfully the loop is striking each step in turn and rebounding to
1) 7D/4 2) 9D/4 3) 5D/4 4) 3D/4 half of height of the step. The coefficient of
38. A body of mass m is rotating in a vertical restitution is
circle of radius 'r' with critical speed. The 1 1
1/ 2
1
1/ 4
difference in its K.E. at the top and at the 1) 1/2 2) 3) 4)
bottom is 2 2 2
1) 2mgr 2) 4 mgr 3) 6 mgr 4) 3 mgr 46. A ball hits the ground and loses 20% of its
39. A simple pendulum of length 'l' carries a bob momentum. Coefficient of restitution is
of mass 'm'. If the breaking strength of the 1) 0.2 2) 0.4 3) 0.6 4) 0.8
47. A plastic ball falling from a height 4.9m
string is 2 mg, the maximum angular rebounds number of times. If total time for
amplitude from the vertical can be second collision is2.4 sec, then coefficient of
1) 0° 2) 30° 3) 60° 4) 90° restitution is
1) 0.3 2) 0.4 3) 0.7 4) 0.6
NARAYANAGROUP 191
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
48. A ball is dropped from a height ‘h’ on to a 56. A body is thrown vertically upward from a
floor of coefficient of restitution ‘e’. The total point ‘A’ 125 m above the ground. It goes up
distance covered by the ball just before to a maximum height of 250 m above the
second hit is (2008 E) ground and passes through ‘A’ on its
1) h (1 − 2e ) 2) h (1 + 2e )
2 2
downward journey. The velocity of the body
when it is at a height of 70 m above the
3) h (1 + e2 ) 4) he 2 ground is ( g = 10 ms-2 ) (2013 M)
49. In two separate collisions, the coefficient of 1) 50 ms-1 2) 60 ms-1 3) 80 ms-14) 20 ms-1
57. A body of mass 300 kg is moved through 10 m
restitutions e1 and e2 are in the ratio 3:1. In the along a smooth inclined plane of inclination
first collision the relative velocity of approach is angle 300 . The work done in moving (in joules)
twice the relative velocity of separation. Then, is ( g = 9.8 ms-2 ) (2013 M)
the ratio between relative velocity of approach 1) 4900 2) 9800 3) 14,700 4) 2450
and relative velocity of separation in the second 58. A ball of mass ‘m’ moving with a horizontal
collision is (2007 E) velocity ‘v’ strikes the bob of mass ‘m’ of a
1) 1:6 2) 2:3 3) 3:2 4) 6:1 pendulum at rest. During this collision, the
50. A sphere of mass m moving with constant ball sticks with the bob of the pendulum. The
velocity u, collides with another stationary height to which the combined mass raises is
sphere of same mass. If e is the coefficient of (g = acceleration due to gravity) (2013 M)
restitution, the ratio of the final velocities of
the first and second sphere is (2007 M) v2 v2 v2 v2
1) 2) 3) 4)
1+ e 1− e e 1+ e 4g 8g g 2g
1) 2) 3) 4) 59. The velocity ‘v’ reached by a car of mass ‘m’
1− e 1+ e 1− e e
PREVIOUS EAMCET QUESTIONS on moving a certain distance from the
51. A canon shell fired breaks into two equal parts starting point when driven by a motor with
at its highest point. One part retraces the path constant power ‘P’ is such that (2012 E)
2
to the canon with kinetic energy E1 and the 3P 3P 3P 3P
1) v ∝ 2) v ∝ 3) v ∝ 4) v ∝
2 3
kinetic energy of the second part is E2. Relation
between E1 and E2 is (2014 E) m m m m
60. A ball ‘A’ of mass ‘m’ moving along positive
1) E2 = E1 2) E2 = 4 E1 x- direction with kinetic energy K and linear
3) E2 = 9 E1 4) E2 = 15E1 momentum “P” undergoes elastic head on
52. A body of 200 g begins to fall from a height collision with a stationary ball ‘B’ of mass M.
where its potential energy is 80 J. Its velocity at After the collision, the ball A moves along
a point where its kinetic and potential energies negative x- direction with kinetic energy K/9,
are equal(in m/s) ( 2014 M) the final linear momentum of the ball B is
( 2012E)
1) 10 8 2) 4 3)400 4)20 1) P 2) P/3 3) 4P/3 4) 4P
53. The work done by a force F = 2i- j-k in 61. Displacement of a body is 5i +3j - 4k m due to
moving an object from origin to a point whose the action of a force 6i + 6j + 4k N on it for 5 s.
The power in watt is ( 2012 M )
position vector is r = 3i + 2j - 5k ( 2013 E) 1) 16 2) 9.6 3) 6.4 4) 3.2
1) 1 unit 2)9 units 3)13 units 4)60 units 62. A ball at rest is dropped freely from a height of
54. A ball at rest is dropped from a height of 12 m. If 20 m. It loses 30% of its energy on striking the
it looses 25 % of its kinetic energy on striking ground and bounces back. The height to which it
the ground and bounces back to a height ‘h’. the bounces back is ( 2012 M)
value of ‘h’ is equal to ( 2013 E) 1) 14 m 2) 12 m 3) 9 m 4) 6 m
1) 3 m 2)6 m 3) 9 m 4) 12 m 63. A 3 kg sphere makes an inelastic collision
55. A block of mass 2.9 kg is suspended from a with another sphere at rest and they stick
string of length 50 cm and is at rest. Another after the collision. If the composite mass
block of mass 100 g, which is moving with a th
speed of 150 m/s strikes and sticks to the first 1
moves with a speed of of the initial speed
block. Subsequently when the string makes an 4
angle of 60 0. With the vertical, the tension in of 3 kg sphere, the mass of second sphere is
the string will be ( g = 10 ms-2 ) (2013 E ) (2012 M )
1) 140 N 2) 135 N 3) 125 N 4) 90 N 1) 12 kg 2) 9 kg 3) 6 kg 4) 3 kg
192 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
64. A ball is let to fall from a height h 0 . It makes LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS
‘n’ collisions with the horizontal ground. If ur ur
after ‘n’ collisions it rebounds with a velocity 1. W = F .S =FScos θ ; here F=mgsin α and
v n and the ball rises to a height hn, then the θ = 00 , α = 300
coefficient of restitution for the collision is
( 2011 E) 2. Fx = F cos α , Fy = F cos β , Fz = F cos γ ,
1 n n 1 W = F .S
h 2n h 2 h 2 h 2n
1) e = n 2) e = n 3) e = 0 4) e = 0 1 2
mv = 4t 2 ; ∴v =
8
t
ho ho hn hn 3.
2 m
65. A bullet is fired normally towards an comparing with v=at, a = constant
immovable wooden block. If it loses 25% of i.e., the force acting on the particle is constant
its kinetic energy in penetrating through the
W= ∫ Fdx
4
block at thickness x, the further distance 4. 5. W = area under F - S curve.
0
penetrated by the bullet into the block is ur ∧ ∧ ur ur
( 2011 M) 6. S = 5 i + 5 j, W = F.S 7.W= FS cos θ
1) 2x 2) 4x 3) 6x 4) 8x
L nL
66. A ball is falling freely from a certain height. 8. U i = nmg , U f = nmg , W = Ui − U f
When it reaches 10 m height from the ground 2 2
its velocity is v0 . It collides with the mgl
9. W = 2
horizontal ground and loses 50% of its 2n
energy and rises back to height of 10 m. The (1,1) ur uur
W = ∫ F . d s ; Here uur ^ ^ ^
value of velocity v0 is ( 2010 E) 10.
(0,0)
ds = dx i + dy j + dz k
1) 7 ms 2) 10 ms 3) 14 ms 4)16 ms −1
− 1 − 1 − 1
(1,1) (1,1)
∴W = ∫ (x dy + ydx ) = ∫ ( y dy + x.dx )
2 2
67. A motor of power P0 is used to deliver water
at a certain rate through a given horizontal (0,0) (0,0)
pipe. To increase the rate of flow of water (as x = y)
X1
through the same pipe ‘n’ times, the power of 1 2 dx
the motor is increased to P1 . The ratio of P1 11. W = ∫ Fdx 12.
0
W=
2
mv where v =
dt
to P0 is (2009E) 1 2
13. W = mv
1) n : 1 2) n :12 3) n :1 4) 1: n 3
3 2
2t
68. A body of mass 5 kg makes an elastic 1 2
1 2
collision with another body at rest and 14. ∆k1 = mg Q ∆k = mv ; v = gt
continues to move in the original direction 2
9 2
2 2 4t 2
after the collision with a velocity equal to 1/ 1
10th of its original velocity. The mass of the ∆k 2 = mg t −
second body is (2009 E) 2 9
( K .Eboy )
1) 4.09 kg 2) 0.5 kg 3) 5 kg 4) 5.09 kg 1
15. K .Eman =
LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY 2
01) 3 02) 2 03) 1 04) 3 05) 1 06)3 1 2 1 1 2
07)3 08)1 09)2 10)2 11) 3 12)3 Mu = mv (QM = 2m)
2 2 2
13)1 14)4 15)4 16)3 17)2 18)3
∆KE = m ( v 2 − u 2 )
19)1 20)4 21)2 22)1 23)1 24)3 1
16.
25)4 26)1 27)1 28)1 29)3 30)1 2
31)2 32)2 33)4 34)3 35)4 36)1 h1 − h2
37)3 38)1 39)3 40)1 41)2 42)1 17. percentage loss of energy = h ×100%
1
43)2 44)4 45)2 46)4 47)3 48)2
1 1
49)4 50)2 51)3 52) 4 53)2 54)3 U = kx 2 &U ' = K ( Nx )
2
18.
55) 2 56)2 57) 3 58) 2 59)3 60)3 2 2
61) 3 62)1 63) 2 64) 4 65)2 66)3 1 2
67) 3 68)1 19. Kx = KE1 + KE2 and m1v1 = m2 v2
2
NARAYANAGROUP 193
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
1 2 1 2 36. If v is velocity when the string is horizontal
20. Kx = mv
2 2 v2
21. By work energy theorem 7 − v = 2 gL hence H =
2 2 +L
2g
1 1
W = mgh + mu 2 − mv 2 1 2
2 2 37. Loss of P.E=gain in K.E; mgh = m 5 gr
22. Work done = P.EI-K.Ef 2
38. ∆K .E = m ( vbottom − vtop )
1
23. ∆K = W ; K .E f − 0 = Fnet S cos θ
2 2
2
24. KEmax = w = ∫ Fdx 39. If θ is angular amplitude , T = mg (3 − 2 cos θ )
3
40. m1u1 − m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
0
1
25 height of fall, H1 = . g × 4 = 8 g
2
2 41. mv 0 i − 3mV0 j + 5mv 0 k = (m + m + m)v
After one second, body is at a height of mv o ($i − 3 $j + 5k$ )
1 15g ∴v=
H2 = 8g − .g ×12 = 3m
2 2 h
H2 42. time, t =
% of P.E retained = H ×100% u
1 For freely falling body : u1 = gt
u For upward projected body , u2 = u − gt
26. ta = = 6 ⇒ u = 6 g
g − m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2 )v
1 2 1
KE : ∆ KE = m ( u − gt ) : m ( u − gt ) − 0
2
4 3
2 2 43. As mass , m = ρ (volume ) = ρ π r
3
1 1
27. mv =(m+m) v1 and (m+m) (v1)2 = kx2 r1 − r2
3 3
2r13u1
2 2 m α r so, v1 = 3
3
3 1
u and v2 = 3
28. K.E of block is converted into elastic P.E in spring r1 + r2 r1 + r2 3
1 2 1 2 r13 u1 + r2 3 u 2 = ( r13 + r2 3 ) v {Q m α r }
3
i.e mv = kx 44.
2 2
29. In first case, at ‘P’ ,TE=PE+KE=2PE h h 1
45. e = h = h =
2 2
1 2 1 2
and TEbottom= mu Rebound momentum
46. e = Striking momentum
2
In second case,
1
TE1bottom= m ( 2u ) = 4TE = 8 PE
2
2h
2 47. T = t + 2t1 = [ 1 + 2e ] since tn = e nt
PE1 PE1 PE g
= =
( )
At ‘P’,
KE TE − PE 8 PE − PE 48. hn = he 2 n ; htotal = h 1 + 2 e
1 1 1 2
1
m v 2 − u 2
49. e1 : e2 = 3:1 ; ∆U1 = 2∆V1 ⇒ e1 = ∆V1 = 1
P0
30. η = × 100 where p0 = 2
Pi t ∆U1 2
Mgh + Mv2
1 ∆V1 ∆V2
: = 3:1
31. P = W = 2 ∆U 1 ∆U 2
t t
m1 − em 2
Pout ( mgh ) / t x mgh 50. v 1 = m + m u 1 + 0
32. η = = , p= 1 2
Pin P 100 t m1 (1 + e )
1 3 v2 = 0 + u1
m1 + m2
33. P = 2 Aυ ρ 34. at = g sin θ 51. At highest point according to L.C.M,
R + R2 m m
35. mg = 1 mu cosθ = − u cosθ + v ;
2 2 2
mv 2 mv 2 1m 1m
since R1 = mg + and R2 = mg − E1 = ( u cos θ ) , E2 = v 2
2
r r 2 2 2 2
194 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
52. T.E at top = T.E at given point ; P.E=P.E1+K.E1 3. A weight of 5 N is moved up a frictionless
80=2K.E1 (Q P.E 1 = K .E 1 ) inclined plane from R to Q as shown.
ur ur ur ur ur Q
53 W = F .S = F .(r2 − r1 )
5m
h1 − h2
54. percentage loss of PE = × 100% 5N
h1
mu mv 2 P R
55. vcommon = and T = mg cos θ + 4m
M +m r What is the work done in joules?
Where v = vbottom − 2 gr (1 − cos θ )
2
1) 15 2) 20 3) 25 4)35
56. v A = 2 gh here h = 125m 4. A 5 kg stone of relative density 3 is resting at
Velocity at a distance 55m below ‘A’ is the bed of a lake. It is raised through a height
v 2 = v 2A + 2 gh1 here h1 = 55m of 5 m in the lake. If g = 10 m/s2, then work
57. W = mgl sin θ done is
v2 2
58. Mv = ( M + m ) v2 ; h = 350 750 550
2g 1) 500 J 2) J 3) J 4) J
3 3 3 3
dv P
ds ∫
59. P = F .v; P = mv ; v dv = ∫ ds
2 2
5. Water is drawn from a well in a 5 kg drum of
m
60. Law of conservation of linear momentum. capacity 55 L by two ropes connected to the
mu1 = − mv1 + PB top of the drum. The linear density of each
s rope is 0.5 kgm-1. The work done in lifting
61. P = F .v = F .
t water to the ground from the surface of water
h1 − h2
62. percentage loss of PE = h ×100% in the well 20 m below is (g = 10 ms-2)
1
1)1.4×104J 2)1.5×104J
63. m u = ( M + m ) v 64. hn = e 2n h0 3)9.8×6×10 J 4) 18 J
65. Work - energy theorem; W = FS cos θ = ∆K .E
6. A ball is dropped from the top of a tower.The
Sα K f − K i
ratio of work done by force of gravity in 1st,
11
m v 0 + m g h1 = m g h 2
2
66. 22 2nd, and 3rd second of the motion of ball is
m −m 1) 1:2:3 2)1:4:16 3)1:3:5 4) 1:9:25
67. P = Aρ v3 ⇒ Pα v 3 68. v1 = m + m u1
1 2
1 2
7. A plate of mass m, breadth ‘a’ and length ‘b’is
initially lying on a horizontal floor with length
LEVEL-II (H.W)
parallel to the floor and breadth
WORK DONE BY CONSTANT FORCE perpendicular to the floor. The work done to
1. A bicycle chain of length 1.6 m and of mass 1
kg is lying on a horizontal floor. If g=10ms-2, erect it on its breadth is
the work done in lifting it with one end b b
touching the floor and the other end 1.6 m 1) mg 2) mg a + 2
2
above the floor is
1) 10 J 2) 3.2 J 3) 8 J 4) 16 J b−a b+a
3) mg 4) mg 2
2. A bucket of mass ‘m’ tied to a light rope is 2
8. A block of mass 10 kg slides down a rough
lowered at a constant acceleration of g/4. If
slope which is inclined at 450 to the horizontal.
the bucket is lowered by a distance ‘d’, the
The coefficient of sliding friction is 0.30.
work done by the rope will be (neglect the
When the block has to slide 5 m, the work
mass of the rope)
done on the block by the force of friction is
1 3 3 5
1) mgd 2) mgd 3) − mgd 4) − mgd nearly
4 4 4 4
1)115J 2)-75 2 J 3) 321.4J 4) -321.4 J
NARAYANAGROUP 195
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
9. A uniform rope of length ‘L and linear density 17. The kinetic energy of a projectile at the
‘ µ ’ is on a smooth horizontal table with a highest point of its path is found to be 3/4th of
its initial kinetic energy. If the body is
length ‘l’ lying on the table. The work done in
projected from the ground, the angle of
pulling the hanging part on to the table is projection is
1)00 2)300 3)600 4) 400
µg ( L − l)
2
1) µ g ( L − l )
2
2) 18. The kinetic energy of a moving body is given
2l 2 by k = 2v2, k being in joules and v in m/s. It’s
2
momentum when travelling with a velocity of
µg (L − l)
2
µ gL 2 m/s will be (in kgms-1 )
3)
2 L2
4) 2(L − l) 1)16 2) 4 3) 8 4) 2
10. A uniform rod of mass 2 kg and length l is POTENTIAL ENERGY
lying on a horizontal surface. If the work done 19. A simple pendulum is swinging in vertical
plane. The ratio of its potential energy when
in raising one end of the rod through an angle it is making 450 and 900 with the
450 is ‘W’, then the work done in raising it vertical is
further 450 is
( ) (
1)1:1 2)1: 2 + 1 3) 2 :1 4) 2 − 1 : 2 )
( )
W
1) W 2) 2 W 3) 4) 2 − 1 W POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SPRING
2
20. A spring of force constant 800 Nm-1 is
WORK DONE BY VARIABLE FORCE stretched initially by 5 cm. The work
11. A block is constrained to move along x-axis done in stretching from 5 cm to 15 cm is
under a force F= - (2x)N. Find the work done 1) 12.50 N-m 2) 18.75 N-m
by the force when the block is displaced from 3) 25.00 N-m 4) 6.25 N-m
x = 2m to x = 4m 21. When a spring is compressed by a distance
1)12J 2)8J 3)-12J 4)-8J ‘x’, the potential energy stored is U1. It is
2
12. A force of (4x +3x)N acts on a particle which further compressed by a distance ‘2x’, the
displaces it from x=2m to x= 3m. The work
increase in potential energy is U2. The ratio
done by the force is
1)32.8J 2)3.28J 3)0.328J 4)Zero of U1:U2 is
13. A body of mass 6kg is under a force which 1)1:7 2) 1:4 3)1:8 4)1:3
causes a displacement in it which is given by 22. A massless spring with a force constant
K=40N/m hangs vertically from the ceiling.
t2
S = m, where ‘t’ is time. The work done by A 0.2kg block is attached to the end of the
4 spring and held in such a position that the
the force in 2sec is spring has its natural length and suddenly
1)12J 2)9J 3)6J 4)3J released.The maximum elastic strain energy
KINETIC ENERGY stored in the spring is(g=10m/s2)
14. Two spheres of same material are moving 1)0.1J 2)0.2J 3)0.05J 4) 0.4J
with kinetic energies in the ratio 108:576. If WORK ENERGY THEOREM BY
the ratio of their velocities is 2:3 , then the CONSTANT FORCE
ratio of their radii is 23. A bulletofm ass‘m ’isfired w ith a velocity‘v’
1)1:1 2)2:3 3) 3:4 4) 4:3 into a fixed log of wood and penetrates a
15. If the momentum of a body decreases by distance ‘s’ before coming to rest. Assuming
30%, then kinetic energy decreases by that the path of the bullet in the log of wood is
1) 60% 2) 51% 3) 69% 4) 90% horizontal, the average resistance offered by
16. If the mass of a moving body decreased by
one third of its initial mass and velocity is the log of wood is
tripled, then the percentage change in its
kinetic energy is mv mv 2 2s ms 2
1) 2 2) 3) 4)
1)500% 2) 600% 3) 300% 4) 200% 2s 2s mv 2 2v
196 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
24. A ball of mass ‘m’ is thrown in air with speed WORK ENERGY THEOREM FOR
v1 from a height h 1 and it is caught at a height VARIABLE FORCE:
h2> h1 when its speed becomes v2. Find the 30. A block of mass 4kg is initially at rest on
a horizontal frictionless surface.A force
work done on the ball by air resistance. ur
F = ( 2 x + 3x2 ) i$ N acts horizontally on it. The
1) mg ( h2 − h1 ) + m ( v2 − v1 )
1 2 2 maximum kinetic energy of the block
2 between x=2m and x=4m in joules is
1)40 2) 36 3)68 4) 52
2) mg ( h2 − h1 ) 3) m ( v2 − v1 )
1 2 2 31. A force F=Ay2+By+C acts on a body at
2 rest in the Y-direction. The kinetic
energy of the body during a displacement
4) mg ( h2 − h1 ) − m ( v2 − v1 )
1 2 2 y = - a to y = a is
2 2 Aa 3 2 Aa 3
25. An object of mass 5 kg falls from rest 1) 2) + 2ca
3 3
through a vertical distance of 20 m and
2 Aa 3 Ba 2 2 Aa3 Ba 2
attains a velocity of 10 m/s. How much work 3) + + ca 4) +
is done by the resistance of the air on the 3 2 3 2
object (g = 10 m/s2) LAW OF CONSERVATION OF
1)750 J 2)– 750 J 3) 850 J 4)- 650 J MECHANICAL ENERGY
26. The velocity of a 2 kg body is changed from 32. A 3kg model rocket is launched straight up
^ ^
with sufficient initial speed to reach a
(4 i + 3 j ) ms to 6 ms . The work done on
-1 -1 maximum height of 100 m, even though air
resistance (a non-conservative force)
the body is performs - 900 J of work on the rocket. The
1)9 J 2)11 J 3)1 J 4) 5 J height the rocket would have gone without air
27. An out fielder throws a cricket ball with resistance will be
an initial kinetic energy of 800J and an 1) 70 m 2) 130 m 3) 180 m 4) 230 m
infielder catches the ball when its kinetic 33. A body of mass 2kg is thrown up vertically with
energy is 600J. If the path of the ball kinetic energy of 490J. If g = 9.8m / s 2 , the
between them is assumed straight and is height at which the kinetic energy of the body
20m long, the air resistance acting on becomes half of the original value, is (2007 M)
the ball is 1) 50m 2) 25m 3) 12.5m 4) 19.6 m
1)26.6N 2)1.33N 3)100N 4)10N 34. A simple pendulum bob has a mass “m” and
28. Velocity -time graph of a particle of length “L”. The bob is drawn aside such that
the string is horizontal and then it is released.
mass 2kg moving in a straight line is as The velocity of the bob while it crosses the
shown in the figure. Work done by all equilibrium position is
the forces on the particle is 1) gL 2) 2 gL 3) 5 gL 4) 3gL
V(m/s)
35. A 100 gm light bulb dropped from a tower
20 reaches a velocity of 20 m/s after falling
through 100 m. The energy transferred to the
air due to viscous force is
1) 98 J 2) 20 J 3) 118 J 4) 78 J
36. In the arrangement shown in figure , string
is light and inextensible and friction is
absent every where .The speed of both
O 2 t(s) blocks after the block ‘A’ has ascend a
1)400J 2)-400J 3)-200J 4)200J height of 1m will be (g=10m/s2)
29. A block of mass of 1kg slides down a curved
track that is one -quadrant of circle of radius
1m. Its speed at the bottom is 2m/s. The
workdone by the frictional force is
A B
1kg 2kg
1)8J 2)-8J 3)4J 4)-4J
1)2m/s 2) 2.58m/s 3) 3m/s 4) 3.58 m/s
NARAYANAGROUP 197
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
POWER 44. A pilot of mass m can withstand a maximum
37. A car drives along a straight level frictionless apparent weight 6 times of mg. The minimum
road by an engine delivering constant power. radius of curvature of vertical circle in which the
Then velocity is directly proportional to aeroplane dives up from lowest point with a
speed 504 kmph is
1
1) t 2) 3) t 4) t 2 1) 200 m 2) 300 m 3) 400 m 4) 500m
t 45. A simple pendulum is oscillating with an
38. The input power to an electric motor is 200KW. angular amplitude 900. If the direction of
Its efficiency is 80%. It operates a crane of resultant acceleration of the bob is horizontal
efficiency 90%. If the crane is lifting a load of at a point where angle made by the string
3.6 tonnes, the velocity with which the load with vertical is
moves is
−1 1 −1 1
1) 8 ms-1 2) 4 ms-1 3) 2 ms-1 4) 40 ms-1 1) sin 2) cos
39. The human heart discharges 75 cm3 of blood 3 3
per beat against an average pressure of −1 1 −1 1
10 cm of Hg. Assuming that the pulse 3) sin 4) cos
frequency is 75 per minute, the power of the 3 3
heart is (density of Hg = 13.6 gm cm-3) 46. A steel wire can withstand a load up to 2940
1) 1.25W 2) 12.5W 3) 0.125W N. A load of 150 kg is suspended from a rigid
4)125W support. The maximum angle through which
40. An elevator can carry a maximum load of the wire can be displaced from the mean
1800kg(elevator+passengers) is moving up position, so that the wire does not break when
with a constant speed of 2m/s. The frictional the load passes through the position of
force opposing the motion is 400N. equilibrium, is (2008 E)
Determine the minimum power delivered by 1) 30° 2) 60° 3) 80° 4) 85°
the motor to the elevator( in horse power). 47. A small block is freely sliding down from top
1) 59 2)8 3)22 4)20 of a smooth inclined plane. The block reaches
41. A body is initially at rest. It undergoes bottom of inclined plane then the block
one - dimensional motion with constant describes a vertical circle of radius 0.5m
acceleration. The power delivered to it at along smooth track. The minimum vertical
time t is proportional to height of inclined plane should be
1 2
1) 1m 2) 1.25 m 3) 3m 4) 2.5 m
1) t 2 2) t 3) t 3 4) t 2 48. A stone of mass 6 kg is revolved in a vertical
42. A dam is situated at a height of 550 m above circle of diameter 6m., such that its speed is
sea level and supplies water to a power house minimum at a point. If the K.E at the same point
which is at a height of 50 m above sea level. is 250 J , then minimum PE at that point is
2000 kg of water passes through the turbines 1) 200J 2) 150J 3) 100J 4 )
per second. What would be the maximum 450J
electrical power output of the power house if 49. The breaking strength of a string is 55 kg wt.
the whole system were 80% efficient The maximum permissible speed of a stone of
1)8MW 2)10MW 3)12.5MW 4)16MW mass 5 kg which is revolved in a vertical
MOTION IN A VERTICAL CIRCLE circle of radius 4m with the help of
43. A stone tied to a string of length ‘L’ is whirled in this string is (g = 10m/s2)
a vertical circle with the other end of the string 1) 10m/sec 2)15m/sec 3) 20 m/sec
at the centre. At a certain instant of time, the 4)25m/sec
stone is at its lowest position and has a speed u. ELASTIC AND INELASTIC COLLISIONS
The magnitude of the change in its velocity as it 50. A 16 gm mass is moving in the +x direction at
reaches a position where the string is horizontal 30 cm/s while a 4 gm is moving in the -x
is direction at 50 cm/s. They collide head - on
and stick together. Their common velocity
1) 2 2) 2gL after impact is
u − 2 gL
1) 0.14cm/s 2)0.14 m/s 3) 0 ms −1 4) 0.3 m/s
3) u 2 − gL 4) 2( u 2 − gL )
198 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
51. A bullet of mass 50 grams going at a speed of dL
200 ms −1 strikes a wood block of mass 950 3. W = mgh 4. W = mgh 1 − d
B
gm and gets embedded in it. The velocity of
h
the block after the impact is 5. W =Mgh + ρ wVgh + mg 2
1) 5 ms −1 2) 10 ms −1 3) 20 ms −1 4) 50 ms −1 2
52. A block of mass 1 kg moving with a speed of W S ( 2n − 1)1
W = FS ⇒ 1 = 1 =
4 ms −1 , collides with another block of mass 2
6. W2 S2 ( 2n − 1)2
kg which is at rest. If the lighter block comes 1
to rest after collision, then the speed of the Q S = u + a n − 2
heavier body is
−1
1) 2 ms −1 2) 1 ms 3) 1.5 ms −1 4) 0.5 ms −1 7. W = mg ( h2 − h1 )
COEFFICIENT OF RESTITUTION 8. W = − f × S = − µ mg cos θ × S
53. A neutron travelling with a velocity v and (L − l)
9. W = m gh = µ ( L − l ) g
1
kinetic energy E collides perfectly elastically
head on with the nucleus of an atom of mass 2
number A at rest. The fraction of the total Where m1 is mass of hanging part
kinetic energy retained by the neutron is l
10. W1 = W = mg sin θ1 here θ1 = 450
2 2 2 2 2
A −1 A +1 A −1 A +1
1) 2) 3) 4) l
A + 1 A − 1 A A W 2 = m g sin θ 2 here θ 2 = 90 0
54. Two balls each of mass ‘m’ are moving with 2
same velocity v on a smooth surface as shown required work = W 2 − W 1
in figure. If all collisions between the balls xf xf
and balls with the wall are perfectly elastic,
the possible number of collisions between the
11. W = ∫ f ( x )dx
xi
12. W= ∫ f ( x )dx
xi
balls and wall together is (2008 M) 1 2 ds
13. W = mv ; v =
2 dt
1 2 1 4 3 2
14. K = mv = ρ π r v
2 2 3
2 2
v v P K P
m m 15. K = ⇒ 1 = 12
2m K2 P2
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) Infinity 1 2 K1 m1v12
16. K = mv ⇒ =
LEVEL - II(H.W)-KEY 2 K 2 m2v22
1) 3 2) 3 3) 1 4) 1 5) 1 6) 3 1 3 1
( K .Ei ) ; 2 m ( u cos θ ) = 4 2 mu 2
3 2
7) 3 8) 2 9) 1 10)4 11)3 12)1 17. K .Etop =
13)4 14)3 15)2 16)1 17)2 18)3 4
19)4 20)3 21)3 22)3 23)2 24)1 1 2
18. K = 2v = mv and P = mv
2
25)2 26)2 27)4 28)2 29)2 30)3 2
31)2 32)2 33)3 34)2 35)4 36)2
19. U = mgl (1 − cosθ ) 20. W = K ( x2 − x1 )
1 2 2
37)3 38)2 39)1 40)1 41) 2 42)1
43)4 44)3 45)4 46)2 47) 2 48)1 2
49)3 50)2 51)2 52)1 53)1 54)3 1 2 1 mg
21. U = kx 22. PE = kx 2 ; k =
2 2 x
LEVEL-II-(H.W) - HINTS 23. W= F × S = ∆K . E 24. Wmg + Wair = ∆K . E .
ur ur l
W= F .S = FS cos θ ; here F=mg; S = , θ = 0 25. Wmg + Wair = ∆K .E .
0
1.
2
2. W = FS cos θ here F=m(g-a),S=h, θ = 180 0 26. Work done = change in kinetic energy
27. W= − FS = K 2 − K1 28. W = K 2 − K1
NARAYANAGROUP 199
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
49. Tmax = m v + g
xf 2
29. W friction = K .E f − P.Ei 30. K .E = W = ∫ f ( x)dx
xi
r
yf m1u1 + m2u2 m u + m u2
50. v = 51 v = m + m
1 1 2
31. K .E = W = ∫ F ( y )dy
yi
32. mgh + W f = mgH m1 + m2 1 2
2
KE1 m1 − m2
52. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 53. KE = m + m
33. At projection, T.E=K.E=490
at given point, P.E1+K.E1=T.E1 1 2
K .E
mgh + = T .E
2
1
34. Loss of P.E= Gain in K.E ; mgL = MV2
2
35. W=P.Ei-K.Ef v v
54. m 1 m 2
1 1
36. mB gh = m A gh + m Av + mB v
2 2
2 2 Ball 2 with wall - 1st (Ball 2 rebounds)
dv P Ball 2 with ball 1 - 2nd (Both balls rebounds)
37. P = Fv = m v ; Hence, vdv = dt Ball 2 with wall - 3rd (Ball 2 rebounds)
dt m
On integration, we find v ∝ t
LEVEL-III
72
38. η = η1 ×η 2 ; P = FV here F = mg
100 WORK DONE BY A FORCE
W Pr essure× volume 1. A long rod ABC of mass “m” and length “L”
39. P= =
has two particles of masses “m” and “2m”
t t
ur r attached to it as shown in the figure. The
40. F = mg+frictional force ; P = F .v
system is initially in the horizontal position.
dv
41. F = ma = constant; a = = cons tan t The work to be done to keep it vertical with A
dt hinged at the bottom is
P = Fv and v=u+at A B C
80 dm ( gh ) 2m
42. Power output = L/2 m L/2
100 dt
43. Using K.EB=P.EH+K.EH find v 1) 2mgL 2) 3mgL/2 3) 5mgL/2 4) 3mgL
uuur r r ^ ^ 2. A particle of mass 100g is thrown vertically
∆V = v − u = v j − u i ; upwards with a speed of 5m/s. The work done
∆V = v 2 + ( − u ) = v 2 + u 2 ; by the force of gravity during the time the
2
particle goes up is
mv 2 1) −0.5J 2) −1.25J 3) 1.25J 4) 0.5J
44. Tmax = + mg = 6mg
r 3. A large slab of mass 5 kg lies on a smooth
ac v2 / r horizontal surface, with a block of mass 4 kg
45. tan θ = = lying on the top of it. The coefficient of
at g sin θ friction between the block and the slab is
but v = 2 gh ;
2
h = r cos θ 0.25. If the block is pulled horizontally by a
force of F = 6 N, then the work done by the
46. While crossing the equilibrium position force of friction on the slab, between the
T = mg +
mv 2 m
= mg + 2 gl (1 − cos θ ) instants t=2s to t=3s is ( g = 10 ms −2 )
r l
= mg + 2mg − 2mg cos θ = mg [3 − 2cos θ ] 4kg
1
( )
2
47. Loss of P.E =Gain in K.E ; mgh = m 5rg 5kg
2
48. T .Ebottom = T .Egiven po int ; m ( 5 gr ) = P.E + K .E
1 2
1) 2.4 J 2) 5.55 J 3) 4.44J 4) 10 J
2
200 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
4. In the pulley – block system shown in figure,
strings are light. Pulleys are massless and
smooth. System is released from rest. In 0.3
seconds
5kg
2kg
F
F
1) 2) time
2kg
time
1kg F F
a) work done on 2 kg block by gravity is 6J
3) 4)
b) work done on 2 kg block by string is -2J
c) work done on 1 kg block by gravity
time
is –1.5J time
d) work done on 1 kg block by string is 2 J WORK - ENERGY THEOREM
1) only a, d are correct
9. A lifting machine, having an efficiency of 80%
2) only b, d are correct uses 2500 J of energy in lifting a 10 kg load over
3) only a, b, c are correct a certain height. If the load is now allowed to fall
4) All are correct through that height freely, its velocity at the end
5. A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight of the fall will be (g=10 m/s2 )
3 1) 10 m s-1 2) 15 m s-1 3) 20 m s-1 4) 25 m s-1
line with a velocity v = ax 2 where 10. A chain AB of length L is lying in a smooth
1 horizontal tube so that a fraction h of its length
−
a = 5m s . What is the work done by the
2 −1 L, hangs freely and touches the surface of the
net force during its displacement from table with its end B. At a certain moment, the
x = 0 to x = 2m? end A of the chain is set free. The velocity of
end A of the chain, when it slips out of tube , is
1) 50 J 2) 20 J 3) 80 J 4) 45.5 J
P.E AND K.E
6. A particle of mass 2 kg starts moving in a A
straight line with an initial velocity of 2 m/s at
a constant acceleration of 2m/ s 2 . Then rate
h
of change of kinetic energy
1) is four times the velocity at any moment 2) is
two times the displacement at any moment B
3) is four times the rate of change of velocity at any 2g L L 1
1) h 2) 2 gh log e h 3) 2 gl loge 4) 2g
moment Lh h hL
4) is constant throughout 11. A block of mass m = 1 kg moving on a
7. A running man has half the kinetic energy that a horizontal surface with speed υ i = 2 ms −1
running boy of half his mass has. The man enters a rough patch ranging from x = 0 .10m
speeds up by 1.0 m/s and now has the same −k
kinetic energy as the boy. The original speed of to x = 2.01m. The retarding force Fr = for
x
the man expressed in m/s units must be 0.1m < x < 2.01 m, Fr =0 for x < 0 .1m
1) 2 + 1 2) 2 − 1 3) 2 + 2 4) 2 − 2 and x > 2.01 m where k = 0.5 J, the final
8. The kinetic energy (KE) versus time graph speed υ f of the block as it crosses this patch
for a particle moving along a straight line is
shown in the figure. The force vs time graph 1) 2ms −1 2) 1ms −1 3) 3ms −1 4) 0.5ms −1
for the particle may be
NARAYANAGROUP 201
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
12. A 1.5kg block is initially at rest on a negligible mass and the pulley is frictionless.
( g = 10m / s 2 )
horizontal frictionless surface. A horizontal
ur
force F = ( 4 − x 2 ) i is applied on the block .
^
K=100N/m
Initial position of the block is at x = 0. The
maximum kinetic energy of the block
between x = 0 and x = 2m is 1KG
1) 2.33J 2) 8.67 J 3) 5.33 J 4) 6.67 J
CONSERVATION OF
MECHANICAL ENERGY 37O
13. The bob of a pendulum is released from a 1) 0.125 2) 1.25 3) 5.2 4) 4.5
horizontal position. If the length of the 17. A light spring of force constant 'K' is held
pendulum is 1.5 m, the speed with which the between two blocks of masses 'm' and '2m'.
bob arrives at the lowest point, given that it The two blocks and the spring system rests
dissipated 5% of its initial energy against air on a smooth horizontal floor. Now the blocks
resistance is (m/s) are moved towards each other compressing
1)3.14 2) 5.28 3) 1.54 4) 8.26 the spring by 'x' and suddenly released. The
14. System shown in fig is released from rest relative velocity between the blocks when the
with mass 2kg in contact with the ground. spring attains its natural length will be
Pulley and spring are massless and the 3K 2K K
friction is absent everywhere. The speed of 1) 2 m x 2) 3m x 3) 3m x
5kg block when 2kg block leaves the contact
with the ground is ( force constant of the K
4) 2m x
spring k=40 N/m and g = 10m / s )
2
18. A ball of mass m is released from A inside a
smooth wedge of mass m as shown in fig.
What is the speed of the wedge when the ball
reaches point B?
A
R
0
45
B
5kg
2kg
smooth
1) 2 m/s 2) 2 2 m/s 3) 2 m/s 4) 2 m/s 1 1
15. The potential energy of a particle of mass m gR 2 5 gR 2 3
1) 2) 2gR 3) 2 3 4) 2 gR
1 2 3 2
is given by U = kx for x < 0 and U=0 for POWER
2
x≥0 . If total mechanical energy of the 19. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2kg
varies with time as P = 3t 2 / 2 W. Here t is in
2E
particle is E. Then its speed at x = is second. If velocity of particle at t=0 is v=0,
k the velocity of particle at time t= 2s will be
2E E E 1) 1 m/s 2) 4 m/s 3) 2 m/s 4) 2 2 m/s
1) zero 2) 3) 4)
m m 2m 20. A particle of mass m is moving in a circular
16. A 1 kg block situated on a rough inclined path of constant radius r such that its
plane is connected to spring of a spring centripetal acceleration ac is varying with
constant 100 Nm-1 as shown in fig. The block
is released from rest with the spring in the time t as ac = k 2 rt 2 where k is a constant. The
unstretched position. The block moves 10 cm power delivered to the particle by the forces
down the incline before coming to rest. Find acting on it, is
the coefficient of friction between the block 1) zero 2) mk 2r 2t 2 3) mk 2r 2t 4) mk 2 rt
and the incline. Assume that the spring has a
202 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
21. A constant power P is applied to a particle of stopper is ejected out horizontally while test
mass m. The distance travelled by the tube completes a vertical circle of radius 25
particle when its velocity increases from cm. The minimum velocity with which stopper
v1 to v2 is (neglect friction) should be ejected out is
1) 72 kmph 2) 90 kmph
1)
m
(
3P 2 2
v2 − v1 ) 2)
m
3P
( v2 − v1 ) 3) 180 kmph 4) 360 kmph
26. A nail is fixed at a point P vertically below the
point of suspension 'O' of a simple pendulum
3)
3P
(
m 3 3
v2 − v1 ) 4)
3P
( v2 − v1 )
m 2 2 of length 1m. The bob is released when the
string of pendulum makes an angle 300 with
22. A body is moved from rest along a straight horizontal. The bob reaches lowest point and
line by a machine delivering constant power. then describes vertical circle whose centre
The ratio of displacement and velocity (s/v) coincides with P. The least distance of P from
varies with time t as O is
t 1) 0.4 m 2) 0.5 m 3) 0.6 m 4) 0.8 m
t 27. A simple pendulum with a bob of mass 'm'
1) 2) swings with angular amplitude of 60°. When its
angular displacement is 30°, the tension in the
string would be
s/v s/v mg
1) 3 3mg 2) (3 3 − 2)
t 2
t
4) 2 mg ( 3 − 2 )
1 3 1
3) 3) 2 mg 3 + 2
4)
28. A block is freely sliding down from a vertical
height 4 m on smooth inclined plane. The block
s/v reaches bottom of inclined plane and then it
s/v
23. Power applied to a particle varies with time as describes vertical circle of radius 1 m along
P=(3t2-2t+1) watt, where ‘t’ is in second. Find smooth track. The ratio of normal reactions on
the change in kinetic energy between t=2s the block while it is crossing lowest point and
and t=4s highest point of vertical circle is
1)32J 2)46J 3)61J 4)100J 1) 6 : 1 2) 5 : 1 3) 3 : 1 4) 5 : 2
24. A car of mass M accelerates starting from 29. The length of a ballistic pendulum is 1 m and
rest. Velocity of the car is given by mass of its block is 1.9 kg. A bullet of mass 0.1
1
kg strikes the block in horizontal direction with
2Pt 2 a velocity 100 ms–1 and got embedded in the
v= where P is the constant power block. After collision the combined mass
M swings away from lowest point. The tension in
supplied by the engine. The position of car as the string when it makes an angle 60° with
a function of time is given as vertical is ( g = 10 ms–2 )
1 1 1) 20 N 2) 30 N 3) 40 N 4) 50 N
8P 2 2 9P 2 2
3 3
1) 30. A stone attached to a string is rotated in a
t 2) t
9M 8M vertical circle such that when it is at the top of
1 the circle its speed is V and there is neither
8P 2 3
2
9P 3 tension nor slacking in the string. The speed
3) t 4) t of stone when its angular displacement is 120°
9M 8M
from the lowest point is
MOTION IN VERTICAL CIRCLE
25. Dry gas of negligible mass is sealed in a test 3 3
1) V 2) 2 V 3) 3 V 4) V
tube of mass 50 gm with the help of a stopper 2 2
of mass 3.5 gm. The test tube is suspended 31. Mass of the bob of a simple pendulum of
from a fixed point with help of massless string length L is m. If the bob is projected
such that the test tube is horizontal and horizontally from its mean position with
distance between point of suspension and velocity 4gL , then the tension in the string
centre of mass of test tube is 25 cm. The test becomes zero after a vertical displacement of
tube is heated to a temperature due to which
1) L/3 2) 3L/4 3) 4L/3 4) 5L/3
NARAYANAGROUP 203
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
32. A bob of mass M is suspended by a massless 36. A particle of mass m has a velocity –v0i, while
string of length L . The horizontal velocity v a second particle of same mass has a velocity
at position A is just sufficient to make it v0 j. After the particles collide, first particle is
reach the point B . The angle θ at which the −1
found to have a velocity v 0 i then the
speed of the bob is half of that at A , satisfies 2
B’ O B velocity of other particle is
α −1 r r 1 r r
1) v0 i + v0 j 2) v 0 i + v 0 j
2 2
r r r r
3) v 0 i + v 0 j 4) − v 0 i + v 0 j
C
37. At high altitude a body at rest explodes into
A two fragments of equal masses with one
π π π π 3π 3π fragment receiving horizontal velocity of
1) θ = 2) < θ < 3) < θ < 4) <θ < π
10 ms-1. Time taken by the two radius vectors
4 4 2 2 4 4
33. A simple pendulum is vibrating with an connecting point of explosion to fragment to
angular amplitude of 900 as shown in the make 900 is (g=10ms-2)
figure. For what value of α is the 1) 10 s 2) 4 s 3) 2 s 4) 1 s
38. A test tube of mass 20 gm is filled with a gas
acceleration directed and fitted with a stopper of 2gm. It is
B’ O B
suspended horizontally by means of a thread
α of 1m length and heated. When the stopper
kicks out, the tube just completes a circle in
C vertical plane. The velocity with which the
A
stopper kicked out is
i) vertically upwards ii) horizontally 1) 7ms-1 2) 10ms-1 3) 70ms-1 4)0.1ms-1
iii) vertically downwards 39. Two bodies move towards each other and
collide inelastically. The velocity of the first
0 −1 1 0 0 −1 1 0
1) 0 ,cos ,90 2) 90 ,cos ,0 body is 2m/s and that of the second is 4m/sec
3 3 before impact.The common velocity after
−1 1 −1 1
0 0 0 0
collision is 1m/s in the direction of the first
3) cos ,0 ,90 4) cos ,90 ,0 body. The number of times did the KE of the
3 3 first body exceed that of the second body
COLLISIONS before collision.
34. A block of wood of mass 3M is suspended by 1) 4.25 2) 3.25 3) 2.25 4) 1.25
10 40. Three particles A, B and C of equal masses,
a string of length m. A bullet of mass M moving with the same speed ‘v’ along the
3
hits it with a certain velocity and gets medians of an equilateral triangle, collide at
embedded in it. The block and the bullet the centroid G of the triangle. After collision,
swing to one side till the string makes 1200 A comes to rest and B retraces its path with a
with the initial position. The velocity of the speed ‘v’ . The speed of C after the collision is
bullet is (g=10ms–2) y-axis v
1
40 −1
1) ms 2) 20ms–1 3) 30ms–1 4) 40ms–1
3
35. A wooden block of mass 10gm is dropped θ
1
from the top of a cliff 100m high. x-axis
Simultaneously a bullet of same mass is fired m m 2 θ
1 2
from the foot of the cliff vertically upwards
with a velocity of 100ms-1. If the bullet after
collision gets embedded in the block, the
common velocity of the bullet and the block v
2
immediately after collision is (g=10 ms-2) v
1) 40 ms-1 downward 2) 40ms-1 upward 1) v along BG 2) along GB
3) 80ms-1 upward 4) zero 2
3) Zero 4) v along CG
204 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
41. A moving sphere P collides another sphere Q 46. A projectile is fixed on a horizontal ground.
at rest. If the collision takes place along the Coefficient of restitution between the
line joining their centers of mass such that projectile and the ground is ‘e’. If a, b and c
their total kinetic energy is conserved and
the fraction of K.E. transferred by the T1
8 be the ratio of time of flight T , maximum
colliding particle is , then the mass of P and 2
9
the mass of Q bears a ratio H1 R
height H and horizontal range R1 in first
1) 8 : 3 2) 9 : 8 3) 2 : 3 4) 2 : 1 2 2
42. A particle strikes a horizontal frictionless two collisions with the ground, then
floor with a speed 'u' at an angle ' θ ' with the 1 1 1
vertical and rebounds with a speed 'v' at an 1) a = 2) b = 2 3) c = 4) 1,2 & 3
angle ' α ' with the vertical. Find the value of e e e
'v' if 'e' is the coefficient of restitution. 47. A wall moving with velocity 2cms −1 towards
1) v = u e2 sin2 θ+cos2 θ 2) v = u e2 cos2 θ +sin2 θ the ball and ball is moving towards the wall
3) v =u e2 cos2 θ+tan2 θ 4) v = u cot2 θ + e2 cos2 θ with a velocity 10cms −1 .It hits the wall
43. Two spheres A and B of equal masses lie on normally and makes elastic collision with
the smooth horizontal circular groove at wall. The velocity of ball after collision with
opposite ends of diameter and at the end of
time 't', ‘A’ impinges on ‘B’. If 'e' is the wall in cms −1
coefficient of restitution, the second impinge 1) 12 2) 8 3)14 4)16
will occur after a time 48. A body A moves towards a wall with velocity
2t t πt 2πt V. The wall also moves towards the body A
1) 2) 3) 4)
e e e e with velocity V0 . After collision the body
44. A ball is thrown at an angle of incidence ' θ '
on a horizontal plane such that the incident moves in opposite direction with velocity V |
direction and the reflected direction are at
right angles to each other. If the coefficient of 2V0
restitution is 'e' then ' θ ' is equal to which is 1 + times the velocity V. The
V
1) tan-1 (e) 2) tan-1 (2e)
3) tan-1 ( 2 e) 4) tan-1 e( ) coefficient of restitution is
1 1 1
45. Consider the collision depicted in fig to be 1) 2) 3) 1 4)
between two billiard balls with equal masses 4 3 2
m1 = m2 . The first ball is called the target. 49. A sphere A of mass m moving with certain
The billiard player wants to ‘sink’ the target velocity hits another stationary sphere B of
ball in a corner pocket, which is at an angle different mass. If the ratio of velocities of
θ 2 = 37o . Assume that the collision is elastic VA 1 − e
and that friction and rotational motion are the spheres after collision is V = 1 + e ,
B
not important, then θ1 is
where e is coefficient of restitution. The
y-axis v1 initial velocity of sphere A with which it
strikes is
1) VA + VB 2) VA − VB
(VB + VA )
θ1 3) VB − VA 4)
x-axis 2
m1 m2 θ2 50. A ball A of mass 3m is placed at a distance d
from the wall on a smooth horizontal surface.
Another ball B of mass m moving with velocity
u collides with ball A. The coefficient of
v2 restitution between the balls and the wall and
1) 37o 2)90o 3) 45o 4) 53o
NARAYANAGROUP 205
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
between the balls is e
a=
( 2m1 − m2 )
a) the velocity of ball B after collision is g 3m1m2
m2 , T = g
u ( 3e − 1)
4. 2m +
1 2 4m1 + m2
4 1 2
b) the velocity of ball B after collision is On 2kg block , W1 = m1 gx = m1 g at ;
2
u ( 2e + 1)
1
4 WT = T × x = T at 2
c) after collision, ball A will move away by 2
d ( 2 e + 1) x
On 1kg block, W2 = m2 g
distance ( 2 e − 1) during the time ball B 2
1
W = ∆ KE = m v 2 − mu
returns back to wall. 1 2
5.
d) after collision, ball A will move away by 2 2
d (e + 1) 1
K = mv 2
distance ( 3 e − 1 ) during the time ball B 6.
2
returns back to wall dK dv d v
∴ = mv = m v = (m a )v
1)a,d 2) a,c 3)b,d 4)c,d dt dt dt
LEVEL-III - KEY 1
7. K.E of man = ( K.E of boy )
01)4 02)2 03)2 04)4 05)1 06)1 2
07)1 08)4 09)3 10)2 11)2 12)3 1 2 1 1 m 2 -----------(1)
mv = v1
13)2 14)2 15)2 16)1 17)1 18)1 2 22 2
1 1m 2
Also given, m ( v + 1) =
2
19)3 20)3 21)3 22)1 23)2 24)1 v1 -------(2)
25)3 26)4 27)2 28)3 29)3 30)2 2 2 2
Divide (1) with (2) to get v
31)4 32)4 33)1 34)4 35)2 36)1 dEk
1
8. E k = mv = kt ; ⇒ power ‘P’= =k
2
37)4 38)3 39)4 40)1 41)4 42)2 2 dt
43)1 44)4 45)4 46)4 47)3 48)3 In this case, P=Fv
49)1 50)1 P K K'
Hence, F = = =
LEVEL-III - HINTS v 2 Kt t
1. L L m
W = mg + mg + 2mgL where K1 is another constant
2 2
80 1
u2 9. × E = mv2
2. h= ; workdone by gravity = FS cos θ 100 2
2g 10. Let ‘x’ be the length of chain inside the tube
here F = mg , S = h,θ = 1800 Mh
3. Maximum frictional force between the slab and g
a= L
=
hg vdv hg
the block M + ; − =
f max = µ N = µ mg ; m=mass of upper block (h + x) h x dx h+ x
L
Evidently, F < f max hg
on integrating both sides, − ∫0 vdv = ∫l −h
v 0
so, the two bodies will move together as a single dx
h+x
unit. If ‘a’ be their combined acceleration, then
(−k )
2.01
∫0.1 x dx = 2 mυi2 − k ln( x) |0.12.01
F K = K + 1
a = 11. f i
m + M
Therefore, frictional force acting can be obtained
υ = 2K /m
1 2 f f
as f = Ma ,Using s = at , find S2 and S3 . x
12. ∆k =W ⇒ K f = ∫ (4 − x ).dx
2 2
W = ( S3 − S2 ) f 0
206 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
13. According to the law of conservation of energy, 1
the total energy of the system remains constant. 2Pt 2
95% of P.Ei=K.Ef ds = dt . Integrate to find ‘s’.
M
1 95
i.e., m v = × mgl
2
2 100
25. mu = Mv but v = 5gr
26. If v is velocity at the lowest point
2g
14. x = ; from conservation of mechanical v 2 = 2 gL (1 − sin θ ) but, v 2 = 5gr & r = L - x
K
where x is minimum distance between 0 and P.
1 2 1 2
energy ; mgx = Kx + mv , here m = 5kg 27. T = mg(3cosθ − 2 cosφ ) ; ( f = 600 ; q = 300 )
2 2
28. Let v2 , v1 be the velocities at lowest point, highest
2E point of vertical circle.
15. Potential energy of particle at x = is zero (x
k v 22 = 2 gh = 2 g × 4 = 8 g
1 2 v 22 − v12 = 4 gr = 4 g × 1 = 4 g ∴ v12 = 4 g
> 0) ; KE =E or mv = E
2
mv 22
1 2 normal reaction at lowest point, R2 = + mg ,
16. m g (sin θ − µ cos θ ) x = kx r
2
m1m2 m v12
17. Using reduced mass concept, µ = m + m At highest point, R1 = − mg
r
1 2
1 2 1 2 29. mu=(m+M)v; If vθ is Velocity at an angle θ .
µ v = kx
2 2 v2 - vq 2 = 2gl (1- cos q ) ; find vθ
18. Loss of PE=Gain in KE
mvθ2
1 1
mgR cos θ = mv 2 + m ( v1 cos θ − v ) 2 then Tθ = + mg cos θ
2 2
r
mv 2
1
+ m (v1 sin θ ) − − − (1)
2 30. = mg Þ v2 = gr
2 r
From conservation of linear momentum If θ is angle from highest point
m(v1 cos 45o − v ) = mv -------(2) v θ2 − v 2 = 2 gr (1 − cos θ )
Here v1 is the velocity of ball w.r.t wedge 31. v = g ( 3 h − r ) ; Where h is maximum height at
solve to get speed of wedge (v) which the tension in the string is zero.
19. ∆KE = Wnet or K f − K i = ∫ Pdt 32. From given condition, v = 5 gL
v2 From energy conservation
20. ac = = k 2rt 2 or v = krt
r
dv
tangential acceleration is, at = = kr
dt A B
hence ∴ P = Ft v cos θ = mat v cos θ
s 2v
u
P
21. P = mav = m
dv 2
ds
v ; m∫ ds = ∫ v 2 dv 3m m
0 v1
1 2 2Pt
22. w = ∆K .E ⇒ Pt = mv ; v = d
2 m
m (v / 2)
2
mv 2
ds
=
2 P 1/2
t − = − mgL (1 − cos θ )
dt m 2 2
t2
∆ K . E = W = ∫ Pdt
7
23. or cos θ = −
t1
8
The value of θ given in option (4) can only have a
1 1
2 Pt 2 ds 2 Pt 2
24. Here v = or = or value of θ as computed above, so (4) is correct
M dt M
NARAYANAGROUP 207
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
33.
4m1m2 8
B’ O B
= , find m and m
41.
( m1 + m2 )
2
α 9 1 2
42. v = (v sin α ) 2 + (v cos α ) 2
C v = (u sin θ ) 2 + (eu cos θ ) 2
A v = u e2 cos2 θ + sin2 θ
At “C” , T cos α = Mg .........(i) πr v 2 − v1
1 43. t = u ; e = u ; v 2 − v1 = e u 1
P.E B = K .E A ⇒ mgr = mv A 2 1 1
2 2π r 2π r 2t
hence at “C”, v = v A2 − 2 gr (1 − cos α ) and second impact , t1 = v − v = eu = e
2 1 1
Mv 2 M .2 gr cos α 44. Tanα = eTanθ ; given θ + α = 900
T − Mg cos α = =
r r 45. θ1 + θ 2 = 900
34. mu = ( M + m ) 2 gl (1 − cos θ ) 46. T n = e n T ; H n = e 2n × H ; Rn=enR
h v2 − v1
35. Time after which collision takes place t=
u 47. e = u − u =1
1 2
before collision, Initial velocity of the wooden
v2 − v1 −v0 + v1 2v0
block ( u1 ); u1 = g t 48. e= = ; given v = 1 +
1
v
u1 − u2 v + v0 v
Intial velocity of the bullet ( u2 ) = u-gt
vA 1 − e vB − v A
⇒ m1u1 − m 2 u 2 = ( m1 + m2 ) v 49. v = 1 + e ⇒ e = v + v − − − (1)
Total momentum Total momentum B A B
36. before collision = after collision . v2 − v1 vB − v A
we have e = u − u = u − 0 − − − − (2)
1 2 A
u1u2 from (1) and (2), uA=?
37. t = 38. M 5 gl = mv
g
39. Calculate K.E1 and K.E2 before collision A B
K .E1 u
∴n = 50. 3m m
K .E2
40. d
A
=
(1 + e) m1u1 ( m1 − em2 ) u1
vA , vB = −
Y
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
mv d
tB = , d A = v At B
vB
mv G mv
LEVEL - IV
300
X
B C
MATCHING TYPE
Along X- axis: 1. Match the following
0 + mv cos θ − mv cos θ = 0 − mv cos θ + mv x Column I Column II
a) Work p) Slope of (momentum)
vx = v cos θ (θ = 300 ) p-t (time) graph
Along Y - axis: b) Power q) Slope of W-t graph
c) Force r) Area under F-s graph
−mv + mv sin θ + mv sin θ = 0 − mv sin θ + mv y d) Impulse s) Area under F-t graph
v y = v sin θ (θ = 300 ) ;
t) unit in SI system joule
vnet = v x2 + v 2y
208 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
2. Column I Column II 6. Match the pairs in two lists given below
a) Force is equal to p) Work is path List – I List – II
independent a) Gravitational force e) decreases
b) For the conservative q) Rate of change b) Frictional force f) conservative force
force of linear momentum c) KE of a dropped g) non-conservative
c) Power is equal to r)Rate of work done body force
d) Area of P-t curves s)Product of force to d) PE of a dropped h) increases
give the velocity body
t) Work done 7. A body is allowed to fall from a height h above
u) Negative of the the ground. Then match the following
potential energy List – I List – II
gradient a) PE = KE e) at height h/2
3. Match the following b) PE = 2KE f) constant at any
Column I Column II point
a) Work done by p) Sum of kinetic c) KE = 2PE g) at height 2h/3
a force is energy and potential d) PE + KE h) at height h/3
energy is constant
b) Work done by q) Work done by
a conservative force is conservative and non ASSERTION & REASON TYPE
conservative forces In each of the following questions, a
c) Change in kinetic r) Independent of statement is given and a corresponding
energy is path followed statement or reason is given just below it. In
d) Under conservative s)Independent of time the statements, mark the correct answer as
forces, sum of kinetic for which force acts 1)If both Assertion and Reason are true and
energy and potential Reason is correct explanation of Assertion.
energy is 2) If both Assertion and Reason are true but
4. Match the following Reason is not the correct explanation of
Column I Column II Assertion.
a) Mechanical energy is p) Always positive 3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
b) Kinetic energy is q) Always negative 4) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
c) Gravitational potential r) May be positive or 8. Assertion (A) : No work is done by the
energy of a body at any negative centripetal force acting on a body moving along
height above surface the circumference of a circle
of Earth is Reason (R) : At any instant, the motion of
d) A body having zero s) Always zero the body is along the tangent to the circle where as
momentum has kinetic the centripetal force is along the radius vector
energy towards the centre of the circle
5. Match the following : 9. Assertion (A) : No work is done by gravitational
Column I Column II force if a body moves along a horizontal surface.
a) Stable p) Potential energy is Reason (R) : In horizontal motion, angle
dU between gravity and displacement is 900
equilibrium zero ; =0
dr 10. Assertion (A) : Work done by the gravitational
b) Unstable q) Potential energy is force is zero, in closed path
equilibrium minimum i.e., Reason (R): Gravitational force is a conservative
dU force
= zero , 11. Assertion (A) :The change in kinetic energy of a
dr
particle is equal to work done on it by the resultant
d 2U force.
is + ve
dr 2 Reason (R): Change in kinetic energy is equal to
c) Neutral equilibrium r) Potential energy is work done in case of system of one particle.
dU 12. Assertion (A): Graph between potential energy
maximum = zero , of a spring versus the extension or compression of
dr
the spring is parabola
d 2U
is − ve Reason (R): Potential energy of a stretched or
dr 2 compressed spring proportional to square of
d 2U extension or compression
d) Most unstable s) =0 13. Assertion (A): the kinetic energy of a body is
dr 2 quadrupled, when its velocity is doubled
position of body
NARAYANAGROUP 209
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
Reason (R): Kinetic energy is proportional to STATEMENTS TYPE
square of velocity 1) Statement I & II are true.
14. Assertion (A) : If a spring is compressed, energy 2) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
is stored and when it is elongated, energy is 3) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
released. 4) Statement I & II are false
Reason (R): The energy stored in a spring is 22. Statement I : An engine A can perform a given
proportional to the linear deformation of the work in 1 hr and engine B can perform the same
spring. work in 1/2 hr. then B has greater power than A.
15. Assertion (A): When a body moving with certain Statement II : Power is the dot product of force
velocity collides head on with another body of and velocity.
same mass at rest, the collision being perfectly 23. This question has statement 1 and statement 2. Of
elastic head on collision, 100% of its K.E is the four choices given after the statements,choose
transferred to the later the one that best describes the two statements. If
Reason (R) : Both momentum and KE are
conserved in the case of perfectly elastic collision two springs S1 and S 2 of the force constants k1
16. Assertion (A): If the momentum of a body and k2 , respectively, are stretched by the same
increases by 20%, then its KE also increases by force, it is found that more work is done on spring
20%
Reason (R): The KE of a body is directly S1 than on spring S 2 .
proportional to its momentum Statement-I : If stretched by the same amount,
17. Assertion (A): In one dimensional perfectly work done on S1 , will be more than that of S 2
elastic collision between two moving bodies of
equal masses, the bodies merely exchange their Statement-II : k1 < k 2 [AIEEE 2012]
velocities after collision. 24. Statement - I: A quick collision between two
Reason (R) : If a lighter body at rest suffers bodies is more violent than slow collision, even
perfectly elastic collision with a very heavy body when initial and final velocities are identical.
moving with a certain velocity, then after collision Statement - II: The rate of change of momentum
both travel with same velocities determines that the force is small or large.
18. Assertion (A): Two particles moving in the same 25. Statement - I: If collision occurs between two
direction do not loose all their energy in a elastic bodies their kinetic energy decreases
completely inelastic collision. during the time of collision.
Reason (R) : Principle of conservation of Statement- II: During collision intermolecular
momentum holds good for all kinds of collisions space decreases and hence elastic potential
19. Assertion (A) : n small balls each of mass ‘m’ energy increases .
colliding elastically each second on a surface with 26. Statement -I: When a body is rotated along a
a velocity u. The force experienced by the surface vertical circle with uniform speed then the sum of
is 2nmu. its kinetic energy and potential energy is constant
Reason (R) : In elastic collision , the ball at all positions
rebounds with the same velocity Statement- II: To make a body to move along a
20. Assertion (A) : A body of mass " m1 " collides vertical circle, its critical speed at a point is
independent of mass of body
head on elastically with another body of mass 27. Statement - I: Work done by spring force on a
" m 2 " at rest the ratio of the final energy of the first block connected to the spring may be positive or
body to the final energy of the second body is negative.
Statement - II : spring force is both pushing and
( m1 − m 2 )
2
pulling.
4 m1 m 2 28. Statement - I : The normal force on a body by
Reason (R) : The collision is perfectly elastic and the floor is not a conservative force
the coefficient of restitution is 1. Statement - II : The normal force does no work
21. Assertion (A) : A body of mass " m1 " collides at all. Hence it will not store energy in the system.
another body of mass " m 2 " at rest elastically. The 29 Statement - I : The workdone in pushing a block
is more than the work done in pulling the block on
fraction of energy transferred to the second body is a rough surface.
m1 Statement - II : In the pushing condition normal
m1 + m 2 reaction in more.
Reason (R) : In an "inelastic collision" both linear 30. Statement - I : A cyclist always bends inwards
momentum and KE is conserved while negotiating a curve.
210 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
Statement - II : By bending he lowers his centre collision
of gravity. d) mechanical energy of the ball remains the
31. Statement - I : The work done by all forces on a same during the collision
system equals to the change in kinetic energy of 1) a, b, d 2) a, b, c 3) a, b 4) a, b, c, d
that system. This statement is true even if non- 38. The given plot shows the variation of U, the
conservative forces act on the system. potential energy of interaction between two
Statement II : The total work done by internal particles with the distance separating them r.
forces may be positive.
OTHER MODEL QUESTIONS U
A
32. Nature of work done by gravitational force E
a) may be negative b) may be positive
c) may be zero d) always positive B
1) a,b & d are correct 2) a, b & c are correct v
3) a,c & d are correct 4) all correct D
33. When workdone on a particle is positive C
a) K.E remains constant 1) B and D are equilibrium points
b) momentum increases 2) C is a point of stable equilibrium
c) K.E increases 3) The force of interaction between the two
d) K.E decreases particles is attractive between points C and
1) a, b 2) b, c 3) b, d 4) a only B and repulsive between points D and E on
34. During “elastic collision” the curve
a) there is no loss of kinetic energy 4) The force of interaction between the
b) the bodies are perfectly elastic particles is repulsive between points C and A
c) temporarily some of the kinetic energy is Which of the above statement are correct?
used to deform the bodies 1)1 & 3 2) 1 & 4 3) 2 & 4 4) 2 & 3
d) after collision the bodies regain the 39. For an isolated system in the absence of any
original shape keeping the total energy dissipative effect
constant a)KE is conserved b) PE is conserved
1) only “a” is true 2) a, b, c, d are true c)energy is conserved d)ME is conserved
3) b, c, d are true 4) a, b, c are true 1) a, b 2) a, b, d 3) c, d 4) c only
35. Identify the correct statements from the 40. The KE of a particle continuously increases
following with time. Then
a) the collisions between the nuclei and a) The resultant force on the particles is
fundamental particles are considered as parallel to the velocity at all instants
elastic collisions b) The resultant force on the particle is at an
b) Emission of an alpha particle by a heavy angle less than 900 with velocity all the times
nucleus is an “elastic collision” c) Its height above the ground level must
c) The collision between two ivory balls is continuously decrease
considered as “elastic collision” d) The magnitude of its linear momentum is
d) A running man jumps into a train. It is an increasing continuously
“elastic collision” 1) b, d 2) a, d 3) a, b, c, d 4) a, b, d
1) only a & b are true 2) only b & c are true 41. Select the correct alternative (s)
3) a, b & c are true 4) b, c & d are true a) Work done by static friction is always zero
36. If force is always perpendicular to motion b) Work done by kinetic friction can be
a) KE remains constant positive also
b) workdone by the force is zero c) Kinetic energy of a system can not be
c) momentum remains constant increased without applying any external
d) speed remains constant force on the system
1) a,b,d 2) a,b,c3) b,c,d 4) a,b,c,d d) Work energy theorem is valid in non-
37. A ball hits a floor and rebounds after an inertial frames also
inelastic collision. In this case, 1) a, b 2) a, b, d 3) b, c, d 4) a, d
a) total energy of the ball and the earth 42. Two Solid spheres of same material having
remains the same radii in the ratio 1 : 2 are moving with same
b) total momentum of the ball and the earth is kinetic energy on a horizontal path. They
conserved are brought to rest by applying same
c) momentum of the ball just after the retarding force. Then
collision is same as that just before the
NARAYANAGROUP 211
WORK,ENERGY,POWER & VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL
JEE MAINS - II
- VOL - VI
i) their initial momenta are in the ratio 1: 2 2 1 2
ii) distance travelled are in the ratio 1 : 1 14. U = Kx , where ‘x’ may be compression or
2
before coming to rest elongation and in both cases energy is stored in
iii) the times taken by them coming to rest is the spring.
1: 2 2 15. In perfectly elastic collision both momentum and
1. i) and (ii) are correct 2. ii) and (iii) are KE are conserved and transfer of KE is
correct maximum when m1=m2 =m so both statements
3. All the three are correct 4.(i) and (iii) are correct are correct but R is correct explanation to A.
P2
LEVEL-IV - KEY 16. K.E =
2m
Matching Type
m1 − m2 2m2
17. v1 = m + m u1 + m + m u2
1. a – r,t , b – q, c – p, d–s
2. a – q,u, b – p,u,c – r,s, d –t 1 2 1 2
3. a – q, b – s, c – r, d–p
4. a – r, b – p, c – q, d–s 2m1 m2 − m1
v2 = u1 + u2
5. a – q, b – r, c – s, d –p
1
m + m 2 1
m + m2
6. a – f, b – g, c – h, d–e If m1=m2=m, v1=u2 and v2=u1
7. a – e, b – g, c – h, d–f If m2<<m1,v1=u1 and v2=2u1
Assertion & Reason Type so A is true R is false
8) 1 9) 1 10) 1 11) 1 12) 1 13) 1 18. If it is a perfectly inelastic collision then
m1u1+m2u2=(m1+m2)v
14)4 15) 1 16) 4 17) 3 18) 1 19) 1
m1u1 + m2u2 P12 P22
20)1 21) 4 v= ; KE = +
m1 + m2 2m1 2m2
Statements Type As P1 and P2 both simultaneously cannot be
22)1 23) 3 24) 1 25) 1 26) 3 27) 1 zero, there fore total K.E cannot be lost
19. In elastic collision K.E remains conserved
28)2 29) 1 30) 1 31) 1 therefore the ball rebounds with the same
Other Model Questions velocity according to newton’s II law
Fxt=Change in linear momentum
32)2 33)2 34) 2 35) 3 36) 1 37) 3 Fx1=mn(u+u) ; F=2nmu
38)3 39)3 40) 4 41) 2 42)1 1 1
20. KE1 = m1v1 ; KE2 = m2 v2
2 2
LEVEL-IV - HINTS 2 2
2
8. As centripetal force and displacement of the 1 m1 − m2 2
body are perpendicular to each other, work done m1 u1
( m1 − m2 )
2
is zero. KE1 2 m1 + m2
= =
9. As angle between gravity and displacement is KE2 1 2m 2 2 4m1m2
1
900 , work done by the gravitational force is m2 u1
zero. 2 m1 + m2
10. A force is said to be conservative, if workdone For perfectly elastic collision, e=1
by the force along any closed path is zero. 21. Fraction of KE transferred to the second body
11. ∆K .E. = Wnet force . This relation is valid for =
4m1m2
( )
m + m . In an inelastic collision only
2
particle as well as a system of particles. 1 2
1 2 linear momentum is conserved
12 Potential energy stored in a spring U = kx ,
2
U∝x 2 . So, U - x graph is a parabola.
1 2
13. Kinetic energy K = mv , when ‘m’ is
2
K1 v12
constant , K ∝ v and 2 = .
K 2 v2 2
212 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
ur
LEVEL-V 5. A force F = ( 3xy − 5 z ) $j + 4 zi$ is applied on a
particle. The work done by the force when the
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
1. A simple pendulum having a bob of mass m is particle moves from point ( 0, 0, 0 ) to point
suspended from the ceiling of a car used in a
stunt film shooting. The car moves up along
( 2, 4, 0) as shown in fig. is
an inclined cliff at a speed v and makes a jump Y
to leave the cliff and lands at some distance.
Let R be the maximum height of the car from (2,4,0)
the top of the cliff. The tension in the string
when the car is in air is
y = x2
mv 2 mv 2
(A) mg (B) mg – (C) mg + (D) zero
R R
2. A particle of mass m is projected at an angle (0,0,0)
α to the horizontal with an initial velocity u.
the work done by gravity during the time it 280 140
A) units B) units
reaches its highest point is 5 5
mu 2 cos 2 α 232 192
A) u 2 sin 2 α B) C) units D) units
2 5 5
mu 2 sin 2 α mu 2 sin 2 α 6. A particle is being acted upon by one
C) D) − dimensional conservative force. In the F–x
2 2 curve shown, four points A, B, C, D are
3. The blocks A and B shown in the figure have marked on the curve.State which type of
masses M A = 5 kg and M B = 4 kg. The system
equilibrium is the particle have at position c.
is released from rest. The speed of B after A
has travelled a distance 1 m along teh incline F
is
D
O B C
A
A A) stable equilibrium B) unstable
C) Neutral D) No equilibrium
5m
37° 10
7. A particle of mass kg is moving in the
B 7
positive direction of x. Its initial position is x
3 3 g g = 0 & initial velocity is 1 m/s. The velocity at
(A) g (B) g (C) (D) x = 10 is: (use the graph given)
2 4 2 3 2
4. A particle is projected along a horizontal Power (in watts)
surface whose coefficient of friction varies as
4
A
µ = 2 , where r is the distance from the origin
r 2
in metres and A is a positive constant. The
initial distance of the particle is 1m from the
origin and its velocity is radially outwards. The X
minimum initial velocity at this point so the 10 (in m)
particle never stops is
A) ∞ b) 2 gA c) 2gA d) 4 gA A) 4 m/s B) 2 m/s C) 3 2 m/s D) 100/3 m/s
NARAYANAGROUP 213
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
8. The potential energy of a particle is determined
a(m/s2)
by the expression U = α ( x + y ) , where α
2 2
is a positive constant. The particle begins to
move from a point with coordinates ( 3,3 ) , t(s)
only under the action of potential field force.
Then its kinetic energy T at the instant when (A) (B)
the particle is at a point with the coordinates K.E K.E
(1,1) is
A) 8α B) 24α C) 16α D) Zero t t
9. An engine is pulling a train of mass m on a
level track at a uniform speed u. The resistive (C) (D)
K.E K.E
force offered per unit mass is f.
A) Power expended by the engine is “mfu”.
B) The extra power developed by the engine to
t t
mghu
maintain a speed u up a gradient of h in s is
s 13. A block of mass m is being pulled up the rough
C) The frictional force exerting on the train is mf on inclined by an agent delivering constant power P.
the level track The coeficient of friction between the block and
D) None of above is correct the inclined is µ . The maximum speed of the block
10. A body of mass m slides downwards along a during the course of ascent is
plane inclined at an angle α . The coefficient P
of friction is µ . The rate at which kinetic m
energy plus gravitational potential energy µ
dissipates expressed as a function of time i
A) µ mtg2 cos α θ
B) µ mtg2 cos α (sin α – m cos α )
C) µ mtg2 – sin α P
D) µ mtg2 sin α (sin α – m cos α ) (A) v =
mg sin ? + µmg cos ?
11. In the figure the variation of components of
P
acceleration of a particle of mass is 1 kg is (B) v =
shown w.r.t. time. The initial velocity of the mg sin ? − µmg cos ?
r
particle is u = ( −3i + 4 j) m/s. The total work 2P
(C) v =
done by the resultant force on the praticle in mg sin ? − µmg cos ?
time from t = 0 to t = 4 seconds is : 3P
ax(in m/s2) (D) v =
mg sin ? − µmg cos ?
14. The spring block system lies on a smooth
horizontal surface. The free end of the spring
37°
t (in sec) is being pulled towards right with constant
speed v0 = 2m/s. At t = 0 sec, the spring of
(A) 22.5 J (B) 10 J (C) 0 constant k = 100 N/ cm is unsttretched and
(D) None of these the block has a speed 1 m/s to left. The
12. For a particle moving on a straight lint the maximum extension of the spring is
variation of acceleration with time is given by 1m/s k = 100N/cm
the graph as shown. Initially the particle was m
4kg V0 = 2m/s
at rest. Then the corresponding kinetic energy
of the particle versus time graph will be (A) 2 cm (B) 4 cm (C) 6 cm (D) 8 cm
214 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
15. Two equal masses are attached to the two ends 20. A force F = − K(yiˆ + xj)
ˆ , where k is a positive
of a spring of spring constant k. The masses
are pulled a part symmetrically to stretch the constant, acts on a particle moving in the xy
spring by a length x over its natural length. plane. Starting from the origin, the particle is
The work done by the spring on each mass is taken along the positive x-axis to the point (a,
0), and the parallel to the y-axis to the point
1 1
(A) kx2 (B) – kx2 (a, a). The total work done by the force on the
2 2 particle is
1 1 (A) – 2Ka2 (B) 2Ka2 (C) – Ka2 (D) Ka2
(C) kx2 (D) – kx2 21. A smooth sphere of radius R is made to
4 4
16. A block of mass m is allowed to slide down a translate in a straight line with a constant
fixed smooth inclined plane of angle q and acceleration a = g. A particle kept on the top
length l . The magnitude of power developed of the sphere is released from there at zero
by the gravitational force when the block velocity with respect to the sphere. The speed
reaches the bottom is of the particle with respect to sphere as a
function of θ as it slides down is
(A) 2m 2 l(g sin θ)3 (B) (2 / 3)m3 lg 2 sin θ
(A) Rg (sin θ + cos θ) (B) Rg (1 + cos θ − sin θ)
(C) (2 / 3)m 2 l 2 g cos θ (D) (1/ 3)m3lg 2 sin θ (C) 4Rg sin θ (D) 2Rg (1 + sin θ − cos θ)
17. An object of mass (m) is located at the origin 22. The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to
of a vertical plane . The body is projected at move along the x-axis is given by U(x)
an angle θ with velocity u. The mean power
x4 x2
developed by the gravitational force during the = − 2 J . The total mechanical energy
interval of time till it reaches maximum height x
mgu sin θ of the particle is 2J. Then, the maximum speed
(A) mgu sin θ (B) in (m/s) is
2
mgu sin θ mgu sin θ (A) 1/ 2 (B) 2 (C) 3 / 2 (D) 2
(C) (D) 23. A smooth sphere of radius R is made to translate
3 4
18. The potential energy of a particle varies with in a straight line with a constant acceleration a
position x according to the relation = g. A particle kept on the top of the sphere is
released from there at zero velocity with respect
3
U ( x ) = 2x 4 − 27 x the point x = is point of to the sphere. The speed of the particle with
2 respect to sphere as a function of θ as it slides
(A) unstable equilibrium (B) stable equilibrium down is
(C) neutral equilibrium (D) none of these.
19. A particle, which is constrained to move along (A) Rg (sin θ + cos θ) (B) Rg (1 + cos θ − sin θ)
the x–axis, is subjected to a force from the (C) 4Rg sin θ (D) 2Rg (1 + sin θ − cos θ)
origin as F (x) = – kx + ax3. Here k and a are 24. A section of fixed smooth circular track of
positive constants. For x=0, the functional form radius r in vertical plane is shown in the figure.
of the potential energy U (x) of particle is A block is released from position x and leaves
(A) (B) the track at y. The radius of curvature of its
U(x) U(x)
trajectory when it just leaves the track at y is
O
x x
R 53° 37°
(C) (D)
U(x) U(x) X Y
O
x x
r r
(A) r (B) (C) (D) none of these
4 2
NARAYANAGROUP 215
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
25. A large slab of mass 5 kg lies on a smooth 28. The bob of a pendulum is released from a
horizontal surface, with a block of mass 4 kg horizontal position. If the length of the
lying on the top of it. The coefficient of friction pendulum is 1.5 m, the speed with which the
between the block and the slab is 0.25. If the bob arrives at the lowermost point, given that
block is pulled horizontally by a force of F = 6 it dissipated 5% of its initial energy against
N. The work done by the force of friction on air resistance?
the slab, between the instants t=2s to t=3s is A) 3.14 m/s B) 5.28 m/s
( g = 10 ms ) −2 C) 1.54 m/s D) 8.26 m/s
29. A 1 kg block situated on a rough inclined plane
4 kg is connected to spring of a spring constant 100
N m −1 as shown in fig. The block is released
5 kg from rest with the spring in the unstretched
position. The block moves 10 cm down the
A) 2.4 J B) 5.55 J C) 4.44J D) 10 J incline before coming to rest. Find the
26. A chain AB of length l is lying in a smooth coefficient of friction between the block and
horizontal tube so that a fraction h of its length the incline. Assume that the spring has a
negligible mass and the pulley is frictionless.
l , hangs freely and touches the surface of the
table with its end B. At a certain moment, the K = 100 N/m
end A of the chain is set free. The velocity of
end A of the chain, when it slips out of tube , is
1 KG
A
37°
h
A) 0.115 B) 1.25 C) 5.2 D) 4.5
B
30. A nail is fixed at a point P vertically below the
2g l point of suspension 'O' of a simple pendulum
A) h B) 2 gh log e of length 1m. The bob is released when the
lh h
string of pendulum makes an angle 300 with
l 1 horizontal. The bob reaches lowest point then
C) 2 gl log e D) 2g describes vertical circle whose centre coincides
h hl
with P. The least distance of P from O is
1 A) 0.4 m B) 0.5 m C) 0.6 D) 0.8 m
27. A bead of mass kg starts from rest from A
2 31. A block is freely sliding down from a vertical
to move in a vertical plane along a smooth height 4 m on smooth inclined plane. The block
fixed quarter ring of radius 5m, under the reaches bottom of inclined plane then it
action of a constant horizontal force F = 5 N describes vertical circle of radius 1 m along
as shown. The speed of bead as it reaches smooth track. The ratio of normal reactions
point B is on the block while it is crossing lowest point,
F A highest point of vertical circle is
A) 6 : 1 B) 5 : 1 C) 3 : 1 D) 5 : 2
32. Mass of the bob of a simple pendulum of
R = 5m
length L is m. If the bob is projected
horizontally from its mean position with
B velocity 4gL , then the tension in the string
A) 14.14 m/s B) 7.07 m/s becomes zero after a vertical displacement of
C) 5 m/s D) 25 m/s A) L/3 B) 3L/4 C) 4L/3 D) 5L/3
216 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 36. Which of the following is/are conservatve
33. Two blocks, of masses M and 2M, are force(s)?
connected to a light spring of spring constanat
r r 5
K that has one end fixed, as shown in figure. (A) F = 2r3 rˆ (B) F = ˆr
The horizontal surface and the pulley are r
frictionless. The blocks are released from r 3 ( x i + y j) 3 ( x 2 i + y j)
when the spring is non deformed. The string F= r
(C)
( x 2 + y2 ) (D) F = ( x 2 + y 2 )3 / 2
3/2
is light.
K
37. A block of mass 2 kg is hanging over a smooth
and light pulley through a light string. The
other end of the string is pulled by a constant
force F = 40 N. The kinetic energy of the
particle increase 40 J in a given interval of
time. Then : (g = 10 m/s2)
4Mg
(A) Maximum extension in the spring is .
K
(B) Maximum kinetic energy of the system is
2M 2g 2
K
(C) Maximum energy stored in the spring is four 2kg
times that of maximum kinetic energy of the system. F =40N
(D) When kinetic energy of the system is maximum, (A) tension in the string is 40 N
2 2
4M g (B) displacement of the block in the given interval
energy stored in the spring is . of time is 2 m
K
34. Select the correct alternatives: (C) work done by gravity is - 20 J
(A) Work done by static friction is always zero (D) work done by tension is 80 J
(B) Work done by kinetic friction can be positive 38. In the system shown in the figure the mass m
also moves in a circular arc of angular amplitude
(C) Kinetic energy of a system can not be increased 60o. Mass 4m is stationary . Then:
without applying any external force on the system
4m
(D) Work energy theoram is valid in non-inerial
frames also.
35. Displacement time graph of a particle moving 60°
in a straight line is as shown in figure. select m
the correct alternative(s): m A
S C B
B (A) the minimum value of coefficient of friction
A
between the same of mass 4m and the surface of
t
O the table is 0.50
(A) Work done by all the forces in region OA and (B) the work dine by gravitational force in the block
BC is positive m is positive when it moves from A to B
(B) Work done by all the forces in region AB is (C) the power delovered by the tention when m
zero moves from A to B is zero
(C) Work done by all the forces in region BC is (D) The kinetic energy of m in position B equals
negative the work done by gravitational force on the block
(D) Work done by all the forces in region OA is when its moves from position A to B.
negative.
NARAYANAGROUP 217
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
39. A strip of wood mass M and length l is placed
on a smooth horizontal surface. An insect of
mass m starts from rest at one end of the strip
and walks to the other end in time t, moving
with a constant speed.
(A) The speed of the insect as seen from the ground (A) positive from 0 to t 1 (B) negative from t 1 to t 2
(C) zero from t 2 to t 3 (D) negative from t 3 to t 4.
l
is < 43. A smooth track in the form of a quarter circle
t
of radius 6m lies in the vertical plane. A
(B) The speed of the strip as seen from the ground particle moves from P1 to P2 under the action
l M r r r r
is of forces F1, F2 and F3. Force F1 is always
t M + m toward P2 and always 20N in magnitude. Force
(C) The speed of the strip as seen from the ground r
F2 is always acts horizontally and is always
l m r
is
t M + m
30N in magnitude. Force F3 always acts tangen-
tially to the track and is of magnitude 15N.
(D) The total kinetic energy of the system is
Select the correct alternative(s):
2
1 l
(m + M ) O 6m P2
2 t
40. In the figure shown upper block is given a
F1 F2
velocity of 6m/s and lower block 3 m/s. When 6m
relative motion between them is stopped. F3
Rough
1 kg 6m/s P1
2 kg r
3m/s (A) Work done by F1 is 120J
Smooth r
(B) Work done by F2 is 180J
(A) Work done by friction on upper block is negative r
(C) Work done by F3 is 45 π J
(B) Work done by friction on both blocks is positive r
(D) F1 is conservative in nature.
(C) The magnitude of work done by friction on 44. A block of mass M is attached with a spring
upper block is 10J constant k. The whole arrangement is placed on a
(D) Net work done by friction is zero. vechile as shown in the figure. If the vehicle starts
41. The potential energy U in joule of a particle of moving towards right with an acceleration a (there
mass 1kg moving in x-y plane obeys the law U is no friction anywhere), then :
= 3x + 4y, where (x, y) are the co-ordinates of k
the particle in metre. If the particle is at rest M a
at (6, 4) at time t = 0 then:
(A) the particle has constant acceleration
(B) the particle has zero acceleration
(C) the speed of particle when it crosses the y-axis Ma
is 10m/s (A) maximum elongation in the spring is
k
(D) co-ordinates of particle at t = 1s are (4.5, 2) 2M a
42. Displacement time graph of particle moving (B) maximum elongation in the spring is k
in a straight line is as shown in figure. 2ma
From the graph we can conclude that work (C) maximum compression in the spring
k
done on the block is : (D) maximum compression in the spring is zero
218 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
45. A small ball of mass m is released from rest at shown in fig, the particle moves from the origin O
a height h 1 above ground at time t = 0. At time to point A(6m, 6m). the figure shows three paths,
t = t0, the ball again comes to rest at a height OLA, OMA and OA for the motion of the particle
h2 above ground. Consider the ground to be from O to A.
perfectly rigid and neglect air friction. In the Y
time interval from t = 0 to t = t0, pick up the
correct statements.
A (6m, 6m)
(A) Work done by gravity on ball is mg (h1 - h2) M
(B) Work done by ground on ball for duratin of
contact is mg (h1 - h2).
(C) Average acceleration of the ball is zero.
O L
(D) Net work done on the ball by all forces X
(A)
except gravity is mg (h1 - h2).
COMPREHENSIVE TYPE QUESTIONS 49. Which of the following is correct?
A) There is equal probability for the force being
Comprehension-1:
conservative or non-conservative.
A block of mass m is kept in an elevation which
B) Conservative or non-conservative nature of
starts moving downward with an acceleration
force cannot be predicted on the basis of given
‘a’ as shown in figure. The block is observed
information.
by two observers A and B for a time interval
C)The given force is non-conservative.
t0 . D)The force is conservative.
50. Along which of the three paths is the work done
A m a
maximum.
A)OA B) OMA C) OLA
D) work done has the same value for all the three
B paths
51. Work done for motion along path OA is nearly
A) 383 J B) 90 J C) 180 J D) 1811 J
46. The observer B finds that the work done by
gravity on the block is : Comprehension - 3 :
One of the forces acting on a certain particle
1 1
B) − mg t0 depends on the particle's position in the xy-plane.
2 2 2 2
A) mg t0 r
2 2 This force F expressed in newtons, is given by the
1 1 r
C) mgat02 D) − mgat0
2 expression F = ( xy î + xyĵ) where x and y are in
2 2 metres. The particle is moved from O to C
47. The observer B finds that the work done by through three different paths :-
pseudo-force on the block is
Y(m)
A) zero B) −ma 2 t0 C) + ma 2t0 D) − mgat0
48. According to observer B, the net work done C
on the block is : B(0,1)
1 1 22
A) − ma t0
2 2
B) ma t0
2 2
O A(1,0) X(m)
1 1
D) − mgat0
2 2
C) mgat0 52. The work done by this force on path OC is
2 2
Comprehensioni - 2 : 1 1 2 2
A) J B) – J C) J D) – J
Force acting on a particle moving in the x-y plane 2 2 3 3
ur
( )
is F = y i$ + x $j N , x and y are in metre. As
2
NARAYANAGROUP 219
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
53. The work done by this force on path OAC is 60. The minimum safe value of r2 so that the block
does not fly off the track at C is
1 1 2 2
A) J C) 3 J
B) – J D) – 3 J (A) 1 m (B) 2 m (C) 1.5 m (D) 3 m.
2 2 61. The work done by gravitational force from A
54. The work done by this force on path OBC is to C is
1 1 2 2 (A) 10 J (B) 20 J (C) 30 J (D) 40 J
A) J C) 3 J
B) – J D) – 3 J Comprehension : 6
2 2
55. Which of the following can be negative ? A chain of length l = πR / 4 is placed. On a smooth
A) Kinetic energy B) Potential Energy hemispherical surface of radius R with one of its
C) Chemical Energy D) All of these ends fixed at the top of the sphere. Mass of chain
Comprehension : 5 is 2πkg and R = 1m. (g = 10 m/s2).
56. A smooth vertical rod is released from rest 62. The gravitational potential energy of the chain
such that it is constrained to move vertically considering reference level at the base of
hemisphere is
on a smooth wedge (θ = 450 ) . When the (A) 20J (B) 20 2 J (C) 40 J (D) 40 2 J.
wedge moves through a distance x, the speed 63. If the chain sliped down the sphere, kinetic
of the rod is : energy of the chain when it has sliped through
π
an angle θ =
4
(A) 23.4 J (B) 63.44 J (C) 80 J (D) 97.4J.
m 64. The tangential acceleration of the chain when
it starts sliding down.
m 40 1 20 1
(A) π 1 − (B) π 1 −
θ = 45° 2 2
1
gx (C) 10 1 − (D) zero.
a) 2gx b) c) gx d) none of these 2
2 PASSAGE-IV:
57. The work done by the normal reaction on the One end of a light string of length L is connected to
rod is :
a ball and the other end is connected to a fixed
mgx 3
a) mgx b) − c) − mgx d) −mgx point O. The ball is released from rest at t = 0
2 2
58. The work done by the normal reaction on the with string horizontal and just taut. The ball then
wedge is : moves in vetical circular path as shown. The time
taken by ball to go from position A to B is t1 and
mgx 3 mgx
a) mgx b) − c) mgx d) from B to lowest position C is t2 . Let the velocity
2 2 2 r r
Comprehension – 5 : of ball at B is vB and at C is vC respectively..
A block of mass m = 1kg is released from point A O A
θ
along a smooth track as shown. Part AB is circular
90–θ
with radius r1 = 4m and circular at C with radius r 2.
Height of point A is h1 = 2m and of c is h2 = 1m.
(g = 10 m/s2).
B
A
C r rC
h1 65. If vC = 2 vB then the value of θ as shown is
h2
−1 1 −1 1
(A) cos (B) sin 4
B 2
59. The force exerted by block on the track at B −1 1 −1 1
is (C) cos (D) sin
2 2
(A) 10 N (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) 40 N
220 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
r r Column - I
66. If vC = 2 vB then:
(A) u = 3.5m / s (B) u = 9.5m / s
(A) t1 > t2 (B) t1 < t2 (C) t1 = t2 (c) T = 15N (d) T = 35N
(D) Information is insufficient Column - II
r r r
67. If vC − vB = vB then the value of θ as shown (p) There will be some point on the trajectory of
object at which speed of the object is zero but
in the figure is
tension in the string is not zero.
1/3 1/3
1
−1 1
−1
(q) There will be ome point on the trajectory of
(A) cos (B) sin object for which tension in the string is zero but
4 4
speed of the object is not zero
1/3 1/3
−1 1 −1 1
(r) There will be some point on the trajectory of
(C) cos (D) sin object for which tension in the string is zero but
2 2
spee of the object is not zero
MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS (s) The acceleration of the object will be in direction
68. A bob of mass 2 kg is suspended from a vehicle 70. A particle is suspended from a string of
by a rope of length l = 5m. the vehicle and the length R. It is given a velocity u = 3 gR at
bob are moving at a constant speed v0 . The the bottom. Match the following.
vehicle is suddenly stopped by a bumper and C
the bob the rope swings out a maximum
angle of 600 . Match the following.
D B
u
A
v0
Column - I Column - II
A) Velocity at B p) 7 mg
COLUMN-I B) Velocity at C q) 5gR
A) Net force acting on the bob at lowest point just
after the hitting C) Tension in string at B r) 7gR
B) Acceleration of the bob at lowest point D) Tension in string at C s) 5 mg
C) Net force acting on the bob at its highest point t) None
D) Acceleration of the bob at its highest point INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
COLUMN-II (all values in SI units) 71. Block A has a weight of 300 N and block B
p) 5 3 vehicle is stopped has weight 50N. Calculate the distance A must
descend from rest before it obtains a speed of
q) 10 r) 20 s)10 3
4 m/s (Neglect the mass of cord and pulleys).
69. A small object of mass 0.5 kg is attached to an (Take g = 10 m/s2)
end of massless 2 meter long inextensible
string with the other end of the string being
fixed. Initially, the string is vertical and the
object is at its lowest position ahving initial
horizontal velocity of magnitude u. The tension
in string is T when the object is at its lowest
position. The object subsequently moves in
vertical plane. The forces acting on object are
tension exerted by string and gravitational pull B
by earth. Match the statements in column I
with corresponding results in column II (take A
g = 10m/s2)
NARAYANAGROUP 221
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
72. A particle of mass m moves along a circle of LEVEL-V - KEY
radius R with a normal acceleration varying SINGLE ANSWER
with time as a n = bt 2 , where b is a constant. 1) D 3) D 3) C 4) C 5) D 6) A 7)C
Find the time dependence of the power 8) C 9) B 10) B 11) B 12) D 13) A 14) C
developed by all the forces acting on the 15) D 16) A 17)B 18) B 19) D 20) C 21) D
particle, and the mean value of this power 22) C 23) D 24) C 25) B 26) B 27) A
averaged over the first 2 seconds after the 28) B 29) A 30) D 31) C 32) D
beginning of motion.(m = 1, v = 2, r = 1) MULTIPLE ANSWER
73. Two blocks A and B are connected to each 33) ABC 34) B,D 35) B 36) ABC
other by a string and a spring; the string passes 37) ABD 38) A,B,C,D 39) A,C
over a frictionless pulley as shown in the
40) A,C 41) A,C,D 42) A,B,C
figure. Block B slides over the horizontal top
surface of a stationary block C and the block 43) B,C,D 44) B,D 45) ACD
A slides along the vertical side of C, both with COMPREHENSION
the same uniform speed.The coefficient of 46) C 47) A 48) C 49) C 50) A 51) B 52) C
friction between the surface and blocks is 0.5. 53) A 54) A 55) B 56) C 57) B 58) D 59) B
K= 2000N/m. If mass of A is 2 kg calculate 60) B 61) A 62) C 63) A 64) A 65) B 66) B
mass of B. 67) B
MATRIX MATCHING
68) A-r;B-q;C-s;D-p
B
69) A-p,s,B-q,s,C-r,s,D-s 70) A-r,B-q,C-p,B-t
INTEGER ANSWER
71) 2 72) 2 73) 4 74) 5 75) 3
C LEVEL-V - HINTS
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
A ur r
1. Acceleration of car is “g” so g eff = g − a
74. A small block is given a velocity v from point 2. Velocity at top = u cos α
A. Given x=3R, R = 20 m and g = 9.8m/s2 .If
1 1 2 mu 2 sin 2 α
Wm = ∆KE = m ( u cos α ) − mu = −
2
the block strikes the point A after it leaves
the smooth circular track in vertical plane , 2 2 2
the value of v is 7x, find v ? 3. (C) If A moves down the incline by 1 metre, B
C 1
shall move up by metre. If the speed of B is v
R 2
then the speed of A will be 2v.
O From conservation of energy:
Gain in K.E. = loss in P.E.
V 1 1 3 1
m A ( 2v ) + m B v 2 = m A g × − m Bg ×
2
A B 2 2 5 2
X
1 g
75. A particle is projected along the inner surface Solving we get v =
of a smooth vertical circle of radius R, its 2 3
velocity at the lowest point being (1/5) 4. If the particle never stops then it may move till
( )
95 gR . If the particle leaves the circle at
x=∞
1 2 ∞ V2 ∞
1
−1
an angular distance cos (x / 5) from the highest mv = ∫ µ mg .dx ⇒ = Ag ∫ 2 .dx
2 1
2 1
x
point, the value of x is
222 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
so, V = 2 gA W
3 3
4
∴ ∫ dw = ∫ ti − t + 1 j ⋅ x
5. z and x components are useless points. 0 0 4 4
2
192 3 2 3 2
so, dw = Fy.dy = 3xy.dy = ∫ 6 x .dx = 5 units
4
t − 3 i + − 8 t − t + 4 j dt
0
8
7. Fvdx = Pdx ∴ W = 10 J
1 Alternate Solution :
m× v2dv = ( 2 + 0.2x ) dx ; v dv =
2
( 2 + 0.2m) dx Area of the graph ;
m
∫a dt = 6 = V(x) f − ( −3) ⇒ V(x) f = 3.
v
7 10 10
x
∫1 = ∫ + ∫
2
v dv 2 dx 0.2 xdx
10 0 0 and ∫ a y dt = − 10 = V(y) f − ( −4 ) ⇒ V(y) f = −6
Now work done = ∆ KE = 10 J
14 1.4 100
= × 10 +
10 2 = 14 + 7
12. (D)
10
v3 = 63 + 1 = 64 ; v =4m/ s
D D
B C
a v C v
2 C
8. As the particle moves only under the action of
B
conservative force, its mechanical energy must be D
conserved. So ∆T + ∆U = 0 (T stands for kinetic A t A t A t
energy) The above graphs show v - t graph from a - t
or ∆T = ∆U = Ui − U f graph & Then v2 - t graph, which are self
explanatory.
= α ( 32 + 32 ) − α (12 + 12 ) = 16α 13. (A) Let at any time the speed of the block along
10. the incline upwards be v.
P mdv
− mg sin? − µmgcos? =
v dt
dv
the speed is maximum when =0
dt
θ
P
∴ v max = mg sin ? + µmg cos ?
P = F .V
So = mg ( sin α − µ cos α ) µ g cos α t
14. (C) In the frame (inertial w.r.t. earth) of free end of
spring, the initial velocity of block is 3 m/s to left
= µ mg 2t ( sin α − µ cos α ) cos α and the spring unstretched.
11. (B) From given graphs :
3m/s
3 3 3 2 4Kg initial state
ax = t and ay = − t + 1 ⇒ v x = t + C
4 4 8
At t = 0 ; vx = − 3 ⇒ C = − 3 maximum
extension
4Kg
3 3 state
∴ v x = t 2 − 3 ⇒ dx = t 2 − 3 dt .... (1)
8 8
A
3 2
Similarly ; dy = − t − t + 4 dt .... (2) Applying conservation of energy between initial
8 and maximum extension state.
r uur r
As dw = F ⋅ ds = F ⋅ ( dx i + xy j) 1 1
mv 2 = kA 2 or A=
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 223
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
23. Applying work energy theorem.
m 4
v= × 3 = 6cm. 1
k 10, 000 maR sin θ + mgR (1 − cos θ ) = mV 2
2
15. Work done on both block are the same and total 24. Apply conservation of energy with O as
1
work done by spring is − kx .
2
2r mgr 1 2
2 reference level mg +0= + mv
5 5 2
1
Hence on each block − kx
2
2 gr v12
rr
4 v= ; Radius of curvature =
5 an
16. p = F.v ; = mg sin θ 2gl sin θ
2 gr / 5 r
= 2m 2 g 3l sin 3 θ Ans. (A) =
g cos 37 2
mgh mgu sin θ 25. Maximum frictional force between the slab and the
17. avg. Power = t = 2 block
1/2
18. U ( x ) = 2 x 4 − 27 x
1
f max = µ N = µ mg = × 4kt10 = 10 N
4
= − ( 8 x3 − 27 ) = 0 for equilibrium
du Evidently, F < f max
F =−
dx so, the two bodies will move together as a single
3 d 2u 3 unit. If a be their combined acceleration, then
x= ; 2
= 24 x 2 > 0 at x =
2 dx 2 F 6 2
a= = = ms −2
3 m+M 4+5 3
Hence U is min at x = so stable. Therefore, frictional force acting can be obtained
2
as
k
19. F ( x ) = – kx + ax 3 ; F( x ) = 0 ; for x = 0 x = ; 2
f = Ma = × 5 N
a
3
k
So slope is zero at x = 0 x = Using s = at
1 2
a
2
1
21. (d) maR sin θ + mgR(1 − cos θ) = mv 2 1 2 2 4 1 2 2
2 s(2) = × (2) = and s(3) = × (3) = 3
ma
2 3 3 2 3
Therefore, work done by friction
mg
R θ
10 4 50
3− = = 5.55 J
3 3
=
9
x4 x2 dU 26. Let ‘x’ be the length of chain inside the tube
22. (c) U = − , = x3 − x = 0 ⇒ x = 0, x = ±1
4 2 dx
Mh
d 2U d 2U g
= 3 x 2
− 1 = +ve for x = m1 a= L
=
hg
dx 2 dx 2
(h + x) h + x
M
1
U ( ±1) = − L
4
VdV hg
K max + Ul min = T .E = 2J − = Integrate
dx h+ x
9 27. Applying the work - energy theorem, we get
K max =
4 1
× mv 2 − 0 = F × R + mg × R
1 3 2
K max = mv 2 v=
2 2 28. Length of the pendulum , l = 1.5 m, Mass of the
bob = m, Energy dissipated = 5%
224 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
According to the law of conservation of energy, the system becomes zero. Therefore 2Mg = T and
the total energy of the system remains constant. 2Mg
At the horizontal position T = kx ⇒ x=
K
Potential energy of the bob, EP =0, kinetic energy Hence KE will be maximum when 2M mass has
1 2 2Mg
of the bob , EK = mv total energy gone down by .
2 K
1 2 Applying W/E theorem
Ex = mv ...(ii)
2 2Mg 1 4M2g2 2M2g2
As the bob moves from the horizotnal position to kf - 0 = 2Mg. - K. ; k =
K 2 K2 f
K2
the lowermost point, 5% of its energy gets Maximum energy of spring
dissipated. The total energy at the lowermost point
2
is equal to 95% of the total energy at the horizontal 1 4Mg 8M 2 g 2
point, i.e, K. =
2 K K
1 95 Therefore Maximum spring energy = 4 × maximum
mv2 = × mgl
2 100 K.E.
2Mg
2 × 95 ×1.5 × 9.8 When K.E. is maximum x = .
⇒v= = 5.28m / s K
100
1 4M 2g 2 2M 2g 2
1 2 Spring energy = .K. =
29. mg (sin 37 − µ cos37 ) x = kx
o o
2 2 K K
i.e. (D) is wrong.
30. If V is velocity at the lowest point
35. [B,D] In region OA particle is acccelerated, in
V 2 = 2 gL(1 − sin θ ) region AB particle has uniform velocity while in
but, V 2 = 5 gr and r = L - x region BD particle is deceleration., Therefore, work
done is positive in region OA , zero in region AB
where x is minimum distance between 0 and P.
and negative in region BC.
find x. r uur
31. Let V2 , V1 be the velocities at lowest point, highest 36.. (A, B, C) Since ; W = ∫ F ⋅ dr
point of vertical circle. Clearly for forces (A) and (B) the integration do
V22 = 2 gh = 2 g × 4 = 8 g not require any information of the path taken.
For (C) : Wc =
V22 − V12 = 4 gr = 4 g × 1 = 4 g
3 ( xi + yj) x dx + y dy
∴V12 = 4 g ∫ ⋅ ( dx i + dy j) = 3∫
(x )
2 3/2
(x + y2 )
3/2
normal reaction at the lowest point, highest point
2
+y 2
are R2 , R1 Taking : x2 + y2 = t
2x dx + 2y dy = dt
mV22 mV12
R2 = + mg ; R1 = − mg dt dt / 2 3 dt
r r ⇒ xdx + ydy = ⇒ Wc = 3∫ 3/2 = ∫ 3/2
2 t 2 t
32. V = g (3h − r ) which is solvable.
Where h is maximum height at which the tension in Hence (A), (B) and (C) are conservative forces.
the string is zero. But (D) requires some more information on path.
MULITIPLE ANSWER Hence non-conservative.
37. (A)(B)(D)
4Mg Free body diagram of block is as shown in figure.
33.
K
System will have maximum KE when net force on
NARAYANAGROUP 225
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
T = F = 40N Here, ds = (6)d (–2 θ ) = – 12d θ and F1 = 20N
0 π
∴ W1 = – 240 ∫x / 4 cos θ dθ = 240 sin = 120 2J
4
r
2kg
F1 is conservative because it is always directed
mg = 20N towards a fixed point P 2.
W2 = F2 (OP2) = (30)(6) =180J and
From work-energy theorem Wnet = ∆ KE r 6( π / 2 ) 3π
W3= F1 ∫0 F3 ds = ∫ 15ds = [15 x ]0 = 45π
3π
or (40 - 20)s = 40
∴ s = 2m
0
Work done by gravity is - 20 × 2 = - 40 J 2 1 2Ma
and work done by tension is 40 × 2 = 80 J 44. [B,D] Max = Kx ; X =
2 K
39. [A,C] mv1 = Mv2, where v1 and v2 are speeds of 45. (A),(C),(D)
mass m and M, as seen from ground. The velocity From the fogure-1 work done by gravity from t
of m relative to M is v12 = v1–(– v2). = 0 to t = t 0 is W = mg
m v1 (h1 - h2)
v2 M
at t = 0
u=0
l at t = t0
1 1 v=0
Hence, t = v = v + v or v1 + v2 = l/t. h2
12 1 2
40. [A,C] h1
From conservation of linear momentum (1 + 2)v =
(6 x 1) + (2 – 3) fixed horizontal surface
∴v = 4m/s (of both the blocks)
Since initial and gfinal velocity of ball is zero its
From work energy therom
i.e., Wtotal = ∆ KE on 1kg block, average acceleration will be zero.
Since net work done is zero from time interval t =
1
Wf = × 1× (42 − 62 ) = −10J 0 to t = t0. Hence work done by forcesz expect
2 gravity is mg (h2 - h1).
1
on 2kg block Wf = × 2(42 − 32 ) = +7J COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
2 49. work depends upon the path so it’s non
∴Net work done by friction is –3J. conservasted
r du ˆ du ˆ ur ur
41. [A,C,D] F =− i − j ; = −3iˆ − 4 ˆj 51. Use W = ∫ F .S
dx dy
r r 52 to 55
a = −3iˆ − 4 ˆj ; a =5 For each of the paths from O to C, work done is
on y axis x = 0, after time t sec. the particle crosses r uur
y axis. given by W = ∫ Fds
0 – 6 = 1/2 x (– 3)t2, t = 2. vx = (– 3) x 2 = – 6 r uur
r Where F = xyiˆ + xyjˆ and ds = dxiˆ + dyjˆ , so the
vy = (– 4) x 2 = – 8. v = 10m / s. r uur
t = 1sec., x = 6 – 1/2 x 3 = 4.5 dot product F .ds = xydx + xydy . The path OAC
y = 4 – 1/2 x 4 = 2 consists of OA and AC. Along OA, y = 0 and dy
42. [A,B,C] Slope of the graph at a point = velocity,
= 0, and along AC, x = 1m and dx = 0.
t1 = 0 to t 1 velocity increases.
1
t1 to t2 velocity dicreases, t 2 to t3 velocity zero and y2 1
=
1
t3 to t4 velocity is constant. So, WOAC = WOA +WAC = 0 + ∫ ydy = J
r 0 2 0
2
43. [B,C,D] Work done by F1 is
The pathe OBC consists of OB and BC. ALong
P2
W1 = ∫P F1 cos θ ds OB, x = 0 and dx =0. Along BC, y = 1m & dy = 0.
1
226 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
1 64. Tangential force on differential element
x2 1
= WOB + WBC = 0 + ∫ xdx = = J dFt = dmg sin θ
1
So WOBC 0 2 0
2
π/ 4 m gR
Along the straight line OC, y = x, so dy = dx and Ft = ∫ l Rd θ g sin θ = [1 − cos 45°)
r uur 0
l
F .ds = xydx + xydy = 2 x 2 dx . 65. Passage-4
2x 3 1
2 VB = 2 gL sin θ ,VC = 2 gL ; VC = 2VB
Hence, WOC ∫ F .ds = ∫ 2 x 2 dx = =
1
J
0 3 3 1
2 gL = 4 ( 2 gL sin θ ) ; sin θ =
0
1 4
Although WOAC = wOBC = J , the work done 66. a = g cos θ which decreases with time area of
2
a − t graph gives change in velocity
WOC along OC is not equal to WOAC or WOBC . The
r dθ
= 2 gl sin θ
force F is non-conservative, because work done V = 2 gl sin θ ; l
dt
between two points depends upon the particular
l dθ l dθ
path. ∫ dt =
2g ∫ sin θ
; t = 2g ∫
sin θ
; t1 < t2
56. C; Contraint relation is
x = y cot θ ; θ = 45 ; x = y ; vw = vR 67. VC2 + VB2 − 2VCVB sin θ = VB2
⇒ VC2 = 2VCVB sin θ ⇒ VC = 2VB sin θ
1 2 1 2
∆U G = ∆K1 + ∆K 2 ; mgx = mv + mv MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
2 2
68. Use the principle of conservation of energy and
v = gx force equation for vertical circular motion
57. B; ∆K R = wG + wN INTEGER ANSWER
mgx mgx 71. S A = h and S B = 2h ; VA = 4m / s ; VB = 8m / s
wN = ∆K − wG = − mgx = − From energy conservation decreases in P.E. of A=
2 2
Increase in P.E. B + Increase in K.E. of both A
mgx and B
58. D; ∆K w = wN ; wN =
2 1 1
2
300h = 50 × 2h + × 30 × 42 + × 5 × 82
mv 2 2 2
59. v 2 = 2gh1 ; N = mg + r 300h = 100h + 240 + 160 ;
1
2 200h = 400 ; h = 2m
mv c
60. At C N ≥ 0 r = mg dv
= bR
2 72. ⇒ v = bR t
dt
1 For circular motion work done by normal force is
mgh1 = mv c + mgh2
2
r2 = 2( h1 − h2 ) zero. For tangential forces.
2
61. Wmg = mg ( h1 − h2 ) = ∆U dv
Ft = m = m bR P = Ft .v = Ft v cos θ as
π4
dt
m M
62. dm = Rd θ ; PE =
l
∫0 l
Rd θgR cos θ θ = 00 ; P = Ft v = mbRt
T
=
M
gR 2 sin 45° = 40J.
∫ P ( t ) dt T
m b R T dt
l Average power =
0
T
= ∫ T
π/2 M 2 ∫ dt 0
63. Uf = ∫π / 4 R g cos θ.d θ 0
l
( )
T
mbR t 2 / 2 mbRt
Ui =
m
gR 2 sin 45° ; ∆U = −∆KE = 0
=
l T 2
NARAYANAGROUP 227
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
73. Normal reaction between blocks A and C will be 2hK 2 hK1 3hK 2 hK 2
zero. Therfore, there will be no friction between A) µ K B) 2µ K C) 2µ K D) µ K
them. Both A and B are moving with uniform speed. 1 2 1 1
Therefore, net force on them should be zero For 4. What is the minimum value of the mass M so
that the block is lifted off the table at the
equilibrium of A: mAg = kx
instant shown in the diagram ? Assume that
m g (2)(10) the blocks are initially at rest.
∴ x = k = 2000 = 0.01m
A
m m
For equilibrium of B: ; µmB g = T = kx = mAg A) 0 B)
sin 60 tan 600
mA 2
∴ mB = µ = 0.5 = 4kg C) m sin 600 D) none of these
T = kx kx
Frictionless
B A Table
T m
µmBg 60°
T mAg
LEVEL-VI M
5. A bob of mass m is suspended from a fixed
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS support with a light string and the system with
1. An engine is pumping water continuously. The bob and support is moving with a uniform
water passes through a nozzle with a velocity horizontal acceleration. The breaking strength
ν . As water leaves the nozzle, the mass per of the string is mg 2 . Find the workdone by
unit length of the water jet is m0 . Find the rate the tension in the string in the first one second:
at which kinetic energy is imparted to the
mg 2mg 2
water: A) 2mg B) 2
C) D) mg 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2
3 2 32 12
A) m0 v B) m0 v C) m0 v D) m0 v 6. A particle moves move on the rough horizontal
2 2 2 2
2. A hemispherical vessel of radius R moving 3
ground with some initial velocity V0 . If of
with a constant velocity v0 and containing a 4
its kinetic energy lost due to friction in time
ball, is suddenly haulted. Find the height by
which ball will rise in the vessel, provided the t0 . The coefficient of friction between the
surface is smooth: particle and the ground is
v02 2v0 2 v02 V0 V0 3V0 V0
A) B) C) D) none of these A) 2 gt B) 4 gt C) 4 gt D) gt
2g g g 0 0 0 0
7. The total mechanical energy of a particle is E.
3. Two balls of same mass are projected as
12
shown, by compressing equally (say x) the 2E
The speed of the particle at x = is
springs of different force constants K1 and K 2 K
by equal magnitude. The first ball is projected 12
upwards along smooth wall and the other on 2E
. Find the potential energy of the
the rough horizontal floor with coefficient of m
friction µ . If the first ball goes up by height particle at x :
h , then the distance covered by the second 1 2 1 2 2 2
ball will be: A) zero B) Kx C) Kx D) Kx
2 4 5
8. The coefficient of friction between a particle
K2 moving with some velcoity V0 and the rough
V0
horizontal surface is 2 gt . Find how much
K1
0
228 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
kinetic energy is lost in time t0 due to friction: 11. A and B are smooth light hinges equidistant
A) 1/4 B) 1/2 C) 3/4 D) 2/3 from C, which can slide on ABC. The spring of
9. A block A of mass m slides on a smooth slider force constant K is fixed at its one end C and
in the system as shown. A block c of same mass connected to light rods AD and BD at point D.
hanging from a pulley pulls block A. When the A block of mass m is suspended at D. Find the
block A was at position B, the spring was velocity of the block, when ∠CAD changes
unstretched. Find the speed of the block A from 30° to 45° . AD = BD = L
when AB = OB = L A C B
(m)
A
B
90°
Spring constant = K
C D
O 1
2
KL2
( )
1 1 2
gL KL2 2 2 A) gL − 2 −1
KL2
( )
2 2
A) − B) gL − 2 −1 2m
2 m 2m 1
2
KL2
( )
1 1 2
2 gL KL2 2 B) gL 2 − 2 −1
2 KL2
( )
2 2
C) gL − 2 − 1 D) 2 − m 2m
m 1
10. A ring ‘A’ of mass ‘m’ is attached to a stretched 2
( ) KL2
( )
2
spring of force constant K, which is fixed at C C) gL 2 −1 − 2 −1
4m
on a smooth vertical circular track of radius
R. Points A and C are diametrically opposite. 1
When the ring slips from rest on the track to KL 2 2
point B, making an angle of 30° with AC. D) g L −
( ∠ACB = 30° ) spring becomes unstretched. 2m
Find the velocity of the ring at B 12. Three springs A,B and C each of force constant
A(m) K, are connected at O. The other ends of B
and C can slide on smooth sliders. A pan is
hanging from other end of the spring A. When
D B
a block of mass m is placed int he pan, find
30°
the amount of workdone by the gravity on
block system after it stops vibrating. The
C spring C does not sag:
1
KR 2 2
( )
2
A) 2− 3 + gR 3
2m
1
KR 2 2
( )
2
B) 2− 3 + gR
m
1
2 KR 2 2
( )
2
C) 2− 3 + gR 3
m
1
KR 2 2
( )
2
D) 2 −1 + gR
2m 3m2g2 2 2
mg 2m2g2 m2g2
A) B) C) D)
2K K K 2K
NARAYANAGROUP 229
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
13. A rope of length l and mass ‘m’ is connected 16. A small body A starts sliding from the height h
to a chain of length l and mass 2m and hung down an inclined groove passing into a half -
verticlly as shown. what is the change in circle of radius h/2 (see figure). Assuming the
gravitational potential energy if the system is friction to be negligible, find the velocity of
inverted and hung from same point. the body at the highest point of its trajectory
(after breaking off the groove).
m l
2m l
9 8 27 10
A) gh B) gh C) gh D) gh
A) mgl B) 4mgl C) 3mgl D) 2mgl 27 27 8 27
14. In the figure shown all the surfaces are 17. In the figures (a) and (b) AC, DG and GF are
frinctionless and mass of block m=1kg, block fixed inclined planes, BC = EF = x and AB =
and wedge are held initially at rest, now wedge DE = y. A small block of mass M is released
isgiven a horizontalacceleration of10m /s2 by from the point A. It slides down AC and
applying a force on the wedge so that the block reaches C with a speed V C. The small block is
does not slip on the wedge, the work done by released from rest from the point D. It slides
normal force in ground frame on the block in down DGF and reaches the point F with speed
3 sec is VF. The coefficients of kinetic frictions between
10 m/s
2 the block and both the surfaces AC and DGF
are m. Calculate V C and V F.
m
A D
M
θ
G
A) 30J B) 60J C) 150J D) 100 3 J
15. A ring of mass m can slide over a smooth
vertical rod. The rod is connected to a spring B C E F
4mg (a) (b)
of force constant K = where 2R is the
R
A) 1.7 m/s B) 2.7 m/s C) 3.7 m/s D) 0.7 m/s
natural length of the spring. the other end of 18. A 0.5 kg block slides from the point A (see
the spring is fixed to the ground at a horizontal figure) on a horizontal track with an initial
distance 2R from the base of the rod. The mass speed of 3m/s towards a weightless horizontal
is released from the height of 1.5R from spring of length 1 m and force constant 2
ground, then work done by spring, velocity of Newton/m.The part AB of the track is
the ring as it reaches the ground is frictionlessand the part BC has the coefficients
of static and kinetic friction as 0.22 and 0.2
respectively. If the distances AB and BD are
2m and 2.14 m respectively find the total
3R/2 distance through which the block moves before
it comes to rest completely (Take g = 10 m/
A s2).
2R
mgR
A) , 2 gR B) mgR, 2 gR
2
A B D C
mgR mgR
C) , 2 gR D) , gR A) 4.20 m B) 4.14 m C) 4.24 m D) 4.26 m
2 2
230 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
19. A block of mass 1 kg kept over a smooth at a symmetrical position with respect to the
surface is given velocity 2 m/s towards a spring position of release as shown in the figure. If
of spring constant 1 N/m at a distance of 10m. Vc and Va be the minimum speeds in clockwise
Find after what time block will be passing and anticlock wise directions respectively,
through P again given to the bob in order to hit the peg ‘B’
then ratio Vc : Va is equal to
P k PegB Bob
m V
30° 30°
10 m PegA
A) ( 20 + 2π ) sec B) 10sec
C) (10 + 2π ) sec D) (10 + π ) sec
20. A body is displaced from ( 0, 0 ) to (A) 1:1 (B) 1: 2 (C) 1: 2 (D) 1:4
(1m,1m ) along the path x = y by a force PREVIOUS IIT QUESTIONS
ur 24. A wind -powered genrator converts wind
( )
F = x 2 $j + yi$ N . The work done by this force energy into electrical energy. Assume that the
generator converts a fixed fraction of the wind
will be energy intercepted by its blades into electrical
4 5 3 7 energy . For wind speed υ , the electrical
A) J B) J C) J D) J powwer output will be proportional to
3 6 2 5
21. Forces acting on a particle moving in a straight [IIT-2008]
line varies with the velocity of the particle as A) υ B) υ 2 C) υ 3 D) υ 4
25. An ideal spring with spring constant k is hung
α
F = where α is constant. The work done by from the ceiling and a block of mass M is
υ attached to its lower end. The mass is released
this force in time interval ∆t is: with the spring initially unstretched Then,the
1 maxumum extension in the spring is [IIT-2002]
A) α∆t B) α∆t C) 2α∆t D) α 2 ∆t 4Mg 2Mg Mg Mg
2 A) B) C) D)
22. A particle of mass m initially at rest starts k k k 2k
moving from point A on the surface of a fixed 26. If W1 , W2 and W3 represent the work done in
smooth hemisphere of radius r as shown. The moving a particle from A to B along three
particle looses its contact with hemisphere at different paths 1,2 and 3 respectively (as
point B. C is centre of the hemisphere. The shown ) in the gravitational field of a point
equation relating θ and θ ' is mass m, find the correct relation between
A
B
W1 ,W2 and W3 [IIT-2003]
B
r θ
m
θ'
C
2
(A) 3sin θ = 2cos θ ' (B) 2sin θ = 3cos θ ' 1
(C) 3sin θ ' = 2 cos θ (D) 2sin θ = 3cos θ '
3
23. A bob attached to one end of a string, other
end of which is fixed at peg A. The bob is taken
to a position where string makes an angle of
A) W1 > W2 > W3 B) W1 = W2 = W3
300 with the horizontal. On the circular path
of the bob in vertical plane there is a peg ‘B’ C) W1 < W2 < W3 D) W2 > W1 > W3
NARAYANAGROUP 231
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
27. A particle is acted by a force F=kx, where k is 30. A tennis ball is dropped on a horizontal smooth
a +ve constant. Its potential energy at x=0 is surface. It bounces back to its original position
zero. which curve correctly represents the after hitting the surface. The force on the ball
variation of potential energy of the block with during the collision is proportional to the length
respect to x ? [IIT-2004] of compression of the ball. Which one of the
U U following sketches describes the variation of
the kinetic energy K with time t most
appropriately? The figures are only illustrative
X X and not to the scale. (IIT-2014)
A) B)
K
A)
U U
t
K
X X
B)
C) D)
t
28. A bob of mass M is suspended by a massless K
string of length L. The horizontal velocity υ at C)
just sufficient ot make it reach the point B.The
t
angle θ at which the speed of the bob is half
of that A, satisfies [IIT-2008]
B K
D)
t
31) A wire, which passes through the hole in a
small bead, is bent in the form of quarter of a
L θ
P
circle. The wire is fixed vertically on ground
as shown in the figure. The bead is released
from near the top of the wire and it slides along
π π π
A) θ = <θ < B) the wire without friction. As the bead moves
4 4 2 from A to B, the force is applies on the wire is
π 3π 3π (IIT-2014)
C) < θ < D) <θ <π
2 4 4 A
29. The work done on a particle of mass m by a
x y
k iˆ + ˆj
force ( x 2 + y 2 )3 / 2 ( x + y2 )
2 3/2
(k
90°
B
being a constant of appropriate dimensions)
when the particle is taken from the point ( a, 0 ) a) always radially outwards
along a circular path of radius a bout the origin b) always radially inwards
in the x-y plane is [IIT-2013] c) radially outwards initially and radially inwards
later.
2kπ kπ kπ
a) b) c) d) zero d) radially inwards initially and radially outwards
a a 2a later.
232 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
32. The potential energy of a particle moving along a 4
x -axis is given by U = 20 + 5sin ( 4π x ) , where
U(J)
(m/s2)
t
U is in J and x is in metre under the action of 160 6 10
conservative force:
A) if total mechanical energy is 20 J, 0 x(m)
6
then at x = 7/8m, particle is at equilibrium
B) if total mechanical energy is 20 J, –160J
then at x = 7/8m particle is not at equilibrium
C) if total mechanical energy is 20 J, A) the work done by all the forces is 704 J
then at x = 3/8m, particle is at equilibrium B) the work done by external forces is 350 J
D) if total mechanical energy is 20 J, C) the work done by external forces is 384 J
then at x = 3/8m, particle is not at equilibrium D) the work done by conservation forces is 300J
33. A block of mass 1 kg moves towards a spring 36. A particle sides down from rest on an inclined
of force constant 10 N/m. The spring is plane of angle θ with horizontal. The distances
massless and unstretched. The coefficient of are as shown. The particle slides down to the
friction between block and surface is 0.30. position A, where it velocity isν
After compressing the spring, block does not
return back: (g = 10 m/s) p
S
A) the maximum value of speed of block for which h A
it is possible is 3.8 m/s
B) the maximum value of speed of block for which H
it is possible is 4.2 m/s
C) if Ei and E f are initial and final mechanical energy, θ
which is sum of kinetic energy and potential energy,
then work done by friction on a system is (Ei - Ef) A) (ν 2 − 2gh ) will remain zero
D) statement in option (C) is wrong
34. The spring constant of spring A is twice the B) (ν 2 − 2gs sin θ ) will remain zero
spring constant of spring B. Each of the spring
ν 2 − 2gs ( H − h )
is cut into two pieces. First piece of spring A is
C) will remain zero
(4/5) of the total length. Second piece of spring ( p − s)
B is (5/6) of its total length. Both springs are
2 2gsH
D) ν −
of equal length initially:
p
will remain zero
. A) the ratio of force constant of first piece of spring
B to the first piece of spring A is (12/5) 37. A particle is taken from point A to point B under
B) the ratio of force constant of first piece of spring the influence of a force field. Now it is taken
B to the first piece of spring A is 2 back from B to A and it is observed that the
C) the ratio of force constant of second piece of work done in taking the particle from A to B is
spring A to the first piece of spring B is 5/3 not equal to the work done in taking it from B
D) the ratio of force constant of second piece of to A. If W nc and W c is the work done by non-
spring A to the first piece of spring B is 7/5 conservative forces and conservative forces
35. A particle of mass 1 kg is moving along X- present in the system respectively, ∆U is the
axis. Its velocity is 6 m/s at x = 0 . change in potential energy, ∆ k is the change
kinetic energy, then
Acceleration-displacement curve and potential
A) Wnc – ∆U = ∆D B) Wc = – ∆U
energy-displacement curve of the particle are
shown: C) Wnc + Wc = ∆k D) Wnc – ∆U = – ∆k
NARAYANAGROUP 233
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
38. An engine is pulling a train of mass m on a P
u
level track at a uniform speed u. The resistive
force offered per unit mass is f.
θ
A) Power produced by the engine is mfu.
B) The extra power developed by the engine engine
to maintain a speed u up inclined plane of h in s is a
mghν (A) If the particle leaves the sphere, when it has
s
a ga
C) The frictional force exerting on the train is mf fallen vertically by a distance of ,u =
on the level track 4 2
D) None of above is correct (B) If the particle leaves the sphere at angle θ (fig)
39. The alternative that gives the conservative ag
3
force of the following is where cos θ = , then u =
uur uur 2 3
A) F1 = 2 xyi$ + x 2 $j B) F2 = y 3 $i + xy 2 $j
uur uur
(C) If u = 0 and the particle just slides down the
C) F3 = yi$ + x $j D) F4 = xy 2 $i + x2 $j hemispherical surface, it will leave the surface when
40. A man is standing on a plank which is placed 2
on smooth horizontal surface. There is cos θ =
3
sufficienet friction between feet of man and
(D) The minimum value of u, for the object to leave
plank. Now man starts running over plank,
correct statement is/are the sphere without sliding over the surface is ag .
A) Work done by friction on man with respect to
ground is nagative COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
B) Work done by friction on man with respect to Comprehension-I
ground is positive The potential energy U (in J) of a particle is given
C) Work done by friction on plank with respect to by ( ax + by ) , where a and b are constants. The
ground is positive
D) Work done by friction on man with respect to mass of the particle is 1 kg and x and y are the
plank is zero coordinates of the particle in metre. The particle is
41. A small sphere of mass m suspended by a at rest at ( 4a, 2b ) at time t = 0 .
thread is first taken a side so that the thread 43. Find the speed of the particle when it crosses
forms the right angle with the vertical and then x-axis
released, then
(A) Total acceleration of sphere as a function of θ A) 2 a 2 + b2 B) a 2 + b2
measured from the vertical is g 1 + 3cos 2 θ
C)
1 2
a + b 2
D)
( a 2 + b2 )
(B) Thread tension as a function of θ measured 2 2
from the vertical is T = 3mg cos θ 44. Find the speed of the particle when it crosses
(C) The angle θ between the thread and the vertical y-axis
( )
at the moment when the total acceleration vector
A) 4 a 2 + b2 B) 2 2 a 2 + b 2
of the sphere is directed horizontally is cos −1 1/ 3
(D) The thread tension at the moment when the C) 2 ( a 2 + b2 ) D) (a 2
+ b2 )
vertical component of the sphere’s velocity is
maximum will be mg. 45. Find the acceleration of the particle
(a + b2 ) B) 2 2 ( a 2 + b 2 )
42. A particle P is initially at rest on the top pf a 2
smooth hemispherical surface which is fixed A) 4
on a horizontal plane. The particle is given a
velocity u horizontally. Radius of spherical C) 2 ( a 2 + b2 ) D) (a 2
+ b2 )
surface is a.
234 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
46. Find the coordinates of the particle at t = 1 51. In terms of F, m, & t, how far did the force
second displace the object according to the person in
car?
A) ( 3.5a,1.5b ) B) ( 3a, 2b )
Ft 2 Ft 2 2Ft 2 4Ft 2
C) ( 3a,3b ) D) ( 3a, 4b )
(A) (B) (C) (D)
m 2m m m
Comprehension - II 52. According to the person on the ground. The
displacement of block is
A block of mass m sits at rest on a frictionless table
in a rail car that is moving with speed vc along a Ft 2 Ft 2
(A) + 2v c t (B) + vct
straight horizontal track (fig.) A person riding in the 2m 2m
car pushes on the block with a net horizontal force Ft 2 Ft 2
F for a time t in the direction of the car’s motion. (C) + vct (D) − vc t
m 2m
Ground Train Comprehension-III
In the figure the variation of potential energy of a
particle of mass m = 2kg is represented w.r.t. its x-
m F coordinate. The particle moves under the effect of
this conservative force along the x-axis.
U(in J)
S1 20
S 15
10
–5 5
47. What is the final speed of the block according –10 2 10 X(in metre)
to a person in the car?
12
Ft 2Ft Ft
A) B) C) − D) zero –15
m m m
48. According to a person standing on the ground 53. If the particle is released at the origin then
outside the train? (A) it will move towards positive x-axis.
Ft 2Ft (B) it will move towards negative x-axis.
A) Vc + B) Vc – (C) it will remain stationary at the origin.
m m
(D) its subsequent motion cannot be decided due
Ft
C) – Vc D) zero to lack of information.
m
54. x = – 5 m and x = 10 m positions of the particle
49. How much did K.E of the block change are respectively of
according to the person in the car? (A) neutral and stable equilibrium.
F2t 2 F2t 2 2F 2 t 2 (B) neutral and unstable equilibrium.
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these (C) unstable and stable equilibrium.
2m m m
50. According to the person on the ground. The (D) stable and unstable equilibrium.
change in KE of block is Passage-IV
2 2 Rod AO3 of length L can rotate about A. Initially
Ft Ft
m Vc + 2 m Vc + 2
(A) m mvc (B) m mvc rod was at potition AO2 , when spring OB of force
− +
2 2 2 2 constant K, attached to block B of mass m was at
2
position OA with unstretched length L. The smooth
Ft block B can slide on rod when pulled by the block
2 m Vc +
−
(C) mv c m (D) None of these D of mass m through a massless spring and smooth
2 2
pulley at O1 .
NARAYANAGROUP 235
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
55. Find the velocity of the block B, when the rod (ii) Particle will complete the circle if u ≥ 5 gR
and spring at B make an angle of 30° with
(iii) Particle will oscillates in lower half
their respective initial positions : (B is the
middle point of the block) (0 < θ ≤ 900 ) if 0 < u ≤ 2 gR
0
A C O2 (iv) The magnitude of tension at a height ‘h’ is
calculated by using formula
M 2
T= u + [ gR − 3gh]
R
B
O3
θ O1
57. If R = 2m, M = 2kg and u = 12m / s . Then
D value of tension at lowest position is
(A) 120 N (B) 164 N (C) 264 N (D) zero
1 1
( ) ( )
10mgL − KL2 2 − 3 2 2 2mgL − KL2
58. Tension at highest point of its trajectory in
2 −1 2
above question will be
A) 8m B) 4m (A) 100 N (B) 44 N (C) 144 N (D) 264 N
59. If M = 2kg , R = 2m and u = 10m / s . Then
1 1
5mgL − KL2 ( )
2 −1 2 6mgL − KL2 ( )
2 −1 2
velocity of particle when θ = 600 is
C) 4m
D) 4m
(A) 2 5 m / s (B) 4 5 m / s
(C) 5 2 m / s (D) 5 m / s
56. Find the work done by the frictional force (if
slider is rough) at the instant when rod and PASSAGE-II:
the spring attached at block B make an anlge A bead of mass m is threaded on a smooth circular
of 30° with their respective initial positions. wire centre O, radius a, which is fixed in vertical
plane. A light string of natural length ‘a’, elastic
1 2
( )
2
A) KL 2 − 3 − mgL 3mg
2 constant = and breaking strength 3mg
a
( )
2 mgL connects the bead to the lowest point A of the wire.
B) KL 2 − 3 −
2
4 The other end of the string is fixed to ring at point
B near point A. The string is slaked initially. The
1 2
( ) 5
2
C) KL 2 − 3 − mgL bead is projected from A with speed u.
8 4
1 2
( )
2
D) KL 2 − 1
2
PASSAGE-I:
A particle of mass M attached to an inextensible
string is moving in a vertical circle of radius. R about P
fixed point O. It is imparted a velocity u in horizontal A
u
direction at lowest position as shown in figure. B
60. The smallest value u0 of u for which the bead
will make complete revolutions of the wire
P h will
u be
Following information is being given (A) u0 = 5 ga (B) u0 = 6 ga
(i) Velocity at a height h can be calculated by using
(C) u0 = 7 ga (D) u0 = 2 ga
formula v 2 = u 2 − 2 gh
236 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
r
61. If v = 2u0 , the tension T in the elastic string 64. The velocity of a particle is v = ati$ + bt 2 $j,
when the bead is at the highest point B of the where t is the time in second. Match the
wire is columns for t = 1 second:
4u02 Column-I
3mu02
(A) (B) 4mg (C) 2mg (D) a − g m A) Acceleration of particle is
a B) Tangential acceleration is
62. The elastic energy stored in the string when C) Radial acceleration is
the bead is at the highest point B will be D) Radius of curvature of path is
Column-II
3mga 2mga
p) less than ( a 2 + b 2 )
(A) (B) 2mga (C) 4mga (D) 3/2
2 2 q) less than ab
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS r) less than ( a 2 + b 2 ) s) greater than 2b
63. A spherical ball of mass m is kept at the
highest point in the space between two fixed, 65. A particle of 500 gm mass moves along a
horizontal circle of radius 16m such that
concentric spheres A and B as shown. The
normal acceleration of particle varies with time
sphere A has radius R and sphere B has a
as an = 9t 2
radius ( R + d ) . All surfaces are smooth. The
Column - I Column - II
diameter of ball is slightly less than d. The ball (a) Tangential force p) 72
is given a gentle push so that angle made by on particle at t = 1
radius vector of the ball with vertical is θ . N A second (in newton)
(b) Total force on q) 36
and N B are the magnitudes of normal reaciton
particle at t = 1
forces on the ball exerted by spheres A and B second ( in newton)
respectively: (c) Power delivered by r) 75
total force at t = 1 sec ( in watt)
h (d) Averge power s) 6
θ developed by total force over
A
first one second (in watt)
R
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
d B 66. A ball leaves the track at B which is at 3m
height from bottom most point of the track.
Match the columns: The ball further rises upto 4m height from the
Column-I bottom most point before falling down. Find h
−1 2 −1 3 ( in m), if the track at B makes an angle 300
A) θ ≤ cos B) θ ≤ cos
3 4 with horizontal.
−1 3 −1 2
C) θ ≥ cos D) θ ≥ cos
4 3 B
Column-II h 3m
p) N B =0 and N A = mg ( 3cos θ − 2 )
q) N B =0 and N A = mg ( 4cosθ − 2 ) 67. The displacment x (in m), of a particle of mass
m (in kg) is related to the time t (in second)
r) N A =0 and N B = mg ( 2 − 3cos θ )
by t = x + 3 . Find the work done in first six
s) none of these
second. (in mJ)
NARAYANAGROUP 237
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
68. Block A of mass 1kg is placed on the rough
A
surface of block B of mass 3 kg. Block B is
placed on smooth horizontal surfac. Blocks O
are given the velocities as shown. Find net
work done by the frictional force. [ in (-) ve J]
8m/sec
A
4m/sec
B
69. A block of mass 2kg is placed on an inclined
L
plane of angle 53°, attached with a spring as
8
shown. Friction coefficient between block and
the incline is 0.25. The block is released from
the rest and when spring is in natural length. u
Find maximum speed of the block it acquires B
after the release in cm/s is found to be nearly
5n. Find ‘n’(take g = 10 m/s2) 72. The sphere at P is given a down ward velocity
v0 and swings in a vertical plane at the end of
/m
k=
8 45N a rope of l = 1m attached to a support at O.
2kg The rope breaks at angle 300 from horizontal,
knowing that it can withstand a maximum
µ = 0.25
tension equal to four times the weight of the
53° fixed
sphere. Then the value of v0 will be
70. Figure shows a light, inextensible string ( g = 10m / s )
2
attached to a cart that can slide along a
frictionless horizontal rail aligned along an x l = 1m
A O
axis. The left end of the string is pulled over θ
a pulley, of negligible mass and friction and v0
fixed at height h = 3m from the ground level.
The cartslides from x1 = 3 3 m to x2 = 4 m
and during the move, tension in the string is
kept constant 50 N. Find change in kinetic
energy of the cart in joules. (Use 3 = 1.7) in 73. A block of mass 0.18kg is attached to a spring
form of 10 x n, where n = of force-constant 2 N/m. The coefficient of
A
friction between the block and the floor is 0.1
Initially the block is at rest and the spring is
un-stretched. An impulse is given to the block
h = 3m as shown in the figure.The block slides a
distance of 0.06m and comes to rest for the
first time . The initial velocity of the block in
x2 x1
m/s is V = N /10 . Then N is: [IIT-2011]
71. A particle is suspended vertically from a point
O by an inextensible massless string of length
L. A vertical line AB is is at a distance of L/8
from O as shown. The object is given a
horizontal velocity u. At some point, its motion
ceases to be circular and eventually the object 74. A particle of mass 0.2 kg is moving in one
passed through the line AB. At the instant of dimension under a force that delivers constant
crossing AB, its velocity is horizontal. Find u. power 0.5W to the particle . If the initial speed
[1999] (in ms −1 ) after 5s is [IIT-2013]
238 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
SUBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS COMPREHENSION TYPE
75. An observer and a vehicle, both start moving 43) A 44) B 45) D 46) A 47) A 48) A 49) A
together from rest with accelerations 5 m/s2 50) B 51) B 52) B 53) D 54) D 55) A 56) C
and 2 m/s2, respectively. There is a 2 kg block 57)B 58)B 59) B 60)C 61) D 62) A
on the floor of the vehicle, and µ = 0.3 MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
between their surfaces. Find the work done 63)A-P, B-S, C-S, D-R 64) A-s; B-r; C-q; D-p
by frictional force on the 2 kg block as 65) A-s,B-r,C-p,D-q
observed by the running observer, during first INTEGER ANSWER TYPE
2 seconds of the motion. 66) 7 67) 0 68) 6 69)10 70) 5
2m/s2 3 3
5m/s
2
71) u = gL 2 + 2
2kg 72) 5 73) 4 74) 5
SUBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
75) 24 J 76) 40 J 77) 2 tan −1 ( 2 )
76. Two blocks A and B are placed one over other.
Block B is acted upon by a force of 20 N which LEVEL-VI - KEY
displaces it through 5 m. Find work done by SINGLE ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
frictional force on block A dm
µ = 0.5 1. m0 =
A 2kg dx
20N
B 3kg
d d 1 1 dm
( KE ) = dt 2 mv2 = 2 dt v 2
Frictionless dn
77. A block of mass m is placed inside a smooth
hollow cylinder of radius R kept horizontally . 1 dm dx 2 1
= v = m0 v
3
Initially system was at rest . Now cylinder is 2 dx dt 2
given constant acceleration 2 g in the horizontal
1
direction by external agent . Find the 2. mv0 2 = mgR (1 − cos θ )
maximum angular displacement of the block 2
with the vertical. v0 2
= R − R cos θ = required height
2g
2g 1 2mgh
2
3. K1 x 2 = mgh (or) x =
2 K1
1 2µ mgx0
K 2 x 2 = µ mgx0 (or) x =
2
2 K2
LEVEL-VI - KEY
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE h K2
1) A 2) A 3) D 4) D 5) C 6) A 7) A equating x0 = µ . K
1
8) C 9) B 10) B 11) C 12) C 13) A 14) C 4. The accelerations of the blocks along the
15) A 16) B 17) A 18) C 19) D 20) B 21) A string are equal; now apply F = ma for both
22) C 23) C 24)C 25)B 26)B 27)A 28)D the blocks.
29)D 30)B 31)D 5. T sin θ = ma and T cos θ = mg
MULTIPLE ANSWER TYPE
So, a = g tan θ
32) A,C 33) A,C 34) A,C 35) A,C
36) ABCD 37) ABC 38) ABC 39) A,C mg
Now, T = = mg 2 (given)
40) B,C,D 41) ABC 42)ACD cos θ
NARAYANAGROUP 239
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
1 1 2 1
cos θ = , or θ = 450 Kx + mg ( AD ) = mv 2
2 2 2
and a = g tan θ = g tan 450 = g x = AC − CB = 2R − 2R cos30°
1 2 (
= R 2− 3 ) ( As ∠CBA = 90°)
workdone, W = T.S = T at 2
2 AD = AB cos 60°
( )
1 R
= mg 2 ( g )(1) 2 = m g 2 / 2
2
= ( AC sin 30° ) cos 60° =
2 2
1
( ) R 1 2
2
1
K .Ei = mV02 ; K .E f =
11
mV02 So, KR 2 2 − 3 + mg = mv
6. 2 2 2
2 42
1
V = V0 − µ gt0 KR
(2 − 3)
2 2 2
v= + gR
2E
12
2E
12
m
7. At x = , v=
K m L
11. Inititally, CD = L sin 30° =
2E 1 2 2
or v = or mv = E
2
m 2 L
Finally, CD = L sin 45° =
12 2
2E
So, at x = , kinetic energy is equal to total Increase in elastic PE + Increase in KE = Decrease
K in PE
mechanical energy. 2
1 L L 1 L L
− + mv2 = mg −
2 2
12 K
2E 2 2 2 2
Hence, PE at x = is zero
K 1
2
( )
K L2
( )
2
On solving, v = gL 2 −1 − 2 −1
So, U ( x ) = 0
4m
12. The system will adjust in such a way by sliding the
8. v1 = v0 − ( µ g ) t0 spring C remains unstretched and spring A and B
v remains vertical. Thus, effective force constant is
= v0 − 0 gt0 = v0 / 2 giveny by
2 gt0 K
1 1 1
velocity left = v0 / 2
= + ; K'=
K' K K 2
2 there is no effect of spring C.
1 v0 1 1 2
K.E left = m = mv0 2mg 2mg
2 2 42 K ' x = mg ; x=, W = mg .x = mg.
K k
1
= of initial K.E 16. v 2 (at end of track) = 2gh.
4
mu 2
9. Decrease in PE = Increase in KE + Increase in = mg cos θ
elastic PE Let body break at angle θ the h . (1)
2
1 1 1
mgL = × ( 2m ) v 2 + Kx 2 = mv 2 + KL2 ( )
2
2 −1 u
2 2 2
θ
1
2
KL2
( )
2
v = gL − 2 −1
2m
10. Decrease in elastic PE + Decrease in PE = Increase
in KE
240 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
h 22. Let v be the speed of particle at B when it is
u 2 = v 2 − 2g (1 + cos θ) mv 2
2
about to loose contact = mg sin θ '
2 2 r
solving cos θ = &u = gh . Applying conservation of energy
3 3
1 2
v at highest pt is mv = mg ( r cos θ − r sin θ ')
2
2 2 8 3sin θ ' = 2 cos θ
u cos θ = gh × = gh
3 3 27 23. For complete circular motion speed at highest
17. In both the cases work done by friction will be point in gR
µMgx
Apply conservation energy va = 2 gR
1 1
∴ MVC = MVF = Mgy − µMgx
2 2
For clock wise motion
2 2
mvc2
∴ VC = VF = 2gy − 2µgx T + mg cos 60 =
R
18. From A to B, there will be no loss of energy. Now
let block compresses the spring by an amount x gR
vC to minimum T=0 ; vC =
and comes momentarily to rest. Then, loss of energy 2
will be equal to the work done against friction. dp d
Therefore, 24. F = = ( mv ) = v ( Apv ) = Apv 2
x dt dt
kx ∴ P = Fv = ( APv ) v = APv 3 ⇒ Pα v3
2
C 25. Loss in P.E = Gain in K.E + P.E stored in spring
A B C v=0 f
1 2Mg
1 1 MgX max = 0 + kX 2 max ; X max =
µk mg (BD + x ) = mv 2 − kx 2 2 k
2 2 26. Work done will be same in all the cases because
Substituting the values (0.2) (0.5) (10) (2.14 + x) gravitational field is a conservative fieldThus work
1 1 done is independent of the point B, therefore
= (0.5)(3)2 − (2)( x )2
2 2 1
27. U = − fFdx = − fkxdx = − kx 2
Solving this equation, we get x = 0.1m 2
28. As the body just reaches the topmost point B,
s m s
19. t = + π + therefore , υ A = 5 gL and υ B = gL
v k v
(1,1) ur uur
Let at point P having angular displacement θ the
20. W = ∫ F .ds( 0,0 )
speed becomes half of the initial value
uur υ A . Using the law of conservation of energy
Here ds = dxi$ + dy $j + dzk$ Energy at A=Energy at B
(1,1)
W =∫
( 0,0)
( x dy + ydx ) ( as x = y )
2 1 1
mυ 2 A = mυ 2 P + mgL (1 − cos θ )
2 2
(1,1)
m (υ A 2 = υ P 2 ) = mgL (1 − cos θ )
y 3 x2 5 1
W = + = J 2
3 2 ( 0,0 ) 6
1 5 gL
α dυ α
m 5 gL − = mgL (1 − cos θ )
= ⇒ ∫ mυ dυ = ∫ α dt 2 4
21. F = ⇒m
υ dt υ 15 7
= (1 − cos θ ) ; cos θ = −
mυ 2 8 8
= α t ; ∆KE = α∆t = work done 3π
2 Which means <θ <π
4
NARAYANAGROUP 241
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
r r
29. W= ∫ F .dr 34. K A = 2 K , K B = K
4 L L 5L
rB ( LA )1 = L , ( LA )2 = ; ( LB )1 = , ( LB ) 2 =
xiˆ yjˆ
( )
dxiˆ + dyjˆ 5 5 6 6
= k∫ + force constant ∝ (1/5 length)
rA ( x + y ) (x + y )
2 2 3/2 2 2 3/2
5 5
( K A )1 = ( 2 K ) = K ;
rB
xdx ydy 4 2
= k∫ +
rA (x 2
+y )
2 3/2
(x 2
+ y2 )
3/2 ( K A )2 = 5 ( 2K ) = 10 K
6
( K B )1 = 6 ( K ) and ( K B ) 2 = (K)
rB
1 x 2
y
2
5
= k∫ d + d
rA (x 2
+y )
2 3/2
2 2 35. Area of ( a − t ) curve = 32 ms −1 = V f − Vi
rB
V f = 32 + Vi = 32 + 6 = 38 ms −1
= k∫
1
(x 2
+ y2 ) work done by all forces = ∆KE
(x 2
+y )
2 3/2
m (V f 2 − Vi 2 ) = ( 382 − 6 2 ) = 704 J
rA
1 1
=
rB r r 2 2
= k ∫ 3 d (r2 ) = k ∫
B B
1 2rdr dr
2r 2r 3
= k ∫ r2
work done by conservation forces
rA rA rA U i − U f = 320 J
work done by external forces = 704-320 = 384J
1 1
r
1
B
= k − = k − 36. h = s sin θ
r rA rA rB
1 2
mv + mg ( H − h ) = mgH
But rA = a and rB = a ; ∴W = 0 2
30. v ∝ t ; v 2 ∝ t 2 ; K.E ∝ t 2 1 2
mv − mgh = zero
MULTIPLE ANSWER CORRECT 2
v 2 − 2 gh =zero ; v − 2 gs ( sin θ ) = zero
2
32. U min is at sin ( 4π x ) = −1
U min = 20 − 5 = 15 J H ( H − h)
But sin θ = P = p − s
( )
K max = E − U min = 20 − 15 = 5 J
( H − h) H
So, v − 2 gs ( p − s ) = zero and v − 2 gs = zero
2 2
3 7 3 7
4π x = π , π ; x = , ,......... p
2 2 8 8
41. Between A and B
33. The spring is compressed by x
1
Block will not return if µ mg ≥ Kx mgl cos θ = mvB2 ; VB = 2 gL cos θ
2
µ mg ( 0.3)(1)(10 ) ar = 2 g cos θ ; at = g sin θ
So, xmax = = = 0.30m
K 10
mvB2
work done against friction = Ei − E f Now at B ; TB − mg cos θ =
L
µ mg ( x + 2 ) =
1 1
mv0 2 − Kx 2 Put VB ⇒ TB = 3mg cos θ
2 2 at 1
tan ( 90 − θ ) = = tan θ ⇒ tan θ = 2
( 0.3)(1)(10 )( 0.3 + 2 ) =
1 1
(1) v0 − (10 )( 0.3 )
2 2 ar 2
2 2 1
⇒ cos θ =
on solving , v0 = 3.8 m/sec 3
242 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
42. Applying conservation of total energy L
1 1 Distance by which B ahs gone down = BC =
mu 2 + mga (1 − cos θ ) = mv 2 4
2 2 Distance by which D has gone down
mv 2 = AB = L sin 30° = L
mg cos θ − N = Decrease in PE = Increase in KE + Increase in
a
for particle to lose contact N = 0 elastic PE
v 2 = ag cos θ ; u + ga ( 2 − 3cos θ ) = 0
2
2
L 1 1 3
mgL + mg = × 2m × v 2 + K L − L
4 2 2 2
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
r ur 1 ∂U $ ∂U
1
$j
43. a =F/m=
m ∂X
i+
∂Y
(
10mgL − KL2 2 − 3 2 2
)
on solving, v = 8m
( )
= − ai$ + bj since, m = 1 kg
uur uur 56. W = ∆KE = 0
44. acceleration ax = − a, a y = −b W f + WN +W S +W g = 0
r
acceleration a = a x 2 + a y 2 = a 2 + b 2 WN = Work done by normal reaction = 0 (Acts
perpendicular to displacement)
u x = − at , v y = −bt
WS = Work done by spring force
1 a
X = 4a + ax t 2 = 4a − t 2 2
2 2 1 L 3
= 0 − K L −
1 b 2 2
Y = 2 b + a y t 2 = 2b − t 2
2 2
5
particle crosses x-axis, when y = 0 Wg = Work done by force of gravity = mgL
45. Particle crosses y-axis, when x = 0 4
46. Coordinate at t = 1 sec will be ( 3.5a,1.5b ) 1
2
5
2 2− 3
W f = − 0 − KL +
2 4
mgL
Ft 2
47. V = u + at = 0 +
m
1
( 5
)
2
Ft = KL2 2 − 3 − mgL
48. Vg = V0 + 8 4
m
57. Put h = 0 T = 164 N
1 1 F 2t 2 1 F 2t 2 58. Put h = 2R T= 144 N
49. mv 2 = =
2 2 m2 2 m R
59. At θ = 60 h = R − R cos 60 = 2
0
1 F 2
51. S train = 0t + t
2m R
Put h = in v 2 − u 2 = 2 gh
1F 2 2
52. S ground = VC t + Strain ; = VC t + .t
2m 60. When particle is at highest position, the elastic
55. ∠ABO = 90° force is downwards
(Since, ∠AOB = 30° and ∠OAB = 60° ) 3mg
Fl = ( 2a − a ) = 3mg
L 3 L a
OB = L cos 30° = ; AB = it v is velocity at height point at B
2 2
mu02
BC = BA sin 30° =
L = Fl + mg − N
4 a
NARAYANAGROUP 243
WORK POWER ENERGY JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II
If V = 0, then KE at lowest point A will be
v2 (a + b )
2 2 3/2
< ( a2 + b2 )
3/2
1 2
mu0 = [ Elastic energy + gPE ] at B R= =
2 an ab
1 3mg 2 INTEGER ANSWER
= a + mg 2a
2 a uB 2 sin 2 θ 2 g ( h − hB ) sin 2 300
66. h0 = 3 + = 3+
u 02 = 7 ga 2g 2g
61. When v = 2v0 = 2 7 ga , For po int B 4 ( given ) = 3 + h sin 2 300 − hB sin 2 300
m ( 2v0 )
2
h ( 3) 7 h
= 3mg + mg − N = 3+ − ; = ⇒ h= 7m
a 4 4 4 4
67. x = ( t − 3) = t 2 − 6t + 9
2
4mv02
= 4mg − N
a dx
v= = 2t − 6
N = ( 4 − 28 ) mg =-24 mg dt
negative sign denote it acts downwards and adds at t = 0, v = −6 ; at t = 6, v = +6
to tension 1
initial KE = m ( −6 ) = 18m
2
total tension in string T = 3mg+N
2
4v 2
T = 0 − gm 1
final KE = m ( 6 ) = 18m
2
a
2
62. Elastic PE stored in the string
1 3mg
68. (1 + 3) v = (1)(8) + ( 3)( 4) = 20 ; v = 5m / sec
2 3
a = mga
(1) ( 52 − 82 ) = − J
2 a 2 1 39
for block A, W f =
2 2
MATRIX MATCHING
( 3 ) ( 52 − 4 2 ) = + J
1 27
d for block B, W f =
63. h = R + (1 − cos θ ) v 2 = 2 gh 2 2
2 net work done by friction = -6 J
or N = mg ( 3cos θ − 2 ) 69. Conceptual
70. Change in kinetic energy = Work done by the force;
Ball will lose contact with sphere A, when N = 0
so W = 50 × 1 (along the string);
3cosθ − 2 = 0
so W = 50 Joule
r
64. v = ati$ + bt 2 $j = ai$ + b $j for t = 1 second
r
a = ai$ + 2bt $j C v
90-θ
r D
a = ( a 2 + 4b 2 ) > 2b
Q
θ
1/2
mg
θ
1
= ( a 2 + 4b 2 ) −
( a 2
+ 2b )
2 2 2
L
L + Lsinθ
( a + b )
2 2
.71 L 8
P u
ab
= < ab
( a 2 + b2 )
1/2
Lcosθ
244 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - II WORK POWER ENERGY
Now, we have following equations f L = 6 N , Fpseudo = 4 N
mv 2 ∴ f = 4N
(1) TQ = 0 Therefore, mg sin θ = ...... (1)
L acc. of the block with respect to observes
(2) v 2 = u 2 − 2gh = u 2 − 2gL(1 + sin θ) ...... (2) = 2 − 5 = −3 m / s 2
∴ displacement of the block w.r.to observes
1
(3) QD = ( range) ........ (3) 1
= × −3 × 4 = −6 m
2
2
∴ work done by friction w.r. to observers
3 3
u = gL 2 + = −24 Joule
2
76. Limiting friction between the blocks
f L = 10 N
mv 2
72. T − mg sin θ = 10
R [ amax ] A = = 5 m / s2
2
m ( v02 + 2 gl sin 30 ) i.e., for shipping between A, B, Bmust move with
4mg − mg sin 30 =
l 5m / s2
2
5m/s
5g
v0 = 10N
2
F
73. Decrease in mechanical energy = work done
⇒ F = 25 N
1 1 2
against friction mυ − kx = ( µ mg ) x but given F = 20 N
2
2 2 77. Free body diagram is :
2 µ gx + k
v=
m
Putting m = 0.18kg , x = 0.06m, k = 2 Nm −1 ,
θ N
µ = 01 we get
4
υ = 0.4m / s = m/s
10
∴N = 4 mg
1 1
74 mυ 2 − mu 2 = W N cosθ = mg
2 2
N sin θ = m ( 2 g )
1 2 ⇒ tan θ = 2
mv = Pt
2 ⇒ θ = tan −1 ( 2 )
2 Pt 2 × 0.5 × 5 ∴ maximum possible angular displacement
υ= = = 5ms −1 = 2θ
m 0.2
= 2 tan −1 ( 2 )
75. FBD of the block,
Fpseudo
*****
f
NARAYANAGROUP 245
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID
BODY DYNAMICS
SYNOPSIS WE-1: If the distance between the centers of the
atoms of potassium and bromine in KBr
Centre of mass (potassium-bromide) molecule is 0.282 × 10 −9 m ,
Ø CM is the point which behaves as if total mass of find the centre of mass of this two particle
the body is supposed to be concentrated at that system from potassium (mass of bromine =
point. This point may lie inside (or) outside the 80 u, and of potassium = 39 u)
material of body, but always lies within the Sol. Let position coordinate of potassium, xK = 0
boundary of the body. Mass may exist or may Position co-ordinate of bromine,
not exist at the location of centre of mass.
Ø Centre of gravity: The point through which xBr = 0.282 × 10−9 m .
weight of the body is supposed to act is called ∴ Position co-ordinate of centre of mass.
centre of gravity. mK xK + mBr xBr
Ø Coordinates of CM xCM =
Coordinates of CM of a system of ‘n’ different mK + mBr
particles
39 × 0 + 80 × 0.282 ×10−9
m1 x1 + m2x2 + ......+mnxn ⇒ xCM = = 0.189 ×10−9 m
Xcm = 39 + 80
m1 + m2 +......+mn WE-2:Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 30 kg are
m1 y1 + m2 y2 + ......+mnyn placed on X-axis. The first mass is moved on
Ycm = the axis by a distance of 2 cm right. By what
m1 + m2 +......+ mn distance should the second mass be moved to
m1 z1 + m2 z2 + ......+mn zn keep the position of centre of mass
Zcm = unchanged.
m1 + m2 + ...... + mn
Case-1: Position of CM of two particle system:
Ø In case of two bodies, the ratio of distance of Sol.
centre of mass from the bodies is in the inverse m1 m2
ratio of their masses. If m1 and m2 are masses Mass of the first block, m1 = 10 kg .
of two bodies separated by a distance ‘d’ then Mass of the second block, m2 = 30 kg .
the sum of moment of weights about centre of mass
is zero. m1∆ x1 + m 2 ∆ x 2
∆ x CM =
d m m1 + m 2
m1gd1 = m 2 gd 2 ( or ) 1 = 2
d 2 m1 10 × 2 + 30 ∆ x2 2
m1 C.M m2
0= ∴∆x2 = − .
40 3
Therefore, the second block should be moved left
d1 d2 through a distance of 2/3cm to keep the position
d of centre of mass unchanged.
In figure, d = d1 + d 2 . WE-3: When ‘n’ number of particles of masses
On solving, m1d1 = m2 d 2 m, 2m,3m,....nm are at distances x1 = 1,
m1d1 = m2 × ( d − d1 ) x2 = 2, x3 = 3....xn = n units r e s p e c t i v e l y
m2 d m1 d from origin on the X-axis, then find the
⇒ d1 = m + m and d2 = m + m distance of centre of mass of the system from
1 2 1 2 origin.
Here, d 1 , d 2 are the distances of CM from m1,m2. m (1) + 2 m ( 2 ) + 3 m (3 ) + ... + ( nm ) n
Thus CM locates nearer to heavier body. Sol. x =
m + 2m + 3m + ... + nm
cm
Note: If m1 , m2 are located at x1 , x2 from origin then n ( n + 1)( 2n + 1)
m (12 + 22 + 32 + .... + n2 ) 6
= 2n + 1
m1 x1 + m2 x2 xcm =
m (1 + 2 + 3 + .... + n )
=
n ( n + 1)
xCM =
3
m1 + m2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 1
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
WE-4: When ‘n’ number of particles of masses Aluminium part mass,
m, 2m,3m,....nm are at distances x1 = 1, m3 = A × 0.2 × 2.7 × 103 = 0.54 × 103 A .
x2 = 4, x3 = 9,...xn = n units respectively
2
Copper part mass, m4 = A× 0.3× 8.9 ×103 = 2.67 × 103 A
from origin on the X-axis, then find the Co-ordinate of iron part from end “O” of the rod
distance of their centre of mass from origin.
x1 = 0.1m .
m (1) + 2 m( 4 ) + 3 m ( 9 ) + .... + nm ( n 2 )
Sol. xCM = Co-ordinate of lead part from end “O” of the rod
m + 2m + 3m + .... + nm
n ( n + 1)
2 x2 = 0.35 m .
m (1 + 2 + 3 + ..... + n
3 3 3
)
= n ( n + 1)
Co-ordinate of aluminium part from end “O” of
=
2
=
m (1 + 2 + 3 + .... + n ) n ( n + 1) 2 . the rod, x3 = 0.6 m .
2 Co-ordinate of copper part from end “O” of the
WE-5: When ‘n’ number of particles each of mass rod, x4 = 0.85 m .
‘m’are at distances x1 = a, x2 = ar , x3 = ar 2 , ∴ Centre of mass of the rod,
......... xn = ar n , units from origin on the m x + m2 x2 + m3 x3 + m4 x4
xCM = 1 1
X-axis, then find the distance of their centre m1 + m2 + m3 + m4
of mass from origin.
(1.58×10 ×0.1+3.42×10 ×0.35+0.54×10 ×0.6+2.67×10 ×0.85) A
ma + m ( ar ) + m ( ar ) + .... + m ( ar )
3 3 3 3
2 n
⇒xCM =
Sol. xCM = (1.58×10 +3.42×10 +0.54×10 +2.67×10 ) A
3 3 3 3
m + m + m + ... + m ( nterms ) ⇒ xCM = 0.481 m from the end “O” of the rod.
m ( a + ar + ar + .... + ar
2 n
) WE-7:If the centre of mass of three particles of
xCM =
mn masses of 1kg, 2kg, 3kg is at (2,2,2), then
1 a ( r − 1) a ( r − 1)
n n where should a fourth particle of mass 4kg
= be placed so that the combined centre of
If r > 1 then ⇒ xCM =
n r − 1 n ( r − 1) mass may be at (0,0,0).
Sol. Let ( x1 , y1 , z1 ) , ( x2 , y2 , z2 ) and ( x3 , y3 , z3 )
1 a (1 − r ) a (1 − r )
n n
If r < 1 then ⇒ xCM = = be the positions of masses 1kg, 2kg, 3kg and let
n 1 − r n (1 − r ) the co-ordinates of centre of mass of the three
WE-6: A 1m long rod having uniform area of cross particle system is ( xcm , ycm , zcm ) respectively..
section is made of four materials. The first m1x1 + m2 x2 + m3x3 1× x1 + 2 × x2 + 3× x3
xCM = ⇒2 = ,
0.2 m is made of iron, the next 0.3 m of lead, m1 + m2 + m3 1+ 2 + 3
the following 0.2 m of aluminium and the
remaining part is made of copper. Find the ( or ) x1 + 2 x2 + 3 x3 = 12 ......(1)
centre of mass of the rod. The densities of iron, Suppose the fourth particle of mass 4kg is placed
lead, aluminium and copper are 7.9 ×103 kg / m3 , at (x4,y4,z4) so that centre of mass of new system
shifts to (0,0,0). For x coordinate of new centre
11.4 ×103 kg / m3 , 2.7 ×103 kg / m3 and 8.9 ×103 kg / m3 of mass we have
respectively. 1× x1 + 2 × x2 + 3 × x3 + 4 × x4
Sol. mass ( m ) = volume (V ) × density ( d ) 0=
1+ 2+ 3+ 4
m = Area ( A ) × length ( l ) × density ( d ) ⇒ x1 + 2 x2 + 3 x3 + 4 x4 = 0 ..........(2)
m = Ald . from equations (1) and (2)
lm 12 + 4 x4 = 0 ⇒ x4 = −3
O Iron Lead Copper
0.2m 0.3m 0.2m 0.3m similarly, y4 = −3 and z4 = −3
0.35m Therefore 4kg should be placed at (-3,-3,-3).
0.6m Case-2: Center of mass of a system of n particles
0.85m in one dimension:
Iron part mass, m1 = A×0.2×7.9×103 = 1.58 ×103 A . Consider n-particles having masses
Lead part mass, m2 = A× 0.3×11.4×103 = 3.42 ×103 A . m1 , m2 ,...., mn along X-axis. The centre of mass
2 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
of this system is given by Case-4: Centre of mass of a system of ‘n’ particles
in (Three dimensional) Space:
m1 x1 + m2x2 + ......+mnxn Consider n-particles in space having masses
Xcm =
m1 + m2 +......+mn m1 , m2 ,....mn with coordinates.
Case-3: Center of mass of a system of particles in
(two dimensional) Plane:
( x , y , z ) , ( x , y , z ) ...... ( x , y , z )
1 1 1 2 2 2 n n n
respectively, then distance of centre of mass from
Consider n-particles in x-y plane having masses
origin in space is d = x cm2 + y cm
2
+ z cm
2
m1 , m2 ,...., mn with coordinates n n n
∑ mi xi ∑ mi yi ∑ mi zi
( x , y ) , ( x , y ) ,....., ( x , y ) respectively..
1 1 2 2 n n Where xCM = i =1 , y CM = i =1 , z CM = i = 1
The distance of centre of mass from origin in a M M M
Case-5: Position vector of Centre of mass:
r r r r
plane is d = xCM
2
+ yCM
2
Let r1 , r2 , r3 ,....., rn be the position vectors of
n-particles having masses m1,m2,......,m n
n n
r
∑m x i i ∑m y i i respectively. If rCM is position vector of their CM
where x = i =1 and y = i =1
then
CM CM
M M n
r
WE-8: Find position of centre of mass of four r r r ∑ mi r1
particle system, which are at the vertices of a r m r + m2 r2 + ...... + mn rn i =1
rCM = 1 1 =
parallelogram, as shown in figure. m1 + m2 + ...... + mn M
Y r r
Where r1 = x1iˆ + y1 ˆj + z1kˆ, r2 = x2iˆ + y 2 ˆj + z2 kˆ,
r
,....., rn = xniˆ + yn ˆj + zn kˆ
(b cos θ, b sin θ) (a+b cos θ , b sin θ)
mC m B ∴ r = x iˆ + y ˆj + z kˆ
CM CM CM CM
Motion of centre of mass
b r
b
(a) Velocity of centre of mass vcm :
r r r
( )
m θ D θ E If v1 , v 2 ,...., v n are velocities of particles of masses
O(0,0) a A (a,0) X r
m1 , m2 ,...m n respectively and vcm is velocity of
Sol. From figure their centre of mass then
uuuuur r
DC = b sin θ , OD = b cosθ . uuuuur dr 1 n dri
Ø VCM = CM = ∑ mi
m x + m2 x2 + m3 x3 + m4 x4 dt
r
M i =1
r
dt
r
xCM = 1 1 uuuuur m1 v + m 2 v 2 + ... + m n v n 1 n r
m1 + m2 + m3 + m4 Ø VCM = 1
= M ∑ mi v i
m1 + m2 + ... + m n i =1
[a + b cosθ ] bsinθ where M = m1 + m2 + ... + mn = Total mass of
xCM = , similarly yCM = the system.
2 2
Ø When two particles of masses m1 and m2 are
a + b cos θ b sin θ
∴ [ xCM , yCM ] = ,
2
moving from a point with velocities v1 and v 2 at
2 an angle ‘ θ ’ with each other, then the velocity of
Note-1: If masses are arranged at vertices of a their centre of mass is given by
rectangle then θ = 900 . m12 v12 + m22 v22 + 2 ( m1v1 )( m2 v 2 ) cos θ
VCM =
a + bcos900 bsin900 a b ( m1 + m2 )
∴[ xCM , yCM ] = , = ,
2 2 2 2 Ø If they move in the same direction, then θ = 0°
m1v1 + m2 v 2
Note-2: If masses are arranged at vertices of a square, and v cm = m1 + m 2
then θ = 900 and lengths of sides are equal
Ø If they move at right angles to each other, then
a a
( a = b) . ∴[ xCM , yCM ] = , . m12 v12 + m 2 2 v 22
2 2 θ = 90° and v cm = m1 + m 2
NARAYANAGROUP 3
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø If they move in opposite directions, then θ = 180° WE-9: An object A is dropped from the top of a
m1v1 − m2 v 2 30m high building and at the same moment
and vcm = m + m another object B is projected vertically
upwards with an initial speed of 15m/s from
r
1 2
(b)Linear momentum of centre of mass pcm :
r r r
( ) the base of the building. Mass of the object A
is 2kg while mass of the object B is 4kg. Find
If p1, p 2 ,...., p n are linear momenta of particles of the maximum height above the ground level
r attained by the centre of mass of A and B system
masses m1 , m2 ,...m n respectively and p cm is (take g = 10m/s2)
linear momentum of their centre of mass then Sol. m1 = 4kg , m2 = 2kg . Initially 4kg is on the
r r r r n r
p = p + p + ... + p = ∑ pi , ground, therefore x1 = 0 and 2kg is on top of the
Ø cm 1 2 n
i =1 building, therefore x2 = 30m
r r n r r
pcm = Mvcm = ∑ mi vi = psystem m x + m2 x2 0 + 2 × 30
Ø xCM = 1 1 = = 10m
i =1 m1 + m2 4+2
M = m1 + m2 + ... + mn = Total mass of the Initial height of CM = 10m
system. m1u1 + m2u2
r Initial velocity of CM, uCM = m + m
(c) Acceleration of centre of mass a cm :
r r r
( ) 1 2
4 ×15 + 0
If a1 ,a 2 ,.....,an are accelerations of particles of uCM = = 10m / s upward
r 4+2
masses m1, m2 ....mn respectively and acm is the Acceleration of CM,
acceleration of their centre of mass then
r r aCM = g = 10m / s 2 downwards . Maximum height
r dvcm 1 n dvi
Ø acm = = ∑ mi attained by CM from initial position,
dt M i =1 dt 2
102
r r r hCM =
uCM
= = 5m
r m1a1 + m2 a2 + ... + mn an 1 n r 2g 20
Ø a cm = = ∑ m a
i i
m1 + m2 + ... + mn M i =1 Maximum height attained by CM of 4kg and 2kg
from the ground = 10+5=15m
Where M = m1 + m2 + ... + mn = Total mass of
the system. WE-10: Find the acceleration of centre of mass
Ø When two particles of masses m1 and m2 are of the blocks of masses m1 and m2 ( m1 > m2 ) in
Atwood’s machine.
moving from a point with accelerations a1 and a2 at Sol. We know from Newton’s laws of motion
an angle θ with each other, then the acceleration magnitude of acceleration of each block
of their centre of mass is given by ////////
r m12a12 + m22a22 + 2 ( m1a1 )(m 2a2 ) cos θ
aCM =
m1 + m2
m2
Ø If they move in the same direction, then θ = 0°
m1a1 + m 2 a2
and aCM = m + m m1
m1a + m2 ( − a )
1 2
Ø If they move at right angles to each other, then m − m2
a = 1 g So, aCM =
m12a12 + m22 a22 m1 + m2 m1 + m2
θ = 90 and aCM
0 = Acceleration of centre of mass
m1 + m 2 2
m − m2
Ø If they move in opposite directions, then θ = 180° aCM = 1 g
m1 + m2
m1a1 − m 2 a2
and aCM = m + m Note: The magnitude of displacement of centre of
1 2 1
mass in time ‘t’ is SCM = aCM t
2
4 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
WE-11: Two bodies of 6kg and 4kg masses have due to internal forces into many fragments, they
their velocity 5iˆ − 2 ˆj + 10kˆ and 10iˆ − 2 ˆj + 5kˆ move randomly in different directions. But the centre
of mass follows the same parabolic path as
respectively. Then, the velocity of their unexploded bomb. So at any moment the vector
centre of mass is [E-2007 ] sum of the moments of mass of all the fragments
Sol. The velocity of centre of mass is
r r about centre of mass is zero.
m1 v1 + m2 v 2 (c) When a wheel is rolling on a road, then the paths
VCM = m + m = 7iˆ − 2 ˆj + 8kˆ of various particles are complicated as they are in
1 2
combined motion (translational + rotational). But
Effect of external forces on CM the motion of centre of mass is purely translational
r 1 r and it follows straight line path.
Ø We know a cm = ∑ mi a i Note: Gravitational force between two masses,electric
M i
r r r force between two charges are the examples of
Therefore M a cm = ∑ Fext + ∑ Fint internal forces for the system, Which cannot
But the internal forces are in the form of produce acceleration in centre of mass of the
action - reaction pairs. Hence they cancel each system.
r r r r WE-12: Two particles A and B initially at rest, move
other. Thus ∑ Fint = 0 ;∴ M a cm = ∑ Fext towards each other, under mutual force of
Ø Thus centre of mass is effected by only external attraction. At an instance when the speed of
force acting on the system. Internal forces will have A is v and speed of B is 2v,the speedof centre
no effect on the motion of centre of mass. When of mass (CM) is [E-2008 ]
no external force acts on the system Sol. Internal forces doesn’t change the position of centre
a) acceleration of centre of mass is zero i.e.,
r r r r r r of mass. So velocity of CM is zero.
Fext = M a cm ⇒ M a cm = 0 ⇒ a cm = 0 . Mutual forces between two bodies :
b) Velocity of centre of mass is constant Ø When two particles approach each other due to
r their mutual interaction, then they always meet at
vcm = constant
r their centre of mass.
c) Linear momentum of the system is constant p cm = Ø To a system of particles m1(x1y1), m2(x2y2)
constant. It is called the law of conservation another particle of mass m3 is added so that
of linear momentum. centre of mass shifts to the origin then coordinates
Characteristics of centre of mass of third particle are
Ø Centre of mass of a system of particles depends (m1 x1 + m 2 x2 ) − ( m1 y1 + m2 y2 )
on mass of particles and their relative positions. x3 = − m3 ; y3 = m3
Ø For continuous distribution of mass, centre of mass
depends on mass distribution and shape of the Ø In a system of two particles of masses m1 and m2 ,
body. when m1 is pushed towards m2 through a distance
Ø Sum of moments of masses about centre of mass
r r d then shift in m2 towards m1 without altering CM
is zero i.e., ∑ mi r i = 0 −m1
i
Ø Centre of mass is independent on frame of position is m d .
2
reference chosen to locate it. Ø A boy of mass m is at one end of a flat boat of
Ø Mass need not be present at centre of mass.
Ø The motion of centre of mass is purely translational. mass M and length l which floats stationary on
Ø The motion of centre of mass is according to water. If boy moves to the other end,
Newton’s 2nd law. i) The boat moves in opposite direction through
Ø Examples for the motion of centre of mass ml
a distance d = ( M + m )
(a) When a bomb at rest at origin of x,y,z-coordinate
system explodes due to internal forces into many ii) The displacement of boy with respect to ground
fragments. These fragments fly off randomly with − Ml
is d = ( M + m )
1
different velocities in different directions. But CM
is not effected and remains at rest at the origin. Ø
r r r
A boy of mass m is standing on a flat boat floating
∴ i∑ mi r i = 0 , where r is position vector of th
i i
stationary on the surface of water. If the boy starts
particle about origin. moving on the boat with velocity Vr with respect
(b) A bomb is projected on the ground to follow to boat, then
parabolic path. When it explodes during the motion
NARAYANAGROUP 5
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
− mVr centre of mass of remaining part shifts by a distance
i) Velocity of the boat w.r.t. ground is V = ,
M +m −r 2 d
‘ − ’ indicates boat moves in opposite direction to R2 − r 2
where ‘d’ is the distance of the C.M. of
the velocity of the boy. the removed part from the centre of the original
MVr disc. In this case the circular sheet is removed from
ii)Velocity of boy w.r.t. ground is V =
1
M +m the edge of disc, then the shift in centre of mass is
WE-13: A 10kg boy standing in a 40kg boat maximum. Here d = R − r .
floating on water is 20m from the shore of the
river. If he moves 8 metres on the boat towards −r 2 d
the shore, then how far is he from the shore Maximum shift ∆x =
R+r
now?
Sol.Mass of the boy (m)=10kg Mass of the boat Ø From a uniform solid sphere of radius R, if a sphere
(M)=40kg Distance travelled by boy (l)=8m of radius ‘r’, is removed, then the centre of mass
Distance travelled by the boat in opposite direction
−r 3d
=
ml
=
10 × 8
M + m 10 + 40
= 1.6 m ( )
of the remaining part shifts by ∆x = R 3 − r 3 ,
Distance of the boy from the shore is where ‘d’ is the distance of the CM of removed
(20-8)+(1.6) = 13.6m part from the centre of the original sphere. In this
Shift in centre of mass in different cases: case spherical cavity is made at the edge of large
Shift is the distance of final location of centre of sphere, then shift in C.M. is maximum. It is given by
mass of the system from its initial location. Shift in
the centre of mass generally occurs due to −r 3 ( R − r ) d
a) Addition of matter b) Removal of matter ∆x = (R 3
−r 3
) .
c) Change in shape d) Change in mass distribution
Ø To a circular disc of radius R 1 another disc of
Ø a) Addition of mass : Due to addition of mass, radius R2 and of the same material is added then
the C.M of a system generally shifts towards or into shift in the CM is
the region where mass is added. If C1 is the CM
2
before addition and C2 is the CM of added mass R2 (R 1 + R 2 ) d
∆x = 2 2
and C1 C2 = d , then R1 + R 2
madded × d Ø If two spheres of same material and radii r1 and r2
∆X shift =
minitial + madded are kept in contact, distance of centre of mass from
CM shifts towards the side of added mass the centre of the first sphere is equal to
Ø b) Removal of mass : Due to removal of mass,
the C.M of a system shifts away from the region r23 d
where mass is removed. If C1 is the CM of the ∆x = r 3 + r 3 ( r1 + r2 ) .
1 2
body before removal and C2 is the CM of the
Similarly distance of centre of mass from the centre
removed part and C1C2 = d then
r13
−mremoved × d of the second sphere is ∆x = 3 3 ( r1 + r2 ) .
∆X shift =
r1 + r2
M initial − mremoved Ø The location of CM of system depends on the
‘ − ’ indicates CM shifts opposite to the side of mass distribution within the system. Due to this
removed mass the location of CM changes whenever the shape
Ø From a uniform circular disc of radius R, if a of system changes and also the relative positions
circular sheet of radius ‘r’ is removed, then the of particles change.
6 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
WE-14: A circular disc of radius R is removed imagine a small element of radius ‘r’ and thickness
from a bigger circular disc of radius 2R such ‘dx’ at a distance x from ‘O’. Mass of small
that the circumferences of the discs touch. element, dm = (π r 2 ) dx ρ . From figure,
The centre of mass of the new disc is at a
distance α R from the centre of the bigger
disc. The value of α is [E-2011]
Sol. dx
r R
O x O'
cm
x
αR h
O1
O2 O
r x Rx
= ⇒ r=
R h h
∫ dm x = ∫ (π r ρ dx ) x
h
2
R
xCM = 0
∫ dm ∫ π r dx ρ
h
2
2R
0
π (R ) M
2 h
M x4
mass of cutoff portion m = = h R x h4
2 2
π (2R ) 4 and ∫0 h2 x dx ∫0 x3 dx = 4 0 = 4 = 3h
2 h
= = h 3 h h3
position of its centre of mass, OO1 = R hence, 2 2
4
∫0 h 2 dx ∫0 x dx 3 0 3
h R x 2 x
for remaining part (new disc)
M Therefore, centre of mass of cone is at a
M ×0− × R
=αR = 4 R 1 3h
xCM
M = − ⇒α = − distance from vertex on its line of symmetry..
M − 3 3 4
4
WE-16: If the linear density of a rod of length L
Methods to locate CM:
Locating the Centre of Mass can be done in four varies as λ = A + Bx , find the position of its
different ways. They are, centre of mass.
1) Method of symmetry Sol. Let the x-axis be along the length of the rod and
2) Method of Decomposition origin at one of its ends. As rod is along x-axis, for
3) Method using theorems of Pappus’s all points on it y and z coordinates are zero.
4) Method of integration y
Ø For continuous distribution of mass, the co-
ordinates of centre of mass are given by x
x cm =
∫ xdm ; y =
∫ ydm ; z =
∫ zdm O X
.
∫ dm ∫ dm ∫ dm
cm cm
dx
WE-15: Distance of centre of mass of a uniform L
cone of height ‘h’ and base radius R, from z
3h Centre of mass will be on the rod. Now consider
the vertex on the line of symmetry is . an element of rod of length dx at a distance x
4
Sol. Consider a cone of height ‘h’ base radius ‘R’ and from the origin, then dm = λ dx = ( A + Bx ) dx
density ρ . To find centre of mass of the cone
NARAYANAGROUP 7
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
another block (GH) is placed below the three
∫ x dm = ∫ x ( A + Bx ) dx
L L
blocks in equilibrium, then
xCM = 0 0
∫ dm ∫ ( A + Bx ) dx
L L
B c1 A
0 0
D c2 C l
AL2 BL3 F
+ E l
3 = 3 AL + 2 BL = L ( 3 A + 2 BL ) 2
2
xCM = 2 x2
BL2 3 ( 2 A + BL ) 3 ( 2 A + BL ) H G 4
AL +
2 The centre of mass (C3) of the upper three block
WE-17: Identical blocks each of mass M and must lie on the edge of the lower fourth
length L are placed one above the other such block i.e. at G. To find x3 consider E as origin.
that each extends out by a maximum length l
as shown in figure. Find the maximum 2M (0 ) + M
x3 = 2 = l ∴ x3 =
l
extension of the n th block from the top, so that
3M 6 6
the blocks will not fall.
l l
similarly x4 = , x5 = ,........
8 10
l
for nth block xn =
Sol. For a two block system, the centre of mass (C1) 2n
of upper block should be at the edge of lower block Note-1: When the above blocks are arranged in such a
l manner, that each block projects out by same
i.e. at distance. But if centre of mass of upper
2 distance, so that the blocks will not fall then the
block is not resting on the lower block then, the distance of projection of each block from the edge
upper block falls down because of unbalanced
l
torque created by gravitational force. of its bottom block is .
n
B A
c1
l
l x=
D C
x n
2
x
If a third block (EF) is arranged below the two
blocks then Note-2: If the entire system is placed at the edge of a
table, so that the blocks will not fall then the equal
B c1 A distance of projection of each block from the edge
D c2
C l l
x of its bottom block is
F E 2 2 n +1
The centre of mass (C2) of (AB) and (CD) block
system must lie on the edge E of third block.
To find x2 consider C as origin. Then x
c x
l
M (0) + M x
x2 = 2 = l Table
2M 4
l
x2 = So, centre of mass of upper two blocks is
4
l
at distance from edge of lower block. Also, if
4
8 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
POSITION OF CENTRE OF
S.No SHAPE OF THE BODY FIGURE
MASS
1 Circular ring At the centre of the ring
C
2 Circular disc At the centre of the disc
C
Thin uniform straight
3 At the geometric centre A C B
rod
4 Triangular plate At the centroid
C
At the point of intersection
5 Square plate
of the diagonals C
At the point of intersection
6 Rectangular plate
of the diagonals C
Hollow or solid
7 At the centre of the sphere
sphere C
At a height of h/3 , from the base
8 Hollow cone h
C h
3
h
Solid cone oc =
At a height of h/4 from the base h 4
9 or
Pyramid C
O
Solid (or) hollow At the mid-point of its own C l
10 cylinder axis
L
OC =
O 2
NARAYANAGROUP 9
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
POSITION OF CENTRE OF
S.No SHAPEOF THEBODY FIGURE
MASS
R
2R a C
sin
11 An arc of radius R At a distance of
subtending an angle a 2 α
α at its centre
of curvature from its centre of curvature x x
O
on the axis of symmetry 2R a
OC = sin
a 2
2R
At a distance of from its R
i)A semi-circle of p
radius ‘R’ C 2R
centre on the axis of π OC=
symmetry O p
4R C
At a distance of from
ii) A quadrant of a p 2
circle of radius ‘R’ R
its centre ‘o’ on the axis of π/4 4R
symmetry OC=
O p 2
4R R
At a distance of from its
3p C 4R
12 Semi-circular disc OC=
centre ‘o’ on the axis of O 3p
symmetry
3R
At a distance of from its R
Solid hemi-sphere 8
13 C 3R
centre ‘o’ on the axis of
o OC =
symmetry 8
R
Hollow hemi-sphere At a distance of from its R
14 (or) 2
C R
Hemi-spherical shell centre ‘o’ on the axis of OC =
symmetry o 2
At its centre within the
15 Horse-shoe magnet boundary limits C
At a distance of
semi-Circular 4 R12 + R1R2 + R22
16 OC = C
annular plate 3p (R1 + R2 ) R2 R1
O
from its centre of symmetry
10 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
Ø Method of decomposition: WE-19: A thin rod of length L is lying along
In this method C.M of a body or a system can be X-axis with its ends at x=0 and x=L. Its linear
determined by decomposing it structurally into small n
x
units of geometrically symmetrical parts. Some density (mass/length) varies with x as k ,
examples are as follows L
where n can be zero or any positive number. If
= + the position x of the centre of mass of the rod
a) is plotted against n, which of the following
graphs best approximates the
dependence of X on n? [AIEEE-2008]
XCM XCM
L L
b) = + 1) L 2) L
2 2
o n o n
In this method each part is considered as a point
object, hence the system will be converted into the
system of n particles. Now the coordinates of CM XCM XCM
of system w.r.t. some reference point are L L
1
mi xi ; yCM = ∑ mi yi and zCM = ∑ mi zi
1 1
xCM = ∑
M i M i M i
3) L 4) L
WE-18: A uniform piece of metal sheet is cut in 2 2
o n o n
the form as shown in the fig. Locate the center
L K
∫
of mass of the piece. n
n x xdx L ( n + 1)
Y
X CM =
∫ = L
xdm 0
=
Sol.
∫ dm L K
∫0 Ln x dx
n n+2
30
20 L
If n =0, then X CM =
10
2
As n increases, the centre of mass shift away from
20 10 20 30 X L
Y x= towards x = L which only option (1) is
2
satisfying.
30 Rigid body: If there is no relative motion between
3
20 any two particles of the body along the line joining
Sol. them by the application of external force,then that
10 1 2 body is called rigid body.
Ø No real body is truly rigid, since real bodies deform
0 10 20 30 X
Let the mass per unit area be σ .We divide the under the influence of external forces.
structure into parts 1,2 and 3.The mass of part-1 is Types of motion of a rigid body
300σ , mass of part-2 is 200σ and that of part-3is Ø Translational motion : All particles of the
100σ . The coordinates of centre of mass of part1 body move in parallel paths such that displacements
are (5, 15); that of part 2 are (20, 5); and that of of all the particles are same as that of the body
part-3 are (15,25). then its motion is said to be translational.
( 300σ ) 5 + ( 200σ ) 20 + (100σ )15 Ø Rotational motion :A body is said to be in
X = ≈ 11.7
600σ
cm
pure rotation if every particle of the body moves in
Yc m =
(300σ )15 + ( 200σ ) 5 + (100σ ) 25 ≈ 13.3 a circle with same angular velocity and the centers
600σ of all the particles lie on a straight line called the
In vector notation rc m = 11.7iˆ + 13.3 ˆj axis of rotation.
NARAYANAGROUP 11
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø Rolling motion : The combination of rotational θ t t
∫ dθ = ∫ ωdt = ∫ (ω0 + at − bt ) dt
4 3
and translational motion with regard to certain
constraints is called rolling motion. 0 0 0
Kinematics of rotational motion about at 5 bt 4
a fixed axis: ⇒ θ = ω 0t + −
5 4
Ø The kinematic equations for rotational motion with
uniform angular acceleration
Moment of force (Torque)
Ø Torque is the turning effect of a force about a fixed
1
1) ω = ω0 + α t 2) θ = ω0t + α t 2 point.
2 Ø Magnitude of the torque is given as the product of
1 magnitude of force and perpendicular distance of
3) ω 2 = ω02 + 2αθ 4) θ n = ωo + α n −
2 line of action of a force from the fixed point.
r
WE-20: The motor of an engine is rotating about τ = F ( r sin θ ) ⇒ τr = rr × F
its axis with angular velocity of 120 rpm.It
comes to rest in 10s, after being switched off. S.I. Unit: Nm Dimensional formula: ML2 T − 2 .
Assuming constant deceleration, calculate the z
number of revolutions made by it before
coming to rest.
Sol. Here n = 120 rpm = 2rps
τ
ω0 = 2π n = 4π rad s −1 ; ω = 0 and t = 10s
ω = ω0 + α t F
P θ
0 = 4π + α × 10 or α = −0.4π rads −2
r
Also, the angle covered by the motor,
O y
1
θ = ω0t + α t 2 rs
2 in
θ
1
∴ θ = 4π ×10 + × ( −0.4π ) ×102 = 40π − 20π = 20π rad
2
x
Hence, the number of revolutions completed, Application: A force of given magnitude applied
θ 20π at right angles to the door at its outer edge is most
N= = = 10
2π 2π effective in producing rotation.
WE-21: A wheel rotates with an angular Ø The moment of a force vanishes if either the
acceleration given by α = 4at 3 − 3bt 2 ,where t is magnitude of the force is zero, or if the line of action
the time and a and b are constants. If the wheel of the force passes through the fixed point.
Ø If the direction of F is reversed, the direction of
has initial angular speed ω0 , write the the moment of force is also reversed.
equations for the (a) angular speed (b) angular Ø If directions of both r and F are reversed, the
displacement direction of the moment of force remains the same.
dω Sign convention : Torque that produces anti
Sol. (a) Since α = ⇒ dω = α dt
clockwise rotation is taken as positive and
dt
Integrating both sides, we get clockwise rotation taken as negative.
ω t t WE-22: A particle is projected at time t=0 from a
∫ d ω = ∫ α dt = ∫ ( 4 at − 3bt 2 ) dt point ‘O’ with a speed ‘u’ at an angle ‘ θ ’ to
3
ω0 0 0
horizontal. Find the torque of a gravitational
4
t t3 force on projectile about the origin at time
ω − ω0 = 4a − 3b ⇒ ω = ω0 + at 4 − bt 3 ‘t’.(x, y plane is vertical plane)
4 3
r
$ 1 2$
(b) Since ω =
dθ
⇒ dθ = ω dt Sol. r = ( u cos θ ) t i + ( u sin θ ) t − gt j
2
dt ur r r ur
On integrating both sides, we get F = − ( mg ) $j ; τ = r×F
12 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
y If the total torque on the rigid body is zero, the
total angular momentum of the body does not
u
change with time.
Ø The rotational equilibrium condition is independent
of the location of the origin about which the torques
are taken.
o θ x Principle of moments:
r
2
( )
τ = ( u cos θ ) t $i + ( u sin θ ) t − gt 2 $j × mg − $j
1 Ø An ideal lever is essentially a light rod pivoted at a
point along its length. This point is called the fulcrum.
r
( )
τ = ( u cos θ ) t ( mg ) $i × − $j
Two forces F1 and F2 , parallel to each other and
usually perpendicular to the lever act on the lever
τ = −mg ( u cos θ ) t ( k$ ) at distances d1 and d 2 respectively from the
fulcrum. Ν is directed opposite to the forces F1
Moment of couple:
A pair of equal and opposite forces with different and F2 . (N = Reaction at fulcrum) For translational
lines of action is known as a couple. A couple equilibrium. N – F1 – F2 = 0
produces rotation without translation. If an object N
is not on pivot (unconstrained) a couple causes the
d1 d2
object to rotate about its centre of mass.
F F2
F1
Ø For rotational equilibrium take the moments about
the fulcrum; the sum of moments must be zero,
d1 F1 − d 2 F2 = 0
d
N acts at the fulcrum itself and has zero moment
F about the fulcrum.
This couple can produce turning effect (or) torque
Ø In the case of the lever force F1 is usually some
on the body. Moment of couple is a measure of
weight to be lifted. It is called the load and its distance
turning effect (τ ) . from the fulcrum d1 is called the load arm. Force
∴τ = moment of couple=magnitude of either force F2 is the effort applied to lift the load; distance d 2 of
× perpendicular distance between the forces the effort from the fulcrum is the effort arm.
∴τ = Fd Principle of moments for a lever
Mechanical Equilibrium of a rigid body: Load arm x load = effort arm x effort
Ø A rigid body is said to be in mechanical equilibrium, Mechanical advantage :
if both its linear momentum and angular momentum Ø The ratio F1 / F2 is called the Mechanical
are not changing with time, or equivalently, body Advantage
has neither linear acceleration nor angular F d
acceleration. M . A. = 1 = 2
F2 d1
Condition for translational equilibrium
Ø The vector sum of the forces, on the rigid body is If the effort arm d 2 is larger than the load arm, the
r r r n r mechanical advantage is greater than one. It means
zero; F1 + F2 + .... + Fn = ∑ Fi = 0 that a small effort can be used to lift a large load.
i =1
WE-23: PQR is a rigid equilateral triangle frame
If the total force on the body is zero, then the total
linear momentum of the body does not change with of a side length ‘L’. Forces F1 , F2 and F3 are
time. P= constant acting along PQ, QR, PR. If the system is in
Condition for rotational equilibrium : rotational equilibrium find the relation
Ø The vector sum of the torques on the rigid body is between the forces.
Sol.Perpendicular distance of any force from centroid
r r r n
r
τ +
zero, 1 2τ + τ
..... n = ∑τi = 0
i =1
‘C’ of triangle is L / 2 3 . The forces F1 , F2
produce anti-clockwise turning effect where as F3
NARAYANAGROUP 13
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
clockwise turning effect about ‘C’. ∴N1 = f and N2 = W
F2
Taking torque about ‘B’ ; N1 (AO) = W (CB)
R
AB
N1 (AB) cos530 = W sin 53
0
2
C 2
Q N1 = W and N2 = W = 10 × 9.8 = 98 N.
P 3
F3 F1
2
Since the system is in rotational equilibrium the total The frictional force is f = N1 = W= 65 N
torque acting on the system about the centroid is zero 3
Toppling:
L L L
F1 × + F2 × − F3 × =0 N N
2 3 2 3 2 3 B D F D F
B
Hence F1 + F2 − F3 = 0 ;∴ F3 = F1 + F2 C E b C a
WE-24: A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge f A f A E b
at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5g
are put one on top of the other at the 12cm
mark, the stick is found to be balanced at W=mg
45cm.What is the mass of the metre stick? W=mg
C N
B D F
C a
f A E b
Sol.
R
10g
mg W=mg
Since the stick is in rotational equilibrium, the total Suppose a force F is applied at a height b above
torque of all the forces about the resultant ‘R’ is the base AE of the block.Further , suppose the
zero. Taking the turning effects about the point of friction ‘f’ is sufficient to prevent sliding.In this case
action of the resultant R we have
if the normal reaction N also passes through C then
10 g × 33 = mg × 5; m = 66 g despite the fact that the block is in translational
WE-25:A uniform ladder of mass 10 Kg leans equilibrium (F = f and N = mg) an unbalanced
against a smooth vertical wall making an torque(due to the couple of forces F and f ) is
angle 530 with it.The other end rests on a there.This torque has tendency to topple the block
rough horizontal floor.Find the normal force about point E. To cancel the effect of this
and the frictional force that the floor exerts
on the ladder. unbalanced torque the normal reaction N is shifted
Sol. The ladder is in equilibrium. towards right a distance ‘a’ such that, net anti clock
wise torque is equal to the net clock wise torque.
Fb
Fb = mg(a) ⇒ a = mg
N1 A Now, as F (or) b (or) both are increased distance
a also increases. But it can not go beyond the right
N2 edge of the block. So in extreme case the normal
reaction passes through E. Now if F or b are further
increased, the block will topple down.This is why
W the block having the broader base has less chances
of toppling in comparison to a block of smaller base.
B f C O
14 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
WE-26: A uniform cylinder of height h and radius WE-28: A force F is applied on the top of a cube as
r is placed with its circular face on a rough shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction
inclined plane and the inclination of the between the cube and the ground is µ . If F is
plane to the horizontal gradually increased. gradually increased, find the value of µ for
If µ is the coefficient of friction, then under which the cube will topple before sliding.
what conditions the cylinder will
(a) slide before toppling F
a
(b) topple before sliding P
N
f=µN f
mg
Sol. Let m be the mass of the cube and ‘a’ be the side
Sol. of the cube.
Mg cos θ The cube will slide if F > µmg ---------(1)
Mg sin θ θ
Mg and it will topple if torque of F about P is greater
than torque of ‘mg’ about P i.e,
(a) The cylinder will slide if a 1
Mg sin θ > µ Mg cosθ ⇒ tanθ > µ .....(1) Fa > mg or F > mg -----------(2)
The cylinder will topple if 2 2
h 2r
( Mg sin θ ) > ( Mg cos θ ) r ⇒ tan θ > ...(2) From equations (1) and (2) we see that cube will
2 h 1
Thus, the condition of sliding is tanθ > µ and topple before sliding if µ > .
2
2r Moment of inertia [Rotational Inertia]:
condition of toppling is tan θ > . Hence, the Ø A body at rest cannot start rotating itself or a rotating
h
2r body cannot stop rotating on its own. Hence, a
cylinder will slide before toppling if µ < body has inertia of rotational motion.
h
Ø The quantity measuring the inertia of rotational
2r
(b) The cylinder will topple before sliding if µ > motion is known as moment of inertia.
h Ø Moment of inertia of a particle of mass m is
WE-27: A uniform cube of side a and mass m rests
on a rough horizontal table. A horizon tal force I = mr 2
F is applied normal to one of the face at a Where r = perpendicular distance of particle from
point directly above the centre of the face, at axis of rotation.
3a S.I unit: kgm 2 ; Its D.F - ML2
a height above the base.What is the
4
Dimensional formula : ML
2
minimum value of F for which the cube begins
to topple about an edge? Ø Moment of inertia of a group or system of particles
Sol. In the limiting case normal reaction will pass through
O. The cube will topple about O if torque of F is I = m1r12 + m2 r2 2 + .........mn rn 2 I = Σmr 2
exceeds the torque of mg. Where m1, m2 ..........mn are masses of particles
N
and r1, r2 ............rn are their perpendicular
a distances from axis of rotation.
2
3a
F Ø Moment of Inertia in rotational motion is
4 analogous(similar) to mass in translatory motion.
O Ø Moment of Inertia of a rigid body depends on the
mg following three factors.
3a a 2 a) mass of the body b) position of axis of rotation
⇒ F > mg ; ⇒ F > mg c) Nature of distribution of mass.
4
2 3
Note-1: Moment of inertia of a rotating rigid body is
2 independent of its angular velocity.
So, the minimum value of F is mg
3 Note-2: Moment of inertia of a metallic body depends
on its temperature.
NARAYANAGROUP 15
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
WE-29: Four holes of radius R are cut from a thin Perpendicular axes theorem
square plate of the side 4R and mass M in XY Statement: It states that the moment of inertia of
plane as shown. Then moment of inertia of a plane lamina about an axis perpendicular to its
the remaining portion about z-axis is plane is equal to the sum of its moments of inertia
Sol. M is the mass of the square plate before cutting about two mutually perpendicular axes concurrent
the holes. with perpendicular axis and lying in the plane of the
M π body.
Mass of one hole m = 2
π R2 = M z
16 R 16
Planar Body
R R
O N
R X
R M
P(x,y)
moment of inertia of remaining portion Y Iz = Ix + Iy
I = Isquare − 4Ihole
Ø This theorem is applicable to bodies which are
mR 2
+ m ( 2R2 )
M
I= 16R 2 + 16R 2 − 4 planar.
12 2 Ø This theorem applies to flat bodies whose thickness
is very small compared to their other dimensions.
8 8 10π
= MR 2 − 10mR 2 = − MR
2
3 3 16 Ø K z = K x2 + K y2
Radius of Gyration(K): Radius of gyration WE-30: Two identical rods each of mass M and
of a rigid body about an axis of rotation is distance length L are joined in cross position as shown
in figure. The moment of inertia of a system
between the axis of rotation and a point at which about a bisector would be.
the whole mass of the body can be supposed to be B1 B2
concentrated so that its moment of inertia would
be the same with the actual distribution of mass.
Ø Moment of inertia of a rigid body of mass M is
I = MK 2
Where K = radius of gyration
Sol. Moment of inertia of a system about an axis which
r + r + ............. + r
2 2 n is perpendicular to plane of rods and passing
K= 1 2 n
through the common centre of rods
n
ML2 ML2 ML2
Where n is total number of particles in the body Iz = + =
12 12 6
and r1 , r2 .............rn are their perpendicular Again from perpendicular axes theorem
distances from axis of rotation. I z = I B1 + I B2 = 2I B1 = 2 I B2 as I B1 = I B2
S.I unit: metre CGS unit: cm
I Z ML2
Dimensional formula: M LT ∴ I B1 = I B2 = =
0 0
2 12
Note: K is not the distance of centre of mass of body
Parallel axes theorem:
from the axis considered. Statement: The moment of inertia of a body about
Ø Radius of gyration of a rigid body depends on an axis is equal to the sum of the moment of inertia
the following two factors of the body about a parallel axis passing through
a)Position of axis of rotation. its centre of gravity and the product of its mass and
b)Nature of distribution of mass. the square of the distance between the two parallel
axes.
16 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
I IG WE-33: Find the moment of inertia of a thin
uniform rod about an axis perpendicular to
its length and passing through a point which
l
M is at a distance of from one end. Also find
a 3
I = IG + Ma 2 G radius of gyration about that axis.
l
Sol. i) Let P be the point at a distance from one end.
3
l l l
Ø This theorem is applicable to a body of any shape. It is at a distance of − = from the centre
2 3 6
Ø K = KG2 + a 2 as shown in the figure.
WE-31: The moment of inertia of a rod of length l I l Ic
l about an axis passing through its centre of 3 6
mass and perpendicular to rod is I. The
moment of inertia of hexagonal shape formed P C
by six such rods, about an axis pass ing
through its centre of mass and perpen dicular
to its plane will be l
Sol. M.I. of rod AB about its centre and perpen
2
ml 2 By parallel axes theorem I = I C + Mr 2
dicular to length = = I ⇒ ml 2 = 12I
12 2
Ml 2 l Ml 2
A l B = +M =
x 12 6 9
I Ml 2 l
ii) The radius of gyration, K = = =
M 9M 3
WE-34: A uniform cylinder has radius R and
Now moment of inertia of rod about the axis which
is passing through O and perpendicular to the plane length L. If the moment of inertia of this
of hexagon cylinder about an axis passing through its
centre and normal to its circular face is mg
ml 2
Irod = + mx 2 [ from parallel axes theorem ] equal to the moment of inertia of the same
12 cylinder about an axis passing through its
2
ml 2 3 5ml 2 centre and normal to its length, then
= +m l = Sol. Moment of inertia of a cylinder about an axis passing
12 2 6
MR 2
Now moment of inertia of system through centre and normal to circular face =
I system = 6 × I rod = 5ml 2 = 5 ×12 I = 60 I 2
Moment of inertia of a cylinder about an axis
WE-32: The radius of gyration of a body about an passing through centre and normal to its length
axis at a distance of 12cm from its centre of
L2 R 2
mass is 13cm. Find its radius of gyration about =M +
a parallel axis through its centre of mass. 12 4
Sol. By parallel axes theorem
MR 2 L2 R 2
M (13 ) = I 0 + M (12 )
2 2
But 2 = M +
12 4
I 0 = M (132 − 12 2 ) = M ( 25 ) R 2 L2 R 2 R 2 L2
= + ⇒ = ;
Its radius of gyration about a parallel axes through 2 12 4 4 12
I0 ∴ L = 3R
its centre of mass K = = 25 = 5cm
M
NARAYANAGROUP 17
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
WE-35: A metal piece of mass 120g is stretched to WE-38: A rod PQ of mass ‘m’ and length L is rotated
form a plane rectangular sheet of area of cross about an axis through ‘P’ as shown in figure.
section 0.54m 2 . If length and breadth of this Find the moment of inertia of the rod about
the axis of rotation.
sheet are in the ratio 1:6, find its moment of Sol. Consider a small element ‘dx’ of the rod which is at
inertia about an axis passing through its a distance ‘x’ from the end ‘P’. If ‘ θ ’ is the
centre and perpendicular to its plane. inclination of rod w.r.t the axis of rotation, the radius
Sol.Mass M=120g = 120 × 10−3 kg of the circle in which the element rotates is given
b b r
Area = lb = 0.54m 2 ⇒ ⇒ .b = 0.54 Q l = by sin θ = ⇒ r = x sin θ
6 6 x
b 2 = 0.54 × 6 ⇒ b = 3.24 = 1.8m Q
M ( l 2 + b2 )
I= = 33.3 × 10−3 kgm 2
12
WE-36: The moment of inertia of HCl molecule θ dx
about an axis passing through its centre of x
mass and perpendicular to the line joining the P
H+ and Cl − ions will be (if the inter atomic
distance is 1A0 ).
Sol. r = 1A0 = 10−10 m ; m1 = 1amu ; m2 = 35.5amu
mm M.I. of the element about the axis of rotation is
Reduced mass µ = m + m = 0.9726 amu
1 2
1 2
dI = dm.r 2
≅ 1.624 × 10 −27 kg Q 1 amu = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg m
where dm is the mass of element dm = dx
Moment of inertia about an axis passing through L
m
dx ( x sin θ ) . Total M.I. of the rod is given
centre of mass of two particle system and
dI =
2
perpendicular to the line joining them is L
I = µ r 2 = 1.624 × 10−47 kg m 2 m mL2
by I= ∫ dI = ∫0
L
WE-37:Four solid spheres each of diameter 2a and sin 2 θ x 2 dx , I = sin 2 θ
L 3
mass m are placed with their centers on the
four corners of a square of side b.Calculate WE-39: Two uniform circular discs, each of mass
the moment of inertia of the system about any 1kg and radius 20cm, are kept in contact about
side of the square. the tangent passing through the point of
1 contact. Find the moment of inertia of the
system about the tangent passing through the
point of contact.
4 3 A
Sol.
1 2
a Sol.
b
1
2 2
B
I1 = ma 2 ; I 2 = ma 2 + mb 2 Mass M = 1kg, r = 20 × 10−2 m
5 5
MR 2 5MR 2
2
I 3 = ma 2 + mb 2 ;
2
I 4 = ma 2 I1 = + MR 2 =
5 5 4 4
Moment of Inertia of the system 5MR 2
Similarly I 2 = , I = I1 + I 2
I = I1 + I 2 + I 3 + I 4 4
10 MR 2 10 × 1× ( 20 × 10 )
2 2 2 2 2 2 −2 2
= ma + ma + mb 2 + ma 2 + mb2 + ma 2 ∴I = = = 0.1kgm 2
5 5 5 5
4 4
8
I = ma 2 + 2mb 2
5
18 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
WE-40: Two solid sphere ( A and B) are made of
metals of different densities ρ A and ρ B 30
0
respectively. If their masses are equal, the ratio R
of their moments of inertia (IA / IB) about their
respective diameter is [E-2007 ]
Sol. As two solid spheres are equal in masses, so
11M 2 11
1
4 4 RA ρ B 3
mA = mB ⇒ π R 3
ρ
A A = π R 3
ρ
B B ⇒ = M.I.of incomplete ring I = R = MR 2
3 3 RB ρ A 12 12
The moment of inertia of sphere about diameter Note: If a sector of mass m, rotates about its natural
2 2
2 I R I ρ 3 axis then its M.I. is mR 2
I = mR 2 ⇒ A = A ⇒ A = B WE-45: A thin wire of length l having density ρ is
5 I B RB IB ρA
bent into a circular loop with C as its
WE-41:The moment of inertia of a then circular centre, as shown in figure. The moment of
disc about an axis passing through its center inertia of the loop about the line AB is
and perpendicular to its plane is I. Then, the [E-2014]
moment of inertia of the disc about an axis 2
3 3 l 3ρ l 3
Sol. I = MR = × l ρ ×
2
parallel to its diameter and touching the edge =
of the rim is [E-2008 ] 2 2 2π 8π 2
WE-46:For the given uniform square lamina
MR 2
Sol. I = ⇒ MR 2 = 2 I ABCD,whose centre is O.Its moment of inertia
2 about an axis AD is equal to how many times
M.I. of the disc about tangent in a plane its moment of inertia about an axis EF ?
5 5 [AIEEE-2007]
= MR 2 = I F
4 2 D C
WE-42: The moment of inertia of a disc, of mass
M and radius R, about an axis which is a
tangent and parallel to its diameter is [E-2010] A
Sol. About the tangent parallel to the diameter
MR 2 5 A E B
I = I g + MR2 = + MR 2 = MR
2
1) 2 I AC = I EF 2) I AD = 3I EF
4 4
WE-43: Two solid spheres A and B each of radius 3) I AC = 4 I EF 4) I AC = 2 I EF
R are made of materials of densities ρ A and
Sol. I EF = I GH ( dueto symmetry )
ρ B respectively. Their moments of inertia
about a diameter are I A and I B respectively. The I AC = I BD ( dueto symmetry )
value of IA/IB is [E-2012] I AC + I BD = I 0
4
π R3 ρ A ⇒ 2 I AC = I 0 -------(1)
IA 3 ρ
= = A and I EF + I GH = I 0
π R3 ρ B ρ B
Sol. I B 4
3 ⇒ 2 I EF = I 0 --------(2)
WE-44: From a complete ring of mass M and radius From Eqs (1) and (2), we get
R, an arc m aking 300 at centre is removed.
What is the moment of inertia of the I AC = I EF
incomplete ring about an axis passing md 2 md 2 md 2
through the centre of the ring and perpen ∴ I AD = I E F + = +
4 12 4
dicular to the plane of the ring.
md 2
I AD = = 4 I EF
Sol. Mass of incomplete ring = M − M × π = 11M 3
2π 6 12
NARAYANAGROUP 19
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Moment of inertia of some regular rigid bodies
Rigid Body Axis of Rotation Moment of Radius of
Inertia ( I ) Gyration ( K )
1)Circular 1) ^r to the plane of ring and passing
ring through its centre MR 2 R
of mass M
and radius
R. 2) ^r to the plane of ring and passing through
its rim 2MR 2 2R
(or) passing through any tangent ^r to
the plane of ring
3) In the plane of the ring and passing through its
centre
(or) passing through any diameter of ring MR 2 / 2 R/ 2
4)In the plane of the ring and passing through its edge
(or) passing through any tangent of ring in its plane. 3MR 2 / 2 3/ 2R
1) ^r to the plane of plate and passing through its centre MR 2 / 2 R/ 2
2) ^r to the plane of plate and passing through its edge 3MR 2 / 2 3/ 2R
2 ) T h i n (or ) passing through any tangent ^r to its plane.
circular plate
of mass M 3)In the plane of plate and passing through its centre
and radius R (or) passing through any diameter of plate MR 2 / 4 R/2
4)In the plane of the plate and passing through its edge
(or) passing through any tangent of plate in its plane. 5MR 2 / 4 5R / 2
3 ) T h i n
h o l l o w 1)Passing through its centre or any diameter 2MR 2 / 3 2R / 3
sphere of 2) Passing through any tangent 5MR 2 / 3 5R / 3
mass M and
radius R
4)Solid 1)Passing through its centre or any diameter 2MR 2 / 5 2R / 5
sphere 2) Passing through any tangent 7MR 2 / 5 7R / 5
of mass M
and radius R
5)
Thin uniform 1) ^ to the length of rod and passing through its centre ML2 /12
r
L/2 3
rod of mass
M and 2) ^r to the length of rod and passing through its end ML2 / 3 L/ 3
length L
20 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
Moment of inertia of some regular rigid bodies
Rigid Body Axis of Rotation Moment of Radius of
Inertia ( I ) Gyration ( K )
M 2 L2 + B2
1) ^ to the plane and passing through its centre
r (L + B2 )
12 2 3
6)Thin
uniform M 2 L2 + B2
rectangular 2) ^r to the plane of plate and passing through a corner (L + B2 )
3 3
plate
of mass M
Length L and 3)In the plane of plate ^r to breadth and passing through
Breadth B. centre of plate . MB2 /12 B/2 3
4)In the plane of plate ^r to breadth and passing through
edge of plate MB2 / 3 B/ 3
5)In the plane of plate ^r to length and passing through
centre of plate. ML2 /12 L/2 3
6)In the plane of plate ^r to length and passing through
edge of plate ML2 / 3 L/ 3
1) ^r to the plane of plate and passing through its centre ML2 / 6 L/ 6
7)Thin square
plate of mass 2) ^ to the plane of plate and passing through a corner 2ML2 / 3
r
2L / 3
M and side
length L. 3)In the plane of plate parallel to any side and passing
through centre of plate ML2 /12 L/2 3
4)In the plane of plate and passing through any two
opposite corners ML2 /12 L/2 3
1) About geometrical or natural axis MR 2 R
8)Thin
hollow 2) Parallel to the length of cylinder and touching its
cylinder surface (or) passing through line of contact of cylinder
of mass with floor when it is rolling. 2MR 2 2R
M radius
R and
æ L2 R 2 ÷ö
Length L ç
3) ^ to the axis of cylinder and passing through its centre ççç12 + 2 ÷÷÷
L2 R 2
r M +
è ø 12 2
NARAYANAGROUP 21
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Moment of inertia of some regular rigid bodies
Rigid Body Axis of Rotation Moment of Radius of
Inertia ( I ) Gyration ( K )
L2 R 2
æ L2 R 2 ÷ö +
çç + ÷
2 ÷÷ø
3 2
çè 3
4) ^ to the axis of cylinder and passing through one end
r M
9)Solid
cylinder of 1)About geometrical or natural axis MR 2 / 2 R/ 2
Mass M
radius R
and length 2)Parallel to the length of cylinder and touching its
L. surface (or) passing through line of contact of cylinder
with floor when it is rolling. 3MR 2 / 2 3R / 2
æ L2 R 2 ÷ö
ç
3) ^r to the axis of cylinder and passing through its centre ççç12 + 4 ÷÷÷
L2 R 2
M +
è ø 12 4
L2 R 2 L2 R 2
4) ^r to the axis of cylinder and passing through one end M + +
3 4 3 4
WE-47: Consider a uniform square plate of side a 1 1
and mass m. The moment of inertia of this Ki = I iωi2 = 18 J ; K f = I f ω 2f = 12 J
2 2
plate about an axis perpendicular to its plane The change is ∆K = K f − K i = −6 J
and passing through one of its corners is
In order for the two discs to spin together at the
[AIEEE-2008]
same rate, there had to be friction between them.
5 2 1 7 2 The loss in kinetic energy is converted into thermal
1) ma 2) ma 2 3) ma 2 4) ma 2
6 12 12 3 energy.
Sol. Using parallel axes theorem, Angular momentum of a particle
Ml 2 Ml 2 7 Ml 2 Definition: The moment of linear momentum of a
I = I G + Mr 2 = + =
12 2 12 body w.r.t. an axis of rotation is known as angular
momentum.
WE-48:A disc of moment of inertia 4kgm 2 is r
Ø The angular momentum L of the particle with
spinning freely at 3rads −1 . A second disc of respect to fixed point O is represented as
moment of inertia 2kgm 2 slides down the r r r
L = r × p = m( r ×v )
spindle and they rotate together. (a) What is Ø The magnitude of angular momentum vector is
the angular velocity of the combination ? r
L = r p sinθ where p is the magnitude of p and
(b) What is the change in kinetic energy of
r r
the system? θ is the angle between r and p .
Sol. (a) Since there are no external torques acting, we Ø It is always directed perpendicular to the plane of
may apply the conservation of angular momentum. rotation and along the axis of rotation.
I f ω f = I iωi ⇒ ( 6kgm2 ) ω f = ( 4kgm2 )( 3rads −1 ) Angular momentum of rigid body:
When a rigid body is rotating, then the vector sum
Thus ω f = 2rads −2 of angular momenta of all the particles of body
(b) The kinetic energies before and after the about the axis of rotation is called angular
collision are momentum of rigid body. It is equal to the product
22 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
of moment of inertia and angular velocity. WE-51: A circular platform is mounted on a vertical
∴ L = ∑ ( ri × mi vi ) = Iω frictionless axle. Its radius is r =2m and its
i moment of inertia is I = 200kg − m2 .It is
S.I. Unit: kgm 2 / sec initially at rest. A 70kg man stands on the edge
Dimensional formula : ML2T −1 of the platform and begins to walk along the
When a body is rolling its total angular momentum edge at speed. V0 = 1.0m / s relative to the
is the vector sum of its angular momentum about ground. Find the angular velocity of the
centre of mass and the angular momentum about a platform.
fixed point on the ground. Sol. Angular momentum of man = angular momentum
Law of conservation of angular momentum: of platform in opposite direction.
If there is no external torque acting on the rotating
body (or system of particles), then its angular mv0 r = Iω ⇒ ω = 0.7rad / s
momentum is conserved. WE-52: A uniform bar of length 6a and mass 8m
r lies on a smooth horizontal table. Two point
dL dL r
If τ ext = 0 then =0 Q = τ ext masses m and 2m moving in the same
dt dt horizontal plane with speeds 2v and v
⇒ L = Iω = constant ∴ I1ω1 = I 2ω2 respectively, strike the bar (as shown in fig)
WE-49:A ballet dancer spins about a vertical axis and stick to the bar after collision. Calculate
at 60 rpm with arms outstretched. When her (a) velocity of the centre of mass (b) angular
arms are folded the angular frequency velocity about centre of mass and (c) total
increases to 90 rpm. Find the change in her kinetic energy, just after collision.
moment of inertia 2m
Sol. By the principle of conservation of angular v
momentum I × 60 = I 2 × 90
C
2I 8m
Final moment of inertia, I 2 =
3 a a
2a 2a
2I I
Change in moment of inertia = I − = 2v
3 3
m
WE-50: A horizontal disc is freely rotating about Sol. (a) As Fext = 0 linear momentum of the system
a vertical axis passing through its centre at is conserved, i.e.
the rate of 100 rpm. A bob of wax of mass 20g
falls on the disc and sticks to it a distance of 5 −2m × v + m × 2v + 0 = ( 2m + m + 8m ) ×V
cm from the axis. If the moment of inertia of or V=0 i.e. velocity of centre of mass is zero.
the disc about the given axis is 2 × 10 −4 kgm 2 , (b) As τ ext = 0 angular momentum of the system is
find new frequency of rotation of the disc. conserved, i.e.
−4
Sol. I = Moment of inertia of disc= 2 × 10 kgm
2 m1v1r1 + m2 v2 r2 = ( I1 + I2 + I 3 ) ω
1
2mva + m ( 2v )( 2a ) = 2m ( a ) + m ( 2a ) + 8m × ( 6a ) /12 ω
2 2 2
I 2 = moment of inertia of the disc + moment of
inertia of the bob of wax on the disc v
i.e. 6 mva = 30 ma 2ω ⇒ω =
−4 −4
= 2 × 10 + mr = 2 × 10 + 20 × 10 −3
( 0.05 )
2
5a
2
(c) From (a) and (b) it is clear that, the system has
= 2 × 10−4 + 0.5 × 10−4 = 2.5 × 10−4 kgm 2
no translatory motion but only rotatory motion.
By the principle of conservation of angular momentum 2
v
E = I ω 2 = ( 30 ma 2 ) = mv 2
I1 n1 = I 2 n 2 ⇒ 2 × 10 −4 ×100 = 2.5 × 10−4 n2 1 1 3
2 2 5a 5
100 × 2
n2 = = 80 rpm
2.5
NARAYANAGROUP 23
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
WE-53: A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating WE-55:The pulley of Atwoods machine has a
with an angular velocity ‘ω0 ’ is placed on a moment of inertia ‘I’ about its axis and its
radius is ‘R’. Find the magnitude of
rough horizontal surface. The initial velocity acceleration of the two blocks assuming the
of the centre of the hoop is zero. What will be string is light and does not slip on the pulley.
the velocity of the centre of the hoop when it Sol.
ceases to slip. (JEE-2013)
////////////////////
v ωr
Sol. mr ω0 = mvr + mr × ⇒ v = 0
2 2
r 2
Rotational dynamics
Relation between Torque and angular
momentum of a rigid body: T2
The vector sum of torques acting on various T1
particles of a rigid body gives the net torque acting m
on the body.
M
τ = ∑τ i
dL
and τ = , L is total angular Suppose the block of mass ‘M’ goes down with
dt an acceleration ‘a’. The angular acceleration
momentum of the body. The time rate of change of
the angular momentum of a particle is equal to the a
of the pulley is, α =
torque acting on it. R
Relation between torque and angular Mg − T1 = Ma ; T2 − mg = ma
acceleration:
a
dL And T1 R − T2 R = Iα = I
τ = But L = Iω R
dt
dω ( M − m ) gR 2
∴τ = I Solving the equation, a = I + M + m R 2
dt
⇒ τ = Iα ( )
This equation is called equation of rotatory motion Rotational kinetic energy:
and analogous to Newton’s 2nd law in dynamics. The sum of the kinetic energies of various particles
WE-54:A uniform rod of mass ‘m’ and length ‘l’ is of rotating body is called rotational kinetic energy.
suspended by means of two light inextensible
L2 1 2 1
strings at the ends of a rod. Tension in one KE rot = = Iω = ωL
string immediately after the other string is cut 2I 2 2
is WE-56: The angular momentum of rotating body
Sol. mg − T = ma .........(1) is increased by 20%. What will be the increase
in its rotational kinetic energy?
L2
Sol. Kinetic energy KE= ⇒ E ∝ L2
2I
T T ∆E 120 ∆E
2
= ( or ) = 0.44
E 100 E
∆E
× 100 = 44%
E
WE-57: A uniform rod of length ‘l’ is held vertically
mg on a horizontal floor fixing its lower end, the
l
mg rod is allowed to fall onto the ground. Find
τ 2 3g
α= = = (i) its angular velocity at that instant of
I ml 2
2l ......(2)
reaching the ground (ii) The linear velocity
3
with which the tip of rod hits the floor.
l
a = α .......(3) Sol. The rod rotates about an axis through one end.
2
From the principle of conservation of mechanical
mg
solving eq (1), (2) and (3) we get, T= energy. Loss of P.E of the rod is equal to its gain in
4 rotational K.E.
24 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
A Bu=0
a
l A
l Sol.
2 mv
L1 = L 2 ⇒ mva = Iω
l 1 2 l 1 ml 2 2
∴ mg = Iω ⇒ mg = . ω m (2 a )
2
2 2 2 2 3 3v
mva = ω ⇒ ω =
3 4a
3g
on solving ω = WE-60: A particle is projected at time t=0 from a
l point ‘O’ with a speed ‘u’ at an angle 450 to
horizontal. Find the angular momentum of
(ii) V = rω or V = lω = l 3 g / l = 3gl the particle at time t=u/g.
r
WE-58: A rigid body is made of three identical thin Sol.Velocity at any time ‘t’ is v = v x $i + v y $j
rods, each of length ‘L’ fastened together in y
the form of the letter ‘H’.The body is free to r
rotate about horizontal axis that runs along
the length of one of the legs of ‘H’. The body
is allowed to fall from rest from a position in P(x,y)
which the plane of ‘H’ is horizontal. What is
the angular speed of the body when the plane θ
of ‘H’ is vertical? O x r
Sol. The moment of inertia of the system about one position vector of projectile at time ‘t’ is r = xi$ + y $j
ur
mL 2
4 since L = m ( r$ × v$ )
rod as axis I = + mL2 ; I = mL2 ur
3 3
( )(
L = m xi$ + y $j × vx $i + v y $j
)
Potential energy decreases for B and C ur
$ $
L = m xv y k − yvx k ; L = mk xv y − yvx
X
u u2
A where vx = and x =
2 2g
B u u
Q x = ( u cos 45 ) t =
Y 0
2 g
C
1− 2
v y = u sin 450 − gt = v0
mgL 3
+ mgL = mgL 2
2 2 ur $ 3
−kmu
By conservation of mechanical energy, the loss in
1
y = u sin 450 t − gt 2 =
2
y2
2g
( )
2 −1 ; L =
2 2g
PE of body is equal to the gain in rotational KE
Work, Power & Angular Impulse
3 1 4 3 g Work: Work done by external torque on
∴ mgL = mL2 ω2 on solving ω =
2 2 3 2 L rotating body is W = ∫ τ dθ
WE-59:A uniform rod AB of mass ‘m’ length ‘2a’ If τ is constant , then, W = τ θ
is allowed to fall under gravity with AB in Work energy theorem : Work done by external
horizontal. When the speed of the rod is ‘v’ torque on rotating body is equal to change in
suddenly the end ‘A’ is fixed. Find the rotational kinetic energy.
angular velocity with which it begins to 1 1
rotate. τ θ = Iω 2 − Iω02
2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 25
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø Work done by retarding torque to stop the rotating Angular Impulse: The large torque acts on a body
body is equal to initial rotational kinetic energy of for relatively very short interval of time is called
body. impulsive torque.
1 Ø The product of impulsive torque and its time of
τθ = Iω 2 and θ = 2π N , action is called angular impulse J. It is a vector. It is
2 always equal to change in angular momentum.
where N = no. of rotations made by the body before ur
r r r dL r ur
coming to rest. ∴ J = ∫ τ dt ; As τ = ; ∫ τ dt = ∆ L
WE-61:What is the work done in increasing the dt
r ur ur
angular frequency of a circular ring of mass
2kg and radius 25 cm from 10rpm to 20 rpm
(
∴J = I ω −ω0 )
about its axis ? WE-63: A uniform rod of mass ‘m’ and length ‘l’
is on the smooth horizontal surface. When a
Sol. Work done=increase in rotational kinetic energy
constant force ‘F’ is applied at one end of the
= I ( ω f − ωi ) = MR (ω f − ωi )
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 rod for a small time ‘t’ as shown in the figure.
2 2 Find the angular velocity of the rod about its
centre of mass.
2 2π π
2 2
1
= × 2 × ( 0.25) − = 0.2054 J
3 3
Unstretched equilibrium
2 a
θ0
θ
position
at any time
Power: The rate of work done by torque is called
power. Instantaneous power is given by
d dθ
= (τθ ) = τ
dW
ur r ur ur
m
P= = τω
dt dt dt Sol. According to angular impulse J = τ t = L 2 − L1
r
As the power is a scalar, it is written as P = τ .ω τ t = Iω 2 − I ω 1
Average power is
l
1 2 1 2 Q ω1 = 0; ω2 = ω ; τ = F
Iω − Iω0 2
Total work done 2 2
Pave = =
t l ml 2 6 Ft
Total time F t= ω −0 ⇒ω =
WE-62: A motor rotates a pulley of radius 25cm at 2 12 ml
20 rpm. A rope around the pulley lifts a 50kg WE-64: A fly-wheel of mass 25kg has a radius of 0.2m.
block, What is the power output of the motor? It is making 240rpm. What is the torque
Sol. The tension in the rope is equal to the weight since necessary to bring to rest in 20s?[E-2010]
there in no acceleration. Thus T=500N Therefore,
2π n 2π × 4
τ = TR = ( 500 )( 0.25 ) = 125 Nm Sol. α = =
t 20
MR 2
R Torque τ = I α = α = 0.2π Nm
2
WE-65: Moment of inertia of a body about an axis
is 4 kg − m 2 . The body is initially at rest and
T a torque of 8Nm starts acting on it along the
same axis. Workdone by the torque in 20s, in
joules is [E-2013]
τ 1
Sol. τ = Iα ⇒ α = = 2 ; θ = α t = 400 ;
2
I 2
2π N 2π ( 20 ) 2π ω = τθ = 3200J
Angular velocity , ω = = rads −1
WE-66: A wheel which is initially at rest is
60 60 3
The power required is subjected to a constant angular accleration
2π about its axis. It rotates through an angle of
P = τω = (125 Nm −1 ) rads −1 = 261W 150 in time t sec. Then how much it rotates in
3 the next 2t sec [E-2014 ]
26 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
Sol. If angular acceleration is constant, we have force.
Ø The condition that point of contact is instantaneously
1 1 1 at rest requires υcm = Rω
θ = ω0t + α t 2 ⇒ 150 = 0 + α t2 ⇒150 = α t 2........(1) v1
2 2 2
for the second condition (time =3tsec)
1
θ1 = α ( 3t ) .........(2) ωv
2
2 O
So, ∆θ = θ 1 − θ = 1200
WE-67: A thin uniform rod of length l and P
mass m is swinging freely about a horizontal Ø It means that the velocity of point at the top of the
axis passing through its end. Its maximum disc ( v1 ) has a magnitude υcm + Rω or 2 υcm and
angular speed is ω . Its centre of mass rises to is directed parallel to the level surface.
a maximum height of [AIEEE-2009] H H rω = v
1 2 1 ml 2
2
l 2ω2 V H 2V
Sol. mgh = Iω = ω ⇒h= V C 2V V
2 2 3 6g + V=0
WE-68: A pulley of radius 2m is rotated about its C C
V -rω=V L V
2V
axis by a force F = ( 20t − 5t ) N (where, t is L V=0
2
measured in seconds) applied tangentially. If (A) (B) (C)
the moment of inertia of the pulley about its Translation Rotation Rolling
axis of rotation is10kgm 2 , then the number (i) Linear speed at H=2V (max)
(ii) Linear speed at L=0 (min)
of rotations made by the pulley before its
direction of motion is reversed, is(AIE 2011) (iii) Linear speed at M= 2V
Sol.Given force, F = 20t − 5t 2 Uniform pure rolling:
Uniform pure rolling or simply “pure rolling” means
FR ( 20t − 5t ) 2
2
that no relative motion exists at the point of contact
α= = = 4t − t 2 between the body and the surface. Let a disc of
I 10
radius R rolls without slipping on a horizontal
dω
= 4t − t 2 ⇒ ∫ d ω = ∫ ( 4t − t 2 )dt
ω t
⇒ stationary surface/ground. For the disc to roll
dt 0 0 without slipping, we must have
3
t
⇒ ω = 2t 2 − Vcm ω
3
When direction is reversed Rω P
ω = 0, i.e., t = 0 to 6 s Now,, Vcm
6
Q
t 3
(i) ( v c m )P =vsurface ⇒ vcm − Rω = 0 ⇒ vc m = Rω
θ
dθ = ω dt ⇒ ∫ dθ = ∫ 2t 2 − dt
0 0
3
6 (ii) If v P >v Q ⇒ vc m -R? > 0 ⇒ v c m >R?
2t 3 t 4
⇒θ = − ⇒ θ = 144 − 108 = 36rad ( Forward Slipping )
3 12 0 (iii) If v P <v Q ⇒ vc m -R? < 0 ⇒ v c m <R?
θ 36
∴ Number of rotations, n = 2π = 2π < 6 (Backward Slipping)
so, v c m = R ? is the condition for a body to be
Rolling Motion
in pure rolling on a stationary horizontal surface/
Pure rolling motion: Motion of a rolling body on
ground. It is sometimes simply called as Rolling.
horizontal surface is the combination of translational
motion and rotational motion where the point of Non uniform pure rolling:
contact has no relative motion with surface. All Ø If a CM = Rα , then no friction arises and the body
points of rolling rigid body have same angular speed is in pure rolling.
but different linear velocities. A body rolls on a Ø If a CM > Rα , then static friction arises and acts
surface when the surface has frictional force i.e.
torque will act on the rolling body due to frictional opposite to motion of the body to support rotatory
NARAYANAGROUP 27
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
motion such that Rα is made equal to a CM to
keep the body still in pure rolling motion. R
(Instantaneously VCM = Rω )
Ø If a CM < Rα , then static friction arises and acts in Mg
the direction of motion of the body to support Sol. Mg − T = Ma ........(1) Also, τ = TR = Iα
I α MRα
translatory motion such that a CM is made equal to ⇒T = = .....(2)
R 2
Rα to keep the body still in pure rolling motion.
1
where I = M R
2
(Instantaneously VCM = Rω )
2
If the above two conditions fail then the body slips Condition for no slipping, a = α R ....(3)
and the friction present is kinetic. Solving equations (1) ,(2)and (3) we obtain
Total K.E of a rolling body : 2 Mg
Ø A rolling body has both translational and rotational a = g and T =
3 3
kinetic energies Rolling of a body on an inclined plane
1 1 without slipping :
(i) KE trans = mVc (ii) KE rot = Iω
2 2
2 2 Ø Consider a body of mass M radius R and moment
of inertia I rolling without slipping on an inclined
(iii) K .Etotal = K .Etranslatory + K .Erotational
plane (making an angle θ with the horizontal). For
2 K2
1 1 1 the body to roll without slipping necessary friction(f)
= mVc2 + Iω 2 = mVc 1 + 2 must be present. From the figure we observe that
2 2 2 R
all forces (other than friction) are acting along the
Where Vc = Velocity of C.M radius and hence will not produce torque in the
body.
K = radius of gyration , R = radius N
K2 K2 f = µN
KEtrans. : KErot. : KEtot. = 1: 2 : 1 + 2 a
R R
Note-1: Fraction of KE associated with translatory
Mg sin θ Mg cos θ
KE tra
=
1 θ Mg
2
motion KE total 1 + K At the point of contact velocity is zero, so the net
R2 torque due to the various forces about the IAOR
Note-2:Fraction of KE associated with rotatory motion is τ = ( Mg sin θ ) R = Iα .... (1)
KE rot 1
=
( Mg sin θ ) R = ( MR 2 + Mk 2 )
a
KE total R2
1+ 2 R
K
g sin θ R ⇒ a = g sin θ
2
Note-3: The K.E. of some rolling bodies : a= 2 k 2 .... (2)
3 R + k2 1+ 2
Ø The K.E. of rolling solid cylinder is E = mv
2
R
4 a
7 Torque due to friction fR = I ... (3)
Ø The K.E. of rolling solid sphere is E = mv
2
R
Ia ( Mk )
10 2
g sin θ Mg sin θ
5 2 ⇒ f = 2 = ⇒ f =
Ø The K.E. of a rolling hollow sphere is E= mv R R2 k 2
R2
6 +
R2
1 1 + 2
k
Ø The K.E. of a hollow cylinder or thin ring is E = mv 2
If µ be the coefficient of friction, then
WE-69: A solid cylinder of mass M has a string
wrapped several times around its circum f ≤ µN ,. where N = Mg cos θ
ference. The free end of string is attached to tanθ
using(3), we get µmin = ... (4)
the ceiling and the cylinder is released from R2
+
k2
1
rest. Find the acceleration of the cylinder and
the tension in the string. (MAINS-2014)
28 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
Condition for a body to roll without slipping: Note-1: If a1 , a2 , a3 and a4 are the accelerations of
For a body to roll without slipping, the force of
friction ‘f’ calculated above must be less than or centre of masses of rolling solid sphere, solid
equal to the maximum value of friction cylinder, hollow sphere and hollow cylinder
i.e. µ Mg cos θ respectively when they roll down the same inclined
Mg sin θ tan θ plane then a1 > a2 > a3 > a4
⇒ ≤ µ Mg cos θ ⇒ µ ≥
R2 R2
1 + 2 1 + 2 Note-2: If t1 , t 2 , t3 and t4 are the times of travel of rolling
k k
solid sphere, solid cylinder, hollow sphere and
(i) Velocity of the body when it reaches the bottom is hollow cylinder respectively to reach the bottom
2 gh 2 gl sin θ
v= = ( since h = l sin θ ) from the top of an inclined plane then
given by k2 k2
1+ 2 1+ 2 t1 < t 2 < t 3 < t 4
R R
g sin θ 2
(ii) Acceleration of the body is given by a = a) For Solid sphere ( µ ) = tan θ
k2 7
1+ 2
2
b) For Hollow sphere ( µ ) = tan θ
R
(iii) Time taken by the body to reach the bottom is 5
2l (1 + k 2 / R 2 ) 1
given by t= c) For Solid cylinder (or) Disc ( µ ) = tan θ
g sin θ 3
Ø 1
d) For Ring (or) Hollow Cylinder ( µ ) = tan θ
If all these are allowed to roll down from the top of
an inclined plane, they will reach the bottom in the 2
following order Note : When a body rolls down without slipping, work
1) Solid sphere 2) Disc (or) Solid cylinder is not done against friction as the point of contact
3) Hollow sphere 4) Ring (or) Hollow cylinder instantaneously at rest.
Ø Bodies rolling on a horizontal plane :
Body Square of Rotational K.E. Rotational K.E Traslational K.E
radius of Translational K.E. Total K.E. Total K.E.
gyration
1. Solid sphere (2/5)r2 2/5 2/7 5/7
2
2. Hollow sphere (2/3) r 2/3 2/5 3/5
3. Disc (or)
Solid Cylinder r2 / 2 1/2 1/3 2/3
4. Ring (or)
Hollow Cylinder r2 1 1/2 1/2
Ø Bodies rolling on an inclined plane
Body Velocity at bottom Acceleration Time of descent
10 gh 5 14l
1. Solid sphere g sin θ
7 7 5 g sin θ
3 10l
6 gh g sin θ
2. Hollow sphere 5 3g sin θ
5
4 gh 2 3l
3. Disc (or)Solid cylinder g sin θ
3 3 g sin θ
1 4l
4. Ring (or) Hollow cylinder gh g sin θ
2 g sin θ
NARAYANAGROUP 29
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø A body rolls on a smooth horizontal surface with Instantaneous axis of rotation:
speed v and then rolls up a rough inclined plane The pure rolling motion is purely rotatory motion
of inclination θ . about instantaneous point of contact with ground.
The axis passing through instantaneous point of
contact and perpendicular to plane of rotation is
called instantaneous axis of rotation.
∴ The total kinetic energy of rolling body is written
θ 1
as KE total = I Pω ,
2
2
(i) The height reached by the body before coming where IP is moment of inertia about instantaneous
v2 k 2 axis of rotation.
to rest is given by h = 1 + Rolling bodies over moving platform:
2g r 2
The rolling bodies do not slide on the surface on
7v 2 which they are moving. If they are rolling on a
a) For solid sphere, h =
10 g moving platform, the point of contact of the body
5v 2 with the platform should have same velocity as
b) For Hollow sphere, h = the platform.
6g
Case 1: If point of contact of surface is moving with
3v 2
c) For Disc (or) Solid cylinder, h = velocity u with respect to ground, then
4g
Vcm − ω R = u
v2
d) For Ring (or) Hollow cylinder, h = ω
g O Vcm
Note : If all these bodies travel with same velocity on
horizontal surface then ωR P u
N
i) Solid sphere reaches the minimum height. ///////////////////////////////////
ii) Ring reaches maximum height. Case 2: For no sliding on the moving platform,
Angular momentum in case of rotation u = ωR − vcm
about a fixed axis:
Ø When the total external torque is zero, the total ω
O vcm
angular momentum of the system is conserved.
Ø The general expression for the total angular u P
Case 3: For accelerated surface, acm − α R = a
N
momentum of the system is L = ∑ ri × pi
i=1
Ø For rotation about a fixed axis, the component of
α acm
angular momentum perpendicular to the fixed axis
is constant. P
a
Angular Momentum of Rolling Wheel ///////////////////////////////////
in combined Rotation & Translation:
Angular momentum of a rolling wheel about an Direction of friction in case of
axis passing through the point of contant P and translation & rotation combined:
perpendicular to the plane of wheel: The direction of friction cannot be found by direct
observation in case of rotational motion, as the
ω body is translating as well as rotating. The direction
vCM
O of frictional force is determined after deciding the
motion tendency of the point of contact of the body
P
r r r r r r
under consideration with the ground. A rolling
( )
L = Ltranslation + Lrotation = m R× vCM + Icmω or object of mass M and radius R is placed on a
r ur ur ur ur ur rough horizontal surface. A force F is applied as
L = mωR2 + ICM ω or L = ( ICM + mR ) ω = I Pω
2
shown.
30 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
WE-71: (i) Explain why friction is necessary to
F R
make the disc to roll in the direction indicated.
x (ii)Give the direction of frictional force at B,
O and the sense of frictional torque, before
perfect rolling begins. (iii)What is the force
of friction after perfect rolling begins ?
P A
Ø Acceleration of point P due to translation C ω0
F R
at = ( towards right ) 2
M
Ø Acceleration of point P due to rotation only,
τ FR f
ar = α R = R = x ( towards left )
I I B
r r r Sol: (i)To roll a disc, a torque is required which in turn
net acceleration of point P is aP = at + ar requires a tangential force to act on it. As the force of
F FRx friction is the only tangential force acting on the disc,
aP = − ( towards right ) (i ) so it is necessarily required for the rolling of a disc.
M I
From the above equation it is clear that motion (ii) Frictional force at B opposes the velocity of
tendency at point P depends upon both x and I, B. Therefore, frictional force is in the same direction
Eq (i) can be written as, as the arrow. The sense of frictional torque is such
as to oppose the angular motion. By right hand
aP =
F Rx
1 − 2 ( ii ) r r
M K rule, ω0 act into the plane of paper and τ out of
If K 2 > Rx : friction will act in backward direction. the paper.
(iii) Frictional force decreases the velocity of the
If K 2 = Rx : no friction will act. point of constant B. Perfect rolling begins when
If K 2 < Rx : friction will act in forward direction. this velocity is zero at which the force of friction is
WE-70: A disc rotating about its axis with angular zero.
WE-72: A thin hollow sphere of mass ‘m’ is
speed ‘ ω0 ’ is placed lightly (without any completely filled with a liquid of mass ‘m’.
translational push) on a perfectly frictionless When the sphere rolls with a velocity ‘v’,
table. The radius of the disc is R. What are kinetic energy of the system is (neglect
the linear velocities of the points A, B and C friction) [E-2011]
on the disc shown. Will the disc roll in the Sol: Total energy = KE + rotational KE
direction indicated? 1 1 2
= ( 2m) v2 + mr 2 ω2
A 2 2 3
1 1 4
C ω0 = ( 2m ) v 2 + mv 2 = mv 2
R 2 3 3
WE-73: A round uniform body of radius ‘R’, mass
2 ‘M’ and moment of inertia ‘I’, rolls down
(without slipping) an inclined plane making
f an angle ‘ θ ’ with the horizontal.Then, its
B acceleration is [A-2007]
Sol: We know that, υ = Rω 2 gh
v=
I ;
For point A: υ A = Rω0 (in the direction of the arrow) Sol: 1+
MR 2
For point B: υ B = Rω0 (in the direction opposite
h = L sin θ , v 2 − u 2 = 2as
R
to arrow) For point C: υC = ω0 (in the v2 2 gL sin θ g sin θ
2 a= = =
2s I I
direction of the arrow) The disc will not roll in the 2 1 + 2
L 1+
direction indicated. It is because the disc is placed MR MR 2
on a perfectly frictionless table and without friction,
a body cannot roll.
NARAYANAGROUP 31
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
WE-74:The uniform 50kg pole ABC is balanced k
in the vertical position. A 500N horizontal
force is suddenly applied at B. If the coefficient M
of kinetic friction between the pole and the
ground is 0.3, determine the initial
acceleration of point A. (Take g = 10ms −2 ).
A
m
4m
Sol: Since the rim of the pulley moves at the same speed
B 500 N as the block, the speed of the block and the angular
velocity of the pulley related by v = ω R When
2m the block falls by a distance x, its potential energy
C
decreases ( ∆U g = − mgx ) , the potential energy
Sol: N = mg = 500
1 2
500 − µ N of the spring increases ∆U g = + kx , and
500 − µ N = ma x ⇒ ax = 2
m
both the block and the pulley gain KE
⇒ ax =
( 500 ) − ( 0.3)( 500 ) = 7ms −2
1 2 1 2
50 ∆K = mv + Iω
Now, let us calculate torque due to forces about 2 2
the centre of mass or centre of gravity G of the From the conservation of mechanical energy,
rod, then τ = ( 500 )(1) − ( 0.3)( 500 )( 3) ∆K + ∆U = 0 ,
⇒ τ = 500 − 450 = 50Nm 1 2 1 v 1 2
2
A mv + I + kx − mgx = 0
2 2 R 2
α 1 M 2 1 2
G m + v + kx − mgx = 0
mg 2 2 2
500 N
B Putting m = 4kg, M = 8kg, k = 32Nm −1 , x =1m
N
C
µN 1 8 2 1
4 + v + ( 32 )(1) − ( 4 )(10 )(1) = 0
2
2 2 2
τ 50 1
As, α = ⇒α = ⇒ α = rad s −2 4v 2 + 16 − 40 = 0 ⇒ v = 2.4 ms −1
1
I
( 50 )( 6 ) 3
2
WE-76: A uniform rod of length L and mass M is
12
pivoted freely at one end as shown in the
So, acceleration of point A is
figure. (a) Find the angular acceleration of
1
a A = ax − rα = 7 − ( 3) = 6ms −2 ( to the right ) the rod when it is at angle ‘ θ ’ to the vertical.
3
(b)Assuming the rod to start from the vertical
WE-75: A block of mass m=4kg is attached to a positions, find the angular velocity as the
spring of spring constant ( k = 32 Nm −1 ) by a function of ‘ θ ’. (c) Find the tangential
rope that hangs over a pulley of mass M=8kg acceleration of the free end when the rod is
If the system starts from rest with the spring
unstretched, find the speed of the block after horizontal.
it falls 1m. Treat the pulley as a disc, so Sol: (a) Figure shows the rod at an angle θ to the
1 vertical
I = MR 2
2
32 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
C.U.Q
α CENTRE OF MASS
1. When a force is applied on a body, Newton’s
θ second law is applicable to
Mg 1) centre of mass 2) any part of the body
3) upper most part of body
O 4) lower most part of body
L 2. Centre of mass of the earth–moon system
sin θ lies
2 1) on the surface of the earth
Net torque about the point O is 2) on the surface of the moon
L 3) with in the earth
τ 0 = Mg sin θ 4) at the midpoint of the line joining their centres
2 3. A square plate and a circular plate made up
Using the second law of motion τ 0 = I 0α of same material are placed touching each
MgL ML2 3 g sin θ other on a horizontal table. If the side length
sin θ = α ⇒α = of square plate is equal to diameter of the
2 3 2L circular plate then the centre of mass of the
(b) From above, we have combination will be
3g sin θ d ω 3g sin θ 1) at their point of contact
α= ⇒ω = 2) inside the circular plate
2L dθ 2L
3) inside the square plate
3 g sin θ
⇒ ω dω = dθ 4) outside the combination
2L 4. A uniform straight rod is placed in vertical
Integrating within appropriate limits, we get position on a smooth horizontal surface and
ω 3g θ released. As the rod is in motion, the centre
∫0 ω dω = 2L ∫0 sin θ dθ of mass moves
1) horizontally 2) vertically down
ω2 3g 3g
= − [ cos θ ]0 =
3) in a parabolic path 4) does not move.
(1 − cosθ )
θ
⇒ 5. A disc and a square sheet of same mass are
2 2L 2L
cut from same metallic sheet. They are kept
3g
⇒ω = (1 − cos θ ) side by side with contact at a single point.
Then the centre of mass of combination is
L
The above result can also be obtained by using 1) at point of contact 2) inside the disc
the Law of Conservation of Mechanical energy, 3) inside the square 4) outside the system
where we use LINEAR MOMENTUM OF CENTRE
Loss inGPE Gainin RKE OF MASS
of CM of Rod = of Rod 6. Two balls are thrown at the same time in
air, while they are in air, the acceleration of
(1 − cos θ ) = I ω 2 = ML2 ω 2
L 1 1 1 their centre of mass
⇒ Mg 1) depends on masses of the balls
2 2 23 2) depends on the direction of motion of the balls
3g 3) depends on speeds of the balls
⇒ω = (1 − cos θ ) 4) is equal to acceleration due to gravity
L
7. Consider a two particle system with the
π particles having masses m1 and m2 . If the first
(c) When the rod is horizontal θ = ,
2 particle is pushed towards the centre of mass
3g through a distance d, by what distance should
So, α = , So, the tangential linear the second particle be moved, so as to keep
2L the centre of mass at the same position?
3g [MAINS 2006]
acceleration is at = α L =
2 m 2d m1d m 1d
This is greater than the acceleration of an object 1) d 2) m 3) m + m 4) m
falling freely. 1 1 2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 33
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
VECTOR PRODUCT (OR) CROSS 15. The direction of following vectors is along the
PRODUCT line of axis of rotation
→ → → → → → → → → 1) angular velocity, angular acceleration only
8. If P× Q = R; Q× R = P and R× P = Q then 2) angular velocity, angular momentum only
→ → → 3) angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular
1) P , Q and R are coplanar momentum only
→ → 4) angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular
2) angle between P and Q may be less than 900 momentum and torque
→ → →
3) P + Q + R cannot be equal to zero. 16. A particle is moving along a fixed circular orbit
with uniform speed. Then true statement from
→ → →
4) P, Q and R are mutually perpendicular the following is
ROTATIONAL VARIABLES, RELATION
1) angular momentum of particle is constant only
BETWEEN LINEAR AND ANGULAR in magnitude but its direction changes from point
VARIABLES,ROTATIONAL to point
KINEMATICS,TORQUE AND 2) angular momentum of particle is constant only
MECHANICAL EQUILIBRIUM in direction but its magnitude changes from point
9. Which of the following equation is wrong to point
r r r uur ur ur
1) t = r ´ F 2) ar = w ´V 3) angular momentum of particle is constant both
ur ur r ur r ur in magnitude and direction
3) at = a ´ r 4) V = r ´w 4) angular momentum of particle is not constant
10. The following pair of physical quantities are both in magnitude and direction
analogous to one another in translatory 17. Class I lever is that in which
motion and rotatory motion. 1) fulcrum is between the load and effort
1) Mass , moment of inertia 2) Force,Torque 2) load is between the fulcrum and effort
3) Linear momentum , Angular momentum 3) effort is between the load and fulcrum
4) All 4) fulcrum, load and effort at one point
11. The correct relation of the following is
r r ur r r ur 18. If force vector is along X-axis and radius
1) τ = r.F 2) τ = r × F vector is along Y-axis then the direction of
ur
r F r r ur
torque is
3) τ = r 4) τ = r + F 1) along +ve Z-axis 2) along -ve Z-axis
r 3) in X-Y plane making an angle 45o with X-axis
12. Two particles p and q located at distances rp 4) in X-Y plane making an angle 135o with X-axis
and ‘ rq ’ respectively from the centre of a 19. During rotation of a body, the position vector
is along X–axis and force vector is along
rotating disc such that rp > rq . Y–axis, The direction of torque vector is
1. both p and q have the same acceleration 1) in the X-Y plane 2) along –ve Z-axis
2. both p and q do not have any acceleration 3) along +ve Z-axis 4) in the X-Z plane
3. ‘p’ has greater acceleration than ‘q’ 20. If the direction of position vector rr is towards
4. ‘q’ has greater acceleration than ‘p’ r
south and direction of force vector F is
13. When a constant torque is applied on a rigid
towards east, then the direction of torque
vector τr is
body, then
1) the body moves with linear acceleration
2) the body rotates with constant angular velocity 1) towards north 2) towards west
3) the body rotates with constant angular 3) vertically upward 4) vertically downward
acceleration 21. Which of the following is wrong?
4) the body undergoes equal angular displacement 1) Direction of torque is parallel to axis of rotation
in equal intervals of time 2) Direction of moment of couple is perpendicular
14. Identify the increasing order of the angular to the plane of rotation of body
velocities of the following (E-2005) 3) Torque vector is perpendicular to both position
a) earth rotating about its own axis vector and force vector
b) hours hand of a clock 4) The direction of force vector is always
c) seconds hand of a clock perpendicular to both the directions of position
d) fly wheel of radius 2m making 300 rps vector and torque vector
1)a,b,c,d 2)b,c,d,a 3)c,d,a,b 4)d,a,b,c
34 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
22. A circular disc is rotated along clockwise 28. I1 , I 2 are moments of inertia of two solid
direction in horizontal plane. The direction of spheres of same mass about axes passing
torque is through their centres If first is made of wood
1) horizontally right side 2) horizontally left side and the second is made of steel, then
3) vertically upwards 4)vertically downwards 1) I1 = I 2 2) I1 < I 2 3) I1 > I 2 4) I1 ≤ I 2
23. Magnitude of torque is maximum in the 29. A Uniform metal rod is rotated in horizontal
following case plane about a vertical axis passing through
1) radius vector is perpendicular to force vector its end at uniform rate. The tension in the
2) radius vector is parallel to force vector rod is
3) Angle between radius vector and force vector 1) same at all points
is 45o 2) different at different points and maximum at
4) Angle between radius vector and force vector centre of rod
is 60o 3) different at different points and minimum at axis
24. A constant resultant torque rotates a wheel of rotation.
about its own axis. Then true statement of 4) different at different points and maximum at axis
of rotation
the following is 30. A boiled egg and a raw egg of same mass and
1) angular velocity of wheel is constant size are made to rotate about their own axis.
2) angular acceleration of wheel is constant
If I1 and I 2 are moments of inertia of boiled
3)angular acceleration of wheel gradually increases
4) angular momentum of wheel is constant egg and raw egg, then
25. A wheel is free to rotate about its own axis 1) I1 = I 2 2) I1 > I 2 3) I1 < I 2 4) I1 = 2 I 2
without friction. A rope is wound around the 31. Raw and boiled eggs are made to spin on a
wheel. If other end of rope is pulled with a smooth table by applying the same torque.
constant force, then true statement from the The egg that spin faster is
1) Raw egg 2) Boiled egg
following is 3) Both will have same spin rate
1) constant torque is produced and the wheel is 4) Difficult to predict
rotated with constant angular velocity 32. Moment of Inertia of a body depends upon
2) constant torque is produced and the wheel is 1) distribution of mass of the body
rotated with constant angular acceleration 2) position of axis of rotation
3) variable torque is produced and the wheel is 3) temperature of the body 4) all the above
rotated with variable angular velocity 33. Of the two eggs which have identical sizes ,
4) variable torque is produced and the wheel is shapes and weights, one is raw and other is
rotated with variable angular acceleration half boiled. The ratio between the moment of
26. The following pairs of physical quantities are inertia of the raw to the half boiled egg about
not analogous to each other in translatory central axis is :
motion and rotational motion 1) = 1 2) > 1 3) < 1 4) not comparable
34. The radius of gyration of a rotating metallic
1) force, torque 2) mass, moment of inertia
disc is independent of the following physical
3) couple, torque quantity.
4) linear momentum, angular momentum 1) Position of axis of rotation 2) Mass of disc
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID 3) Radius of disc 4) temperature of disc
BODIES, ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS 35. A brass disc is rotating about its axis. If
temperature of disc is increased then its
27. The moment of inertia of a rigid body depends 1) radius of gyration increases, but moment of
on inertia remains the same
A) mass of body 2) moment of inertia increases but radius of
B) position of axis of rotation gyration remains the same
C) time period of its rotation 3) radius of gyration, moment of inertia both
D) angular velocity of the body remain the same
1) A and B are true 2) B and C ar true 4) radius of gyration, moment of inertia both
3) C and D are true 4) A and D are true increase
NARAYANAGROUP 35
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
36. The radius of gyration of a rotating circular 41. Identify the correct order in which the ratio
ring is maximum about following axis of of radius of gyration to radius increases for
rotation the following bodies.
1) natural axis I) Rolling solid sphere II) Rolling solid cylinder
2) axis passing through diameter of ring III) Rolling hollow cylinder
3) axis passing through tangent of ring in its plane IV) Rolling hollow sphere
4)axis passing through tangent of ring perpendicular 1) I, II, IV, III 2) I, III, II, IV
to plane of ring. 3) II, I, IV, III 4) II, I, III, IV
37. Moment of inertia of a thin circular plate is 42. Identify the increasing order of radius of
minimum about the following axis gyration of following bodies of same radius
1) axis perpendicular to plane of plate passing
I) About natural axis of circular ring
through its centre
II) About diameter of circular ring
2) axis passing through any diameter of plate
III) About diameter of circular plate
3) axis passing through any tangent of plate in its
plane IV) About diameter of solid sphere
4) axis passing through any tangent perpendicular 1) II, III, IV, I 2) III, II, IV, I
to its plane 3) III, IV, II, I 4) II, IV, III, I
38. A ring of mass ‘m’ and radius ‘r’ is melted 43. Identify the decreasing order of moments of
and then moulded into a sphere . The moment inertia of the following bodies of same mass
of inertia of the sphere will be and same radius.
1) more than that of the ring I) About diameter of circular ring
2) less than that of the ring II) About diameter of circular plate
3) equal to that of the ring III) About tangent of circular ring ⊥ r to its plane
4) none of the above IV) About tangent of circular plate in its plane
39. Two copper circular discs are of the same 1) III, IV, II, I 2) IV, III, I, II
thickness. The diameter of A is twice that of B. 3) IV, III, II, I 4) III, IV, I, II
The moment of inertia of A as compared to that 44. Three dense point size bodies of same mass
of B is are attached at three vertices of a light
1) twice as large 2) four times as large equilateral triangular frame. Identify the
3) 8 times as large 4) 16 times as large increasing order of their moment of inertia
40. The moment of inertia of a thin square plate about following axis.
ABCD of uniform thickness about an axis
I) About an axis ⊥ r to plane and passing through
passing through the centre O and
perpendicular to the plane of the plate is a corner
[IIT1992] II) About an axis ⊥ r to plane and passing through
I2 centre
I3 I1 III) About an axis passing through any side
A B
IV) About ⊥ r bisector of any side
1) IV,III, II, I 2) III, II, IV, I
I4 O 3) II, IV, III, I 4) II, III, IV, I
45. Four point size dense bodies of same mass
are attached at four corners of a light square
C D frame. Identify the decreasing order of their
moments of inertia about following axes.
I) Passing through any side
a) I 1 + I 3 b) I 2 + I 4 II) Passing through opposite corners
c) 2 I1 + I3 d) I 1 + 2 I 3 III) ⊥ r bisector of any side
1) a,b are true 2) b,c are true IV) ⊥ r to the plane and passing through any corner
3) c,d are true 4) b,d are true 1) III, IV, I, II 2) IV, III, I, II
3) III, II, IV, I 4) IV, III, II, I
36 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
46. A motor car is moving in a circular path with 1) I increases and ω , E decrease but L is constant
uniform speed v. Suddenly the car rotates 2) I decreases, ω and E increase but L is constant
through an angle θ . Then, the magnitude of 3) I increases, ω decreases, L and E are constant
change in its velocity is 4) I increases, ω increases but L and E are constant
θ θ 52. If polar ice caps melt, then the time duration
1) 2v cos 2) 2v sin of one day
2 2
θ
1) increases 2) decreases
θ
3) 2v tan 4) 2v sec 3) does not change 4) zero
2 2
53. A hollow sphere partly filled with water has
47. An electric motor rotates a wheel at a
moment of inertia I when it is rotating about
constant angular velocity (ω ) while opposing its own axis at an angular velocity w . If its
torque is t . The power of that electric motor angular velocity is doubled then its moment
is of inertia becomes
1) Less than I 2) More than I
tw t
1) 2) tw 3) 2tw 4) 3) I 4) zero
2 w 54. If most of the population on earth is migrated
48. A constant power is supplied to a rotating disc. to poles of the earth then the duration of
The relationship between the angular velocity a day
(ω ) of the disc and number of rotations (n) 1) increases
3) remains same
2) decreases
made by the disc is governed by 4) first increases then decreases
1 2 55. The law of conservation of angular momentum
1) ω ∝ n 3 2) ω ∝ n 3
is obtained from Newton's II law in rotational
3 motion when
3) ω ∝ n 2 4) ω ∝ n 2 1) external torque is maximum
2) external torque is minimum
ANGULAR MOMENTUM & 3) external torque is zero
CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR 4) external torque is constant
56. If earth shrinks then the duration of day
MOMENTUM 1) increases 2) decreases
49. An ice block is in a trough which is rotating
about vertical axis passing through its centre. 3) remains same
When ice melts completely, the angular 4) first increases then decreases to initial value
velocity of the system 57. A circular disc is rotating in horizontal plane
about vertical axis passing through its centre
without friction with a person standing on
the disc at its edge. If the person gently walks
to centre of disc then its angular velocity
1) increases 2) decreases
3) does not change 4 )becomes zero
58. A ballet dancer is rotating about his own
1) increases 2) decreases vertical axis.Without external torque if his
3) remains same 4)becomes double angular velocity is doubled then his rotational
50. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis, kinetic energy is
the direction of its angular momentum is 1) halved 2) doubled
1) radial 2) along axis of rotation 3) quadrupled 4) unchanged
3) along tangent 59. The following motion is based on the law of
4) perpendicular to the direction of angular velocity conservation of angular momentum
51. A ballet dancer is rotating about his own A) rotation of top B) diving of diver
vertical axis on smooth horizontal floor. I , ω , C) rotation of ballet dancer on smooth
L, E are moment of inertia, angular velocity, horizontal surface
angular momentum, rotational kinetic energy D) a solid sphere that rolls down on an inclined
of ballet dancer respectively. If ballet dancer plane
stretches himself away from his axis of 1) A, B and C are true 2) A, B and D are true
rotation, then 3) B, C and D are true 4) A, C and D are true
NARAYANAGROUP 37
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
60. Two bodies with moment of inertia I1 and I 2 1) solid sphere 2) hollow sphere
3) solid cylinder 4) hollow cylinder
( I 2 > I1 ) are rotating with same angular 67. Solid sphere, solid cylinder, hollow sphere,
momentum. If K1 and K 2 are their K.E.s, hollow cylinder of same mass and same radii
then are rolling down freely on an inclined plane.
1) K 2 > K1 2) K 2 < K1 3) K1 = K 2 4) K 2 ≥ K1 The body with maximum acceleration is
1) solid sphere 2) solid cylinder
61. A solid sphere is rotating in free space . If 3) hollow sphere 4) hollow cylinder
the radius of the sphere is increased keeping 68. In the case of following rolling body
mass same which one of the following will not translatory and rotational kinetic energies are
be affected?
equal for
1) Moment of inertia 2) Angular momentum
1) circular ring 2) circular plate
3) Angular velocity 4) Rotational kinetic energy
62. A circular wheel is rotating in horizontal plane 3) solid sphere 4) solid cylinder
without friction about its axis. If a body is 69. A disc is rolling (without slipping) on a
gently attached to the rim of the wheel then frictionless surface . C is its centre and Q and
following is false. P are two points equidistant from C. Let
1) Moment of inertia increases but angular V p , VQ and Vc be the magnitudes of velocities
momentum remains same of points P,Q and C respectively, then
2) Angular velocity decreases but angular [IIT-2004]
momentum remains same
3) Rotational kinetic energy decreases but angular
momentum remains same
Q
4) Angular momentum increases but angular
velocity remains same C
63. A uniform metal rod of length 'L' and mass
'M' is rotating about an axis passing through P
one of the ends perpendicular to the rod with
angular speed ' ω ' . If the temperature 1) VQ > VC > VP 2) VQ < VC < VP
increases by "t 0 C" then the change in its
1
angular velocity is proportional to which of 3) VQ = VP , VC = VP 4) VQ < VC > VP
the following ? (Coefficient of linear expansion 2
of rod = α ) 70. A particle performs uniform circular motion
1) ω 2) ω 3) ω2 4) 1/ ω with an angular momentum L. If the angular
64. A gymnast standing on a rotating stool with frequency f of the particle is doubled, and
his arms outstretched, suddenly lowers his kinetic energy is halved, its angular
arms momentum becomes :
1) his angular velocity decreases L L
2) his angular velocity increases 1) 4L 2) 2 L 3) 4)
2 4
3) his moment of inertia remains same 71. If V is velocity of centre of mass of a rolling
4) his moment of inertia increases body then velocity of lowest point of that body
65. Angular momentum of the particle rotating is
with a central force is constant due to 1) 2V 2) V 3) 2V 4) Zero
[AIEEE-2007]
1) constant force 72. If the velocity of centre of mass of a rolling
2) constant linear momentum body is V then velocity of highest point of that
3) zero torque 4) constant torque body is
ROLLING MOTION &ROTATIONAL V
1) 2V 2) V 3) 2V 4)
2
KINETIC ENERGY 73. If x is ratio of rotational kinetic energy and
66. Solid sphere, hollow sphere, solid cylinder and translational kinetic energy of rolling body
hollow cylinder of same mass and same radii then the following is true
are simultaneously start rolling down from the
1
top of an inclined plane. The body that takes 1) x = 1 2) x £ 1 3) x ³ 1 4) x =
longest time to reach the bottom is 2
38 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
74. A body is freely rolling down on an inclined 79. When a ring is rolling V1, V2, V3 and V4 are
plane whose angle of inclination is q . If ‘a’ velocities of top most point, lowest point, end
is acceleration of its centre of mass then point of horizontal diameter, centre of ring
following is correct respectively, the decreasing order of these
1) a = gsin q 2) a < g sin q velocities is
1) V2, V1, V4, V3 2) V2, V1, V3, V4
3) a > g sin q 4) a = 0 3) V1, V2, V3, V4 4) V1, V3, V4, V2
75. A Child is standing with folded hands at the 80. The increasing order of fraction of total
centre of a platform rotating about its central kinetic energy associated with translatory
axes. The K.E of the system is ‘ K ’. The child motion of the following rolling bodies is
now stretches his hands so that the moment I) circular ring II) circular plate
of inertia of the system doubles. The K.E III) solid sphere IV) hollow sphere
of the system now is 1) I, II, IV, III 2) IV, I, II, III
K K 3) I, IV, II, III 4) IV, I, III, II
1) 2K 2) 3) 4) 4K 81. A and B are two solid spheres of equal
2 4
76. A yo-yo is placed on a rough horizontal masses. A rolls down an inclined plane without
surface and a constant force F , which is less slipping from a height H. B falls vertically
than its weight, pulls it vertically. Due to this from the same height. Then on reaching the
ground.
F 1) both cannot do work
2) A can do more work than B
3) B can do more work than A
C 4) both A and B will have different linear speeds
82. A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a ring
are released from top of an inclined plane
///////////////////////// (frictionless) so that they slide down the
O plane. Then maximum acceleration down the
1) frictional force acts towards left, so it will move plane is (no rolling):
towards left 1) solid sphere 2) hollow sphere
2) frictional force acts towards right, so it will move 3) ring 4) same for all
towards right 83. A sphere cannot roll on
3) it will move towards left, so frictional force acts 1) a smooth horizontal surface
towards left 2) a smooth inclined surface
4) it will move towards right so friction force acts 3) a rough horizontal surface
towards right 4) a rough inclined surface.
77. When the following bodies of same radius
starts rolling down on same inclined plane, C.U.Q - KEY
identify the decreasing order of their times 01) 1 02) 3 03) 3 04) 2 05) 2 06) 4
of descent 07) 4 08) 1 09) 4 10) 4 11) 2 12) 3
I) solid cylinderII) hollow cylinder 13) 3 14) 1 15) 4 16) 3 17) 1 18) 2
III) hollow sphere IV) solid sphere 19) 3 20) 3 21) 4 22) 4 23) 1 24) 2
1) IV, I, III, II 2) II, III, I, IV 25) 2 26) 3 27) 1 28) 3 29) 4 30) 3
3) I, IV, III, II 4) II, III, IV, I 31) 2 32) 4 33) 2 34) 2 35) 4 36) 4
78. When the following bodies having same radius 37) 2 38) 2 39) 4 40) 1 41) 1 42) 3
starts rolling down on same inclined plane, 43) 4 44) 1 45) 2 46) 2 47) 2 48) 1
identify the increasing order of their
49) 2 50) 2 51) 1 52) 1 53) 2 54) 2
accelerations
I) hollow cylinder II) solid cylinder 55) 3 56) 2 57) 1 58) 2 59) 1 60) 2
III)solid sphere IV) hollow sphere 61) 2 62) 4 63) 2 64) 2 65) 3 66) 4
1) I, IV, III, II 2) IV, I, II, III 67) 1 68) 1 69) 1 70) 4 71) 4 72) 3
3) I, IV, II, III 4) I, IV, III, II 73) 2 74) 2 75) 2 76) 1 77) 2 78) 3
79) 4 80) 3 81) 4 82) 4 83) 2
NARAYANAGROUP 39
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
1) 5ms–1 2) 6ms–1 3) 8ms–1 4) Zero
LEVEL - I (C.W) 8. If two particles of masses 3kg and 6kg
which are at rest are separated by a distance
CENTRE OF MASS of 15m. The two particles are moving towards
1. A system consists of two masses connected each other under a mutual force of attraction.
by a massless rod lies along x–axis. The Then the ratio of distances travelled by the
distance of centre of mass from O is particles before collision is
m1=0.4kg m2=0.6kg 1) 2 : 1 2) 1: 2 3) 1 : 3 4) 3 :1
O 9. Two bodies of 6 kg and 4 kg masses have their
x1=2m x2=7m
1) 2m 2) 3m 3) 5m 4) 7m velocity 5iˆ − 2 ˆj + 10kˆ and 10iˆ − 2 ˆj + 5kˆ resp-
2. Four particles, each of mass 1 kg are placed ectively.Then the velocity of their centre of
at the corners of a square OABC of side 1 m. mass is
‘O’ is at the origin of the coordinate system.
OA and OC are aligned along positive X-axis 1) 5iˆ + 2 ˆj − 8kˆ 2) 7iˆ + 2 ˆj − 8kˆ
and positive Y-axis respectively. The position 3) 7iˆ − 2 ˆj + 8kˆ 4) 5iˆ − 2 ˆj + 8kˆ
vector of the centre of mass is (in ‘m’)
10. A thin uniform rod of length “L” is bent at
( 1
) (
1) iˆ + ˆj 2) iˆ + ˆj 3) iˆ − ˆj 4)
2
) (
1 ˆ ˆ
2
)
i− j its mid point as shown in the figure. The
distance of the centre of mass from the point
3. A thick straight wire of length π m is fixed at “O” is
its midpoint and then bent in the form of a
circle. The shift in its centre of mass is
π
1) π m 2) 0.5 m 3) 2 m 4) m θ
2
4. A rigid body consists of a 3kg mass located O
ur
( )
at r1 = 2$i + 5 $j m and a 2kg mass located at 1)
L
sin
θ L
2) cos
θ
r 2 2 2 2
r 2 = (4iˆ + 2 ˆj) m. The position of centre of mass L θ L θ
is 3) sin 4) cos
4 2 4 2
14 ˆ 19 ˆ 14 19 ˆ
1) j + i m 2) ˆi + jm 11. Three identical spheres each of mass ‘m’
5 5 5 5 and radius ‘R’ are placed touching each
19 ˆ 14 ˆ other so that their centres A, B and C lie
3) i + j m 4) 0 on a straight line. The position of their
5 5 centre of mass from centre of A is
5. A boat of mass 40kg is at rest. A dog of mass
4kg moves in the boat with a velocity of 2R 5R 4R
10m/s. What is the velocity of boat(nearly)? 1) 2) 2R 3) 4)
3 3 3
1) 4m/s 2) 2m/s 3) 8m/s 4) 1 m/s 12. A boy of mass 50kg is standing at one end of
6. Two blocks of masses 10kg and 30 kg are a boat of length 9m and mass 400kg. He
placed along a vertical line if the first block is runs to the other end. The distance through
raised through a height of 7cm then the
distance through the second mass should be which the centre of mass of the boat boy
moved to raise the centre of mass of the system system moves is
by 1cm is 1) 0 2) 1m 3) 2m 4) 3m
1)1cm up 2)1cm down 3)2 cm down 4)2 cm up 13. A dog weighing 5kg is standing on a flat boat
MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS, so that it is 10 metres from the shore. It
LINEAR MOMENTUM OF walks 4m on the boat towards the shore and
then halts. The boat weighs 20kg and one can
CENTRE OF MASS assume that there is no friction between it
7. Two bodies of different masses 2kg and 4kg and water. The dog from the shore at the end
are moving with velocities 2m/s and 10m/s of this time is
towards each other due to mutual gravitational
attraction. Then the velocity of the centre of 1) 3.4 m 2) 6.8m 3) 12.6 m 4) 10 m
mass is
40 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
VECTOR PRODUCT (or) CROSS 19. The average angular velocity of the seconds
hand of a watch if the seconds hand of the
PRODUCT watch completes one revolution in 1 minute
14. The angular velocity of a rotating body is
ur is
ω = 4$i + $j − 2k$ . The linear velocity of the π π
rads −1 rads −1
body whose position vector 2$i + 3 $j − 3k$ is
1) 2)
15 30
1) 5$i +8 $j +14k$ 2) 3$i + 8 $j + 10k$ 3)
π
rads −1 4)
π
rads −1
45
3) 8$i − 3 $j + 2k$ 4) -8$i +3 $j +2k$
7
20. The angular displacement of a particle is
15. The area of the triangle whose adjacent sides
given by θ = t3 + t2 + t + 1 then, its angular
(
are represented by the vector 4$i + 3 $j + 4k$ ) velocity at t = 2 sec is ......... rads −1
and 5i$ in sq. units is 1) 27 2) 17 3) 15 4) 16
1) 25 2) 12.5 3) 50 4) 45 21. In the above problem, the angular
(
16. The angle between the vectors $i + $j + k$ and ) acceleration of the particle at t = 2 sec is
......... rads − 2
($i − $j − k$ ) is 1) 14 2) 16 3) 18 4) 24
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS,
8 −11 π
2) sin +
−1
1) sin TORQUE, MECHANICAL
3 3 3
EQUILIBRIUM
−1 8 −1 8 22. A stationary wheel starts rotating about its
3) cos 4) cos
3 3 own axis at uniform angular acceleration
ROTATIONAL VARIABLES, RELATION 8rad / s 2 . The time taken by it to complete 77
BETWEEN LINEAR & ANGULAR rotations is
VARIABLES 1) 5.5 sec 2) 7 sec 3) 11 sec 4) 14 sec
17. The linear velocity of a point on the surface 23. A stationary wheel starts rotating about its own
of earth at a latitude of 60° is axis at constant angular acceleration. If the
wheel completes 50 rotations in first 2 seconds,
800 800π then the number of rotations made by it in next
1) m/sec 2) m/sec
3 3 two seconds is
5 2000π 1) 75 2) 100 3) 125 4) 150
3) 800 × m/sec 4) m/sec r r
18 27
24. If F = 2 ˆi - 3 ˆj N and r = 3iˆ + 2 ˆj m then
torque τr is
18. A table fan, rotating at a speed of 2400 rpm
is switched off and the resulting variation of
the rpm with time is shown in the figure. The 1) 12k$ 2) 13k$ 3) -12k $ 4) -13k $
total number of revolutions of the fan before 25. A crowbar of length 120 cm has its fulcrum
it comes to rest is situated at a distance of 20cm from the load.
Rev/min
The mechanical advantage of the crow bar is
2400 1) 1 2) 3 3) 5 4) 7
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID BODIES
26. Three particles of masses 1gm, 2gm & 3gm
are at 1cm, 2cm, & 3cm from the axis of
rotation respectively then the moment of
600 inertia of the system & radius of gyration of
the system respectively are .......gm cm2 and
0 t(s) .. cm
8 16 24
1) 63, 2.449 2) 60, 4.5
1) 420 2) 280 3) 240 4) 380 3) 36, 4.449 4) 36, 2.449
NARAYANAGROUP 41
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
27. A hoop of mass 500gm & radius 10cm is moment of inertia is
placed on a nail. then the moment of inertia 1) 200 × α × ∆T 2) 100 × α × ∆T
of the hoop, when it is rotated about the nail 3) 50 × α × ∆T 4) 150 × α × ∆T
will be-- kgm2 36. Three point sized bodies each of mass M are
1) 0.05 2) 0.02 3) 0.01 4) 0.03 fixed at three corners of light triangular frame
of side length L. About an axis perpendicular
28. The ratio of moments of inertia of two solid to the plane of frame and passing through
spheres of same mass but densities in the centre of frame the moment of inertia of three
ratio 1:8 is bodies is
1) 1 : 4 2) 4 :1 3) 2 : 1 4) 8 :1
3ML2
29. The radius of a solid sphere is R and its density 1) ML2 2) 3) 3ML2 4) 3ML2
D. When it is made to rotate about an axis 2
37. In above problem, about an axis perpendicular
passing through any diameter of sphere, to the plane of frame and passing through a
expression for its moment of inertia is corner of frame the moment of inertia of three
8 8 bodies is
1) pDR pDR 5
5
2) 3ML2
7 15 1) ML2 2) 2ML2 3) 3ML2 4)
28 28 2
3) pDR 5 4) pDR
5 38. In above problem about an axis passing through
15 5 any side of frame the moment of inertia of three
30. Four point size bodies each of mass M are fixed bodies is
at four corners of a light squre frame of side 3ML2 3ML2 2ML2
length L. The moment of inertia of the four 1) ML2 2) 3) 4)
2 4 3
bodies about an axis perpendicular to the plane 39. The radius of gyration of a body is 18 cm when
of frame and passing through its centre is it is rotating about an axis passing through
1) 4ML2 2) 2 2ML2 3) 2ML2 4) 2ML2 centre of mass of body. If radius of gyration of
same body is 30 cm about a parallel axis to first
31. Four particles each of mass ‘m’ are placed axis then, perpendicular distance between two
at the corners of a square of side length ' l '. parallel axes is
The radius of gyration of the system about 1) 12 cm 2) 16 cm 3) 24 cm 4) 36 cm
an axis perpendicular to the plane of square 40. The position of axis of rotation of a body is
and passing through its centre is changed so that its moment of inertia
decreases by 36%. The % change in its
l l radius of gyration is
1) 2) 3) l 4) 2l 1) decreases by 18% 2) increases by 18%
2 2
32. In the above problem the moment of inertia 3) decreases by 20% 4) increases by 20%
41. A diatomic molecule is formed by two atoms
of four bodies about an axis perpendicular to
the plane of frame and passing through a which may be treated as mass points m1 and
corner is m2 joined by a massless rod of length r. Then
1) ML2 2) 2ML2 3) 2 2ML2 4) 4ML2 the moment of inertia of molecule about an axis
passing through centre of mass and
33. In above problem the moment of inertia of perpendicular to the rod is :
four bodies about an axis passing through 1)zero 2) ( m1 + m2 ) r 2
opposite corners of frame is
m1m2 2 m1 + m2
1) 2ML2 2) 2ML2 3) ML2 4) 2 2ML2 3) m + m r
2
4) m m r
34. In the above problem the moment of inertia 1 2 1 2
42. I is moment of inertia of a thin square plate
of four bodies about an axis passing through about an axis passing through opposite
any side of frame is corners of plate. The moment of inertia of
1) 4ML2 2) 2 2ML2 3) 2ML2 4) 2ML2 same plate about an axis perpendicular to the
plane of plate and passing through its centre
35. The diameter of a fly wheel is R. Its coefficient is
of linear expansion is a . If its temperature is
increased by ∆T the percentage increase in its 1) I/2 2) I / 2 3) 2I 4) 2I
42 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
43. Mass of thin long metal rod is 2 kg and its 2π mr 4π mr 2π mr 2 4π mr 2
moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular 1) 2) 3) 4)
to the length of rod and passing through its T T T T
51. If the radius of earth shrinks by 0.2% without
one end is 0.5kg m 2 . Its radius of gyration is change in its mass, the % change in its
1) 20 cm 2) 40 cm 3) 50 cm 4) 1m angular velocity is
ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND 1) increase by 0.4% 2) increase by 0.1%
CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR 3) decrease by 0.4% 4) decrease by 0.1%
52. A metallic circular plate is rotating about its
MOMENTUM axis without friction. If the radius of plate
44. The diameter of a disc is 1m. It has a mass of expands by 0.1% then the % change in its
20kg. It is rotating about its axis with a speed moment of inertia is
of 120rotations in one minute. Its angular 1) increase by 0.1% 2) decrease by 0.1%
momentum in kg m 2/s is 3) increase by 0.2% 4) decrease by 0.2%
1)13.4 2) 31.4 3) 41.4 4) 43.4 53. A constant torque acting on a uniform circular
45. If the earth were to suddenly contract to 1/nth wheel changes its angular momentum from A
of its present radius without any change in to 4A in 4sec. The torque acted on it is
its mass, the duration of the new day will be
nearly 3A A 2A 3A
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) 24/n hours 2) 24n hours 4 4 4 2
3) 24/n2 hours 4) 24n2 hours 54. Density remaining constant, if earth
46. A particle performs uniform circular motion contracts to half of its present radius,
with an angular momentum L. If the angular duration of the day would be (in minutes)
frequency f of the particle is doubled, and 1) 45 2) 80 3) 100 4) 120
kinetic energy is halved, its angular 55. A mass is whirled in a circular path with an
momentum becomes angular momentum L. If the length of string
1) 4L 2) 2L 3) L/2 4) L/4 and angular velocity, both are doubled, the
47. A ballet dancer is rotating about his own new angular momentum is
vertical axis at an angular velocity 100 rpm 1) L 2) 4L 3) 8L 4) 16L
on smooth horizontal floor. The ballet dancer ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
folds himself close to his axis of rotation by
which is moment of inertia decreases to 56. An automobile engine develops 100 KW
half of initial moment of inertia then his final when rotating at a speed of 1800 rev/min. The
angular velocity is torque it delivers ( in N-m )
1) 50rpm 2) 100rpm 1) 350 2) 440 3) 531 4) 628
3) 150rpm 4) 200rpm 57. An electric motor exerts a constant torque
48. A circular ring of mass M is rotating about 5Nm on a fly wheel by which it is rotated at
its own axis in horizontal plane at an angular the rate of 420rpm The power of motor is
velocity ω . If two point size bodies each of 1)110watt 2)150watt
mass m, are gently attached to the rim of ring
at two ends of its diameter, then the angular 3)220watt 4)300watt
velocity of ring is ROLLING MOTION
Mω 2mω mω 2M ω 58. A shaft rotating at 3000rpm is transmitting a
1) 2) 3) 4)
M + 2m M + 2m M + 2m M + 2m power of 3.14KW. The magnitude of the
49. A ballet dancer is rotating at angular velocity driving torque is
ω on smooth horizontal floor. The ballet 1) 6Nm 2) 10Nm 3) 15Nm 4) 22Nm
dancer folds his body close to his axis of 59. A solid sphere rolls down without slipping
rotation by which his radius of gyration from rest on a 30 0 incline. Its linear
decreases by 1/4th of his initial radius of acceleration is
gyration, his final angular velocity is 1) 5g/7 2) 5g/14 3) 2g/3 4) g/3
3ω 9ω 9ω 16ω 60. A hollow sphere rolls down a 30o incline of
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 4 16 9 length 6m without slipping. The speed of cen
50. A particle of mass m is moving along a circle tre of mass at the bottom of plane is
of radius r with a time period T. Its angular
momentum is 1) 6ms −1 2) 3ms −1 3) 6 2ms −1 4) 3 2ms −1
NARAYANAGROUP 43
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
61. For a body rolling along a level surface, the m
translational and rotational K.E. are sin θ ( L / 4 )
ycm = 2 ; rcm = x 2cm + y 2 cm
equal.The body is m
1) Solid cylinder 2) disc
m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3
3) ring 4) hollow sphere 11. xcm = m + m + m
62. A ring and a disc of same mass roll without 1 2 3
slipping along a horizontal surface with same 12. Center of mass does not change
r ur r
velocity. If the K.E. of ring is 8J, then that of 13. Distance from shore= (10 − l + d ) 14. v = ω × r
disc is ur ur
1) 2J 2) 4J 3) 6J 4) 16J 1 ur ur A× B
63. When a hollow sphere is rolling without 15. Area of triangle = A × B 16. sin θ =
2 AB
slipping on a rough horizontal surface then 2π
the percentage of its total K.E. which is 17. v = rω ; r = R cos θ ; ω =
translational is T
18. Number of revolutions = area under the curve
1) 72% 2) 28% 3) 60% 4) 40%
2π π
64. If a sphere of mass 2kg and diameter 10cm 19. ω = = rads −1
is rolling at speed of 5ms −1 . Its rotational 60 30
dθ
kinetic energy is 20. θ = t 3 + t 2 + t + 1 ; ω = = 3t 2 + 2t + 1
1)10J 2) 30J 3)50J 4) 70J dt
LEVEL-I - (C.W) - KEY dω
21. α = = 6t + 2 = 12 + 2 = 14rads −2
01) 3 02) 2 03) 2 04) 2 05) 4 06) 2 dt
07) 4 08) 1 09) 3 10) 4 11) 2 12) 1 1 2
13) 2 14) 2 15) 2 16) 1 17) 4 18) 2 22. Given ωi = 0 and θ = αt
2
19) 2 20) 2 21) 1 22) 3 23) 4 24) 4
25) 3 26) 4 27) 3 28) 2 29) 2 30) 3 23. ωi = 0 ; t = 2s ;
31) 1 32) 4 33) 3 34) 3 35) 1 36) 1 θ = 50 ( 2π ) = 100π rad
37) 2 38) 3 39) 3 40) 3 41) 3 42) 4 2θ 200π
43) 3 44) 2 45) 3 46) 4 47) 4 48) 1 ∴α = 2
= = 50π rad s −2
49) 4 50) 3 51) 1 52) 3 53) 1 54) 1 t 4
1 2 1
‘ θ ’ in 4 sec ; θ = α t = ( 50π )(16 )
55) 3 56) 3 57) 3 58) 2 59) 2 60) 1
61) 3 62) 3 63) 3 64) 1 2 2
LEVEL-I - (C.W) - HINTS = 400 π rad
in the last 2 sec, θ = 400π − 100π = 300π rad
m1 x1 + m2 x2
1. xcm = 2. rˆcm = xcmiˆ + ycm ˆj θ
=
300π
m1 + m2 ∴ no.of rotations = = 150
ur ur r
2π 2π
l r m1 r1 + m2 r2 24. τr = rr × F
3. 2π r = l; r = 4. r cm =
2π m1 + m2 effort arm
m×v m1∆y1 + m2 ∆y2 25. M A = l o a d a r m
5. vb = 6. ∆ycm = m1 + m2
m+M 26. I = Σmr 2 = 1(1) + 2 ( 2 ) + 3 ( 3)
2 2 2
m1v1 + m2 v2
7. vcm = m1 + m2 ; Internal force does not change
I
and K = Ans: 36, 2.449
the position of centre of mass Σm
r r
r m1 v1 + m2 v 2
2
27. I = mr 2 + mr 2 = 2mr 2 28. I sphere = MR
2
8. m1r1 = m2 r2 9. v cm = 5
m1 + m2
2 2 4 3 8
29. I = MR = π R DR = π DR
2 2 5
m m
− ( L / 4 ) − ( cos θ ) L / 4 5 5 3 15
10. xcm = 2 2
m
44 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
M L M I1 I 2 R1
I = ∑ mr 2
45. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; T = T , R2 = n
30.
L 1 2
L L Here r = 1
2 46. KE = Lω
L 2
L ∴ I = 4 M = 2 ML
2
47. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; I1n1 = I 2 n2 ⇒ n2 = 200rpm
M M 2
2 48. I1ω1 = I 2ω2
l 4ml 2
31. I = ∑ mr 2
= 4 m
2
=
2
= 2ml 2
3
2
I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; mk ω1 = mk ω2 ; k ω = k1 ω2
2 2 2
49. 1 1
I 2
2ml l
1 2
4
Radius of gyration k = = = 2πr
M 4m 2 50. L = mvr and V = T
2
32. I = 2 ML2 + M L 2 ; = 2ML2 + 2ML2 = 4 ML2 2
33. 51. I ω = MR 2ω = constant ; ⇒ R 2ω = constant
5
∆I ∆R L2 − L1
L 2 52. I ∝ R 2 and I = 2 R 53. τ = t
I = 2 M = ML
2
2 54. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 and R1 T1 = R2 T2
5 5
2
L1 r1 ω1
34. I = ML2 + ML2 = 2ML2 55. L = mrω 2 ; L ∝ rω 2 ; = ×
L2 r2 ω2
∆I 2∆l = τω = τω 58. p = τω
35. I ∝ l and = = 2α∆T 56. p 57. p
2
I l g sin θ 2 gl sin θ
36. a= 2 v=
L 2 59. k 60. k2
I = 3 M
1+ 2 1+ 2
L L
O 3
R R
1 2 1 2 1 2 k2
L = ML2 61. mv = Iω 62. KE = mv 1 + 2
2 2 2 R
37. I = 2 ML
2
2 1
3L 3ML 2 KET
× 100 = × 100 1 2
38. I = M = 63. KETOTAL 1+ K
2
64. KErot = Iω
2 4 2
R2
39. K = k cm
2
+d2
LEVEL - I (H.W)
K2 I2
40. I = MK 2 ⇒ I α K 2 ; K − 1 × 100 = I − 1
1 1 CENTRE OF MASS
41. With respect to centre of mass, effective mass 1. The distance of centre of mass from ‘O’ is
mm mm 5kg 4kg 6kg
= 1 2 ;∴ I = 1 2 r 2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
0 0.3m 1m
1)0.21m 2) 0.35m 3) 0.42m 4) 0.48m
ML2 ML2 2. Four bodies of masses 1,2,3,4 kg respectively
42. I = I
, z = I x + I y ;∴ I 1
= = 2I
12 6 are placed at the comers of a square of side
‘a’. Coordinates of centre of mass are (take
mL2 L
43. I = ;∴K = 1kg at the origion, 2kg on X-axis and 4kg on
3 3 Y-axis)
2
mr
44. L = Iω ;where I = ; ω = 2π n 7 a a a 7 a a 3a 7a 3a
2 1) , 2) , 3) , 4) ,
10 2 2 10 2 10 10 2
NARAYANAGROUP 45
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
3. A uniform rod of length one meter is bent at 10. Two objects of masses 200g and 500g have
its midpoint to make 900. The distance of velocities of 10i m/s and ( 3i + 5 j ) m / s
centre of mass from the centre of rod is (in
cm) respectively. The velocity of their centre of mass
1) 20.2 2) 13.4 3) 15 4) 35.36 is
4. Particles of masses 1kg and 3kg are at 5
1) 5i − 25 j 2) i − 25 j
( 2i + 5 j + 13k ) m and ( −6i + 4 j − 2k ) m then 7
instantaneous position of their centre of mass 25 5
is 3) 5i + j 4) 25i − j
7 7
1 VECTOR PRODUCT OR CROSS
1) ( −16i + 17 j + 7k ) m
4 PRODUCT
1
2) ( −8i + 17 j + 7k ) m 11. The position of a particle is given by
r
r = $i + 2 $j − k$ and its momentum is
4
1
3) ( −6i + 17 j + 7k ) m ur
4 p = 3$i + 4 $j − 2k$ . The angular momentum is
1 perpendicular to
4) ( −6i + 17 j + 5k ) m 1) x-axis 2) y-axis 3) z-axis
4
5. A boat of mass 50kg is at rest. A dog of mass 4) line at equal angles to all the axes
5kg moves in the boat with a velocity of 20m/ 12. A uniform sphere has radius R. A sphere of
s. What is the velocity of boat? diameter R is cut from its edge as shown.
1) 4m/s 2) 2m/s 3) 8m/s 4) 1 m/s Then the distance of centre of mass of
MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS, remaining portion from the centre of mass of
the original sphere is
LINEAR MOMENTUM OF
CENTRE OF MASS R
6. Two bodies of masses 5kg and 3kg are moving
towards each other with 2ms −1 and 4ms −1 1)R/7 2) R/14 3)2R/7 4) R/18
13. The area of the parallelogram whose adjacent
respectively. Then velocity of centre of mass is
1) 0.25ms −1 towards 3kg 2) 0.5ms −1 towards 5kg sides are P = 3i$ + 4 $j; Q = −5$i + 7 $j is
3) 0.25ms −1 towards 5kg 4) 0.5ms −1 towards 3kg (in sq.units)
1)20.5 2) 82 3) 41 4) 46
7. A circular disc of radius 20cm is cut from one r r
edge of a larger circular disc of radius 50cm. 14. If A = 3i + j + 2k and B = 2i − 2 j + 4k and θ
The shift of centre of mass is is the angle between the two vectors, then
1) 5.7cm 2) -5.7cm 3) 3.2cm 4) -3.2cm sinθ is equal to
8. Two particles of masses 4kg and 6kg are
separated by a distance of 20m and are 2 2 2 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
moving towards each other under mutual 3 3 7 13
force of attraction, the position of the point ROTATIONAL VARIABLES,
where they meet is RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR
1) 12m from 4kg body 2) 12m from 6kg body
3) 8m from 4kg body 4) 10m from 4kg body AND ANGULAR VARIABLES
9. A uniform metre rod is bent into L shape with 15. A particle is moving with uniform speed
the bent arms at 900 to each other. The 0.5m/s along a circle of radius 1m then the
distance of the center of mass from the bent angular velocity of particle is ( in rads-1 )
point is 1)2 2)1.5 3)1 4) 0.5
L L L L 16. The angular velocity of the seconds hand in a
1) m 2) m 3) m 4) m watch is
4 2 2 2 2 8 2 1) 0.053 rad/s 2) 0.210 rad/s
3) 0.105 rad/s 4) 0.42 rad/s
46 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
17. The angular displacement of a particle is given 24. If I is moment of inertia of a thin circular plate
by θ = t 3 + 2t + 1 , where t is time in seconds. about an axis passing through tangent of plate
Its angular acceleration at t = 2s is in its plane. The moment of inertia of same
circular plate about an axis perpendicular to its
1) 14 rad s −2 2) 17 rad s −2 plane and passing through its centre is
3) 12 rad s −2 4) 9 rad s −2 4I 2I 4I 2I
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS, 1) 2) 3) 4)
5 5 3 3
TORQUE, MECHANICAL 25. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere about
EQUILIBRIUM an axis passing through its centre is 0.8kgm 2 .
18. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis The moment of inertia of another solid sphere
at a uniform angular velocity ω . The disc is whose mass is same as mass of first sphere,
subjected to uniform angular retardation by but the density is 8 times density of first
ω sphere, about an axis passing through its
which its angular velocity is decreased to centre is
2
during 120 rotations. The number of rotations 1) 0.1kgm2 2) 0.2 kgm 2
further made by it before coming to rest is 3) 0.4 kgm 2 4) 0.5 kgm 2
1)120 2) 60 3) 40 4) 20
26. Moment of inertia of a hoop suspended from
19. The handle of a door is at a distance 40cm
a peg about the peg is
from axis of rotation. If a force 5N is applied
on the handle in a direction 300 with plane of MR 2 3MR 2
door, then the torque is 1) MR 2)2 3) 2MR 2 4)
2 2
1) 0.8 Nm 2) 1 Nm 3) 1.6 Nm 4) 2 Nm 27. Four particles each of mass 1kg are at the
20. A door can just be opened with 10N force on four corners of square of side 1m. The M.I.of
the handle of the door. The handle is at a the system about a normal axis through centre
distance of 50cm from the hinges. Then, the of square is
torque applied on the door (in Nm) is
1) 5 2) 10 3) 15 4) 20 1) 6 kgm 2 2) 2 kgm 2 3)1.25 kgm 2 4) 2.5 kgm 2
21. A particle of mass m is projected with an initial 28. Three identical masses, each of mass 1kg,
velocity u at an angle θ to horizontal.The are placed at the corners of an equilateral
torque of gravity on projectile at maximum triangle of side l. Then the moment of inertia
height about the point of projection is of this system about an axis along one side of
the triangle is
mgu 2 sin 2θ
1) 2) mgu 2 sin 2θ 3 2
l
3 2
2 1) 3l 2 2) l 2 3) 4) l
4 2
mgu 2 sin θ 1 29. A wire of mass m and length l is bent in the
4) mu sin 2θ
2
3) form of circular ring. The moment of inertia
2 2
22. A uniform rod is 4m long and weights 10kg. of the ring about its axis is
If it is supported on a knife edge at one meter ml 2 ml 2 ml 2
from the end, what weight placed at that end 1) ml 2 2) 3) 4)
4π 2 2π 2 8π 2
keeps the rod horizontal. 30. The moment of inertia of a thin uniform rod of
1) 8kg 2) 10kg 3) 12kg 4) 15kg mass M and length L about an axis
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID BODIES perpendicular to the rod, through its centre is
23. The ratio of moments of inertia of a solid I.The moment of inertia of the rod about an axis
sphere about axes passing through its centre perpendicular to rod through its end point is
and tangent respectively is I I
1) 2:5 2) 2:7 3) 5:2 4) 7:2 1) 2) 3) 2I 4) 4I
4 2
NARAYANAGROUP 47
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
31. Four point size bodies each of mass m are now stretches his arms so that the M.I. of
fixed at four corners of light square frame of the system doubles. The K.E. of the system
side length 1m. The radius of gyration of these now is
four bodies about an axis perpendicular to the 1) 2K 2) K/2 3) 4K 4) K/4
plane of frame passing through its centre is 40. If radius of earth shrinks by 0.1% without
1 1 change in its mass, the percentage change in
1) 2 2) 2 3) 4) the duration of one day
2 2 1) decrease by 0.1% 2) increase by 0.1%
32. Uniform square plate of mass 240 gram is 3) decrease by 0.2% 4) increase by 0.2%
made to rotate about an axis passing through 41. A ballet dancer spins about a vertical axis at
any diagonal of plate. If its moment of inertia 60rpm with his arms closed. Now he stretches
is 2 × 10−4 kgm 2 then its side length is his arms such that M.I. increases by 50%.
1) 10cm 2) 12cm 3) 15cm 4) 20cm The new speed of revolution is
33. Two objects of masses 1kg and 2kg separated 1) 80rpm 2) 40rpm 3) 90rpm 4) 30rpm
by a distance of 1.2m are rotating about their 42. A metallic circular wheel is rotating about its
centre of mass. Find the moment of inertia of own axis without friction. If the radius of wheel
the system expands by 0.2%, percentage change in its
angular velocity
1) 0.96kgm 2 2) 0.48kgm 2 1) increase by 0.1% 2) decrease by 0.1%
3) 0.83kgm 2 4) 0.72kgm 2 3) increase by 0.4% 4) decrease by 0.4%
34 The radius of gyration of a body about an axis 43. A uniform circular disc of radius R is rotating
at a distance of 4cm from its centre of mass about its own axis with moment of inertia I at
is 5cm. The radius of gyration about a parallel an angular velocity ω If a denser particle of
axis through centre of mass is mass m is gently attached to the rim of disc
1) 2cm 2) 5cm 3) 4cm 4) 3cm than its angular velocity is
35. The M.I. of a thin rod about a normal axis I + mR 2 Iω
through its centre is I. It is bent at the centre 1) ω 2) I ω ( I + mR ) 3) 4)
Iω I + mR 2
such that the two parts are perpendicular to
44. A particle of mass m is rotating along a circular
each other and perpendicular to the axis. The
path of radius r. Its angular momentum is L.
M.I. of the system about the same axis will be
The centripetal force acting on the particle is
1) 2I 2) I 3) I/2 4) 4I
36. The moment of inertia of two spheres of equal L2 L2 m L2 L2
masses about their diameters are the same. 1) 2) 3) 4)
mr r mr 2 mr 3
One is hollow, then ratio of their diameters ur r
45. F = ai$ + 3 $j + 6k$ and r = 2$i − 6 $j − 12k$ . The
1) 1:5 2) 1: 5 3) π :1 4) 5 : 3
value of ‘a’ for which the angular momentum
ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND is conserved is
CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR 1) -1 2) 0 3) 1 4) 2
MOMENTUM 46. If earth shrinks to 1/64 of its volume with mass
37. A circular disc of mass 4kg and of radius 10cm remaining same, duration of the day will be
is rotating about its natural axis at the rate 1) 1.5h 2) 3h 3) 4.5h 4) 6h
of 5 rad/sec. its angular momentum is 47. A mass is whirled in a circular path with a
constant angular velocity and its angular
1) 0.25 kgm 2 s −1 2) 0.1kgm 2 s −1 momentum is L. If the length of string is now
3) 2.5kgm 2 s −1 4) 0.2 kgm 2 s −1 halved keeping the angular velocity same, the
38. If the mass of earth and radius suddenly new angular momentum is
become 2 times and 1/4th of the present value, 1) L/4 2) L/2 3) L 4) 2L
the length of the day becomes 48. A disc rotates with angular velocity ω and
1) 24h 2) 6h 3) 3/2h 4) 3h kinetic energy E. Then its angular momentum
39. A child is standing with folded hands at the E 2E ω
1) Iω 2) L = 3) L = 4) L =
centre of a platform rotating about its central ω ω E
axis. The K.E. of the system is K. The child
48 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS LEVEL-I (H.W) - KEY
2 01) 4 02) 2 03) 4 04) 1 05) 2 06) 3
49. A wheel at rest has M.I. kgm 2 . It is 07) 2 08) 1 09) 1 10) 3 11) 1 12) 2
π 2
13) 3 14) 3 15) 4 16) 3 17) 3 18) 3
rotated by a 60W motor for one minute. The 19) 2 20) 1 21) 4 22) 2 23) 2 24) 2
number of rotations made by the wheel in one 25) 2 26) 3 27) 2 28) 3 29) 2 30) 4
minute is 31) 3 32) 1 33) 1 34) 4 35) 2 36) 4
1) 90 2) 450 3) 1800 4) 1200 37) 2 38) 4 39) 2 40) 3 41) 2 42) 4
50. The shaft of a motor is making 1260rpm. The 43) 4 44) 4 45) 1 46) 1 47) 1 48) 3
torque supplied by the motor is 100Nm. the 49) 3 50) 3 51) 2 52) 1 53) 4 54) 1
power of motor is ( in KW) 55) 2 56) 1 57) 2 58) 2
1) 100 2) 21 3) 13.2 4) 4.8
51. An electric motor rotates a wheel at a LEVEL-I (H.W) - HINTS
constant angular velocity 10rps while m1 x1 + m2 x2
opposing torque is 10Nm . The power of that 1 . xcm = m1 + m2
electric motor is
1) 120W 2) 628W 3) 314W 4) 3.14W m x +m x m y +m y
2. xcm = 1 1 2 2 ; ycm = 1 1 2 2
52. The work done in increasing the angular m1 + m2 m1 + m2
frequency of a circular ring of mass 2kg and
radius 25cm from 10 rpm to 20rpm about is L θ
3. d= Sin
axis 4 2
1)0.2058J 2)0.2040J 3)0.2085J 4)0.2004J r r
r m1 r 1 + m2 r 2
ROLLING MOTION 4. r cm =
53. A ring is allowed to roll down on an incline of m1 + m2
1 in 10 without slipping. The acceleration of m×v
its center of mass is 5. vb =
m+M
1) 9.8ms −2 2) 4.9ms −2 3) 0.98ms −2 4) 0.49ms −2 m1v1 + m2 v2
54. A cylinder is released from rest from the top 6. vcm = m1 + m2
of an incline of inclination θ and length ‘l’. If
the cylinder roles without slipping, its speed r 2d
at the bottom 7. shift = − 2 2
R −r
4 gl sin θ 3gl sin θ 8. m1r1 = m2 r2
1) 2)
3 2 L θ
9. rcm = xcm2
+ ycm
2
(or) rcm = cos
4 gl 4 g sin θ 4 2
r r
3)
3sin θ
4)
3l r m1 v1 + m2 v 2
55. For a body rolling along a level surface, without 10. v cm =
m1 + m2
slipping the translational and rotational kinetic
r r r r
energies are in the ratio 2:1.The body is 11. r × F = τ ; τ ⊥ x − axis
1) Hollow sphere 2) solid cylinder
r 3d
3) Ring 4) Solid sphere 12. shift = 3 3
56. A solid sphere and a spherical shell roll down R −r
an incline from rest from same height. The r r
13. Area of parallelogram = P × Q
ratio of times taken by them is ur ur
21 21 25 25 A× B
1) 2) 3) 4) 14. sin θ =
25 25 21 21 AB
57. When a solid sphere is rolling along level v
surface the percentage of its total kinetic 15. ω =
energy that is translational is r
1) 29%2) 71% 3) 60% 4) 40% 2π
58. A thin ring of mass 1kg and radius 1m is rolling 16. ω =
60
at a speed of 1ms −1 . Its kinetic energy is dω
1) 2J 2) 1J 3) 0.5J 4) zero 17. α =
dt
NARAYANAGROUP 49
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
ω12 − ω22 θ 2 2π
18. α is constant, α = ; θ2 = 1 40. I ω = MR 2 × = constant
2θ 3 5 T
19. τ = rF sin θ 20. τ = rF ∆T ∆R
r R T ∝ R 2 and =2
$ $ $
21. = i + H j × mg j
τ T R
2 41. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; I1n1 = I 2 n2
22. clockwise torque = anticlockwise torque 42. I ω = mr 2ω = constant
2
MR 2 ∆ω ∆r
I centre 5 2 ω ∝ r −2 and = −2
23. = = ω r
I tan get 7 MR 2 7
43. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; I1 = I ; I 2 = I + mR 2
5
L
44. L = mvr ⇒ v =
2
5MR MR 2
24. I = & I| = mr
4 2
mv 2 L2
= =
2
2 centripetal force F
1 I R D 3 r mr 3
25.Mass is same and D ∝ 3 ; 1 = 1 = 2
R I 2 R2 D1 r r ur dL
26. It is equivalent to ring rotating about an axis passing 45. τ = r × F and τ = =0
dt
through tangent. 2
46. I ω = MR ω = constant and V ∝ R3
2
l
27. I = ∑ mr ; r =
2 5
2 L1 r1
2
L
L = mr 2ω ; L ∝ r 2 ; L = r ⇒ L2 = 4
2
3l 47.
2
28. I = M 2
2 1 τθ
48. KE = Lω 49. p = ; θ = 2π N
l 2 t
29. I = mr ; r =
2
50. p = τω 51. p = τω
2π
W = I (ω22 − ω12 )
2 1
ML2 L 52.
30. I = ; I = ICM + M 2
12 2 g sin θ
I a=
31. I = 2ml ; k =
2
53. k2
4m 1+ 2
R
Ml 2 2 gl sin θ
32. I z = I x + I y ; =I+I v=
12 54. k2
1+ 2
m1m2 2 R
33. I = m + m r 1
1 2 mV 2
2
2 =
34. I = mk ; I = I 0 + mr 2
2
55. 1 2 1
2 2 Iω
l l 2
35. ml 2 m 2 m 2
I = ; I =
|
+ =I k2
12 2 3 2 3 2l 1 + 2
2 2 56. R
36. M.I. of solid sphere about diameter = mr t=
5 g sin θ
2 2
M.I. of hollow sphere about diameter = mr KE T 1
3 × 100 = × 100
mr 2 57. KE trans 1 + k
2
37. L = I ω = ω 38. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 R2
2
1 2
L2 58. KErot = Iω
39. KE = 2
2I
50 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
6. A bomb of mass ‘m’ at rest at the coordinate
LEVEL- II (C.W) origin explodes into three equal pieces. At
a certain instant one piece is on the x–axis
CENTRE OF MASS at x=40cm and another is at x=20cm,
1. A uniform wire is bent into the form of a
rectangle of length L and width W. The y = –60cm. The position of the third piece is
coordinates of its centre of mass from a corner 1) x = 60cm, y=60cm 2) x = –60cm, y= –60cm
are 3) x = –60cm, y=60cm 4) x = 60cm, y= –60cm
L 7. Particles of masses m,2m, 3m ........... nm gram
1) (0, 0) 2) , W are placed on the same line at distances, l,
2
2l, 3l, ...... nl cm from a fixed point. The
W L W
3) L, 4) , distance of centre of mass of the particles
2 2 2 from the fixed point in cm in
2. A uniform disc of radius R is put over another
uniform disc of radius 2R of same thickness (2n + 1)l l
1) 2)
and density. The peripheries of the two discs 3 n +1
touch each other. The position of their centre
of mass is n(n 2 + l )l 2l
1) at R/3 from the centre of the bigger disc towards 3) 4) n(n 2 + l )l
2
the centre of the smaller disc
2) at R/5 from the centre of the bigger disc towards 8. Three particles each of mass 2kg are at the
the centre of the smaller disc corners of an equilateral triangle of side 3 m.
3) at 2R/5from the centre of the bigger disc towards
the centre of the smaller disc If one of the particles is removed, the shift in
4) at 2R/5from the centre of the smaller disc the centre of mass is
3. Three particles each 1kg mass are placed at 1) 0.2m 2) 0.5m 3) 0.4m 4) 0.3m
the corners of a right angled triangle AOB, 9. The mass of a uniform ladder of length 5m is
O being the origin of the co–ordinate system 20 kg. A person of mass 60kg stand on the
OA and OB along +ve x-direction and +ve y –
direction. The position vector of the centre of ladder at a height of 2m from the bottom. The
mass is (OA = OB = 1m) (in meters) position of centre of mass of the ladder and
i+ j i− j 2( i + j ) man from the bottom is
1) 2) 3) 4) (i–j) 1)1.256m 2) 2.532m 3) 3.513m 4)2.125m
3 3 3
4. If three particles of masses 2kg, 1kg and 10. A uniform thin rod of length 1m and mass 3kg
3kg are placed at corners of an equilateral is attached to a uniform thin circular disc of
triangle of perimeter 6m then the distance of radius 30cm and mass 1kg at its centre
centre of mass which is at origin of particles perpendicular to its plane. The centre of mass
from 1kg mass is (approximately) ( Assume
of the combination from the centre of disc is
2kg on x-axis
1) 0.375m 2) 0.25m 3) 0.125m 4)0.475m
1
1) 6 m 2) 2m 3) m 4) 2m 11. Four identical particles each of mass “m” are
2 arranged at the corners of a square of side
5. Six identical particles each of mass ‘m’ are
length “L”. If one of the masses is doubled,
arranged at the corners of a regular hexagon
of side length “L”. If the mass of one of the the shift in the centre of mass of the system.
particle is doubled, the shift in the centre of w.r.t. diagonally opposite mass
mass is
L 3 2L L L
L 1) 2) 3) 4)
1) L 2) 6L / 7 3) L / 7 4) 2 5 4 2 5 2
3
NARAYANAGROUP
51
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
12. A circular hole of radius ‘r’ is made in a MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS
disk of radius ‘R’ and of uniform thickness
at a distance ‘a’ from the centre of the disk. AND LINEAR MOMENTUM
The distance of the new centre of mass from 16. Two particles of equal masses have velocities
the original centre of mass is r r
v1 = 4iˆand v 2 = 4jˆ . First particle has an
r
R r acceleration a1 =(5$i + 5 $j ) ms–2 while the
a acceleration of the other particle is zero.
The centre of mass of the two particles
aR 2 ar 2 moves in a path of
1) 2 2) 2 1) Straight line 2) Parabola
R − r2 R − r2
a( R 2 − r 2 ) a( R 2 − r 2 ) 3) Circle 4) Ellipse
3) 4) 17. Two particles of masses “p” and “q” (p>q)
r2 R2
13. The centre of mass of the letter F which is cut are separated by a distance “d”. The shift
from a uniform metal sheet from point A is in the centre of mass when the two particles
6 are interchanged is
A 1) d(p+q) / (p–q) 2) d(p–q) / (p+q)
2
4 3) d p/(p–q) 4) d q/ (p–q)
2 VECTOR PRODUCT OR CROSS PRODUCT
8 18. The unit vector perpendicular to
2 ur ur
2 A = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj + kˆ and B = iˆ − ˆj + kˆ is
2
4 iˆ − ˆj − 5 kˆ 4 iˆ − ˆj + 5 kˆ
1) 2)
2 42 42
1) 15/7, 33/7 2) 15/7, 23/7 4 iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ 4iˆ + ˆj − 5kˆ
3) 22/7, 33/7 4) 33/7, 22/7 3) 4)
14. Two identical thin uniform rods of length L 42 42
each are joined to form T shape as shown 19. An electron is moving with speed 2 × 105 m / s
in the figure. The distance of centre of mass
from D is along the positive x-direction in the presence
ur
(
of magnetic induction B = $i + 4 $j − 3k$ T . The )
A C B
magnitude of the force experienced by the
ur r ur
electron in N ( e = 1.6 × 10 − 1 9 C ) ( F = q ( v × B ))
1) 18 × 1013 2) 28 × 10 − 13
D 3) 1.6 ×10−13 4) 73 × 10 −13
1) 0 2) L/4 3) 3L/4 4)L
15. Figure shows a square plate of uniform 20. A particle of mass 80 units is moving with a
thickness and side length 2 m. One fourth uniform speed v = 4 2 units in XY plane,
of the plate is removed as indicated. The along a line y = x + 5 . The magnitude of the
distance of centre of mass of the remaining
portion from the centre of the original square angular momentum of the particle about the
plate is origin is
1) 1600units 2) 160 2 units
O
3) 152 2 units 4) 16 2 units
1) 1/3m 2) 1/2 m 3)1/6 m 4)1/8m
NARAYANAGROUP
52
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
ROTATIONAL VARIABLES, kg is suspended to the rod at its 10 cm division.
RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR AND The mass of rod is
ANGULAR VARIABLES 1) 0.4 kg 2) 0.8 kg 3) 1.2 kg 4) 1.6 kg
21. The linear and angular velocities of a body in 27. A metallic rod of mass 20 kg and of uniform
rotatory motion are 3 ms–1 and 6 rad/s thickness rests against a wall while the lower
respectively. If the linear acceleration is 6 end of rod is in contact with rough floor. The
m/s2 then its angular acceleration in rads–2 is rod makes an angle 60° with floor. If the
1) 6 2) 10 3) 12 4) 2 weight of rod produces a torque 150 N m about
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS, TORQUE its lower end,the length of rod (g = 10 ms–2)
1) 1.5 m 2) 2 m 3) 3 m 4) 4 m
AND 28. A roller of mass 300 kg and of radius 50 cm
MECHANICAL EQUILIBRIUM lying on horizontal floor is resting against a
22. A stationary wheel starts rotating about its step of height 20 cm. The minimum horizontal
own axis at an angular acceleration force to be applied on the roller passing
5.5rad / s 2 . To acquire an angular velocity through its centre to turn the roller on to the
step is
420 revolutions per minute, the number of
1) 980N 2)1960N 3)2940N 4) 3920N
rotations made by the wheel is
1) 14 2) 21 3) 28 4) 35
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID
23. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis BODIES
at constant angular acceleration. If its 29. A thin rod of mass M and length L is bent into a
angular velocity increases from 210 rpm to circular ring. The expression for moment of
inertia of ring about an axis passing through its
420 rpm during 21 rotations then the angular
diameter is
acceleration of disc is
ML2 ML2 ML2 ML2
1) 5.5rad / s 2 2) 11rad / s2 1) 2) 3) 4)
2p2 4p2 8p2 p2
3) 16.5rad / s 2 4) 22rad / s2 30. Two identical circular plates each of mass 0.1
24. A circular disc is rotating about its own axis kg and radius 10 cm are joined side by side as
at uniform angular velocity w . The disc is shown in the figure. Their moment of inertia
subjected to uniform angular retardation by about an axis passing through their common
which its angular velocity is decreased to tangent is
w / 2 during 120 rotations. The number of
rotations further made by it before coming to
rest is
1) 120 2) 60 3) 40 4) 20S
25. Average torque on a projectile of mass m ,
initial speed u and angle of projection θ
between initial and final positions P and Q , 1) 1.25x10-3 kgm 2 2) 2.5x10-3 kgm 2
about the point of projection is :
3) 1.25x10-2 kgm 2 4) 2.5x10-2 kgm 2
mu 2 sin 2θ
1) 2) mu 2 cosθ 31. A wheel starting from rest is uniformly
2
mu 2 cos θ accelerated with α = 4 rad / s2 for 10 seconds.
3) mu 2 sin θ 4) It is then allowed to rotate uniformly for the
2
26. A metal rod of uniform thickness and of next two seconds and is finally brought to rest
length 1 m is suspended at its 25 cm division in the next 10 seconds. Find the total angle
with help of a string. The rod remains rotated by the wheel.
horizontally straight when a block of mass 2 1) 200 rad 2) 400 rad 3) 300 rad 4) 480rad
NARAYANAGROUP
53
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
32. Two spheres each of mass M and radius R/2 37. I is moment of inertia of a thin circular plate
are connected with a massless rod of length about its natural axis. The moment of inertia
2R as shown in the figure. The moment of of a circular ring whose mass is half of mass
inertia of the system about an axis passing of plate but radius is twice the radius of plate
through the centre of one of the spheres and about an axis passing through any tangent of
perpendicular to the rod is ring in its plane is
Y 1 1) 3 I 2) 4 I 3) 6 I 4) 1.5 I
Y
38. The moment of inertia of a uniform rod of
P M Q M length 2l and mass m about an axis xy passing
2R through its centre and inclined at an enable
R R α is
2 2
1 1
Y Y
21 2 5 5
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
5 5 2 21
ml 2 ml 2
33. Moment of inertia of a thin circular plate of 1) sin 2 α 2) sin 2 α
mass M, radius R about an axis passing 3 12
through its diameter is I . The moment of ml 2 ml 2
inertia of a circular ring of mass M, radius R 3) cos α
2
4) cos 2 α
6 2
about an axis perpendicular to its plane and
39. The ratio of radii of two solid spheres of same
passing through its centre is
material is 1 : 2. The ratio of moments of
I I inertia of smaller and larger spheres about
1) 2I 2) 3) 4I 4)
2 4 axes passing through their centres is
34. The mass of a thin circular plate is M and its 1) 1 : 4 2) 1 : 8 3) 1 : 16 4) 1: 32
radius is R. About an axis in the plane of 40. I is moment of inertia of a thin circular ring
plate at a perpendicular distance R/2 from about an axis perpendicular to the plane of
centre of plate, its moment of inertia is ring and passing through its centre. The same
ring is folded into 2 turns coil. The moment
MR 2 MR 2 3MR 2 3MR 2 of inertia of circular coil about an axis
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 2 4 2 perpendicular to the plane of coil and passing
35. In a rectangle ABCD (BC = 2 AB). The through its centre is
moment of inertia is maximum along axis I I
through 1) 2I 2) 4I 3) 4)
2 4
A E D
41. A metallic thin wire has uniform thickness.
From this wire, two circular loops of radii r,
F H 2r are made. If moment of inertia of 2 nd loop
B G C about its natural axis is n times moment of
inertia of 1st loop about its natural axis. The
1) BC 2) AB 3) HF 4) EG value of n is
36. M is mass and R is radius of a circular ring. 1) 2 2)4 3) 2 2 4) 8
The moment of inertia of same ring about an 42. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder about
axis in the plane of ring at a perpendicular an axis parallel to its length and passing
2R through its centre is equal to its moment of
distance from centre of ring is inertia about an axis perpendicular to the
3
length of cylinder and passing through its
2MR 2 4 MR 2 3 MR 2 17 MR 2 centre. The ratio of radius of cylinder and its
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 9 8 18 length is
1) 1: 2 2) 1 : 2 3) 1: 3 4) 1 : 3
NARAYANAGROUP
54
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
43. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder ANGULAR MOMENTUM &
about its natural axis is I. If its moment of CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR
inertia about an axis ⊥r to natural axis of MOMENTUM
49. A thin uniform circular disc of mass M and
cylinder and passing through one end of
radius R is rotating in a horizontal plane about
cylinder is 19I/6 then the ratio of radius of an axis perpendicular to the plane at an
cylinder and its length is angular velocity ω . Another disc of mass M/
1) 1 : 2 2) 1 : 3 3) 1 : 4 4) 2 : 3 3 but same radius is placed gently on the
44. Two identical circular plates each of mass M first disc coaxially. The angular velocity of
and radius R are attached to each other with the system now is
their planes ⊥r to each other .The moment of 4ω 3ω 3ω
1) 2) ω 3) 4)
inertia of system about an axis passing through 3 4 8
their centres and the point of contact is 50. A turn table is rotating in horizontal plane
about its own axis at an angular velocity
MR 2 5MR 2 3 2 90rpm while a person is on the turn table at
1) 2) 3) MR 4) MR2
4 4 4 its edge. If he gently walks to the centre of
45. The radius of gyration of rod of length ‘L’ and table by which moment of inertia of system
decreases by 25%, then the time period of
mass ‘M’ about an axis perpendicular to its
rotation of turn table is
length and passing through a point at a 1) 0.5sec 2) 1sec 3) 1.5sec 4) 2sec
distance L/3 from one of its ends is 51. A uniform cylindrical rod of mass m and length
7 L2 L 5
L is rotating with an angular velocity ω . The
1) L 2) 3) 4) L axis of rotation is perpendicular to its axis of
6 9 3 2 symmetry and passes through one of its edge
46. Two point size bodies of masses 2 kg, 3 kg are faces. If the room temperature increases by
fixed at two ends of a light rod of length 1 m. ‘t’ and the coefficient of linear expansion is
The moment of inertia of two bodies about an α , the change in its angular velocity is
axis perpendicular to the length of rod and 3 αωt
passing through centre of mass of two bodies is 1) 2αωt 2) αω t 3) αωt 4)
2 2
1)0.6 kgm2 2)0.8 kgm2 3)1 kgm2 4)1.2 kgm2 ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
47. Three rings each of mass M and radius R 52. A constant torque of 1000Nm turns a wheel
are arranged as shown in the figure. The of M.I. 200kg m 2 about an axis through
moment of inertia of the system about AB is centre. The angular velocity after 3s is
A
1) 15 rad s −1 2) 22 rad s −1
3) 28 rad s −1 4) 60 rad s −1
53. If 484J of energy is spent in increasing the
speed of a wheel from 60rpm to 360rpm, the
M.I. of the wheel is
B
1) 1.6 kg m 2 2) 0.3kg m2
3 2 7 2
1) 3MR 2 2) MR 3) 5MR 2 4) MR 3) 0.7 kg m 2 4) 1.2 kg m2
2 2
48. Three identicalHitachi thin rods each of mass 54. The angular frequency of a fan of moment of
m and length L are joined together to form inertia 0.1kgm2 is increased from 30rpm to
an equilateral triangular frame. The moment 60rpm when a torque of 0.03Nm acts on it.
of inertia of frame about an axis perpendicular The number of revolutions made by the fan
to the plane of frame and passing through a while the angular frequency is increased from
corner is 30rpm to 60rpm
1) 7.855rev 2) 6.855rev
2mL2 3mL2 4mL2 3mL2 3) 5.855rev 4) 8.855rev
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 2 3 4
NARAYANAGROUP
55
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
55. A wheel rotating at an angular speed of angle θ with the horizontal. The frictional
20 rad s −1 is brought to rest by a constant force between the cylinder and the incline is
mg sin θ
torque in 4s. If the M.I. is 0.2 kg m 2 the work 1) mg sin θ 2)
3
done in first 2s is 2mg sin θ
1) 50J 2) 30J 3) 20J 4) 10J 3) mg cos θ 4)
3
ROLLING MOTION 61. A thin metal disc of radius 0.25m and mass
56. A sphere of mass m and radius r rolls on a 2kg starts from rest and rolls down an inclined
horizontal plane without slipping with a speed plane. If its rotational kinetic energy is 4J at
u. Now it rolls up vertically, then maximum the foot of the inclined plane, then its linear
height it would be attain will be velocity at the same point is
3u 2 5u 2 7u 2 u2 1) 1.2ms −1 2) 2.8ms −1 3) 20ms −1 4) 2ms −1
1) 2) 3) 4) 62. A small sphere of radius R rolls without
4g 2g 10 g 2g slipping inside a large hemispherical bowl of
57. A circular ring starts rolling down on an radius R . The sphere starts from rest at the
inclined plane from its top. Let v be velocity top point of the hemisphere. What fraction of
of its centre of mass on reaching the bottom the total energy is rotational when the small
sphere is at the bottom of the hemisphere
of inclined plane. If a block starts sliding down
on an identical inclined plane but smooth, from 7 2 5 7
1) 2) 3) 4)
its top, then the velocity of block on reaching 5 7 7 10
63. A metal disc of radius R and mass M freely
the bottom of inclined plane is rolls down from the top of an inclined plane
v v of height h without slipping. The speed of its
1) 2) 2v 3) 4) 2v centre of mass on reaching the bottom of the
2 2 inclined plane is
58. A thin rod of length L is vertically straight on
4 gh 3gh gh
horizontal floor. This rod falls freely to one 1) 2) 3) gh 4)
side without slipping of its bottom. The linear 3 4 2
velocity of centre of rod when its top end 64. A thin rod of length L is vertically straight on
horizontal floor. This rod falls freely to one
touches floor is
side without slipping at its bottom. The linear
3gL 3gL velocity of the top end of the rod with which it
1) 2gL 2) 3) 3gL 4) strikes the floor is
2 4
59. A wheel of radius ‘r’ rolls without slipping with 3gL 3gL
1) 2gL 2) 3) 3gL 4)
a speed v on a horizontal road. When it is at a 2 4
point A on the road, a small lump of mud LEVEL-II - (C.W) - KEY
separates from the wheel at its highest point 01) 4 02) 2 03) 1 04) 2 05) 3 06) 3
B and drops at point C on the ground. The 07) 1 08) 2 09) 4 10) 1 11) 4 12) 2
distance AC is 13) 1 14) 3 15) 3 16) 1 17) 2 18) 1
B 2V 19) 3 20) 1 21) 3 22) 3 23) 1 24) 3
25) 1 26) 3 27) 3 28) 4 29) 3 30) 2
31) 4 32) 1 33) 3 34) 2 35) 2 36) 4
37) 3 38) 1 39) 4 40) 4 41) 4 42) 3
A 43) 1 44) 3 45) 3 46) 4 47) 4 48) 2
C
49) 3 50) 1 51) 1 52) 1 53) 3 54) 1
r r r 3r 55) 2 56) 3 57) 4 58) 4 59) 3 60) 2
1) v 2) 2v 3) 4v 4) v 61) 2 62) 2 63) 1 64) 3
g g g g
60. A solid cylinder of mass m rolls without
slipping down an inclined plane making an
NARAYANAGROUP
56
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
r r
LEVEL-II - (C.W) - HINTS A× B ur r ur
1. CM coincides with point of intersection of
diagonals
18. n = Ar × Br
ˆ
(
19. F = e v × B )
2. Distance of C.M. from centre of big disc x = α ω
r 2a 20. L = r × p = m ( r × v ) 21. =
a v
r- radius of small disc
R2 + r2 22. θ = 2π N ; ω 2 = 2αθ
R- radius of big disc a- distance between the
ω − ω1
2 2
centres of discs 23. α = 2
2θ
3. rcm = xcmiˆ + ycm ˆj
ω1 − ω 2
2 2
4. Coordinates of 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg are (0, 0), 24. α is constant; α =
(2,0), (1, 3 ) respectively 2θ
ω ω
2 2
Σmi xi Σmi yi ω −
Xcm= Σm ; Y cm = Σm ; rcm = X cm 2
+ Ycm2 −0 q1
i i
2 =2 ; q2 =
2θ1 2θ 2 3
md
5. shift = 25. τ = Force × perpendicular distance about the
M +m
6. Coordinates of masses m1 = m, m2 = m, m3 = m point of projection
are (40, 0), (20, -60) & (x3, y3) respectively, 26. clockwise torque = anti clockwise torque
mg × 25 = 2 g × 15
( xcm , ycm ) = ( 0, 0) ///////////////
∑ mx = (1 + 2 + 3 + .... + n ) l
2 2 2 2
xcm = 10 50
∑ m (1+ 2 + 3 + ..... + n)
7.
25
md
8. shift = 2g
mg
M −m
9. Mass of ladder acts at 2.5m Mass of man acts at 2m L
27. τ = mg × cos 60°
m1 y1 + m2 y2 2
y=
m1 + m2
m2 d L
md
10. Xcm = m + m 11. shift = 2
1 2 M +m
r 2a L
12. x=
R2 − r 2 2
Σmi xi Σmi yi 0
60
13. m = σA ; Xcm = Σm ;Ycm = Σm
i i
L
m + m( L ) mg
=
14. X 2 28. Clock wise torque = anti clockwise torque
( )
cm
2m
F (50 − 20) = mg 502 − 302
15. ‘m’ be the mass of each part 3m × cc2 = m × cc1
− ad MR 2 L
(or) X = a - Area of removed plate A - 29. I = but 2π R = L ⇒ R =
A−a 2 2π
area of original plate d - distance between centers
uuur uuur ML2
∴I = 2
16. Vcm parallel to acm 8π
m2 d pd 5 1
17. xcm = m + m = p + q 30. I = 2I1 & I1 = MR 2 31. θ = ω0t + α t 2
4 2
2 R 2
1 2
32. I = 2 5 M 2 + M ( 2 R )
2
m1d qd
xcm = =
1
m1 + m2 p + q ;shift = x cm : xcm
1
NARAYANAGROUP
57
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
MR 2 1 ∆ω ∆I
33. I = ; I ' = MR 2 51. I∝ ⇒ =− = 2α∆t
4 ω ω I
53. W = I 2π ( n2 − n1 )
2 1
MR 2 R 52. τ = Iα ; ω = α t
2 2
34. I = I c + Md = 2
+M 2
4 2 54. τ = I α , ω 2 − ω02 = 2αθ , θ = 2π N
35. perpendicular distance is maximum when the axis
of rotation passes through AB, hence M.I about Iω 1 2 k2
AB is maximum. 55. τ = ; W =τθ 56. mgh = mv 1 + 2
2R
t 2 R
I = I c + Md 2 ; I C = MR and d =
2
36.
3 57. for ring, v1 = 2 gh2 = v for block v 2 = 2gh
k
MR I = M R 2 = 2 R = 6 I
2 3 3 M 1+ 2
I= [ ]2
2 2
37. ; 1 1 1 R
2 2
38. Take small element and use integration 3g L
58. ω = ; v = rω and r =
2 L 2
39. I = MR 2 , M α R 3 ; I α R 5 k2
5 2h
59. R = 2v × T = 2v 60. f = mg sin θ 2 2
1 g k +R
40. Mass is same. l = 2π rn ⇒ rα where n is 1 2 1 MR2 2 mv 2
n 61. KErot = 2 Iω = 2 2 ω =
number of turns 4
1 2
2 2
Iω
I1 r1 n2
I ∝ r 2 and I = r = n
2 1
2 gh
62. 1 2 k2 63. v = 64. mgh = Iω 2
2 2 1 mv 1 + 2 k2 2
2 R 1+ 2
41. I ∝ MR 2 and M ∝ L ∝ R ∴ I ∝ R3 and r
3
I 2 R2
= LEVEL- II (H.W)
I1 R1
MR 2 ML2 MR 2 CENTRE OF MASS
42. = +
2 12 4 1. Four particles, each of mass 1kg, are placed
MR 2
19 I ML2 MR 2 at the comers of square of side one meter in
43. I = ; I1 = = + the XY plane. If the point of intersection of
2 6 3 4 the diagonals of the square is taken as the
2 2
MR MR 3 origin,the co-ordinates of the center of mass
44. I1 = + = MR 2 are
2 4 4
45. According to parallel axes theorem 1) (1,1)2) (-1, 1) 3) (1,-1) 4) (0,0)
2 2. Three identical particles each of mass 0.1kg
ML2 L 4 ML2 ML2 L
I= +M = = ∴K = are arranged at three corners of a square of
12 6 36 9 3 side 2m . The distance of the center of mass
m1m2 2 from the fourth corner is
46. I = m + m L 1) 2/3m 2) 4/3m 3) 1m 4) 8/3m
1 2
3. A bomb of mass ‘m’ at rest at the coordinate
MR 2 3 2 MR 2 7 MR 2 origin explodes into three equal pieces. At a
47. I = + 2 2 MR = 2 + 3MR = 2
2
2 certain instant one piece is on the x-axis at
mL2 x=60cm and another is at x=40cm, y=60cm.
48. I = 2 I1 + I 2 ; I1 = ; I 2 = I c + md 2 The position of the third piece is
3 1) x = −100cm , y = −60cm
mL2 3L
Ic = and d = 2) x = −60cm , y = −60cm
12 2
3) x = −60cm , y = 60cm
MR 2 M
49. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; I1 = , I2 = M + R2 4) x = 60cm , y = −60cm
2 3
50. I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; I1 = 100, I 2 = 100 − 25 = 75
NARAYANAGROUP
58
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
4. Masses 1kg, 1.5kg , 2kg and M kg are VECTOR PRODUCT OR CROSS PRODUCT
situated at (2,1,1), (1,2,1), (2,-2,1) and 10. The magnitude of two vectors which can be
(-1,4,3).If their center of mass is situated at
(1,1,3/2),the value of M is represented in the form i + j + ( 2 x ) k is
1) 1kg 2) 2kg 3) 1.5kg 4) 3kg 18 .Then the unit vector that is
5. Six identical particles each of mass ‘m’ are perpendicular to these two vectors is
arranged at the corners of a regular hexagon
of side length ‘L’. If the masses of any two −i + j i− j −i + j −i + j
1) 2) 3) 4)
adjacent particles are doubled. The shift in the 2 8 2 8 2 2
centre of mass is
L 3L 3L 3L
( −1
)
11. A proton of velocity 3$i + 2 $j ms enters a
6.
1)
8
2)
8
3)
16
4)
4
Three particles each of mass ‘m’ are arranged
( )
field of magnetic induction 2$i + 3k$ T . The
accel eration produced in the proton in
at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side
‘L’. If one of masses is doubled. The shift in (specific charge of proton = 0.96 × 108 Ckg −1 )
r ur
the centre of mass of the system
L L 3L L
(
F = q v × B
)
( )
1) 2) 4 3 3) 4) 2 3
1) 0.96 ×10 6$i + 9 $j + 4k$
3 4 8
7. Four identical particles each of mass ‘m’ are
2) 0.96 ×10 ( 6$i − 9 $j − 4k$ )
arranged at the corners of a square of side length 8
‘l’. If the masses of the particles at the end of a
3) 0.96 ×10 ( $i − $j − k$ )
side are doubled, the shift in the centre of mass 8
of the system.
4) 0.96 ×10 ( 5$i − 9 $j − 4k$ )
l l l l 8
1) 2) 3) 4)
6 6 2 2 5 2
8. The co-ordinates of centre of mass of letter E ROTATIONALVARIABLES, RELATION
which is cut from a uniform metal sheet are BETWEEN LINEAR & ANGULAR
(take origin at bottom left corner and width of VARIABLES
letter 2cm every where) 12. A vehicle starts from rest and moves at uniform
6 cm acceleration such that its velocity increases
by 3ms −1 per every second. If diameter of
wheel of that vehicle is 60cm, the angular
8 cm 2 cm acceleration ofw heelis(in rad s-1)
2cm 1)5 2)10 3)15 4)20
13. Starting from rest the fly wheel of a motor
6 cm attains an angular velocity of 60 rad/sec in 5
1) (2cm, 4cm) 2) (2.4cm, 5cm) seconds. . The angular acceleration obtained is
3) (3cm, 5cm) 4) (3.3cm, 5cm) 1) 6 rad / s 2 2) 12 rad / s 2
MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS,
3) 300 rad / s 2 4) 150 rad / s 2
LINEAR MOMENTUM OF
CENTRE OF MASS ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS, TORQUE,
9. Two particles of equal mass have velocities MECHANICAL EQUILIBRIUM
ur ur 14. A ceiling fan is rotating about its own axis
V 1 = 8$i and V 2 = 8 $j . First particle has an with uniform angular velocity ω . The electric
r
( )
current is switched off then due to constant
acceleration a1 = 5$i + 5 $j ms while the
−2
opposing torque its angular velocity is
acceleration of the other particle is zero.The 2ω
centre of mass of the two particles moves is a reduced to as it completes 30 rotations.
3
path of The number of rotations further it makes
1) straight line 2) parabola before coming to rest is
3) circle 4) ellipse 1) 18 2) 12 3) 9 4) 24
NARAYANAGROUP
59
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
15. A wheel has a speed of 1200 revolutions per rings and passing through the point of contact
minute and is made to slow down at a rate of is
4 rad/s2. The number of revolutions it makes
before coming to rest is
1) 143 2) 272 3) 314 4) 722
16. A particle of mass 1kg is projected with an
initial velocity 10ms −1 at an angle of G
projection 450 with the horizontal. The 3 3 5 5
average torque acting on the projectile 1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
between the time at which it is projected and 2 4 2 4
the time at which it strikes the ground about 22. The moment of inertia of a thin square plate
the point of projection in newton meter is of mass 1.2 kg is 0.2 kgm 2 when it is made to
1) 25 2) 50 3) 75 4) 100 rotate about an axis perpendicular to plane
17. A uniform metre scale of mass 1kg is placed of plate and passing through a corner of plate.
on table such that a part of the scale is beyond The side length of plate is
the edge. If a body of mass 0.25kg is hung at 1) 0.2m 2) 0.4m 3) 0.5m 4) 0.8m
the end of the scale then the minimum length 23. Three point masses m1,m2,m3 are placed at
of scale that should lie on the table so that it three corners of an equilateral triangle of side
does not tilt is a. The moment of inertia of the system about
1) 30cm 2) 80cm 3) 70cm 4) 60cm an axis coinciding with the altitude of triangle
18. A heavy wheel of radius 20cm and weight passing through m 1 is
10kg is to be dragged over a step of height
10cm, by a horizontal force F applied at the
centre of the wheel. The minimum value of F m1
is
1)20kgwt 2)1kgwt
3) 10 3 kgwt 4) 10 2 kgwt
m2 a a m3
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID BODIES
19. Two discs one of density 7.2 g/cm3 and the 2 2
other of density 8.9 g/cm3 are of same mass ( m2 + m3 ) a 2
and thickness. Their moments of inertia are 1) ( m1 + m2 + m3 ) a 2
2)
6
in the ratio
( m2 + m3 ) a
2 2
( m2 + m3 ) a 2
8.9 7.2 3) 4)
1) 2) 2 4
7.2 8.9 24. From a uniform wire two circular loops are
3) ( 8.9 × 7.2 ) :1 4) 1: ( 8.9 × 7.2) made (i) P of radius r and (ii) Q of radius nr. If
20. The mass of a circular ring is M and its radius the moment of inertia of Q about an axis
is R. Its moment of inertia about an axis in passing through its centre and perpendicular
the plane of ring at a perpendicular distance to its plane is 8 times that of P about a similar
R/2 from centre of ring is axis. The value of n is (diameter of the wire
is very much smaller than r or nr)
MR 2 MR 2 3MR 2 3MR 2 1) 8 2) 6 3) 4 4) 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 2 2 4 25. The moment of inertia of a uniform thin rod of
21. Two circular rings each of mass M and radius length L and mass M about an axis passing
R are attached to each other at their rims through a point at a distance of L/3 from one of
and their planes perpendicular to each other its ends and perpendicular to the rod is
as shown in the figure. The moment of inertia
of the system about a diameter of one of the 7 ML2 ML2 ML2 ML2
1) 2) 3) 4)
48 6 9 3
NARAYANAGROUP
60
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
26. Two small spheres of mass 5kg and 15kg are 33. The moment of inertia of thin rod of linear density
joined by a rod of length 0.5m and of λ and length l about an axis passing through
negligible mass. The M.I. of the system about one end and perpendicular to its length is
an axis passing through centre of rod and
normal to it is λl 2 λl 2 λl 3 λl 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) 10 kgm 2 2) 1.25 kgm 2 3) 20 kgm 2 4) 8 kgm 2 12 3 12 3
27. Ratio of densities of materials of two 34. Moment of inertia of a bar magnet of mass M ,
circular discs of same mass and thickness is length L and breadth B is I. Then moment of
5:6.The ratio of their M.I. about natural axes inertia of another bar magnet with all these values
is doubled would be
1) 5:6 2) 6:5 3) 25:36 4) 1:1 1) 8I 2) 4I 3) 2I 4) I
28. M.I. of a uniform horizontal solid cylinder of ANGULAR MOMENTUM & CONSERVATION OF
mass M about an axis passing through its edge ANGULARMOMENTUM
and perpendicular to the axis of cylinder when 35. A circular disc is rotating without friction
its length is 6 times of its radius R is about its natural axis with an angular velocity
39 39 49 49 ω . Another circular disc of same material and
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2 thickness but half the radius is gently placed
4 2 4 2
29. A circular disc of radius R and thickness R/6 over it coaxially. The angular velocity of
has moment of inertia I about an axis passing composite disc will be
through its centre and perpendicular to its 4ω 8ω 7ω 16ω
plane. It is melted and recast into a solid 1) 2) 3) 4)
3 9 8 17
sphere. The M.I. of the sphere about its
36. A ballet dancer is rotating about his own
diameter as axis of rotation is
vertical axis on smooth horizontal floor with
1) I 2) 2I/3 3) I/5 4) I/10
30. The moment of inertia of ring about an axis a time period 0.5sec. The dancer folds himself
passing through its diameter is I. Then close to his axis of rotation due to which his
moment of inertia of that ring about an axis radius of gyration decreases by 20%, then
passing through its centre and perpendicular his time period is
to its plane is 1) 0.1sec 2) 0.25sec 3) 0.32sec 4) 0.4sec
1) 2I 2) I 3) I/2 4) I/4 37. A particle of mass 1kg is moving along the line
31. A thin rod of mass 6m and length 6L is bent y = x + 2 with speed 2m/sec. The magnitude
into regular hexagon. The M.I. of the of angular momentum of the particle about the
hexagon about a normal axis to its plane and origin is
through centre of system is 1) 4 kg − m 2 / sec 2) 2 2 kg − m 2 / sec
1) mL2 2) 3mL2 3) 5mL2 4) 11mL2
3) 4 2 kg − m 2 / sec 4) 2 kg − m 2 / sec
32. If I1 is moment of inertia of a thin rod about
38. A uniform metal rod of length L and mass M
an axis perpendicular to its length and passing
is rotating about an axis passing through one
through its centre and I2 is its moment of
of the ends perpendicular to the rod with
inertia when it is bent into a shape of a ring
angular speed ω . If the temperature
then (Axis passing through its centre and
increases by toC then the change in its
perpendicular to its plane)
angular velocity is proportional to which of
I1 I1 the following?(Coefficient of linear expansion
1) I 2 = 2) I 2 =
4π 2 π2 of rod= α ).
I2 π 2 I2 3
2) ω
1
3) = 4) I = π 2 1) ω 3) ω 2 4)
ω
I1 3 1
NARAYANAGROUP
61
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS 10 20 30 40
39. A fly wheel of M.I. 6 × 10−2 kgm2 is rotating 1) 7 2)
7
3)
7
4)
7
with an angular velocity of 20 rad s −1 . The 45. A thin metal rod of length 0.5m is vertically
straight on horizontal floor. This rod is falling
torque required to bring it to rest in 4s is
freely to a side without slipping. The angular
1)1.6Nm 2) 0.6Nm 3) 0.8Nm 4)0.3Nm
40. When 200J of work is done on a fly wheel its velocity of rod when its top end touches the
frequency of rotation increases from 4Hz to floor is (nearly)
9Hz. The M.I. of the wheel about the axis of 1) 7rad s −1 2) 4.2rad s −1
rotation is (nearly)
1) 0.12kg m 2 2) 0.2 kg m 2 3) 3.5rad s −1 4) 2.1rad s −1
3) 0.22 kg m 2 4) 0.3kg m2 46. What should be the minimum coefficient of
41. The moment of inertia of a wheel of radius static friction between the plane and the
cylinder, for the cylinder not to slip on an
20cm is 40 kgm 2 if a tangential force of 80N inclined plane
applied on the wheel, its rotational K.E. after
1 1 2 2
4s is 1) tan θ 2) sin θ 3) tan θ 4) sin θ
1) 16.2J 2) 51.2J 3) 25.6J 4) 24.8J 3 3 3 3
ROLLING MOTION 47. A thin metal disc of radius 25cm and mass
2kg starts from rest and rolls down on an
42. An initial momentum is imparted to a
inclined plane. If its rotational kinetic energy
homogeneous cylinder, as a result of which it
is 8J at the foot of this inclined plane, then
begins to roll without slipping up an inclined
linear velocity of centre of mass of disc is
plane at a speed of v0 = 4m / sec The plane 1) 2 m/s 2) 4m/s 3) 6m/s 4) 8m/s
makes an angle θ = 300 with the horizontal. LEVEL-II(H.W) - KEY
What height h will the cylinder rise to? 01) 4 02) 2 03) 1 04) 3 5) 2 06) 2
( g = 10m / s )
2 07) 1
13) 2
08) 2
14) 4
09) 1
15) 3
10) 1
16) 2
11) 2
17) 4
12) 2
18) 3
1) 0.8m 2) 1.2m 3) 1.0m 4) 1.6m 19) 1 20) 4 21) 3 22) 3 23) 4 24) 4
43. A solid cylinder starts rolling down on an 25) 3 26) 2 27) 2 28) 3 29) 3 30) 1
inclined plane from its top and V is velocity of
31) 3 32) 4 33) 4 34) 1 35) 4 36) 3
its centre of mass on reaching the bottom of
37) 2 38) 2 39) 4 40) 1 41) 2 42) 2
inclined plane. If a block starts sliding down
43) 3 44) 4 45) 1 46) 1 47) 2
on an identical inclined plane but smooth, from
its top, then the velocity of block on reaching LEVEL-II(H.W) - HINTS
the bottom of inclined plane is m1 x1 + m2 x2 m y + m2 y2
1. xcm = ; ycm = 1 1
v 3 2 m1 + m2 m1 + m2
1) 2) 2v 3) v 4) v
2 2 3 2. rcm = xcm
2
+ ycm
2
44. A wheel of radius 0.2m rolls without slip ping m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3
with a speed 10m/s on a horizontal road. When 3. ( xcm , ycm ) = ( 0, 0) ; 0= m1 + m2 + m3
it is at a point A on the road, a small lump of
m1 y1 + m2 y2 + m3 y3
mud separates from the wheel at its highest 0=
point B and drops at point C on the ground. m1 + m2 + m3
The distance AC is m x + m2 x2 + m3 x3 + m4 x4
4. xcm = 1 1
B m1 + m2 + m3 + m4
md md
5. shift = 6. shift =
M +m M +m
A C
NARAYANAGROUP
62
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
md L2 R2
7. shift = 28. I = M 3 + 4
M +m
m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3 + m4 x4
xcm = 1
8. 29. I = π R ρ ;volume of disc = volume of sphere
5
m1 + m2 + m3 + m4
12
m1 y1 + m2 y2 + m3 y3 + m4 y4
=
⇒ radius of sphere ( R1 ) =
ycm R
m1 + m2 + m3 + m4
ur ur 2
A× B
9. vcm is parallel to acm 10. nˆ = ur ur
A× B MR 2
30. I = and I 1 = MR 2 = 2 I
ur r ur r e r ur 2
(
11. F = e v × B ; a =
m
)
v× B ( ) ml 2 3
2
31. I rod = + m l ; I system = 6 I rod
a a 12
12. α = 13. α = 2
r r
14. α is constant ML2 L
32. I1 = , I 2 = MR 2 , R =
2π
ω 2 − ( 2ω / 3)
2 12
ω − ω 2 and θ1 =
2 2
θ= 1 M ML λ L
2 3
2α θ 2 ( 2ω / 3 )2 − 0 33. λ= ; I= =
L 3 3
2π N ω 2 − ω12
15. ω =
t
;θ = 2
2α
34. I=
M 2
12
( L + b2 ) 35. I1ω1 = ( I1 + I 2 ) ω2
2π 2π
= m ( u 2 cos 2 θ )
dL
16. τ = I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ; mK1 × T = mK 2 × T
2 2
dt 36.
1 2
17. ( 50 − x ) 1 = x ( 0.25) x = 40cm 37. L = mvr⊥ = 1( 2 ) ( 2 cos 450 ) = 2 2
length of the table = 100-40=60cm Y y=x+2
18. clockwise torque = anticlockwise torque
( 20 ) − (10) = F ( 20 −10 )
2 2
mg r
X
MR I R 2
ρ 8.9 2
19. I = ⇒ 1 = = 2= 1 m
2 I2 R ρ1 7.2 2
1 ML2
2
38. I ∝ -----(1) ; I = ⇒ I ∝ L2 -----(2)
MR 2 R ω 3
20. I = I C + md , IC = ; d=
2
1
2 2 from (1) and (2) ω ∝ 2
MR 2 5MR 2 L
21. I = 2MR 2 + =
40. W = I 4π ( n2 − n1 )
2 2
1 2 2 2
2
39. τ = Iα 2
MR 2 L
22. I = 6 + M = 0.2 1 2
2 41. ω = ω0 + α t ; KE = Iω
a 2
23. I = ∑ mr ; r1 = 0, r2 = r3 = g sin θ
2
h
2 a= , v = 2aS , sin θ =
24. Moment of inertia P = Mr 2 42. 1+ 2
K 2
s
Moment of inertia Q = ( nM ) ( nr 2 )
R
2 gh
given I Q = 8 I P ⇒ n = 2 v1 = =v
43. For cylinder, k2
2 1+ 2
ML2 L R
25. I= +M 26. I = mr 2
12 6 For block v 2 = 2gh
1
27. I = π tR ρ
4
2h
2 44. R = 2v × T = 2v and h = 2R
g
NARAYANAGROUP
63
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
5. A circular disc of radius R is removed from a
k 2 / R2 bigger circular disc of radius 2R such that the
l 1 2
= Iω µ = tan θ 2 circumference of the discs coincide . The
45. Mg 46. k + 1
2 2 centre of mass of the new disc is α R from the
R2 centre of the bigger disc. The value of α is
1) 1/3 2) 1/2 3) 1/6 4) 1/4
1 2 1 mR 2 2 6. Four identical planks each of lengths ‘L’
47. KErot = Iω = ω are arranged one above the other over a
2 2 2
table as shown. Each projects a distance ‘a’
LEVEL- III beyond the edge of the one that is below it.
What is the maximum possible value of ‘a’
MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS& for the system to be in equilibrium without
LINEAR MOMENTUM tripping forward?
1. Seven homogeneous bricks each of length a
L,mass M are arranged as shown. Projection a
a
L 1) L/5 2) L/ 4 3) L/3 4) L
x= then x co-ordinate of C.M is
10 7. Two masses ‘m1 ’ and ‘m2’ (m1>m 2 ) are
-x- connected to the ends of a light inextensible
-x-
-x- string which passes over the surface of a
-x-
-x- smooth fixed pulley. If the system is
-x-
released from rest, the acceleration of the
0
22 32 42 12 centre of mass of the system will be (g =
1) L 2) L 3) L 4) L acceleration due to gravity)
35 35 35 35
2. The centre of mass of a non uniform rod of g (m1 - m 2 ) g (m1 - m 2 ) 2
length L whose mass per unit length 1) 2)
(m1 + m 2 ) (m1 + m2 ) 2
Kx 2
λ= ,Where k is a constant and x is the g (m1 + m 2 ) g (m1 + m 2 )
L 3) 4)
distance from one end is : (m1 − m2 ) (m1 − m2 )
3L L K 3K 8. Two bodies of masses m 1 and m 2 are moving
1) 2) 3) 4) with velocity v1 and v2 respectively in the
4 8 L L same direction. The total momentum of the
3. A rope of length 30 cm is on a horizontal table system in the frame of reference attached to
with maximum length hanging from edge A of
the centre of mass is (v is relative velocity
the table. The coefficient of friction between
the rope and table is 0.5. The distance of centre between the masses)
of mass of the rope from A is m1 m 2 v 2 m1 m 2 v
1) 2)
5 15 5 17 5 19 7 17 m1 − m 2 m1 + m2
1) cm 2) cm 3) cm 4) cm
3 3 3 3 4 m1 m 2 v
4. As shown in figure from a uniform 3) zero 4)
rectangular sheet a triangular sheet is m1 + m2
removed from one edge. The shift of centre 9. A shell in flight explodes into n equal
of mass is fragments k of the fragments reach the
60 cm ground earlier than the other fragments.
The acceleration of their centre of mass
20 cm
O 30 cm subsequently will be
1) g 2)(n–k)g
(n − k ) g (n − k )
3) 4) g
1) 4.2 cm 2) – 4.2cm 3) 6.67 cm 4)– 6.67 cm k n
NARAYANAGROUP
64
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
10. A body of mass ‘m’ is dropped and another 14. Two particles A and B of mass 1 Kg and 2 Kg
body of mass M is projected vertically up with respectively are projected in the directions
speed ‘u’ simultaneously from the top of a shown in figure with speeds u A = 200 m / s and
tower of height H . If the body reaches the
highest point before the dropped body reaches uB = 50 m / s , Initially they were 90 m apart.
the ground, then maximum height raised by Find the maximum height attained by the
the centre of mass of the system from ground centre of mass of the particles. ( g = 10 m / s 2 )
is B
u2 u2 uB
1) H + 2) uA
2g 2g
2 2
A
1 Mu 1 mu
3) H + 4) H + 1) 115.55m 2) 145.55 m
2g m + M 2g m + M 3) 4.55 m 4) 34.55 m
11. Two blocks of equal mass are tied with a light VECTOR PRODUCT OR CROSS
string, which passes over a massless pulley
as shown in figure. The magnitude of
PRODUCT
15. At a given instant of time the position vector
acceleration of centre of mass of both the
of a particle moving in a circle with a velocity
blocks is ( neglect friction everywhere )
3iˆ − 4 ˆj + 5kˆ is iˆ + 9 ˆj − 8kˆ . Its angular velocity
at that time is:
1)
(
13iˆ − 29 ˆj − 31kˆ ) 2)
( )
13iˆ − 29 ˆj − 31kˆ
146 146
60
0
30
0
3)
(
13iˆ + 29 ˆj − 31kˆ ) 4)
( )
13iˆ + 29 ˆj + 31kˆ
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
146 146
3 −1 g 3 −1
1) 4 2 g 2) ( 3 − 1)g 3) 4) 2 g ROTATIONAL VARIABLES,
2 RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR
12. A rope thrown over a pulley has a ladder with & ANGULAR VARIABLES
a man of mass m on one of its ends and a 16. Two points P and Q, diametrically opposite on
counter balancing mass M on its other end. a disc of radius R have linear velocities v and
The man climbs with a velocity vr relative to 2v as shown in figure. Find the angular speed
ladder . Ignoring the masses of the pulley and of the disc.
the rope as well as the friction on the pulley v P
axis, the velocity of the centre of mass of this
system is :
2v
m m M 2M Q
1) vr 2) vr 3) vr 4) vr
M 2M m m v 2v v v
13. Two particles of masses 2 kg and 3 kg are 1) 2) 3) 4)
R R 2R 4R
projected horizontally in opposite directions 17. Point A of rod AB (l =2m) is moved upwards
from the top of a tower of height 39.2 m with against a wall with velocity v=2 m/s. Find
velocities 5 m/s and 10 m/s respectively. The angular speed of the rod at an instant when
horizontal range of the centre of mass of two
particles is θ = 600 .
v
1) 8 2 m in the direction of 2 kg A
2) 8 2 m in the direction of 3 kg
3) 8 m in the direction of 2 kg
θ
4) 8 m in the direction of 3 kg
B
1) 4rad/s 2)1.155rad/s 3) 2rad/s 4) 2.50rad/s
NARAYANAGROUP
65
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
18. A uniform circular disc of radius R lies in the 22. A wheel having radius 10 cm is coupled by a
XY plane with its centre coinciding with the belt to another wheel of radius 30cm. 1st
origin of the coordinate system. Its moment wheel increases its angular speed from rest
of inertia about an axis, lying in the XY plane, at a uniform rate of 1.57 rad s–2. The time for
parallel to the X-axis and passing through a 2nd wheel to reach a rotational speed of 100
point on the Y-axis at a distance y =2R is I1 . rev/min is...(assume that the belt does not slip)
Its moment of inertia about an axis lying in a 1) 20 sec 2) 10 sec 3) 1.5 sec 4) 15 sec
plane perpendicular to XY plane passing 23. An equilateral prism of mass m rests on a
through a point on the x-axis at a distance x rough horizontal surface with coefficient of
= d is I 2 . If I1=I2 the value ofd is friction µ . A horizontal force F is applied on
the prism as shown. If the coefficient of
19 17 15 13
1) R 2) R 3) R 4) R friction is sufficiently high so that the prism
2 2 2 2 does not slide before toppling, the minimum
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS, TORQUE
force required to topple the prism is
MECHANICAL EQUILIBRIUM
19. A wheel rotating with uniform angular F
acceleration covers 50 revolutions in the first
five seconds after the start. Find the angular
acceleration and the angular velocity at the a a
end of five seconds.
1) 4π rad / s 2 ,80π rad / s
2) 8π rad / s 2 ,40π rad / s a
mg mg µmg µmg
3) 6π rad / s 2 , 40π rad / s 1) 2) 3) 4)
3 4 3 4
4) 6π rad / s 2 ,80π rad / s 24. The mass of a metallic beam of uniform
20. A square is made by joining four rods each of thickness and of length 6 m is 60 kg. The
mass M and length L. Its moment of inertia beam is horizontally and symmetrically lies
about an axis PQ, in its plane and passing on two vertical pillars which are separated
through one of its corner is by a distance 3 m. A person of mass 75 kg is
P walking on this beam. The closest distance
to which the person can approach one end of
0
the beam so that the beam does not tilt down
45 is (neglect thickness of pillars)
1) 30 cm 2) 20 cm 3) 15 cm 4) 10cm
25. Two persons P and Q of same height are
L
carrying a uniform beam of length 3 m. If Q
is at one end, the distance of P from the other
end so that P, Q receive loads in the ratio 5 :
Q 3 is
1) 0.5 m 2) 0.6 m 3) 0.75 m 4) 1 m
4 8 10
1) 6ML2 2) ML2 3) ML2 4) ML2 + 26. A uniform meter scale of mass 1 kg is placed
3 3 3 on table such that a part of the scale is beyond
21. A shaft is turning at 65rad /sec at time zero. the edge. If a body of mass 0.25 kg is hung
Thereafter, angular acceleration is given by at the end of the scale then the minimum
α = ( −10 − 5t ) rad / s 2 where t is the elapsed length of scale that should lie on the table so
time. Find its angular speed at t =3sec. that it does not tilt is
1) 25 rad/sec 2) 12.5rad/sec 1) 90 cm 2) 80 cm 3) 70 cm 4) 60 cm
3) 17 rad/sec 4) 22 rad /sec
NARAYANAGROUP
66
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
27. A metallic cube of side length 1.5 m and of angle 15° with the horizontal is
mass 3.2 metric ton is on horizontal rough
floor. The minimum horizontal force that
0
should be applied on the cube at a height 1.2 15
m from that floor to turn the cube about its
lower edge is
1) 1.96 × 103 N 2) 4.9 × 103 N
3) 1.96 × 104 N 4) 4.9 × 104 N
28. A cubical block of mass m and side L rests on
a rough horizontal surface with coefficient of ML2 11ML2 7 ML2 10ML2
1) 2) 3) 4)
friction µ . A horizontal force F is applied on 12 24 12 24
the block as shown. If the coefficient of 31. A thin rod of length L and mass M is bent at
friction is sufficiently high so that the block the middle point O at an angle of 600 . The
does not slide before toppling, the minimum moment of inertia of the rod about an
force required to topple the block is axis passing through O and perpendicular to
[JEE 2000] the plane of the rod will be
F
O
0
60 L/2
/////////////////// L/2
1) mg/4 2) infinitesimal
3) mg/2 4) mg (1 – u)
29. The center of an equilateral triangle is O. ML2 ML2 ML2 ML2
1) 2) 3) 4)
Three forces F1 , F2 and F3 are applied along 6 12 24 3
AB, BC and AC respectively. The magnitude 32. Four identical solid spheres each of mass M
and radius R are fixed at four corners of a light
of F3 so that the total torque about O should
square frame of side length 4R such that
be zero is centres of spheres coincide with corners of
square. The moment of inertia of 4 spheres
about an axis perpendicular to the plane of
frame and passing through its centre is
21MR 2 42MR 2 84MR 2 168MR 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 5 5 5
33. In the above problem moment of inertia of 4
spheres about an axis passing through any
side of square is
21MR 2 42MR 2 84MR 2 168MR 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) ( F1 + F2 ) 2) ( F1 − F2 ) 5 5 5 5
34. Thickness of a wooden circular plate is same
F1 + F2
3) 4) 2 ( F1 + F2 ) as the thickness of a metal circular plate but
2 density of metal plate is 8 times density of
ROTATIONAL INERTIA OF SOLID BODIES wooden plate. If moment of inertia of wooden
30. A square plate of mass M and edge L is shown plate is twice the moment of inertia of metal
in figure. The moment of inertia of the plate plate about their natural axes, then the ratio of
about the axis in the plane of plate and radii of wooden plate to metal plate is
passing through one of its vertex making an 1) 1 : 2 2) 1 : 4 3) 4 : 1 4) 2 :1
NARAYANAGROUP
67
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
35. A uniform circular disc of radius 'R' lies in Their moments of inertia about the axis
the X-Y plane with the centre coinciding with passing through the centre and perpendicular
the origin. The moment of inertia about an to their planes are in the ratio 1:m. The
axis passing through a point on the X-axis at relation between m and n is
a distance x = 2R and perpendicular to the 1) m=n 2) m = n2 3) m = n3 4) m = n4
X-Y plane is equal to its moment of inertia 40. The moment of inertia of a hollow sphere of
about an axis passing through a point on the mass M having internal and external radii R
Y-axis at a distance y = d and parallel to the and 2R about an axis passing through its
X-axis in the X-Y plane. The value of 'd' is
centre and perpendicular to its plane is
4R R R R 62
1) 2) 17 3) 15 4) 13 3 13 31
3 2 2 2
2
1) MR 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
2 32 35 35
36. Two rings of the same radius R and mass M
41. Find moment of inertia of half disc of radius
are placed such that their centres coincide
and their planes are perpendicular to each R 2 and mass M about its centre. A smaller
other. The moment of inertia of the system half disc of radius R1 is cut from this disc.
about an axis passing through the common
centre and perpendicular to the plane of one
of the rings is
MR 2 3MR 2
1) 2) MR 2 3) 4) 2MR 2
2 2
37. In the above problem, the moment of inertia
of the system about an axis passing through
the diameters of both rings is 1)
M
4
(
R1 + R 2
2 2
) 2)
8
(
M 2
R 1 + R 22 )
MR 2 MR 2 3MR 2
1)
4
2)
2
3)
2
4) MR 2 3)
M 2
16
( R 1 + R 22 ) 4)
M 2
32
( R 1 + R 22 )
38. Four thin metal rods, each of mass M and
length L, are welded to form a square ABCD
ANGULAR MOMENTUM &
as shown in figure. The moment of inertia of CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR
the composite structure about a line which MOMENTUM
bisects rods AB and CD is 42. A uniform smooth rod (mass m and length l)
placed on a smooth horizontal floor is hit by a
particle (mass m) moving on the floor, at a
distance l / 4 from one end elastically
(e =1).The distance travelled by the centre
of the rod after the collision when it has
completed three revolutions will be
1) 2π l 2) cannot be determined
3) πl 4) none of these
43. A bullet of mass m is fired upward in a
direction of angle of projection 60° with an
ML2 ML2 ML2 2ML2 initial velocity u. The angular momentum of
1) 2) 3) 4) this bullet when it is crossing highest point
6 3 2 3
with respect to point of projection is
39. Two circular loops A and B are made of the
same wire and their radii are in the ratio 1:n. 2mu 3 3mu 3 2mu 3 3mu 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
5g 8g 9g 16 g
NARAYANAGROUP
68
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
44. A particle of mass 5g is moving with a speed P
of 3 2cms −1 in X-Y plane along the line
(3/2) R
y = x + 4 . The magnitude of its angular
momentum about the origin in gcm 2 s −1 is v0
C
30
1) zero 2) 60 3) 30 4) 1) increase continuously as the disc moves away
2
2) decrease continuously as the disc moves away
45. A ballot dancer is rotating about his own 3) is always equal to 2MRv0
vertical axis on smooth horizontal floor with 4) is always equal to MRv0
a time period 0.5 sec. The dancer folds 48. A disc of mass m and radius R moves in the
himself close to his axis of rotation due to X-Y plane as shown in figure. The angular
which his radius of gyration decreases by momentum of the disc about the origin O at
20%, then his new time period is the instant shown is
1) 0.1 sec 2)0.25 sec 3) 0.32 sec 4) 0.4 sec y
46. A smooth uniform rod of length L and mass v = ωR
M has two identical beads of negligible size, ω
each of mass m, which can slide freely along 3R
the rod. Initially the two beads are at the
centre of the rod and the system is rotating x
O
with angular velocity ω0 about its axis 4R
perpendicular to the rod and passing through 5 7
1) − mR ω k 2) mR ω k
2 2
its mid point (see figure). There are no 2 3
external forces. When the beads reach the 9 5
3) − mR ω k 4) mR ω k
2 2
ends of the rod, the angular velocity of the
2 2
system is [JEE - 1988] 49. A uniform sphere of mass m, radius r and
moment of inertia I about its centre of mass
axis moves along the x-axis is shown in figure.
Bead Bead Its centre of mass moves with velocity v0,
and it rotates about its centre of mass with
L L angular velocity ω0 . Let L = ( Iω0 + mv0r)( −k ) .
2 2 The angular momentum of the body about the
the origin O is
ω0 y
ω0
M ω0 M ω0 v0
1) 2) r
M + 3m M + 6m
(M+ 6m ) ω0 O
3) 4) ω0
M 1) L, only if v0 = ω0 r
47. A uniform circular disc of mass M and radius
2) greater than L, v0 > ω0 r
R rolls without slipping on a horizontal
surface. If the velocity of its centre is v 0, then 3) less than L, if v0 > ω0 r
the total angular momentum of the disc about 4) L, for all value of v0 and ω0
a fixed point P at a height 3R/2 above the
centre C.
NARAYANAGROUP
69
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
50. In the figure shown, a ring A is initially rolling g 3g g 2g
without sliding with a velocity v on the 1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 3 3
horizontal surface of the body of the body B
54. The arrangement shown in figure consists of
(of same mass as A). All surfaces are smooth.
two identical uniform solid cylinders each of
B has no initial velocity. What will be the
mass 5kg on which two light threads are
maximum height reached by A on B?
wound symmetrically. Find the tensions of
each thread in the process of motion. The
friction in the axle of the upper cylinder is
A v assumed to be absent.
smooth
B
3v2 v2 v2 v2
1) 2) 3) 4)
4g 4g 2g 3g
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
51. Calculate the linear acceleration of the blocks
in the given figure . Mass of block A = 10kg,
mass of block B = 8kg, mass of disc shaped 1) 4.9N 2) 9.8N 3) 8.8N 4) 5.8N
pulley = 2kg (take g = 10m / s 2 ) 55. The top in the figure has a moment of inertia
equal to 4.0 × 10−4 kgm 2 and is initially at rest.
It is free to rotate about the stationary axis
AA1. A string wrapped around a peg along the
axis of the top is pulled in such a manner as
B to maintain a constant tension of 5.57N . If
A the string does not slip while it is unwound
from the peg. what is the angular speed of
20 19 29 20
1) m / s 2 2) m / s 2 3) m / s 2 4) m / s2 the top after 80.0cm of string has been pulled
19 20 20 29 off the peg.
52. A block of mass m is attached at the end of
an inextensible string which is wound over a A'
rough pulley of mass M and radius R as
F
shown in figure. Assume that string does not
slide over the pulley. Find the acceleration of
the block when released.
R
1)130rad/s 2)142rad/s 3)149rad/s 4)120rad/s
M 56. A solid cylinder of mass m=4kg and radius
m R=10cm has two ropes wrapped around it, one
near each end. The cylinder is held
2mg 2mg mg mg
1) 2) 3) 4) horizontally by fixing the two free ends of the
m+M 2m + M 2m + M m+M cords to the hooks on the ceiling such that
53. A uniform rod of length L and mass M is both the cords are exactly vertical. The
pivoted freely at one end (at bottom level ) cylinder is released to fall under gravity. Find
and placed in vertical position. What is the the tension along the strings.
tangential linear acceleration of the free end 1) 6.53N 2) 5.23N 3) 3.23N 4) 4.43N
when the rod is horizontal?
NARAYANAGROUP
70
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
ROLLING MOTION 61. A tangential force F acts at the top of a thin
57. Assume the earth’s orbit around the sun as spherical shell of mass m and radius R. Find
circular and the distance between their the acceleration of the shell if it rolls without
centres as ‘D’ Mass of the earth is ‘M’ and slipping.
its radius is ‘R’ If earth has an angular velocity F
R
‘ ω0 ’ with respect to its centre and ‘ ω ’ with
respect to the centre of the sun, the total O
kinetic energy of the earth is:
MR2ω02 ω 5 Dω
2 2
1) 1 + + 6F 6m 3m 5m
5 ω 0 2 Rω0 1) 2) 3) 4)
5m 5F 5F 6F
MR 2ω02 5 Dω 62. A uniform circular ring of radius R is first
2
2) 1 + rotated about its horizontal axis with an
5 2 Rω0
angular velocity ω0 and then carefully placed
5 5 Dω 2 on a rough horizontal surface as shown. The
3) 2 MR ω0 1 + 2 Rω
2 2
0 coefficient of friction between the surface and
the rings is µ . Time after which its angular
2 ω 2 5 Dω 2
speed is reduced to 0.5ω0 is
4) 5 MR ω0 1 + ω + 2 Rω
2 2
0 0 ω0
58.A solid cylinder of mass 10kg is rolling
perfectly on a plane of inclination 300 . The
force of friction between the cylinder and the
surface of the inclined plane is ω0 µ R ω0 g 2ω0 R ω0 R
1) 49N 2) 24.5N 3) 49/3N 4) 12.25N 1) 2) 3) 4)
2g 2µ R µg 2µ g
59 The velocities are in ground frame and the
cylinder is performing pure rolling on the 63. A uniform circular disc of radius R rolls without
plank, velocity of point ' A ' would be slipping with its center of mass moving along
positive x=axis with a speed v. The velocity
A
of point P at the instant shown in figure is
y
VC
C r P
θ v
VP
x
1) 2VC 2) 2VC − VP 3) 2VC + VP 4) 2 (VC − VP )
60. A carpet of mass M made of inextensible
vr sin θ vr cos θ
material is rolled along its length in the form 1) v p = v + i + j
of a cylinder of radius R and kept along a R R
rough floor. The carpet starts unrolling
vr sin θ vr cos θ
without sliding on the floor, when a negligibly 2) v p = v + i − j
small push is given to it. The horizontal R R
velocity of the axis of a cylindrical part of the vr sin θ vr cosθ
carpet, when its radius is reduced to R/2 is 3) v p = v + i+ j
R R
14 7 vr sin θ vr cosθ
1) gR 2) gR 3) gR 4) 2gR 4) v p = v + i− j
3 3 R R
NARAYANAGROUP
71
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
64. A uniform solid sphere of radius r is rolling LEVEL - III - HINTS
on a smooth horizontal surface with velocity
v and angular velocity ω = ( v = ω r ) . The 1.
∑m x i i
sphere collides with a sharp edge on the wall xcm =
as shown in figure. The coefficient of friction ∑m i
between the sphere and the edge µ = 1 / 5.
Just after the collision the angular velocity L L
L4
kx 3
of the sphere becomes equal to zero. The ∫ xdm ∫0 L dx
= 3=
4 3L
kx 2 ;x = 0L = L 2
linear velocity of the sphere just after the 2. dm = dx cm kx L 4
collision is equal to L ∫0 dm ∫0 L dx 3
ω 3. Fractional length hanging,
edge
V l µ l 0.5
O = ⇒ = ⇒ l = 10 cm
L 1+ µ 30 1 + 0.5
let ‘ ρ ’ be the mass per unit length. The co-
v 3v v
1) v 2)
3) 4) ordinates of 20ρ and 10ρ are (10,0) and (0,5)
5 5 6 respectively from ‘A’.
65. A particle of mass ‘m’ is rigidly attached at
‘A’ to a ring of mass ‘3m’ and radius ‘r’. The 2
Distance of C.M from A, r cm= xcm + ycm
2
system is released from rest and rolls without − mass of removed part × d
sliding. The angular acceleration of ring just 4. shift =
after release is Mass of remaining part Here d=20 cm
r 2a
r 5. Shift of centre of mass x = 2
A R − r2
O Where r = radius of removed disc
m
R = radius of original disc
P a = distance between the centres
g g g g Note:In this question shift must be ∝ R for exact
1) 2) 3) 4) approach to the solution
4r 6r 8r 2r
66. A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is 6. CM of bricks, above each brick must not be
placed on a rough horizontal surface. It is Σmi xi
stuck by a horizontal cue stick at a height h beyond its edge. xcm = Σm ; xcm = L
i
above the surface. The value of h so that the
sphere performs pure rolling motion L L L
x1 = a + , x2 = 2a + , x3 = 3a +
immediately after it has been stuck is 2 2 2
J L
h (or) a =
n
R Fext ( m 1 + m 2 ) g − 2T → 1
7. ( a cm ) y = = ()
2R 5R 7R 9R M m1 + m 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 2m1 m2 g
5 2 5 5 But T = →( 2)
LEVEL-III - KEY m1 + m2
01) 1 02) 1 03) 2 04) 4 05) 1 06) 2
∑m a
9. acm =
i i
07) 2 08) 3 09) 4 10) 3 11) 1 12) 2
13) 2 14) 1 15) 2 16) 3 17) 3 18) 3
8. Theoretical
∑m i
19) 2 20) 3 21) 2 22) 1 23) 1 24) 1
( ucm )
2
25) 2 26) 4 27) 3 28) 3 29) 1 30) 2
10. hmax = H +
31) 2 32) 4 33) 4 34) 4 35) 2 36) 3 2g
37) 4 38) 4 39) 3 40) 4 41) 1 42) 1 11. Acceleration of system,
43) 4 44) 2 45) 3 46) 2 47) 4 48) 1 mg sin 60 − mg sin 30
49) 4 50) 2 51) 1 52) 2 53) 2 54) 1 a=
55) 3 56) 1 57) 2 58) 3 59) 2 60) 1 2m
61) 4 62) 4 63) 2 64) 1 65) 2 66) 3
NARAYANAGROUP
72
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
3 −1 ma1 + ma 2 ω2
a = t=
α 2 Qω1 = 0
g , Now a cm =
4 2m
3 −1 23. About right base corner ; τ F = τ mg
here, a1 and a 2 are 4 g at right angles. 24. About a pillar clockwise torque = anticlockwise
torque
25. Let x is distance of P from other end
2a 3 − 1
Hence, acm = 2 = g
( xFP ) + ( LFQ ) = W
L
4 2 2
12. The masses of load, ladder and man are M, where L is the length of the rod and W is its weight
M-m and m respectively. Their velocities are
but W = FP + FQ
v(upward), -v and vr -v respectively 26. If the distance from one end is x then
∴ vcm =
∑ mi vi ( 50 − x )1 = x ( 0.25 ) =
x
∑m i 4
M (v) + ( M − m)( − v) + m(v r − v) m 200 − 4x = x ⇒ x = 40cm
= = vr ∴ length on the table = 100 - 40 = 60 cm
2M 2M L
2h 27. τcw =τAcw ; F×1.2 = mg × ; F = 1.96 ×104 N
13. Range of C.M = vcm 2
g 28. (F) (perpendicular distance) = mg(perpendicular
m1 v1 + m2 v 2 1 mg
But v cm = m + m distance) FL = mg ⇒ F =
1 2
2 2
14. Maximum height attained by C.M 29. If the perpendicular distance of any side of the
2
ucm triangle from ‘O’ is ‘x’then F1 x + F2 x − F3 x = 0
= Initial height of C.M +
2g ⇒ F1 + F2 = F3
r r From diagram, we get x = AO sin 600
r r×v 30.
15. ω = 2
r L 3 ML2 ML2
= × = = =
( ) ( )
I
; z I
; x I
3iˆ − 4 ˆj + 5kˆ = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ × iˆ + 9 ˆj − 8kˆ
y
2 2 6 12
2
ML
16. ω =
v
=
2v
; ⇒ x = 2R ; ω =
v I AB = + Mx 2
x x + 2R 2R 12
31. Moment of inertia of a uniform rod about one end
v
17. ω= mL2
L cos θ = ∴ moment of inertia of the system
mR 2 mR 2 3
I1 = + m ( 2R ) ; I 2 = + md 2 ; I1 = I 2
2
m ( L / 2)
2
18. mL2
4 2 = 2× =
1 2 3 12
19. θ = 2π N ,θ = ω0t + α t 2
2 32. I = 4I1 where I1 is M .I of each sphere
20. M.I about an axis passing through the diagonal I1 = I c + Md 2
2 ML2
Ig = 2 L
and I c = MR ; d = ; L = 4R
M.I about the given axis 2
3 5 2
2
L
I = I g + 4M 33. I = 2( I c + I1 ) and I1 = I c + Md 2
2 2
I c = MR 2 and d = 4R
21. ω = ∫ α dt 5
22. At any instant linear acceleration of all points of 34. I1 = 2I 2 ; M1R 12 = 2M 2 R 22
coupled belt is same. a = rα R1
2
M
r1α1 = r2α 2 ;find α 2 ; ω2 = ω1 + α 2t = 2 2 ;but m ∝ D × R 2
R2 M1
NARAYANAGROUP
73
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
æ R1 ÷ö2 æ ö2 Hence, distance travelled by the centre of the rod
4
çç ÷ = 2 D 2 çç R 2 ÷÷ R1 D
= 2 2 2π l
çè R ÷÷ø D1 çè R 1 ÷÷ø
= s = vt = v = 2π l
R2 D1 is
v
2
35. On x-axis at a distance 2R, 43. Angular momentum about a point P(x,y) with
+ m ( 4 R 2 ) = mR 2
mR 2 9 respect to the point of projection is
I=
2 2 u 2 sin 2 θ 3mu 2
L=-m[ u cos θ ] = (Qθ = 600 )
mR 2 2 g 16 g
On y-axis at a distance ‘d’ I = + md 2
4 44. From the diagram,
R 1
equating both, d = 17 OC = OA sin 450 = 4 × = 2 2cm
2 2
MR 2 Angular momentum
36. I = I1 + I 2 where I1 = MR 2 and I 2 =
MR 2
2
( )( )
= mv ( OC ) = 5 3 2 2 2 ; = 60gm cm 2 s −1
37. I = 2I1 , where I1 =
2 45. I1ω1 = I 2ω 2 ; MK12 2π = MK 22 2π
38. I = I1 + I2 + I 3 + I 4 T1 T2
2 46. Initial angular momentum = final angular
ML2 L momentum
I1 = I 2 = and I 3 = I 4 = M 2
12 ML2
I ω0 = I ω ; whereL
1
I=
I1 M 1 R12 12
39. = for a circular loop, M α R
I 2 M 2 R22 ML 2
L
2
I1 = + 2m
I1 R13 12 2
∴ = r r
I 2 R23 (
47. L = I cmω + m r × vcm )
40. If I1 and I 2 are moment of inertia of hollow
MR 2 3
spheres of radii R and 2R respectively, then = ω ( −k ) + M R ( − j ) × v 0i = M R v 0 k$
I = I 2 − I1 and mass α R 3 2 2
r r
41. I = I total − I ' (
48. L = I cmω + m r × vcm )
42. ω
=
1
2
( ) ( )
MR 2ω k$ + m 4 Ri$ + 3R $j × ω Ri$
= − MR 2ω k$
5
V 2
1/4 49. L = R × Mv 0 + Iω0 ; = Mv 0 r + Iω0 , which is
V
m v constant
50. When the ring is at the maximum height, the wedge
mv = mv' = mV ⇒ v = v' + V ( i) and the ring have the same horizontal component
Applying conservation of angular momentum about of velocity. As all the surfaces are smooth, in the
point of collision. absence of friction between the ring and wedge
and surface angular velocity of the ring remains
ml 2 l
0= ω − mV ⇒ lω = 3V ( ii ) constant.
12 4 From conservation of mechanical energy
Applying restituting equation,
( u1 − u2 )n = ( v2 − v1 )n ⇒ ( v − 0) = (V − v' (iii) 1 1 1 1 1
Mv 2 + I ω 2 = Mv12 + I ω 2 + Mv12 + mgh
Solving Eqs. (i), (ii), and (iii) we get V=v and 2 2 2 2 2
v
ω=
3v where v1 = final common velocity =
l 2
Time taken to complete three revolutions v 2
θ 6π 6π l 2π
h=
( θ = 6π ) ; t = ω = ω = 3v = v 4g
NARAYANAGROUP
74
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS µg
m2 − m1 µ mgR = MR 2α ; µ g = Rα ⇒ α =
51. a = g R
m2 + m1 +
M µg ω ω0 R
ω = ω0 − t = 0 ;∴ t =
2 R 2 2µ g
MR 2 v
52. mg − T = ma ; a = α R; TR = α 63. Hence ω =
2 R
2T 2mg
α= ; ∴ a=
MR 2m + M θ 90-θ
mgl 3g sin θ v
53. τ = sin θ ; α =
2 2l
π ωr
When rod is horizontal θ =
2 v v
3g 3g v p x = v + r sin θ i ; v p y = − r cos θ j
∴α = ⇒ at = α l = R R
2l 2 vr sin θ vr cos θ
mg vp = v + i − j
54. T = R R
10 64. Impulse provided by the edge in the horizontal
55. w = ( 5.57 N ) × ( 0.800m ) = 4.46 J direction
− ∫ Ndt = − mV | − ( mV ) ----(1)
I ( ω 2f − ωi2 )
1
∆K =
2 Friction impulse in the vertical direction
mg 2 V
56. T = µ R ∫ Ndt = mR 2 ---(2)
6 5 R
1 2 1 2 1 2 from eq(1) & (2) we get
57. Total kinetic energy = I ω0 + mv + I ω
2 2 2 ∫ Ndt = 2mV and V | = V
1 2 1 1 2 65. The distance of CM from the ring centre O
MR 2 ω02 + MD 2ω 2 + MR 2 ω 2
2 5 2 2 5 3m ( 0 ) + m ( r ) r
x= =
MR ω0 ω
2 2 2
5Dω
2 2
3m + m 4
= 1 + 2 + we can apply torque equation about point of
5 ω0 2 R 2ω02 contact as the ring is rolling
mg sin θ R2 N
58. f = where =2
R2 K2 4mg
1+ 2
K x
59. VC − rω = Vp → (1) α
O
VA = VC + rω = 2VC − Vp 3mg
A
60. Gain in KE = loss in PE CM mg
1 2 K2 f
mv 1 + 2 = Mgh2 − mgh1 P
2 R τ p = I pα
where M = mass of carpet of radius R
r
4mg = ( 3mr 2 + mr 2 ) + m ( AP ) α
2
R
m = mass of carpet of radius 4
2
( )
⇒ mgr = 4mr 2 + m 2r α
2
2
R R
h2α R and hα1 and also mα
2 2 g
61. F + f = ma & FR − fR = Iα ⇒ mgr = 6mr 2α ⇒a=
6r
62. Taking the τ about C.M.
NARAYANAGROUP
75
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
66. Let v be the velocity of the centre of mass of the its plane
sphere and ω be the angular velocity of the body 5
about an axis passing through the centre of mass. c) about natural axis g) MR 2
4
2
J = Mv ; J ( h − R ) = 5 MR × ω
2 1
d) about any tangent h) MR 2
2
2 2
from the above two equations v ( h − R ) = r ω ⊥ r to its plane
5 5. Match the following
from the condition of pure rolling, v = Rω A disc rolls on ground without slipping.
2R 7R Velocity of centre of mass is v. There is a point
h− R = ⇒h= P on circumference of disc at angle θ . Suppose
5 5
v p is the speed of this point. Then, match the
LEVEL- IV following table:
Matching Type Questions
1. Match the following : Vcm
List– I List – II
θ
A. Position of centre of e. is zero
mass P
B. The algebraic sum f. in non uniform
of moments of all the gravitational field Column-I Column-II
masses about centre
of mass g.is independent a) If θ = 600 p) v p = 2v
C. Centre of mass and of frame of b) If θ = 900 q) v p = v
centre of gravity coincide reference
D. Centre of mass and h. in uniform c) If θ = 1200 r) v p = 2v
centre of gravity do gravitational
d) If θ = 1800 s) v p = 3v
not coincide field
2. Match the following: 6. Column-I Column-II
List - 1 List - 2 2 2
a) torque e) mass a) Moment of inertia p) MR
5
b) moment of inertia f) linear momentum of annular disc of inner
c) angular momentum g) linear acceleration
d) angular acceleration h) force radius R1 and outer
3. If R is radius and K is radius of gyration then radius R2 about
in the case of following rolling bodies match symmetric axis
the ratio K 2 : R 2
3
List - 1 List - 2 b) Moment of inertia q) MR 2
a) solid sphere e) 1 : 1 10
b) solid cylinder f) 2 : 3 of elliptical disc of two
c) hollow sphere g) 1 : 2 radii R1 and R2
d) hollow cylinder h) 2 : 5 about symmetric axis
4. Match the following moment of inertia of thin
circular plate about different axes of rotation c) Moment of inertia r)
4
( R1 + R22 )
M 2
List - 1 List -2
of solid sphere of radius
3
a) about any diameter e) MR 2 R about symmetric axis
2
b) about any tangent in f)
1
MR 2 d) Moment of inertia s)
2
( R1 + R22 )
M 2
4
of solid cone of base
NARAYANAGROUP
76
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
radius R about symmetric axis (c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
7. A solid spherical ball of mass M and radius (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
R rolls without slipping down a surface 10. Assertion : The centre of mass of a two particle
inclined to horizontal at an angle θ . system lies on the line joining the two particles,
Considering that ball is uniform solid sphere being closer to the heavier particle.
and that ball and surface are perfectly rigid. Reason: Product of mass of one particle and its
Column-I Column-II distance from centre of mass is numerically equal
to product of mass of other particle and its distance
a) Friction force p) Zero
from centre of mass.
involved 11. Assertion: The centre of mass of system of n
b) Minimum value of q) ( 2 / 7 ) Mg sin θ particles is the weighted average of the position
coefficient of friction vector of the n particles making up the system.
for pure rolling Reason: The position of the centre of mass of a
c) Work done against r) Static friction system is independent of coordinate system.
frictional force 12. Assertion: The centre of mass of an isolated
system has a constant velocity.
d) Force of kinetic s) ( 2 / 7 ) tanθ Reason: If centre of mass of an isolated system
friction is already at rest, it remains at rest.
8. A solid sphere, hollow sphere, solid cylinder, 13. Assertion: The centre of mass of a body may lie
hollow cylinder and ring each of mass M and where there is no mass.
radius R are simultaneously released at rest Reason: Centre of mass of a body is a point,
from top of incline and allowed to roll down where the whole mass of the body is supposed to
the incline. be concentrated.
Column-I Column-II 14. Assertion: A particle is moving on a straight line
a) Time taken to reach p) Solid sphere with a uniform velocity, its angular momentum is
bottom is maximum for always zero.
b) Angular acceleration q) Hollow cylinder Reason: The momentum is zero when particle
maximum for moves with a uniform velocity.
c) Kinetic energy at r) Hollow sphere 15. Assertion: The centre of mass of a proton and
bottom is same for an electron, released from their respective
d) Rotational kinetic s) Ring positions remains at rest.
energy is maximum for Reason: The centre of mass remain at rest, if no
9. A rigid body of mass M and radius R rolling -external force is applied.
without slipping on an inclined plane. The 16. Assertion: The position of centre of mass of a
magnitude of force of friction body does not depend upon shape and size of the
Column-I Column-II body.
Mg sin θ Reason: Centre of mass of a body lies always at
a) For ring p) the centre of the body
2.5
17. Assertion: A shell at rest, explodes. The centre
Mg sin θ of mass of fragments moves along a straight path.
b) For solid sphere q)
3 Reason: In explosion the linear momentum of
Mg sin θ the system is not conserved.
c) For solid cylinder r) 18. Assertion: A judo fighter in order to throw his
3.5 opponent on to the mattress he initially bend his
Mg sin θ opponent and then rotate him around his hip.
d) For hollow sphere s) Reason: As the mass of the opponent is brought
2
Assertion & Reason closer to the fighter’s hip, the force required to
Read the assertion and reason carefully to mark throw the opponent is reduced.
the correct option out of the options given below 19. Assertion: The centre of mass of an electron and
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the proton, when released moves faster towards
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. proton.
(b) If both assertion and reason or true but reason Reason: Proton is lighter than electron.
is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
NARAYANAGROUP
77
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
20. Assertion: At the centre of earth, a body has Reason: In rolling down, a body acquired both,
centre of mass, but no centre of gravity. kinetic energy of translation and rotation.
Reason: Acceleration due to gravity is zero at 32. Assertion: In rolling, all points of a rigid body
the centre of earth. have he same linear speed.
21. Assertion: When a body dropped from a height Reason: The rotational motion does not affect
explodes in mid air, its centre of mass keeps moving the linear velocity of rigid body.
in vertically downward direction. 33. Assertion: A wheel moving down a perfectly
Reason: Explosion occur under internal forces frictionless inclined plane will undergo slipping (not
only. External force is zero. rolling motion).
22. Assertion: It is harder to open and shut the door Reason: For perfect rolling motion, work done
if we apply force near the hinge. against the friction is zero.
Reason: Torque is maximum for the door. 34. Assertion: The total kinetic energy of a rolling
23. Assertion: Moment of inertia of a particle solid sphere is the sum of translational and
changes, when the axis of rotation changes. rotational kinetic energies.
Reason: Moment of inertia depends on mass Reason: For all solid bodies total kinetic energy
and distance of the particles. is always twice the translational kinetic energy.
24. Assertion: Inertia and moment of inertia are
different quantities. Statement type questions
Reason: Inertia represents the capacity of a body 1) Statement A& B are true
to oppose its state of motion or rest. 2) Statement A is true, Statement B is false
25. Assertion: If earth shrink (without change in mass) 3) Statement A is false, Statement B is true
to half its present size, length of the day would 4) Statement A & B are false
become 6 hours. 35. Consider the following two statements A and B
Reason: As size of the earth changes its moment and identify the correct answer
of inertia changes. Statement A : The centre of mass of a system of
26. Assertion: Torque due to force is maximum when particles depends on forces on the particles.
angle between r and F is 900. Statement B : In the absence of external force,
Reason: The unit of torque is newton-metre. the centre of mass of system moves with uniform
27. Assertion: Radius of gyration of body is a velocity
variable quantity. 36. Consider the two statements A and B and identify
Reason: The radius of gyration of a body about the correct answer
an axis of rotation may be defined as the root Statement A : A wooden sphere and a copper
mean square distance of the particles from sphere of same radius are kept in contact with
the axis of rotation. each other the centre of mass will be with in
28. Assertion: A ladder is more apt to slip, when the wooden sphere.
you are high up on it than when you just begin to Statement B: Three identical spheres each of
climb. radius R are placed touching each other on
Reason: At the high up on a ladder, the torque is horizontal table. The centre of mass of the system
large and it is small when one just begins to climb. is located at the point of intersection of the
29. Assertion: Torque is equal to rate of change of medians of the triangle formed by the centres of
angular momentum. spheres.
Reason:Angular momentum depends on moment 37. Consider the following two statements A and B
of inertia and angular velocity. and identify the correct choice
30. Assertion:The speed of whirlwind in a tornado Statement A : The rotational kinetic energy of a
is alarmingly high. rolling body is always greater than its translatory
Reason: If no external torque acts on a body, its kinetic energy
angular velocity remains conserved. Statement B: The maximum value of radius of
31. Assertion: The velocity of a body at the bottom gyration of a rolling body can not be greater than
of an inclined plane of given height, is more when the radius of that body
it slides down the plane, compared to, when it 38. Consider the following two statements A and B
rolling down the same plane. and identify the correct choice
NARAYANAGROUP
78
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
Statement A : Spokes are used in a bicycle of centre of mass [EAMCET-2012]
wheel to increase the strength of wheel 1) Both A and B are correct
Statement B: Mass of fly wheel is concentrated 2) Both B and C are wrong
on its rim to increase its moment of inertia 3) Both A and C are wrong
39. Consider the following two statements A and B 4) Both A and D are wrong
and identify the correct choice 46. A shell is projected at some angle with horizontal.
Statement A : Moment of inertia of circular plate When the shell is at its highest point, it explodes
is minimum about its natural axis into two pieces.
Statement B : Inertia of rotation of a rotating Statement A : : The law of conservation of linear
body is proportional to its angular momentum momentum can be used for the small interval of
40. Consider the following two statements A and B explosion
and identify the correct choice Statement B : The net force on the shell at highest
Statement A : The torques produced by two point is zero
forces of couple are opposite to each other. 47. Statement A : Impulsive force on a particle may
Statement II : The direction of torque is always change its kinetic energy and its momentum
perpendicular to plane of rotation of body Statement B : Momentum of a particle changes
41. Consider the following two statements A and B only when kinetic energy of the particle changes
and identify the correct choice 48. A uniform rod is held vertically on a smooth
Statement A : The torque required to stop a horizontal surface. Now the rod is released, given
rotating body in a given time is directly proportional it simultaneously a gentle push
to its initial angular momentum Statement A : Centre of mass of the rod moves
Statement B: If radius of earth shrinks then its in vertical direction as the rod falls
rotational kinetic energy increases Statement B : The rod is falling freely
42. Statement A : Mechanical advantage of a lever 49. A particle is thrown vertically upward from ground,
is always < 1 while another is thrown simultaneously vertically
Statement B: Mechanical advantage of a lever downward from some height
can be increased by increasing its effort arm or by Statement A : In the reference frame of centre
decreasing its load arm. of mass of the system, the particles move uniformly
43. Consider the following two statements A and B Statement B : Acceleration of the centre of mass
and identify the correct choice of the system is zero
Statement A : When a rigid body is rotating about 50. Statement A : Momentum of a system w.r.t centre
its own axis, at a given instant all particles of body of mass of the system is zero
possess same angular velocity. Statement B : Centre of mass can acceleration
Statement B: When a rigid body is rotating about only under the action of external forces.
its own axis, the linear velocity of a particle is 51. Statement A : Internal force cannot change
directly proportional to its perpendicular distance kinetic energy of a system of particles
from axis Statement B : Internal forces cannot change
44. Consider the following two statements A and B momentum of a system of particles.
and identify the correct choice 52. Statement A : Linear momentum of a system of
Statement A : The moment of inertia of a rigid particles with respect to centre of mass must be
body is independent of its angular velocity zero
Statement B: The radius of gyration of a rotating Statement B : Linear momentum of a system of
metallic disc is dependent on its temperature particles is the vector-sum of linear momenta of
45. Choose correct statement. all particles of the system.
(A) The position of centre of mass of a system is 53. Statement A : Work done by a force on a body
dependent on the choice of coordinate system whose centre of mass does not move may be non-
(B) Newton’s second law of motion is applicable zero
to the centre of mass of the system. Statement B : Work done by a force depends
(C) Internal forces cannot change the state of on the displacement of the centre of mass
centre of mass. 54. Statement A : Net work done by internal force
(D) Internal forces can change the state in a system may be zero.
Statement B : Net force on the centre of mass of
the system by internal mechanism is zero
NARAYANAGROUP
79
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
55. Statement A : In collision between two bodies, Statement B : Both spheres take same time to
they remain in contact with each other for a very reach bottom of the incline.
short interval of time before they separate. During 65. Statement A : A particle in uniform motion may
the period of restitution, the bodies try to regain have non-zero angular momentum about a point
their original shape. in space.
Statement B : During the period of contact, Statement B : A particle may be moving on a
bodies exchange their momentum and energy curved path with uniform speed.
56. Statement A : For a system of particles, total 66. Statement A : Rolling on a stationary surface
energy of the system can change even if net force can be treated as pure rotation about the point of
acting on the system is zero contact
Statement B : If net force on a system of particles Statement B : Point of contact of the body is
is zero, total momentum can not change. instantaneous centre of rotation, as it is
57. Statement A : In pure rolling motion, net work instantaneously at rest during rolling.
done by friction is zero. Multi Option Questions
Statement B : Sum of translational work done 67. Identify the correct one from the following
by friction and rotational work done by friction is statements.
zero A. the position of centre of mass in a co–ordinate
58. Statement A : For a system of particles under system does not change if a man moves from
central force field, total angular momentum is the one end to other end on a floating wooden
conserved about the centre log in still water.
Statement B : Torque acting on such a system is B. When a man moves from one end to other
zero about the centre end on a floating wooden log in still water, it
59. Statement A : A ball is rolling on a rough moves in opposite direction
horizontal surface. It gradually slows down and C. Due to action and reaction the wooden log
stops. floating in still water moves in opposite direction
Statement B :: Force of rolling friction decreases as the man on it moves from one end to the other
linear velocity end
60. Statement A : A ring is rolling without slipping on 1) B & C are true 2) A & D are true
rough surface as shown in figure. The force of 3) A, B & C are true 4) All are correct
friction necessary for ring to purely roll is in forward 68. If external forces acting on a system have
direction. zero resultant, the centre of mass
Statement B : Force of friction is zero when A. may move B. may accelerate
external force acts at top of ring. C. must not move D.must not accelerate
61. Statement A : Velocity acquired by a rolling body 1) A & B are correct 2) B & C are correct
depends on inclination of plane on which it rolls 3) C & D are correct 4) A & D are correct
down without slipping 69. In which of the following cases, the centre of
Statement B : Velocity depends upon height of mass of a rod is certainly not at its centre?
descent of body A. The density increases from left to right upto
62. Statement A : A cylinder rolls up an incline plane, the centre and then decrease
reaches some height and then rolls down. The B. The density decreases from left to right upto
direction of friction force acting on cylinder is up the centre and then increase
the incline while ascending as well as descending. C. The density continuously increases from left
Statement B : Direction of force of friction is in to right
accordance with sense of angular acceleration. D. The density continuously decreases from left
63. Statement A : Angular momentum of a particle to right
executing uniform circular motion is constant. 1) A & B are correct 2) B & C are correct
Statement B : Momentum of a particle executing 3) C & D are correct 4) A & D are correct
uniform circular motion is constant. 70. If a circular concentric hole is made in a disc
64. Two solid spheres (of masses m and 4m and radii then about an axis passing through the centre
r and 16r) roll down without slipping on an incline. of the disc and perpendicular to its plane.
Statement A : Both reach the bottom of incline 1) moment of inertia decreases
with same kinetic energies.
NARAYANAGROUP
80
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
2) moment of inertia increases a smooth table. One particle describes a
3) radius of gyration increases circular path on the table with angular
4) radius of gyration decreases velocity ω1 , and the other describes a conical
71. A rotor of radius r is rotating about its own
vertical axis and a person in contact with inner pendulum with angular velocity ω2 below the
wall of rotor remains in equilibrium without table. If l1 and l2 are the lengths of portions
slipping down. If ω is angular velocity of rotor
of the string above and below the table, then
and µ is minimum coefficient of friction
between person and the wall of rotor then l1 ω2 l1 ω22
1) l = ω 2) = 2
following is correct 2 1 l2 ω1
1 1
A) µ ∝ ω2 B) µ ∝ C) µ ∝ D) µ ∝ r 1 1 ml 1 1 l cos θ
r ω2 3) ω 2 + ω 2 = g 4) ω 2 + ω 2 = g
1) A and B are true 2) A and D are true 1 2 1 2
3) B and C are true 4) C and D are true 76. A symmetrical body of mass M, radius R and
72. A particle of mass m is executing uniform radius of gyration k is rolling on a horizontal
circular motion on a path of radius r. If v is surface without slipping. If linear velocity of
speed and p the magnitude of its linear centre of mass is vc and angular velocity ω ;
momentum, then the radial force acting on then
the particle is
mv 2 p2 1 2 k2
1) the total KE of body is 2 mvc 1 + R 2
pm vp
1) 2) 3) 4)
r r r mr
r r
73. In circular motion if v is velocity vector, a is 1
r 2) the rotational KE is MR 2ω 2
acceleration vector, r is instantaneous 2
ur
position vector, and p is momentum vector 1
Mvc2
ur 3) the translational KE is
2
and ω is angular velocity of particle. Then
r ur r 4) Total energy = 0
1) v, ω and r are mutually perpendicular 77. A ring type flywheel of mass 100kg and
ur r ur diameter 2m is rotating at the rate of
2) p, v and ω are mutually perpendicular
r r r ur 5
3) r × v = 0 and r × ω = 0 rev/sec. Then
rr r ur 11
4) r.v = 0 and r.ω = 0 1) the moment of inertia of the wheel is
74. The length of second hand of a watch is 1cm.
Then 100kg − m 2
1) The linear speed of tip of second hand is 2) the kinetic energy of rotation of flywheel is
π 5 × 103 J
cm / s 3) the angular momentum associated with the
30
2) The linear speed of the tip of second hand is flywheel is 103 joule-sec
uncertain 4) the flywheel, if subjected to a retarding torque
3) The change in linear velocity vector in 15 250N − m , will come to rest in 4sec.
π 78. In which of the following case(s), the angular
seconds is 2cm / s 2 momentum is conserved?
30
4) The change in acceleration vector in 15minutes 1) The planet Neptune moves in elliptical orbit
around the sun with sun at one focus
π2 2 2) A solid sphere rolling on an inclined plane
is cm / s 2
1800 3) An electron revolving around the nucleus in
75. Two particles, each of mass m are attached elliptical orbit
to the two ends of a light string of length L 4) An α − particle approaching a heavy nucleus
which passes through a hole at the centre of from sufficient distance.
NARAYANAGROUP
81
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
79. A solid sphere is in pure rolling motion on an 53) 2 54) 3 55) 1 56) 1 57) 1 58) 1
inclined surface having inclination θ 59) 1 60) 3 61) 3 62) 1 63) 2 64) 3
[IIT-2006] 65) 1 66) 2
1) frictional force acting on sphere is µmg cos θ MULTI OPTION QUESTIONS
67) 3 68) 4 69) 3 70) 1,3
2) f is dissipative force
71) 3 72) 1,3,4 73) 1,4 74) 1,3,4
3) friction will increase its angular velocity and
75) 2,4 76) 1,3 77) 1,2,3,4
decrease its linear velocity 78) 1,3,4 79) 3,4 80) 1,2,3 81) 1,4
4) If θ decreases, friction will decrease.
r LEVEL-IV-HINTS
80. The torque τ on a body about a given point is Assertion and reasoning type
ur ur ur
found to be equal to A × L , where A is a 10. If centre of mass of system lies at origin
ur r
constant vector and L is angular momentum then r cm = 0
of the body about that point. From this it y
follows that
ur
dL ur
1) is perpendicular to L at all instants of time
dt
ur ur x
2) the component of L in the direction of A does
not change with time r1 r2
ur
3) the magnitude of L does not change with time ur ur
ur m1 r1 + m 2 r2
4) L does not change with time. r cm =
81. A sphere is rolled on a rough horizontal surface. m1 + m 2
It gradually slows down and stops. The force ur ur
∴ m1 r1 + m 2 r2 = 0 or m1r1 = m 2 r2
of friction tends to
1) decrease linear velocity It is clear that if m1 > m 2 then r 2 > r1
2) increase linear momentum 12. External force on the system
3) decrease angular velocity d r
4) increase angular velocity Fext = M
dt
( )
v cm If system is isolated i.e.
LEVEL - IV - KEY r
Matching Type Fext = 0 then vcm =constant.Initially if the velocity
1) A → g; B → e; C → h; D → f of centre of mass is zero then it will remain zero.
2) a → h; b → e; c → f ; d → g 13. As the concept of centre of mass is only theoretical,
therefore in practice no mass may lie at the
3) a - h; b - g; c - f; d - e
centre of mass. For example, centre of mass of a
4) a-f; b-g; c-h; d-e
uniform circular ring is at the centre of the ring where
5) a-q, b-p, c-s, d-r
there is no mass.
6) a-s; b-r; c-p; d-q r
7) a-q,r; b-s; c-p; d-q 14. When particle moves with constant velocity v then
8) a-q,s; b-p; c-pqrs; d-q,s its linear momentum has some inite value
ur r
9) a-s; b-r; c-q; d-p
Assertion & Reason Type Questions ( )
P = mv . Angular momentum (L) = Linear
10) 1 11)2 12)2 13) 1 14) 4 15) 1 momentum (P) x Perpendicular distance of line of
16) 4 17) 4 18) 1 19) 4 20) 1 21) 1 action of linear momentum form the point of
22) 3 23) 1 24) 2 25) 1 26) 2 27) 1 rotation(d). So if d ≠ 0 then L ≠ 0, but if d = 0
28) 1 29) 2 30) 3 31) 1 32) 4 33) 2 then L may be zero. So we can conclude that angular
34) 3 momentum of a particle moving with constant
Statement Type Questions velocity is not always zero.
35) 3 36) 1 37) 3 38) 3 39)3 40) 3 15. Initially the electron and proton were at rest so
41) 1 42) 3 43) 1 44) 1 45) 4 46) 2 then centre of mass will be at rest. When they move
47) 2 48) 2 49) 2 50)) 1 51) 3 52) 1 towards each other under mutual attraction then
NARAYANAGROUP
82
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS
velocity of centre of mass remains unaffected ∴ T αIα R 2 . It means if size of the earth changes
because external force on the system is zero. then its moment of inertia changes. In the problem
16. The position of centre of mass of a body depends radius becomes half so time period (Length of the
on shape, size and distribution of mass of the body. day) will becomes 1/4 of the present value i.e.24/
The centre of mass does not lie necessarily at the 4=6 hr.
centre of the body.
17. As the shell is initially at rest and after explosion, 26. τ = rFsin θ. If θ = 900 then τmax = rF Unit of
according to law of conservation of linear torque is N - m.
momentum, particles move in all direction,such that 27. Radius of gyration of body is not a constant
total momentum of all parts is equal to zero. quantity. Its value changes with the change in
18. Through bending weight of opponent is made to location of the axis of rotation. Radius of gyration
pass through the hip of judo fighter to make of a body about a given axis is given as
its torque zero.
r12 + r22 + ..... + rn2
19. The position of centre of mass of electron and K=
proton remains at rest. As their motion is due to n
internal force of electrostatic attraction, which is 28. When a person is high up on the ladder, then a
conservative force. No external force is acting on large torque is produced due to his weight about
the two particles, therefore centre of mass remain the point of contact between the ladder and the
at rest. floor. Whereas when he starts climbing up, The
20. At the centre of earth, g = 0. Therefore a body has torque is small. Due to this reason, the ladder is
no weight at the centre of earth and have no centre more apt to slip, when one is high up on it.
uur
of gravity (centre of gravity of a body is the point r dL
where the resultant force of attraction or the weight 29. r= and L = Iω
of the body acts). But centre of mass of a body dt
depends on mass and position of particles and is 30. In a whirlwind in a tornado, the air from nearby
independent of weight. regions gets concentrated in a small space thereby
21. Explosion is due to internal forces. As no external decreasing the value of its moment of inertia
force is involved, the vertical down ward motion considerably. Since, Iω = constant, so due to
of centre of mass is not affected. decrease in moment of inertia of the air, its angular
22. Torque = Force x perpendicular distance of line of speed increases to a high value. If no external torque
action of force from the axis of rotationHence for dL
a given applied force, torque or true tendency of acts, then τ = 0 ⇒ = 0 or L = constant
rotation will be high for large value of d. If distance dt
d is smaller, then greater force is required to cause ⇒ Iω =constant. As in the rotational motion, the
the same torque, hence it is harder to open or shut moment of inertia of the body can change due to
down the door by applying a force near the hinge. the change in position of the axis of rotation, the
23. The moment of inertia of a particle about an axis of angular speed may not remain conserved.
rotation is given by the product of the mass of the 31. In sliding down, the entire potential energy is
particle and the square of the perpendicular distance converted into kinetic energy. While in rolling down
of the particle from the axis of rotation. some part of potential energy is converted into
For different axis, distance would be different, K.E. of rotation. Therefore linear velocity acquired
therefore moment of inertia of a particle changes is less.
with the change in axis of rotation. 32. In rolling all points of rigid body have the same
24. There is a difference between inertia and moment angular speed but different linear speed.
of inertia of a body. The inertia of a body depends 33. Rolling occurs only on account of friction which is
only upon the mass of the body but the moment of a tangential force capable of
inertia of a body about an axis not only depends providing torque. When the inclined plane is
upon the mass of the body but also upon the perfectly smooth, body will simply slip under the
distribution of mass about the axis of rotation. effect of its own weight.
25. When earth shrinks it angular momentum remains 34. K N = K R + K T This equation is correct for any
constant. i.e. body which is rolling without slipping. For the ring
2 2π and hollow cylinder only K R = K T i.e.
L = Iω = mR 2 × = cons tan t
5 T K N = 2K T
NARAYANAGROUP
83
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
LEVEL-V
m
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS A
1. A rigid massless beam is balanced by a θ
particle of mass 4m in left hand side and a
pulley particle system in right hand side. The 2 2
(a) tan θ (b) tan θ
x 3 9
value of y is: 1
(c) 6 tan θ (d) none of these
x Y 5. A disc of mass m is connected with an ideal
spring of stiffness k . If it is released from
m rest., it rolls without sliding on an inclined
4m
plane. The maximum elongation of the spring
is :
m
2m k
7 5
(a) 6 (b) 6 (c) 1:1 (d) 11/12 m
2. A uniform box is kept on a rough inclined plane.
θ
It begins to topple when θ is equal to :
mg sinθ 2mg sin θ 3mg sin θ 2mg sin θ
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2x k 3k k k
x 6. A massless thin hollow sphere is completely
filled with water of mass m . If the hollow
sphere rolls with a velocity v . the kinetic
energy of the sphere of water is :(Asune water
θ
is non viscous)
1
(a) 300 (b) 600 (c) tan −1 (d) 45°
2
3. A rod touches a disc kept on a smooth V
horizontal plane. If the rod moves with an
accleration a , the disc rolls on the rod without
sliding.Then, the acceleration of the disc w.r.t
the rod is
1 1 7 5
(a) mv 2 (b) mv 2 (c) mv 2 (d) mv 2
2 3 10 6
a 7. A particle P collides elastically at M with a
speed v . The change in angular momentum of
the particle about the point N during collision
60°
is :
a 3a P
(a) 3 (b) (c) zero (d) a/2
2 θ
4. A uniform cylinder of mass m is kept on an M
N I
accelerating wedge. If the wedge moves with
an acceleration a = 3g tan θ , the minimum V
coefficient of friction between the cylinder and
wedge to avoid relative sliding between them (a) 2mvl cos θ ↓ (b) 2mvl cos θ ↑
is (c) zero (d) mvl cos θ ↑
84 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
8. Aball is attached to a string that is attached to 12. A hemispherical shell of mass M and radius
a thick pole. When the ball is hit, the string R is hinged at point O and palced on a
warps around the pole and the ball spirals horizontal surface. A ball of mass M moving
inwards sliding on the frictionless surface. with a velocity u inclined at an
Neglecting air resistance, what happens as the
ball swings around the pole? 1
angle θ = tan −1 strikes the shell at point A
(a) The mechnical energy and angular momentum 2
are conserved
(as shown in the figure) and stops. What is the
(b) The angular momentum of the ball is conserved
at the mechanical energy of the ball increases minimum speed u if the given shell is to reach
(c) The angular momentum of the ball is conserved the horizontal surface OP?
and the mechanical energy of the ball decreases O P
(d) The mechanical energy of the ball is conserved
and angular momentum of the ball decreases
9. The free end of a thread wound on a bobbin is α
A
passed round a nail A hammered into the wall. m u
The thread is pulled at a constant velocity’v’
Assuming pure rolling of bobbin, find the 2 gR gR
(a) Zero (b) (c)
velocity v0 of the centre of the bobbin at the 3 5
instant when the thread forms an angle α with d) it cannot come on the surface for any value of u
the vertical:(R and r are outer and inner radii 13. A hollow sphere of mass 2kg is kept on a rough
off the babbin) horizontal surface. A force of 10 N is applied
at the centre of the sphere as shown in the
figure. Find the minimum value of µ so that
the sphere starts pure rolling.
V (Take g=10m/s2)
F = 10N
vR vR 30°
(a) (b)
R sin α − r R sin α + r
2vR v
(c) (d)
R sin α + r R sin α + r
10. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass
m
density ρ is bent into a circular loop with centre
at O as shown. The moment of inertia of the (a) 3 × 0.16 (b) 3 × 0.08
loop about the axis XX ' is :
x
1
x (c) 3 × 0.1 (d) Data insufficient
14. A cubical block of side L and mass m is placed
O on a horizontal floor. In the arrangement as
shown, a force F is applied at the end of the
plane sheet PQ which is firmly attached with
ρ L3 ρ L3 5ρ L3 3ρ L3
(a) (b) (c) (d) the block. What should be the minimum value
8π 2 16π 2 16π 2 8π 2
11. A partice moves in a circular path with of PQ so that block may be tipped about an
decreasing speed. Choose the correct edge?
statement F 30° L (a) L / 3
(a) Angular momentum remains constant P Q
r
(b) Acceleration ( a ) is towards the centre a (b) L / 2
(c) Particle moves in a spiral path wth decreasing L
radius (c) L 2 / 3
(d) The direction of angular momentum remains
constant O
(d) L 3 / 2
NARAYANAGROUP 85
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
15. A rigid body of moment of inertial I is F
projected with velocity V making an angle of
450 with horizontal. The magnitude of angular F1 Q P F2
momentum of the projectile about the point of
projection when the body is at its maximum
A B
IV 3
µ µ
(a) ( 7 F1 − 3F2 ) ( 5 F1 − 3F2 )
height is given by where R is the
2 2 gR 2 (b)
2 2
radius of the rigid body. The ridid body is:
µ
(a) sphere (b)spherical shell (c) µ ( 3F1 − F2 ) (d) ( 3F1 − F2 )
(c) disc (d) none of these 2
16. An equilateral triangle ABC formed a uniform 18. Consider the following statements:
wire has two small identical beads initially s1 : Zero net torque on a body means always
located at A. The triangle is set rotating about absence of rotational motion of the body.
the vertical axis AO.Then the beads are s2 : A particle may have angular momentum
relased from rest simultanously and allowed even though the particle is not moving in a
to slide down,one along Ab and other AC as circle.
shown.Meglecting frictional effects,the s3 : A ring of rolling without sliding on a fixed
quantities that are conserved as beads slides
surface. the centripetal acceleration of each
down are: particle with respect to the centre of the ring
is same.
A
State in order, whether s1 , s2 , s3 are ture or
g false.
(a) FTT (b) FFT (c) TTF (d) FTF
19. A uniform rod of length L (in between the
supports) and mass m is placed on two suports
B O C
A and B. The rod breaks suddenly at length
L/10 from the support B. Find the reaction at
(a) angular velocity and total energy(kinetic support A immediately after the rod breaks.
and potential) L/10
(b) total angular momentum and moment of
interia about the axis of rotation
A D B
(c) angular velocity and moment of interia
about the aixs of rotation
(d) total angular momentum and total energy L
17. On a smooth horizontal table, a sphere is 9 19 mg 9
A) mg B) mg C) D) mg
pressed by blocks A and B by forces F1 and 40 40 2 20
20. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R is
F2 respectively ( F1 > F2 ) exactly normal to rolling up a rough inclined plane which makes
the tangent at the point of contact of blocks an angle of 300 with the horizontal. If the
and sphere. A force F is applied on the sphere coefficients of static and kinetic friction are
along a diameter perpendicular to another each equal to µ and the only forces acting
diameter OP, which is the line of action of are gravitatinal and frictional, then value of
forces F1 and F2 . The sphere moves out of µ for maximum magnitude of the frictional
force acting on the disc is
block A and B. FInd minimum value of F. the
coefficient of friction is µ at all contacts: 1 1 1 1
A) B) C) D)
3 2 3 3 3 3
86 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
? 2 ( r2 − r1 ) + ? 1r2 ? 2 ( r2 − r1 ) + ? 1r1
21. On a particle moving on a circular path with a
constant speed v , light is thrown from a
(A) (B)
projectors placed at the centre ofthe circular r2 r2
path. The shadow of the particle is formed on
the wall. The velocity of shadow up the wall is (C) ? 1 (D) ? 2
Wall 24 . Two vertical walls are separated by a distance
v
of 2 metres. Wall ‘A’ is smooth while wall B is
rough with a coefficient of friction µ = 0.5 A
uniform rod is probed between them. The
length of the longest rod that can be probed
φ between the walls is equal to
2m
(A) v sec 2 f (B) v cos 2 f P
(C) v cos f (D) None of these
22. A rod of length l is travelling with velocity Q
v and rotating with angular velocity ? such
Wall Wall
?l
= v . The distance travelled by end
A B
that
2 (a) 2 metres (b) 2 2 metres
B of the rod when rod rotates by an angle,
17
p (c) 2 metres metres (d)
is 2
2
25. A disc is rotating at an angular velocity ω0 .A
A
constant retardation torque is applied on it to
stop the disc. After a certain time at which
ω V some number of rotation of the disc have been
performed so that total angle rotated is θ1 and
B
2
that only th of these rotatios will further stop
3
5
(a) 2l (b) l (c) 3l (d) 4l the disc. Find the retarding force.
2
23. A large rectangular box has been rotated with 11ω02 9ω02 5ω02 3ω02
a) 2) 3) 4)
a constant angular velocity ? 1 about its axis 14θ1 14θ1 14θ1 14θ1
as shown in the figure. Another small box kept 26. A square plate hinged at A, of side a and mas
inside the bigger box is rotated in the same M is placed in ( x − z ) plane. The plate is
sense with angular velocity ? 2 about its axis
allowed to fall upto ( x − y ) plane. Find its
(which is fixed to floor of bigger box). A particle
P has been identified, its angular velocity about angular velocity.
AB would be Z
A
ω1
y
C
ω2
x
P A
1/2 1/2
3g 12 g
1/2 1/2
r1 D 24 g 12 g
a) b) c) d)
B r2 a 2 7 a 7a 7 2a
NARAYANAGROUP 87
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
27. A disc of mass m and radius r is placed on a 31. A disc is given an initial angular velocity ω0
rough horizotal surface. A cue of mass m hits
and placed on rough horizontal surface as
the disc at a height h from the axis passing
shown. The quantities which will not depend
through centre and parallel to the surface. The
on the coefficient of friction is/are
disc will start pure rolling for.
r r r r
a) h < b) h = c) h > d) h ≥
3 2 2 2
ω0
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
28. A solid cylinder is rolling down the inclined
plane without slipping. Which of the following
is/are correct (a) The time until rolling begins
(a) The friction force is dissipative (b) The displacement of the disc until rolling begins
(b) The friction force is necessarily changing (c) The velocity when rolling begins
(c) The friction force will aid rotation but opposes (d) The work done by the force of friction
translation 32. A thin rod AB of mass M and length L is
(d) The friction force is reduced if θ is reduced rotating with angular speed ω0 about vertical
29. An impulse I is applied at the end of a uniform axis passing through its end B on a horizontal
rod if mass m. then : smooth table as shown. If at some instant the
I2 hinge at end B of rod is opened then which of
(a) KE of translaton of the rod is the following statement is/are correct about
2m
motion of rod ?
I2
(b) KE of rotation of the rod is A M
6m
3I 2 L
(c) KE of rotation of the rod is
2m
B
I 2I 2 ω0
(d) KE of the rod is
m
30. A uniform rod of mass m and length l is in (a) The angular speed of rod after opening the
equilibrium under the constraints of horizontal
and vertical rough surfaces. Then : hinge will remain ω0
y (b) The angular speed of rod after opening the
hinge will be less than ω0
(c) In the process of opening the hinge the kinetic
energy of rod will remain conserved.
(d) Angular momentum of rod will remain
1
conserved about centre of mass of rod in the
process of opening the hinge
θ
x 33. A cylinder rolls without slipping on a rough
O
floor, moving with a speed v. It makes an elastic
(a) the net torque of normal reaction about O is collision with smooth vertical wall. After impact
mgl (a) it will move with a speed v initially
equal to cos θ (b) its motion will be rolling without slipping
2
(b) the net rorque due to friction about O is zero (c) its motion will be rolling with slipping initially
(c) the net torque due to normal reactions is and its rotational motion will stop momentarily at
numerically equl to the net torque due to the some instant
frictional force abou the CM of the rod (d) its motion will be rolling without slipping only
(d) all of the above after some time
88 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
34. A sphere of radius 0.10m and mass 10kg rests 37. A wheel is under pure rotational motion about
in the corner formed by a 30° inclined plane an axis passing through its centre. It moves
and a smooth vertical wall. Choose the correct with constant angular velocity.
options a) if angular velocity is increasing then acceleration
of particles on a spoke if moved from centre to
periphery remains constant
f mg b) acceleration of particles on a spoke if moved
from centre to periphery continuously increases
30°
c) acceleration of particles on a spoke if moved
from centre to periphery continuously increases and
on peripherial points,it remains same
N2
d) accelerations of particles in both the cases remain
(a) N1 = 56.5 N (b) N 2 = 113 N same
(c) f = 0 (d) f ≠ 0 COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
35. If the resultant of all the external forces acting Passage - I :
on a system of particles is zero, then from an A string is wrapped several times on a cylinder of
inertial frame, one can surely say that mass M and radius R. the cylinder is pivoted about
(a) linear momentum of the system does not change its axis of symmetry. A block of mass m tied to the
in time string rests on a support so that the string is slack.
(b) kinetic energy of the system changes in time the block is lifted upto a height h and the support is
(c) angular momentum of the system does not removed. (shown in figure)
change in time
(d) potential energy of the system does not change
in time R
36. A rod of length ‘l’ is pivoted smoothly at O is
resting on a block of height h. If the block m
moves with a constant velocity V, pick the m h h
current alternatives.
θ V h
38. What is the angular velocity of cylinder just
before the string becomes taut
O 2gh gh 2 gh
(a) zero (b) (c) (d)
R R R
V cos ?
(a) angular velocity of rod is 39. When the string experience a jerk, a large
h impulsive force is generated for a short
(b) angular acceleration of rod is duration, so that contribution of weight mg can
2V 2 cos3 ? sin ? be neglected during this duration. Then what
will be speed of block m, just after string has
h2 become taut
V cos 2 ? 2gh 2gh gh gh
(c) angular velocity of rod is
h (a) 1 + M (b) M (c) 1 + M (d) M
(d) tangential velocity of free end of rod is m 1 + 2m m 1 + 2m
lV cos 2 ? 40. If M = m, what fraction of KE is lost due to
the jerk developed in the string
h (a) 1/2 (b) 2/3 (c) 1/3 (d) 1/4
NARAYANAGROUP 89
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Passage-II : Passage - IV :
A man of mass 100 kg stands at the rim of a turn . Three particles each of mass m can slide on fixed
table of radius 2m, moment of inertia 4000 kg. The frictinless circular tracks in the same horizontal plane
table is mounted on a vertical smooth axis, through as shown . Particle m1 (= m)moves with veocity
its center. The whole system is initially at rest. The v0 and hits patricle m2 (= m), the cofficient of
man now walks on table with a velocity 1m/s relative
restitution being e = 0.5. Assume that m2 and
to earth
41. With what angular velocity will the turn table m3 (=m)are at rest initially and lie along a radial line
rotate before impact, and the spring is initially unstretched.
(a) 0.5 rad/sec (b) 0.1 rad/sec V0
m2
(c) 0.05 rad/sec (d) 0.2 rad/sec m1
42. Through what angle will the turn table have k
rotated when the man reaches his initial m3
position on it 2R
π 3π R
(a) rad/sec (b) rad/sec
11 11
2π 4π
(c) rad/sec (c) rad/sec
11 11 46. Velocity of m2 immediately after impact is
43. Through what angle will it have rotated when v0 3v0
v0 3v0
the man reaches his initial position relative to (a) (b) (c) (d)
4 42 2
earth
47. The maximum veloctiy of m3 is
π 2π
(a) rad/sec (b) rad/sec 3 3 3 3
5 5 (a) v0 (b) 10 v0 (c) v0 (d) v0
5 4 2
2π π 48. The maximum stretch of the spring is
(c) rad/sec (d) rad/sec
11 11 3 m 3 m
Passage-III : (a) v0 (b) v0
4 5R 2 5R
A homogeneous rod AB of length L and mass M is
hinged at the centre O in such a way that it can 3 m
(c) v0 (d) 3 v m
rotate freely in the vertical plane. The rod is initially 5 5R 0
10 5R
in horizontal position. An insect S of the same mass Passage - V :
M falls vertically with speed V on point C, midway A plank of length 20 m and mass 1 kg is kept on a
between the points O and B. Immediately after horizontal smooth surface. A cylinder of mass 1kg
falling, the insect starts to move towards B such is kept near one end of the plank. The coefficient
that the rod rotates with a constant angular of friction between the two surfaces is 0.5. The
velocityω . plank is suddenly given a velocity 20m/s towards
left.
m m
A B
O C l = 20m
44.Calculate angular velocity in terms of V and L 49. Which of the following statement is correct?
12V V 7V 3V (a) Intitial acceleration of cylinder is 5m / s 2 towards
(a) (b) (c) (d) left
7L L 12 L 2L
45. If insect reaches the end B when the rod has (b) Initial acceleration of cylinder is 5m / s 2 towards
turned through an angle of 900 calculate V right
(c) Initial acceleration of cylinder is 10 m / s 2 towards
interms of L
right
3 7 1 2 (d) Initial acceleration of cylinder is 10 m / s2 towards
(a) 2gL (b) 2gL (c) gL (d) 2gL
7 12 12 7 left
90 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
50. Which of the following statement is correct? 57. Choose the correct statement
(a) Pure rolling of cylinder takes place immediately (a) Linear momentum of disc is conserved as the
(b) Intitally cylinder slips and then pure rolling begins spring force is always perpendicular to velocity of
(c) Pure rolling never begins disc.
(d) There is no lose in kinetic energy during its entire (b) Angular momentum of disc about fixed end of
motion. spring is conserved.
51. Velocity of plank when pure rolling begins is (c) Kinetic energy of disc is conserved
(a) 10m/s (b) 1.5sec (c) 20m/s (d) 25m/s (d) Angular velocity of disc remains constant
52. Time in which plank and cylinder separate 58. In the subsequent motion of disc, maximum
(a) 1 sec (b) 1.5 sec (c) 2.5 sec (d) 2 sec elongation of spring is l0 /10 . The velocity of
Passage - VI : disc at this instant is:
A ring of radius R is rolling purely on the outer (a) 11 m / s (b) 10 m / s
surface of a pipe of radius 4R. At some instant, the (c) 5 m / s (d) 7 m / s
centre of the ring has a constnat speed of v.
59. What is the force constant of spring?
53. The acceleration of the point on the ring which
is in contact with the surface of the pipe is (a) 210 N / m (b) 100 N / m
(a) 4v 2 / 5R (b) 3v 2 / 5R (c) v2 / 4R (d) zero (c) 110 N / m (d) 200 m / s
54. The acceleration of the point on the ring which Passage - IX:
is farthest from the centre of the pipe at the A thin uniform rod of mass m and length L is hinged
given moment is : at one end and from other end a light string is
(a) 4v 2 / 5R (b) 3v 2 / 5R (c) 3v 2 / 4R (d) 6v 2 / 5R attached. The string is wound over a frictionless
pullely (having mass 2m) and a block of mass 2m
Passage - VII :
is connected to string on other side of pulley as
A uniform rod of mass ‘m’ and length L is released
shown. The system is released from rest when the
from rest, with its lower end touching a frictionless
horizontal floor. At the initial moment, the rod is rod is making an angle of 370 with horizontal.Based
inclined at an angle of 300 with the vertical. on above information answer the following
55. Then,the value of normal reaction from the questions:
floor just after release,will be:
a) 4mg/7 b) 5mg/9 c) 2mg/5 d) mg/5 H2
56. In the above problem, the initial acceleration
of the lower end of the rod will be:
a) g 3 / 4 b) g 3 / 5 c) 3 g 3 / 7 d) g 3 / 7
mL
Passage-VIII:
One end of an ideal spring of unstretched length 37° 2m
lO = 1m , is fixed on a frictionless horizontal table.
H
The other end has a small disc of mas 0.1 kg attahed
to it. The disc is projected with a velocity 60. Just after release of the system from rest,
acceleration of block is
?0 = 11 m / s perpendicular to the spring:
72 g 48 g
v1 (a) , downwards (b) , downwards
121 119
11l0 90 g 90 g
(c) , downwards (d) , upwards
v0 10 121 121
61. Just after release of the system, the resultant
O force exerted by hinge on rod is
l0 (a) 0.7mg (b) 0.92mg (c) 0.53mg (d) mg
NARAYANAGROUP 91
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
62. Just after release of the system from rest, the 65. A rigid body of mass M and Radius R rolls
resultant force exerted by hinge H 2 on pulley without slipping on an inclined plane of
is inclination θ under gravity Match the type of
body with magnitude of the force of friction.
46
(a) mg in upward direction C olum n I C olum n II
121
Mg sin θ
46 a) For ring p)
(b) mg in downward direction 2.5
121
Mg sin θ
438 b) For solid sphere q)
(c) mg in upward direction 3
121
Mg sin θ
438 c) For solid cylinder r)
(d) mg in downward direction 3.5
121
Mg sin θ
MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS d) For hollow s)
63. For the following statements, except gravity 2
and contact force between the contact spherical shell
surfaces, no other force is acting on the body. 66. A rigid body is rolling without slipping on
Column I Column II horizontal surface.At given instant BD is
(a) When a sphere is (p) Upward direction perfectly horizontal and CD is perfectly
in pure–rolling on a vertical.
fixed horizontal surface. C
(b) When a cylinder (q) vcm > R ω ω = v/R
is in pure rolling on
a fixed inclined plane in upward D R
B
direction then friction force acts in
(c) When a cylinder is (r) vcm < R ω
in pure rolling
down a fixed incline plane, Column I Column II
friction force acts in
(d) When a sphere of (s) No frictional force a) Velocity at pointA, vA p) v 2
radius R is rolling acts b) Velocity at point B, vB q) Zero
with slipping on a fixed horizontal
surface, the relation between vcm and ω is c) Velocity at point C, vC r) v
(t) Work done by the d) Velocity at point D, vD s) 2v
frictional force is zero
67. A horizontal table can rotate about its axis. A
64. A uniform disc is acted upon by some forces
block is placed at a certain distance from
and it rolls on a horizontal plank without
slipping from north to south. The plank, in turn center as shown in figure. The table rotates
lies on a smooth horizontal surface. Match the such that block does not slide. Select possible
following regarding this situation : direction of net acceleration of block at the
Column I Column II instant shown in figure. Then match the
(a) Frictional force on (p) May be columns.
the disc by the surface directed towards 4
north
(b) Velocity of the (q) May be directed
lowermost point of the disc towards south 3
(c) Acceleration of (r) May be zero
centre of mass of the disc
(d) Vertical component (s) Must be zero 2
of the acceleration of 1
centre of mass
92 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
Column I Column II Column I Column II
a) When rotation is p) 1
1. No friction between p. Angular acceleration
clockwise with constant ω pulley and string, and of pulley is 0
b) When rotation is q) 2 moment of inertia of
clockwise with decreasing ω pulley is not
negligible.
c) When rotation is r) 3
clockwise with increasing ω 2. Friction is there q. T1 = T2
between pulley and
d) Just after clockwise s) 4 string, and pulley is
rotation begins form rest light.
68. An uniform disc rolls without slipping on a 3. Friction is not there r. T1 ≠ T2
rough horizontal surface with uniform angular and pulley is light.
velocity. Point O is the centre of disc and P is D. Friction is there and s. Angular
pulley is having acceleration of
a point on disc as shown. In each situation of some moment of pulley ≠ 0
column I a statement is given and the inertia.
corresponding result are given in column –II.
Match the statements in coloumn-I with the 70. A smooth ball of mass m moving with a uniform
results in column-II velocity v0 strikes a smooth uniform rod AB
of equal mass m, lying on a frictionless
P horizontal table. The ball strikes the rod at
one end A, perpendicular to the rod, as shown
in the figure. The collision is perfectly elastic.
O
Some physicaL quantities pertaining to this
situation are given in COLUMN-1 while their
values are given in COLUMN-2 in a different
order . Match the values in COLUMN-II and
Column I Column II the quantities in COLUMN-I
a) The velocity of p) Change at point P in m A
disc magnitude with time v0
b) The acceleration q) Is always directed of
point P on disc from that point not m
towards centre of disc.
c) The tangential r) is always zero
acceleration of point B
P on disc Column-I Column-II
d) The acceleration s) is non-zero and
of point on remains constant in 2
A) Final kinetic energy of ball p)
disc which is in contact magnitude 5
with rough horizontal surface Initial kinetic energy of ball
69. A light string is wrapped on a pulley and two B) Impulse delivered to the rod
blocks of masses m1 and m2 are attached to 3
Initial momentum of ball q)
5
free end of string as shown in figure. T1 and C) Angular momentum of rod about its
T2 are the tension in string on two sides of centre of mass
Initial angular momentum of the ball about
pulley. In column I, some information is
mentioned about friction between of inertia of 9
the centre of mass of the rod r)
pulley, while in colunm II the effect of the 25
information mention in column I on the motion Final kinetic energy of rotation of the rod
of system is given. Match the entries of Final kinetic energy of translation of the rod s) 3
column I with the entries of column II. D) Final kinetic energy of rotation of the rod
Final kinetic energy of translation of the rod
NARAYANAGROUP 93
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS LEVEL-V - KEY
71. A rod of mass m and length l is released SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
from rest from vertical position as shown in
1.D 2.C 3. A 4.D 5. D 6. A 7. C
the figure. The normal force as a function of θ ,
which is exerted on the rod by the ground as it 8. D 9. A 10.D 11. D 12. D 13. B 14. A
falls downward, assuming that it does not slip 15. C 16. D 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. C 21. A
22. A 23. B 24. D 25. C 26. A 27. B
3cos θ − 1
2
is mg then n = MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTION
n
28. C,D 29. A,C,D 30. A,B,C,D
31. C,D 32. A,C,D 33. A,C,D
34. A,B,C 35. A,B 36. B,C 37.B,C
θ COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
38. A 39. B 40. C 41. C 42.A 43. A 44. A
45. B 46. B 47.B 48. A 49. B 50. B 51. B
72. One end of a uniform rod of mass M and 52.B 53. A 54. D 55. A 56. C 57. B 58. B
length L is supported by a frictionless hinge 59. A 60. A 61. C 62. C
which can with stand a tension of 1.75 Mg. The MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
rod is free to rotate in a vertical plane. The
63. A → s, t; B → p; C → p; D → q, r
maximum angle should the rod be rotated from
the vertical position so that when left, the hinge 64. A → p, q, r; B → p, q, r; C → p, q, r; D → s
π
65. A → s; B → r; C → q; D → p
does not break is 66. A → q; B → p; C → s; D → r
n
67. A → r; B → s; C → q; D → p
73. A thin uniform bar of mass m and length 2L is 68. A → p; B → q, s; C → p; D → q
held at an angle 300 with the horizontal by 69. A → p, q; B → q, s; C → p, q; D → p, q, r, s
means of two vertical inextensible strings, at 70. A → r ; B → P ; C → P ; D → S
each end as shown in figure. If the string at INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
the right end breaks, leaving the bar to swing
the tension in the string at the left end of the 71. 2 72. 3 73. 4 74. 5
bar immediately after string breaks is LEVEL-V - HINTS
n DETIAL SOLUTINS
T= mg
13 SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
a=
( 2m − m ) g = g
1. for T in lower string ,
3m 3
g
T = 2mg − 2m× = 4mg / 3
3
30° 8mg
&T 1 = 2T =
R 3
74. A uniform sphere of radius starts rolling
16 8mg 11mg
T 1 + mg = + mg =
down without slipping from the top of another 3 3
sphere of radius R = 1 m. The angular velocity Let has take movent about hinge
of the sphere in rad s −1 , after it leaves the 11mg x 11
surface of the larger sphere is 8 x n. Where n 4mg × x = ×y⇒ =
3 y 12
= --.
94 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
x 9. When the thread is pulled, the bobbin rolls to the
2. mg sin θ × x = mg cos θ × right. Resultant velocity of point B along the thread
2
(taking moment aobut right bottom corner) is υ = υ0 sin α − ω r , where υ0 sin α is the
1
component of translation velocity along the thread
⇒ tan θ = and ω r linear velocity due to rotation. As the
2
bobbin rolls without slipping, υ0 = ω R. Solving the
3. ma cos θ − f = mA → (1)
υR
f × r = Iα → ( 2 ) ; A = rα → ( 3) obtained equations, we get υ0 = .
R sin α − r
a 3 l 3ρl 3
2
From about equation A = 1 3
10. I = mR + mR = mR = ρ l = 2
2 2 2
3 2 2 2 2π 8π
a 1 2 11. L = mVR, hear V dicreases so L never be
A= where θ = 60 & I = mr
0
3 2 r r
constant, Also ar & at both are acting & thind point
4. r
contradicts the given question. But direction L is
ma sinθ always constant.
N 12. There is neither torque nor angular momentam about
f the O. (because line of action passes through O)
O So u = 0
ma p
mg cosθ 13. Form given figure we get
mg sinθ N = F sin θ + mg → (1) ; F cos θ − f = ma → ( 2)
mg θ
fR = Iα → ( 3)
ma sinθ Slove above equation we can easily get
mg sin θ − ma cos θ − f = ma .....(1) µ = 0.08 × 3
14. Block will be tipped about point O.
N = ma sin θ + mg cos θ .....(2)
f = µ N ..........(3) M O = ( F cos 300 ) a = F sin 300 L + mgL / 2
3 mgL
τ ( p ) = mg sin θ = mR 2 × α ......(4) F=
2 (a 3−L )
a = Rα ........(5)
Solving above equitions we get m µ For F > 0, a 3 > L ; a ≥ L / 3.
15. At highest point, velocity = V cos 450 = V / 2
5. We use work energy principal
V V 2 sin 2 450 V 2
1 2mg sin θ L = m .r ⊥ ; Here r⊥ = h = =
mg sin θ × x − kx 2 = 0 ⇒ x = 2 2g 4g
2 k
6. Liquid gets only tracanslatory motion in side any mV 3 IV 3
L= = 2
( given ) ; So, m = I2
1 2 4 2 g 2 2 gR 2 R
rollny mosum. This kE = mv
2 1
I= mR 2 . It is a disc.
taking component 2
∆L = mv sin θ × l
7. durring strike
− mv sin θ l = 0
8. The force is conservative. so ME is conserved V cos 45°
(friction less) & Angular momentum ( L = Iω )
h
decreases due to reverse swing compare to that of
initial swing before strike.
NARAYANAGROUP 95
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
16. Hear force is conservative ( Fg ) . Thus energy is
20. It may happen if friction is upwards and disc
acceleration downwards. The equations of motion
r
conserved. & No external torqued. L = constant. are
17. N1 = F1 and fi = µ N1 = µ F1 mg sin θ − f g f
a= = − ; ( As θ = 300 )
f 2 = µ F2 ; F − f1 − f2 = ma → (1)
m 2 m
τ fR 2f
( f − f ) R = 5 ( f1 − f 2 ) R 5 ( f1 − f 2 ) α= = =
α= 1 2 = I ( mR / 2 ) mR
2
I 2mR 2 2mR
For no slipping a = Rα
a = α R = 5 ( f1 − f 2 ) / 2m
g f
From eq.(1), − = 2 f / m or f = mg / 6
2 m
5 ( f1 − f 2 )
F − f1 − f 2 = mg 3
2 f ≤ f max ; = µ mg cos 300 = µ mg
6 2
5 5 µ
F= f1 − f 2 + f1 + f 2 = ( 7 F1 − 3F2 ) 1
2 2 2 µ=
3 3
F
V
Vy
f1 α f2
y
21.
θ
18. In case of pure rolling,torque due to friction about
contact is zero. y = R tan ?
9 9 dy dv
19. Torque = τ = mg L = R sec2 ? = ; Vy = R sec 2 ? ( ? )
10 20 dt dt
v
2
m 9 3g
= Iα = L α ; a= Vy = R sec 2 ? = V sec 2 ?
3 10 2L R
Acceleration 22. Here the point B is following a curvilinerar path
3 g 9 L 27 g whose velocity at any instant is given by vector sum
aCM = α ( AC ) = = → →
2 L 20 40 → ?×L
of V and . When rod rotates by an angle
9 2
NA = mg
40 ? , the situation is as shown in the figure. The speed
(9L/20) of end point at this instant is
A C D A
9 θ
10
ω V
9 ωL θ
mg 2
10
96 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
2 25. Let n1 rotations performed upoto a cenrtain time
?L ?L
v1 = v + + 2v +
2
× cos ( p − ? ) n1 = (θ1 / 2π )
2 2
v1 = 2v ( [1 + cos ? ] ) n2 =
2
3
2 θ 2 1
n1 = 1 = θ1 .
3 2π 5 2π
? ? ω12 = ω02 − 2αθ1 .....(1) and
= 2v × 2 cos = 2v cos
2 2 2
0 = ω12 − 2α θ1 ....(2)
v1 =
?L ? ds d?
× 2cos ; = × L cos
? 5
2 2 dt dt 2 From eqns. (1) and (2)
? 2L 4αθ1 5ω02
∫ ds = L ∫
s p /2
cos d? = = 2L = ω0 − 2αθ1 ;
2
α =
⇒ 0 0 2 5 14θ1
2
→ → 26. AC = a 2
23. V , CD = ? 2 ( r2 − r1 ) ; V , CD, AB = ? r
11
The plate falls by AO = a / 2
→ → →
VP , AB = VP , CD + VCD , AB Iz I + I2
I (diagonal DB ) = = 1
= ? 2 ( r2 − r ) + ? 1r1
2 2
C
Angular velocity of P about AB
vPAB ? 2 ( r2 − r1 ) + ? 1 ( r1 ) a
? = =
r2 r2
D B
24. µ N = mg
P I2 I1
A
N1
θ com
f = µN2 1 Ma 2 Ma 2
= 2 3 = 6
mg Q N2
Ma 2
Since I1 = I 2 = ; I A = I DB + M ( AO )
2
6
2
Ma 2
( )
2
& N1 = N 2
2
= +M a/ 2 = Ma 2 = Ma 2
Take the torque about the com 6 3 3
1 l l a 1 12
N1 sin θ + N 2 sin θ = µ N 2 cosθ Mg = Iω 2 = Ma 2ω 2
2 2 2 2 2 23
1 l 3g
1/2 1/2
N1 sin θ × 2 = µ N 2 × cos θ 3g
2 2 Which gives ω = =
2a a 2
µ 1
tan θ = ; sec 2 θ − 1 = 27. Linear momentum is conserved, mv = mv ' .Angular
2 2 momentum abouty centre of the disc.
l2 l 0.25 17 mr 2 2vh
sec θ = 1 + ; = 1+ ; L= mt = mvh = − Iω = ω or ω = 2
4 2 4 2 2 r
NARAYANAGROUP 97
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
2vh N
For pure rolling v = rω =
r
or h = r / 2 , for pure rolling. m vr = ω
ω0
31. r ω
MULITPULE ANSWER
28. Self explanatory mg
1 2
29. KET = mv ..............(1) & I = mv ....(2) Using conservation angular momentum and equation
2
rω0
2 of kinematics t = so t depends on µ
so KET =
I 1 2
; again KER = Iω .......(3) 3µ g
2m 2
ω02 r 2
l 1 6I s= ; if depends on µ .
we have I × = ml 2 × ω ⇒ ω = 18µ g
2 12 ml
Again at bigining condition v = 0 and ω = ω0
1 1 2 36 I 2 3I 2
Thus KE R = × ml × 2 2 = both indipendent to µ
2 12 ml 2m Again work by friction
2I 2 W( f ) = −µ mgr × θ slipping = −µ gr
and KE = KET + KER =
m
30. ω 2r 2 ω 2r 2
=
2µ g 2
f2
Thus it is independent to µ
32. Initialy ω0 is not changed. After that ω0 decreases
because I 0ω0 = I 'ω ' initialy I 0 about B & later
N2
I ' is about com.
N1 Then kinetic energy and angular momentum both
are conserved due to no external torque.
mg θ 33. Let look synopsis given.
f1
v ' = ev ( ← ) , e = 1 so v ' = v hence a, c, d are
N1 = mg − f 2 .............(1); N 2 = f1 ........ (2) correct
34. If we take moments about an axis through the
Now taking moment about A
center of the sphere. Only f can have a
l
N 2 × l sin θ + f 2 × l cos θ = mg × cosθ .....(3) torque. ∑τ = 0 ; Take ∑ Fy = 0 yields
2
Take moment about point B N 2 cos 300 = mg = (10kg ) ( 9.8m / s 2 )
l
N1 × l cos θ = mg × cos θ + f1 × l sin θ ...(4)
2
∑F x = 0 yields N 2 sin 300 − N1 = 0
or N1 = 56.5 N , N 2 = 113 N
τ 0 ( of normals ) =
35. As external force is zero,P is constant but K.E
mg increases.
N1l cos θ + N 2 × l sin θ =
2 Due to external torque ,angular momentum
changes. P.E also changes.
mg
l cos θ + cot θ = 2mgl cos θ / 2
2 h V cos2 ?
36. V cos ? = ×? ; ? =
B,C & D are easily explain cos ? h
98 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
2K 0
40. For M = m,K1 = , so the fraction lost is
3
ω
V K 0 − K1 1
K = 3
Vcosθ 0
θ h
41 to 43
41. By conservation of angular momentum on the man-
table system,
d? 2V 2 cos 3 ?.sin ? r r
(B) a = = Li = L f or 0 + 0 = I m ωm + I t ωt
dt h2
Imω m v 1
37. Acceleration is given by ω 2 r and it increases if ωt = − ω = = rad / s
I1 where m r 2
moved from centre to periphery. Accelerations of
all end points will be same. If ω is varying 1/ 2 1
ω t = −100 ( 2) × = − rad / s
2
acceleration will be ( rα ) + ( rω ) . On
1/2
2 2 4000 20
Thus the table rotates clockwise (opposite to man)
moving from centre to periphery acceleration with angular velocity 0.05 rad/s.
(When ω is varying) will increses 42. If the man completes one revolution relative to the
COMPHRENSION TYPE QUESTIONS table then θ mt = 2π;2π = θm − θ t
38 to40
2π = ω m t − ω t t (where t is the time taken)
38. Just before the string becomes taut, the block falls
freely, so v 0 = 2gh. There is no tension in the t = 2π / (ω m − ω t ) = 2π ( 0.5 + 0.05)
string, so nothing causes the cylinder to spin, so Angular displacement of table is
ω 0 = 0. 2π
θ t = ω t t = −5.05 × ( 2π / 0.55) = − radian
39. When the string experiences a jerk, the large 11
impulse developed is of very short duration so that 43. If the man completes one revolution relative to the
the contribution of weight mg can be neglected earth, then θ m = 2π
during this time interval.
The angular momentum of the system is conserved, 2π 2π
as the tension is internal force for the system. Thus time = ω = 0.5
r r m
we have Li = Lf During this time, angular displacement on the table,
1 2π
mv1R + MR 2 ω1 = mv0 R = m 2ghR
2 θ t = ω t ( time ) = −0.05 × ,
0.5
The string is inextensible, so v1 = Rω1 . On solving π
θ t = − radian , θ t = 36° in clockwise direction
2gh 5
for ω1 we get ω1 = R 1 + ( M / 2m) 44 to 45
A angular momentum of system of rod and insect,
2gh just after collision = intial angular momentum of
v1 = Rω1 =
1 + ( M / 2m) insect about o
The final kinetic energy K1 is given by ML2 L
2
L
∴ + M ω = Mυ
11 2 v1
2
1 1 1 4
K1 = mv12 + Iω12 = mv1 + MR 2 12 4
2
2 2 2 2 2 R
ω
1 M 2 1 mv02
= m + v1 =
2 2 2 1 + ( M / 2m) 0 θ
12V
ω=
K0 1 x B
= Q K o = mvo2 7L
1 + ( M / 2m)
,
2 Mg
NARAYANAGROUP 99
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Let the insect fall on the rod at time t = 0, then at MR 2
49-51: f R = α ; f = 5 N ; M = 1kg ;
time t, inclination of rod with horizontal, θ = ωt 2
∴ Angular momentum f
Rα = 10 m / s 2 ; a1 = = 5m / s 2 ; a2 = 5m / s 2 ;
ML 2
M
L = Iω = + Mx 2 ω For acontact = a1 ; vcontact = ( a1 + Rα ) t = 15t .... (1)
12
Torque produced by weight of insect , a1 α
τ = Mg x cos θ = Mgx.cos ωt
d a2 f
τ= L ; F= µ N ∴µ = 0.2 f
dt
46-48 :First we apply conservation of momentum on For plank vcontact = 20 − 5t ......... ( 2 )
m1 and m2 : m1 v0 = m1v1 + m2 v2
From eqns. (1) and ( 2 ) , we get
v0 = v1 + v2 .............. (1) As m1 = m2
t = 1 sec
Where v1 and v2 are veolcities of m1 and m2 Till the cylinder sllips on plank
immediately after impact.
From definition of coefficient of restitution, 1 1
Srel = urel + are1t 2 , = 20 ×1− ×10 ×12 = 15m
1 v −v 2 2
e= = − 2 1 or v0 = 2 ( v2 − v1 ) ........ ( 2 ) Velocity of plank when pure rolling begins
2 0 − v0
v = 20 - 5t = 15m/s
On sovling eqns. (1) and ( 2 ) ,
Velocity of cylinder = a1t = 5m / s
v0 3v When pure rolling begins, friction force vanishes,
we get v1 = and v2 = 0
4 4 velocity of plank and cylinder is constant. After pure
The spring has maximum extension when angular
rolling beings.
velocity w of m2 and m3 about O is same. Now we
→ v2 →
apply conservation of angular momentum. a AC = → →
51-54: 5R ; a BA = a BG − a AG ;
3 3 v0
m v0 2R = mR 2ω + m ( 2 R ) ω o r ω
2
= ;
4 2 5 R D
3
Velocity of m2 = 2 Rω = v0
5 v aAG
A
3
Velocity of m3 = Rω = v0 B
10
m2 4R
2R
aBA
C
v2
v3 = 0
m3 → →
v2 v 2 v 2 4v 2
R a BA = ; a BG = − = ; similarly
R R 5R R
O → v 2 v 2 6v 2
a DG = − =
In order to determine maximum extension in the R 5R 5R
spring, we apply law of conservation of energy. 55-56: From constraint condition
1 3 1 2 3 v0 1 23 v 1
m v0 = mR + m ( 2R ) 0 + k ∆xmax
2
L
2 4 2 2 5R 2 2 5R 2 α sin 30
; 0 −a = 0
2
L mL
2
L
3 m a = α.........(1) ; mg− N =ma...(2) ; N sin300 = ...........( 3)
On solving for ∆x , we get ∆x 2
max = v0 . 4 2 12
4 5R
100 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
Let a be the angular acceleration of rod about hinge
ω=0 and a be the acceleration of block just after the
L system is released from rest.
α
2 30° α The free body diagram of rod, pulley and block
are shown in figure. In free body diagram of rod,
a acceleration of cm the force exerted by hinge on rod is not shown.
L
For rod, mg × cos 37 0 − T × L cos 37 0
c 2
From eqns (1), )2) and (3) mL2
12 g 3g 4 mg = − Ia I =
we get α = 7l ; a = 7 ; N = 7 3
Acceleration of lower end of rod is For block, 2mg − T = 2ma
( ) ( ) ( )
→
ax =
L L 12 g
α cos 300 −iˆ = × ×
3 ˆ 3 3g ˆ
−i = −i 4 La
From constraint, a = La cos37 =
0
2 2 7l 2 7
5
57-59
Solving above equations, we get
v1
72 g 90 g 98mg
a= ,a = ,T =
11l0 121 121L 121
v0 10 Reaction force exerted by H 2 on pulley
O 438
l0 is, N1 = 2T + 2mg = mg
121
Angular momentum of disc about fixed end is Now draw the complete free body diagram of rod
conserved, as the spring force passes through O as follows
11l 10? Lα T
m?0l0 = m?1 0 ; ?1 = 10 m / s = 0 2
T cos37°
T sin37°
10 11
From conservation of energy we get mg sin37°
2
1 1 1 l R1
mV02 = mV12 + K 2 0
2 2 2 10 R2 mg mg cos37°
⇒ K 2 = 210 N / m mL
⇒ R1 + T cos37 − mg cos 37 =
0 0
59- 62 a
2
N1
⇒ R2 + T sin 37 0 = mg sin 37 0
Net reaction force on rod due to hinge is,
T
F = R12 + R22
T T
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
α 2mg 63. At the time of pure rolling,friction = 0and work by
mg
friction is zero.
Due to downward reletive motion the direction
friction is upwards.
a
Due to downward reletive motion, friction is
upwards.
2mg
There are two cases possible,q and r
NARAYANAGROUP 101
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
64. There are possibilities of p,q,r that dependence on
lω
V + 2 − v
relative velocity of contact point. The velocity of
COM is always parallel to the motion of rolling a =1 = − lω
body. 0 − v0 ⇒ V + 2 − v = v0
mg sin θ
f =
mr 2 mg sin θ
65. 1 + ; For = lw
2 ⇒ v + v0 = V + .......(4)
I 2
mg sin θ l l ml
2
For hollowsphere f =
2.5 Also mv0 = mv + ω
2 2 12
mg sin θ
For solid cylider f = lω
3 ⇒ v0 = v + .......(5)
6
mg sin θ
For solid sphere f = lω
3.5 From (3) and (5) we get v =
θ
6
66. V p = 2V sin 2
lω ......... (6)
2
67. Angular velocity is constant,tangential acceleration So, from (4), we get v + v0 =
3
is zero.But radial acceleration does not zero.
12v0
68. (a) at point P ,tangential velocity changes with time. Solving (5) and (6), we get ω =
At the point contact of pure rolling frictional is 5l
zero.So acceleration is towards centre. v0 V
F F
69. A → As there is no friction between pulley and
rope and pulley so T1 = T2 and torque on pulley ω
V
so angular acceleration is 0.
B → Since there is friction so acceleration of pulley
is non - zero. So, by torque equation
just before During Just after
T1 − T2 = Iα impact impact impact
But as I = 0 ⇒ T1 = T2 3v0 2v
C → Since pulley is light, no friction between rope So, we get v = ,V = 0
5 5
and pulley so T1 = T2 and torque on pulley is 0 1 2
mv
and α = 0 . ⇒
Final KE of ball 2
= =
9
Initial KE of ball 1 mv 2 25
D → Friction is there between pulley and rope 0
2
and moment of inertia of pulley is not negligible.
So, pulley has angular acceleration and by equation Im pulse Delivered to rod 2
⇒ =
T1 − T2 = Iα ⇒ T1 ≠ T2 Initial Momentum of ball (mv0 ) 5
This condition is valid only when M 1 ≠ M 2 ml 2
( L1 )rod Iω
( L1 )rod 12
ω
= 2
If M 1 = M 2 then T1 = T2 = mg and α = 0 ( L1 )ball about CM l ⇒ L = =
mv0 ( 1 )ball mv l 5
0
70. mv − mv0 = − ∫ Fdt = − J ......(1) 2 2
mV = J .......(2)
ml2
mv0 = mv + mV ω
( K rod )rotation 12
⇒ = =3
⇒ v0 = v + V ........(3) ( K rod )translation mv 2
102 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
71. At angle θ
τ TL cos 300 3 3T
1 2 l 3g α= = =
I ω = mg (1 − cos θ) ω2 = (1 − cos θ)
or, m ( 2L )
2
2 2 l I 2ml
…(i) 12
Differentiating w.r.t. q, now just after the string breaks acceleration of point
l A in vertical directon should be zero solving above
mg sin θ
α= 2 3 g sin θ equations we get
m l2 = … (ii)
2 l
3 4 6 3g
T= mg and α =
l 2 3g l 3 13 13 L
an = ω = (1 − cos θ) and at = α = g sin θ 74. The equation of motion for the centre of the sphere
2 2 2 4
f = ma x = m (at cos θ − a n sin θ) at the moment of breaking off, N = 0 is
3 3 g sin θ mv 2
= m g sin θ cos θ − (1 − cos θ) = mg cos θ
4 2 R+r
3 3 where v is the speed of the centre of the sphere at
= mg sin θ cos θ − 1
2 2 that moment and θ is the coresponding angle. The
speed v can be found by using the Law of
C x
conservation of energy,
an θ
at y
r
Further, m g − N = ma y or,, h
N = m ( g − at )
N = m [ g − (at sin θ + an cos θ)]
θ
3 3 g cos θ R
= m g − g sin 2 − (1 − cos θ) θ
4 2
mg mg
= [4 − 3 sin 2 θ − 6 cos θ + 6 cos2 θ]
4
mg
= (1 − 3cos θ) 2 .
4
The rod does not slip until N =0
1
θ = cos−1 .
mv 2 Iω 2
i.e., According to which mgh = +
3 2 2
2
2M Lω 2 2
72. 1.75Mg = Mg + (i) where I = mr , v = rω and
L 2 5
L 1 ML2 2 h = ( R + r )(1 − cos θ )
Mg (1 − cos θ ) = ω (ii) From the equations we get
2 2 3
Solving (i) and (ii) we get θ = 60º 10 g ( R + r )
ω=
17r 2
ax = 0
⇒ ω = 40rads −1 .
73. ∑F x =0 ; a = ∑ Fy = mg − T
y
m m
NARAYANAGROUP 103
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
LEVEL-VI k
c
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS m
1. The point P of a string is pulled up with an Q
acceleration g. then the acceleration of the Q Q
hanging disc (w.r.t ground) over which the
string is wrapped, is (a) τ C ≠ 0 for ct < t0 (b) f = 0 for t < t0
ma
P (c) x = , where x = deformation of the spring
2g g k
(a) ↓ (b) ↑
3 3 1
(d) ( KE )max = ma2t02 , where ( KE )max is the maximum
2
m KE of the rolling body
4g g
(c) ↓ (d) ↓
3 3 5. A linear impulse ∫ Fdt acts at a point C of the
2. A sphere of mass m1 is placed on a plank of smooth rod AB . The value of x is so that the
end A remains stationary just after the impact
mass m2 . The coeffcient of friction between is :
the plank and sphere is µ . If the inclined plane A
is smooth, the frictional force between the
plank and sphere : l l
(a) (b)
4 3
O
m1 µ x
m2 C
µ=0 l l
Fdt (c) (d)
6 5
θ B
6. Two light vertical springs with equal natural
(a) depends on m1 (b) depends on m2
lengths and spring constants k1 and k2 are
(c) 0 (d) = µ m1 g cos θ sparated by a distance l . Their upper ends
3. Four beads each of mass m are glued at the are fixed to the ceiling and their lower ends to
top, bottom and the ends of the horizontal the ends A and B of a light horizontal rod AB.
diameter of a ring of mass m . If the ring rolls A vertical downwards force F is applied at point
without sliding with the velocity v of its , the C on the rod. AB will remain horizontal in
kinetic energy of the system (beads +ring) is: equilibrium if the distance AC is :
m
m m
k1 k2
(a) 5mv 2 (b) 4mv 2 (c) 2mv 2 (d) mv 2
4. A rolling body is connected with a trolley car x
A C B
by a spring of stiffness k . It does not slide
and remains in equilibrium relative to the
accelerating trolley car. If the trolly car is
l lk1 lk 2 lk2
stopped after a time t = t0 :( the rolling body (a) (b) k + k (c) k (d) k + k
2 1 2 1 1 2
touches the trolly)
104 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
7. Let I be the moment of inertia of a uniform 11. A ring of mass M and radius R lies in x-y
square plate about an axis AB that passes plane with its centre at origin as shown. The
through its centre and is parallel to two of its mass distribution of rings is non-uniform such
sides. CD is a line in the plane of the plate that at any point P on the ring, the mass per
that passes through the centre of the plate and unit length is given by λ = λ0 cos 2 θ ( where
makes an angle θ with AB. Then the moment
of inertia of the plate about the axis CD is equal λ0 is a positive constant). Then the moment
to : of inertia of the ring about z- axis is
(a) I (b) I sin 2 θ (c) I cos 2 θ (d) I cos2 (θ / 2 ) y
8. Two point masses A of mass M and B of mass 1
M (a) MR 2 (b) MR 2
4M are fixed at the ends of a rod of length l R P 2
θ x
and of negligible mass. The rod is set rotation
about an axis perpendicular to its length with MR MR
(c) 2λ (d) 5λ
a uniform anguular speed. The work required
for rotating the rod will be minimum when the 12. As shown in figure, the hinges A and B hold a
distance of axis of rotation from the mass A is uniform 400 N door in place. the upper hinge
at supports the entire weight of the door. find the
2 8 4 l resultant force exerted on the door at the
(a) l (b) l (c) l (d)
5 5 5 5 h
9. A spool of mass M and internal and external hinges . the width of the door is, where h is
radii R and 2R hanging from a rope touches a 2
curved surface, as shown. A block of mass m the distance between the hinges.
plaed on a rough surface inclined at an angle
α with horizontal is attached with other end of y
the rope. The pulley is massless and system
is in equilibrium. Find the coefficient of friction M
3mg + 2 Mg A
m (a) 3mg − 2 Mg
3mg sin α + 2 Mg cos α
α (b) 3mg cos α − 2Mg sin α 400N
B
3mg cos α + 2 Mg sin α
(c) 3mg sin α − 2Mg cos α
3mg + 2 Mg tan α (a) 312 N (b) 280 N (c) 412 N (d) 480 N
(d) 3mg − 2Mg tan α
13. A thin wire of lenght L is is bent into a circular
10. A ring of mass m and radius R is rolling down wire of uniform linear density ρ . When
on a rough inclined plane of angle θ with circular wire is in a vertical plane find the
horizontal. Plot the angular momentum of the moment of inertia of loop about an axis
ring about the point of contact of ring and the BC,pasing through centre of the loop and
plane as a function of time.
which makes an angle θ with the tangent at
1) L 2) L
the topmost point of the loop
B
A
a) b) θ θ
t t
3) L 4) L
c) d) ρ L3 ρ L3 ρ L3 ρ L3
a) b) c) d)
t t 8π 2 2 2π 2 4π 2 3π 2
NARAYANAGROUP 105
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
14. A box of mass 1 kg is mounted with two 17. A uniform rod AB of length three times the
cylinders each of mass 1kg, moment of radius of a hemisphered bowl remains in
inertia0.5kg m 2 and radius 1m as shown in equilibrium in the bowl as shown. Neglecting
figure, Cylinders are mounted on their control friction find the inclination of the rod with the
axis of rotation and this system is placed on a horizontal.
rough horizontal surface, the rear cylinder is r B
C
connected to battery operated motor which θ
provides a torque of 100n-m to this vcylinder 3r
via a belt as shown. if sufficient friction is A
present between cylinder and horizontal
surface for pure rolling, find acceleration of (a) sin −1 (0.92) (b) cos−1 (0.92)
m (c) cos −1 (0.49) (d) tan −1 (0.92)
the vehicle in . ( Neglect mass of motor,, 18. A particle of mass m is released from rest at
s2
belt and other accessories of vehicle). point A in the figure falling freely under gravity
parallel to the vertical Y-axis. the magnitude
Electric meter of angular momentum of particle about point
O when it reaches B is
m ( whereOA=b and AB=h)
O b
A
m m m m θ
(a) 202 (b) 10 2 (c) 25 2 (d) 30 2
s s s s
h
15. Two identical rings Aand Bare acted upon by
torques τ A and τ B respectively.A is rotating
about an axis passing through the centre of Y B
mass and perpendicular to the plane of the
ring. B is rotating about a chord at a mh
(a) (b) mb 2 gh (c) mb 3 gh (d) 2mb gh
1 bg
distance times the radius from the centre 19. The end B of the rod AB which makes an angle
2
of the ring. if the angular acceleration of the θ with the floor is being pulled with a constant
rings is the same, then velocity V0 as shown in the figure. The length
(a) τ A = τ B (b) τ A > τ B (c) τ A < τ B of the rod is l . At the instant when θ = 370
(d) Nothing can be said about τ A and τ B as data Y
are insufficient
16. A uniform plank of weight W and total length
2L is placed as shown in figure with its ends in A l
contact with the inclined planes. the angle.of
θ V0
friction is 150 . determine the maximum value X
O B
of the angle a at which slipping impends.
W 2
L
(a) Velocity of end A is V0 downwards
3
L
α 5 V0
(b) angular velocity of rod is
3 l
60°
45° (c) angular velocity of rod is constant
(a) 18.10 (b) 48.40 (c) 36.2 0 (d) 88.80 (d) velocity of end A is constant
106 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
20. A block having equilateral triangular cross- 23. A uniform rod oflength l is released from the
section of side a and mass m is placed on a position shown in the figure. The acceleration
rough inclined surface, so that it remains in due to gravity is g . There is no friction at any
equilibrium as shown in figure. The torque of surfae. Find the intial angular acceleration of
normal force acting on the block about its the rod.
centre of mass is
60° 30°
θ 3 3g 5 3g 3 3g 5 3g
(a) (b) (c) (d)
10l 7l 11l 19l
1
(b) 2 3 mga sin θ
3 24. Consider an arrangement shown in the figure.
(a) mga sin θ
2 The pulley P is frictionless and the threads are
massless. The mass of the spools is m and
1
(c) 2 3 mga cos θ (d) Zero 1
moment of inertia of the spool is mR 2 . The
2
21. A thin horizontal uniform rod AB of mass m mass of the disc of radius R is also m. The
and and length l can rotate freely about a surface below the spool is rough to ensure
vertical axis passing thorough its end A. At a pure rolling of spool. The mass of the block is
certian moment the end B starts experiencing m and the surface below the block is smooth.
a constant force F which is always Find the initial acceleration of the block when
perpendicular to the original position of the the system is released from rest.
stationary rod and directed in a horizontal
plane. The angular velocity counted relative P R
R/2
Spool
to the intial position is B
m
6F 6F
(a) sin φ (b) cos φ R
ml ml Disc Rough Smooth
8F 8F
(c) sin φ (d) cos φ
ml ml 4 2 8 10
22. Ablock of mass m moves on a horizontal circle (a) g (b) g (c) g (d) g
37 37 37 37
against the wall of a cylindrical room of radius 25. Find the moment of inertia of a hemisphere of
R. The floor of the room, on which the block mass M and radius R shown in the figure,
moves, is smooth but the friction coefficient
about an axis AA' tangential to the
between the wall and the block is µ . The block
hemisphere.
is given an initial speed V0 . The power A
developed by the resultant force acting on the 9
(a) I =
2
mR
block as a function of distance travelled s is R 20
M
µ m 03
−3 s
µmV03 −3Rµs 13
(b) I =
2
(a) e µ
(b) − e mR
R R A' 20
µ m V 03 µ mV03 −3Rµs 7 3
(c) I = (d) I =
2 2
(c) (d) e mR mR
R R 20 20
NARAYANAGROUP 107
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS (a) The rod is in translational and rotational
26. A wheel rolls purely between a rough horizontal equilibrium.
surface below it and a horizontal plank above (b) The rod is in rotational equilibrium only.
it under the action of a horizontal force F (c) The magnitude of the froce exerted by the rod
uur uur on the pivot is 503N
applied on the plank. If at any time v p and vc
(d) The rod is in rotational equilibrium about P only
represent velocity of plank and velocity of 29. A light rod of length 4 m can be maintained in
centre of mass of wheel and
uur uur equilibrium position as shown in the figure if
a p and ac represent acceleration of plank we apply single force on it.
and acceleration of centre of mass of wheel Y
repectively then which of the following is/are
4m
correct.
X
F Vp
37°
2kg
Vc
uur uur uur uur
(a) v p = 2 vc (b) a p = 2 ac 5kg
uur uur uur uur
(c) v p = vb (d) a p = ac The required force
(a) would have magnitude of 77
27. A small block of mass m is released from rest (b) Would have a line of action making an angle of
from position A inside a smooth hemispherical
bowl of radius R as shown in figure. Choose tan −1 (17 / 9 ) with negative x- axis
the wrong option(s) 48
(c) would be appiled at a distance of m from
17
A R the right end
(d) the rod cannot be maintained in equilibrium
under the action of a single force.
30. Two particles of masses m1 and m2 aree
B connected with a rigid rod of length l . If a force
(a) Acceleration to block is constant throughout F acts perpendicular to the rod then (a1 & a2
(b) Acceleration of block is g at A are instantaneous acceleration of m 1 & m2)
(c) Acceleration of block is 3g at B
m1 m2
(d) Acceleration of block is 2g at A
28. Consider a uniform rod of mass 40 kg and
length 8m, pivoted about a point P 3m from
one end as shown in the figure. Few external
forces are acting on the rod as shown in figure.
3m 5m
200 N 50 N F
∆ F
P (a) a2 = 0 (b) a1 = m
1
100 N 20 N
mark out the correct statement (s). F F ( m1 + m2 )
(c) aCM = m + m (d) α = m1 m2 l
Take g = m / s 2 1 2
108 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
31. A uniform solid sphere of mass m is placed on D P
a sheet of paper on a horizontal surface. The
coefficient of friction between paper and
sphere is µ . If the paper is pulled horizontally
with an acceleration
B
S
C (a) The acceleration of the block B is double the
acceleration of the centre of D
P (b) The force of friction exerted by D on S acts to
a
the left
(c) The horizontal and the vertical sections of the
(a) the tension in the string is equal to mg sin θ string has the same tension
mg sin θ (d) The sum of the kinetic energies of D and B is
(b) force acting on the cylinder is less than the loss in the potential energy of B as it
2
moves down
mg sin θ
(c) tension in the string is equal to 35. A triangular block ABC of mass m and side 2a
2
lies on a smooth horizontal plane is shown.
(d) frictional force acting on the cylinder is zero
32. A rigid body is in pure rotation, that is, There point masses of mass m each strikes
undergoing fixed axis rotation. Then which of the block at A, B and C with speed as shown.
the following statement(s) are true After the collision the particle come to rest.
(a) You can find two points in the body in a plane Then:
perpendicular to the axis of rotation
having same velocity Y
A
(b) You can find two points in the body in a plane m
v
perpendicular to the axis of rotation having same
60° X
acceleration
(c) Speed of all the particles lying on the curved
surface of a cylinder whose axis coincides with the m
axis of rotation is same
(d) Angular speed of the body is same as seen
v
from any point in the body 60° 60°
33. A rough disc of mas m rotates freely with an B v C
angular velocity ω . If another rough disc of
m m
mass and same radius but spinning in
2
opposite sense with angular speed ω is kept (a) the centre of mass of ∆ABC remains
on the first disc. Then: stationary after collision
(a) the final angular speed of the dise is ω3 (b) the centre of mass of ∆ABC moves with a
(b) the net work done by friction is zero velocity v along x- axis after collision
(c) the friction does a positive work on the lighter (c) the triangular block rotates with an angular
disc 2 3mva
velocity ω = about its centriod axis
−mR ω2 2 I
(d) the net work done by friction is perpendicular to its plane
3
34. In the figure, the disc D does not slip on the 1
(d) a point lying at a distance of from
surface S, the pulley P has mass and the string 2 3ma
does not slip on it. The string is wound around centroid G on perpendicular bisector of BC is at
the disc. rest just after collision
NARAYANAGROUP 109
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
36. A rod leans against a stationary cylindrical 7 11ρ0 Al 3
body as shwon in figure, and its right end slides (c) KE = mgl (d) I =
to the right on the floor with a constant speed 39 36
v. Choose the correct option(s) 39. The torque τ on a body about a given point is
α found to be equal to A x L where A is a constant
ω vector, and L is the angular momentum of the
R body about that point. From this it follows that
R θ
dL
X (a) is perpendicular to L at all instants of time
dt
− Rv 2 ( 2 x 2 − R 2 ) (b) the component of L in the direction of A does
(a) the angular speed ω is
x2 ( x2 − R2 )
3/2 not change with time
(c) the magnitude of L does not change with time
Rv (d) L does not change with time
(b) the angular acceleration α is 40. Consider a sphere of mass ‘m’ radius ‘R’ doing
x x2 − R2
pure rolling motion on a rough surface having
Rv r
(c) the angular speed ω is velocity v 0 as shown in the Figure. It makes
x x2 − R2 an elastic impact with the smooth wall and
− Rv 2 ( 2 x 2 − R 2 ) moves back and starts pure rolling after some
(d) the angular acceleration α is x2 ( x2 − R2 )
3/2 time again.
37. The uniform 120 N board shown in figure is
supported by two ropes. A 400 N weight is
suspended one-fourth of the way from the left
end. Choose the correct options
θ 30° T V0
T2 3
0.25L 0.75L O
400N (a) Change in angular momentum about ‘O’ in the
(a) T1 = 185 N (b) T2 = 371N entirem otion equals2m v0R in magnitude.
(b) Moment of impulse provided by the wall during
(c) T2 = 185 N (d) tan θ = 0.257 impact about O equals 2mv0R in magnitude.
38. The KE and moment of inertia about the given
end point of a rod of mass m and length l and 3r
(c) Final velocity of ball will be v 0
cross sectional area A which is rotating with 7
g 3r
ω= as shown in the Fig. will be [ density (d) Final velocity of ball will be – v 0
l 7
41. If a cylinder is rolling down a rough inclined
x
of the rod varies as ρ = ρ 0 1 + , x is the with initial sliding.
l (a) after some time it may start pure rolling
distance measured from O) ] (b) after sometime it must start pure rolling
(c) it may be possible that it will never start pure
g
ω= rolling
l (d) cannot conclude anything
42. Which of the following statements are correct.
O
(a) friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on
an inclined surface is always upward along the
incline irrespective of any external force acting on
7 7 ρ0 Al 3 it.
(a) KE = mgl (b) I = (b) friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on
36 36
110 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
an inclined surface is may be upward may be
2gr0 gr0 gr0 4gr0
downwards depending on the external force acting (a) (b) (c) (d) .
on it. tan α 2 tan α tan α tan α
(c) friction acting on a cylinder rolling without sliding Passage - II : (46-48)
may be zero depending on the external force acting A rod AB of mass 3m and length 4a is falling freely
on it. in a horizontal position and c is a point distant a
(d) nothing can be said exactly about it as it depends from A. When the speed of the rod is u, the point c
on the friction coefficient on inclined plane. collides with a particle of mass m which is moving
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS vertically upwards with speed u. If the impact
Passage - I : (43-45) between the particle and the rod is perfectly elastic
A small particle of mass m is given an initial velocity find
v0 tangent to the horizontal rim of a smooth cone at C G
a radius r0 from the vertical centerline as shown at A B
point A. As the particle slides to point B, a vertical u l
distance h below A and a distance r from the vertical 2
centerline, its velocity v makes an angle θ with the
horizontal tangent to the cone through B. 3mg
43. The value of θ is 46. The velocity of the particle immediately after
the impact
r0
29 19
D A (a) u down (b) u down
19 29
h
α 29 27
(c) u,up (d) u down
B 19 19
r 47. The angular velocity of the rod immediately
after the impact
α
19u 12u 29u 19u
(a) (b) (c) (d)
12a 19a 19a 29a
48. The speed of B immediately after the impact
v0 r0
cos −1 is
(a) (r0 − h tan α ) v20 + 2gh
19 19
(a) u down (b) u up
−1 0 0 vr 27 27
(b) cos ( r + h tan α ) v 2 + 2 gh
0 0
v0 r0 27 27
cos −1 (c) u down (d) u up
(c) ( r0 − h tan α ) v02 − 2 gh 19 19
Passage - III : (49-50)
v0 r0 An uniform rod of mass m=30kg and length
cos −1
(d) r0 v02 + 2gh l=0.80m is free to rotate about a horizontal axis O
passing through its centre. A particle P of mass
44. The speed of particle at point B M=11.2kg falls vertically through a height
(a) v 20 + 2gh (b) v 20 − 2gh 36
h= m and collides elastically with the rod at a
245
(c) v 20 + gh (d) 2v02 + 2gh
l
45. The minimum value of v0 for which particle will distance from O. At the instant of collision the
be moving in a horizontal circle of radius r0. 4
NARAYANAGROUP 111
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
rod was stationary and was at an angle α = 37 0 K 2K 2K 4K
with horizontal as shown in figure (a) (b) (c) (d)
M M 3M 3M
53. The maximum value of V0 for which the disc
h
will roll without slipping.
37° M M
l 0 (a) µ g (b) µ g
2
K 2K
l
3M 5M
4
l (c) µ g (d) µ g
4
K 2K
Passage - V : (54-56)
49. Calculate angular velocity of the rod just after
A wheel of radius R, mass m with an axle of radius
collision is
(a) 1 rad/s (b) 3 rad/s (c) 2 rad/s (d) 4 rad/s r is placed on a horizontal surface. Its moment of
50. Velocity of particle P after collision is inertia is I = mR 2 .Unwinding a rope from its axel
( g = 10ms −2 ) a force F is applied to pull it along a horizontal
surface. The friction is sufficient enough for its pure
7 −1 9 −1
(a)
9
ms (b) 7ms −1 (c) ms (d) 1ms −1
7 rolling ( ∠θ = 00 )
Passage - IV : (51-53)
wheel F
A uniform thin cylinder M and radius R is attached
to two identical massless springs of spring constant
K, which are fixed to the wall, as shown. The spring θ
are attached to the axle of the disc symmetrically
on either side at distance d from its centre. The R
r
axle is massless and both the springs and the axle Axle
are in horizontal plane. The unstretched length of
each spring is L. The disc is initially at its equilibrium
position with its centre of mass (CM) at a distance
L from the wall. The disc rolls without slipping with
ur 54. Find the linear acceleration of the wheel
velocity V 0 = V0iˆ . The coefficient of friction is µ
F ( I / m ) − Rr 2 F ( I / m ) − Rr
( ) ( I / m ) + r 2
(a) I / m + r 2 (b)
F ( 2 I / m ) − 2 Rr
(
F I 2 / m − Rr )
(c) ( I / m ) + r
(d)
( I / m ) + r
2 2
d
Y 2d V0
R 55. Find the condition for which frictional force acts
in backward direction
X
(a) ( I / m ) > Rr (b) ( 2 I / m ) > Rr
L
51. The net external force acting on the disc when I 2 I
its CM is at displacement x with respect to (c) m > Rr (d) > Rr
its equilibrium position is m 2
2 Kx 4 Kx 56. Find the condition for which frictional force acts
(a) − Kx (b) −2Kx (c) − (d) − in forward direction
3 3
52. The centre of mass of the disc undergoes SHM (a) ( I / m ) < Rr (b) ( 2 I / m ) < Rr
with angular velocity ω , equal to
112 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
I 2 I 4 15 R 6R
(c) m < Rr (d) < Rr (a) (b) 4
m 2 3 8a 4a
6R 3 15 R
Passage - VI : (57-59) (c) 3 (d)
Consider a cylinder of mass M = 1kg and radius 7a 4 8a
R=1 m lying on a rough horizontal plane. It has a 61. The angular velocity of disc is
plank lying on its stop as shown in the figure. 1 7a 8a 4 7a 16 8a
(a) × (b) (c) × (d) ×
m = 1kg
3 6R 15R 9 6R 9 15R
60°
62. The revolution made by disc in time interval
A computed in Q.No. (i) is
M
6 5p 2
R (a) 8 (b) (c) (d)
5p 6 3p
B Passage - VIII :(63-65)
A disc of a mass M and radius R can rotate freely
A force F = 55 N is applied on the plank such that in vertical plane about a horizontal axis at O. distant
the plank moves and causes the cylinder to roll. r from the centre of disc as shown in the figure.
The plank always remains horizontal. There is no The disc is relased from rest in the shown position.
slipping at any point of contact.
57. The acceleration of cylinder is M,R
(a) 20 m/s2 (b) 10 m/s2 (c) 5 m/s2 (d) 12 m/s²
58. The value of frictional force at A is
(a) 7.5 N (b) 5.0 N (c) 2.5 N (d) 1.5 N 0 C
59. The value of frictional force at B is
(a) 7.5 N (b) 5.0 N (c) 2.5 N (d) 1.5 N
63. The angular acceleration of disc when OC
Passage - VII :(60-62)
A cabin is falling freely and inside thecabin a disc rotates by an angle of 370 , is
of mass M and radius R is made to undergo
8rg 5rg
uniform pure rolling motion with the help of some
(a) 5 R 2 + 2r 2 (b) 4 R 2 + 2r 2
external agent. Inside the cabin wind is blowing in
horizontal direction which imparts an acceleration
a to all the objects present in cabin in horizontal 10rg 8rg
direction. [Disc still performs uniform pure rolling (c) 3 R 2 + 2r 2 (d)
motion]. A very small particle gets separated from
5R 2
disc from point P and after some time it passes 64. The angular velocity of disc in above described
through the centre of disc O. Based on above case is
information, answer the following questions: 8 gr 6 gr
(a) 5 R 2 + 2r 2 (b) 5 R 2 + 2r 2
12 gr 12 gr
0 g
(c) 5 R 2 + 2r 2 (d)
5R 2
37° 65. Reaction force exerted by hinge on disc at this
P
instant is
60. The time taken by particle to reah from
Mg
(a) 5 ( R + 2r 2 ) × g ( R 2 + 6r 2 ) + ( 4 R 2 )
P to O is 2 2
2
NARAYANAGROUP 113
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
applied on cylinder at different positions with
(b) 5 ( R + 2 r 2 ) × 3 ( R + 6r )
Mg 2 2
2 respect to its centre O in each of four
situations of column-1, due to which magnitude
4Mg Mg of acceleration of centre of mass of cylinder
(c) 5 ( R + 2r )
2 2
× R 2
(d) 5 ( R + 2r 2 ) ×
2
4R2 is ‘a’ Match the appropriate results in column-
II for conditions of columnI
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS Column-I
F F
66. A rod of length L and weight w is kept in
equilibrium on the two support separated by R R/2
O O
L (a) (b)
as shown in the figure. The right support is
2
taken out at time t = 0.
Match the following questions based on the
above information F O
O
(c) (d) R/2
w,L F
Column-II
(p) Friction force on cylinder will not zero
L F F
2 q) a = r) a ≠
m m
s) friction force acting on cylinder is zero
68. Column I Column II
(Object) (Moment of inertia)
Column I Column II 8MR 2
(a) Uniform rod p)
(a) The moment (p) 3g/7 11
of inertia of the rod
M
about the support point at t = 0 is
12 g
(b) The angular (q) 30°
7L
l=R
acceleration of rod about
the support point at t = 0 is
4ω
(c) The linear (r)
7 MR 2
acceleration of centre (b) Uniform semicircular ring. q)
12
of mass of rod at t = 0 is
Axis is perpendicular
7 ω L2 to plane of ring
(d) The normal (s) 48 g
M
reaction on the rod
ωL2
by the support at t = 0 is (t) 3 g
[π = 22/7]
67. A uniform solid cylinder of mass m and radius
R is placed on a rough horizontal surface 13MR 2
where friction is sufficient to provide pure (c) Uniform triangular r)
8
rolling. A horizontal force of magnitude F is plate of mass M
114 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
R
60° ω0
60°
R v0
R (V0 > Rω0)
(C)
A
2
MR
(d) Uniform disk of initial mass s)
8
m2 α
M from which circular Portion of radius
R is then removed M.I of remaining mass
about axis which is perpendicular to plane
of plate and passing through its centre (D)
m1
F
Column-II
R p) The angular momentum of disc about point A
2R (as shown in figure) remains conserved.
q) The kinetic energy of disc after it starts rolling
without slipping is less than its initial kinetic energy.
r) In the duration disc rolls with slipping, the
69. In each situation of column-I, a uniform disc friction acts on disc towardsleft
of mass m and radius R rolls on a rough fixed s) Before rolling starts acceleration of the disc
horizontal surface as shown. At t=0(initially) remain constant in magnitude and direction.
the angular velocity of disc is ωo and velocity t) Final angular velocity is independent of friction
coefficient between disc and the surface.
of centre of mass of disc is V0 (in horizontal INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
direction). The relation between V0 and ω0 for 70. A plank of mass m1 with a uniform solid sphere
each situation and also initial sense of of mass m2 placed on it rests and a force F is
applied to the plank. The acceleration of the
rotation is given for each situation in column-
plank provided there is no sliding between
I. Then match the statements in column-I with
F
the corresponding results in column-II the plank and the sphere is m1 +
n
m2 then the
7
Column-I
value of n is
ω0
v0
(V0 > Rω0)
(A) 71. A uniform cylinder of radius r is rotating about
A
its axis at the angular velocity ω0 . It is now
placed into a corner as shown in figure. The
ω0 coefficient of friction between the wall and the
cylinder as well as the ground and the cylinder
v0 is µ . The number of turns, the cylinder
(V0 > Rω0)
(B) completes before it stops, are given by
A ω20 r 1 + µ 2
the value of n is
nπg µ(1 + µ)
NARAYANAGROUP 115
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
74. A ball of radius R=20cm has mass m=0.75kg
WALL and moment of inertia (about its diameter)
I = 0.0125 kgm 2 . The ball rolls without sliding
over a rough horizontal floor with velocity
V0 = 10 ms −1 towards a smooth vertical wall. If
coefficient of restitution between the wall and
the ball is e=0.7, velocity V of the ball long
after the collision is ( g = 10 ms −2 )
72. The pulley shown in figure, has a radius 10 cm 75. A uniform square plate of mass ‘m’ is
and moment of inertia 0.5 kg-m2 about its axis. supported as shown. If the cable suddenly
Assuming the inclined planes to be frictionless, breaks, assuming centre of mass is on
1 horizontal ine passing through A determine ;
the acceleration of the 4.0 kg block is that
n
mg
value of n is The reaction at A is that n is
n
2.0kg 4.0kg
B
45° 45°
73. In the arrangement shown in figure, ABC is a A
straight, light and rigid rod of length 90cm. End C
A is pivoted so that the rod can rotate freely
about it, in vertical plane. A pulley, having
b b
internal and external radii R=7.5cm and r=5cm
is fixed to a shaft of radius 5cm. The pulley -
shaft system can rotate about a fixed
horizontal axis O. B is point of contact of the 76. In the figure shown there is a fixed wedge ‘W’
pulley and the rod. From free end C of the rod of inclination θ . A is a block, B is a disc and
a mass m2 = 2kg is suspended by a thread. ‘C’ is a solid cylinder. A, B and C each has
Another thread is wound over the shaft and a mass ‘m’. Assuming there is no sliding
anywhere and string to be of negligible mass
block of mass m1 = 4kg is suspended from it.
find :
If coefficient of friction between the rod and The friction force acting on the cylinder due
the pulley surface is µ = 0.4 and moment of
mg
inertia of pulley-shaft system about axis O is to the wedge is (1 + n sin θ ) that n is
15
I = 0.045 kg − m2 , the acceleration of block
B
m1 , when the system is released
( g = 10 ms −2 ) is
A 60cm B 30cm C
C
A
W
O fixed
r
R θ
77. In the figure shown a uniform ringh of mass
m1 m2
m is placed on arough horizontal fixed surface.
The coefficient of friction between left half of
116 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
ring and table is µ1 whereas between right half m3
and table is µ2 at the moment shown. The ring
48kg , then m is
2
has angular velcoity in clockwise sense in the
figure shown. At this moment find the
magnitude of acceleration ( in m / s2 ) of m4
m3
centre C of ring. [Given g = 10 m / s 2 ] m2 m1
80. An isosceles right triangular plate ABC of
µ1 µ2
mass m is free to rotate in vertical plane about
a fixed horizontal axis through A. It is
supported by a string such that the side AB is
A C horizontal. The reaction at the support A is
p ( mg )
thus p + q = − .
q
78. In the given diagram a sphere of mass m and
radius R is rolling without slipping on a rough A l
inclined surface of inclination ( p / 6 ) . Centre
R l
of mass of sphere is at C which is
3
distiance from centre in a direction parallel to
inclined plane. Moment of a intertia of the
C
sphere about point of contact is I 0 (given). At
81. The densities of two solid spheres A and B of
the given instant sphere is rotating with
the same radii R vary with radial distance r as
constant velcity ? 0 . Calculate the angular
r
5
ρA (r ) = k r
accel eration of sphere at this instant to near and ρB ( r ) = k ,
est integer?
R R
ω0
m, R
respectively, where k is a constant. The
R 3 moments of inertial of the individual spheres
about axes passing through their centres are
R
C
IA n
I A and I B , respectively. If I = 10 , the value
Centre of
No slipping mass
B
30° of the n is
82. A horizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m
[Given that m = 2kg , R = 0.5m and mass 0.45 kg is free to rotate about its
? 02 = 3 in axis. Two massless spring toy-guns, each
g = 10m / s 2 , SI unit and
carrying a steel ball of mass 0.05 kg are
I 0 = 10kg − m 2 ] attached to the platform at a distance 0.25 m
79. Figure shows an arrangement of masses from the centre on its either sides along its
hanging from a ceilling. In equilibrium each diameter (see figure). Each gun
rod is horizontal, has negligible mass and simultaneously fires the balls horizontally and
extends three times as far to the right of the perpendicular to the diameter in opposite
directions. After leaving the platform, the balls
wire supporting is as to the left. If mass m4 is
NARAYANAGROUP 117
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
have horizontal speed of 9 ms −1 with respect MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
to the ground. The rotational speed of the 26. A,B 27. A,C 28. A,C
platform in rads-1 after the balls leave the 29. A,B,C 30. A,B,C 31. B,D
platform is 32. C,D 33. A,D 34. A,B,D
35. B,C 36. C,D 37. A,B,D
38. A,B 39. A,B,C 40. A,B,D
41. A,C 42. B,C
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
43. A 44. A 45. C 46. A 47. B 48. C 49. D
50. C 51. D 52. D 53. C 54. A 55. A 56. A
83. A ring of mass M and radius R is rotating with
angular speed ω about a fixed vertical axis 57. B 58. A 59. C 60. A 61. B 62. D
passing through its centre O with two point 63. A 64. C 65. A
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
M
masses each of mass and rest at O. These 66. A → s ; B → q ; C → p ; D → r
8
masses can move radially outwards along two 67. A → p ; B → q , s ; C → p , r ; D → p , r
maseless rods fixed on the ring as shown in 68. A → q; B → p; C → s; D → r
the figure. At some instant the angular speed 69. A → p, q, r; B → p, q, r; C → p, q; D → p, q, r
8 INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
of the system is ω and one of the masses is 70. 2 71. 8 72. 4 73. 1 74. 2 75. 4 76. 7
9
77. 4 78. 1 79. 4 80. 5 81. 6 82. 4 83. D
3
at a distance of R from O. At this instant LEVEL-VI - HINTS
5
the distance of the other mass from O is SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
(JEE_ADV-15) 1. 2mg-T=ma ; TR = I α
a g
α= ; solving α =
R 3
2. m1 g sin θ = Fpseudo ........(1)
m1 g sin θ − f = m1 g sin θ ⇒ f = 0
1 2
( 2v ) + ( 2v ) + 02 +
2 2
3. m 4v +
O 2
1 2 1 2 1
mv + I ω = m 4v 2 + 4v 2 + mv 2 = 5mv 2
2 2 2
V
2V
2v
V
V
2v
LEVEL-VI - KEY V V
V
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. D 2. C 3. A 4.B 5. C 6. D 7.A 4. f = 0 for t < t0 until it can stop no friction acts
8.C 9.B 10.D 11.A 12.C 13.A 14.A because it neither slides nor rotates due to action
of the rolling
15.A 16.C 17.B 18.B 19.B 20.B 21.A
5. Let J be the impluse acting on the rod
22.B 23.A 24.A 25.B
118 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
1 11. Divide the ring into infinitely small lengths of mass
J = mvcm ; Jx = ml 2ω . Since the end A is dm. Even though mass distribution is non- uniform,
12
each mass dm1 is at same distance R from origin
l J 12 Jx l
stationary VA = Vcm − ω = − 2 = 0 Q MI of ring about z − axis is
2 m ml 2
6. Let x be the distance from the end of spring constant = dm1 R 2 + dm2 R 2 + ......dmn R 2 = MR 2
K1. If y is the elongation of the rod, kasking 12. Only a horizontal force acts at hinge B, because
moments about the point C, hinge A is assumed to support the door,s weight.Let
us take torques about A as axis.
⇒ K1 yx = K 2 y ( L − x )
1 ∑F x =0 or F2 − H = 0
= ml 2 = ICB ( irrespective an angle)
∑F
7. I AB
6 = 0 or V − 400 N = 0
y
1 2 We find from these that
8. W= Iω H = 100 N and V = 400 N
2
Let x is the distance of CM from A →
To find the resultant force R on the hinge at A,
I = Mx 2 + 4 M × 2 ( l − x ) × ( −1) = 2Mx − 8Ml
dI 4
we have R = ( 400 2
+ (100 )
2
) = 412 N
= 10 − 8Ml = 0; x = l
dx 5 13. M = ρ L ; L = 2π R so R = L / 2π
9. Torque about point of contact of the spool will be
1 1
zero I ' XX = MR 2 ; I 'YY = MR 2
2 2
2
T .3R = Mg .2 R or T = Mg I 0 = I Z = I ' XX + I 'YY = MR 2
3
Equating the forces acting on the block along and Y
perpendicular to the incline
N + T sin α = mg cos α
θ 90°
2
or N = mg cos α − Mg sin α X X'
3
Also mg sin α + T cos α = f = µ N
2 2
mg sin α + Mg cos α = µ mg cos α − Mg sin α C
3 3 Y'
N Now I BC + I B ' C ' = I 0 = IZ = MR 2
f
MR 2 1 L2 ρ L3
so I BC = = ( ρ L) 2 = 2
2 2 4π 8π
T α 14. For whole sytem f1 − f 2 = 3 (1) a.... (1)
For rear cylinder 100 − f1 = 0.5 ( a ) .... ( 2 )
mg
For rear cylinder f 2 = 0.5 ( a ) ....( 3 )
3mg sin α + 2Mg cos α
µ=
3mg cos α − 2Mg sin α 100 = 4a; a = 20m / s 2
∆L 15. I B ' ( in new given condition )
10. L = ( mg sin θ ) Rt ; Since, τ = so, L = τ ( ∆t )
∆t 2
The curve between L and time t will be a straight 1 R
= MR 2 + M = MR 2 = I A
line. 2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 119
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
thus τ A = τ B = τ B ' = I α 18. L = 2 gh × mb
16. Appling equilibrium equations,we get 19. This equation is on example of combined rotational
∑X = F A cos 60 + N A sin 60 + FB cos 45 − N B sin 45 = 0 and translational motion, here we are solving this
Also we know htat with the help of instantaneous axis of rotation is
FA = 0.268 N A and FB = 0.268 N B lying at a distance of l sinθ from end B and
Solving above equations we get N A 0.158 N B perpendicular to V0 . Let ω is the angular velocity
of rod. Then.
∑Y = N A cos 60 − FA sin 60 + N B cos 45 +
VA = ω × l cos θ
FB sin 45 = W and V = V = ω × l sin θ
B 0
Solving above equations we get
20. Here, torque due to normal force balances the
N B = 0.966W and F = 0.259W torque due to frictional force which is equal to
Taking moment about A and equating it to zero,
we get 1
mga sinθ .
= (W × L cos α ) − ( N B cos 45 0 × 2 L cos α )
2 3
∑M A
F
+ ( N B cos 450 × 2 L cos α )
− ( FB sin 450 × 2 L sin cos α )
− ( FB cos 450 × 2 L sin sin α ) = 0
21. l
By putting the values of known quantities in above A t=0 B
equation we get α = 36.2 0
F
17. The focrces acting on the rod are:
(i) Weight W of the rod acting veritcally r
downwards from centre of gravity.
(ii) Reaction R at A acting normally at A i.e along
AO λ
(iii) Reaction R1 at C actiong at right angle to rod.
For equilibrium the three forces will be concurrent.
By geometry, θ
∠OCA = ∠OAC = ∠GDA = θ 3F
AC = CD cos θ = 2r cos θ , DC = 2r sin θ lα = Fl cos θ ; α= cos θ
ml
and AG = 1.5r
d ω 3F
In triangle GDC, ω. = cos θ
GC AC − AG sin θ 2r cos θ − 1.5r dθ ml
tan θ = = or =
DC DC cos θ 2r cos θ ω 3F φ 6F
∴ 2 sin 2 θ = 2 cos 2 θ − 1.5 cos θ ∫0
ω . dω =
ml ∫
0
cos θ dθ ; ω =
ml
sin φ
or 1 − cos 2 θ = cos 2 θ − 0.75cos θ 22. f = − ma
or 2 cos 2 θ − 0.75cos θ − 1 = 0
⇒ µ N = − ma
0.75 ± ( 0.75 ) + 4× 2
2
solving it , cos θ = ⇒µ
mV 2
= −m × V
dV
4 R dS
0.75 ± 8.5625 µV − dV
= = 0.92 ( u sin g the + sign ) ⇒ =
4 R dS
∴θ = cos −1 ( 0.92 ) = 23° dV − µ
⇒ = dS
V R
120 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
dV − µ
V S
⇒ ∫V V = R ∫0 dS
T2
0 p R/2 a
a1 R
V −µ
(S)
T1 B
⇒ ln = α1
m
V0 R α2
T2
a2 f
− µS mg
⇒ V = V0 e R
− − − − − (1)
R
Now a = a 1 R −
Now power co n s umed by friction,
P = − f .V 2
= − µ NV a1R
⇒ a= .....(i) ; a1 = a1R ......(ii)
mV 2 2
= −µ V
R a2 = a1 ( 2 R ) + a 2 ( R ) .....(iii)
mV 3 For the block ma = T1 ......(iv)
= −µ − − − − − − − ( 2)
R For the spool ma1 = T2 − T1 − f .......(v)
substitutethe value of V from eq (1) , we get
mR 2
a1 = T2 R + T1R + fR
−3 µ S
−µ m 3 R .....(vi)
P= V0 e 2
R
23. Suppose C is the point through which For the disc ma2 = mg − T2 ........(vii)
theinstantaneous axis of rotation passes and G is
1 2 2
mR a = T2 R
the centre of mass of the rod. From the geometry
......(viii)
of the figure 2
C
4
NB 30° For these equations, we get a = g
30° 37
25. Moment of inertia about an axis through
°
30
s
the flat face of hemisphere
co
l/2 NA
B
G l/2 A
mg I0 IG I
60° 30°
A
CG = l cos30 0
The moment of inertia about C 5
R
8
+ m ( l cos300 ) = ml 2
2
ml 2 5
I= G
12 6 3
R
If a is the angular acceleration, then 8
5 2 l 0 3 3g
ml a = mg cos 30 ⇒ a =
6 2 10l
24. Suppose the acceleration of the block B is a, A'
acceleration of disc is a2 and the acceleration fo
2
centre of mass of spool is a1 , also suppose the I0 = mR 2
angular accelerations of spool and disc are a1 and 5
a 2 respectively.. From the parallel axis theorem, the moment of
inertial through c.m. of the hemisphere
2
3 83
I0 = I0 − m R = mR
2
8 320
NARAYANAGROUP 121
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Using parallel axis theorem, Moment of inertia about vertical components of force exetred by pivot on
the axis AA' , rod, respectively.
Ry
2 R
5 13
I = I G + m R ⇒ I = mR 2 200 N 50 N
8 20
Rx
MUTLIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
26. For pure rolling of wheel wrt horizontal surface 100 N 400 N 20 N
below it RX = 200 − 50 = 150 N
For pure rolling of wheel wrt plank
RY = 400 + 100 − 20 = 480 N
Vp Then ,
R = (105) + ( 480 ) ; 503 N
2 2
Vc +Rω
The rod will exert equal and opposite force on the
ω pivot.
Vc 29. For equilibrium of the rod, let us say force R is
Rω Vc appilied whose X and Y components are
Vc = Rω
RX and RY as shown in figure.
VP = Vc + Rω = 2Vc RX = 36 N , RY = 48 + 20 = 68 N
dv p 2dv c Ry
∴ = ; a p = 2ac R
dt dt X 4-X
27. Acceleration of block is not constantthrought. 36 N
2
Acceleration of block at B is V / R where
Rx 60 N
V = 2 gR .
2
20 N 48N
28. The rod is in translation equilibrium in any case as For rotational equilibrium, x × 20 = 48 ×× ( 4 − x )
it is privoted, now let us check for its rotational 48
equilibrium. ⇒ x= m ; So, R = 362 + 682 ; 77 N .
17
For rotational equilibrium, the net torque acting
about any point must be zero F l
30. acm = ; F × = Iα
m1 + m2 2
3m 1m 4m
l l
200 N 50 N a1 = acm + α ; a2 = acm − α
2 2
∆ 31. ma − f = ma0
p
2mR 2
fR = I α ; I = ; a0 = Rα
100 N 400 N 20 N 5
Let us take the torque about P. 32. All points in the body, in plane perepndicualr to the
axis of rotation, revolve in concentric circles. All
∑τ = 400 ×1 − 20 × 5 −100 × 3 = 0 points lying on the circle of same radius have same
[ Taking clockwise as + ve speed (and also same magnitude of acceleration)
but different directions of velocity (also different
and anticlock wise as − ve ]
direction of acceleration)
So rod is in rotational equilibrium, also. Hence there cannot be two points in teh given plane
If a body is in rotational equilibrium then
with same velocity or with same acceleration. As
∑τ = 0 about any point.
ext mentioned above, points lying on circle of same
The force exterted by a pivot on rod maintains the radius have same speed.
translational equilibrium in horizontal and vertucal Angular speed of body at any instant w.r.t any point
directions. Let Rx and Ry be the horizontal and on the body is same by definition.
122 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
Dividing throughout by L and solving, we get
1 2 1m 2 1 1
33 mr × ω − r × ω = mr 2 + mr 2 ω ' T1 = 185 N
2 2 2 2 4
Substituting into our earlier equations, we get
⇒ω' =ω /3
d) use work energy principle T1 = 185 N
Substituting into our earlier equations, we get
13
w f + wg = ∆ ( KE ) ⇒ mr 2 ω 2 / 9 T2 = sin θ = 92.5 N and T2 = cos θ = 360 N
24 Dividing th equation yields
1 1 tan θ = 0.257, or θ = 14.40
− mr 2ω 2 + mr 2ω 2
4 8 Than 0.249T2 = 92.5 and T2 = 371N
ω r 2 2
One can always check moment problem results by
⇒ w f + 0 = −m taking moments about another point, such as the
3
right end of the bar for this problem
34. According to the given figure VB = 2Vdisc ......(1) l
1
38. I = ∫ 3dmx
2
After taking derivatative aB = 2adisc here b & d
0
are conceptual
35. By law conservation of linear movementum we l
1 x 1
l
x3
= ∫ ρ 0 1 + ( Adx ) x 2 = ρ 0 A ∫ x 2 dx + dx
( )
mviˆ + mvjˆ + mv − ˆj + 0 0
3 l 3 0
l
have ur 1 l 3 1 l 4 7 ρ Al 3
= ρ0 A + × = 0
= p t riangular wedge + 0
3 3 l 4 36
ur r r
⇒ p = mviˆ since the net linear momentum 39 τr = A × L when A is constant vector . Accroding
imparted to the tangular which is along x-axis end to given condition, it is cross product so τr is
in non zero, so the center of mass of the wedge r r
ABC will move along x-axis. perpendiculr to L and also to A .
= Al sin θ the component r in
R dl
36. Form the geometry, x = Forther more L
sin θ dt
r
dθ the direction of A ( i.e l cos θ ) will not change
Also, ω = − . Therefore, which time. otherwise AL sin θ will not satishfied.
dt r r
The magnitude of L does not change becose AL
dx d R
v= = is perpendicular to τr
dt dt sin θ
− R ( dθ / dt ) cos θ ω R cos θ 40.
= =
sin 2 θ sin 2 θ
v sin 2 θ Rv
ω= =
R sin θ x x 2 − R 2
V0
Rv 2 ( 2 x 2 − R 2 ) ω0
dω d Rv =−
α= =
( )
3/2 (before collision)
dt dt x x − R
2 2
x2 x2 − R2
37. Taking moments about the left edge and resolving
T1 into x and y components,
∑τ = 0 yields LT cos 30 − ( 0.25L )( 400 )
1
0
− ( 0.5L )(120 ) = 0 V0
ω0
(just after collision) P
NARAYANAGROUP 123
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
From equation (i)
Eliminating v and substituting r = r0 – h tan α
v 0 r0 = v20 + 2gh (r0 − h tan α) cos θ
v0 r0
V cos θ =
ω v + 2gh (r0 − h tan α)
2
0
P f
( at the point of pure rolling ) mv02
N sin α = mg …(ii) N cos α = …(iii)
Taking angular momentum about the point P r0
I ω0 − mV0 R = I ω + mVR ⇒
gr0
Solving (ii) and (iii) tan α = .
2 V 2 V v02
mR 2 × 0 − mV0 R = mR 2 × + mVR
5 R 5 R
( 3m ) ( 4a 2 ) .ω = 4ma 2 ω
1
3V J .a = I Gω =
⇒V = − 0 12
7 46-48
41 If friction is enough to support pure rolling then its In order to use the law of restitution. we need the
starts pure rolling . other wise doesnot do this
speed of point C, which is u1 − aω (downwards)
42 the direction of the friction depons on the directoin
of net extrenal force acting on the body
COMPREHENSION TYPE J impulse = F x ∆t
43-45.From angular momentum conservation about axis
of cone. O ⇒
T h e
r0
J a
D C v1
α v2
h
E law of restitution now gives relative velocity of
r separation at point of impact = e (relative velocity
α
of approch ) or u2 − ( u1 − aω ) = e ( u + u )
m v0 r0 = m v r cos θ hence 2u = u2 − u1 + aω
For the rod the speed of the particle is
v0 r0 = v r cos θ …(i)
29
from energy conservation ; E 1 = E 2 υ (downwards)
19
1 1
mv02 + mgh = mv 2 + 0 ; v = v02 + 2gh 49 - 50
2 2 Velocity component of particle, normal to rod (just
r0 – r = h tan α ; r = (r0 – h tan α )
J − M υ0 cos α
υn =
N sinα after collision ) is M
N Since, the collision is elastic, therefore, there is no
loss of kinetic energy during collision.
Hence kinetic energy of system of rod and particle
just after collision = kinetic energy of pariticle just
α
Ncosα before collision .
∴ I ω 2 + M (υt2 + υn2 ) = mυ02
1 1 1
α
2 2 2
J = 24 Ns
mg
124 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
MV02 1 MR 2 V0
2
Kx02
+ =
2 2 2 R 2
J Elongation of spring in extreme position
O
3M 3M
x0 = V0 f ≤ fL V0 ≤ µ g
4K K
54-56 F − f = ma ; F ( r ) + f ( R ) = Iα
∴ From equation (1) ω = 3 rad / sec tangential
component of velocity of particle a = Rα
36 F (r + R) R
υt = υ0 sin α = 2 gh sin 370 = ms −1 solving a = I + mR 2 and f = F − ma
35 ( )
51-53
51 When CM is displaced by x , 2Kx − f = Ma F [( I / m ) − Rr ]
=
( I / m ) + r 2
MR 2
fR = Iα = α and a = Rα
2 55. f is positive for ( I / m ) > Rr for frictional force
4 Kx acts in backward direction.
On solving a =
3M 56. f is negative for (I/m) <Rr or frictional force
4 Kx acts in forward direction
Net force on the disc = Ma = 57-59
3
α
Drawing the F.B.D of the plank and the cylinder
N1
Fsinθ
Fcosθ
Kx Kx
f1
ur 4 Kx ˆ
mg
52. F = − i ( as disc is displaced toward right) Equations of motion are
3
F cos θ − f1 = ma ........ (1)
4K 4K
a= x ; ω= F sin θ + N1 = mg ........ ( 2 )
3M 3M
f1 + f2 = MA ........ ( 3 )
a 4 Kx
53 α = =
R 3MR f1 R − f 2 R = I α ........ ( 4 )
MR MR 4 Kx 2 Kx A = Rα ........ ( 5 )
so f = α = =
2 2 3MR 3 1
4 × 55 ×
a 4 Kx MR 4 F cos θ 2
α= = ; so, f = α a= = = 10m / s 2
3M + 8m ( 3 ×1) + ( 8 ×1)
.
R 3MR 2
MR 4 Kx 2 Kx 1
= = 3 × 1 + 55 ×
2 3MR 3 3MF cos θ 2 = 7.5 N
f1 = =
f is maximum when x is maximum 3M + 8m 3 ×1 + 8 × 1
f ≤ f L ( = µ Mg ) for pure rolling.Energy 1
1 + 55 ×
conservation at equilibrium and extreme position and f 2 = MF cos θ = 2 = 2.5 N
3M + 8m 3 ×1 +8 ×1
60-62
NARAYANAGROUP 125
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Y From energy-conservation,
I? 2
= Mg × r sin 370
2
O
MR 2 ?2 3
X ⇒ + Mr 2 = Mgr ×
P 2 2 5
Let us solve this situation wrt cabin
frame of reference. Acceleration of detached 12 gr
? =
particle wrt cabin in horizontal direction is a ⇒ 5 R 2 + 2r 2
(towards right) and is zero in vertical direction. Let
angular velcoty of disc be ? and velocity of its From FBD of disc,
centre of mass be v , then form pure rolling motion
Rx − Mg sin 37 0 = Mar = M? 2 r
condition, v − R? = 0 i.e., v = R? Initial
RY
velocity of particle is,
RX
→
u p = ( v − R? cos37 ) i + ( R? sin 37 )j
^ ^
0 0
O 37°
ω2r
R? ^ 3R? ^
= i+ j ar
5 5
For required situation, position vector of final at
Mg
location of particle is,
→ Mg cos37 0 − Ry = Mat = Mra
r = ( R sin 37 + vt ) i + ( R cos37 )j
^ ^
0 0
where t is the time taken by particle to 3Mg R 2 + 6r 2
⇒ Rx = ,
reach from P to O. 5 R 2 + 2r 2
3R? 4
R cos37 0 = t⇒t = Mg 4 R 2
5 3? Ry =
5 R 2 + 2r 2
R? 1 2
and R sin 37 + vt = t + at
0
Mg
5 2 R = Rx2 + Ry2 =
5 R 2 + 2r 2
8a 4 15 R
where v = R? ⇒ ? = ,t= ×
2 2
15 R 3
Number of revolutions made in time t is,
8a
g ( R 2
+ 6 r )
2 2
+ ( 4 R )
?t 2 MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
n= =
2p 3p ML2 ML2 7WL2
63-65 66. (A) I P = I CM + Ma 2 = + = (S)
12 16 48 g
O L 12 g
(B) W × = I Pα ⇒ α = (Q)
O C 37° 4 7L
L 3g
(C) a = α = (P)
C′ 4 7
3 Mg 4W
From t = Ia (D) N = Mg − = (R)
7 7
MR 2 67. Assume friction to be absent and horizontal Force
⇒ Mg × r cos37 0 = + Mr 2 a is applied at a distance x above centre
2
F mR 2 2Fx
8rg a= and Fx = α or Rα =
⇒a = m 2 mR
5 R 2 + 2r 2
126 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
R Now we substitute the value of a p from equation
if a = Rα then x = (4) in equation (5), hence
2
F F − m 2 ac = m 1 ( ac + αr ) … (6)
The fricton force will be zero and a = 5
m From equations (2) and (3) or , αr = ac
2
R
If a > Rα or x < ,Friction force is Substituting this value in equation (6), we have
2
7 7
F or, F − m 2 ac = m 1ac or, F = m 2 + m 1 ac or,
2 2
towards left anf a ≠
m F
ac =
R 7
if a < Rα or x > Fricton force towards right m 2 + m1
2 2
7 F
and a ≠
F Now a p = ac + αr = 2 ac = 2 .
m m1 + m 2
7
1 2 1 71. The free body diagram is shown in the figure.
68. (a) I = ml × sin θ = ml
2 2
3 12 1
The initial energy = I ω20
b) I = I COM + mr ( centre of mass of the reaging
2
2
where I is the moment of inertia of the cylinder
2R
will be art r = from the centre of the ring and is given by I = Mr 2
1
π 2
69. Angular momentum each conserved about the point (M = Mass of the cylinder and r = Radius)
of contact with the ground.Angular mo mentum also ∴ Initial Kinetic energy of cylinder
is conserved in all cases about any point on the line
1
passing through point of contact and parallel to the = Mr 2 ω02 … (1)
4
velocity of the centre of mass. Then kinetic energy
R
decreases in all cases due to work done by the f1
friction. We have to calculate the relative velocity
of contact point and the direction of friction in A,B
N
and D towards the left. and in case of C, the friction
direction towards right. Those direction never be
f2
changed in any given cases.
Mg
INTEGER TYPE Here, there is no motion of the centre of gravity of
70. The situation is as shown in the figure. the cylinder, hence,
Here we have,
R + µN = Mg … (2) ; N = µR … (3)
F − f = m1 ap … (1) Solving for R and N,
and, f = m 2 ac … (2) Mg µMg
R= N =
Further,
2
f × r = I α = m 2 r 2α … (3) ( + µ2 ) … (4) ;
1 (1 + µ2 ) … (5)
5
The total initial energy is dissipated against frictional
and, a p = a c + αr … (4) forces.
m2
1 r ωo 2 2
∴ Mr ω0 = ( µN + µR ) .2πn ; n = 8πg
2 2
ac
4
m1
f where n is the number of turns made by the cylinder
F
before it stops.
ap Putting the values of N and R, and solving for n
gives the final result..
Substituting the value of f from equation (2) in
equation (1), we get 72. ( T2 − T1 ) R = Iα
F − m 2ac = m 1a p … (5)
NARAYANAGROUP 127
ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
( T2 − T1 ) R = I
a
→ (i ) mg
R
4 g sin 4 5 0 − T2 = 4a → ( ii ) w
O
T1 − 2g sin 45 0 = 2a → ( iii ) m a
Solving (i) (ii) and (iii) we get a = 0.25 m / s 2
µN
73. Taking moment ( about A) of forces acting on the N
rod. 0.60 N = ( 0.60 + 0.30 ) T2 . or N = 30 N
A 60cm 30cm
υ = 2ms −1
mb 2 mb 2 mb 2 1
75. I = + = 1 +
N f T2
6 2 2 3
T2 T1
f
N
w O
C
r Nx
R
Ny
T1 mg mg mg
T1 (.05 ) − ( .4 )( 30 )( .075 ) = (.045 )( 20a ) 2
2mb 2 mgb 2mb 3g
I= g ; Hence = α=
For vertical forces acting on block m1 3 2 3 2 2b
m1 g − T1 = m1a ; T1 = 18a + 18 Velocity of O is zero So N x = 0
b 3g 3mg
4 0 − (1 8 a + 1 8 )= b mg
4 a ; a =1 m / s 2 mg − N y = m α =m = 4 ∴N y =
2 2 2 2b 4
74. For vetical forces, N = mg 76. (a) mg−T1 =ma (1)
For vertical forces, µ N = ma. or a = µ g = 10µ .
a
Taking moments (about o) of forces acting on the ⇒ T2 + f − mg sin θ = m ..... ( 2 )
2
ball, µ NR = I α or α = 120 µ
1 a
Long after the collision, there will be no sliding or it (T2 − f ) r = mr 2 × ...... ( 3)
2 2r
will be pure rolling . Let sliding stop after a time t
after collision, the final transtional velocity,
υ = ( 7 − at ) or υ = 7 − 10 µt and final
angular velocity, ω = ( −ω0 ) + α t
or ω = (120 µ t − 50 ) rad s −1 ( clockwise )
But at that instant υ = Rω T2
T1
∴( 7 − 10 µt ) = 0.2 (120 µt − 50 ) ∴µ t = 0.5
128 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS
T1 T2 4m1 g × 3 = m3 g i.e., m3 = 12m1
a/2 16m1 g × 3 = m4 g
f m1 = 1kg
A
2mg
a 80.
mg sinθ 3
The FBD of plate it as shown in fiigure,
mg
1 a l T
⇒ (T1 − T2 ) r = mr 2 × ...... ( 4 )
2 r
By (1) , ( 2 ) , ( 3) & ( 4)
4 g ( 2 − sin θ )
⇒a = substitute this a value we get
15 l mg
mg
f = (1 − 7 ) sin θ
15
77. Net force,
µ2(Rdθ.λ).g
θ For transtional equilibrium
mg = R + T
µ1 Rdθ.λg dθ For rotational equilibrium,
θ θ
A l 2l
ω R× =T ×
3 3
2mg
⇒ R=
3
2
F = 2∫ ( µ1Rd??) g cos ? 81. I = ∫ ρ4πr r dr
p /2 2 2
0 3
−2 ∫ ( µ1Rd??) g cos ? I A ∝ ∫ ( r ) ( r 2 )( r 2 ) dr
p/2
= 2 ( µ1 − µ2 ) .R?g ↑ I B ∝ ∫ ( r 5 )( r 2 )( r 2 ) dr
IB 6
F ( 2 µ1 − µ2 ) R?g ∴ =
∴a = = I A 10
m 2pR?
2 × m b v.d
( µ − µ2 ) g = 4
= 1 82.
ω=
1
= 4rads −1
m p .r 2
p 2
R 83. Using conservation of angular momentum
78. mgR + m? 0 R = I0a
2
3 8ω m 9 R 2 8ω
mR 2ω = mR 2 × + × × +
a=1.05=1 ( nearest value) 9 8 25 9
79. m2 g × 1 = m1 g × 3 i.e., m2 = 3m1 m 2 8ω 4R
×x × ⇒ x =
8 9 5
NARAYANAGROUP 129
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
GRAVITATION
SYNOPSIS GM 1− e GM 1 + e
VA = and V p =
Kepler’s Laws :
a 1+ e a 1− e
Ø Kepler’s first law or law of orbits: Every planet Ø If e>1 and total energy (K.E +P.E)>0, the path of
revolves around the sun in elliptical orbit with the the satellite is hyperbolic and it escapes from its
sun at one of its focii. orbit.
Ø If e<1 and total energy is negative, it moves in an
F1 F2 elliptical path.
2b Ø If e=0 and total energy is negative, it moves in
circular path.
2a Ø If e = 1 and total energy is zero, it will take parabolic
As shown in the fig., sun may be at F 1 or F2 . Here path.
Ø The path of the projectile thrown to lower heights
a and b denote the lengths of semi major and semi
is parabolic and thrown to greater heights is
minor axes.
elliptical.
Ø The nearest position of the planet from the sun is
Ø Kepler’s second law or Law of Areas: The
called perihelion.
radius vector joining the planet to the sun sweeps
Ø The farthest position of the planet from the sun is
out equal areas in equal intervals of time.
called aphelion.
Ø A planet of mass m is moving in an elliptical orbit dA
Ø Areal Velocity of radius vector joining the
around the sun(S) of mass ‘M’, at one of its focii. dt
rp rA planet to sun remains constant. Mathematically
dA
= constant
dt
M m 2b dl
P S O A
dθ
sun r p
C a
SO
Ø Eccentricity of the elliptical path e = But A =
1 1 1
( dl ) r = ( rdθ ) r = r 2 dθ
OA 2 2 2
c d 1 2
e= ⇒ c = ea
a So, r dθ = constant
dt 2
Ø From fig, rp = a − c = a − ea = a (1 − e )
1 2 dθ 1 2
⇒ r = r ω = constant
Similarly ra = a + c = a + ea = a (1 + e ) 2 dt 2
Ø From conservation of angular momentum at A and 1 mr 2ω I ω L
⇒ = = = constant
P, we have mV p rp = mVA rA 2 m 2 m 2m
L = constant
Vp rA 1 + e
= = Ø As the gravitational force on planet by sun is central,
VA rp 1 − e
torque is zero and hence angular momentum of the
Ø From conservation of energy, we have planet is constant.
NARAYANAGROUP 129
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø This law is a consequence of law of conservation W.E - 2: The mean distance of a planet from the
of angular momentum. sun is approximately 1/4 times that of earth
dA L mVr Vr from the sun. Find the number of years
Ø = = = required for planet to make one revolution
dt 2 m 2 m 2
about the sun.
Ø Areal velocity of radius vector of the planet is
independent of mass of the satellite. 1
Sol : Given rP = rE and TE = 1yr
Ø As angular momentum is conserved, 4
m(Vmax )( rmin ) = m(Vmin )( rmax ) From Kepler’s third law, T 2α r 3
V max 1+ e
⇒ =
3
2 3
V min 1− e TP rP rP 2
= ⇒ TP = TE
Here, V perihelion = Vmax and Vaphelion = Vmin TE rE rE
3
Ø Kepler’s laws can be applied to natural and artificial 3
r 2 1 2
satellites as well. TP = (1) E = = 0.125 Yrs
Ø Kepler’s third law or Law of periods : The square 4rE 4
of period of revolution of a planet around the sun is W.E- 3:The speed of the planet at the perihelion
proportional to cube of the average distance of P be Vp and the Sun - planet distance SP
planet (i.e., semi major axis of elliptical orbit) from be rp as shown in Fig. Relate { rp,Vp }to the
the sun. corresponding quantities at the aphelion
rmax + rmin (1 + e ) a + (1 − e ) a { rA ,VA }. Will the planet take equal times to
rmean = = =a traverse BAC and CPB ?
2 2
Sol: The magnitude of the angular momentum at P is
Hence, T 2 ∝ a 3
Lp = mpVprp,
where ‘ a ’ is length of semi major axis of ellipse The magnitude of the angular momentum at A
Ø The gravitational force between the planet and the is LA = mpVArA
Sun provides the necessary centripetal force for
the planet to go round the Sun.
If M = mass of Sun, m = mass of planet and rp rA
r = average distance of the planet from the Sun,
GMm
then, F = 2
= mrω 2 s 2b
r
sun
GM 4π 2 2π
= as ω =
r3 T2 T
r3
T 2 = 4π 2 ⇒ T 2 ∝ r3 According to law of conservation of angular
GM
W.E - 1: An artificial satellite is in an elliptical Vp rA
orbit around the earth with aphelion of 6R momentum, m prpVp = mprAVA or =
VA rP
and perihelion of 2R where R is Radius of the
earth = 6400Km. Calculate the Here rA >rp hence Vp >VA.
eccentricity of the elliptical orbit. The area SBAC bounded by the ellipse and
Sol: We know that the radius vectors SB and SC is larger than
SBPC in Fig. From Kepler’s second law,
perigee ( rp ) = a (1 − e) = 2R............(1) equal areas are swept in equal times.
apogee ( ra ) = a(1 + e) = 6R ............(2) Hence, the planet will take a longer time to
Solving (1) & (2), eccentricity (e) = 0.5 traverse BAC than CPB.
130 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
W.E- 4: Let us consider that our galaxy consists Electromagnetic Force :
of 2.5 × 1011 stars each of one solar mass. Ø This force exists between any two charged
How long will this star at a distance of 50,000 particles.
light years from the galastic entre take to com- Ø This force is either attractive or repulsive.
plete one revolution ? Take the diameter of Ø It is communicated through Photons.
the Milky way to be 105 ly.G = 6.67 × 10– Strong Nuclear Force :
11
Nm 2Kg-2. (1 ly = 9.46 × 1015 m ) Ø This force may act between any pair of nucleons in
Sol: Here M = 2.5 × 1011 solar mass the nucleus.
= 2.5 × 1011 × (2 × 1030 )kg = 5.0 × 10 41 kg
Ø It is charge independent.
Ø It is spin dependent .
r = 50,000 ly = 50,000 × 9.46 × 1015 m Ø It is communicated through π mesons.
= 4.73 × 1020 m Weak Nuclear Force :
4π 2 r 3 Ø They are responsible for radioactive decay like
We know that, M = 2 β - decay..
GT
1 1 Ø They act between leptons, positrons,
4π2 r3 2 4 × (22 / 7) 2 × (4.73 × 10 20 )3 2
T= = µ -mesons, neutrinos and Hadrons etc.
−11 41
GM (6.67 × 10 ) × (5.0 × 10 ) Ø It is communicated through weak bosons.
= 3.53 × 1014 s.
Newton's Law of Gravitation:
Basic Forces in Nature:
The magnitude of gravitational force of
Basic forces are classified into four categories
attraction between two point masses is given
a) Gravitational Force
b) Electromagnetic Force m1m2
by F = G
c) Strong nuclear Force r2
d) Weak nuclear Force Where G is universal gravitational constant
Relative strengths of basic forces between −2
protons : Ø G = 6.67 ×10−11 Nm kg
2
(or) 6.67 × 10−8 dyne cm 2 gm−2
Basic force Range Relative
strength Ø G is a scalar, Dimensional formula M −1
L3T − 2
Long range 1
Gravitaional → − Gm1m2 ∧ − Gm1m2 →
In Vector form F = r=
(upto infinity)
Ø r
r2 r3
r
31
Weak nuclear Short range 10
(<<1 fm) Here r∧ is the unit vector in the direction of r and
36
Electromagnetic Long range 10 ‘-’ sign indicates that the force is attractive.
(upto infinity) Properties of gravitational force:-
Short range 38
Strong nuclear
(1fm)
10 Ø Gravitational force acts along the line joining the
two interacting particles i.e., gravitational force is
Gravitational Force: a central force.
Ø This force is between any two massive particles. Ø Gravitational force is independent of the presence
Ø It is always attractive force. of other particles.
Ø It is a conservative force. Ø Gravitational force form an action - reaction pair.
Ø It is independent of medium present between So gravitational force obeys Newton IIIrd Law
the masses. → →
Ø It can provide radial acceleration. F12 F21
Ø It is communicated through a particle called as A →
r B
Graviton. uur uuur
⇒ F12 = − F21 ⇒ F12 + F21 = 0
NARAYANAGROUP 131
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Ø F - d2 graph is a rectangular hyperbola as W.E- 5: If two particles each of mass 'm' are placed
shown. at the two vertices of an equilateral triangle
Force of side 'a', then the resultant gravitational
force on mass m placed at the third vertex is
C
30 0
30 0
2 FA FB
(distance)
Sol: FR
Ø Gravitational force is a conservative force i.e., the 600 60 B
0
A
amount of work done by gravitational force in
displacing a body from one place to other place
is independent of the path traversed.
FR = FA2 + FB2 + 2 FA FB cos 600
Ø The net gravitational force on any particle is the = 3F [Q FA = FB = F ]
vector sum of all individual gravitational forces on
it, by all other particles in the system. Gm2
FR = 3 2
F1,net = F12 + F13 + F14 + ......... + F1n a
we can express this equation more compactly as W .E- 6: If four identical particles each of mass
r
n r m, are kept at the four vertices of a square of
vector sum F1, n e t = ∑i= 2
F1 , i side length a, the gravitational force of
attraction on any one of the particles is
m a m
Ø Sun exerts gravitational force on earth , but earth
does not move towards sun because the FR
gravitational pull of the sun on the earth provides a F
1
a
the necessary centripetal force to earth, so the orbit Sol:
F
is stable.
m a F m
Ø If gravitational force is proportional to r–n then
2Gm Gm2 2
n +1 1-n FR = 2 F + F ' = +
time period of a planet Ta r 2
v∝r 2 a2 2a 2
Gm 2 1
UNIVERSAL GRAVITATIONAL CONSTANT: FR = 2+ along the diagonal
//////////
a 2
2
towards the opposite corner.
M
W.E- 7: Four particles, each of mass M and
equidistant from each other, move along a
circle of radius R under the action of their
A m l/2 θ B mutual gravitational attraction. The speed of
r each particle is (2014A)
M
Sol: Let a be the distance between two particles.
M a M
Ø From Cavendish experiment the value of
R
a a
universal gravitational constant (G) can be FR F
M M
a F
kθ r 2 MV 2
calculated by G = R
Mml The resultant gravitational force on any one of the
M - Mass of heavier sphere GM 2 2 + 1
m - Mass of lighter sphere particle is given by FR = 2
.
a2
k - Torsion constant ; θ - Angle of twist
132 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
Which provides necessary centripetal force for from P. Then gravitational force due to the
motion of mass M in circle, so element on the particle will be
1 GM 2 MV 2 Gm(M / L )(Rdθ )
2 + = a dF = along OP
2 a2 R2
2 [ as dl = Rd θ ]
Y
2 2 + 1 GM 2 2 + 1 GM dF
V2 = = dl
2 2 a 2 2 2 R P
⇒V =
1
2
GM
R
(
1+ 2 2 ) m
dθ
θ
X
W. E-8:If four different masses m1 , m2 , m3 and m4
are placed at the four corners of a square of So the components of this force along
side ‘a’ the resultant gravitational force on x and y axes will be
mass m kept at the centre is GmM cos θdθ
dFx = dF cos θ =
Sol: The force on m due to m1 and m3 is LR
GmM sin θdθ
2Gm dFy = dF sin θ =
F1 = (m1 − m3 ) along the diagonal towards LR
a2
So that
m1 [if m1 > m3 ].
Fx =
GmM π
∫0 cos θ dθ =
GmM
[sin θ]π0 = 0
LR LR
m3 a m2
GmM π GmM
[ − cosθ ]0
π
∫
F2
Fy = Sinθ dθ =
a
θ
FR a LR 0 LR
m
F1 2πGmM L
m4 a m1 = as R = π
L2
The force on m due to m2 and m4 is
2πGmM
2Gm F = Fx2 + Fy2 = Fy = (as Fx =zero)
F2 = 2 (m2 − m4 ) along the diagonal towards L2
a W.E - 10: Two particles of equal masses move in a
m2 [ if m2 > m4 ] . circle of radius r under the action of their
mutual gravitational attraction. Find the
The resultant force is F12 + F22 = F speed of each particle if the mass of each
particle is m.
2Gm Sol : In this case the two particles maintain gravitational
F= (m1 − m3 )2 + (m2 − m4 )2
a2 force of attraction diametrically. The gravitational
and the resultant force makes an angle θ with F1 force on one of the particles must be equal to the
necessary centripetal force
F2
where, θ = tan −1 ( F ). mV 2 Gmm Gm
= ⇒V =
( 2r )
2
1 r 4r
W.E - 9: A thin rod of mass M and length L is
bent into semicircle as shown in figure.
What is gravitational force on a particle
with mass m at the centre of curvature ? m r O m
Sol: Consider an element of rod of length dl as
shown in figure and treat it as a small particle
of mass (M/L) dl situated at a distance R
NARAYANAGROUP 133
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
W.E - 11: Mass M is split into two parts m and
FR = F12 + F22 + 2 F1F2 cos θ
(M-m), which are then separated by a certain
distance. What is the ratio of (m/M) which ⇒ FR = (2G) 2 + (3G) 2 + 2 × 2G × 3G × cos 60o
maximises the gravitational force between the
parts ? ⇒ FR = 19 G
Sol: If r is the distance between m and (M-m), the W.E -14:Two particles of masses 1Kg and 2Kg are
gravitational force between them will be placed at a distance of 50cm. Find the initial
m( M − m) G acceleration of the first particle due to
F =G = 2 ( mM − m 2 )
r2 r gravitational force.
For F to be maximum dF/dm = 0 as M & r are Sol: Gravitational force between two particles is
constants.
Gmm 6.67 ×10−11 ×1× 2
d G F= 1 2
= = 5.3×10−10 N
⇒ ( mM − m 2 ) = 0 ⇒M −2m = 0 r2 (0.5)2
dm r 2
;
The acceleration of 1Kg particle is
m 1
⇒ = . So, the force will be maximum when F 5.3 ×10−10
M 2 a1 = = = 5.3 × 10−10 ms −2 towards
the parts are equal. m1 1
W.E - 12:Imagine a light planet revolving around the 2Kg mass
a very massive star in a circular orbit of radius W.E -15:An infinite number of particles each of
r with a period of revolution T. On what mass m are placed on the positive X-axis at
power of ‘r’ will the square of time period
depend on the gravitational force of 1m,2m,4m,8m,.... from the origin. Find the
attraction between the planet and the star is magnitude of the resultant gravitational
proportional to r −5 2 ? force on mass ‘m’ kept at the origin.
Sol: The gravitational force provides necessary y
mV 2 K K
centripetal force = 52 ⇒V2 =
r r mr 3 2 Sol
m m m m m
2π r mr 32
O 1 2 4 8 x
But T = = 2π r ; ∴T 2 α r 7 2
V K The resultant gravitational force
W.E - 13:Three spherical balls of masses 1kg, 2kg Gm 2 Gm 2 Gm 2
and 3kg are placed at the corners of an equi- F= + + + ..........
lateral triangle of side 1m. Find the magni- 1 4 16
tude of the gravitational force exerted by 2 1 1
kg and 3 kg masses on 1 kg mass. = Gm 2 1 + + + .........
4 16
Sol: If F 1 is the force of attraction between 1kg, 2kg
1× 2
masses, then, F1 = G × (1) 2 ⇒ F1 = 2G 1
= Gm 2 2 a
1 = Gm Q S∞ =
4
1−
A1 kg 3 1− r
F1 600 F 4
2 W.E -16:In a double star system, two stars of
masses m 1 and m 2 separated by a distance
B C 'x' rotates about their centre of mass. Find
2 kg 3 kg
If F2 is the force of attraction between 1kg, 3kg the common angular velocity and Time
period of revolution.
1× 3 x
masses, then, F2 = G × (1) 2 ⇒ F2 = 3G Sol: m
1
r1 c.m r2 m2
The angle between the forces F 1 and F 2 is 60o. If The gravitational force between the masses
‘ FR ’ is the resultant of these two forces then provides the necessary centripetal force.
134 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
Gm m W.E -19:A particle of mass m is situated at a
i.e. 1 2
= m1 r1ω 2
––––(1) distance d from one end of a rod of mass M
x2
The distance of centre of mass from m1 is and length L as shown in fig. Find the
magnitude of the gravitational force
m2 x between them.
r1 = -------- (2)
m1 + m 2 x dm
Gm1m 2 mm x m
= 1 2 ω2 d L
From (1) and (2) x2 m1 + m 2 Sol : Consider an element of mass 'dm' and length
'dx' at a distance 'x' from the point mass.
G ( m1 + m 2 ) G ( m1 + m 2 ) M
ω2 = ⇒ω= Mass of the element dm = dx .
x3 x3 L
Gravitational force on ‘m’ due to this element is
2π x3 M M
T = ; T = 2π Gm dx ( d + L ) Gm dx
ω G ( m1 + m 2 ) L L
dF =
x2
; F= ∫
d
x2
W.E- 17:In Cavendish’s experiment, let each small (d + L ) ( d + L)
mass be 20g and each large mass be 5 kg. The GmM −1
rod connecting the small masses is 50 cm long, ⇒F= L ∫d
x −2 dx = GmM x
L −1 d
while the small and the large spheres are
( d + L) 1
separated by 10.0 cm. The torsion constant is GmM −1 GmM 1
⇒F= = −
L x d L d ( d + L)
4.8 ×10−8 kgm2 s −2 and the resulting angular
deflection is 0.40 . Calculate the value of GmM d + L − d GmM
F= =
universal gravitational constant G from this L (d + L)d d (d + L)
data.
W.E -20:The gravitational force acting on a
Sol: Here, m = 20 g = 0.02kg , M = 5 kg particle, due to a solid sphere of uniform
r = 10cm = 0.1m, l = 50cm = 0.5m density and radius R, at a distance of 3R
θ = 0.40 = ( 0.40 )( 2π / 3600 ) = 0.007 rad,
from the centre of the sphere is F1 . A spherical
hole of radius (R/2) is now made in the
sphere as shown in the figure. The sphere with
k = 4.8 × 10 −8 kgm 2 s −2
hole now exerts a force F2 on the same
kθ r 2
Thus, from G = particle. Ratio F1 to F2 is (2013E)
Mml
G=
( 4.8 × 10 ) ( 0.007 )( 0.1)
−8 2
5 × 0.02 × 0.5 R
2 m
= 6.72 × 10 −11 Nm 2 kg −2 . R
W.E -18:The mean orbital radius of the Earth
around the Sun is 1.5 ×108 km. Estimate the
mass of the Sun. 3R
Sol: As the centripetal force is provided by the Sol: Let mass of the removed sphere = M.
gravitational pull of the Sun on the Earth Then mass of the original sphere = 8M (since
GM s M e 4π 2 4π 2 r 3 mass ∝ R 3 )
= M e r ω 2 =M e r (or) Ms =
r2 T2 GT2 8GMm
F1 = and F2 = 8GMm −
GMm
given, r = 1.5 × 108 km = 1.5 × 1011m; 9R 2 9R2 5R
2
2
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
4 × (22 / 7)2 × (1.5 × 1011 )3 F 50
∴ Ms = Therefore, F = 41
1
−11 ≈ 2 × 1030 kg ( on simplifying)
(6.67 × 10 ) × (365 × 24 × 60 × 60) 2
2
NARAYANAGROUP 135
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Acceleration due to gravity (g): ∆g d
Ø It is the acceleration gained by the body due to Ø Fractional change, =
g R
gravitational force of attraction . The value of ‘g’ is
Ø Decrease in g at small heights is more than decrease
constant at a given place but differs from place to
in g at small depths.
place.
Ø The force with which a body is attracted towards Ø Decrease in g at large heights is less than decrease
the centre of a planet is called weight of that body in g at large depths.
on the planet. Ø ‘g’ becomes zero at the centre of the earth.
Graphical representation of variation of ‘g’
GM with height and depth: The variation of g with
Ø Relation between G and g is, g = 2
R the distance r from the centre of the earth is shown
Ø ‘g’ is a vector quantity with −2
below
LT as its
dimensional formula. Its SI unit is m s . − 2 gR 2
i) Above the earth : g h =
Variation of 'g' : (R + h)2
Variation of g with altitude : If g and g h are gR 2 1
acceleration due to gravities on the surface of the gh = 2
(Q R + h = r) ⇒ g h ∝ 2
r r
Earth and at height ‘h’ above the surface of the
Earth of mass M and radius R then ⇒ gh versus r graph is a curve as shown.
-2
GM g=9.8ms
g = 2 and gh =
GM
( R + h)
2
R 1
g r g∝
R2 inside r2
Ø gh = g
( R + h )2 the earth
x
distance from centre of earth (r)
2h
Ø For small values of h, g h ≈ g 1 − g
R i) Inside the earth: g d = (R − d)
Thus, as the height increases, the value of g R
decreases. g
gd = (r) (Q R − d = r) ⇒ g d ∝ r
Ø The decrease in value of g at height h R
2h ⇒ gd versus r graph is a straight line passing
( h << R) is ∆g = g − gh ≈ R g through the origin as shown in fig.
Ø Variation of ‘g’ with latitude :
∆g 2h Consider an object of mass m at latitude λ of the
Ø Fractional change, ≈
g R earth due to rotation of a earth, the value of
Variation of g with depth: If g is acceleration acceleration due to gravity gλ at a given place is
due to gravity at the surface of the earth and gd is given by g λ = g − rω 2 cos λ
acceleration due to gravity at a depth ‘d’ below
the surface of the earth, then where rω 2 cos λ is the component of centrifugal
acceleration along the radius of the Earth.
GM 4
Ø on surface, g = 2 = π GR ρ
R 3 pole
FC COS λ
4 r
at a depth, g d = π G ( R − d ) ρ
P
Ø FC=mrω
2
3 R a
d
Ø g d = g 1 − Equator λ
R O
Thus, as depth increases, the acceleration due to
gravity decreases.
Ø The decrease in value of g at depth ‘d’ is
d
∆g = g
R
136 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
where r is the radius of the circle in which the GM
object is revolving. Here r = Rcos λ Sol: Acceleration due to gravity, g =
R2
∴ g λ = g − ω R cos λ 2 2
6.67 × 10−11 × 2.5 × 2 × 1030
= = 2.3 × 1012 ms−2
where ω is the angular velocity. R is radius of the (12000)2
earth and λ is latitude of the place Centrifugal acceleration
Special cases : = r ω2 = r (2 πf ) 2 = 12000(2π × 1.5) = 1.1 × 10 ms
2 6 −2
Ø At the poles λ = 900
Since, g > rω2 , the body will remain stuck with
∴ gλ =90o = g − ω R ( 0)
( )
2 2
(Qcos90 o
= 0) the surface of star.
W.E- 22:What is the time period of rotation of the
∴ gλ = g -- (maximum)
(= 90 ) o earth around its axis so that the objects at
the equator becomes weightless?
Ø At the equator λ = 00
(g=9.8m/s2, Radius of earth = 6400km)
∴gλ =0o = g −ω2 R(1)
( )
2
(Qcos0 =1)
o Sol: When earth is rotating the apparent weight of a
body at the equator is given by
∴ gλ = g − ω 2 R .... (minimum) Wapp = mg − mRω 2
( =0 )
o
If bodies are weightless at the equator
Ø Here, Rω 2 = 0.034ms −2 for the Earth.
Ø The value of ‘g’ at poles does not depend on the 0 = mg − mRω 2 ⇒ g = Rω 2
speed of rotation of the earth, but at the equator g
‘g’ decreases with the increase of speed of rotation ⇒ω=
R
of earth.
Ø If earth suddenly stops its rotation, then the 2π R
Time period, T = = 2π
acceleration due to gravity at poles remains ω g
constant, and acceleration due to gravity at equator
increases by ω 2 R . 6.4 ×106
T = 2π = 5078s = 84 minute 38s
Variation of ‘g’ due to shape of the earth: 9.8
The earth is elliptical in shape. It is flattened at the W.E- 23: The height at which the acceleration due
poles and bulged at the equator. So radius at to gravity becomes g/9 ( where g is the
equator is greater than the radius at poles. acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
P the earth) in terms of the radius of the earth
Rp (R) is (2009A)
Re
E 2
g R R 1
Sol: Given = g ⇒ =
9 R+h R+h 3
1
As gα , the value of g at the equator is 3R = R + h ⇒ 2R = h
R2
W.E -24: How much above the surface of earth does
minimum and at the poles is maximum.
the acceleration due to gravity reduce by 36%
Ø Lines joining the places on the earth having same
of its value on the surface of earth.
values of g are called isograms.
W.E -21: A star 2.5 times the mass of the sun is Sol: Since g reduces by 36%, the value of g there is
reduced to a size of 12 km and rotates with 64
a speed of 1.5 rps. Will an object placed on 100-36=64%. It means, g ' = g.
100
its equator remain stuck to its surface due If h is the height of location above the surface of
to gravity ? (Mass of the sun = 2 × 1030 kg). earth, then,
NARAYANAGROUP 137
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
experienced by a unit mass placed at that point.
R2
⇒
64
g=g
R2 ur
g'= g uur F
( R + h) ( R + h)
2 2
∴ Gravitational field strength, Eg = m
100
0
8 R R 6.4 × 106 Units of gravitational field strength are Nkg −1 or
⇒ = ⇒h= = = 1.6 ×10 m
6
10 R + h 4 4
ms −2 and dimensional formula is LT −2
W.E -25:Find the percentage decrease in the weight It is a vector quantity. It is always directed radially
of the body when taken to a depth of 32Km towards the centre of mass of the body producing
below the surface of earth. the field.
Sol: Weight of the body at depth d is Note: In the earth's gravitational field,
ur ur
d uur F m g ur
mg ′ = mg 1 − Eg = = 0
=g
R m0 m0
mg − mg ′
Hence, in the earth’s gravitational field, the intensity
% decrease in weight = × 100 of gravitational field is nothing but acceleration
mg
due to gravity 'g'.
d 32 Ø The intensity of gravitational field at a distance r
= ×100 = × 100 = 0.5%
R 6400 GM
W.E 26:A man can jump 1.5m on the Earth. from a point mass ‘M’ is given by E g = 2
r
Calculate the approximate height he might Ø The direction of the force F and hence of E is from
be able to jump on a planet whose density is P to O as shown in fig.
one-quarter that of the Earth and whose radius P
is one-third that of the Earth. Rp
Re
Sol: We know that, in case of Earth, E
GM ( 4π / 3 ) R 3 ρ = 4 π G R ρ r
g= = G × − GM r
R2 R2 3 In vector form the above formula is E g = r
r3
R
Similarly, for the other planet whose radius and
3
ρ 4π G R ρ E
density is , g ′ = 3 3 4
4
r
1 4π G 1 g
g′ = Rρ = g ⇒ = 12 . Theoretically gravitational field due to a particle
12 3 12 g′ extends upto infinite distance around it
u2 1 The value of Eg is zero at r = ∞ .
hmax = ⇒ hmax ∝ (here u is constant)
2g g If the system has a number of masses, then resultant
gravitational field intensity can be found out by using
h′ g the principle of superposition.
= = 12 ⇒ h′ = 12h = 12 × 1.5 = 18m r r r r
h g′ i.e. Eg = Eg1 + Eg 2 + Eg3 + ........
Gravitational Field: Null Point :
Ø It is the region or space around a massive particle Ø It is the point in a gravitational field at which resultant
in which its gravitational influence is felt. field intensity is zero.
Gravitational field strength (or) Intensity Ø If two particles of masses m1 & m2 are separated
of Gravitationl Field:
by a distance r, the distance of null point from m1
Ø Gravitational field strength at any point in a
gravitational field is defined as the gravitational force is given by
138 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
r Field due to Circular Disc:
x= Ø Gravitational field intensity due to a circular disc of
Gm1 Gm2 m2
E1 −E2 = 0 ⇒ = ; +1 mass M at any point on the axial line
(r − x)
2
x2 m1 Q
m1 m2
E1 E2 R2 + x 2
R
Eg θ
p
x O x
r
W.E-27:Two bodies of masses 100Kg and 10,000Kg
are at a distance of 1m apart. At what distance
2GM
from 100kg on the line joining them will the or Eg = (1 − Cosθ ) (in terms of ‘ θ ’)
resultant gravitational field intensity be zero? R2
G × 100 G × 10, 000
Field due to Hollow Sphere (or)
= Spherical Shell (E or I):
Sol: (1 − x )
2
x2
Ø Gravitational field intensity due to a uniform
1 spherical shell
⇒ 100 x 2 = (1 − x ) ⇒ x =
2
E
11
Field due to Circular Ring:
Ø Gravitational field intensity due to a uniform circular GM 1
ring of mass M at any point at a distance ‘x’(from E∝
R2 r2
the centre of the ring) on its axis is
r
Eg =
GMx uuur R
(x 2
+R )
2 3/2 along PO At a point inside the spherical shell,
(E ) g inside =0, (E )g centre
= zero
At a point outside the spherical shell,
(E )
dE sin θ GM
=
dE
g (here r = R)
R
surface
R2
dE cos θ θ
0 dE cos θ θ
p
(E )g outside
=
GM
r2
(here r > R)
Field due to Solid Sphere(uniform mass
dE dE sin θ
density):
x
Gravitational field intensity due to a solid sphere
Gravitational field intensity is directed towards the E
centre of the circular ring.
GM
At the centre of the circular ring, E g = 0 E∝
1
R 2 E∝ r r2
R
Eg is maximum , at x = and R
r
2
Eg = 0 ( at the centre of solid sphere )
2GM
E max = GMr
3 3R 2 ( Eg )inside =
R3
( for r < R )
NARAYANAGROUP 139
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
At a point on the surface of the solid sphere, GMm
Ø If x <<<R ⇒ F = x ,then force varies linearly
GM R3
( Eg ) surface =
R2
( for r = R ) as distance ‘x’
At a point outside the solid sphere, R
Ø Force is maximum, at x = ± , maximum force
2
( Eg )outside = GM
r2
( for r > R ) 2G M m
Fmax =
E g = 0 (at infinite distance) 3 3R 2
Field due to Straight Rod: A rod of length Gravitational Potential:
2l,density ρ ,placed along y- axis,such that mid Ø The amount of work done in bringing a unit mass
point of rod coincides with origin.The gravitational from infinity to a certain point in the gravitational
field intensity at a point P(a,0) is field of another massive object is called as
gravitational potential at that point due to massive
2Gρ l 2G ρ 1
Eg = = object.
a l 2 + a2 a a2
1+ Ø Let W is the work done and m0 is the test mass
l2
W
2G ρ a2 a2 then V =
Eg = 1 − 2 + higher powers of 2 + − − − m0
a 2l l As this work done is negative, the gravitational
potential is negative.
l Ø S.I unit : J/Kg
θ
Dimensional formula : M L T
0 2 −2
P 2Gρ Ø
a
if l is ∞ ,then, Eg =
l a Potential due to a Point Mass:
Ø The gravitational potential at a point P which is at a
r r distance r from a point mass M is given by
Since Fg = mEg
GM r
V =−
M
Ø A thin rod of mass M and length L is bent into a r
o P
semi circle, gravitational force on a particle of mass
GMm
Ø If the system has a number of masses m1 , m2 ,
m placed at the centre of curvature is F= 2π
L2 m3 .......... mn at distances r1 , r2 , r3 .......... rn from
Ø A thin rod of mass M and length L is bent in to a the point p, the resultant gravitational potential at a
complete circle,then resultant force on a particle point p can be written as
placed at its centre is zero.
Ø A point mass m is at a distance x from the center V = V1 +V2 + V3 + .........Vn
of the ring of mass M and radius R on its
axis.gravitational force between the two is m m m m
⇒ V = −G 1 + 2 + 3 + ........... + n
GMmx 1
r r2 r3 rn
F=
( R2 + x2 )
32 n
mi
⇒ V = −G ∑
i =1 ri
dm
R 2 + x2 Potential due to Circular Ring:
R Ø Gravitational potential due to a circular ring, at a
x m distance r from the centre and on the axis of a ring
of mass M and radius R is given by
GMm
Ø If x >>>R ⇒ F = , then for a distant point, V =
− GM O r P
x2 R
R +r
2 2
ring behaves as point mass.
140 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
GM
At r = 0, V = − , i.e., at the centre of the 3 x2
R
Vinside = −GM − 3 (if x<R)
ring gravitational potential is −
GM 2R 2R
R
Ø At a point on the surface of the solid sphere,
Gravitational Potential due to a Spherical
−GM
Vsurface = (If x=R)
Shell: R
Let M be the mass of spherical shell and R is its −GM
radius Ø At a point outside the solid sphere, Voutside =
−GM x
V =
r (If x>R)
Ø At a point inside the spherical shell, (If r < R)
3 GM 3
Ø At the centre, x=0 ⇒ Vc = − = Vsurface .
2 R 2
Ø The variation of V with x is as shown:
−GM R
Vinside =
R O
r −3 GM Centre
2 R
V
−GM m surface
Ø At a point on the surface of the spherical shell, R
−G M Inside
V surface = (If r = R) Outside
R
GM
Vcentre = − (r = 0 at centre) x
R Ø In case of solid sphere potential is maximum at
GM centre.
Vinside = Vsurface = Vcentre = −
, Newton’s Shell Theorem : Gravitational potential
R
Ø At a point outside the spherical shell, at a point outside of a solid (or) hollow sphere of
mass M is same as potential at that point due to a
r
point mass of M separated by same distance.
Hence, the sphere can be replaced by a point mass.
−GM Ø Gravitational potential difference:The amount
Voutside =
M
(If r > R)
r R of work done in bringing a unit mass between two
points in the gravitational field is called as the gravi-
Ø At infinity, V∞ = 0 tational potential difference between the two points.
Ø The variation of magnitude of V with r is as Wb − Wa
shown ( For a spherical shell ) ∆ V = Vb − Va = −
m0
V
1 1
GM
Wab = − mo (Vb − Va ) = −Gmmo −
− rb ra
R
r Relation between gravitational field and
R
potential:
Ø Gravitational field and the gravitational potential are
Gravitational Potential due to a Solid →
Sphere: related by E = −gradientV = −gradV
Ø At a point inside the solid sphere, → ∂V ∧ ∂V ∧ ∂V ∧
E = − i+ j+
∂ z
k
−GM ∂x ∂y
Vinside = (3R 2 − x 2 )
2R3
NARAYANAGROUP 141
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
∂V Ø If a particle moves opposite to the field direction
Here, = Partial derivative of potential function then work done by the field will be negative. So
∂x
potential energy will increase and change in
V with respect to x, i.e., differentiate V wrt x
potential energy will be positive.
assuming y and z to be constant. Ø If a particle moves in the direction of the field
Ø The above equation can be written in the following work done is positive, so potential energy
forms. decreases and change in potential energy is
− dV negative.
Ø E= , If gravitational field is along x-direction
dx Ø potential energy exists for only conservative forces
only. and it does not exist for non conservative forces.
uur
→ uur ∧ ∧ ∧ Ø By the definition of gravitational potential,
Ø dV = − E . dr , (where dr = dx i + dy j + dz k W U
→ ∧ ∧ ∧
V =− = ⇒ U = mV
and E = Ex i + E y j + Ez k ) m m
ur Gravitational Potential Energy of Two
Note:a) If E is given V can be calculated by the Particle System:
r r ur uur Ø The gravitational potential energy of two particles
formula V = ∫ dV = −
∝
∫ E. dr ∝
of masses m1 and m2 separated by a distance r is
b) The negative slope of V - r curve gives E Gm1m2
given by U = −
Gravitational potential energy: r
The amount of work done by the gravitational force Gravitational Potential Energy of Three
in bringing a body from infinity to any point in the Particle System:
gravitational field is defined as the gravitational Consider a system consists of three particles
potential energy at that point. of masses m 1, m2 and m 3 located at A, B and C
dU respectively.Total potential energy ‘U’ of the
For a conservative field, F = −
dr ém m ù
ê 1 2 m2 m3 m1m3 ú
uur
⇒ dU = − F . dr
→
system is U = -G ê rr + rr + rr ú
êë 12 23 13 úû
u r ur uur r ur uu
r Z
⇒ ∫ dU = − ∫ F . dr ⇒ U − U0 = −∫ F. dr C
m3
r13
u0 r0 r0 r23
m1
We generally choose the reference point at infinity A
r12 m2
B
and assume potential energy to be zero there. If O Y
we take r0 = ∞ and U 0 = 0 then,
X
ur uur
r
r ur uur Ø If a body is moving only under the influence of
⇒ U = − ∫ F . dr = −W as ∫ F . dr = W
∞ ∞ gravitational force, from law of conservation of
Potential energy of a body or a system is the mechanical energy U1 + K1 = U 2 + K2
negative work done by the conservative forces Gravitational Potential Energy of a
in bringing it from infinity to present position. System of Particles:
P.E=+mgh2
Ø The gravitational potential energy for a system of
n particles is given by
Reference h2
P.E= 0 Gm1 m 2 Gm 2 m 3
U = ∑U i =− + + ............
Level h1 r12 r23
P.E=-mgh1
142 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
n ( n − 1)
For a sphere of radius ‘x’, mass of the sphere
Ø For n particle system there are pairs and 4
2 = π x 3 ρ , where ρ = density of sphere
the potential energy is calculated for each pair and 3
added to get the total potential energy of the −4
Gravitational potential on the surface = π Gρ x
2
system. 3
Gravitational Potential Energy of a body Gm
in Earth’s Gravitational Field: (since gravitational potential = −
x
Ø If a point mass ‘m’ is at a distance r from the centre
−G 4 −4
GMm = × π x3ρ = π Gx 2 ρ )
of the earth, then, U = − x 3 3
r Work done by the agent in increasing the surface
Ø On the surface of earth, from x to x + dx is
GMm
U surface = −
GM
= − mgR Q g = 2 −Gm ( dm )
= Gravitational potential × dm
R R x
Ø At a height ‘h’ above the surface of earth, −4 16π 2
= π G x 2 ρ ( 4π x 2 dx ρ ) = G ρ 2 x 4 dx
GMm 3 3
Uh = −
R+h Therefore, total work done
Ø The difference in potential energy of the body of −16π 2 − 16π 2 G ρ 2 R 5
G ρ 2 ∫ x 4 dx =
R
mass m at a height h and on the surface of earth is =
3 0 15
∆U = U h − U surface
2
GMm GMm 1 1 −16π GR 2 5
M −3 GM 2
=− −− = GMm − = =
R+h R R R+h 15 4 5 R
π R 3
3
GMmh GMmh mgh
= = ∆U = = Gravitational self potential energy of a sphere.
( R + h) R h
R 2 1 +
⇒ h
1+ . If Ø Self potential energy of a thin uniform shell of
R R
Gm 2
h << R, ∆U ≈ mgh mass ‘m’ and radius ‘R’ is −
2R
Ø Work done in lifting a body of mass m from earth Ø Change in the gravitational potential energy in lifting
surface to a height h above the earth’s surface is a body from the surface of the earth to a height
1 1 mgh equal to ‘nR’ from the surface of the earth
W = U h − U surface ; W = GMm − =
R R+h h ∆U =
GMmh GMm(nR) GMmn mgRn
= = =
1+ R( R + h) R( R + nR) R(n + 1) n + 1
R
W.E -28: The gravitational field due to a mass
Ø Gravitational potential energy at the centre of the
earth is given by distribution is given by E = - K x 3 in x-
3 GMm
direction. Taking the gravitational potential
U c = mVc = − to be zero at infinity, find its value at a distance
2 R x.
3 −3GM Sol: The potential at a distance x is
Here, Vc = Vs = (It is minimum but not x
2 2R −K −K
x
K
zero. However ‘g’ at centre of earth is zero) V = − ∫ Edx = ∫ 3 dx = 2 = 2
Ø Self potential energy of a uniform sphere of ∞
x 2x ∞ 2x
mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’: W.E-29: A particle of mass m is placed at the centre
It is the amount of work done to bring identical of a uniform spherical shell of equal mass and
massive particles to construct a sphere of mass M radius a. Find the gravitational potential at
radius R and density ρ a point P at a distance a/2 from the centre.
NARAYANAGROUP 143
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Sol: The gravitational potential at P due to particle at W.E - 33: Find the gravitational potential
− Gm −2Gm energy of a system of four particles, each
centre is V1 = = of mass m placed at the vertices of a
a/2 a
square of side l.Also obtain the gravita-
−Gm
The potential at P due to shell is V2 = tional potential at centre of the square.
m
a m
−3Gm
The net potential at P is V1 + V2 =
a l
W.E -30:The gravitational field in a region is given 2
r r r l
by E = − ( 20 Nkg −1 ) ( i + j ) . Find the
O
gravitational potential at the origin (0,0)
r uur
Sol: V = −∫ E. dr = − ∫ Ex .dx + ∫ Ey .dy =20x+20y
m m
⇒ V=0 at the origin (0,0). Sol :The system has four pairs with distance l and two
W.E -31: Calculate the gravitational potential at
the centre of base of a solid hemisphere of mass diagonal pairs with distance 2 l .
M, radius R. Gm 2 Gm 2 2Gm 2 1
Sol: Consider a hemispherical shell of radius r and U = −4 −2 =− 2+
l 2l l 2
thickness dr. Its mass is given by
The gravitational potential at the centre of the
3Mr 2 dr
dm =
2
M
( 2π r dr ) R3
= 2 square is
V = Algebraic sum of potential due to each
π R3
3 particle
dm 4Gm 4 2Gm 2l
dr
V=− =− Q r = 2
r l
M r
W.E - 34: Two bodies of masses m and 4m are placed
R
at a distance r. The gravitational poten
Since all points of this hemispherical shell are at tial at a point on the line joining them
the same distance r from centre O, potential at O where thegravitational field is zero is
due to it is (2011A)
−Gdm −3GMrdr Sol: Position of null point from mass m is
dV = =
r R3 r r
x= =
R −3GM
∴ V = ∫ dV = .
4m
+1
3
0 2R m
W.E -32: The gravitational field in a region is
r
given by the equation E = (5 i + 12 j) N / kg . 3
If a particle of mass 2kg is moved from the
m Null point 4m
origin to the point (12m, 5m) in this region,
the change in the gravitational potential
energy is ( 2012 E) 3 12 −9Gm
r uur ∴ potentialV = −Gm + =
Sol: dV = − E. dr r 2r r
= −(5i + 12 j). (12i + 5 j) = −(60 + 60) = −120 Escape Velocity:
Change in gravitational potential energy dU= mdV Ø The minimum velocity required for a body in order
= 2(-120) = -240 J to escape from the gravitational field of a planet is
defined as escape velocity.
144 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
Ø For a body to just escape to infinity , it is projected R
with a minimum velocity such that its total energy ⇒ h=
v 2
must be zero (PE+KE= 0). − 1
e
2
v
−GMm 1
+ mVe2 = 0
R 2 Case II:-If the velocity of projection v = v e then, total
If Ve is the escape velocity from the surface of the energy of the body just becomes zero, so that the
body just escapes from the planet and goes to
2GM infinity and the body possess zero velocity at infinity.
planet then Ve =
R Case III:- If a body is projected with a velocity greater
4 than the escape velocity ( v > v e ) , total energy is
Also Ve = 2 gR and Ve = 2 π R ρ G R
3 positive, the body escapes from gravitational
(Where ρ is the mean density of the planet) influence of the planet and enter into interstellar
Escape Velocity of a body From certain height space with certain velocity.
above the surface of a planet: By law of conservation of energy
Ø At a height ‘h’ above the surface of a planet 1 2 GMm 1 2
mv − = mv∞
− GMm 2 R 2
PEbody =
R+h 2GM 2GM
⇒ v 2∞ = v 2 − = v 2 − v e2 Q v 2e =
For object to escape TE=PE+KE=0 R R
GMm 1 2 GMm
KEbody = − PEbody = ⇒ mve = ⇒ v∞ = v 2 − ve2
R+h 2 R+h
i.e., the body will move in interplanetary or
2GM
⇒ ve = = 2gh ( R + h )
R+h interstellar space with a velocity v 2 − ve2
Here, gh is acceleration due to gravity at height h. Salient features regarding escape velocity:
Behaviour of a Body Projected Vertically Up Ø Escape velocity depends on the mass, density and
with Different Velocities from the Surface of a radius of the planet from which the body is
Planet: projected.
Ø Consider a body of mass ‘m’ projected with a Ø Escape velocity does not depend on the mass of
velocity ‘v’ from the surface of a planet of mass the projected body and its direction of projection
‘M’ and radius ‘R’ and the angle of projection.
Ø Escape velocity from the surface of earth
Case I: If the velocity of projection v < ve then,
=11.2Km/s
Total energy is negative. The body goes to certain Ø Escape velocity from the surface of moon
maximum height and then falls back.To find this =2.31 Km/s
maximum height ,we use law of conservation of Ø There is no atmosphere on moon, because r.m.s.
energy. TE surface = TEmax.height velocity of molecules is greater than the escape
GMm 1 GMm velocity on the moon (i.e., vrms > ve )
− + mv 2 = −
R 2 R+h Ø Escape velocity on sun is maximum. As v rms < v e ,
1 GMmh R + h 2GM hence, even the lightest molecules can not escape
mv 2 = ⇒ =
2 R ( R + h) h Rv2 from there. Sufficient amount of hydrogen is present
in the atmosphere of the sun since the escape
R v2 R ve2 velocity on the sun is very high.
+ 1 = e2 ⇒ = 2 −1 Ø If a body falls freely from infinity, then, it reaches
h v h v
the earth with a velocity of 11.2 Km/s.
NARAYANAGROUP 145
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
W.E -35: If Earth has mass nine times and radius W.E - 37: A planet in a distant solar system is 10
twice that of the planet mars, calculate the times more massive than the earth and its
velocity required by a rocket to pull out of the radius is 10 times smaller. Given that escape
gravitational force of Mars. Take escape speed velocity from the earth is 11km/s, the escape
on surface of Earth to be 11.2 km/s velocity from the surface of the planet is
Re
Sol: Here, M e = 9M m , and Re = 2 Rm Sol: Given M P = 10 M e ; RP = (2008A)
10
ve (escape speed on surface of Earth )=11.2 km/s
2 GM
We know that v e =
Let Vm be the speed required to pull out of the R
gravitational force of mars. 2GM P 100 × 2GM e
∴ vP = = = 10v e
We know that RP Re
2GM e 2GM m =10 × 11 = 110km/s
ve = and v m =
Re Rm Earth Satellites
Satellites: The bodies revolving round a planet in
vm 2GM m Re its gravitational field are defined as satellites.
Dividing, we get v = Rm
×
2GM e Orbital speed of Satellites: The velocity of a
e
satellite revolving around the earth of mass M and
M m Re 1 2 radius R in a circular orbit of radius 'r' at a height
= × = ×2 =
M e Rm 9 3 'h' from the surface of earth is called orbital velocity.
2
⇒ vm = (11.2 km / s ) = 5.3km / s GM GM gR 2
3 vo = = =
r ( R + h) ( R + h)
W.E- 36: A rocket is fired with a speed v = 2 gR
near the earth's surface and directed upwards. GM
Angular velocity ω =
( R + h)
3
(a) Show that it will escape from the earth.
(b) Show that in interstellar space its speed
( R + h )3 ( R + h) 3
is v = 2gR . Time period T = 2π = 2π
GM gR 2
Sol : (a) As PE of the rocket at the surface of the
Ø For a satellite orbiting very close to earth.
earth is (–GMm/R) and at infinity is zero, energy
required for escaping from earth GM
h << R then, v o = R
= gR
GMm GM
= 0−
R
= mgR Q g = R 2 1
ω2 ∝
R3 ⇒ T ∝ R
2 3
1
And as initial KE of the rocket mv2 = 2mgR Ø For two satellites revolving around the earth in
2
different circular orbits of radii r1 and r2 at vertical
is greater than the energy required for escaping
(= mg R), the rocket will escape. v1 r2 R + h2
(b) If u is the velocity of the rocket in interstellar heights h1 and h2 , v = r = R + h
2 1 1
space (free from gravitational effects) then by
Ø Orbital velocity for a satellite close to the surface
conservation of energy,
of earth v0 = 7.92 kms −1 ≈ 8kms −1
1
( ) 1
( ) 1
2 2
m 2 gR − m 2gR = mv2
2 2 2 Ø Orbital velocity is independent of mass of the
v = 4gR - 2gR or v = 2gR
2 satellite.
146 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
Ø It is always along the tangent to the orbit.
2π 2π 2π
Ø Relation between escape and orbital velocities is Since ωrel = ω sat − ωearth ⇒ = −
T Ts Te
ve = 2 v0
Energy of Orbiting Satellite:
Ø If the speed of the orbiting body 'v' is such that
Ø The potential energy of the system is
vo < v < ve then its orbit changes from circle to
−GMm
ellipse. U=
r
Ø If the satellite revolves close to the earth surface,
Ø The kinetic energy of the satellite is,
(h<<R),then, Time period of revolution,
1 1 GM GMm
R K = m v 20 = m or K =
T = 2π = 84.6min =1.41 hr 2 2 r 2r
g
GMm
T =
3π Ø The total energy is E = K + U = −
(or) Gρ 2r
Frequency of Revolution(n): The number of Ø When the satellite revolves in an orbit of radius ‘r’
revolutions made by the satellite in one second is (here r = R+h) potential energy is negative, means
called the frequency of revolution(n). that the satellite is moving in the gravitational field
of the planet. The planet and the satellite form a
1 1 GM 1 GM
n= = = bound system. If it is to be escaped out of the
T 2π r 3
2π ( R + h)3
GMm
gR 2 GM gravitational field, some additional energy 2( R + h )
Q g = R 2
1
=
2π ( R + h )3
will have to be given to it.
Ø If the satellite revolves close to the earth surface, Ø Trajectories of a body projected with different
1 GM 1 g velocities:
(h<<R)then n = =
2π r3 2π R An object revolves around a planet only when it is
Angular Momentum: The angular momentum of projected with sufficient velocity in a direction
the satellite is given by perpendicular to the gravitational force of attraction
of the planet on the object.
G M
L = m v0r = m r = G M m 2r
r
Ø For satellites τ =0 and L = constant in a given point of projection
orbit because gravitational force is central force. speed v part of ellipse
Ø Angular momentum of the satellite depends on mass v< (gr )
of the satellite, mass of the planet and radius of the earth
hyperbola
orbit. v > (2gr )
Ø A satellite behaves like a freely falling body. circle
parabola v= (gr ) ≈ 8 kms −1
Ø When a satellite revolves round a planet in an
elliptical orbit, then its orbital speed is not uniform. v= (2 gr ) ≈ 11 km s −1
ellipse
Ø The mass of a planet can be determined with the (2 gr ) > v > (gr )
help of its satellite.
Ø If the satellite is travelling in the same direction as If v < gr object falls on the surface of earth
the rotation of earth i.e. west to east , the time
interval between two successive times at which it If v = gr object revolve in a circular orbit.
will appear vertically overhead to an observer at a
If gr < v < 2 gr object revolves in an
T sTe
fixed point on the equator is T = T − T elliptical orbit.
e s
NARAYANAGROUP 147
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
If v = 2gr object escapes from the field and
GMm éê h 2 - h1 ù
ú
ÞW=
follows parabolic path. 2 ëê (R + h1 )(R + h 2 ) úûú
ê
If v > 2gr object escapes from the field and Case IV: Work done (or) additional energy to be
imparted for an object to just escape an object
follows hyperbolic path.
which is initially revolving around the planet close
Special Cases : to the surface is
v=0
v2 4
-GMm GMm GMm
+ =-
3
v1 Escape
2 h1 TEi =
R R 2R 2R
v 1 h2
M TEf = O(object escapes only when its TE
becomes zero (or) positive)
Case I:Work done to lift an object at rest from the Work done (or) additional energy imparted to the
surface of a planet to a height h is object is
GMm
GMm -G M m W = DE = TE f -TEi = = KE of the object
TEi = TEsurface = - +0= 2R
R R Hence, an object (satellite) revolving around the
GMm -GMm
planet escapes when
TEf = TEheight = - R+h
+0=
R+h 1)It’s KE is doubled (increases by 100%)
2)It’s velocity is increased to 2 times of present
GMm GMm
Work done W = TEf –TEi = - value (increases by 41.4%)
R R+h Additional velocity imparted to the body
= ve –v0 = 2 v0 - v0
GMmh mgh
ÞW= =
R (R + h ) 1 + h
R
Case II: Work done to shift an object at rest from the
( )
2 -1 v 0 = 3.2km / s (nearly)
surface of planet in to an orbit in which object Note: In the above case if theobject initially revolves
revolves around the planet is around the planet at a height h from the surface
-GMm -GMm -GMm
TEi = TEsurface = +0 = then it’s TE = 2 ( R + h )
R R
-G M m 1 -G M m Additional energy required to escape the
TEf = TEorbit = R + h + 2 m v 0 = 2 (R + h )
2
GMm
object is 2 (R + h)
GMm GMm
-
Work done W= TEf –TEi = R 2 (R + h ) W.E -38: A satellite orbits the earth at a height of
400 km above the surface. How much energy
é R + 2h ù must be expended to rocket the satellite out
W = G M m êê ú
ú
êë 2 R ( R + h ) úû
of the gravitational influence of earth? Mass
of the satellite is 200 kg , mass of earth =
Case III: Work done to shift an object revolving around 6.0 × 1024 kg, radius of earth = 6.4 × 106 m,
the planet from one orbit in to another orbit is G = 6.67 × 10–11 Nm 2 kg–2.
GMm 1 -GMm Sol : Total energy of orbiting satellite at a height
TEi = (TE )h1 = - R + h + 2 mv1 = 2 R + h
2
( 1) -GMm
1
h = 2(R + h)
-GMm
TEf = (TE )h2 = - R + h + 2 mv 2 = 2 (R + h )
GMm 2 1 Energy expended to rocket the satellite out of
2 2 the earth’s gravitational field. = − (Total energy
Work done
GMm
GMm GMm of thesatellite) = 2(R + h )
W = TEf –TEi = 2 ( R + h ) - 2 (R + h )
1 2
(6.67 × 10−11 ) × (6 × 10 24 ) × 200
= = 58.85 ×108 J
2(6.4 × 106 + 4 × 105 )
148 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
W.E - 39: A body is projected vertically upwards W.E- 42: A rocket is fired ‘vertically’ from the
from the surface of the earth with a velocity surface of mars with a speed of 2 kms-1. If 20%
equal to half of escape velocity of the earth. of its initial energy is lost due to martian at-
If R is radius of the earth, maximum height mospheric resistance, how far will the rocket
attained by the body from the surface of the go from the surface of mars before returning
earth is (2009E)(2011M) to it?
Sol: From law of conservation of energy, Mass of mars = 6.4 × 1023 kg;
TEsurface = TEMax Height radius of mars = 3395 km;
2
Sol: From the law of conservation of energy
GMm 1 ve GMm 1
+ m (0)
2
− + m = − −GMm 80 1
+
−GMm
mV = +0
2
R 2 2 R+h 2 R+h
R 100 2
GMm 1 2GM GMm 2 2GM
− + m =− Q v e = 1 1
= 0.4 m ( 2 × 10 )
GMm − 3 2
R 2 4R R+h R
On simplifying, we get h = R/3 R R+h
W.E -40: A particle is fired vertically upwards from GM R
⇒ 1− = 1.6 ×106
the surface of earth reaches a height 6400Km. R R + h
Find the initial velocity of the particle . 3.395 ×106 × 1.6 ×106
Sol: TE. on the surface of the earth = 1−
= TE. at the highest point 6.67 × 10−11 × 6.4 × 1023
R 3,395
1 GMm GMm R+h = = = 3,888.9km
mV 2 − = 0− 0.873 0.873
2 R R+h ∴ The required height up to which the
1 mgh rocket will go = 3,888.9 − 3, 395 = 493.9km
⇒ mV 2 = W.E -43: Two heavy spheres each of mass 100Kg
2 h
1+ R
given, h = R =6400Km and radius 0.1m are placed 1m apart on a
horizontal table. What is the gravitational
So, V 2 = gh ⇒ V = gh field and potential at the mid point of the
line joining their centres.
⇒ V = 10 × 6400 ×103 = 8Km/s Sol: Gravitational field at the mid point of the line
W.E -41: If a satellite is revolving around a planet joining their centres is given by
of mass M in an elliptic orbit of semi major r GM r GM r
2 (
E= −r ) + 2 ( )
r =0
axis a, then show that the orbital speed of the ( r 2) ( r 2)
satellite when it is at a distance r from the
Gravitational potential at the mid point of the line
2 1 joining their centres is given by
focus will be given by V = GM − − GM −GM −4GM
r a V = + =
GMm ( r 2) ( r 2 ) r
Sol: Total energy of the system is E = − 4 × 6.67 × 10 −11 × 100
2a =− = − 2.7 × 10 − 8 J / kg
1
GMm
which is conserved. So, KE + PE = − W.E- 44:The gravitational potential difference
2a between the surface of a planet and a point
At position ‘r’,orbital speed of the satellite is V. 20m above it is 16J/kg. Calculate the
1 2 −GMm workdone in moving a 2kg mass by 8m on a
Then, KE = mV and PE = slope of 600 from the horizontal.
2 r
1 GMm GMm Sol: The vertical height through which the body
So, mV − =−
2
2 r 2a has to be raised = 8sin 600 = 4 3 m. The P.D
.D
for a distance of 20m is 16J/kg. Hence, the
2 1
⇒ V = GM − P.D for a distance of 4 3 m for a mass of 2kg
r a
4 3
is × 16 × 2 ; 11 J
20
NARAYANAGROUP 149
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
W.E - 45: The mass of a spaceship is 1000kg. It is GMm 4GMm
to be launched from the earth surface out into EN = − −
free space. The value of ‘g’ and ‘R’ are 10ms-2 2R 4R
and 6400km respectively.The required energy From the principle of conservation of
for this work will be (2012A) mechanical energy
1 2 GM 4GM GM GM
Sol: To launch the spaceship out into free space, v − =− −
2 R 5R 2R R
GMm 2GM 4 1
1/2
from energy conservation, − +E =0 3GM
or v = − ⇒v =
2
R
R 5 2
5R
GMm GM
E= = 2 mR = mgR = 6.4 × 10 J
10 W.E-48:A 400kg satellite is in a circular orbit of
R R radius 2RE about the earth. How much energy
W.E - 46: The minimum energy required to launch is required to transfer it to a circular orbit of
a satellite of mass m from the surface of a radius 4RE? What are the changes in the ki-
planet of mass M and radius R in a circular netic and potential energies?
orbit at an altitude of 2R is (2013A)
Sol: Mass of satellite m = 400 kg
Initial radius of circular orbit = 2RE
Sol: From the law of conservation of energy
Final radius of circular orbit = 4RE
−GMm −GMm GM m
+ KEimparted =
Initial total energy Ei = − 4R
E
R 2 × 3R E
GMm 1 5 GMm
KEimparted = 1 − =
R 6 6 R GM m
Final total energy E f = − 8 R
E
W.E -47:Two uniform solid spheres of equal E
radii R, but mass M and 4M have a centre
to centre separation 6R, as shown in Fig. The change in the total energy is ∆E = E f − Ei
The two spheres are held fixed.A projec-
tile of mass ‘m’ is projected from the surface GM E m GM E m
∆E = − +
of the sphere of mass M directly towards the 8RE 4 RE
centre of the second sphere. Obtain an
expression for the minimum speed ‘ v ’ of the GM E m GM E mRE
∆E = − = 2
projectile so that it reaches the surface of the 8RE RE 8
second sphere.
GM E
R Q = g = 9.81 m / s 2
M R mv RE2
N 4M
0 C ∆E =
gm R E
( RE = 6.37 × 106 m )
8
x
9.81 × 400 × 6.37 × 106
∴∆E = = 3.13 × 10 9 J
6R 8
Sol: The neutral point N is at a distance ‘ x ’ from Kinetic Energy is reduced
mass M , given by
∆K = K f − Ki = −3.13 × 109 J
d 6R
x= = = 2R
m2
+1
4M
+1
The change in potential energy is twice the
m1 M change in total energy
The mechanical energy at the surface of M is ∴ ∆U = U f − U i = −6.25 × 109 J .
1 2 GMm 4GMm Binding Energy:
Et = mv − −
2 R 5R
The energy required to remove the satellite from
At the neutral point N, the speed approaches
its orbit to infinity is called binding energy of the
zero. The mechanical energy at N is purely
system.
potential.
150 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
1 GMm Important Features Regarding Satellite:
mV0 − + B .E . = 0
2
2 r Ø If the law of force obeys the inverse square law
GMm 1 U
Binding energy (BE) = F∝ 2 ,
F = −
dU
and K .E = = E
2r r dr 2
PE PE KE Here, U → potential energy, E → total energy
gy
Ø For a satellite = −2 , = 2, = −1
KE TE TE The same is true for electron-nucleus system
PE : KE :TE =−2:1: −1 because there also, the electrostatic force, Fe ∝
1
Ø Energy graph for a satellite is r2
Ø For a given satellite in an orbit ,
KE 1
L = mvr = constant ⇒ v ∝ .
r
r V1
TE P2
PE V2 r2
r1 P1
O
Change in Orbit of a Satellite:
1
Ø Energy required to shift a satellite from an orbit of Ø For satellites in different orbits v ∝
r
radius r1 into an orbit of radius r2 is V2
GMm 1 1
E = E2 − E1 = −
2 r1 r2
r2 P2
mgR 1
2
1
( or ) E = − O
2 r1 r2 V1
r1
Ø When the satellite is transferred to a higher orbit P1
( r2 > r1 ) then variation in different quantities are W.E -49:A satellite of mass ‘m’ and radius ‘R’ is
as shown in the following table. orbiting the Earth in a circular orbit of radius
Variation Relation with r ‘r’. It starts losing energy due to air resistance
Quantity
at a rate of C Js −1 . The time taken by the
1
Orbital Velocity Decreases v∝ satellite to reach the Earth is ---
r
−GMm dE GMm 1 dr
Increases Sol : E = ⇒ = =C
Time period T ∝r 3/2
2r dt 2 r 2 dt
1 GMm dr
Linear momentum Decreases p∝ ⇒ dt =
r 2C r 2
GMm 1 1
t
L∝ r GMm 1
R
Angular momentum Increases ∫ dt =
0
2C ∫ r r2
dr ⇒ t =
2 C r
−
R
1 W.E - 50:Two satellites of same mass are launched
Kinetic energy Decreases K∝
r in the same orbit round the earth so as to
rotate opposite to each other. They soon
1
Potential energy Increases U ∝− collide inelastically and stick together as
r wreckage. Obtain the total energy of the
1 system before and just after the collision.
Total energy Increases E∝− Describe the subsequent motion of the
r
wreckage.
1
Binding energy Decreases BE ∞
r
NARAYANAGROUP 151
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Sol : In case of satellite motion, energy of a satellite Geostationary and Polar Satellites
GMm Communication satellites:
in an orbit is given by E = -
2r Ø The satellites which remain stationary with respect
So the total energy of the system before collision to the Earth are known as communication satellites.
E i = E1 + E 2 = 2E = -
GMm For example INSAT 1A, 1B, 2A etc
r Ø If anything is gently released from a
As the satellites of equal mass are moving in satellite, then it starts moving with the velocity of
opposite direction and collide inelastically, the the satellite and itself becomes a satellite.
velocity of wreckage just after collision, by Ø The satellite is projected from west towards east
conservation of linear momentum will be so that maximum benefit of the motion of the earth
mv - mv = 2mv, i.e., v = 0 may be obtained.
Ø A satellite moving in a stable orbit does not need
i.e., just after collision wreckage comes to rest in any energy from an external source.
the orbit. So energy of the wreckage just after Conditions for geo-stationary satellite:
collision will be totally potential and will be Ø The plane of orbit of the satellite should coincide
GM (2 m ) 2 GMm with geo-equatorial plane
EP = - =-
r r Ø The velocity of the satellite must be in the same
And as after collision the wreckage comes to rest direction as that of earth i.e., from west towards
in the orbit, it will move along the radius towards east.
the earth under its gravity. Ø The period of revolution of satellite must be equal
W.E -51: A launching vehicle carrying an artificial to the period of rotation of earth about its own axis
satellite of mass m is set for launch on the i.e., 24 hrs.
surface of the earth of mass M and radius R. Ø Time period of revolution of geo-stationary satellite
If the satellite intended to move in a circular with respect to earth is infinity.
Ø The height of the geo-stationary satellite from the
orbit of radius 7R, the minimum energy
surface of the earth is nearly 36000 KM.
required to be spent by the launching vehicle Ø The relative velocity of geo-stationary satellite with
on the satellite is (2010 E) respect to earth is zero.
Sol: Here r = R + h = 7R Ø The orbit of the geo-stationary satellite is called
the ‘Parking Orbit”.
GM
Orbital velocity V0 = Polar Satellites:
r
Ø These are low altitude (500 km to 800 km) satellites
TE of satellite in its orbit = PE + KE Ø They go round the poles of earth in north-south
GMm 1 direction
= − + mV02 Ø Polar satellites have a time period of 100 minutes
r 2
nearly
GMm 1 GM Ø These satellites can view polar and equatorial
=− r
+ m
2 r
regions at close distances with good resolution.
Ø These satellites are useful for remote sensing,
GMm 1 G M GMm
= − 7 R + 2 m 7 R = − 14 R meteorology and environmental studies of earth.
Weightlessness:
GMm Ø Weightlessness is a phenomenon in which the object
TE of satellite on the earth = − is in a state of free fall
R
If the minimum energy to launch the satellite in to Ø Wapp = m ( g − a ) Here a = g ⇒ W app = 0
its orbit is Emin , then, Ø A pendulum will not vibrate in an artificial satellite
since g = 0 inside the satellite.
GMm GMm 13GMm
− + Emin = − ⇒ Emin = = 2π
l
=∞
R 14R 14 R Therefore, T g ⇒ Frequency = 0
152 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
Condition for Weightlessness in a Satellite: D C
Ø The force acting on the astronaut of mass ‘m’
S
GMm m v 20
is 2 − FR = A B
r r
1) t1 > t2 2) t1 < t2
here FR is the reactional force
Ø The reactional force on the floor of the satellite is 3) t1 = t2 4) Incomplete information
zero. Hence, there is the state of weightlessness 6. Two satellites are revolving around the earth
GMm m v 20 in circular orbits of same radii. Mass of one
in a satellite i.e., = satellite is 100 times that of the other. Then
r2 r
Ø As the frame of reference attached to the satellite their periods of revolution are in the ratio
is an accelerated frame, whose acceleration 1) 100:1 2) 1:100 3) 1:1 4) 10:1
v 20 GM 7. According to Kepler’s second law, line joining
towards the centre of the earth is a = r
= 2 =g
r
the planet to the sun sweeps out equal areas
in equal time intervals. This suggests that for
C.U.Q the planet
1) radial acceleration is zero
KEPLER’S LAWS 2) tangential acceleration is zero
1. The time period of an earth’s satellite in 3) transverse acceleration is zero 4) All
circular orbit is independent of NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION
1) the mass of the satellite 8. If F g and Fe are gravitational and electrostatic
2) radius of its orbit forces between two electrons at a distance 0.1
3) both the mass and radius of the orbit m then F g / Fe is in the order of
4) neither the mass of the satellite nor the radius of 1) 1043 2) 10–43 3) 1035 4) 10–35
its orbit Gm1m2
9. F = is valid
2. If the earth is at one-fourth of its present r2
distance from the sun, the duration of the year 1) Between bodies with any shape
would be 2) Between particles
1) half the present year 3) Between any bodies with uniform density
2) one-eighth the present year 4) Between any bodies with same shape
3) one-fourth the present year 10. Fg, Fe and Fn represent the gravitational,
electro-magnetic and nuclear forces
4) one -sixteenth the present year
respectively, then arrange the increasing order
3. The radius vector drawn from the sun to a of their strengths
planet sweeps out ___ areas in equal time 1)Fn,Fe,Fg 2)Fg,Fe,Fn 3)Fe,Fg,Fn 4)Fg,Fn, Fe
1) equal 2) unequal 3) greater 4) less 11. Find the false statement
4. If the area swept by the line joining the sun 1) Gravitational force acts along the line joining the
and the earth from Feb 1 to Feb 7 is ‘A’, then two interacting particles
the area swept by the radius vector from Feb 2) Gravitational force is independent of medium
8 to Feb 28 is 3)Gravitational force forms an action-reaction pair
1) A 2) 2A 3) 3A 4) 4A 4) Gravitational force does not obey the principle
of superposition.
5. The motion of a planet around sun in an
12. Law of gravitation is not applicable if
elliptical orbit is shown in the following figure.
A)Velocity of moving objects are comparable
Sun is situated at one focus. The shaded areas to velocity of light
are equal. If the planet takes time ‘ t1 ’ and B) Gravitational field between objects whose
masses are greater than the mass of sun.
‘ t2 ’ in moving from A to B and from C to D 1)A is true, B is false 2) A is false, B is true
respectively, then 3)Both A & B are true 4) Both A&B are false
NARAYANAGROUP 153
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
13. Among the following the wrong statement is 22. If suddenly the gravitational force of attraction
1) Law of gravitation is framed using Newton’s between earth and satellite revolving around
third law of motion it becomes zero, then the satellite will (2002A)
2) Law of gravitation cannot explain why gravity 1) Continue to move in its orbit with same velocity
exists 2) Move tangential to the original orbit with the
3) Law of gravitation does not explain the presence same velocity
of force even when the particles are not in physical 3) Becomes stationary in its orbit
4) Move towards the earth
contact
RELATION BETWEEN g AND G,
4) When the range is long, gravitational force VARIATION OF g
becomes repulsive. 23. If the speed of rotation of earth about its axis
14. Out of the following interactions, weakest is increases, then the weight of the body at the
1) gravitational 2) electromagnetic equator will
3) nuclear 4) electrostatic 1) increase 2) decrease 3) remains unchanged
15. Neutron changing into Proton by emitting 4) some times decrease and sometimes increase
electron and anti neutrino. This is due to 24. The ratio of acceleration due to gravity at a
1) Gravitational Force 2) Electromagnetic Force depth ‘h’ below the surface of earth and at a
3) Weak Nuclear Force 4) Strong Nuclear Force height ‘h’ above the surface for h<<R
16. Attractive Force exists between two protons 1) constant only when h<<R
inside the Nucleus. This is due to 2) increases linearly with h
1) Gravitational Forces 2) Electromagnetic Forces 3) increases parabolically with h 4) decreases
3)Weak Nuclear Forces 4)Strong Nuclear Forces 25. If the gravitational force of earth suddenly
17. Repulsive force exist between two protons out disappears, then,
side the nucleus. This is due to 1) weight of the body is zero
1) Gravitational Forces 2) Electromagnetic Forces 2) mass of the body is zero
3)Weak Nuclear Forces 4)Strong Nuclear Forces 3) both mass and weight become zero
18. Radioactive decay exist due to 4) neither the weight nor the mass is zero
26. Which of the following quantities remain
1)Gravitational Forces 2)Electromagnetic Forces
constant in a planetary motion, when seen from
3)Weak-Nuclear Forces
the surface of the sun.
4)Strong-Nuclear Forces 1) K.E 2) angular speed
19. Two equal masses separated by a distance 3) speed 4) angular momentum
d attract each other with a force (F). If one 27. Average density of the earth (2005A)
unit of mass is transferred from one of them to 1) does not depend on ‘g’
the other, the force 2) is a complex function of ‘g’
1) does not change 2) decreases by (G/d2) 3) is directly proportional to ‘g’
3) becomes d 2 times 4) increases by (2G/d2) 4) is inversely proportional to ‘g’
20. Which of the following is the evidence to show 28. A person will get more quantity of matter in
that there must be a force acting on earth and kg-wt at
directed towards Sun? 1) poles 2) a latitude of 600 3) equator 4) satellite
1) Apparent motion of sun around the earth 29. A pendulum clock which keeps correct time
2) Phenomenon of day and night at the surface of the earth is taken into a mine,
3) Revolution of earth round the Sun then
4) Deviation of the falling body towards earth 1) it keeps correct time 2) it gains time
21. Six particles each of mass ‘m’ are placed at 3) it loses time 4) none of these
the corners of a regular hexagon of edge 30. Two identical trains A and B move with equal
speeds on parallel tracks along the equator.
length ‘a’. If a point mass ‘ m0 ’ is placed at A moves from east to west and B moves from
the centre of the hexagon,then the net west to east. Which train will exert greater
gravitational force on the point mass is force on the track?
6Gm 2 6Gmm0 6Gm 1) A 2) B 3) they will exert equal force
1) 2) 3) Zero 4) 4) The mass and the speed of each train must be
a2 a2 a4 known to reach a conclusion.
154 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
31. Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform 39. Tidal waves in the sea are primarily due to
density, the acceleration due to gravity 1) the gravitational effect of the moon on the earth
1) at a point outside the earth is inversely 2) the gravitational effect of the sun on the earth
proportional to the square of its distance from 3) the gravitational effect of the Venus on the earth
the centre 4) the atmospheric effect of the earth itself
2) at a point outside the earth is inversely 40. Consider earth to be a homogeneous sphere.
proportional to its distance from the centre Scientist A goes deep down in a mine and
3) at a point inside is zero Scientist B goes high up in a balloon. The
4) at a point inside is inversely proportional to its
gravitational field measured by
distance from the centre.
1) A goes on decreasing and that of B goes on
32. If earth were to rotate faster than its present
speed, the weight of an object increasing
1) increase at the equator but remain unchanged at 2) B goes on decreasing and that of A goes on
poles increasing
2) decrease at the equator but remain unchanged 3) Each decreases at the same rate
at the poles 4) Each decreases at different rates.
3) remain unchanged at the equator but decrease GRAVITATIONAL FIELD INTENSITY,
at the poles GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL,
4) remain unchanged at the equator but increase at POTENTIAL ENERGY AND
the poles WORKDONE
33 The time period of a simple pendulum at the 41. Intensity of gravitational field inside the hollow
centre of the earth is spherical shell is
1) Zero 2) infinite 3) less than zero 4) two second 1) Variable 2) minimum 3) maximum 4) zero
34. A body of mass 5 kg is taken into space. Its 42. The work done by an external agent to shift
mass becomes a point mass from infinity to the centre of the
1) 5 kg 2) 10 kg 3) 2 kg 4) 30 kg earth is ‘W’. Then choose the correct relation.
35. If the mean radius of earth is R, its angular 1) W=0 2) W>0 3) W<0 4) W ≤ 0
velocity is ω and the acceleration due to 43. The intensity of the gravitational field of the
gravity at the surface of the earth is ‘g’ then earth is maximum at
the cube of the radius of the orbit of a satellite 1) centre of earth 2) equator
will be 3) poles 4) same everywhere
Rg R2g R2g R 2ω
1) 2) 3) 4) 44 Let VG and EG denote gravitational potential
ω2 ω ω2 g
and field respectively, then choose the wrong
36. If R=radius of the earth and g =acceleration statement.
due to gravity on the surface of the earth,
1) VG = 0, EG = 0 2) VG ≠ 0, EG = 0
the acceleration due to gravity at a distance
(r<R) from the centre of the earth is 3) VG = 0, EG ≠ 0 4) VG ≠ 0, EG ≠ 0
proportional to 45. Two identical spherical masses are kept at
1) r 2) r2 3) r–2 4) r–1 some distance. Potential energy when a mass
37. If R = radius of the earth and g = acceleration ‘m’ is taken from the surface of one sphere to
due to gravity on the surface of the earth, the the other
acceleration due to gravity at a distance (r>R) 1)increases continuously 2)decreases continuously
from the centre of the earth is proportional to 3) first increases, then decreases
1) r 2) r2 3) r–2 4) r–1 4) first decreases, then increases
38. Earth is flattened at poles and bulged at 46. A thin spherical shell of mass ‘M’ and radius
equator. This is due to ‘R’ has a small hole. A particle of mass ‘m’ is
1) revolution of earth around the sun in an elliptical released at its mouth. Then
orbit 1) the particle will execute S.H.M inside the shell
2) the particle will oscillate inside the shell, but the
2) angular velocity of spinning motion about its axis
oscillations are not simple harmonic
is more at equator 3) the particle will not oscillate, but the speed of
3) centrifugal force is more at equator than poles the particle will go on increasing 4) none of these
4) more centrifugal force at poles than equator
NARAYANAGROUP 155
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
47. The gravitational field is a conservative field. 1) Elliptical, parabolic and hyperbolic
The work done in this field by moving an object 2) Hyperbolic, parabolic and elliptical
from one point to another 3) Elliptical, circular and parabolic
1) depends on the end-points only 4) Parabolic, circular and Elliptical
2) depends on the path along which the object is 54. If a satellite is moved from one stable circular
moved orbit to a farther stable circular orbit, then
3) depends on the end-points as well as the path the following quantity increases
between the points. 1) Gravitational force2) Gravitational P.E.
4) is not zero when the object is brought back to 3) linear orbital speed 4) Centripetal acceleration
its initial position. 55. If the universal gravitational constant
48. A hole is drilled through the earth along a decreases uniformly with time, then a satellite
diameter and a stone is dropped into it. When in orbit will still maintain its
the stone is at the centre of the earth, it has 1) weight 2) tangential speed
finite a) weight b) acceleration 3) period of revolution 4) angular momentum
c) P.E. d) mass ESCAPE SPEED
1) a & b 2) b & c 3) a, b & c 4) c & d 56. The earth retains its atmosphere, due to
49. A body has weight (W) on the ground. The 1) the special shape of the earth
work which must be done to lift it to a height 2) the escape velocity being greater than the mean
equal to the radius of the earth is speed of the molecules of the atmospheric gases.
1) equal to WR 2) greater than WR 3) the escape velocity being smaller than the mean
3) less than WR 4) we can’t say speed of the molecules of the atmospheric gases.
50. A gravitational field is present in a region. A 4) the sun’s gravitational effect.
point mass is shifted from A to B, along 57. Ratio of the radius of a planet A to that of
planet B is ‘r’. The ratio of accelerations due
different paths shown in the figure. If W1 , W2
to gravity for the two planets is x. The ratio
and W3 represent the work done by of the escape velocities from the two planets
gravitational force for respective paths, then is
Path 1
1) W1 = W2 = W3 2) W1 > W2 > W3 1) rx 2) r / x 3) r 4) x / r
58. The ratio of the escape velocity and the orbital
3) W1 > W3 > W2 4) none of these velocity is
Path 2
A B 1
Path 3 1) 2 2) 3) 2 4) 1/2
2
51. The energy required to remove an earth 59. The escape velocity from the earth for a rocket
satellite of mass ‘m’ from its orbit of radius ‘r’ is 11.2 km/sec. Ignoring the air resistance, the
to infinity is escape velocity of 10 mg grain of sand from
the earth will be (in km/sec)
GMm − GMm GMm Mm
1) 2) 3) 4) 1) 0.112 2) 11.2 3) 1.12 4) None
r 2r 2r 2r 60. The escape velocity for a body projected
52. A hollow spherical shell is compressed to half vertically upwards from the surface of earth
its radius. The gravitational potential at the is 11 km/s. If the body is projected at an angle
centre of 450 with the vertical, the escape velocity
will be
1) increases 2) decreases 3) remains same
4) during the compression increases then returns 1) 11 2 km / s 2) 22 km / s
to the previous value. 3) 11km / s 4 ) 22 2 km / s
53. For a satellite projected from the earth’s 61. A missile is launched with a velocity less than
surface with a velocity greater than orbital the escape velocity. The sum of its kinetic
velocity the nature of the path it takes when and potential energy is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero
its energy is negative, zero and positive 4) May be positive or negative depending upon its
respectively is initial velocity
156 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
62. The escape velocity of a body depends upon 1) Continue to move with the same speed along
its mass as the same path
1) m0 2) m1 3) m3 4) m 2 2) Move with the same velocity tangential to original
63. The magnitude of potential energy per unit orbit.
mass of the object at the surface of earth is
3) Fall down with increasing velocity.
‘E’. Then escape velocity of the object is
1) 2E 2) 4E 2 3) E 4) E / 2 4) Come to rest after moving certain distance along
64. A space station is set up in space at a distance original path.
equal to earth’s radius from earth’s surface. 71. A space-ship entering the earth’s atmosphere
Suppose a satellite can be launched from space is likely to catch fire. This is due to
1) The surface tension of air 2) The viscosity of air
station. Let V1 and V2 be the escape velocities
3) The high temperature of upper atmosphere
of the satellite on earth’s surface and space 4) The greater portion of oxygen in the
station respectively. Then atmosphere at greater height.
1) V2 = V1 2) V2 < V1 72. An astronaut orbiting the earth in a circular
3) V2 > V1 4) No relation orbit 120 km above the surface of earth, gently
drops a ball from the space-ship. The ball will
EARTH SATELLITES 1) Move randomly in space
65. The minimum number of geo-stationary 2) Move along with the space-ship
satellites required to televise a programme all 3) Fall vertically down to earth
over the earth is 4) Move away from the earth
1) 2 2) 6 3) 4 4) 3 73. Following physical quantity is constant when
66. When a satellite going around the earth in a a planet that revolves around Sun in an
circular orbit of radius r and speed v loses elliptical orbit .
some of its energy , then 1) Kinetic energy 2) Potential energy
1)r and v both increase 2)r and v both decrease 3) Angular momentum 4) Linear velocity
3) r will increase and v will decrease 74. A satellite launching station should be
4) r will decrease and v will increase 1) Near the equatorial region
67. The satellite is orbiting a planet at a certain 2) Near the polar region
height in a circular orbit. If the mass of the 3) On the polar axis 4) At any place
planet is reduced to half, the satellite would 75. When a satellite in a circular orbit around the
1) fall on the planet earth enters the atmospheric region, it
2) go to orbit of smaller radius encounters small air resistance to its motion.
Then
3) go to orbit of higher radius
1) its angular momentum about the earth decreases
4) escape from the planet
2) its kinetic energy decreases
68. A satellite is revolving round the earth in an 3) its kinetic energy remains constant
elliptical orbit. Its speed will be 4) its period of revolution around the earth increases
1) same at all points of the orbit 76. The period of a satellite moving in circular orbit
2) different at different points of the orbit near the surface of a planet is independent of
3) maximum at the farthest point 1) mass of the planet 2) radius of the planet
4) minimum at the nearest point 3) mass of the satellite 4) density of planet
69. An artificial satellite of the earth releases a 77. Out of the following statements, the one
packet. If air resistance is neglected, the point which correctly describes a satellite orbiting
where the packet will hit, will be about the earth is
1) ahead 2) exactly below 3) behind 1) There is no force acting on the satellite
4) it will never reach the earth 2) The acceleration and velocity of the satellite
70. A satellite is moving in a circular orbit round are roughly in the same direction
the earth. If any other planet comes in between 3) The satellite is always accelerating about the earth
them, it will 4) The satellite must fall, back to earth when its
fuel is exhausted.
NARAYANAGROUP 157
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
78. When an astronaut goes out of his space-ship 85. A satellite is revolving round the earth. Its
into the space he will kinetic energy is Ek . How much energy is
1) Fall freely on the earth 2) Go upwards required by the satellite such that it escapes
3) Continue to move along with the satellite in the out of the gravitational field of earth
same orbit.
4) Go spiral to the earth E
1) 2 Ek 2) 3 Ek 3) k 4) infinity
79. When the height of a satellite increases from 2
the surface of the earth. 86. If the universal gravitational constant
1) PE decreases, KE increases increases uniformly with time, then a satellite
in orbit will still maintain its
2) PE decreases, KE decreases 1) weight 2) tangential speed
3) PE increases, KE decreases 3) period of revolution 4) angular momentum
4) PE increases, KE increases 87. Two satellites of masses m 1 and m 2
80. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit (m1 > m2) are revolving around earth in circular
around the earth. The mass of the satellite is orbits of radii r1 and r2 (r1 > r2) respectively.
Which of the following statements is true
very small compared to the mass of the earth regarding their velocities V 1 and V 2.
1) the acceleration of S is always directed towards V1 V2
the centre of the earth 1) V1 = V2 2) V1 < V2 3) V1 > V2 4) r = r
1 2
2) the angular momentum of S about the centre of 88. An earth satellite is moved from one stable
the earth changes in direction, but its magnitude circular orbit to another larger and stable
remains constant circular orbit. The following quantities increase
3) the total mechanical energy of S varies for the satellite as a result of this change
periodically with time 1) gravitational potential energy
4) the linear momentum of S remains constant in 2) angular velocity 3) linear orbital velocity
4) centripetal acceleration
magnitude 89. A satellite is revolving in an elliptical orbit in
81. If S1 is surface satellite and S 2 is geo- free space; then the false statement is
stationary satellite, with time periods T1 and 1) its mechanical energy is constant
T2 , orbital velocities V1 and V2 , 2) its linear momentum is constant
3) its angular momentum is constant
1) T1 > T2 ; V1 > V 2 2) T1 > T2 ;V1 < V2 4) its areal velocity is constant
3) T1 < T2 ; V1 < V2 4) T1 < T2 ; V1 > V2 90. When a satellite falls into an orbit of smaller
82. A relay satellite transmits the television radius its speed
programme from one part of the world to 1) decreases 2) increases
another part continuously because its period 3) does not change 4) zero
1) is greater than period of the earth about its axis 91. Two artificial satellites are revolving in the
2) is less than period of rotation of the earth about same circular orbit. Then they must have the
its axis. same
3) has no relation with the period of rotation of the 1) Mass 2) Angular momentum
earth about its axis. 3) Kinetic energy 4) Period of revolution
4) is equal to the period of rotation of the earth 92. If satellite is orbiting in space having air and
about its axis. no energy being supplied, then path of that
83. The following statement is correct about the satellite would be
motion of earth satellite. 1) circular 2) elliptical
1) It is always accelerating towards the earth 3) spiral of increasing radius
2) There is no force acting on the satellite 4) spiral of decreasing radius
3) Move away from the earth normally to the orbit 93. A satellite in vacuum
4) Fall down on to the earth 1) is kept in orbit by solar energy
84. An artificial satellite of mass m is revolving 2) previous energy from gravitational field
round the earth in a circle of radius R. Then 3) by remote control
work done in one revolution is 4) No energy is required for revolving
mgR 94. Two heavenly bodies s1 & s2 not far off from
1) mgR 2) 3) 2π R × mg 4) Zero each other, revolve in orbit
2 1) around their common centre of mass
2) s1 is fixed and s2 revolves around s1
158 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
3) s2 is fixed and s1 revolves around s2 1) 24 hrs 2) 1 year 3) Infinity 4) Zero
4) cannot say 105. A synchronous satellite should be at a proper
height moving
95. If V , T , L , K and r denote speed, time period, 1) From West to East in equatorial plane
angular momentum, kinetic energy and radius 2) From South to North in polar plane
of satellite in circular orbit 3) From East to West in equatorial plane
a) V α r −1 b) Lα r1/2 4) From North to South in polar plane
c) T α r 3/2 d) Kα r −2 106. The orbital angular velocity vector of a geo-
1) a,b are true 2) b,c are true stationary satellite and the spin angular
3) a,b,d are true 4) a,b,c are true velocity vector of the earth are
1) always in the same direction
96. Two similar satellites s1 and s2 of same mass 2) always in opposite direction
‘m’ possess around completely inelastic 3) always mutually perpendicular
collision while orbiting earth in the same 4) inclined at 23 1/2° to each other
circular orbit in opposite direction then 107. It is not possible to keep a geo-stationary
1) total energy of satellites and earth system become satellite over Delhi. Since Delhi
zero 1) is not present in A.P 2) is capital of India
2) the satellites stick together and fly into space 3) is not in the equatorial plane of the earth
3) the combined mass falls vertically down 4) is near Agra.
4) the satellites move in opposite direction 108. The angle between the equatorial plane and
ENERGY OF ORBITING SATELLITES the orbital plane of a geo-stationary satellite is
97. For a planet revolving round the sun, when it 1) 450 2) 00 3) 900 4) 600
is nearest to the sun 109. The angle between the equatorial plane and
1) K.E. is min and P.E. is max. the orbital plane of a polar satellite is
2) Both K.E. and P.E. are min 1) 450 2) 00 3) 900 4) 600
3) K.E. is max. and P.E. is min
4) K.E. and P.E. are equal WEIGHTLESSNESS
98. A body is dropped from a height equal to 110. Pseudo force also called fictitious force such
radius of the earth. The velocity acquired by as centrifugal force arises only in
it before touching the ground is 1) Inertial frames 2) Non-inertial frames
3) Both inertial and non-inertial frames
1) V= 2 gR 2) V=3gR 3) V= gR 4) V=2gR 4) Rigid frames
99. When projectile attains escape velocity, then 111. Feeling of weightlessness in a satellite is due to
on the surface of planet , its 1) absence of inertia 2) absence of gravity
1) KE > PE 2) PE > KE 3) absence of accelerating force
3) KE = PE 4) KE = 2 PE 4) free fall of satellite
100. A satellite is moving with constant speed ‘V’
in a circular orbit around earth. The kinetic C.U.Q - KEY
energy of the satellite is 1) 1 2) 2 3) 1 4) 3 5) 3 6) 3
1 2 3 2
7) 3 8) 2 9) 2 10)2 11) 4 12)3
1) mV 2) mV 2 3) mV 4) 2mV 2 13) 4 14)1 15)3 16) 4 17) 2 18) 3
2 2 19) 2 20) 3 21) 3 22) 2 23) 2 24) 2
GEOSTATIONARY AND POLAR 25) 1 26)4 27) 3 28) 3 29) 3 30) 1
SATELLITES 31) 1 32) 2 33) 2 34) 1 35) 3 36) 1
101. The orbit of geo-stationary satellite is circular, 37) 3 38) 3 39) 1 40) 4 41) 4 42) 3
the time period of satellite depends on 43) 3 44) 3 45) 3 46) 4 47) 1 48) 4
(2008 E) 49) 3 50) 1 51) 3 52) 2 53) 1 54) 2
1) mass of the Earth 2) radius of the orbit 55) 4 56) 2 57) 1 58) 1 59) 2 60) 3
3) height of the satellite from the surface of Earth 61) 2 62) 1 63) 1 64) 2 65)4 66) 4
4) all the above 67) 4 68) 2 69) 4 70) 2 71) 2 72) 2
102. Polar satellites go round the poles of earth in 73) 3 74) 1 75) 1 76) 3 77) 3 78) 3
1) South-east direction 2) north-west direction 79) 3 80) 1 81) 4 82) 4 83) 1 84) 4
3) east-west direction 4) north-south direction 85) 1 86) 4 87) 2 88) 1 89) 2 90) 2
103. A geo-stationary satellite has an orbital period 91) 4 92) 4 93) 4 94) 1 95) 2 96) 3
of 97) 3 98) 3 99) 3 100)1 101)4 102) 4
1) 2 hours 2) 6 hours 3) 24 hours 4) 12 hours 103) 3 104) 3 105)1 106) 1 107) 3 108) 2
104. The time period of revolution of geo-stationary 109) 3 110) 2 111) 4
satellite with respect to earth is
NARAYANAGROUP 159
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
8. The period of moon’s rotation around the earth
LEVEL - I (C.W) is nearly 29 days. If moon’s mass were 2 fold
its present value and all other things remain
KEPLER’S LAWS unchanged, the period of moon’s rotation
1. If ‘A’ is areal velocity of a planet of mass M, would be nearly (in days)
its angular momentum is 1) 29 2 2) 29 / 2 3) 29 3 4) 29
2 9. If the mass of earth were 2 times the present
1) M/A 2) 2MA 3) A2 M 4) AM
mass, the mass of the moon were half the
2. A planet revolves round the sun in an elliptical
present mass and the moon were revolving
orbit of semi minor and semi major axes x and
y respectively. Then the time round the earth at the same present distance,
period of revolution is proportional to the time period of revolution of the moon would
be (in days)
3 3 3
1) ( x + y ) 2 2) ( y − x ) 2 3) x 2
3
4) y 2 1) 56 2) 28 3) 14 2 4) 7
3. Let ‘A’ be the area swept by the line joining LAW OF GRAVITATION
the earth and the sun during Feb 2012. The 10. Two spheres of masses m and M are situated
area swept by the same line during the first in air and the gravitational force between them
week of that month is is F. The space between the masses is now
1) A/4 2) 7A/29 3) A 4) 7A/30 filled with a liquid of specific gravity 3. The
4. A satellite moving in a circular path of radius gravitational force will now be
‘r’ around earth has a time period T. If its F F
radius slightly increases by 4%, then 1) 2) 3F 3) F 4)
9 3
percentage change in its time period is 11. The gravitational force between two bodies is
1) 1% 2) 6% 3) 3% 4) 9% 6.67 ×10−7 N when the distance between their
5. The time of revolution of planet A round the centres is 10m. If the mass of first body is 800
sun is 8 times that of another planet B. The kg, then the mass of second body is
distance of planet A from the sun is how many 1) 1000 kg 2) 1250 kg 3) 1500 kg 4) 2000 kg
times greater than that of the planet 12. Two identical spheres each of radius R are
B from the sun (2002A) placed with their centres at a distance nR,
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 5 where n is integer greater than 2. The
6. The distance of Neptune and Saturn from the gravitational force between them will be
Sun are respectively 1013 and 1012 meters and proportional to
their periodic times are respectively Tn and 1) 1 R 4 2) 1 R 2 3) R2 4) R4
13. A satellite is orbiting round the earth. If both
Ts . If their orbits are circular, then the value gravitational force and centripetal force on the
of Tn / Ts is satellite is F, then, net force acting on the
satellite to revolve round the earth is
1
1) 100 2) 10 10 3) 4) 10 1) F/2 2)F 3)2F 4) Zero
10 10 14. Mass M=1 unit is divided into two parts X and
7. The Earth moves around the Sun in an (1–X). For a given separation the value
of X for which the gravitational force between
elliptical orbit as shown in the figure. The ratio them becomes maximum is
OA 1) 1/2 2) 3/5 3) 1 4) 2
= x . Then, ratio of the speed of the Earth
OB ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY AND
at B and at A is nearly ITS VARIATION
15. If g on the surface of the earth is 9.8 m / s 2 ,
B
Earth its value at a height of 6400 km is (Radius
O
A 1) x 2) x 3) x x 4) x 2 of the earth = 6400km).
Sun
1)4.9ms–2 2)9.8ms–2 3)2.45ms–2 4)19.6ms–2
160 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
16. If g on the surface of the earth is 9.8ms −2 , its 23. Particles of masses m1 and m2 are at a fixed
value at a depth of 3200km (Radius of the r
distance apart. If the gravitationalr field
earth = 6400km) is strength at m 1 and m 2 are I 1 and I 2
1) 9.8ms −2 2) zero 3) 4.9ms −2 4) 2.45ms −2 respectively. Then,
ur uur uur ur
17. If mass of the planet is 10% less than that of 1) m1 I1 + m2 I 2 = 0 2) m1 I 2 + m2 I1 = 0
earth and radius of the planet is 20% greater ur uur uur ur
than that of earth then the weight of 40kg 3) m1 I1 − m2 I 2 = 0 4) m1 I 2 − m2 I1 = 0
person on that planet is GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL,
1)10 kg wt 2)25 kg wt 3)40 kg wt 4)60 kg wt POTENTIAL ENERGY
18. The angular velocity of the earth with which it 24. The PE of three objects of masses 1kg, 2kg
has to rotate so that the acceleration due to and 3kg placed at the three vertices of an
gravity on 600 latitude becomes zero is equilateral triangle of side 20cm is
1) 2.5 × 10−3 rad s −1 2) 1.5 × 10−3 rad s −1 1) 25G 2) 35G 3) 45G 4) 55G
25. A small body is initially at a distance ‘r’ from
3) 4.5 × 10−3 rad s −1 4) 0.5 × 10−3 rad s −1 the centre of earth. ‘r’ is greater than the
19. Assume that the acceleration due to gravity radius of the earth. If it takes W joule of work
on the surface of the moon is 0.2 times the to move the body from this position to
acceleration due to gravity on the surface another position at a distance 2r measured
of the earth. If Re is the maximum range of from the centre of earth, how many joules
would be required to move it from this position
a projectile on the earth's surface, what is
to a new position at a distance of 3r from the
the maximum range on the surface of the
moon for the same velocity of projection centre of the earth.
1) W/5 2) W/3 3) W/2 4) W/6
1) 0.2 Re 2) 2 Re 3) 0.5 R e 4) 5Re 26. A body of mass ‘m’ is raised from the surface
20. The value of acceleration due to gravity on of the earth to a height ‘nR’ (R -radius of
the surface of earth is x. At an altitude of ‘h’ earth). Magnitude of the change in the
from the surface of earth, its value is y. If R is gravitational potential energy of the body is
the radius of earth, then the value of h is (g - acceleration due to gravity on the surface
x y of earth) (2007M)
y x
1) y −1 R 2) x −1 R 3) R 4) R
n n−1 mgR mgR
x y
1) mgR 2) mgR 3) 4) ( n−1)
GRAVITATIONAL FIELD n+1 n n
INTENSITY 27. A person brings a mass 2 kg from A to B. The
increase in kinetic energy of mass is 4J and
21. The point at which the gravitational force
work done by the person on the mass is −10J .
acting on any mass is zero due to the earth
and the moon system is (The mass of the earth The potential difference between B and A is
is approximately 81 times the mass of the ....... J / kg
moon and the distance between the earth and 1) 4 2) 7 3) -3 4) -7
the moon is 3,85,000km.) 28. The work done in lifting a particle of mass ‘m’
1) 36,000km from the moon from the centre of earth to the surface of the
2) 38,500km from the moon earth is
3) 34500km from the moon 1
1) –mgR 2) mgR 3) Zero 4) mgR
4) 30,000km from the moon 2
22. Masses 2 kg and 8 kg are 18 cm apart. The 29. The figure shows two shells of masses m1 and
point where the gravitational field due to them
is zero is m2 . The shells are concentric. At which point,
1)6 cm from 8 kg mass 2) 6 cm from 2 kg mass a particle of mass m shall experience zero
3)1.8 cm from 8 kg mass 4) 9 cm from each mass force?
NARAYANAGROUP 161
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
m1
1) A 2) B Ve
1) V e = 2) Ve = 2Ve1
1
m2
4
3) C 4) D
D C B A 3) Ve = 2Ve1 4) Ve1 = 2Ve
37. A satellite revolves in a circular orbit with
30. Energy required to shift a body of mass ‘m’ 1
speed V = Ve . If satellite is suddenly stopped
from an orbit of radius 2R to 3R is (2002A) 3
GMm GMm GMm GMm and allowed to fall freely on to earth, the speed
1) 2) 3) 4)
12 R 3R 2 8R 6R with which it hits earth’s surface is
ESCAPE & ORBITAL VELOCITIES
gR 2
31. The ratio of escape velocities of two planets if 1) gR 2) 3) 2gR 4) gR
3 3
g value on the two planets are 9.9m / s 2
38. A space station is set up in space at a distance
and 3.3m / s 2 and their radii are 6400km and
equal to earth’s radius from the surface of
3200km respectively is
earth. Suppose a satellite can be launched
1) 2.36 : 1 2) 1.36 : 1 3) 3.36 : 1 4) 4.36 : 1
32. The escape velocity from the surface of the from the space station also. Let
earth of radius R and density ρ v1 and v2 be the escape velocities of the
2π ρ G 2π ρ G satellite on the earth’s surface and space
1) 2 R 2) 2
3 3 station respectively, then
R 2π Gρ 1) v2 = v1 2) v2 < v1 3) v2 > v1
3) 2π 4)
g R2 4) 1, 2 and 3 are valid depending on the mass of
33. A body is projected vertically up from surface satellite.
of the earth with a velocity half of escape
velocity. The ratio of its maximum height of EARTH SATELLITE
ascent and radius of earth is 39. The orbital speed for an earth satellite near
1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 1 : 3 4) 1 : 4 the surface of the earth is 7 km/sec. If the
34. A spaceship is launched in to a circular orbit radius of the orbit is 4 times the radius of the
of radius ‘R’ close to the surface of earth. The earth, the orbital speed would be
additional velocity to be imparted to the 1) 3.5 km/sec 2) 7 km/sec
spaceship in the orbit to overcome the earth’s 3) 7 2 km/sec 4) 14 km/sec
gravitational pull is (g = acceleration due to 40. Two satellites are revolving round the earth
gravity) at different heights. The ratio of their
orbital speeds is 2 : 1. If one of them is at a
1) 1.414Rg 2) 1.414 Rg
height of 100km, the height of the other
3) 0.414Rg 4) 0.414 gR satellite is ( in km)
35. The escape velocity from the earth is 11 km/ 1) 19600 2)24600 3) 29600 4) 14600
s. The escape velocity from a planet having 41. A satellite of mass m revolves around the
twice the radius and same density as that of earth of radius R at a height x from its surface.
the earth is (in km/sec) If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the
1) 22 2) 15.5 3) 11 4) 5.5 surface of the earth, the orbital speed of the
36. An object of mass ‘m’ is at rest on earth’s satellite is
surface. Escape speed of this object is Ve . 1/2
gR 2 gR 2 gR
Same object is orbiting earth with h = R , then 1) gx 2) 3) 4)
R+x R+x R−x
escape speed is Ve1 . Then
162 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
42. Two satellites M and N go around the earth 49. Two satellites of masses 400 kg, 500 kg are
revolving around earth in different circular
in circular orbits at heights of RM and RN orbits of radii r1, r2 such that their kinetic
respectively from the surface of the earth. energies are equal. The ratio of r 1 to r2 is
Assuming the earth to be a uniform sphere 1) 4 : 5 2) 16 : 25 3) 5 : 4 4) 25 : 16
50. The kinetic energy needed to project a body
of radius RE , the ratio of velocities of the of mass m from earth’s surface (radius R ) to
VM infinity is
satellites V is mgR mgR
N
1) 2) 2mgR 3) mgR 4)
2 4
2
RM RN + RE RN + RE RN GEOSTATIONARY AND POLAR SATELLITES
1) 2) 3) R + R 4)
RN RM + RE M E RM 51. Orbital speed of geo-stationary satellite is
1) 8km/sec from west to east
43. A satellite of mass ‘m’ revolves round the earth 2) 11.2km/sec from east to west
of mass ‘M’ in a circular orbit of radius‘r’ with 3) 3.1km/sec from west to east
an angular velocity ‘ ω ’. If the angular 4) Zero
velocity is ω /8 then the radius LEVEL-1 (C.W) - KEY
of the orbit will be
1) 4r 2) 2r 3) 8r 4) r 1)2 2)4 3) 2 4)2 5)3 6)2
7)2 8)4 9)3 10)3 11)2 12)4
44. The moon revolves round the earth 13 times
13)2 14)1 15)3 16)3 17)2 18)1
in one year. If the ratio of sun-earth distance
19)4 20)1 21)2 22)2 23)1 24)4
to earth-moon distance is 392, then the ratio 25)2 26)1 27)4 28)2 29)4 30)1
of masses of sun and earth will be 31)1 32)1 33)3 34)4 35)1 36)3
1) 365 2) 356 × 10−12 3) 3.56 × 105 4) 1 37)4 38)2 39)1 40)1 41)2 42)2
45. A satellite is launched into a circular orbit of 43)1 44)3 45)2 46)3 47)3 48)1
radius R around the earth. A second satellite 49)1 50)3 51)3
is launched into an orbit of radius 1.01 R. The LEVEL-1(C.W) - HINTS
time period of the second satellite is larger dA L
than that of the first one by approximately 1. =
dt 2 M
1) 0.5% 2) 1.5% 3) 1% 4) 3%
2. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2α r 3
46. An astronaut orbiting in a spaceship round the
earth has a centripetal acceleration of 3. For 29 days - A, For 1 day - A/29 ,
For 1 week - 7A/29,
2.45m / s 2 . The height of spaceship from
∆T 3 ∆R
earth’s surface is (R= radius of earth) 4. T 2α r 3 , T ×100 = 2 R ×100
1) 3R 2) 2R 3) R 4) R / 2
3
ENERGY OF SATELLITES T r 2
47. A satellite moves around the earth in a circular 5. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2α r 3 , 1 = 2
T2 r1
orbit with speed ‘v’. If ‘m’ is mass of the
satellite then its total energy is 3
T r 2
1 1 3 6. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2α r 3 , 1 = 2
1) mv2 2) mv2 3) – mv2 4) mv2 T2 r1
2 2 2
48. The K.E. of a satellite in an orbit close to the 7. From conservation of angular momentum
surface of the earth is E. Its max K.E. so as mv r = Constant, v1r1 =v 2 r2
to escape from the gravitational field of the 8. Time period does not depend upon the mass of the
earth is. satellite
1) 2E 2) 4E 3) 2 2 E 4) 2 E
NARAYANAGROUP 163
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
r3 28. W = GPE2 − GPE1 ; ∆GPE = mgh
9. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T =2π h
GM 1+
10. Gravitational force does not depend upon the R
medium between the masses. 29. The gravitational field intensity at a point inside the
spherical shell is zero.
Gm1m2 Fg × R 2 1 1
11. Fg = ⇒ m2 = Gm
GMm
R2 30. W=T.E 2 − T .E1 = −
1 2 r2 r1
Gm1m2 4 31. Ve = 2 gR ⇒ Ve ∝ gR
12. F= 2
; Here m = π R 3
R 3
2GM 4
32. Ve = but M = π R ρ
3
13. Gravitational force provides centripetal force.
R 3
G × m (1 − x ) mx 1
14. F = is maximum when x = R
R2 2 33. h = Here n = 2
n −1
2
R2 d
( )
gh
= 16. g ' = g 1 − 34. V = Ve −V0 = 2gR − gR = gR 2 −1
15. g
( R + h) ;
2
R
1 Gmn
35. Ve ∝ R ρ ; 36. 2 mv0 − ( R+h ) = O ;
2
GM M
17. g = 2 ⇒ g α 2
R R
37. V = Ve2 − 2V02
18. g − Rω cos λ = 0 , given λ = 60 , Find ω
2 2 0
38. From the surface of earth
u2 1 Escape velocity v1 =
2GM
19. Rmax = ⇒ Rmax ∝ R
g g
1 GMm
mv 22 − =0
G M G M 2 2R
20. x = , y =
(R + h )
2
R 2
GM 1 GM 1
39. V0 = ⇒ V0 ∝ ; 40. V0 = R+h
⇒ V0 ∝
d
r r R+h
x=
m2 GM gR 2 GM 1
21. distance of null point +1 41. V0 = = ;42. V0 = R+h
⇒V0 ∝
m1 R+h R+x R+h
1
∝ r3 ⇒ω α
d 2 2
x= 43. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T
m2 r3
22. distance of null point +1
m1 r3
44. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2α
r Gm r G m1 M
23. I1 = 2 2 and I 2 = − ∆T 3 ∆r
d2 45. T ∝ R ⇒ × 100 = × 100
3 2
d
T 2 r
Gm1m2
24. GPE (U ) = Use, U net = U 1 + U 2 + U 3 2
gR 1 2
r12
46. a = ; 47.TE = -KE = - mv
(R + h )
2
2
25. W = GPE2 − GPE1 Here, GPE = G m1 m 2
K 2 gR
48. K = gR ⇒ K e = 2 K 0
r12 e
0
mgh
26. ∆GPE = GMm m
1+
h 49. KE = ⇒ KE ∝ ⇒ m ∝ r
2r r
R
1
27. W = m ( ∆V ) + ∆KE 50. KE = mVe2 ; 51. Vo = g(R+h)
2
164 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
8. A planet moves around the sun in elliptical
LEVEL - I (H.W) orbit. When earth is closest from the sun, it is
at a distance r having a speed v. When it is at
KEPLER’S LAWS a distance 4r from the sun its speed is
1. In planetary motion, the areal velocity of v v
position vector of a planet depends on angular 1) 4v 2) 3) 2v 4)
4 2
velocity (ω ) and the distance of the planet
from sun (r). If so, the correct relation for areal 9. A planet of mass ‘m’ is in an elliptical orbit
velocity is (2003E) about the sun ( m << M ) with an orbital time
dA dA period ‘T’. If ‘A’ be the area of the orbit then
1) ∝ ωr 2) ∝ ω2 r
dt dt its angular momentum is
dA dA 2mA mA
3) ∝ ωr 2 4) ∝ ωr 1) 2) mAT 3) 4) 2mAT
dt dt T 2T
2. If a and b are the nearest and farthest LAW OF GRAVITATION
distances of a planet from the sun and the 10. The gravitational force between two particles
planet is revolving in elliptical orbit, then of masses m1 and m2 seperated by certain
square of the time period of revolution of that
planet is proportional to distance in air medium is F. If they
are taken to vacuum and separated by the
3) ( a + b ) 4) ( a − b )
3 3
1) a 3 2) b3 same distance, then the gravitational force
3. Let ‘A’ be the area swept by the line joining between them will be
the earth and the sun during Feb 2007. The 1) greater than F 2) less than F
area swept by the same line during the first 3) F 4) Zero
week of that month is 11. The mass of a ball is four times the mass of
1) A/4 2) 7A/29 3) A 4) 7A/30 another ball. When these balls are separated
4. The period of a satellite in an orbit of radius by a distance of 10cm, the gravitational force
R is T. Its period of revolution in an orbit of between them is 6.67 ×10−7 N . The masses of
radius 4R will be the two balls are ( in kg)
1) 2T 2) 2 2T 3) 4T 4) 8T 1) 10 , 20 2) 5 , 20 3) 20 , 30 4) 20 , 40
5. The period of revolution of an earth's satellite 12. Gravitational force between two point masses
close to the surface of earth is 60 minutes. m and M separated by a distance r is F. Now
The period of another earth's satellite in an if a point mass 3m is placed next to m, the
orbit at a distance of three times earth's radius force on M due to m becomes
from its surface will be (in minutes) 1) F 2) 2F 3) 3F 4) 4F
1) 90 2) 90 × 8 3) 270 4) 480 13. Three uniform spheres each of mass m and
6. If a planet of mass m is revolving around the diameter D are kept in such a way that each
sun in a circular orbit of radius r with time touches the other two, then magnitude of the
period T, then mass of the sun is gravitational force on any one sphere due to
1) 4π 2r 3 / GT 2) 4π 2r3 / GT 2 the other two is
3G m 2 2 3G m 2 3G m 2 3G m 2
3) 4π 2 r / GT 4) 4π 2r3 / G2T 2 1)
D2
2)
D2
3) 4)
D2
4D 2
7. The period of revolution of a planet around the 14. A 3 kg mass and a 4 kg mass are placed on x
sun in a circular orbit is same as that and y axes at a distance of 1 metre from
of period of similar planet revolving around a the origin and a 1 kg mass is placed at the
star of twice the radius of first orbit and ‘M’ is origin. Then the resultant gravitational force
the mass of the sun and mass of star is on 1 kg mass is
1) 2M 2) 4M 3) 8M 4) 16M 1) 7G 2) G 3) 5G 4) 3G
NARAYANAGROUP 165
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITATIONAL FIELD INTENSITY
GRAVITY AND ITS VARIATION 23. There are two bodies of masses 100Kg and
15. The height at which the value of g is half that 1000Kg separated by a distance 1m. The
on the surface of earth of radius R is intensity of gravitational field at the mid point
1) R 2) 2R 3) 0.414R 4) 0.75R of the line joining them will be
16. The depth at which the value of g becomes 1) 2.4 ×10−6 N / kg 2) 2.4 ×10−7 N / kg
25% of that at the surface of earth is (in Km) 3) 2.4 ×10−8 N / kg 4) 2.4×10−9 N / kg
1)4800 2)2400 3) 3600 4) 1200 24. Masses 4 kg and 36 kg are 16 cm apart. The
17. If the radius of earth decreases by 10%, the point where the gravitational field due to them
mass remaining unchanged, then the is zero is
acceleration due to gravity 1)6 cm from 4 kg mass 2)4 cm from 4 kg mass
1) decreases by 19% 2) increases by 19% 3)1.8 cm from 36 kg mass 4)9 cm from each mass
3) decreases by more than 19% 25. Two particles of masses 4Kg and 8Kg are
4) increases by more than 19% kept at x = - 2m and x = 4m respectively. Then,
18. The acceleration due to gravity at the poles the gravitational field intensity at the origin is
is 10ms −2 and equatorial radius is 6400km for 1) G 2) 2G 3) G/2 4) G/4
the earth. Then the angular velocity of rotation 26. Three particles each of mass m are kept at
of the earth about its axis so that the weight the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side
L. The gravitational field at the centre due to
of a body at the equator reduces to 75% is
these particles is
1 1 1 1
rads -1 4)
1) 1600 rads -1 2) 800 rads-1 3) rads-1 3GM 9GM 2GM
400 200 1) Zero 2) 3) 4)
L2 L2 L2
19. The maximum horizontal range of a projectile GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL,
on the earth is R. Then for the same velocity
of projection, its maximum range on another
POTENTIAL ENERGY
27. Three particles each of mass m are placed at
5R
planet is . Then, ratio of acceleration due the corners of an equilateral triangle of side
4
b. The gravitational potential energy of the
to gravity on that planet and on the earth is
system of particles is
1) 5:4 2) 4:5 3) 25:16 4) 16:25
20. A particle hanging from a massless spring −3Gm2 −Gm2 −3Gm2 −Gm2
1) 2) 3) 4)
stretches it by 2 cm at earth’s surface. How 2b 2b b b
much will the same particle stretch the spring 28. If W is the weight of a satellite on the surface
at a height of 2624 Km from the surface of of the earth, then the energy required to launch
the earth? (Radius of earth = 6400 Km) that satellite from the surface of earth into a
1) 1cm 2) 2cm 3) 3cm 4) 4cm circular orbit of radius 3R is (here R is the
21. The value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ radius of earth)
on the surface of a planet with radius double 1) 5WR/6 2) 6WR/5 3) 2WR/3 4) 3WR/2
that of earth and same mean density as that 29. A body of mass m is lifted from the surface of
of the earth is ( g e = acceleration due to earth to a height equal to R/3 where R is the
radius of earth, potential energy of the body
gravity on the surface of earth)
increases by
1) g p = 2ge 2) g p = ge / 2 3) g p = ge / 4 4) g p = 4ge 1) mgR/3 2) mgR/4 3) 2mgR/3 4) mgR/9
22. If g is acceleration due to gravity on the 30. An object of mass 2 Kg is moved from infinity
surface of the earth, having radius R, the to a point P. Initially that object was at rest
height at which the acceleration due to gravity but on reaching P its speed is 2m/s. The
reduces to g/2 is workdone in moving that object is -4J.
( )
R Then potential at P is ...........J/Kg.
1) R/2 2) 2R 3) 4) 2 −1 R 1) 8 2) - 8 3) 4 4) - 4
2
166 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
31. If mass of earth is M, radius is R, and should be given to the space craft so that it
gravitational constant is G, then workdone to might escape the earth’s gravitational pull
take 1Kg mass from earth surface to infinity 1) 20.2Kms −1 2) 3.25Kms−1 3) 8Kms −1 4) 11.2Kms−1
will be 40. If the escape velocity on earth is 11.2 km/s,
GM GM GM
2GM its value for a planet having double the radius
1) 2) 3) 4) and 8 times the mass of earth is..(in km/sec)
2R R 2R
R
32. A body of mass m is placed on the earth surface 1) 11.2 2) 22.4 3) 5.6 4) 8
is taken to a height of h = 3R, then, change in 41. The escape velocity of a body from earth
gravitational potential energy is surface is Ve . The escape velocity of the
mgR 2mgR 3mgR mgR same body from a height equal to 7R from
1) 2) 3) 4) earth surface will be
4 3 4 6
33. A body is released from height 5R where R is Ve Ve Ve Ve
1) 2) 3) 4)
the radius of the earth. Then that body reaches 2 2 2 2 4
the ground with a velocity equal to 42. Escape velocity of a body from the surface of
5 gR 3 gR the earth is V1 and from an altitude equal to
1) 2) 3) 5gR 4) 3gR
3 5 twice the radius of the earth , escape velocity
34. The difference in PE of an object of mass 10kg is V2 . Then,
when it is taken from a height of 6400km to
12800 km from the surface of the earth is 1) V1 =V2 2) V1 = 7 V2 3) V1 = 3V2 4) V1 = 2 V2
(M E = 6 ×1024 kg )
EARTH SATELLITES
43. The ratio of the orbital speeds of two satellites
1) 1.045 × 108 J 2) 1.565 × 108 J of the earth if the satellites are at heights
3) 2.65 × 108 J 4) 4.5 × 108 J 6400km and 19200km (Radius of the earth =
6400 km)
35. If the gravitational potential energy of a body
at a distance r from the centre of the earth is 1) 2 :1 2) 3 :1 3) 2:1 4) 3:1
U, then its weight at that point is 44. An artificial satellite is revolving in a circular
orbit at height of 1200 km above the surface
U2 U of the earth. If the radius of the earth is
1) U 2) 3) U 2r 4)
r r 6400km and mass is 6 ×1024 kg, the orbital
ESCAPE & ORBITAL SPEEDS
36. The escape velocity of an object on a planet velocity is ( G = 6.67 ×10−11 Nm 2 / kg 2 )
whose radius is 4times that of the earth and ‘g’ 1) 7.26kms −1 2) 4.26kms −1
value 9 times that on the earth, in kms-1, is 3) 9.26kms −1 4) 2.26kms −1
1) 33.6 2) 67.2 3) 16.8 4) 25.2
45. The mean radius of the orbit of a satellite is 4
37. The escape velocity of a sphere of mass ‘m’ is times as great as that of a parking orbit of
given by the earth. Then its period of revolution around
2GMm 2GM 2GMm 2GM the earth is
1) Re
2) Re2
3) Re2
4) Re 1) 4 days 2) 8 days 3) 16 days 4) 96 days
46. If the mass of earth were 4 times the present
38. A body is projected up with a velocity equal to mass, the mass of the moon were half the
3/4th of the escape velocity from the surface present mass and the moon were revolving
of the earth. The height it reaches is (Radius round the earth at twice the present distance,
of the earth is R) the time period of revolution of the moon would
1) 10R/9 2) 9R/7 3) 9R/8 4) 10R/3 be (in days)
39. A space craft is launched in a circular orbit
1) 56 2 2) 28 2 3) 14 2 4) 7 2
very close to earth. What additional velocity
NARAYANAGROUP 167
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
47. A satellite of mass ‘m’ revolves around earth of 55. The height of geo-stationary satellite above
mass M in a circular orbit of radius,’r’ with angular the centre of earth is (in km)
velocity ω . If radius of the orbit becomes 9r, then 1) 6400 2) 12800 3) 36000 4) 42000
angular velocity of this orbit is
WEIGHTLESSNESS
ω ω 56. How much faster than its normal rate should
1) 9ω 2) 3) 27ω 4)
9 27 the earth rotate about its axis so that the
48. An artificial satellite of mass ‘m’ is revolving weight of the body at the equator becomes
around in a circular orbit of radius ‘r’. If the
mass of earth is M, angular momentum of the zero (R = 6.4 ×106 m, g = 9.8m / s 2 ) (in times)
satellite with respect to the centre of earth is 1)nearly17 2)nearly12 3)nearly 10 4)nearly 14
(2012M) LEVEL-1(H.W) - KEY
1) GM m2 r 2) 2m GMr 1) 3 2) 3 3) 1 4) 4 5) 4 6) 2
7) 3 8) 2 9) 1 10) 3 11) 2 12) 1
GM 13) 4 14) 3 15) 3 16) 1 17) 4 18) 1
3) 2M Gmr 4)
r 19) 2 20) 1 21) 1 22) 4 23) 2 24) 2
49. Two satellites of masses 400kg, 500 kg are 25) 3 26) 1 27) 3 28) 1 29) 2 30) 2
revolving around earth in different circular
31) 2 32) 3 33) 1 34) 1 35) 4 36) 2
orbits of radii r1 , r2 such that their kinetic 37) 4 38) 2 39) 2 40) 2 41) 3 42) 3
energies are equal. The ratio of r1 , r2 is 43) 1 44) 1 45) 2 46) 2 47) 4 48) 1
1) 5 : 4 2) 16:25 3) 45 : 4 4) 25:16 49) 1 50) 2 51) 3 52) 4 53) 1 54) 3
50. Angular momentum of a satellite revolving 55) 4 56) 1
round the earth in a circular orbit at a height LEVEL-1(H.W) - HINTS
R above the surface is L. Here R is radius of dA L dA
the earth. The magnitude of angular 1. = ⇒ ∝ vr ∝ ω r 2
momentum of another satellite of the same dt 2m dt
mass revolving very close to the surface of 2. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2 ∝ r 3
the earth is dA A A′ A
3. = constant ⇒ = ⇒ A′ =
1)L/2 2)L/ 2 3) 2 L 4)2L dt 28 7 4
ENERGY OF SATELLITES 4. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2 ∝ r3
51. The K.E. of a satellite is 104 J . Its P.E. is 5. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2 ∝ r3
1) −104 J 2) 2 ×104 J 3) −2×104 J 4) −4×104 J GMm r3
6. From Kepler’s 3rd law, mrw = T = 2π
2
2
52. Energy required to move a body of mass ‘m’ r GM
from an orbit of radius 3R to 4R is GMm r3
7. From Kepler’s 3rd law, mrw = = π
2
T 2
GMm GMm GMm GMm
r2 GM
1) 2R 2) 6R 3) 12 R 4) 24 R 1
8. From Kepler’s 2nd law, rv = Constant
53. K.E. of an orbiting satellite is K. The minimum 2
additional K.E. required so that it goes to dA L
infinity is 9. =
dt 2m
1) K 2) 2K 3) 3K 4) K/2 10. Gravitational force does not depend upon the
GEO-STATIONARY AND POLAR medium between the masses.
SATELLITES Gm1m2
54. Imagine a geo-stationary satellite of earth 11. Fg = Given, m2 = 4m1
R2
which is used as an inter continental telecast G m 1m 2
station. At what height will it have to be 12. F = ; Gravitational force between
r2
established two point masses is independent of the presence
1) 10 3 m 2) 6.4×103m 3) 35.94 ×106 m 4)infinity of other masses.
168 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
13. Gravitational force on one sphere due to the other
32. ∆GPE = mgh
two is F = F1 + F2 + 2 F1 F2 Cosθ = 3F1
2 2
h
1+
Gm 2 3Gm 2 R
But F1 = 2 ⇒ F = (Q F1 = F2 ) 33. From conservation of energy, ( P.E + K.E ) on
D D2 the surface of the earth = P.E at height 5R
3G 4G GMm 1 −GMm 5 gR
θ = 900 , F1 = 12 , F2 = 12 − + mv 2 =
( R + 5R ) ⇒ v = 3
14.
R 2
F = F1 + F2 + 2 F1 F2 Cosθ
2 2
1 1
34. P.E = −GMm −
gh R2 R1 R2
=
15.
( R + h) Given h= R/2 35. As U =mgr, weight mg = U/r
2
g
36. ve = 2 gR ⇒ ve ∝ gR
d 25
16. g ′ = g 1 − Given g ′ = g
R 100 37. v =
2GM
Escape velocity does not depend
GM 1 R
17. g = 2
⇒ g ∝ 2 upon the mass of the projected body.
R R
75 1 2 mgh
mve =
18. gφ = g − Rω2 Given gφ =
100
g 38. 2 1+ ; 39. v = 2gR − gR;v = gR
h ( 2 −1 )
2 R
u 1
19. Rmax = ⇒ Rmax ∝ 2GM v1 M1 R2
g g 40. ve = ⇒ =
R v2 M 2 R1
gh R2
mg=Kx , x ∝ g Here, = 2GM
20.
( R + h)
2
g 41. ve =
R
4
21. g= Gπ R ρ ⇒ g ∝ R ρ 2GM 2GM
3 at height v1e = =
gh R2 R+h R + 7R
= g
Given g h = 1 2 GmM
22.
( R + h) 42. 2 mv = R + h ;
2
g 2
( )
G × 1000 G ×100
I = − GM 1
23. (1/ 2 ) 2 (1/ 2 )2 43 . v0 = ⇒ v0 ∝
R+h R+h
x=
r
GM 2π r
and T =
GM
m2 44. v 0 = ; 45. v0 =
24. Distance of null point +1 R+h R+h v0
m1
r r r r r r r T 2 = 4π 2
r3
⇒ Tα
r3
25. I = I1 + I 2 ; 26. I = I1 + I 2 + I 3 = 0 46.
GM M
Gm m 1
27. GPE (U ) = r Use, U net = U 1 + U 2 + U 3
1 2
47. From Kepler’s 3rd law, T 2 ∝ r 3 ⇒ ω α
2
12 r3
28. w = Total energy in orbit - gravitational potential r m
energy on surface of planet L = mv0 r ; 49. KE1 = KE2 L = mvr and r = m
1 1 2
48.
mgh 2 1
29. ∆GPE = 50. L = mv0 r ; 51. P.E. = −2( K .E.)
h
1+
R GMm KE 2 v 2e
W = (U2 −U1 ) ⇒U =− =
30. W = m ( ∆v ) + ∆KE
52. ; 53. KE1 v 2o
2r
1
31. P.E of 1kg mass placed at the earth surface
(R + h)
3
T 2 gR 2 3
GM 54. T = 2π ⇒ h= −R
=− 4π
2
. Its P.E at infinity = 0. GM
R
GM 55. R + h = (6400 + 36000)km ≅ 42000km
∴ Workdone = ∆ P .E = R 56. g1 = g − Rω 2
NARAYANAGROUP 169
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
midpoint of a side and (ii) at the centre of the
LEVEL - II (C.W) triangle are, respectively.
4GM 2 4GM 2
1) 0, 2) ,0
KEPLER’S LAWS 3a 2 3a 2
2 2
1. If the Earth shrinks such that its density 3 GM GM
3) , 4) 0, 0
becomes 8 times to the present value, a2 a2
then new duration of the day in hours 8. Two masses ‘M’ and ‘4M’ are at a distance
‘r’ apart on the line joining them, ‘P’ is point
will be (2008M)
where the resultant gravitational force is zero
1) 24 2) 12 3) 6 4) 3 (such a point is called as null point). The
2. A planet moves around the sun. At a given distance of ‘P’ from the mass ‘M’ is
point P, it is closest from the sun at a distance
r r 2r 4r
d1 ,and has a speed V1 . At another point Q, 1) 5 2) 3) 4)
3 3 5
when it is farthest from the sun at a distance 9. If the mass of one particle is increased by 50
d 2 , its speed will be % and the mass of another particle is
d12V1 d2V1 d1V1 d22V1 decreased by 50 %, the force between them
1) 2) d 3) d 4) 2 1)decreases by 25% 2)decreases by75 %
d2 1 2 d1
3. If a graph is plotted between T 2 and r 3 for 3) increases by 25% 4)does not change
a planet then, its slope will be 10. If the distance between the sun and the earth
2
T 4π 2 GM is increased by three times , then the
1) 2) gravitational force between the two will
GM 4π 2
1) remain constant 2) decrease by 63%
θ 3) 4π GM 4) Zero 3) increase by 63% 4) decrease by 89%
3
r 11. Two lead balls of masses m and 5m having
4. Two different artificial satellites orbiting with radii R and 2R are separated by 12R. If
same time period around the earth having they attract each other by gravitational
angular momenta 2:1. The ratio of masses of force, the distance covered by small sphere
the satellites is before they touch each other is
1) 10 R 2) 7.5 R 3) 9 R 4) 2.5 R
1) 2:1 2) 1:2 3) 1:1 4)1:3
12. Three identical particles each of mass “m”
5. The ratio of Earth’s orbital angular momentum
are arranged at the corners of an equilateral
(about sun) to its mass is 4 .4 × 1015 m2s–1. triangle of side “L”. If they are to be in
The area enclosed by the earth’s equilibrium, the speed with which they must
orbit is approximately revolve under the influence of one another’s
1) 1 × 1022 m2 2) 3 × 1022 m2 gravity in a circular orbit circumscribing the
3) 5 × 10 m22 2
4) 7 × 1022 m2 triangle is
LAW OF GRAVITATION 1)
3Gm
2)
Gm
3)
Gm
4)
3Gm
6. Gravitational force between two point masses L L 3L L2
13. Two particles each of mass ‘m’ are placed
m and M separated by a distance r is F. Now
at A and C are such AB=BC=L. The
if a point mass 3m is placed next to m, the gravitational force on the third particle placed
total force on M will be at D at a distance L on the
1) F 2) 2F 3) 3F 4) 4F perpendicular bisector of the line AC is
7. If three particles,each of mass M are placed Gm2 Gm2
1) 2 along BD 2) along DB
at the three corners of an equilateral triangle L 2L2
of side a, the force exerted by this system on Gm2 Gm2
another particle of mass M placed (i) at the 3) 2 along AC 4) 2 along BD
L L
170 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
ACCELERATION DUE TO 1) 4 gR 2) 2gR 3) gR 4) 4gR
GRAVITY AND ITS VARIATION
14. The height at which the value of acceleration 21. A projectile is fired vertically upwards from
due to gravity becomes 50% of that at the the surface of the earth with a velocity Kve ,
surface of the earth. (Radius of the earth =
where ve is the escape velocity and K<1.If R
6400 km) is
1) 2650 2) 2430 3) 2250 4) 2350 is the radius of the earth, the maximum height
15. The radius and density of two artificial to which it will rise measured from the centre
of the earth will be(neglect air resistance)
satellites are R1 , R2 and ρ1, ρ 2 respectively..
The ratio of acceleration due to gravities on 1− K 2 R
1) 2)
them will be R 1− K 2
R1ρ2 R
R2 ρ2 R1ρ1 R2ρ1 3) R(1 − K 2 ) 4)
1) R ρ 2) R ρ 3) R ρ 4) R ρ 1+ K 2
1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2
22. If the radius of earth shrinks by 0.2%
16. A man weigh ‘W’ on the surface of earth and without any change in its mass , escape
his weight at a height ‘R’ from surface of earth velocity from the surface of the earth
is (R is Radius of earth) 1) increases by 0.2% 2) decreases by 0.2%
W W 3) increases by 0.1% 4) increases by 0.4%
1) 2) 3) W 4) 4W
4 2 23. If d is the distance between the centres of
17. The acceleration due to gravity at the latitude
the earth of mass M1 and moon of mass M2,
450 on the earth becomes zero if the
angular velocity of rotation of earth is then the velocity with which a body should
2 2g 5R be projected from the mid point of the line
1) 2) 2gR 3) 4)
gR R 2 joining the earth and the moon, so that it just
18. Acceleration due to gravity on moon is 1/6 of
escapes is
the acceleration due to gravity on earth. If the
ratio of densities of earth and moon is 5/3, then G(M1 + M2 ) G(M 1 + M 2 )
1) 2)
radius of moon in terms of radius of earth will d 2d
be 2G (M 1 + M 2 ) 4G (M 1 + M 2 )
3) 4)
1 d d
5 1 3
1) Re 2) Re 3) Re 4) Re
18 6 18 2 3 24. The escape velocity of a planet having mass 6
ESCAPE SPEED times and radius 2 times as that of earth is
19. The mass of a planet is half that of the earth
1) 3ve 2) 3ve 3) 2ve 4) 2ve
and the radius of the planet is one fourth that
of earth. If we plan to send an artificial satellite 25. If ‘ ve ’ is the escape velocity of a body from a
from the planet, the escape velocity planet of mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’. Then the
will be, ( Ve = 11kms −1 ) velocity of the satellite revolving at height ‘h’
from the surface of the planet will be
1)11kms −1 2) 5.5 kms −1
R 2R R+h R
3) 15.55 kms −1 4) 7.78 kms −1 1) ve 2) ve 3) ve 4) ve 2 ( R + h )
R+h R+h R
20. If a rocket is fired with a velocity, V = 2 gR 26. A particle falls towards earth from infinity. The
near the earth’s surface and goes upwards, its velocity with which it reaches earth’s surface is
speed in the inter-stellar space is 1) v = 2gR 2) v = 2gR
3) v = gR 4) v = R/g
NARAYANAGROUP 171
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
EARTH SATELLITES 2g(n +1)R 2 gR 2gnR
27. Two satellites P, Q are revolving around earth 1) 2) 3) 4) 2 gnR
n n +1 n +1
in different circular orbits. The velocity of P 33. Three particles of equal mass ‘m’ are situated
is twice the velocity of Q. If the height of P at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side
‘L’. The work done in increasing the side of
from earth’s surface is 1600 km. The radius
the triangle to 2L is
of orbit of Q is ( R =6400 km).
2G2m Gm2 3Gm2 3Gm2
1)1600km 2)20000km 3)32000km 4)40000km 1) 2) 3) 4)
2L 2L 2L L
28. A planet is revolving around the sun. Its
34. A small body is at a distance ‘r’ from the
distance from the sun at apogee is rA and that centre of mercury, where ‘r’ is greater than
at perigee is rP . The masses of planet and sun the radius of Mercury. The energy required
to shift the body from r to 2r measured from
are ‘m’ and M respectively, VA is the velocity the centre is E. The energy required to shift it
of planet at apogee and VP is at perigee from 2r to 3r will be
respectively and T is the time period of E E E
revolution of planet round the sun, then identify 1) E 2) 3) 4)
2 3 4
the wrong answer. 35. Escape velocity of a body of 1kg mass on a
π2 π2 planet is 100m/s. Gravitational potential
1) T = ( rA + rP ) 2) T = ( rA + rP )
2 3 2 3
2Gm 2GM energy of the body at the planet is
1) -5000J 2) -1000J 3) -2400J 4) 5000J
3) v ArA = v P rP 4) v A < v P ; rA > rP 36. By what percent the energy of the satellite
29. Suppose the gravitational force varies has to be increased to shift it from an orbit of
inversely as the nth power of distance, then 3r
the time period of a planet in circular orbit of radius ‘r’ to
2
radius ‘R’ around the sun will be proportional 1) 66.7% 2) 33.3% 3) 15% 4) 20.3%
to (2004A) 37. At what height from the surface of earth, the
n +1 n −2 n −1 total energy of satellite is equal to its potential
1) 2)
3) R n 4) 2
2 2
R R R energy at a height 2R from the surface of earth
30. An artificial satellite is revolving around the (R = radius of earth )
earth in a circular orbit. Its velocity is one- 1) 2R 2) R/2 3) R/4 4) 4R
third of the escape velocity. Its height from GEO-STATIONARY SATELLITES
the earth’s surface is ( in Km) 38. A geo-stationary satellite is orbiting the earth
1) 22400 2) 12800 3) 3200 4) 1600 at a height 6R above the surface of the earth,
GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL ENERGY where R is the radius of earth. The time period
31. The work done to increase the radius of orbit of another satellite revolving around earth at a
of a satellite of mass ‘m’ revolving around a height 2.5 R from earth’s surface is
planet of mass M from orbit of radius R in to 1) 12 2hr 2) 12 hr 3) 6 2hr 4) 6 hr
another orbit of radius 3R is
2GMm GMm GMm GMm LEVEL-II (C.W) KEY
1) 2) 3) 4) 1)3 2)3 3)1 4)1 5)4 6)4
3R 3R 6R 24R 7)2 8)2 9)1 10)4 11)2 12)2
32. A stone is dropped from a height equal to nR, 13)2 14)1 15)3 16)1 17)3 18)1
where R is the radius of the earth, from the 19)3 20)2 21)2 22)3 23)4 24)1
surface of the earth. The velocity of the stone 25)4 26)2 27)3 28)1 29)1 30)1
on reaching the surface of the earth is 31)2 32)3 33)3 34)3 35)1 36)2
37)2 38)3
172 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
LEVEL-II (C.W)-HINTS 2
R W
1. Given m1 = m2 ⇒ V1d1 = V2 d2 16. W = mg ; W ′ = mg ′ = mg =
R+h 4
⇒ R13d1 = R23d 2 ⇒ R1 = 2R2
2g
17. 0 = g − Rω cos 45 ⇒ ω =
2 2 0
From law of conservation of angular momentum
R
2
T2 R2 4
I1ω1 = I 2ω2 ⇒ T = R 18. g = π GR ρ ⇒ g ∝ R ρ
1 1 3
2. From conservation of angular momentum 2 GM M
19. ve = ⇒ ve ∝
v r = Constant. R R
T 2 4π 2 20. According to the law of conservation of energy
=
3. Slope =
R 3 GM
(From Kepler’ss 3rd law)
[T .E ]Surface = [T .E ]int erstellarspace
dA L −GMm 1
4. = = constant.( From Kepler’ss 2nd law) ⇒
1
+ mv 2 = 0 + mv12
dt 2m R 2 2
5. Areal velocity = Area swept/time for one revolution
1
( ) 1
2
of earth about sun ⇒ mgR + m 2 gR = mv12
So, Area = (Areal velocity)(Time period) 2 2
1
L ⇒ mv12 = mgR ⇒ v12 = 2 gR ⇒ v1 = 2 gR
= ×365×86400 2
2m 21. According to the law of conservation of energy
GMm GM ( m + 2m)
6. F = 2 ; F′ = −
GMm 1
+ mK 2 v e2 = −
GMm
+0
r r2 R 2 R+h
7. Find individual forces and calculate resultant
2GM
Gm1m2 v 2e =
Use F = R
R2
v 2e K 2 v 2e v2 ( R)
d − + =− e
x= 2 2 2( R + h)
m2
8. +1 2GM
m1 22. ve =
R
m m
mm m + 1 m2 − 2 ∆v e 1 ∆R
F1 = G 1 2 2 and F = G 1 2
1
9. 2 ⇒ ve ∝ ⇒ × 100 = − × 100
d 2
d2 R ve 2 R
23. Using law of conservation of energy,
Gm1m2 m2 d eff
10. F = ; 11. x = ; Here deff = 9 R 1 2G m
R2 m1 + m2 m v e2 = (M1 + M 2 )
2 d
mv 2 F = Gm1m2 and r = L
12. 3F = ; v M p Re
L2 24. v =
p
r 3
e M e Rp
Gm 2
13. F1 = 2F , F = 2GM GM
2 L2 25. v e = , v=
R R+h
g
GM ⇒ g′ =
′
14. g = ( R + h)2
2
h ⇒
v
=
R
⇒ v = ve
R
1 + 2 ( R + h) 2( R + h)
R ve
4 26. The projecting body having same final velocity to
15. g = π GR ρ ⇒ g ∝ Rρ
3 reach projecting place. So, v = 2gR
NARAYANAGROUP 173
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
27. Given, vP = 2vQ LEVEL - II (H.W)
GM GM
=2 → rQ = 4rP KEPLER’S LAWS
rP rQ
1. Two satellites S1 and S2 are revolving round a
4π rA + rP
2 3
rA + rP planet in coplanar and concentric circular
28. T = Q r =
2
GM 2 2 orbits of radii R1 and R2 in the same direction
By the law of conservation of angular respectively. Their respective periods of
momentum v ArA = v P rP revolution are 1hr and 8 hr. The radius of the
orbit of satellite S1 is equal to 104 km. Their
1 2 mgh relative speed when they are closest, in kmph
k mv =
29. F = n , F = m r ω ; 30. 2 h
2
is :
r 1+
R π
31. Workdone = change in TE 1) × 104 2) π ×104 3) 2π ×104 4) 4π ×104
2
GMm GMm LAW OF GRAVITATION
Workdone = −
2R 6R 2. Two metal spheres each of radius ‘r’ are kept
1 2 mgh in contact with each other. If d is the density
mv = of the material of the sphere, then the
32. 2 h
1+ gravitational force between those spheres is
R
proportional to
−3Gm2 r2
33. Initial potential energy U i = 1) d r 2 6 2) d r 3)
2 4 d 2
4) 2
L
r4 d
3Gm2 3. Two lead spheres of same radius are in contact
Final potential energy U f = −
2L with each other. The gravitational force of
3Gm2 3Gm2 3Gm2 attraction between them is F. If two lead
W= U f − Ui = − −− = spheres of double the previous radius are in
2L L 2L
contact with each other, the gravitational force
34. E = U 2 − U1 of attraction between them will be
GMm GMm GMm 1) 2F 2) 32F 3) 8F 4) 16F
⇒− + = 4. The gravitational force between two bodies is
2R R 2R
decreased by 36% when the distance between
GMm GMm GMm
E1 = − + = them is increased by 3m. The initial distance
3R 2R 6R between them is
2GM GM 1) 6 m 2) 9 m 3) 12 m 4) 15 m
35. ve = = 100 ⇒ = 5000
5. Two particles of masses ‘m’ and ‘2m’ are at a
R R
GMm
distance ‘3r’ apart at the ends of a straight
∴ PE (U ) = − = −5000J line AB. C is the centre of mass of the system.
R
The magnitude of the gravitational force on a
−GMm −GMm −GMm unit mass placed at C due to the masses is
36. E = 2r
W = E2 − E1 =
2r1
, E2 =
2r2
7Gm 9Gm 3Gm
−GMm −GMm 1) Zero 2) 3) 4)
37. = r = R + h 4r 2
4r 2
2r 2
2r 3R
6. If the distance between two bodies is
(7 R ) increased by 25%, then the % change in the
3 3
T1 R
= 1
=
38. T2 R2
3
7R
3 gravitational force is
1) Decreases by 36% 2) Increases by 36%
2
3) Increases by 64% 4) Decreases by 64%
174 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
7. Three point masses each of mass ‘m’ rotate 14. The difference in the value of ‘g’ at poles and
in a circle of radius r with constant angular
3
velocity ω due to their mutual gravitational at a latitude is Rω 2 then latitude angle is
4
attraction. If at any instant, the masses are
on the vertex of an equilateral triangle of side 1) 600 2) 300 3) 450 4) 950
‘a’, then the value of ω is 15. A particle hanging from a spring stretches it
by 1 cm at earth’s surface. Radius of earth is
Gm 3Gm Gm 6400 km. At a place 800 km above the earth’s
1) 3 2) 3 3) 4) Zero
a a 3a3 surface, the same particle will stretch the
8. The angular momentum (L) of earth revolving spring by
round the sun is proportional to r n , where r is 1)0.79 cm 2)1.2 cm 3) 4 cm 4)17 cm
the orbital radius of the earth. The value of 16. A tunnel is dug along a diameter of the earth.
‘n’ is :(assume the orbit to be circular) The force on a particle of mass ‘m’ placed in
1 1 the tunnel at a distance x from the centre is
1) 2) 1 3) − 4) 2
2 2 GMem GM e m GM e m
9. Four particles of masses m, 2m,3m and 4m are GM e mR 3
1) x 2) x 3) 4)
placed at the corners of a square of side length R3 R2 R3 x x
a. The gravitational force on a particle of mass ESCAPE SPEED
m placed at the centre of the square is 17. The mass of the Earth is 9 times that of Mars.
The radius of the Earth is twice that of Mars.
Gm2 3 2Gm2 2 2Gm2 2Gm2
1) 4 2 2) 3) 4) The escape velocity of the Earth is 12 km/sec.
a2 a2 a2 a2 The escape velocity on Mars
ACCELERATION DUE TO is .... km/sec
GRAVITY AND ITS VARIATION 1) 4 2km / sec 2) 2 2km / sec
10. If the radius of the earth is made three times,
keeping the mass constant, then the weight of 3) 6 2km / sec 4) 8 2km / sec
a body on the earth’s surface will be as 18. The escape velocity of a body from earth is
compared to its previous value is 11.2 km/s. If a body is projected with a velocity
1)one third 2)one ninth 3)three times 4)nine times twice its escape velocity, then the velocity of
11. The difference in the value of ‘g’ at poles and the body at infinity is (in km/s)
at a place of latitude 450 is 1) 19.4 2) 194 3) 1.94 4) 0.194
19. A particle is kept at rest at a distance R
Rω 2 Rω 2 Rω 2 (Earth’s radius) above the earth’s surface. The
1) Rω 2 2) 3) 4)
2 4 3 minimum speed with which it should be
12. The angular velocity of earth’s rotation about projected so that it does not return is
its axis is ‘ ω ’. An object weighed by a spring
GM GM GM GM
balance gives the same reading at the equator 1) 2) 3) 4)
as at height ‘h’ above the poles . R 2R 3R 4R
The value of ‘h’ will be 20. 16 kg and 9 kg are separated by 25m. The
velocity with which a body should be projected
ω 2 R2 ω 2 R2 2ω 2 R 2 2ω 2 R 2 from the mid point of the line joining the two
1) 2) 3) 4)
g 2g g 3g masses so that it just escape is
13. The radius and acceleration due to gravity of 1) g 2) 2gR 3) G 4) 2 G
1 1 21. The escape velocity from earth is 11 km/
moon are and that of earth, the ratio of
4 5 sec.The escape velocity from a planet having
the mass of earth to mass of moon is nine times the radius and one third of density
1) 1:80 2) 80:1 3) 1:20 4) 20:1 as earth is ___ Km/sec
1) 11 2) 22 3 3) 33 3 4) 44 3
NARAYANAGROUP 175
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
EARTH SATELLITES vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 10
22. The speed of a satellite that revolves around cm is(approximately)
earth at a height 3R from earth’s surface is 1) 10 −13 J 2) 2 ×10−13 J 3) 4 ×10 −13 J 4) 10 −11 J
( g=10 m / s 2 at the surface of earth, radius of 30. The energy required to shift the body
earth R = 6400 km) (in kms-1) revolving around a planet from r to 2r is E
(measured from centre of planet). The energy
1) 2 2 2) 4 3) 4 2 4) 8
required to shift it from 2r to 4r is
23. If an artificial satellite is moving in a circular
orbit around earth with speed equal to one E E E
1) E 2) 3) 4)
2 3 4
fourth of Ve from earth, then height of the
31. By what percent, the energy of the satellite
satellite above the surface of the earth is has to be increased to shift it from an orbit of
1)7R 2) 4R 3) 3R 4) R radius ‘r’ to ‘3r’
24. Two satellites A and B go round a planet P in 1) 66.7% 2) 33.3% 3) 15% 4) 20.3%
circular orbits having radii 4R and R 32. At what height from the surface of earth, the
respectively. If the speed of the satellite A is total energy of satellite is equal to its potential
3V, the speed of the satellite B is energy at a height 3R from the
1) 12V 2) 6V 3) 4V 4)3V surface of earth ( R = radius of earth )
25. A satellite moving in a circular path of radius
1) 4R 2) 3R 3) 2R 4) R
‘r’ around earth have a time period T. If its
radius slightly increases by ∆r , the change in LEVEL-II(H.W) - KEY
its time period is 1)2 2)2 3)4 4)3 5)2 6)1
7)2 8)1 9) 1 10)2 11)2 12)2
3T T 13)2 14)2 15)1 16)1 17)1 18)1
1) ∆r 2) ∆r
2 r r 19)1 20)4 21)3 22)2 23)1 24)2
25)1 26)2 27)2 28)4 29)2 30)2
3T2 3T2 31)1 32)4
3) 2 r 2 ∆r 4) ∆r
2 r LEVEL-II(H.W) - HINTS
26. A satellite is orbiting earth in an orbit with a 2π R
velocity 4 km/sec, then acceleration due to 1. T 2α R 3 , V0 = T , Rel. velocity = V01 − V02
gravity at that height is (in ms-2 )
1) 0.4 2) 0.62 3) 0.87 4) 1.21 Gm1m2
2. F= , Here, m = (Vol)(den)
ENERGY OF SATELLITES, R2
GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL ENERGY 3. For solid spheres in contact Fα R 4
27. A stone is dropped from a height equal to 3R,
Gm1m2 1
above the surface of earth. The velocity of 4. F= 2
⇒F∝ 2
stone on reaching the earth’s surface is R R
Gm1m2
1) g
R
2)
3
gR 3) 2gR 4) gR 5. F= , Fnet = F2 − F1
2 2 R2
28. If ‘g’ is acceleration due to gravity on the
F1 d22 ∆F F −F
earth’s surface, the gain in the potential 6. = 2; ×100 = 1 2 ×100
F2 d1 F F1
energy of an object of mass ‘m raised from
the surface of the earth to a height equal to 7. F = F12 + F22 + 2 F1 F2 cos θ
the radius ‘R’ of the earth is
1) 2 mgR 2) mgR 3) mgR/4 4) mgR/2
3GMm a
29. The work done in bringing three particles each 2
= mrω 2 Here, r =
of mass 10 gm from large distance to the a 3
176 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
mv 2 GMm ve GM
8. L = mvr ; = 2 23. v = 4 , v0 = R + h
r r
9. Find individual forces and calculate resultant
GM v RB
10. W = mg =
GMm 24. v = ⇒ A=
R vB RA
r2
25. According to Kepler’s II law, T 2α R 3
11. gφ = g − Rω cos φ , g poles = g
2 2
differentiating on both sides w.r.t ‘r’
12. F = mg ′, g ′ = g − Rω 2 cos 2 φ ∆ T 3 ∆r
=
T 2 r
GM M
13. g = 2
⇒ g α 2 2
R R vh R R
26. = , gh = g
3 vs R+h R+h
14. Rω cos λ = Rω 2
2 2
4
1 2 ( mg ) Rh ( mg ) R ( nR )
27. 2 mv = R + h = R + nR
( )
2
gh R
15. e∝g Here, =
( R + h)
2
g
1 1
GM ' m M' M 28. P.E. = −GMm −
16. F= 2 but 3 = 3 R1 R2
x x R
3Gm1m2 3Gm1m2
vm M m Re 29. W = −U = − − =
17. = r r
ve M e Rm
−GMm
18. velocity at infinity 30. TE = ;
2r
v∞ = v 2 − v 2e = 2 (11.2 ) − (11.2 )
2 2
−GMm ∆E
31. TE = ; × 100%
2r E
GMm
19. F = ( R + h )2 GMm 1
= mv 02
32. T.E = P.E ;
( R + h)
2
2
Mv 20
and centripetal force F = ( R + h ) LEVEL - III
GMm Mv 20 1. A point mass is orbiting a significant mass M
⇒ =
( R + h)
2
( R + h) lying at the focus of the elliptical orbit having
major and minor axes given by 2a and 2b
4G ( M 1 + M 2 ) respectively. Let r be the distance between
20. v = ; the mass M and the end point of major axis.
d
Velocity of the particle can be given as
21. vα R ρ
ab GM ab GM
g 1) 2)
22. ‘g’ at a height 4 R = r a3 r b3
16
g 2ab GM
and v 0 = g ( 4 R ) → ( 4R ) ab GM
4) r a + b
3
16 3)
2r r 3 2
NARAYANAGROUP 177
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
2. A planet of mass m revolves in elliptical orbit
T 2 T 2T
around the sun so that its maximum and 1) 3 2) T 3) 4)
minimum distances from the sun are equal to 6 8 3 3π
ra and rp respectively. The angular momentum 8. A homogeneous spherical heavenly body has
of this planet relative to the sun is a uniform and very narrow frictionless duct
along its diameter. Let mass of the body be M
GMrp ra 2GMrp ra
1) L = m 2) L = m
and diameter be D. A point mass m moves
(r p + ra ) (rp + ra ) smoothly inside the duct. Force
(r + ra )
exerted on this mass when it is at a distance
Gmrp ra
3) L = M
s from the centre of the body is
4) L = M
p
(r + ra ) Gmrp ra
GMm πGMm s 8GMm
p
GMm
3. A satellite moving in elliptical orbit around earth .
1) 2)
( ) s
( )
3 3) 4) −
2
as shown. The minimum and maximum distance s 2 D / 2 D3 R s
of the satellite from earth are 3 units and 5 9. Two concentric shells of different masses m1
units respectively. The distance of satellite from
earth when it is at ‘P’ is —— ( units ) and m2 are having a sliding particle of mass
m . The forces on the particle at position
P 1) 4
I , II and III are
2) 3
E O
II
S Q r2
3) 3.75
m2 III Gm1 G( m1 + m2 ) m
4) 6
m1 r3 1) 0, 2
, 2
r2 r1
4. The longest and the shortest distance of a planet r1 Gm2 Gm1
from sun is R1 and R2 . Distance from sun when 2) r 2 , 0, r 2
2 1
it is normal to major axis of orbit is
I
R +R R +R 2 2
1 R1R2
2 2R1R2 G(m1 + m2 )m Gm2 G(m1 + m2 )m G(m2 )m
1) 1 2 2) 3) R + R 4) R + R , 2 ,0 4) , ,0
2 2 1 2 1 2 3) r1
2
r2 r1
2
r2
2
5. A satellite is orbiting just above the surface of
a planet of average density D with period T. If 10. Suppose a vertical tunnel is dug along the
G is the universal gravitational constant, the diameter of earth assumed to be a sphere of
3π uniform mass having density ρ . If a body of
quantity is equal to
G mass m is thrown in this tunnel, its acceleration
1) T 2 D 2) 3π T 2 D 3) 3π D 2T 4) D2T
6. A planet revolves around sun in an elliptical at a distance y from the centre is given by
orbit of eccentricity ‘e7’. If ‘T’ is the time
period of the planet then the time spent by the m
planet between the end of the minor axis and
close to sun is y
1 e Te e πT
1) T − 2) 3) − 1 4)
4 2π π π e
7. An artificial satellite revolves around earth in 4π 3
circular orbit of radius r with time period T.. 1) G ρ ym 2) π Gρ y
The satellite is made to stop in the orbit which 3 4
4 4
makes it fall onto earth. Time of fall of the 3) πρ y 4) π G ρ y
satellite on to earth is given by 3 3
178 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
11. A point mass M is at a distance S from an
infinitely long and thin rod of linear density D.
m
If G is the gravitational constant then R
gravitational force between the point mass and 2 2 GmM
8R 1)
the rod is 27 R 2
GmM
2)
MGD MGD 8R 2
1) 2 2)
S S S M GmM
3)
M MGD 2 MGD 9R 2
3) 4)
2S 3 S 2 GmM
4)
R 9 9R 2
12. A cavity of radius is made inside a solid 15. A mass m extends a vertical helical spring of
2
sphere of radius R . The centre of the cavity spring constant k by x m at the surface of
earth. Extension in spring by the same mass
R at height h metre above the surface of earth
is located at a distance from the centre of
2 is
sphere. The gravitational force on a particle
( R + h) R2
2
GMm GMm x
of mass m at a distance
R
from the centre of ( )
1) k R + h 2)
kR2
3)
R2
x 4)
( R + h)
2
2 16. A straight rod of length L extends from x = a
the sphere on the line joining both the centres to x = L + a . Find the gravitational force it
of sphere and cavity is ( opposite to the centre exertson a pointm assm at x = 0 is
GM ( if the linear density of rod µ = A + Bx 2 )
of cavity ) [ here g = where M is the
R2 A 1 1
mass of the sphere ]. 1) Gm a + BL 2) Gm A a − a + L + BL
mg 3mg mg mg A A
1)
2
2)
8
3)
16
4)
4 3) Gm BL + 4) Gm BL −
a + L a
13. Four masses ‘m’ each are orbiting in a circle of 17. A mass m is placed in the cavity inside a
radius ‘r’ in the same direction under hollow sphere of mass M as shown in the
gravitational force. Velocity of each particle is figure. The gravitational force on m is
m
(
Gm 1+ 2 2 ) GMm
m m 1) r 2 1)
r r R2
m GMm
Gm 2)
m 2) R r2
r GMm
3) ( R − r ) 2
Gm1+ 2 2
3)
Gm
r
(
1+2 2 )
2r 2
4)
4) Zero
14. The centres of a ring of mass m and a sphere 18. A spherical shell is cut into two pieces along
of mass M of equal radius R, are at a distance a chord as shown in the figure. P is a
point on the plane of the chord.The
8 R apart as shown in fig. The force of gravitational field at P due to the upper part
attraction between the ring and the sphere is is I1 and that due to the lower part is I 2 .
What is the relation between them?
NARAYANAGROUP 179
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
23. If earth were to rotate on its own axis such
1) I1 > I 2 that the weight of a person at the equator
P
becomes half the weight at the poles, then its
2) I1 < I 2
time period of rotation is (g=acceleration due
3) I1 = I 2
to gravity near the poles and R is the radius
4) no definite relation of earth) (Ignore equatorial bulge)
19. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at (2013M)
distance r1 and r2 from the centre of a uniform 2R R R R
sphere of radius R and mass M are E1 and 1) 2π 2) 2π 3) 2π 4) 2π
g 2g 3g g
E2 respectively. Then: 24. Four particles each of mass M are located at
E1 r1 the vertices of a square with side L. The
1) E = r if r1 < R and r2 < R gravitational potential due to this at centre of
2 2
square is
E1 r22
2) = if r1 < R and r2 < R GM GM
E2 r12 1) − 32 2) − 64
L L2
E1 r13 GM
3) = if < R and r2 < R 3) Zero 4) − 16
E2 r23 r1 L
25. The gravitational potential of two
E1 r12
4) = if r1 < R and r2 < R homogeneous spherical shells A and B of same
E2 r22
surface density at their respective centres are
20. Two masses 90 kg and 160 kg are 5 m apart.
The gravitational field intensity at a point 3m in the ratio 3 : 4 . If the two shells
from 90 kg and 4 m from 160 kg is coalesce into single one such that surface
1)10 G 2)5 G 3) 5 2G 4) 10 2G density remains same, then the ratio of
21. Gravitational field intensity at the centre of potential at an internal point of the new shell
the semi circle formed by a thin wire AB of to shell A is equal to :
mass ‘m’ and length ‘L’ is 1) 3 : 2 2) 4 : 3 3) 5 : 3 4) 5 : 6
26. A thin uniform annular disc ( see figure ) of
Y
mass M has outer radius 4R and inner radius
Gm 2 $
1)
L2
i () 3R. The work required to take a unit mass
from point P on its axis to infinity is
A B X 2)
Gm 2 $
π L2
j() P
3)
2π Gm $
i() 4)
2π Gm $
j () 2GM
( )
2
L L2 4R
1) 4 2 −5
22. Two equal masses each ‘m’ are hung from a 7R
balance whose scale pans differ in vertical
height by ‘h’. the error in weighing is 2) −
2GM
7R
(
4 2 −5 )
1
1) π G ρ mh 2) G ρ mh
( )
3 GM 2GM
8 4 3) 4) 2 −1
3) π G ρ mh 4) π G ρ mh 2R 5R
3 3
180 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
27. The gravitational force in a region is given by, 32. A ring has non-uniform distribution of mass
ur
F = ayi$ + ax $j . The work done by gravitational
having mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’. A point mass
m0 is moved from A to B along the axis of the
force to shift a point mass m from ( 0,0,0 ) to ring. The work done by external agent against
( x0 , y0 , z0 ) is
gravitational force of ring is
M
1) max0 y 0 z0 2) max0 y0 3) − max0 y0 4)0 R
28. Two identical thin rings each of radius ‘R’ are A B
co-axially placed at a distance ‘R’. If the rings
have a uniform mass distribution and each has R R
mass m1 and m2 respectively, then the work GMm 0 GMm0 1 1
−
R 2
1) 2)
done in moving a mass ‘m’ from the centre of 2R 5
one ring to that of the other is:
GMm0 1 1 GMm0
−
Gm(m1 − m2 )( 2 − 1) 3) R 5 2 5R
4)
1) Zero 2)
2R 33. Two concentric spherical shells A and B of
radii R and 2R and masses 4M and M
Gm 2(m1 + m2 ) Gm1m( 2 + 1) respectively are as shown. The gravitational
3) 4)
R m2 R potential at point ‘p’ at distance ‘r’ (R <r<2R)
29. The gravitational field in a region due to a from centre of shell is (r = 1.5R)
certain mass distribution is given by B
ur
( )
E = 4$i − 3 $j N / kg
. The work done by the field 2R
A
R
in moving a particle of mass 2 kg from (2m,1m) r
P
2
to 3 m, 2m along the line 3x+4y=10 is 4GM 4GM
1) − 2) − 2 R
9G M
3) − 4) − 6 R
19GM
25 50 25 R 3R
1) − N 2) − N 3) N 4) Zero 34. The potential energy of a body of mass ‘m’ is
3 3 3
given by U=px+qy+rz. The magnitude of the
30. A particle of mass 1kg is placed at a distance acceleration of the body will be
of 4m from the centre and on the axis of a
uniform ring of mass 5kg and radius 3m. The p+q+r p 2 + q2 + r 2
work done to increase the distance of the 1) 2)
m m
particle from 4m to 3 3m is
G G G G p3 + q3 + r 3 p 4 + q4 + r 4
1) J 2) 4 J 3) J 4) J 3) 4)
3 5 6 m m
31. Consider two configurations in fig (i) and fig(ii) 35. A particle is placed in a field characterized by
3m a value of gravitational potential given by
uur
2m V = -kxy, where ‘k’ is a constant. If Eg is the
a
a a gravitational field then
ur
m a 2m m a 3m ( )
1) E g = k xi$ + y $j and is conservative in nature
ur
fig (i)
The work done by external agent in changing
fig (ii)
(
2) E g = k yi$ + x $j ) and is conservative in nature
ur
the configuration from fig(i) to fig(ii) is (
3) E g = k xi$ + y $j ) and is non conservative in
6Gm2 1 nature
2) − 1+ ur
1) Zero
a
2 (
$ $
)
4) Eg = k yi + x j and is non conservative in
nature
6Gm 2 1 6Gm2 1
3) − 1 − 4) −
a
2−
a 2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 181
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
36. A thin rod of length ‘L’ is bent to form a semi 42. Two spherical planets P and Q have the same
circle. The mass of the rod is ‘M’. What will uniform density ρ , masses M P and M Q and
be the gravitational potential at the centre of
the circle? surface areas A and 4A respectively. A
−GM −GM −π GM −π GM spherical planet R also has uniform density
1) 2) 3) 4) ρ and its mass is ( M p + M Q ) . The escape
L 2π L 2L L
37. If the gravitational field intensity at a point is velocities from the planets P, Q and R are
GM VP ,VQ and V R , respectively. Then (2012 I)
, then potential at a distance ‘r’ is
r 2.5 1) VQ >VR >VP 2) VR >VQ >VP
2GM − GM 2GM GM
1) 2) 3.5 3) - 1.5 4) 3.5 1
3) VR /VP =3 4) VP /VQ =
1.5
3r r 3r r
38. In a certain region of space, the gravitational 2
field is given by −k / r , where r is the distance 43. A spherically symmetric gravitational system of
and k is a constant. If the gravitational ρ for r ≤ R
particles has a mass density ρ = 0
potential at r = r0 be V0 , then what is the 0 for r > R
expression for the gravitational potential V? Where ρ0 is a constant. A test mass can
1) k log ( r / r0 ) 2) k log ( r0 / r ) undergo circular motion under the influence of
3) V0 + k log ( r / r0 ) 4) V0 + k log ( r0 / r ) the gravitational field of particles. Its speed v
as function of distance r from the centre of the
39. Distance between the centre of two stars is
system is represented by ( 2008 I)
10a. the masses of these stars are M and
16M and their radii a and 2a respectively. A v v
body of mass m is fired straight from the
surface of the larger star towards the surface 1) 2)
of the smaller star. What should be its R r R
r
minimum initial speed to reach the surface of
the smaller star ? v v
GM 1 5GM 3 GM 3 5 GM 3) 4)
1) 2) 3) 4)
a 2 a 2 a 2 a r r
R R
40. There is a crater of depth R/100 on the surface
of the moon (radius R). A Projectile is fired 44. A satellite is moving with a constant speed ‘v’
vertically upward from the crater with velocity, in a circular orbit about the earth. An object
of mass ‘m’ is ejected from the satellite such
which is equal to the escape velocity v from
that it just escapes from the gravitational pull
the surface of the moon. Find the maximum of the earth. At the time of its ejection, the
height attained by the projectile. (2003A) kinetic energy of the object is
1) 90R 2) 95 R 3) 99.5 R 4) 50 R 1 2 3 2
41. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of a 1) mv 2) mv2 3) mv 4) 2mv 2
2 2
6 LEVEL-III-KEY
planet is g , where g is the gravitational
11 1) 1 2) 2 3) 1 4) 4 5) 1 6) 1
acceleration on the surface of the earth. The 7) 2 8) 3 9) 4 10) 4 11) 1 12)2
average mass density of the planet is 2/3 times 13)4 14)1 15)4 16) 2 17) 4 18)3
that of the earth. If the escape speed on the
19)1 20)4 21) 4 22)3 23)1 24)1
surface of the earth is taken to be 11kms −1 ,
25)3 26)1 27)2 28)2 29)2 30)4
the escape speed on the surface of the planet
31)3 32)2 33)4 34)2 35)2 36)4
in kms−1 will be (2010 I) 37)1 38)3 39)4 40) 3 41)1 42)2,4
1) 3 2) 6 3) 9 4) 12 43)3 44)2
182 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
LEVEL-III-HINTS Using Kepler’s third law T 2∞r 3
1. Gravitational force = Centripetal force
T' T 2T
GM v 2 time of fall = = =
⇒ 2 = 2 2 8 8
r r
M Ms
here r is the radius of curvature. From Kepler’s 3
= GmM S
4 D 4 F=−
law, time period is given by, 8. π π S3 ;
3 2 3 S2
2π ab
3
a
T = 2π = G m (m1 + m 2 )
GM rv 9. Position I. F = r1 2
dA vr 2dA 2
= ⇒ dt = T = = π ab (here the particle lies outside of both the shells)
dt 2 vr rv
Gm2
v=
ab GM Position II. F = r 2
2
r a3
2. From conservation of energy here the particle lies outside of the shell of mass m1
GMm 1 2 −GMm 1 2 position III. Here the particle lies inside of both of
− + mv p = + mva
rp 2 ra 2 the shells so F = 0 .
L = mv p rp = mv a ra 4 3
10. Mass of the sphere is given by M = π y ρ
3
1
3. Semi major axis = 4 ⇒ ae = 1 ⇒ e = Gravitational force,
4
4
Semi minor axis = b G π y3 ρ m
F= ⇒a= F
3
1
b = a 1 − e2 = 4 1 − = 15 = 15 y 2
m
16
Sdα
Required distance = b 2 + 1 = 4 11. dm = D × dl = D ×
cos α
4. R1 = (1 + e) a ; R2 = (1 − e) a
GMdm
R1 + R2 dF = cos α
a= ; R1R2 = (1 − e2 ) a2 Gravitational force,
S
2 cos α
b2 π /2
semi-latus rectum = MGD 2MGD
a total force F = ∫ S
cos α dα =
S
a 2 (1 − e 2 )
−π / 2
R1 R2 2 R1 R2
= =
= ρR −ρ ( R / 2)
3
R1 + R2 R1 + R2
a
12. E1 = 6ε , Ec =
2 0 3ε 0 R 2
R3 R3
5. Using T = 2π = 2π M 1
GM 4
G × π R3D Enet = E1 + Ec ; ρ = 4 3 ; ε 0 = 4π G
3 πR
4π 2 R3 3π 3π 3
T2 = = ⇒ = T 2D
4 3
G πR D DG G Gm 2 2Gm 2 mv 2
+ cos 45 =
( )
13.
( 2r )
3 2 2
2r r
dA
6. = constant ;
dt GMdm
π ab 1
14. dF = ; F = ΣdF cosθ
t AB ( Area ) SAB − b ( ea ) 3R 2
= 4 2 15. Let the extension at height h be x ' then
T ( Area ) ellipse =
π ab
7. On stopping, the satellite will fall along the radius r GMm F
x= ∴ F = kx or x =
of the orbit which can be regarded as a limiting kR 2
k
r
case of an ellipse with semi major axis
2
NARAYANAGROUP 183
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
x' R2 R2 r12 : r22 : r 2 = r12 : r22 : ( r12 + r22 ) = 9 : 16 : (9+16)
= x' = x
( )
then x k R + h 2 ;
( R + h)
2
⇒ r1 : r2 : r = 3 : 4 : 5 = V1 : V2 : V
16. Here, g = GM / R and 2
M ( 2π r ) dr
26. dm = π (16 R 2 − 9 R 2 ) 4 R
G ( M / 2) 2GM
g'= = = 2g
( R / 2) − G ( dm )
2
R2 4R
dV = ; V = ∫ dV
g '− g r 2 + 16 R 2 3R
∴ % increase in g = g × 100 W = m [V∞ − V ]
2g − g ur uur
( yi$ + x $j ) ( dxi$ + dy $j )
x0 y0 z0
=
g
×100 = 100% 27. W = ∫ F .dr = ma ∫
0
17. Gravitational force is zero due to symmetry
= ma ∫ d ( xy ) = ma ( xy )
18. At the point P, we have I1 − I 2 = 0 (because the
gravitational field inside a shell is zero). H e n c e −Gm1 Gm2 −Gm2 Gm1
28. V1 = − and V2 = −
I1 = I 2 R 2R R 2R
GM −Gm2 Gm1 −Gm1 Gm2
19. If r ≤ R, then E = 3 (r ) ⇒ E ∞r ∆V = V2 −V1 = − + −
R R 2R R 2R
E1 r1 1 1
⇒ E = r if r1 < R and r2 < R = G (m1 − m2 ) −
2 2 R 2R
GM 1 mG(m1 − m2 )( 2 − 1)
If r ≥ R, then E = 2
⇒ E∞ 2
Hence W = m (∆V ) =
r r 2R
⇒
E1 r22
= if > R and r2 > R
E2 r12 r1
( ) ((
29. W = m E.dr = m E. r2 − r1 ))
30. U1 = −G
20. ER = E12 + E22 −5G
m
U2 = , W = U 2 − ( −U1 )
; L = π r ; dm = λ dl = λ ( rdθ )
6
21. λ =
L −Gm1m2
31. GPE = ; W = GPE2 − GPE1
Gλ $
π π
$ r
E= ∫ cos θ dθ i + ∫ sin θ dθ j −G 4 M MG
r 0 0 V= −
2h1 2h2
32. W = m [VB − VA ] ; 33. 3
R 2R
22. Error = m ( g2 − g1 ) = mg − 2
R R −dU
23. gφ = g − Rω 2 cos2 φ 34. F = ; Fx = − p, Fy = − q, Fz = − r
dr
r
GM GM F = p 2 + q2 + r 2 ⇒ ma = p 2 + q2 + r 2
24. U = −4 = − 32
L/ 2 L
∂ ˆj ( −kxy )
∂
25. 4π r ρ = 4π r1 ρ + 4π r2 ρ ⇒ r 2 = r12 + r22
2 2 2
35. Eg = − iˆ −
∂x ∂y
−GM G 4π r 2 ρ −GM
V= =− 36. L = π r but V =
r r r
V = −4π rG ρ ⇒ V ∝ r
37. V = − ∫ Edr
V r 3 r2 9
⇒ 1 = 1 = ⇒ 12 = dV dr
V2 r2 4 r2 16 38. Here, I = − = − k / r (or) dV = k
dr r
then integrate
184 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
39. Let there are two stars 1 and 2 as shown below.
v2A
M 16M = VB − VA
C1 r1 P r2 C2 2
a
GM −GM R
2a 2
− 3 (1.5R 2 ) − 0.5 R −
GM
1 2 =−
R R + h R 100
Let P is a point between C1 and C2 , where
2
gravitational field strength is zero. Hence 1 1 3 1 99 1
=− + − .
GM G (16M ) r2 R R + h 2 R 2 100 R
= ; r = 4, r1 + r2 = 10a Solving this equation, we get h = 99.5R
r12 r22 1
4 4
G π R3 ρ
∴ r2 = 4 + 1 (10a ) = 8a 41. g = GM = 3
2 2
R R
r1 = 2a
Now, the body of mass m is projected from the g
g∞ρ R ; R∞
surface of large star towards the smaller one. ρ
Between C2 and P it is attracted towards 2 and Now escape velocity, ve = 2 gR
between C1 and P it will be attracted towards 1.
g g2
Therefore, the body should be projected to just ve ∞ gR ; ve ∞ g × ∞
cross point P because beyond that the particle is ρ ρ
attracted towards the smaller star itself.
( ve ) planet = (11kms −1 )
6 3
× −1
1 2 121 2 = 3kms
From conservation of mechanical energy mv
2
2G M 2G8M
= potential energy of the body at P 42. V P = , VQ = = 2VP
− potential energy at the surface of larger star.. R 2R
1 2 GMm 16GMm VR =
2G 9 M
= 91 / 3V P
∴ 2 mvmin = r − r 91 / 3 R
1 2
mv2 GmM
GMm 16GMm 43. For r ≤ R ; = 2 → (1)
− − − r r
10a − 2a 2a 4 3
here, M = 3 π r ρ 0
1 2 45 GMm
mvmin = substituting in Eq(1) we get v∞r
2 8 a
3 5 GM i.e., v − r graph is a straight line passing through
vmin =
2 a origin. for r > R
3
40. Speed of particle at A, Gm π R 3 ρ 0 1
mv 2
= 4 or v ∞
vA = escape velocity on the surface of r r2 r
The corresponding v − r graph will be as shown
2GM
earth = in option (3)
R 44. In circular orbit of a satellite, potential energy
At highest point B, vB = 0
= −2 × ( kinetic energy ) = −2 × 1 mv 2 = − mv 2
Applying conservation of mechanical energy, 2
decrease in kinetic energy Just to escape from the gravitational pull, its total
= increase in gravitational potential energy mechanical energy should be zero. Therefore, its
1 kinetic energy should be + mv 2
= mv 2A = U B − U A = m (VB − VA )
2
NARAYANAGROUP 185
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
5. Bodies can be projected from surface of earth
LEVEL - IV to make them to orbit as a satellite or escape
from gravitational pull of planet. Column-I
Matching Type Questions gives the position of body after it is projected
1. Match the Columns and Column-II gives values of velocity of
Column-I Column - II projection.
A) Concept of P) at the poles on the Column-I Column-II
elliptical path surface of earth A) Velocity of projection of P) 11.2 km/s
B) Gravitational Q) Decreases as we go body from surface of earth
attraction force upwards from the for body to orbit around surface
surface of earth of earth close to it.
C) Acceleration due R) Kepler’s 1st law B) Velocity of projection of Q) 7.8 km/s
to gravity body to orbit around earth in
D) Acceleration due to S) Kepler’s 2nd law geostationary orbit
gravity is maximum T) Newton’s Law C) Velocity of body to orbit R) <7.8 km/s
2 A satellite of mass m is moving in a circular around earth in any orbit.
orbit of radius r = (Re+h) around earth of D) Velocity of body to escape S) » 3km/s
radius Re and mass M e, and density of earth from surface of earth
ρ . Match the following 6. Column-I Column-II
Column-I Column - II (position) (Gravitational intensity)
A) At centre of earth P) GM/R2
r3 B) At r<R (inside earth) Q) 0
A) Orbital velocity of the satellite P) T = 2π
GM e C) At r=R R) GMr/R3
GM e m D) At r>R (outside earth) S) GM/r2
B) Kinetic energy of the satellite. Q) 7. Column-I Column-II
2r
A) Gravitational force P) Sun-synchronous orbit
GMem
C) Potential energy of the satellite R) − B) Escape speed Q)Geo-synchronous orbit
2r C) Geo-stationary R) Conservative force
GMem satellite
D) Total energy of the satellite S) − D) Remote sensing S) Independent of
r
GM satellite mass of body
e
E) Time period of the satellite. T) 8. If our planet suddenly shrinks in size, still
r
3. Column-I Column-II remaining perfectly spherical with mass
The gravitational potential remaining unchanged.
Column-I Column-II
energy at A) Duration of the day P) increase
A)Surface of earth P) 0 B) Kinetic energy of rotation Q) unchanged
R C) Duration of the year R) decrease
B) At height h = Q) -mgR 9. When a planet moves around the sun
3
3 Column-I Column-II
C) At infinity R) - mgR A) Its angular momentum P) increases
2 B) When it is near the sun its speed Q) constant
3
D) At centre of earth S) - mgR C) When it is near the sun its R) decreases
4 potential energy
4. Column-I Column-II 10. A satellite is revolving round the earth in an
A) Acceleration due to gravity P) g elliptical orbit.
at north pole of earth when earth Column-I Column-II
rotates with angular speed w (A) Gravitational force exerted by earth and
æ xö P) Zero
B) Acceleration due to gravity Q) g çççè1- R ÷÷÷ø centripetal force at some points only can be
(B) Work done by gravitational force in
at height x from surface of earth x<<R æ 2x ö
C) Acceleration due to gravity R) g çççè1- R ÷÷÷ø
Q) Equal
some small parts of orbit can be
at depth x
(C) In comparison of centripetal force at some
D) Acceleration due to gravity S) g - Rw 2
R) Greater
at equator due to rotation of earth
point magnitude of gravitational force can be
with angular speed w
186 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
11. Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve round a planet 17. Assertion: A spherical shell produces no
in coplanar circular orbits in opposite gravitational field anywhere.
sense.Their periods of revolution are 1hr. and Reason: The field due to various mass elements
8hrs. respectively. The radius of orbit of S1 is cancels out, everywhere inside and outside the
104 km. shell.
Column-I Column-II 18. Assertion: For the planets orbiting around the sun,
A) Speed of Ist satellite P) π ×104 km / h angular speed, linear speed, KE change with time,
B) Speed of IInd satellite Q) 3π ×104 km / h but angular momentum remains constant.
Reason: No torque is acting on the rotating planet.
C) Minimum magnitude of R) 2π ×104 km / h
So its angular momentum is constant.
relative velocity between 19. Assertion: The change of weight with height h near
the two satellites
the earth’s surface is proportional to h 0
ASSERTION AND REASONING TYPE Reason: Since gravitational potential is given by
QUESTIONS V = −GM / r .
In the following questions, each question 20. Assertion: A particle is at a height R from the
contains Assertion and Reason. Each question surface of earth. (Here R is radius of earth). If
has four choices (1), (2),(3) and (4) out of which mass of particle is m then its gravitational potential
only one is correct. energy is mgR.
(1) Assertion is True, Reason is True; Reason: If a particle is slowly lifted above the
Reason is a correct explanation for Assertion surface of earth then work is done by external
. agent . Work done by external agent is wasted in
(2)Assertion is True, Reason is True; Reason the form of heat energy.
is NOT a correct explanation for Assertion . 21. Assertion: Two particles are to be projected from
(3)Assertion is True, Reason is False. the surface of earth so that particles just leave the
(4) Both Assertion ,Reason are false gravitational field of earth. One particle is projected
12. Assertion: Particle of mass m dropped into a hole vertically upward and another is at an angle of 450
made along the diameter of the earth from one end with vertical. Speed given to both particles is same.
to the other end possess simple harmonic motion. Reason: Escape speed does not depend upon
Reason:Gravitational force between any two angle of projection.
particles is inversely proportional to the square of 22. Assertion: For a satellite revolving very near to
the distance between them. earth’s surface the time period of revolution is given
13. Assertion: Escape velocity is independent of the by 1 h 24 min.
angle of projection. Reason: The period of revolution of a satellite
Reason: Escape velocity from the surface of earth depends only upon its height above the earth’s
is 2gR where R is radius of the earth. surface.
14. Assertion: Work done by gravitational field in 23. Assertion: Kepler’s second law can be
understood by conservation of angular momentum
cyclic process is zero
principle
Reason: Work done by conservative field does
Reason: Kepler’s second law is related with areal
not depend upon path.
velocity which can further be proved to be based
15. Assertion: Gravitational potential is zero inside a
on conservation of angular momentum as
shell.
Reason: Gravitational potential is equal to double ( dA / dt ) = ( r 2ω ) / 2
the work done in bringing a unit mass from infinity 24. Assertion: If earth suddenly stops rotating about
to a point inside the gravitational field. its axis then the acceleration due to gravity will
16. Assertion: In elliptical orbit around the sun, become same at all the places.
the earth is closer to the sun during summer than Reason: The value of acceleration due to gravity
during winter in northern hemisphere. is independent of rotation of earth.
Reason: The angular momentum of the earth about 25. Assertion: Orbital velocity of a satellite is greater
the sun is not conserved. than its escape velocity.
NARAYANAGROUP 187
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
Reason: Orbit of a satellite is beyond the gravita STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
tional field of earth 1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true
26. Assertion: When a planet moves in elliptical 2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false
orbit around sun, its angular momentum about sun 3) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true
remains conserved. 4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is false
Reason: Total energy of the planet remains 35. Statement-1: When a body is projected with velocity
conserved v = v0 (where v 0 is orbital velocity) then
27. Assertion: Satellite is put in an orbit at a height path of the projectile is circular.
where air resistance is present, then orbital velocity Statement - 2 : Gravitational force between body
of the satellite will decrease. and the earth provides the centripetal force.
Reason: Due to air resistance a lot of heat will be 36. Statement - 1 : For a mass M kept at the centre of
produced which may burn satellite a cube of side ‘a’, the flux of gravitational field
28. Assertion: The magnitude of gravitational potential passing through its sides is 4π GM. (2008A)
at the surface of solid sphere is less than Statement - 2 : If the direction of a field due to a
that of the centre of sphere. point source is radial and its dependence on the
Reason: Due to solid sphere, gravitational potential distance ‘r’ from the source is given as r 1/2. Its flux
is same within the sphere. through a closed surface depends only on the
29. Assertion: smaller the orbit of a planet around the strength of the source enclosed by the surface
sun, shorter is the time it takes to complete. and not on the size or shape of the surface
Reason: According to Kepler’s third law of 37. Statement-1: Orbiting satellite or body has K.E.
planetary motion, square of time period is of always less than that of Potential energy.
proportional to cube of mean distance from the sun. Statement - 2 : For any bound state, the magnitude
30. Assertion: The value of acceleration due to gravity of potential energy is always twice that of kinetic
does not depend upon mass of the body energy (K.E.)
Reason: Acceleration due to gravity is a constant 38. Statement-1 : There is almost no effect of rotation
quantity
of earth at poles.
31. Assertion: Earth does not retain hydrogen
Statement - 2 : Because rotation of earth is about
molecules and helium atoms in its atmosphere,
polar axis.
but does retain much heavier molecules, such as
oxygen and nitrogen. 39. Statement-1 : The force of attraction due to a
Reason: Lighter molecules in the atmosphere have hollow spherical shell of uniform density, on a point
translational speed that is greater or closer to escape mass situated inside it is zero.
speed of earth. Statement - 2 : The gravitation field due to the
32. Assertion: If a particle projected horizontally just shell inside the shell will be zero.
above the surface of earth with a speed greater 40. Statement-1 : The angular momentum uder a
than escape speed, then it will escape from central force is constant.
gravitational influence of earth. Statement - 2 : A force directed towards a fixed
Reason: Escape velocity is independent of its point following inverse square law is conservative
direction. 41. Statement-1 : A satellite moves round the earth in
33. Assertion: If time period of a satellite revolving in a circular orbit under the action of gravity.A person
circular orbit in equatorial plane is 24h, then it in the satellite experience a zero gravity field in the
must be a geo-stationary satellite. satellite
Reason: Time period of a geo-stationary satellite Statement - 2 : The contact force by the surface
is 12 h on the person is zero
34. Assertion: Two satellites are following one another 42. Statement-1 :A body becomes weightless at the
in the same circular orbit. If one satellite tries to centre of earth.
catch another ( leading one ) satellite, then it can Statement - 2 : As the distance from centre of
be done by increasing its speed without changing earth decreases acceleration due to gravity
the orbit. increases.
Reason: The energy of earth - satellite system in 43. Statement-1 : The speed of satellite always remains
constant in an orbit
circular orbit is given by E = + ( GMm) / ( 2r ) , where Statement - 2 : The speed of a satellite depends
r is the radius of the circular orbit. on its path.
188 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
44. Statement-1 : If earth suddenly stops rotating about 51. For a planet moving around the sun in an elliptical
its axis, the acceleration due to gravity at poles orbit, which of the following quantities remain
remains unchanged. constant ?
Statement - 2 : Rotation of earth is about polar A) The total energy of the ‘sun planet’ system
axis so the centripetal acceleration of any pole is B) The angular momentum of the planet about the
zero. sun.
45. Statement-1 : Total energy of an orbiting satellite
C) The force of attraction between the two
depends only on the semi major axis and not on its
eccentricity.
Statement - 2 : For zero eccentricity the path of D) The linear momentum of the planet
the satellite will be circular. 52. If a satellite orbits as close to the earth’s surface
46. Statement-1 : A planet is moving around the sun in as possible
an elliptical orbit. Then from aphelion point to A) its speed is maximum
perihelion point the speed of the planet continuously B) time period of its rotation is minimum
increases. C) the total energy of the earth plus satellite system
Statement - 2 : According to Kepler’s second is minimum
law, the areal velocity of the line joining planet to D) the total energy of the earth plus satellite system
the sun is constant. is maximum
47. Statement-1 : Acceleration due to moon’s gravity 53. A satellite to be geo-stationary, which of the
on moon’s surface is ge/6.Acceleration due to following are essential conditions?
earth’s gravity on moon’s surface
is g e/(60)2 A) it must always be stationed above the equator
Statement - 2 : The distance of moon from earth’s B) it must be rotate from west to east
centre is approximately equal to 60 times the radius C) it must be about 36,000km above the earth
of earth. surface
48. Statement-1 : Space rockets are usually launched D) its orbit must be circular, and not elliptical
in the equatorial line from west to east. LEVEL-IV- KEY
Statement - 2 : The acceleration due to gravity is MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
minimum at the equator. 1)A-R, B-T, C-Q, D-P
MORE THAN ONE CORRECT 2)A-T, B-Q, C-S, D-R, E-P
CHOICE 3)A-Q, B-S, C-P, D-R ; 4)A-P, B-R, C-Q,D-S
49. Which of the following is correct 5)A-Q, B-S, C-R, D-P; 6) A-Q, B-R,C-P,D-S
A) An astronaut in going from Earth to Moon will 7)A-R, B-S, C-Q, D-P; 8) A-R, B-P, C-Q
experience weightlessness once. 9) A-Q, B-P, C-R ; 10)A-Q, B-P, C-R
B) When a thin uniform spherical shell gradually 11)A-R,B-P, C-Q
shrinks maintaining its shape, the gravitational
potential at its centre decreases. ASSERTION - REASONING TYPE
C) In the case of spherical shell, the plot of V
versus r is continuous. 12.2 13.1 14.1 15.4
D) In the case of spherical shell, the plot of 16.4 17.4 18.1 19.2
gravitational field intensity I versus r is continuous 20.4 21.1 22.1 23.1
50. An object is weighed at the North pole by a beam 24.3 25.4 26.2 27.2
balance and a spring balance, giving readings of 28.3 29.1 30.3 31.1
WB and W S respectively. It is again weighed in the 32.1 33.4 34.4
same manner at the equator, giving reading of STATEMENTS
35.1 36. 1 37.1 38.1
WB′ and WS ′ respectively. Assume that the 39.1 40.1 41.3 42.2
acceleration due to gravity is the same every where 43.3 44.1 45.1 46.1
and that the balances are quite sensitive. 47.1 48.1
A) WB = WS B) WB′ = WS ′ MORE THAN ONE CHOICE
49. A,B,C 50. A,C,D 51. A,B 52. A,B,C
C) WB = WB′ D) WS ′ < WS 53. A,B,C,D
NARAYANAGROUP 189
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
LEVEL-IV-HINTS 24. The value of g at any place is given by
12. As the particle moves along the hole in to and fro g ′ = g − ω 2 Re cos 2 λ
motion it executes SHM If ω = 0 then g ′ = g . The value of g will be same
Gm1m2 1 at all places.
F= ⇒F∝ 2
r 2
r 25. Ve = 2 v0
13. Using only energy conservation, 26. Angular momentum is conserved because net
1
m v e2 = (G M m )/ R torque is zero
2 27. Decrease in speed and production of heat, both
14. Work done by conservative field in cyclic take place.
process is zero
GM
15. Work will be done only in bringing the unit 28. Vin = 3R 2 − r 2
mass from infinity upto the surface of shell because 2 R3
inside the shell there is no gravitational field and in GM
moving inside the shell no work will be done. At surface Vs = [ at r = R ]
R
16. Assertion is true otherwise the orbit would be
unstable. 3
Vin = Vs ⇒ Vin > Vs
17. Although no gravitational field is produced inside a 2
symmetric shell, it produces a field at points outside V is not same everywhere as indicated by Vin
the shell.
r
18. The torque on a body is given by τ = dL / dt . . 29. According to Kepler’s third law of motion, T 2 ∝ a3 ,
In case of planet orbiting around the sun no torque When a is smaller, shorter is the time
is acting on it. period.
⇒ L (angular momentum) = constant. 30. Acceleration due to gravity is given by g = GM / r 2 .
2h 2h Thus it does not depend on mass of body .
19. g ′ = g 1 − ; ∆g = g − g ′ = g
R R 3KT 3RT
31. From kinetic theory of gas, v= , v=
( m∆g ) = m ∆g = m
dW d d d 2 gh m M
=
dh dh dh dh R So, for lighter gas molecules v is greater which is
enough to take these molecules away from
2mg
= = constant earth’s atmosphere.
R
20. Potential energy of particle at a height R is 2GM
32. Ve = = 2 gR = 11.2 k m s−1
GMm mgR R
GPE = − =−
2R 2 Which does not depend upon angle of projection
and mass of the projected body. Escape velocity
2GM
21. Ve = = 2 gR = 11.2 km s −1 is independent of direction of projection.
R 33. For a satellite to be geo-stationary, the necessary
Which does not depend upon angle of projection requirements are:
and mass of the projected body. 1. Its orbit must be in equatorial plane and
22. The time period of satellite which is very near to circular.
R 2. Its time period must be 24 h;
earth is given by T = 2π g
= 84min = 1 h 24min 3. Its sense of rotation must be same as that of
earth about its own axis.
dA 1 dA 1 2
23. = rv ⇒ = r ω 34. Here, Assertion is wrong because as speed of one
dt 2 dt 2 satellite increases, its kinetic energy and hence
mr 2ω L total energy increases,
⇒ = = constant ⇒ L = constant. i.e., total energy becomes less negative and hence
2m 2m
r increases, i.e., orbit changes.
190 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
LEVEL - V 5. A body starts from rest from a point at a
distance r0 from the centre of the earth. It
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
reaches the surface of the earth whose radius
1. A spherical hollow is made in a lead sphere of is R . The velocity acquired by the body is
radius R such that its surface touches the
outside surface of the lead sphere and passes 1 1 1 1
through the centre. The mass of the lead A) 2GM R r B) 2GM R r
sphere before hollowing was M . The force of 0 0
attraction that this sphere would exert on a 1 1 1 1
particle of mass m which lies at a distance d C) GM R r D) GM R R
from the centre of the lead sphere on the 0 0
straight line joining the centre of the sphere 6. Two rings having masses M and 2M ,
and the hollow is respectively, having same radius are placed
coaxially as shown in figure.
3R
GMm GMm 1
1
A) B) d 2
2
R
d2 8 1
2d P
R
GMm 1
1 2
GMm If the mass distribution on both the rings is
C) d 2 R D) 8d 2
8 1 non-uniform, then gravitational potential at
2d point P is
2. A thin rod of length L is bent to form a circle.
Its mass is M . What force will act on the GM 1 2 GM 2
A) B) 1 C) zero
mass m placed at the centre of the circle? R 2 5 R 2
4 2GMm GMm 2 GMm D) cannot be determined from given information
A) B) 2 2 C) D) zero 7. A point P lies on the axis of a fixed ring of
L 2
4 L L2
3. A solid sphere of uniform density and mass mass M and radius R , at a distance 2R from
its centre O . A small particle starts from P
M has radius 4 m . Its centre is at the origin
of the coordinate system. Two spheres of radii and reaches O under gravitational attraction
1 m are taken out so that their centres at only. Its speed at O will be:
P 0, 2,0 and Q 0, 2,0 respectively. This 2GM 1 2GM
leaves two spherical cavities. What is the A) 1 B)
gravitational field at the origin of the R 5 R
coordinate axes? Z 2GM
C)
R
5 1 D) zero
8. The gravitational field due to a mass
distribution is given by
Y
E K / x 3 in x direction.
P O Q
Taking the gravitational potential to
be zero at infinity, its value at distance x is:
X
31GM Gm 2K K K 3K
A) B) C) 31GM D) zero A) 2 B) 2 C) 2 D) 2
1024 1024 x 2x x 2x
4. The gravitational potential due to earth at 9. An artificial satellite of earth is launched in
infinite distance from it is zero. Let the circular orbit in equatorial plane of the earth
gravitational potential at a point P be and satellite is moving from west to east.
With respect to a person on the equator, the
5 J kg 1 . Suppose, we arbitrarily assume the
gravitational potential at infinity to be satellite is completing one round trip in 24 h .
10 J kg 1 , then the gravitational potential at Mass of earth is, M 6 1024 kg . For this
situation, orbital radius of the satellite is:
P will be
A) 5 J kg 1 B) 5 J kg 1 A) 2.66 104 km B) 6400 km
C) 36, 000 km D) 29, 600 km
C) 15 J kg 1 D) 15 J kg 1
191
191
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
15. A satellite revolving around the planet in a
10. A satellite is orbiting around earth in a circular circular orbit is to be raised to a bigger circular
orbit of radius r . A particle of mass m is orbit. The required energy can be supplied to
projected from satellite in forward direction the satellite for achieving the bigger orbit:
A) in one stage
2 B) in minimum two stages
with velocity v times orbital velocity C) in minimum four stages
3
(this velocity is given with respect to earth). D) in minimum three stages
During subsequent motion of the particle, its 16. A spherical uniform planet is rotating about
minimum distance from the centre of earth is its axis. The velocity of a point on its equator
r 2r 4r is v . Due to rotation of planet about its axis
A) B) r C) D) the acceleration due to gravity g at equator
2 3 5 1
11. The satellite is moving in an elliptical orbit is of g at poles. The escape velocity of a
about the earth as shown in figure: 2
P
particle on the pole of planet in terms of ve :
A) ve 2v B) ve 3v C) ve v D) ve v / 2
S E Q
MULTI ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
17. Figure shows the kinetic energy Ek and
The minimum and maximum distance of
satellite from earth are 3 units and 5 units, potential energy EP curves for a two-
respectively. The distance of satellite from the particle system. Name the point at which the
earth when it is at P is equal to system is bound.
A) 4 units B) 3 units
C) 3.75 units D) none of these
12. An exploratory rocket of mass m is in orbit Ek
about the sun at a radius of RES /10 (one tenth
of the radius of the earth’s orbit about the sun). Energy
To exit this orbit, it fires its engine over a short A B C D Position
period of time. This quickly doubles the
velocity of the rocket while halving its mass
(due to fuel consumption). Immediately after Ep
the burn, what is the kinetic energy of the
rocket? Take mass of sun as M S
GM S m 10GM S m 20GM S m 5GM S m A) A B) B C) C D) D
A) 2 R B) R C) R D) R 18. A tunnel is dug along a chord of the earth at a
ES ES ES ES
perpendicular distance R / 2 from the earth’ss
13. A shell is fired vertically from the earth with centre. The wall of the tunnel may be assumed
speed vesc / N , where N is some number to be frictionless. A particle is released from
greater than one and vesc is escape speed on one end of the tunnel. The pressing force by
the particle on the wall, and the acceleration
the earth. Neglecting the rotation of the earth of the particle vary with x (distance of the
and air resistance, the maximum altitude particle from the centre of earth ) according
attained by the shell will be ( RE is radius of to
Pressing force Pressing force
the earth):
RE R NR N 2R
A) 2 B) E2 C) 2 E D) 2 E A) B)
N 1 N N 1 N 1 x x
14. A planet of small mass m moves around the x=R/2, x=R x=R/2, x=R
sun of mass M along an elliptical orbit such acceleration acceleration
that its minimum and maximum distance from
sun are r and R respectivley. Its period of
revolution will be: C) D)
3 3 x x
A) 2
r R B) 2
r R x=R/2, x=R x=R/2, x=R
19. A solid sphere of uniform density and radius 4
6GM 3GM units is located with its centre at the origin O
3 3
r R r R of coordinates. Two spheres of equal radii 1
C) D) 2 unit, with their centres at A 2,0, 0 and
2GM GM
192
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
COMPERHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
B 2, 0, 0 respectively, are taken out of the Comprehension-22-24:
solid leaving behind spherical carvities as A solid sphere of mass m radius r is placed inside
shown in the figure. Then Y a hollow thin spherical shell of mass M and radius
R as shown in figure. A particle of mass m is
placed on the line joining the two centres at a
X
distance x from the point of contact of the sphere
A
O
B and the shell. Find the magnitude of the resultant
gavitational force on this particle due to the sphere
Z
and the shell if
A) the gravitational force due to this object at the m'
origin is zero
B) the gravitational force at the point B 2, 0, 0 is M
x
zero m
C) the gravitational potential is the same at all points
22. r < x < 2r
of the circle z 2 y 2 36
Gmm 2r x Gmm x r
D) the gravitational potential is same at all points of A) B)
3
the circle y 2 z 2 4 2r 2r 3
20. A double star consists of two stars having Gmm x r Gmm 2 x r
C) 3 D)
masses M and 2M . The distance between r r3
their centres is equal to r . They revolve under 23. 2r < x < 2R
their mutual gravitational interaction. Then, Gmm Gmm Gmm 2Gmm
which of the following statements are not
correct? A) 4 x x
2 B) 2 C) 3 D) 2
x r x r x r
A) Heavier star revolves in orbit of radius 2r / 3 24. x > 2R
B) Both the stars revolve with same speed, period 2GMm Gmm GMm 2Gmm
of which is equal to 2 / r 3 2GM 2 / 3 A) x r 2 x r 2 B) 2 x R 2 x r 2
C) Kinetic energy of the heavier star is twice that
of the other star GMm Gmm GMm Gmm
D) Havier star revolves in orbit of radius r/3 C) x R 2 x r 2 D) x R 2 x r 2
21. Two satellites S1 and S 2 are revolving around Comprehension-25-27:
the earth in coplanar concentric orbits in the In the graph shown, the PE of earth-satellite system
opposite sense. At t 0 , the positions of is shown by solid line as a function of distance r
satellites are shown in the diagram. The period (the separation between earth’s centre and satellite).
of S1 and S 2 are 4 h and 24 h, respectively.. The total energy of the two objects which may or
may not be bounded to earth are shown in figure
The radius of orbit of S1 is 1.28 10 4 km. For by dotted lines.
this situation mark the correct statement(s).
E2 E2 total
Energy r0
S1 S2 0 r
E1 E1 total
A) The angular velocity of S 2 are observed by S1 V(r)
Based on the above information answer the
at t 12 h is 0.486 rad s 1 . following questions:
B) The two satellites are closest to each other for 25. Mark the correct statement(s):
the first time at t 12 h and then after every 24 h A) The object having total energy E1 is bounded one
they are closest to each other. B) The object having total energy E2 is bounded one
C) The orbital velocity of S1 is 0.64 104 km . C) Both the objects are bounded
D) The velocity of S1 relative to S 2 is continuously D) Both the objects are unbounded
changing in magnetic and direction both
193
193
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
26. If object having total energy E1 having same 31. What is the possible orbital speed of the
PE curve as shown in figure, then satellite in moving around the planet in circular
A) r0 is the maximum distance of object from orbit in a plane which is perpendicular to the
axis of planet?
earth’s centre
B) this object and earth system is bounded one A) R G B) 2R G
C) the KE of the object is zero when r r0 G
D) all the above C) R 2 G D) R
2
27. If both the objects have same PE curve as
shown in figure, then 32. If an object is projected radially outwards from
A) for objects having total energy E2 all values of the surface such that it reaches upto a
r are possible maximum distance of 3R from the axis then
B) for object having total energy E2 values of r r0 what should be the speed of projection?
are only possible 2
A) R G B) 2 R G ln 3
C) for object having total energy E1 all values of r 3
are possible 4 2
D) none of the above C) R G D) R G ln 3
Comprehension-28-30: 3 3
A triple star system consists of two stars, each of 33. Assume that the planet is rotating about its
mass m , in the same circular orbit about central axis with time period T . How far from the axis
30
star with mass M 2 10 kg . The two outer of the planet do the synchronous
stars always lie at opposite ends of a diameter of telecommunications satellites orbit?
their common circular orbit. The radius of the A) RT G B) 2RT G
circular orbit is r 1011 m and the orbital period of
G
each star is 1.6 107 s . C) RT 2 G D) RT
v
2
Comprehension-34-36:
Two planets of equal mass orbit a much more
m m
M
massive star. Planet m1 moves in a circular orbit of
radius 1108 km with a period of 2 years Planet
v m2 moves in an elliptical orbit with closest distance
20 11 2 2
[Take 2 10 and G 10 Nm kg ] r1 1 108 km and farthest distance
3
28. The mass m of the outer star is r2 1.8 108 km , as shown:
16 11
A) 1030 kg B) 10 kg
30
m1
15 8 Star r
r
15 30 8 30 A
2 1
P
C) 10 kg D) 10 kg
16 11
29. The orbital velocity of each star is m 2
5 5
A) 10 103 m / s B) 10 105 m / s 34. Using the fact that the mean radius of an
4 4 elliptical orbit is the length of the semimajor
5 5 axis, find the period of m2 ’s orbit.
C) 10 102 m / s D) 10 104 m / s
4 4 A) 3.31 years B) 2.21 years
30. The total mechanical energy of the system is
1375 1375 C) 4.25 years D) 1.52 years
35 38
A) 10 J B) 10 J 35. What is the mass of the star?
64 64
1375 1375 A) 5.29 1020 Kg B) 1.49 1025 Kg
34 37
C) 10 J D) 10 J C) 1.49 1029 Kg D) 1.49 1030 Kg
64 64
Comprehension-31-33:
Consider a hypothetical planet which is very 36. Compare the speed of planet m2 at P with
long and cylindrical. The density of the planet that at A.
is , its radius is R . A) VP 2.4VA B) VP 3.6VA
R
C) VP 4.2VA D) VP 1.8VA
194
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS LEVEL -V - HINTS
37. A planet revolves about the sun in elliptical SINGLE ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
orbit of semi-major axis 2 1012 m . The areal 1. F1 gravitational force between sphere of mass
velocity of the planet when it is nearest to the 2
sun is 4.4 1016 m / s . The least distance M and the particle of mass m GMm / d .
between planet and the sun is 1.8 1012 m . F2 gravitational force between the removed part
The minimum speed of the planet in km/s is k/ and the particle of mass m GM 1m / d R / 2 2
10. Determine the value of k . where M 1 mass of the removed part
38. The gravitational potential energy of a satellite GM 1m
revolving around the earth in circular orbit is - 3 3 F
4 MJ. Find the additional energy (in MJ) that 4 R 4 R M 2
R
2
should be given to the satellite so that it 3 2 3 8 8 8 d
escapes from the gravitational field of the 2
earth. where M 1 mass of the removed part
39. A particle is projected from the earth’s surface GMm
with an initial speed of 4 km/s. What will be 2 3 F
themaximum height attained by the particle ? 4 R r R M 2
R
2
So,
40. Earth is a sphere of uniform mass density. If 3 2 3 8 8 8 d
the weight of the body is 10n N half way down 2
the centre of earth find the value of n . The Hence, required force
body weighed 100 N on the surface. GMm GMm
F F1 F2 2
2
41. An infinite collection of equal masses of 2 kg d R
8 d
are kept on a horizontal line x axis at 2
positions x 1, 2, 4,8,....... . Find the
GMm 1
gravitational potential at x 0 in GJ units. 1
42. Three uniform spheres, each having a d 2
2
R .
8 1
mass M 5kg and radius a 2.5m are kept 2d
in such a way that each touches the other two. 2. Field produced by circular rod at its centre is zero.
Find the magnitude of the gravitational force Hence no force is acting on the particle placed
in GN on any of the spheres due to the other at the centre.
two. 3. Let = density of sphere, R radius of sphere,
43. A chord of length 64m is used to connect a r radius of spherical cavity..
100kg astronaut to a spaceship whose mass is 4 3
much lager than that of the astronaut. Estimate Mass of complete sphere R M
3
the value of the tension in 102 N in the chord. 3
Assume that the spaceship and the astronanut Mr 3
M 1 M
fall on a straight line from the earth’s centre. Here, m R3 3
64 .
The radius of the earth is 6400 km. 4
44. Two satellites of mass ratio 1: 2 are revolving Now, I R I I P I Q Here, I R 0 , also I P I Q .
around the earth in circular orbits such that 4. According to the problem, as the potential at
the distance of the second satellite is four times
as compared to the distance of the first increases by 10 J kg 1 , hence potential w i l l
satellite. Find the ratio of their centripetal increase by the same amount everywhere (potential
forces. gradient will remain constant).
LEVEL - V -KEY Hence, potential at point P 10 5 5 J kg 1 .
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS GMm 1 2 GMm
1) B 2) D 3) D 4) B 5) B 6) A
7) A 8) B 9) A 10) A 11) A 12) B 5. r 2 mv R
0
13) A 14) C 15) B 16) A
MULTI - ANSWER QUESTIONS 1 2 GMm GMm v 2 GM GM
mv
17) A, B, C, D 18) B, C 19) A, C, D 2 R r0 2 R r0
20) A, C 21) A, B, C, D
COMPERHENSION QUESTIONS 1 1 1 1
v2 2G M v 2G M .
22) C 23) B 24) D 25) A 26) D R r0 R r 0
27) A 28) B 29) D 30) B 31) C 6. As all the points on the periphery of either ring are
32) B 33) D 34) A 35) C 36) D at same distance from point P , the potential at point
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS P due to whole ring can be calculated as
37) 4 38) 2 39) 1 40) 5 41) 4 42) 4
43) 3 44) 8
195
195
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
11. From given information, semi-major axis is equal
V GM / R2 x 2 where x is axial to 4 units. Let e be the eccentricity of ellipse, then
distance from the centre of the ring. This expression
is independent of the fact whether the distribution 1 b
of mass is uniform or non-uniform. ae 1 e
4 1
GM G 2M
So, V at P is V 3
2R 5R 5
GM 1 2 Semi-minor axis,
.
R 2 5 1
b a 1 e 4 1 units 15 units .
GMm GMm 1 2 16
7. mv
2
R 4R 2
R 2 2 So, required distance b 2 12 4 units .
2GM 1 GM s m 1 2 1 m 2
v2 1 12. mv 2v
R 5 R
Es 2 2 2
8. V Edx 10
9. Here time period of satellite w.r.t observer on GMm GMm 1 2
equator is 24h and the satellite is moving from 13. mv
west to east, so angular velocity of satellite wrt R R h 2
earth’s axis of rotation (considered as fixed) is, 1 2 1 1 2GM h
v GM v2
2 2 2 Rh R R Rh
, where T and T are time periods
Ts Te S e h v
v 2 ve2 Given v
e
of satellite and earth, respectively. Rh N
R
hr 1.45 10 rad / s .
1 4
Substitute h
6 1 N 2
1/ 2
GM GM a3
From, v r 14. T 2 (Kepler’s Law)
r r
Gm
GM 2
r 3/ 2 rR r R
and a Hence, T .
7 4 2 2 GM
r 2.66 10 m 2.66 10 km . 15. Energy is needed to raise to higher orbits.Two stages
10. As the velocity of particle is less than orbital velocity are needed. One for incresing the orbit and the
of satellite, the particle goes in elliptical orbit of semi- second for the correction.
major axis less than r .
GMm mv2 mg m GM GM
16. 2
- = = . 2 v
R R 2 R R 2R
2GM
As v e v e 2v
r 1
R
v1 MULTI ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
17. For all points, EP EK (numerically). So, totally
Let r1 be the minimum distance and v1 be velocity energy is negative. Thus, the system is a bound
of part icle at this position, t hen system corresponding to all the points.
2 18. Net force towards centre of earth
m0 v0 r m0 v1r1 , where m0 is the mass of
3 = mg mgx / R ;
particle and v0 is orbital speed equal to Normal force N mg sin .
GM 2 N
v1r1 v0 r
r 3 mg
x
R/2
From energy conservation,
m0 2 / 3 v02 GMm0 m0v12 GMm0
2 r 2 r1
r mgx R
Solving above equations, we get r1 . Thus pressing force N
2 R 2x
196
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
mg Gmm
N is constant and independent of x . F
2 2 When x 2 R
x r m'
Hence b .
Tangential force F ma mg cos
R2
x2 gx
gx 4 a R2 4x2 . M
Q g cos R x
R x m
R
Curve is parabolic and at x , a 0 . Hence C .
2 the sphere and shell both will contribute to the
19. The mass of the sphere with cavities is symmetrically
situated with respect to the origin. The circle GMm GMm
2 2 Fsphere 2
Fshell 2
y z 36 has a radius of 6 units and all points x r x R
on it are at a distance of 6 units from the centre of
the sphere where the whole mass of the sphere is GMm GMm
F
supposed to be concentrated. The circle is outside x R x r .
2 2
the sphere. Similar is the case with circle
Comprehension - 25 - 27:
y2 z2 4 . 25. For the system to be bounded one, total energy of
r the system must be negative. So, objective having
20. M(r-x)=2Mx Mr-Mx =2Mx x= total energy E1 is bounded and other is unbounded.
3
3
26. Total energy = KE + PE = negative, so, system is
T1 R1 2 bounded.
21. From Kepler’s law T 2 R3 . So,
T2 R2 At t r0 , total energy = PE and KE = 0
2 2
For r r0 , total energy = PE and KE = negative,
T2 3 24 3 4
R2 R1 1.28 10 km which is not possible, so r0 is the maximum distance
T1 6
of object from earth’s centre.
3.22 10 4 km Orbital velocity of S1 is 27. The object having total energy E2 is bounded as
2 R1 2 1.28 104 its total energy is positive and it is never intersection
v1 0.64 10 4
km PE cure, so all values of r are possible for it.
T1 4
Comprehension - 30-32 :
Orbital velocity of S 2 is
4
28. Fmm = Gravitational force between two outer stars
2 R 2 2 1.28 10
v2 0.64 10 4 km . Gm 2
T2 4 .
At t 12 h the two satellites are closest to each 4r
other and after every 24 h they come at same FmM Gravitational force between central star and
position relative to each other. It is clear that GmM
direction of v2 w.r.t. v1 is changing continuously outer star .
in both magnitude and direction. r2
For circular motion of outer star,
Angular velocity of S 2 w.r.t S1 at t 12 h is
mv 2
G m 4m
v1 v2 / R2 R1 0.468 rad s 1 . Fmm FmM v2
This can be easily proved by writing the basic r 4r
equations. 2 r
T period of orbital motion v
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
Comprehension-22 - 24: 16 2 r 2 150 11
m 4M 8 10 30 1030 kg .
2
m' GT 16 8
M
x 29. T
2 r
v
2 r 2 10 10 11
When 2r x 2 R m
v T 1.6 10 7
5
then the force will be due to sphere only. 10 104 ms 1 .
4
30. Total mechanical energy = K.E + P.E.
197
197
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
1 2GMm Gm
2 X distance between planet and sun and
2 mv 2 angular speed of planet about sun. From Kepler’s
2 r 2r second law areal velocity of planet is constant. At
G 4 M m 2G M Gm farthest
. position
m dS 1
2 R r 1 2 R r 2 R r
4r r r 2
A
Gm m dt 2 2
20 11 11 30 1
M 10 10 11 1 2A
r 4 3 8 10 2 R r vB or vB (least speed), (Using
2 2R r
30 11 30 1375 values) vB 40 km / s thus, k 4 .
2 10 10 1038 J .
32 64 38. PE 4MJ TE 2MJ
Comprehension - 31 - 33 : The additional energy required to make the satellite
31. Consider a closed cylindrical Gaussian surface of escape 2MJ .
radius r and length l around the planet. mghRe 1 2 v2
Gauss’s law gives 39. R h 2 mv h 2
1
2
v
2 G R e 2g
2 rlE 4 G l R2 E R
r d
To rotate a satellite around the planet in the orbit 40. mg mg 1 where d is the depth
radius r, centripetal force is provided by the R
Gravitational force. 1 mg
2 2 mg 1 50 N
2 G R mv 2 2
i.e., m v 2 G R
r r 41. Gravitational potential at a point at a distance of r
i.e., independent of radius r. GM
32. Work done by gravitational force, from any mass m
3R 1
r
W 2 G R m 2
dr Therefore potential at x 0 is
R r
GM GM GM GM
V ....
W 2 G m R 2 ln 3 . 1 2 4 8
Applying work energy theorem, we get 1 1 1 GM
1 2 2
V GM 1 2 3 .... V ,
mv 2 G mR ln 3 v 2 R G ln 3 2 2 2 1 1/ 2
2
1
2 vT G as the common ratio of successive terms is .
33. v r r r RT . 2
T 2 2
Comprehension - 34 -36: In GJ units, V 2 m 4 .
34. Mean radius of planet, 42. The net gravitational force acting due to any two
sphere on the third is the vector sum of their
r r individual gravitational force. Therfore,
m2 1 2 1.4 108 km Now,, T r 3/ 2
2
3/2 F F F F 2 F 2 2FF cos60
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 .4 1 0 8
time period of m 2 T1 8 Putting F1 F2 F 3 F1
10
or T2 2 1.4
3/ 2
3.31 year G m m Gm 2
Where F 2
2 r 3/ 2 3 a2 a
4 2 r
35. T M 5 2
GM GT 2 In G Newton, F 2.5 2 4
2
4 3.14 10 11
3
29 43. The tension in the string T is given as
6.67 10 11 2 365 25 3600 2 1.49 10 kg GMm
36. vr cons tan t T Fgr mar T 2
m R l 2
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS Rl
2
37. Area covered by line joining planet and sun in time GMm R
2
1 2 T m R l
dt is ds 2 X d ; Area velocity R2 R l
2
dS 1 d 1 GMm R
2
X 2
X 2 where T m R l
dt 2 dt 2 R2 R l
198
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
3mgl 3 100 10 6 4. Inside a uniform shere of density there is a
T 3
3 102 N spherical cavity whose centre is at a distance
R 6400 10
mv 2 GMm l from the centre of the sphere. Find the
44. Centripetal force f 2 strengh of the gravitational field inside the
r r cavity.
Where m is the mass of the satellite and m is the
mass of the satellite of earth (mass M) 2 4
2
A) E G l B) E G l
f1 1 4r1 16 3 3
8 4 2 4
f 2 2 r12 2 C) E G l D) E G l
2 2
3 3
LEVEL - VI 5. Inside a fixed sphere of radius R and uniform
density , there is spherical cavity of radius
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS R
1. Find the potential energy of the gravitational such that surface of the cavity passes
interaction of a point mass m and a rod of 2
mass m and lengt l if they are along a straight through the centre of the sphere as shown in
line. Point mass is at a distance of a from the figure. A particle of mass m is released from
end of the rod. rest at centre B of the cavity. Calculate velocity
m with which particle strikes the centre A of the
sphere. Neglect earth’s gravity. Initially
a sphere and particle are at rest.
2
Gm 2a l Gm 2a l 2
A) U ln B) U l 2 ln 2a l A) G PR 2
l 2a l 3
2 2 2
Gm 2a l Gm 2a l 2
C) U ln D) U ln B
B) GP 2 R 2
l2 2a l l2 2a l 3
2. Mass M is distributed uniformly along a line A R/2
of length 2L. A particle of mas m is at a point R 2
that is a distance a above the centre of the C) GPR 2
line on its perpendiculr bisector (Point P in 5
figure). The gravitational force that the line 2 2 2 2 2
exerts on the particle is D) GP R
P 3
6. A ring of radius R 4m is made of a highly
dense meterial. Mass of the ring is
a m1 5.4 109 kg distributed uniformly over uts
circumference. a highly dense partice of mass
L L
m2 6 108 kg is placed on the axis of he ring
M
at a distance x0 3 m from the centre.
GMm GMm
A) B) a L2 a 2 Neglecting all other forces, except mutual
L2 a 2 gravitational interaction of the two, calculate
GMm GMm (i) displacement of the ring when particle is at
C) D) a L2 a 2 2 the centre of ring and
a L2 a 2
3. A planet of mass m moves along an ellipse (ii) speed of the paricle at that instant.
around the sun so that its maximum and A) i 0.4m ii 16cms 1 B) i 0.3m ii 18cm / s
minimum distances from the sun are equal to
C) i 0.2m ii 12cm / s D) i 0.6m ii 24cm / s
r1 and r2 respectively. Find the aqnglular
momentum of this planet relative to the centre 7. A cosmic body A moves to the sun with velocity
of the sun. Mass of the sun is M. v0 (when far from the sun) and aiming
2GMr1r2 2GMr1r2 parameter l the arm of the vector v0 relative
A) m 2 B) m r r
r1 r2 1 2 to the centre of the sun . Find the minimum
distance by which this body will get to the sun.
2GMr12 r22 2 2GMr1r2 Mass of the sum is M.
C) m D) m
r r2 r r2
199
199
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
2
11. The density of the core of a planet is 1 and
GM lv02 GM
A) v 2 1 1 B) 2
1 that of the outer shell is 2 . The radii of the
GM v
0
0 core and that the planet are R and 2R
2 respectively. Gravitational acceleration at the
lv02 surface of the planet is same as at a depth R.
GM
C) v 2 1 1 2
0 GM D) GMlv0 1 1
Find the ratio .
2
8. Two satellites S1 and S 2 revolve around a
planet in coplanar circular orbits in the opposit
P1 3 P1 4
sense. The periods of revolutions are T and A) P 7 B) P 9
R
T rspectively. Find the angular speed of S 2 2R 2 2
as observed by an astronaut in S1 , when they 1
are closest to each other. P1 7 P1 3
2 C) P 3 D) P 8
1 1 2 2
2 n 3 1 2 n 3 1
W W 12. A projectile of mass m is fired from the surface
A) 13 B) 2
of the earth at an angle 600 from the
T n 1 T 2 n 3 1
GM e
vertical. The initial speed v0 is equal to R .
13 23 e
2 n 1 2 n 1 How high does the projectile rise? Neglect air
W W resistance and the earth’s rotation.
C) 23 D) 13 V0
T n 1 T n 1
Re Re
9. A particle of mass m is placed on centre of A) B)
2 5
curvature of fixed, uniform semi - circular ring Re
rmax
of radius R and mass M as shown in figure.
Calculate : Re Re
C) D)
(a) interaction force between the ring and the 4 8
particle and 13. Find the velocity of a satellite travelling in an
(b) work required to displace the particle from elliptical orbit, when it reaches point C on the
centre of curvature to infinity. end of the semiminor axis.
2GM GM V
A) a F 2 b c
c
a
M R R 2 g
A) Vc R B) Vc R
2GMm GMm b g a
B) a F b 2
m
R R a
2GMm 2 GMm
C) a F b g g
R R 2
R2 C) Vc R D) Vc R 2
a a
2GMm GMm
D) a F b MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
R2 R 14. A cannon shell is fired to hit a target at a
10. Given a thin homogeneous disc of radius a and horizontal distance R. However it breaks into
mass m1 . A particle of mass m2 is placed at a two equal parts at its highest point. One partd
A returns to the cannon. The other part
distance l from the disk on its axis of A) Will fall at a distance R beyond the target
symmetry. Initially both are motionless in free B) Will fall at a distance 3R beyond the target
space but they ultimately collide because of C) Will hit the target
graviational attraction. Find the relative D) Have nine times the kinetic energy of A
velocity at the time of collision. Assume a<<1. 15. A particle mooving with kinetic energy 3 J
1 makes an elastic collison (head - on) with a
2 1 2 2 1 stationary particle which has twice its mass,
A) 2G m1 m2 B) 2G m1 m2 a l During impact :
a l
2 A) The minimum kinetic energy potential of system
2 1 21 1 is 1 J
C) 1 2 a l D) 2G m1 m2 a l
2G m m
200
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
B) The minimum elastic potential energy of the A) The total energy of the two satellites plus earth
system is 2 J GMm
C) Momentum and total energy are conserved at system just before collision is
r
energy instant B) The total energy of the two satellites plus earth
D) The ratio of kinetic energy to potential energy 2GMm
of the system first decreases and then increases. system just before collision is
16. Consider a thin spherical shell of uniformly r
density of mass M and radius R : C) The total energy of two satellites plus earth
A) The gravitational field inside the shell will be zero GMm
system just after collision is
GM 2
2r
B) The gravitational self energy of shell is D) The combined mass (two satellites) will fall
2R
C) Attractive force experience by unit area of the towards the earth just after collision.
GM 2 COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
shell pull the other half is Comprehension - 20 -22
2R2 V2
D) Net gravitational force with which one
GM 2 P A
hemisphere of the shell arrracts other, is S
8R 2
V1
17. A satellite moves in an elliptical orbit about A planet of mass m is moving in an elliptical orbit
the earth. The minimum and maximum distance around the sun of mass M. The semi major axis of
of the satellite from the centre of earth are its orbit is a, eccentricity is e.
7000 km and 8750 km respectively. For this
situation mark the correct statement(s). 20. Find speed of planet V1 at perihelion P
[Take M e 6 10 24 kg ] GM 1 e 1 e GM
A) The maximum speed of the satellite during its A) B)
a 1 e 1 e a
motion is 5.64 km/s
B) The minimum speed of the satellite during its
GM 1 e
2
motion is 4.51 km/s GM 1 e
C) The length of major axis of orbit is 15750 km C) D) a 1 e 2
a 3 1 e
D) None of the above
18. The gravitational potential changes uniformly 21. Find speed of planet V2 at aphelion A.
from -20J/kg to -40J/kg as one moves along
x -axis from x 1m to x 1m . Mark the GM 1 e GM 1 e
correct statement about gravitational field A) B)
a 1 e a 1 e
intensity of origin.
GM 1 e GM 1 e
2 2
A) The gravitational field intensity at x 0 must be
equal to 10N/kg. C) D)
B) The gravitational field intensity at x 0 may be a 1 e 2 a 1 e 2
equal to 10N/kg. 22. Find total energy of planet interms of given
C) The gravitational field intensity at x 0 may be parameters.
greater than 10N/kg. GMm GMm 2 GMm GMm
D) The gravitational field intensity at x 0 must not A) B) C) D)
be less than 10N/kg. 4a 2a 8a 2a
Comprehension - 23 - 25 m
19. Consider two satellites A and B of equal mass
m, moving in same circular orbit about earth, h
but in opposite sense as shown in figure. The A
orbital radius is r. The satellites undrgoes a B
collision which is perfectly inelastic. Which is
perfectly inelastic. For this situation, mark out
the correct statement(s). R
[Take mass of earth as M]. 2R
A B
r Sphere of mass M and radius R is surrounded by a
spherical shell mass M and radius 2R as shown. A
small particle of mass m is released from rest from
a height h R abovethe shell. There is a hole
Earth
in the shell.
201
201
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
23. In what time will it enter the hole at A ? C) Relative to earth’s centre, angular momentum
of A when it is in elliptical path would be less than
hR 2 2hR 2 angular momentum of B
A) 2 B) D) During the whole process angular momentum
GM GM
2
of B would be more than angular momentum of A
hR
C) D) None of these 28. If r2 3r1 and time period of revolution ford
GM B be T than time taken by A in moving from
24. What time will it take to move from A to B? position 1 to position 2 is
R2 R2
A) B) 3 3 T 2 T 2
GMh GMh A) T B) T C) D)
2 2 3 3 3
R2
C) D) None of these INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
GMh 24
25. With what approximate speed will it collide at 29. A mass of 6 10 kg is to be compressed in a
B? sphere in such a way that the escape velocity
2GM GM 3GM GM from its surface is 3 108 m / sec. Find the
A) B) C) D) radius of the sphere (in mm).
R 2R 2R R
Comprehension - 26 - 28
30. Two equal masses are held at a distance of 3.0
2 r cm in a line and released simultaneously. What
will be the separation between them after 2
Earth
sec ?
B 1 2
1 r 31. Two satellites S1 and S 2 are to be set in the
A orbits of R / 4 and R / 6above the earth’s
sufrace. They revolve around the earth in a
coplanar circular orbit in the opposite sense.
Two satellites A and B are revolving around the What will be the ratio of speed of projection
earth in circular orbits of radius r1 and r2 from the earth’s surface ?
32. Distance between the centre of two stars is
respectively with r1 r2 . Plane of motion of the two 10a. The masses of these stars are M and 16M
are same. At position 1, A is given an impulse in the and their radii are a and 2a, respectively. A
direction of velocity by firing a rocket so that it body of mass m is fired straight from the
follows an elliptical path to meet B at position 2 as surface of the larger star towards the smaller
shown. Focal lengths of the elliptical path are r1 star. What should be its minimum speed to
reach the surface of the smaller star (round
and r2 respectively. At position 2, A is given another GM
implulse so that velocities of A and B at 2 become off to the nearest integer in the unit of )
a
equal and the two move together. ?
For any elliptical path of the satellite time period of
revolution is given by Kepler’s planetary law as 33. Two particles A and B of masses 1kg and 2kg,
respectively, are kept at a very large
T 2 r 3 where a is semi-major axis of the ellipse separation. When they are released, they
r1 r2 move under their gravitational attraction. Find
which is in this case. Also angular momentum the speed (in 10 5 m / sec) of A when that of B
2
of any satellite revolving around the earth will remain is 3.6 cm/hr.
a constant about earth’s centre as force of 34. An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit
gravity on the satellite which keeps it in elliptical around the earth with a speed equal to half the
path is along its position vector relative to the earth magnitude of the escape velocity from the
centre. earth. If the satellite is stopped suddenly in its
26. When A is given its first impulse at that orbit and allowed to fall freely on the earth,
moment Find the speed (in km/s) with it hits the surface
A) A, B and earth centre are in same straight line of earth
B) B is a head of A angularly
C) B is behinds of A angularly D) None of the above g 10m / sec2 and R 6400km .
27. If the two have same mass 35. A Large spherical mass M is fixed at one
A) A would have more potential energy than B while position and two identical point masses m are
on their initial circular paths kept on a line passing through the centre of M
B) A would have more kinetic energy than B while (see figure). The point masses are coneceted
on their initial circular paths by a rigid massless rod of length l and this
202
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
assembly is free to move along the line x L L 2GmM adx
connecting them. All three masses interact only Fnet 2 F sin
2L a x a x2
x0 0 2 2 2 1/ 2
through their mutual gravitational interaction.
When the point mass nearer to M is at a L GMma.dx
distance r 3l from M, the tension in the rod GMm
2 3/ 2
M
0
La x2
a L2 a 2
is zero for m k . The value of k is V1
288 r2 r1
P' P
M m m 3. 90 S
V2
r l Applying conservation of angular momentum and
mechanical energy at P and P ' .
LEVEL -VI-KEY
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS r1
1) A 2) C 3) B 4) B 5) A 6) B mv1r1 sin 900 mv2 r2 sin 900 or v2 r v1
7) A 8) C 9) D 10) A 11) C 12) A 13) C 2
MULTI - ANSWER QUESTIONS 1 r12 2 1 1
14) A, D 15) A, B, C, D 16) A, B, D m 2 1 v1 GMm
17) A, B, C 18) B, C, D 19) A, B, D 2 r2 r2 r1
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
20) A 21) B 22) D 23) A 24) C 25) D 2 r1 r2 2GM 2GMr2
or v1 r r v1
26) B 27) B,C 28) C 2 1
r1 r1 r2
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
29) 9 30) 3 31) 1 32) 3 33) 2 34) 8 angular momentum of planet, L mv1r1
35) 7 2GMr1r2
or L m r r
LEVEL - VI - HINTS 1 2
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 4. Let, E gravitational field at x due to the complete
m sphere E1 field due to hole
1. dm .dx
l and E2 field due to the remaining portion
Gm. dm Gm 2 dx
dU E E1 E2 E2 E E1 .... i
a x l a x GM Gm
2
l/2 Gm 2 l / 2 dx x R
2
U dU
l l / 2 a x
l / 2 x
2
3
4 4 R
Gm 2 a l / 2 Gm 2 2a l 3
Here, M R 0 and m . 0
1n 1n 3 3 2
l a l /2 l 2a l 5. Applying conservation of mechanical energy.
x dx
x=0 P Q ncrease in kinetic energy = decrease in gravitational
potentiial energy
1 2
x ax
or mv U B U A m VB VA
a 2
m
v 2 VB VA ..... (i)
F Potential at A : VA potential due to complete
sphere - potential due to cavity
2.
1.5GM Gm 2GM 1.5GM
x dx
R R
Gm dM R R / 2
M
dM dx F a 2 x 2 3
R 3
2L 4 R
Here, m
4 3
and M R
Components F cos (i.e., parallel to line) cancel 3 2 6 3
each other. Net force will be perpendiculat to the Substituting the values, we get
rod. GM
2
R 1.5Gm
VB 3 1.5R 2 0.5
R 2 R / 2
203
203
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
11 GM 3GM 1 1 1 2 1/ 3
2 .
T T 2/ 3 T 1
8 R R
1
1 2/3 2 / 3 1
G R3 11 4
. R3 G R 2 C
R 2 6 3
dm
d
1 9.
VB VA G R 2 So, form eq. (i) F
3 A O m B
2 M M
v G R2 dM Rd .d
3 R
6. (a) Let x be the displacement of ring. Then /2 /2 2Gm dM
displacement of the particle is x0 x, or 2 F sin (towards C) sin
0 0 R2
3.0 x m. Centre of mass will not move. Hence, /2 2GMm 2GMm GMm
sin .d (b) U
5.4 10 x 6 10
9 8
3 x 0 R 2
R 2
R
Solving, we get x 0.3m GMm
Sun Binding energy U
v R
90 i.e, this much energy is required to dispalce the
r
particle from centre of curvature to infinity.
l 10. Potential at centre of disc.
7.
m
G 12 2 r.dr 2Gm1
A a G dm a
a
v0 V a
Let r be the minimum distance and m the mass of
0 r 0 r
cosmic body A. applying conservation of angular Now applyuing conservation of mechanical
momentum (about sun) and conservation of energy, decrease in gravitational P.E. = increase in
mechaical energy, we have, 1 2
K.E. or vr U i U f ; Here = reduced
mv0l mvr . ...... (i) 2
m1m2
1 2 1 2 GMm mass m m and vr relative speed.
mv0 mv ...... (ii) 1 2
2 2 r
Solving these two equation, we have 1 mm
1 2 2 Gm1m2 2Gm1m2
2 m m vr l
a
1 2
lv02
2
GM
r 2 1 1 2 1
v0
GM vr 2G m1 m2 a l
v1 11. Let m1 be the mass of the core and m2 the mass
r1
of outer shell.
s1 s2
8. T r 3/ 2 or rT 2/ 3 Gm1 G m1 m2
v2
g A g B (given) Then R 2 2
r2
2R
2/3 2/3
r1 T1 T 1 4m1 m1 m2 (or)
r T
2/3
2 2 T 4 4 4 3 4
4 R 3 1 R 3 .1 2 R R 3 2
2 r2 2 r1 1 1 r
2 . 1 3 3 3 3
v v
21 2 1 2
T T1
T2 T1 r2 1 7
r2 r1 r2 r1 r
1 1 4 1 1 7 2 3
2
r2
204
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
12. Let v be the speed of the projetile athighest point 1 u
2
and rmax its distance from the centre of the earth. Minimum kinetic energy of system 3m 1J
2 3
Applying conservation of angular momentum and
mechanical energy, Maximum potential energy of system = 2J
16. Say the shell has acquired a mass m and further a
mv0 sin mvrmax ................. (i) mass dM is to be added
1 2 GM e m 1 2 GM e m GMdM M GMdM
mv0 mv ......... (ii) dW V dm W
2 Re 2 rmax R
or, 0 R
Solving these two equation with given data we get, GM 2
3Re
self energy U
rmax 2R
2 Say F is now the attractive force per unit area. If
Re the shell expands from R to R+dR then work done
or the maximum height hmax rmax Re by attractive force is F 4R2dR since this is the
2 work done by gravitational field, this may be equal
vc m
to reduction in gravitational potential energy.
r
a
b 1 dU GM 2
M or, R 2 FdR dU or, F
13. 4 R 2 dR 2 8 R 4
Now total force experienced by one hemisphere
1r
From the property of an ellipse we can show that F R 2 (vector addition adds only
F ds
ra components perpendicular to the equation plane)
Total energy of a satellite in an elliptical orbit is,
GM 2
GMm 1 2 GMm GMm Net gravitational force F G
E mvc 8R 2
2a 2 r 2a V A
1 2 GMm GMm
or mvc
2 a 2a
17. E
GM g
or vc
a
or vc R
a
; as GM gR 2
Vp
From angular momentum conservation
MULTI ANSWER QUESTIONS
14. By the principle of conservation of momentum the vp r 8750
mv r mv r A 1.25
horizontal velocity of the other part will be the p p A A v A rp 7000
horizontal velocity of the other part will be greater
than u cos . Hence it will strike the point beyond From energy conservation,
the target. The kinetic energy of their part will
be nine times that of the part A. mv 2p GM e m mv A2 GM e m
15. In a head on elastic collision between two particles, 2 rp 2 rA
the kinetic energy becomes minimum and potential
energy becomes maximum and potential energy 1 1
becomes maximum at the instant when they move v A2 v 2p GM e
with a common velocity. The momentum and energy r r
are conserved at energy instant. A p
Let m and u be the mass and initial velocity of the v A 4.51 km / s and v p 5.64 km / s
first particle, 2m be the mass of second particle
and v be the common velocity. Then, 18. From given information, Ex 10 N / kg
1 u But, no information is provided about E y and Ez
mu 2 3 J mu m 2m v or v
2 3
So, E Ex2 E y2 Ez2 10 N / kg if E y E z 0
205
205
GRAVITATION JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III
10 N / kg if E y and/or Ez are non-zero Comprehension - 23 - 25
23. Acceleration due to gravity near the surface of shell
19. Just before collision, the total energy of two
satellites is, can be assumed tod be uniform h R .
GMm GMm GMm G 2M GM
E g 1 2
2r 2r r 2 From h gt
2R 2R2 2
Let orbital velocity is v1 then from momentum
conservation, 2h hR 2
t 2
mv mv 2m v1 v1 0 g GM
As velocity of combined mass just after collision is Gm Gmh
zero, the combined mass will fall rowards earth. At 24. U A 2 gh 2 2 h
this instant, the total energy of the system only consist 2R R
of the gravitational potential energy given by From A to B, field due to shell is zero, but field due
GM 2m to sphere is non-zero.
U
2r R R2
COMPREHENSION TYPE t
Hence, AB
UA GMh
Comprehension - 20 - 22
V2 25. K A 0 : Potential between A and B due to shell is
constant. From energy conservation we can write,
P
r1 ae r2
A K A U A K B U B K A U A U B mv v A vB
S
1 2
2a mvB m VA VB vB 2 v A vB
V1 2
r1 a ae a 1 e GM GM GM
2
r2 a ae a 1 e ........ i 2R R R
20. mV1r1 sin 90 mV2 r2 sin 90 Comprehension - 26 - 28
GMm GMm
V1r1 V2 r2 ........ ii 27. U and KE
r 2r
According to conservation of energy at P and A
for same m, if r1 r2 , KE1 KE2 and U1 U 2
1 GMm 1 GMm
mV12 mV22 ........ iii Also, angular momentum of A before reaching the
2 r1 2 r2 position 2(during elliptical path) wasd less than that
of B. Since, some impulse is needed (at position 2)
GM 1 e for A in direction of its motion to equal its speed
From i , ii and iii V1 1 e and angular momentum equal to that to B.
a
28. In the continuation with same comprehension
V1r1 GM 1 e r2 r2 / 3 2r2
21. V2 V2
r2 a 1 e r
2 3
1 2 GMm Let time period of A in elliptical path is T0
22. Total Energy E 2 mV1 r
1
GMm
2
T0 r
; T0
3
T 2 2
Substitute V1 and r1 and simplify ; E T r2 3 3
2a
T0 T 2
Time taken by A to move from 1 to 2 ; t
2 3 3
206
JEE-ADV PHYSICS-VOL - III GRAVITATION
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS 33. The net force acting on the system is
2GM m1 m2 F 1 F2 0
29. As ve
R
The linear momentum of the system is comserved
11 24
2GM 2 6.67 10 6 10
R 2
mA VA mBVB
ve2 3 108 m 2
v A B vB 3.6 7.2 cm / hr
R 9mm mA 1
30. Since force and acceleration are same mass and 7.2 10 7.2 102 7.2 10
they have zero initial velocity, the sepration will be 3
3
2 105
the same, which is 3.0 cm 3.6 10 3600 3.6 10
1 2 GMm1 GMm1 In 105 m / sec, ; v A 2
31. 2 m1v1 R
R
2 R 34. Given v0 ve / 2
4
1/ 2 1/2
1 GMm 2 GMm 2 GM 1 2GM
m 2 v 22
2 R R Rh 2 R
2 R
6 On solving, h R .
v1 21 From the law of conservation of energy,
1
v2 20 GM 1 GMm
mv 2
32. At the point P between the stars, let the gravitational R h 2 R
field intensity be zero. So
1 2 GMm GMm GMm
G 16 m GM or, mv
2 2 R 2R 2R
x2 10 a x
GM
x or, v gR
4 x 4 x 40a x 8a R
10a x
1/2
If means that if the body crosses the point P, it is
attracted by the other star. Thus the critical
10 6.4 106 8 km / sec.
velocity is the velocity of the body just to reach the 35. For m closer to M
point P, which can be given as
1 2 GMm Gm 2
2 ma .......... 1
V mv ,where V potential difference 9 l 2
l
2
between A and P. and for the other m
V Potential at A Potential at P Gm 2 GMm
ma .......... 2
G 16 M
l2 16l 2
G M G 16 M GM
Solving (1) and (2), we get K = 7
2a 8a 8a 2a
45GM 90GM 45GM
; V 2 V
8a 8a 4a
3 GM 2.414 GM
3
2 a 2 a
GM
Rounded of to the nearest integer in is 3.
a
207
207
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
5. A block of mass M is connected to a spring of
LEVEL-V
force constant k and is placed on a smooth
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS horizontal surface. The block is displaced and
compressed the spring by “A”. The block is
1. Two simple pendulums of length 1 m and 16 m left free to move from this position, when the
respectively are given small displacements at block is at a distance A/2 from mean position
the same time in the same direction. The it collides elastically with the identical block.
number of oscillations ‘N’ of the smaller Time to be taken by block to move from
pendulum for them to be in phase again is extreme position to mean position is....
4 3 1
(A) (B) (C) 4 (D)
3 4 16 K
π M M
2. The driver of a car records a period of
3
seconds for a pendulum of 1m hung from the A/2 A/2
roof. The acceleration of the car is (g = 10ms −2 ) mean
(A) 10ms −2 (B) 15ms −2 position
(C) 17.2ms −2 (D) 34.5 ms–2.
M π M π 2M 5π M
3. A bob of mass M is hung using a string of (A) 2π (B) (C) (D)
length l . A mass m moving with a velocity u K 2 K 2 K 6 K
pierces through the bob and emerges out with 6. A uniform rod of length l is mounted so as to
u rotate about a horizontal axis perpendicular
velocity horizontally. The frequency of small to the rod and at a distance x from the centre
3 of mass. The time period will be the least when
oscillations of the bob, considering A as x is
amplitude is,
l l l l
1 3mu 1 2m (A) (B) (C) (D)
(A) (B) 4 2 3 12
2π 2MA 2π 3MA 7. A particle of mass m oscillating as given by
1 2mu 1 3mu 3
(C) 2 π 3MA (D) 2π 2MA U(y) = K y with force constant K has an
amplitude A. The maximum velocity during the
4. A block of mass m moves with a speed v
oscillation is proportional to
towards the right block which is in equilibrium
with a spring attached to rigid wall. If the (A) A (B) A3 (C) A3/2 (D) A1/2
surface is frictionless and collisions are elastic, 8. A particle at the end of a spring executes
the frequency of collisions between the masses simple harmonic motion with a period t 1, while
will be : the corresponding period for another spring is
t2. If the period of oscillation with the two
K springs in series is T, then
v
m m (A) T = t1 + t 2 (B) T 2 = t12 + t 22
L
(C) T −1 = t −21 + t −21 (D) T −2 = t1−2 + t 2−2
v 1 K v 1 K
(A) + (B) 2 2 L + π 9. A body of mass m, is attatched to a vertical
2L π m m rod of mass M and length L, hung from a
pivoted support. A spring of constant K fixed
2 to a support on the left as shown and is
v 1 m
(C) 2 L + π m (D) + attached to the rod at a distance from the pivot.
2L π K The frequency of the oscillation is :
v K
58 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
11. If the mass of the the pulleys shown in figure
x M are small and the cord is inextensible, the
angular frequency of oscillation of the system
k L is
m ka
1 K 1 K A
A) 2π ( M + 2m)
(B)
2π M
+ 2m
3 B
m
K M + 2m
(C) 2π (D) 2π kb
M K x
+ 2m
3
10. A smooth semicircular wire track of radius R
is fixed in a vertical plane. One end of massless K a + Kb Ka Kb
3R
(A)
m
(B)
( K a + Kb ) m
spring of natural length is attached to the
4 K a Kb 4K a Kb
lowest point O of the wire track . A small ring (C) 4 m ( K a + Kb ) (D)
( K a + Kb ) .m
of mass m which can slide on the track is
attached to the other end of the spring. The 12. A ball is suspended by a thread of length l at
ring is held stationary at point P such that the the point O on an inclined wall as shown. The
spring makes an angle of 60º with the vertical. inclination of the wall with the vertical is α .
mg The thread is displaced through a small angle
The spring constant is K=
R
. Considering β ( > α ) away from the vertical and the ball is
the instance when the ring is released , the released. The period of oscillation of
free body diagram of the ring, when aT is pendulum( the collision between the wall and
tangential acceleration, F is restoring force and the ball is elastic) is
N is normal reaction is
P
α β
R l
C
P
60°
O
Q
aT
N F l l α
P P (A) 2π +2 .cos −1
β
F
(A) 60° mg (B) 60° mg
g g
aT
O O l sin α l sin α
(B) 2π (C) 2π
N g g cos β
N F
60°
P 60° P l l α
(D) 2π −2 .cos −1
F
(C) (D)
β
60° mg aT g g
mg
aT
O O
NARAYANAGROUP 59
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
13. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together 17. The block of mass m1 shown in figure is
by a massless spring of spring constant k (Fig).
fastened to the spring and the block of mass
When the masses are in equilibrium, m1 is
removed. Frequency and amplitude of m2 is placed against it. The blocks are pushed
oscillation of m2 are
a further distance ( 2 / k )( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ from
K m g mean position against the spring and released.
(A) ω = m ; A = K
2
1 The common speed of blocks at the time of
separation is
K mg
(B) ω = m ; A = K
1
K
2
m2
m1
m2 K m1 g
(C) ω = m ; A = K k
1
m1 θ
K m2 g
(D) ω = m ; A = K 3
2
A)
2
( m1 + m 2 ).g sin θ B) ( m1 + m2 ).g sin θ
14. Two light springs of force constant k1 and k2 k k
and a block of mass m are in one line AB on a
smooth horizontal table such that one end of m1 + m2 5
C) .g sin θ D) ( m1 + m 2 ).g sin θ
each spring is fixed on rigid supports and the k k
other end is free as shown in the figure. The 18. In figure a sharp blow by some external agent
distance CD between the free ends of the
spring is 60 cm. If the block moves along AB imparts a speed of 2 m/s to the block towards
with a velocity 120 cm/s in between the springs, left when it is at equilibrium position The
calculate the period of oscillation of the block. potential energy of the spring when the block
(k1=1.8N/m, k2 = 3.2N/m, m=200gm) is at the right extreme is
120 cm/sec ( k = 100 N / m , M = 1 kg and F = 10 N )
A K1 C B
D K2
M
m k
F
60 cm
(A) 1.41 S (B) 2.82 S (C) 5.64 S(D) 1.92 S
15. A solid sphere of radius R is floating in a liquid
of density ρ with half of its volume A) 4.5 J B) 4 J C) 0.5 J D) 2.5 J
submerged. If the sphere is slightly pushed and 19. A rectangular plate of sides a and b is
released, it starts performing simple harmonic suspended from a ceiling by two parallel
motion. The frequency of these oscillations is strings of length L each (figure). The
1 3g 1 2R 1 R 1 5g separation between the strings is d . The plate
A) B) C) D)
2π 2 R 2π 3g 2π g 2π 3R is displaced slightly in its plane keeping the
16. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical strings tight. The time period of oscillation is
direction about the mean position y0 with
amplitude A and angular frequency ω . At a
distance y from the mean position, the mass L d L
detaches from the spring. Assume that the
spring contracts and does not obstruct the
motion of m. The distance y (measured from a b
the mean position) such that the height h
attained by the block is maximum is (Aw2 > g) L L+a La La
g 2g 3g 4g A) 2π g B) 2π C) 2π g .b D) 2π g .d
g
A) 2 B) 2 C) 2 D) 2
ω ω ω ω
60 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
20. A small block oscillates back and forth on a
smooth concave surface of radius R (Figure).
The time period of small oscillations is 24. In the fig the pulley has a mass M, radius r
and the string does not slip over it. The time
period of oscillation is
2m + M
A) 2π
2k
R R R R
A) 2π B) 2 C) π D) 2π 2m + 3MR 2
g g g g B)
21. Assume that a tunnel is dug across the earth. R 2k
A ball is dropped into it. The time where it
m
moves with a speed of gR is m C) 2π
k
R R π R π R
A) 2π B) π C) D) m+M
g g 2 g 2 g D) 2π
22. A uniform rod of mass m and length l is k
suspended through a light wire of length l and 25. The average kinetic energy of a particle of
torsional constant k as shown in figure. The mass m undergoing S.H.M with angular
time periods of the system for small oscillations frequency ω and amplitude A, over half of one
in the vertical plane about the suspension point time period is
and angular oscillations in the horizontal plane 1 1
about the centre of the rod are (A) mω 2 A2 (B) mω 2 A2
2 4
13l ml 2
A) 2π ; 2π (C) mω 2 A2 (D) 2mω 2 A2
12 g 12 K 26. The time periods of systems depicted below
l ml 2 under identical conditions are respectively
B) 2π ; 2π
k l g 3K
13l ml 2
C) 2π ; 2π
m 12 g 3K
k
l l ml 2 k
D) 2 π ; 2π k
g 12 K
23. Two small balls, each of mass m are connected k m
by a light rigid rod of length L . The system is
suspended from its centre by a thin wire of m
torsional constant k . The rod is rotated about m
the wire through an angle θ0 and released. The m
tension in the rod as the system passes through
the mean position is from left to right
k θ 04
2
+ 4m g L
2 2 2
A)
2L m 4m m
(i) 2π ; (ii) 2π ; (iii) 2π
k 2θ 04 + m 2 g 2 L2 k k 4k
B) (A) ii,i,ii,iii (B) i,i,iii,ii (C) i,ii,ii,iii (D) i,i,ii,iii
L
m m 27. Two identical simple pendulums each of length
kθ02 kθ 2 + mgL ‘ l ’ are connected by a weightless spring as
C) D) 0
L 2L L shown.
NARAYANAGROUP 61
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
In equilibrium, the pendulums are vertical and 30. A coin of mass m is placed on a horizontal
the spring is horizontal and undeformed. The platform which is undergoing S.H.M. about a
time period of small oscillations of the linked mean position O in horizontal plane. The force
pendulums, when they are deflected from their of friction on the coin is f. While the coin does
equilibrium positions through equal not slip on the platform f is
displacements in the same vertical plane in (A) directed towards O always.
the opposite directions and released, is (B) directed away from O always
(C) directed towards O when the coin moves in
wards
l (D) maximum when coin and platform are at rest
l 2π
(A) 2π (B)
g +
2 kl
31. x = A sin 2 ωt + B cos2 ωt + C sin ωt cos ω t
g m represents S.H.M. for
(A)any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
l l
(B) A = -B, C = 2B, amplitude = B 2
l
2π 2l m (C) A= B, C=0
(C) kl 2π +
g + (D) g k (D) A=B, C=2B,amplitude= B
m K m m
32. A simple pendulum of length L and mass m is
28. A mass of 0.98 kg suspended using a spring vibrating with an amplitude a. Then the
of constant k= 300 N m −1 is hit by a bullet of maximum tension in the string is not
20gm moving with a velocity of 3m/s vertically. a 2
(B) mg 1 + L
The bullet gets embedded and oscillates with
(A) mg
the mass in a vertical plane. The amplitude of
oscillation will be :
(A) 0.15cm (B) 0.35 cm (C) 1.2cm (D) 12 m a
2
a 2
(C) mg 1 + (D) mg 1 +
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS 2 L 2 L
29. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are 33. Three simple harmonic motions in the same
connected by a massless spring of natural direction having the same amplitude and same
length l and spring constant K. The blocks period are superposed. If each differ in phase
are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor from the next by 45°, then
with the spring at its natural length as shown. (A) the resultant amplitude is (1 + 2 )a
A third identical block C also of mass m, moves (B) the phase of the resultant motion relative to the
on the floor with a speed v along line joining first is 90°
B and A and collides with B elastically. Then (C) the energy associated with the resulting motion
C B A is (3 + 2 2 ) times the energy associated with any
m m m single motion
(A) The frequency of oscillation of the system AB (D) the resulting motion is not simple harmonic
1 2K COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
is
2π m Passage-I
B) The K.E. of the system at maximum compression Two identical blocks P and Q have mass m each.
of the spring is mv 2 / 4 They are attached to two identical springs initially
unstretched. Now the left spring (along with P) is
m compressed by A/2 and the right spring (along with
(C) The maximum compression of the spring is v
K Q) is compressed by A. Both the blocks are
released simultaneously. They collide perfectly
m inelastically. Initially time period of both the blocks
(D) The maximum compression of the spring is v
2K was T.
62 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
A/2 A 40. The angle θ as shown is
−1 1 −1 3 −1 2
P Q
A) tan B) tan C) tan D) zero
34. The time period of oscillation of combined mass 5 2 3
is 41. If the whole liquid column is given a small
T displacement from its equilibrium position, the
T
(A) (B) 2T (C) T (D) time period of these oscillations is
2 2
35. The amplitude of combined mass is R 2R 3R R
A) 2π B) 2π C) 2π D) 2π
A A 2A 3A 6.11 3 2 9.8
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 2 3 4 Passage-IV
36. The energy of oscillation of the combined mass Two identical balls A and B, each of mass 0.1 kg,
is are attached to two identical massless springs. The
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 spring-mass system is constrained to move inside
(A) kA (B) kA (C) kA (D) kA a rigid smooth pipe bent in the form of a circle as
2 4 8 16
Passage-II shown in figure. The pipe is fixed in a horizontal
For SHM to take place force acting on the body plane. The centers of the balls can move in a circle
should be proportional to - x or F = -kx. If A be of radius 0.06 m. Each spring has a natural length
the amplitude then energy of oscillation is 1/2 KA2. of 0.06 π meter and spring constant 0.1 N/m.
37. Force acting on a block is F = (-4x + 8). Here F Initially, both the balls are displaced by an angle θ
is in newton and x is the position of block on
x-axis in meters π
= radian with respect to the diameter PQ of the
(A) Motion of the block is periodic but not simple 6
harmonic circle (as shown in fig.) and released from rest.
(B) Motion of the block is not periodic
(C) Motion of the block is simple harmonic about the
origin, x=0
(D) Motion of the block is simple harmonic about x=2m A B
x = Rθ
x = Rθ O θ
38. If energy of oscillation is 18 J, between what θ
P θ = π/6 Q
points does the block will oscillate?
(A) between x = 0 and x = 4 m
(B) between x = -1m and x = 5 m
(C) between x = -2m and x = 6m
(D) between x = 1m and x = 3 m 42. The frequency of oscillation of ball B is
39. The amplitude of oscillation is 1 1 6 2
(A) 4 cm (B) 2 cm (C) 1 cm (D) 3 cm (A) Hz (B) Hz (C) Hz (D) Hz
Passage-III Two non-viscous, incompressible and π 2π π π
immiscible liquids of densities ρ and 1.5 ρ are 43. The speed of ball A when A and B are at the
poured into the two limbs of a circular tube of radius two ends of the diameter PQ is (in m/s)
R and of small cross-section kept fixed in a vertical (A) 0.0314 (B) 0.0628 (C) 0.1256 (D) zero
plane as shown in fig. Each liquid occupies one- 44. The total energy of the system is
fourth the circumference of the tube. (A) 3.9x10-4 J (B) 10-4 J (C) 6x10-4 J (D) 2x10-4 J
Passage-V
You are riding a four wheeler automobile of mass,
3000kg. Assume that you are examining the
θ oscillation characteristics of its suspension system.
θ The suspension sags by 15 cm when the automobile
h1 θ h2
is placed on it. Also, the amplitude of oscillations
1.5p p decreases by 50% during one complete oscillation.
1 2 Shock absorber supports 750 kg (g=10 m/s2)
NARAYANAGROUP 63
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
45. The spring constant of the spring is (in N/m) 50. Match the following:
(A) 20x104 (B) 10x104 (C) 5x104 (D) 40x104 Column-I Column-II
46. The time period of one oscillation is (A) A constant force acting (p) the time period
(A) 0.77 s (B) 1 s (C) 2 s (D) 1.414 s along the line of SHM affects
(B) A constant torque acting (q) the frequency
MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS along the arc of angular SHM
47. In case of seconds pendulum, match the affects
following. Consider shape of earth also (C) A particle falling on the (r) the mean
Column - I Column - II block executing SHM when
(A) At pole (p) T > 2s position it crosses the mean
(B) On a satellite (q) T < 2s position affects
(D) A particle executing SHM (s) the amplitude
(C) At mountain (r) T = 2s
when kept on a uniformly accelerated car affects
(D) At centre of earth (s) T = 0 (t) T = ∞ 51. For a particle executing S.H.M. along a
48. Match the following: straight line, match the statements in column-
A spring block system executes SHM in such I with statements in column-II. (Note that
a way that the block is having velocity v when displacement given in column-I is to be
it crosses the mean position. Now the changes measured from mean position.)
have been made in such a way that the velocity Column-I Column-II
while crossing the mean position gets doubled (A)Velocity-time graph will be (p) Straight line
without changing mass of the block. In (B) Acceleration-velocity
Column-I some statements (incomplete) are graph may be (q) Circle
given and corresponding completions are given (C) Acceleration-displacement (r) Ellipse
in Column-II. Match the entries of Column-I graph will be
with the entries of Column-II. Assume that (D) Acceleration-time graph (s) Sinusoidal curve
the system is horizontal. will be
Column-I Column-II 52. In column-I equations describing the motion
(A) The frequency of oscillation (p) 2 of a particle are given and in column-II possible
will change by a factor of nature of the motions. Match the entries of
column-I with the entries of column-II.
(B) The amplitude of oscillation (q) 2 Column-I Column-II
will change by a factor of
(C) The magnitude of maximum (r) 1 (A) y = Ae(ωt +φ ) (p) Oscillatory
acceleration will change by a (B) y = B sin ωt + C cos ωt (q) Periodic
(C) y = A sin (ωt + kx )
factor of
(r) S.H.M
(D) Maximum PE increases by a (s) 4
factor of (D) y = kx (s) Rectilinear
49. Match the following: 53. A particle moves according to the law given
Column - I below in the column-I where x, v and a are
(A) Linear combination of two SHMs displacement, velocity and acceleration
(B) y = A sin ω1t + A sin (ω2t + φ ) respectively and ω , A are +ve constants. Then
match the following.
(C) Time period of a pendulum of infinite length Column-I
(D) Maximum value of time period of an
oscillating pendulum (A) a = −ω 2 x3 (B) a = −ω 2 x 2
Column-II πx
(C) a = −ω A sin where ( − A ≤ x ≤ A)
2
R 2A
(p) T = 2π (R is radius of the earth (D) v = a = −ω 2 A2 − x 2
g
(q) SHM for equal frequencies and amplitude Column-II (Nature of motion of particle)
(r) Superposition may not always be an SHM (p) Motion is periodic
(q)Motion is oscillatory
(s) Amplitude will be 2A for ω1 = ω2 and (r) Motion is not simple harmonic
if phase difference of π / 2 (s) Mechanical energy is conserved
64 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
54. For a particle under going linear S.H.M. about 59. Statement-I: In a simple pendulum performing
x = 0 , choose the correct possible S.H.M. the net acceleration is always between
combination. Symbols have their usual tangential and radial accelerations except at lowest
point.
meanings.
Statement-II: At lowest point tangential
Column-I Column-II
r r acceleration is zero.
(A) v . a > 0 (p) Extreme position 60. Statement-I: Time period of spring block system
(B) Velocity may be negative (q) Mean position is the same whether in an accelerated or in an
(C) Acceleration is negative (r) 0 < x < A inertial frame of reference.
r Statement-II: Mass of the block of spring block
(D) vr × ar = 0 (s) − A < x < 0 system and spring constant of the spring are
ASSERTION & REASON QUESTIONS independent of the acceleration of the frame of
reference.
(A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; 61. Statement-I: If the amplitude of a simple
Statement-II is a correct explanation for harmonic oscillator is doubled, its total energy
Statement-I. becomes four times.
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II: The total energy is directly
Statement-II is NOT a correct explanation for proportional to the square of the amplitude of
Statement-I. vibration of the harmonic oscillator.
(C) Statement-I is true; Statement-II is false INTEGER ANSWER QUESTIONS
(D) Statement-I is false ; Statement-II is true
55. Statement-I: When a girl sitting on a swing stands 62. In the given spring block system if k = 25π 2
up, the periodic time of the swing will increase. Nm-1, find time period of oscillation.
Statement-II: In standing position of a girl, the K
length of the swing will decrease. 5kg 5kg
K K
56. Statement-I: Two simple harmonic motions are K
π 63. Consider a liquid which fills a uniform U-tube,
given by y1 = 10 sin 3π t + and as shown in the figure upto a height h = 10 m.
4
The angular frequency of small oscillations of
( )
y2 = 5 sin 3π t + 3 cos 3π t . These have the liquid in the U-tube is (g = 10 ms-2)
amplitudes in the ratio 1 : 1.
Statement-II: y1 & y2 represents two waves of
amplitudes 5& 5 3 .So the resultant amplitude is 10.
57. Statement-I: During the oscillations of simple h
pendulum, the direction of its acceleration at the
mean position is directed towards the point of
suspension and at extreme position it is directed 64. A uniform plank of mass m = 1 kg, free to move
towards the mean position. in the horizontal direction only, is placed at
Statement-II: The direction of acceleration of a the top of a solid cylinder of mass 2m and
simple pendulum at the mean position or at the radius R. The plank is attached to a fixed
extreme position is decided by the tangential and wall by means of a light spring of spring
radial components of force by gravity. constant k = 7 N/m2. There is no slipping
58. Statement-I: A particle is moving along x − axis. between the cylinder and the plank, and
between the cylinder and the ground. The
The resultant force F acting on it is given by angular frequency of small oscillations of the
F = − ax − b, where a and b are both positive system is
constants. The motion of this particle is not S.H.M. m k
Statement-II: In S.H.M. resultant force must be
proportional to the displacement from mean R
position. 2m
NARAYANAGROUP 65
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
65. Two simple pendulums A and B having lengths 49) A-q,r;B-q,r,s;C-p;D-p
l and l / 4 respectively are released from the 50) A-r,s ; B-r,s; C-p,q,s ; D-r,s
position as shown in fig. Calculate the time (in 51) A - s; B - q,r ; C -p; D - s
seconds) after which the two strings become 52) A - p,q,r; B - p,q,r ; C - p,q,r; D - s
parallel for the first time. 53) A-p,q,r,s; B-r, s ; C-p,q,r,s ; D-p,q,r,s
54) A - r, s; B - q,r,s ; C - p,r ; D - p,q,r,s
90
(Take l = m and g = 10 m / s 2 ) ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE
π 2
55) D 56) B 57) A 58) D 59) D 60) A 61) A
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
62) 1 63) 1 64) 2 65) 1 66) 2
θ2 θ1 l/4
LEVEL -V - HINTS
l
B
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
1. We know that time period is directly proportional
A
to the square root of its length. Two different
66. In the arrangement shown in fig. pulleys are pendulums can be in phase at the earliest with a
light, springs are ideal and difference in the number of oscillations being a
K1 = 25π 2 N / m, K 2 = 2 K1 , K3 = 3K1 and K 4 = 4 K1 maximum of one. NTshorter = ( N − 1)TLonger
are the force constants of the springs. N 1 = ( N − 1) 16 ; N = ( N − 1)4 = 4 N − 4
Calculate the period of small vertical
oscillations of block of mass m = 3kg . 4
3N = 4 ; N =
3
i.e., when 4 oscillations of the shorter and three of
the longer pendulum are over they will be in phase.
So, choice (a) is correct and rest of the choices
k2 k4 are wrong.
π
2. Given: T = second, l = 1m As the car
3
accelerates it will given a pseudoforce on bob and
m
the bob will tilt itself from the vertical by an angle
a
θ = tan −1 and the time period of oscillation is
k1 k3 g
l
T = 2π squaring both sides with T
LEVEL-V - K E Y g 2 + a2
SINGLE ANSWER TYPE
π
2
1
andL 3 = 4π
2
01) A 02) D 03) C 04) C 05) D 06) D 07) C
⇒ g 2 + a 2 = 36
08) B 09) C 10) C 11) C 12) D 13) B 14) B g + a2
2
15) A 16) A 17) B 18) C 19) A 20) A 21) C
22) A 23) B 24) A 25) B 26) D 27) B 28) B a 2 = 36 2 − 10 2 ; a = 36 2 − 10 2 = 34.5ms −2
MULTIPLE ANSWER TYPE so, choice (d) is correct.
29) A,B,D 30) A,C,D 31) A,B,D 32) A,C,D 33) A,C 3. Using momentum conservation we get,
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS u 2 mu
mu = Mv + m. ∴ v=
34) C 35) A 36) D 37) D 38) B 39) A 40) A 3 3 M
41) A 42) A 43) B 44) A 45) C 46) A K.E. at mean position of the bob
MATRIX MATCH TYPE 1 1 4 m2u 2 2m 2u 2
47) A-q ; B-t ; C-p ; D-t = Mv 2
= M =
2 2 9 M2 9M
48) A - r; B - p; C-p; D-s
66 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
1 7. Since total energy can be the maximum P.E.,
Comparing with K .E. = M ω 2 A2 at mean
2 1 2
2
3 3 1 2
we get, mv + Ky = KA ⇒ mv = K A − y ;
2
3 3
( )
4 m 2u 2 2mu
position, We get ω = Or ω =
2
9M 2 A 2 2 K ( A3 − y 3 )
3MA V=
1 2mu m
= 2π v ⇒ v = maximum velocity at mean position (y=0) is
2π 3MA
∴ Frequency (C) is correct. 2 KA 3
Vmax = ⇒ Vmax ∝ A
3/ 2
4. Time taken to collide on left wall and get back to m
2L so choice (C) is correct.
the mass attached with spring is t1 = . Time m
v
8. Time period of spring T = 2π
to get the spring compressed once and to come k
T 2π m m
k being the force constant of spring.
back is, t 2 = = =π ∴ Average m
2 2 K K
For first spring. t1 = 2π k ..... (1)
t +t 1
time between two successive collisions , t = 1 2
2 m
1 For second spring t 2 = 2π k ..... (2)
collision frequency = 2
t The effective force constant in their series
P Q O k1k 2
combination is k = Therefore, time period
k1 + k 2
m(k1 + k 2 )
5. Extreme of combination T = 2π
position mean k1k 2
position 4π 2 m(k1 + k 2 )
⇒ T2 = ..... (3)
PQ = QO; t PO = t PQ + tQO ; k1k 2
From equations (1) and (2), we obtain
T M
t PQ = + tQO ......(1); T = 2π ............(2) m m
6 K t12 + t 22 = 4π 2 + ∴ t 2 + t 2 = T 2 [from eq(3)]
k1 k 2 1 2
6. Time period of the rod oscillating about a horizontal
axis with center of mass at a distance x is
x
I + Mx 2 dT θ
T = 2π For least T, =0
Mgx dx
y
9.
1 −
1
2
Mgx. (1 + Mx ) .2 Mx − ( I + Mx )
2 2
dT 2
= 2π =0 m
dx Mgx
As the rod is displaced by y towords the spring,
the spring will get compressed by y and the angular
1 Mgx
∴ 2Mx = I + Mx 2 y 1 2 1 2 1 2
2 I + Mx 2
shift, tan θ = ; Iω + Ky + mv = Constant
x 2 2 2
3
Mgx.Mx = ( I + Mx 2 ) 2 Solve to get x and 1 ML2 1 1
+ mL2 ω 2 + Ky 2 + mv 2 = Constant
l 2 3 2 2
substitute back in T to get xleast = 1 M
12 1 1
+ m v 2 + Ky 2 + mv 2 = Constant
2 3 2 2
NARAYANAGROUP 67
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
Differentiating w.r.t. time , we get, 2nd Method
1 M 1 1
+ m 2va + K 2 yv + m 2va = 0
2 3 2 2
Ky
K ka/4
a = - M + m + m ∴ ω = M
3
+ 2m
3 =
So, choice (c) is correct and choices (a) and (b)
are incorrect. Choice (d) is not possible since, it is m
incorrect dimensionally.
m
N
60° 12. If α < β , the ball collides with the wall and rebounds
P
F with same speed. The motion of ball from A to Q is
10. free body diagram is 60° one part of a simple pendulum. Time period of ball
mg
= 2(t AQ ) . Consider A as the starting point (t = 0) .
aT
O Equation of motion is x(t ) = A cos ωt
11. Let T be the tension in the cord and xa and xb the x(t ) = l β cos ωt , because amplitude = A = lβ
displacements of pulleys A and B respectively. Now time from A to Q is the time t when x becomes
assume that pulley B is fixed ; then extension of −lα . ⇒ −l α = lβ cos ωt
x −α
spring x b = or x = 2 x b . Similarly if we imagine ⇒ t = t AQ = 1/ ω cos −1
2 β
that pulley A is fixed, x = 2 x a . But neither pulley B The return path from Q to A will involve the same
time interval. Hence time period of ball = 2 t AQ
nor pulley A is fixed. ∴ x = 2x a + 2 x b ....(1)
From free body diagram of pulleys, 2 α l −α l l −1 α
cos −1 − = 2 cos−1 = 2 π g − 2 g cos β .
ω β g β
2T = k b x b .... (2) or 2T = ka xa .... (3)
If k eq denotes equivalent spring constant,
α β l
T
= x = 2 x a + 2x b From equations (2) and (3) Q
k eq A
2T 2T lα lβ
xa = and x b = 1
ka k b i.e., k eq = 13. (i) When m1 is removed only m2 is left. Therefore,
1 1
4 + k
ka kb angular frequency : ω = m
2
k eq k ak b
Hence ω = = (ii) Let x1 be the extension when only m2 is left.
m 4 m (k a + k b )
m2 g
T T kbxb
Then, kx1 = m2g or x1 = …(1)
k
Similarly, let x2 be extension in equilibrium when
both m1 and m2 are suspended. Then,
A ( m1 + m2 ) g
B (m1 + m2)g = kx2 ; ∴ x2 = …(2)
k
From Eqs. (1) and (2) amplitude of oscillation :
kbxb m1 g
T T A = x2 – x1 =
k
68 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
14. Betw een C and D block will move with constant Total compression in spring = x + x1
speed of 120 cm/s. Therefore, period of oscillation
Let x2 be the displacement of m1 at the time of
T2 T1
will be (starting from C).T = tCD + + tDC + loosing the contact with m2 from mean position
2 2
m m
F.B.D. at the time of loosing contact.
Here, T1 = 2p k and T2 = 2p k
1 2
and ∴ m1a = m1 g sin θ − k ( x − x2 )
60 ⇒ m1ω 2 x2 = m1 g sin θ − kx + kx2
tCD = tDC = = 0.5 s
( m + m ) gsinθ = mg sinθ
120
m1.k
2π 2π 0.2 ⇒ .x2 −kx2 + k. 1 2
∴ T = 0.5 + 2
0.2
3.2
+ 0.5 +
2 1.8
( m1 +m2 ) k
1
(m = 200 g = 0.2 kg) T = 2.82 s k −m2 k
15. Half of the volume of sphere is submerged. For Q ω = ⇒ x2 = −m2 g sin θ
equilibrium of sphere, Weight = upthrust m1 + m2 ( m1 + m 2 )
V
∴ Vrxg = 2 (rL)(g) ; rs = L …(1)
ρ
⇒ x2 =
( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ
= x → ( 3)
2
When slightly pushed downwards by x, weight will k
remain as it is while upthrust will increase. The ∴ At the tine of loosing contact, no compression
increased upthrust will become the net restoring in spring
force (upwards). ⇒ from law of conservation of energy, Einitial = E final
F = –(extra upthrust) 1 1
⇒ k( x1 + x) −( m1 +m2) gsinθ.( x+ x1) = ( m1 +m2 ) v2
2
= –(extra volume immersed)(rL)(g)
or ma = –( π R2)xrLg (a = acceleration) 2 2
3 ρ 3
( m1 + m2 ).g sin θ
4
∴ 3 πR 2 a = - ( π R2) x rLg (a = acceleration) v=
k
3g 18. Let δ → compression at mean position
∴ a = - 2 R x as the given motion is simple harmonic
1
x → amplitude of SHM ∴ P E = k ( x − δ )
2
1 a 1 3g 2
Frequency of oscillation, f = 2π x =
2π 2 R 19. In displaced position Frestoring = mg sin θ as θ is
16. At distance y above then mean position velocity of
small : sinθ → θ ; cos θ → 1
the bock. v = w A2 – y 2 . After detaching from
x x
the spring net downward acceleration of the block ⇒ Frest = mgθ and θ = ⇒ ma = mg
will be g. Therefore, total height attained by the L L
block above the mean position, g g L
⇒ a = x = ω2x ; ω= ; T = 2π
v 2 ω2 ( A 2 – y 2 ) L L g
h = y + 2g = y +
2g
x
dh 20. Let θ = ; F = mg sin θ ; θ → small
For h to be maximum =0 R res
dy
21. y = A sin ωt
dh g P O Q
Putting dy = 0, we get y = 2
ω
17. At the equilibrium condition left extreme right extreme
A A
x=
( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ → (1) where y = R; A = 2R
k
g
2 (Q derived from v = ω A2 − y 2 ); ω =
Let x1 = ( m1 + m2 ) g sin θ → ( 2 ) R
k
NARAYANAGROUP 69
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
π
∴ phase difference between P & Q = time
2 k
k k/4 k/4
T T
difference between P & Q = ; t PQ = = ? ⇒ and ⇒
4 4
I ml 2 I ml 2 26.
22. T1 = 2π ;I = + ml 2 ; T2 = 2π ;I = m m
mgl 12 K 12 m
23. at mean position, tension is m
2
mω 2 L 27. At the disturbed position:
T= ( mg ) 2
+ → (1)
2
1 2 1 2
from law of conservation of energy I ω = kθ 0
2 2
F F
kθ02 kθ 02 2kθ 02
⇒ω = 2
= = → ( 2)
I mL2 mL2 mg mg
2 x x
4 Restoring torque on particle is
from (1) & (2) T can be solved. τ = − ( mg × l sin θ ) + ( 2klθ × l cos θ )
for small, θ ; sin θ → θ : cos θ → 1 and
2π
τ = I α ; α = −ω 2θ : T =
ω
28. From LCLM, ( M + m ) v = mu → (1)
1 1
24. from energy method From LCE, ( M + m ) v 2 = KA2
m 2 2
MULTI ANSWER QUESTIONS
29. Let v1 is the velocity acquired by A and B then
v
1 1 1 mv = mv1 + mv1 i.e., v1 =
E = mv2 + Iω2 + k ( x +δ ) −δ 2 − mgx 2
2
2 2 2 1 1 1 1
2 so, mv′2 = mv12 + mv12 + kx 2
MR mg 2 2 2 2
= constant Where I = ; δ= =
2 k M
where x is displacement i.e., x = v
dE 2K
extension in mean position. = 0 .Use so, choice (d) is correct.
dt At maximum compression, KE. Of A-B system is
dv 2π
= a = ω 2 x; T = 1 1
= mv12 + mv 12 = mv12 = mv 2
1
dt ω 2 2 4
25. average kinetic energy of a particle is so, choice (b) is correct.
T /2 30. Frictional force gives centripetal acceleration
K .Eavg
1
= mω 2 A2
∫0
cos 2 ωt.dt
T /2
2
∫ dt
0
1
by solving we get K .Eavg = mω 2 A2
4
70 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
31. Using sin 2ωt = 2 sin ωt cos ωt and 1 kA2
cos 2ωt = 1 − 2sin ωt = 2 cos ωt − 1 .
2 2 36. E = ( 2m ) v 2 =
2 16
We get, x = (1− cos2ωt ) + (1+ cos2ωt) + sin 2ωt
A B C Passage-II
2 2 2 37. F=-4x+8, Let us write x=(X+2) then, F=-4X
C this is the equation of SHM. Further F = 0 as X= 0
For A = 0, B = 0; x= sin 2ωt so, choice (a) is correct or x = 2m
2
for A=-B and C=2B; x=B cos 2ωt +B sin 2ωt 2E 2 ×18
38. F= - 4X ; k = 4 N/m; A = = = 3m
Amplitude = B 2 So choice (b) is correct k 4
mean position is x = 2m. Hence, the extrme points
For A = B,C=0; X=A Hence, (c) is not correct are 5m and - 1m.
option. For A = B, C= 2B, X= B +B sin ωt
df 1
It also represents SHM with amplitude B. 39. k = = 4, E = KA2 we get, A = 3m.
So choice (d) is correct. dx 2
Passage-III
mv 2
32. T − mg cosθ = , T is maximum, when θ = 0 40. In equilibrium, pressure of same liquid at same level
l will be same.
2
mvmax ma 2ω 2 Therefore, P 1 = P2
Tmax = mg + = mg + or P + (1.5 ρ gh1)= P + ( ρ gh2)
L L
(P = pressure of gas in empty part of the tube)
ma 2 g = mg 1 + a
2
∴ 1.5 h1 = h2
= mg + × 1.5 [R cos θ – R sin θ ] = (R cos θ + R sin θ )
L L L
The other options are therefore, wrong. or 3 cos θ – 3 sin θ = 2 cos θ + 2 sin θ
33. From superposition principle:y = y1 + y2 + y3 1
= a sin wt + a sin (wt + 45°) + a sin (wt + 90°) or 5 tan θ = 1 θ = tan–1 5
= a [sin wt + sin (wt + 90°)] + a sin (wt + 45°)
41. When liquids are slightly disturbed by an angle β .
= 2a sin (wt + 45°) cos 45° + a sin (wt + 45°)
= A sin (wt + 45°) Net restoring pressure dP = 1.5 ρ gh + ρ gh =
Therefore, resultant motion is simple harmonic of 2.5 ρ gh. This pressure will be equal at all sections
amplitude. A = ( 2 + 1) a
of the liquid. Therefore, net restoring torque on the
whole liquid.
And which differ in phase by 45° relative to the
first. Energy in SHM ∝ (amplitude)2
2 A
2
β h
) ( )
Eresultant
(
1 2
E = 2 m A ω E 2 +1 = 3 + 2 2
2
= =
single a
∴ Eresultant = ( 3 + 2 2 ) Esingle β h = R sin (θ + β)
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS
h
Passage-I
34. They will collide at their mean positions because
m
time period of both are same and that is 2π . τ = –(dP)(A)(R) or τ = - 2.5 ρ gh AR
k
= -2.5 ρ gAR[R sin ( θ + β ) – R sin θ ]
After collision combined mass is 2m and Keff= 2K.
Hence, time period remains unchanged. = –2.5 ρ gAR2 [sin θ cos β + sin β cos θ – sin θ ]
35. Form conservation of linear momentum Assuming cos β ; 1 and sin β ; β (as β is
ωA ωA
−m + mω A = 2mv ⇒ v = = ω ' A' small) ∴ τ = –(2.5 ρ AgR2 cos θ ) β
2 4
ωA A or I α = –(2.5 ρ AgR2 cos θ ) β …(1)
⇒ = ω A' ⇒ A' =
4 4
NARAYANAGROUP 71
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
Eq. (1) can be rewritten as
4k
26 I α = –4 kR2q or (mR2) α = –4kR2 θ or α =– m θ
1
1 acceleration 1 α
0 ∴ Frequency oscillation,f= 2π displacement = 2π θ
5 1 4k
πR πR f = Substituting the values, we have
2π m
Here, I=(m1+m2)R2= 2 ⋅ A ρ + 2 ⋅ A(1.5ρ)
1 4 × 0.1 1
f= = Hz
R α =(1.25 π R ρ )A and cos θ =
2 3
5 2π 0.1 π
= 0.98
26 (ii) In stretched position, potential energy of the
(6.11)β 1
Substituting in equation (1), we have α = – system is PE = 2 2 k {2x}2 = 4 kx2 and in mean
R
As angular acceleration is proportional to –b, position, both the blocks have kinetic energy only.
motion is simple harmonic in nature.
1 2
β R Hence, KE = 2 2 mv =mv2 From energy conservation
T = 2π = 2π
α 6.11 PE = KE ; ∴ 4 kx2 = mv2
Passage-IV k k
44. Given— Mass of each block A and B, m = 0.1 kg ∴ v = 2x m = 2R θ m
Radius of circle, R = 0.06 m
π 0.1
∴ v= 2(0.06) 6 0.1 or v = 0.0628 m/s
A B (iii) Total energy of the system, E = PE in stretched
x = Rθ x = Rθ
θ O θ position or = KE in mean position
P θ = π/6 Q E = mv2 = (0.1) (0.0628)2 J or E = 3.9 × 10–4 J
Passage-V
45. 4 ( kx ) = mg ( Q weight is equally distributed on
Natural length of spring l0 = 0.06 π = π R four wheels)
(Half circle) and spring constant, k = 0.1 N/m M
In the stretched position elongation in each spring 46. T = 2π ( M=3000 kg ; K = spring constant )
4K
x= R θ . Let us draw FBD of A MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
l
47. Use T = 2π
Kx
g
F=4
k
O 48. (A): ω = ,i.e it is independent on velocity
m
(B) v = ω A i.e v ∝ A
(C) amax = ω 2 A i.e a ∝ A
1
Spring in lower side is stretched by 2x and on upper (D) P.E = mω 2 A2 i.e P. E i.e P.E ∝ A2
2
side compressed by 2x. Therefore, each spring will 49. A) linear combination of two SHMs will be an SHM
exert a force 2kx on each block. if the individual SHMs have equal frequencies, their
Hence, a restoring force, F = 5 kx will act on A in amplitudes may be different:
the direction shown in figure.
τ = –F.R = –(4 kx)R = –(4kR θ )R or τ =–4kR2. θ (1) B) y = A sin ω1t + A sin (ω2t + φ )
Since, each ball executes angular SHM about origin O. if ω1 = ω2 = ω ; φ = π / 2
72 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
y = A sin ωt + A cos ωt , ∴ amplitude = 2A then, the total mechanical energy of the liquid
2
1 dx
R R column is : E = { A(h + x )ρ + A(h − x)ρ} .
C) T = 2π D) T = 2π , is maximum value. 2 dt
g g
h+x h − x
50. A constant force and a constant torque affect only + A(h + x)ρ⋅ g ⋅ + A(h − x ) ⋅ ρ ⋅ g ⋅
2 2
the mean position. In third case, as the block falls
on mean position, the mean position is not affected.
In a car, a constant pseudo force will act which will
affect only the mean position.
π
51. ( A)v = Aω cos ωt = Aω sin ωt +
2 h+x h–x
a2 ω2 y2
(B) 2 = (C) a α − x (D) a = Aω 2 sin ωt
v A2 − y 2 2
1 dx 1
2 = (2 Ahρ) + ( 2 Aρg ) (h2 + x 2 )
d y 2 dt 2
52. by using the equation = −ω 2 y we can match
dt 2 After differentiating the total energy and equating
53.(A) a = −ω x , if x = −ve, a = +ve
2 3 it to zero, one finds acceleration = −ω2 x .
The angular frequency of small oscillations, ω , is:
x = +ve, a = −ve
2 Aρg g 10
(B) a = −ω 2 x 2 , x = −ve, a = − ve , x = +ve, a = −ve ω=
2 Ahρ
=
h
=
10
= 1 rad/s
πx x = −ve, a = +ve 64. Suppose that the plank is displaced from its
(C) a = −ω 2
A sin , if x = +ve, a = −ve equilibrium position by x at time t , the centre of
2A
the cylinder is, therefore, displaced by x/2.
(D) v = a = −ω 2 ( A2 − x 2 ) not S.H.M ∴ the mechanical energy of the system is given by,,
a a E = K .E. (Plank) + P.E. (spring) + K.E. (cylinder)
2
d x
2
acceleration in S.H.M 1 dx 1 2 1
E= m + kx + 2 m
2 dt 2 2 dt 2
4 1 11 1 d x
2
1 7 dx 1 2
2
54. + 2m.R 2
velocity in S.H.M = ( m) + kx
22 R dt 2 2 4 dt 2
3 2 After differentiating the total energy and equating
ASSERTION & REASON QUESTIONS it to zero, one finds acceleration = −ω 2 x
61. E ∝ A2 4k
The angular frequency, ω= = 2 rad/sec
INTEGER ANSWER QUESTIONS 7m
k
2k × θ2 θ1
= 2 = 2k l/4
62. Equivalent spring constant = keq k l
5 Let T = 2π
l
2k + 65. 1 ; θ1 = θ 2
2 g
5×5 5 2
Reduced mass of system = µ = = 4π 2π 4π 2π
5+5 2 θ cos t = −θ cos t ; t = 2nπ ± t +π
T T T T
µ 5
∴T = 2π = 2π 2 1
= 5π = 5π
1
=1s for n = 0, t = T / 2 for n = 1, t = T / 6, 3T / 2
keq 2k
5 k 25π 2 T π l
63. Suppose that the liquid is displaced slightly from the first time meeting, t = =
6 3 g
= 1s
equilibrium so that its level rises in one arm of the
tube, while it is depressed in the second arm by the 1 1 1 1
66. T = 2π 4m + + +
same amount, x .If the density of the liquid is ρ , K1 K 2 K 3 K 4
NARAYANAGROUP 73
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
4. A L - shaped bar of mass M is pivoted at one
LEVEL-VI of its end so that it can freely rotate in a
vertical plane as shown. If it is slightly
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS displaced from its equilibrium position then the
1. Two light springs of force constants k1 , k2 and frequency of oscillation is....
a block of mass m are in the line AB on a A 1 g 3 10
smooth horizontal table such that one end of (A) 2π L 4
each spring is fixed on rigid supports and the L θ0
other end is free as shown: The given values 1 g 10
are k1 = 1.8 N / m ; k2 = 3.2 N / m ; (B) 2π L 4
B
m = 200 gm ; L = 60 cm ; If the block moves
( 2 ) (D) 2π
along AB with a velocity 120 cm/sec in between 1 g 1 g
the springs, then period of oscillation of the L (C)
2π L 2L
block is[Q assume all collisions are elastic]: C
(A) 1.04 sec 5. A uniform cylinder of mass m and radius R
is in equilibrium on an inclined plane by the
k2 k1 (B) 0.785 sec action of a light spring of stiffness k , gravity
m and reaction force acting on it. If the angle of
(C)1 sec
inclination of the plane is φ , then angular
A B (D)2.82 sec frequency of small oscillations of the cylinder
C L D is...............
2. The following figure shows a particle of mass,
m , attached with four identical springs, each
of length l . Initial tension in each spring is
k
k 2k
F0 . The period of small oscillations of the (A) 2 (B) 2
m m
particle along a line perpendicular to the plane
of the figure is (neglect gravity)
m
ml ml R
(A) π (B) 2π
(C) 2
2k
(D)
2k
Particle F0 F0
φ 3m m
m
ml ml 6. A body A of mass m1 and body B of mass m2
(C) 2π 2 F (D) π 4 F
0 0 are interconnected by a massless spring as
3. A V-shaped glass tube of uniform cross-section shown. The body A performs free vertical
is kept in a vertical plane as shown. The harmonic oscillations with the amplitude A and
angular frequency of small oscillations of frequency f . The maximum value of f such
liquid in a tube is that body B does not leave the surface is
m1 1 m1 + m2 g
A (A) 2π
m2 A
1 m1 + m2 g
(B) 2π
h { α β
m1 A
1 g
g sin α .sin β g sin α .sin β (C)
(A) (B) B m2 2π A
h h
1 m2 g
g g ( sin α + sin β ) (D) 2π .
(C) (D) m1 A
h h
74 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
7. In the arrangement shown, the sleeve of mass l2
+ r2
M is fixed between two identical springs (A) 2π 12
whose combined force constant is k . The R
gr
l2
sleeve can slide without friction over a + r2
horizontal bar AB. The arrangement rotates m (B) 2π 4
with a constant angular velocity ω about a gr
vertical axis passing through the middle of the R
bar. The period of small oscillations of the l (C) 2π
g
sleeve is..............
l+R
sleeve (D) 2π
g
A M B 10. A thin uniform vertical rod of mass m and
length l pivoted at point O is shown in Fig.
The combined stiffness of the springs is equal
ω to k . The mass of the spring is negligible.
The angular frequency of small oscillation is
m m O
(A) 2π (B) 2π
k k − mω 2
m m l
(C) π (D) π
k k − mω 2
8. A vertical pole of length l , density ρ , area of
3k 3g
cross section A ,floats in two immiscible liquids
3k g +
of densities ρ1 and ρ2 .In equilibrium position (A) + (B) 2m l
2m l
the bottom end is at the interface of the liquids. 3k 2 g
When the cylinder is displaced vertically, the 3k 3g +
time period of oscillation is............... (C) + (D) m 3l
m 2l
ρl 11. A thin-walled tube of mass m and radius R
(A) π ( ρ1 + ρ2 ) g has a rod of mass m and very small cross
section soldered on its inner surface. The side-
ρl 1 1 view of the arrangement is as shown
ρ (B ) π +
ρ 2
g ρ1 m
ρ1
} l1
(C) π
( ρ1 + ρ2 ) l
R
ρg
ρ2
(D) π
l
ρg
( ρ1 + ρ 2 ) The entire arrangement is placed on a rough
horizontal surface. The system is given a
9. A uniform rod of mass, m , and length l small angular displacement from its
remains in equilibrium inside a smooth equilibrium position, as a result, the system
hemisphere of radius R as shown. The period performs oscillations. The time period of
of small oscillations of the rod resulting oscillations if the tube rolls without
slipping is
is.... Q r 2 = R 2 − l 2 / 4 4R 2R R
(A) 2π g
(B) 2π g
(C) 2π
g
(D) None of these
NARAYANAGROUP 75
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
12. An elastic string of constant k is attached to
l/2
a block of mass m as shown. The block is
2mg l/2
}
} } l l/4
}
given an extension of from the
k
equilibrium position and released. The time K
period of oscillations of the block is
4ml 2l 2 ml 2l
(A) π 3( kl + 2mg ) + π 3g (B) π kl + 2 mg + π 3
String of stiffness 'k' 3ml l 4 ml l
(C) π kl + 2mg + π 3 (D) π kl + 2 mg + π 3
15. Consider a swing whose one end is fixed above
the other rope by “b”. The distance between
m the poles of the swing is a . The lengths l1 and
m π l2 are such that l12 + l2 2 = a 2 + b 2 as shown.
m
(A) 2π (B) 4 + 3 The period of the small oscillations of the
k k 3
swing, by neglecting the height of the swinging
m m m m person, is....
(C) 2π +2 3 (D) π + 3
k k k k
13. A ring of mass m can freely slide on a smooth
vertical rod. The ring is symmetrically attached
with two springs, as shown, each of stiffness b
k . Ring is displaced such that each spring l1
makes an angle θ with the horizontal. If the l2
ring is slightly displaced vertically, then time
period is............
a
θ θ l1 + l2 l1l2
(A) 2π (B) 2π
g ga
m
l1 + l2
2 2
l1l2
(C) 2π g a + b (D) 2π g a + b
( ) ( )
16. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length l is
hinged at one end making an angle α from
m m sin θ the horizontal on the ceiling of a room. The
(A) 2π (B) 2π other end is supported by a vertical massless
k 2k
string. The angular frequency of small
2π m π m oscillations of this system is
(C) (D)
sin θ 2k sin θ 2k g 3g
14. A light inextensible string carrying a spring is (A) (B)
l sin α l sin α
passed over two smooth fixed pulleys as
shown. If the rod is slightly displaced about 3g 3g
(C) (D)
the hinge from is equilibrium position, then 5l sin α 2l sin α
time period is.
76 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
17. Four identical bars of mass m , length l are 20. Two particles move parallel to x − axis about
connected by pins at A,B,C and D. The bars the origin with same amplitude ‘ a ’ and
are attached to four springs of same stiffness frequency ω . At a certain instant they aree
as shown. The entire system can move in found at a distance a / 3 from the origin on
horizontal plane. In the equilibrium position opposite sides but their velocities are in the
shown, θ = 450 . If the corners A and C aree same direction. What is the phase difference
between the two ?
given small displacements toward each other
and released, then time period of vibration is −1 7 −1 5 −1 4 −1 1
(A) cos (B) cos (C) cos (D) cos
9 9 9 9
2M 21. From what minimum height must the system
(A) 2π h
3K be released when spring is unstretched so that
B
4m after perfectly inelastic collision ( e = 0 ) with
(B) 2π ground, B may be lifted off the ground: (Spring
A 45° C K
constant = k )
M
(C) 2π m A (A) mg / ( 4k )
D 4K
M (B) 4mg / k
(D) 2π
K
18. A rod of mass m and length l is pivoted at a h (C) mg / ( 2k )
point O in a car whose acceleration towards 2m B
(D) None of the above
left is a0 . The rod is free to oscillate in a
vertical plane. In the equilibrium state the rod 22. The mean velocity of a particle performing
remains horizontal then other end is suspended S.H.M. with time period of 0.6s and amplitude
of 10 cm averaged over a time interval during
by a spring of stiffness k . The time period of which it travels a distance of 5 cm, starting
oscillations is.... from extreme position is
a0 1)0.5 m/s 2)0.7 m/s 3)0.3m/s 4)1.04 m/s
lm
(A) 2π 23. The time period of small oscillations in a
ma0 + kl vertical plane performed by a ball of 40gm
K 2lm fixed at the middle of horizontally stretched
(B) 2π string of 1m length when the constant tension
O ma 0 + kl 10N in wire is:
lm (A) 0.1 s (B) 0.2 s (C) 0.3 s (D) 0.4 s
(C) 2 π 24. The maximum velocity of a point undergoing
3ma0 + 4kl simultaneous two oscillations given by
2lm x1 = a cos wt and x2 = a cos 2wt is:
(D) 2π 3ma 6kl
0 +
(A) 2.74aw (B) 2aw (C) 1.414aw (D) aw
25. A physical pendulum is positioned such that is
19. A body A of mass moving with velocity v while
centre of gravity is vertically above
passing through its mean position collides in suspension point. From that position the
perfect inelastically with a body B of same mass pendulum started moving toward the stable
which is connected to a vertical wall through a equilibrium and passed it with an angular
spring whose spring constant is k . After velocity ω . By neglecting the friction at point
collision it sticks to B and executes S.H.M. of suspension, the period of small oscillations
Find the amplitude of resulting motion: of the pendulum is
m m m m 2π 4π π 5π
v v v v (A) (B) (C) (D)
(A)
k
(B)
2k
(C)
k
(D)
2k ω ω ω ω
NARAYANAGROUP 77
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
26. A fly wheel of mass 35kg swings as pendulum MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
about a knife-edge as shown. The period of
30. A simple pendulum consists of a bob of mass
oscillation is 1.22s. , the moment of inertia of
m and a light string of length l as shown.
the fly wheel about its centre is
Another identical ball moving with the small
(A) 1.15 kg .m 2 velocity v0 collides with the pendulum’s bob
and sticks to it. For this new pendulum of mass
(B) 2.4 kg.m 2 2m , mark out the correct statement(s).
0.3m
(C) 3.2 kg .m 2
0.4m
(D) 0.75 kg .m 2 l
27. A thin uniform plate shaped as an equilateral
triangle with a height ‘h’ performs small v0 m
oscillations about the horizontal axis coinciding m
with one of its sides. The time period of l
oscillation is..... (A) Time period of the pendulum is 2π g
(B) The equation of motion for this pendulum is
h h 2h 2h
(A) 2π (B) π (C) π (D) 2π
g g g g v0 g
θ= sin t
28. A smooth horizontal disc rotates about the 2 gl l
vertical axis ‘O’ with constant angular velocity (C) The equation of motion for this pendulum is
ω as shown. A thin uniform rod AB of length
v0 g
‘ l ’ performs small oscillations about the θ= cos t
2 gl l
vertical axis A fixed to the disc at a distance
‘ a ’ from axis of rotation of the disc. The 2l
(D) Time period of the pendulum is 2π g
angular frequency of the oscillations of rod is
31. Figure (a) shows a spring of force constant k
3a
(A) ω fixed at one end and carrying a mass m at
2l the other end placed on a horizontal frictionless
O A B a surface. The spring is stretched by a force F.
(B) ω Figure (b) shows the same spring with both
a I l ends free and a mass m fixed at each free
3a 3a end. Each of the spring is stretched by the
(C) ω (D) ω same force F. The mass in case (a) and the
l l
rod fixed at A masses in case (b) are then released. Which
29. Two balls with masses m1 = 1kg and m2 = 2kg of the following statements are true ?
are slipped on a thin smooth horizontal rod as
shown. The balls are interconnected by a light
spring of stiffness K = 24 N / m . The left A k B F F
O
m m m
hand ball ( m1 ) is imparted the initial velocity
(a)
12 cm/s towards second ball. The amplitude
of oscillations made by the arrangement (A) While oscillating, the maximum extension of
the spring is more in case (a) than in case (b)
is................... (B) The maximum extension of the spring is same
K in both cases.
m1 m2 (C) The time period of oscillation is the same in
both cases.
(D) The time period of oscillation in case (a) is 2
(A) 3 cm (B) 2 cm (C) 1 cm (D) 4 cm times that in case (b).
78 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS Passage-II
Passage-I Two identical blocks A and B, each of mass
In the arrangement given below, both the springs m = 3kg , are connected with the help of an ideal
are in their natural lengths. The coefficient of friction spring and placed on a smooth horizontal surface
between m2 and m1 is µ . There is no friction as shown. Another identical block C moving with
between m1 and the surface. If the blocks are velocity v0 = 0.6 m / s collides with A and sticks
displaced slightly, they together perform simple to it, as a result, the motion of system takes place
harmonic motion. in some way.
k = 2000
m→ m m
–N/m
k2 C A B
m2
k1 Based on this information, answer the following
m1 questions:
35. After the collision of C and A, the combined
32. The frequency of oscillations is body and block B would
1 ( k1 + k2 ) (A) oscillate about centre of mass of system and
centre of mass is a rest.
(A) 2π
( m1 + m2 ) (B) oscillate about centre of mass of system and
centre of mass is moving
1 k1k2 (C) oscillate but about different locations other than
(B) 2π
( m1 + m2 )( k1 + k 2 ) the centre of mass.
(D) not oscillate
1 ( k1 + k2 )(m1 + m2 ) 36. Oscillation energy of the system, i.e., part of
(C)
2π m1m2 the energy which is oscillating (changing)
between potential and kinetic forms, is
1 ( m1 + m2 ) (A) 0.27 J (B) 0.09 J
(C) 0.18 J (D) 0.45 J
(D)
2π ( k1 + k2 ) 37. The maximum compression of the spring is
33. If the frictional force on m2 is acting in the (A) 3 30 mm (B) 3 20 mm
same direction of its displacement from mean (C) 3 10 mm (D) 3 50 mm
position, then
Passage-III
m1 m2 m1 k1
(A) k < k (B) m > k A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a
1 2 2 2 massive vertical spring of spring constant
(C) m1k2 = m2 k1 k = 4mg / L and natural length '10L ' . The lower
(D) frictional force is never in the direction of end of spring is free and is at a height L from fixed
displacement horizontal floor as shown. The spring is initially
unstreched and the spring-block system is released
34. If friction on m2 acts in the direction of
from rest in the shown position.
displacement, then maximum possible
amplitude of SHM is m
µ m2 g ( m1 + m2 ) µ m1 g ( m1 + m2 )
(A) (B)
m1k 2 − m2 k1 m2 k1 − m1k 2
10L
µ m1 g ( m1 + m2 ) µ m2 g ( m1 + m2 )
(C) (D)
m1k1 − m2k 2 m1k1 − m2 k2
L
NARAYANAGROUP 79
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
38. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, 42. The amplitude of oscillation would be:
the magnitude of force exerted by the spring
2 2
4mg mv0 mv0 mg
2 2
on the block is
(A) + (B) +
(A)
mg
(B) mg (C) zero (D) None of these 3k 12k 12k 3k
2
2 2
39. As the block is coming down, the maximum mv0 mg mv0 4mg
2 2
speed attained by the block is (C) + (D) +
6k k 6k 3k
3 3 43. The time taken by block-bullet system to move
(A) gL (B) 3gL (C) gL (D) gL
2 2
mg
40. Till the block reaches its lowest position for from y = initial equilibrium position ) to
the first time, the time duration for which the k
spring remains compressed is y = 0 (natural length of spring) is: [A
L L 1 π L L 1 represents the amplitude of motion]
−1
(A) π 2 g + 4 g sin 3 (B) 4 + sin −1
g 4g 3
4m −1 mg −1 4 mg
π (A) cos 3kA − cos 3kA
(C) π
L
+
L
sin − 1
2
(D) 2
L
+
L
sin − 1
2 3k
2g 4g 3 2g 4g 3
Passage-IV 3k −1 mg −1 4 mg
A block of mass m is suspended from one end of (B) cos 3kA − cos 3kA
4m
a light spring as shown. The origin O is considered
at distance equal to natural length of spring from 4m −1 4mg −1 mg
ceiling and vertical downward direction as +ve y- (C) sin − sin
axis. When the system is in equilibrium a bullet of
6k 3kA 3kA
mass m / 3 moving in vertical upward direction with (D) None of the above
velocity v0 strikes the block and embeds into it.
Passage-V
A block of mass m is connected to a spring of
As a result, the block (with bullet embedded into
it) moves up and starts oscillating. spring constant k and is at rest in equilibrium as
shown in (a). Now, the block is displaced by h
l below its equilibrium position and imparted a speed
k
O v0 towards down as shown in figure (b). As a
result of the jerk, block executes simple harmonic
m Y motion about its equilibrium position. Based on
above information answer the following questions:
[Where A is the amplitude of oscillation,
m/3 v0
h k
Based on above information, answer the following δ = sin −1 , ω = ]
questions: A m
41. Select the correct statement(s):
(A) The block-bullet system performs S.H.M.
mg
about y =
k
(B) The block-bullet system performs oscillatory
mg
motion but not S.H.M. about y = k
(C) The block-bullet system performs S.H.M. Equilibrium
m
4 mg position
about y= h
3k (a)
(D) The block-bullet system performs oscillatory
4mg v0 m
motion but not S.H.M. about y=
3k
(b)
80 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
44. The amplitude of oscillation is: Passage-VII
2 Two blocks of masses 3kg block is attached to a
mv0
(A) h (B) + h2 spring with a force constant, k k = 900 N / ma
k which is compressed 2m initially from its equilibrium
m position. When 3kg mass is released, it strikes the
(C) v0 + k (D) None of these 6kg mass and the two stick together in an inelastic
k
collision.
45. The equation for the simple harmonic motion
is: 2m2 = 6kg
(A) y = − A sin [ωt + δ ] (B) y = − A cos [ωt + δ ]
π m1 = 3kg
(C) y = A sin ωt + δ + k
2
π
(D) y = A sin ωt + δ + 2m 1m
4 49. The common velocity of the blocks after
46. Find the time taken by block to cross the mean collision is
position for the first time: (A) 10 m/s (B) 30 m/s (C) 15 m/s (D) 2 m/s
π 50. The amplitude of resulting oscillation after the
δ −δ π −δ π −δ collision is:
(A) (B) 2 (C) (D)
ω ω ω 2ω 1 1
(A) m (B) m (C) 2m (D) 3m
Passage-VI 2 3
A plank of mass M is placed on a smooth 51. The velocities of a particle executing S.H.M.
horizontal surface. Two light identical springs each are 30 cm/s and 16 cm/s when its displacements
of stiffness k are rigidly connected to struts at the are 8 cm and 15 cm from the equilibrium
ends of the plank as shown.When the springs are position. Then its amplitude of oscillation in
in their unextended position the distance between cm is:
their free ends is 3l . A block of mass m is placed (A) 25 (B) 21 (C) 17 (D) 13
on the plank and pressed against one of the springs Passage-VIII
so that it is compressed by l . To keep the blocks A cube made of wood having specific gravity 0.4
and side length a is floated in a large tank full of
at rest it is connected to the strut by means of a
water.
light string, initially the system is at rest. Now the
string is burnt.
string
struts 3l l m struts
M 52. Which action would change the depth to which
47. Maximum displacement of plank is: block is submerged ? ( γ wood < γ water )
ml 5ml 3ml 2ml (A)more water is added in the tank
(A) (B) (C) (D) (B) atmospheric pressure increases
m+M m+M m+M m+M
(C) the tank is accelerated upwards
48. Time period of oscillation of block:
(D) A small coin is placed over the cube
2Mm 2 Mm 53. If the cube is depressed slightly, it executes
(A) ( 2π + 3) k M + m (B) ( π + 6 ) k M + m
( ) ( ) SHM from it’s position. What is it’s time
period?
Mm Mm 4π
(C) ( π + 3) k M + m (D) ( 2π + 6 ) k M + m
a 5a 2a a
( ) ( ) A) 2π B) 2π C) 2π D)
g 2g 5g 5 g
NARAYANAGROUP 81
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
54. What can be maximum amplitude of it’s Passage-X
vertical simple harmonic motion ? A block is tied within two springs, each having
a spring constant equal to k . Initially the springs
(A) (B) 0.4a (C) 0.6a (D) 0.2a are in their natural length and horizontal as shown.
2
Passage-IX The block is released from rest.
The springs are ideal, acceleration due to gravity
A block is attached to a spring and is placed on a
horizontal smooth surface as shown in which spring is g downwards. Air resistance is to be neglect.
is unstretched. Now the spring is given an initial The natural length of spring is l0 .
compression 2x0 and block is released from rest.
Collisions with the wall PQ are elastic.
k k
x>0
58. If the decrease in height of the block till it
k
reaches equilibrium is 3l0 then the mass of
x0 the block is:
55. Find the time period of motion of the block: 2kl0 2kl0 3kl0
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
2π m 4π m 3π m π m g g g
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 k 3 k 2 k 2 k 59. If the block is under equilibrium and the angle
56. Write its equation of motion indicating position made by the spring with horizontal is 600 then
as a function of time: the mass of the block is:
T 2 gl0 2 gl0
(A) x = −2 x0 cos ω t 0 < t < (A) (B)
2 2 3
2π T 4 gl 0
(B) x = −2 x0 cos ωt + <t <T
3 2 (C)
3
(D) None of these
T 60. If the decrease in height of the block till its
(C) x = − x0 cos ωt 0 < t <
2 speed becomes zero is 8l0 then the mass of
πT the block is:
(D) x = −2 x0 cos ωt + < t < T
3 2 2kl0 2kl0
57. Draw x − t (position-time) graph for one (A)
g
(B)
g
period. Treating position of block in
unstretched position of spring as origin 3kl0
x x (C) (D) None of these
g
t (B) t Passage-XI
(A)
For a particle oscillating along x-axis according to
equation x = A sin ωt
61. The mean value of its velocity averaged over
x x first 3/8 of the period is
(A) 0.3 Aw (B) 0.1 Aw (C) Aw (D)0.5 Aw
(C) (D) 62. The magnitude of its mean velocity vector
t t
averaged over first 3/8 of the period is:
(A) 0.3Aw (B)0.55Aw (C) Aw (D) 0.1Aw
82 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
63. The mean value of its speed averaged over 68. The velocity of particle is given by
first 3/8 of the period is:
(A) v = A2 + B 2 ω
(A) 0.3Aw (B) 0.55Aw (C) Aw (D) 0.1Aw
Passage-XII (B) v = A2 cos2 ωt + B 2 sin 2 ωt .ω
The distance travelled in a time, t by a particle
moving along x-axis according to an equation (C) v = ω (A 2
+ B 2 ) − ( x2 + y 2 )
x = A cos wt is given by S = nA + S 0 , when time
(D) v = ω ( A + B) − ( x + y)
2 2
T
t can be written as t = n + t0 such that 69. The acceleration of particle is given by [Q r
4
is position vector]
t0 < T / 4 and distance travelled in that t0 is S 0 . (A) a = −ω 2 r (B) a = ω 2 r
64. The distance S is, when ‘n’ is even number: (C) a = ω r (D) a = −ω r
nπ
S = A ( n + 1) − cos ωt + MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
2
(A)
nπ 70. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0 .
S = A ( n + 1) − cos ω t −
(B) 2 Their positions as function of time are given
nπ by X A = A sin ωt and X B = A sin ( ωt + π / 3)
S = A n + sin ωt −
2
(C)
Column-I Column-II
nπ 5π
(D) S = A ( n + 1) − sin ωt − (A) Minimum time when (p)
2 6ω
65. The distance S is, when ‘n’ is odd number. x is same
S = A ( n + 1) − cos ωt +
nπ π
2
(A) (B) Minimum time when velocity (q)
3ω
nπ is same
(B) S = A ( n + 1) − cos ω t −
2 (C) Minimum time
nπ π
(C) S = A n + sin ωt − after which vA < 0 and vB < 0 (r)
2 ω
(D) Minimum time
nπ
S = A ( n + 1) − sin ωt −
2 π
(D)
after which xA < 0 and xB < 0 (s)
66. The resultant amplitude of oscillations 2ω
resulting from super position of 71. A particle of mass 2 kg is moving on a straight
x1 = 3cos ωt , x2 = 5cos (ω t + π / 4 ) and line under the action of force F = ( 8 − 2 x ) N .
x3 = 6sin ωt is The particle is released from rest at x = 6m .
(A) 14 (B) 7 (C) 4 (D) 2 For the subsequent motion, match the
following (all the values in the Column-II are
Passage-XIII
in their SI units):
A point moves in the plane xy according to the Column-I Column-II
law x = A sin ωt ; y = B cos ω t ; where A,B & ω (A) Equilibrium position is at x (p) π / 4
are positive constant. (B) Amplitude of SHMs ( q) π / 2
67. The equation for trajectory for path taken by (C) Time taken to go
particle is
directly from x = 2 to x = 4 (r) 4
x2 y2
(A) x 2 + y 2 = A2 (B) + =1 . (D) Energy of SHM is (s) 6
A2 B 2
(E) Phase constant of SHM assuming (t) 2
(C) y = Bx (D) y = Ax + Bx 2
equation of the form A sin ( ωt + φ )
NARAYANAGROUP 83
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
72. Match the following 74. Column I shows spring block system with a
Column-I lists the various modes of oscillations constant force permanently acting on block
of masses connected to springs. Column-II match entries of column-I with column-II.
lists the corresponding frequencies of Column-I
oscillations when executing S.H.M.
x=0
Match them properly. k
Column-I (A) m F = 2mg
k k
(A) x=0
k
m m (B) m F = 2mg
k
(B) m 2m
g g
2k
m k k
(C) k
(C) (D)
m m
k k/2 F = 2mg F = 2mg
m Column-II
(D)
m
(p) Time period of oscillation T = 2π spring is
Column - II k
initially relaxed when force is applied
1 3k 1 2k
(p) (q) 2mg
2π 2m 2π m (q) Amplitude of oscillation is A = spring is
k
1 k 1 3k initially relaxed when force is applied
(r) (s) (r) Maximum velocity attained by block is before
2π 3m 2π m
73. A mass m is subjected to a force m
force is applied block is in equilibrium 2 g k
F = ( at − bx ) iˆ initially the mass lies at the
position
origin at rest. Here x refers to the x
(s) Maximum magnitude of acceleration of block
coordinate of the mass, t refers to the time
When force is applied block is in equilibrium is 2g.
elapsed. All the values are in S.I. unit (i.e.
(t) Velocity of block when spring is in natural length
F , m , t , x , a and b are constants). Now match is zero. If block acquire natural length.
the column-I with column-II. (All values in 75. In column-I, the projection of a particle
column-II are in S.I.Units.) moving along a circle (uniformly) in x − y
Column-I Column-II plane with its centre of origin along x and y
(A) Maximum velocity attained axes, while in Column-II, the description of
by the mass (p) 1 particle’s motion is given. It is given that
(B) Average velocity of the particle particle’s angular velocity is constant and
during the subsequent motion (q) 2 equal to ω and the radius of circle is
(C) Average acceleration of the particle
π
during subsequent motion (r) 0 A, δ ≠ 0, or π . For this situation match the
2
π π
(D) Position of particle at t = (s) −1 column-I with column-II.
2 2
84 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
Column-I 77. Statement-I: During the oscillations of simple
(A) x ( t ) = A sin ( ωt + δ − π / 2 ) ; pendulum, the direction of its acceleration at the
mean position is directed towards the point of
(B) x ( t ) = A sin ( ωt + δ ) ; suspension and at extreme position it is directed
towards the mean position.
(C) x ( t ) = A sin (ωt ) ; x ( t ) = A cos ( ωt )
Statement-II: The direction of acceleration of a
(D) x ( t ) = A cos ( ωt + δ ) ; simple pendulum at the mean position or at the
extreme position is decided by the tangential and
Column-II
radial components of force by gravity.
(p) Uniform circular motion (clockwise)
78. Statement-I: For a particle of mass 1 kg, executing
(q) Uniform circular motion (anti-clockwise)
S.H.M., if slope of restoring force vs displacement
(r) At t = 0 particle is neither on x − axis nor on graph is = -1, then the time period of oscillation
y -axis will be 6.28 s.
(s) At t = 0 particle is either on x -axis or on Statement-II: If 1 kg mass is replaced by 2 kg
y − axis. mass and rest of the information remains same as
76. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a in statement-1, then the time period of oscillation
block attached to a spring with k = 200 N / m . will remain 6.28 s.
The block slides on a frictionless horizontal 79. Statement-I: In simple harmonic motion, the graph
surface, with equilibrium point x = 0 . A graph between velocity and the displacement is an ellipse.
Statement-II: In simple harmonic motion the phase
of the block’s velocity v as a function of time
difference between velocity and displacement is
t is shown. Correctly match the required
information in Column-I with the values given π /2.
80. Statement-I: Two cubical blocks of same material
in Column-II (use π 2 = 10 )
and of sides a and 2a , respectively are attached
V[m/5] rigidly and symmetrically to each other as shown.
2π The system of two blocks is floating in water in
0.10 0.20 such a way that upper surface of bigger block is
O t(s)
just submerged in the water. If the system of blocks
-2π is displaced slightly in vertical directions, then the
amplitude of oscillation on either side of equilibrium
Column-I Column-II position would be different.
(A) The block’s mass in kg (p) −0.20
a
(B) The block’s displacement at
t = 0 in maters (q) -200
(C) The block’s acceleration
at t = 0.10 s in m / s 2 (r) 0.20
(D) The block’s maximum kinetic
energy in joules (s) 4.0
STATEMENT MODEL
(A) If Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is the correct explanation for
Statement-1.
(B) If Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true, 2a
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement-1. Statement-II: The force constant on two sides of
(C) If Statement-1 is true; Statement-2 is false. equilibrium position in the above-described situation
(D) If Statement-1 is false; Statement-2 is true. is different.
NARAYANAGROUP 85
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
81. Statement-I: Three pendulums are suspended 84. A rod of mass m and length l hinged at one
from ceiling as shown. end is connected by two springs of spring
constants k1 and k2 so that it is horizontal at
equilibrium. What is the angular frequency
of the system ? (in rad/s)
( Takel=lm,b=1/4m,K1 = 16N / m, K2 = 63N / m, m = 3kg )
These three pendulums are set to oscillate as shown
by arrows, and it is found that all three have same
time period. Now, all three are taken to a place K1
where acceleration due to gravity changes to 4/9th
of its value at the first place. If spring pendulum O
makes 60 cycles in a given time at this place, then
torsion pendulum and simple pendulum will also b
make 60 oscillations in same (given) time interval. K2
Statement-II: Time period of torsional pendulum l
is independent of acceleration due to gravity.
82. Statement-I: A circular metal hoop is suspended
on the edge by a hook. The hoop can oscillate 85. A uniform disc of mass m and radius
side to side in the plane of the hoop, or it can
80
oscillate back and forth in a direction perpendicular R= m is pivoted smoothly at P. If a
to the plane of the hoop. The time period of 23π 2
oscillation would be more when oscillations are uniform ring of mass m and radius R is welded
carried out in the plane of the hoop. at the lowest point of the disc, find the period
Statement-II: Time period of physical pendulum of SHM of the system (disc + ring). (in
is more if moment of inertia of the rigid body about seconds)
corresponding axis passing through the pivoted
point is more. P
INTEGER ANSWER QUESTIONS R
R m 2R = r A
83. A weightless rigid rod with a small iron bob at
the end is hinged at point A to the wall so that
it can rotate in all directions. The rod is kept
in the horizontal position by a vertical R
inextensible string of length 20 cm, fixed at R m B
its midpoint. The bob is displaced slightly
perpendicular to the plane of the rod and
string. Find period of small oscillations of the 86. In the figure shown a plate of mass 60g is at
πX rest and in equilibrium. A particle of mass
system in the form s , the value of X is
10 m = 30 g is released from height 4.5 mg/k from
B
the plate. The particle sticks to the plate.
Neglecting the duration of collision find the
l = 20cm time from the collision of the particle and plate
to the moment when the spring has maximum
A compression. Spring has force constant 1 N/
Bob m. Calculate the value of time in the form
l l π / x and find the value of x .
86 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
m
LEVEL - VI - HINTS
l
2 cos θ 1. t = t1 + t2 + t3 , let C ', D ' be the extreme positions
of the springs k2 , k1 respectively..
T1 m
t1 = t DD ' + tD ' D = =π
2 k1
∴
2 L t = t + t = T2 = π m
t2 = t DC + tCD = ; 3 CC ' C 'C 2
87. A small body of mass m is connected to two v k2
horizontal springs of elastic constant k , natural 2. Let x is the small displacement from mean position
length 3d / 4 . In the equilibrium position both perpendicular to plane of figure then:
springs are stretched to length d , as shown.
A C
What will be the ratio of period of the motion θ θ
(Tb / Ta ) if the body is displaced horizontally x
F0+dF0 F0+dF0
by a small distance where Ta is the time period
when the particle oscillates along the line of m
restoring force on particle due to only two springs
springs and Tb is time period when the particle
oscillates perpendicular to the plane of the = 2 ( F0 + dF0 ) sin θ , From symmetry, total
figure ? Neglect effects of gravity. restoring force due to all four springs =
x
d d 4 ( F0 + dF0 ) sin θ : ≈ 4 ( F0 + dF0 )
l
m
k k 4 F0 4F0
≈ x (Q dF0 .x → 0 ) ⇒ a = − x = −ω 2 x
LEVEL-VI - KEY l ml
2π
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS ∴T = =?
1) D 2) A 3) B 4)A 5) C 6) B 7) B ω
8) B 9) A 10) C 11) A 12) B 13) C 14) A 3. The diagram in disturbed condition is:
15) B 16) D 17) A 18) D 19) B 20) A 21) B
22) A 23) B 24) A 25) B 26) A 27) C 28) A 29) B
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS x
30) A,B 31) B,D
y x' ∆l Excess length of
COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS x
32) A 33) B 34) A 35) B 36) A 37) A 38) B liquid which
39) C 40) B 41) C 42) B 43) A 44) B 45) A h provide restoring
46) C 47) B 48) D 49) A 50) C 51) C 52) D force
53) C 54) C 55) B 56) B,A 57) B 58) C 59) C α β
60) B 61) A 62) C 63) B 64) B 65) C 66) B
67) B 68) B 69) A ∴ ∆l = x + x ' ......................(1) From diagram:
MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS α β
70) A-q; B-p; C-s ; D-r 71) A-r; B-t; C-q; D-r; E-q
72) A-q; B-p; C-s; D-r 73) A-q; B-p ; C-r ; D-s
74) A-p,q,r,s,t ; B-p,q,r,s,t ; C-p,q,r,s;D-p,q,r,s x y y x'
75) A-p,q,r ; B - p,q,r ; C - p,q,s ; D -p,q,r
76) A - r ; B - p; C - q; D - s
ASSERTION & REASON QUESTIONS
77) A 78) C 79) B 80) A 81) D 82) A sin α
INTEGER ANSWER QUESTIONS y = x sin α = x 'sin β ⇒ x ' = x : ....(2)
83) 4 84) 8 85) 2 86) 5 87) 2 sin β
NARAYANAGROUP 87
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
∴ Restoring force, F = W∆l .sin β
= ( ρ A.∆l.g ) sin β .............(3)
mω2x M kx
But F = ma ......................(4)
where m = A ρ .l ...................(5)
h h
l= + ...............(6) a
sin α sin β
find w , after solving above equations. ∴ Frestoring = kx − mω 2 x ⇒ ma = ( k − mω 2 ) x
4. Concept of physical pendulum f =
1 mgl
⇒a=
( k − mω ) x 2
T =?
2π I m
where l = length between point of suspension and [Q do not confuse angular velocity of frame with
centre of mass, I = moment of inertia about A angular frequency of SHM]
L ML2 8. Here interface acts as mean position of SHM:
⇒l = 10 ; I = T1 T2
4 3 ∴ time period, T = +
5. Let, x be the displacement of centre of mass of 2 2
cylinder from mean position. ρl ρl
∴ from rolling concept, elongation in spring= 2x T1 = 2π : T2 = 2π
ρ2 g ρ1 g
∴ Restoring torque about point of contact is:
τ rest = −2 R ( 2kx ) = −4kxR 9. Restoring torque : τ = mgrθ
but x = Rθ ⇒ τ rest = −4kR 2θ = Iα
3
= mR 2 .α and α = − ω 2 θ : r R
2
6. As A oscillates up and down, the normal force
between B and surface varies from minimum to
maximum. To keep body B in contact with the
surface, the Rminimum ≥ 0 and R becomes
minimum, when A is at topmost position. l/2
Free body diagrams are: mgr
⇒ I ω 2θ = mgrθ ⇒ ω =
2
and
I
T
ml 2 l2 2π
I= + mr 2 ; r 2 + = R 2 ∴ T =
12 4 ω
Aω 2 = a A B 10. Let the diagram in disturbed position is as shown.
O
l/2
T R
θ
m1g m 2g
(Q in non-inertialframe )
T + m1 g = m1 Aw ..................(1)
2
mg K2X
– T + m2 g = R .........................(2)
and R ≥ 0 ..............................(3) K1X
solve for f min = ? x
7. Let x be the displacement of sleeve in disturbed ∴ Restoring torque about ‘O’ is
condition along horizontal bar from centre. l
The free body diagram is: τ rest = mg sin θ + k1x ( l cosθ ) + k2 x ( l cosθ )
2
88 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
mgl 13. Let x be the displacement of the ring from
= sin θ + kxl cos θ (Q k1 + k 2 = k ) equilibrium position and x ' be the extension in the
2
spring:
1(Qθ → small ; sin θ → θ ;
mgl kx1 kx–1
cos θ → 1; x = lθ ) = + kl 2 θ ;
2
ml 2 90 - θ 90 - θ
= I .α = .α ⇒ α = ω 2θ ⇒ ω = ?
3
11. Rolling can be considered as pure rotation about
point of contact, P: Now it is compound pendulum
oscillating about ‘P’.
x'
Sinθ = ∴ Frest = 2kx 'cos ( 90 − θ )
x
θ
x
c.m R
R/2
I x
∴T = 2π ; where I = mR2 + mR2 = 2mR2 .
mgd 2π
d = R / 2 ∴T = ? ⇒ x ' = x sin θ = ma & a = ω 2 x ; T = ω = ?
12. Here string becomes slack when acceleration of 14. Let the rod is displaced by θ towards left:
body becomes more than g above equilibrium ∴ net torque on rod is
position. Hence during that period, SHM
disappears: l l l l
−k sin θ . cos θ + mg sin θ + k sin θ l cos θ
P4 2 2 2 2
b as θ is small. sin θ → θ ; cos θ → 1
P3
O
equilibrium
position
b θ
P1 mg
b=
P2 k
upto P3 , SHM appears and between P3 & P4 ,
SHM disappears. =
2T1
3
( )
+ tP3 P4 + t P P :
4 3
kl 2 mgl kl 2
∴ T = tOP2 + t P2O + tOP3 + t P3 P4 + t P4 P3 + tP3O ⇒τ = θ+ .θ − θ
2 2 4
m kl 2 mgl ml 2
where : T1 = 2π velocity at P3 is : = + θ = α
k
4 2 3
v = ω A2 − x2 = ω 4b 2 − b 2 = bω 3
T 4ml
t P3 P4 + t P4 P3 =
2v ∴ t1 = 2 = π 3 ( kl + 2mg ) ................(1)
g
NARAYANAGROUP 89
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
l/2 cosθ 16. For a small angular displacement β from vertical,
the figure is: Restoring torque about ‘O’ is:
l α
2 cos θ β
l θ
K θ
2
l sinα
l cosθ
P
P'
mg
τ = ( T sin β ) l ≈ T β l .................(1).
When the rod is displaced right by an angle θ ,
then string becomes slack i.e., rod becomes where T = tension in the string = ?
when the rod is in equilibrium position.
1 I
physical pendulum. ∴ t22 = T = = 2π l
2 mgd ∑τ = 0 = mg 2 cos α − T ( l cos α )
mg
⇒T = .............. ( 2 )
2
θ From figure : pp ' = θ l = β l sin α ................(3)
ml 2
I= : solve for time period.
3
17. Let the angle turned by the bars be ‘ θ ’ after being
displaced from equilibrium position. Compression
ml 2
where I = , d = l / 2 , time period = t1 + t2 = ? in springs A,C is ∆x1 = l cos ( 450 − θ ) − cos 450
3
15. From the given information, it is inferred that two extension i springs B, D is
ropes are perpendicular to each other: ∆ x2 = l cos 45 0 − cos ( 45 0 + θ )
∴T1 cos θ + T2 sin α = mg ................(1) ∴ Potential energy
T1 sin α = T2 cos α ...........................(2) 1 2 1 2
= 2 K ∆x1 + 2 K ∆x2 .............(1)
⇒ T1 = Mg cos α and T2 = mg sin α 2 2
45 + θ
45 − θ
⇒
45°
90 - α
T1 α T2
≈ Kl 2θ 2 (Q after simplication )
mg Kinetic energy =
When the swing is given a displacement, x , along
1 dθ
2 2
ml2 l ml
2
outward normal to plane of the paper as: I ; where I = + m tan450 =
θ φ 2 dt 12 2 3
x ∴ dE / dt = 0 ⇒ solve for T..
18. Let e be the initial elongation in the spring at
equilibrium position: ∴ about ‘O’
x x
Frestoring = T1 cosθ + T2 cosφ ; cosθ = ; cosφ = l mg
l1 l2 τ = mg − kel = 0 ⇒ e = ...................(1)
2 2k
Solve for time period.
let the angular displacement be θ :
90 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
21. Just after collision with ground, Applying COE
1 2 1 1
mv + mgx + kx 2 = m ( 2 gh ) + 0 + 0
2 2 2
1
ma0 ⇒ mv 2 > 0 ⇒ h > 4mg / k
(Q in non-inertial frame ) 2
T /6
θ ∫ −aω sin ωt.dt
V = 0
T /6
22. average
∫ dt
mg
l l 0
∴τ restoring = mg cos θ + ma0 sin θ
2 2 l/2 l/2
ml 2
− k ( e − l sin θ ) l cos θ ) = Iα = α
3
⇒α = ? T
X0
T
2 π θ0 θ0 θ θ x
= w2θ ∴ T =
w 23.
19. Assuming the collision lasts for a small interval. We
can apply conservation of momentum and get the (x <<x0)
2 mg mg
v 1 v 1 2
common velocity = K .E . = ( 2m ) = mv 4T
2 2 2 4 ∴ mg − 2T cos θ = ma ⇒ a = − x = −ω 2 x
This is also the total energy of system as the spring ml
is unstretched at this moment. If the amplitude is ml
1 2 1 2 1 2 ∴T = π
A, total energy = kA ∴ kA = mv T
2 2 4 24. x = a cos wt + a cos 2wt
m dx dv
∴ A= .v v= For vmax ; =0
2k dt dt
20. Let x1 = a sin ωt and x2 = a sin ( ωt + δ ) be two ⇒ cos wt = 0.64 ∴ vmax = 2.74aw
S.H.M.
a −a
= a sin ωt and = a sin ( ωt + δ ) l
3 3 l
1 −1
sin ωt = and sin ( ωt + δ ) = 25. x
3 3
1 1 −1
Eliminating t , cos δ + 1 − sin δ = ω
3 9 3 From law of conservation of energy
9 cos 2 δ + 2 cos δ − 7 = 0 1
mg ( 2l ) = Iω 2 ........... (1)
cosδ = −1 or 7/9 i.e., δ = 1800 or cos−1 ( 7/9) 2
I
Now v1 = aω cos ωt and v2 = aω cos ( ωt + δ ) Time period : T = 2π ..........................(2)
mgl
If we put δ = 1800 . We find that v1 and v2 are of Solve (1) & (2) , to get T = ?
opposite signs. Hence δ = 1800 is not applicable.
I
∴δ = cos −1
( 7 / 9) 26. T = 2π : I =?
mgl
NARAYANAGROUP 91
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
31. Extension ; x = F / k ; as F is same in both cases,
h/3
m
27. x will be the same. time period = 2π
G k
T' k 1 1
I mh 2 ⇒ = = =
T = 2π ;l = h/3: I = T =?
T k' 2 2
mgl 6 COMPREHENSION TYPE
28. Problem can be solved in rotatory frame. Passage-I
In disturbed condition:
B
32. Oscillate together i.e. meff = m1 + m2
2
mrω
θ1 meff
keff = k1 + k2 ∴T = 2π
r
keff
θ
l/2 33. Assume blocks are displaced towards right, the
O
free body diagram of m2 except frictional force is:
a
N
From diagram:
a
=
r a sin θ
⇒r= ........... (1) m2 k2x
sin r sin (π − θ ) sin r
2 l
∴ torque about A is τ = −mrω 2 sin θ1 .......(2)
m2g
ml 2
τ = Iα = α ......... ( 3) θ is small. a =ω2x
3 if frictional force acts towards right ,then
Solve for angular frequency , ω0 = ? k2 x − friction = m2ω 2 x ⇒ k 2 x > m2ω 2 x
29. Total mechanical energy of system = kinetic energy k +k m k
1 ⇒ k2 > m2 1 2 ⇒ 1 > 1
of mass m1 = m1v1 .................(1) m1 + m2
2
m2 k2
2
But total mechanical energy = kinetic energy due 34. f = k2 A − m2ω 2 A ≤ µ m2 g
to motion of centre of mass + energy of oscillation.
⇒ energy of oscillation µm2g k +k
⇒ A≤ and ω = 1 2 Amax = ?
m1v1
2
1 1 k2 −m2ω 2
m1 + m2
= 2 1 1 2 ( 1 2 ) m m = µ v1 = µ ( Aw )
1 1 2 2
− +
2
m v m m
1 2 2 2 Passage-II
37. B accelerates and combined mass decelerates. The
v1 k centre of mass of the system continues to move
⇒ v1 = Aw ⇒ A = ; v1 = 12 cm / s w= :
w µ rightward with constant speed. While both the
solve for A. blocks oscillate about centre of mass.
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS v0
The velocity just after collision is: v =
l 2
30. T = 2π , independent of mass of bob: The velocity of centre of mass is:
g
m v + m2v2 µ
Equation of motion is : θ = θ 0 sin ωt Vc.m = 1 1 T = 2π
m1 + m2 ; k
:
Calculation of θ0 is from law of conservation of reduced mass concept:
2
v0 1
1
energy. ( 2m ) = 2mgl (1 − cos θ 0 ) ⇒ θ 0 = ? Oscillation energy of the system is: E = ( 2m ) v
2
2 2 2
Translational kinetic energy of the centre of mass
92 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
1 moving with velocity v , then by using
of the system = ( 3m ) vcm2 v = ω A2 − x2 , we can find the amplitude of
2
The remaining energy is oscillating between kinetic motion.
and potential energy during the motion of blocks:
3k 2 mg
2 2
v0 3k 2
A − ( y − y0 ) =
Oscillating energy = maximum elastic potential A −
=
2
energy 4 4m 4m 3k
Passage-III
38. When speed of block is maximum, net force on mv
2
mg
2
mv02 mg
2
block is zero. Hence at that instant spring exerts a ⇒ 0 = A2 − ⇒ A = +
force of magnitude ‘ mg ’ on the block. 12k 3k 12k 3k
39. kx = mg .................(1) To compute the time taken by the combined mass
mg
1 1
mg ( L + x ) = kx 2 + mvmax ................(2)
2 from y = to y = 0 , we can either go for
k
2 2 equation method or circular motion projection
3 method.
From (1) & (2) : we get vmax = gL
2
40. x = A sin ωt ; where x = L / 4
⇒ t0 = ? ( Q from compression to mean position) y=0
β θ y = y0
α
2π π L y – y0 4mg
and t2 = = ; ∴ t = t1 + t2 = ? y=
4ω 4 g α = θ+β
3k
Passage-IV
43. Initially in equilibrium let the elongation in spring by
mg
y0 , then ⇒ y0 =
k θ α −β
Required time, t = =
ω ω
y − y0 mg y 4mg
y=0 cos α = = ; cos β = =
A 3kA A 3kA
y
mg −1 4mg
v y cos −1 − cos
m A so, t = 3kA 3kA
m 4m ω
3 v0 3 A 4m 4m −1 mg −1 4mg
= cos 3kA − cos 3kA
3 3k
As the bullet strikes the block with velocity v0 and Passage-V
gets embedded into it, the velocity of the combined 44. The angular frequency of simple harmonic motion
mass can be computed by using the principle of k
momentum conservation. is given by, ω =
m
m 4m v
V0 = V ⇒v= 0 The velocity of block, when it is at a displacement
3 3 4 of y from mean position is given by,,
Let new mean position is at distance y from origin,
4m 4mg v = ω A2 − y 2 , where A is the amplitude of
then ky = g ⇒y= . Now, the block oscillation. For given initial condition,
3 3k
2
executes S.H.M. about mean position defined by k mv
v0 = A2 − h 2 ⇒ A2 = 0 + h 2
4mg m k
y= . At t = 0 , the combined mass is at a
3k 2
mv0
displacement of y − y0 from mean position and is ⇒ A= + h2
k
NARAYANAGROUP 93
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
45. To have the equilibrium of simple harmonic motion,
3l 3l
it is best to represent simple harmonic motion as =
uniform circular motion. = vm / M k ( M + m)
Y l
Mm
Time period of oscillation of block
3l Mm
P = 2 2t1 +
k ( M + m ) Mm
= ( 2π + 6 )
k ( M + m)
X
δ h y l
Mm
Passage-VII
t=0 49. Angular frequency of oscillation is given by
At t = 0 , let particle is making an angle δ with k
ω= = 10 3 . velocity of 3 kg block at the
h h m
−ve, x − axisasshown,then sin δ = ⇒ δ = sin −1 instant it hits the 6kg block is given by
A A
At time, y = − A sin (ωt + δ ) v = ω A2 − x 2 = 10 3 22 − 12 ⇒ 30 m / s
So, the equation of simple harmonic motion is, During collision moment is conserved thus
k m1v1 = ( m1 + m2 ) vC ⇒ 3 × 30 = 9 × vC
h
2
mv0
y=− + h 2 sin t + sin −1 or, hence, common velocity of combined mass =
k m A
46. To compute the time taken by the block to cross ( vC ) = 10 m / s
mean position for the first time we can make use of 50. After collision angular frequency of oscillation has
circular motion representation: changed however the instantaneous position of
block does not change. Also equilibrium position
h
π − sin −1 is still at relaxed length of spring.
π −δ A
t= = Q
ω k
m
Passage-VI
48. (1) CM remains at rest ; block moves 5t on plank
when system comes to rest k
5ml 9kg
−m [ 5l − ∆x ] + M ∆x = 0 ; ∆x =
m+M P
1 m.M 2 1 2
(2) In CM frame v m / M = kl 1m
2 m+M 2 Hence x = 1m
M +m k
vv / M = k l Now angular velocity ω ' =
Mm ( m1 + m2 ) ;
(3) Consider motion of block w.r.t.plank
900
kx ω'= = 10
aM = right ward ; F = − ( kx + maM ) or 9
M
Velocity = ω ' A '2 − x2 or 10 = 10 A' 2 − 12
d 2x k 1 1 ω 2 = kmM
= + = − + x
(M + m) k
x a k
dt 2 m
M
M m Hence A ' = 2m
π Mm 51. v 2 = ω 2 ( A2 − x 2 )
Time to get the spring relaxed is t1 = 2
( M + m) k For x = 8cm ; 302 = ω 2 ( A2 − 82 ) ..............(1)
For x = 15cm;16 2 = ω 2 ( A2 − 152 ) ..............(2)
Time taken by block to travel 3l between springs
Solving (1) and (2),
94 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
162 A2 − 162 ( 8 ) = 302 A2 − ( 30 ) − (15 )
2 2 2
8π 4 m
Net time period T = 2t BP = = π
A2 ( 302 − 16 2 ) = ( 30 ) (15 ) − (16 ) ( 8) ⇒ A = 17 6ω 3 k
2 2 2 2
x
Passage-VIII
53. mg = Fb ; a3 × 0.4 ρ g = a 2 h ρ g x0
T
2
h = a ; m = a3 × 0.4 ρ ; Fnet = a 2 x ρ g O t
5 T
2
a3 × 0.4 ρ 2a –2x0
T = 2π ; T = 2π
a ρg
2
5g
54. Displacement must be less than side of cube. T
Passage-IX 56. x = −2 x0 cos ω t ; −0 < t <
2
A block is attached to a spring and is placed on a
2π T
horizontal smooth surface as shown in which spring x = −2 x0 cos ωt + ; <t <T
is unstretched. Now the spring is given an initial 3 2
compression 2x0 and block is released from rest. Passage-X
Collisions with the wall PQ are elastic. A block is tied within two springs, each having
spring constant equal to k . Initially the springs
x>0 are in their natural length and horizontal as shown.
The block is released from rest.
The springs are ideal, acceleration due to gravity
is g downwards. Air resistance is to be neglect.
The natural length of spring is l0 .
k
k k
x0
55. Treat initial position of block as origin O . Had 58. l0 + x0 = l0 2 + 3l0 2 = 2l0 ⇒ x0 = l0
wall not been.....motion would have been normal
3kl0
S.H.M. with amplitude 2x0 say......point, Give A mg = kx0 sin600 2 = 3kl0 ⇒ m =
and B g
' + ' ve tan θ = 3 ⇒ θ = 600
x0
B O P A θ
3l0
2x0
2x0
But in the given situation velocity of block at P will
2
get.... with same magnitude, mass PA part of 1 2 1 2
motion will be...... Equation of motion 59. 0 + mg 3l0 + 0 = mv + 0 + k ( l0 )
2 2
x = −2 x0 cos ω t 2
1 2 2kl0
for tBP ; x = x0 ⇒ x0 = −2 x0 cos ω tBP ⇒ mv = 3mgl0 − kl0 ⇒ v = 2 3 gl0 −
2 2
2 m
π π 4π
⇒ ωtBP = + ⇒tBP = ’ t PB = t BP
2 6 6ω
NARAYANAGROUP 95
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
2l g 2
2 dx dy
68. vx = ; vy = = v = vx + vy
2 2
= 2 3gl0 − 0 = 2 3gl0 − gl0 dt dt
3l0 3
dv dv y
69l0 − 2 gl0 4 gl0 69. ax = x ; ay = ; a = axiˆ + a y ˆj
= = dt dt
3 3 MATRIX MATCHING QUESTIONS
60. l + x = 8l0 + l0 = 3l0 ⇒ x = 2l0
2 2
B A A
π/3 30°
θ 70.
8l0 B
π
⇒ t1 =
3ω
( A) wt1 = π − ( wt1 + π / s )
1 2 5π
0 + 0 + mg 8l0 = 0 + k ( 2l0 ) × 2 + 0 ⇒ t2 = ( B ) wt2 = 2π − ( wt2 + π / 3)
2 6ω
4kl0 2kl0 ( c ) cos wt3 < 0 t3 < π / 2 w
⇒ k 4l0 = mg 8l0 ⇒ m = =
2
g 8 g ( d ) sin wt4 < 0 t4 < π / w
Passage-XI
3T /8
∫ Aw cos wt.dt
Vave = 0
3T /8
A
A
61.
∫ dt
0
ωt = π ωt = π
B ⇒t = π/ω B ⇒t = π/ω
∫
3T /8
AwCoswt
. .dt
62. Vave =
0
71. F = 8 − 2 x = −2 ( x − 4 ) :
3T /8
∫ 0
dt
at equilibirum ; F = 0 ⇒ x = 4m
∫
3T /8
Aw cos wt .dt extreme position is at x = 6m
63. Average speed =
0
⇒ amplitude, A = 2m
∫
3T /8
dt
0 force constant , k = 2 N / m
Passage-XII 2π
64. S = nA + S 0 ; S 0 = A − x0 ; x0 = A cos wt0 ⇒ mω 2 = 2 ⇒ ω = ? T = =?
ω
65. S = nA + S0 ; S0 = x0 = A sin wt0 time from x = 2 to x = 4 ; t = T / 4
a2 = 5 1 2
∴ Energy = kA = ?
2
As the particle has started its motion from positive
a1 = 3 extreme φ = π / 2
66. 72. (A) Motion is simple harmonic
a3 = 6
d 2x −k
2
= ( m2 + 2m1 ) .x
dt m1m2
Passage-XIII 1 2 1 2
67. sin 2 θ + cos 2 θ = 1 ω2 = k + = k + .x
m1 m2 m 2m
96 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- IV OSCILLATIONS
Maximum value of v = 2m / s
And average value of v = 1 m / s
π
t = π / 2 = − 1 m
1
m1 = m m2 = 2m m1 = m Position = ∫0 vdt = t − sin t , at
2
2k 1 2k 74. (A) For equilibrium
ω= ∴ frequency =
m 2π m 2mg 2mg
2mg = kx ; x = ; A= ; vmax = Aω
k ( m + 2m ) 3k k k
(B) Angular frequency ω = = 2mg k m k 2mg
2m 2 2m = = 2g ; amax = ω 2 A ; = × = 2g
k m k m k
1 2k (B) Same as (A)
∴ frequency =
2π m 2mg
m (C) Initially mg = kx0 ; 3mg = kx ; A =
m k
(C) Here effective spring constant = 3k Spring will not acquire natural length.
2k mg
(D) mg = kx0 Spring is compressed by in
m
k
k
2mg mg
equilibrium kx = mg ; A = ; x=
k k
1 3k
∴ frequency = kx
2π m
(D) Effective spring constant (K) is given by
1 1 1 3 K
= + = ; K=
K K K K 3
F = 2mg
k 2k mg
m dv
76. v = v0 sin ωt ; x = ∫ vdt ; a =
dt
1
1 K K .Emax = KA2
∴ frequency = 2π 3m 2
ASSERTION & REASON
md 2 x dv
73. F = at − bx = 2
=m 77. Tangent component of weight = mg sin θ
dt dt
Radial component of weight = mg cos θ
dv
Putting value, we get =t−x at mean position ; radial present
dt at extreme position; tangent present.
d 2v 78.As F = − mω 2 y ⇒ slope of F − y graph is
Differentiating once more 2 = 1 − v = −1( v − 1)
dt − mω 2 −1 = − mω 2 = −ω 2 ⇒ ω = 1 T = 2π = 6.28 s
Comparing this with standard S.H.M. equation, we If mass is changed but slope remains same, the
get ⇒ v − 1 = A sin (ωt + φ ) or time period will change.
v = 1 + A sin (ωt + φ ) 79. y = a sin ( ωt + φ ) ; v = aω cos ( ωt + φ )
v2 y2
Now at t = 0, v = 0 and
dv
=0 v = ω a − y ⇒ 2 2 + 2 =1
2 2
dt ω a a
and phase difference between displacement and
⇒ 0 = 1 + A cos φ ⇒ 0 = A cos φ Solving we get,
π
v = 1 + A sin t − ( π / 2 ) = 1 − cos ( t ) velocity is .
2
NARAYANAGROUP 97
OSCILLATIONS JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOLIV
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
80. Let ρ0 = density of material of cube ρ = density I
of liquid. ∴ at equilibrium position: 85. T = 2π : I = I disc + I ring
Mgr
9 ρ 0 = 8 ρ ................(1): If the block is displaced
down by x above mean position.
Frestoring = 4a 2 ρ gx .............(2) R
As force constants on two sides of equilibrium
position are not same, amplitude of oscillations on 2R = r A
two sides different.
l m I
81. T1 = 2π ; T2 = 2π ; T3 = 2π ;
g k c
R
only T1 depends on place where oscillations have B
been taken:
I
82. T = 2π ; I1 = mR 2 + mR 2 = 2mR 2 ; 3mR 2
mgd = + 10mR 2 M = 2m : r = 2 R
2
mR 2 3
I2 = + mR 2 = mR 2 86. Velocity of the particle just before collision,
2 2
4.5mg
INTEGER ANSWER QUESTIONS u = 2g × . Now just after collision,
K
velocity ( V ) of the system of ‘plate +particle’ is
B given by mu = 3mV
2mg
y = A sin (ωt + φ ) , where A = ,
K
l l'
5π K
φ= ,ω=
83. θ 6 3m
A
The plate will be at rest again when y = − A
θ
θ = 45° 2π 3m
mg After simplification, t = =π / 5 s .
∴ The bob will execute SHM about the stationary 3 K
axis passing through AB. 3d d
87. Initial stretch in both springs = d − =
l' l 4 4
∴T = 2π ; where l ' = ; g ' = g cos θ
g' sin θ d d
Frestoring = k + x − k − x = 2kx = ω1 x
2
84. Applying torque equation, about O, τ = Iα 4 4
K2b θ
θ d'
K2lθ 3d
d 1 = d sec θ ; ∴ x ' = d sec θ − 4
force towards equilibrium position = ( kx 'sin θ ) ,
k lθ d 2θ
⇒ ( k , bθ × b cosθ ) + 2 × l cos θ = −I 2 due to one spring = 2 ( kx 'sin θ ) , due two springs
θ dt
d .θ TB
=
ml 2
; θ → small ; ω = ? for small θ , force = k = ω2 2θ ⇒ T = 2
Here : I 2 A
3
98 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER-I
SYNOPSIS Ø The Celsius ( °C ) , Fahrenheit ( °F ) , Kelvin (K),
Reaumur (R), Rankine (Ra) are commonly used
Heat and Temperature thermometric scales.
Heat: Different Thermometric Scales:
Ø Heat is a form of energy which produces the Thermometric LFP UFP Total No.of
sensation of hotness. scale divisions
Ø Heat is the thermal energy of the body. Celsius scale 0°C 100°C 100
Ø Heat flows from bodies at high temperature to Fahrenheit scale 32°F 212°F 180
bodies at low temperature. Kelvin scale (or) 273.15 K 373.15K 100
Concept of Temperature: Absolute scale
Ø Temperature is a physical quantity which measures Reaumur scale 0°R 80°R 80
the degree of hotness or coldness of a body. Ø On any thermometric scale
Ø Temperature determines the direction of flow of Reading - LFP
heat between two bodies in thermal contact with = constant
UFP - LFP
each other until both acquire same temperature.
Ø When two bodies are at same temperature X−L
(or) = constant.
then they are said to be in thermal equilibrium U−L
with each other. Relation Between Temperatures of Different
Ø In thermal equilibrium the heat in the two bodies Scales:
may or may not be equal. C−0 F − 32 K − 273 R −0
Ø Temperature is the macroscopic property of a body Ø = = = (or)
100 − 0 212 − 32 373 − 273 80 − 0
or a system.
Ø Temperature is a scalar quantity. C F − 32 K − 273 R
= = = (or)
Measurement of Temperature 100 180 100 80
Ø Measurement of temperature requires: C F − 32 K − 273 R
(a) the construction of an instrument (i.e., = = =
5 9 5 4
thermometer) Ø Temperature difference on different scales is
(b) the calibration of the thermometer.
∆C ∆F ∆K ∆R
Ø Construction of thermometer depends on some = = =
physical property of matter (such as pressure, 5 9 5 4
volume, emf, resistance etc) that changes with Ø Common reading on Celsius and Fahrenheit scales
temperature. is −40° i.e. −40°C = −40°F .
Ø Calibration of the thermometer depends on fixing C F − 32 X X − 32
certain points on the thermometer. Since, = ⇒ =
5 9 5 9
Ø The fixed points are ( ice point) the temperature of
X = −40° .
the melting point of ice and (steam point) the
temperature of the boiling point of water under Ø Temperature of the core of the sun is 107 K while
normal atmospheric pressure. of its surface 6000 K. Normal temperature of
Thermometric Scales: human body is 310.15K ( = 37 0 C = 98.6 o F )
Ø The distance between the LFP and UFP of a
thermometer is called the fundamental interval. while NTP implies 273.15K ( = 00 C = 32o F ) .
Fundamental interval = ( UFP ) − ( LFP ) . Faulty Thermometer:
Ø The fundamental interval is divided into equal parts. Ø If the reading on a faulty thermometer is ‘X’ and its
These parts are given arbitrary numerical values of lower and upper fixed points are L and U
temperature known as thermometric scale. respectively then
Ø correct reading on Celsius scale is
NARAYANAGROUP 1
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
C−0 X−L 1 9
= tC = tC + 32
100 U−L
2 5
Ø Correct reading on Fahrenheit scale is
F − 32 X − L 320
=
U−L
or tC = − = −24.60 C
180 13
K − 273 X − L WE-4: An accurate Celsius thermometer and a
Ø Correct reading on Kelvin scale is = .
100 U−L faulty Fahrenheit thermometer register 60°
Ø Error in measurement by faulty thermometer and 141° respectively when placed in the same
= measured value - true value constant temperature enclosure. What is the
Correction = - Error error in the Fahrenheit thermometer?
WE-1:The graph between two temperature scales C F − 32 60 F − 32
A and B is shown in Fig. Between upper fixed Sol : From = ⇒ = ⇒F =1400 F
point and lower fixed point there are 150 5 9 5 9
equal divisions on scale A and 100 on scale B. Error = 141- 140 = 10 F ; Correction = −10 F
The relation between the temperatures in two Types of Thermometers:
scales is given by ____ Primary standard thermometers
0
(gas thermometers)
Temperature ( A)
Constant volume Constant pressure Gravimetric thermometers
0 (Compensated Air Thermometer)
180 Secondary Thermometers
VtA = 1500
Expansion Resistance Radiation
(liquid) Thermometers Pyrometers
Thermometers
300
VtB = 1000 Principle of Thermometry :
O 0
100 Temperature ( B)
0 If X is a property that varies linearly with
temperature T as X = a T + b, where
tA − 30 tB − 0 ‘a’ and ‘b’ are constants then
Sol : When t B = 0, t A = 300 ∴ =
150 100 X −X
t = t 0 ×100°C is general equation
X100 − X0
WE-2: What is the temperature for which the
reading on Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales
used to measure temperature t.
are same ?
Sol : On the Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales or X t = X 0 (1 + α t )
K - 273.15 F - 32 Measurement of Temperature Based
= (if X=K=F) on Triple point
100 180
Ø If the value of thermometric property at 0K,
X - 273.15 X - 32
= 273.16K and T KK is 0, XTr and X respectively
100 180 TK X X
9 Ø = , i.e., TK = ( 273.16 ) K
X = (255.38) = 574.6 273.16 XTr XTr
4 Ø When a constant volume gas thermometer is used
\ 574.6 K = 574.6°F.. to measure temperature of a body then
WE-3:At what temperature is the Fahrenheit P
scale reading equal to half that on the TK = ( 273.16 ) K
PTr
Celsius scale ?
9 1 Where PTr is pressure of a given amount of gas at
Sol : As t F = tC + 32 and t F = tC , triple point of water and P is the pressure at a
5 2
temperature which is to be determined
2 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
WE-5: Two absolute scales X and Y have triple WE-9:The resistance of a platinum resistance
points of water defined to be 300 X and 450Y. thermometer is found to be 11.0 ohm when
How are TX and TY related to each other ? dipped in a triple point cell. When it is dipped
Sol : Here, temperature 300 on absolute scale in a bath,resistance is found to be 28.887 ohm.
X=273.16K (Triple point of water) Find the temperature of the bath in 0C on
∴ Value of temperature T X on absolute platinum scale.
273.16 Sol. In terms of triple point of water,
scale X = TX é R ùú
TK = ê 273.16
300
K
Similarly, value of temperature T Y on absolute scale ê RTr úû
ë
273.16
Y = 28.887
so TK = 273.16´ = 717.32 K
TY
450
Since both these values are equal, 11.0
273.16 273.16 2 Now as TC = TK - 273.15
TX = TY ∴TX = TY
300 450 3 TC = 717.32 - 273.15 = 444.17 0 C
WE-6:The readings corresponding to the ice point WE-10:Graph shows the relation between
and steam point for a constant pressure gas Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales of
thermometer are 500 cc, and 545 cc. If the temperature . Find slope in each graph?
reading corresponding to room temperature Sol.
be 510 cc, find the room temperature? Case (i) :
Sol. Given : V0=500cc; V100=545cc. and Vt=510 cc. F
Vt − V0 510 − 500
Using, t = V × 100 = 100
100 − V0 545 − 500 2120 F
= 22.22o C
WE-7: A constant volume gas thermometer shows Slope =
9
pressure readings of 50 cm and 90 cm of 5
mercury at 00C and 1000C respectively.What 320 F
is the temperature on gas scale when the
pressure reading is 60 cm of mercury ? -17.780 C O 1000C C
Sol. Given that P 0=50cm of Hg,P100=90 cm of Hg
A plot of Fahrenheit temperature (F) versus
Pt= 60 cm of Hg Celsius temperature (C)
Pt - P0
t= ´100 = 60 - 50 ´100 = 250 C 9
P100 - P0 90 - 50 F = C + 32
5
(Q y = mx + c )
WE-8:The resistance of a platinum wire is 15Ω Slope of the graph m =9/5
at 200C. This wire is put in a hot furnace and C F − 32 5 160
the resistance of the wire is found to be 40Ω. Case (ii):
5
=
9
;C = F −
9 9
(Q y = mx + c )
Find the temperature of the hot furnace if Slope of the graph , m = 5/9
temperature coefficient of resistance of
C
platinum is 3.6 × 10−3 0C −1
5
R2 (1 + α t2 ) Slope =
Sol. Rt = R0 (1 + α t ) ⇒ R = (1 + α t )
9
1 1
40 (1 + α t2 ) F
O 320F
= ⇒ 40 − 15 = α (15t2 − 40t1 )
15 (1 + α t1 ) -17.780C
25
15t 2 = + 40 × 20 ≈ 7745
3.6 × 10−3 A plot of Celsius temperature (C) versus
7745 Fahrenheit temperature (F)
⇒ t2 = ≈ 5160 C
15
NARAYANAGROUP 3
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Thermal Expansion of Solids: Coefficient of Linear Expansion:
Ø Thermal expansion of solids is different for isotropic Ø The ratio of increase in length of a solid per degree
and anisotropic solids. rise in temperature to its original length is called
Ø Thermal expansion is same in all directions of coefficient of linear expansion ( ∝ )
isotropic solids. l 2 − l1
α = / 0C
Ø Metals, amorphous solids like glass and crystals l1 × ( t 2 − t1 )
like rock salt are the examples of isotropic solids.
1 dl
Ø Thermal expansion is different in different directions α in differential form α = l0 dt / 0C
of anisotropic solids.
length of the solid after heating
Ø Many of the crystals such as crystalline CaCO3 ,
l 2 = l 1 1 + α ( t 2 − t1 )
Galena are the examples of anisotropic solids.
Ø Solid substances such as cast iron, silver iodine, The coefficient of linear expansion of a solid depends
silica glass, rubber, leather, ice, lead etc., contract on the nature of the material and scale of
on heating. temperature. (it is independent on dimension of
Ø The interatomic force of attraction depends on the material )
distance between atoms. Ø The linear expansion of a solid l2-l1=e= l1 α (t2- t 1)
Ø On heating solids expand due to increase in Ø It depends on three factors.
interatomic spacing, which is a result of a) Its original length (l1)
asymmetrical lattice vibrations. b) The nature of the material ( α )
Ø The molecules possess both KE and PE. So the c) Change in temperature (t2 - t 1)
KE and PE of molecules increase when the body Ø Increase in length ∆l = lα∆t
is heated. ∆l
Ø The increase in KE may be in the form of Ø Fractional change in length = α∆t
l
a) translational KE b) vibrational KE
∆l
c) rotational KE Percentage change in length × 100 = α∆t × 100
Ø In solids the increase in KE is in vibratory KE and l
rotatory KE. Ø For anisotropic solids, if αx , αy and α z are
Ø The increase of KE results in rise in temperature.
coefficients of linear expansions along x, y and z
Potential Energy Curve: directions respectively then the average coefficient
Ø Due to the presence of intermolecular attraction,
the molecules possess PE. αx + α y + αz
of linear expansion is α =
Ø At a particular distance of separation the force of 3
attraction is maximum, potential energy is minimum Ø Numerical value of coefficient of linear expansion
and stability is maximum. of a solid is αC when the temperature is measured
Ø The atoms are in a specific state of vibration, at a
particular distance of separation (ro) and makes in Celsius scale and its value is α F when the
solid to have a definite size. temperature is measured in Fahrenheit scale then
Ø The graph between the interatomic distance and
5 9
potential energy is a curve called potential energy a) α F = α C (or) α C = α F
curve. 9 5
E b) α F < α C .
Ø A composite rod is made by joining two rods of
different materials and of same cross section. If
r l1, l2 are their initial lengths at t1 °C , then
0
E2 (a) the increase in length of composite rod at t2 °C
r2
E1 is given by ∆l = ( l1α1 + l2α 2 )( t2 − t1 )
r1 T1
b) The effective coefficient of linear expansion of
E0 T0 l1α 1 + l2 α 2
r0 the composite rod is given by α = l1 + l2 .
4 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
Ø If two metal rods of coefficients of linear expansions Coefficient of Areal (or) Superficial expansion:
α1 and α 2 have same length at t1 °C and t2 °C The ratio of increase in its area per degree rise in
respectively, then the common temperature at which temperature to its original area is called coefficient
they have again the same length is of areal expansion ( β ).
α1t1 − α 2t2
t=
α1 − α 2 A2 − A1
β= / 0C
Ø If two rods of same length l having different A1 × (t2 − t1 )
coefficients of linear expansion α1 and α 2
( α1 > α 2 ) are at the same temperature t1°C then Final area A 2= A1[1 + β (t2-t1)]
a) difference in their lengths at higher temperature
Ø Change in area ∆A = Aβ∆t .
t2 °C is given by ∆l = x = (α1 −α2 ) l ( t2 − t1 )
∆A
Variation of moment of inertia of the body Ø Fractional change in area = β∆t
with temperature A
Ø With increase of the temperature radius increases ∆A
Percentage change in area × 100 = β∆t × 100
and moment of inertia increases(if α is positive). A
Ø When the temperature of body increases from T Ø The diameter of a metal ring is ‘D’ and the coefficient
to T + ∆T its moment of inertia increases from I of areal expansion is β . If the temperature of the
to I + ∆I , fractional change in M.I. of the body is ring is increased by ∆t then
∆I a) The increase in area of the ring
= 2α ∆ T
I πD2β∆t
Ø A sphere of coefficient of linear expansion α , mass ∆A = Aβ∆t = πR2β∆t =
4
m and radius r is spinning about an axis through its
πD 2 α
diameter with an angular velocity ω1 . If the = ∆ t (Q β = 2 α )
2
temperature of the sphere increases by ∆t then its Coefficient of volume expansion:
new angular velocity is ω2 . Ø The ratio of increase in its volume per degree rise
As angular momentum remains constant. in temperature to its original volume is called
Iω = constant coefficient of volume expansion γ .
∆ω ∆I V − V1 0
I ∆ω + ω∆I = 0 ⇒ =− γ = 2 / C ; V =V [1 + γ (t -t )]
ω I V1 (t 2 − t1 ) 2 1 2 1
∆I V −V
Final temperature t 2 = V γ + t1 .
2 1
For small changes in temperature, = 2α ∆T ⇒ Ø
I 1
ω2 − ω1 Ø Change in volume ∆V = γV1 ( t 2 − t1 ) .
= −2α∆t
ω1 ∆V
Ø Fractional change in volume = γ∆ t
V
ω2 = ω1 (1 − 2α∆t ) .
∆V
Ø The diameter of a metal ring is ‘D’ and the coefficient Ø percentage change in volume ×100 = γ∆t ×100
V
of linear expansion is α . If the temperature of the Ø Volume expansion of a body is independent of its
ring is increased by ∆t then the increase in cavities.
circumference of the ring Relation among α , β , γ :
D
∆C = Cα∆t = 2πrα∆t = 2π α∆t = πDα∆t Ø β = 2α , γ = 3α
2
Ø α : β : γ = α : 2α : 3α = 1: 2 : 3
Increase in circumference = π Dα∆t
α β γ
Ø = =
1 2 3
NARAYANAGROUP 5
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Variation of density of substance with Ø Pyrex glass is used to prepare test tubes for heating
temperature purpose because its linear expansion coefficient is
Ø When a solid is heated its volume increases and small. ( α = 3x10-6 0C-1)
hence its density decreases, as mass remains Ø Silica glass (quartz) is used for making bulbs of
constant. thermometer because of low linear expansion
If ρ 1 and ρ 2 are densities of a solid at t 10C and coefficient. ( α = 0.5 x10-6 0C-1)
t20C, and as m1=m2 ; ρ 1 V1 = ρ 2 V2 Ø Invar is an alloy of Iron, Nickel and Carbon . Invar
ρ 1V1= ρ 2V1[1+ γ (t2-t1)] has very low linear expansion coefficient, so used
ρ 1= ρ 2 [ 1+ γ (t2 - t 1)] in wrist watches, pendulum clocks and standard
If ρ t and ρ 0 are densities at t 0 C and 00 C. scales.
Ø A hole is drilled at the centre of a metallic plate.
ρ0 When plate is heated, the diameter of hole
ρt = (or) ρ t =ρ o (1+?t)-1 .
(1+?t) increases.
Ø When two holes are drilled on a metal plate and
ρt ≈ ρo (1-?t) heated the distance between the holes increases.
Ø For anisotropic materials γ is the sum of linear Ø When a solid and hollow spheres with same outer
coefficients in three mutually perpendicular radius made up of same metal are heated to same
directions. temperature then both expand equally.
γ = αx + α y + αz . Ø Platinum is used to seal glass because their
coefficients of expansion are almost same.
For isotropic solids γ = 3α
Applications: Same Expansion In Different Rods:
Ø Between the rails a gap is left to allow for their If two rods of different materials have the same
difference between their lengths at all temperatures
expansion in summer. If l is the length of the rail
only when their linear expansions are equal.
and ∆t is the change in temperature then the gap
∆l1 = ∆l2 ; l1α1∆t = l2α 2 ∆t
is given by ∆ l = l α ∆ t
Ø l1 α 2
Then l1α1 = l2α 2 , l = α
A wire of length l is bent in the form of a ring with
a small gap of length x1 at t 10C. On heating the 2 1
ring to t 20C the gap increases to x2 in length. The if the constant difference in their lengths is x then
coefficient of linear expansion of wire xα 2 xα1
l1 = l2 =
α= 2 1
x −x α1 ~ α 2 , α1 ~ α 2 , x = l2 ~ l1
x1 (t 2 − t1 ) Bimetallic Strip:
Ø Gap behaves like the material for all thermal
expansions. t t l
Ø Telephone wires are loosely connected between
the poles in summer, to allow for their contraction t
in winter. r1 t
Ø Concrete roads are laid in sections and gaps are r2
provided between them to allow for expansion. R
l θ
Ø Pipes used to convey steam from boiler must have
loops to prevent cracking of pipes due to thermal
expansion.
Ø Huge iron griders used in the construction of
bridges and buildings are allowed to rest on rollers
on either side providing scope for expansion. where t is thickness of each strip
Hence the damage to the structure can be avoided. Ø Bimetallic strip works on the principle that different
Ø When a drop of water falls on a hot glass chimney, metals expand differently for the same rise in
the portion of the spot where the water falls, temperature.
contracts and the remaining portion expands.So, Ø If a bimetallic strip made of brass and iron is heated
brass bends on convex side (α b > α i )
the glass chimney breaks (brittle nature of the glass
also).
6 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
Ø If it is cooled brass bends on concave side. Pendulum Clocks:
Ø Radius of curvature of a bimetallic strip. Variation of Time Period of Pendulum Clocks :
dl l − l
( or ) θ = = 2 1 ; l = l (α 2 − α1 ) ∆T
l
θ= l0
R dr r2 − r1 R 2t T0 = 2π
g
2t
∴ R=
(α 2 − α1 ) ∆T (Qα 2 > α1 ) If temperature is increased by ∆ t,
l0 (1 + α ∆t )
t = thickness of each metal strip used. T = 2π
Ø Bimetallic strip can be used as temperature sensor g
in thermometers and fire alarms. (by using Binomial expansion)
Ø As an automatic switch or circuit breaker in electric
α
iron, refrigerators, incubators, thermostats, flash T = T0 (1 + ∆t )
lights etc. 2
Ø As a balance wheel in wrist watches. α
⇒ ∆T = T − T0 = T0 ∆t
Measuring Tapes: 2
Ø Measuring tapes are made of invar steel because ∆T = increase in time period .
of its least coefficient of linear expansion. Ø Pendulum clocks looses time in summer and gains
Ø Measuring tapes made of metals show correct time in winter
reading only at a temperature at which they are
1
constructed or calibrated. The loss or gain per day = a? t × 86400 Sec.
Ø When a metal scale expand it shows less value than 2
true value and vice versa Compensated pendulum length is always constant
at all temperatures, so it shows correct time at all
Ø If lm is the measured reading of the length of a
temperatures.
body at t20C and lc is the correct length of the
Grid Iron Pendulum:
body at calibration temperature t1°C then The total expansion of brass rods should be equal
lc = lm 1+ ( αS −αb ) ( t 2 − t1 ) t2 > t1 to that of steel rods . ∆l1 = ∆l2
where αS , α b are the coefficients of linear n1l1α1 = n2l2α 2
expansions of the scale and the body respectively. Thermal Stress:
Ø A metal scale calibrated at particular temperature Ø It is developed due to prevention of expansion of
does not give the correct measurement at any other a solid when it is heated.
temperature. Ø A rod of length l0 clamped between two fixed walls.
Ø When scale expands correction to be made For ∆t Change in temperature
∆l = lα∆t Correct reading = l + ∆l (t2> t 1) Young’s modulus
Ø When scale contract correction to be made F / A Fl0 F
Y= = =
∆l = lα∆t Correct reading = l − ∆l (t2< t 1) ∆l / l0 A∆l Aα∆t (Q ∆ l = l 0α ∆ t )
l= measured value
% error in the measurement = α∆t ×100 or
F
= Y α ∆t
Ø If a cube of coefficient of cubical expansion γ is A
heated, then the pressure to be applied on it to Ø Thermal force F = YAα∆t .
prevent its expansion is P then ∆V = V γ∆t Thermal force is independent of length of rod.
P P Ø Thermal stress = Yα∆t
K= = Ø For same thermal stress in two different rods
∆V γ∆t ⇒ P = K γ∆t heated through the same rise in temperature,
V
Ylα1 = Y2α 2
⇒ P = 3 K α ( t 2 − t1 )
Ø Two rods of different metals having the same area
where K is bulk modulus of cross section A are placed between the two
NARAYANAGROUP 7
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
massive walls as shown in the fig. The first rod has
h2= height of barometer at t2 0 C where the
a length l1 , coefficient of linear expansion α1 and
measurement is made.
Young’s modulus Y1 . The corresponding quantities γ Hg = real coefficient of expansion of mercury
for second rod are l2 , α 2 & Y2 . The α s = Coefficient of linear expansion of scale
temperature of both rods is now raised by t 0 C . WE-11: What length of brass and iron at 00C must
be used if the difference between their lengths
is always 0.2m? The values of α for brass and
iron are 18 × 10−6 / 0 C and
Y1 α1 Y2 α2 12 × 10−6 / 0 C respectively.(2014 E) ( 2013 M)
l2α 2
Total length prevented from expansion Sol : l1α1 = l2α 2 and l2 − l1 = x ; l1 = α
1
F × l1 F × l2
∆l1 + ∆l2 = +
Y1 × A Y2 × A l2α 2 α − α2
l2 − l1 = x = l2 − = l2 1
α1 α1
At ( l1α1 ) + ( l2α 2 )
Thermal force =F =
l1 l2 xα1 0.2 × 12 × 10−6
+ l2 = = = 0.40m
Y1 Y2 α1 − α 2 (18 − 12 ) × 10−6
Fl
Q ∆l = lα t = xα 2 0.2 × 18 × 10−6
YA l1 = = = 0.60m
α1 − α 2 (18 − 12 ) × 10−6
F t ( l1α1 ) + ( l2α 2 )
Thermal stress = = WE-12:A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of
A l1 l2
+ the wooden wheel of bullock cart. The
Y1 Y2 diameter of the rim and the iron ring are
Ø Lengths of individual rods due to thermal stress: 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 270 C .
Length of the first rod = Original length + increase The temperature to which the ring should be
in length due to rise in temperature - decrease in heated so as to fit the rim on the wheel
length due to thermal force
(α iron = 1.20 × 10−5 / 0 C ) ?
Fl1
l1 = l1 + l1α1t − AY Sol :Given t1 = 270 C ; l1 = 5.231 m ; l2 = 5.243 m
1
1
Fl2 l2 = l1 1 + α1 ( t2 − t1 )
Length of the second rod l21 = l2 + l2α 2t − AY
5.243 = 5.231 1 + 1.20 × 10−5 ( t2 − 27 )
2
Ø Junction displacement = difference in lengths of
any one of the rods after heating and before heating. or t2 = 2180 C
Fl1 Fl WE-13:An aluminium measuring rod, which is
∴ x = l1α1t − ∴ x = l2α 2t − 2
AY1 (or) AY2 correct at 50 C measures the length of a line
Barometer With Brass Scale: as 80 cm at 450 C . If thermal coefficient of
Ø Relation between faulty and actual barometric linear expansion of aluminium is 2.50×10−5 /0 C .
heights is given by The correct length of the line is
h 2 =h1[1+(γ Hg -α s ) (t 2 -t1 )] Sol : L2 = L1 + L1α∆t
h1= height of barometer at t10 C where the scale is L2 = 80 + ( 2.50 ×10−5 ) ( 80 )( 40 ) = 80.08cm
marked.
8 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
WE-14: An iron rod of length 50cm is joined at an inertia of the wheel and C is the torsional
end to copper rod of length 100cm at 200C. rigidity of its spring. The wrist watch keeps
Find the length of the system at 1000C and accurate time at 250C. How many seconds
average coefficient of linear expansion of the would it gain a day at –250C if the balance
system. wheel made of Aluminium ?
( airon = 12 ´10-6 / 0 C and acopper = 17´10-6 / 0 C. ) ( Given, α Al =25.5 × 10–6/ 0C )
Sol. Increase in length of composite rod is
Q I = MK 2
1 C 1 C
Sol : f = =
∆l = ∆l1 + ∆l2 = ( α1l1 + α 2l2 )∆t 2π I 2π k M
1 1 df −dT −dk
= (12 × 10 −6 × 50 + 17 × 10−6 ×100) × (100 − 20) f ∝ ; f∝ ⇒ f = T = k
T k
= 0.192cm
Length of the composite rod at 1000 C is l + ∆l dk dT
As = α dt ⇒ = +α dt
= 150.192 cm k T
Average linear expansion co-efficient Number of seconds gained/day
∆l 0.192 dT = ( 8.64 × 104 ) (α dT ) =110.2 s/day
α avg = = = 16 × 10 − 6 / 0 C
l ∆ t 150 × 80 WE-18: A clock with a metallic pendulum is
WE-15: Density of gold is 19.30 g/cm3 at 200C. 5seconds fast each day at a temperature of
Compute the density of gold at 90 0 C by 15 o C and 10 seconds slow each day at a
adding steam to it. (α = 14.2 ×10 −6 / 0 C )
temperature of 30 o C. Find coefficient of
linear expansion for the metal.
ρ2 V1 V1 Sol. The time lost or gained per day is
Sol : ρ = V = V (1 + 3α∆T ) = (1 + 3α∆T )
−1
1
1 2 1
∆t = 2 α∆T × 86400 [as 1 day = 86400 s.]
ρ2
or = (1 − 3α ∆T ) or If graduation temperature of clock is T 0 then gain
ρ1 in time at 150C is
ρ 2 = ρ1 (1 − 3α∆T )
1
5 = (α ) (T0 -15) × 86400 ........ ( i )
2
= (19.30 ) 1 − 3 (14.2 ×10−6 ) ( 70 ) = 19.24 g / cm3 At 30oC clock is loosing time thus
WE-16: Uniform pressure P is exerted on all sides 1
10 = α (30 – T0) 86400 ...... (ii)
of a solid cube of bulk modulus, B and volume 2
coefficient of expansion γ , at temperature t 0C. Dividing equation (ii) by (i), we get
By what amount should the temperature of 2 (T0 – 15) = (30 – T0) or T0 = 20oC
cube be raised in order to bring its volume Thus from equation (i)
back to the value it had before the pressure 1
5= α [20 – 15] 86400
was applied ? 2
P VP α = 2.31 × 10–5 / o C
Sol : As B= , ∆V = ....(i)
∆V / V B
WE-19:A steel bar of cross sectional area 1 cm 2 and
If ∆T is the required increase in
50 cm long at 300C fits into the space between
temperature, ∆V = γ V ∆T ....(ii) two fixed supports. If the bar s now heated to
From eqns. (i) and (ii), 2800 C, what force will it exert against the
VP P supports ? ( a for steel = 11 × 10–6/0C and
γ V ∆T = or ∆T = γ B Young's modulus for steel = 2 × 10111 N/m2 )
B
WE-17 :The balance wheel of a mechanical wrist Sol :Force exerted on the supports
watch has a frequency of oscillation given by =Stress × Area of cross section = Y a A (t2 - t1 ).
1 = 2 × 10111 × 11 × 10–6 × 10–4 × 250 = 55000N.
f = C / I , where I is the moment of
2π
NARAYANAGROUP 9
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
WE-20: A mass of 2kg is suspended from a fixed
point by a wire of length 3m and diameter L L
0.5 mm. Initially the wire is just unstretched,
the mass resting on a fixed support. By how
much must the temperature fall if the mass is
α1Y1 α2Y2
to be entirely supported by the wire (Given Y
for wire = 206 G Pa, α =11 × 10–6/0C)
Sol :Contraction due to cooling is equal to the Sol :Since, each rod is prevented from expansion
stretching produced by the weight ‘mg’. so,they are under compression and mechanical
mgL 2 × 9.8 × 3 strain.The strain in each rod is zero.
∴∆L = =
AY π ( 0.25 )2 ×10−6 × 206 ×109
e1 F e2 F e1 e2
Now the contraction due to cooling = α1∆T − = α 2 ∆T − = =0
l AY1 ; l AY2 ; l l
= Lα∆t =3 × 11 1 × 10–6 × ∆t
solving ∆t = 440 C F F
WE-21:A metallic rod of length l cm and cross- α1∆T − = 0 and α 2 ∆T − =0
AY1 AY2
sectional area A cm2 is heated through t°C.
After expansion if a mechanical force is
applied normal to its length on both sides of F F
α1∆T = .........(1) and α2∆T = ......(2)
the rod and restore its original length, what AY1 AY2
is the value of force? The young's modulus
of elasticity of the metal is E and mean Dividing (1) by (2), we get α1Y1 = α 2Y2
coefficient of linear expansion is α per
degree Celsius. WE-23: A bimetallic strip of thickness 2 cm
consists of zinc and silver rivetted together.
Sol :Change in the length = ∆l = lα t The approximate radius of curvature of the
Length of rod at t°C is l + l αt strip when heated through 500 C will be :
Decrease in length due to stress = ∆l (linear expansivity of zinc and silver are
32 × 10–6/0C and 19 × 10–6 /0C respectively)
But length of rod remains constant ∴∆lt − ∆l = 0
2t
stress F l + ∆ lt Sol : Radius of curvature R = (α − α )∆T
∴ ∆ l = ∆ lt = l α t ⇒ E = = ×
strain A −∆ lt
2 1
2 ×1
EA∆lt − EAl αt EAαt R= = 30.77m
∴F =
l + ∆lt
=
l + l αt
=−
(1 + αt ) ( 32 − 19) ×10−6 × 50
WE-24: A steel rail 30m long is firmly attached
Here, negative sign indicates that forces are
to the road bed only at its ends. The sun raises
compressive in nature.
the temperature of the rail by 500C, causing
WE-22:Two metal rods are fixed end to end between the rail to buckle. Assuming that the buckled
two rigid supports as shown in figure. Each rail consists of two straight parts meeting in
rod is of length l and area of cross-section is the centre, calculate how much the centre of
A.When the system is heated up,determine the the rail rise? Given, α steel = 12 × 10–6/0C.
condition when the junction between rods does
not shift ?(Y1 and Y2 are Young's modulus of x+Vx x+Vx
y
materials of rods, α1 and α 2 are coefficients
of linear expansion) 2x
10 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
Sol :Let the initial length be 2 x and the final total length Sol :Given d=20cm
be 2 ( x + ∆ x ) as shown . V = V0 (1 + γ t ) = V0 (1 + 3α t ) (since γ =3α )
Let y be the height of the centre of the buckled rail.
Clearly, ∆x = α x ∆T and change in volume = V − V0 = 3V0α t
3
4 d
y = ( x + ∆x )2 − x 2 = 2 x ( ∆x ) = 2 x 2α∆t −6
= 3 × π × 23 × 10 × 100
3 2
y = x 2α∆T [neglecting ( ∆x )2] 3
4 0.2 −6
= 3 × π × 23 × 10 × 100
Thus, y = [15 2 (12 ×10−6 ) 50]cm = 0.52m 3 2
WE-25:When composite rod is free, composite = 28.9cc (1cc = 10−6 m3 )
length increases to 2.002m from temperature W.E.28:A wooden wheel of radius R is made of two
200C to 1200C. When composite rod is fixed semi circular parts (see figure).The two parts
between the support, there is no change in are held together by a ring made of a metal
component length. Find Y and α of steel if strip of cross-sectional area S and length L.L
Ycu = 1.5 × 1013 N / m 2 α cu = 1.6 ×10−5 /0C is slightly less than 2π R .To fit the ring on
the wheel,it is heated so that its temperature
rises by ∆T and it just steps over the wheel.As
Steel
it cools down to surrounding temperature. It
Copper
0.5m
presses the semi-circular parts together.If the
coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is
2m α and its Young’s modulus is Y, then the force
that one part of the wheel applies on the other
Sol. ∆l = lsα s ∆T + lcα c ∆T part is (AIEEE 2012 )
0.002 = 1.5α s + 0.5 × 1.6 × 10 − 5 ´100
1.2 ×10 −5
αs = = 8 ×10−6 0C
1.5 R
If there is no change in composite length, thermal
force of steel and copper rod should be equal
Fst=Fcu ; Y s A α s ∆t = Y cu A α Cu ∆t
Ys αc α c 1.5 × 1013 × 1.6 × 10−5 F
= ; Y = Yc × =
Yc αs s αs 8 × 10 −6
Ys = 3 × 1013 N / m 2 Sol :
WE-26: A metal rod of Young’s modulus F and
coefficient of thermal expansion α is held at T T
its two ends such that its length remains Increase in length
invariant.If its temperature is raised by t o c ,then ∆L
∆L = α L ∆ T ⇒ = α∆T
the linear stress developed in it is(AIE-2011 ) L
F the thermal stress developed is
Sol : ∆L = α L∆T = AY ⇒ Stress = = Y α∆T = Y α t
FL
A T ∆L
=Y = Y α∆T ; T = SY α∆T
WE-27: An aluminium sphere of 20cm diameter is S L
heated from 0o c to 100o c . Its volume changes From the FBD of one part of the
by (given that the coefficient of linear wheel, F = 2T
expansion for aluminium (α A1 = 23×10−6 / o C ) Where F is the force applied by one part of
the wheel on other part, F = 2 SY α∆T
(AIEEE 2011 )
NARAYANAGROUP 11
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
9. For measuring temperature near absolute
C.U.Q zero,the thermometer used is
1) thermoelectric thermometer
MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE 2) radiation thermometer
1. Temperature of gas is a measure of 3) magnetic thermometer
1) the average translational kinetic energy of the 4) resistance thermometer
gas molecules 10. Which of the following scales of temperature
2) the average potential energy of the gas molecules has only positive degrees of temperature?
3) the average distance of the gas molecules 1) Centigrade 2) Fahrenheit scale
4) the size of the molecules of the gas 3) Reaumur scale 4)Kelvin scale
2. Celsius is the unit of 11. Which of the following is the smallest rise in
temperature?
1) Temperature 2) Heat
1) 1oF 2) 1oR 3) 1K 4) 1oC
3) Specific heat 4) Latent heat 12. The temperature at which two bodies appear
3. On the Celsius scale the absolute zero of equally hot or cold when touched by a person
temperature is at is
1) 00 C 2) −320 C 3) 1000 C 4) −273.150 C 1) 0oC 2)37oC 3) 25oC 4) 4oC
13. The range of clinical thermometer is
4. The correct value of 00 C on the Kelvin scale is 1) 37oC to 42oC 2) 95oF to 110oF
1) 273.150 C 2) 273.160 C 3) 900 F to1120 F 4) 950 C to1040 C
0 14. Which of the following is the largest rise in
3) 2730 C 4) 273.2 C temperature?
5. The standard scale of temperature is 1) 1oF 2) 1oR 3) 1K 4) 1oC
1) the mercury scale 2) the gas scale THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS
3) the platinum resistance scale 4) liquid scale 15. Solids expand on heating because
6. Melting and Boiling point of water on 1) the K.E. of the atoms increases.
Fahrenheit scale of temperature respectively 2) the P.E. of the atoms increases
1) 212 0 F , 320 F 2) 320 F , 2120 F 3) total energy of the atoms increases.
4) the K.E. of the atoms decreases.
3) 00 F ,1000 F 4) 320 F ,1320 F 16. Expansion during heating
7. For measurements of very high temperature 1) occurs only in solids.
2) decreases the density of the material
say around 50000 C (of sun) , one can use: 3) occurs at same rate for all liquids and gases.
1) Gas thermometer 4) increases the weight of the material.
2) Platinum resistance thermometer 17. When a metal bar is cooled, then which one of
3) Vapour pressure thermometer these statements is correct.
4) Pyrometer( Radiation thermometer) 1)Length, density and mass remain same.
2) Length decreases, density increases but mass
8. Mercury boils at 3560 C . However, mercuryy remains same
thermometers are made such that they can 3)Length and mass decrease but density remains
measure temperatures upto 5000 C . This is the same.
4)Length and density decrease but mass
done by remains the same.
1) maintaining vacuum above the mercury column 18. When a metal bar is heated, the increase in
in the stem of the thermometer length is greater, if
2) filling Nitrogen gas at high pressure above the 1) the bar has large diameter 2) The bar is long.
mercury column 3) the temperature rise small 4) Small diameter
3) filling Nitrogen gas at low pressure above the 19. A ring shaped piece of a metal is heated, If
mercury column the material expands, the hole will
4) filling oxygen gas at high pressure above the 1) contract 2) expand 3) remain same
mercury column 4) expand or contract depending on the width
12 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
20. A solid ball of metal has a spherical cavity 28. The coefficient of linear expansion of a metal
inside it. The ball is cooled.The Volume of
rod is 12x10-6 / 0C, its value in per 0F
the cavity will 20 15
1) decrease 2) increase 1) × 10 − 6 / 0 F 2) × 10 −6 / 0 F
3) remain same 4) have its shape changed 3 4
3) 21.6 × 10 −6 / 0 F 4) 12 × 10 −6 / 0 F
21. The substance which has negative coefficient
of linear expansion is 29. The coefficient of volume expansion is
1) lead 2) aluminum 1) equal to the coefficient of linear expansion.
3) iron 4) invar steel 2) twice the coefficient of linear expansion
22. Two spheres of same size are made of same 3) equal to the sum of coefficients of linear and
material but one is hollow and the other is superficial expansions.
solid. They are heated to same temperature, 4) Twice the coefficient of areal expansion.
then 30. Always platinum is fused into glass, because
1) both spheres will expand equally. 1) platinum is good conductor of heat
2) hollow sphere will expand more than solid one 2) melting point of platinum is very high
3) solid sphere will expand more than hollow one 3) they have equal specific heats
4) hollow sphere will expand double that of solid 4) their coefficients of linear expansion are equal
31. Two metal strips that constitute a bimetallic
one
strip must necessarily differ in their.
23. If temperature of two spheres of same size
1) length 2) mass
but made of different materials changes by
3) coefficient of linear expansion 4) resistivity
∆T then 32. Thermostat is based on the principle of
1) both expands equally
2) sphere with greater α expands or contracts 1) equal expansion of two rods of different lengths.
2) different expansion of two rods of different
more than other.
lengths.
3) sphere with greater α expands or contracts less
3) different expansion of two rods of same length
than other.
4) equal expansion of two rods of same length.
4) both contracts equally.
33. A pendulum clock shows correct time at 0 0 C.
24. The linear expansion of a solid depends on
At a higher temperature the clock.
1) its original mass
1) looses time 2) gains time
2) nature of the material and temperature
3) neither looses nor gains time 4)will not operate
difference.
34. To keep the correct time modern day watches
3) the nature of the material only are fitted with balance wheel made of
4) pressures 1) steel 2) platinum 3) invar 4) tungsten
25. The coefficient of linear expansion of a solid 35. A brass disc fits into a hole in an iron plate.
depends upon To remove the disc.
1) the unit of pressure 1) the system must be cooled
2) the nature of the material only 2) the system must be heated
3) the nature of the material and temperature 3) the plate may be heated (or) cooled
4) unit of mass 4) the disc must be heated
26. If α c and α k denote the numerical values of 36. When hot water is poured on a glass plate, it
coefficient of linear expansions of the solid, breaks because of
expressed per 0C and per Kelvin respectively, 1) unequal expansion of glass
then. 2) equal contraction of glass
1) α c > α k 2) α c < α k 3)unequal contraction of glass 4)glass is delicate
3) α c = α k 4) α c = 2 α k 37. When the temperature of a body increases
27. If α c and α f denote the numerical values of 1) density and moment of inertia increase
coefficient of linear expansion of a solid, 2) density and moment of inertia decrease
expressed per 0C and per 0F respectively, then 3) density decreases and moment of inertia
1) α c > α f 2) α f > α c increases.
3) α f = α c 4) α f + α c = 0 4) density increases and moment of inertia
decreases.
NARAYANAGROUP 13
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
38. In balance wheel of watch, the factors that expansion of material of the rod is α ).
make its oscillations uniform are 1)Zero 2)I α ∆t 3)2 I α ∆t 4)3 I α ∆t
1) tension in string 46. A bimetal made of copper and iron strips
2) moment of inertia of balance wheel welded together is straight at room
3) temperature 4) pressure
39. When a metal ring is heated temperature. It is held vertically so that the
1) the inner radius decreases and outer radius iron strip is towards the left hand and copper
increases strip is towards right hand. The bimetal strip
2) the outer radius decreases and inner radius is then heated. The bimetal strip will
increases 1) remain straight 2) bend towards right
3) both inner and outer radii increases 3) bend towards left 4) have no change
4) both inner and outer radii decreases 47. If L1 and L2 are the lengths of two rods of
40. A cube of ice is placed on a bimetallic strip at
coefficients of linear expansion α 1 and α 2
room temperature as shown in the figure. What
will happen if the upper strip of iron and the respectively the condition for the difference in
lower strip is of copper? lengths to be constant at all temperatures is
Ice 1) L1 α 1 = L2 α 2 2) L1 α 2 = L2 α 1
...................Cu..................... 3) L1 α 12 = L2 α 22 4) L1 α 22 = L2 α 12
Fe
1) Ice moves downward 2) Ice moves upward 48. When a copper ball is cooled the largest
3) Ice remains in rest 4) None of the above percentage increase will occur in its
41. To withstand the shapes of concave mirrors 1) diameter 2) area 3) volume 4) density
against temperature variations used in high 49. The coefficients of linear expansion of P and
resolution telescope, they are made of Q are α1 and α 2 respectively. If the coefficient
1) quartz 2) flint glass of cubical expansion of ‘Q’ is three times the
3) crown glass 4)combination of flint and silica
42. The holes through which the fish plates are coefficient of superficial expansion of P, then
fitted to join the rails are oval in shape because which of the following is true ?
1) bolts are in oval shape 1) α 2 =2 α1 2) α1 =2 α 2 3) α 2 =3 α1 4) α1 =3 α 2
2) to allow the movement of rails in the direction 50. The substance which contracts on heating is
of length due to change in temperature. 1) silica glass 2) iron
3) to make the fitting easy and tight 3) invar steel 4) aluminum
4) only oval shape holes are possible 51. PQR is a right angled triangle made of brass
43. A semicircular metal ring subtends an angle
rod bent as shown. If it is heated to a high
of 1800 at the centre of the circle. When it is
heated, this angle temperature the angle PQR.
1) remains constant 2) increases slightly P
3) decreases slightly 4) becomes 3600 1) increases
44. The diameter of a metal ring is D and the 2) decreases
coefficient of linear expansion is α . If the
3) remains same
temperature of the ring is increased by 10 C, Q R
the circumference and the area of the ring will 4) becomes 1350
increases by 52. A brass scale gives correct length at 00C. If
1) π Dα , 2π Dα 2) 2π Dα , π D 2α the temperature be 250C and the length read
by the scale is 10 cm. Then the actual length
π Dα π D 2α will be
3) π Dα , 4) π Dα , 1) more than 10 cm 2) less than 10 cm
2 2
45. The moment of inertia of a uniform thin rod 3) equal to 10 cm 4) we can not say
about its perpendicular bisector is I. If the 53. The coefficient of volume expansion is
temperature of the rod is increased by ∆t , 1) twice the coefficient of linear expansion.
2) twice the coefficient of real expansion.
the moment of inertia about perpendicular
3) thrice the coefficient of real expansion.
bisector increases by (coefficient of linear
4) thrice the coefficient of linear expansion
14 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
54. When a metal sphere is heated maximum 6. A Centigrade and a Fehrenheit thermometer
percentage increase occurs in its are dipped in boiling water. The water
1) density 2) surface area temperature is lowered until the Fahrenheit
3) radius 4) volume thermometer registers 140o . What is the fall
55. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of same
in temperature as registered by the
material have same mass. When they are
Centigrade thermometer
heated by 50°C, increase in volume of solid
1) 300 2) 400 3) 600 4) 800
sphere is 5 c.c. The expansion of hollow
7. Two absolute scales A and B have triple points
sphere is
of water defined to be 200 A and 300 B (given
1) 5 c.c. 2) more than 5 c.c.
triple point of water is = 276.16 K). The
3) Less than 5 c.c. 4) None
relation between TA and TB is
C.U.Q - KEY 3
1) 1 2) 1 3)4 4)1 5)2 6)2 1) TA = TB 2) TB = TA
2
7) 4 8)2 9)3 10)4 11)1 12)2
2 3
13)2 14)2 15)1 16)2 17)2 18)2 3) TB = TA 4) TB = TA
19)2 20)1 21)1 22)1 23)2 24)2 3 4
25)2 26)3 27)1 28)1 29)3 30)4 8. The temperature coefficient of resistance of wire
31)3 32)3 33)1 34)3 35)1 36)1 is 12.5 × 10−4 / Co . At 300 K the resistance of
37)3 38)2 39)3 40)1 41)1 42)2 the wire is 1 ohm. The temperature at which
43)1 44)4 45)3 46)3 47)1 48)4 resistance will be 2 ohm is
49)1 50)1 51)3 52)1 53)4 54)4 1) 1154 K 2)1100 K 3)1400 K 4) 1127 K
55)2 9. The reading of Centigrade thermometer
coincides with that of Fahrenheit thermometer
LEVEL - I (C.W) in a liquid. The temperature of the liquid is
1) −40o C 2) 0o C 3) 100o C 4) 300o C
MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE
10. The pressure of a gas filled in the bulb of a
1. If the temperature of a patient is 40o C his constant volume gas thermometer at 0 0C and
temperature in the Fahrenheit scale will be 1000C are 28.6 cm and 36.6 cm of mercury
1) 720F 2) 960F 3) 1000F 4) 1040F respectively. The temperature of bulb at which
2. The freezing point on a thermometer is marked pressure will be 35.0 cm of mercury will be
as 20 0 and the boiling point as 150 0. A 1) 800C 2) 700C 3)550C 4) 400C
temperature of 600C on this thermometer will THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS
be read as 11. The coefficient of linear expansion of a metal
1) 400 2) 650 3) 980 4) 1100 is 1 × 10-5/0C. The percentage increase in area
3. A Celsius thermometer and a Fahrenheit of a square plate of that metal when it is
thermometer are put in a hot bath. The reading heated through 1000C is
on Fahrenheit thermometer is just 3 times the 1) 0.02% 2) 0.1% 3) 0.001% 4) 0.2%
reading on Celsius thermometer. The 12. The length of each steel rail is 10m in winter.
temperature of the hot bath is The coefficient of linear expansion of steel is
1)26.670C 2)36.670C 3)46.67 0C 4)56.67 0C 0.000012/0C and the temperature increases by
4. Oxygen boils at −183o C . This temperature is 150C in summer. The gap to be left between
approximately the rails
1) 215o F 2) −297 o F 3) 329o F 4) 361o F 1) 0.0018m 2) 0.0012m 3) 0.0022m 4) 0.05m
13. A clock while keeps correct time at 300 C has
5. A mercury thermometer is transferred from a pendulum rod made of brass. The number
melting ice to a hot liquid. The mercury rises of seconds it gains (or) looses per second when
to 9/10 of the distance between the two fixed the temperature falls to 100 C is [ α of brass
points. Find the temperature of the liquid in = 18 × 10-6 /0 C ]
Fahrenheit scale 1) 18 × 10-6 sec 2) 18 × 10-5 sec
1)194o F 2) 162o F 3) 112o F 4) 113o F 3) 0.0018 sec 4) 0.018 sec
NARAYANAGROUP 15
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
14. A metal plate of area 1.2 m2 increases its area LEVEL - I (C.W) - HINTS
by 2.4 × 10-4 m2 when it is heated from 00 C to
1000 C. The coefficient of cubical expansion of F − 32 C − 0 C −0 X − L
1. = 2. =
the metal expressed in per 0C is 180 100 100 U − L
1)2 × 10-6 2)4 × 10-6 3)6 × 10-6 4) 3 × 10-6
15. The length of a metal rod at 00C is 0.5m.When F − 32 C − 0
3. = and F=2C
it is heated, its length increases by 2.7mm. The 180 100
final temperature of rod is (coeff. of linear
expansion of metal = 90 × 10-6/0C) F − 32 C − 0 F − 32 9
4. = 5. =
1) 200C 2) 300C 3) 400C 4) 600C 180 100 180 10
16. The density of a substance at 00C is 10 g/c.c. F − 32 C − 0
and at 100 0C its density is 9.7g/c.c. The 6. =
180 100
coefficient of linear expansion of the substance 7. Size of the degree on absolute scale A= size of the
is. degree on absolute Scale B
1)10-4/0C 2)3 × 10-4/0C
3)6 × 10-4/0C 4)9 × 10-4/0C (276.16)TA (276.16)TB
=
17. What force should be applied to the ends of 200 300
steel rod of a cross sectional area 10 cm2 to R 2 − R1 C − 32 C − 0
α = =
R 1 t 2 − R 2 t 1 9. 180
prevent it from elongation when heated form 8.
273 K to 303 k? ( α of steel 10-5 0C-1, Y = 2 × 100
1011 Nm −2 ) Pt − P0 ∆A
10. t = P − P × 100 11. β = 2α , 100 = β ∆t100
1)2 × 104N 2)3 × 104N 100 o A
3)6 × 10 N4
4)12 × 104 N ∆T 1
18. The inner diameter of a brass ring at 273 K is 12. l2 − l1 = l1α ( t2 − t1 ) 13. = α∆t
5 cm. To what temperature should it be heated T 2
for it to accommodate a ball 5.01 cm in A2 − A1 3 l2 − l1
diameter. ( α = 2 × 10-5 /0 C) 14. β = A ( t − t ) , γ = 2 β 15. t2 − t1 = l α
1 2 1 1
1) 273 K 2)372 K 3) 437 K 4) 173K
19. A metal sheet having size of 0.6 × 0.5 m2 is d0 − dt γ
heated from 293 K to 5200 C. The final area 16. γ = d ∆t , α = 3
t
of the hot sheet is { α of metal=2 × 10-5 /0 C]
Fl
1) 0.306 m2 2) 0.0306 m2 17. ∆l = ---- (1)
3) 3.06 m 2
4) 1.02m2 AY
20. A crystal has linear coefficients 0.00004/0C, Increase in length, ∆l = l α ∆ t ---- (2)
0.00005/0C, 0.00006/0C. Coefficient of cubical
Fl
expansion of the crystal is from (1) and (2); = l α ∆ t ⇒ F = YAα∆T
1)0.000015/0C 2) 0.00015/0C AY
3) 0.00012/ C 0
4) 0.00018/0C r2 − r1
21. A wire of length 60 cm is bent into a circle with 18. ∆t = rα 19. A2 = A1 (1 + β∆t )
1
a gap of 1 cm. At its ends, on heating it by
1000C, the length of the gap increases to 1.02 20. γ = α x + α y + α z
cm. α of material of wire is
l2 − l1
1) 2 × 10-4/0C 2) 4 × 10-4/0C 21. α = l ∆t (gap can be taken as l1 )
3) 6 × 10-4/0C 4) 1 × 10-4/0C 1
LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY LEVEL - I (H.W)
1) 4 2) 3 3) 1 4) 2 5) 1 6) 2
7) 2 8) 3 9) 1 10) 1 11) 4 12) 1 1. What is the temperature on Fahrenheit scale
13) 2 14) 4 15) 4 16) 1 17) 3 18) 2 corresponding to 30o C
19) 1 20) 2 21) 1
1) 86o F 2) 52o F 3) 62o F 4) 72o F
16 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
2. A faulty thermometer has its fixed points 12. A metal rod having a linear coefficient of
marked at 6o and 96o . What is the correct expansion 2 × 10-5 /0 C has a length 1m at
temperature on the Centigrade scale when this 250C, the temperature at which it is shortened
by 1 mm is (1983 E)
thermometer reads 87 o
1) 500C 2) -500C 3) -250C 4) -12.50C
1) 83o C 2) 93o C 3) 90o C 4) 85o C 13. A clock with an iron pendulum keeps correct
3. The temperature at which Celsius reading is time at 150C. If the room temperature rises
half the Fahrenheit reading to 200C, the error in seconds per day will be
1) 40o C 2) 20o C 3) 160o C 4) 80o C (coefficient of linear expansion for iron is
4. The normal boiling point of liquid hydrogen is 0.000012/0C)
1) 2.5sec 2) 2.6sec 3) 2.4sec 4) 2.2sec
−253o C . What is the corresponding 14. A steel rod of length 0.5km is used in the
temperature on absolute scale construction of a bridge. It has to withstand
1) 22 K 2) 20 K 3) 274 K 4) -20 K a temperature change of 400C. The gap that
5. A faulty thermometer has 90.5o C and 0.5o C is allowed for its expansion is [ α = 10-6/0C]
as upper and lower fixed points respectively. 1) 0.02cm 2) 0.02mm 3) 2m 4) 20 mm
What is the correct temperature if this faulty 15. A wire of length 100cm increases in length by
thermometer reads 15.5 o C 10-2 m when it is heated through 1000 C. The
1) 16.67o C 2) 16o C 3) 15o C 4) 15.5o C coefficient of linear expansion of the material
of the wire expressed in /K units is
6. The temperature of a substance increases by
1) −1×10−6 2) 1×104 3) 1×10−4 4) 10−2
27o C . On the Kelvin scale this increase is 16. The variation of density of a solid with
equal to temperature is given by the formula
1) 300 K 2) 2.46 K 3) 27 K 4) 7 K
d1 d1
7. A Fahrenheit thermometer registers 1) d 2 = 2) d 2 =
1 + γ (t2 − t1 ) 1 − γ (t2 − t1 )
107 o while a faulty Celsius thermometer
registers 42o . Find the error in the later.. d1 d1
3) d 2 = 4) d 2 = 1 + 2γ (t − t )
1) 0.6o C 2) 0.72o C 3) 1.2o C 4) 7.2o C 1 − 2γ (t2 − t1 ) 2 1
17. An iron bar whose cross sectional area is 4cm2
8. A platinum wire has a resistance of 2. 62 Ω at
is heated from 00C and 1000C. The force
15 0C and 3.29 Ω at 80 o C. Find the
required to prevent the expansion of the rod
temperature coefficient of the resistance of is [Y of Iron = 2 × 1012 dyne / cm2
platinum wire. α of Iron = 12 × 10-6 /0 C]
1) 4.18 x 10 -3 oC-1 2)9.34 x 10 -3 oC-1 1) 0.96 × 108 N 2) 0.96 × 107 N
3) 1. 934 x 10 -3 oC-1 4)934 x 10 -3 oC-1 3) 9.6 × 107 N 4) 96 × 103 N
9. The Fahrenheit and Kelvin scales of 18. A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The
temperature will give the same reading at diameter of the hole is 4.24 cm at 27.0 0 C .
1) –40 2) 313 3) 574.25 4) 732.75 What is the change in the diameter of the hole
10. The pressure of hydrogen gas in a constant
when the sheet is heated to 2270 C ? α for
volume gas thermometer is 80.0cm at 00C,
110cm at 1000C and 95.0 cm at unknown copper = 1.70 × 10 −5 K −1
temperature t. Then t is equal to 1) 1.44 ×10−2 cm 2) 14.4 ×10−2 cm
1) 500C 2) 750C 3) 950C 4) 1500C
3) 144 × 10 −2 cm 4) 0.144 × 10−2 cm
THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS
11. A brass sheet is 25 cm long and 8 cm breadth 19. Distance between two places is 200km. α of
metal is 2.5 × 10-5 /0 C. Total space that must
at 00 C. Its area at 1000C is ( α = 18 ×10−6 / 0 C ) be left between steel rails to allow a change
1) 207.2 cm2 2) 200.72 cm2 of temperature from 360F to 1170F is
2
3) 272 cm 4) 2000.72 cm2 1)2.25km 2)0.225km 3)22.5km 4)0.0225km
NARAYANAGROUP 17
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
20. A crystal has a coefficient of linear expansion
d0
12 ×10 −6 / 0 C in one direction and 16. dt = (1 + γ∆t )
244 × 10−6 / 0 C in every direction at right
angles to it . Then the coefficient of cubical Fl
17. ∆l = ---- (1)
expansion of crystal is AY
1) 450 × 10−6 / 0 C 2) 500 × 10−6 / 0 C Increase in length ∆l = l α ∆ t ---- (2)
3) 244 × 10−6 / 0 C 4) 36 × 10−6 / 0 C Fl
from (1) and (2) = l α ∆ t ⇒ F = YAα∆T
21. When a thin rod of length ‘ l ’ is heated from AY
t01C to t 02 C length increases by 1%. If plate 18. L2 − L1 = L1α∆T 19. l2 − l1 = l1a ∆t
of length 2 l and breadth ‘ l ’ made of same
material is heated form t 0 1 C to t 02 C, 20. γ = α x + α y + α y
percentage increase in area is ∆A
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4 21. 100 = β × ∆t × 100 β = 2α
LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY A
1)1 2)3 3)3 4)2 5)1 6)3 LEVEL - II (C.W)
7)1 8)1 9)3 10)1 11)2 12)3
13)2 14)4 15)3 16)1 17)4 18)1
19)2 20)2 21) 2 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE
1. The resistance of a certain platinum resistance
LEVEL - I (H.W) - HINTS
thermometer is found to be 2.56 Ω at 0oC and
F − 32 C − 0 C−0 X −L 3.56 Ω at 1000 C . When the thermometer is
1. = 2. =
180 100 100 U − L immersed in a given liquid, its resistance is
observed to be 5.06 Ω . The temperature of
F − 32 C − 0
3. = ; F=2C the liquid
180 100
1) 45 0C 2) 250 0C 3)225 0C 4)120 0C
C−0 X −L 2. A constant volume gas thermometer shows
4. K=C+273 5. =
100 U − L pressure readings of 50 cm and 90 cm of
F − 32 X − L mercury at 0o C,100o C respectively, The
6. ∆0C = ∆ 0 K 7. = temperature of the bath when pressure reading
180 U −L
is 60 cm of mercury.
R 2 − R1
8. α = 1) 45 0C 2) 30 0C 3) 25 0C 4) 20 0C
R 1 t 2 − R 2 t1 3. On a hypothetical scale A the ice point is 420
F − 32 K − 273 and the steam points is 1820 For another scale
9. = But F = K = x B. The ice point is –100 and steam point in 900.
180 100
If B reads 600. The reading of A is.
Pt − P0
10. t = P − P × 100 1) 160 0 2) 140 0 3) 120 0 4) 110 0
100 o
4. The upper and lower fixed points of a faulty
11. A2 = A1 (1 + β∆t ) , β = 2α mercury thermometer are 2100F and 340 F
l2 − l1 respectively. The correct temperature read by
12. t2 − t1 = l ∆t this thermometer is
1
1) 220F 2) 800F 3) 1000F 4) 1220F
1
13. loss or gain in t ime per day = α∆t 86400 5. A Fahrenheit thermometer registers 1100 F
2 while a faulty Celsius thermometer registers
l2 − l1
14. l2 − l1 = l1α∆t 15. α = l ( t − t ) 440 C . Find the error in the later
1 2 1
1) 0.37 0 2) 0.87 0 3) 0.67 0 4) 0.48
18 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS 12. When the temperature of a body increases
6. When a rod is heated from 250C to 750C, it from t to t+ ∆ t, its moment of inertia increases
expands by 1 mm. When a rod of same from I to I + ∆ l. The coefficient of linear
material but with 4 times the length is heated expansion of the body is α . The ratio ∆ I/I is
from 250C to 500C. The increase in length is (2012 E)
1) 1mm 2) 1.5mm 3)1.6mm 4)2 mm 1) ∆ t/t 2) 2 ∆ t/t 3) α ∆ t 4) 2 α ∆ t
7. An iron metal rod is to maintain an accuracy 13. There is some change in length when a 33000
of one part per million. The coefficient of N tensile force is applied on a steel rod of area
linear expansion of iron is 1 × 10-5 /0 C. The
minimum variations in temperature of the rod of cross-section 10−3 m 2 . The change of
could be temperature required to produce the same
1) ± 10C 2) ± 50C 3) ±0.10C 4) ± 0.010C elongation of the steel rod when heated is
8. Two metal rods have coefficients of linear (Y= 3 × 1011 N / m 2 , α = 1.1×10−5 / 0 C )
expansion 1.1 × 10-5 /0 C and 1.65 × 10-5 /0 C 1) 200 C 2) 150 C 3) 100 C 4) 00 C
respectively. The difference in lengths is 10cm 14. Brass scale of a Barometer gives correct
at all temperatures. Their initial lengths must reading at 00C. coefficient of linear expansion
be respectively. of brass is 18 × 10-6 /0C. If the barometer
1) 40 cm and 50 cm 2) 40 cm and 30 cm reads 76cm at 200C, the correct reading is
3) 50 cm and 60 cm 4) 30 cm and 20 cm ( γ Hg=18 × 10-5 /0 C)
9. Two rods of same length and same diameter 1 76.426 cm 2) 75.7cm
are drawn from equal masses and same 3) 76.642 cm 4) 76.264 cm
quantity of heat is supplied to the two rods.
15. A thin brass sheet at 10°C and a thin steel
Find the ratio of expansions if specific heats
of the material is 2/3 and that of coefficient of sheet at 20°C have the same surface area.
linear expansion is 1/2 The common temperature at which both would
1) 4/3 2) 1/2 3) 3/4 4)1/3 have the same area is (Coefficient of linear
10. Two rods of different materials having expansion for brass and steel are respectively,
coefficients of thermal expansion α1 , α 2 and 19 × 10–6/°C are 111 × 10–6/°C)
young’s modulus Y 1, Y 2 respectively are fixed 1) –3.75°C 2) –2.75°C 3) 2.75°C 4)3.75°C
between two rigid walls. The rods are heated 16. A pendulum clock gives correct time at 200C
such that they undergo the same increase in at a place where g= 10m/s2. The pendulum
temperature. There is no bending of rods. If consists of a light steel rod connected to a
α1 : α 2 =2:3, thermal stress developed in the heavy ball. If it is taken to a different place
where g = 10.01m/s2 at what temperature the
rods are equal provided Y 1:Y2 is equal to
pendulum gives correct time ( α of steel is
1) 2:3 2) 1:1 3) 3:2 4) 4:9
10–5/0C) [2007 E]
11. Two uniform metal rods one of aluminium of
1) 300C 2) 600C 3) 1000C 4) 1200C
length l1 and another made of steel of length 17. Two rods of lengths L1 and L2 are welded
l2 and linear coefficients of expansion αa and together to make a composite rod of length
(L1+L2). If the coefficient of linear expansion
αs respectively are connected to form a single
of the materials of the rods are α1 and α 2
rod of length l1+l 2 . When the temperature of respectively, the effective coefficient of
the combined rod is raised by t o C , the length linear expansion of the composite rod is
of each rod increases by the same amount. [2012 E]
l1 L1α1 − L2α 2 L1α1 + L2α 2
Then l +l is 1) L + L 2) L + L
1 2 1 2
1 2
αs αa αa αs α1 + α 2
3) α1α 2 4)
1) α + α 2) α + α 3) α 4) α 2
a s a s s a
NARAYANAGROUP 19
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
18. A clock pendulum made of invar has a period 8. l1α1 = l2α 2 , l1 − l2 = 10
of 0.5sec at 200C. If the clock is used in a
climate where the temperature averages to 9. Q1 = Q2 ; ms1 ( ∆t )1 = ms2 ( ∆t )2
300C, how much time does the clock loose in
10. Thermal stress Y1a 1∆t = Y2 a 2 ∆t
each oscillation. For invar α = 9 × 10−7 0C −1
11. l1α a ∆t1 = l2α s ∆t2
1) 2.25 × 10−6 sec 2) 2.5 × 10−7 sec
3) 5 ×10−7 sec 4) 1.125 × 10−6 sec ∆I ∆R ∆I
12. from I = MR2, = 2× , = 2α∆t
19. A steel scale is correct at 0°C. The length of a I R I
brass tube measured by it at 40°C is 4.5m. The F
correct length of the tube at 0°C is 13. ∆t =
YAα
(Coefficients of linear expansion of steel and
brass are 11 × 10-6/°C and 19 × 10-6/°C 14. True value =scale reading l − ( γ − α ) ∆t
respectively). β1t1 − β 2t2 ∆l ∆g
1) 4.001m 2) 5.001 m 3)4.999m 4)4.501m 15. t = β − β 16. = = α∆t
20. The ratio of lengths of two rods is 1 : 2 and the 1 2 l g
ratio of coefficient of expansions is 2 : 3. The ∆L1 ∆L2
first rod is heated through 600C. Find the 17. = L1α1 ; = L2α 2
∆t ∆t
temperature through which the second rod is
∆L ∆L1 ∆L2
to be heated so that its expansion is twice that
∴ = + ; ( L1 + L2 ) α = L1α1 + L2α 2
of first is ∆t ∆t ∆t
1) 600C 2) 400C 3) 300C 4) 100C 1
18. ∆T = α∆t ; 19. lc = lm 1 + ( αS ~ αb ) ( t 2 − t1 )
LEVEL - II (C.W)-KEY 2
1) 2 2) 3 3) 2 4) 4 5) 3 6) 4 ∆t1 α 2 l2
7) 3 8) 4 9) 3 10) 3 11)1 12)4 20. ∆l = α l ∆t ⇒ ∆t = α × l
2 1 1
13) 3 14) 2 15) 1 16) 4 17) 2 18) 1
19) 4 20) 2
LEVEL - II (H.W)
LEVEL - II (C.W)- HINTS
Rt − R0 P − P0 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE
1. t= × 100 2. t = t 100 1. The resistance of a resistance thermometer
R100 − R0 P100 − P0
has values 2.70 Ω and 3.70 Ω at 00C and 1000C
Re ading − LFP
3. = constant respectively. The temperature at which the
UFP − LFP resistance is 3.10 Ω is
X A − LA X B − LB 1) 300C 2) 400C 3) 600C 4) 700C
=
U A − L A U B − LB 2. A gas thermometer measures the temperature
Re ading − LFP from the variation of pressure of a sample of
4. = constant gas. If the pressure measured at the melting
UFP − LFP
point of lead is 2.20 times the pressure
F − 32 X − L
= measured at the triple point of water find the
180 U −L melting point of lead.
C − 0 F − 32 1) 600K 2) 420K 3) 790 K 4) 510 K
5. =
100 180 3. On a hypothetical scale X, the ice point is 400
e1 e2 and the steam point is 1200. For another scale
6. As α1 = α 2 ⇒ l ∆t = l ∆t Y the ice point and steam points are –300 and
1 1 2 2
1300 respectively. If X-reads 500 The reading
∆l ∆l
7. = 1/106 ⇒ = α ∆t of Y is
l l 1) –50 2) –80 3) –100 4) –120
20 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS flask made of the same glass as that rod
4. 0
A steel tape is calibrated at 20 C. when the measures a volume of 1000 c.c at 00C. The
temperature of the day is -10 0 C, the volume it measures at 1000C in c.c. is
percentage error in the measurement with 1) 1018 cc 2) 918 cc 3) 818 cc 4) 718 cc
the tape is ( α =12 × 10-6 /0 C) 12. A pendulum clock runs fast by 5 seconds per
1) 3.6% 2) 0.36% 3) 0.18% 4) 0.036% day at 200c and goes slow by 10 seconds per
5. The temperature coefficient of resistance of day at 35 0C. It shows correct time at a
wire is 12.5 × 10−4 . At 300K the resistance of temperature of
wire is 1Ω . The temperature at which 1) 27.50C 2) 25.0C 3) 30.0C 4) 33.0C
resistance will be 2Ω is 13. A second's pendulum clock having steel wire
1)827K 2)854K 3)1527K 4) 1127K is calibrated at 20°C . When temperature is
6. The diameter of iron wheel is 1cm. If its increased to 30°C , then how much time does
temperature is increased by 7000C What is the clock loose or gain in one week ?
the increase in circumference of the wheel?
[ α steel = 1.2 × 10−5 ( °C ) ]
−1
( α =12 × 10-6 /0 C)
1)0.0264cm 2)0.264 cm 3)2.64cm 4)26.4 cm 1) 0.3628s 2) 3.626s 3) 362.8 s 4) 36.28s
7. If a cylinder of diameter 1.0cm at 300C is to 14. A metre scale made of steel is calibrated at
be slid into a hole of diameter 0.9997 cm in a 200C to give correct reading. Find the distance
steel plate at the same temperature, the between 50 cm mark and 51 cm mark if the
minimum required rise in the temperature of scale is used at 100C. Coefficient of linear
the plate is: (Coefficient of linear expansion expansion of steel is 1.1 × 10–5/0C
of steel=12 × 10-6/0C) 1) 1.00011 cm 2) 1.0011 cm
1) 250C 2) 350C 3) 450C 4) 550C 3) 1.011 cm 4) 1.000011 cm
8. The initial lengths of two rods A and B are in 15. A thin brass sheet at 20°C and a thin steel
the ratio 3:5 and coefficients of linear sheet at 30°C have the same surface area.
expansion are in the ratio 5:3. If the rods are The common temperature at which both would
heated from 340C to 650C, the ratio of their have the same area is (Coefficient of linear
expansion will be expansion for brass and steel are respectively,
1)1:1 2) 3:5 3) 1:2 4) 2:3 19 × 10–6/°C are 111 × 10–6/°C)
9. A thin copper wire of length L increases in 1) –6.250C 2) +6.250C
length by one percent when heated from t10 C 0
3) –3.25 C 4) +3.250C
16. Distance between two places is 200 km. α of
and t2 0 C . The percentage change in area
steel is 12 × 10–6/°C. Total space that must
when a thin copper plate having dimension be left between steel rails to allow for a change
2L × L is heated from t10C to t20 C is
of temperature from 36°F to 117°F is (in km)
1)1 % 2) 3 % 3) 2 % 4) 4%
1)1.08 2)0.108 3)0.8 4) 0.0108
10. The brass scale of a barometer gives correct
17. Two thin metal strips, one of brass and the
reading at 10oC. The barometer reads 75 cm
other of iron are fastened together parallel to
at 30oC. What is the atmospheric pressure at
each other. Thickness of each strip is 2 mm. If
0oC (in cm Hg)
the strips are of equal length at 0°C. The radius
(α Brass = 20 × 10−6 / 0 C ; γ Hg = 175 ×10 −6 / 0 C ) of the arc formed by the bimetallic strip when
1) 74.8 2) 75.03 3) 70 4) 60 heated to 80°C is (Coefficient of linear
11. Two marks on a glass rod 10cm apart are expansion of brass = 19 × 10-6/°C &
found to increase their distance by 0.06mm of iron = 12 × 10-6/°C).
when the rod is heated from 00C to 100C. A 1) 3.57m 2) 2.67m 3) 3.12m 4) 4.56m
NARAYANAGROUP 21
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
18. A brass wire 1.8 m long at 270 C is held taut 1
13. ∆T = α∆t × 7 × 86400
with little tension between the two rigid 2
supports. If the wire is cooled to a temperature 14. lc = lm (1 + ( αS − α b ) ( t 2 − t1 ) )
of −390 C , the tension developed in the wire,
if its diameter is 2.0 mm, Coefficient of linear
15. ( A2 )brass = ( A2 )steel
expansion of brass = 2.0 × 10−5 K −1 ; Young’ss
modulus of brass = 0.91× 1011 Pa
( A1 )br 1 + β Br ( t − 20 ) = ( A1 )st 1 + β St ( t − 30 )
1) 3.8 × 102 N 2) 5.8 × 102 N Given ( A1 )br = ( A1 ) st
3) 7.8 × 102 N 4) 6.8 × 102 N ∆C ∆F 2t
16. ∆l = α l ∆t , = 17. r = (α − α ) ∆ T
5 9 1 2
LEVEL-II ( H.W ) - KEY 18. Decrease in length due to tention
1) 2 2)1 3) 3 4) 4 5) 4 6)1
Fl
7) 1 8) 1 9) 3 10)1 11)1 12)2 ∆l = ---- (1)
13)4 14)1 15)2 16)2 17)1 18)1 AY
Increase in length due to rise in temperature
LEVEL-II (H.W) - HINTS ∆l = l α ∆ t ---- (2)
Rt − R0 Fl
1. t= × 100 from (1) and (2) = l α ∆ t ⇒ F = YAα∆T
R100 − R0 AY
T P P
2. = ⇒ TK = ( 273.16 ) K LEVEL - III
TTr PTr PTr
Re ading − LFP 120 − x 130 − y THERMAL EXPANSION
3. = constant, = 1. Two rods of the same length, have radii in the
UFP − LFP 80 160
ratio 3:4. Their densities are respectively 8000
∆l and 9000 kg/m3. Their specific heats are in the
4. ∆l = l α ∆ t ⇒ × 100 = a ∆ t × 100
l ratio of 2:3. When the same amount of heat is
R − R1 1 supplied to both, the changes in their lengths
α= 2 −4 = are in the ratio. (If their linear coefficients are
5. R1t2 − R2t1 ; 12.5 × 10 t2 − 54 in the ratio 5:6)
6. Increase is circumference = π Dα∆t where D = 1) 1:1 2) 5:2 3) 5:12 4) 12:5
diameter of the wheel 2. A solid sphere of radius r and mass m is
spinning about a diameter as axis with a speed
7. r2 = r1 (1 + α∆t ) ⇒ r2 − r1 = r1 α ∆ t
ω 0. The temperature of the sphere increases
∆l1 l1 α1 by 1000C without any other disturbance. If the
8. ∆l = l1α∆t ⇒ = ×
∆l2 l2 α 2 coefficient of linear expansion of material of
sphere is 2 × 10-4 /0 C, the ratio of angular
∆A speed at 1000C and ω 0 is
9. ∆A = Aβ ∆ t ⇒ × 100 = ß∆t × 100
A 1) 1:1 2) 1:1.04 3) 1.04:1 4) 1:1.02
10. H1 = H 2 1 − ( γ Hg − α ) ∆t
3. Two rods of different materials and identical
cross sectional area, are joined face to face at
one end and their free ends are fixed to the
11. ∆l = α l ∆t ; V2 = V1 (1 + 3α∆t ) rigid walls. If the temperature of the
1 surroundings is increased by 30°C, the
12. a ( 35 − t ) × 86400 = 10 ---- (1) magnitude of the displacement of the joint of
2 the rod is (length of rods l1 =l2 =1unit, ratio of
1 their young's moduli, Y1 /Y2 =2, coefficients of
a ( t − 20 ) × 86400 = 5 ----- (2) linear expansion are α 1 and α 2 )
2
Solving 1 and 2 1) 5(α 2 − α1 ) 2) 10(α1 − α 2 )
3) 10(α 2 − 2α1 ) 4) 5(2α1 − α 2 )
22 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
4. A wire of length L0 is supplied heat to raise 9. A thin circular metal disc of radius 500.0 mm
is set rotating about a central axis normal to
its temperature by T. if γ is the coefficient of
its plane. Upon raising its temperature
volume expansion of the wire and Y is Young’s gradually, the radius increases to 507.5 mm.
modulus of the wire then the energy density The percentage change in the rotational kinetic
stored in the wire is energy will be
1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1) 1.5% 2) -1.5% 3) 3% 4) -3%
1) γ T Y 2) γ T Y
2 3 10. A steel wire AB of length 100 cm is fixed rigidly
1 γ 2T 2 1 2 2 at points A and B in an aluminium frame as
3) 4) γ T Y shown in the figure. If the temperature of the
18 Y 18
5. A uniform solid brass cylinder of mass M=0.5 system increases through 100 0 C, then the
Kg and radius R=0.03m is placed in excess stress produced in the steel wire
frictionless bearings and set to rotate about relative to the aluminium?
its geometrical axis with an angular velocity
of 60 rad/s. After the cylinder has reached α Al = 22 × 10 −6 / 0 C and α steel = 11× 10−6 / 0 C
the specified state of rotation, it is heated young's Modulus of steel is 2 × 1011 Nm–2 .
(without any mechanical contact) from room Aluminium frame
temperature 200C to 1000C. The fractional
change in angular velocity of the cylinder is
( α =2 × 10-5/0C)
1) -3.2 × 10-3 2) 3.2 × 10-3 A
steel wire
B
3) 2.3 × 10 -3
4) -2.3 × 10-3
6. Calculate the compressional force required to
prevent the metallic rod of length l cm and
cross-sectional area A cm2 when heated 1) 2.2 × 108 Pa 2) 22 × 108 Pa
through t °C , from expanding along length 3) 0.2 × 108 Pa 4) 220 × 108 Pa
wise. The Young's modulus of elasticity of the 11. An equilateral triangle ABC is formed by
metal is E and mean coefficient of linear joining three rods of equal length and D is the
expansion is α per degree Celsius mid-point of AB. The coefficient of linear
EAα t E Aα t expansion for AB is α1 and for AC and BC is
1) EAα t 2) 3) 4) Elα t
1 + αt 1−αt
7. An iron rod of length 50 cm is joined to an α 2 . The relation between α1 and α 2 , if
aluminium rod of length 100cm. All distance DC remains constant for small
measurements refer to 20oC. The coefficient changes in temperature is (2010 E)
of linear expansion of iron and aluminium are A D α1 B
12 × 10−6 / °C and 24 × 10−6 / °C respectively..
The average linear expansion coefficient of
composite system is :
α2 α2
1) 36 ×10−6 / °C 2) 12 × 10−6 / °C
3) 20 × 10−6 / °C 4) 48 × 10−6 / °C
8. A rod of length 20 cm is made of metal. It
expands by 0.075 cm when its temperature is C
raised from 0°C to 100°C . Another rod of a 1) α1 = α 2 2) α1 = 4α 2
different metal B having the same length
1
expands by 0.045 cm for the same change in 3) α 2 = 4α1 4) α1 = α 2
temperature. A third rod of the same length is 2
composed of two parts, one of metal A and the 12. A cube of edge (L) and coefficient of linear
other of metal B. This rod expands by 0.060 expansion ( α ) is heated by 10C. Its surface
cm for the same change in temperature. The area increases by
portion made of metal A has the length : 1) 6 α L2 2) 8 α L2 3) 12 α L2 4) 2 α L2
1) 20 cm 2) 10 cm 3) 15 cm 4) 18 cm
NARAYANAGROUP 23
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
13. An iron ball of diameter 6cm and is 0.01 mm (Given α = 9 × 10 −6 / °C )
B
too large to pass through a hole in a brass plate
when the ball and plate are at a temperature of 1) α A = 3 × 10−6 / °C , 500°C
200C. The temperature at which (both for ball 2) α A = 3 × 10−6 / °C , 222.22°C
and plate) the ball just passes through the hole
3) α A = 27 × 10−6 / °C ,500°C
(
is αiron = 12 × 10
−6 0
/ C ; αbrass = 18 × 10 −6 0
/ C ) 4) α A = 27 × 10−6 / °C , 222.22°C
1) 2)680C 3) 480C 4) 280C 400C 18. The coefficient of linear expansion of an in
14. A rod of length 2 m is at a temperature of homogeneous rod changes linearly from α1 to
200 C . The free expansion of the rod is 0.9mm. α 2 from one end to the other end of the rod.
If the temperature is increased to 500 C , the
stress produced when the rod is fully The effective coefficient of linear expansion
prevented to expand of rod is
α1 + α2
Y = 2 × 1011 N / m 2 , α = 15 × 10−6 / 0 C 1) α1 + α 2 2) 3) α1α2 4) α1 − α2
1) 9 × 107 N / m 2 2) 4.5 × 107 N / m 2 2
19. A rod of steel is 5m long and 3cm diameter at
3) 5 × 107 N / m2 4) 3 × 107 N / m 2 a temperature of 200C. Find the free expansion
15. The coefficient of linear expansion for a certain of the rod when the temperature is raised to
metal varies with temperature as α (T ) . If L0 650C. Find the respective pulls exerted if (i)
the ends do not yield and (ii) the ends yield by
is the initial length of the metal and the
0.12 cm. Y = 2 × 105 MN / m2 and α =12×10−6
temperature of metal changed from T0 to
per 0C
T ( T0 > T ) then, 1) 0.27 cm, 42.41 KN, 76.34 KN
2) 0.27 cm, 76.30 KN, 42.39 KN
2) L = L0 1+ ∫T α (T ) dT
T
1) L = L0 ∫T α (T ) dT
T
3) 0.27 cm, 38.63 KN, 78.23 KN
0 0
4) 0.27 cm, 78.23 KN, 38.63 KN
T 20. Two bars are unstressed and have lengths of
3) L = L 0 1 − ∫ α (T ) dT 4) L > L0 25cm and 30cm at 200C as shown in Figure.
T0 Bar (1) is of aluminium and bar (2) is of steel.
16. A steel tape is placed around the earth at the The cross-sectional area of bars are 20cm2 for
equator. When the temperature is 0 0 C aluminium and 10cm2 for steel. Assuming that
neglecting the expansion of the earth, the the top and bottom supports are rigid, stress
clearance between the tape and the ground if N
the temperature of the tape rises to 300C, is in Al steel bars in when the temperaturee
mm 2
nearly (α steel = 11×10−6 / K ) is 700C. (Nearly )
1) 1.1 km 2) 0.5 km 3) 6400 km 4) 2.1 km (Ya = 0.70 ×105 N / mm2 .Ys = 2.1× 105 N / mm2 .
17. The variation of lengths of two metal rods A
and B with change in temperature are shown α a = 24 × 10−6 / 0C and α s = 12. × 10−6 / 0C )
in figure. The coefficients of linear expansion
α A for the metal A and the temperature T will
Al 25cm
be :
1006 A
1004 B
Length(mm)
1002
1000 St 30cm
998
996
994
O O T 1) 75, 150 2) 25, 50 3) 50, 100 4)100, 200
Temperature( C)
24 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
LEVEL - III -KEY ∆l ∆l
1)2 2)2 3)3 4)4 5)1 6)2 8. αA = ; αB = ; ∆l A + ∆lB = 0.065
l ∆t l ∆t
7)3 8)2 9)4 10)1 11)2 12)3
13)2 14)1 15)3 16)4 17)4 18)2 dR dK −2dR
9. × 100 = 1.5; =
19)2 20) 1 R K R
LEVEL-III - HINTS 10. Net elongation ∆l = (α Al −α St ) l ∆t
1. Q = ms∆θ , m = ρπ r l 2
Stress = Y ( Strain )
∆l ∆l ρ r s α 2
11. Before and after changing the temperature,
∆θ = ⇒ 1 = 2× × 2× 1 2
lα ∆l2 ρ1 r s1 α 2 1
2
l12 1
= l2 (1 + α t ) − l1 (1 + α t )
2 2
l22 −
2. I1? 1 = I 2? 2 ; R12 ? 1 = R22 ? 2 4 4
2 and l1 = l2
? 2 R2 1
= = 12. ∆A = Aβ ∆ t ;
? 1 R1 (1 + a ∆t ) 2
13. d 'iron = d 'brass (after heating)
3. Y1 ( Strain )1 = Y2 ( Strain ) 2
diron (1 + αiron∆t ) = dbrass (1 + αbrass ∆t )
α l ∆T1 − x α l ∆T2 + x
Y1 1 = Y2 2 14. ∴ Thermal stress = strain × Y = ∆l ×Y = (α∆t ) Y
l l l
(Y2α 2 − Y1α1 ) dL
Displacement of the rod x = × l × ∆T 15. L = −α ( T ) dt ; Integrate the equation
Y1 + Y2 0
4. Elastic potential energy per unit volume 16. Increase in length of tape; ∆l = lα∆T
1 1 1006 − 1000 ∆L
E= × Stress × Strain = × Y × ( Strain )
2
17. Slope of the line A= =
2 2 T ∆T
∆L 1
2
1 6
⇒ E = ×Y × = 1000mm α A -------(1)
= × Y × α × ∆T
2 2
2 L 2 T
∆? −∆I −2∆R similarly for B line
5. I1? 1 = I 2? 2 ; = = − 2a ∆t
? I R
2
= 1002mm α B --------(2)
2 ∆I 2∆R T
I ∝ R , =
I R From (1) & (2) α A = 3α B
6. Natural length of the rod at t °C = l + lα t
α 2 − α1
L
decrease in natural length due to stress = ∆l 18. α n = α1 + x; ∆L = ∫ α n dx∆t
L
− F ( l + ∆l )
0
− EAα t
∆l1 − ∆l = 0 ; E = ; F= α + α2
A∆l 1+ αt α1 + α 2
L= 1 L∆T ; α eff =
2 2
7. ∆l1 + ∆l2 = ∆l ; l1α1∆t + l2α 2 ∆t = ( l1 + l2 ) α ave ∆t
19. If the ends do not yield then F = YA α ∆T
α l + α 2 l2
α avg = 11 YA(αl∆T −e)
l1 + l2 If the ends yield by an amount e then =
l0
NARAYANAGROUP 25
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
20. Contraction of the two bars due to compressive Assertion & Reason Type
stress = Elongation of the two bars due to rise of 1)A and R are correct and R is correct explanation
for A
temperature
1) A and R are correct and R is not correct
Sl Sl explanation for A
Y + Y = (α L∆t ) Al + (α L∆t ) St 3) A is true and R is false
Al St
4) Both A and R are false
Force in steel = force in aluminium 5. Assertion (A): A thick and thin metallic rods of
S Al × Α Al = S St × Α St same material heated through same rise of
temperature then thermal stress is same.
LEVEL - IV Reason (R): Thermal stress is independent of area
of cross section.
Matching Type Questions 6. Assertion (A): An iron ball strucked in a brass
1. List - I List - II plate is removed by heating the system.
a)Isotropic solids e) Expands on melting Reason (R): The coefficient of linear expansion
of brass is more than that of iron.
b) Ice f) Equal expansion in all
7. Assertion (A): Invar steel is used to prepare clock
directions pendulum.
c)Anisotropic solids g) Contracts on heating Reason (R): The coefficient of linear expansion
d) Copper h) unequal expansion in of invar steel is Infinity.
different directions 8. Assertion (A): When hot water is poured in a thick
2. List - I List - II glass tumbler then the tumbler breaks.
a) Thermal expansion e) Pendulum clock Reason (R): Glass is a bad conductor of heat
b) α , β , γ f) Depends on 9. Assertion (A): To have same difference between
the lengths of two metallic rods their initial lengths
Dimension, Material,
of 0ºC should be in the inverse ratio of their
Temperature
coefficient of linear expansion.
c) Bimetallic strip g) Depends on nature of Reason (R): If the lengths of two metallic rods at
the material only 0º C are in the inverse ratio of their
d)Invar steel h) Balance wheel coefficient of linear expansion then the change in
of a watch the lengths due to same rise of temperature is same.
3. List - I List - II 10. Assertion (A): A solid on heating undergoes
a) Bimetal thermostat e) Pendulum clock expansion only because of increasing the amplitude
b) Compensated f) Invar steel of the simple oscillators.
pendulum Reason (R): A solid on heating undergoes
c) Metal tape g) Differential expansion only because of increasing the inter
expansion of metals atomic distance.
d) Elinvar h )Hair spring 11. Assertion (A): A metallic plate containing circular
4. List - I List - II hole is heated then the size of the hole increases.
Reason (R): The expansion of the solid always
a. Thermal stress e. 3α∆t100
takes place radially outwards.
d 12. Assertion (A): Platinum is used to fuse into glass
b. Loss in time of a f. (α − α ) ∆ t
2 1 tube.
pendulum clock per sec Reason (R): Both platinum and glass have almost
same values of coefficient of linear expansion.
c. percentage increase g. Yα∆t
13. Assertion (A): A thin rod and a thick rod made of
in volume of a solid same material having same length are heated through
d. Radius of circular arc h. (1/ 2 ) α∆t same range of temperature. Then both the rods
expand equally.
of bimetallic strip Reason (R): The linear expansion e = lα∆t
26 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I
14. Assertion (A): A thin rod and a thick rod made of 22. Statement 1: Gas thermometers are more sensitive
same material having same length are given same than liquid thermometers.
amount of heat θ . Then the thin rod expands more. Statement 2: Expansion in gases is more
Reason (R): The linear expansion depends upon
prominent than liquids.
initial length of the rod only .
15. Assertion (A): A platinum wire can be sealed More than one option Type Questions
through glass. But a brass one cannot be sealed 23. When a rod is heated, its linear expansion
through glass. depends on
Reason (R): Coefficient of linear expansion of a) initial length b) area of cross section
platinum and that of brass have different values. c) mass d) temperature rise
16. Assertion (A): Two rods of the same material have 1) only a is correct 2) a & d are correct
the same lengths but diameter are in the ratio of 3) b & c are correct 4) a & c are correct
1:2. If 1000cal of heat is supplied to the two rods
24. The numerical value of coefficient of linear
separately the ratio of their linear expansion is 4:1.
Reason (R): The linear expansion e = lα∆t expansion is independent of units of
17. Assertion (A): The linear coefficients of expansion a) length b) temperature c) area d) mass
of a crystal along three perpendicular axes are 1) only (a) is correct
2) (a) & (b) are correct
−α α 7α
α, , . Its volume coefficient is 3) (a) ,(b) & (c) are correct
2 5 10 4) (a) ,(c) & (d) are correct
Reason (R): for anisotropic solids 25. Expansion during heating
γ = α x + α y + αz . (a) occurs in solids only
(b) causes decrease in weight
Statement type questions
(c) is due to increase of interatomic spacing
Options :
1)only (a) is wrong
1. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is true
2. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is false 2)(a),(b) & (c) are wrong
3. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is true 3) (a) & (b) are wrong
4. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is false 4) (a) ,(b) & (c) are correct
18. Statement 1: Fahrenheit is the smallest unit 26. When a copper solid sphere is heated, its
measuring temperature. (a) moment of inertia increases
Statement 2: Fahrenheit was the first temperature (b) Elasticity decreases
scale used for measuring temperature.
(c) density decreases
19. Statement 1: A brass disc is just fitted in a hole in
a steel plate. The system must be cooled to loosen (d) mass increases
the disc from the hole. 1) only (b) is true
Statement 2: The coefficient of liner expansion 2) (a) & (b) are true
for brass is greater than the coefficient of linear 3) (a),(b) & (c) are true
expansion for steel. 4) all are true
20. Statement 1: When a bimetallic strip made of iron 27. Due to thermal expansion with rise in
and brass is heated then it bends in the form of temperature
concave towards Brass. (a)Metallic scale reading becomes lesser than true
Statement 2: The coefficient of linear expansion value
of iron is less than brass. (b) Pendulum clock goes fast
21. Statement 1: The linear expansion does not (c) A floating body sinks a little more
depend on nature of the material, initial length, and (d) The weight of a body in a liquid increases
rise in temperature. 1) only (a) is correct
Statement 2: The coefficient of linear expansion 2) (a) & (b) are correct
depends on nature of the material and system of 3) (a),(b) & (d) are correct
temperature. 4) (a),(c) & (d) are correct
NARAYANAGROUP 27
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER–I JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
28. Which of the following statements are true 10. In case of en-harmonic oscillators, increase in
(a) Rubber contracts on heating amplitude is not equal on both sides. To have equal
(b) Water expands on freezing amplitude on both sides atoms change their
(c) Water contracts on heating from 0°C to 4°C position, with this, interatomic distance increases
(d) Water expands on heating from 4°C to 40°C and substance expand.
1) (a) is correct 11. To have same angular separation, among the
2) (b) and (c) are correct atoms, expansion of solids takes place radially
3) (c) & (d) are correct outwards.
4) all are correct 12. Platinum and glass expand equally on heating and
29. When a metal ring having some gap is heated
a) length of gap increases contracts equally on cooling α pt = α glass .
b) radius of the ring decreases 14. Linear expansion also depends on rise in
c) the angle subtended by the gap at the centre temperature. The rise in temperature is more in thin
remains same rod, than thick rod when both are given same
d) length of gap decreases
1
1) only d is correct amount of heat. dQ = ms ∆t ; ∆t α
2) a and b are correct m
3) a & c are correct 15. Brass and glass are not having equal expansions
4) all are correct on heating and equal contractions on cooling
LEVEL - IV - KEY [α Brass ≠ α Glass ]
Matching Type Questions But [α Platinum = α Glass ] so platinum wire can be
1) a-f, b-g, c-h, d-e 2) a-f, b-g, c-h, d-e
sealed through glass but brass can not be sealed.
3) a-g, b-e, c-f, d-h 4) a- g, b-h, c-e, d-f
∝ 2 ⇒ e ∝ 12 ⇒ ∴ e1 = 4
Assertion & Reason Type 1 1
16. e ∝ ∆t ∝
5) 1 6) 1 7) 3 8) 1 9) 1 10) 1 m π r lρ r e2 1
11) 1 12) 1 13) 1 14) 3 15) 3 16) 1 Statement Type Questions
17) 1 20. As brass expands more than Iron on heating,
Statement type questions bimetallic strip bends with brass on convex side
18)2 19)1 20) 3 21) 3 22)1 [α Brass > α Iron ]
More than one option type questions 21. Linear expansion depends on nature of material,
23) 2 24) 4 25) 3 26) 3 27) 4 28) 4 initial length, rise in temperature and scale of
temperature. Where as coefficient of linear expansion
29) 3
depends on nature of material and scale of
LEVEL - IV - HINTS temperature.
Assertion & Reason Type More than one option questions
5. Thermal stress = yα∆t 24. α is independent on length, area and mass. It
Thermal stress is independent of area of cross depends on temperature.
section. 25. Expansion occurs due to increase of interatomic
6. Brass expands more on heating than Iron spaces.
26. When copper solid sphere is heated, radius
(α Brass > α Iron )
increases, moment of inertia increases volume
7. Linear expansion of Invar steel is very very less. increases, mass remains constant so density
8. Glass is bad conductor of heat and due to uneven decreases. Elasticity also decreases.
expansion and contraction glass tumbler breaks.
l1 α 2
9. ∆l1 = ∆l2 = l1α1∆t = l2α 2 ∆t ; l = α
2 1
28 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
mass of the liquid expelled
SYNOPSIS γA =
mass remained × change in temperature
Thermal Expansion of Liquids m1 = mass of empty bottle
Introduction:
m2 = mass of the bottle with liquid
Ø Liquids do not have any shape of their own. volume m3 = mass of the bottle with remaining liquid
of liquid is equal to volume of the container mexp = m2 - m3 ; mremain = m3 - m1
Ø Linear and superficial expansions have no meaning
for liquids. ∆t = rise in temperature
Ø As liquids possess definite volume, they experience m2 − m3
γA = /0 C
volume expansion only. ( m3 − m1 ) ∆t
Coefficient of Real Expansion( γ R ):
Relation between ( γ R ) and ( γ A ):
Ø Expansion which does not depend upon the
expansion of vessel is called Real expansion. Ø The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is equal
Ø The real expansion of liquids depends on to the sum of coefficient of apparent expansion of
a) Initial volume of liquid ,b) Rise in temperature the liquid and coefficient of volume expansion of
c) Nature of liquid the vessel.
Ø The real increase in volume per unit original volume γR = γA + γg
per 1 0C rise in temperature is called coefficient of
real expansion
∆V On heating Level of liquid
V −V
γ R = 2 1 / 0 C ⇒ V = V [1 + γ (t − t )]
V1 (t2 − t1 ) 2 1 R 2 1 γR > γg= > γA>0 Rises
Ø Percentage change in volume of a liquid is given
γR < γg= > γA<0 Falls
∆V
by V × 100 = γ R (t2 − t1 ) ×100 . γR = γg= > γA=0
Remains same
Coefficeint of Apparent Expansion( γ A ):
γg = 0 = > γA =γR Rises
Ø When a liquid is heated both liquid and container
expand. γR=-ve => γA = γR Rises
Ø Expansion which depends upon expansion of vessel
is called apparent expansion.
Ø The apparent expansion of liquids depends on
a) Initial volume of liquid, b) Rise in temperature. Ø If the same liquid is heated in two vessels X and Y,
c) Nature of liquid. real expansion of liquid is independent on nature of
d) Nature of material of container. the vessel, then
Ø The apparent increase in volume per unit original γ R = γ AX + 3α X and γ R = γ AY + 3αY
volume per 10 C rise in temperature is called
coefficient of apparent expansion of liquid. γ AX + 3α X = γ AY + 3αY ;
V2 − V1 γ AX − γ AY = 3(αY − α X )
γA = / 0C ⇒ V = V [1 + γ (t − t )]
V1 (t2 − t1 ) 2 1 A 2 1 Ø Here γ AX , γ AY denote coefficients of apparent
expansion of liquid in vessels X and Y respectively.
Ø γ A can be determine by using specific gravity bottle Ø αX and αY are coefficients of linear expansion of
method vessels X and Y respectively.
NARAYANAGROUP 29
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
WE-1.Volume of the bulb of a mercury thermometer Ø The temperature at which the density of liquid is
at 00 C is V0 and area of cross section of the 1 x −1 0
capillary tube is A 0 , coefficient of linear times of its density at 0 0 C is t 3 = γ C
x R
expansion of glass is α g , and the cubical 0
expansion of mercury is γ m . If the mercury fills WE-2. A block floats in water at 4 C so that 0.984
the bulb at 00C, find the length of mercury of its height is under water. At what
column in thermometer at T C 0 temperature of water will the block just sink
Sol: Expansion of mercury = V0γ mT in water? Neglect expansion of block.
Expansion in glass bulb = V0 3α gT ( γ R for water = 2.1× 10−4 / 0 C )
Apparent expansion in mercury Sol: Let d1 - density of water at 4 0C
= V0γ mT – V0 3α gT ; i.e., At l = V0T ( γ m − 3α g )
d2 - density of water at t 0C
d3 - density of block at t 0C
V0T ( γ m − 3α g ) V0T ( γ m − 3α g ) d1
l= = d2 = ; d1 = 1g / c.c ; d = 0.984 g / c.c.
A0 (1 + 2α gT ) (Q A0= At) 1 + γ∆t 3
At
The block sinks when the density of the block and
Variation of Density of Liquid With
Temperature: d1
water are equal d 2 = = d3
Ø For a liquid if the temperature increases volume 1 + γ∆t
m 1
increases and hence density decreases. Q d = 0.984 =
1 + 2.1 × 10 − 4 ( t − 4 )
V
Ø For calculating the change in density , the coefficient 1
of real expansion of the liquid is to be considered. 1 + 2.1× 10−4 ( t − 4 ) =
0.984
d0 = dt(1+γRt) or dt = d 0 (1 − γ Rt )
8 ×104
where, d0 = density of liquid at 00C ⇒t −4= = 77.430 C
dt = density of liquid at t 0C 492 × 2.1
γR = Coefficient of real expansion of liquid It must be heated to ' t ' = 77.43 + 4 = 81.430 C
Ø If d1 and d2 are the densities of a liquid at WE-3:A sphere of diameter 7cm and mass 266.5g
temperatures t 1 and t2 respectively floats in a bath of liquid at 0 0C. As the
d1 = d2 [1+ γR (t2 - t1)] temperature is raised, the sphere just sinks at
Ø If d 0 and dt are densities of liquid at 00 C and a temperature of 350C. If the density of the
liquid at 0 0C is 1.527 g/cm3 find the coefficient
d0 − dt 0
γ = / C of cubical expansion of the liquid.
t 0 C , then R d × t Sol: The sphere will sink in the liquid at 350C, when its
0
density becomes equal to the density of liquid at
Ø If d1 and d2 are densities of liquid at t1 0 C and
350C. The density of sphere,
d1 − d 2 0
t 2 C ,then γ R = d t − d t / C
m 4
0
ρt = ; V = π r 3
1 2 2 1 V 3
Ø The temperature at which the density of a liquid is 266.5
ρt = = 1.483 g / c m 3
0
3
x 4 22 7
× ×
x% less than that at 0 0 C is t1 = (100 − x)γ C 3 7 2
R
Ø The temperature at which the density becomes x% Now ρ 0 = ρ t [1 + γ∆T ]
1.527 = 1.483[1 + γ × 35] ;1.029 = 1 + γ × 35
100 − x 0 1.029 − 1
of the density at 00 C is t2 = C γ = = 0.00083 / 0 C
xγ R 35
30 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
Condition for constant volume of If water is taken above Hg and the system is heated
unoccupied space in the container at all then observed (apparent) expansion of water will
temperatures: be equal to its real expansion. This is the principle
Ø The unoccupied volume or volume of air present in involved in dilatometer.
WE-4: A long cylindrical metal vessel, having a
the vessel will be constant only when both container linear coefficient (α), is filled with a liquid
and liquid have same thermal expansion. (or) same upto a certain level. On heating it, it is found
increase in volume that the level of liquid in the cylinder
remains the same. What is the volume
coefficient of expansion of the liquid ?
Un ocupied [EAMCET 2013(M)]
volume Sol: Volume of liquid V=Al. Increase in volume
∆V = ( ∆A) l (Ql is constant )
Liquid
Let Vc and Vl are volumes of container and liquid.
Also ? c and ? l are coefficients of expansion of
container and liquid respectively.
Unoccupied volume remain constant
DVc = DVl ; i.e., VC ? C Dt = Vl ? l Dt
For container: ( ∆V )C = ( ∆A) l = Aβ∆tl = V (2α )∆t
VC ? C = Vl ? l
Ø To compensate expansion of container using For liquid: ( ∆V )l = V γ l ∆t
mercury (Dilatometer) If the level of the liquid remains same
A small amount of Hg is taken in a container such ( ∆V )C = ( ∆V )l ; V (2α )∆t = V γ l ∆t
that its expansion is equal to expansion of container
made of glass ⇒ γ l = 2α
Let Vc and Vl are volumes of container and liquid. Volume of Liquid Expelled:
Ø A container of volume VC at temperature t 10C is
Also γc and γ l are coefficients of container and completely filled with a liquid. If the container is
liquid respectively. heated to t 20C, then volume of liquid over flown is
V1 = initial volume of the liquid = initial volume of
the container
V2(liquid ) = V1 [1 + γ l (t2 − t1 ) ]
Water
V2(container ) = V1 [1 + γ c (t2 − t1 )]
Hg Volume of liquid over flow is
\ DVc = DVl ; Vcγ cDt = Vlγ l Dt (V2 )l − (V2 )c = V1 (γ l − γ c )(t2 − t1 )
WE-5. A 250cm3 glass bottle is completely filled
VHg γg 1 with water at 500C. The bottle and water are
V c γ c = Vl γ l ; = =
Vc γ Hg 7 heated to 600C. How much water runs over
If:a) the expansion of bottle is neglected
1
So if glass container is filled with Hg upto, th of b) the expansion of bottle is included?
7
its volume then expansion of container is ( βglass = 1.2 ×10−5 / K & γ water = 60 ×10−5 / 0C )
compensated. Due to expansion of container level Sol. Water overflown = (final volume of water) –
decreases and due to expansion of Hg level (final volume of bottle )
increases. The total expansion would be zero. (a) If the expansion of bottle is neglected:
NARAYANAGROUP 31
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
volume of water over flown in a liquid at 00 C is ∆W0 . If α and β are the
∆V1 = 250 (1 + γ lθ ) − 250 = 250 × γ lθ volume coefficients of expansion of the solid
= 250 × 60 × 10 −5 × 10 = 1.5cm
3
and the liquid respectively, then the loss of
(b) If the bottle (glass) expands: weight at t0 C is approximately
volume of water over flown ∆V2 = 250 (γ l − γ g )θ , Sol: Loss of weight at 00 C = V0 ρ 0 g = ∆W0
3β V0 = volume of body at 0 0 C
−5
where γg = = 1.8 × 10 / C
o
2 V1 = volume of body at t10 C
= 250 ( 58.2 ×10 −5 ) × ( 60 − 50 ) = 1.455cm3 Loss of weight at t10C = V1 ρ1 g = ∆W1
Apparent Weight of a Solid Immersed ∆W1 V1 ρ1 g d 0 ρ1
in a Liquid: = = ×
Ø When a body is immersed in a liquid its weight ∆W0 V 0 ρ 0 g d1 ρ 0 where d0 is density of
decreases. solid at 00C and ρ0 is density of liquid at 00C
Ø The apparent weight of the body,
∆W1 d1 (1 + α t ) ρ1 1+αt
W = V ( dbody − dliq ) g ; (V= volume of body ). = =
Ø When temperature is increased, density of the liquid
∆W0 d1 (1 + β t ) ρ1 1 + β t
decreases more than that of body. Hence apparent ∆W1 = ∆W0 (1 + α t )(1 − β t ) = ∆W0 1 + (α − β ) t
weight of body immersed in liquid increases.
Ø If d1 and d 2 are densities of a liquid at t1°C and WE-9. A solid whose volume does not change with
temperature floats in liquid at two different
t 2 °C and volume of a solid body at t1°C and temperatures t10C and t20 C of the liquid.
t 2 °C are V1 and V2 respectively then Fractions of the volume of the solid remain
submerged are f1 and f2 respectively. The
Ø Up thrust at t1°C is F1 = V1 d1g coefficient of absolute expansion of the liquid
Ø Up thrust at t 2 °C is F2 = V2d2g is equal to [EAMCET 2012(M)]
Sol. If V0 is the initial volume of the liquid
F1 V1 d1 F1 1 + γ R ( t 2 − t1 )
Ø F = V d ; F = 1 + γ t − t ∆V1 is the volume of the liquid displaced at t 10C
2 2 2 2 s( 2 1)
∆V2 is the volume of the liquid displaced at t 20C
F1
2
( )
Ø F = 1+ γ R − γ s ( t 2 − t1 ) ∆V
f1 = 1 ; f 2 =
∆V2
;
f1 ∆V1
=
V0 V0 f 2 ∆V2
WE-6. A cube of coefficient of linear expansion α
is floating in a bath containing a liquid of f1 V0 (1 + γ t1 )
=
coefficient of volume expansion γ l . When the f 2 V0 (1 + γ t2 ) ; f1 + f1γ t2 = f 2 + f 2γ t1
temperature is raised by ∆T , the depth upto f −f
which the cube is submerged in the liquid γ = 1 2
f 2 t1 − f1t2
remains the same. Find relation between
α and γ l WE-10. A piece of metal weighs 45 g in air and 25
Sol: Before heating g in a liquid of density 1.5 × 103 kg m -3 kept at
300C. When the temperature of the liquid is
Mg = Fb ; Mg = Vl ρl g = Ax ρl g .......... (1)
raised to 400C, the metal piece weighs 27g. The
After heating Mg = Fb ; Mg = V ρ l g .......... (2)
1 1 1
density of liquid at 400C is 1.25 × 103kgm-3.
Equating (1) & (2) Ax ρ l g = A1 x ρl1 g The coefficient of linear expansion of metal
is [EAMCET 2009(E)]
ρl
Aρl g = A(1 + β∆t ) g Sol. M1 = mass of the metal piece in air
(1 + γ∆t ) M2 = mass of the metal piece in liquid at 300C
1 + γ∆t = 1 + β ∆t ; γ = β ∴ γ = 2α M3 = mass of the metal piece in liquid at 400C
WE-7. The loss of weight of a solid when immersed
32 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
ρ1 = density of liquid at 300C Ø Water in a lake freezes when temperature of water
falls below 0o C . If temperature of surroundings of
ρ 2 = density of liquid at 400C
lake is −T 0C then temperature just below surface
Mass expelled ∆m1 = M1 − M 2 = V1 ρ1 at 300C
of lake is 0o C and at bottom of lake is
20 V1 ρ1
∆m2 = M 1 − M 3 = V2 ρ 2 at 400C; 18 = V ρ 40 C or 277 K
2 2 Ø The coefficient of volume expansion of water at 40C
is zero.
10 V1 × 1.5 × 103 9 × 1.2
= 3 ; 1 + γ∆t =
Correction For Barometric Reading:
9 V1 (1 + γ∆t ) × 1.25 × 10 10 The brass scale of barometer is usually calibrated
10.8 at 0 0C . If observation is taken at different
= =1.08; γ∆t = 1.08 − 1 ; 3α = 0.08
10 temperature, then a correction is needed for brass
0.08 scale. Suppose the height of mercury at 00 C is
α= −3 0 H 0 and true scale reading is H. If α is the
3 ∴α = 2.6 ×10 / C coefficient of linear expansion of brass, then true
Anomalous Expansion of Water: height of brass scale at temperature t is
Ø Liquids, in general expand in volume with rise of
temperature. H t = H (1 + α t ) ........(1)
Ø Pure water when heated contracts from 00 C to As atmospheric pressure is constant at all
3.980 C (40 C) and expands from 40C onwards. It temperatures, so we have
is called anomalous expansion of water. Pressure at 00 C =pressure at t 0 C
Ø Water has negative expansion coefficient in the range H 0 ρ 0 g = Ht ρt g .......(2)
at 0 0 C to 4 0 C and positive expansion coefficient
Here ρ 0 and ρt are the densities of mercury at
above 40 C.
Ø At 40 C water occupies minimum volume and hence 00 C and t 0 C respectively. Also we have
density becomes maximum (1gm /cc). ρ0
ρt = , γ being volume coefficient of mercury..
V 1+ γ t
Thus from equation (1) and (2), we
ρo
have H o ρo g = H (1 + α t ) g
1+ γ t
1.00013
1.00000
H o = H (1 + α t )(1 + γ t )−1 ; H o = H (1 + α t )(1 − γ t )
4 10
t0C H o = H 1 + α t − γ t − αγ t 2
Ø The density of water increases from 00 C to 40C
and decreases with rise in temperature from 4 0C H o = H [1 − (γ − α )t ] ; [Q γα is neglected ]
WE-11. A Barometer with brass scale, which is
correct at 00C, reads 75cm on a day when the
d 1.0 gm/cc
air temperature is 200C. Calculate correct
reading at 00C. (Coefficient of real expansion
of mercury =0.00018/0C and coefficient of
linear expansion of brass =0.0000189/0C.)
Sol: We know H0 ≅ H (1 − ( γ − α ) t ) .
In this problem, H = 75cm, t = 200C,
0
tC4C o
γ = 0.00018/0C, α = 0.0000189/0C
Ø The experiment with Hope’s apparatus establishes H0 = 75.000[1–(0.00018–0.0000189)20]
that water has maximum density at 40C. =74.758 cm
Ø Dilatometer is a convenient apparatus to study the
anomalous expansion of water.
NARAYANAGROUP 33
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
8. A block of wood is floating on water at 200C
C.U.Q with certain volume above the water level. The
1. Expansion of liquids on heating is different temperature of water is slowly increased the volume
from that solids, since the expansion of liquids 1) increases 2) decreases
is 3) remains same
1) much more than solids because molecular 4) first decreases and then increases.
spacing in them is less 9. A glass is full of water at 40 C when it is
2) much more than solids because molecular (a)cooled (b) heated then, which one of the
spacing in them is more following is correct
3) much less than solids because molecular spacing 1) water level decreases, increases
in them is more. 2)water level increases, decreases
4) much less than solids because molecular spacing 3) water level decreases, decreases
in them is less 4)water over flow in both the cases
2. A liquid with coefficient of real volume 10. The top of a lake is frozen when the air in
expansion ( γ ) is filled in container of material contact with the lake surface is at − 50 C the
having coefficient of linear expansion ( α ). If temperature of water in contact with the bottom
liquid over flows on heating. of the lake will be
1) γ = 3α 2) γ >3α 3) γ < 3α 4) γ = α 1) − 50 C 2) 40 C 3) 0 0 C 4) − 40 C
3. On heating a liquid of coefficient of real 11. A metal sphere is suspended in water at
expansion γ in a container having coefficient 0 0 C by a thread when water is heated to 40 C
of linear expansion α / 3 . The level of liquid the tension in the thread
in the container will 1) decreases 2) increases 3) remains same
1) rise 2) fall 3)remains same 4) over flows 4) first increases and then decreases
4. A long cylindrical vessel of volume V and 12. Water has maximum density at
coefficient of linear expansion α contains a 1) 00C 2) 40C 3) 250C 4) 370C
liquid. The level of liquid has not changed on 13. A Sealed glass jar is full of water. When it is
heating. The coefficient of real expansion of
kept in a freezing mixture, it is broken because
the liquid is.
1) water expands from 4 0C to 0 0C
V −α V +α V 2) ice expands while melting
1) 2) 3) 4) 3α
V V V −α 3) water expands due to freezing
5. The liquid whose coefficient of real expansion 4) ice expands since its temperature falls below 00C
is equal to 1.5 times the coefficient of areal
expansion of container and heated then the C.U.Q -KEY
level of the liquid taken in the container 1) 2 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4 5) 3 6) 1
1) rises 2) falls 7) 3 8) 2 9) 4 10) 2 11) 1 12) 2
3) remains same 4) first rises and then falls 13) 1
6. A metal ball suspended from the hook of a
spring balance is kept immersed in a liquid LEVEL-I (C.W.)
other than water. On increasing the
temperature of this liquid, the reading in the EXPANSION OF LIQUID
spring balance. 1. The coefficient of real expansion of liquid is
1) Increases 2) Decreases γRand the coefficient of apparent expansion of
3) Remains same 4) May increases or decreases.
the liquid is γA. The coefficient of cubical
7. A metal ball immersed in alcohol weights W 1
expansion of the vessel is γ. If γR : γA =4:1
at 00C and W2 at 500 C Assuming that the
then γA: γ is
density of the metal is large compared to that 1) 3:1 2) 1:3 3) 4:1 4) 1:4
of alcohol then. 2. γ A of liquid is 7/8 of γ R of liquid. α g of vessel
1) W1 = W2 2) W1>W2 is
γ γ γ γ
3) W1< W2 4) W1 > W2 1) R 2) R 3) R 4) R
8 12 24 36
34 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
3. The apparent coefficient of expansion of liquid, 1) 12.6 ×10−4 / 0C 2) 0.8 × 10 −4 / 0C
when heated in a copper vessel is C and when
heated in a silver vessel is S. If A is the linear 3) 1.25 × 10−5 / 0C 4) 1.25 × 10−4 / 0C
coefficient of expansion of Copper, linear 10. A weight thermometer contains 52g of a liquid
expansion coefficient of silver is at 100C. When it is heated to 1100C,2 g of the
C + S − 3A C + 3A − S liquid is expelled. The coefficient of real
1) 2) expansion of the liquid is[αglis 9 × 10-6/0C]
3 3
1)27 × 10-6/0C 2) 427 × 10-6/0C
S + 3A − C C + S + 3A 3) 373 × 10-6/0C 4) 473 × 10-6/0C
3) 4)
3 3 LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY
4. The density of a liquid at 1000C is 8.0 g/cm3 1) 2 2) 3 3) 2 4) 2 5) 1 6) 1
and at 00C is 8.4 g/cm3, the coefficient of cubical
7) 3 8) 1 9) 4 10) 2
expansion of the liquid is
1) 10-4 / 0C 2) 5 × 10-4 / 0C LEVEL - I (C.W) - HINTS
2) 8 × 10 / C
-4 0
4) 4 × 10-4 / 0C
γR =γA +γg
5. If γ is the coefficient of a real expansion of a 1.
liquid then the temperature at which density 7
2. γ A = γ R and γ A = γ R − 3α
of a liquid is 1% of its density at 0 C is
0 8
99 1 100 1 3. For copper vessel γ R = ( γ A )c + 3α c
1) 2) 3) 4)
γ 99γ γ 100γ For silver vessel γ R = ( γ A ) s + 3α s
6. A one litre flask contains some mercury. It is d o − dt 0
found that at different temperatures the volume 4. γ = / C
dt ( t2 − t1 )
of air inside the flask remain same. The volume
of mercury taken in the flask is (coefficient of d0 d 0 − dt
5. given dt = , t1 = 00 C , t2 = t ; γ =
linear expansion of glass is 9 ×10−6 0 C and 100 dt × t
coefficient of volume expansion of Hg is 6. Vl γ l = Vg γ g
−4
1.8 ×10 0
C ). [EAMCET 2008(M)] Vg
1) 150ml 2) 750ml 3)1000ml 4)700ml 7. Vl γ l = Vg γ g and γ g = 3α ⇒ Vl =
2
7. A liquid occupies half of a vessel at a particular
temperature. The volume of the unoccupied 8. ∆V = V ( γ l − γ g ) ∆t
part remains constant at all temperatures. If mass of the liquid exp elled
α and γ are the coefficients of linear and real 9. γA =
mass of theliquid remaining × ∆t
expansions of a vessel and liquid, then γ is
1) 3α 2) 3α /2 3) 6 α 4) 9 α mass of the liquid exp elled
8. A glass bulb of volume 250cc is filled with 10. γ A = mass of theliquid remaining × ∆t ,
mercury at 200 C and the temperature is raised
γ R = γ A + 3α
to 1000 C .If the coefficient of linear expansion
of glass is 9 × 10−6 / 0 C Coefficient of absolute
LEVEL-I (H.W.)
expansion of mercury is 18 × 10−5 / 0 C .The
volume of mercury overflows
1) 3.06cc 2)2.94cc 3)6.12cc 4)7.73cc EXPANSION OF LIQUID
9. If on heating a liquid through 800C, the mass 1. The coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is
7 × 10-4/0 C.The co efficient of linear expansion
1 of the vessel is1×10−5 / 0 C . The coefficient
expelled is th of mass still remaining, the
100 of apparent expansion of the liquid is
coefficient of apparent expansion of the liquid 1) 7 × 10-4/ 0C. 2) 6 × 10-5/ 0C.
is 3) 67 × 10-5/ 0C. 4) 73 × 10-5/ 0C.
NARAYANAGROUP 35
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
2. The coefficient of real expansion γR of a liquid 9. A glass vessel just holds 50gm of a liquid at
is 5 times the coefficient of linear expansion of 00C. If the coefficient of linear expansion is
the material of the container in which the liquid 8 × 10 −6 / 0C . The mass of the liquid it holds at
is present. The ratio of the coefficient of 800C is [ coefficient of absolute expansion of
apparent expansion and real expansion of the liquid = 5 × 10 −4 / 0C (nearly)
liquid is 1) 46 g 2) 48 g 3) 51 g 4) 42 g
1) 5:2 2) 1:5 3) 2:5 4) 5:1 10. A weight thermometer contains 51 g of
3. When a liquid in a glass vessel is heated, its mercury at 200C and 50 g of mercury at 1000C.
apparent expansion is 10.30 × 10-4/0C. Same The coefficient of apparent expansion of
liquid when heated in a metalic vessel, its mercury in glass vessel is
apparent expansion is 10.06 × 10-4 /0 C. The 1) 25 × 10-5 / 0C 2) 2.5 × 10-3 / 0C
coefficient of linear expansion of metal is 3) 2 × 10-5/ 0C 4) 4 × 10-4 / 0C
( αglass = 9 × 10-6/0C) LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY
[EAMCET 2013, 2010(M) 2012(E)] 1) 3 2) 3 3) 4 4) 1 5) 1 6) 2
1) 51 × 10-6/0C 2) 43 × 10-6/0C 7) 2 8) 3 9) 2 10) 1
-6 0
3) 25×10 / C 4) 17 × 10-6/0C LEVEL - I (H.W) - HINTS
4. Coefficient of real expansion of mercury is
1. γR =γA +γg 2. γ R = 5α , γ R = γ A + 3α
0.18 × 10-3/0C. If the density of mercury at 00C
is 13.6 g/cc its density at 473K will be 3. For copper vessel γ R = ( γ A )c + 3α c
1) 13.12 g/c.c. 2) 13.65g/c.c.
3) 13.51 g/c.c. 4) 13.22 g/c.c. For silver vessel γ R = ( γ A ) s + 3α s
5. If coefficient of real expansion of a liquid is 4. dt = d o / (1 + γ∆t )
1 0 1 0 d −d
5500
/ C. The temperature at which its 5. given γ R = / C ; d0=100; d t=99, γ = 0 t
dt × t
5500
density is 1% less than density at 00C is
γl 8
1) 55.50C 2)1000C 3) 990C 4) 10C
6. = Vl γ l = Vg γ g
6. The coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid γg 1 ;
and glass are in the ratio of 8:1. The volume Vg γl Vg γ
of the liquid to be taken into 800cc container 7. Vl γ l = Vg γ g ⇒ = ⇒ −1 = l −1
so that the unoccupied portion remains Vl γg Vl γg
constant is 8. ∆V = V ( γ l − γ g ) ∆t
1) 10cc 2) 100cc 3) 80cc 4) 8cc
7. The fraction of the volume of a glass flask must x
9. If x is mass of the liquid expelled. γ A =
be filled with mercury so that the volume of ( m − x) ∆ t
the empty space may be the same at all m2 − m3
temperatures is 10. γ a = ( m − m ) ∆ t
(α = 9 × 10−6 / 0C , γ Hg = 18.9 × 10 −5 / 0C )
3 1
glass
LEVEL-II (C.W.)
1 1 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 7 4 5 EXPANSION OF LIQUID
3
8. A glass flask of volume 200cm is completely
1. Coefficient of apparent expansions of a liquid
filled with mercury at 200C. The amount of
in two different vessels are a and b. then the
mercury that overflow when the flask is heated
real coefficient of expansions of liquid, if the
to 800C (Coefficient of volume expansion of
ratio of volume expansion of vessels is x : y
glass is 27 × 10-6/ 0 C, γ of mercury 0.18 × 10-3/
0
C) bx − ay ay + bx ay − bx ay + bx
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) 2.16cm3 2) 0.032cm3 3) 1.84cm3 4) 2.40cm3 x− y x+ y x−y x− y
36 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
2. A flask contains 100c.c of a liquid at 100C. the rod changes by
When it is heated to 1100C increase in volume 1) 00C 2) 100C 3) 200C 4) 1700C
of the liquid appears to be 2 c.c. Find the 8. A barometer with a brass scale correct at 0 0C
coefficient of real expansion of the liquid. reads 70 cm of mercury on a day when the air
( α of flask is 11× 10−6 / 0 C ) temperature is 400C. The correct reading at
0 0C is (Coefficient of real expansion of
1) 2.33 × 10-4 /0C 2) 3.33 × 10-4 /0C
mercury is 0.00018/0C and coefficient of linear
3) 23.3 × 10-4 /0C 4) 33.3 × 10-4 /0C
0 expansion of brass is 0.000018/0C)
3. At 0 C the densities of a cork and a liquid in
1) 60.5cm 2) 69.5cm 3) 20.5cm 4) 50.00cm
which the cork floats are d 1 and d2 respectively.
9. A solid floats in a liquid at 200C with 75% of it
The coefficient of expansion for the material
immersed. When the liquid is heated to 1000C,
of the cork and the liquid are γ and 100 γ
the same solid floats with 80% of it immersed
respectively. If the cork sinks when the
in the liquid. Calculate the coefficient of
temperature of the liquid is ‘t0C’ then the ratio
expansion of the liquid. Assume the volume of
d2 the solid to be constant.
d1 is 1) 8.33×10–4/0C 2) 83.3×10–4/0C
3) 833×10–4/0C 4) 0.833×10–4/0C
1 + 100γt 1 + γt 10. The volume of mercury in the bulb of a
1) 2)
1 + γt 1 + 100γt thermometer is 10-6 m3. The area of cross-
100 + γt 1 + γt section of the capillary tube is 2 × 10-7 m2. If
3) 4) the temperature is raised by 100 0C, the
1 + γt 100 + γt
increase in the length of the mercury column
is ( γ Hg = 18 × 10 / C ) [EAMCET 2009(M)]
4. A wooden block of density 860 kg/ m3 at 00C −5 0
is floating on benzene liquid of density
900 kg/m3 at 00C. The temperature at which 1) 18 cm 2) 0.9 cm 3) 9 cm 4) 1.8 cm
the block just submerge in benzene is 11. A non-conducting body floats in a liquid at 200C
with 2/3 of its volume immersed in the liquid.
[ γ wood = 8 × 10 −5 / 0 c, γ benzene = 12 × 10−4 / 0 C ]
When liquid temperature is increased to 1000C,
1) 240 c 2) 420 c 3) 160 c 4) 320 c 3/4 of body volume is immersed in the liquid.
5. A sphere of mass 180g and diameter 6 cm floats Then the coefficient of real expansion of the
on the surface of a liquid. When the liquid is liquid is.... (neglecting the expansion of
0
heated to 35 C, the sphere sinks in the liquid. container of the liquid) [EAMCET 2011(E)]
0 -3
If the density of liquid at 0 C is 2 gcm . The 1) 1.56 ×10−4 / 0 C 2) 15.6 ×10−4 / 0 C
coefficient of real expansion of liquid is
3) 1.56 ×10−5 / 0 C 4) 15.6 ×10−5 / 0 C
1) 71.4 × 10-4/0C 2) 81.4 × 10-4/0C
3) 91.4 × 10-4/0C 4) 61.4 × 10-4/0C 12. A glass flask of volume one litre is filled
6. A vessel contains a liquid filled with 1/10th of completely with mercury at 00C. The flask is
its volume. Another vessel contains same liquid now heated to 1000C. Coefficient of volume
upto 1/8th of its volume. In both cases the expansion of mercury is 1.82 × 10-4/0C and
volume of empty space remains constant at all coefficient of linear expansion of glass is 0.1
temperatures. Then the ratio of coefficient of × 10-4/0C. During this process, amount of
linear expansions of the two vessels is mercury which overflows is
1) 2:5 2) 5:2 3) 4:5 4) 5:4 [EAMCET 2013(E)]
7. The co–efficient of linear expansion of iron is 1) 21.2 cc 2) 15.2 cc 3) 2.12 cc 4) 18.2 cc
11/180 of volume coefficient of expansion of LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY
mercury which is 18 × 10−5 / 0C .An iron rod is 1) 1 2) 1 3) 1 4) 2 5) 1 6) 3
10m long at 270C. The length of the rod will be 7) 2 8) 2 9) 1 10) 3 11) 2 12) 2
decreased by 1.1mm then the temperature of
NARAYANAGROUP 37
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS 2. If the coefficient of real expansion γ R is 1%
γa x x a −γR more than coefficient of apparent expansion
1. = ; =
γb y y b −γR ,linear expansion coefficient of the material is
2. Coefficient of apparent expansion γR 100γ R 101γ R 101γ R
1) 2) 3) 4)
V2 − V1 303 101 300 100
γA =
V1 ( t2 − t1 ) and γ R = γ A + 3α
3. When a block of iron floats in mercury at 00 C,
a fraction k1 of its volume is submerged, while
d 2 di (1 + γ 2 ∆t ) at the temperature 600C, a fraction k2 is seen
d f = d i (1 + γ∆t ) ; = to be submerged. If the coefficient of volume
3. d1 d i (1 + γ 1∆t )
expansion of iron is γFe and that of mercury is
4. If the boat sinks in benzene γHg, then the ratio k1/k2 can be expressed as
VBdBg = Vldlg ; VBdB = Vldl 1 + 60γ Fe 1 − 60γ Fe
1) 1 + 60γ 2) 1 + 60γ
d (wood) at t0C = d (benzene) at t0C Hg Hg
( d0 )wood ( d0 )benzene 1 + 60γ Fe 1 + 60γ Hg
= 3) 1 − 60 γ 4) 1 + 60γ
(1 + γ w∆t ) (1 + γ B ∆t ) Hg Fe
0
4. A boat is floating in water at 0 C such that
d − dt
; dt = ; V = 4 π r 3
m 97% of the volume of the boat is submerged
5. γ = 0
dt × t V 3 in water. The temperature at which the boat
will just completely sink in water is
V V
6. V1 =
10
, V2 =
8
; V1γ l = Vg γ g
( γ R = 3×10−4 / C) (nearly)
0
11 1) 100C 2) 1030C 3) 600C 4) 500C
7. α iron = γ Hg ; ∆l = lα∆t
180 5. A sphere of diameter 8cm and mass 275 g floats
in a bath of liquid. As the temperature is raised,
ρ0
8. H 0 ρ0 g = Ht ρt g ; H 0 ρ0 = H (1 + α t ) the sphere begins to sink at a temperature of
(1 + γ t ) 3
400 C. If the density of the liquid is 1.5g/cm at
∴ H 0 = H 1 − ( γ − α ) t
00C, find the coefficient of cubical expansion
of the liquid. Neglect the expansion of the
X 2 − X1 sphere
γR = / 0C
9. X 1 ( t 2 − t1 ) 1) 125×10−4 /0 C 2) 25×10−5 /0 C
−
3) 15 ×10 / C
6 0 4) 115×10−3 /0 C
10. ∆V = A× ∆l ⇒ V γ∆t = A × ∆l
6. The coefficient of volume expansion of mercury
V2 − V1 is 20times the linear expansion of glass. Find
11. V1 = 2V/3, V2= 3V/4, γ = V ∆t the volume of mercury that must be poured in
1
to a glass vessel of volume V so that the
12. ∆V = V (γ l − γ s )∆t volume above the mercury remain constant at
all temperatures
LEVEL-II(H.W.)
3V V 3V V
EXPANSION OF LIQUID 1) 2) 3) 4)
40 20 20 30
1. The ratio of coefficients of apparent
7. If γ (apparent) of a liquid in a vessel is 76% of
expansions of the same liquid in two different
γ (real) of that liquid, the coefficient of linear
vessels is 1:2. If α1 and α2 are the coefficient
expansion of the vessel is
of linear expansions then coefficient of real
1) 8% of γ (real) 2) 16%of γ (real)
expansion of the liquid is
1) 2α1 - α22) 3α1 - 4α2 3) α1 - 2α2 4) 6α1 - 3α2 3) 24%of γ (real) 4) 25.3%of γ (real)
38 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
8. The height of the mercury column in a 2. A piece of metal weighs 46g in air. When it is
barometer provided with a brass scale immersed in a liquid of specific gravity 1.24 at
corrected at 0 0C is observed to be 74.9 cm at 270C, it weighs 30g. When the temperature of
150C.Find the true height of the column at 00C. the liquid is raised to 420C, the metal piece
(a = 20×10-6 / 0C and ? Hg = 175×10-6 / 0 C )
weighs 30.5g.Specific gravity of liquid at 420C
b is 1.2. Calculate the coefficient of linear
1) 74.72cm 2) 79.92cm expansion of the metal.
3) 74.12cm 4)72.64 cm 1) 2.4 × 10−5 0C 2) 3.4 × 10−5 0C
−
3) 2.9 × 10 C5 0 4) 24 × 10−5 0C
LEVEL - II (H.W) - KEY
1) 4 2) 1 3) 1 4) 2 5) 1 6) 3 3. A piece of metal floats on mercury. The
7) 1 8) 1 coefficients of volume expansion of the metal
and mercury are γ 1 and γ 2 respectively. If the
LEVEL - II (H.W) - HINTS temperature of both mercury and metal are
( γ A )1 1 1 γ R − 3α1 increased by an amount ∆t ,the fraction of the
= ; 2 = γ − 3α
1.
(γ A )2 2 R 2
volume of the metal submerged in mercury
changes by the factor.
γ
2. γ R = γ A + A ; γ R = (γ A + 3α ) 1
1) (γ − γ ) ∆t
1
2) (γ − γ ) ∆t
100 2 1 1 2
v d d1 3) (γ 1 − γ 2 )∆ t 4) (γ 2 − γ 1 )∆t
3. Vdg = v ρ g ; V = ρ ; k1 = ρ at 00 C
1 4. The loss in weight of a solid when immersed in
d2 k1 d1 ρ 2 a liquid at 00C is W0 and at t 0 C is ‘W’. If cubical
k2 = at t0
C; = coefficient of expansion of the solid and the
ρ2 k 2 d 2 ρ1
liquid are γ s and γ l then W =
k1 d 0 (1 + γ Fet ) ρ0 1 + γ Fet
= × = 1) W0 [1 + (γ s − γ l )t ] 2) W0 [1 − (γ s − γ l )t ]
k2 d0 (1 + γ Hg t ) ρ0 1 + γ Hg t
97V 3) W0 [1 + (γ l − γ s )t ] 4) W0 [1 − (γ l − γ s )t ]
4. mg = ρ 0 g ; mg = V ρ t g ; 97V ρ 0 g = V ρt g
100 100 5. The density of a liquid of coefficient of cubical
expansion γ is ρ at 00C when the liquid is heated
d0 − dt m
5. γ = , dt = to a temp T, the change in density will be
dt × t V
− ργ T ργ T
γ Hg = 20α g ; VHg γ Hg = Vg γ g 1) 2)
6. 1+ γ T 1+ γ T
76 − (1 + γ T ) γ (1 + γ T )
7. γA = γR ; γ g = γ R −γ A 3) 4)
100 γT γT
ρ 6. A uniform pressure P is exerted on all sides of
8. H 0 ρ 0 g = Ht ρt g ; H 0 ρ 0 = H (1 + α t ) (1 + 0γ t )
a solid cube at temperature t0 C. By what
∴ H 0 = H 1 − ( γ − α ) t amount should the temperature of the cube be
raised in order to bring its volume back to the
original value before the pressure was applied,
LEVEL-III if the bulk modulus is B and volume coefficient
1. A mercury thermometer contains 2c.c. of Hg. is γ?
0 0 0
at 0 C. Distance between 0 C and 100 C γP P B 1
marks on the stem is 35cm and diameter of 1) 2) 3) 4)
B γB γP γBP
the bore is 0.02cm then γA of liquid is
1) 0.000055/0C 2) 0.000066/0C
LEVEL - III - KEY
3) 0.00055/0C 4) 0.000058/0C 1) 1 2) 1 3) 4 4) 1,4 5) 1 6) 2
NARAYANAGROUP 39
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
LEVEL - III - HINTS ASSERTION & REASON
1. ∆V = V γ A ∆t ... (1); ∆V = Al = π r 2l .... (2) 1) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
explanation of A
from (1) and (2) V γ A ∆t = π r 2 l 2) Both A & R are true but R is not the correct
2. m1 − m2 = V1 ρ1 ; m1 − m3 = V2 ρ 2 explanation of A.
V2 = V1 (1 + γ∆t ) 3) A is true but R is false
4) Both A and B are false
f1 =
d metel
f2 =
d metel
×
(1 + γ 2 ∆t ) 3. Assertion(A): It is observed that when a liquid is
3. d mercury ;
(1 + γ 1∆t ) d mercury heated in a vessel its level does not change.
Reason (R): coefficient of real expansion of the
f 2 (1 + γ 2 ∆t ) f 2 − f1 liquid = coefficient of volume expansion of the vessel
= = ( γ 2 − γ 1 ) ∆t
f1 (1 + γ 1∆t ) ;
4. Assertion(A): Real expansion of liquid does not
f1
depend upon material of container.
4. W0 = V0 d o g , Wt = Vt d t g Reason (R): Liquids have no definite shape. They
acquire the shape of the containers in which they
W0 V0 d0 V0 dt [1 + γ l t ] are taken.
= =
Wt Vt dt V0 [1 + γ s t ] dt 5. Assertion(A): A wooden block is floating on a
liquid.When the temperature of the liquid is
γT ρ increased the volume of the block immersed in
5. ρ − ρ t = γρ t T ; ρ − ρt = (1 + γ T ) the liquid increases.
Reason (R):As temperature increases,the density
When temperature increases density decreases of liquid decreases.
PV PV 6. Assertion(A): when a liquid in a container is
6. ∆V = V γ∆t ...... (1); B = ⇒ ∆V =
∆V B heated first the level of the liquid falls down and
PV then rises .
= V γ∆t ...... (2) Reason (R): when the liquid in a container is
K
heated first the container undergoes expansion
PV P and generally the expansion of the liquid is
from (1) and (2) = V γ∆t ; ∆t =
K Kγ greater than that of solid.
7. Assertion(A): when a beaker containing liquid
LEVEL-IV is heated the centre of mass of the system first falls
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS down then rises up above the initial position.
1. LIST -I LIST -II Reason (R): The liquid in the beaker undergoes
a) App. expansion e) Nature of vessel expansion on heating and the expansion of liquid is
and liquid more than that of beaker.
b) Real expansion f) Nature of liquid
MORE THAN ONE ANSWER QUESTIONS
c) γ A g) Nature of Vessel & 8. Certain volume of a liquid is taken in a long
liquid & temperature glass tube and its temperature is increased at
d) γR h) Nature of a uniform rate, the rate of increase in the length
liquid and temp. of the liquid depends on
2. LIST -I LIST-II a) length of the liquid
a) γ g is +ve & < γR e) liquid level does not b) area of cross section of the glass tube
change c) coefficient of expansion of glass
b) γ g is - ve f) liquid level increases 1) only (a) is correct 2) (a) & (b) are correct
continuously 3) (b)&(c) are correct 4)(a),(b)&(c)are correct
c) γ g = γR g) liquid level decreases. 9. A metal ball suspended from a spring balance
is immersed in water at 4°C . If the
d) γ g > γR h) liquid level first temperature of water is changed the reading
decreases and then in the balance
increases.
40 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
(a) may decreases (b) increases and then heat is absorbed by the liquid, liquid
(c) may remains same expands more than solids.
1) only (c) is true 2) (b) is true THERMAL EXPANSION OF GASES
3) (a) & (c) are true 4) (b) & (c) are true
10. Identify the correct statements from the SYNOPSIS
following:
a) The apparent expansion of liquid depends on Introduction:
the expansion of material of the container Ø Gases have no definite shape and volume. The
b)The real expansion of the liquids depends on the Gases completely occupies the entire volume of the
density of the liquid. vessel in which it is filled.
c)The expansion of liquid with respect to the Ø The state of given mass of gas can be described in
container is called the apparent expansion. terms of three parameters called pressure, volume
1) Only a & b are true 2) Only b & c are true and temperature.
3) a,b & c are true 4) Only a & c are true Ø Keeping one parameter constant, the relation
11. A liquid of coefficient of real expansion γ is between other two can be established. Hence there
partly filled in a vessel of coefficient of linear are three gas laws.
expansion γ /3. When the system is heated, Boyle’s Law:
then. Ø Statement : At constant temperature, the
a) The volume of space above liquid remains same. volume of given mass of a gas is inversely
b) The level of liquid relative to vessel remains same. proportional to its pressure.
c) The fraction of volume of liquid in vessel remains Explanation : i) Let P and V be the pressure and
same. volume of given mass of a gas at constant
1) Only (a) is correct
2) Only (b) & (c) are correct temperature. According to Boyle's law, V α 1 ( at
3) Only ( c) is true 4) All are true P
1
LEVEL-IV - KEY const. temp.) ⇒ V = K or PV = K (constant)
P
1)3 2)2 3)1 4)2 5)1 6)1 K depends on mass of the gas & the constant
7)1 8)4 9)2 10)3 11)4 temperature at which the gas is kept.
For a given mass of a gas and at a given temperature.
LEVEL-IV - HINTS
1 1 = P2V 2
PV
03. For a given temperature, γ R = γ g , volume The shape of the graph plotted between pressure
expansion of vessel = volume expansion of the liquid (P) of given mass of a gas and its volume (V) at
04. Liquids acquire the shape of the container but their constant temperature is a rectangular hyperbola. It
real expansion does not depends on nature of the is also called as 'isotherm'
container
Temperature is constant
05. As temperature increases, Buoyancy decreases,
T=constant
apparent weight increases and volume of immersed
P
part increases.
Density of liquid is inversely proportional to The curve is isothermal curve
ρ 0 − ρt
temperature γ = ρ ∆t
t V
6. The liquid in the container heated first the level of Ø Boyle's law generally holds good only at low
liquid falls because heat is absorbed by the container pressure and high temperatures.
and then heat is absorbed by the liquid, liquid Ø A gas which obey Boyle's law under all conditions
expands more than solids. of temperature and pressure is called ideal gas.
7. The liquid in the container heated first the level of Ø Real gases obey gas laws only at low
liquid falls because heat is absorbed by the container pressure and high temperatures.
NARAYANAGROUP 41
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Ø All Gases are real gases only.
Ø P1 r1
Attraction between the molecules of perfect gas is \ =
zero. P2 r2
Ø Ideal or perfect gas obeys gas laws at all
temperatures and pressures without any P
limitations.
Ø Hydrogen or Helium behaves closely as
perfect gas. Hence they are preferred in constant
θ
volume gas thermometers. ρ
Ø The graphs drawn between P & V at constant A graph plotted between pressure and density at
temperature of a gas are called isotherms constant temperature is a straight line passing
Ø PV-P graph is a horizontal straight line parallel to through origin.
pressure axis. a) Quill tube is used to verify Boyle's law. A quill tube
is a capillary tube with narrow uniform bore and
PV one end is closed. A mercury pellet is introduced
into the capillary tube such that an air column is
trapped between the mercury pellet and closed end.
In quill tube, Pl = constant. (P is pressure and l is
length of air column).
P b) In quill tube experiment, PV = constant (or)
PA l = constant \ P l = constant.
1 (Q A , area of cross section of the bore is constant)
Ø P− graph is a straight line passing through origin
V Where P is pressure of enclosed air and l is length
P of enclosed air column. If H is atmospheric pressure
(mercury barometer) and h is length of mercury
column, pressure P in different cases is as shown in
the figure.
1 i) When the open end of the tube is vertically
V upwards, then
Ø Two vessels of volumes V1 and V2 containing a gas
Volume of the enclosed air = A l 1
under pressures P 1 and P 2 respectively are joined
and Pressure of the air = P 1
at the same temperature. Then the common pressure
From free body diagram of mercury pellet
PV + PV
PV = PV P= 1 1 2 2
P0A + mg = P1A ; i.e., H r gA + Ah r g = P1A
1 1 + PV
2 2 ⇒ V1 + V2
Ø If second vessel is an evacuated then
(or) P 1 = (H + h) r g \ P1 = (H + h) cm of Hg
PV
P(V1 + V2 ) = PV P= 1 1 Q P2 = 0
1 1 ⇒ V1 + V2
ii) When the open end of the
Ø Boyle's law in terms of density : p0
tube is vertically downwards,
Consider a gas of mass m, pressure P, volume V h then
and density r then V = .But From Boyle's law
m Volume of the enclosed air,
m r p1
V2 = Al2 and Pressure of the
PV = constant or P = constant
r
Since mass of the gas is constant, P a r .
l1
air = P2
∴ At constant temperature, for a given mass of
gas, pressure is directly proportional to its density
For equilibrium of mercury pellet,P0A=mg+P2A
42 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
d) h – 1/ l Graph : From the graph between h and
mg
i.e., P2 = Po -
1
l2 (or) , H can be calculated.
A
hAr g
p2 l
P2 = H r g - 1/l
h A
p0
(or) P 2 = (H – h) r g
\ P2 = (H – h) cm of Hg
iii) When the tube is horizontal, volume of the h
H
enclosed air, V 3 = Al3 Pressure of the air = P 3
i.e., P 3A = P 0A Þ P3 = P 0 \ P3 = H cm of Hg The graph drawn between ‘h’ (excess pressure)
and 1/ l (where l is the length of the air column) is
p3 p0 a straight line making a negative intercept on ‘h’
l3 h axis whose magnitude gives atmospheric pressure.
Motion of An Air Bubble In A Liquid
iv) When the tube is making an angle q with vertical, When an air bubble rises from bottom to surface of
with open end upwards, then a lake, its volume increases. If V1 and V 2 are the
Volume of enclosed air = A l4 volumes of air bubble at the bottom and at the top
of the lake and temperature is assumed to be
and pressure of the air = P 4
constant, then according to Boyle's law
For equilibrium of mercury pellet, we have
P1V1 = P2V2 ; (H + h)V1 = HV2
Ahrg cos q
P4A = P0A + mg cos q (or) P4 = P 0 + Where h is depth of the lake and H is atmospheric
A
pressure on water barometer. (i.e., nearly 10m of
water column height)
N a) If V2 = nV1 then (H + h) V1 = H(nV1)
p0
æ hö
H+h = Hn, \ h = (n – 1) H and n = çççè1 + ø÷÷÷
mg cosθ
H
θ
4
p
mg sinθ b) if r1 and r2 are the radii of the bubble at the
l4
bottom and at the top and if r 2 = nr1,
then (H + h)V1 = HV2
P4 = H r g + h r g cos q = (H+hcos q )cm of Hg
p r1 = H p (nr1 )
4 3 4 3
i.e., (H+h)
3 3
c) According to Boyle's law, P l = constant
(or) (H + h) r13 = Hn3 r13 \ H + h = Hn3
(H + h) l 1=(H–h) l 2 =H l 3 =(H+h cos θ ) l 4 1
æ h ö3
d) If l1 is length of the enclosed air column in the quill Þ h= (n3 – 1) H and n = ççç1 + ÷÷÷
tube with its open end vertically upwards and l2 è Hø
with its open end downwards, then atmospheric
pressure H can be calculated as P1l1 = P2l 2 ; i.e.,
V2
( H + h) l 1 = ( H - h) l 2
h
i.e., H = h ( l1 + l2 )
V1
( l2 − l1 )
NARAYANAGROUP 43
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Faulty barometer : 50 1
Case 2 : P2V2 = P3V3 ; P3 = P2 = P2
100 2
air 2 1 4
P2 V1 = PV
2 3 ∴V3 = V1
3 2 3
l A
WE-2. The volume of an air bubble increases by
x% as it raises from the bottom of a water lake
L to its surface. If the water barometer reads H,
H the depth of the lake is
Sol: P1V1 = P2V2; (H + h) dgV1 = HdgV2
B HV
( H + h )V1 = HV2 ; H + h = 2
V1
V −V ∆V
h = H 2 1 ; h = H
V1 V
∆V x Hx
Let H t be the true atmospheric pressure in terms Here ×100 = ∴h =
V 100 100
of mercury height. Let H f be the faulty reading
WE-3. The density of an air bubble decreases by
given by the barometer. If l is length of air column x% as it raises from the bottom of a lake to its
surface. The water barometer reads H. The
trapped, l = ( L − H f ) . depth of the lake is
Sol: P1V1=P2V2
Pressure of air trapped = ( H t − H f ) = P V d d −d
h = H 2 − 1 = h 1 − 1 = H 1 2
As temperature is constant. We can use Boyle’s V1 d2 d2
law. i.e. Pl =constant. Q d1 − d 2 = x ; d 2 = d1 − x = 100 − x
⇒ ( Ht − H f )( L − H ) =constant ∆d x
f × 100 = x ; h=H
d 100 − x
Then the above equation can be represented as
( H − H )( L − H )
1 1 WE-4. An ideal gas is trapped between a mercury
1 1 1 column and the closed lower end of a narrow
vertical tube of uniform bore. The upper end
= ( H − H )( L − H )
2
1
2
1
2 of the tube is open to the atmosphere.
(Atmospheric pressure is 76cm of mercury).
Where H1 , H 2 = true values The length of the mercury and the trapped gas
H11 , H 21 = faulty values columns are 20cm and 43cm, respectively.
What will be the length of the gas column
when the tube is tilted slowly in a vertical plane
WE-1. A given mass of ideal gas has volume V at through an angle of 60 0. Assume the
pressure P and room temperature T. Its pressure temperature to be constant.
is first increased by 50% and then decreased Sol. Boyle’s law holds good because the temperature is
by 50% (both at constant temperature). The constant so, P 1V1=P2V2
volume becomes P1Al1 = P 2Al2 or P 1l1=P2l2, (A is constant)
Sol: PV = constant ; since the bore is uniform
150 × P1 3 P1 = 76 + 20 = 96 cm of Hg; l1= 43cm;
Case 1: P1V1 = P2V2 ; P2 = = P1 P2 = 76 + hcos θ = 76+20 cos 600
100 2
= 76+10=86 cm of Hg ; l2= ?
3 2 i.e 96 × 43=86l2 → l2 =48cm of Hg
1 1 =
PV PV
1 2 ∴V2 = V1
2 3
44 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
WE-5. A column of Hg of 10cm length is contained
Patm (76 cm Of Hg) P atm(76 cm Of Hg)
in the middle of a narrow horizontal 1m long
tube which is closed at both ends. Both the
halves of the tube contain air at a pressure 76 x
Hg
cm of Hg. By what distance will the column
of Hg be displaced, if the tube is held vertical 100 cm
? (Assume temperature to be constant) 100-x
B L+Y Sol : When mercury is poured on the top of the piston,
due to increase in pressure, the volume of air will
decrease according to Boyle's law. If final mercury
Sol. A
column of height x is poured on the piston then gas
L L
L-Y pressure in equilibrium can be given as
Pf = ( 76 + x ) cm of Hg
10cm
If initially the length of air column on each As atmospheric pressure is equivalent to the
side is L, according to the given problem, pressure due to a mercury column of height 76cm.
2L+10=100,i.e., L=45 cm......(1) If A be the area of cross section of cylinder then
Now if the tube is held vertical, the Hg according to Boyle's law P1V1 = P2V2 o r
column will be displaced downward by y (76)(100 A) = (76 + x )(100 - x ) A
such that PB+10=PA..........(2)
applying Boyle’s law to air enclosed inside A, or 7600 = 7600 + 24x − x 2 or x = 24 cm.
LP0 WE-7. A gas is enclosed in a vessel of volume V at
P0LA=PA(L–y)A, i.e., PA = ( L − y ) .......(3) a pressure P. It is being pumped out of the
vessel by means of a piston-pump with a stroke
While for air enclosed inside B,
volume ν . What is the final pressure in the
LP0
P0 LA = PB ( L + y ) A, i.e., PB = vessel after 'n' strokes of the pump ? Assume
( L + y ) .......(4) temperature remains constant.
Substituting the values of P A and PB from Sol. According to ideal gas equation PV=nRT,at
equation (3) and (4) in (2), with L = 45 and constant temperature for a given mass, PV= P 1V1
P0 = 76 cm of Hg, we get Now as stroke volume is ν during 1st stroke for
45 × 76 45 × 76 constant mass (say m) volume changes from V to
− = 10; y 2 + 684 y − ( 45 ) = 0
2
( 45 − y ) ( 45 + y ) ( V + ν ) and so if pressure changes from P to P 1,
the above equation yields
−684 ± + 4 (45 ) V
(684 )
2 2
PV = P 1(V+ ν ), i.e., P1 = P V + ν ......... (1)
or y =
2
After the first stroke, the gas left in the vessel has
or y = −342 + 345 ; 3cm again volume V but at pressure P1 (with mass
WE-6. A vertical cylinder of height 100cm contains m1<m). Now the second stroke will take place from
air at a constant temperature and its top is these initial conditions and if P 2 is the pressure of
closed by a frictionless piston at atmospheric the gas in the cylinder at the end of 2nd stroke,
pressure (76cm of Hg) as shown figure (a). If
V
mercury is slowly poured on the piston, due to P1V = P2(V + ν ), i.e., P2 = P1 V + ν
its weight air is compressed. Find the
maximum height of the mercury column
which can be put on the piston.
NARAYANAGROUP 45
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
V0 Vt
pressure.Then =
273.15 273.15 + t
æ 1 ö
t÷
V
\ Vt = V0 çç1 +
çè 273.15 ø÷÷
Vt − V0
V t = V 0 (1 + a t ) Also , α =
V0 t
Substituting the value of P 1 from equation (1) in the If V1 & V2 are the volumes of the given mass of the
2
V gas at temperatures t 1 & t 2 respectively
above P2 = P
V + ν V −V
The volume coefficient of gas is α = V t − V t / C
2 1 0
Repeating the same for n strokes, the pressure of Ø 1 2 2 1
the gas in the vessel after nth stroke will be,
1
n
α= / 0 C =0.00366/0C
V
n
1 273.15
Pn = P = P . Here a is called volume coefficient of the gas.
V + ν 1 + ( ν / V)
Graphs between volume and temperature
WE-8.Two chambers, one containing m 1g of a gas
at P1pressure and other containing m2g of a of a gas in different cases:
gas at P2 pressure are put in communication Ø At constant pressure, the density of a given mass
with each other. If temperature remains of a gas is inversely proportional to its temperature
constant, the common pressure reached will be 1
P on Kelvin scale. i.e., d ∝ (or) dT = constant.
Sol. According to Boyle's law = const. T
r If temperature changes from T1 to T2 , the density
km 2
\ V1 = m1 = km1 and V2 = of a given mass of gas changes from d1 to d 2 so
r1 P1 æ ö
P2
ç 1
m m ÷
Total volume = k çç P + P ÷÷÷ that d1T1 = d 2T2 .
2
è 1 2 ø
D
Let mixture has common pressure P and common
density ρ . v B θ C
( m1 + m 2 ) a) v0
r= OB CD
æm m ö θ tan θ = =
k çç 1 + 2 ÷÷÷
A 273 BC
çè P P ÷ø
0 0
-273 O tC
1 2
(m1 + m 2 ) P1P2 ( m1 + m 2 )
Þ P = kr = = v
æ m1 m 2 ö÷
çç + (P2 m1 + m 2 P1 )
÷ ∆v
çè P P ÷÷ø
1 2
b) Slope =
∆T
θ
Charles Law: T
Charles constant pressure law v
Ø The volume of a given mass of gas at p2 p1 > p2
constant pressure is directly proportional to the c) p1
θ1 θ2
absolute temperature. V αT (at constant pressure)
T
V V Charles law of constant volume:
⇒ 1= 2
T1 T2 Ø The pressure of a given mass of a gasses is directly
proportional to the absolute temperature at constant
Ø Let V0 and Vt be the volumes of the given mass of
volume. This law is also known as
a gas at 00 C and t 0C respectively at constant Gay - Lussac's law. PαT (at constant volume)
46 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
P1 P2 Ø Permanent gases such as hydrogen, air, helium,
⇒ = oxygen and nitrogen obey the laws with sufficient
T1 T2
accuracy at low pressures and high temperatures.
Ø Let P 0 and P t be the pressures of given mass of a Ø At absolute zero, an ideal gas remains in gaseous
gas at 00C and t 0C respectively at constant volume. state.
P0 Pt Ø Total internal energy (u) of an ideal gas
Then = = ∑ K.E of all the gas molecules.
273.15 273.15 + t
Since intermolecular forces are absent among the
1 ideal gas molecules, P.E of the molecules becomes
∴ Pt = P0 1 + t
273.15 zero.
Real Gas
Pt − P0
Pt = P0 (1 + β t ) Also β =
The gas which obeys Boyle's law at low
P0t pressure and high temperature is called a real
Ø If P1 & P2 are the pressures of the given mass of a gas.
gas at temperatures t 1 & t2 respectively then the Ø Real gas has finite size molecules.
pressure coefficient of gas is Ø Long before reaching the absolute zero, the gas
converts into liquid.
P2 − P1
β= =
1
/ 0 C =0.00366/0C Ø Total internal energy (u) = ∑ P.E + ∑ K.E of all the
1 2 − p2 t1
Pt 273.15 molecules.
Here β is called pressure coefficient of the gas Since intermolecular forces are not absent, P.E of
Graphs between pressure and the molecules of a real gas is not zero.
Ideal Gas (Or Perfect Gas) Equation :
temperature of a gas in different cases:
An ideal gas of mass ‘m’ having pressure ‘p’ volume
Ø If two vessels of same volume containing a gas at
PV
T1K and T2 K temperatures and at pressures ‘V’, at temperature ‘T’ ∴ = constant
T
P1 and P2 are connected by a narrow tube then PV
Ø The ratio depends on both nature and mass
P1T2 + P2T1 T
the common pressure P=
T1 + T2 . of the gas.
D PV
Ø The ratio T
per unit mass of given gas is called
P B θ C
a) P0 'specific gas constant' and is represented by 'r'.
θ PV
A
0 0 tan θ =
OB CD
= i.e., = r Þ PV = rT
-273 O tC 273 BC T
Ø For a mass m of the gas PV = mrT .... (1)
P The value of 'r' depends on the nature of the gas
∆P i.e., its value is different for different gases . S.I.
b) Slope = unit of 'r' is J kg–1 K–1.
∆T
θ
O T Dimensional formula - M 0 L2T −2θ −1
P
When one mole of the gas is considered, the ratio
V1>V 2 PV
c) V1 is the same for all gases and is called
θ1 θ2 T
T Universal gas constant 'R'.
Ideal Gas
A gas which obeys Boyle's law and Charles' i.e.,
PV
= R Þ PV = RT
laws strictly at all temperatures and pressures T
is called a perfect or an ideal gas. For 'n' moles of a gas, the ideal gas equation is
Ø The ideal gas has point size molecules PV = nRT
NARAYANAGROUP 47
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Ø S.I. unit of R is J mol–1 K–1 and dimensional Ø R=N 0K Where K=Boltzmann's constant
2 –2
formula of R is ML T K mol .–1 –1 N0 = Avogadro's number
Ø When a gas of mass 'm' and molecular weight 'M' Ø The gas equation in terms of density ‘d’, for a given
is considered, the number of moles of the gas is P
given by n = m/M ; substituting in PV=nRT, mass of a gas is = constant.
dT
m
we get PV = RT .... (2) P1 P PV PV
M ⇒ = 2 ; T = T
1 1 2 2
From (1) and (2) r = R/M d1T1 d 2T2 1 2
Ø The ideal gas equation in terms of mass of the gas Ø When pressure and volume are constant for a given
and specific gas constant is PV = m r T
m
Ideal gas equation in terms of Boltzmann's ideal gas PV = RT
constant : M
Ø Boltzmann's constant (K) is defined as universal 1 K m T
m µ , m= , 1 = 2
gas constant per molecule. T T m 2 T1
R Ø If a gas with physical parameters (P1,V1,T1) is mixed
i.e., K = N where NA is Avogadro's number of with another gas with parameters (P2,V2,T2) and if
A
molecules . We know, PV = n R T and resultant mixture is with parameters (P,V,T) then
Total number of molecules ( N ) PV PV PV
n= 1 1
+ 2 2 =
Avagadro number of molecules ( N A ) T1 T2 T
\ PV = N
N Ø An air bubble rises from bottom of a lake to the
RT (or) PV = NKT
A
top. If V1 and V2 are the volumes of air bubble,
Where N = Number of molecules present in the
gas, K = Boltzmann's constant, T1 and T2 are the temperatures at bottom and top
where n = no.of moles of gas,
PV PV
S.I. unit of R is J mole -1 K-1 of the lake then T = T
1 1 2 2
Calculation of Universal gas constant : 1 2
Ø Universal gas constant is the gas constant for one
( H + h ) V1 HV2 ( H + h ) r13 = Hr23
mole of a gas. It is same for all gases, since at the = (or) .
same temperature and pressure, one mole of any T1 T2 T1 T2
gas occupies the same volume.
Ø At the top of mountain a thermometer reads T1K
Ø Experimentally, it was found that, 1 mole of any
gas occupies a volume of 22.4 litres at N.T.P. temperature and barometer reads H1 cm of Hg
At N.T.P, Normal pressure, pressure. At the bottom of mountain they read T2 K
P = hdg = 76 × 13.6 × 980 dyne cm-2
Normal temperature, T = 273K temperature and H2 cm of Hg pressure
Volume of 1 gram mole of gas = 22400 c.c respectively. If d1 and d 2 are densities of air at the
Universal gas constant, R = PV top and bottom of a mountain, then
T
P1 P H H d HT
76 × 13.6 × 980 × 22400 = 2 ; 1 = 2 (or) 1 = 1 2 .
= d1T1 d 2T2 d1T1 d 2T2 d 2 H 2 T1
273
R = 8.314 × 107 erg mole -1 K-1 WE-9. P–V diagrams of same mass of a gas are
-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
=8.314 J g mole K = 8314 J kg mole K drawn at two different temperatures T1 and
=1.987cal mole-1K-1 =0.0821 lt atm mole-1K-1 T2. Explain whether T1 > T2 or T2 > T1
Significance of R: Sol: Keeping the pressure of the gas remains constant.
Ø The value of "R" does not depend on the mass of According to Charles’s law V ∝ T
gas or its chemical formula.
48 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
P PV PV
P = constant Now
1 1
= 2 2
T1 T2
( 76×13.6 + 250) 980 ×
4
π ( 0.18)
T2 3
T1
⇒ 3
V1 V2 V T1
In the graph is pressure kept constant and volumes
( 76 ×13.6 ) × 980
4
π ( 0.2)
3
are compared
= 3 (or)
From Charles’s law at constant pressureV ∝ T
313
From the graph V2 > V1 so T 2 > T 1
T1 = 283.37 K ; T1 = 283.37 − 273 = 10.370 C
WE-10. 4g of hydrogen is mixed with 11.2 litre of WE-12. A faulty barometer tube is 90cm long and
He at STP in a container of volume 20 litre. If it contains some air above mercury. The
the final temperature is 300 K. Find the reading is 74.5cm when the true atmospheric
pressure. pressure 76cm. What will be the ture
Sol: 4g hydrogen = 2 moles hydrogen atmospheric pressure if the reading on this
barometer is 74cm? (H = 10cm of water
1 column)
11.2 litre He at STP = mole of He
2
RT Sol.
P = PH + PHe = ( nH + nHe )
V
15.5cm 16.0cm
1 8.31 × ( 300 )
= 2+
2 ( 20 × 10 − 3 ) = 3.12 × 10 N / m
5 2
90cm 74.5cm 74.0cm
WE-11. An air bubble starts rising from the bottom
of a lake. Its diameter is 3.6 mm at the bottom
and 4mm at the surface. The depth of the lake
is 250 cm and the temperature at the surface Let the area of cross-section of the tube be A cm 2
is 400C. What is the temperature at the and true pressure be H cm of mercury. Since the
bottom of the lake? Given atmospheric temperature is constant., Boyle’s law can be applied
pressure = 76cm of Hg and g = 980cm/s2 to the air enclosed in the upper part of the
Sol: At the bottom of the lake, volume of the bubble barometer tube, thus
V1 =
4
π ( 0.18 ) cm 3
3 P1 = ( 76.0 − 74.5 ) = 1.5cm of mercury
3
Pressure on the bubble P 1 = Atmospheric V1 = A × ( 90 − 74.5 ) = A ×15.5cm3
pressure + Pressure due to a column of 250cm of
P2 = ( H − 74.0 ) cm of mercury
water = ( 76 ×13.6 + 250 ) 980 dyne/cm2
At the surface of the lake, volume of the V2 = A × ( 90 − 74.0 ) = A ×16cm3
1 1 = PV
4
V2 = π ( 0.2 ) cm3
3 Applying Boyle’s law PV 2 2
bubble
3
1.5 × ( A ×15.5 ) = ( H − 74 ) × ( A ×16 )
Pressure on the bubble ; P 2 = atm. pressure
= ( 76 ×13.6 × 980 ) dyne/cm2 H − 74 =
1.5 ×15.5
16
T2 = 273 + 40 0 C = 313 K
H = 75.45cm
NARAYANAGROUP 49
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Expression of density for different cases : 4) increase or decrease depending on the chemical
composition of gas
m
ρ = . From the ideal gas equation , 4. At constant pressure density of a gas is
V 1) directly proportional to absolute temperature
PM 2) inversely proportional to absolute temperature
∴ρ= 3) independent of temperature
RT
Ø From this equation we can see that ρ – P graph 4) directly proportional to square root of absolute
temperature
is straight line passing through origin at
5. The slope of T-P graph for a given mass of a
constant temperature gas increases, the volume of the gas
Ø ( ρ ∝ P ) for a given gas and ρ − T graph is 1) increases 2) decreases
3) does not change 4) may increase or decrease
rectangular hyperbola at constant pressure 6. Which of the following methods will enable the
1 volume of an ideal gas to be made four times
ρ ∝ . 1) double the absolute temperature and pressure
T
2) halve the absolute temperature and double the
Ø Similarly for a given mass of a gas ρ − V graph pressure.
3) quadruple the absolute temperature at constant
1
is a rectangular hyperbola ρ ∝ pressure
V 4) quarter the absolute temperature at constant
pressure
ρ ρ ρ 7. An ideal gas is that which
P= constant 1) cannot be liquefied 2) can be easily liquefied
m= constant m=constant 3) has strong inter molecular forces
T= constant 4) has a large size of molecules.
m=constant 8. In a gas equation, PV = RT, V refers to the
P T V volume of
1) any amount of a gas 2)1gram mass of a gas
C.U.Q 3) 1 gram mole of a gas 4) 1litre of a gas
9. For a constant volume gas thermometer one
1. When the volume of a gas is decreased at should fill the gas at
1) high temperature and high pressure
constant temperature the pressure increases 2) high temperature and low pressure
because the molecules 3) low temperature and low pressure
1) strike unit area of the walls of the container more 4) low temperature and high pressure
often. 10. The molar gas constant is the same for all
2) strike the unit area of the walls of the container gases because at the same temperature and
with higher speed pressure, equal volumes of gases have the
3) strike the unit area of the wall of the container same
with lesser speed. 1) number of molecules
4) move with more kinetic energy 2) average potential energy
2. Boyle's law is represented by the equation 3) ratio of specific heats 4) density
PV=K (K is not constant), K depends on 11. A box contains x molecules of a gas. How
1) pressure of the gas 2) volume of the gas will the pressure of the gas be effected if the
3) mass of the gas 4) all the above number of molecules is made 2x?
3. A closed vessel contains some gas at 1) Pressure will decrease.
atmospheric pressure and room temperature. 2) Pressure will remain unchanged.
It is then given a high speed by placing it in a 3) Pressure will be doubled.
fast moving train. The temperature of the gas 4) Pressure will become three times
1) will increase 2) will decrease
3) will remain unchanged.
50 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
12. According to Charles’s law, 19. A volume V and temperature T was obtained,
1) at constant pressure, volume of gas is as shown in diagram, when a given mass of
proportional to its absolute temperature. gas was heated. During the heating process
2) at constant pressure, the volume of a gas is not the pressure is
proportional to its absolute temperature. B
3) at constant gauge pressure, the molecular V
volume of a gas is proportional to its absolute 1) increased
temperature. A 2) decreased
4) at constant volume, the absolute pressure is
3) remains constant
proportional to absolute temperature. O T 4) changed erratically
13. The density of an ideal gas
1) is directly proportional to its pressure and 20. A P-V diagram is obtained by changing the
absolute temperature temperature of the gas as shown. During this
2) is directly proportional to its pressure and process the gas is
inversely proportional to its absolute temperature
3) is inversely proportional to its pressure and A
directly proportional to its absolute temperature
4) is inversely proportional to both its pressure P
and absolute temperature of the gas 1) heated continuously
14. The relation between volume V, pressure P
and absolute temperature T of an ideal gas B
is PV = xT, where x is a constant. The value O V 2)cooled continuously
of x depend upon 3) heated in the beginning but cooled towards the
1) the mass of the gas molecule end
2) the average kinetic energy of the gas molecules 4) cooled in the beginning but heated towards the
3) P, V and T end
4) the number of gas molecules in volume V. 21. The critical temperature of the gas is the
15. The air of the atmosphere becomes cool at temperature
higher altitudes due to 1) at which Charles’s law is obeyed
1) decrease in density 2) variation in pressure 2) at which Boyle’s law is obeyed
3) expansion of the air 3) above which the gas cannot be liquefied
4) height above the surface of the earth 4) at which all molecular motion ceases
16. If pressure and temperature of an ideal gas 22. The P-T graph for the given mass of an ideal
are doubled and volume is halved, the number gas is shown in figure. Then the volume
of molecules of the gas
1) becomes half 2) becomes two times B
3) becomes 4 times 4) remains constant P 1) increases
17. If gas molecules undergo, inelastic collision 2) decreases
with the walls of the container A
1) temperature of the gas will increase 3) remains constant
2) temperature of the gas will fall 4) data insufficient
O
3) pressure of the gas will increase T
4) neither temperature nor the pressure change C.U.Q. - KEY
18. A gas in an airtight container is heated from 1) 1 2) 3 3) 3 4) 2 5) 2 6) 3
25oC to 90oC. The density of gas will 7) 1 8) 3 9) 2 10) 1 11) 3 12) 1
1) increase slightly 2) increase considerably 13) 2 14) 4 15) 3 16) 2 17) 4 18) 3
3) remain the same 4) decrease slightly 19) 1 20) 3 21) 1 22) 1
NARAYANAGROUP 51
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
A gas is kept at 130C in a vessel, If the volume
9.
LEVEL-I (C.W.) of the gas is kept constant and is heated, the
pressure will be doubled to its initial pressure
GAS LAWS at a temperature
1. A vessel containing 10 litre of air under a 1) 576 K 2) 286 K 3) 143 K 4) 73 K
pressure of 1MPa is connected to a 4 litre 10. State the equation corresponding to 8g of O 2
empty vessel. The final air pressure in the is
vessel assuming that the process is isothermal. 1) PV=8RT 2)PV=RT/4
1) 7/5 MPa 2) 5/7MPa 3) 1MPa 4) 10MPa 3)PV=RT 4)PV=RT/2
2. Two vessels of volume 10 and 5 litres contain IDEAL GAS EQUATION
air at 5 atmospheres and x (Unknown) 11. A given amount of gas is heated until both its
atmospheres. When they are connected pressure and volume are doubled. If initial
together with a small tube the resultant temperature is 270 C, its final temperature is
pressure is '6' atmospheres find the value of 1) 300 K 2) 600 K 3) 1200 K 4) 900K
'x' 12. At. N.T.P. 28 g of Nitrogen occupies 22.4 litres.
1)8 atm 2) 16 atm 3) 4 atm 4) 2 atm What is the mass of 5.6 litres of
3. An air bubble rises from the bottom of a lake Nitrogen at 38cm of Hg pressure and 2730C
and its radius is doubled on reaching the temperature
surface. If the temperature is constant the 1) 7 g 2) 48 g 3) 1.75 g 4) 1.5 g
depth of the lake is. (1 atmospheric pressure 13. A vessel of volume 4 litres contains a mixture
= 10m height of water column) of 8g of O2, 14 g of N2 and 22 g of CO2 at
1) 7m 2) 70m 3) 10m 4) 0.7m 270C .The pressure exerted by the mixture is
4. If an air bubbles rises from the bottom of a 1) 10 atmosphere 2) 5 × 106 N/m2
1 3) 7.69 × 105 N/m2 4) 6 × 105 N/m2
mercury tank to the top its volume become 1
2
times. When normal pressure is 76 cm of Hg LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY
then the depth of the Hg tank is 1) 2 2) 1 3) 2 4) 1 5) 3 6) 1
1) 38 cm 2) 132 cm 3) 76 cm 4) 49 cm 7) 4 8) 3 9) 1 10) 2 11) 3 12) 3
5. A quill tube contains a mercury column of 13) 3
length 19cm. The length of air column is 24cm
when it is held vertically. On inverting it with LEVEL - I (C.W) -HINTS
its open end downwards the length of air 1. PV = P1V1 + P2V2 ; P2 = 0
column will be 2. PV = P1V1 + P2V2
(atmospheric pressure = 76cm of Hg) 3. P1V1 = P2V2 ; ( H + h) r13 = Hr23
1) 20cm 2) 30cm 3) 40cm 4) 35cm
6. At what temperature will the volume of a gas 4. P1V1 = P2V2 ; ( H + h)V1 = HV2
be twice the volume at 270 C at a given
V1 T1
pressure. 5. ( H + h)l1 = ( H − h)l2 6. V ∝ T ; V = T
1) 3270 C 2) 540 C 3) 1270 C 4) 1000C 2 2
7. If the temperature of a gas is increased by 1K
∆V ∆T
at constant pressure its volume increases by 7. V ∝T ; =
0.0035 of the initial volume. The temperature V T
of the gas is P1 T1 ∆T ∆P
8. = =
1) 100K 2) 150K 3) 300K 4) 285.7K P2 T2 ; T P
8. A cylinder contains a gas at temperture of 270C
and a pressure 1MPa. If the temperature of P1 T1 m
= 10. PV = RT
the gas is lowered to -230C, the change in 9. P∝T ; P2 T2 M
pressure is
1) 1MPa 2) 5/6MPa 3) 1/6MPa 4) 5MPa
52 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
PV PV 9. State the equation corresponding to 4g of N 2is
m
11. T = T 12. PV = RT , PV ∝ mT
1 1 2 2
1) PV = 8RT 2) PV = RT/7
1 2 M 3) PV = RT 4)PV = RT/2
RT m1 m2 m3 IDEAL GAS EQUATION
m P= + +
13. PV = RT ; 10. A gas at temperature 27 0 C and pressure 30
M V M1 M2 M 3
atmosphere is allowed to expand to one
atmospheric pressure. If the volume becomes
LEVEL - I (H.W)
10 times its initial volume, the final
GAS LAWS temperature becomes
1. If a given mass of a gas occupies a volume 1) 1000 C 2) 3730 K 3) 3730 C 4) − 1730 C
100cc at one atmospheric pressure and a 11. 16 g of O gas and x g of H gas occupy the
2 2
temperature of 1000C. What will be its volume same volume at the same temperatrue and
at 4 atmospheric pressure, the temperature pressure. Then x =
being the same? 1)1/2g 2)1g 3) 8g 4) 16 g
1) 100cm3 2) 400cm3 3) 25cm3 4) 200cm3 12. An enclosure of volume 3 litre contains 16 g of
2. A vessel containing 9 litres of an ideal gas at oxygen, 7 g of nitrogen and 11 g of carbon -
760 mm pressure is connected to an evacuated di-oxide at 27°C . The pressure exerted by the
9 litre vessel. The resultant pressure is mixture is approximately
1) 380mm 2) 760mm 3) 190mm 4) 1140mm [R = 0.0821 lit atm mole-1 K-1]
3. A bubble rises from the bottom of a lake 90m 1) 1 atmosphere 2) 3 atmosphere
deep on reaching the surface, its volume 3) 9 atmosphere 4) 8.3 atmosphere
becomes (take atmospheric pressure equals
to 10 m of water ) LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY
1)4 times 2)8 times 3)10 times 4) 3 times 1) 3 2) 1 3) 3 4) 2 5) 2 6) 1
4. An air bubble rises from the bottom to the 7) 2 8) 3 9) 2 10) 4 11) 2 12) 4
surface of lake and it is found that its diameter LEVEL - I (H.W) -HINTS
is doubled. If the height of water barometer is
11m, the depth of the lake in meters is
1. P ∝ 1 2.PV = P1V1 + P2V2
1) 70m 2) 77m 3) 7.7m 4) 78m V
5. The temperature of a gas contain in a closed 3. (H + h)V = HV 4. ( H + h) r13 = Hr23
0
vessel increased by 2 C when the pressure is
increased by 2% the initial temperature of the ∆P ∆T V1 T1
gas is 5. P∝T ,
P
=
T
6. V ∝T V = T
,
2 2
1)200K 2)100K 3) 2000 C 4) 1100 C
The volume that a gas occupies at 343K if its 7. P ∝ T , P1 = T1 P T
6. 8. P ∝T, 1 = 1
volume at -250 C is 7.5 litre is (The process is P2 T2 P2 T2
isobaric)
m PV PV
9. PV = 10. T = T
1 1 2 2
1) 10.29 lit 2) 102.9 lit 3) 1.029 lit 4) 1029 lit RT
7. A car tyre has air at 1.5 atm at 300 K.If P M 1 2
increases to 1.75 atm with volume same, the m m
temperature will be ____ 11. of oxygen = of hydrogen
M M
1) 350 0 C 2) 350K 3) 300 0 C 4) 300K
8. A gas at 6270 C is cooled that its pressure m RT m1 m2 m3
12. PV = RT ; P = + +
becomes 1/3 of its initial value at constant M V M1 M2 M 3
volume. Its final temperature is
1) 900 K 2) 600 K 3) 300 K 4)100K
NARAYANAGROUP 53
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
GAS LAWS 9. During an experiment an ideal gas is found to
1. A vessel contains a gas under a pressure of obey an additional gas law VT = constant. The
5 × 105 pa. If 3/5 of the mass of the gas is flown gas is initially at temperature T and pressure
out,What will be the gas pressure if the P. When it is heated to the temperature2T, the
temperature being maintained constant, resulting pressure is
1) 50 MPa 2) 2MPa 3) 0.2MPa 4) 0.5MPa 1) 2P 2) P/2 3) 4P 4) P/4
2. When an air bubble of radius ‘r’ rises from the 10. During an experiment an ideal gas is found to
bottom to the surface of a lake, its radius obey an additional law VP2 = constant. The
becomes 5r/4 (the pressure of the atmosphere gas is initially at a temperature 'T' and volume
is equal to the 10m height of water column). If 'V'. When it expands to a volume 2V, the
the temperature is constant and the surface temperature becomes
tension is neglected, the depth of the lake is T
1)T 2) 2T 3) 2 T 4) 2
1) 3.53 m 2) 6.53 m 3) 9.53 m 4) 12.53m 11. At the bottom of a lake where temperature is
3. How much should the pressure of the gas be
increased to decrease the volume by 10% at 7 0 C the pressure is 2.8 atmosphere. An air
constant temperature ? bubble of radius1 cm at the bottom rises to the
1)10% 2)9.5% 3)11.11% 4)5.11% surface. Where the temperature is 27 0 C .
4. 1 litre of oxygen at a pressure of 1 atmosphere Radius of air bubble at the surface is
and 2 litres of nitrogen at a pressure of 0.5
1) 31 3 2) 41 3 3) 51 3 4) 61 3
atmosphere are introduced in a vessel of 1 litre
capacity without any change in temperature. 12. The gas in vessel is subjected to a pressure of
The total pressure in atmosphere is 20 atm at a temperature 270C. The pressure
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4 of the gas in a vessel after one-half of the gas
5. Two closed vessels of equal volume contain is released from the vessel and the
air at 105kPa at 300K and are connected temperature of the remainder is raised by 500C
through a narrow tube. If one of the vessels is is [EAMCET 2011(M)]
now maintained at 300K and the other at 400K 1) 8.5 atm 2) 11.7 atm 3) 17 atm 4) 10.8 atm
then the pressure becomes. 13. An ideal gas is initially at temperature T and
1) 120kPa 2) 105kPa 3) 150kPa 4)300kPa volume V. Its volume is increased by ∆V due
IDEAL GAS EQUATION to an increase in temperature ∆T , pressure
6. A vessel is filled with an ideal gas at a pressure remaining constant. The physical quantity
of 10 atmospheres and temp 27 0 C . Half of ∆V
the mass of the gas is removed from the vessel δ= varies with temperature as
V ∆T
the temperature of the remaining gas is [EAMCET 2010(M)]
increased to 87 0 C . Then the pressure of the
gas in the vessel will be
T T+∆T T+∆T
1) 5 atm 2)6 atm 3) 7 atm 4)8 atm
7. Two identical containers connected by a fine
1) 2) T
capillary tube contain air at N.T.P. if one of
those containers is immersed in pure water, T T
boiling under normal pressure then new
pressure is T
T+∆T
1) 76 cm of Hg 2)152 cm of Hg
3) 57 cm of Hg 4) 87.76 cm of Hg T+∆T
3) 4) T
8. At the top of a mountain a thermometer read
70 C and barometer reads 70 cm of Hg. At the T
bottom of the mountain the barometer reads T
76cm of Hg and thermometer reads 270 C. The
density of air at the top of mountain is ______
times the density at the bottom.
1) 0.99 2) 0.9 3) 0.89 4) 0.95
54 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
14. The pressure p for a gas is plotted against its V T P T T
absolute temperature T for two different Q 2 = 1 and 1 = 1 × 1
V1 T2 P2 T2 T2
volumes V1 and V2. If p is plotted on y-axis
and T on x-axis, then [EAMCET 2010(M)] P1 V1 T1
1) the curve for V1 has greater slope than that for V2 10. PV ∝ T , P × V = T
2 2 2
2) the curve for V2 has greater slope than that for V1
3) both curves have same slope According to given data P 2V = constant
4) the curves intersect at some point other than T=0 1 1
15. Two gases A and B having same pressure P, P1 V2 2 T1 V2 2 V1
volume V and absolute temperature T are ⇒ = ⇒ =
P2 V1 T2 V1 V2
mixed. If the mixture has the volume and
temperature as V and T respectively, then the PV PV
pressure of the mixture is [EAMCET 2007 E] 11. T = T
1 1 2 2
1 2
1) 2P 2) P 3) P/2 4) 4P
LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY m P1 m1 T1
12. PV = RT , P ∝ mT ; = ×
1) 3 2) 3 3) 3 4) 2 5) 1 6) 2 M P2 m2 T2
7) 4 8) 1 9) 3 10) 3 11) 1 12) 2
∆V ∆T 1
13) 3 14) 1 15) 1 13. = ∴δ ∝
V T T
LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS 14.
P1 m1
1. P ∝ d , d ∝ m ; P∝m ; P =m P
2 2
V1
mass of gas taken out of cylinder is (m1 - m2)
2. 1 1 = PV
PV 2 2 ; ( P + hdg )V0 = PV 1
3. according to Boyles law
V2
1 P1 = V2 , P2 − P1 = V1 − V2 ×100
P∝ , θ1
V P2 V1 P1 V2 θ2
T
P1 m1 M 2 T
4. P1 = P2 ; P =m ×M PV = nRT ; PV ∝ T ; PV ∝ T , V ∝
2 2 1 P
Slope of the graph gives volume of the gas
P P P1 P1 Keep ‘T’ constant
5. + = +
T T T T1 Tanθ1 > Tanθ 2 ∴V1 > V2
P1 m1 T1
6. P ∝ mT ; P = m ×T PV PV PV P1V 2 PV
15. T = T + T =
1 1 2 2
2 2 2 ;
1 2 T T
PV PV V V
7.
1 1
+ 1 1 = P1 1 + 11
T1 T1 T1 T1 LEVEL-II (H.W)
PV GAS LAWS
8. = constant,
T 1. A cylinder contained 10kg of gas at pressure
m Pm P1 P2 107 N / m2. The quantity of gas taken out of
V= ; = constant ; dT = d T cylinder if final pressure is 2.5 × 106 N/m2 is
d dT 1 1 2 2
(Assume temperature of gas is constant)
PV PV P T V 1) Zero 2) 7.5 Kg 3) 2.5 Kg 4) 5 Kg
9.
1 1
= 2 2 ; 1 = 1 . 2 ; Given V ∝ 1
T1 T2 P2 T2 V1 T
NARAYANAGROUP 55
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
2. An air bubble of volume V0 is released by a fish temperature of one litre sphere constant at 270C,
if temperature of two litre sphere is increased to
at a depth h in a lake. The bubble rises to the
1270C, then the final pressure is
surface. Assume constant temperature and
1) 110 cm of Hg 2) 120 cm of Hg
standard atmospheric pressure P above the lake.
3) 150 cm of Hg 4) 200 cm of Hg
The volume of the bubble just before reaching
9. Two containers of equal volume containing the
the surface is
(d is the density of water). same gas at pressure P1 and P2 and absolute
hgd V0 ( P + hgd ) temperature T1 and T2 respectively were
1) V0 + 2)
P P connected with narrow capillary tube. The gas
V0 reaches a common pressure P and a common
3) + hgd 4) (V0 + V0 dg ) temperature T. The ratio P/T is equal to
P
3. If the pressure of a gas contained in a closed P P 1 P1 P2
1) T + T 2) 2 T + T
1 2
vessel increases by x% when heated by 10 C , 1 2 1 2
its initial temperature is P1T2 + P2T1 P1T2 − P2T1
1) (100/x) Kelvin 2) (100/x) Celsius 3) T1 + T2 4) T1 − T2
x + 100 100 − x 10. During an experiment an ideal gas is found to
3) Kelvin 4) Celsius
x x obey an additional law V2P= constant. The gas
4. A closed vessel contains 8 g of oxygen and 7g is initially at a temperature T and volume V.
of Nitrogen. Total pressure at a certain When it expand to a volume 2V, the
temperature is 10 atm. When all the oxygen is temperature becomes.
removed from the system without change in 1) T 2) 2T 3) T 2 4) T/2
temperature then the pressure will be 11. The density of a gas at N.T.P. is 1.5 g/lit. its
1) 10 × 7/15atm 2)10 × 8/15atm density at a pressure of 152cm of Hg and
3) 10 × 8/16 atm 4) 10 × 8/32 atm temperature 270 C
5. A cylinder contains gas at a pressure of 2.5 273 150
atm. Due to leakage, the pressure falls to 2 1) g / lit 2) g / lit
100 273
atm, after sometime. The percentage of the
1
gas which is leaked out is 3) g / lit 4) 1.5 g/ lit
1) 40 2) 15 3) 20 4) 25 273
6. 0
The volume of a gas at 0 C is 546cc.at constant LEVEL - II (H.W) - KEY
pressure it is heated from 300C to 500C the 1) 2 2) 2 3) 1 4) 3 5) 3 6) 2
change in volume is 7) 4 8) 2 9) 2 10) 4 11) 1
1) 20cc 2) 40cc 3)10cc 4) 273cc LEVEL - II (H.W) -HINTS
IDEAL GAS EQUATION 1. P ∝ ρ , ρ ∝ m When temperature and volume are
7. A flask is filled with 13 g of an ideal gas at constant P ∝ m
270C its temperature is raised to 520C. The
mass of the gas that has to be released to 2. 1 1 = PV
PV 2 2 ; ( P + hdg )V0 = PV
maintain the temperature of the gas in the flask P2 T2 P2 − P1 T2 − T1
= =
at 520C and the pressure remaining the same 3. P1 T1 and P1 T1
is
m m
1)2.5 g 2)2.0 g 3)1.5 g 4)1.0 g 4. PV = RT , P ∝
8. A one litre sphere and a two litre sphere are M M
connected with a capillary tube of negligible P1 m1 M 2
= × , ( P1 + P11 ) = 10, P1 = 5
volume. They contain an ideal gas at 270C at a P2 m2 M 1
pressure of 100cm of Hg. Keeping the
56 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
∆ P ∆m P
5. P ∝ m when V&T are constant ⇒ P = m T1
1) T1 > T2
T2
1 2) T2 > T1
6. ∆V = V α∆T , here α = 273 ; ∆V = 546
3) T1 = T2
m 1 d 4) T1 = T2
3
7. PV = RT , m ∝ , mass released = m1 - m2
M T 4. For an ideal gas V-T curves at constant
1 1
PV1 PV2 P V1 P V2 pressures P1 & P2 are shown in figure, from the
8. + = +
T1 T1 T1 T2 figure
PV PV PV PV V
9.
1
+ 2 = + P1
T1 T2 T T 1) P1>P2
2
10. Given that PV = constant. From Gas equation P2
2) P1<P2
T T
P ∝ ; V 2 = constant ⇒ TV = constant 3) P1=P2
V V
T 4) P1 < P2
P1 P2
11. d T = d T 5. A Volume V absolute temperature T
1 1 2 2
diagram was obtained when a given mass of
LEVEL - III gas was heated. During the heating process
from state 1 to 2, the pressure
GAS LAWS
V
1. The graph drawn between pressure and volume 1) Remains constant
in Boyles law experiment is shown in figure 2
for different molecular weights then 2) Decreased
1 3) Changed erratically
1) M 2 < M 1 T 4) Increased
6. Two identical containers each of volume V0 are
2) M 1 < M 2
P M2 joined by a small pipe. The containers contain
M1 3) M 1 = M 2 identical gases at temperature T0 and pressure
V 4) M 3 = M P0. One container is heated to temperature 2T0
1 2
while maintaining the other at the same
2. The graph drawn between pressure and volume
in Boyle’s law experiment is shown in figure temperature. The common pressure of the gas
for different masses of same gas at same is P and n is the number of moles of gas in
temperature then container at temperature 2T0.
4
1) P = 2 P0 2) P = P0
1) m2 > m1 3
m2 2) m1 > m2 2 PV 3PV
3) n = 3RT 4) n = 2 RT
0 0 0 0
P
m1 3) m1 = m2 0 0
V 4) m13 = m2 7. A cycle tube has volume 2000 cm3. Initially
3. In Boyles experiment for a given gas at th
3
different temperatures the graph drawn the tube is filled to of its volume by air
between pressure and density are straight 4
lines as shown then at pressure of 105 N/m2. It is to be inflated to
a pressure of 6 × 105 N/m2 under isothermal
NARAYANAGROUP 57
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
conditions. The number of strokes of pump, 12. A closed container of volume 0.02m3
which gives 500 cm3 air in each stroke, to contains a mixture of neon and argon gases,
inflate the tube is at a temperature of 27°C and pressure of
1) 21 2) 12 3) 42 4) 11 1× 105 Nm-2 . The total mass of the mixture is
28g. If the gram molecular weights of neon and
8. A horizontal uniform glass tube of 100cm argon are 20 and 40 respectively. Find the
length is sealed at both ends contains 10 cm masses of the individual gases in the container,
mercury column in the middle, the temperature assuming them to be ideal. (Universal gas
and pressure of air on either side of mercury constant R = 8.314 J/mol.k)
o
column are respectively 31 C and 76cm of 1) m1 = 4 g, m2 = 24 g 2) m1 = 8 g, m2 = 20 g
3) m1 = 16 g, m2 = 12 g 4) m1 = 12 g, m2 = 16 g
mercury , if the air column at one end is kept
at 0oC and the other end at 273oC then LEVEL - III - KEY
o
pressure of air which is at 0 C is 1) 1 2) 1 3) 1 4) 2 5) 1 6) 3
7) 1 8) 3 9) 4 10) 3 11) 3 12) 1
(in cm of Hg )
1)76 2)88.2 3)102.4 4)122 LEVEL - III - HINTS
9. A closed hollow insulated cylinder is filled with 1.
m
gas at 00C and also contains an insulated piston PV = RT ;
M
of negligible weight and negligible thickness at P = constant At constant pressure
the middle point. The gas on one side of the piston 1
0
M2 V∝ from graph
is heated to 100 C. If the piston moves 5cm, the P M1 M
length of the hollow cylinder is [2011 E] volume V 2 > V1 then
v1 v2
1)13.65cm 2)27.3cm 3)38.6cm 4)64.6cm V M2 < M1
10. Two thermally insulated vessels 1 and 2 are 2.
m
filled with air at temperature (T1, T 2), volume PV = RT
(V1, V2) and pressure (P1, P2) respectively. If M
P = constant same gas is used at
the valve joining the two vessels is opened,
m2
the temperature inside the vessel at P constant pressure
m1
equilibrium will be
V ∝ m from graph
1) T1 + T2 v1 v2
V V2 > V1 then m2 > m1
2) T1T2 (P1V1 + P2V2) / (P1V1T1 + P2V2T2)
3) T1T2 (P1V1 + P2V2) / (P1V1T2 + P2V2T1) 3.
P
4) (T1+T2) / 2 P T1 = constant ; At
dT
11. Two identical vessels A and B with frictionless constant pressure
T2 1
pistons contain the same ideal gas at the same d ∝ from graph
temperature and the same volume V. The masses P = constant T
d2> d1 then T2 < T1
of gas in A and B are m A and m B respectively..
d1 d2 d
The gases are allowed to expand isothermally to 4.
the same final volume 3 V. The change in pressure V
P1 PV
of the gas in A and B are found to be ∆P and 1.5 = constant at
∆P respectively. Then P2
T
constant volume
1) 9mA = 4mB 2) 3mA = 2mB P ∝ T from the graph
V = constant
temperature T 2 > T1
3) 2mA = 3mB 4) 4m A = 9mB
T1 T2 T then P2 > P1
58 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
5. l l
PV
= constant
V T
slope of V - T graph
2 gives pressure from 00C 00C
state 1 to 2 V-T graph l+5 l-5
9.
1 is a straight line, slope
of the graph remains 1000C 00C
5 cm
T
constant then pressure
remains constant PV l l1 l2
= Const , = Const ; =
6. n1 + n2 = n + n
1
1
1
2 T T T1 T2
PV PV PV0 PV0 PV
+ 0 0= + 10. n = = Const
0 0
RT0 RT0 RT0 R 2T0 RT
11. At constant temperature PV = constant
2 PV PV0 3 4P
0 0
= ⇒ P= 0 dV dV
RT0 RT0 2 3 dP = − P and = constant
V V
from ideal gas equation PV = nRT
4 P0 ∴dP ∝ P ..... (1)
V0 = n12 R (2T0 )
3 m mRT
from PV = RT ⇒ P =
M MV
2 2 = ( PV
1 1 ) + ( P V )n
1 1
7. PV
⇒ P ∝ m ..... (2)
PV PV P Al P Al from (1) and (2) dP ∝ m
8.
1 1
= 2 2 ⇒ 1 1= 2 2
T1 T2 T1 T2
12. n = nne + nAr , mne = m , mAr = 28 - m
Pl Pl PV = nRT
⇒ 11
= 2 2 area remains constant
T1 T2
Whenever temperature of the glass tube changes LEVEL - IV
piston moves through a distance x. So that pressure
remains constant MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
Before heating 1. Match List I and List II
45cm 45cm List-I List-II
76cm 76cm A) P-V graph E) Straight line cutting
310C
(T is constant) tem peratureaxisat2730C
10cm 310C
After change of temperature B) P-T graph F) Rectangular hyperbola
(V is constant)
(45-x) (45+x) C)V-T graph G) A straight line parallel to
1 1
P P (P is constant) pressure axis
00C 10cm
0
31 C D) PV- P graph H) Straight line passing
(T is constant) through origin
l1 l2 45 − x 45 + x
= ; = 2. Match List I and List II
T1 T2 273 546 List-I List-II
∴ x = 15cm A) Real gas E)Boltzmann’s constant
compare left hand side volumes in both cases B) gas constant for 1 F)Molecular forces
molecule of a gas are present
P11l11 Pl C) gas constant for 1 G) molecular forces of
1
= 11
T1 T1 mole gas are absent
D) ideal gas H) universal gas constant
NARAYANAGROUP 59
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
3. Match List I and List II 1 0
List-I List-II Reason (R):Volume coefficient of gas is 273
/C
A) Barometer E) Charles’s law 10. Assertion (A): Volume of gas at 500C is ‘V’.
B) specific gas constant F) J mole -1 K-1 Keeping the pressure constant, the temperature is
C) gas thermometer G) Boyle’s law doubled. Volume becomes 2V.
D) universal gas constant H) J Kg-1 K-1
Reason (R): At constant pressure, the volume of
4. Match List I and List II
List-I List-II gas is directly proportional to its absolute
temperature.
A) Boyle’s Law E) PV = NkBT
11. Assertion (A): Pressure of gas is same every where
P inside a closed container
B) Charles’s law F) =constant,at
T Reason (R):The gas molecules under go elastic
constant volume collisions among themselves and with walls of the
C) Gay-Lussac’s law G) V αT at container
constant pressure 12. Assertion (A): Gases obey Boyle's law at high
1 1 =
D) Equation of state of H) PV constant temperature and low pressure only.
an ideal gas Reason (R): At low pressure and high
ASSERTION & REASON TYPE QUESTIONS temperature, gases would behave like ideal gases.
1) Both assertion (A) and reason (R) are 13. Assertion (A):The air pressure in a car tyre
correct and R gives the correct explanation increases during driving
2) Both assertion (A) and reason (R) are Reason (R): Temperature of air in the tyre
correct but R does not give the correct
explanation
increases due to friction of tyre with road. Increase
3) A is true but R is false in temperature results in an increase in pressure
4) Both A and R are false according to Charles’s law [EAMCET 2012 M]
5. Assertion (A): Real gases do not obey the ideal STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
gas equation. Options :
1. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is true
Reason (R): In the ideal gas equation, the volume
2. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is false
occupied by the molecules as well as the inter 3. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is true
molecular forces are ignored. 4. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is false
6. Assertion (A): Gases are characterised with two 14. Statement-1 : The pressure of a given mass of
coefficients of expansion gas varies linearly with its absolute temperature. The
volume of the gas shall remain constant in the
Reason (R): When heated both volume and process.
pressure increase with the rise in temperature. Statement-2 :When pressure is directly
7. Assertion (A): PV/T=constant for 1 gram of gas. proportional to temperature, P-T graph is a straight
This constant varies from gas to gas. line.
15. Statement-1 : Real gas approaches ideal gas
Reason (R):1 gram of different gases at NTP behaviour at low pressures and high temperatures.
occupy different volumes. Statement-2 :At low pressure , density of gas is
8. Assertion (A):PV/T=constant for 1 mole of gas. very low.
This constant is same for all gases. 16. Statement-1 : All molecules in a gas move with
the same speed.
Reason (R): 1 mole of different gases at NTP Statement-2 : Average velocity of molecules of a
occupy same volume of 22.4 litres. gas sample is zero.
9. Assertion (A): At constant pressure when a gas is MORE THAN ONE OPTION QUESTIONS
heated from 40 to 410C, the increase in volumes is 17. According to Boyle's Law PV=C the value of
1/273 of its initial volume at 273 K C depends on.
A)Mass of the gas B)Type of gas C) Temperature
1) A,B 2) B,C 3) A,C 4) A,B,C
60 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
18. Select the correct graphs 24. PV = n RT holds good for
A) the P-1/V graph at constant temperature is a A) Isobaric process B) Isochoric process
rectangular hyperbola. C) Isothermal process D) Adiabatic process
B) the PV-V graph is a straight line parallel to the 1) A & B 2) A,B & C 3) A,B & D 4) All
Y-axis. LEVEL-IV - KEY
C) P-V graph at constant temperature is a straight MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
line passing through the origin 1) A-F, B-H, C-E,D-G. 2) A-F, B-E,C-H, D-G
D) V-T graph at constant pressure is a straight line 3)A-G,B-H,C-E,D-F. 4)A-H.,B-G,C-F,D-E
passing through the origin. ASSERTION & REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
1) A,B 2) B,D 3) C,D 4) A,D 5)1 6)1 7)1 8)1 9)1 10)1
19. Which of the following processes will 11)1 12)1 13) 1
quadruple the pressure STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
A) Reduce V to half and double T 14)3 15)1 16)3
B) Reduce V to 1/8th and reduce T to half
More than one option Type questions
C) Double V and half T
D) Increase both V and T to double the values. 17)3 18)2 19)2 20)4 21)1 22)3
1) B,C 2) A,B 3) C,D 4) A,D. 23)4 24)4
20. Following operation are carried out on a sample LEVEL-IV - HINTS
of ideal gas initially at pressure P volume V 5. The real gas obeys all gas laws at low pressure and
and Kelvin temperature T. high temperature. Ideal gas obeys all gas laws at all
A) At constant volume, the pressure is increased temperatures and pressures.
fourfold. 6. under constant pressure and volume gases have
B) At constant pressure, the volume is doubled same coefficient of expansions i.e. α = β
C) The volume is doubled and pressure halved.
7. 1 mole of any gas will occupy same volume (at
D) If heated in a vessel open to atmosphere, one-
fourth of the gas escapes from the vessel. Arrange PV
N.T.P) = R = constant
the above operations in the increasing order of final T
temperature but for one gram of any different gases will occupy
1) A, B, C, D 2) C, B, A, D different volumes (at N.T.P)
3) B, A, D, C 4) D, C, B, A PV
21. Real gases approaches ideal gas at high = r = constant(for a given gas)
temperature and low pressure because T
A.interatomic separation is large 8. PV = nRT
B. size of the molecule is negligible when compared R is universal gas constant, it is constant for all gases
to inter atomic separation ∆V
1) A & B are true 2) only A is true 9. α= , ∆t = 10 C
V ∆t
3) only B is true 4) A & B are false
25. The parameter that determine the physical 1
α=
state of gas are : 273.150 C
A) Pressure B) Volume 10. From Charles’s law at constant pressure, V ∝ T
C) Number of moles D) Temperature 11. pressure developed in a gas is due to elastic collision
1) A & B 2) A,B & C 3) A,B & D 4)A,C &D of gas molecules with walls and is same through
22. The parameter that determine the physical out the container.
state of gas are : 12. Ideal (or) perfect gas obeys gas laws at all
A) Pressure B) Volume temperature and pressures without any limitations.
C) Number of moles D) Temperature 13. When the vehicle is in motion temperature of tyre
1) A & B 2) A,B & C 3) A,B & D 4) A,C &D and hence the temperature of gas increases due to
23. In the equation PV=constant, the numerical friction. Hence P ∝ T at constant volume.
value of constant depends upon
A) temperature B) mass of the gas
C) system of units used D) nature of the gas
1) A & B 2) B & C 3) C & D 4) All
NARAYANAGROUP 61
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE-JEE
ADV PHYSICS-VOL-
ADV V
-PHY- VOL - V
LEVEL - V 3 . A cube of coefficient of linear expension α s is
floating in a bath containing a liquid of
coefficient of volume expertion γ l . When the
THERMAL EXPANSION OF SOLIDS
temperature is raised by ∆T , the depth upto
AND LIQUIDS
which the cube is submerged in the liquid
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
remains the same. Then the relation between
1. Three identical rods of equal length L are
joined to form an equilateral triangle ABC as α s and γ l is
shown in figure. D is the midpoint of AB. The A) γ l = 3α s B) γ l = 3α s / 2
coefficient of linear expansion is a1 for AB,
C) γ l = 2α s D) γ l = α s / 2
and a 2 for AC and BC. If α1 = 4α 2 , the change
4. A heavy brass bar has projections at its ends
in time period of the systam is as shown in the figure. Two fine steel wires,
A D α1 B fastened between the projections, are just taut
(zero tension) when the whole system is at
α2 α2
00 C . What is the tensile stress in the steel
wires when the temperature of the sytem is
raised to 3000 C ?
C Given that abrass = 20 × 10−6 0C −1
2α + α asteel = 12 × 10−6 0C −1 Ysteel = 2 × 1011 N m−2
(A) (α1 + α 2 )L∆t (B) 1 2 L∆t
2
(α1 + 2α 2 )L∆t
(C) (D) Zero
2
2. In a vertical U-tube containing a liquid, the two
arms are maintained at different temperatures,
t1 and t 2. The liquid columns in the two arms (A) 48 × 107 Nm−2 (B) 84 ×107 Nm−2
have heights l1 and l2 respectively. The (C) 32 × 104 Nm −2 (D) 24 ×104 Nm −2
coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid 5. The variation of lengths of two metal rods
is equal to
A and B with change in temperature are shown
in Fig. The coefficients of linear expansion
a A for the metal A will be nearly:
(Given a B = 9 × 10−6 / 0C )
t2
t1 L1 1006
A B
L1 1004
Length(mm)
1002
1000
998
996
l1 − l 2 l1 − l2 994
(A) l t − l t (B) l t − l t Temperature (°C)
2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2
l1 + l2 l1 + l2 (A) 13 × 10 −6 / 0C (B) 27 × 10 −6 / 0C
(C) l t + l t (D) l t + l t
2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 (C) 18 × 10 −6 / 0C (D) 43 × 10 −6 / 0C
62
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUE STIONS C. Incandescent lamp
6. A metallic circular disc having a circular hole D. Electric fuse
at its centre rotates about an axis passing Column II
through its centre and perpendicular to its p. Radiation from a hot body
plane. When the disc is heated: q. Energy conversion
(A) its angular speed will decrease r. Melting
(B) its diameter will decrease
s. Thermal expansion of solids
(C) its moment of inertia will increase
(D) its angular speed will increase INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
7. A bimetallic strip is formed out of two identical 10. A steel rod of length 5 m is fixed between two
strips one of copper and the other of brass. support. The coefficient of linear expansion of
The co-efficients of linear expansion of the two steel is 12.5 × 10–6/°C. Calculate the stress
metals are α C and α B . On heating, the (in 108 N/m2) in the rod for an increase in
temperature of the strip goes up by ∆T and temperature of 40°C. Young’s modulus for steel
the strip bends to form an arc of radius of is 2 × 1011 Nm−2
curvature R. Then R is Passage for Q no 11,12
(A) proportional to ∆T Two rods of different metals having the same area
(B) inversely proportional to ∆T of cross section A are placed between two rigid
(C) proportional to | α B − α C | walls. For the first rod l1,α1, Y1 , and for the second
(D) Inversely proportional to | α B − α C |
rod l2 , α 2 , Y2 are the physical quantitities with usual
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
meanings. Now the temp of the system is increased
8. Whenever a liquid is heated in a container,
by t 0C .
expansion in liquid as well as container takes
place. If γ is the volume expansion coefficient Given [ l1 = 20 cm , α 1 = 18 × 10 − 6 ( 0 C )
−1
of liquid and a is coefficient of linear expansion
of the container match the entries of Column I Y1 = 10 × 1011 N / m 2 , l2 = 18cm
and Column II
( )
−1
Column I Column II α 2 = 20 × 10−6 oC Y2 = 9 × 1011 Nm −2 ]
(i) Liquid level rises with (A) γ = 2α
respect to container 11. The force with which the rods act on each other
(ii) Liquid level remains (B) 2α < γ < 3α is 9F KN then F =
same with respect to container 12. The length of the smallar rod at 1000 C is 3.6
(iii) Liquid level drops with (C) γ = 3α L cm then L =
respect to container LEVEL - V-KEY
(iv) Liquid level remains (D) γ > 3α SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
same with respect to ground 1) D 2)A 3)C 4) A 5) B
9. Column I gives some devices and Column II
MULTIPE ANSWER QUESTIONS
gives some processes on which the functioning
6) A,C 7) B. D
of these devices depend. Match the devices
in Column I with the processes in Column II. MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
(IIT 2007) 8) (i) → (D), (ii) → (C), (iii) → (B), (iv) → (A)
Column I 9) (A → s, B → q, C → p, q, D → q, r)
A. Bimetallic strip INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
B. Steam engine 10) 1 11) 4 12)6
63
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE-JEE
ADV PHYSICS-VOL-
ADV V
-PHY- VOL - V
LEVEL - V - HINTS From Eq. (iii), a A = 3 × 9 × 10 −6
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
= 27 × 10−6 / 0C
2 2
l l
1. Dc2 = l 2 − = l 2 (1 + α 2 t) 2 − (1 + α1 t) MULTIPE ANSWER QUESTIONS
2 2
6. A, C.
neglecting α 22 & α12 & solving above we get When the disc with a central hole is heated, diameter
α1 = 4α 2 of hole as hole as well as outer diameter of disc
2. Letρ0, ρ1 and ρ2 be the densities of the liquid at both increases. As a result of this, mass of the disc
temperatures 0, t -1 and t 2 respectively will be distributed more away from its axis which
To balance pressure, ρ1l1g = ρ2l2g means that moment of inertia will increase on
heating. Now according to the law of conservation
ρ0 ρ0 of angular momentum, as
or l1 = l2
1 + γt1 1 + γt 2 Iω = constant so ω will decrease.
7. Co-efficient of linear expansion of brass is greater
l1 − l2
⇒ l1 + l1γt 2 = l2 + l2 γt1 γ = l t − l t than that of copper i.e. α B > α C
21 12
∴ L B = L0 (1 + α B ∆T)
3. mg = l12d ρ1g
or (R + d)θ = L0 (1 + α B ∆T)
mg = l22 d ρ 2 g
Again, L C = L0 (1 + +αC ∆T)
ρ1 or Rθ = L0 (1 + α C ∆T)
l2 = l1 (1 + α s ∆ t ) ; ρ 2 =
1 + γ l ∆t
(R + d)θ 1 + α B ∆T
∴ =
(
l12 d ρ1 g = l12 1 + α s ∆ t 2 ) 1 ρ+ rdg∆ t
1
2
Rθ 1 + α C ∆T
brass
copper
1 + γ l ∆t = (1 + α s ∆t )
2
γ l ; 2α s + d
4. T .S = y ( ab − as ) × ? T θ R
5. Slope of line
A=
(1006 − 1000 ) mm = ? L = La or
R +d
= (1 + α B ∆T)(1 − α C ∆T) , by binomial
A R
T 0C ?T
approximation
6
i.e, mm / 0C = (1000 mm ) a A ....(i) or 1 +
d
= 1 + (α B − α C ) ∆T – Smaller terms
T R
Similarly, for line B d d
or = (α B − α C )∆T or R =
2 R (α B − αC )∆T
mm / 0C = (1002 mm ) a B ....(ii)
T ∴ R∝
1
. Option (b) is correct. and
Dividing E.q. (i) by Eq. (ii) ∆T
1
1000a A R∝
3= ; a A = 3a B | α B − αC | . Option (d) is correct
1002a B
64
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS l1 l2
8. Change in volume of a liquid w.r.t. container A C
∆V = V0 [ γ − 3 ∝]∆T B m2
α = co-effecient of linear expansion of material of
container and γ is volume expansion co-effecient (A) l2 Y1 + l1Y2 (B) 2 l2 Y1 + l1Y2
of liquid (C) l1Y2 + l2 Y1 (D) l2 Y1 − l1Y2
(a) If γ > 3α level of liquid rises w.r.t. container as 2. Two wires A and B of the same corss sectional
well as w.r.t. ground
area, young’s modulli Y1 , Y2 and coefficients
(b) γ = 3α level of liquid remains same w.r.t.
container but rises w.r.t. ground of linear expansion α1, α 2 respectively are
(c) 2α < γ < 3α level of liquid falls w.r.t. container joined together and fixed between rigid
but rises w.r.t. ground supports at either ends. The tension in the
compound wire when the wire A is heated and
(d) γ = 2α level of liquid falls w.r.t. container but
wire B is cooled at different temperature is
remains same w.r.t. ground same when wire A alone in cooled at same
9. Conceptulal temperature as wire B earlier. The correct
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS option is
10. Thermal stress = Yα ∆T α Y α Y
A) α > 2Y B) α < 2Y
1 2 1 2
= 2 × 1011 × 12.5 × 10–6 × 40 = 1×108 N / m 2 2 1 2 1
Answer is 1. α1 2Y2 α1 Y2
11. The increase in length due to expansion = decrease C) α > Y D) α > Y
2 1 2 1
in length due to elastic force 3. A thermostated chamber at a height h above
F l1 l2 earth’s surface maintained at 300 C has a clock
( l1α1 + l2α 2 ) = +
A y1 y2 fitted with uncompensated pendulum. The
Fl2 maker of the clock for chamber mistakenly
12. l2 = l2 + l2α t − Ay
|
designed it to maintain correct time at 200 C .
2
It is found that when the chamber is borught
to earth’s surface the clock in it clicked correct
LEVEL - VI
time. Re is the radius of Earth. The linear
coefficient of the material pf pendulum is
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS h h 5R R
1. Two rods AB and BC of equal cross-sectional A) R B) 5R C) h e D) he
e e
area are joined together and clamped between INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
two fixed supports as shown in the figure. For
4. The system shown in figure consists of 3
the rod AB and road BC lengths are l1 and l2
springs and two rods. If the temperature of the
coefficient of linear expansion are α1 and α 2 , rod is increased by ∆T , then the total energy
young’s modulus are Y1 and Y2 , densities are
99 2 2
ρ1 and ρ2 respectively. Now the temperaturee stored in three springs is β × kL α (∆T ) 2 .
484
of the compound rod is increased by θ .
Assume that there is no significant change in Determine the value of β . The spring are
the lengths of rod due to heating. then the time initially relaxed and there is no friction
taken by a transverse wave pulse to travel from anywher. For rods the coefficient of linear
end A to other end C of the compound rod is expansion is α
directly proportional to
65
THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATTER - II JEE-JEE
ADV PHYSICS-VOL-
ADV V
-PHY- VOL - V
L L/2 ∆g =
2hg
k 2k 3k Re
Variation of l with temperature = ∆l
1/2
l l ∆g ∆g
Th = 2π = 2π 1 − = T 1 +
LEVEL VI - KEY g − ∆g g g 2g
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS l + ∆l ∆l
1) C 2) B 3) B Tθ = 2π = T 1 +
g l
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS The clock shows correct time if Th = Tθ
4) 3
∆l ∆g
LEVEL VI - HINTS =
2l 2 g
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. Final length of the rod AB will be ∆l ∆g 2h h
Linear expansity = 10l = 10 g = 10 R = 5R
e e
Fl1
l1' = l1 (1 + α1θ ) −
Y1A 4. Let x1 , x2 and x3 be the compression in
Final length of the rod BC will be three
springs respectively, when the temperature of
Fl2
l2' = l2 (1 + α 2θ ) − the rods is increased by ? T .
Y2 A
Elongation in rod of length L is l1 = La ? T
Now, l1 + l2 = l1' + l2'
L La ? T
F ( l1α1 + l2α 2 ) Y1Y2 θ Elongation in rod of length is, l2 =
⇒ = 2 2
A l1Y2 + l2 Y1
3La ? T
Time taken by transverse wave pulse to travel from Total elongation, l1 + l2 =
the end A to the end C will be 2
l1' l2' 3La ? T
t= + x1 + x2 + x3 =
F F 2
Aρ1 Aρ2 From equilibrium of rods
It is given that l1' = l1 and l2' = l2 , kx1 = 2kx2 = 3kx3
⇒ Solving above equation we get,
then t ∝ l1Y2 + l2 Y1
9
2 T = Y Aα t Y2 A2α 2t2 − Y1 A1α 1t1 = Y1 A1α 1t2 x1 = La ? T
11
Y2 A2α 2t2 = Y1 A1α1 ( t1 + t2 ) 9
x2 = La ? T
t1 + t2 Y2 A2α 2 t1 − t2 Y2 A2α 2 − 2YA1α1 22
= =
t2 Y1 A1α1 t2 Y1 A1α1 3
x3 = La ? T
∆t Y2α 2 − 2Y1α1 11
=
t2 Y1α1 Total energy stored in 3 springs is,
Y2 α1 kx12 2kx22 3kx32
for ∆t = α Y2α 2 − 2Y1α1 2Y > α U= + +
1 2 2 2 2
3. Variation of acceleration due to gravity with altitude 297
= × ka 2 L2 ( ? T )
2
2h 484
gh = g 1 −
Re So, ß =3
66
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
SYNOPSIS Temperature gradient:
(θ1 − θ2 )
Ø These are three distinct modes of heat transfer: Ø l
is called the temperature gradient. It tells
conduction, convection and radiation how the temperature changes per unit distance
Conduction moved in the direction of heat flow.
Ø It is the transmission of heat without the actual Ø If dθ is small change in temperature in the direction
movement of the particles of the medium. of heat flow, across small element of length dx then,
Ø It takes place mainly in solids.
dθ
Ø It takes place in metals due to free electrons. temperature gradient = − . Here the negative
Ø Consider a good conductor in the shape of uniform dx
rod of length l, whose opposite parallel faces are sign indicates the decreses in temperature as the
distance increases in the direction of heat transfer
maintained at different steady temperatures θ1 and Ø In steady state, temperature gradient is same along
θ2 such that θ1 > θ2 . the length of the conductor.
Thermal resistance : (R)
l Ø Thermal resistance R of a conductor of length l ,
θ1 A Q θ2 cross-section A and conductivity K is given by
l
Ø Under steady state conditions the amount of heat Q R=
KA
flowing from hot face to the cold face of the block is Ø The S.I unit of R is K / W
A (θ1 − θ 2 ) t KA (θ1 − θ 2 ) t Ø Dimensional formula of R is M −1 L−2T 3θ
Q∝ or Q =
l l Note:If one end of a metal rod is kept in a steam jacket
Ø Here K is the constant of proportionality called and other end is kept in an ice block, then the amount
coefficient of thermal conductivity or thermal KA(θ1 − θ 2 )t
conductivity of the material of the block of ice that melts is m = lLice
Ø Co-efficient of thermal conductivity is defined
Here l =Length of metal rod
as the rate of flow of heat per unit area per unit
Ø Diffusivity (D) is the ratio of thermal conductivity
temperature gradient in steady state
(K) to thermal capacity per unit volume ( ms / V )
Q/t
K= of a material.
θ −θ
A 1 2 Ø The rate of flow of heat across the material of a
l block between the parallel faces is given by
Ø The S.I unit of K is W/m-K dQ dθ
Ø The C.G.S unit of K is cal/s-cm-oC = − KA ; Here the negative sign indicates
dt dx
Ø Dimensional formula of K is MLT −3θ −1
the decrease in temperature as the distance increases
Ø K depends on the nature of the metal. in the direction of heat transfer.
Ø K is independent of length, area of cross section Ø Q /t is the rate of heat flow (or) rate of energy
and temperature difference.
Ø For a perfect conductor K =∝ . transfer, which is equal to power P. Then
l
Ø For a perfect insulator K= 0 ∆θ = P = PR . This equation is useful for
KA
Ø If K value is more, it is a good conductor of heat
solving problems when heat flows through layers of
Ø If K value is less, it is a bad conductor of heat.
materials placed in series or parallel.
66 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
W.E-1: The temperature of the two ends A and B of a W.E-3: A rod of length L with sides fully insulated
rod of length 25cm and circular cross section are is made of a material whose thermal
100º C and 0º C respectively.
. In the steady state, conductivity K varies with temperature as
find the temperature at a point 10cm from the end α
B (ignore loss of heat from curved surface of the K = , where α is constant. The ends of rod
T
body)? (EAM-2013M)
Sol: are at temperature T1 and T2 ( T2 > T1 ) . Find
θ the rate of heat flow per unit area of rod.
0 10cm 0
Sol:
100 C 0C
A T1 T2
B
25cm
Let, temperature at A is θ1 = 100ºC dx
and temperature at B is θ 2 = 0º C dQ dT
= q = − KA
Length of the rod L = 25cm dt dx
Let temperature at distance x = 10cm from Heat transfer across each differential element is same
end B is θ . In study state temperature gradient is
α dT
constant q = − A
T dx
θ1 − θ2 θ −θ2 100 − 0 θ − 0
i.e., = ; = ⇒ θ = 40º C
L x 25 10 dT α A T2
⇒ q = − L ln T
L T2
W.E-2: Two walls of thickness l1 and l2 and ther-
∫0
qdx = −α A∫
T1 T 1
mal conductivities K1 and K2 are in contact. α A T1
In the steady state, if the temperature at the q= ln
L T2
outer faces are T1 and T2 ,find the temperature
W.E-4: A cubical thermocol ice box of side length
at the common wall. (AIEEE-2008) 30cm has thickness of 5.0cm. If 4.0 kg of ice is
Sol: put in the box, estimate the amount of ice re-
θ1 θ θ2 maining after 6hr. The outside temperature is
45ºC, and co-efficient of thermal conductivity
Q K1 K2 Q of the thermocol is 0.01 J s-1 m-1 K-1. (Latent
Heat of fusion of water = 335 × 103 J kg-1).
l l Sol: Total mass of ice in box = 4 kg
1 2
Area A = 6( side) = 6×30×30×10−4 = 54×10−2 m2
2
Let θ be the temperature of the junction or interface.
Q Thickness d = 5 × 10 −2 m
In steady state, = constant
t Time t = 6 x 3600 = 21,600sec
Let m is mass of ice melted in 6hr
K 1 A ( θ1 − θ ) K 2 A ( θ − θ 2 )
∴ = KA ( ∆θ ) t
l1 l2 = mLice
d
K1θ1 K 2θ2
+ 0.01× 54 ×10−2 × 45 × 6 × 3600
l1 l2 K1θ1l2 +K 2θ2l1 −2
= m × 335 ×103
θ= 5 ×10
K1 K2 =
+ K1l2 + K2l1 ⇒ m = 0.3 Kg
l1 l2 ∴ Mass of ice remaining after 6 hrs
= 4kg - 0.3kg = 3.7Kg
NARAYANAGROUP 67
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-5: A metal rod AB of length 10x has its one
r −a b−a b−a
end in ice at 0º C and the other end B in water = ⇒ r = a + x
x l l
at 100º C . If a point P on the rod is maintained
at 400º C , then it is found that equal amounts dx
Thermal resistance of the element is dR =
of water and ice evaporate and melt per unit Kπ r 2
time. The latent heat of evaporation of water ∴ Thermal resistance of the cylinder is
is 540 cal/g and latent heat of melting of ice is
−2
80 cal/g. If the point P is at a distance of λ x 1 b−a
l l
dx
R=∫
K π ∫0 l
= a+ x dx
from the ice end A, find the value of λ . [neglect 0
Kπ r 2
any heat loss to the surrounding.] (JEE-
2009) l
Sol. b−a
−1
a + x
λx (10 − λ)x 1 l
P =
Kπ b−a
−
l 0
0°C(ice) 400°C 100°C
(steam)
l 1 1
= − = l
K π ( a − b ) b a K π ab
dmice dmvapour 400 KS 300 KS
= ; λ xL = (10 − λ ) xL
dt dt ice vapour
Conduction of heat through a Composite slab
400 300
= = λ =9 a) When different rods of same cross
λ × 80 (10 − λ ) 540 sections are connected in series.
W.E-6: Find the value of the thermal resistance of θ1 θ2
the non-uniform cylindrical rod of thermal
K1 K2 A
conductivity K and length l as shown in figure.
l1 θ l2
Ø Let two rods of same cross-sectional area having
a b lengths l1 and l2 and co-efficient of thermal
conductivities K1 and K2 are connected in series.
For the 1st rod θ1 − θ = P R1 ......... (i)
For the 2nd rod θ − θ 2 = P R2 ........ (ii)
l
Sol. For combined rod θ1 − θ 2 = P ( Reff ) .... (iii)
dx Eq. (i) + (ii) gives (θ1 −θ2 ) = P( R1 + R2 ) ..... (iv)
from eq. (iii) and (iv) Reff = R1 + R 2
a b
Hence , the effective thermal resistance for rods in
series is the sum of thermal resistances of each rod.
x
Ø In series, Reff = R1 + R 2
l l1 + l2 l l l
= 1 + 2 Q R =
Consider a small element of width dx at a distance Keff A K1 A K2 A KA
x from one end as shown in figure.
⇒
l1 + l2 l l
= 1 + 2 ⇒ K eff =
( l1 + l 2 ) K1K 2
From similar triangles K eff K1 K 2 l1 K 2 + l2 K1
68 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
2K K W.E-7: A room has a window fixed with a pane of
Ø If l1 = l2 then K eff = K + K
1 2
1 2 area 1.2m2. The glass has thickness 2.2mm. If
Ø If n rods of different materials and same area of the temperature outside the room is 36ºC and
cross sections are connected in series then, effectivethe temperature inside is 26ºC
thermal conductivity is (a) calculate the heat flowing into the room
l1 + l2 + ... + ln l1 l l every hour.
= + 2 + ... + n
K eff K1 K 2 Kn (b) If the same single pane window is replaced
b) When different slabs of same thickness are by double paned window with an air gap of
0.50 cm between the two panes calculate the
connected in parallel
heat flowing into the room every hour.
Ø Let two rods of same length having cross-sectional
areas A1,A2 and thermal conductivities K1,K2 are Kg = 0.80Wm−1K −1; Kair = 0.0234Wm−1K −1.
arranged in parallel. Sol:(a) We assume that one side of the pane is at 36ºC
t and the other side (inside the room) is at 26ºC.
θ1 θ2
Given Thickness of the window pane
K1 A1 d = 2.2mm = 2.2 × 10−3 m
Q Area of the window pane A = 1.2m 2
A(θ2 −θ1 ) 0.8×1.2×10
K2 A2
Q
=K = = 4364 J / s.
t d 2.2×10−3
Ø The quantity of heat supplied is distributed between Therefore heat flown into the room per hour is
Q Q Q Q = 4364 × 3600 = 1.57 × 107 J
the two rods ; i.e = 1 + 2 (or) P = P1 + P2
t t t (b) When single pane window is replaced by a
θ1 − θ2 θ1 − θ2 θ1 − θ 2 double paned window we have two layers of glass
⇒ = +
Reff R1 R2 and one layer of air between them.
Thermal resistance for glass
1 1 1 RR
∴ = + Reff = 1 2
Reff R1 R2 (or) R1 + R2 dg 2.2 ×10 −3
Rg = = = 2.29 ×10−3 K/ W
K g Ag 0.8 ×1.2
1 1 1
Ø In parallel, = +
Reff R1 R2 Thermal resistance for the air gap
K ( A1 + A2 ) K1 A1 K 2 A2 da 0.5×10−2
⇒ = + Ra = = =178×10−3 K / W
l l l Ka Aa 0.0234×1.2
K1 A1 + K 2 A2
∴ K eff =
A1 + A2 Net thermal resistance RT = R g + Ra + Rg
K1 + K 2
Ø If A1 = A2 then K eff =
2 (
= 2.29 × 10−3 + 178 ×10 −3 + 2.29 × 10−3 )
−3
If n rods of same length and different area of cross = 182.6 × 10 K / W
sections of different materials are connected in
parallel then, effective thermal conductivity is ∆θ 10
P= = = 55 J / s
K eff ( A1 + A2 + ..... + An ) K1 A1 K 2 A2 K A RT 182.6 × 10 −3
= + + ..... + n n
l l l l
Therefore heat flown into the room per hour is
K A + K 2 A2 + ... + K n An
K eff = 1 1 Q = P × t = 1.98 ×105 J
A1 + A2 + .... + An
NARAYANAGROUP 69
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-8: Three rods AB,BC and BD made of the 00C 00C
same material and having the same area of
cross section have been joined as shown in the Brass Steel
figure. The ends A,C and D are held at
θ
temperatures 200 C , 800 C and 800 C
respectively. If each rod is of same length, then Cu
find the temperature at the junction B of the
three rods ( 2010 E ) 0
100 C
Let θ is the junction temperature. Given A = 4cm2
A B C lcu = 46cm, lBr = 13cm, & lsteel = 12cm
Kcu = 0.92, KBr = 0.26&Ksteel = 0.12CGS
. . .units
Q Q Q
In steady state t = t +
cu brass t steel
D
Sol. KCu A(100 −θ ) KBr A(θ − 0) Ksteel A(θ − 0)
= +
A R R C lcu lBr lsteel
B
20 C
0 0
80 C 0.92A(100 −θ ) 0.26A(θ −0) 0.12A(θ −0)
= +
46 13 12
R
⇒ θ = 40º C
D
Q KCu A (100 − θ )
80 C0
∴ = = 4.8 cal / sec
t cu lCu
Let θ B is the temperature of the junction W.E-10: A cylinder of radius R made of a material
Q Q Q of thermal conductivity K1 is surrounded by
In steady state, t + t = t
DB CB BA cylindrical shell of inner radius R and outer
radius 2R made of a material of thermal con-
KA(80 −θB ) KA (80 − θB ) KA(θB − 20)
+ = ductivity K 2 . The two ends of the combined
l l l
system are maintained at two different tem-
80 − θ B + 80 −θ B =θ B − 20 ⇒θ B = 60º C peratures. There is no loss of heat across the
W.E-9:Three rods of Copper, Brass and Steel are cylindrical surface and system is in steady state.
welded together to form a Y-shaped structure. What is the effective thermal conductivity of
Area of cross - section of each rod is 4 c m .
2 the system? (EAM-2013M)
End of copper rod is maintained at 1000 C , K 2
Heat flow R 2R
where as ends of brass, steel are kept at 0 C .0
Lengths of the copper, brass and steel rods are K 1
46,13 and 12 cms respectively. The rods are θ1 θ2
thermally insulated from surroundings except
at ends . Thermal conductivities of copper, Sol. A1 = π R , A2 = π 4 R − R
2 2 2
( )
brass and steel are 0.92,0.26 and 0.12 CGS Two cylinders are in parallel,
∴ Keff ( A1 + A2 ) = K1 A1 + K2 A2
units respectively . Rate of heat flow through
copper rod is : (JEE-2014)
Sol. K π R 2 + K 2 3π R 2
K eff = 1 2
( K1 + 3K 2 )
;i.e., K eff =
π R + 3π R 2
4
70 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
W.E-11 Two plates each of area A, thickness L1 Sol: Given KX = 2KY
and L2 thermal conductivities K1 and K 2 L L
respectively are joined to form a single plate Rx = and RY = , i.e., RY = 2RX
Kx A KY A
of thickness ( L1 + L2 ) . If the temperatures of If RX = R , RY = 2 R
the free surfaces are θ1 and θ 2 . Calculate The corresponding thermal network is as shown
(a) Rate of flow of heat 2R C 2R
0
(b)Temperature of interface 100 C R 2R 200C
A B E F
R D R
4R
Heat 0
100 C R
flow
2R 200C
K1 K2 A B E F
θ2 2R
θ1
100 C R θΒ 4R/3 θΕ 2R 20 C
0 0
L1 L2
A B E F
Sol.(a) If the thermal resistance of the two plates are
100 − 20 100 − θ B
R1 and R2 respectively then as plates are in se- = ⇒ θ B = 81.54º C
4R R
ries, R+ + 2R
3
L L
Rs = R1 + R2 = 1 + 2 100 − 20 θ − 20
AK1 AK 2 = E ⇒ θ E = 56.92º C
4R 2R
R+ + 2R
dQ ∆θ (θ1 − θ 2 ) A (θ1 − θ 2 ) 3
H= = = =
dt Rs ( R1 + R2 ) L1 L2 W.E-13:Three rods AB,BC and BD having thermal
K + K conductivities in the ratio 1:2:3 and lengths
1 2 in the ratio 2:1:1 are joined as shown in figure.
(b) If θ is common temperature of interface then The ends A,C and D are at temperatures
θ1 − θ 2 θ1 − θ θ R +θ R θ1 ,θ2 and θ3 respectively. Find the temperature
= [Q = ] ∴ θ= 1 2 2 1
R1 + R2 R1
H1 H2 ( R1 + R2 ) of the junction B.
( Assume steady state and θ1 > θ > θ 2 > θ 3 )
L2 L1
θ1 K +θ2 K D θ3
L
θ= 2 1
Q R=
L1 L2 KA
K + K B θ
1 2 C 2
W.E-12: Rods X and Y of identical dimensions
but of different materials are joined as
shown in figure. The length of each part is
the same
C A θ1
Y Y Sol.Let the thermal conductivities of the rods AB,BC
Y and BD be K, 2K and 3K respectively and their
A X B E F
X X
lengths be 2L, L and L we have
∆Q ∆Q ∆Q
D ∆t = ∆t + ∆t
If the temperature of end A and F be AB BC BD
maintained at 1000 C and 200 C respectively,, KA (θ1 − θ ) 2 KA (θ − θ 2 ) 3KA (θ − θ3 )
i.e., = +
then find the temperatures of the junctions 2L L L
1
B and E. (Thermal conductivity of X is double
that of Y)
∴θ = (θ1 + 4θ2 + 6θ3 )
11
NARAYANAGROUP 71
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-14: A cylinder of radius R and length l is made surface of ice will be at 00c. If A is the area of the
up of a substance, whose thermal conductivity
K varies with the distance x from the axis as lake, heat escaping through ice in time dt,
K=K 1x+K2. Determine the effective thermal 0 − ( −θ )
conductivity between the flat faces of the dQ = KA dt
cylinder. y
dx
-00C
Ice
y
axis
00C dy
Sol.Let us subdivide the entire cylinder into a number of Water
coaxial cylindrical shells of infinitesimally small
thickness dx .
Cross sectional area of the shell is 2π x ( dx ) . Ø Now due to escaping of this heat if dy thickness
Using the expression for the effective thermal of water in contact with lower surface of ice freezes,
conductivity.
dQ = mL = ρ ( dyA ) L [ as m=ρ dV=ρ A dy ]
∑AK 1
R
K ( 2π xdx )
∑ Ai ∫0
K eff = i i
; K eff = dy K θ 1
∑A = × ⇒ t = ρ L ∫ ydy = 1 ρ L y 2
y
ρL y
i
dt Kθ 0 2 Kθ
R
1 Ø It is clear that time taken to double and triple the
( K1x + K2 ) 2π x( dx)
π R2 ∫0
= thickness will be in the ratio
R t1 : t 2 : t3 = 12 : 22 : 32 , i.e., t1 : t2 : t3 =1 : 4 : 9 .....
=
2
2 ∫ ( 1
)
K1 x 2 + K 2 x dx = ( 2 K1 R + 3K 2 ) Ø The time taken to change the thickness of ice layer
from y1 to y2 is t ∝ ( y22 − y12 )
R 0 3
W.E-15. Two identical rods are joined at their
middle points. The ends are maintained at Ø The time intervals to change thickness from 0 to y,
constant temperatures as indicated. Find the from y to 2y and so on will be in the ratio
temperature of the junction ∆t1 : ∆t 2 : ∆t3 = (12 − 02 ) : ( 22 − 12 ) : ( 32 − 22 )
0
75 C
i.e., ∆t1 : ∆t2 : ∆t3 = 1 : 3 : 5 ...
W.E 16. The thickness of ice in a lake is 5cm and
0 0
50 C 180 C the atmospheric temperature is - 100 C .
Calculate the time required for the thickness
of ice to grow to 7cm. Thermal conductivity of
250C ice = 4 × 10−3 cal / cm − s − 0 C ; density of ice
Sol: Under study state condition
Let θ be the temperature of the junction. = 0.92 g / cm3 and latent heat of fusion of ice
180 −θ θ − 75 θ − 50 θ − 25 = 80 cal/g
= + + ⇒θ = 82.5ºC
R R R R ρL 2
Growth of ice layer on ponds Sol: ∆t =
2 KT
( x2 − x12 )
Ø When atmospheric temperature falls below 00C the 92 ×10−2
=
2 × 4 ×10−3 × 100 ( 7 − 5 )
water in the lake will start freezing. Let at any time 80 2 2
t, the thickness of ice layer in the lake be y and
= 22080s = 6.13Hr
temperature of water in contact with the lower
72 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
Electrical, Thermal & Fluid Analogy
Electric Current Thermal current Fluid current
Electric charge flows Heat flows from higher tem Fluid flows from higher
from higher potential to perature to lower temperature pressure to lower pressure
lower potential
The rate of flow of charge The rate of flow of heat may The rate of flow of fluid is
is called the electric be called heat current called Fluid current
i.e., H = dQ V=
volume
=Area×Velocity
dq
current, i.e, I = dt Time
dt
The relation between Similarly, the heat current may P
the electric current be related with the V=
and the potential temperature difference as R
difference is given by θ −θ
Ohm's law,i.e, H= 1 2
V1 − V2 R
I= where R is the thermal Where R is fluid
R
where R is the electrical resistance of the conductor Resistance
resistance of the
conductor
The electrical resistance The thermal resistance may P 8ηl
is defined as be defined as R= =
V πr 4
l
ρl l R=
R= = KA co-efficient of viscosity
A σA
where K=thermal
where resistivity and conductivity of conductor
electrical conductivity
V −V dQ θ −θ
dq
=i = 1 2 =H = 1 2 V=
P
dt R dt R R
σA KA
= (V1 − V2 ) = (θ1 − θ2 )
l l
NARAYANAGROUP 73
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Radial flow of heat Ingen hausz experiment
Ø Consider two thin spherical shells of radii r1 and Ø If a number of identical rods of different metals are
coated with wax and one of their ends is put in
r2 . A medium of thermal conductivity ‘K’ is boiling water, then in steady state the square of
contained between these shells. A heater is placed length of the bar over which wax melts is directly
at the centre of the shells. Heat is conducted through
the medium radially from inner to the outer shell. proportional to the thermal conductivity of the
Let the temperatures of the inner and the outer shells L2
metal.i.e L2
∝ K ⇒ =Constant
be θ1 and θ2 at steady state. K
W.E-18. In the Ingen hausz method to compare the
dθ thermal conductivities of different substances,
the length upto which wax melted in copper
r P
and zinc rods are 9.3 cm and 5cm respectively.
1
dr Compare their thermal conductivities.
r Sol.Given lc = 9.3cm and lz = 5cm
2
K c lc2 9.3
r2 = 2 = Q = 3.46
Ø Choose an element of radial thickness dr at a radial K z l z 5
distance ‘r’ from the centre of shells. Let dθ be Thus, the thermal conductivity of copper is 3.46
the temperature difference across it. The rate of times that of zinc.
flow of heat through the element W.E-19. A steam pipe with a radius R1 is sur-
dθ 2 dθ rounded by an insulating jacket with an outer
H = KA = K π r dr (or)
dr radius of R0 . If the temperature of the inner
r2
dr 4π K
θ2
4π Kr1r2 (θ1 − θ2 ) ( θ1 ) and outer ( θ0 ) surfaces are fixed (θ1 > θ0 ) ,
∫r r 2 = − H θ∫ dθ ⇒ H = ( r2 − r1 )
1 1 find the heat flow through the jacket. (Apply
4π Kr1r2 (θ1 − θ 2 ) the heat conduction equation to steady state
Thickness of the shell , ( r2 − r1 ) =
H radial heat flow corresponding to cylindrical
W.E-17. A hollow sphere of glass whose external symmetry).
and internal radii are 11 cm and 9 cm respec- Sol: Consider a cylindrical shell of thickness ‘dr’ and
tively is completely filled with ice at 0ºC and radius ‘r’.
placed in a bath of boiling water. How long Cross sectional view of steam pipe is as shown in
will it take for the ice to melt completely? figure.
given thatdensity ofice = 0.9 g/cm 3, latent heat
of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g and thermal
conductivity of glass = 0.002 cal / cm-sºC.
4π Kr1r2 ∆θ
Sol: In steady state, rate of heat flow H = r − r R0 r dr
2 1
Substituting the values,
R1
H=
( 4)(π )( 0.002)(11)( 9)(100 − 0)
(11− 9) (or)
dQ dQ dm
= 124.4 cal / s ; = L Let L be the length of the cylinder.
dt dt dt
dm dQ / dt 124.4 The heat transferred per second,
∴ = = = 1.555 g / s
dt L 80 dQ dθ dθ R dr
q= = − KA = − K ( 2π rL ) ⇒∫
0
Total mass of ice, m = ρice ( 4π r ) = ( 0.9 )( 4 ) π ( 9 )
2 2
1 dt dr dr R r 1
= 916 g 2π KL (θ1 − θ0 )
∴ Time taken for the ice to melt completely 2π LK θ0 ∴q =
t=
m
=
916
= 589s
=−
q ∫θ1
dθ
ln 0
R
( dm / dt ) 1.555 R1
74 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
W.E-20. A steam pipe of radius 5 cm carries steam Ex: Hot air rises by natural convection. sea breeze,
at 100ºC. The pipe is covered by a jacket of land breeze, trade winds, monsoons etc. are also
insulating material 2cm thick having a ther- due to free convection.
mal conductivity 0.07 W/m-K. If the tempera- Ø In natural convection, gravity plays an important
ture at the outer wall of the pipe jacket is 20ºC, role and it always takes place vertically carrying
how much heat is lost through the jacket per the heat upwards.
meter length in an hour?
Ø Natural convection can not take place in a gravity
Sol.Thermal resistance per meter length of an element
free space such as orbiting satellite or freely falling
at a distance r and thickness dr is
lift. Ex: (i) Ventilators placed below the roof allow
k = 0.07 W / m-K hot air to escape (ii) working of chimney.
(b)Forced convection
Ø If the fluid particles are forced to move by an
7cm r dr external agent (like fan or by a blower or by a pump
etc.,) it is called forced convection.
5cm
Ex: heat transfer to parts of human body (blood
circulation).
Convection co-efficient
Ø In forced convection, the rate of heat flow is
dR =
dr 1 proportional to the surface area and the
K ( 2π r ) QR = temperature difference between the surface and the
KA
−2
fluid. P = Q / t = hA ∆θ .
1 7×10 dr
Total resistance R = ∫ r d R =
r
2π K ∫5×10 r
2
−2 Ø Where h is the coefficient of convection. A is surface
1
area over which fluid moves, ∆θ is the difference
1 7 1
ln (1.4 ) = 0.765 K/W
= ln = of temperature between the surface and the fluid.
2π K 5 ( 2π )( 0.07 )
W.E-21. A runner moves along the road at 2 ms-1 in
Temperature difference still air that is at a temperature of 29oC. His
Heat current H = Thermal resis tan ce surface area is 1.4m2, of which approximately
85% is exposed to the air. Find the rate of
(100 − 20) = 104.6W convective heat loss from his skin at a
= temperature 35 o C to the outside air?
0.765
Coefficient of convection for dry air and bare
Heat lost in one hour = Heat current × time
skin at wind speed 2ms-1 is 22W/m2-oC.
= (104.6 )( 3600 ) J = 3.76 × 10 J 5
Q
Sol: = h A ∆θ ; h=22 W/m2-oC
Convection t
Ø The process in which heat is transferred from one ∆θ =35-29=6oC
place to other by the actual movement of particles A = 85% of the surface area of the runner
of medium due to difference in density . 1.4 × 85
100 ≅ 1.2m
Ø Convection takes place in fluids. It is more i.e., A = 2
predominant in liquids. Q
Ø Heat transfer in mercury takes place by = 22 ×1.2 × 6 = 160W
t
conduction not by convection.
Ø Convection is of two types. (a) Natural or Free Radiation:
convection (b) Forced convection. Ø It is the process of transmission of heat from one
(a) Natural or Free convection place to another without any material medium.
Ø If the fluid particles move only due to the Ø It is the fastest process of heat transmission.
temperature difference (density difference), it is Thermal radiation:
called natural convection. Ø Heat energy transferred by means of
electromagnetic waves is Thermal radiation.
NARAYANAGROUP 75
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Nature and properties of radiant energy: Reflecting power (r):
Ø It consists of long wavelength electromagnetic Amount of radiant energy reflected
radiation. r=
Amount of radiant energy incident
Ø The wave length of these waves is nearly 800nm to Transmitting power (t):
4,00,000 nm. (or 7800Ao to above 1 mm)
Amount of radiant energy transmitted
Ø It occupies the infrared region of the t=
electromagnetic spectrum. Amount of radiant energy incident
Ø velocity is 3 x 108 ms-1 like light waves. aλ + r + t = 1 , ‘ aλ ’ is absorptive power, ‘r’ is
Ø The intensity of radiant energy obeys inverse square reflecting power & ‘t’ is the transmitting power.
1 Black body radiation:
law. I ∝ ; where I = Intensity of radiation Ø A body which completely absorbs all the heat
d2
d = distance from the source radiation incident on it is called a perfect black body
(or)
Prevost’s theory of heat exchange: A body which emits the radiation of all wavelengths
Ø Every object emits and absorbs radiant energy at when it is at high temperature is called perfect black
all temperatures except at absolute zero. body.
Ø The energy emitted by a body does not depend on Ø Ferry’s black body and Wien’s black body are
the temperature of the surroundings. examples of artificial black bodies.
Ø The rate of emission increases with the increase in Distribution of energy in black body
the temperature of the body. spectrum
Ø If two bodies continuously emit and absorb same
amount of energy, then they are in thermo dynamic Y
1646K
equilibrium.
Ø The radiant energy emitted by a body depends on 1449K
the nature of the surface of the body, surface area Ελ 1259K
of the body and temperature of the body.
1095K
Emissive power (eλ ) :
Ø The amount of energy emitted per second per unit 908K
surface area of a body at a given temperature for a 904K
given wavelength range (λ and λ + dλ ) is called
emissive power.
X
Emissivity (e): (λ)
Ø The ratio of radiant energy emitted by a surface to
radiant energy emitted by a black body under same Observations from graph
conditions is called emissivity. Ø Intensity of radiation increases with increase of
wavelength.
Ø For a perfect black body emissivity e= 1 and e = 0
(for perfect reflector);e=0.97(for human skin) Ø For a particular wavelength ( λ m ) the intensity of
Absorptive power (aλ ) : radiation emitted is maximum. Beyond λ m intensity
Ø At a given temperature, for a given wavelength of radiation emitted decreases.
range, the ratio of energy absorbed to the energy Ø Area under the curve ( E λ versus λ ) represents
incident on the body is absorptive power. total energy emitted per sec per unit area by a black
Amount of radiant energy absorbed body corresponding to all the wavelengths.
∴ aλ = Wien’s displacement law:
Amount of radiant energy incident
Ø Wavelength corresponding to the maximum
Ø aλ = 1 .( for black body) intensity ( λ m ) shift towards left (or smaller
76 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
wavelength side) along the axis (i.e decreases ) as Ø Radiant energy emitted by a hot body per second
the temperature of the body is increased. So the P = eAσT 4
wavelength ( λ m ) varies inversely as the absolute Stefan - Boltzmann’s law:
Ø If a black body at absolute temperature T is
1 surrounded by an enclosure at absolute
temperature of the body. λ m ∝ or λ m T = b
T temperature To , then the rate of loss of heat energy
where ‘b’ is known as Wien’s constant per unit area by radiation is given by
b = 2.9×10−3 m− K E = σ (T 4 − T0 4 )
Y For any hot body, E = σ e(T 4 − T04 )
Where ‘e’is the emissivity of the body.
λm Ø Radiant power of any body
P = σ Ae (T 4 − T04 )
Temperature of the Sun & Solar constant :
Ø The temperature of the Sun can be determined by
X assuming it to be a black body.
(T)
λm Earth
R
1 X
T
Ø Total amount of radiant energy emitted by the sun
λ m1 υm2
per second = ( 4π R ) σ T ;R=Radius of the Sun
T
= 2 = 2 4
λm2 T1 υ m1
Ø let ‘r’ be the mean distance between the sun and
Ø On increasing temperature of a body, its colour
changes gradually from red → orange → yellow the earth and S 0 be the solar constant. Then the
→ green → blue → violet. energy received per second by the sphere of radius
Ø Thus the temp of violet star is maximum and temp ( r ) is 4π r 2S0
of red star is minimum.
Solar constant: Solar constant is defined as “the
Ø Sun is a medium category star with λ m = 4753A 0 rate at which the radiant energy of the sun received
(yellow colour) and temp about 6000K. by perfectly black surface, normal to unit area in
Stefan’s law: the absence of atmosphere, when kept at distance
Ø The amount of heat radiated by a black body per equal to the mean distance of earth from the Sun”
second per unit area is directly proportional to the 4π R 2σ T 4 = 4π r 2S0
fourth power of its absolute temperature.
r 2 S
1/4
r 2 S
E ∝ T 4 ⇒ E = σ T 4 ( σ = Stefan’s constant ) T = 0 ⇒ T = 0
4
σ = 5.67 ×10−8Wm−2 K −4 R σ R σ
Hence, the surface temperature of the Sun can be
Dimensional formula of σ is M L T K
1 0 −3 −4
Ø determined.
NARAYANAGROUP 77
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Kirchhoff’s law : Ø Cooling curve
Ø At a give temperature, for a given wavelength range,
Y
the ratio of emissive power to absorptive power of
a body is constant and that constant is equal to the θ0
emissive power of a perfect black body at the given
temperature and wavelength. θ1
Temperature
θ2
eλ
i.e. = constant = Eλ
aλ t1 t2 X
Time
i.e. good absorbers are good emitters.
Ø Fraunhoffer lines in solar spectrum can be explained
θ 2 = θ 0 + (θ1 − θ 0 ) e − Kt + C , θ 0 =temperature of the
on the basis of Kirchhoff’s law.
Green house effect surroundings
Ø Limitations of Newton’s law of cooling:
Ø The warming of earth atmosphere and surface due
a) The excess of temperature (θ − θ 0 ) must
to greenhouse gases( CO2, N2O,C.F.C, O3 ) is called
green house effect. not be large i.e. (θ − θ 0 ) ≤ 30 − 350
Newton’s law of cooling b) Newton’s law of cooling is a special case of
Stefan’s law, because this law can be derived from
Ø Rate of loss of heat ∝ (θ − θ 0 ) Stefan’s law.
Ø The curve between rate of cooling and temperature
dQ dθ difference is a straight line passing through origin.
⇒ = K (θ − θ 0 ) ⇒ − ms = K (θ − θ 0 )
Q R ∝ (θ − θ0 )
dt dt
dθ K
⇒− = (θ − θ 0 ) (K= Cooling constant) Y
dt ms
dθ
where − = Rate of fall of temperature or rate R
dt
of cooling.
Ø Rate of loss of heat of a hot body due to cooling
X
dQ dθ (θ−θ0)
= ms .
dt dt
Here ‘m’, ‘s’ are mass and specific heat of the body. Ø Curve between the rate of cooling and body
temperature.
Ø The rate of cooling of a hot body is directly
proportional to the mean excess temperature of R = K (θ − θ 0 ) = Kθ − Kθ 0
the body above that of the surroundings, provided Y
the difference in temperature of the body and that
of surroundings is small.
dθ θ +θ dθ R
= K 1 2 − θ s here = Rate of cooling. θ0
dt 2 dt X
(θ)
θ1 ,θ 2 are the initial and final temperatures of the
body respectively. θ s is temperature of surroundings −Κθ0
and K is the cooling constant.
78 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
Ø Because log e (θ − θ0 ) = −Kt + log e A .This is the Ø In Newton’s law of cooling, if air is dry then the
law of cooling remains valid even at high
equation of a straight line, hence the curve between temperatures.
log (θ − θ0 ) and ‘t’ will be a straight line . Ø To determine specific heat of a liquid: In an
Y experiment of Newton’s law of cooling m1 is the
mass of calorimeter, m2 is the mass of water in it
or m3 is the mass of liquid in it. If t1 and t2 are the
loge (θ−θ0)
times taken by water and liquid to cool from
temperatures θ2 to θ1 in the surroundings of
temperature θ s , then specific heat of liquid can be
X
t calculated from
Ø Curve between log e R and log e (θ − θ 0 ) t1 m1 s1 + m 2 s 2
=
t 2 m1 s1 + m 3 s 3
Y
Where s1 , s2 and s3 are the specific heats of
calorimeter, water and liquid respectively.
Additional formulae:
loge R
Ø Rate of fall of temperature of a body at temperature
T kept in surroundings of temperature T0 is
X
loge (θ−θ0)
Ø If the rates of cooling of two bodies are same then
dθ eA 4 4
=
dt Vρs
T − T0 ( )
the rate of fall of temperature of the body with highest Ø Initial rate of fall of temperature of a spherical body
dθ 1
heat capacity will be the least. i.e. ∝ 4 3
dt ms of radius ‘r’ can be found by substituting V = πr
3
if R is constant and A = 4πr 2 in the above formula.
Ø If two liquids are cooled under identical conditions
(i.e. surface area, temperature difference and time i.e.,
dθ e4πr 2
=
dt 4 πr 3ρs
(
T 4 − T04 =
3e
rρs
) (T4 − T04 )
difference are same) then their rates of cooling will
3
be the same. R1 = R2 ⇒ (θ −θ0 )1 = (θ −θ0 )2
Ø Initial rate of fall of temperature of cubical body of
Ø If two liquids are cooled under identical side length L is
circumstances then their rates of fall of temperature
dθ e6L2 4
( ) (Q A = 6L2 , V = L3 )
will not be same. The rate of fall of temperature
= T − T04
( Rθ ) of that liquid will be minimum whose specific dt L3ρs
( )
1
heat is maximum and vice versa. i.e.Rθ ∝ =
6e
T 4 − T04
ms Lρs
Ø When a solid sphere of radius r, density ρ and
Ø Ratio of initial rates of fall of temperature of a sphere
specific heat S is heated to temperature θ and then and a cube of same material in the same surroundings
cooled in an enclosure to temperature θ0 , then its
( dθ / dt )1 e L T4 − T4
dθ 1 = 1 14 04
rate of fall of temperature ∝
dt r3 ρ S (
is dθ / dt
)2 2e 2 r T2 − T0
NARAYANAGROUP 79
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-22. The plots of intensity versus wavelength W.E-25. If a black body is radiating at T = 1650 K,
for three black bodies at temperatures T1,T2 at what wavelength is the intensity maximum?
and T3 respectively are shown in fig. Their −3
temperatures are shown in fig. How their Sol: According to Wien’s law, λmT = 2.9×10 mK
temperatures are related? 2.9 × 10 −3
Y λmax = = 1.8 µ m
1650
T3
W.E-26. Two bodies A and B have thermal emis-
(I) T2 sivities of 0.01 and 0.81 respectively. The outer
surface area of the two bodies are the same.
T1 The two bodies emit total radiant power at the
same rate. The wavelengths λA and λB corre-
sponding to maximum spectral radiancy in the
X
(λ)
radiation for A and B respectively differ by 1.00
µ m. If the temperature of A is 5802 K. Find
1 (a) the temperature of B , (b) λB
Sol: From Wien’s displacement law λm ∝
T Sol: Given eA = 0.01, eB = 0.81 and TA = 5820 K
from graph λ2 > λ3 > λ1 ∴T1 > T3 > T2
W.E-23. Variation of radiant energy emitted by Sun, Power radiated P = eσ T 4 and e ATA4 = eBTB4
filament of Tungsten Lamp and welding arc
1 1
as a function of its wavelength shown in fig. e 4 0.01 4
Identify the temperatures of Sun, filament ∴TB = A × TA = × 5802 = 1934 K
lamp and welding arc. eB 0.81
Y
as TB < TA , λB > λA ∴ λB − λA = 1µ m (given)
E
∴ λB − λ A = 1× 10−6 m ......(i)
T3 From Wien’s displacement law,
T2 λB TA 5802
= = = 3 ∴ λ = 3λ ......(ii)
T1 λ A TB 1934 B A
X
(λ) From Eqs. (i) and (ii) λB = 1.5 × 10−6 m = 1.5 µ m
Sol: From Wien’s displacement law
Sun-T3, tungsten filament T 2, welding arc-T1 W.E-27. Two spherical bodies A (radius 6cm) and
W.E-24. The frequency (ν m ) corresponding to B(radius 18cm) are at temperature T1 and T2 ,
which energy emitted by a black body is respectively. The maximum intensity in the
maximum, may vary with temperature T of the emission spectrum of A is at 500 nm and in
body as shown in figure. Which of the curves
represents correct variation? that of B is at 1500 nm. Considering them to
be black bodies, what will be the ratio of the
1
Sol: From Wien’s displacement law λm ∝ rate of total energy radiated by A to that of B.
T
(JEE-2010)
∴υ ∝ T Hence graph A is correct
Y TA λB 1500
Sol. λmT = constant ; T = λ = 500 = 3
µm DA B A
C
Rate of total energy radiated P ∝ AT 4 ∝ R 2T 4
2 4
PA RA TA 6
2
∴ = × = × ( 3) = 9 :1
4
B
PB RB TB 18
O X
T
80 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
W.E-28. Find the temperature of an oven if it ra-
r2
2
diates 8.28 cal per second through an open- 2.0
∴ I2 = I1 12 = 102 = 2.55 ×103 W / m 2
ing, whose area is 6.1 cm2. Assume that the 0.4
r2
radiation is close to that of a black body.
Sol. The emittance of the oven The power at the surface of the sphere
E =
8.28 × 4.2
6.1 × 10 − 4
= 5.7 × 10 4 Watt / m 2 ( )
P = I 2 4π r22 = 2.55 ×103 × 4π ( 0.4) and
2
P = e σ AT 4 (or) 2.55 × 103 × 4π ( 0.4 ) =
2
From Stefan’s law, E = σ T 4 ,
Where σ = 5.67 × 10−8W / m2 − K 4 e × 5.67 × 10−8 × 4π ( 0.4 ) × ( 523)
2 4
E 5.7 ×104
T4 = ,= = 1×1012 K 4 2.55 × 103
σ 5.67 ×10 −8
∴e = = 0.61
5.67 × 10 −8 × ( 523)
4
∴T = 10 K = 1000 K
3
W.E-29.Three very large plates of same area are W.E-31: One end of a rod of length 20cm is in-
kept parallel and close to each other. They are serted in a furnace at 800K. The sides of the
considered as ideal black surface and have very rod are covered with an insulating material
high thermal conductivity . The first and third and the other end emits radiation like a black
plates are maintained at temperatures 2T and body. The temperature of this end is 750 K in
3T respectively. Find the temperature of the the steady state. The temperature of the sur-
middle ( i.e. second ) plate under steady state rounding air is 300K. Assuming radiation to
( 2012 JEE ) be the only important mode of energy transfer
Sol. between the surrounding and the open end of
2T T 1 3T the rod, find the thermal conductivity of the
rod. Stefan’s constant σ = 6.0 ×10−8W / m2 − K 4
Sol.
Furnace 750 K
800 K Airtemp
Let T1 is the temperature of the middle plate 300 K
20cm
Under steady state, rate of emission = rate of
absorption Quantity of heat flowing through the rod per sec-
ond in steady state.
σ ( 2 A )(T1 ) = σ A ( 2T ) + σ A ( 3T )
4 4 4
dQ K . A.dθ
1 = .... (i)
97 4 dt x
2T14 = 16T 4 + 81T 4 ⇒ T1 = T
2 Quantity of heat radiated from the end of the rod
W.E-30 : A sphere with diameter of 80cm is held at per second in steady state:
a temperature of 250ºC and is radiating en-
ergy. If the intensity of the radiation detected
dQ
dt
(
= Aσ T 4 − T04 ) --- (ii)
at a distance of 2.0m from the sphere’s centre
is 102 W/m 2, What is the emissivity of the K .dθ
sphere? From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
x
= σ T 4 − T04( )
1
Sol. From inverse square law I ∝ K × 50
= 6.0 ×10−8 ( 7.5 ) − ( 3) × 108
4 4
r2
0.2
I2 Intensity on the surface of the sphere r2
= = 12 K=74 W/mk
I1 Intensity at a distance 2.0m from the centre r2
NARAYANAGROUP 81
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-32. A body cools from 80ºC to 50ºC in 5 min- 3. Two rods of different materials having different
utes. Calculate the time it takes to cool from lengths and same cross sectional areas are
60ºC to 30ºC. The temperature of the sur- joined end to end in a straight line. The free
roundings is 20ºC. ends of this compound rod are maintained at
Sol: According to Newton’s law of cooling different temperatures. The temperature
dθ θ +θ gradient in each rod will be
= K 1 2 − θ0 1) same 2) zero
dt 2
3) directly proportional to thermal conductivity of rod
For decrease of temperature from 800 C to 500 C
4) inversely proportional to thermal conductivity of
80 − 50 80 + 50 the rod
=K − 20 ......(1)
5 2 4. A piece of paper wrapped tightly on a wooden
For decrease of temperature from 600 C to 300C rod is found to get charged quickly when held
over a flame compared to similar piece when
60 − 30 60 + 30 wrapped on a brass rod. This is because
=K − 20 ..........(2)
t 2 1) brass is good conductor and wood is a bad
From eq’s (1) and (2) , t = 9 min conductor of heat
W.E-33. Two spheres made of same material have 2) brass is a bad conductor of heat
their radii in the ratio 1 : 3. They are heated 3)wood contains large number of free electrons
to the same temperature and kept in the same 4) wood is a good conductor of heat
surroundings at a moderate temperature. 5. When heat flows through a wire of uniform
Show that the ratio of their initial rates of fall cross section under steady state, then
of temperature is 3:1 if the bodies are cooled 1) temperature gradient is same every where
by natural convection and radiation. 2) temperature at a particular point remains same
Sol. The rate of fall of temperature of a hot body is given 3) rate of heat flow is same at all cross sections
dθ eAσ 4 4) all the above
by
dt
=
ms
T − T04( ) 6. Temperature is analogous to
1) charge 2) potential difference
∴
dθ e 4π R σ T − T0
=
2 4 4
⇒
(
dθ
∝
1 ) 3) electric field strength 4) force
dt 4 dt R 7. On heating one end of a rod the temperature
π R3 ρ s of the whole rod will be uniform when
3
1) k = 1 2) k = 0 3) k = 100 4) k = ∞
( dθ / dt )1 R2 3 R1 8. For an ideal conductor thermal resistance is
= = Q = 1:3
( dθ / dt )2 R1 1 R2 9.
1) unity 2) infinity 3) zero 4) 1000
A metal rod of area of cross section A has
Their ratio of fall of temperature is 3 : 1. length L and coefficient of thermal conductivity
K.The thermal resistance of the rod is
C.U.Q
L KL KA A
1. Metals are good conductors of heat because 1) 2) 3) 4)
KA A L KL
1) they contain large number of free electrons 10. Thermal conductivity of a metal rod depends
2) their atoms are relatively apart on
3) their atoms collide frequently 1) area of cross section 2) temperature gradient
4) they have reflecting surfaces 3) time of flow of heat 4) all the above
11. Coefficient of thermal conductivity
2. In steady state
1) depends upon nature of the material of the body
1) heat received is partly conducted and partly
2) is independent of dimensions of the body
radiated 2) heat is not absorbed 3) both 1 and 2
3) both 1 and 2 4) all the heat is conducted 4) depends on temperature difference
82 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
12. If the end of metal rod is heated, then the rate 22. One half of a slab of ice is covered with black
of flow of heat does not depend on cloth and the other half with white cloth. This
1) area of the end of the rod 2) mass of the rod is then placed in sunlight. After some time the
3) time 4) temperature gradient pieces of cloth are removed. Then
13. In the following solids thermal conductivity is 1) ice has melted equally under both the pieces
maximum for 2) more ice has melted under white cloth
1) copper 2) aluminium 3) gold 4) silver 3) more ice has melted under black cloth
14. For a perfect insulator coefficient of thermal 4) it will depend on the medium in which ice is
conductivity is placed
23. Compared to a person with white skin another
1) zero 2) infinite 3) one 4) two
person with dark skin, will experience :
15. It is hotter at some distance over the flames
1) less heat and more cold
than in front of it because
2) more heat and more cold
1) air conducts heat upwards only
3) more heat and less cold
2) heat is radiated upwards only 4) less heat and less cold
3) convection of heat occurs upwards only 24. Which of the following statements is wrong?
4) heat is radiated downwards only 1) rough surfaces are better radiators than smooth
16. The process in which rate of transfer of heat surfaces
maximum is 2) highly polished mirror like surfaces are very good
1) conduction 2) convection 3) radiation radiators
4) in all these heat is transferred with the same speed 3) black surfaces are better absorbers than white
17. By which of the following methods could a cup ones
of hot tea loss heat when placed on metallic 4) black surfaces are better radiators than white
table in a class room ones
a) conduction b) convection 25. The physical factor distinguishes thermal
c) radiation d) evaporation of liquid radiation from visible light is
1) a,b 2) b,c 3)a,b,c 4) a,b,c,d 1) wavelength 2) pressure
18. The thermal radiations are similar to 3) temperature 4) amplitude
1) X-rays 2) cathode rays 26. If we place our hand below a lighted electric
3) α − rays 4) γ -rays bulb. We feel warmer because of
19. The temperature at which a black body ceases 1) convection 2) radiation
to radiate energy is 3) conduction 4) both 1 and 2
1) 0 K 2) 273 K 27. Heating effect of the incoming solar radiation
3) -273 K 4) at all temperatures is maximum at local noon because
20. The intensity of energy radiated by a hot body 1) atmospheric absorption is zero
at a distance r from it varies as 2) sun’s rays travel through minimum air
thickness
1 1 1 3) solar rays are vertical to the ground
1) r2 2) 3) 4 4) 3
r2 r r 4) outgoing radiation is minimum
21. When a body has the same temperature as that 28 The absorptivity of Lamp black and platinum
of its surroundings black is
1) it does not radiate heat 1) 0.91 2) 0.98 3) 1.00 4) 0.99
2) it radiates same quantity of heat as it receives 29. Absorptive power of a white body and of a
from the surroundings perfectly black body respectively are
3) it radiates less quantity of heat as it receives 1) 1,0 2) 0,1 3)-1,-1 4) ∞ ,0
from the surroundings 30. Three bodies A,B,C are at -27 C, 00C, 1000C
0
4) it radiates more quantity of heat as it receives respectively. The body which does not radiate
from the surroundings. heat is
1) A 2) B 3) All the bodies radiate heat 4) C
NARAYANAGROUP 83
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
31. At high temperature black body spectrum is 41. Four pieces of iron are heated to different
1) continuous absorption 2) line absorption temperatures. The colours exhibited by them
3) continuous emission 4) line emission are respectively red,yellow, orange and white
32. A black body emits respectively. The one that is heated to the
1) radiations of all wave lengths 2)no radiation highest temperature will exhibit the colour
3) radiation of single wave length 1) White 2) Yellow 3) Red 4)Orange
4) radiation of selected wave length 42. A star which appears blue will be
33. The best laboratory approximation to an ideal 1) much hotter than the sun
black body is 2) colder than the Sun
1) a lump of charcoal heated to high temperature 3) as hot as the Sun 4) at -2730 C
2) a glass surface coated with coal tar 43. If a star is colder than the Sun it appears
1) Yellow 2) Red 3) Blue 4) Violet
3) a metal coated with black dye
44. The amount of radiation emitted by a perfectly
4) a hollow enclosure blackened inside with lamp
black body is proportional to
black and have a small hole
1) temperature on ideal gas scale
34. A black body does not
2) fourth root of temperature on ideal gas scale
1) emit radiation 2) reflect radiation
3) fourth power of temperature on ideal gas
3) absorb radiation scale
4) emit and absorb radiation 4) source of temperature on ideal gas scale
35. If the amount of heat energy received per unit 45. At a given temperature, the ratio between
area from the Sun is measured on Earth, Mars emissive power and absorptive power is same
and Jupiter, it will be for all bodies and is equal to the emissive power
1) the same for all of black body.This statement is called
2) in decreasing order of Jupiter, Mars, Earth 1) Newton’s Law 2) Planck’s law 3 )
3) in increasing order of Jupiter, Mars, Earth Kirchoff’s law 4) Wien’s
4) in decreasing order of Mars, Earth, Jupiter law
36. The colour of a star is a measure of its 46. If the sun become twice hotter, it will radiate
1) age 2) temperature 1) energy sixteen times larger
3) size 4) distance from the earth 2) predominantly in the infrared
37. A polished metal plate with a rough black spot 3) predominantly in the ultra violet
on it is heated to about 1400K and quickly 4) energy sixteen times smaller
taken into a dark room. Then 47. Three identical spheres of different materials
1) the spot will appear brighter than the plate iron, gold and silver are at the same
2) the spot will appear darker than the plate temperature. The one that radiates more
3) heat conduction is easier downward energy is
4) it is easier and more convenient to do so 1) Gold 2) Silver
38. If ‘p’ calorie of heat energy is incident on a 3) Iron 4) All radiate equally
body and absorbs ‘q’ calories, its coefficient 48. Cooling graphs are drawn for three liquids a,b
of absorption is and c. The specific heat is maximum for liquid
1) p/q 2) p - q 3) q/p 4) q + p Y
39. The velocity of heat radiation in vacuum is
1) Equal to that of light 2)Less than that of light T
e a
3) Greater than that of light
m b
4) Equal to that of sound p
40. Distribution of energy in the spectrum of a c
X
black body can be correctly represented by Time
1) Wien’s law 2) Stefan’s las 1) a 2) b 3) c
3) Planck’s law 4) Kirchhoff’s law 4) for all the three a,b and c
84 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
49. A black body of temperature T is inside a 54 5
2) TS 3) (TB − TS )
5
4
TB − TS
4 4
chamber of temperature T0 . Now the closed 1) TB 4 4)
chamber is slightly opened to Sun such that 57. Newton’s law of cooling is a law connected with
temperature of black body (T ) and chamber 1) Conduction 2) Convection
(T0 ) remain constant 3) Radiation 4) Convection and Radiation
1) Black body will absorb more radiation from the 58. Newton’s law of cooling holds good provided
Sun the temperature difference between the body
2) Black body will absorb less radiation from the and the surroundings is
Sun 1) large 2) small
3) Black body emits more thermal energy 3) very large 4) any value
4) Black body emits thermal energy equal to the 59. A block of steel heated to 1000C is left in a
thermal energy absorbed by it. room to cool. Which of the curves shown in
50. The rate of cooling of a body is the figure, represents the correct behaviour
1) independent of the nature of the surface of Y
the body T
2) independent of the area of the body e C
3) dependent on the excess of temperature of m B
the body above that of the surroundings. p A
4) independent of the temperature of the
X
surroundings. Time
51. A cube, a sphere and a circular plate made of 1) A 2) B 3) C 4)A and C
same material and having same mass are 60. Let there be four articles having colours blue,
heated to same high temperature. The body red, black and white. When they are heated
that cools at the least rate when left in air at together and allowed to cool, the article that
room temperature is cool earlier is
1) Sphere 2) Cube 1) Blue 2) Red 3) Black 4) White
3) Circular plate 4) All at the same rate 61. Which of the following qualities are best suited
52. Newton’s law of cooling is applied in laboratory for cooking utensils?
for the determination of the 1) High specific heat and low thermal conductivity
1) Specific heat of gases 2) Latent heat of gases 2) High specific heat and high thermal conductivity
3) Specific heat of liquids 4)Latent heat of liquids 3) Low specific heat and low thermal conductivity
53. Newton’s law of cooling is a special case of 4) Low specific heat and high thermal conductivity
1) Kirchoff’s law 2) Wien’s law 62. The bulb of a thermometer is spherical and that
3) Stefan-Boltzmann’s law 4) Planck’s law
of another is cylindrical. Equal quantity of
54. The amount of heat energy radiated per second
by a surface depends upon: mercury is filled in them. Then
1) Area of the surface 1) thermometer with spherical bulb will respond
2) Difference of temperature between the surface quickly
and its surroundings 2) thermometer with cylindrical bulb will respond
3) Nature of the surface 4) All the above slowly
55. Four identical copper cylinders are painted. If 3) thermometer with spherical bulb will respond
they are all heated to the same temperature slowly
and left in vacuum which will cool most rapidly. 4) thermometer with cylindrical bulb will respond
1)Painted shiny white 2)Painted rough black quickly
3)Painted shiny black 4)Painted rough white 63. Which of the following methods of flow of heat
56. If T B and T s are the temperatures of the body is (are) based on gravitational attraction?
and the surroundings and TB − TS is of very 1) Conduction 2) Convection
high value, then the rate of cooling in natural 3) Radiation 4) All of these
convection is proportional to
NARAYANAGROUP 85
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
64. Two rods A and B of same metal and of same 73. A surface at temperature T0 K receives power
cross-section have length in the ratio 1:2. One P by radiation from a small sphere at
end of each rod is at O 0C and temperature of temperature T < T0 and at a distance d. If both
0 0
other ends are 30 C and 40 C respectively. T and d are doubled, the power received by
Which of the rod will have higher flow of heat? the surface will become
1) Rod A 2) Rod B 3) Both will have same 1) P 2) 2P 3) 4P 4) 16P
4) Depends upon the shape 74. Two circular disc A and B with equal radii are
65. While measuring the thermal conductivity of blackened. They are heated to same
liquids, the upper part is kept hot and lower temperature and are cooled under identical
cooled so that conditions. What inference do you draw from
1) convectional flow is stopped their cooling curves (R is rate of cooling)?
2) radiation is stopped 3) conduction is easier
4) it is easier to perform the experiment Y
66. The amplitude of radiations from a cylindrical A
R
heat source is related to the distance is
1
1) A ∝ 1 / d 2 2) A ∝ B
d
4) A ∝ d
2
3) A ∝ d
67. Kirchoff’s law states that
1) a body absorbs radiation of shorter wavelengths
and emits radiation of higher wavelength X
2) a body absorbs radiation of any wavelength but (θ−θ0)
emits radiation of specific wavelengths
1) A and B have same specific heats
3) a body absorbs and emits radiation of same
2) Specific heat of A is less
wavelengths
3) Specific heat of B is less 4)Nothing can be said
4) none of these
68. If pressure on a gas is increased from P to 2P, 75. A solid at temperature T1 is kept in an
then its heat conductivity evacuated chamber at temperature
1) increases 3) decreases T2 ( T2 > T1 ). The rate of increase of
3) becomes zero 4) remains unchanged temperature of the body is proportional to
69. Two layers of cloth of equal thickness provide
1) T2 − T1 2) T22 − T12 3) T23 − T13 4) T24 − T14
warmer covering than a single layer of cloth
of double the thickness,because they 76. The thermal radiation emitted by a body is
1) behave like a thermos 2) have lesser thickness proportional to Tn where T is its absolute
3) allow heat from atmosphere to the body temperature. The value of n is exactly 4 for
4) enclose between them a layer of air 1) a blackbody 2) all bodies
70. In a room containing air, heat can go from one 3) bodies painted black only
place to another by 4) polished bodies only
1) conduction 2) convection 77. A blackbody does not
3) radiation 4) all of these 1) emit radiation 2) absorb radiation
71. The reflectance and emittance of a perfectly 3) reflect and refract radiation 4) All the above
black body are respectively 78. In summer, a mild wind is often found on the
1) 0,1 2) 1,0 3) 0.5,0.5 4) 0,0 shore of a calm river. This is used due to
72. Wien’s displacement law fails at 1)difference in thermal conductivity of water and soil
1) low temperature 2) high temperature 2) convection currents
3) short wavelength 4) long wavelength 3) conduction between air and the soil
4) radiation from the soil
86 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
79. A heated body emits radiation which has C.U.Q - KEY
maximum intensity near the frequency ν 0 . The 01) 1 02) 3 03) 4 04) 1 05) 4 06) 2
emissivity of the material is 0.5. If the absolute 07) 4 08) 3 09) 1 10) 4 11) 3 12) 2
temperature of the body is doubled, 13) 4 14) 1 15) 3 16) 3 17) 4 18) 1
1) the maximum intensity of radiation will be near 19) 1 20) 2 21) 2 22) 3 23) 2 24) 2
25) 1 26) 2 27) 2 28) 2 29) 2 30) 3
the frequency 2ν 0
31) 3 32) 1 33) 4 34) 2 35) 3 36) 2
2) the maximum intensity of radiation will be near 37) 1 38) 3 39) 1 40) 3 41) 1 42) 1
ν0 43) 2 44) 3 45) 3 46) 1 47) 4 48) 1
the frequency 49) 4 50) 3 51) 1 52) 3 53) 3 54) 4
2
3) the total energy emitted will increase by a factor 55) 2 56) 1 57) 4 58) 2 59) 1 60) 3
of 32 61) 4 62) 4 63) 2 64) 1 65) 1 66) 2
4) the total energy emitted will increase by a factor 67) 3 68) 4 69) 4 70) 2 71) 1 72) 4
of 8 73) 3 74) 2 75) 4 76) 2 77) 3 78) 2
80. Radiation is passing through a transparent 79) 1 80) 3 81) 3 82) 3
medium, then
1) the temperature of medium increases LEVEL - I (C.W)
2) the temperature of medium decreases
3) the temperature of medium does not alter CONDUCTION
4) the temperature of medium first increases and 1. In a steady state of heat conduction the
then becomes steady. temperature of the ends A and B of a rod 100cm
81. The graph shown in the adjacent diagram, long are 0º C and 100º C . The temperature
represents the variation of temperature T of of the rod at a point 60cm distant from the end
two bodies x and y having same surface area, A is
with time (t) due to emission of radiation. Find 1) 0º C 2) 40º C 3) 60ºC 4) 100º C
the correct relation between emissive power(E) 2. An aluminium meter rod of area of cross section
and absorptive power(a) of the two bodies
4cm 2 with K = 0.5cal /gm- C is observed that at
0
Y steady state 360 cal of heat flows per minute.
The temperature gradient along the rod is
T 1) 30 C / cm 2) 60C/ cm 3) 120C/ cm 4) 200C/ cm
3. One end of metal bar of area of cross section
y 5cm2 and 25cm in length is in steam other in
contact with ice, the amount of ice melts in one
minute is (Lice=80cal/gm,K=0.8cgs units )
X 1) 16 gm 2) 12 gm 3) 24 gm 4)36 gm
4. Which of the following rods made of same
material will conduct more heat in a given time
t X when their ends are maintained at the same
temperature difference.
1) E x > E y and a x < a y 1) l = 1m, r = 1cm 2) l = 2m, r = 2cm
2) E x < E y and a x > a y
3) l = 3m, r = 1cm 4) l = 100c m, r = 2cm
3) E x > E y and a x > a y
5. A cylindrical rod with one end in a steam
4) E x < E y and a x < a y chamber and the other end is in ice. It is found
82. In which of the following process, convection that 1gm of ice melts per second. If the rod is
does not takes place primarily? replaced by another one of same material
1) Sea and Land breeze double the length and double area of cross
2) Boiling of water section, The mass of ice that melts per second
3) Warming of glass of bulb due to filament is
4) Heating of air around a furnace 1) 2 gm 2) 4 gm 3) 1 gm 4) 0.5 gm
NARAYANAGROUP 87
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
WIEN’S DISPLACEMENT LAW AND NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING
KIRCHHOFF’S LAW 13. A body at 500 C cools in a surroundings
6. In an atomic bomb, the temperature of
maintained at 300 C . The temperature at
10million degrees is developed at the moment
of explosion. In what region of the spectrum which the rate of cooling is half that of the
do the wavelength corresponding to maximum beginning is
energy density lie? 1) 16.320 C 2) 26.30 C 3) 400 C 4) 46.30 C
( b = 0.28 ×10 S.I.unit )
−2 14. A body cools from 700C to 600C in 8 minute.
The same body cools from 600C to 500C in
1) Ultra-violet 2) Visible 1) 8 minutes 2) less than 8 minute
3) Infra-red rays 4) x-rays 3) More than 8 minute
7. Solar radiation emitted by sun resembles that 4) 1 or 2 or 3 depending on the specific heat of the
emitted by a black body at a temperature of
6000 K. Maximum intensity is emitted at a body
wavelength of about 4800A0. If the sun was LEVEL - I (C.W) - KEY
cooled down from 6000 K to 3000 K. then the 01) 3 02) 1 03)2 04) 4 05) 3 06) 4
peak intensity would occur at a wavelength of 07) 2 08) 3 09) 1 10) 4 11) 1 12) 3
1) 4800 A0 2) 9600 A 0 3) 2400 A 0 4) 19200A0 13) 3 14) 3
STEFAN’S LAW LEVEL - I (C.W) - HINTS
8. Two spheres of the same material have radii
1m and 4m and temperature 4000K and 2000K KA ( ∆θ ) t θ1 − θ 2 θ − θ 2
1. Q= ⇒ =
respectively. The energy radiated per second l L l
by the first sphere is :
KA (θ 1 − θ 2 ) t KA (θ1 − θ 2 ) t
1) greater than that of the second 2. Q= 3. Q = mL =
2) less than that of the second l l
3) equal in both cases
4) the information is incomplete to draw any 4. Q=
(
K π r2 ) ( ∆θ ) t ⇒ Q ∝ r 2
conclusion l l
9. Two objects A & B have exactly the same KA (θ1 − θ 2 ) t ⇒ m2 = A2 × l1
shape and are radiating the same power. If 5. Q = mL =
l m1 A1 l2
their temperatures are in the ratio 3 :1 then
6. λm T = b
the ratio of their emissivities is.
1) 1: 9 2) 9 : 1 3) 3 : 1 4) 1 : 3 7. λm × T = constant, λ1T1 = λ2T2
10. A black body at 1270C emits the energy at the 2 4
rate of 106 J/m2 s. The temperature of a black P1 r1 T1
body at which the rate of energy emission is 8. P = σ AT 4 = σ 4π r 2T 4 ⇒ P = r × T
2 2 2
16 ×106 J/m2 s is 4
1) 5080C 2) 2730C 3) 4000 C 4) 5270C e1 T2
11. An incandescent light bulb has a tungsten fila- 9. P = eσ AT 4 ⇒ e = T
2 1
ment that is heated to a temperature 3×103 K 4
when an electric current passes through it. If E1 T1
10. E = σ T 4 ⇒ = 1. P = eAσ T 4
11.
the surface area of the filament is approxi- E2 T2
mately 10-4 m 2 and it has an emissivity of 0.3,
E1 TB1 − T0
4 4
12. E = σ (T − T )
the power radiated by the bulb is nearly =
4 4
⇒
( σ = 5.67 ×10−8W / m2 − K 4 ) 0 E2 TB2 4 − T0 4
1) 138 w 2) 175 w 3) 200 w 4) 225 w
dθ
12. Two black bodies at 3270C and 6270C are 13. = − K (θ − θ 0 ) ⇒ R ∝ θ − θ 0
suspended in an environment at 270C. The dt
ratio of their emissive powers is 14. Rate of cooling decreases with fall of temperature.
1) 15 : 8 2) 16 : 3 3) 3 : 16 4) 5 : 8 Hence, time increases..
88 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
emission radiations rates are 140A0 and 4200
LEVEL - I (H.W) A0 respectively :
1) 1 :30 2) 30 :1 3) 42 : 14 4) 14 : 42
CONDUCTION STEFAN’S LAW
1. In the steady state the two ends of a meter 8. The rate of radiation from a black body at 00C
rod are at 300 C and 200 C , the temperature is E. The rate of radiation from this black body
at the 40 th cm from the end at higher at 2730C is
temperature is 1. 2E 2. E/2 3. 16 E 4. E/16
1) 220 C 2) 260 C 3) 250 C 4) 240 C 9. Two bodies of same shape, same size and same
2. A rod of length 1 m having cross-sectional area radiating power have emissivities 0.2 and 0.8.
−1
0.75m2 conducts heat at 6000 Js . Then the The ratio of their temperature is
temperature difference across the rod is, if 1) 3 :1 2) 2 :1 3) 1: 5 4) 1: 3
K = 200 Wm −1K −1
1) 200 C 2) 400 C 3) 800 C 4) 1000 C 10. Two spheres have radii 1m, 2m are at same
temperatures, have emissivities e, 2e then ra-
3. A 3cm cube of iron one face at 1000 C and the
tio of radiant energy emitted per second is
other in a block of ice at 00 C . If K of 1) 1:2 2) 1:4 3) 1:8 4) 1:1
iron = 0.2 CGS units and L for ice is 80 cal/gm, 11. The radiant power of a furnace of surface area
then the amount of ice that melts in 10 min- of 0.6 m2 is 34.2 KW. The temperature of the
utes is (assume steady state heat transfer) furnace is [ σ = 5.7 x 10-8 Wm-2K-4]
1) 450 g 2) 900 g 3) 350 g 4) 500 g 1) 3400 K 2) 1012 K 3) 1000 K 4) 5700 K
4. Heat is flowing through two cylindrical rods of 12. How many watt of energy is required to keep
same material. The diameters of the rods are a black body in the form of a cube of side 1cm
in the ratio 1 : 2 and their lengths are in the at 2000K? (Temperature of surrounding is
ratio 2 : 1. If the temperature difference be- 270C and σ = 5.67 × 10−5 Wm −2 K −4 )
tween their ends is same, then the ratio of
1) 444 KW 2) 544 KW
amounts of heat conducted through them per
3) 644 KW 4) 64 KW
unit time will be
1) 1 :1 2) 2 : 1 3) 1 : 4 4) 1 : 8 NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING
5. One end of a cylindrical rod is kept in steam 13. The rates of cooling of a body at temperatures
chamber and the other end in melting Ice. Now 1000 C and 800 C are x1 and x2 respectively ,
0.5 gm of ice melts in 1 sec. If the rod is re- when placed in a room of temperature 400 C
placed by another rod of same length, half the
diameter and double the conductivity of the first x1
rod, then rate of melting of ice will be (in gm/ then x2 is
sec) ( 2008 E ) 1) 4/5 2) 5/4 3) 3/2 4) 2/3
1) 0.25 2) 0.5 3) 1 4) 2 14. A vessel full of hot water is kept in a room and
WIEN’S DISPLACEMENT LAW AND it cools from 800C to 750C in T 1 minutes, from
KIRCHHOFF’S LAW 750C to 700C in T2 minutes and from 700C to
6. The wavelength of maximum energy released 650C in T3 minutes. Then
during an atomic explosion was 2.93 × 10−10 m . 1. T1=T2 =T3 2. T1>T2 >T3
−3
Given that Wien’s constant is 2.93 ×10 mK , 3. T1<T2 =T3 4. T1<T2 <T3
the maximum temperature attained must be
of the order of LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY
1) 10−7 K 2) 107 K 01) 2 02) 2 03) 1 04) 4 05) 1 06) 2
3) 10−13 K 4) 5.86 × 107 K 07) 2 08) 3 09) 2 10) 3 11) 3 12) 2
7. What will be the ratio of temperatures of sun 13) 3 14) 4
and moon if the wavelengths of their maximum
NARAYANAGROUP 89
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
LEVEL - I (H.W) - HINTS 2. Three rods A,B and C have the same
KA ( ∆θ ) t θ −θ θ − θ1 dimensions. Their conductivities are K A , K B
1. Q= ⇒ 1 2 = and K C respectively. A and B are placed end
l L l
Q KA ( ∆θ ) KA ( ∆θ ) t to end, with their free ends kept at certain
2. = 3. mL f = temperature difference. C is placed separately
t l l
KA (θ1 −θ2 ) t Q K π r ( ∆θ )
2 with its ends kept at same temperature
4. Q= ⇒ = difference. The two arrangements conduct
l t l
heat at the same rate K c must be equal to
Q
t
1 = K 1 × r1
2
KA + KB 1 KAKB
∴ 1) KA+KB 2) K K 3) ( KA +KB ) 4) K + K
Q K 2 r2 A B 2 A B
t 2 3. Two rods (one semi-circular and other straight)
KA ( ∆θ ) t of same material and of same cross-sectional
5. mL f = area are joined as shown in the figure. The
l points A and B are maintained at different
m temperatures. The ratio of heat transferred
K2 d2
2
through a cross-section of a semicircular rod
⇒ t 2
= to the heat transferred through a cross section
m K 1 d 1 , d = diameter of the straight rod in a given time is
t 1 Semi circular rod
6. λ mT = b
7. λ m T = constant ⇒ λ1T1 = λ2T2
Straight rod
4
P1 T1
8. P = σ AT 4 ⇒ P = T (given that P1 = E) A B
2 2 1) 2 :π 2) 1:2 3) π : 2 4) 3:2
1 4. Two identical slabs are welded end to end and
T e 4
20cal of heat flows through it for 4min. If the
9. P = eAσ T ⇒ 2 = 1
4
T1 e2 two slabs are now welded by placing them one
2 2
above the other, and the same heat is flowing
P1 r1 T1 through two ends under the same difference of
(
10. P = eσ 4π r T ⇒
2
)
= ×
4
P2 r2 T2
temperatures, the time taken is
1) 1min 2) 2 min 3) 4 min 4) 16 min
11. P = eσ A T 4 4
(
12. P = σ A T − Ts
4
) 5. A slab consists of two parallel layers of copper
and brass of the same thickness and having
dθ thermal conductivities in the ratio 1 : 4. If the
13. ∝ (θ − θ 0 ) ⇒ R ∝ θ − θ 0
dt free face of brass is at 100 ºC and that of
14. Rate of cooling decreases with fall of temperature. copper at 0º C , the temperature of interface
Hence, time increases.. is
1) 80º C 2) 20º C 3) 60º C 4) 40º C
LEVEL -II (C.W) 6. Two metal plates of same area and thickness
CONDUCTION l 1 and l 2 are arranged in series. If the thermal
1. The co-efficient of thermal conductivity of conductivities of the materials of the two plates
copper, mercury and glass respectively Kc ,Km are K1 and K 2 . The thermal conductivity of
and K g such that Kc > K m > K g if the same the combination is
quantity of heat is flow per sec per unit area of 2K1K2 K +K
each and corresponding temperature gradient 1) K + K 2) 1 2
1 2 2
are X c , X m and X g :
K1K2 ( l 1 + l 2 )
1) X c = X m = X g 2) X c > X m > X g 4) K1 + K2
3) X c < X m < X g 4) X m < X c < X g
3) K1l 2 + K2l1
90 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
7. Two hollow spheres of same material one with 11 A cube of side 10cm is filled with ice of density
double the radius of the other and double the 0.9gm/c.c. Thickness of the walls of the cube is
thickness of the other filled with ice, The ratio 1mm and thermal conductivity of the material of
of times in which ice gets melted in the two the cube is 0.01 C.G.S. units. If the cube is placed
spheres is in steam bath maintained at a temperature of
1) 2 :1 2) 1 : 2 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4 1000 C , the time in which ice completely melts
8. A wall has two layers A and B, each made of a is ( Lice = 80 cal / gm )
different material. Both the layers have the 1) 6 sec 2) 12 sec 3) 24 sec 4) 48 sec
same thickness. The thermal conductivity of WIEN’S DISPLACEMENT LAW
the material of A is twice that of B. Under
thermal equilibrium, the temperature
AND KIRCHHOFF’S LAW
12. A black body is at a temperature of 2800 K.
difference across the wall is 36º C . The
The energy of radiation emitted by this object
temperature difference across the layer A is
with wavelength between 499 nm and 500 nm
1) 6º C 2) 12º C 3) 18º C 4) 24º C is U1 , between 999 nm and 1000 nm is U 2 and
9. Two rods of length l and 2l thermal between 1499 nm and 1500 nm is U 3 . The
conductivities 2Kand Kare connected end to Wien’s constant b = 2.80 × 106 nm K. Then
end. If cross sectional areas of two rods are 1) U1 = 0 2) U 3 = 0 3) U1 > U 2 4) U 2 > U1
equal, then equivalent thermal conductivity of 13. When the temperature of a black body
the system is increases, it is observed that the wavelength
corresponding to maximum energy changes
5( )
1) 6 K 2) 1.5K 3) 1.2 K 4) 9 K 8( ) from 0.26 µ m to 0.13 µ m . The ratio of the
emissive powers of the body at the respective
10. Three rods of identical cross-sectional area
and made from the same metal form the sides temperatures is :
of an isosceles triangle ABC right angled at 16 4 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
1 1 4 16
B . The points A and B are maintained at
temperatures T and 2T , respectively, in the 14. For an enclosure maintained at 1000K the
steady state. Assuming that only heat maximum radiation occurs at wavelength λ .
m
conduction takes place, temperature of point If the temperature is raised to 2000K, the peak
C is will shift to (CBSE, PMT 1998)
1) 0.5 λm 2) λm 3) 4 λm 4)8 λm
A STEFAN’S LAW
15. The power radiated by a black body is P and it
radiates maximum energy around the
wavelength λ0 . If the temperature of the black
body is now changed so that it radiates
maximum energy around a wavelength 3λ0 / 4 ,
the power radiated by it will increase by a factor
of
B C
1) 4/3 2) 16/9 3) 64/27 4) 256/81
16. The rates of heat radiation from two patches
3T T of skin each of area A, on a patient’s chest
1) 2)
2 +1 2 +1 differ by 2%. If the patch of the lower temp is
T at 300K and emissivity of both the patches is
3) T
( ) 4) assumed to be unity, the temp. of other patch
3 2 −1 2 −1 would be.
1) 306K 2) 312K 3) 308.5K 4) 301.5K
NARAYANAGROUP 91
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
17. A spherical black body with a radius of 12cm NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING
radiates 450W power at 500K. If the radius 25. A body cools from 500C to 450C in 5 min and to
were halved and the temperature doubled, the 400C in another 8 min. The temperature of the
power radiated in watts would be surrounding is
1) 225 2) 450 3) 900 4) 1800 1) 340C 2) 300C 3) 430C 4) 370C
18. If the temperature of the sun were to increase 26. A hot body is placed in cold surroundings. It’s
from T to 2T and its radius from R to 2R, then rate of cooling is 30C per minute when its
the ratio of the radiant energy received on earth temperature is 700C and 1.50C per minute
to what it was previously, will be when its temperature is 500C it’s rate of cooling
1) 4 2) 16 3) 32 4) 64 when its temperature is 400C.
19. The radiation emitted by a star A is 10,000 times 1. 0.250C / min 2. 0.50C / min
that of the Sun. If the surface temperature of 3. 0.750C / min 4. 10C / min
the sun and the star A are 6000K and 2000k 27. A calorimeter of water equivalent ‘5g’ has
respectively, the ratio of the radii of the star A water of mass 55 g upto a certain level. Another
and the Sun is identical calorimeter has a liquid of mass ‘38g’
1) 300 : 1 2) 600: 1 3) 900 : 1 4) 1200:1 upto same level. As both of them cool in the
20. Two electric bulbs have filaments of lengths L same surroundings from 500C to 460C, water
and 2 L, diameters 2d and d and emissivities takes 80 s where as the liquid takes 32 s to
3e and 4e. If their temperatures are in the ratio cool. If the specific heat of water is 1 cal/g-0C,
2 : 3, their powers will be in the ratio of the specific heat of the liquid in cal/g-0C is
1) 8 : 27 2) 4 : 27 3) 8 : 3 4) 4 : 9
1) 0.8 2) 0.4 3) 0.5 4) 0.2
21. If the absolute temperature of a black body is
doubled the percentage increase in the rate of
LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY
01) 3 02) 4 03) 1 04) 1 05) 1 06) 3
loss of heat by radiation is
07) 3 08) 2 09) 3 10) 1 11) 2 12) 4
1) 15% 2) 16% 3)1600% 4) 1500% 13) 4 14) 1 15) 4 16) 4 17) 4 18) 4
22. A sphere and cube of same material and same 19) 3 20) 2 21) 4 22) 3 23) 1 24) 4
volume are heated upto the same temperature 25) 1 26) 3 27) 3
and allowed to cool in the same surroundings.
The ratio of the amounts of radiations emitted LEVEL - II (C.W)- HINTS
will be KA ( ∆θ ) t ∆θ
1. Q = ⇒ K = const
l l
4π π 1 4π
1/3 2/3
1) 1:1 2) :1 3) :1 4) :1
3 6 2 3 ∆θ 1 1
∝ ⇒ X ∝ ;Since, K c > K m > K g
23. A black metal foil is warmed by radiation from l K K
a small sphere at temperature T and at a ∴ For same quantity of heat flow per sec per unit
distance d it is found that the power received area of each X c < X m < X g
by the foil is P. If both the temperature and 2. When A and B are in series
the distance are doubled, the power received
by the foil will be l1 + l2 l1 l 2K A KB
= + 2 ⇒ Keff =
1) 64P 2) 16P 3) 4P 4) 8P Keff K1 K2 K A + KB
24. A very small hole in an electric furnace is used
2K AK B
A ( ∆θ )
for heating metals. The hole nearly acts as a
Q KA + KB
2
black body. The area of the hole is 200 mm .To ........ (i)
keep a metal at 727º C , heat energy flowing =
t 2l
through this hole per sec, in joules
Q K C A ( ∆θ )
is (σ = 5.67 × 10−8Wm −2 K −4 ) (EAM-2014E) For rod C = ........ (ii)
t l
1) 22.68 2) 2.268 3) 1.134 4) 11.34 From (i) and (ii) we get value of KC
92 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
KA ( ∆θ ) t Given that temperature difference across the wall
3. Q= is 36º C
l
Let temperature difference across A is ∆θ then
Q1 KA ( ∆θ ) t 2R 2 temperature difference across B is 36 − ∆θ
= × =
πR KA ( ∆θ ) t π
2 KA∆θ KA ( 36 − ∆θ )
Q2
In steady state, =
R = radius of semi-circle. x x
4. In series (end-to-end)
l
K K 9. In series, Reff = R1 + R2 R =
KA
2K × K
K eff = =K l 1 + l 2 l1 l 2
K+K = +
In parallel (place one above the other) K eff k1 k 2
10.
K
K A
K+K
K eff = =K
2
KA ( ∆θ ) t
Q= here Q, K, ∆θ are same in both
l
t2 l 2 A1 B C
cases. ∴ t = l × A
1 1 2 Q Q
5. t = t
BC CA
00C θ 1000C
KA ( 2T − Tc ) = KA (T − T ) c
K 4K l 2l
x x KA ( ∆θ ) t
11. mLice =
Let θ be temperature of interface d
Q Q 4KA(100 −θ ) KA(θ −0) (
K 6a 2 ) ( ∆θ ) t
t = t ; = ρ ice ( a ) Lice =
3
Brass Cu x x d
l l 1 + l 2 l1 l 2 here, a, d are side and thickness of cube.
6. Reff = R1 + R2 R = ; K = + Heat conducts through six faces.
KA eff k1 k 2
12. For any temperature the energy is maximum in the
KA( ∆θ ) t 4 3 K4π R2 ( ∆θ ) t middle range of wavelength. So, the energy is
7. mLice = ⇒ π R ρ × Lice = maximum for wavelength 1000 nm.
d 3 d
t R d 13. P = σ AT 4 and λm ×T = const
∴ 1 = 1 × 1 4 4
t2 R2 d 2 P1 T1 λ2
= =
A B P2 T2 λ1
14. λ m T = c o n s t ⇒ λ 1T 1 = λ 2T 2
8. 2K K
4
P2 T2
x x 15. P = σ AT 4 and λm T = const =
P1 T1
NARAYANAGROUP 93
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
16. P = σ AT 4
LEVEL-II (H.W)
∆P ∆T
P∝T ⇒ 4
× 100 = 4 × 100
P T CONDUCTION
∴ temp of other patch = T ± ∆T 1. Three metal rods of coefficient of thermal
17. P = σ AT ⇒ P = σ 4π R T
4
( 2
) 4 conductivities K, 2K,3K conducts heats of 3Q,
2Q, Q per seconds through unit area then the
2 4
P1 R1 T1 ratio of temperature gradients
= × 1) 9:3:1 2) 9:1:1 3) 3:1:1 4) 1:1:1
P2 R 2 T2
2. Three rods A,B and C have the same
18. P = σ AT ⇒ P = σ 4π R T
4 2 4
( ) dimensions. Their conductivities are
2 4 K A , K B and K C respectively they are kept at
P1 R1 T1
= × same temperature difference. The rate of heat
P2 R2 T2 flow through C is equal to rate of combined
2
PA Tsun heat flow through A and B then K C must be
19. P = σ ( 4π R ) R
2
T ⇒ A =
4
×
R sun PSun T A equal to
20. P = eσ ( 4π R 2 ) T 4 ⇒ 1 KAKB
1) KA+KB 2) K + K 3) ( KA +KB ) 4) 2 K +K
KAKB
A B 2 A B
P1 e1 r1 l1 T1
4
3. Two rods one is semi circular of thermal
= × × ×
P2 e2 r2 l 2 T2 conductivity K1 and other is straight of thermal
conductivity K 2 and of same cross-sectional
21. P = σ AT 4 ⇒
area are joined as shown in the figure. The
P2 − P1 T 4 points A and B are maintained at same
×100 = 2 − 1 × 100 temperature difference. If rate of flow of heat
P1 T1
is same in two rods then, K1 / K 2 is
22. Given, (Volume ) sphere = (Volume )cube Semi circular rod
1
4 R 3 3
π R3 = a3 ⇒ = Straight rod
3 a 4π
A B
Here, R, a are radius of this sphere and side of the
cube 1) 2 :π 2) 1:2 3) π : 2 4) 3:2
4. Two identical rods of same metal are first
( P
P = eσ A T 4 − TS ⇒ 1 = 1 =
4
P2
A
)
A2
4π R 2
6a 2
welded in series and then in parallel are
maintained at same temperature difference
4 2
eσ AT 4 I 2 T2 d1 then the ratio of heats conducted in same time
23. I= 2
⇒ = × hereI =P is
d I1 T1 d 2 1
1) 1:1 2) 1:2 3) 1:4 4) 1:3
dθ θ1 + θ 2 5. Two slabs A and B of equal surface area are
24. P = σ AT 4 25. =K − θ0
dt 2 placed one over the other such that their surfaces
dθ are completely in contact. The thickness and
26.
dt
∝ (θ − θ 0 ) ; R ∝ θ − θ0 ( )
coefficient of thermal conductivities of slab A is
twice that of B. The first surface of slab A is
27. From Newton’s law of cooling
maintained at 1000 C , while the second surface
dθ 1
∝ ⇒ t ∝ ms of slab B is maintained at 250 C . The
dt ms
temperature at the contact of their surfaces is
W + m1 s1 t1
∴ W +m s = (2008 E)
2 2 t 2 ; W= thermal capacity of
1) 150 C 2) 62.50 C 3) 550 C 4) 850 C
calorimeter
94 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
6. Three metal rods of same lengths and same WIEN’S DISPLACEMENT LAW
area of cross - sections having conductivities AND KIRCHHOFF’S LAW
1,2,3 units are connected in series. Then their
effective conductivity will be 12. The temperature of a furnace is 22270C and
1) 2 units 2) 1.6 units 3) 2.4 units 4) 2.8 units the intensity is maximum in its spectrum nearly
7. Two hollow spheres of same thickness are filled at 12000A0. If the intensity in the spectrum of
with ice. The ratio of their diameter is 1 : 2 star is maximum nearly at 4800A0, then the
and the ratio of thermal conductivities of the surface temperature of the star is
materials is 2 : 3. The ratio of times in which 1) 84000C 2)62500C 3) 72000C 4)59770C
the ice gets melted in the two spheres is 13. Black body at a temperature of 1640 K has
1) 3 : 4 2) 4 : 3 3) 3 : 8 4) 8 : 3
8. Three rods of same dimensions have the wavelength corresponding to maximum
thermal conductivity 3K,2K and K. They are emission equal to 1.75 µ m. Assuming the
arranged as shown in figure. Then the moon to be a perfectly black body, the tem-
temperature of the junction in steady state is perature of the moon, if the wavelength corre-
( 2009 E ) sponding to maximum emission is 14.35 µ m,
0
50 C is
2K 1) 100 K 2) 150 K 3) 200 K 4) 250 K
3K
14. A particular star (assuming it as a black body)
has a surface temperature of about 5 ×104 K .
0
100 C
K The wave length in nano-meters at which its
00C
radiation becomes maximum is ( b = 0.0029mk)
(2003M)
200 0 100 0 50 0
1) C 2) C 3) 75 0 C 4) C 1) 48 2) 58 3) 60 4) 70
3 3 3
9. Three rods of lengths L,2L and 3L having ther- STEFAN’S LAW
mal conductivities 3K,2K and K are connected 15. The power radiated by a black body is ‘P’ and
end to end. If cross sectional areas of three it radiates maximum energy around the
rods are equal then equivalent thermal con-
wavelength λ0 . If the temperature of the black
ductivity of the system is.
1) 18K / 13 2) 36K / 13 3) 9K / 13 4)12K / 13 body is now changed so that it radiates
10. Three rods of identical cross sectional area and maximum energy around a wavelength
made from the same metal form the sides of λ 0 / 2 ,the power radiated becomes(2012 E )
an equilateral triangle ABC. The points A and
1) 4P 2) 16P 3) 64P 4) 256P
B are maintained at temperatures 3 T and
16. There is a temperature difference of 1K
T respectively . In the steady state, the tem- between two black patches of skin on patient’s
perature of the point C is TC . Assuming that chest and each patch having area A. The
only heat conduction takes place, the value of radiant heat emitted from them is differ by 2
TC / T is equal to % , then temperatures of two patches may be.
1) 100 K, 101 K 2) 300 K, 301 K
1+ 3 1− 3 1+ 2 1− 2 3) 200 K, 201 K 4) 400 K, 401 K
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2 17. A black body radiates energy at the rate of E
11. A hollow metal cube, with side 0.5m and wall
thickness 5x10-3m is filled with ice. It is watt/ m 2 at a high temperature TK when the
immersed in water tank maintained at 1000C. T
Calculate the amount of ice melted in 335sec. temperature is reduced to K . Then
( Conductivity of metal 2
= 0.5Wm-1 K -1, Latent heat of fusion of radiant energy is (2007E)
ice=335x103Jkg-1) E
1) 15kg 2) 15g 3) 1.5kg 4) 1.5g E E
1) 2) 2E 3) 4)
2 4 16
NARAYANAGROUP 95
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
18. The radiant energy from the Sun, incident 26. Two bodies have thermal capacities in the ratio
normally at the surface of earth, is 20kcal/m2 - 3:4 and the rates of loss of heat in the ratio
min. What would have been the radiant energy 3:5. Their rates of cooling will be in the ratio
incident normally on the earth, if the sun had a of
temperature twice of the present one? 1) 9 : 20 2) 4 : 5 3) 5 : 4 4) 1 : 1
1. 40 kcal/(m2 - min) 2. 80kcal/(m2-min) 27. A calorimeter of water equivalent 6 g has wa-
3. 160 kCal/(m2-min) 4. 320 Kcal/(m2-min) ter of mass 64 g up to a certain volume. An-
19. A star behaves like perfect Black body other identical calorimeter has liquid of mass
emitting radiant energy. The ratio of radiant 50 g and specific heat 0.6 cal/g-0C upto same
energy emitted per sec by this star to that level. If both of them cool in the same sur-
emitted by another star having 8 times the roundings through same range of temperature
radius of the former but having Kelvin and the time taken for the water to cool is 140
temperature one fourth of the former is s, the time taken for the liquid to cool is
1) 1:4 2) 1:8 3) 4:1 4) 1:16 1) 72 s 2) 140 s 3) 36 s 4) 120 s
20. Two spherical bodies have radii R,2R and LEVEL - II (H.W) -KEY
emissivities e,2e. If the temperature ratio is 01) 1 02) 1 03) 3 04) 3 05) 2 06) 2
2:1 then the powers will be in the ratio 07) 1 08) 1 09) 1 10) 1 11) 1 12) 4
1) 1:1 2) 2:1 3) 3:1 4) 4:1 13) 3 14) 2 15) 2 16) 3 17) 4 18) 4
19) 3 20) 2 21) 4 22) 3 23) 1 24) 3
21. The temperature of a black body is increased
25) 2 26) 2 27) 1
by 50%. The amount of radiation emitted by
the body increases by LEVEL - II (H.W) - HINTS
1)50% 2)100% 3)225% 4)406.25%
22. A solid sphere is at a temperature T K. The KA ( ∆θ ) t
sphere is cut into two halves. the fraction of 1. Q = l
energy emitted per second by the half sphere
∆θ Q ∆θ Q
to that by complete sphere is ∝ , let =X ⇒ X ∝
1 1 3 1 l K l K
1) 2) 4 3) 4 4) 1 6 Q1 Q2 Q3
2
23. A black metal foil is warmed by radiation from X1 : X2 : X3 = : :
K1 K2 K 3
a small sphere at temperature ‘T’ and at a
distance d. It is found that the power received Q Q Q
2. = +
by the foil is P. If both the temperature and t C t A t B
the distance are halved, the power received
K c A ( ∆θ ) K A A (∆ θ ) K B A ( ∆θ )
by the foil will be in the ratio = +
1) 1:4 2) 1:8 3) 1:16 4) 1:64 l l l
24. Power radiated by a black body is P0 and the Q Q
3. =
wavelength corresponding to maximum energy t semicircular rod t straightrod
is around λ0 . On changing the temperature of K1 A ( ∆ θ ) K 2 A ( ∆ θ )
the black body, it was observed that the power =
256
πr 2r
radiated becomes 81 P0 . The shift in r = radius of semi circle.
wavelength corres-ponding to the maximum KA ( ∆θ ) t
energy will be 4. Q =
l
λ λ λ0 λ Q1 K s A ( ∆θ ) t
1) + 0 2) + 0 3) − 4) − 0 = ×
l
( here K s = K p )
4 2 4 2 Q2 2l K p 2 A ( ∆θ ) t
NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING Q Q 2 K (100 − θ ) K (θ − 25 )
5. t = t ⇒ =
25. A body cools from 700 C to 500 C in 5 minutes. A B 2l l
Temperature of surroundings is 200 C . Its 6. Reff = R1 + R2 + R3
temperature after next 10 minutes is (2008 M) l1 + l 2 + l 3 l l l
= 1 + 2 + 3
1) 250 C 2) 300 C 3) 350 C 4) 450 C K eff K1 K2 K3
96 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
KA( ∆θ ) t 4 3 K4π R2 ( ∆θ ) t 19. P = σ AT 4 ⇒ P = σ 4π R 2T 4
7. mLice = ⇒ π R ρ × Lice = 2 4
d 3 d P R T
t R K ∴ 2 = 2 2
∴ 1 = 1× 2 P1 R1 T1
t2 R2 K1
20. P = eσ A T 4
⇒ P = eσ 4 π R 2 T 4
Q Q Q
8. t = + 4
3K t 2K t K P T e R
∴ 1 = 1 1× 1
3 K A (100 − θ ) 2 KA (θ − 50 ) K A (θ − 0 ) P2 T2 e2 R2
= +
l l l
θ is temperature of the junction. E2 − E1 T 4
21. E = σ T 4 ; E ×100 = T − 1 ×100
2
9. Reff = R1 + R2 + R3 1 1
l1 + l 2 + l3 l l l P1 A1
= 1 + 2 + 3
22. P = e σ A T ⇒ P = A
4
K eff K1 K 2 K 3
2 2
10.
A1 = 4 π R 2 and A2 = 2π R 2 + π R 2
A ( 3T ) 4 2
eσ AT 4 I T d
23. I = 2
⇒ 2 = 2 × 1 here I =P
d I1 T1 d 2 1
24. λm T = const. and P =σAT4 , ∆λ = λ − λ0
dθ θ +θ dQ dθ
25. = K 1 2 − θ 0 26. = ms
dt 2 dt dt
dθ 1
B(T) C 27. From Newton’s law cooling ∝ ⇒ t ∝ ms ;
dt ms
Q Q
t = t ;
(
KA 3T −TC ) = KA(T −T)
C m1 s1 + m2 s2 m1 s1 + m3 s3
=
AC CB l l t1 t2
KA ( ∆θ ) t LEVEL - III
11. Let mass of ice melted=m; mLice =
x
Q K( 6A)( ∆θ ) t
CONDUCTION
∴m = = ; x = wall thickness, 1. One end of a copper rod of uniform cross
Lice Lice ×x section and of length 1.5m is kept in contact
A = area of each face. with ice and the other end with water at 100ºC.
Heat is conducted across all the six faces. At what point along its length should a
12. λmT = constant ⇒ λ1T1 = λ2T2 temperature of 200ºC be maintained so that in
13. λmT = constant ⇒ λ1T1 = λ2T2 steady sate, the mass of ice melting be equal
to that of the steam produced in same interval
14. λmT = b 15. λmT = cons tan t and P ∝ T 4 of time?Assume that the whole system is
16. P = σ AT 4 insulated from surroundings.(Lice=80 cal/gm
and Lsteam= 540 cal/gm)
∆P ∆T
× 100 = 4 × 100 ; T = T ± ∆T 1.5m
P T 2 1 x
0
4
0
Ice 0 C (water 100 C)
E1 T1
17. E = σ T 4 ⇒ = 2000C
E2 T2 1) 8.59 cm from ice end
4 2) 10.34 cm from water end
E2 T2
18. E = eσ T ⇒ =
4
3) 10.34 cm from ice end
E1 T1 4)8.76 cm from water end
NARAYANAGROUP 97
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
2. Three rods of material ‘x’ and three rods of between the outer and inner surfaces of the
material y are connected as shown in figure. All shell is not to exceed ‘T’, the thickness of the
the rods are of identical length and cross- shell should not be less than
section. If the end A is maintained at 600C and 4π KR 2T 4π KR 2 4π R 2 T 4π R 2T
the junction E at 100C, find effective Thermal 1) 2) 3) 4)
P TP KP KT
Resistance. Given length of each rod=l, area
6. The temperature of the two outer surfaces of
of cross-section=A, conductivity of x=K and
conductivity of y=2K. a composite slab, consists of two materials
having coefficients of thermal conductivity K
C and 2K and thickness x and 4x respectively
are T2 and T1(T2>T1). The rate of heat transfer
X X through slab, in a steady state is
A B A ( T2 − T1 ) K
X E f , with f equals to
x
Y
Y Y x 4x
T2 K 2K T1
D
4l 7l 4 KA 7 KA
1) 2) 3) 4)
3KA 6 KA 3l 3l 1) 1 2) 1/2 3) 2/3 4) 1/3
3. A cylinder of radius R made of a material of 7. A and B are two points on a uniform metal ring
thermal conductivity K1is surrounded by a whose centre is O. The angle AOB = θ . A and
cylindrical shell of inner radius R and outer B are maintained at two different constant
radius 3R made of material of thermal temperatures. When θ = 180 0 , the rate of total
conductivity K2 . The ends of the combined heat flow from A to B is 1.2W. When θ = 900 ,
system are maintained at two different this rate will be
temperatures. There is no loss of heat across 1) 0.6 watt2) 0.9 watt 3) 1.6 watt 4) 1.8 watt
the cylindrical surface and the system is in 8. Two ends of a conducting rod of varying cross
steady state. The effective thermal section are maintained at 2000 C and 00 C
conductivity is respectively . In steady state
K1K2 K + 3K K + 8K
1) K1 + K2 2) K + K 3)
1 2
4) 1 9 2
1 2 4
4. Water is being boiled in a flat bottomed kettle
placed on a stove. The area of the bottom is A B C D
300cm2 and the thickness is 2mm. If the amount
of steam produced is 1gm min-1, then the 00C
difference of the temperature between the X
inner and the outer surface of the bottom is 2000C X
(thermal conductivity of the material of the 1) temperature difference across AB and CD are
kettle 0.5cal cm-1s-1C-1, latent heat of the steam equal
is equal to 540calg-1) 2) temperature difference across AB is greater
1) 120C 2)20C 3)0.120C 4) 0.0120C than that of across CD
5. A point source of heat of power ‘P’ is placed at 3) temperature difference across AB is less than
the centre of a spherical shell of mean radius that of across CD
‘R’. The material of the shell has thermal 4) temperature difference may be equal or different
conductivity ‘K’. If the temperature difference depending on the thermal conductivity of the rod
98 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
9. Three rods of same dimensions are arranged 13. The temperature of an isolated black body falls
as shown in the figure. They have thermal from T1 to T2 in time ‘t’. Let ‘c’ be a constant,
conductivities K1 , K 2 and K 3 . The points P and then......
Q are maintained at different temperatures for
1 1 1 1
the heat to flow at the same rate along PRQ 1) t = c T − T 2) t = c T 2 − T 2
and PQ. Which of the following options is 2 1 2 1
correct?
1 1 1 1
R 3) t = c T 3 − T 3 4) t = c T 4 − T 4
2 1 2 1
14. A star behaves like a perfectly black body
emitting radiant energy. The ratio of radiant
K1 K2 energy per second by this star to that emitted
by another star having 8 times the radius of
former, but having temperature, one-fourth
P Q that of the former in Kelvin is
K3 1) 1 : 4 2) 1 : 16 3) 4 : 1 4) 16 : 1
15. A sphere of density ‘d’, specific heat capacity
1
1) K3 = ( K1 + K2 ) 2) K 3 = K1 + K 2 ‘c’ and radius ‘r’ is hung by a thermally insulating
2 thread in an enclosure which is kept at lower
K1 K 2 temperature than the sphere. The temperature
3) K 3 = K + K 4) K3 = 2 ( K1 + K 2 ) of the sphere starts to drop at a rate which is
1 2
proportional to
10. A boiler is made of a copper plate 2.4 mm thick
1) c / r3d 2) 1 / r3dc 3) 3r3dc 4) 1 / rdc
with an inside coating of a 0.2 mm thick layer
16. Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities
of tin. The surface area exposed to gases at
of 0.01 and 0.16 respectively. The outer
2
7000 C is 400 cm . The maximum amount of surface areas of the two bodies are the same.
steam that could be generated per hour at The two bodies radiate energy at the same
atmospheric pressure is rate. The wavelength λB corresponding to the
Kcu = 0.9 cal / cm − s −0 & ktin = 0.15 cal / cm − s −0 C maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation
and Lsteam = 540 cal / g from ‘B’ is shifted from the wavelength
1)5000Kg 2)1000Kg 3)4000Kg 4)200Kg corresponding to the maximum spectral
11. Water in a lake is changing into ice at 00C. radiancy in the radiation from ‘A’ by 1.00 µm .
when the atmospheric temperature is 100C. If If the temperature of ‘A’ is 5802 K,
the time taken for 1cm thick ice layer to be 1) the temperature of ‘B’ is 1934K
formed is 7hour, the time required for the 2) λB = 1.6µ m
thickness of ice to increase from 1cm to 2cm is 3) the temperature of B is 11604K
1) 7hour 2) 14 hour 3) <7hour 4) >14 hour 4) the temperature of B is 2901K
RADIATION 17. Assuming the sun to be a spherical body of
12. Two metallic spheres S1 and S2 are made of radius R at a temperature ‘T’ K, evaluate the
the same material and have identical surface total radiant power incident on earth, at a
finish. The mass of S 1 is three times that of S 2. distance r from the sun. (Take r0 is radius of
Both the spheres are heated to the same high earth ‘ σ ’ Stefan’ss constant)
temperature and placed in the same room 4π r0 2 R 2σ T 4 π r0 2 R 2σ T 4
having lower temperature but are thermally 1) 2)
r2 r2
insulated from each other. The ratio of the
initial rate of cooling of S 1 to that S 2 is : π r02 R 2σ T 4 R 2σ T 4
3) 4)
4π r 2 r2
2) (1 / 3)3 3) 1/ 3 4)
1
1) 1/3 3 /1
NARAYANAGROUP 99
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING Y
18. Two solid spheres are heated to the same
log e (?-? 0 )
temperature and allowed to cool under
identical conditions. Assume that all the
surfaces have the same emissivity and ratios 2)
of their radii, specific heats and densities are 0 X
respectively 1: α ,1: β ,1: γ . Then the ratio of t
initial rates of loss of heat and initial rates of
fall of temperature is Y
1) αβγ :1,1: α 2 2) 1: α 2 , αβγ :1 log e (?-? 0 )
3) α :1, αβγ :1
2
4) α 2 :1,1: αβγ
19. A heated object (at time t = 0 and temperature 3)
T = T0 ) is taken out of the oven to cool and 0 X
placed on a table near an open window. Write t
an expression for its temperature as function
of time T, where Ts is the surrounding Y
temperature. log e (?-? 0 )
1) T = Ts − ( T0 + Ts ) e − kt 2) T = Ts + (T0 + Ts ) e− kt
4)
3) T = Ts + ( T0 − Ts ) e − kt 4) T = Ts − ( T0 − Ts ) e − kt 0 X
20. A system ‘S’ receives heat continuously from t
an electrical heater of power 10W. The 23. If a piece of metal is heated to temperature θ
temperature of S becomes constant at 500C and then allowed to cool in room which is at
when the surrounding temperature is 200C.
After the heater is switched off, S cools from temperature θ0 , the graph between the
35.10C to 34.90C in 1 minute. The heat capacity temperature T of the metal and time t will be
of S is closest to ( 2013 JEE )
1) 750J(0C)-1 2) 1500J(0C)-1 Y
3) 3000J(0C)-1 4) 6000J(0C)-1 Y
21. According to Newton’s Law of cooling, the rate T
of cooling of a body is proportional to ( ∆θ ) ,
n
T θ0
1) 2)
where ∆θ is the difference of temperature of X
X O
the body and the surroundings, then n is equal 0 t
t
to
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 1 Y
22. A liquid in a beaker has temperature θ ( t ) at
Y
T
T
time ‘t’ and ‘ θ0 ’ is temperature of
θ0
surroundings, then according to Newton’s law .3) θ0 4)
of cooling the correct graph between loge X X
O O
(θ − θ0 ) and t is (2012 JEE) t t
Y
log e (?-? 0 )
LEVEL - III - KEY
01) 2 02) 2 03) 4 04) 4 05) 1 06) 4
1) 07) 3 08) 3 09) 3 10) 3 11) 4 12) 2
0 X
t 13) 3 14) 3 15) 4 16) 4 17) 2 18) 2
19) 3 20) 2 21) 4 22) 1 23) 3
100 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
LEVEL - III - HINTS
R 3R
KA ( 200 − 0 ) t
=
4 4 3R
mice = R net =
1. 80 (1.5 − x ) ; If θ = 900 then
R 3R 16
+
4 4
KA ( 200 − 100 ) t
msteam =
540 × x ∆θ 4
∴ I2 = = I1
According to given problem, mice = msteam 3R 3
2. No heat is flowing through the road CD 16
C
Q
R R 8. ∆θ = t × thermal resistance
B
A E
l
R
2 R R ∆θ ∝ thermal resistance (R); where R = KA
2 2
D
1
2R × R 2R ∆θ ∝ , Area across CD is less. Therefore ,
Req = RAB + R BE , R BE = = A
2R + R 3 temperature difference across CD will be more.
R 2 R 7R 7l 9.
Req = + = =
2 3 6 6 KA R
3. Two rods are in parallel
K eff ( A1 + A2 ) = K1 A1 + K 2 A2
K1 K2
A1 = π R 2 and A2 = π (9 R 2 − R 2 )
mL KA (θ1 − θ 2 )
4. = P Q
t d K3
Q K ( 4π R 2 ) ∆ θ
5. Rate of heat flow =P= Q Q
t d Given t =
d=Thickness of shell PQR t PQ
K s A ( ∆θ ) K 3 A ( ∆θ )
x 4x 3x
6. Req = + = 2 K1K 2
KA 2 KA KA = , here K s =
2l l K1 + K 2
Q (T2 − T1 ) (T2 − T1 ) KA
= = Q temperaturedifference θ 2 − θ1
t Req 3x 10. t = thermal resi tan ce = R + R
1 2
Compare this equation with given equation.
R Q
× giventime
m=
2 t
A o B Lice
ρL 2
7.
11. t =
2 KT
(
x2 − x12 ; ) t ∝ x2 2 − x12
R
2 dθ
12. ms = eσ A ( T 4 − T04 )
∆θ I = ∆θ = 1.2 watt
dt
Thermal current I = R net ;
1
R 4 3 dθ dθ 1
= eσ 4π r 2 (T 4 − T04 ) ; α α 1/3
1
4 πr s
3 dt dt r m
NARAYANAGROUP 101
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
dT t ms T dT dθ
= −σ AT 4 ; ∫ dt = −
σ A ∫T T 4
= − K ( T − Ts )
2
13. ms 19.
dt 0 1
dt
14. P = σ AT ⇒ P = σ 4π R T
4 2 4 T
dθ
t
P R T
2 4
∫T T − Ts = − K ∫0 dt log TT0 −− TTss = − K t + C
∴ 1 = 1 1 0
P2 R2 T2 dQ 1
20. ∝ T − T0 ; 10 = β ( 50 − 20 ) ; β =
dθ
15. ms
dt
(
= KA θ − θ 0 ) dt
(θ − θ 2 ) = β θ 1 + θ 2 − θ
3
dθ
( ms ) 1 s
4 3
3
π r
d × c
dt
= K 4π r 2
θ −(θ 0 ) here
t 2
θ1 = 35.1º C;θ2 = 34.9º C
dθ 1 21. According to Newton’s Law of cooling
∝
dQ dQ
dt rdc ∝ ∆θ ; but ∝ ( ∆θ ) ⇒ n = 1
n
16. P = e Aσ T ⇒ e A T A = e B T B
4 4 4
dt dt
θ
λmT = const ⇒ λ ATA = λ BTB dθ dθ
t
22. = − k (θ − θ 0 ) ; ∫ = − k ∫0 dt
Given λB − λA = 1µ n dt θ
θ − 0
θ 0
17. Energy radiated per sec by the Sun in all possible ln (θ − θ 0 ) = −kt + C so graph is a straight line.
directions (Assume the Sun as perfect black body)
dθ dθ
E = ( 4π R 2 ) σ T 4 23. = − k (θ − θ 0 ) ; ∫
θ − θ0
= − K ∫ dt
dt
Intensity (I) of the Sun on the Earth surface
log (θ − θ0 ) = − Kt + C ⇒ θ − θ 0 = e − Kt +C
σ ( 4π R 2 ) T 4 R
2
I= = σ T4 θ = θ0 + e − Kt +C
4π r 2
r
Total radiant energy per sec as received on earth LEVEL - IV
2
R 2 4
= ( π r0 2 ) I = πσ r0 T MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
r 1. Match the following:
[ ∴ The area of the Earth which receives the energy List -I List -II
1 A) Coefficient of thermal E) Wm−2 K −4
is only th of total surface area of the Earth
4 conductivity
( r >> R ) whose disc has surface area equal to B) Temperature gradient F) Wm−1K −1
C) Stefan’s constant G) mK
π r0 2 w.r.t sun ] D) Wien’s constant H) Km−1
dQ 2. Match the following
A R 2
⇒ 1 = 1 = 1
dt A) Thermal resistance E) MT −3K −4
18.
dQ
(
= σ Ae T − T0
4 4
) dQ A2 R2 B) Stefan's constant F) MLT −3K −1
dt C) Wien's constant G) M −1L−2T 3K
dt 2
D) coefficient of thermal H) M 0 LK
dθ conductivity
A m s 3. Match the following
dθ σ Ae 4 ⇒ dt 1 = 1 × 2 × 2
= ( T − T0 )
4
dθ A2 m1 s1
List - I List - II
dt ms A) Fraunhoffer lines E)Newton law
dt 2 of cooling
dθ B) Black body F) Kirchoff’s law
ρ
dt 1 = 2 × 2 × 2
R s C) Specific heat of G) Ferry
dθ R1 ρ1 s1 a liquid
dt 2 D) Thermal conductivity H) Searle’s apparatus
of a metal
102 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
ASSERTION & REASON TYPE ORDER ARRANGING QUESTIONS
1) Both A and R are true, R is correct 13. I) A sphere II) A cube III)A thin circular plate.
explanation of A All made of the same material having the same
2) Both A and R are true, R is not correct mass are initially heated to 2000C. Identify the
explanation of A order in which the objects cool faster when left
3) Both A and R are true in air at room temperature
4) Both A and R are false 1) III,II and I 2) II, I and III
4. Assertion (A): Woolen clothes keep the body warm
3) I, II and III 4) II, III and I
in winter
14. A beaker full of hot water is kept in a room and
Reason (R): Air is a bad conductor of heat
5. Assertion (A): The radiation from the sun surface it cools from
varies as the fourth power of its absolute temperature. I) 900C to 800C in t1 sec. II) 800C to 700C in t2 sec.
Reason (R): Sun is not a black body. III) 700C to 600C in t3 sec. IV) 600C to 500C in t4 sec.
6. Assertion (A): Thermal radiations are If the room temperature is 100C, identify the
electromagnetic radiation with wave lengths greater order in which the times of cooling increases
than visible light. 1) IV,III,II & 1 2) I,III,IV & II
Reason (R): Thermal radiations can propagate 3) I, II,III & IV 4) III, I, II & IV
through vacuum. 15. In the following, which statement is correct
7. Assertion (A): Two metallic spheres of same size, A) A hot body emits hot radiations only.
one of copper and other of aluminium heated to the B) A cold body absorbs the radiations only.
same temperatures, will cool at the same rate when C) A cold body emits cold radiations only.
they are suspended in the same enclosure. D) All the bodies emits and absorbs radiations
Reason (R): The rate of cooling of a body is directly
simultaneously
proportional to the excess of temperature of the
1) A 2) B 3) C 4) D
body over the surroundings.
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS LEVEL -IV - KEY
Options : MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Statement A is true and statement B is true 1) A-F, B-H, C-E, D-G 2) A-G, B-E, C-H, D-F
2. Statement A is true and statement B is false 3) A-F, B-G, C-E, D-H
3.Statement A is false and statement B is true ASSERTION & REASON TYPE QUESTION
4.Statement A is false and statement B is false 4) 1 5) 2 6) 2 7) 1
8. (A) Heat transfer by conduction and convection STATEMENT TYPE QUESTION
require a material medium. 8) 1 9) 1 10) 1 11) 4 12) 1
(B) Heat transfer by radiation doesn’t effect the ORDER ARRANGING QUESTIONS
medium through which it passes. 13) 1 14) 3 15) 4
9. (A) A body of low thermal capacity gets heated or
cooled quickly. LEVEL -IV - HINTS
(B) Good emitters are bad reflectors. 4. Some air is trapped in pores of woolen clothes will
10. (A) Greater the mass of radiating body, slower will act as bad conductor of heat.
be cooling 5. Radiation emitted from the sun is measured with the
(B)Greater the temperature of the surroundings, help of Stefan’s law by considering the sun as
lower will be cooling blackbody, but sun is not a perfect black body.
11. (A) Water can be boiled inside the artificial satellite 6. Thermal radiations are electromagnetic radiations
by convection which belongs to infrared region. Electromagnetic
(B) Heavy liquid can be boiled in artificial satellite by energy does not require material medium for their
convection propagation.
12. (A) Black body radiation is white 7. Rate of cooling depends on surface area and
(B) Emissive power of a body is proportional to its temperature difference between the body and the
absorptive power surroundings.
NARAYANAGROUP 103
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
LEVEL-V T–T0
(A) 1 min
T
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1. 0.5 mole of an ideal gas at constant (B) 2 min
temperature 27°C kept inside a cylinder of (∆T)0
length L and cross-section area A closed by
(C) 3 min
a massless piston. The cylinder is attached
0.37 (∆T)0
with a conducting rod of length L , cross-section (0.37)2 (∆T)0
area (1/9) m2 and thermal conductivity k, O τ 2τ Time (t) (D) 4 min
whose other end is maintained at 0°C. If piston
is moved such that rate of heat flow through 5. A and B are two points on a uniform metal ring
the conducing rod is constant then find velocity whose centre is C. The angle ABC = θ . A and
of piston when it is at height L/2 from the B are maintained at two different constant
bottom of cylinder. [Neglect any kind of heat temperatures. When θ = 180°, the rate of total
loss from system] heat flow from A to B is 1.2 W. When θ = 90°,
this rate will be
(A) 0.6 W (B) 0.9 W (C) 1.6 W (D) 1.8 W
6. Two metallic spheres S1 and S2 are made of
L 27°C the same material and have got identical
0°C surface finish. The mass of S1 is thrice that of
S2. Both the spheres are heated to the same
L high temperature and placed in the same room
having lower temperature but are thermally
k k k k
(A) (B) (C) (D) insulated from each other. The ratio of the
50R 100R 110R 90R
initial rate of cooling of S1 to S2 is (IIT-95)
2. Two thin walled spheres of different materials,
1 1 3 æ1ö
13
one with double the radius and one-fourth wall (A) (B) 3 (C) (D) ççè ÷÷÷ø
thickness of the other, are filled with ice. If 3 1 3
the time taken for complete melting of ice in 7. A black body is at a temperature of 2880 K.
the sphere of larger radius is 25 minutes and The energy of radiation emitted by this object
that for smaller one is 16 minutes, the ratio of with wavelength between 499 nm and 500 nm
thermal conductivities of the materials of is U1, between 999 nm and 1000 nm is U2 and
larger sphere to the smaller sphere is : between 1499 nm and 1500 nm is U3. The
(A) 4 : 5 (B) 25 : 1 (C) 1 : 25 (D) 8 : 25 Wein constant, b = 2.88 × 106 nm-K. Then
3. The power radiated by a black body is P, and (IIT - 1998)
it radiates maximum energy around the (A) U1 = 0 (B) U3 = 0 (C) U1 > U2 (D) U2 > U1
wavelength λ0. If the temperature of the black 8. Three discs, A, B and C having radii 2 m, 4 m
body is now changed so that it radiates and 6 m respectively are coated with carbon
maximum energy around a wavelength 3λ0/4, black on their outer surfaces. The wavelengths
the power radiated by it will increase by a factor of corresponding to maximum intensity are 300
(A) 4/3 (B) 16/9 (C) 64/27 (D) 256/81 nm, 400 nm and 500 nm respectively. The
4. A calorimeter of negligible heat capacity power radiated by them are QA, QB and QC
contains 100 cc of water at 400C. The water respectively (IIT - 2004)
cools to 350C in 5 min. The water is now (A) QA is maximum (B) QB is maximum
replaced by k-oil A equal volume at 400C, Find (C) QC is maximum (D) QA = QB = QC
the time taken for the temp to become 350C 9. In which of the following process, convection
(Given densities of water and K-oil are does not take place primarily ? (IIT- 2005)
respectively 1000 and 800 kg.m-3; and their (A) Sea and land breeze (B) Boiling of water
specific heats are respectively: 420 and 2100 (C) Warming of glass bulb due to filament
J/kg-0C) (D) heating air around a furnace
104 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
10. Variation of radiant energy emitted by sun, 14. In the figure shown, AB is a rod of length 30
filament of tungsten lamp and welding arc as cm and area of cross-section 1.0 cm2 and
a function of its wavelength is shown in figure. thermal conductivity 336 S.I. units. The ends
Which of the following option is the correct A & B are maintained at temperatures 200 C
match? and 400 C respectively. A point C of this rod is
connected to a box D, containing ice at 00 C,
through a highly conducting wire of negligible
Eα
heat capacity. The rate at which ice melts in
T3 the box is
T2
T1 A C B
λ 20°C 40°C
(A) Sun-T1,tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T3
(B) Sun-T2,tungsten filament-T1, welding arc-T2 10cm 20cm
(C) Sun-T3,tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T1
(D) Sun-T1,tungsten filament-T3, welding arc-T2 highly conducting wire
11. A solid copper sphere ( density ρ and specific
heat C) of radius r at a n initial temeprature Ice D
200K is suspended inside a chamber whose
walls are at almost 0K. The time required for 0°C
the temeprature of the sphere to drop to 100K (a) 84 mg/s (b) 84 g/s (c) 20 mg/s (d) 40 mg/s
is 15. Which of the following graphs shows the
A) 1.7 ρ rc B) 2.7 ρ rc C) 3.3 ρ rc D) 4.2 ρ rc correct variation in intensity of heat radiations
12. Three very large plates of same area kept by black body and frequency at a fixed
parallel and close to each other. They are temperature?
considered as ideal black surfaces and have (a) EV (b) Eλ
UV Visible Infra-red UV Visible Infra-red
very high thermal conductivity. The first and
third plates are maintained at temperature 2T
and 3T respectively. The temperature of the 3500K
2500K
1500K
2500K
middle (i.e. second) plate under steady state 1500K 3500K
condition is (IIT JEE-2012)
V V
1 1 1
65 4 97 97
4 1 4
(a) T (b) T (c) T (d) ( 97 ) 4 T
(c) Eλ Infra-red Visible UV (d) Eλ Infra-red Visible UV
2 4 2 3500K 1500K
13. Three rods AB, BC and BD of same length l
2500K 2500K
and cross-sectionsl area A are arranged as
shown. The end D is immersed in ice whose 1500K 3500K
mass is 440 gm. Heat is being supplied at V V
constant rate of 200 cal/sec from the end . Time 16. Three different arrangemnets of materials 1,
in which whole ice will melt (Latent heat of 2 and 3 to from a wall. Thermal conductivities
fusion of ice is 80 cal/gm) are k1 > k 2 > k3 . The left side of the wall is
K,l 2K,l
200 cal/sec 100°C 200C higher than the right side. Temperature
A B C
difference ∆T across the material 1 has
K/2l following relation in three cases:
Ice a. b. c. (a) ∆Ta > ∆Tb > ∆Tc
D (b) ∆Ta = ∆Tb = ∆Tc
1 2 3 1 3 2 3 1 2
(A) 40/3 min (B) 700 sec (c) ∆Ta = ∆Tb > ∆Tc
(C) 20/3 min (D)indefiniely long time (d) ∆Ta = ∆Tb < ∆Tc
NARAYANAGROUP 105
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
MULTIPLE ANSWER TYPE
17. Two identical objects A and B are at
temperatures TA and TB, respectively. Both
objects are placed in a room with perfectly
absorbing walls maintained at a temperature
T (TA > T > TB). The objects A and B attain the
temperature T eventually. Select the correct
statements from the following. (a) Rate of heat flow from outside to the flask is 80 π J / s
(A) A only emits radiation, while B only absorbs it π
(b) The rate at which ice melts is kg / s
until both attain the temperature T 4200
(B) A loses more heat by radiation than it absorbs, (c) The rate at which ice melts is 100 π kg / s
while B absorbs more radiation than it emits, until (d) Rate of heat flow from outside to flask is 40 π J / s
they attain the temperature T
21. A metal cylinder of mass 0.5 kg is heated
(C) Both A and B only absorb radiation, but do electrically by a 12 W heater in a room at
not emit it,until they attain the temperature T 15 0 C. The cylinder temperature rises
(D) Each object continuous to emit and absorb nuniformly to 250C in 5 min and finally
radiation even after attaiing the temperature T becomes constant at 450C. Asuming that the
18. Two solid spheres are heated to the same rate of heat loss is proportional to the excess
tempearature and allowed to cool under temperature over the surroundings
identical conditions. Compare; (i) initial rates (a) The rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to
of fall of temperature, and (ii) initial rates of surrounding ar 200C is 2 W
loss of heat. Assume that all the surfaces (b) The rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to
have the same emissivity and ratios of their surrounding at 450C is 2 W
radii, specific heats and densities are 240
(c) Specific heat capacity of metal is J / kg 0C
respectively 1: a,1: ß ,1: ? . ln(3/ 2)
(d) None fof these
(A) aß? :1 (B) 1: a 2 (C) ß = a? (D) 1: a 3 22. When we consider convection with radiation
19. Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities in Newton’s law of cooling while temperature
of 0.01 and 0.81 respectively. The outer of the object in consideration is sightly higher
surface areas of the two bodies are the same. than the environment temperature. Choose
The two bodies emit total radiant power at the correct statements about rate of heat loss.
(a) directly proportional to emissivity
same rate. The wavelength λB corresponding (b) directly proportional to Stefan’s constant
to maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation (c) directly proportional to surface area
from B shifted from the wavelength (d) directly proportional to temperature difference
corresponding to maximum spectral radiancy of body and room.
in the radiation from A, by 1.00 µ m . If the MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
temperature of A is 5802 K : (IIT - 1994) 23. Match the following Column I and II
(A) the temperature of B is 1934 K Column I
(B) λB = 1.5µ m (A) Wien’s displacement explains
(B)Planck’s law explains
(C) the temperature of B is 11604 K
(C) Kirchhoff’s law explains
(D) the temperature of B is 2901 K (D) Newton’s law of cooling explains
20. A 100 cm long cylindrical flask with inner and Column II
outer diameter 2 cm and 4 cm respectively is (p) Why days are hot and nights cold in deserts
completely filled with ice as shown in the (q) Why a blackened platinum wire, when gradually
figure. The constant temperature outside the heated, appears first dull red and then blue
flask is 400C. (r) The distribution of energy in black body
(Thermal conductivity of the flask is spectrum at shorter as well as longer wavelengths
0.693 W / m 0 C , Lice = 80cal / gm & ln 2 = 0.693 ). (s) Why some stars are hot ter than other
106 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
24. Column I (B)
A) A perfect reflecting body
B) A perfect black body
C) An ordinary smooth body
D) An ordinary rough body
Column II B is thin spherical shell A is a solid sphere r A<rB
(C)
P) absorbs radiation Q) reflects radiation
R) emits radiations S) transfer heat
25. Entries in cloumn I consists of diagrams of
thermal conductors. The tupe of conductor &
direction of heat flows are listed below. B is thin spherical shell, A is a solid sphere r A<rB
Entries column II consists of the magnitude Body A is being heated by a heater of constant
of rate of heat flow belonging to any of the power ‘P’
entries in column I. If temperature difference (D)
in all the cases is (T1-T2)
Column I
(A) (B)
3R 3R
T2
B is thin spherical shell, A is a solid sphere, rA ≈ rB
2R
T1 T2 T1 R
R
k0
k0 Body A is being heated by a heater of constant
Thick cylindrical Thick spherical power ‘P’
shell, flow along axis shell, radical flow
Column II
(D) 3R (P) TA = TB
(C) 3R
2R
T1 R T2 (Q) TA < TB
R
T1
T1 (R) Heat received by A is more than heat radiated
k0
T2
by it at steady state.
X solid cylinder,
Thick cylindrical flow along axis, (S) Radiation spectrum of A & B is distinguishable
shell, radical flow variable k as
k = k0(1+x/(3R)) (T) Steady state can’t be achieved
Column II COMPREHENSIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
π k0 R Passage : 1
(P) 6π k0 R ( T1 − T2 ) (Q) 3 ln 2 (T1 − T2 ) A body is kept inside a container the temeprature
of the body is T1 and the temeprature of the
4π k0 R
(R) π k0 R ( T1 − T2 ) (T1 − T2 )
(S) container is T2 . the rate at which body absorbs
ln 2
26. A & B are two black bodies of radii rA and rB the energy is α . The emissivity of the body is e.
respectively, placed in surrounding of The radiation striking the body is either absorbed
temperature T 0 . At steady state the or reflected.
temperature of A & B is T A & TB respctively. 27. After a long time, the temperature of the body
Column I will be
(A) A) T1 B) T2
(T1 − T2 )
C) T1 + D) none of these
2
28. At what rate, the body will emit the radiant
A & B are solid sphere r A=rB energy
A) If t is the time, rate is ( T1 − T2 ) t B) e
Body ‘B’ is being heated by a heater of constant
power ‘P’
C) both of the above D) none of the above
NARAYANAGROUP 107
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
29. At what rate the body will basorb the radiant 34. A solid copper sphere of density ρ, specific
energy heat c and radius r is at temperature T1. It is
A) α , but α ≠ e suspended inside a chamber whose walls are
at temperature 0 K. The time required for the
B) ( T1 − T2 ) / t , where t is the time temperature of sphere to drop to T 2 is
C) e, but e = α D) None of the above
30. A good absorber is rρc 1 1
3 − 3 . Find the value of x? Take the
A) good reflector B) poor reflector xeσ T2 T1
C) average reflector D) assessment not possible emmissivity of teh sphere to be equal to e.
ASSERTION & REASON TYPE QUESTIONS 35. Two identical conducting rods are first,
Note : Each question contains STATEMENT- connected independently to two vessels, one
1 (Assertion) and STATEMENT-2 (Reason). containing water at 100°C and the other
Each question has 5 choices (A), (B), (C), (D) containing ice at 0°C. In the second case, rods
and (E) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. are joined end to end and are connected to
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; the same vessels. If q1 and q2 (in g/s) are the
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1. rates of melting of ice in two cases, then find
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; the ratio of q 1/q2.
Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for 36. Two spherical bodies A (radius 6 cm) and B
Statement-1.
(C) Statement -1 is True, Statement-2 is False. (radius 18 cm) are at temperatures T1 and T2
(D) Statement -1 is False, Statement-2 is True. respectively. The maximum intensity in the
(E) Statement -1 is False, Statement-2 is False emission spectrum of A is at 500 nm and in
31. Statement-1 : As the temperature of the blackbody that of B is at 1500 nm. Considering them to
increases, the wavelength at which the spectral be black bodies, what will be the ratio of total
intensity (Eλ) is maximum decreases. energy radiated by A to that of B?(IIT-2010)
Statement-2 :The wavelength at which the spectral LEVEL - V - KEY
intensity will be maximum for a black body is
proportional to the fourth power of its absolute SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
temperature. 1) B 2) D 3)D 4)B 5)C 6)D 7)D
32. Take a test tube nearly filled with water and
put in the bottom a piece of paraffin wax, round 8)B 9)C 10)D 11)A 12) C 13) A 14) D
which a piece of thick copper wire has been 15) C 16) B
wound so that wax remains at the bottom. MULTIPE ANSWER QUESTIONS
Temperature required for melting wax is 520C.
Statement -1: Heat the water at top where it will 17) B, D 18) A,B 19) A,B
be seen to boil vigorously without melting wax. 20) A,B 21) A,C 22) C,D
Statement-2 : Convection currents are not set-up MATRIX MATCHING TYPE
when water columm is heated from top amd water
is poor conductor of heat. 23) A → Q; B → S; C → R; D → P
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS 24) A → Q,S; B → P,R,S; C → P,Q,R,S; D → P,Q,R,S)
33. A rod of length l with thermally insulated 25) A → R; B → P; C → S; D → Q
lateral surface is made of a material whose 26) A → Q,S; B → P; C → S; D → Q,S
thermal conductivity varies as K = C/T. where COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
C is a constant. The ends are kept at
temperatures T1 and T2. The temperature at 27) B 28) B 29) C 30) B
a distance x from the first end where the ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
n x / 2l
T2 31) C 32) A
temperature is T1 , T = T1 . Find the
T1 INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
value of n? 33) 2 34) 9 35) 4 36) 9
108 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
LEVEL - V - HINTS 5. R = Total thermal resistance of the ring
∆T = difference in temperature between A and B
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
for θ = 180° equivalent resistance between A and
∆Q ∆w kaθ
1. = = work done per unit time = B is R/ 4 (R/2 & R/2 in parallel)
∆t ∆t L
∆T ∆T
Power = F × Velocity = PAV' =
nRT
AV ′ Rate of flow of heat I1 = 1.2 = ∴ = 0.3
V
R/4 R
where V → volume, V' → velocity For θ = 90°, equivalent resistance between A &
0.5R(300) kaθ B is 3R/16 (R/4 and 3R/4 in parallel)
⇒ AV ′ =
V L ∆T 16
Rate of flow of heat I 2 = = × 0.3 = 1.6W
0.5R(300) kaθ ka 27 k 3R /16 3
⇒ L
AV ′ = ⇒ V′ = =
L R 300 100R 6. According to Stefan’s law, ∆Q = eσAT 4 ∆t
A.
2
Also, ∆Q = ms∆T ∴ ms∆T = eσAT 4 ∆t
dr 1 r2 − r1
2. (D). ∫ dR = ∫ 4πr 2 K = 4πK r r ∆T eσAT 4 ∆T eσT 4 A
21 = =
or or …… (i)
[R = thermal resistance] ∆t ms ∆t s m
• 4πK∆θ 4πK∆θ 1/3
Q= = 4 3 3m
r2 − r1 t For a sphere, m = πr ρ or r =
r r 2
3 4πρ
r
12
mL 4πK∆θ 4
∴Area of sphere,
= m = ρ × πr3
time 2
(t / r )
2/3
r 3 3m
ρL K A = 4πr 2 or A = 4π
1
tr
= × constant time ∝ ……….. (ii)
r
2
time tr K 4πρ
∴Rate of cooling
t/4
∆T eσT
2/3
3
t 4 2/3
t m
2rKs
1 KS KL 8 = 4π ×
; K = 25
25 4 ∆t s
R R = = 4πρ m
16 trK L 2 KL S
S = (Constant) × m–1/3
3. (D). Let T 0 = initial temperature of the black body. 1/3 −1 / 3 1/3
∴ λ0T0 = b (constant) S1 m1 S 3m 1
∴ = or 1 = =
Power radiated = P 0 = C.T04. (c = constant) S2 m 2 S2 m 3
Let T = new temperature of black body. 1/3
S1 1
3λ 0 =
∴ T = b = λ 0 T0 or
4T
T= 0 ∴ S2 3
4 3
4 7. According to Wien’s displacement law,
4 256
Power radiated = c.T4 = (cT04 ) = P0 λ m T = Wien’s constant (b)
3 81
4. From the law of cooling, we have b 2.88 × 106 nm K
kt
or λ m = T
=
2880 K
or λ m = 1000nm
−
( 35 − T0 ) = ( 40 − T0 ) e ?sV
Since the intial and the final temperature differences ∴Energy of radiation is maximum
U2
are the same, we must have ?1.s1 .t2 = ?2 .s2 .t1 at λ m = 1000 nm
Eλ U1 U3
800 × 2100 × 5 ∴Thus U2 > U1, U2 > U3
∴ t2 = 1000 × 4200
= 2min
As the properties of the exponential functions U1 ≠ 0, U 2 ≠ 0
λ
λµ
demand, in equal intervals of time the fall in the ∴Option (d) is correct
‘temperature difference’ has the same ratio.
NARAYANAGROUP 109
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
8. According to Wien’s displacement law, 12. (c)
λT = b = wien’s constant 2T T 3T
b
∴ λ A TA = b or TA = 3 × 10−7
b × 107 z
TA = = where z = (b × 107 )
3 3
b × 107 z b × 107 z σ A ( 2T ) + σ A ( 3T ) = σ ( 2 A )(T ' )
4 4 4
Similarly TB = = and TC = =
4 4 5 5
16T 4 + 81' T 4 = 2 ( T ')
4
Again, according to Stefan’s law,
Q = Power radiated by black body = AσT 4 1
Where A = area of disc = π R 2 97 4
97T 4 = 2T '4 ⇒ T ' = T .
z
4 2
QA = ( πR ) ×σ× ( TA ) −2 2
or QA = π(2 ×10 ) ×σ
2 4
A
3 13. Give k (thermal conductivity)
=100 cal/m/sec/0C, A=10 cm2, l=1m
22
Q A = πσ× 10−4 × z 4 × If θ be temperature of B,
34
2kA (θ − 100) ( k / 2) A(θ − 0) = 200
+
or Q A = ( πσ × 10 × z ) ×
−4 4 4 then
81 l l
Substituting value
Put πσ × 10−4 × z4 = k = cons tan t
kA(880 − 0)
4k θ = 8800 C∴φ1 = mL; × t = 440 × 80
or Q A = = 0.049k 2l
81
80 × 1× 2 × 440
k × (4) 2 K t= = 800sec = 40 / 3 min
Q
Similary, B = = = 0.062k 100 × 10 ×10−4 × 880
(4) 4 16
dθ dm 40 − 0 20 − 0
14. = .L f = × K A + .1 K A
k × (6) 2
36K dt dt .2
QC = 4
= = 0.037k . Hence Q is maximum
(5) 625 B
1
15. According to Wien’s law λm ∝ ⇒ vm ∝ T
10. According to wein’s law λ T = const T
λ3 < λ2 < λ1 ∴ T3 > T2 > T1 As the temperature of body increases, frequency
T3
→ sun T2
→ welding arc
corresponding to maximum energy in radiation ( λm )
T1
→ Tungsten filament increases. Also area under the curve ∫ Ev dv ∝ T 4
16. since the rate of heat flow will be same in all the
Eα
three cases so the temperature diffrence will also
be same across wall 1 because it has same
T3
parameteres in all the cases.
T2
T1 MULTIPE ANSWER QUESTIONS
λ 1λ2λ3 λ 17. B, D.
11. Energy radiated per second = σ AT 4 Every object emits and absorbs the radiation
simultaneously. If energy emitted is more than
t 100
− dT − dT energy absorbed, temperature falls and vice versa.
= σ AT ; ∫ dt = σ A = ∫ T dT
4 4
So, mc 18. A, B
dt 0 200
(i) Given, R1 : R2 = 1: a , s1 : s2 = 1: ß
mc 1 1 7mc × 10−6
t= − = =1.71 ρ rc.
3σ A (100 )3 ( 200 )3 ;
24σ A ?1 : ?2 = 1: ?, e1 = e2 ;
d?
dt
=−
ms
(
sAe 4
T − T04 )
110 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
d? A1 r2
dr ln2
dt
1 = m1s1 = A1 × m2 × s2 Req = ∫ =
k .2π rl k .2π l
d?
r1
SO A2 A2 m1 s1
dt
2 m2 s2 TS − Tice 40
∴ Heat current = Req
=
ln2
k 2π l = 80π J / sec
d?
dt
1 = 4pR1 × ?2 × 4 / 3pR2 × s2
2 3
dmice
d? 4pR22 ?1 4 / 3p13 s1 Also, L f = 80π
dt dt
2
dmice 80π π
⇒ = = kg / sec
d? dt 80 × 4.2 × 1000 4200
R1 R2 ?2 s2 dt 1 = 2 × 2 × 2
2 3 R ? s T(°C)
= × × × = d? R1 ?1 s1
25
R2 R1 ?1 s1 dQe
2
dt 21.
15
In final state, = k (45 − 15) = 12
dt
= a × ? × ß = aß? 5 t(min)
d? d? 2 dQ 2
K = ; at 200 C, e = k (20 − 15) = × = 2watt
SO : = aß? :1 5 dt 5
dt 1 dt 2
dT 2 dT 2
m.s. = 12 − (T − 15 ) ⇒ m.s. = 18 − T
= sAe (T 4 − T04 )
dQ dt 5 dt 5
(ii)
dt dT 240
m.s.∫ = ∫ dt ⇒ s =
25 300
J / kg − 0C
2 3
dQ
15 0
18 − T l n
2 5 2
dt 1 = A1 = R1 = 1
dQ A2 R2 a 2 dQ
= eAσ 4T03 (T − T0 ) + kA (T − T0 )
22.
dt
dt 2
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
dQ dQ
= 1: a
2
: 31. From Wein’s law l m T=constant i.e. peak emission
dt 1 dt 2
1
1 wavelength l m µ .Hence as T increases l m
T
T e 4
19. A,B e A σ TA4 = e B σ TB4 ; A = B = 3 decreases.
TB eA 32. Since the water has high heat capacity so it will
increase its own temperature and a very less part
TA
TB = = 1934 k λ A TA = λ BTB of heat will be transfered to the wax .so wax will
3 not melt.
λB INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS
λA = ; λ B − λ A = 1µm ; λ B = 1.5 m
3
x T
dQ CAdT dQ dx = CA dT
33. (2) = ; dt ∫ ∫T
dt Tdx 0 Ti
dQ T dQ T
l
x = CA In ; (i) l = CAIn 2
dr dt T1 dt T1
20.
X dx
x/l
x ln T / T1 T2
= ; T = T1
T1 T2
l ln T2 / T1 T1
NARAYANAGROUP 111
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
34. (9) The rate of loss of energy due to radiation, 2. A body with an initial temperature θi is allowed
to cool in a surrounding which is at a constant
dT
P = eAσT 4 . . Tis rate must be equal to mc dt . temperature of θ0 (θ0 < θi ) . Assume that
Newton’s law of cooling is obeyed. Let k =
dT
Hence, −mc = eAσT 4 constant. The temperature of the body after
dt time t is best expressed by
Negative sign is used as temperature decreases with
(A) (θi − θ0 ) e− kt (B) (θi − θ0 ) ln (kt)
4 3
time. In this equation, m = πr ρ and A = 4πr
2
(C) θ0 + (θi − θ0 ) e− kt (D) θi e − kt − θ0
3
3. The intensity of radiation emitted by the sun
T2
dT 3eσ 4 rρc dT
t
has its maximum value at a wavelength of 510
∴ − dt = ρcr T or, − ∫ dt = 3eσ ∫ T 4 nm and that emitted by the north star has the
0 T 1 maximum value at 350 nm, If these stars
behave like blackbodies, then the ratio of the
rρc 1 1
Solving this, we get t = 9eσ 3
− 3 . surface temperature of the sun and the north
T2 T1 star is :
(A) 1.46 (B) 0.69 (C) 1.21 (D) 0.83
Temperature difference dm
35. (4) = L 4. A rod of uniform cross section is heated at
Thermal resistance dt
temperature t0 at a point which is at n1 times
dm 1 1
∝ q∝ if its length ( n1 < 1) from its one end in stready
dt Thermal resistance ; R
The rods are in parallel in the first case and they state. The temeprature at this end is t1 and
q1 2R at other end is t2 . Rate of vapourisation of
are in series in the second case. q = (R / 2) = 4
2 water at either end of the rod is same. The
36. 9 ( T1 )( 500 nm ) = T2 (1500 nm ) ; T1 = 3T2 end at which temeprature is t2 is how much
more far away than the other end from the
E A = σ ⋅ 4 π ( 6 cm ) ( T1 ) ; EB = σ ⋅ 4π (18 cm ) (T1 )
2 4 2 4
point at which the rod is heated.
EA 1
2
n1 ( t0 − t2 ) n1 ( t0 − t1 )
= × ( 3) = 9 .
4
A) B)
EB 3 t0 − t1 t0 − t2
LEVEL-VI 2n1t0 2n1 ( t1 − t2 )
C) t − t D)
0 2 t0 − t1
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
5. A body obeying Newton’s law of cooling cools
1. A body cools in a surrounding which is at a in a surrounding which is at a constant
constant temperature of θ 0 . Assume that it
obeys Newton’s law of cooling. Its temperature temperature. Its temperature θ is plotted
θ is plotted against time t. Tangents are drawn against time. There are two points on the curve
to the curve at the points P (θ = θ1) and Q(θ = with temperatures θ 2 and θ1 (θ 2 > θ1 ) such
θ2). These tangents meet the time axis at angle
of φ2 and φ1, as shown. that tangents on these points make angles of
tan φ θ −θ 2φ and half of it with time axis respectively..
(A) tan φ = θ − θ
2 1 0
1 2 0 Find the temperature of the surrounding
tan φ θ −θ A) θ1 cos 2φ − θ 2 (1 + cos 2φ )
(B) tan φ = θ − θ
2 2 0
θ1
B) θ1 (1 + cos 2φ ) − θ 2 cos 2φ
P 1 1 0
tan φ θ
(C) tan φ = θ
1 1
θ θ
( )
2 Q
2 2
θ0 φ2 φ1
tan φ1 θ 2
2θ1 + θ 2 1 + tan 2 φ
(D) tan φ = θ C) (θ 2 − θ1 ) cos 2φ
(1 − tan φ )
t
D) 2
2 1
112 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
6. The three rods of same material and cross- 9. The emissive power of a black body at T=300K
sectional area from the sides of a triangle ABC. is 100 W / m 2 . Consider a body B of area
The points A, B and C are maintained at
A = 10m 2 , coefficient of reflectivity r = 0.3,
3T
and absorptivity a = 0.2. If its temperature is
temepratures T, T 2 and ( 2 +1 ) 300K, then markout the correct statement.
respectively. Assuming that only heat a) The emissive power of B is 20W / m 2
conducting takes place and the system is in
b) The emissive power of B is 200W / m 2
steady state, find the angle at B. The
temeprature difference per unit length along c) The power emitted by B is 20W
CB and CA is equal. d) The power emitted by B is 180W
A(T) 10. A spherical shell of inner radius R1 and outer
radius R2 is having variable thermal
conductivity given by K = a0Tr . Where ‘r’ is
3T
B T 2 C the distance from the centre. Two surfaces of
2 +1
the shell are maintained at temperature T1
A) 300 B) 450 C) 600 D) 900
7. Temperature of a body ? is slightly more than (inner surface) and T2 (outer surface),
the temperature of the surrounding ?0 , its rate respectively ( T1 > T2 ) . The heat current
of cooling ( R ) versus temperature of body
flowing through the shell would be
4π a0 ( T12 − T22 ) 4π a0 R12 R22 (T12 − T22 )
( ? ) is plotted, its shape would be: a) × R1 R2 b)
R2 − R1 R22 − R12
4π a0 (T1 − T2 ) R1 R2
(a) R (b) R
c)
R2 − R1
4π a0 (T12 − T22 )( R1 + R2 )
2
θ θ
(c) R (d) R d)
R2 − R1
11. A radiator whose temperature is T 0C, is used
to heat the room in the cold weather. The
θ θ radiator is able to maintain a room temperature
of 300C when outside temperature is -100C and
8. A body cools from 800 C to 700 C in 10 150C when outside temperature is -300 C.
minutes. Find the time required further for it Determine the temperature of the radiator
[Assume Newton’s law of cooling to be valid]
to cool from 700 C to 600 C . Assume the a) 850C b) 150C c) 98.60C d) 1500C
temerature of the surrounding to be 300 C . 12. Two thin walled spheres of different materials,
one with double the radius and one-fourth wall
4 5 thickness of the other, are filled with ice. If
(a) 10log e (b) 10log e
3 4 the time taken for complete melting of ice in
the sphere of larger radius is 25 min and that
4 5
log e log e for smaller one is 16 min, the ratio of
10 × 3 10 × 4
thermal conductivities of the materials of
(c) 5 (d) 4
log e log e larger sphere to the smaller sphere is
4 3 (a) 4 : 5 (b) 25 : 1 (c) 1 : 25 (d) 8 : 25
NARAYANAGROUP 113
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
13. An object is being heated by a heater supplying The ratio of the surface temperature of star A
60 W heat. Temperature of surrounding is to that of star B, TA :TB , is approximately:
20°C and the temperature of object becomes A) 2 : 1 B) 4 : 1 C) 1 : 2 D) 1 : 1
constant at 50°C. Now the heater is switched 17. An irregular rod of same uniform material as
off. What is the rate at which the object will shown in figure is conducting heat at a steady
lose heat when its temperature has dropped rate. The temperature gradient at varoius
to 30°C sections versus area of cross section graph
(a) 20 W (b) 30 W (c) 40 W (d) 60 W will be:
14. The power radiated by a black body is Po and
the wavelength corresponding to the maximum
energy is around λ0 On changing the
temperature of the black body, it was observed
256
that pow er radiated is increased to P0
81
The change in the wavelength corresponding
to maximum intensity A) dT/dx B) dT/dx
λ0 λ0
(a) increases by (b) decreases by
4 4
λ0 λ0 A A
(c) increases by (d) decreases by
2 2
C) dT/dx D) dT/dx
15. The container A is constantly maintained at
1000 C and insulated container B in the figure
contains ice at 00 C . Different rods are used
to connect them. For a rod made of copper, it
A
takes 30 minutes for the ice to melt and for a
rod of steel of same cross-section taken in 18. A solid copper sphere of dimater 10mm, is
different experiment it takes 60 minutes for cooled to a temperature of 150K and is then
ice to melt. When these rods are placed in an enclosure at 290 K. Assuming that
simultaneously connected in parallel, the ice all interchange of heat is by radiation, calculate
melts in: the initial rate of rise of temperature of the
sphere. The sphere may be treated as a black
A B body ρcopper = 8.93 ×103 kg / m3 ,
s = 3.7 × 102 JKg −2 K −1 ; σ = 5.7 × 10−8 Wm −2 K −4
A) 15 minutes B) 20 minutes
C) 45 minutes D) 90 minutes A) 0.68 K/s B) 0.068 K/sC) 0.34 K/s D) 0.034 K/s
16. The spectra of radiation emitted by two distant 19. The temperatures across two different slabs
stars are shown below. A and B are in the steady state (as shown in
Fig.) The ratio of thermal conductivities of A
Star A
and B is
60
A) 2:3
Intensity
Temperature (°C)
50
40
30
B) 3:2
Star B 20 A B
10
0 C) 1:1
0 500 1000 2000 3000 0
Wavelength (nm) 1 2 3 4 5 6
(cm) D) 5:3
114 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS (a) heat flow through A and E slabs are same
(b) heat flow through slab E is maximum
20. The temperature drop through a two-layer (c) temperature difference across slab E is smallest
furnace wall is 900°C. Each layer is of equal (d) heat flow through C = heat flow through B +
area of cross section. Which of the following heat flow through D.
actions will result in lowering the temperature
dθ
θ of the interface? 23. In Newton’s law of cooling = − k (θ − θ 0 ),
Other 1000°C
Inner Outer
dt
layer layer the constant k is proportional to:
(A) A; surface area of the body
(B) S is the specific heat of the body
θ
(A) By increasing the thermal conductivity of outer 1
(C) being the mass of the body
layer m
(B) By increasing the thermal conductivity of inner (D) e is the emissivity of the body
layer COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
(C) By increasing thickness of outer layer
Passage-I
(D) By increasing thickness of inner layer Consider a spherical body A of radius R which is
21. Seven identical rods of material of thermal placed concentrically in a hollow enclosure H, of
conductivity k are connected as shown in Fig. radius 4R as shown in the figure. The temperature
All the rod are of identical length l and cross- of the body A and H are TA and TH respectively..
sectional area A. If the one end B is kept at Emissivity, transmittivity and reflectivity of two
100°C and the other end is kept at 0°C. The
temperatures of the junctions C, D and bodies A and H are (eA , eH ), ( t A , tH ) and ( rA , rH )
E(θC , θD and θE ) be in the steady state? respectively. (Assume no absorption of the thermal
C k D
energy by the space in between the body and
enclosure as well as outside the enclosure and all
k k k k radiations to be emitted and absorbed nomral to
A B the surface.)[Take σ × 4π R 2 × 300 4 = β J / s ]
k E k
H
(A) θC > θE > θD
A
(B) θE = 50o Cand θD = 37.5o C 6R
P
(C) θE = 50 C, θC = 62.5 Cand θD = 37.5 C
0 o o
3R
Q
(D) θE = 50o C, θC = 60o Cand θD = 40o C
22. A composite block is made of slabs A, B, C, D 24. The temperature of A (a perfect black body)
and E of different thermal conductivities is TA = 300 K and temperature of H is
(given in terms of a constant K) and sizes
(given in terms of length, L) as shown in the TH = 0 K . For H take eH = 0.5 and t H = 0.5,
figure. All slabs are of same width. Heat Q For this situation mark out the correct
flows only from left to right through the blocks. statement(s).
Then in steady state a) The rate at which A loses the energy is β J / s .
heat
0 1L 5L 6L b) The rate at which spherical surface containing P
1L
A B 3K E
β
receives the energy is J /s.
2K C 4K 6K 2
3L c) The rate at which spherical surface containing Q
receives the energy is β J / s .
D 5K
4L
d) All of the above
NARAYANAGROUP 115
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
25. In above question, if body A has 29. The maximum attainable temperature of the
eA = 0.5, rA = 0.5 and for H, eH = 0.5, rH = 0.5, sphere is
then mark out the correct statement(s). 1 1 1
I 2 I 3
I 4
β a) b) c) d) Never occurs
a) The rate at which A loses energy is 4σ 2σ 4σ
2
b) The rate at which the spherical surface containing MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
P receives the energy is zero. 30. Suppose that both ends of the rod are kept at
c) The rate at which the spherical surface containing a temperature of T0C, and that the initial
Q receives the energy is β d) All of the above temperature distribution along the rod is given
26. Consider two cases, first one in which A is a by T = (1000C) sin πx / L , where x is measured
perfect black body and the second in which A from the left end of the rod. Let the rod be of
is a non-black body. In both the cases, copper, with length L and cross-section area
temperature of body A is same equal to 300K A. Column I represents graph of certain
and H is at temperature 600K. For H, physical quantities as we move from left to
t = 0 and a ≠ 1 . For this situation, mark out right end of rod. Column II represents those
the correct statement(s). physical quantities.
a) The bodies lose their distinctiveness inside the Cross-section Area A
enclosure and both of them emit the same radiation
as that of the black body. Heat
b) The rate of heat loss by A in both cases is the T °C T°C
same and is equal to β J / s . L
c) The rates of heat loss by A in both the cases are (A) Y
different.
d) From this information we can calculate exact
rate of heat loss by A in different cases.
27. In the previous question if the enclosure is
considered as perfect black body and is
maintained at same temperature as that of O X
x=L
temperature of body A, then in the two cases
a) the body A emits radiation at the same rate. (B) Y
b) the body A emits radiation at different rates
c) the temperature of body A remains constant.
d) None of the above
Passage-II
A highly conducting solid sphere of radius R, density
ρ and specific heat s is kept in an evacuated O
x = L/2
X
chamber. A parallel beam of thermal radiation of
x=L
intensity I is incident on its surface. Consider the
sphere to be a perfectly black body and its (C) Y
temperature at certain instant considered as t = 0
is T0 . [Take Stefan’s constnat as σ ]. Answer the
following questions based on above information. Graph coincides
28. The equation which gives the temperature T with x-axis
of the sphere as a function of time, is O X
x=L
T dT t 3dt T dT t 3dt
a) ∫T0 =∫ b) ∫T0 4σ T ∫0 4 Rρ s
= (p) Initial temperature gradient
I − 4σ T 4 0 4 Rρ s 4
(q) Initial temperature
T dT 3t T 3dT 5t (r) Finl temperature distribution along rod.
c) ∫T0 = d) ∫ =
I − 4σ T 4
8Rρ s T0 I − 4σ T 4
4Rρ s (s) Final rate of heat transfer along rod.
116 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
INTEGER TYPE QUESTIONS 35. A metal rod AB of length 10x has its one end
31. A few rods of materials X and Y are connected A in ice at 0 0C and the other end B in water at
as shown in Fig. The cross-sectional areas of 1000C. if a point P on the rod is maintained at
all the rods are same. If the end A is maintained 4000C, then it is found that equal amounts of
at 80°C and the end F is maintained at 10°C. water and ice evaporate and melt per unit time.
If the temperature of junctions B and E in The latent heat of evaporation of water is 540
cal/g and latent heat of melting of ice is 80 cal/
39.48 o C 60.52 o C g. If the point P is at a distance of λ x from the
steady state are and . Find n 1
n1 n2 ice end A, find the value of λ . (Neglect any
and n2 . Given that thermal conductivity of heat loss to the surrounding.)
material X is double that of Y.
LEVEL VI - KEY
C
SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
1) B 2) C 3) B 4) D 5) B 6) D 7) B
L Y 8) C 9) A 10) B 11) D 12) D 13) A 14) B
E Y F 15) B 16) A 17) B 18) B 19) B
L
80°C
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
A X B
X L 20) A,B 21) A,C 22) A,B,C,D 23) A,C
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
24) D 25) D 26) C 27) B 28) A 29) C
D MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
32. A hot body placed in air is cooled down 30) A-Q, B-P, C-RS
according to Newton’s law of cooling, the rate INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
of decrease of temperature being k times the 31) 2 32) 2 33) 2 34) 4 35) 9
temperature difference from the
surrounnding. Starting from t = 0, The time in LEVEL VI - HINTS
which the body will lose half of the maximum SINGLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
x ln 2 dQ
heat is . Find the value of x. 1. (B). For θ-t plot, rate of cooling =
2k dt
33. One end of a uniform rod of length 1 m is = slope of the curve.
placed in boiling water while its other end is dθ
placed in m elting ice.A point P on the rod is AT P, = |tan(180-φ2)| = tanφ2 = k(θ2 - θ0)
dt
maintained at a constant temperature of where k = constant.
800°C. The mass of steam produced per
dθ
second is equal to the mass of ice melted per At Q, =| tan(180 − ϕ1 ) |= tan ϕ1 = k(θ1 − θ0 )
dt
second. If specific latent heat of steam is 7
times the specific latent heat of ice, then the tan ϕ θ −θ
∴ tan ϕ = θ − θ
2 2 0
distance of P from the steam chamber is n/18 1 1 0
m. Find the value of n? dθ
34. Two indentical conducting rods are first, 2. = −k(θ − θ0 ), where k = constant
connected independently to two vessels, one dt
containing water at 1000 C and the other θ dθ
∫ = − ∫ k ⋅ dt
t
∴
containing ice at 0 0C. In the second case, rods θi θ − θ0 0
are joined end to end and are connected to
or [ln (θ − θ0 )]θθi = −kt or
the same vessels. If q1 and q2 ( in g/s) are the
rates of melting of ice in two cases, then the ln(θ − θ0 ) − ln(θi − θ0 ) = − kt
ratio of q1 / q2 is θ − θ0 − kt
or θ − θ = e or θ = θ0 + (θ i − θ0 )e− kt .
i 0
NARAYANAGROUP 117
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
3. According to Wien’s displacment law, TA − Tc (TC − TA 2) TC − TB
λ m T = constant (b). Let S = Sun, NS = North star,, = =
L 2 L L
∴ (λ m )S TS = ( λ m ) NS TNS
from this we can find that LCB = L , LAC = L 2
T (λ ) 350
∴ S = m NS = = 0.69
TNS (λ m )S 510 and for which LAB = L . ∴ Bˆ = 900
P 8. For the transition from 800 C to 700 C
P3
C
( ? T )0 = Tb − Ts = 80 − 30 = 50 and for 700 C
to 60 0C, ( ? T )0 = 40 C As ? T = ? T0 e− ct .
P1 0
P2 A
B
Note that temperature difference also decrease
exponentially. 40 = 50e −10c and 30 = 40e − ct
V
V1 V2
4
The workdone W is positive if volume increases in ln
5 4 3
the process and W is negative if volume decreases
∴ 10c = ln and ct = ln ; t = 10 × 5
in the process. Hence WAB is positive as volume 4 3 ln
increases from V1 to V2, WBC is negative as volume 4
decreases from V2 to V 1. 9. For body A, emissivity = absorptivity = 0.2
Further |WBC| > |WAB|. Net workdone = WAB + (–WBC)
E E
W =A negative value (Q |WBC| > |WAB|) or W < 0 So, from Kirchhoff’s law, black body =
From the graph itself, P3 > P1 ∴ W < 0 and P 3 > P1 a a B
Hence option (c) represents correct answer.
100 E
dQ dm dm KA ∆T dm dm ⇒ = ⇒ E = 20W / m 2
4. =L ; = . ; = 1 0.2
dt dt dt l L dt 1 dt 2 Emitted power by B is, p = EA = 200W .
t0 − t1 t0 − t2 n2 t0 − t2 10. Temperature is decresing as we are going out, let a
= =
n1lL n2lL ; n1 t0 − t1 a distance x from the centre, the temperature
n2 − n1 ∆n t1 − t2 dT
= = gradient is − , At this location, K = a0Tx
n1 n1 t0 − t1 dx
dθ dT
= tan(1800 − 2ϕ ) = tan 2ϕ = K (θ2 − θ0 ) From H = − KA We have
5.
dt dx
dθ dT
= tan(1800 − ϕ ) = tan ϕ = K (θ1 − θ 0 ) ⇒ H = −a0Tx × 4px ×
2
dt dx
tan 2ϕ θ 2 − θ 0 Hdx
=
⇒ ∫R1 = − ∫ 4pa0TdT
R2 T2
tan ϕ θ1 − θ 0 x 3 T1
solving θ 0 = θ1 (1 + cos 2ϕ ) − θ 2 cos 2ϕ 4pa0 R12 R22 (T12 − T22 )
6. TB > TA , het will flow from B to A and from C to ⇒H=
R22 − R12
B to remain in steady state. The conduction formula
11. Here the radiator is heating the room and due to
∆Q KA conduction (through walls/windows/doors) the
is = ∆T
∆T L room gets cooled down. It means in equilibrium
the rate at which energy is given to room by radiator
TC 3
= and TA − Tc = 2(TC − TA 2)
is same as the rate at which energy is lost to
TA 2+A atmosphere.
118 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
dQ tr
From Newton’s law of cooling, = k1 (T − T0 ) time ∝
dt K
Where T is the temperature of object and T0 is the t
temperture of the surroundings. From the law of 25 4 2rK s 1 K s K L = 8
= = ;
dQ 16 trK L 2 K L K s 25
conduction, = k2 (T2 − T1 ) Where T2 and
dt 14. Let initial temperature is T0 and final (new)
T1 are temeratures of the bodies from which heat is temperature is T, while corresponding wavelength
transferred and to which it is transferred corresponding to maximum intensities are ?0 and
respectively. ⇒ For equilibrium
? respectively..
k1 (T − T0 ) = k 2 (T2 − T1 ) 4
p0 T0
For first case, From Stefan’s law, =
k1 (T − 30 ) = k2 30 − ( −10 ) = k 2 × 40 p T
4
T
4
For second case, 256 4 T 4
k1 (T − 15 ) = k2 15 − ( −30 ) = k2 × 45 ⇒ T = 81 = 3 ⇒ T = 3
0 0
T − 30 40 From Wien’s law, ?0T0 = ?T
⇒ = ⇒ T = 1500 C
T − 15 45 ?0 T 4 3
= = ⇒ ? = ?0
dr 1 r2 − r1 ? T0 3 4
12. ∫ dR = ∫ 2
=
4pr K 4pK
r2 r1
So wavelength corresponding to maximum energy
[R = thermal resistance] ?0
at new temperature decreases by .
4pK? ? 4pK? ? 4
Q= =
r2 − r1 t ∆T 100
15. Q = it where i = heat flow rate = =
2 R R
r1r2 r
100 100
∴Q = ( 30 ) ⇒ R1 = × 30
1
R Q
r1 100 100
Also, ∴ Q = R × 30 ⇒ R2 = Q × 60
r2 2
1 1
Now, Q = R + R treqd
mL 4pK? ? 4 1 2
= m = ? × pr 3
time t 3 Q
2 ∴ t reqd = = 20
r Q 1 Q 1 min.
× ×
100 30 100 60
?L K
= × constant T λ 1000
16. λMATA = λMBTB (Weins law); T = λ = 500 = 2 :1
A MB
time tr B MA
t/4 dT
t 17. H = KA is same in stready state condition,
dx
dT
R R ∴A = constant ∴ Hyperbolic graph
dx
NARAYANAGROUP 119
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
18. Using Stefan’s law, the rate of increase of R5 = R6 R3 = R4 + R5 = R7 (ii)
dT σ A ( T − T ) kA(θ C − 50) kA
4 4
=
0 R4 + R6 = R7 ; = (50 − θ D )
temperature is l l
dt ρ V s
kA kA kA kA
where ρ = 8.93 × 103 kg / m3 , (100 − θC ) = (θC − 50) + (θC − θD ) = θD
l l l l
s = 3.7 × 102 J / kg / K A/V=area/volume ratio θ C + θ D = 100 ; 2θC − 2θ D = 50 ⇒ θ C = 62.5°C
A 6
= ; d= diameter of the sphere θ D = 37.5°C ; ∴ θ C > θ E > θ D
V d
T0= temperature of the surrounding =290K dQB A ∆T
22. = 3K 2 = iB
T=temperature of the body = 150 K dt 4 4L
6σ
∴
dT
=
dt ρ sd
(T04 − T 4 ) = 0.068 Ks −1 dQC 2 A ∆T2
= 4K = iC
dt 4 4L
dQ 1 (50 − 30) (50 − 20) A ∆T
× = KA
19. = KB dQD
= 5K 2 = iD
dt A 3 3 dt 4 4L
2KA=3KB or KA/KB=3/2
iB + iD = iC .
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
900
= Comprehension-I:(24-27)
l1 l
20. (A, D) H = rate of heat flow + 0 The diagram shows the situation clearly. The rate
Ki A K0 A at which energy is emitted by A is ß J / s , while
Hli crossing the enclosure, the rate at which energy is
Now, 1000 − θ = K A or,,
i ß
transmitted out is ,
2
900 l = 100 − 900 H β/2
θ = 1000 − i l K
li + l0 Ki A 1+ 0 i A β
K i A K 0 A K 0 li
P
Now, we can see that θ can be decreased by Q
increasing thermal conductivity of outer layer (K0)
So, rate at which A loses energy is ß J / s , and
and thickness of inner layer (li ) .
the rate at which P and Q receive energy are
21. (A, C) This problem can be solved like electric
current problem. ß / 2 J / s and ß J / s , respectively. This energy is
Let R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7 be the rates of received on the area of sphere passing through P
heat flow through AE, EB, AC, CD, CE, ED and and Q.Now, in this case, each of incidence,
DB, respectively. reflection and absorption take place.
θC θC H
C R4 D
β/2 β/4
R3 R7
R5 R6
A
θ1 A θ°C β/8
100°C R1 E R2 B
θE β/16
R1 = R 2 θ E = 50o C (i)
120 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
The rate at whcih energy has been lost by A is, PASSAGE-II:(28-29)
The rate at which energy is absorbed by the sphere
P = − Pabsorbed − Pemitted
is, P1 = pR 2 I . Let at any time t, the temperature
ß ß ß ß ß ß
= − + + .... + + + + ..... = of sphere be T, than, rate at which heat is being
8 32 2 8 32 2 radiated is P2 = pR 2 I − 4ps R 2T 4
The rate at which energy is received by P is,
P1 = 0 .The rate at which energy is receivedby Q is, dT
⇒ ms = pR 2 I − 4s T 4
dt
ß ß ß ß ß ß
P2 = + + .... + + + + ..... = dT pR 2 dt 3dt
2 8 2 8 32 2 ⇒ = =
I − 4s T 4 4 3
pR ?s 4 R?s
ß 4 ß 4
= × + × =ß 3
2 3 4 3
dT t 3dt
∫T0 I − 4s T 4 ∫0 4 R?s
T
=
β β/2 Solving this, we get T as a function of t.For
β/4
γ/2 γ/2 1/4
β/2
dT I
= 0 We get, Tmax =
BB N BB β/8
γ/4 maximum temp,
γ/8
dt 4s
MATRIX MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
If ß = s 4pR 2 × 3004 then πx
30. (A-q), (B-p), (C-s, r) ; T = 100 Csin
o
s × 4p ( 4R ) × 600 = 256 ß = ?
2 4 L
A
Let aH = eH = 0.5 and for A in 2nd case,
TH TC
eA = a A = 0.5
L
? ß
For 1st case, Pemitted = ß J / s Pabsorbed = + dT 100π πx
2 2 Temperature gradient = cos
dx L L
? ß Y
Rate at which energy is lost P = ß − − J /s Y
2 2
ß ß ß O x=L/2
X
For 2nd case, Pemitted = 2 + 8 + 32 J / s O X
L
For 2nd case,
Initial temperature Final rate of heat transfer = 0
ß ß ß ? ? 2ß ?
Pemitted = + + + ...... + + + .... = + Y
2 8 32 4 16 3 3
ß ß ? ? ß ?
Pabsorbed = + + ...... + + + .... = +
2 32 4 16 6 3
O X
ß
Rate at which heat is lost, P = In these questions
2
thermal equilibrium is not acheived and infinite no.
of reflection, absorption can take place before Graph coincides with x-axis
thermal equilibrium has been actived, and it is Final temperature is (gradient) distribution = 0
because of very large speed of radiation.
NARAYANAGROUP 121
TRANSMISSION OF HEAT JMAINS
JEE- ADV - C.W - VOL V
PHYSICS-VOL- - II
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS If the body lose half of the maximum loss that it
31. (n1 = 1 and n2 = 2) We first find the thermal Q T −T
resistances of the different rods shown in the figure. can, then decrease in temp = mc 1 0
2 2
1 L If body loses this heat in time t, then its temperature
These are given as R AB = k . A
x T1 − T0 T1 + T0
at tiem t’ will be T1 − = 2
1 (πL / 2) 1 ( πL / 2) 1 L 2
R BCE = . ; R BDE = . ; R EF = k . A
kY A kX A Y
Putting these values in Eq. (i), we have
Also, k X = 2k Y , Now in steady state the amount T1 − T0
= T0 + (T1 − T0 )e − kt'
of heat flow from end E to F remains constant as 2
there is no absorption of heat. Then we must have T −T 1 ln 2
that the amount of heat coming at junction B is equal or 1 0 = (T1 − T0 )e − kt' or e− kt' = or t ' =
2 2 k
to the amount of heat having B and same statement
dmsteam d
can be given for junction E. If temperatures of 33. Let = mice = m
junctions B and E are taken as TB and TE, dt dt
respectively, then we have for junction β . Q P Q
TA − TB TB − TE TB − TE Boiling Melting
= +
R AB RBCE R BDE or water Ice
80 − TB TB − TC TB − TE X 1–X
= + (7L) (L)
1/ k x . L / A 1/ k Y .πL / 2A 1/ k x .πL / 2A
⇒ Qsteam = 7 mL and Qice = mL
TB − TE TB − TE
or 80 − TB = + ....(i) 800 − 100 800 − 0
π 2π i.e., Qsteam = 7Qice ⇒ ℜA = 7ℜA
Similarly for junction E, we can write x 1− x
TB − TE TB − TE TE − 10
+ = 1
R BCE R BDE R EF or ⇒x= m
TB − TE TB − TE T − 10
9
+ + E Temperature difference dm
1/ k y .πL / 2A 1/ k x .πL / 2A 1/ k y .L / A = L
34.
Thermal resis tan ce dt
2 ( TB − TE ) 4 ( TB − TE )
or + = TE − 10 dm 1 1
π π ∝ ;q ∝
3 dt Thermal resis tan ce R
or ( TB − TE ) = TE − 10 ..........(ii) The rods are in parallel in the first case and they
4π
Solving equation (i) and (ii), we get q1 2R
are in series in the second case q = ( R / 2) = 4
TE = 19.74o C and TB = 60.52o C 2
dT dmice dmvapour
32. (2) We have − = k(T − T0 ) 35 =
dt dt dt
where T0 is the temperature of the surrounding. If Q1 λx
T1 is the initial temperature and T is the temperature P (10 –λ)x Q2
T t
dT
at any time t, then ∫ (T − T ) = −k ∫ dt
T 1 0 0
T−T KA400
or ln(T − T0 ) TT = −kt or ln Q1 = = m × 80
= −kt
0
−
1 0
T T t
KA ( 400 − 100 ) t
or T = T0 + (T1 − T0 )e − kt (i) Q1 = t = m × 540
The body continues to lose heat till its temperature (10 − λ ) x
becomes equal to that of the surrounding. The loss Dividing both, λ = 9
of heat Q = mc(T1 − T0 )
122 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
CALORIMETRY
Ø If specific heat varies with temperature then heat
SYNOPSIS energy given to a substance is
θ2
INTRODUCTION
Ø Heat is a form of energy in transit, that flows from Q = m ∫ Sdθ
θ1
a body at high temperature to a body at low
temperature. Ø Water has largest specific heat among solids and
Ø The S.I. Unit of heat is Joule (J) liquids. So it is used as coolant in automobile
radiators.
Ø The C.G..S. Unit of heat is calorie (Cal) Ø Among solids, liquids, and gases specific heat is
1 Cal = 4.186 J ≅ 4.2J maximum for Hydrogen. (3.5 Cal/g- ºC ) and
Ø The quantity of heat required to warm a given minimum for radon and actinium. ( ≈ 0.022 Cal/g- ºC)
substance depends on its mass ( m), the change Ø Specific heat slightly increases with increase of
in temperature ( ∆θ ) and nature of the substance. temperature.
i.e ∆ Q = mS ∆ θ Ø Among liquids specific heat is minimum for
mercury.
Where ∆Q = quantity of heat gained
Ø The value of specific heat may lie between 0 and
m = mass of substance
α.
∆θ = rise in temperature Ø In isothermal process, the value of specific heat is
S= specific heat (depends on nature of the infinity but in adiabatic process its value is zero.
material)
Ø Specific heat of all substances is zero at 0K.
Specific Heat Ø Substances with highest specific heat are bad
Ø The amount of heat required to rise the conductors of heat and with low specific heat are
temperature of unit mass of a substance through good thermal and electrical conductors.
10C is called specific heat of the material of the Ø The substance with large specific heat warms up
body. slowly and cools down slowly.
1 ∆Q S.No. Substance Specific heat
S=
m ∆θ CGS Value S.I Value
Ø The S.I unit of S is J/kg- K a) Water 1cal g-1 0C-1 4186 JKg-1 K-1
Ø The C.G.S unit of S is Cal./g- 0C b) Ice -1 0 -1
0.5 cal g C 2100 Jkg-1 K-1
Ø Dimensional formula of S is L2T −2θ −1 c) Steam 0.47 cal g-1 0C-1 1970 Jkg-1 K-1
Ø Molar specific heat capacity
1 ∆Q
Thermal capacity or Heat capacity
C= (n = number of moles)
n ∆θ Ø It is the amount of heat required to rise the
Ø The SI unit of C is J/mole - K temperature of the body by 10C
Ø The C.G.S. unit of C is Cal / mole - ºC
∆Q
Ø Dimensional formula of C is ML2T −2θ −1mole −1 H=
∆θ
Ø Gases will have two specific heats
(i) Specific heat at constant volume (Cv) Ø The S.I.unit of H is JK-1
(ii) Specific heat at constant pressure (Cp). Ø The C.G.S unit of H is Cal oC-1
Ø Specific heat depends only on the nature of Ø Dimensional formula of H is ML2T −2θ −1
material and unit of temperature. Usually Ø Thermal capacity depends on mass and nature of
temperature dependence of specific heat is the substance.
neglected.
NARAYANAGROUP 123
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Water equivalent W.E. 4: Two spheres of radii in the ratio 1:2, have
specific heats in the ratio 2:3. The densities
Ø Mass of water which has same thermal capacity are in the ratio 3:4. Find the ratio of their
as that of the substance is called water equivalent thermal capacities.
Ø It is numerically equal to heat capacity (ms) in CGS Sol: Thermal capacity of a body = mS.
units The ratio of thermal capacities
Ø The S.I unit of water equivalent is kg 4 3
Ø The C.G.S unit of water equivalent is g. π r1 ρ1 S1 3
m1S1 V1 ρ1 S1 r ρ S
= = 3 = 1 1 1
Ø Dimensional formula of water equivalent is ML0T 0 m 2 S 2 V2 ρ 2 S 2 4
π r23 ρ 2 S 2 r2 ρ 2 S 2
.
3
Ø If mW , ms are masses of water and substance and
r1 1 S1 2 ρ1 3
SW , S S are their specific heats respectively then, Here, r = 2 ; S = 3 ; ρ = 4
2 2 2
mW × SW × ∆θ = mS × S S × ∆θ The ratio of thermal capacities
⇒ mW ×1 = mS S S , ∴ mW = mS S S
3
1 3 2 1
= =
W.E-1:A lead piece of mass 25g gives out 1200 2 4 3 16
calories of heat when it is cooled from 900 C CALORIMETRY
Ø Calorimetry means measurement of heat.
to 100 C . What is its (i) specific heat (ii) ther- Ø A device in which heat measurement can be made
mal capacity (iii) water equivalent. is called ‘calorimeter’.
Sol: Mass of lead piece (m) = 25 g = 0.025 kg Law of method of mixtures (or)
Heat energy given out ( dQ ) = 1200 × 4.2 J Principle of calorimetry
Ø If two liquids at different temperatures are mixed
1 dQ together, the heat lost by hot body is equal to the
(i) specific heat S = heat gained by the cold body. This is called law
m dθ
of method of mixtures.
1 1200 × 4.2 Ø When three substances of different masses m1,
= × = 2520JKg −1K −1
0.025 80 m2 and m3 ,specific heats S1,S2,S3 and at different
(ii) Thermal capacity = mS = 0.025 × 2520 temperatures θ1 , θ2 , and θ3 respectively are
= 63 J/K
mixed, then the resultant temperature is
63 m S θ + m2 S2θ2 + m3 S3θ3
(iii) Water equivalent Kg = 0.015 Kg θ= 1 1 1
4200 m1S1 + m2 S2 + m3S3 (when state of
W.E-2 : The specific heat of a substance varies
contents does not change)
as ( 3θ 2 + θ ) ×10−3 cal /g − º C. What is the Ø Two liquids of masses m 1 and m 2 and specific
amount of heat required to rise the heats S1 and S 2 respectively are mixed. Then
temperature of 1kg of substance from the specific heat of the mixture is
10ºC to 20ºC?
Sol.:For small change in temperature d θ , heat m S + m2 S 2
∴ S mix = 1 1
required, dQ = mSdθ . ( m1 + m2 )
θ2 W.E 5: 10 litres of hot water at 70ºC is mixed
∴ Q = ∫ mSdθ with an equal volume of cold water at 20º C .
θ1 Find the resultant temperature of the water.
20 (Specific heat of water = 4200 J/kg -K)
θ2
20
( 2
)
∴ Q = ∫ 1000 3θ + θ ×10 dθ = θ +
−3
2 10
3 m1S1θ1 + m2S2θ2
Sol. Resultant temperature, θ = m S + m S
10
1 1 2 2
3 202 3 102 Here, m1 = m2 = 10kg ,
= 20 + − 10 + = 8200− 1050 = 7150cal (since mass of 1 litre of water is 1 kg).
2 2
W.E-3: Find the water equivalent of copper block θ1 = 70º C;θ2 = 20º C
of mass 200g. The specific heat of copper is and S1 = S 2 = 4200 J / kg − K
0.09 cal / g 0C . 10 × 4200 × 70 + 10 × 4200 × 20
θ= = 45º C
Sol: Water equivalent w= mS = 200 × 0.09 = 18g 10 × 4200 + 10 × 4200
124 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
W.E 6. A sphere of aluminium of 0.047 kg is CHANGE OF STATE
placed for sufficient time in a vessel Ø Matter exists in three states or phases such as
containing boiling water, so that the sphere solid, liquid and gas.
is at 1000C. It is then immediately transferred Ø A transition from one of these states to
to 0.14 kg copper calorimeter containing 0.25 another is called change of state.
kg of water at 200C. The temperature of water Melting of ice or vaporisation of water is an
rises and attains a steady state at 23 0 C example for change of state. During change of
Calculate the specific heat capacity of state, temperature remains constant.
aluminium. Melting:
( Scu = 386 J / Kg − K ; S w = 4180 J / Kg − K ) Ø The change of state from solid to liquid is called
melting (and the reverse process is called fusion).
Sol: Heat lost by aluminium sphere =
Ø Every solid melts at a definite temperature called
(heat gained by water) + (heat gained by
melting point.
calorimeter)
Ø The melting point remains constant until the entire
0.047 × SAl × (1000 − 230 ) = 0.25× 4180( 230 − 200 ) amount of solid substance melts.
Ø During melting, solid and liquid states are in
+0.14 × 386 ( 230 − 200 ) equilibrium.
Ø Melting point of a solid depends on its nature,
∴ S Al = 911J / Kg − K
pressure and presence of impurities.
Vaporisation (Boiling) :
W.E 7: The temperature of equal masses of three Ø The change of state from liquid to vapour at a
different liquids A, B and C are 12ºC, 19ºC particular temperature is called vaporisation.(and
and 28ºC respectively. The common the reverse process is called condensation)
temperature when A and B are mixed is 16ºC Ø Every liquid vaporises at a definite temperature
and when B and C are mixed is 23ºC. What called boiling point.
should be the common temperature when A Ø The boiling point remains constant until the entire
and C are mixed? amount of liquid vaporises.
Sol. Given θ A = 12º C ,θ B = 19º C and θC = 28º C . Ø During vaporisation liquid and gaseous states are
in equilibrium.
Let S A , S B and S C are the specific heats of Ø Boiling point of a liquid depends on nature of the
respective liquids. liquid, applied pressure and presence of impurities.
When liquid A and B are mixed Evaporation:
Heat gain = Heat lost Ø The escape of molecules from the free surface of
mS A (16 − 12 ) = mS B (19 − 16 )
a liquid is called evaporation
Ø Refrigerators, air coolers etc., work on the
4 principle of cooling produced by evaporation.
or S B = S A ........(i ) Ø Body temperature is also controlled by
3
When liquid B and C are mixed evaporation of sweat.
Ø Evaporation is a slow process where as boiling
Heat gain = Heat lost
is a quick process.
mS B ( 23 − 19 ) = mSC ( 28 − 23) or Ø Evaporation takes place at all temperatures
whereas boiling takes place at a particular
5
SB = S C .....(ii ) temperature.
4 Ø Evaporation takes place only at the surface of a
15 liquid where as boiling occurs through out the
From (i) and (ii), we get S A = SC liquid.
16
Ø The rate of evaporation depends on the nature of
When A and C are mixed, let equilibrium tem-
the liquid.
perature of mixture is θ , then Ø The rate of evaporation is more when the difference
Heat gain = Heat lost in temperatures of the liquid and the surrounding
mSA (θ −12) = mSC ( 28 −θ ) ⇒θ = 20.26º C air is high.
NARAYANAGROUP 125
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Effect of pressure on melting point and Regelation of ice:
Ø The melting of ice when pressure is applied and
boiling point resolidification on removal of pressure is called
Ø Effect of pressure on M.P and B.P can be regelation. Snow-ball preparation is due to
explained with Clausius-Clapeyron relation which regelation.
can be derived on the basis of thermodynamics Ø Skating is possible on snow due to the formation
dP L
of water below the skates.
i.e. dT = T (V − V ) Triple point :
f i Ø The temperature and pressure at which solid, liquid
L = Latent heat of fusion and vapour states co-exist is called triple point.
Vi = Initial volume, Vf = Final volume Ø The triple point of water is
273.16K (0.010C) and pressure 0.006 atm.
Ø In case of boiling as volume of vapour V f is always
(0.459 cm of Hg)
dP Ø Negative slope of ice line showing that the melting
greater than volume of liquid Vi hence is point decreases with increasing of the pressure
dT
positive. i.e boiling point of every liquid rises with Ø Sublimation is the change from a solid to the vapour
increase in pressure state without the intermediate liquid state and the
Ø In case of melting for substances like wax and reverse process of direct condensation of vapour
sulphur which expands on melting to solid is called hoar frost.
V f > Vi and hence melting point rises with increase Phase diagram of water
in pressure.
Ø In case of substances like ice and rubber which
contracts on melting V f < Vi and hence V f − Vi c ice line steamline A
pressure
negative i.e. melting point is lowered with increase
in pressure.
Ø On mountains, it is difficult to cook food because 0
with increase in height, pressure decreases and 0.006 atm
hence the boiling point of water decreases.
W.E-8: The melting point of ice is 0ºC at 1 atm. hoar frost line
At what pressure will it be -1ºC? B
1 −3 3
(Given, V2 − V1 = 1 − × 10 m )
0.9
Ø Under normal conditions of pressure, solids like
Sol. Here ∆T = ( −1 − 0 ) = −1, T = 273 + 0 = 273K
camphor, iodine, arsenic, etc., do not melt when
1 −3 3
heated, but they under go “sublimation”.
and V2 − V1 = 1 − × 10 m (given) Latent Heat :
0.9
Ø It is the amount of heat required to change unit
L = 80cal / g
mass of a substance from one state to another
∆P L state without any change of temperature.
we have, ∆T = T (V − V )
Q
( J / Kg or Cal / g )
2 1
L=
m
∆P 80 × 4.2 ×103
= ∴ Q = mL ; L = Latent Heat
( −1)
273 1 −
1 −3
×10 Ø Latent heat of fusion of ice is 80Cal/g or
0.9
0.335 × 106 J/kg.
∴∆P = 110.8 ×105 N / m 2 = 110.8 atm Ø Latent heat of vapoursiation of water is 540 Cal/
P2 − P1 = 110.8 atm ⇒ P2 = 110.8 + P1 = 111.8 atm g or 2.26 × 106 J/kg
126 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
Ø The amount of heat required to convert m gram W.E-9 : A piece of ice of mass 100 g and at
of ice at –100C to m gram of steam at 1000C is temperature 00 C is put in 200 g of water at
0
250 C . How much ice will melt as the
-10 C m gm
temperature of the water reaches 00 C ?
Q1 = msice ∆q (specific heat capacity of water
= 4200J kg −1 K −1 and latent heat of fusion
0
0C m gm
Q2 = mLice of ice = 3.4 × 105 J Kg −1 )
0
0C m gm Sol: The heat released as the water cools down from
Q3 = msw ∆q 250 C to 00 C is
0
100 C
m gm
Q = mS ∆θ = ( 0.2 )( 4200 )( 25 ) = 21000 J
Q4 = mLsteam The amount of ice melted by this heat is
0
100 C m gm Q 21000
m= = = 62 g
L 3.4 × 10 5
Y W.E-10 : The following graph represents change
of state of 1 gram of ice at −200 C . Find the
Boiling
net heat required to convert ice into steam at
Point
1000 C
Melting Sice = 0.53cal / g − 0 C
Point
0
T( C)
X
Total heat required Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4 d
100
Ø During melting or boiling the heat absorbed by e
the substance is used in increasing the molecular 0
b
c
distances
a Q(cal)
Temperature -20 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
F
Sol: In the figure :
0
100 C a to b: Temperature of ice increases until it reaches
D its melting point 00 C .
0CB
0
C
Q1 = mSice 0 − ( −20 ) = (1)( 0.53)( 20 ) = 10.6cal
ice
b to c: Temperature remains constant until all the
A Heat ice has melted
Length of BC ∝ Latent Heat of fusion of ice
Length of DE ∝ Latent Heat of Vapourisation Q2 = mL f = (1)( 80 ) = 80cal
Length of DE > Length of BC ( i.e. always Lv > L f ) c to d : Temperature of water again rises until it
reaches its boiling point 1000 C
1
Slope of AB ∝ mS Q3 = mS water [100 − 0] = (1)(1.0 )(100 ) = 100cal
solid
d to e : Temperature is again constant until all the
1
slope of CD ∝ mS
water is transformed into the vapour phase
Liquid Q4 == mLv = (1)( 539 ) = 539cal
Note:
Thus, the net heat required to convert 1g of ice at
(i) Latent heat of a substance becomes zero at
critical temperature. −200 C into steam at 1000 C is
(ii) Latent heat depends on the nature of a substance Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4 = 729.6cal
and pressure.
NARAYANAGROUP 127
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
W.E-11 : A calorimeter of water equivalent 83.72 Let m be the mass of steam condensed, then
Kg contains 0.48 Kg of water at 35ºC. How 180 1
much mass of ice at 0ºC should be added to m× 540 = 180 ⇒ m = 540 = 3 g
decrease the temperature of the calorimeter
to 20ºC. 1 4
Final contents : Water = 1 + = g ,
3 3
(SW= 4186J / Kg-K and Lice = 335000 J / Kg ) 1 2
Sol. Heat capacity of the calorimeter = 83.72J K-1 steam = 1 − 3
= g
3
From law of method of mixtures, W.E-14: 20g of steam at 100ºC is passed into 100g
Heat lost by calorimeter of ice at 0ºC. Find the resultant temperature
if latent heat of steam is 540 cal/g, latent heat
+ = Heat gained by the ice
of ice is 80 cal/ g and specific heat of water is
Heat lost by water 1 cal/gºC.
Sol. For steam
83.72×15+ 0.48×4186×15 = m×( 335000 +83720) Heat lost by the steam in condensation
∴ m = 0.07498 Kg Q1 = ms Ls = 20 × 540 = 10800cal .........(1)
W.E-12: A steam at 100ºC is passed into 1 kg of For ice
water contained in a calorimeter of water Heat gained by the ice in melting and to rise its
equivalent 0.2 kg at 9ºC till the temperature temperature from 0o C to 1000 C is
of the calorimeter and water in it is increased
to 90ºC. Find the mass of steam condensed Q2 = mice Lice + mice S w ∆t
in kg ( SW=1 cal/g ºC, & Lsteam = 540 cal/ = 100 × 80 + 100 ×1 ×100 = 18000cal ......(2)
g)(EAM-14E)
Sol.Let, m be the mass of the steam condensed. From eq. (1) and (2) ; Q2 > Q1
mass of the steam passed into calorimeter, Let θ = resultant temperature of the mixture
m2 = 1kg = 1000 g. According to law of method of mixtures
Water equivalent of calorimeter, Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by ice
m1Sl = 0.2 kg = 200g
ms Ls + ms Swater (100 −θ ) = mice Lice + mice Swater (θ − 0)
θ1 = temperature of the steam = 100ºC
θ2 = temperature of the water = 9ºC ( 20×540) +20×1(100−θ) = (100×80) +(100×1×θ)
⇒ θ = 40º C
θ3 = resultant temperature = 90ºC
Note: The temperature of mixture can never be lesser
From law of method of mixtures,
than lower temperature and can never be greater
Heat lost = heat gained (calorimeter + water)
than higher temperature
m Lsteam + SW (θ1 − θ3 ) = [ m1S1 + m2 SW ] (θ3 − θ2 ) θ L ≤ θ mix ≤ θ H
m 540 + 1(100 − 90 ) = [ 200 + 1000 × 1] ( 90 − 9 ) If ‘m’ g of steam at 1000 C is mixed with ‘m’ g of
⇒ m = 176 g = 0.176kg ≈ 0.18kg ice at 00 C then
W.E.13: 1g steam at 100ºC is passed in an insulat- a) Resultant temperature of mixture is 1000 C
ing vessel having 1g ice at 0ºC. Find the equi-
m
librium composition of the mixture. (Neglect- b) Mass of steam condensed = g
ing heat 3
capacity of the vessel). 2m
Sol. Available heat from steam c) Mass of steam left uncondensed = g
3
mL = 1× 540 = 540 cal
4m
Heat required for melting of ice and to rise its tem- d) The final mixture contains g of water and
3
perature to 100º C = mice Lice + mwater S water ∆θ
2m
= (1× 80 ) + 1×1× (100 − 0) = 180 cal 3
g of steam both at 1000 C
128 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
W.E-15 : 6 gm of steam at 1000 C is mixed with 6 W.E.17.When a small ice crystal is placed into
super cooled water, it begins to freeze
gm of ice at 00 C . Find the mass of steam left instantaneously. What amount of ice is
uncondensed formed from 1kg of water super cooled to
( L f = 80cal / g , Lv = 540cal / g , −8º C .
Sol. mL = m1S∆θ ; m× 80 = 1000 ×1× 8 ; m = 100g
SWater = 1cal / g − 0 C ) Saturated and Unsaturated Vapours :
Sol: For steam (a)When the pressure exerted by a vapour is
maximum it is called saturated vapour, when
Heat lost by the steam in condensation pressure exerted is not maximum, it is called
Q1 = ms Ls = 6 × 540 = 3240cal .........(1) unsaturated vapour.
For ice (b)Saturated vapours do not obey the gas laws and
saturated vapour pressure of liquid is independent
Heat gained by the ice in melting and to rise
of volume occupied. But unsaturated vapour obey
its temperature from 0o C to 1000 C is the gas laws.
(c)At boiling point of a liquid saturated vapour
Q2 = mice Lice + mice S w ∆t pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure at that
= 6 × 80 + 6 ×1 ×100 = 1080cal ......(2) place.
NOTE:
From eq (1) and (2) Q1 > Q2
Units
i.e , the total steam did not condensed into water. Physical
CGS
Let ‘m’ gm of steam is condensed into water by Quantity SI
( Practical )
giving 1080cal. of heat . Heat Joule Calories
Specific Heat Joule/Kg -K Cal/ g-0 C
1080
mLs = 1080 ; m = = 2 gm Molar specific Joule/m ol -
Cal/mol -0 C
540 Heat K
Thermal
∴ mass of the steam left uncondensed = 6 − 2 = 4g capacity
Joule/Kg Cal/ 0C
Water
W.E-16:A piece of ice(heat capacity =2100J/Kg 0C Kg g
Equivalent
and latent heat = 3.36 × 105 J / Kg ) of mass m
grams is at −5º C at atmospheric pressure. It C.U.Q
is given 420 J of heat so that the ice starts
melting. Finally when the ice-water mixture 1. Heat capacity of a substance is infinite. It
is in equilibrium, it is found that 1gm of ice means
has melted. Assuming there is no other heat 1) heat is given out 2) heat is taken in
exchange in the process. Find the value of 3) no change in temperature whether heat is taken
m. (JEE-2010) in (or) given out
Sol. Here, heat given is used to increase the 4) all of the above
temperature of the ice to 0º C and to melt 1gm of 2. The heat capacity of a material depends upon
ice. 1) the structure of a matter
Given m is mass of ice in gm. 2) temperature of matter
3) density of matter 4) specific heat of
( )
∴ 420 = m × 2100 × 5 +1 × 3.36 × 105 × 10−3 matter
⇒ m = 8 gm . 3. Heat required to raise the temperature of one
gram of water through 1 0C is
Super cooling : 1) 0.001 Kcal 2) 0.01 Kcal
Ø Most liquids, if cooled in a pure state in a perfectly 3) 0.1 Kcal 4) 1.0 Kcal
clean vessel, with least disturbance, can be 4. In defining the specific heat, temperature is
lowered to a temperature much below the normal represented in 0F instead of 0C. Then the
freezing point, without solidifying. This is known value of specific heat will
as super cooling or super fusion. 1) decrease 2) increase
Ø In super cooling, water can be cooled upto 3) remain constant
−10ºC without becoming solid. 4) be converted to heat capacity
NARAYANAGROUP 129
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
5. Which of the following states of matter have 12. Cooking is difficult on mountains because
two specific heats ? 1) water boils at low temperature
1) Solid 2) Gas 3) Liquid 4) Vapour 2) water boils at high temperature
6. The specific heat of a gas in an isothermal 3) water does not boil 4) it is cool there
process is 13. Paraffin wax expands on melting. The melting
1) infinity 2) zero point of wax with increasing pressure
3) negative 4) remains constant 1) increases 2) decreases
7. Why the specific heat at a constant pressure 3) remains same 4)we can’t say
is more than that at constant volume 14. In a pressure cooker cooking is done quickly
1) There is greater inter molecular attraction at because
constant pressure 1) the cooker does not absorb any heat
2) At constant pressure molecular oscillation are 2) it has a safety valve
more violent 3) boiling point of water rises due to increased
3) External work need to be done for allowing pressure
expansion of gas at constant pressure 4) it is a prestige to cook in a cooker
4) Due to more reasons other than those 15. A large block of ice is placed on a table when
mentioned in the above the surroundings are at 00C
8. The ratio [Cp / Cv] of the specific heats at a 1) ice melts at the sides 2) ice melts at the top
constant pressure and at a constant volume of 3) ice melts at the bottom
any perfect gas 4) ice does not melt at all
16. Which of the following at 1000C produces
1) can’t be greater than 5/4
most severe burns ?
2) can’t be greater than 3/2
1) Hot air 2) Water 3) Steam 4) Oil
3) can’t be greater than 5/3
17. The latent heat of vaporisation of water is
4) can have any value more than latent heat of fusion of ice, why
9. During melting process, the heat given to a 1) On vaporisation much larger increase in volume
solid is used in (generally) takes place
1) increasing the temperature 2) Increase in kinetic energy is much larger on
2) increasing the density of material boiling
3) increasing the average distance between the 3) Kinetic energy decreases on boiling
molecules 4) Volume decreases when the ice melts
4) increasing the average K.E. of the molecules 18. The latent heat of vaporisation of a substance
10. When two blocks of ice are pressed against is always
each other then they stick together (coalesce) 1) greater than its latent of fusion
because 2) greater than its latent heat of sublimation
1) cooling is produced 2) heat is produced 3) equal to its latent heat of sublimation
3) increase in pressure, increase in melting point 4) less than its latent heat of fusion
4) increase in pressure, decrease in melting point 19. A piece of ice at 0 0C is dropped into water at
00C. Then ice will
11. Ice is found to be slippery when a man walks
1) melt 2) be converted to water
on it This is so because
3) not melt 4) partially melt
1) increase in pressure causes ice to melt faster C.U.Q-KEY
2) increase in pressure causes ice to melt slower 01) 3 02) 4 03) 1 04) 1 05) 2 06) 1
3) its surface is smooth and cold 07) 3 08) 3 09) 3 10) 4 11) 1 12) 1
4) ice is colder 13) 1 14) 3 15) 3 16) 3 17) 1 18) 1
19) 3
130 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
8. A beaker contains 200g of water. The heat
LEVEL - I (C.W) capacity of the beaker is equal to that of 20g
water. The initial temperature of water in the
HEAT CAPACITY (OR)
beaker is 200C. If 440g of hot water at 920C
THERMAL CAPACITY is poured in it, the final temperature
1. The ratio of densities of two substances is (neglecting radiation loss) will be nearly
2:3 and that of specific heats is 1 : 2. The 1) 580C 2) 680C 3) 730C 4) 780C
ratio of thermal capacities per unit volume is 9. If 10g of the ice at 00C is mixed with 10g of
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 3) 1 : 3 4) 3 : 1 water at 1000C, then the final temperature of
2. Two spheres of copper of diameters 10cm and the mixture will be
20 cm will have thermal capacities in the ratio 1) 50C 2) 100C 3) 100 K 4) 00C
1 1 1 1 10. 10 grams of steam at 1000 C is mixed with 50
1) 2) 3) 4)
8 2 4 6 gm of ice at 00 C then final temperature is
3. Two liquids A and B of equal volumes have 1) 200 C 2) 500 C 3) 400 C 4) 1000 C
their specific heats in the ratio 2 : 3. If they 11. The heat energy required to vapourise 5kg
have same thermal capacity, then the ratio of water at 373 K is
of their densities is 1) 2700 K.cal 2) 1000 K.cal
1) 1 : 1 2) 2 : 3 3) 3 : 2 4) 5 : 6 3) 27 K.cal 4) 270 K.cal
4. Specific heat of aluminium is 0.25 cal/g-0c. 12. Two liquids A and B are at temperatures of
The water equivalent of an aluminium vessel 750C and 1500C respectively. Their masses
of mass one kilogram is are in the ratio of 2 : 3 and specific heats are
1) 40 cal/ 0C 2) 250 g in the ratio 3 : 4. The resultant temperature
0
3) 250 cal/ C 4) 40 g of the mixture, when the above liquids, are
mixed (Neglect the water equivalent of
LAW OF MIXTURES (OR) container ) is
1) 1250C 2) 1000C 3) 500C 4) 1500C
CALORIMETRY AND CHANGE OF
13. 1g of ice at 00 C is mixed 1g of steam at
STATE PRINCIPLE
5. The quantity of heat which can rise the 1000 C . The mass of water formed is
temperature of x gm of a substance through 1) 1.33g 2) 1 g 3) 0.133 g 4) 13.3g
t1°C can rise the temperature of y gm of 14. A piece of metal of mass 112g is heated to
water through t2°C is same. The ratio of 1000 C and dropped into a copper calorimeter
specific heats of the substances is of mass 40g containing 200g of water at
1) yt1 / xt2 2) xt2 / yt1 160 C . Neglecting heat loss, the specific heat
3) yt2 / xt1 4) xt1 / yt2 of the metal is nearly, if the equilibrium
6. Two liquids A and B are at 300C and 200C temperature reached is 240 C
respectively. When they are mixed in equal ( Scu = 0.1cal / g −º C )
masses the temperature of the mixture is
found to be 260C. The ratio of specific heats 1) 0.292 cal / gm −0 C
is 2) 0.392 cal / gm −0 C
1) 4 : 3 2) 3 : 4 3) 2 : 3 4) 3 : 2
0
3) 0.192 cal / gm −0 C
7. M g of ice at 0 C is mixed with M g of water
at 100c. The final temperature is 4) 0.492 cal / gm −0 C
1) 80C 2) 60C 3) 40C 4) 00C
NARAYANAGROUP 131
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
15. Three liquids with masses m1 , m2 , m3 are 9. From principle of calorimetry
thoroughly mixed. If their specific heats are ( m × L) + ( m × S ×∆θ1 ) = m × S ×∆θ2
S1 , S2 , S3 and their temperatures θ1 , θ2 , θ3 10. Heat lost = Heat gained
respectively, the temperature of the mixture is mice Lice + mice Sw (θ ) =
S1θ1 + S2θ2 + S3θ3 msteam Lsteam + msteam S w (100 − θ )
1) m S + m S + m S
1 1 2 2 3 3 11. Q = m x Lsteam
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ2 + m3S3θ3 12. mASA ( θ -75) = mBSB (150 - θ )
2) m1S1 + m2 S2 + m3 S3 13. Here the resultant temperature is 1000 C
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ2 + m3S3θ3 m| is mass of the steam condensed
3) m1θ1 + m2θ2 + m3θ3 m| Lv = mice L f + mice S water × ∆θ
m1θ1 + m2θ2 + m3θ3 ∴ water formed = 1g + m|
4) S θ + S θ + S θ 14. Heat lost by metal = heat gained by calorimeter
1 1 2 2 3 3
and water
LEVEL - I (C.W)-KEY mmetal Smetal (100 − 24 ) =
01) 3 02) 1 03) 3 04) 2 05) 3 06) 4
07) 4 08) 2 09) 2 10) 3 11) 1 12) 1 ( mcu Scu + mwater Sw ) ( 24 −16)
13) 1 14) 3 15) 2 15. Let θ1 > θ2 > θ3 and θ = resultant temperature.
From principle of colorimetry
LEVEL - I (C.W)-HINTS
m3 S3 (θ3 − θ ) = m1S1 (θ − θ1 ) + m2 S2 (θ − θ 2 )
H1 ρ1 S1
1. H = mS = ρVS ⇒ H = ρ S
2 2 2
LEVEL - I (H.W)
3
4 H r
2. H = mS = ρ π r 3 S ⇒ 1 = 1
3 H 2 r2 HEAT CAPACITY (OR) THERMAL
CAPACITY
ρ1 S2 1. The densities of two substances are in the
3. m1S1 = m2S2 ⇒ v1ρ1 S1 = v2 ρ2 S2 ; ρ = S
2 1 ratio 5:6 and the specific heats are in the ratio
4. water equivalent = mS gram. 3:5 respectively. The ratio of their thermal
5. Q1 = Q2 ⇒ m1S1θ1 = m2 S2θ2 capacities per unit volume is
1) 2:1 2) 1:2 3) 4:1 4) 1:4
6. Heat lost by A = Heat gain by B
2. Two spheres with radii in the ratio 1:2 have
S A ( ∆θ ) B specific heats in the ratio x:y and densities in
mS A ( ∆θ ) A = mSB ( ∆θ ) B ⇒ =
SB ( ∆θ ) A the ratio z:x. The ratio of their thermal
capacities is
7. ( M × 80 ) > ( M ×10 ) ∴ Final Temp. is 00 c 1) z:2y 2) zy:8 3) z:8y 4) xy:2z
3. Density of a liquid ‘A’ is 0.5 g/c.c and that of
8. From principle of calorimetry
liquid ‘B’ is 0.6 g/c.c . Heat capacity of 8 litres
mwater × Sw × (θ − 20) + ( mS ) × (θ − 20) of ‘A’ is equal to that of 10 litres of ‘B’ . Then
the specific heats ratio of A and B is
= mhot water × Sw ×( 92 −θ ) 1) 4:5 2) 1:1 3) 2:3 4) 3:2
132 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
4. A copper block of mass 500 gm and specific 11. Quantity of heat lost in condensation of 10
heat 0.1 cal/gm 0 C heated from 300 C to gm of steam at 1000 C is
2900 C , the thermal capacity of the block is 1) 2.26 × 105 J 2) 2.26 × 104 J
1) 50cal / 0 C 2) 50gm 3) 5cal / 0 C 4) 5gm 3) 22.6 J 4) 44.52 × 104 J
LAW OF MIXTURES (OR) 12. Two liquids at temperatures 600 C and 200 C
respectively have masses in the ratio 3:4
CALORIMETRY & CHANGE OF
their specific heats in the ratio 4:5 . If the
STATE PRINCIPLE two liquids are mixed, the resultant
5. 75 gm of copper is heated to increase its temperature is (2000 E)
temperature by 100 C . If the same quantity 1) 700 C 2) 500 C 3) 400 C 4) 350 C
of heat is given to ‘m’ gm of water, to have 13. Steam at 1000 C is passed into 22 grams of
same rise in temperature is ( specific heat of
water at 200 C . When resultant temperature
copper = 420 J / Kg −0 C )
is 900 C , then weight of the water present is
1) 7.5gm 2) 5gm 3) 10gm 4) 2.5gm 1) 27.33 g 2) 24.8 g 3) 2.8 g 4) 30 g
6. Two liquids are at 400 C and 300 C . When they 14. A calorimeter of water equivalent 100 grams
are mixed in equal masses, the temperature contains 200 grams of water at 100 C . A solid
of the mixture is 360 C . Ratio of their specific of mass 500 grams at 450 C is added to the
heats is calorimeter. If equilibrium temperature is
1) 3:2 2) 2:3 3) 4:3 4) 3:4 250 C then, the specific heat of the solid is
7. If 10g of the ice at 00C is mixed with 10g of (in cal / g − 0 C )
water at 100C, then the final temperature of 1) 0.45 2) 0.1 3) 4.5 4) 0.01
the mixture will be 15. Two liquids of masses m and 5 m at
1) 50C 2) 00C 3) 1000 C 4) 400C temperatures 3θ , 4θ are mixed. If their
8. 5 gm of steam at 1000 C is passed into specific heats are 2S,3S respectively, the
resultant temperature of mixture is
calorimeter containing liquid. Temperature of
liquid rises from 320 C to 400 C . Then water 66 55 44 33
1) θ 2) θ 3) θ 4) θ
equivalent of calorimeter and contents is 17 17 17 17
1) 40 g 2) 375 g 3) 300 g 4) 160 g LEVEL - I ( H.W )-KEY
01) 2 02) 3 03) 4 04) 1 05) 1 06) 1
9. M gram of ice at 00 C is mixed with 3 M gram
07) 2 08) 2 09) 2 10) 1 11)2 12) 4
of water at 800 C then the final temperature 13) 2 14) 1 15) 1
is
LEVEL - I ( H.W )-HINTS
1) 300 C 2) 400 C 3) 500 C 4) 600 C
H1 ρ1 S1
10. 50 g of steam at 1000 C is passed into 250 g 1. H = mS = ρVS ⇒ H = ρ S
2 2 2
of ice at 00 C . Find the resultant temperature
3
(if latent heat of steam is 540 cal/g , latent 4 H ρ S r
heat of ice is 80 cal/g and specific heat of 2. H = mS = ρ πr3S ⇒ 1 = 1 × 1 × 1
3 H 2 ρ 2 S2 r2
water is 1 cal/g-0C)
1) 400 C 2) 300 C 3) 200 C 4) 100 C 3. mASA = mBSB ⇒ ρ AVAS A = ρ BVBS B
NARAYANAGROUP 133
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
4. Thermal capacity , H = mS
LEVEL - II (C.W)
5. Q1 = Q2 ⇒ m1S1∆θ1 = m2 S 2 ∆θ 2
SPECIFIC HEAT
6. Heat lost by 1st liquid = Heat gained by 2nd liquid. 1. A metal block absorbs 4500 cal of heat when
heated from 300 C to 800 C . Its thermal
mS1 ( 400 − 360 ) = mS 2 ( 360 − 300 ) capacity is
1) 90 gm 2) 90 cal / 0 C 3) 9 gm 4) 9 cal / 0 C
7. ( m × Lice ) > mSw (10) ∴ final temp is 0º C 2. Two beakers A and B contain liquids of
masses 300 g and 420 g respectively and
8. Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by the
calorimeter and contents. specific heats 0.8 cal / g −0 C and 0.6 cal / g −0 C .
The amount of heat on them is equal. If they
msteam × Lv + ms × 1(1000 − 400 ) = mS ( 400 − 320 ) are joined by a metal rod
1) heat flows from the beaker B to A
9. 80M + M ×1× (θ 0 − 0 ) = 3M ×1× ( 800 − θ 0 ) 2) heat flows from A to B
3) no heat flows
10. Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by ice. 4) heat flows neither from A to B nor B to A
LAW OF MIXTURES (OR)
msteam Lv + ms × S w (1000 − θ 0 )
CALORIMETRY AND CHANGE OF
= mw L f + mw S w (θ 0 − 0 )
STATE PRINCIPLE
3. Three liquids A,B and C of masses 400gm,
11. Q = mLsteam 600 gm and 800 gm are at 300c, 400c and 500c
respectively. When A and B are mixed
12. Heat lost = Heat gained
resultant temperature is 360C when B and C
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ2 are mixed resultant temperature is 440C Then
θ= ratio of their specific heats are
m1S1 + m2 S2
1) 2:1:1 2) 3:2:1 3) 2:2:1 4) 1:4:9
13. msteam Lv + msteam S w (1000 − 900 )
4. 1gm of ice at 00C is converted to steam at
1000C the amount of heat required will be
( LSteam = 536 cal / g )
= mw S w ( 900 − 200 )
1) 756 cal 2)12000 cal 3)716 cal 4)450 cal
msteam = mass of steam converted into water 5. 50g of copper is heated to increase its
temperature by 100C. If the same quantity
∴ mass of water = 22 g + msteam of heat is given to 10 g of water, the rise in its
temperature is
14. Heat lost by solid = Heat gained by calorimeter
( Scu = 420J/kg/0C and S w = 4200J/kg/0C )
and water
1) 50C 2) 60C 3) 70C 4) 80C
ms Ss ( 45 − 25 ) = ( mc Sc + mw S w ) ( 25 − 10
0 0 0 0
) 6. A liquid of mass ‘m’ and specific heat ‘S’ is at
a temperature ‘2t’. If another liquid of thermal
15. From principle of calorimetry capacity 1.5 times, at a temperature of t/3 is
added to it, the resultant temperature will be
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ2
θ= 4 t 2
m1S1 + m2 S2 1) t 2) t 3) 4) t
3 2 3
134 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
7. Boiling water at 1000C and cold water at t 0C 7. Heat lost by hot water = Heat gained by cold
are mixed in the ratio 1:3 and the resultant water.
maximum temperature was 370C. Assuming
no heat losses, the value of ‘t’ is m1 1
m1S1 × ∆θ1 = m2 S 2 ∆θ2 Given, =
1) 40C 2) 90C 3) 120C 4) 160C m2 3
8. The fraction of ice that melts by mixing equal
8. Here a part of ice is melted because heat given by
masses of ice at -10°C and water at 60°C is
water when it comes to 0ºC is less than the heat
6 11 5 11 required for ice to melt completely.
1) 2) 3) 4)
11 16 16 15 Let m| is the mass of the ice melted.
9. Power of a man who can chew 0.3 kg ice in
one minute is ( in cal/s) m′Sice (10 ) + m′Lice = mwater Sw ( 60 )
1) 400 2) 4 3) 24 4) 240
mL f
10. The final temperature, when 10 g of steam at 9. P=
t
1000 C is passed into an ice block of mass 100g
(L steam = 540 cal / g , Lice = 80 cal / g ; S water = 1 cal / g 0C )
10. Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by ice
is msteam × Lv + msteamSw (1000 −θ 0 ) = miceLf + miceSw (θ0 −0)
1) 00C 2)15.70C 3) 16.90C 4) 20.40C
LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY LEVEL - II (H.W)
01) 2 02) 2 03) 3 04) 3 05) 1 06) 2
07) 4 08) 2 09) 1 10) 1 SPECIFIC HEAT
LEVEL - II (C.W) - HINTS 1. A calorimeter takes 200 cal of heat to rise its
temperature through 100 C . Its water
∆Q
1. H = equivalent in gm is
∆θ
1) 2 2) 10 3) 20 4) 40
2. Quantity of heat on A = Quantity of heat on B
2. Three different substances have the specific
m A × S A × θ 1 = m B × S B × θ 2 ⇒ θ1 > θ 2
heats in the ratio 1:2:3 and the temperature
3. When A, B are mixed increases in the ratio 3:2:1 when the same
mA S A ( ∆θ ) A = mB SB ( ∆θ ) B ...... (i) heat is supplied to the three substances. The
When B, C are mixed ratio of their masses is
1) 1:1:1 2) 1:2:3 3) 3:2:1 4) 4:3:4
m B S B ( ∆ θ ) B = mC S C ( ∆ θ )C ...... (ii)
From (i) and (ii) we get relation between SA and SC. LAW OF MIXTURES (OR)
When A and C are mixed CALORIMETRY & CHANGE OF
m AS A (∆θ )A = m C SC (∆θ )C STATE PRINCIPLE
4. Q = mLsteam+mSw(100-0)+mLs 3. Equal masses of 3 liquids A, B and C have
temperatures 10º C , 25º C and 40º C
5. Q1 = Q2 ⇒ mSc ×∆θ1 = mSw ×∆θ2
respectively. If A and B are mixed, the mixture
6. From principle of calorimetry has a temperature of 15º C . If B and C are
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ2 mixed ,the mixture has a temperature of
θ=
m1S1 + m2 S2 30º C . If A & C are mixed the temperaturee
of the mixture is (EAM-2012M)
(G i v e n , m 2 S 2 = 1.5 × m 1 S 1 )
1) 16º C 2) 35º C 3) 20º C 4) 25º C
NARAYANAGROUP 135
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
4. 1 gram of ice at −100 C is converted to steam 10. The amount of steam at 1000 C that should
at 1000 C the amount of heat required is be passed into 600 g of water at 100 C to make
( Sice = 0.5 cal / g −º C ) the final temperature as 400 C will be
1) 40 g 2) 30 g 3) 20 g 4) 45 g
( Lv = 536 cal / g & L f = 80 cal / g , )
1) 861 cal 2)12005 cal
LEVEL-II ( H.W ) - KEY
3)721 cal 4)455 cal
01) 3 02) 4 03) 1 04) 3 05) 3 06) 4
5. 30 gram of copper is heated to increase its
07) 2 08) 3 09) 1 10) 2
temperature by 200 C if the same quantity of
LEVEL-II ( H.W ) - HINTS
heat is given to 20 gram of water the rise in
its temperature. ∆Q
1. H=
( S w = 4200 J / kg − K & S cu = 420 J / kg − K ) ∆θ
1) 50 C 2) 60 C 3) 30 C 4) 80 C m1 S2 ∆θ 2
2. Q = mS ( ∆θ ) = const ⇒ = ×
6. A liquid of mass ‘m’ and specific heat ‘c’ is m2 S1 ∆θ1
heated to a temperature 2T. Another liquid
of mass ‘m/2’ and specific heat ‘2c’ is heated 3. When A & B are mixed, mS A ( 5 ) = mS B (10 )
to a temperature T. If these two liquids are
∴ S A = 2S B
mixed, the resulting temperature of the
mixture is When B & C are mixed, mS B ( 5 ) = mSC (10 )
1) (2/3)T 2) (8/5)T 3) (3/5)T 4) (3/2)T
7. A tap supplies water at 100 C and another tap ∴ S B = 2SC So, S A == 4SC ; When A & C are mixed
at 1000 C . How much hot water must be taken mS A (θ − 10 ) = mSC ( 40 − θ )
so that we get 20kg of water at 350 C
4. Q = m× Sice ×10 + mLice+mSw(100-0)+mLs
1) 40/9 kg 2) 50/9 kg
3) 20/9 kg 4) 130/9 kg 5. Q1 = Q2 ⇒ mcu Scu ×∆θ1 = mwSw ×∆θ2
8. Find the amount of heat supplied to decrease
m1 S1θ1 + m 2 S2 θ 2
the volume of an ice-water mixture by 1 cm3 6.From principle of calorimetry; θ = m1 S1 + m2 S 2
without any change in temperature.
(ρ = 0.9 ρ water , Lice = 80cal / gm )
7. From principle of calorimetry
ice
m1 S1θ 1 + m 2 S2 θ 2
1) 360 cal. 2) 500 cal. θ =
m1 S1 + m 2 S 2 ( Given, m1+m2=20)
3) 72 cal. 4) 720 cal
9. The power of a system which can convert 10 8. Q = m × Lice = ρice (V ) Lice
kg of water at 30 C into ice at 0 C in one
0 0
Q
minute ( L ice = 336000 J/Kg; and
9. P= ; Q = m× Sw × 30 + m× Lice
S water = 4200 J / kg / K ) will be t
1) 77 kW 2) 55 kW 10. Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by water
3) 38.5 kW 4) 40 kW msteam × Lv + msteamSw (1000 − 400 ) = mwater Sw ( 400 −100 )
136 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
LEVEL - III 6. A thermally insulated vessel contains some
water at 00 C . The vessel is connected to a
LAW OF MIXTURES (OR) CALORIMETRY
vacuum pump to pump out water vapour. This
& CHANGE OF STATE PRINCIPLE
results in some water getting frozen. The
1. 30g oficeat00C and 20 g of steam at 1000C are
maximum percentage amount of water that
mixed. The composition of the resultant will be solidified in this manner will be
mixture is
1) 40g of water and 10g steam at 1000C ( Lsteam = 21×105 J / kg and Lice = 3.36×105 J / kg ).
2) 10g of ice and 40g of water at 0 0C 1) 86.2% 2) 33.6% 3) 21% 4) 24.36%
3) 50g of water at 1000C 7. The specific heat of a substance varies with
4) 35g of water and 15g of steam at 1000C
temperature as s=0.20+0.14 θ +0.023 θ 2 (cal/
2. 30 gms of water at 30ºC is in a beaker. Which gmºC) .Heat required to raise the temperature
of the following, when added to water, will
of 2 gm of the substance from 50 C to 150 C is
have greatest cooling effect? (Specific heat
( θ is in ºC )
of copper = 0.1 cal/gmºC)
1) 24 cal 2) 56 cal 3) 82 cal 4) 100 cal
1) 100gm of water at10ºC
8. In an industrial process 10 kg of water per
2) 15gm of water at 0ºC
hour is to be heated from 200 C to 800 C . To
3) 3gm of ice at 0ºC 4) 18gm of copper at 0ºC
do this steam at 1500 C is passed from a boiler
3. ‘n’ number of liquids of masses m,2m,3m,4m,
into a copper coil immersed in water. The
....... having specific heats S, 2S,3S, 4S, ....
steam condenses in the coil and is returned
are at temperatures t, 2t, 3t, 4t . . . . are mixed.
to the boiler as water at 900 C . How many
The resultant temperature of mixture is
kilograms of steam is required per hour
3n 2n ( n + 1) (specific heat of steam = 1cal/gm, latent heat
1) t 2) 3 ( 2n + 1) t
2n + 1 of vapourisation = 540 cal/gm)?
1) 1gm 2) 1 kg 3) 10 gm 4) 10 kg
3n ( n + 1) 3n ( n + 1) 9. A heater melts 0ºC ice in a bucket completely
3) 2 ( 2n + 1) t 4) ( 2n + 1) t
into water in 6 minutes and then evaporates
all that water into steam in 47 minutes 30 sec.
4. Steam is passed into a calorimeter with water
If latent heat of fusion of ice is 80 cal/gram,
having total thermal capacity 110 cal/gm and
latent heat of steam will be (specific heat of
initial temperature 30ºC. If the resultant
water is 1 cal /gam-ºC)
temperature is 90ºC, the increase in the mass 1) 536 Cal/gram 2) 533.3 Cal/gram
of the water is 3) 540 Cal/gram 4) 2.268 × 106 J/Kg
1) 12 gm 2) 1.2 gm 3) 5 gm 4) 12.4 gm 10. Ice at 0ºC is added to 200gm of water initially
5. 2 kg of ice at −20ºC is mixed with 5 kg of at 70ºC in a vacuum flask. When 50gm of ice
has been added and has all melted, the
water at 20ºC in an insulating vessel having temperature of flask and contents is 40ºC.
a negligible heat capacity. The final mass of When a further 80gm of ice is added and has
water in the vessel. ( The specific heat of all melted, the temperature of whole become
water and ice are 1k cal/kg0C and 0.5 k cal/ 10ºC. Neglecting heat lost to surroundings
kg0C respectively and the latent heat of the latent heat of fusion of ice is
fusion of ice is 80 k cal/kg) is 1) 80 cal/gm 2) 90 cal/gm
3) 70 cal/gm 4) 540 cal/gm
1) 7 kg 2) 6 kg 3) 4 kg 4) 2 kg
NARAYANAGROUP 137
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
LEVEL - III-KEY m2
01) 1 02) 1 03) 3 04) 1 05) 2 m2 = 6.25m1 ; % = m + m × 100
1 2
06) 1 07) 3 08) 2 09) 2 10) 2
θ2
LEVEL - III- HINTS
7. Q = ∫ m × S × dθ
1. msLs = (mice Lice + mice s∆θ ) θ1
Where ms=mass of steam condensed to rise 15
temperature of ice to 1000c water. (
Q = 2 ∫ 0.2 + 0.14θ + 0.023θ 2 dθ )
2. From principle of calorimetry 5
(i) mSw ( 30 − θ1 ) = m1Sw (θ1 − 10 ) 8. Let ‘m’kg of steam is required for this process
(ii) mSw ( 30 − θ 2 ) = m2 S w (θ2 − 0 ) 0
steam, 150 C 0
water, 90 C
(iii) mSw ( 30 − θ3 ) = m3 Lice + m3 Sw (θ3 − 0 )
(iv) mSw ( 30 − θ 4 ) = m4Scu (θ 4 − 0 )
here m1 = 100 g , m2 = 15 g , m3 = 3 g , m4 = 18 g
above calculations will be show that θ1 is least.
water
3. From principle of calorimetry
m1S1θ1 + m2 S2θ 2 + ......
θ=
m1S1 + m2 S 2 + .....
θ=
(1 + 2 + 3 + ........ + n ) t
3 3 3 3
m w × S w × (8 0 − 2 0 )
(1 + 2 + 3 + ......... + n )
2 2 2 2
4. From principle of calorimetry = m×Ssteam ×(150 −100) + mLsteam + mSw (100 −θ )
( mS )water ∆θ1 = m ( Lsteam + S ∆θ2 ) 9. Let ‘m’ be the mass of ice in the bucket
(mS)water= 110, Sw = 1, Lice = 540 , Heat given out by heater in 6min is 80m
∆θ1 = 60 & ∆θ 2 = 10 Heat given out in 47.5min is 100m+mLv
5. Let ‘m’ be mass of ice melted into water m × 80 -- → 6 minutes
mice × Sice × 20 + m× Lice = mwater × Sw × 20 (m × 1 × 100 )+ (m × Lv) → 47.5 minutes
final mass of water in vessel = m + 5kg. ∴ 80 × 47.5 = 6(100+Lv)
10. According to principle of calorimetry
6. Let m1 mass is vaporised and m2 mass gets
solidified ML f + MS ∆θ = ( mS ∆θ )water + ( mS ∆θ ) flask
Then heat taken in vaporisation = heat given during
5Lf = 400+ 3w....(i), here w = ( mS ) flask
or m1 ( 21× 105 ) = ( m2 ) ( 3.36 × 105 )
138 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V CALORIMETRY
Now the system contains (200+50)gm of water
13
at 40ºC, so when further 80gm of ice is added d) when A,B and C all are mixed s) θ
5
8 L f = 670 + 3w.....( ii )
3. Match the following.
from (i) & (ii) we get L f . Column-I Column-II
a) Specific heat p) watt
LEVEL - IV
b) Heat capacity q) j/kg-oC
Matching Type Questions c) Heat current r) j/sec
d) Latent heat s) j/kg
1. One gram of ice at 00 C is heated to change
4. In a container of negligible mass m grams of
to steam at 1000 C having volume 1673cc at
steam at 1000 C is added to 100gm of water
normal pressure
that has temperature 200 C . If no heat is lost
Column-I Column-II
to the surroundings at equilibrium, match the
(event) Heat required
following.
a) Change in total potential p) 40cal / g
Column-I Column-II
energy a) If m=20gm, mass of steam p)114.8
b) External work done in q) 497cal / g in the mixture (in mg)
expanding the gas b) If m=20gm, mass of water q)76.4
c) Change in kinetic energy r) 100cal / g in the mixture (in mg)
c) If m=20gm, final temperature r)5.2
d)Change in potential energy s) 577cal / g
of the mixture (in 0 C )
and boiling process
2. Three liquids A,B and C having same specific d) If m=10gm, final temperature s)100
heats have masses m,2m and 3m.Their of the mixture (in 0 C )
temperatures are θ , 2θ and 3θ respectively..
The temperature of mixture
Assertion & Reason Type Questions
Column-I Column-II Read the following Questions and Choose if
1) both, Assertion and Reason are true and the
5
p) θ
Reason is correct explanation of the Assertion.
a) when A and B are mixed
2
2) both, Assertion and Reason are true, but Reason
is not correct explanation of the Assertion.
5
b) when A and C are mixed q) θ 3) Assertion is true, but the Reason is false.
3
4) Both, Assertion and Reason are false.
7
c) when B and C are mixed r) θ 5. Assertion: The specific heat capacity of a body
3 depends on the material of the body.
NARAYANAGROUP 139
CALORIMETRY JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- V
Reason: The specific heat capacity of a body 12. Statement-1:At room temperature ice does not
depends on heat given sublimate from ice to steam.
6. Assertion: Latent heat of fusion of ice is 336000 Statement-2: The critical point of water is much
above the room temperature.
J kg −1
13. Statement-1 : When two liquid samples with
Reason: Latent heat refers to change of state
temperature T1 and T2 but same specific heat
without any change in temperature.
capacities are mixed the equilibrium temperature
7. Assertion: Change of state is an example of
isothermal process. T1 + T2
of the mixture is
2
Reason: Change of state from solid to liquid
occurs only at melting point of solid and change Statement-2:The amount of heat lost by the hotter
of state from liquid to gas occurs only at boiling liquid is equal to the amount of heat absorbed by
point of liquid. Thus, there is no change of the cooler liquid.
temperature during change of state. LEVEL - IV- KEY
8. Assertion: Specific heat of a substance during Matching Type Questions
change of state is infinite.
1) a-s, b-p, c-r, d-q 2) a-q, b-p, c-s, d-r
Reason: During change of state ∆Q = mL ,
3) a-q, b-s, c-p,r, d-s 4) a-r, b-p, c-s,d-p
specific heat does not come in.
Assertion & Reason Type Questions
Statement Type Questions 5) 3 6) 2 7) 1 8) 2
Options : Statement Type Questions
1. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is true 9) 1 10) 1 11) 3 12) 1 13) 3
2. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is false
3. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is true LEVEL - IV - HINTS
4. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is false 1. Specific heat depends on nature of the material but
9. Statement-1: Specific heat capacity is the cause not depend on heat given.
of formation of land and sea breeze. 2. From definition we know that temperature remains
Statement-2: The specific heat of water is more constant during change of state. From experiments
than that of land. we get the value of Lice.
10. Statement-1:When a solid melts or a liquid boils, 3. The process in which temperature remain constant
the temperature does not increase when heat is is called isothermal process.
supplied. During the change of state temperature remain
Statement-2:The heat supplied is used to increase constant until total amount of substance can
internal kinetic energy. undergoes change of state.
11. Statement-1:Melting of solid causes no change 4. During the change of state ∆θ = 0
in internal energy.
Statement-2: Latent heat is the heat required to 1 ∆Q Q
∴S = = ∞ ; From definition L =
melt a unit mass of solid. m ∆θ m
140 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
THERMODYNAMICS
SYNOPSIS
Ø Thermodynamics: Thermodynamics is a or coldness of a body.
branch of science which deals with exchange of Ø Temperature determines the direction of flow of
heat energy between bodies and conversion of heat when two bodies are placed in thermal contact.
the heat energy into mechanical energy and vice Ø Heat always flows from the body at higher
versa. temperature(hot body) to the body at lower
Ø The state of a gas in thermodynamics is specified temperature(cold body).
by macroscopic variables such as pressure, Ø Temperature is a scalar quantity.
volume, temperature, etc., Its S.I unit is Kelvin(K) and
Ø A particular portion of matter or a restricted region C.G.S unit is degree Celsius( o C ).
of space under investigation is called system.
Its dimensional formula is M 0 L0T 0 K 1 or
Ø Thermodynamic system: If the state of a
system is represented by pressure (P), volume M 0 L0T 0θ 1 .
(V),temperature (T) and Entropy(s) then it is called
Ø Heat
a thermodynamic system.
It is the thermal energy that exchanges between
Ø Thermo dynamical process : If the state of
two systems due to the temperature difference
a system changes in such a way that any of P, V,
between them.
T, etc., changes, then the process is called thermo
dynamical process. Ø Its SI unit is joule and C.G.S unit is calorie.
Ø Mechanical equilibrium : There is no Its dimensional formula is [ML2 T-2]
unbalanced force between the system and its Ø Calorie: It is the quantity of heat required to raise
surroundings. the temperature of 1g of water by 1o C .
Ø Thermal equilibrium : There is a uniform Ø Standard(Mean) Calorie: It is the quantity of
temperature in all parts of the system and is same heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of
as that of surroundings. water from 14.5o C to 15.5o C .
Ø When bodies are in thermal equilibrium, no Its value is, 1calorie = 4.186J ≈ 4.2J .
exchange of heat takes place. Heat is measured by using calorimeter.
Ø Chemical equilibrium : There is a uniform Heat is a path dependent quantity.
chemical composition throughout the system and Ø Internal work : It is the work done by one
surroundings. part of a system on its another part.
Ø Thermodynamic equilibrium:A system is Ex: The work done by a gaseous system against
said to be in thermodynamic equilibrium when it is intermolecular forces.
in a state of thermal, mechanical and chemical Ø External work: When the work is done by
equilibrium. (or) on the system on (or ) by the surroundings,
Ø Zeroth law of thermodynamics: If two then it is called external work.
isolated bodies A and B are in thermal equilibrium P-V graph or indicator diagram :
independently with a third body C, then the bodies Ø The graph drawn between pressure of a gas on y-
A and B will also be in thermal equilibrium with axis and its volume on x-axis is called indicator
each other. diagram. This graph is useful to calculate external
Ø Zeroth law of thermodynamics leads to the concept work done by the system during thermodynamic
of temperature(T). change.
Ø Temperature is the measure of degree of hotness
NARAYANAGROUP 29
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
Workdone by a gas during change in H∝W ⇒ W=JH.
W
volume: J= H where J= Mechanical equivalent of heat.
Ø When a gas expands, then for a small
Mechanical equivalent of heat (J):
change(Quasi-statically) in volume dV, small
Ø It is the amount of work necessary to produce unit
workdone is dW=PdV = Area of narrow strip
amount of heat energy.
(almost rectangle) as shown in figure. Here pressure Ø J is not a physical quantity. It is simply a conversion
P is almost constant. factor between mechanical work and its equivalent
Pressure heat energy.
Ø Values of ‘J’:
The value of J depends on the units of work W
and heat H.
P
When W is in Joules, H is in Cal, then
J = 4.186J / cal ≈ 4.2J / cal
When W and H both are expressed in joules, J=1.
volume
V1 V2 Applications of Joule’s law
If the volume changes from V1 to V2, then the total Ø The height from which ice is to be dropped to melt
external work done by the system is it completely is
V2 JL
W = ∫ PdV =Area under P-V curve. h= g ; where L= Latent heat of ice.
V1
Ø The raise in temperature of water when it falls from
Ø Area under P-V graph is equal to the external work a height h to the ground is,
done during the process.
gh
Ø If the volume changes from V1 to V2 at constant ∆θ = ; where ‘S’ is specific heat of water
JS
pressure(isobarically) Ø When a bullet of mass m moving with a velocity v
W = P∫ dV = P (V2 − V1 )
V2
is stopped abruptly by a target and all of its heat
V1 energy liberated is retained by bullet , then the
Pressure increase in temperature is.
v2
∆θ =
2 JS
If the bullet absorbs x% of heat liberated, then
P
x v2
Volume rise in its temperature is ∆θ =
V1 V2 100 2 JS
Work is a path dependent quantity Ø When a block of ice of mass M is dragged with
constant velocity 'v' on a rough horizontal surface
Sign convention: of coefficient of friction µ , through a distance
Ø If the work is done by the system, then work done 'd', then the mass of ice melted is,
is (+) ve. (QdV > 0 ⇒W > o)
µMgd
Ø If the work is done on the system, then it is m= ; where m=mass of ice melted.
JL
(-) ve. (QdV < 0 ⇒W < 0) In order to melt all the ice completely, the block
Relation between work and heat JL
(Joule’s law): should be dragged through a distance d = µ g
Ø The amount of heat produced is directly Now, the time taken to melt completely is given
proportional to the amount of mechanical work
d JL
done. by t = =
v µ gv
30 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Ø When a block is dragged on a rough horizontal 12´10 5 = (10´103 )´ 0.9´Dt
surface of coefficient of friction µ , then the rise in
µ gd 12´10 5
temperature of block is, ∆θ = \ Dt = = 133.3°C
JS 0.9´10 4
Ø If a bullet at a temperature less than its melting point WE.2 : Hailstones fall from a certain height. If they
just melts when abruptly stopped by an obstacle melt completely on reaching the ground, find
and if all the heat produced is absorbed by the bullet, the height from which they fall. (g=10 ms-2,
then L = 80 calorie/g and J = 4.2 J/calorie.)
1 Sol. On reaching the ground, a hailstone of mass M
J ( mS ∆ θ + mL ) = mv 2
2 losses potential energy which is converted into heat
Where L= Latent heat of fusion of the material of energy required to melt it. In SI, potential energy
the bullet , S= Specific heat of the bullet lost = heat energy required for melting the hailstone
∆θ = rise in temperature before it melts. Mgh = ML Þ gh = L
Ø A metal ball falls freely on the ground from a height L 80´ 4.2 ´1000
h= , h=
‘h1’ and bounces to height ’ h2’. If the ball absorbs g 10
all the heat energy generated, then raise in
= 33.6 ´1000m = 33.6 km.
g ( h1 − h2 )
temperature of the ball is ∆θ = WE.3 : A girl weighing 42 kg eats bananas whose
JS energy is 980 calories. If this energy is used
Ø When a body rotating with angular speed ω is to go to height h find the value of h.(J=4.2J/
suddenly stopped, if it absorbs all the heat calorie)
generated, then rise in temperature of body is Sol. Energy gained by the girl in eating bananas
Iω 2 = 980 calories = 980 ´ 4.2 J.
∆θ =
2 JmS
(QW = τθ = τωt ) W=H (in S.I.)
Where I=Moment of inertia of the given body 980 × 4.2 = mgh ⇒ 980×4.2 = 42×9.8×h
Ø A drilling machine drills a hole to a metal plate in a 980´4.2
time 't'. The machine is operated by a torque ' τ ' Þh = =10m
42´9.8
with constant angular speed ω . If the heat
WE.4 : A lead bullet of mass 21 g travelling at a
generated is completely absorbed by the plate, then
speed of 100 ms −1 comes to rest in a wooden
τωt
the raise in temperature of the plate is ∆θ = block. If no heat is taken away by the wood,
JmS
then find the raise in temperature of the wood.
(QW = τθ = τωt ) (Specific heat of lead = 0.03 calorie/g °C.)
Where, m= mass of the plate Sol. kinetic energy of the bullet = heat gained by the
S= specific heat of the material of the given plate 1 2
WE. 1: A 10kw drilling machine is used for 5 bullet, mv = mSDt
minutes to bore a hole in an aluminium block 2
of mass 10 × 103 kg. If 40% of the work done v2 (100)2
Dt = = = 39.680C
is utilised to raise the temperature of the block, 2S 2´0.03´ 4.2´1000
then find the raise in temperature of the WE.5 : The height of the Niagara falls is 50m. If
aluminium block ?
(Specific heat of Aluminium = 0.9 Jkg-1 k-1) J = 4.2 ×107 erg / cal . Then the difference of
Sol. Work done by the drilling machine in 5 min temperature of water at the top and bottom
W= power x time =10 × 103 × 5 × 60 = 3 × 106J of the falls is
The energy utilised to rise the temperature of the Sol. P.E. is converted into heat, mgh = JmS ∆t
40
block = 40% of W = 3 × 10 ´ = 12 ´105 J gh 980 × 5000
6
100 ∆t = = = 0.1170 C
JS 4.2 ×107
Heat gained by aluminium block =
mass × specific heat × increase in temperature.
NARAYANAGROUP 31
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
WE.6 : A piece of ice at 00 C falls from rest into nR ∆ T P f V f − PV
∆ U = nC V ∆ T = =
i i
a lake of water which is also at 00 C and 0.5% γ −1 γ −1
of ice melts. Find the minimum height from 5)The internal energy of ideal gas depends only on
which the ice falls. its temperature T. When T increases U also
Sol. Let a mass 'm' of ice falls from height h. increases and vice versa.
Loss in potential energy = mgh, 6)Internal energy of real gases depends upon
0.5 temperature, pressure and volume.
Heat produced, H = mLice
100 7)Real gases consists of both kinetic energy and
0.5 potential energy due to intermolecular forces.
since,W = JH; mgh = J × mLice First law of thermodynamics:
100
Ø All the heat added to a system is partially utilised
0.5 Lice
h= to do the external work and remaining to increase
100 × g its internal energy.
Ø
0.5 × ( 4.2 J / cal ) ( 80 × 103 cal / kg )
The differential form of first law of thermodynamics
= = 171.43m is
100 × 9.8 m / s 2 dQ=dU+dW, where dQ = heat added,
Internal energy: dU = Increase in internal energy
Ø Internal energy of a system is the energy possessed dW= work done = PdV
by the system due to molecular motion and ∴ dQ = dU + PdV
molecular configuration. The energy due to
molecular motion is called internal kinetic energy For bulk changes ∆Q = ∆U + PdV ∫
U k and that due to molecular configuration is Ø dU is state dependent but path independent and
internal potential energy U p ,i.e dQ,dW are path dependent.
Sign convention :
U = UK +U p Ø When heat is added (flows into) to the system dQ
Regarding internal energy it is worth nothing that is + ve(+dQ)
1) Change in internal energy is path independent Ø When heat is taken (flows out) from the system
and depends only on the initial and final states of dQ is -ve (-dQ)
the system i.e Ø When gas expands work is done by the gas, dw is
2 positive (+ dW)
1 Ø When gas compresses work is done on the gas,
i f
then work done by the gas dW is negative (-dW)
3
Ø When internal energy of system increases
∆U1 =∆U2 =∆U3 ; ∆ U = U f − U i dU is +ve (+dU)
Ø When internal energy of system decreases
2) Change in internal energy in a cyclic process is
dU is -ve(-dU)
always zero as for cyclic process U f = U i , so Significance and limitations of first law:
that ∆ U = U f − U i = 0 Ø It is a consequence of law of conservation of
3)In case of ideal gas as there is no molecular energy.
Ø This law is applicable to any process in nature.
attraction U p = 0 ,i.e, internal energy of an ideal
Ø This law is applicable to all the three phases of
gas is totally kinetic and is given by
matter.
U = UK =
3 3
nRT with ∆U = nR∆T Ø First law of thermodynamics does not indicate the
2 2 direction of heat transfer. It does not tell any thing
4) In case of gases, whatever be the process about the conditions under which heat can be
transformed into work.
32 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
WE.7: When heat energy of 1500J is supplied to a WE.11:Consider the vaporization of 1g of water at
gas the external workdone by the gas is 525J 1000C to steam at 1000C at one atmospheric
what is the increase in its internal energy pressure. Compute the work done by the water
Sol. Heat energy supplied ∆Q=1500J system in the vaporization and change in
internal energy of the system.
External workdone ∆W=525J
Sol. To change a system of mass m of liquid to vapour,,
By 1st law of thermodynamics ∆Q = ∆U+∆W
heat required is Q = mLvapour
∴∆U = ∆Q − ∆W =1500 – 525 = 975J.
WE.8:When 1g of water at 100°C is converted into The process takes place at constant pressure, and
steam at 100°C, it occupies a volume of 1671cc so the work done by the system is the work in an
at normal atmospheric pressure. Find the isobaric process. W = P∆V
increase in internal energy of the molecules of Where ∆V = (Vvapour − Vliquid )
steam. From first law of thermodynamics
Sol. 1 atmosphere = 1.013 x 105 Nm-2 ;
volume of 1gm of water, V1 = 1cc = 10-6m3; ∆U = Q − W = mLv − P (Vvapour − Vliquid )
Latent heat of vaporization of water
m
Q ρ = & ρ = 1gm / cc Lvapour = 22.57 ×105 J / kg
V
Volume of steam = 1671 cc = 1671 x 10-6 m3 Q = (1.00 × 10−3 )( 22.57 × 105 ) = 2.26 × 103 J
External work done dW = P(V2 - V1)
= 1.013 x 105 (1671 x 10-6 - 1 x 10-6) Q No. of moles = weight /gram molecular weight
= 1.013 x 105 x 1670 x 10-6 1
= 1.013 x 167 = 169.2 J. ∴ Moles of water in 1g = = 0.0556 mole
18
Latent heat of vaporisation of steam= 540 cal/g nRT ( 0.0556 )( 8.315)( 373)
So, heat supplied to convert 1g of water into steam, Vvapour = = = 1.70 × 10−3 m3
P 1.013 × 10 5
DQ = 540 x 4.2J = 2268J The density of water is
By first law of thermodynamics 1.00 × 103 kg / m 3 = 1.00 g / cm3
DU = DQ -DW = 2268 -169.2 = 2098.8J
WE. 9: Calculate the external workdone by the Vliquid = 1.00 × 10−6 m3
system in KCal, when 40 KCal of heat is Thus the work done by the water system in
vaporization is W = P (Vvapour − Vliquid )
supplied to the system and internal energy
rises by 8400 J.
Sol. dQ=dU+dW = (1.013 × 10 5 )(1.70 × 10 −3 − 1.00 × 10 −6 ) = 172 J
8400 The work done by the system is positive since the
dU = 8400 J = KCal = 2 KCal. volume of the system has increased.
4200
∴ 40 KCal = 2 KCal+external work done From first law,
The external work done = 40 - 2 = 38 KCal ∆U = Q − W ⇒ ∆U = 2.26 ×103 − 172 = 2.09 ×103 J
WE.10:In a thermodynamic process pressure of a
fixed mass of a gas is changed in such a
Specific heats of a gas:
Ø Gases have two types of specific heats.
manner that the gas releases 20J of heat and
a) Specific heat at constant volume (cv)
8J of work is done on the gas. If initial internal
energy of the gas was 30J, what will be the b) Specific heat at constant pressure( c p)
final internal energy? Ø Specific heat of all substances is zero at 0K.
Sol. We know that, dQ = dU+dW Specific heat of a gas at constant pressure ( c p )
Since heat is released by the system, dQ = -20J. Ø It is the heat required to rise the temperature of 1g
and work is done on the gas, dW = -8J
dU = -20 - (-8) = -20 + 8 = -12J of a gas by 1o C at constant pressure.
⇒ U f − U i = −12 J 1 dQ
∴cp = dQp = mc p dT
U f = U i − 12 = 30 − 12 = 18 J m dT p ;
NARAYANAGROUP 33
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
∴∆Q p = mc p ∆T , if c p is constant. Ø For a gas having 'f' degrees of freedom,
f f
∆Q p = m ∫ c p dT , if c p depends on temperature. C v = R, C p = 1 + R
2 2
Specific heat of a gas at constant volume ( cv ) 2 Cp
γ = 1+ ∴ γ =
Ø It is the heat required to rise the temperature of 1g f CV
of a gas by 1o C at constant volume CP, CV and γ values of different gases:
1 dQ γ=
CP
∴ cv = S.No Atomicity of gas CP CV
m dT v CV
dQv = mcv dT 1. Monoatomic
5
R 3 5
= 1.67
R
2 2 3
∴ ∆Qv = mcv ∆T , if cv is constant.
7 5 7
R R = 1.4
∆Qv = m ∫ cv dT , if cv depends on temperature. 2. Diatomic
2 2 5
Ø SI unit of both c p , cv is J/Kg-K 4
3. Tri non-linear& 4R 3R = 1.33
3
CGS unit is cal/g- o C
and poly atomic
Molar specific heats ( C ,C
P V ) of a gas
9 7 9
4. Tri linear R R = 1.29
Ø When the above specific heats c p , cv are defined 2 2 7
per 1mole of gas, then they are said to be molar ? Of mixture of gases:
specific heats and represented by CP , CV . Ø When n1moles of a gas is mixed with n2 moles of
another gas.
1 dQ
These are, C p = n 1C v1 +n 2 C v 2
n dT p then, (C v ) mixture =
n 1 +n 2
1 dQ 1 dU
Cv = = , (Q ∆W = 0 )
n1C p1 +n 2C p 2
n dT v n dT (C p ) mixture = (C v ) mixture + R =
n1 +n 2
SI unit of both molar specific heats is J/ mol-K
Ø Cp is greater than CV and, C p (mixture)
? mixture =
CP C v (mixture)
=γ ( Cp ,CV are molar specific heats )
CV n1 + n2 n n
Also γ = 1 + 2
mixture −1 γ1 −1 γ 2 −1
Cp - CV= R, where R is universal gas constant
R= 8.314 J/ mol-K ≈ 2cal / mol − K Ø At constant pressure, fraction of heat absorbed that
γR R dU C v 1
CP = and Cv =
γ −1 γ −1 is converted into internal energy is dQ = C = ?
p
R Ø At constant pressure, fraction of heat absorbed that
Ø c p − cv = r =
M
( but C = M c) is converted into external workdone is
⇒ M ( c p − cv ) = R dW nRdT
= =
R
=1−
1
dQ nC p dT C p ?
Where r is specific gas constant and c p , cv are
expressed in J/Kg-K.
34 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
WE.12:Calculate the difference between the two WE. 16: The specific heat capacity of a metal at
specific heats of nitrogen, given that the low temperature(T) is given as
density of nitrogen at N.T.P is 1.25 g/litre 3
−1 −1 T
and J= 4200 J/KCal., ( in KCal/kg-K) C p ( kJK kg ) = 32 . A 100 g vessel
Sol. PV = mrT 400
of this metal is to be cooled from 20K to 4 K
P
The difference in specific heats, r = . by a special refrigerator operating at room
ρT
P = 1.013 × 105 N/m2; T = 273 K; ( 0
)
temperature 27 C .The amount of work
10-3 kg 1.25´10-3 kg required to cool the vessel is
r = 1.25´ 3 3 = 3 -6 3
= 1.25kg / m3
10 cm 10 ´10 m Sol. Heat required to change the temperature of vessel
by a small amount dT
1.013´105 dQ = mC p dT . Total heat required
\r = = 296.8J/kg K
1.25´273
3
∴ The difference of specific heats T
Q = m ∫ 32
4
= 0.0768 KCal/kg-K. dT = 0.001996kJ
20
400
WE. 13:Four moles of a perfect gas is heated to work done required to maintain the temperature
increase its temperature by 20C absorbs heat
of 40 cal at constant volume. If the same gas of sink to T2
is heated at constant pressure find the amount Q −Q
W = Q1 − Q2 = Q Q2 For T2 = 20K ;
1 2
of heat supplied.
Sol. At constant volume dQ = nCvdT = dU = 40
2
At constant pressure 300 − 20
W1 = 0.001996 = 0.028 kJ
dQ = dU + nRdT = 40 + (4´ 2´ 2) = 56 cal 20
WE.14: When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at For T2 = 4K
constant pressure fraction of the heat energy
300 − 4
supplied which increases the internal energy W2 = 0.001996 = 0.148 kJ
of the gas is 4
Sol. Heat used in increasing the internal energy is ∴ The work required to cool the vessel from
Q1 = Cv dT ; Heat absorbed at constant pressure 20K to 4K is W2-W1=0.148-0.028=0.12KJ
As temperature is changing from 20 K to 4 K
to increase the temperature by dT is Q2 = C p dT work done required will be more than W1 but
Q1 Cv 1 1 less than W2 .
∴ = = =
Q2 C p C p / Cv γ WE 17 : The P-V diagram represents the
Q1 5 thermodynamic cycle of an engine, operating
for diatomic gas, γ = 7 / 5; ∴ Q = 7 with an ideal monoatomic gas. The amount
2 of heat, extracted from the source in a single
WE.15:A quantity of heat Q is supplied to a cycle is [JEE MAIN 2013]
monoatomic ideal gas which expands at
constant pressure. The fraction of heat that
goes into work done by the gas is 2P0 B C
Sol. C p dT = Cv dT + dW ; ∴ dW = ( C p − Cv ) dT
P0 D
Fraction of heat converted into work A
dW
=
( C p − C v ) dT = 1 − C v = 1 − 1
dQ C p dT Cp γ V0 2V0
For monoatomic gas, γ = 5 / 3
0 0 = nRTA ; 2 PV
Sol. PV 0 0 = nRTB ; 2 P0 2V0 = nRTC
dW 1 3 2
∴ = 1− = 1− = . Heat supplied H = nC V ∆TAB + nCP ∆TBC
dQ γ 5 5
NARAYANAGROUP 35
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
2P V PV 4P V 2P V Ø There should not be any exchange of heat between
= nCV 0 0 − 0 0 + nC P 0 0 − 0 0 the system and surroundings. All the walls of the
nR nR nR nR
container and the piston must be perfectly insulating.
3 0 0
PV 5 0 0
2PV 13 Ø
= n 2 R nR + n 2 R nR = PV It is a quick process.
0 0
2 Ø The internal energy changes certainly as
Thermodynamic processes: temperature changes.
Ø Quasi-static process: A quasi-static process Ø In the adiabatic process P, V & T are related as
can be defined as an infinitesimally slow process (i) PV γ = constant(ii) TV γ −1 =constant
in which the system remains in thermal and (iii) P1−γ T γ =constant
mechanical equilibrium with the surroundings at Ø In this process specific heat is zero.
each and every intermediate stage. P
i.e., temperature, pressure are almost constant
during infinitesimal small change in the state of gas.
It is an ideal process. In practice it does not occur. Ø Indicator diagram is
work
Ø Isothermal process:In this process, the V
pressure and volume of gas change, but
dP P
temperature remains constant. Hence internal Ø Slope of adiabatic curve, tan θ = = −γ
energy is also constant. dV V
Ø The slope of adiabatic curve is γ times to that of
i.e., dT = 0; dU = 0
the isothermal curve.
Ø The system is in thermal equilibrium with the Ø The adiabatic bulk modulus of gas is γ p
surroundings. i.e. γ times isothermal bulk modulus.
Ø It takes place in a thermally conducting vessel. Hence
Ø The workdone by the system during the adiabatic
heat exchanges between system and surroundings.
expansion is
Ø In this process dQ = dW
Ø nR
It is a slow process. W= (T -T ) = nCv(T1-T2)= −nCV∆T
Ø It obeys the Boyle’s law i.e. PV=Constant γ −1 1 2
Ø Specific heat is infinity.
1 1 − P2V2
Cp PV
P =n (T1 − T2 ) =
γ γ −1
Ø It takes place in a non conducting vessel. Hence
Ø Indicator diagram no exchange of heat takes place between system
work
and surroundings.
V
Ø Adiabatic expansion causes cooling and
dP P compression causes heating.
Ø Slope of isothermal curve, tan θ = =−
dV V Ø Eg:- Sudden bursting of tube of bicycle tyre,
Ø dP Propagation of sound in gases
Isothermal bulk modulus − =P
dV V Ø In this process dU = −dW
Ø The workdone during the isothermal change at Comparison between isothermal
temperature T for n moles of gas is
and adiabatic curves :
V P Ø When expanded to the same volume from the
W = 2.303nRT log10 2 =2.303 nRT log10 P
1
V1 2 same initial state.
Ø Isothermal process is ideal. In nature, no process
is perfectly isothermal. But we can say melting of P
ice, boiling of water are approximately isothermal. Work done : W1>W2
In these two processes internal energy increases 1-isothermal
1 2-adiabatic
even temperature is constant. Final pressure: P 1>P2
2
Ø Adiabatic process: The pressure, volume and Final temperature: T 1>T2
temperature of a gas change but total heat remains V1 V2 V
constant i.e., dQ=0 (Q=constant).
36 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Ø When compressed to the same volume from the Isochoric process (or) Isometric process
same initial state.
Ø It is a process in which the volume of the system
remains constant.
i.e., ? V =0 for such process ? W =0
Ø In this process, the increase in internal energy is
maximum where as the work done is zero.
Ø In this process ∆Q = ∆U
Work done: W1<W2 P
Ø It obeys Gay-Lussac's law, = constant
Final pressure : P 1>P2 T
P
Final temperature: T 1>T2
Ø When expanded to the same pressure from the same
initial state. Ø Indicator diagram
P 1-isothermal V
P1 2-adiabatic Work done : W1>W2 dP
P2 2 1 Ø Slope of isometric curve, =∞
Final volume : V1>V2 dV
f
V2 Final temperature : T 1>T2
V1 V Ø Specific heat is CV = R
2
Ø When compressed to the same pressure from the Ø Bulk modulus of elasticity K = ∞
same initial state.
Isobaric process:
P Ø It is a process in which the pressure of the system
1-isothermal Workdone : W1 < W2 remains constant. i.e., ∆P = 0
2-adiabatic
V
It obeys Charles law , = constant
P1 2
1 Final volume : V1<V2 Ø
P2 T
P
V1 V2
Final temperature : T 1<T2
V
Sno Isothermal Change Adiabatic change
1 Temperature remains No exchange of heat ∆Q = 0
constant, i.e ∆T = 0 Ø Indicator diagram
2 System is thermally System is thermally insulated Work
conducting to the from the surroundings V1 V2 V
surroundings
dP
3 The process takes place The process takes place Ø Slope of isobaric curve, =0
slowly quickly dV
4 Internal energy remains Internal energy changes. f
constant. ∆U = 0 ∆U ≠ 0 Ø Specific heat is C p = 2 + 1 R
5 Specific heat capacity is Specific heat capacity is zero
infinite
Ø Bulk modulus of elasticity K=0.
6 Equation of state is Equation of state is Ø Work done in isobaric process is given by
PV=constant γ
PV =constant ∆W = P(V2 − V1 ) = nR (T2 − T1 ) = nR ∆ T
7 dp P dp P Ø Eg:- Boiling of water into steam.
Slope = − Slope = −γ
dv i V dv a V Ø At constant pressure,
8 Isothermal elasticity Adiabatic elasticity dQ:dU:dW= nCP ∆T : nCV ∆T : n ( CP − CV ) ∆T
Eθ = P Eφ = γ P
γR R
9 Vf
Wi = nRT loge W =
( PV − P V )
i i f f = C P : CV : R = :
γ −1 γ −1
:R
Vi γ −1
a
P nR (Ti − T f ) ∴ ∆Q : ∆U : ∆W = γ :1: ( γ − 1) = ( f + 2 ) : f : 2
= nRT loge i =
P
f γ −1 2
Q γ = 1 +
f
NARAYANAGROUP 37
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
For monoatomic gas = 5 : 3 : 2 (B) If the change is adiabatic. For the gas in the left
For diatomic gas = 7: 5 : 2 chamber,
For non-linear poly atomic gas = 4 : 3 : 1
( )
γ
P ( 5V ) = P′ V ′ ............(iii)
γ
Cyclic process :
Ø If a system after undergoing through a series of
changes comes back to its initial state, the process and for the gas in the right chamber
( )
is called cyclic. γ
8 P (V ) = P′ 6V − V ′ ..........(iv)
γ
Ø In a cyclic process (the system finally reaches the
same initial state), workdone is equal to the area
enclosed by the cycle. dividing (iv) by (iii)
It is +ve if the cycle is clockwise. 3/2
It is -ve if the cycle is anticlockwise. 6V − V ′ 8 6V 4 10
= 3 / 2 or = 1+ i.e V′ = V
P P V′ 5 V′ 5 3
W=+ve W=-ve Substituting it in Equation (iii)
5V × 3
3/2
3 3
P′ = P = P = 1.84 P
V V 10V 2 2
In the cyclic process as U f = U i ,
10 8
∆ U = U f − U i = 0 and so the first law implies So P′ = 1.84 P ; V ′ = V and 6V − V ′ = V
3 3
∆Q = 0 + ∆W , i.e ∆Q = ∆W , heat supplied is
WE.19:In a cyclic process shown in the figure an
equal to the work done (area of the cycle)
WE.18:A piston divides a closed gas cylinder into ideal gas is adiabatically taken from B to A,
two parts. Initially the piston is kept pressed the work done on the gas during the process
such that one part has a pressure P and volume B → A is 30 J, when the gas is taken from
5V and the other part has pressure 8P and A → B the heat absorbed by the gas is 20J.
volume V, the piston is now left free. Find the What is the change in internal energy of the
new pressure and volume for the isothermal gas in the process A → B .
and adiabatic process. ( γ = 1.5)
Sol. PA 20 J
P L 8P 30J B
5V V
v
P′ L P′ Sol: WBA = −30J,QBA = 0 ; ∆U BA = −WBA = 30 J
V′ (6V-V′ ) Now, DUAB =-DUBA =-30J
Final pressure will be same on both sides. Let it be WE. 20:A gas undergoes a change of state during
(
P ′ , with volume V ′ , in the left side and 6V − V ′ ) which 100 J of heat is supplied to it and it
does 20 J of work. The system is brought back
in the right side to its original state through a process during
Case - (A) if the change is isothermal. which 20 J of heat is released by the gas. What
For the gas enclosed in the left chamber,
is the work done by the gas in the second
P × 5V = P ′V ′ .........( i ) process ?
While for the gas in the right chamber Sol. dQ1 = dU1 + dW1
( )
8 P × V = P′ 6V − V ′ .........(ii ) 100 = dU1 + 20 ⇒ dU1 = 80 J
Solving these for V ′ and P ′ , We get dQ2 = dU 2 + dW2 (∴ dU1 = −dU 2 )
30 13 48 −20 = −80 + dW2 ⇒ dW2 = 60 J
V′ = V and P′ = P and 6V − V ′ = V
13 6 13
38 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
WE. 21:An ideal gas is taken through the cycle Comparing it with the equation
A → B → C → A , as shown in the figure. If the γ
PV = constant for an adiabatic process,
net heat supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5 J,
what is the work done by the gas in the process we get γ = 3 / 2
C→A WE. 24:When 5 moles of an ideal gas is compressed
isothermally, its volume decreases from 5 litre
to 1 litre. If the gas is at 27°C, find the work
2 C B 1
done on the gas log10 5 = -0.6990 .
3
V(m )
Sol. In the case of 'n' moles, work done on the gas
1 A
V
W = nRT log e 2
10 2
P(N/m ) V1
V
Sol : ∆ WAB = P∆V = (10 )( 2 − 1) = 10J W = nRT × 2.3026 × log10 2
V1
∆ WBC = 0 (as V = constant)
1
From first law of thermodynamics ∴ W = 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 2.3026 × log10
∆Q = ∆W + ∆U ; ∆U = 0 (process ABCA is cyclic) 5
∴ ∆Q = ∆WAB + ∆ WBC + ∆WCA
= 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 2.3026 × (-0.6990)
= -2.007 × 104J
∴ ∆WCA = ∆Q − ∆WAB − ∆WBC = 5 − 10 − 0 = –5J
WE. 25:A gas is expanded to double its volume by
WE.22:An ideal monoatomic gas is taken round
two different processes. One is isobaric and
the cycle ABCDA as shown in the P-V
the other is isothermal. Let W1 and W2 be the
diagram. Compute the work done in this
process. respective work done, then find W1 and W2
Vf
Sol: W1 = Pi (V f − Vi ) = PV
i i − 1
5P0 A B Vi
Pressure (P) = nRT ( 2 − 1) = nRT
æV f ÷÷ö = nRT log 2 = W log 2
W2 = nRT loge ççç
3P0 C
D ÷÷ e( ) e( )
çè Vi ø
1
2V0 3V0 5V0 6V0
Volume(V) WE. 26:Temperature of 1 mole of an ideal gas is
increased from 300 K to 310 K under isochoric
Sol. Total work done
process. Heat supplied to the gas in this process
= Area under P-V curve (parallelogram)
is Q = 25 R, where R = universal gas constant.
= Base x Height = (6V0 – 3V0) (5P0 – 3P0)
= (3V0)(2P0) = 6P0V0 units What amount of work has to be done by the
gas if temperature of the gas decreases from
WE. 23:During an adiabatic process, if the pressure 310 K to 300 K adiabatically?
of an ideal gas is proportional to the cube of
Sol. ∆Q = nCV ∆T
its temperature, find γ .
Sol. For an ideal gas of one mole PV = RT 5
∴25R = (1) (CV) (310–300) or CV = R
During an adiabatic process P ∝ T3 2
P = kT3 ; where k is a constant As the gas is diatomic γ = 1.4
3
Now work done in adiabatic process
PV k 3 3
P = k Þ P= P V nR (T1 - T2 ) (1)( R)(310 - 300)
R R3 W= = = 25 R
g -1 1.4 -1
P 2V3 = cons tan t ; PV3 / 2 = constant
NARAYANAGROUP 39
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
WE. 27:A tyre pumped to a pressure of 6 ∴ P = k V ⇒ P = kV 1/2
atmosphere suddenly bursts. Room
temperature is 25 o C. Calculate the 2k 3/2
work done W = ∫ PdV = k ∫ V 1/2 dV = V
temperature of escaping air. ( γ = 1.4.) 3
Sol. From P11−γ T1γ = P21−γ T2γ Here, P 1 = 6 atm ; Polytrophic process:
P2 = 1 atm ; T1 = 273+25 = 298K; γ = 1.4 Ø In this process the gas obeys an additional law in
1.4
(6)(1-1.4)(298)1.4 = (1)(1–1.4) T2 the form of PV x = constant,
(298)1.4 (where x is +ve or − ve constant) along with
T21.4 1.4 −0.4
= (298) 6 =
60.4 ideal gas equation PV = nRT
1 1.4 − nR ∆ T
(298)1.4 1.4 (298)1.4 298 Ø In this process external Work done is W= x −1
T2 = 0.4 = 0.4
= 2 R R
6 1.4 Ø In this process molar specific heat, C= γ − 1 − x − 1
(6) (6) 7
2 WE. 31:P - V diagram of a diatomic gas is a straight
(or) log T2 = 2.4742 - (0.7782) line passing through origin. What is the molar
7
heat capacity of the gas in the process
= 2.4742 - 0.2209 = 2.2533. Sol. P - V diagram of the gas is a straight line passing
Anti log of 2.2533 = 178.7 through origin. Hence,
∴ T2 = 178.7K Þ t2 = 178.7 - 273 = - 94.3OC.
P ∝ V or PV = constant ⇒ x = −1
–1
WE. 28:Three samples of the same gas A, B and Molar heat capacity in the process
C ( γ = 3/2) have initially equal volume. Now R R
C= + Here, γ = 1.4 (for diatomic gas)
the volume of each sample is doubled. The g -1 1 - x
process is adiabatic for A, isobaric for B and
R R
isothermal for C. If the final pressures are ∴ C = 1.4 − 1 + 1 + 1 or C = 3 R
equal for all three samples, find the ratio of
their initial pressures WE. 32: Find the molar heat capacity in a process
Sol: Let the initial pressure of the three samples be P A, of a diatomic gas if it does a work of Q/4 when
a heat of Q is supplied to it
3 3
PB and P C then PA (V ) 2 = ( 2V ) 2 P 5 2 ( dU )
Sol. dU = CvdT = 2 R dT (or) dT =
PB = P ; PC (V) = P (2V) 5R
From first law of thermodynamics
∴ PA : PB : PC = (2) : 1 : 2 = 2 2 :1: 2
3/2
Q 3Q
WE.29: An ideal gas mixture filled inside a dU = dQ – dW = Q – =
4 4
balloon expands according to the relation Now molar heat capacity
PV2/3=constant. What will be the temperature
dQ Q ´ 5 R = 5 RQ =
10
inside the balloon C= = R
dT 2 ( dU ) 3Q
2
3
Sol. PV2/3 = constant ⇒
nRT 2/3
(V ) = constant
4
V WE. 33 :A monoatomic gas undergoes a process
T .V −1/3 = constant ⇒ V ∝ T 3 given by 2dU + 3dW = 0, then what is the
Temperature increases with increase in volume. process
2 dU dU
WE. 30: Work done to increase the temperature Sol: dQ = dU + dW ⇒ dQ = dU − =
3 3
of one mole of an ideal gas by 300C, if it is 1 1 3 nRdT
2 = nCv dT = n. RdT =
expanding under the condition V α T 3 is 3 3 2 2
1 dQ R
( R = 8.314 J / mol / K ) (EAM-2012) C=
n dT
= ;It is not isobaric as C is not
2
Sol: We have, V α T 2 / 3 ; but PV = RT
T 5R
equal to ; It is not adiabatic as C ≠ 0
3 2
PV α T ; PV αV 2 ⇒ Pα V It is not isothermal as C ≠ ∞ so it is a polytrophic
process.
40 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
WE.34 :The relation between U, P and V for an WE. 37:When a system is taken from state i to state
ideal gas is U = 2 + 3PV. What is the f along the path iaf, it is found that Q = 50
atomicity of the gas. cal and W = 20 cal. Along the path' ibf Q = 36
Sol : For an adiabatic process dQ = 0 = dU + dW cal. W along the path ibf is
or 0 = dU + PdV –––– (1) (AIEEE-2007)
From the given equation dU = 3 (PdV + VdP) a f
Substituting dU from (1), -PdV = 3 (PdV + VdP)
dV dP i b
or 4P (dV) + 3V (dP) = 0 or 4 = −3 Sol. From first law of thermodynamics,
V P
On integrating, we get dQ = dU + dW
In (V4) + In (P3) = constant,In (V4P3) = constant For path iaf, 50 = ∆U + 20 ⇒ ∆U = 30 cal
⇒ V4P3= constant or PV4/3 = constant For path ibf, dW = dQ − dU = 36 − 30 = 6 cal
4
i.e., γ = i.e., gas is polyatomic. WE. 38:A thermally insulated vessel contains an
3
ideal gas of molecular mass M and ratio of
WE.35:One mole of a monoatomic ideal gas
undergoes the process A → B in the given specific heat γ . It is moving with speed v and
P - V diagram. What is the specific heat for is suddenly brought to rest. Assuming no heat is
this process ? lost to the surroundings. its temperature
P increases by (in Kelvin ) (JEE MAIN-2011)
1 2 1 m R
6P0
Sol. mv = du = nCV dT ; 2 mv = M γ − 1 ∆ T
2
B
2
3P0
A WE. 39: 100 g of water is heated from 300C to 500C
V0 5V0 V ignoring slight expansion of the water, the
Sol. Specific heat change in its internal energy is (specific heat
∆Q 1 W of water is 4180J/Kg/K) (JEE MAIN-11)
C= = ( ∆U + W ) = Cv + Sol. dQ = dU + dW ;dW= 0 (Q dV is neglected )
∆T ∆T ∆T
For the given process ∴ dQ = dU = mS ∆θ
9P
W = 4V0 0 = 18PV = (100 ) (10 − 3 ) ( 4180 )( 20 ) = 8360 J ≈ 8.4 K J
0 0 (Q W= area of P – V graph)
2
Also, ∆T = T2 − T1 WE. 40 : Five moles of hydrogen initially at STP
is compressed adiabatically so that its
(6 P0 )(5V0 ) (3P0 )V0 27 PV
- = 0 0 temperature becomes 673 K. The increase in
=
R R R internal energy of the gas, in kilo joule is
3 (R = 8.3 J/mol-K; γ = 1.4 for diatomic gas)
and Cv = R (EAM-2014)
2
Sol. Work done by an ideal gas in adiabatic expansion
W 3R 18PV 3R 2 R 13R
\ C = Cv + = + 0 0
= + = 8.3
DT 2 æç 27PV ö R
0 0÷
÷÷ 2 3 6 dU = n dT = 5 ( 300 ) = 41500 J
ççè γ −1 1.4 − 1
R ø
WE. 36: If c P and c v denote the specific heats of WE. 41 : The volume of one mole of the gas is
nitrogen per unit mass at constant pressure changed from V to 2V at constant pressure p.
and constant volume respectively, then If γ is the ratio of specific heats of the gas,
change in internal energy of the gas is
R R
1) c P − cV = 2) c P − cV = (EAM-2014)
28 14 R PdV
3) c P − cV = R 4) c P − cV = 28 R Sol. dU = nCv dT = n γ − 1 dT = n
γ −1
(AIEEE-2007)
P ( 2V − V ) PV
Sol. Mayer formula c P − cV =
R
=
R =n =
M 28 γ −1 γ −1
NARAYANAGROUP 41
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
WE. 42 :Three moles of an ideal monoatomic gas Sol. Processes A to B and C to D are parts of straight
undergoes a cyclic process as shown in the line graphs of form y = mx
figure. The temperature of the gas in different
nR
states marked as 1, 2, 3 and 4 are 400K, 700K, and P = T ( n = 3) i.e PαT
2500K and 1100K respectively. The work done V
by the gas during the process 1-2-3-4-1 is So, volume remains constant for the graphs AB and
(universal gas constant is R) (EAM-2013) CD.
So, no work is done during processes for A to B
2 and C to D.
3
P 1
4 WAB = WCD = 0 and WBC = P2 (VC − VB )
= nR (TC − TB ) = 3R ( 2400 − 800 ) = 4800 R
v
Sol. Process 1 → 2 and 3 → 4 are polytrophic and WDA = P1 (VA − VD ) = nR (TA − TD )
process 2 → 3 and 4 → 1 are isobaric.
From the graph = 3R ( 400 − 1200 ) = −2400 R
P Work done in the complete cycle
P ∝V ⇒ = K ⇒ PV −1 = K ⇒ x = −1
V W = WAB + WBC + WCD + WDA
Work done W = W1→2 + W2→3 + W3 →4 + W4→1 = 0 + 4800 R + 0 + ( −2400 ) R
=
nR
[T1 − T2 ] + P2 (V3 − V2 ) +
nR
[T3 − T4 ] + P1 [V1 − V4 ] = 2400 R = 19953.6 J ≈ 20 kJ
x −1 x −1
WE. 44 : An ideal gas is subjected to a cyclic process
nR nR
= [T1 − T2 ] + nR (T3 − T2 ) + [T3 − T4 ] + nR [T1 − T4 ] ABCD as depicted in the p-V diagram given
x −1 x −1
below
nR
= [T1 − T2 + T3 − T4 ] + nR (T3 − T2 + T1 − T4 ) A B
x −1
3R
= [ 400 − 700 + 2500 − 1100] P
−1 − 1 C
+ 3R ( 2500 − 700 + 400 − 1100 ) D
V
3R
= [1100] + 3R (1100 )
−1 − 1 Which of the following curves represents the
1 equivalent cyclic process?(EAM-2009)
= 3R (1100 ) 1 − = 1650 R
2
WE. 43 : 3 moles of an ideal monoatomic gas A B A B
performs ABCDA cyclic process as shown in
figure below. The gas temperatures are 1) P 2) V
TA = 400K , TB = 800K , TC = 2400K and TD = 1200K . C C
D D
The work done by the gas is (approximately) T T
( R = 8.314 J / mol K )
(EAMCET-2010) A B A B
B C
3) P 4) V
C C
p D D
D T T
42 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Sol. A → B → C → D → A is clockwise process. Ø These two statements of the second law are
During A → B , pressure is constant and B → C , equivalent to each other. Because, if one is violated,
the other is also automatically violated.
1
process follows Pα , it means T is constant. Reversible process:
V Ø A process which can be retraced back in such a
During process C → D, both P and V changes way that the system passes through the states as in
direct process and finally the system acquires the
1
and process D → A follows Pα which means initial conditions, leaving no change anywhere else,
V is called reversible process. Any quasi-static
T is constant. process can be reversible.
Comparison of P-V curves of various Conditions for a process to be reversible:
processes : Ø (a) There should be no loss of energy due to
conduction, convection or dissipation of energy
P against any resistance, like friction, viscosity etc.
K=0 isobaric (b) No heat should be converted into magnetic or
electric energy.
isochoric
K=P (c) The system must always be in thermal,
isothermal mechanical and chemical equilibrium with the
K=γP surroundings.(i.e the process must be quasi-static)
adiabatic
K =∞ Ø Examples : In practice, there is no reversible
V process. But approximately we can give the
following examples.
Free expansion : i) The process of change of state from ice into water
is a reversible process.
Gas Vacuum ii) The process of change of state from water to
steam.
iii) The gradual extension and compression of an
Figure shows an insulated cylinder divided into
elastic spring is approximately reversible.
two parts by a thin massless fixed piston. Volume iV) The electrolysis process is reversible if internal
of left compartment is filled with an ideal gas and resistance is negligibly small.
the right compartment is vacuum. If we release v) Slow compression and expansion of an ideal
the piston, gas fills the whole space of the cylinder gas at constant temperature.
rapidly. In this expansion no heat is supplied to Irreversible process:
the gas as walls are insulated. ∴ ∆Q = 0 . As the Ø In this process the system does not pass through
piston is fixed no work is done by the gas, ∆W = 0 the same intermediate states as in the direct process.
and hence internal energy remains constant. Ø Most of the processes occurring in nature are
irreversible.
∴∆U = 0 , T is constant Examples :1) Diffusion of gas
Such an expansion is called "free expansion". 2) Dissolving of salt in water
Second law of thermodynamics : 3) Sudden expansion or compression of gas
Ø Clausius statement: It is impossible for a self Heat engine :
acting machine unaided by any external agency to Ø The device, used to convert heat energy into
transfer heat from a cold reservoir to a hot reservoir. mechanical energy is called a heat engine.
In other words heat can’t flow by itself from a Ø For conversion of heat into work with the help of a
colder to a hotter body. heat engine the following conditions required.
Ø Kelvin-Planck Statement: It is impossible i) There should be a reservoir at constant higher
for any heat engine to convert all the heat absorbed temperature ‘ T1 ’ from which heat is extracted. It is
from a reservoir completely into useful work. In called the source.
other words 100% conversion of heat into work ii) Working substance which undergoes
is impossible. thermodynamic cyclic changes(ex: ideal gas).
iii) There should be a reservoir at constant lower
NARAYANAGROUP 43
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
temperature ‘ T2 ’ to which heat can be rejected. P
This is called the sink.
A T1
Ø The source and sink should have very high thermal B
capacity. Q1
Working of heat engine : D
T2
C
Q2
a) Schematic diagram of heat engine
v
Source Engine Sink The P-V diagram of the cycle is shown in the figure.
T1 T2 In process AB heat Q1 is taken by the working
Q1 Q2 substance at constant temperature T 1 and in process
CD heat Q2 is liberated by the working substance
at constant temperature T2. The net work done is
W=Q1 - Q2 the area enclosed by the cycle ABCDA. After doing
the calculations for different processes we can show
b) Engine derives an amount ‘Q1’ of heat from the
Q2 T2
source. that : Q = T
c) A part of this heat is converted into work ‘W’. 1 1
d) Remaining heat ‘Q2’ is rejected to the sink. Therefore, efficiency of the Carnot engine is
Thus Q1 = W + Q2 or the work done by the engine Q T
η = 1− 2 = 1− 2
is given by W = Q1 − Q2 Q1 T1
e)The energy Q2 is unavailable in the universe, As T2 is always less than T1 , η < 1 . i.e., the value
of η can never be equal or greater than 1. When
which causes increase in entropy of universe.
Efficiency of heat engine : the temperature of sink T2 =0 K, then η can be 1
or 100% . But it is impossible.
Ø Efficiency of heat engine (η ) is defined as the
Ø For Carnot engine η is independent of the nature
fraction of total heat supplied to the engine which of working substance. It depends on only the
is converted into work. temperatures of source and sink.
W Q1 − Q2 Q2 Ø The efficiency of an irreversible engine is always
Mathematically η= = = 1− less than or equal to that of reversible engine when
Q1 Q1 Q1 operated between the same temperature limits.
Ø According to this , efficiency is 100% if Q2 = 0, ∴ always ηir ≤ η r
that is no heat is rejected to the cold reservoir or Refrigerator:
sink. That is the entire heat absorbed must be
converted to mechanical work , which is impossible Engine
according to Second law of Thermodynamics.
T1 T2
Carnot or Reversible or Ideal heat engine: Q1 Q2
Ø When the working substance is an ideal gas and it
is subjected to cyclic process consisting of
isothermal expansion, adiabatic expansion, W=Q1 - Q2
isothermal compression and adiabatic The refrigerator is just the reverse of heat engine.
compression, then such heat engine is called In refrigerator the working substance extracts an
Carnot engine. The cyclic process is called Carnot amount of heat Q2 from the cold reservoir (Sink)
cycle. at a lower temperature T2 . An amount of external
Carnot Cycle :Carnot cycle consists of the work W is done on the working substance and
following four stages (i) Isothermal expansion finally an amount of heat Q1 is rejected to the hot
(process AB), (ii) Adiabatic expansion (process
reservoir at a higher temperature T1 .
BC), (iii) Isothermal compression (process CD),
and (iv) Adiabatic compression (process DA).
44 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Ø Coefficient of performance of a refrigerator WE. 46:A Carnot engine operating between
Q Q2 1
β= 2 = Q −Q [Q W = Q1 - Q2] temperatures T1 and T2 has efficiency .
W 6
1 2
When T2 is lowered by 62K, its efficiency
Q2 T2
Ø For Carnot refrigerator Q = T . 1
1 1 increases to . Then T1 and T2 are,
3
T2 respectively : (JEE MAIN-2011)
Thus β = T − T
1 2 T2 1 T T2 5
Sol. η = 1− ⇒ = 1− 2 ⇒ =
Ø The relation between efficiency of a heat engine T1 6 T1 T1 6 .....(1)
(η ) and coefficient of performance of a refrigerator
T2 − 62 1 T − 62
(β) working between the same temperature limits η2 = 1 − ⇒ = 1− 2
T1 3 T1 .......(2)
1 −η
is β = On solving Equation (1) and (2)
η
T1 = 372 K and T2 = 310 K
Ø Let η 1 and η 2 are the efficiencies of heat engines
WE. 47:Find the efficiency of the thermodynamic
working between temperature limits (T1, T 2 )and cycle shown in figure for an ideal diatomic
(T2, T3) respectively then the efficiency of heat gas.
engine working between temperature limits T1 and
T3 is 2P0 B
T2 T Pressure (P)
η1 = 1 − ⇒ 2 = 1 − η1 P0
T1 T1 A C
T3 T V0
η2 = 1 − ⇒ 3 = 1 − η2 2V0
Volume(V)
T2 T2 Sol. Let n be the number of moles of the gas and the
T2 T3 T3 temperature be T0 in the state A.
(1 − η1 )(1 − η2 ) = × = Now, work done during the cycle
T1 T2 T1 1 1
W = × ( 2V0 − V0 )( 2 P0 − P0 ) = PV
0 0
T3 T 2 2
But η = 1 − ⇒ 3 = 1−η For the heat ( ∆Q1 ) given during the process
T1 T1
A → B , we have
∴ η =1- (1-η1 )(1 − η2 ) ∆Q1 = ∆WAB + ∆UAB
WE. 45: A refrigerator, whose coefficient of
∆WAB = area under the straight line AB
performance β is 5, extracts heat from the
( P0 + 2P0 )( 2V0 − V0 ) = 0 0
1 3P V
cooling compartment at the rate of 250 J per =
cycle. 2 2
Applying equation of state for the gas in the state A
(a) How much work per cycle is required to
& B.
operate the refrigerator?
(b) How much heat per cycle is discharged to P0 V0 ( 2P0 )( 2V0 )
= ⇒ TB = 4T0
the room which acts as the high temperature T0 TB
reservoir?
5R
Sol. (a) As coefficient of performance of a refrigerator ∴ U AB = nC V ∆T = n ( 4T0 − T0 )
2
Q 250
is defined as β = Q L / W ,So W = β = 5 = 50 J
L
15nRT0 15P0 V0
= =
2 2
(b)As Q H = Q L + W ; so Q H = 250 + 50 = 300 J
NARAYANAGROUP 45
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
3 15 work done in cycle
∴∆Q1 = P0 V0 + P0 V0 = 9P0 V0 Sol. Efficiency = × 100
2 2 heat absorbed
Obviously, the processes B → C and C → A
Area under P − V diagram
involve the abstraction of heat from the gas. =
∆QAB + ∆QBC
Efficiency = Work done per cycle
Total heat supplied per cycle PV
∴η = 0 0
1 nCV ∆ T1 + nC p ∆T2
P0 V0
1
i.e., η= 2 = PV
9P0 V0 18 = 0 0
3 5
WE. 48:Efficiency of a heat engine whose sink is nR (TB − TA ) + nR (TC − TB )
2 2
at temperature of 300 K is 40%. To increase
PV
the efficiency to 60%, keeping the sink = 0 0
3 5
temperature constant, the source temperature ( 2 PV 0 0)+
0 0 − PV ( 4PV 0 0)
0 0 − 2 PV
2 2
must be increased by
PV 1
T2 40 3 = 0 0
= = 15.4%
Sol. T = 1 − η = 1 − 100 = 5 3 5
PV + 2 PV 6.5
1 2 0 0 2 0 0
5 5 WE. 51: A Carnot engine, whose efficiency is 40%
⇒ T1 = T2 ⇒ T1 = × 300 = 500 K takes heat from a source maintained at a
3 3
temperature of 500 K. It is desired to have an
New efficiency η ′ = 60% engine of efficiency 60%. Then , the intake
temperature for the same exhaust (sink)
T2 60 2
temperature must be(JEE MAIN-12)
'
= 1 −η ′ = 1 − = T2 T
Sol. η = 1 − T ; 0.4 = 1 − 2 ⇒ T2 = 300 K
T1 100 5
1 500
5
T1 ′ = × 300 = 750 K ; ∆T = 750− 500 = 250K T2 300 300
2 0.6 = 1 −
1
= 1 − 1 ⇒ T11 = = 750 K
WE.49:A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of T1 T1 0.4
η = 1/10 as heat engine, is used as a WE.52:A diatomic ideal gas is used in a car engine
refrigerator. If the work done on the system as the working substance. Volume of the gas
is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from increases from V to 32V during the adiabatic
the reservoir at lower temperature is expansion part of the cycle. The efficiency of
(JEE MAIN-2007) the engine is (JEE MAIN-2010)
= T2 ( 32V1 )
Sol. Coefficient of performance of refrigerator γ −1 1.4 −1 1.4−1
Sol. TV
1 1 = T2V2γ −1 ⇒ TV
1 1
1 − η 1 − 1/10 Heat extracted
β= = =9 = T 1 3
η 1/10 workdone ⇒
T2 1
= ⇒ η = 1− 2 = 1− =
∴ Heat extracted = 9 × 10 = 90J T1 4 T1 4 4
WE. 50: Helium gas undergoes through a cycle Entropy(s):
ABCD (consisting of two isochoric and Ø The thermodynamic coordinate or parameter that
isobaric line) as shown in figure. Efficiency gives the measure of disorder is called entropy.
of this cycle is nearly : (Assume the gas to be We cannot measure entropy, but we can measure
close to ideal gas) (JEE MAIN-2012) change in entropy during thermodynamic change.
B C
If ‘ds’ is the small change in entropy at temperature
2P0
dQ
P0
T, then ds =
A D T
Where dQ is exchange of heat between system
V0 2V0
46 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
and surroundings at temperature T.
P
dQ
Now the total change in entropy is ∆s = ∫ 2 3
T
Ø Change in entropy during an isothermal change is
1 4
∆Q ∆W V
∆s= = = 2.303nR log10 2
T T V1
Ø Change in entropy during phase change is T
mL Sol. 1 → 2 and 3 → 4 are isochoric processes.
∆s=
T Therefore, work done is zero.
Ø Change in entropy during temperature change is ∴Wtotal = W23 + W41 = P2 (V3 − V2 ) + P4 (V1 − V4 )
sdT
∆s=m ∫ , (if s is temperature dependent) = nR ( T3 − T2 ) + nR ( T1 − T4 )
T
Ø In a reversible process entropy increases if heat = nR ( T3 − T2 + T1 − T4 ) = 800nR = 2400 R
is absorbed and vice - versa.
Ø Entropy of the universe always increases if system WE. 55 :P-V diagram of an ideal gas is as shown
undergoes an irreversible process. in figure. Work done by the gas in the
Ø Entropy of universe can never be zero. process ABCD is: (EAM-MED-2011)
Ø At absolute zero temperature(0K), entropy P
becomes zero. But it does not occur. C
2P0 D
Graphs:
WE.53:An ideal monoatomic gas undergoes a P0 A
cyclic process ABCA as shown in the B
figure.The ratio of heat absorbed during AB V
to the work done on the gas during BC is:
V Sol. WAB = − PV
0 0;
B
2V0 WBC = 0 and WCD = 4 PV
0 0
A WABCD = − PV
0 0 + 0 + 4 PV
0 0 = 3 PV
0 0
V0 C
WE. 56:Volume versus temperature graph of two
moles of helium gas is as shown in figure. The
T0 2T0 T
ratio of heat absorbed and the work done by
5 5nRT0 the gas in process 1-2 is :
Sol. QAB = nC P ∆ T = n R ( 2T0 − T0 ) =
2 2 V
1 2
QBC = WBC = nR 2T0 ln = − nR 2T0 ln ( 2 )
2
QAB 5 1
QBC = nR 2T0 ln ( 2 ) ⇒ =
WBC 4 ln ( 2 )
T
WE. 54:Three moles of an ideal monoatomic gas
Sol. V - T graph is a straight line passing through origin.
performs a cycle 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1 as
Hence, V ∝T or P = constant
shown. The gas temperatures in different
states are, T1 = 400 K , T2 = 800 K , dQ nC p ∆T nC p ∆T 5 R 5
= = = =
dW nC p ∆T − nCV ∆T nR∆T
T3 = 2400 K and T4 = 1200 K . The work 2R 2
done by the gas during the cycle is
NARAYANAGROUP 47
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
WE. 57:Pressure versus temperature graph of an
ideal gas is as shown in figure. Density of P C P
B,C
the gas at point A is ρ 0 . Density at B will be B
1) 2)
P D A,D
A
3P0 B V V
P0 A P C o
T0 T B C
2T0
3) D
B 4)
PM P
Sol. ρ = or ρ ∝ A A D
RT T V
V
P P0 P 3 P0
T = T and T = 2 T
Sol. Along process AB, CD temperature is constant
A 0 B 0 1 1
( isothermal process) i.e., P ∝ , ρ ∝
V V
P 3 P 3 3
T = 2 T ∴ ρ B = 2 ρ A = 2 ρ0 ρ − V graph will be a rectangular hyperbola.
B
Along BC and DA, V is constant ⇒ ρ is constant
WE. 58 :In the P-V diagram shown in figure ABC
is a semicircle. The work done in the process WE. 60 :A thermodynamic system undergoes cyclic
process ABCDA as shown in figure. The work
ABC is :
done by the system is :
P(atm)
P
3 C 3P0 C B
B
1 A
1 2
V(L) 2P0 O
Sol. WAB is negative (volume is decreasing) and WBC P0 D
A
is positive (volume is increasing) and since
v0 2v0 V
WBC > WAB
∴ Net work done is positive PV
Sol. WBCOB = − Area of triangle BCO = − 0 0
Q Workdone=area between semicircle 2
= π ( pressure radius )( volume radius ) PV
WAODA = + Area of triangle AOD = + 0 0
2
1 π
= π (1atm ) litre = atm ( litre ) ∴Wnet = 0
2 2 WE. 61 :P-V plots for two gases during adiabatic
WE. 59 : Pressure versus temperature graph of an processes are shown in the figure. Plots 1 and
ideal gas is as shown in figure corresponding 2 should correspond respectively to:
density ( ρ ) versus volume(V) graph will be: P
P C
B 1
D 2
A V
T
48 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Sol. In adiabatic process 3. Heat is
dP P 1) kinetic energy of molecules
Slope of P-V graph, = −γ 2) potential and kinetic energy of molecules
dV V
Slope ∝ γ (with negative sign) 3) energy in transits
From the given graph, (slope)2 >(slope)1 4) work done on the system
4. Which of the following does not characterise
∴γ 2 > γ 1
the thermodynamic state of matter
Therefore, '1' should correspond to O2 ( γ = 1.4 ) 1) Volume 2) Temperature
3) Pressure 4) Work
and '2' should correspond to He ( γ = 1.67 ) .
5. The thermal motion means
WE. 62 : One mole of diatomic ideal gas undergoes 1) motion due to heat engine
a cyclic process ABC as shown in figure. 2) disorderly motion of the body as a whole
The process BC is adiabatic. The temperature 3) motion of the body that generates heat
at A,B and C are 400 k, 800k and 600 k,
4) random motion of molecules
respectively. Choose the correct statement.
6. Heat required to rise the temperature of one
[JEE MAIN 2014]
gram of water through 10 c is
P
B 1) 0.001 K cal 2) 0.01 K cal
800 K 3) 0.1 K cal 4) 1.0 K cal
7. Heat capacity of a substance is infinite. It
means
600 K 1) heat is given out 2) heat is taken in
A C 3) no change in temperature whether heat is
400 K
V taken in (or) given out
1) The change in internal energy in whole 4) all of the above
cyclic process is 250 R 8. For a certain mass of a gas Isothermal relation
2) The change in internal energy in the between ‘P’ and ‘V’ are shown by the graphs
process CA is 700 R at two different temperatures T1 and T2 then
3) The change in internal energy in the
process AB is -350 R P
4) The change in internal energy in the
process BC is -500R
Sol: Process A → B T1
T2
5R
∆U = nCV ∆T = 1× ( 800 − 400 ) = 1000R v
2 1)T1 = T 2 2)T1>T2 3)T1 < T2 4)T1 ≥ T2
5R
C→ A ; ∆U = nCV ∆T = 1× 2 ( 400 − 600 ) = −500R 9. Certain amount of heat supplied to an ideal
gas under isothermal conditions will result in
∆U cycle = 0 , and ∆U AB + ∆U BC + ∆U CA = 0 1) rise in temperature
1000 R + ∆U BC − 500R = 0 ; ∴ ∆UBC = −500R 2) doing external work and a change in
temperature
C.U.Q 3) doing external work
1. Water is used in car radiators as coolant 4) an increase in the internal energy of the gas
because 10. The temperature range in the definition of
1) its density is more 2) high specific heat standard calorie is
3) high thermal conductivity 4) free availability 1) 14.5 0 C to 15.5 0 C 2) 15.5 0 C to 16.5 0 C
2. Of the following specific heat is maximum for
3) 10 C to 2 0 C 4) 13.5 0 C to 14.5 0 C
1) Mercury 2) Copper 3) Water 4) Silver
NARAYANAGROUP 49
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
11. The pressure p of a gas is plotted against its 3) in SI system, heat is measured in the units of
absolute temperature T for two different work
constant volumes V1 and V2, where V1 > V2 . 4) of some reason other than those mentioned above
If p is taken on y–axis and T on x–axis 20. When we switch on the fan in a closed room.
1) the curve for V1 has greater slope than the curve The temperature of the air molecules
for V2 1) increases 2) decreases
2) the curve for V2 has greater slope than the curve 3) remains unchanged
for V1 4) may increase or decrease depending on the
3) the curves must intersect at some point other speed of rotation of the fan.
than T = 0 21. Which type of molecular motion does
4) the curves have the same slope and do not contribute towards internal energy for an ideal
intersect monoatomic gas
1) translational 2) rotational
12. dU + dW = 0 is valid for
3) vibrational 4) all the above
1) adiabatic process 2) isothermal process 22. In which of the following processes the
3) isobaric process 4) isochoric process internal energy of the system remains
13. In a given process dW=0, dQ<0 then for a gas constant ?
1)temperature–increases 2)volume–decreases 1) Adiabatic 2) Isochoric
3)pressure–decreases 4)pressure–increases 3) Isobaric 4) Isothermal
14. A piece of ice at 0 0 C is dropped into 23. The internal energy of a perfect monoatomic
water at 0 0 C . Then ice will gas is
1) complete kinetic
1) melt 2) be converted into water 2) complete potential
3) not melt 4) partially melt 3) sum of potential and kinetic energy of the
15. The temperature determines the direction of molecules
net change of 4) difference of kinetic and potential energies of
1) gross kinetic energy the molecules
2) intermolecular kinetic energy 24. Which of the following is constant in an
3) gross potential energy isochoric process ?
4) intermolecular potential energy 1) Pressure 2) Volume
16. The direction of flow of heat between two 3) Temperature 4) Mass
gases is determined by 25. How does the internal energy change when
1) average kinetic energy 2) total energy the ice and wax melt at their normal melting
3) internal energy 4) potential energy points?
17. Heat is absorbed by a body . But its temperature 1) Increases for ice and decreases for wax
does not raised. Which of the following statement 2) Decreases for ice and increases for wax
explains the phenomena ? 3) Decreases both for ice and wax
1) Only K.E. of vibration increases 4) Increases both for ice and wax
2) Only P.E. of inter molecular force changes 26. In the free expansion of a gas, its internal
3) No increase in internal energy takes place energy
4) Increase in K.E. is balanced by decrease in 1) remains constant
P.E. 2) increases
18. Zeroth law of thermodynamics gives the 3) decreases
concept of 4) sometimes increases , sometimes decreases
1) pressure 2) volume 3) temperature 4) heat 27. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends
19. We need mechanical equivalent of heat upon
because 1) only its pressure
1) it converts work into heat 2) only its volume
2) in C.G.S system, heat is not measured in the 3) only its temperature
units of work 4) its pressure and volume
50 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
28. On compressing a gas suddenly, its 35. In an isobaric (constant pressure) process. the
temperature correct ratio is
1) increases 2) decreases 1) ∆Q : ∆U = 1 : 1 2) ∆Q : ∆U = 1 : γ−1
3) remains constant 4) all the above 3) ∆Q : ∆U = γ−1: 1 4) ∆Q : ∆U = γ : 1
29. When heat is added to a system at constant 36. In an isobaric process, the correct ratio is
temperature, which of the following is possible. 1) ∆Q : ∆W = 1 : 1 2) ∆Q : ∆W = γ : γ−1
1) Internal energy of system increases 3) ∆Q : ∆W = γ−1: γ 4) ∆Q : ∆W = γ : 1
2) Work is done by the system 37. Air in a thermally conducting cylinder is
3) Neither internal energy increases nor work done suddenly compressed by a piston, which is then
by the system maintained at the same position with the
4) Internal energy increases and work is done by
passage of time ?
the system
1) The pressure decreases
30. The first law of thermodynamics is based on
2) The pressure increases
the law of conservation of
1) energy 2) mass 3) momentum 4) pressure 3) The pressure remains the same
31. A given mass of a gas expands from the state 4) The pressure may increase or decrease
A to the state B by three paths 1,2 and 3 as depending upon the nature of the gas
shown in the figure. If W1, W2 and W3 38. Which of the following states of matter have
respectively be the work done by the gas along two specific heats ?
the three paths then 1) Solid 2) Gas 3) Liquid 4) Plasma
39. The specific heat of a gas in an isothermal
A process is
3 1) infinity 2) zero
P 2
1 3) negative 4) remains constant
B 40. Why the specific heat at a constant pressure
is more than that at constant volume ?
V
1) There is greater inter molecular attraction at
1) W1 > W2 > W3 2) W1 < W2 < W3
constant pressure
3) W1 = W2 = W3 4) W1 < W2 = W3
2) At constant pressure molecular oscillations are
32. A given system undergoes a change in which
more violent
the work done by the system equals to the
decrease in its internal energy. The system 3) External work need to be done for allowing
must have undergone an expansion of gas at constant pressure
1) isothermal change 2) adiabatic change 4) Due to more reasons other than those mentioned
3) isobaric change 4) isochoric change in the above
33. A closed vessel contains some gas at a given 41. The ratio Cp / Cv of the specific heats at a
temperature and pressure. If the vessel is constant pressure and at a constant volume of
given a very high velocity, then the any perfect gas
temperature of the gas 1) can’t be greater than 5/4
1) increases 2) decreases 2) can’t be greater than 3/2
3) may increase or decrease depending upon the 3) can’t be greater than 5/3
nature of the gas 4) can have any value
4) does not change 42. Which of the following formula is wrong ?
34. Unit mass of liquid of volume V1 completely
R Cp
turns into a gas of volume V2 at constant 1) Cv = γ − 1 2) =γ
atmospheric pressure P and temperature T. The CV
latent heat of vaporization is “L”. Then the
change in internal energy of the gas is γR
3) Cp = γ − 1 4) Cp - Cv = 2R
1) L 2) L+P(V2 - V1)
3) L - P(V2-V1) 4) Zero
NARAYANAGROUP 51
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
43. Two identical samples of gases are allowed to 52. During adiabatic expansion the increase in
expand to the same final volume (i) volume is associated with
isothermally (ii) adiabatically. Work done is 1) increase in pressure and temperature
1. more in the isothermal process 2) decrease in pressure and temperature
2. more in the adiabatic process 3) increase in pressure and decrease in
3. equivalent in both processes temperature
4. equal in all processes 4)Decrese in pressure and increase in temperature
44. Which of the following is true in the case of a 53. A gas is being compressed adiabatically. The
reversible process ? specific heat of the gas during compression is
1) There will be energy loss due to friction 1) zero 2) infinite
2) System and surroundings will not be in thermo 3) finite but non zero 4) undefined
dynamic equilibrium PV
3) Both system and surroundings retains their 54. The gas law = constant is true for
initial states T
4) 1 and 3 1) isothermal change only
45. The ratio of the relative rise in pressure for 2) adiabatic change only
adiabatic compression to that for isothermal 3) Both isothermal & adiabatic changes
compression is 4) neither isothermal nor adiabatic change
55. During adiabatic compression of a gas, its
1 1 temperature
1) γ 2) 3) 1 − γ 4)
γ 1− γ 1) falls 2) raises
46. Ratio of isothermal elasticity of gas to the 3) remains constant 4) becomes zero
adiabatic elasticity is 56. The work done on the system in an adiabatic
compression depends on
1 1
1) γ 2) 3) 1 − γ 4) 1) the increase in internal energy of the system
γ 1− γ 2) the decrease in internal energy
47. The conversion of water into ice is an 3) the change in volume of the system
1) isothermal process 2) isochoric process 4) all the above
3) isobaric process 4) entropy process 57. The ratio of slopes of adiabatic and isothermal
48. For the Boyle’s law to hold good, the curves is
necessary condition is
1
1) Isobaric 2) Isothermal 1) γ 2) 3) γ 2 4) γ 3
3) Isochoric 4) Adiabatic γ
49. An isothermal process is a 58. Two steam engines ‘A’ and ‘B’, have their
1)slow process 2)quick process sources respectively at 700 K and 650 K and
3) very quick process 4) both 1 & 2 their sinks at 350 K and 300K. Then
50. Two samples of gas A and B, initially at same 1) ‘A’ is more efficient than ‘B’
temperature and pressure, are compressed to 2) ‘B’ is more efficient than ‘A’
half of their initial volume, 'A' isothermally and 3) both A and B are equally efficient
'B' adiabatically. The final pressure in 4) depends on fuels used in A and B
1) A and B will be same 59. If the temperature of the sink is decreased,
2) A will be more than in B then the efficiency of heat engine
3) A will be less than in B 1) first increases then decreases
4)A will be double that in B 2) increases
51. In which of the following processes all three 3) decreases
thermodynamic variables, that is pressure 4) remains unchanged
volume and temperature can change 60. An ideal heat engine can be 100% efficient if
1) Isobaric 2) Isothermal its sink is at
3) Isochoric 4) Adiabatic 1) 0K 2) 273K 3) 00C 4) 00F
52 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
61. If the temperature of a source increases, then 68. The adiabatic and isothermal elasticities Bφ
the efficiency of a heat engine
1) increases 2) decreases and Bθ are related as
3) remains unchanged 4) none of these B B
1) B = γ 2) B = γ 3) Bφ − Bθ = γ 4) Bθ − Bφ = γ
φ θ
62. When heat is added to a system then the
θ φ
following is not possible?
1) Internal energy of the system increases 69. For the indicator diagram given below, select
2) Work is done by the system wrong statement ?
3) Neither internal energy increases nor work is P
done by the system
4) Internal energy increases and also work is done I II
by the system V
63. A sink, that is the system where heat is 1) Cycle - II is heat engine cycle
rejected, is essential for the conversion of 2) Net work is done on the gas in cycle - I
heat into work. From which law the above 3) Workdone is positive for cycle - I
inference follows? 4) Workdone is positive for cycle - II
1) Zeroth 2) First 3) Second 4)Both 1 & 2 70. By opening the door of a refrigerator inside
64. The efficiency of a heat engine a closed room
1) is independent of the temperature of the source 1) you can cool the room to a certain degree
and the sink 2) you can cool it to the temperature inside the
2) is independent of the working substance refrigerator
3) can be 100% 3) you can ultimately warm the room slightly
4) is not affected by the thermal capacity of the 4) you can neither cool nor warm the room
source or the sink 71. Which of the following will extinguish the fire
65. An ideal heat engine working between quickly ?
temperatures TH and TL has efficiency η . If 1) Water at 1000C 2) Steam at 1000C
0
both the temperatures are rised by 100K 3) Water at 0 C 4) Ice at 00C
each, then the new efficiency of the heat 72. Which of the following is true in the case of
engine will be molecules, when ice melts ?
1) equal to η 1) K.E is gained 2) K.E. is lost
2) greater than η 3) P.E is gained 4) P.E. is lost
3) less than η 73. When two blocks of ice are pressed against
4) greater or less than η depending upon the nature each other then they stick together because
of the working substance 1) cooling is produced
66. The efficiency of the reversible heat engine 2) heat is produced
3) increase in pressure will increase in melting point
is η r , and that of irreversible heat engine is 4) increase in pressure will decrease in melting
ηI . Which of the following relation is correct? point
74. A cubical box containing a gas with internal
1) ηr > η I 2) ηr < ηI energy U is given velocity V, then the new
3) η r ≥ η I 4)ηr > 1 and η I < 1 internal energy of the gas
67. In a heat engine, the temperature of the 1) less than U 2)more than U 3) U 4) zero
working substance at the end of the cycle is 75. A cubical box containing a gas is moving with
1) equal to that at the beginning some velocity. If it is suddenly stopped, then
2) more than that at the beginning the internal energy of the gas
3) less than that at the beginning 1) decreases
4) determined by the amount of heat rejected to 2) Increases
the sink 3) remains constant
4) may increases or decreases depending on the
time interval during which box comes to rest.
NARAYANAGROUP 53
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
76. Which one of the following is wrong 4) a refrigerator can reduce the temperature to
statement. absolute zero
1) During free expansion, temperature of ideal gas 84. In the adiabatic compression the decrease in
does not change. volume is associated with
2) During free expansion, temperature of real gas 1)increase in temperature and decrease in
decreases. pressure
3) During free expansion of real gas temperature 2) decrease in temperature and increase in
does not change. pressure
4) Free expansion is conducted in adiabatic 3) decrease in temperature and decrease in
manner. pressure
77. A common salt is first dissolved in water and 4) increase in temperature and increase in pressure
extracted again from the water. In this 85. Which of the following is true in the case of
process, an adiabatic process where γ = C P / CV ?
1) entropy decreases
2) entropy increases 1) P1−γ T γ = constant 2) Pγ T 1−γ = constant
3) entropy becomes zero 3) PT γ = constant 4) Pγ T = constant
4) entropy remains constant. 86. If an ideal gas is isothermally expanded its
78. A large block of ice is placed on a table where internal energy will
the surroundings are at 0 0C, then 1) increase 2) decrease
1) ice melts at the sides 3) remains same
2) ice melts at the top 4) decrease or increase depending on nature of
3) ice melts at the bottom the gas
4) ice does not melt at all 87. For an adiabatic process the relation between
79. Which of the following substance at 1000C V and T is given by
produces most severe burns ? 1) TV γ = constant 2) T γ V = constant
1) Hot air 2) Water 3) Steam 4) Oil
80. What energy transformation takes place 3) TV 1−γ = constant 4) TV γ −1 = constant
when ice is converted into water 88. The temperature of the system decreases in
1) Heat energy to kinetic energy the process of
2) Kinetic energy to heat energy 1) free expansion
3) Heat energy to latent heat 2) adiabatic expansion
4) Heat energy to potential energy 3) isothermal expansion
81. Which of the following laws of 4) isothermal compression
thermodynamics leads to the interference 89. Heat engine rejects some heat to the sink.
that it is difficult to convert whole of heat This heat
into work ? 1)converts into electrical energy.
1) Zeroth 2) Second 3) First 4) Both 1 & 2 2)converts into light energy.
82. Starting with the same initial conditions, an 3)converts into electromagnetic energy
ideal gas expands from volume V 1 to V2. The 4)is unavailable in the universe.
amount of work done by the gas is greatest 90. For an adiabatic change in a gas, if P, V,T
when the expansion is denotes pressure, volume and absolute
1) isothermal 2) isobaric temperature of a gas at any time and γ is the
3) adiabatic 4) equal in all cases ratio of specific heats of the gas, then which
83. The second law of thermodynamics implies of the following equation is true?
1) whole of heat can be converted into mechanical 1) T ? P1− ? = const. 2) T 1-? P ? = const.
energy
3) T ?-1 V ? = const. 4) T ? V ? = const.
2) no heat engine can be 100% efficient
3) every heat engine has an efficiency of 100%
54 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
91. PV versus T graph of equal masses of H2, 99. Among the following the irreversible process
He and CO2 is shown in figure. Choose the is
correct alternative ? 1) free expansion of a gas
2)extension or compression of a spring very slowly
3 3)motion of an object on a perfectly frictionless
2 surface
PV 1 4) all of them
100. Which of the following processes are nearly
reversible ?
T a. Heat conduction b. Electrolysis
(1) 3 corresponds to H2, 2 to He and 1 to CO2 c. Diffusion d. Change of state
(2) 1 corresponds to He, 2 to H2 and 3 to CO2 1) Only a 2)Both b and d
(3) 1 corresponds to He, 3 to H2 and 2 to CO2 3) Only c 4) All of the above
(4) 1 corresponds to CO2,2 to H2 and 3 to He 101. Gas is taken through a cyclic process
92. If the ratio of specific heats of a gas at completely once. Change in the internal
constant pressure to that at constant volume energy of the gas is
is γ , then the change in internal energy of 1) infinity 2) zero 3) small 4) large
the mass of gas, when the volume changes 102. What will be the nature of change in internal
from V to 2V at constant pressure P, is energy in case of processes shown below ?
1) R /(γ − 1) 2) PV
3) PV / (γ − 1) 4) γ PV/ (γ − 1)
93. Heat is added to an ideal gas and the gas P P
expands. In such a process the temperature
1) must always increase v v
2) will remain the same if the work done is equal
to the heat added
3) must always decrease
4) will remain the same if change in internal energy P P
is equal to the heat added
94. First law of thermodynamics states that
v v
1) system can do work
2) system has temperature 1) + ve in all cases
3) system has pressure 2) – ve in all cases
4) heat is form of energy 3) – ve in 1 and 3 and + ve in 2 and 4
95. The material that has largest specific heat is 4) zero in all cases
1) mercury 2) water 103. Which of the following is incorrect regarding
3) hydrogen 4) diamond the first law of thermodynamics ?
96. The law obeyed by isothermal process is 1) It introduces the concept of internal energy
1) Gay-Lussac’s law 2) Charles law 2) It introduces the concept of entropy
3) Boyle’s law 4) Dalton’s law 3) It is applicable to any process
97. Which law defines entropy in thermodynamics 4) It is a restatement of principle of conservation
1) zeroth law 2) First law of energy.
3) second law 4) Stefan’s law 104. The temperature of the system decreases in
98. For the conversion of liquid into a solid the process of
1) orderliness decreases and entropy decreases 1) free expansion
2) orderliness increases and entropy increases 2) isothermal expansion
3) both are not related 3) adiabatic expansion
4) orderliness increases and entropy decreases 4) isothermal compression
NARAYANAGROUP 55
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
105. In a process the pressure P and volume V of (1) Process A only (2) Process C only
an ideal gas both increase (3)Processes C & D (4)Processes B, C & D
1) It is not possible to have such a process 112. Two completely identical samples of the same
2) The workdone by the system is positive ideal gas are in equal volume containers with
3) The temperature of the system increases the same pressure and temperature in
4) 2 and 3 containers labeled A and B. The gas in container
106. The heat capacity of material depends upon A performs non-zero positive work W on the
1) the structure of a matter surroundings during an isobaric process before
2) temperature of matter the pressure is reduced isochorically to 1/2 of
3) density of matter its initial amount. The gas in container B has
4) specific heat of matter its pressure reduced isochorically to 1/2 of its
107. Heat cannot flow by itself from a body at lower initial value and then the gas performs same
temperature to a body at higher temperature is non-zero positive work W on the surroundings
a statement or consequence of during an isobaric process. After the processes
1) I st law of thermodynamics are performed on the gases in containers A and
2) IInd law of thermodynamics B, which is at the higher temperature?
3) conservation of momentum 1)The gas in container A
4) conservation of mass 2)The gas in container B
108. For an isothermal process 3) The gases have equal temperature.
1) dQ = dW 2) dQ = dU 4) The value of the work W is necessary to
answer this question.
3) dW = dU 4) dQ = dU + dW
113. Which of the following conditions of the Carnot
109. When thermodynamic system returns to its ideal heat engine can be realised in practice?
original state, which of the following is NOT 1) Infinite thermal capacity of the source
possible? 2) Infinite thermal capacity of the sink
1) The work done is Zero 3) Perfectly non conducting stand
2) The work done is positive
4) Less than 100% efficiency
3) The work done is negative
4) The work done is independent of the path 114. A heat engine works between a source and a
followed sink maintained at constant temperatures T1
110. A liquid in a thermos flask is vigorously and T2 . For the efficiency to be greatest
shaken. Then the temperature of the liquid
1) is not altered 2) increases 1) T1 and T2 should be high
3) decreases 4) none 2) T1 and T2 should be low
111. The PV diagram shows four different possible
paths of a reversible processes performed on a 3) T1 should be high and T2 should be low
monoatomic ideal gas. Path A is isobaric, path B 4) T1 should be low and T2 should be high
is isothermal , path C is adiabatic and path D is 115. The heat engine would operate by taking heat
isochoric . For which process does the at a particular temperature and
temperature of the gas decrease? 1) converting it all into work
P 2) converting some of it into work and rejecting
A the rest at lower temperature
P0 3) converting some of it into work and rejecting
the rest at same temperature
D B
1 4) converting some of it into work and rejecting
P C
2 0 the rest at a higher temperature .
V
V0 2V0
56 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
C.U.Q - KEY 5. From what height a block of ice must fall into
1) 2 2) 3 3) 3 4) 4 5) 4 6) 1 1
7) 3 8) 3 9) 3 10)1 11)2 12)1 a well so that th of its mass may be
100
13)3 14) 3 15)2 16)1 17)2 18)3 melted? (g = 10 m/s2)
19)2 20)1 21)1 22)4 23)1 24)2 1) 300 m 2) 336 m 3) 660 m 4) none
25)1 26)1 27)3 28)1 29)2 30)1 6. Two identical balls ‘A’ and ‘B’ are moving with
31)2 32)2 33)4 34)3 35)4 36)2 same velocity. If velocity of ‘A’ is reduced to
37)1 38)2 39)1 40)3 41)3 42)4 half and of ‘B’ to zero, then the rise in
43)1 44)3 45)1 46)2 47)1 48)2 temperatures of ‘A’ to that of ‘B’ is
49)1 50)3 51)4 52)2 53)1 54)3 1) 3 : 4 2) 4 : 1 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 1
55)2 56)1 57)1 58)2 59)2 60)1 7. A 50kg man is running at a speed of 18kmh −1 .
61)1 62)3 63)3 64)2 65)3 66)3 If all the kinetic energy of the man can be
67)1 68)1 69)3 70)3 71)1 72)3 used to increase the temperature of water
73)4 74)3 75)2 76)3 77)2 78)3 from 200 C to 300 C , how much water can be
79)3 80)4 81)2 82)2 83)2 84)4 heated with this energy?
85)1 86)3 87)4 88)2 89)4 90)1 1) 15 g 2) 20 g 3) 30 g 4) 40 g
91)1 92)3 93)2 94)1 95)3 96)3 8. A man of 60 kg gains 1000 cal of heat by
97)3 98)1 99)1 100)2 101)2 102)4 eating 5 mangoes. His efficiency is 56%. To
103)2 104)3 105)2 106) 4 107)2 108)1 what height he can jump by using this energy?
109)2 110)2 111)3 112)2 113)4 114)3 1) 4m 2) 20 m 3) 28 m 4) 0.2 m
115)2 FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS
9. How much work to be done in decreasing the
LEVEL - I (C.W) volume of an ideal gas by an amount of
2.4 x 10–4 m3 at constant normal pressure of
JOULE’S LAW 1 x 105 N/m2 ?
1) 28 joule 2) 27 joule 3) 24 joule 4)25joule
1. A piece of lead falls from a height of 100m on
10. Find the external work done by the system in
a fixed non-conducting slab which brings it to kcal, when 20 kcal of heat is supplied to the
rest. If the specific heat of lead is 30.6 cal/kg system and the increase in the internal energy
°C, the increase in temperature of the slab is 8400 J (J=4200J/kcal) ?
immediately after collision is 1) 16 kcal 2) 18 kcal 3) 20 kcal 4)19 kcal
1) 6.72°C 2) 7.62°C 3) 5.62°C 4) 8.72°C 11 Heat of 30 kcal is supplied to a system and
2. Hailstones fall from a certain height. If only 4200 J of external work is done on the system
1% of the hailstones melt on reaching the so that its volume decreases at constant
ground, find the height from which they fall. pressure. What is the change in its internal
(g=10ms-2,L=80calorie/g & J = 4.2J/calorie) energy ? (J = 4200 J/kcal)
1) 336 m 2) 236 m 3) 436 m 4) 536 m 1) 1.302 x 105 J 2) 2.302 x 105 J
5
3) 3.302 x 10 J 4) 4.302 x 105 J
3. From what minimum height a block of ice
12. Air expands from 5 litres to 10 litres at 2 atm
has to be dropped in order that it may melt pressure. External workdone is
completely on hitting the ground ? 1) 10J 2) 1000J 3) 3000 J 4) 300 J
mgh JL J 13. Heat given to a system is 35 joules and work
1) mgh 2) 3) 4) done by the system is 15 joules. The change
J g Lg
in the internal energy of the system will be
4. Two spheres A and B with masses in the ratio 1) – 50 J 2) 20 J 3) 30 J 4) 50 J
2 : 3 and specific heat 2 : 3 fall freely from 14. A gas is compressed at a constant pressure of
rest. If the rise in their temperatures on 50 N/m2 from a volume 10m3 to a volume of
reaching the ground are in the ratio 1 : 2 the 4m3. 100J of heat is added to the gas then its
ratio of their heights of fall is internal energy is
1) 3 : 1 2) 1 : 3 3) 4 : 3 4) 3 : 4 1) Increases by 400J 2) Increases by 200J
3) Decreases by 400J 4) Decreases by 200J
NARAYANAGROUP 57
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
CP, CV AND THEIR RELATIONS DIFFERENT THERMODYNAMIC
15. Find the change in internal energy in joule PROCESSES
when 10g of air is heated from 30°C to 40°C 23. One mole of an ideal gas undergoes an
(c = 0.172 kcal/kg/KJ = 4200 J/kcal) isothermal change at temperature 'T' so that
v its volume V is doubled. R is the molar gas
1) 62.24 J 2)72.24 J 3)52.24 J 4)82.24 J
constant. Work done by the gas during this
16. The temperature of 5 moles of a gas at constant
change is (2008 M)
volume is changed from 1000C to 1200C. The
1) RT log4 2) RT log2 3) RT log1 4) RT log3
change in internal energy is 80J. The total heat
24. One mole of O 2 gas having a volume equal to
capacity of the gas at constant volume will be
22.4 litres at 0 0C and 1 atmospheric pressure
in joule/kelvin is
is compressed isothermally so that its volume
1) 8 2) 4 3) 0.8 4) 0.4
reduces to 11.2 litres. The work done in this
17. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at
process is
constant pressure, the fraction of heat energy
1)1672.5J 2)1728J 3) –1728J 4) –1572.5J
supplied which is used in doing work to
25. The isothermal Bulk modulus of an ideal gas
maintain pressure constant is
at pressure 'P' is
1) 5/7 2) 7/2 3) 2/7 4) 2/5
18. When a monoatomic gas expands at constant 1) P 2) γP 3) P/2 4) P / γ
pressure, the percentage of heat supplied that 26. Diatomic gas at pressure ‘P’ and volume ‘V’
increases temperature of the gas and in doing is compressed adiabatically to 1/32 times the
external work in expansion at constant original volume. Then the final pressure is
pressure is 1) P/32 2) 32 P 3) 128 P 4) P / 128
1) 100%, 0 2) 60%, 40% 27. The pressure and density of a diatomic gas
3) 40%, 60% 4) 75%, 25% ( γ = 7 / 5) change adiabatically from (P, d) to
19. For a gas, the difference between the two
specific heats is 4150J Kg-1 K -1 and the ratio d1 P1
(P1, d 1). If = 32 , then should be
of specific heats is 1.4. What is the specific d P
heat of the gas at constant volume in 1) 1/128 2) 32
J Kg-1 K -1? 3) 128 4) none of the above
1)8475 2) 5186 3)1660 4) 10375 28. An ideal gas at a pressure of 1 atmosphere
20. The specific heat of air at constant pressure and temperature of 270 C is compressed
is 1.005 kJ/kg K and the specific heat of air at adiabatically until its pressure becomes 8
constant volume is 0.718 kJ/kgK. Find the times the initial pressure, then the final
specific gas constant. temperature is ( γ = 3 / 2)
1) 0.287 kJ/kg K 2) 0.21 kJ/kg K
1) 6270 C 2) 5270C 3) 4270C 4) 3270C
3) 0.34 kJ/kg K 4) 0.19 kJ/kg K
29. The volume of a gas is reduced adiabatically
21. The specific heat of Argon at constant volume
is 0.3122kJ/kg/K. Find the specific heat of 1
to of its volume at 270C, if the value of
Argon at constant pressure if R = 8.314 kJ/k 4
mole K. (Molecular weight of argon = 39.95) γ = 1.4, then the new temperature will be
1) 5203 2) 5302 3) 2305 4) 3025
1) 350 × 40.4 K 2) 300 × 40.4 K
22. If the ratio of the specific heats of steam is
1.33 and R = 8312J/k mole K find the molar 3) 150 × 40.4K 4) None of these
heat capacities of steam at constant pressure 30. Two moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at 270C
and constant volume. occupies a volume of V. If the gas is expanded
1) 33.5 kJ/k mole, 25.19 kJ /kg K adiabatically to the volume 2V, then the work
done by the gas will be (γ = 5 / 3)
2) 25.19 kJ/k mole, 33.5 kJ/kg K
3) 18.82 kJ/k mole, 10.82 kJ/k mole
4) 24.12 kJ /k mole, 16.12 kJ/k mole 1) –2767.23J 2) 2767.23J
3) 2500J 4) –2500J
58 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
31. A container of volume 1m3 is divided into two 1 2
equal compartments, one of which contains an 7. W= JH ⇒ mv = JmS ∆θ 8. mgh=JH
2
ideal gas at 300 K. The other compartment is
9. dW = PdV
vacuum. The whole system is thermally
isolated from its surroundings. The partition 10. dQ = dU + dW ⇒ dW = dQ − dU
is removed and the gas expands to occupy the 11. dQ = dU + dW 12. W = P (V2 − V1 )
whole volume of the container. Its temperature
now would be 13. dU = dQ − dW 14. dU = dQ − P (V2 − V1 )
1) 300 K 2) 250 K 3) 200 K 4) 100 K
15. dUV = mcv dT
32. A gas at 10oC temperature and 1.013×105 Pa
pressure is compressed adiabatically to half 16. dQ = dU + PdV = dU + P ( 0 ) = dU
of its volume. If the ratio of specific heats of
the gas is 1.4, what is its final temperature? dQ dU
=
1) 103oC 2) 123oC 3) 93oC 4) 146oC dT V dT
33. Find the work done by a gas when it expands dW 1 dU 1 dW 1
isothermally at 37oC to four times its initial volume. 17. = 1− 18. dQ = γ ; =1−
dQ γ dQ γ
1) 3753J 2) 3573J 3) 7533J 4) 5375J
HEAT ENGINE R
19. CP − CV = R ⇒ CV = 20. cP − cV = r
34. The efficiency of a heat engine if the γ −1
temperature of source 227oC and that of sink
R γR R
is 27oC nearly 21. c P − cV = 22. CP = ; CV =
1) 0.4 2) 0.5 3) 0.6 4) 0.7 M γ −1 γ −1
35. A Carnot engine takes 3 × 10 cal. of heat from
6
V V
23. W = nRT log e V 24.W = 2.303nRT log10 V
2 2
a reservoir at 6270C, and gives it to a sink at
1 1
270C. The work done by the engine is
25. Isothermal process PdV+VdP=0
1) 4.2 × 106 J 2) 8.4 × 106 J 3) 16.8 × 106 J 4) zero
dP dV dP dP
LEVEL - I(C.W) - KEY =− ; (K ) = = =P
P V dV dP
1) 2 2) 1 3) 3 4) 2 5) 2 6) 1 −
7) 1 8) 1 9) 3 10)2 11) 1 12)2 V P
13)2 14)1 15)2 16)2 17)3 18)2
( )
γ
19)4 20)1 21) 1 22)1 23)2 24)4 p1 V2 γ
γ
26. PV = K ⇒ = 27. P2 = d 2
25)1 26)3 27)3 28)4 29)2 30)2 p2 V1 P1 d1
31)1 32)1 33)2 34) 1 35) 2
γ −1
V
LEVEL - I (C.W ) - HINTS 28. T P γ 1−γ
=T P γ 1−γ
29. T2 = T1 1
gh
1 1 2 2
V2
1. mgh = JmS ∆θ ⇒ ∆θ =
nR
JS
30. W = (T1 − T2 )
JmLice γ −1
2. mgh = 3.W= JH ⇒ mgh = JmLice
100 31. For free expansion, dU = 0 ⇒ dT = 0 ⇒ T is
h1 S1 ∆θ1 constant.
4. mgh = mS ∆θ ⇒ hα S ∆θ ⇒ h = S × ∆θ V
2 2 2
32. TV γ −1
= T V γ −1
33. W = 2.303nRT log10 2
m
1 1 2 2
V1
5. mgh = Lice
100 T2
34. η = 1 − T
W T2 T2
35.η = Q = 1 − T ⇒ W = 1 − T Q
θ v −v
2 2
1
m ( v22 − v12 ) ⇒ 1 =
1
mS ∆θ = J 2 1 1 1
6. θ2 v − v
12 12
2 2 1
NARAYANAGROUP 59
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
10. Find the external workdone by the system in
LEVEL - I (H.W) K cal, when 12.5 k cal of heat is supplied
JOULE’S LAW to the system and the corresponding
increasing in internal energy is 10500 J
1. A piece of aluminium falls from a height of
(J = 4200 J/kcal)
200m on a fixed non conducting slab which
1)15 K cal 2)12.5 kcal 3)10.0 kcal 4)7.5 kcal
brings it to rest. If the specific heat of 11. Heat of 20 K cal is supplied to the system and
aluminium is 210 Cal/kg0C. the increase in 8400 J of external work is done on the system
temperature of the slab immediately after so that its volume decreases at constant
collision (assume that there is no loss of heat) is pressure. The change in internal energy is
1) 2.2oC 2) 3.3oC 3) 4.4oC 4) 5.5oC (J = 4200 J /kcal)
2. Hail stones fall from certain height. If only 1) 9.24 × 104 J 2) 7.56 × 104 J
2% of the mass of the hail stone melt on 3) 8.4 × 104 J 4) 10.5 × 104J.
reaching the ground,, the height from which 12. A gas expands from 40 litres to 90 litres at a
they fall is ( g = 10 ms-2, L = 80 cal/gm and constant pressure of 8 atmospheres. Work
J = 4.2J/cal) done by the gas during the expansion is
1) 33.6 km 2) 67.2 km 3) 672 m 4) 336 m 1) 4×10-4J 2) 4×104J 3) 4×103J 4) 4×102J
3. From what minimum height a block of ice has 13. To a system 300 joules of heat is given and it
to be dropped in order that 0.5% of ice melts does 60 joules of work. How much does the
on hitting the ground ? internal energy of the system change in this
1) 171.43m 2) 17.14m 3) 161.43m 4) 1.714km process? (in joule)
4. Two spheres ‘A’ and ‘B’ of masses in the ratio 1) 240 2) 156. 5 3) –300 4) –528. 2
1 : 2. Specific heats in the ratio 2 : 3 falls 14. A gas under constant pressure of 4.5x105Pa
from heights ‘h1’ and ‘h2’. On reaching the when subjected to 800KJ of heat, changes the
ground rise in temperatures are equal, then volume from 0.5m3 to 2 m3 . The change in
h1/h2 = the internal energy of the gas is
1) 3 : 2 2) 2 : 9 3) 2 : 3 4) 2 : 1 1) 6.75 × 105 J 2) 5.25 × 105 J
5. 2kg ice block should be dropped from ‘x km’ 3) 3.25 × 105 J 4) 1.25 × 105 J
height to melt completely. The 8 kg ice should
be dropped from a height of
CP, CV AND THEIR RELATIONS
15. Find the change in internal energy in joule when
1) 4x Km 2) x Km 3) 2x Km 4) x/2 Km
20gm of a gas is heated from 20oC to 30oC
6. Two metal balls having masses 50g and 100g
(cV = 0.18 kcal/kg K; J = 4200J/kcal)
collides with a target with same velocity. Then
1) 72.8 J 2) 151.2 J 3) 302 J 4) 450 J
the ratio of their rise in temperatures is 16. When two moles of a gas is heated from O 0 to
1) 1 : 2 2) 4 : 1 3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 1 100C at constant volume, its internal energy
7. A brick weighing 4 Kg is dropped into a 1m changes by 420J. The molar specific heat of
deep river from a height of 2m. Assuming that the gas at constant volume
80% of the gravitational potential energy is 1) 5.75 J K-1 mole-1 2) 10.55 J K-1 mole-1
finally converted into thermal energy find -1
3) 21 J K mole -1
4) 42 J K-1 mole-1
this thermal energy in calories is 17. A cylinder of fixed capacity 67.2 litres contains
1) 15 2) 17 3) 23 4) 27 helium gas at STP. Calculate the amount of
8. A man of 60 kg gains 1000 cal of heat by heat required to raise the temperature of the
gas by 150C ? ( R = 8.314 J mol −1 k −1 )
eating 5 mangoes. His efficiency is 28%. To
what height he can jump by using this energy?
1) 2m 2) 20 m 3) 28 m 4) 0.2 m 1) 561.19 J 2)570.9 J 3)580.9 J 4)590.9 J
FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 18. When a diatomic gas expands at constant
pressure, the percentage of heat supplied that
9. 2kg of water is converted into steam by increases temperature of the gas and in doing
boiling at atmospheric pressure. The volume external work in expansion at constant
changes from 2 x 10–3 m3 to 3.34 m3. The work pressure is
done by the system is about 1) 60%, 40% 2) 40%, 60%
1) – 340 kJ 2) – 170 kJ 3) 170 kJ 4) 340 kJ 3) 28.57%, 71.42% 4) 71.42%, 28.57%
60 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
19. The molar specific heat of a gas at constant 1 1
volume is 20 Joule mol-1 K-1. The value of γ 1)
32
2) 32 3) 128 4)
8
for it will be 28. Air is filled in a motor tube at 270C and at a
11 7 5 3 pressure of 8 atmospheres. The tube suddenly
1) 2) 3) 4) bursts, then temperature of air is [Given γ
10 5 3 2
20. The specific heat of air at constant pressure of air = 1.5]
is 1.005 kJ/kg/K and the specific heat of air 1) 27.50C 2) 750C 3) 150 K 4) 1500C
at constant volume is 0.718 kJ/kg/K. If the 29. A mono atomic gas initially at 27 0 C is
universal gas constant is 8.314 kJ/k mole K compressed adiabatically to one eighth of its
find the molecular weight of air ? original volume. The temperature after
1) 28.97 2) 24.6 3) 22.8 4) 19.6 compression will be
1) 100C 2) 8870C 3) 9270C 4) 1440C
21. Calculate the specific heat of a gas at
constant volume from the following data. 30. One gm mol of a diatomic gas ( γ = 1.4) is
Density of the gas at N.T.P.=19×10-2 kg/m3, compressed adiabatically so that its
(Cp/Cv) = 1.4, J = 4.2 × 103 J/kcal; atmospheric temperature rises from 270C to 1270C. The
pressure = 1.013 × 105 N/m2. ( in kcal / kg k ) work done will be
1) 2.162 2) 1.612 3) 1.192 4) 2.612 1) 2077.5 joules 2) 207.5 joules
22. If the ratio of specific heats of neon is 1.667 3) 207.5 ergs 4) 205.5 joules
and R = 8312 J/k mole K find the specific heats 31. A container of volume 2m3 is divided into two
of neon at constant pressure and constant equal compartments, one of which contains
volume. (Molecular weight of neon =20.183) an ideal gas at 400 K. The other compartment
1) 1.029, 0.6174 2) 1.831, 0.921 is vacuum. The whole system is thermally
isolated from its surroundings. The partition
3) 1.621, 0.421 4) 0.862, 0.246
is removed and the gas expands to occupy
DIFFERENT THERMO the whole volume of the container. Its
DYNAMICAL PROCESS temperature now would be
23. One mole of an ideal gas expands 1) 400 K 2) 250 K 3) 200 K 4) 100 K
isothermally to double its volume at 27°C. 32. At 27oC and pressure of 76 cm of Hg the
Then the work done by the gas is nearly volume of a diatomic gas is 2000 cm3. If it is
1) 2760 cal 2) 414 cal 3) 1380 cal 4) 600 cal compressed adiabatically to a volume of 1000
24. One mole of an ideal gas expands at a cm3, what are its pressure and temperature?
constant temperature of 300 K from an initial ( γ =1.4)
volume of 10 litres to a final volume of 20 1) 200.5 cm of Hg, 122.9oC
litres. The work done in expanding the gas is 2) 180.4 cm of Hg, 84.2oC
(R = 8.31 J/mole –K) ( in joules) 3) 120 cm g kg 80oC
1) 750 2) 1728 3) 1500 4) 3456 4) 162.4 cm of Hg 92oC
25. The isothermal bulk modulus of a perfect gas 33. The work done on a gas when it is compressed
at normal pressure is isothermally at 27oC to half of the initial
volume is (nearly)
1) 1.013 ×105 N / m2 2) 1.013 ×106 N / m2 1) 3436 J 2) -1718 J
3) 1.013 × 10−11 N / m2 4) 1.013 × 1011 N / m2 3) +1718 J 4) -3436J
HEAT ENGINE
26. A gas for which γ =1.5 is suddenly compressed
34. A Carnot engine has the same efficiency
to 1/4 th of the initial volume. Then the ratio between 800 K to 500K and x K to 600 K.
of the final to initial pressure is The value of ‘x’ is
1) 1:16 2) 1:8 3) 1:4 4) 8:1 1) 1000 K 2) 960 K 3) 846 K 4) 754 K
27. The pressure and density of a monoatomic 35. A Carnot’s engine working between 270 C and
gas ( γ = 5/3) change adiabatically from 1270 C takes up 800 J of heat from the
d P2
reservoir in one cycle. What is the work done
(P1, d1) to (P2, d2). If d = 8 then P should be
2
by the engine
1 1
1) 100J 2) 200J 3) 300 J 4) 400 J
NARAYANAGROUP 61
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
LEVEL - I (H.W) - KEY γR R
1) 1 2) 3 3) 1 4) 3 5) 2 6) 4 22. CP = ( γ − 1) , CV = ( γ − 1)
7) 3 8) 1 9)4 10) 3 11) 1 12)2
13) 1 14)4 15)2 16)3 17) 1 18)4 V
23. W = 2.303nRT log10 V
2
19)2 20)1 21)3 22)1 23)2 24)2
1
25)1 26)4 27)2 28)3 29)3 30)1
31)1 32)1 33)2 34)2 35)2 V2
24. W = 2.303nRT log10 V
LEVEL - I (H.W) - HINTS 1
1. mgh = JmS∆θ ⇒∆θ = gh 25. K iso = P = 1.013 × 105 N / m 2
JS
γ
JL γ P1 V2
γ
2. mgh = JmL ⇒h = 26. PV = PV ⇒ =
1 1 2 2
g P2 V1
0.5 γ
3. W = JH ⇒ mgh = J 100 × mL ice P1 d1
=
27.
P2 d 2
h1 S1
4. mgh = JmS ∆θ ⇒ hα S ⇒ = 28. T1 P1γ −1 = T2 P2γ −1
h2 S 2
γ −1
5. mgh = JmL ⇒ hα L ; h is independent of mass 29. TV
1 1 = T2V2γ −1
1 2 nR ( T2 − T1 )
6. mv = JmS ∆θ ⇒ ∆θα v 2 30. W =
2 γ −1
80 31. dU=0, dT=0
7. W = JH ⇒ ( mgh ) = JQ γ −1
100 V1 V1
8. Efficiency × energy = work done = mgh 32. P2 = P1 ⇒ T2 = T1
V2 V2
9. W=PdV 10. dW = dQ − dU
11. dU = dQ + dW 12. W = P (V2 − V1 ) V2
33. dW = 2.303RT log10 V
13. dU = dQ − dW 14. dU = dQ − dW 1
15. dU = mcv dT 16. dU = nCv dT T2 W T2
34. η = 1 − T 35. Q = 1 − T
17. We know that 1 mole of an ideal gas at STP 1 1 1
occupies a volume of 22.4 litres. Thus the cylinder
contains 3 moles of helium. LEVEL-II (C.W)
3
Heat required = nCv ∆T = 3 × R∆T
2 JOULE’S LAW
dU 1 dW 1 1. A copper block of mass 1kg slides down on a
18. dQ ×100 = γ ×100 ; dQ ×100 = 1 − γ ×100 rough inclined plane of inclination 370 at a
constant speed. Find the increase in the
R R
CV = ⇒ γ = 1+ temperature of the block as it slides down
19 (γ − 1) CV through 60cm assuming that the loss in
mechanical energy goes into the copper block
R R
20. cP − cV = M ⇒ M = c − c as thermal energy. (specific heat of copper =
420 Jkg −1K −1 , g = 10ms −2 )
P V
R P
21. cV = M ( γ − 1) ⇒ cV = J ρT ( γ − 1) 1) 6.6 × 10−3 0C 2) 7.6 × 10−3 0C
3) 8.6 × 10−3 0 C 4) 9.6 × 10−3 0 C
62 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
2. A steel ball of mass 0.1kg falls freely from a 4H 5H 7H
height of 10m and bounces to a height of 5.4m 1) 2) 3) 2H 4)
3 3 3
from the ground. If the dissipated energy in
this process is absorbed by the ball, the rise 1
10. mole of Helium gas is contained in a
in its temperature is (specific heat of steel 2
460 Jkg −1K −1 , g = 10ms −2 ) container at S.T.P. The heat energy needed to
double the pressure of the gas, keeping the
1) 0.01 0C 2) 0.1 0C 3) 1 0C 4) 1.1 0C volume constant (heat capacity of the
3. A lead bullet (specific heat= 0.032cal / gm 0C ) gas= 3 Jg − 1 K − 1 ) is
is completely stopped when it strikes a target 1) 3276J 2) 1638J 3) 819J 4) 409.5J
with a velocity of 300m/s. The heat generated 11. How much heat energy in joules must be
is equally shared by the bullet and the target. supplied to 14gms of nitrogen at room
The rise in temperature of bullet will be temperature to rise its temperature by 400 C
1) 16.7 0 C 2) 1.670 C 3) 167.4 0 C 4) 267.4 0 C
at constant pressure? (Mol.wt.of N 2 =28gm,
4. A block of ice falls from certain height and
completely melts. If only 3/4th of the energy R=constant)
is absorbed by the block, the height of the fall 1) 50R 2) 60R 3) 70R 4) 80R
12. The volume of 1kg of hydrogen gas at N.T.P.
should be ( L = 363SI unitsand g =10ms−2 )
is 11.2 m3 . Specific heat of hydrogen at
1) 48.4m 2) 84.4m 3) 88.4m 4) 44.8m
5. A lead bullet of mass 21g travelling at a speed constant volume is 100.46J kg −1K −1 . Find the
of 100 ms −1 comes to rest in a wooden block. If specific heat at constant pressure in J kg −1K −1 ?
no heat is taken away by the wood, the rise in 1) 120.2 2) 142.2 3) 163.4 4)182.3
temperature of the bullet in the wood nearly is 13. 3 moles of a monoatomic gas requires 60cal
(Sp. heat of lead 80cal/kg 0 C ) heat for 50 C rise of temperature at constant
1) 250 C 2) 280 C 3) 330 C 4) 150 C volume, then heat required for 5 moles of
FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS same gas under constant pressure for 100 C
6. When 20J of work was done on a gas, 40J of rise of temperature is (R=2 cal/mole-k)
heat energy was released. If the initial internal 1) 200cal 2) 400cal 3) 100cal 4) 300cal
energy of the gas was 70J, what is the final 14. One mole of a monoatomic gas is mixed with
internal energy? one mole of a diatomic gas. What will be the
1) 50J 2) 60J 3) 90J 4) 110J value of γ .
CP,CV AND THEIR RELATIONS 1) 1.5 2) 1.54 3) 1.4 4) 1.45
7. A quantity of heat ‘Q’ is supplied to a DIFFERENT THERMODYNAMIC
monoatomic ideal gas which expands at
constant pressure. The fraction of heat that
PROCESSES
15. The triatomic gas is heated isothermally. What
goes into workdone by the gas is
1) 2/5 2) 3/5 3) 2/3 4) 1 percentage of the heat energy is used to
increase the internal energy ?
8. For hydrogen gas C p − Cv = a and for Oxygen 1)0% 2) 14% 3)60% 4)100%
gas C p − Cv = b , where C p and Cv are molar 16. One mole of an ideal gas ( γ = 7 / 5 ) is
specific heats. Then the relation between ‘a’ adiabatically compressed so that its
and ‘b’ is
temperature rises from 270 C to 350 C . The
1) a=16b 2) b=16a 3) a=4b 4) a=b
9. The H calories of heat is required to increase work done by the gas is (R=8.47J/mol-K)
temperature of one mole of monoatomic gas 1)-160J 2)-168J 3)150J 4)120J
from 200 C to 300 C at constant volume. The 17. The tyre of a motor car contains air at 150 C if
quantity of heat required to increase the the temperature increases to 350C, the
temperature of 2 moles of a diatomic gas from approximate percentage increase in pressure
is (ignore the expansion of tyre)
200 C to 250 C at constant volume is 1) 7 2) 9 3) 11 4) 13
NARAYANAGROUP 63
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
18. A given mass of a gas is compressed T2K. The second engine B receives heat
isothermally until its pressure is doubled. It is rejected by the first engine and rejects to
then allowed to expand adiabatically until its another sink at T3=300K. If the efficiencies
original volume is restored and its pressure is of two engines are equal, then the value of T 2
then found to be 0.75 of its initial pressure. is
The ratio of the specific heats of the gas is 1)489.4K 2)469.4K 3)449.4K 4)429.4K
approximately LEVEL - II (C.W) - KEY
1) 1.20 2) 1.41 3) 1.67 4) 1.83 1) 3 2) 2 3) 3 4) 1 5) 4 6) 1
19. One mole of oxygen is heated at constant 7) 1 8) 4 9) 2 10) 2 11) 3 12) 2
pressure starting at 00 C . The heat energy 13) 4 14) 1 15) 1 16) 2 17) 1 18) 2
that must be supplied to the gas to double its 19) 2 20) 2 21) 1 22) 1 23) 4 24) 4
volume (R is the molar gas constant) is 25) 1
1) 2.5 × 273 × R 2) 3.5 × 273 × R LEVEL - II (C.W)-HINTS
3) 2.5 × 546 × R 4) 3.5 × 546 × R 1 2 1
20. The equation of a certain gas can be written 1. mv = mS ∆T ;But mv 2 = mgh
2 2
T7 / 5 1
= cons tan t . Its specific heat at
⇒ v 2 = 2 gl sin θ ; × 2 gl sin θ = S ∆T
as
P2 / 5 2
constant volume will be
2. ∆h = h1 − h2 ; mg ∆h = mS ∆T
3 5 7
1) R 2) R 3) R 4) 2R 1 1 2 3
2 2 2 × mv = JmS ∆T mgh = JmL
3. 4.
HEAT ENGINE 2 2 4
21. In a mechanical refrigerator, the low 1 2
temperature coils are at a temperature of 5. mv = JmS ∆T 6. dQ = U f −U i + dW
2
−230 C and the compressed gas in the dW 1
condenser has a temperature of 270 C . The 7. = 1−
dQ γ
theoretical coefficient of performance is
1) 5 2) 8 3) 6 4)6.5 8. Both are diatomic gases and CP − CV = R for all
22. A Carnot’s engine whose sink is at a gases
temperature of 300K has an efficiency of 40%. dQ1 n1C1 dT1
By how much should the temperature of the 9. dQV = nCV dT ⇒ =
source be increased so as to increase the dQ2 n2C2 dT2
efficiency to 60%? 10. ( dQ )V = nCV dT 11. ( dQ ) P = nCP dT
1)250K 2)275K 3)300K 4)325K
23. A refrigerator placed in a room at 300K has PV
12. cP = cV + r where r =
inside temperature 200K. How many calories mT
of heat shall be delivered to the room for each
13. ( dQ )V = nCV dT
2KiloCal of energy consumed by the
refrigerator ideally ? CP − CV = R ⇒ CP = CV + R
1) 4K.cal 2)2K.cal 3)8K.cal 4)6Kcal
24. An ideal Carnot’s engine whose efficiency is ( dQ ) P = nCP dT
40% receives heat at 500K. If the efficiency n1γ 1 + n2γ 2
is to be 50% then the temperature of sink will 14. γ = n1 + n2
be
1)600K 2)800K 3)1000K 4)250K 15. Isothermal process, dU = 0
25. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in nR (T1 − T2 )
succession. The first one, A receives heat from 16. dW =
a source at T1=800Kand rejects to a sink at γ −1
64 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
∆T ∆P 3. A lead bullet of 10g travelling at 300m/s
17. PαT ⇒ × 100 = × 100 strikes against a block of wood and comes to
T P
rest. Assuming 50% of heat is absorbed by
∆P
⇒ ×100 = 7 ( approximately ) the bullet, the increase in its temperature is
P (sp-heat of lead is 150J/Kg-K)
1) 1000C 2) 1250C 3) 1500C 4) 2000C
1 1 = PV
18. For isothermal process , PV 2 2
4. Water falls from a height 500m, what is the
γ γ
1 1 = PV
For adiabatic process, PV 2 2 rise in temperature of water at bottom if whole
γ energy remains in the water ? (J=4.2)
V 3
2P = P V γ 1) 0.96 0C 2) 1.02 0 C 3) 1.16 0 C 4) 0.3 0 C
2 4 5. A ball is dropped on a floor from a height of
T2 V2 2m. After the collision it rises up to a height
19. T = V ;Heat to be supplied = nC p (T2 − T1 ) of 1.5m. Assume that 40% of the mechanical
1 1
energy lost goes as thermal energy into the
R ball. Calculate the rise in temperature of the
20. P1−γ T γ = constant ; CV =
γ −1 ball in the collision. (Heat capacity of the ball
Q2 T2 is 800JK −1 )
21. β = W = T − T 1) 0.5 × 10 −3 0C 2) 1.0 × 10−3 0C
1 2
T2 T2 3) 1.5 × 10−3 0C 4) 2.5 × 10−3 0C
22. η1 = 1 − ; η2 = 1 − 1 FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS
T1 T1 6. In a thermodynamic process the pressure of a
Q2 T2 fixed mass of gas is changed. In this process
23. β = W = T − T gas releases 20J heat and 8J work is done on
1 2
the gas. If initial internal energy of the gas is
T2 T2 T3 30J, then final internal energy is
24. η = 1 − T 25. 1 − T = 1 − T 1) 2J 2) 42J 3)18J 4) 58J
1 1 2
CP,CV AND THEIR RELATIONS
LEVEL-II (H.W) 7. The density of a substance is 400kgm −3 and
that of another substance is 600kgm−3 . The
JOULE’S LAW heat capacity of 40cc of first substance is
1. A copper block of mass 5kg slides down along equal to that of 30cc of second substance. The
a rough inclined plane of inclination 300 with a ratio of their specific heats is
constant speed. The increase in the 1) 1: 6 2) 6:1 3) 9:8 4)8:9
temperature of the block as it slides down 8. For hydrogen cP − cV = m and for nitrogen
through 100cm assuming that the loss of
mechanical energy goes into copper block as cP − cV = n , where cP and cV refer to specific
thermal energy. (specific heat of copper heats per unit mass respectively at constant
420 J kg −1K −1 , g = 10ms −2 ) pressure and constant volume. The relation
between 'm' and 'n' is
1) 1.19 × 10−3 0 C 2) 2.38 × 10−3 0C 1) n=14m 2) n=7m 3) m=7n 4) m=14n
3) 1.19 × 10−2 0 C 4) 2.38 × 10 −2 0 C 9. 294 joules of heat is required to rise the
temperature of 2 mole of an ideal gas at
2. A brass sphere of mass 0.2kg falls freely from
constant pressure from 300C to 350C. The
a height of 20m and bounces to a height of 8m
amount of heat required to rise the
from the ground. If the dissipated energy in
temperature of the same gas through the
this process is absorbed by the sphere the rise
same range of temperature at constant
in its temperature is (specific heat of brass =
volume (R=8.3 Joules/mole-K) is
360 J kg −1K −1 , g = 10ms −2 ) 1)12.6J 2)211J 3)29.4K 4)37.8J
1) 0.33 0 C 2) 0.66 0C 3) 0.77 0C 4) 0.88 0 C
NARAYANAGROUP 65
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
10. 1672cal of heat is given to one mole of oxygen 1)-166J 2)166J 3)168J 4)-168J
at 00 C keeping the volume constant. Raise in 19. The volume of air increases by 5% in its
temperature is (cP=0.2cal/gm0k and R=2cal/ adiabatic expansion. The percentage
mole/K) decrease in its pressure will be
1)5% 2)6% 3)7% 4)8%
1) 33.60 C 2) 36.30 C 3) 63.30 C 4) 334.40 C
20. Certain perfect gas is found to obey the law
11. 0.5 mole of diatomic gas at 270 C is heated at PV3/2 = constant, during adiabatic process. If
constant pressure so that its volume is tripled. such a gas at initial temperature T is
If R=8.3J mole-1k-1then work done is adiabatically compressed to half of the initial
1) 4980J 2) 2490J 3) 630J 4) 1245J volume, its final temperature will be
12. The volume of 1kg of oxygen gas at NTP is 1) 2T 2) 2T 3) 2 2T 4) 4T
0.7m3 . Specific heat of oxygen at constant HEAT ENGINE
volume is 653 Jkg −1k −1 . The specific heat of 21. The coefficient of performance of a Carnot
oxygen at constant pressure in Jkg −1k −1 is refrigerator working between 300 C & 00 C is
1) 10 2) 1 3) 9 4) 0
(atmospheric pressure 105Pa)
22. A Carnot engine has efficiency of 40% when
1) 713 2) 813 3)913 4)1013
sink temperature is 300K. In order to
13. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at
increase the efficiency by 50%, the source
constant pressure, its internal energy is
temperature will have to be increased by
increased by 50cal then the work done by the
1) 2750K 2) 3250K 3)3800K 4)2500K
gas is
23. A refrigerator works between 30C and 400C.
1) 30cal 2)50cal 3)70cal 4)20cal
To keep the temperature of the refrigerator
14. A gaseous mixture consists of 16g of helium
constant, 600 calories of heat is to be removed
and 16g of oxygen. The ratio C p / CV of the every second. The power required is
mixture is 1) 33.78Watt 2) 337.8 Watt
1) 1.4 2) 1.54 3) 1.59 4)1.62 3) 7.77Watt 4) 10.77Watt
DIFFERENT THERMODYNAMIC 24. Two Carnot engines ‘A’ and ‘B’ are operated
PROCESS in succession. The first one, A receives heat
15. 0.1 moles of diatomic gas at 270 C is heated at from a source at T1 = 800 K and rejects to a
constant pressure, so that the volume is sink at T2 K. The second engine B receives
doubled.If R=2 cal.mol −1 k −1 , the work done is heat rejected by the first engine and rejects
1) 150cal 2) 60cal 3) 40cal 4)30cal to another sink at T3 = 300 K . If the work
16. If a triatomic gas is heated at constant pressure, outputs of two engines are equal, then the
percentage of the heat energy which is used to
value of T2 is
increase the internal energy is
1) 75% 2) 14% 3) 60% 4)100% 1)100K 2)300K 3)550K 4)700K
17. Two moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at 25. One of the most efficient engines ever
developed operates between 2100K and
270 C occupies a volume of V. If the gas is 700K. Its actual efficiency is 40%. What
expanded adiabatically to the volume 2V, then percentage of its maximum possible efficiency
the work done by the gas will be is this?
1) −2767.23J 2) 2767.23J 1) 40% 2) 60% 3)66.67% 4)33.37%
3) 2500J 4) −2500J LEVEL - II (H.W ) - KEY
18. One mole of an ideal gas with γ = 1.4 is 1) 3 2) 1 3) 3 4) 3 5) 4 6) 3
adiabatically compressed so that its 7) 3 8) 4 9) 2 10) 4 11) 2 12) 3
temperature rises from 270C to 350C. The 13) 4 14) 4 15) 2 16) 1 17) 2 18) 2
change in the internal energy of the gas is 19) 3 20) 1 21) 3 22) 4 23) 2 24) 3
25) 3
( R = 8.3 J mol −1
k −1 )
66 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
LEVEL - II (H.W)-HINTS Q2 T2 W
1 2 1 23. β = W = T − T ; P =
mv = JmS ∆T ; × 2 gl sin θ = JS ∆T 1 2 t
1.
2 2 T1 − T2 WA T −T W
2. mg ( h1 − h2 ) = JmS ∆T 24. η A = T1
=
Q1 ; ηB = 2 3 = B
T2 Q2
1 1 2 Q1 T1 T2 − T3 T1
3. × mv = JmS ∆T 4. mgh = JmS ∆T = × = (∴WA = WB )
2 2 Q2 T2 T1 − T2 T2
40 T1 + T3
5. W = JH ⇒ ( mgh ) = JmS ∆T T2 =
100 2
6. U f − U i = dQ − dW ; dQ = (U f − U i ) + dW T2
25. η = 1 − T ×100
1 dQ C m C Vd 1
7. C= ⇒ 1 = 2; 1= 2 2
m dT C 2 m1 C2 V1d1
LEVEL-III
8. CP − CV = mM ( for H2 ) ; CP − CV = nM ( for N2 )
JOULE'S LAW
9. ( ∆Q ) P = nCP ∆T ; 1. An ice block is projected vertically up with a
CP − CV = R ⇒ CV = C P − R ; ( ∆Q)V = nCV ∆T
velocity 20 ms-1. The amount of ice that melt
when it reaches the ground and if the loss of
10. ∆QV = nCV ∆T 11. dW = PdV = nR∆T P.E. is converted into heat energy if the mass
of ice block is 4.2 kg
12. PdV = RdT = ( C P − CV ) dT 1) 2.5 gm 2) 2.5 kg 3) 0.25 kg 4)0.25 gm
2. How much will the temperature of 100g of
dU 1 n1CP1 + n2CP2 water be rised by doing 4200 J of work in
13. = 14. γ = stirring the water?
dW γ − 1 n1CV1 + n2CV2
1) 0.010C 2) 0.10C 3) 10C 4) 100C
V1 T1 3. A lead ball moving with a velocity v strikes a
15. V = T ; dW = pdV = RdT wall and stops. If 50% of its energy is converted
2 2 into heat, The increase in temperature is
dU 1 (Specific heat of lead is S)
16. ×100 = ×100 1) 2v2 / JS 2)v2 / 4JS 3) v2 S/ J 4) v2 S/ 2J
dQ γ 4. A steel drill is making 180 revolutions per
γ −1 minute, under a constant torque of 5 N-m. If it
V1 nR
17. T2 = T1 ; dW = [T1 − T2 ] drills a hole in 7 sec in a steel block of mass
V2 γ −1 600 gm, rise in temperature of the block is
(S = 0.1 cal gm-1 0C-1)
nR (T1 − T2 ) 1) 2.6ºC 2) 1.3ºC 3) 5.2ºC 4) 3ºC
18. dU = 5. The time taken by an electric heater to rise
γ −1 the temperature of 100 cc of water through
∆P ∆V 100C is 7s. If there is no loss in energy, power
19. PV γ = constant ⇒ =γ
P V of that motor is ( J = 4.2 J / cal )
γ γ γ −1
= T2V2γ −1 1) 420 W 2) 42 W 3) 4.2 W 4) 0.6 W
1 1 = PV
20. PV 2 2
; TV
1 1
FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS
T2 6. When 1 gm of water changes from liquid to
21. η = T − T vapour phase at constant pressure of 1
1 2
atmosphere, the volume increases from 1cc
T T to 1671cc. The heat of vaporisation at this
22. η 1 = 1 − T , η 2 = 1 − T 1
2 2
1 1
pressure is 540 cal/gm. Increase in internal
energy of water is
Equating T2 in both the cases. (1 atmosphere = 1.01 x 106 dyne/cm2)
1) 4200J 2) 8200J 3) 1200J 4) 2100 J
NARAYANAGROUP 67
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
7. One cubic meter of an ideal gas is at a pressure 14. The ratio of specific heats of a gas is γ . The
of 105 N / m 2 and temperature 300K. The gas change in internal energy of one mole of the
is allowed to expand at constant pressure to gas when the volume changes from V to 2V
twice its volume by supplying heat. If the at constant pressure “P” is
change in internal energy in this process is PV PV
1) γ − 1 2) PV 3) γ − 1 4) γ
104 J, then the heat supplied is
1) 105 J 2) 10 4 J 3) 11× 10 4 J 4) 2.2 ×105 J DIFFERENT THERMODYNAMIC
8. 1kg of water and 1kg of steel are heated PROCESSES
through 1K. The change in their internal 15. γ for a gas is 5/3. An ideal gas at 270C is
energies are compressed adiabatically to 8/27 of its
(Specific heat of steel = 460 J kg-1K-1 ; original volume. The rise in temperature of
Specific heat of water = 4200Jkg-1K-1) the gas is
1) 460 J, 4200 J 2) 4200 J, 460 J 1) 4500C 2) 3750C 3) 2250C 4) 4020C
3) 1000 J, 4200 J 4) 460 J, 1000 J 16. One mole of a gas expands with temperature
9. Consider the melting of 1g of ice at 00C to water T such that its volume, V = kT2, where k is a
at 00C at atmospheric pressure. Then the constant. If the temperature of the gas
change in internal energy of the system changes by 600C then the work done by the
(density of ice is 920kg/ m3) ? gas is
1) 334 J 2)420 J 3) 540 J 4)680 J 1) 120 R 2) R ln 60 3) kR ln 60 4) 60 kR
17. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at
CP, CV AND THEIR RELATIONS
temperature T1, is enclosed in a cylinder fitted
10. A cylinder of fixed capacity 67.2 litres
with a frictionless piston. The gas is allowed
contains helium gas at S.T.P. The amount of
to expand adiabatically to a temperature T 2
heat required to rise the temperature of the
by releasing the piston suddenly. If L 1 and L 2
gas by 150C is (R =8.31 J mol-1K-1) are the lengths of the gas column before and
1) 520 J 2) 560.9 J 3) 620 J 4) 621.2 J after expansion respectively, then T1/T2 is
11. 14 g of N 2 gas is heated in a closed rigid given by
container to increase its temperature from 2 2
L1 3 L1 L2 L2 3
230 C to 430 C . The amount of heat supplied 1) 2) L 3) L 4)
L2 2 1 L1
to the gas is
18. Three samples of the same gas 'x' ,' y' and
1) 25 cal 2) 50 cal 3) 100 cal 4) 30 cal
'z', for which the ratio of specific heats is γ =3/
12. 70 cal of heat is required to rise the
2, have initially the same volume. The
temperature of 2 moles of an ideal gas at volumes of each sample is doubled , by
constant pressure from 30ºC to 35ºC. What is isobaric process in the case of 'y' and by
the amount of heat required to rise the isothermal process in the case of 'z'. If the
temperature of same gas through the same initial pressures of the samples 'x', 'y' and 'z'
range at constant volume?(R = 2cal mole-1K-1)
1) 28 J 2) 50 Cal 3) 75 J 4) Zero are in the ratio 2 2 : 1 : 2 , then the ratio of
13. The relation between internal energy U, their final pressures is
pressure P and volume V of a gas in an 1) 2 : 1 : 1 2) 1 : 1 : 1 3) 1 : 2 : 1 4) 1 : 1 : 2
adiabatic process is : U = a + bPV Where ‘a’ 19. n moles of an ideal gas undergo a process in
which the temperature changes with volume
and ‘b’ are constants. What is the value of the
as T = kV2. The work done by the gas as the
ratio of the specific heats?
temperature changes from T0 to 4T0 is
a b +1 a +1 b
1) 2) 3) 4)
b b a a 5 3
1) 3nRT0 2) nRT0 3) nRT0 4) Zero
2 2
68 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
20. 'm' grams of a gas of a molecular weight M is 27. An ideal refrigerator has a freezer at a
flowing in an isolated tube with velocity 2v. If temperature of –130C. The coefficient of
the gas flow is suddenly stopped the rise in its performance of the engine is 5. The
temperature is ( γ = ratio of specific heats; temperature of the air (to which heat is
R = universal gas constant; J = Mechanical rejected) will be
equivalent of heat) 1) 3250C 2) 325 K 3) 390C 4) 3200C
2 Mv 2 ( γ − 1) mv 2 ( γ − 1) 28. The heat reservoir of an ideal Carnot engine
1) 2) is at 800 K and its sink is at 400 K. The amount
RJ M 2 RJ
of heat taken in it in one second to produce
mv 2 γ Mv2 γ useful mechanical work at the rate of 750 J is
3) 4) 1)2250 J 2)1125 J 3)1500 J 4) 750 J
2 RJ 2 RJ
21. Heat is supplied to a diatomic gas at constant 29. A Carnot engine works between 2000 C and
pressure. The ratio of ∆ Q: ∆ U: ∆ W is 00C. Another Carnot engine works between
1)5 : 3 : 2 2) 5 : 2 : 3 3)7 : 5 : 2 4)7 : 2 : 5 00C and - 2000 C . In both cases the working
22. A given quantity of an ideal gas at pressure P substance absorbs 4 kilocalories of heat from
and absolute temperature T obeys P α T 3 the source. The efficiency of first engine will
during adiabatic process. The adiabatic bulk be
modulus of the gas is 100 200 173 273
2 3 1) 2) 3) 4)
173 473 273 373
1) P 2) P 3) P 4) 2P
3 2 30. In the above problem, the output of second
23. An ideal gas is taken through a cyclic thermo engine is
dynamical process through four steps. The 1) 29.3 × 103 Cal 2) 12.3 × 103 Cal
amounts of heat involved in these steps are
3) 12.3 × 103 joule 4) 2.93 × 103 joule
Q1 = 5960 J , Q2 = −5585 J , Q3 = −2980 J , Q4 = 3645 J ;
31. In the above problem, the ratio of outputs of
respectively, The corresponding works
two engines is
involved are W1 = 2200 J , W2 =−825 J , W3 =−1100 J 1)0.577 2) 0.377 3)0.777 4)0.177
and W4 respectively. Find The value of W4 GRAPHS
and efficiency of the cycle 32. An ideal monoatomic gas is taken round the
1) 1315 J, 10% 2) 275 J, 11% cycle ABCDA as shown in the diagram. The
3) 765 J, 10.82% 4) 675 J , 10.82% work done during the cycle is
HEAT ENGINE
B(2P,V) C(2P,2V)
24. A Carnot's engine is made to work between 1) PV
2000C and 00C first and then between 00C and P 2) 2PV
–2000C. The ratio of efficiencies of the engine
in the two cases is A(P,V) D(P,2V) 3) 3PV
1) 1.73:1 2) 1:1.73 3) 1:1 4) 1 : 2 V 4) 4PV
25. A scientist says that the efficiency of his heat 33. The figure shows P-V graph of an ideal one
engine which operates at source temperature mole gas undergone to cyclic process ABCA,
1270C and sink temperature 270C is 26%, then then the process B → C is
1) it is impossible
2) it is possible but less probable
3) it is quite probable 4) data is incomplete 1) Isobaric
2P0 B
26. Efficiency of a Carnot engine is 50% when
temperature of outlet is 500 K. In order to 2) Adiabatic
increase efficiency upto 60% keeping P
P0 A C
temperature of intake the same, what is the 3) Isochoric
temperature of outlet V0 V 2V0 4) Isothermal
1) 200 K 2) 400 K 3) 600 K 4) 800 K
NARAYANAGROUP 69
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
34. On a T-P diagram, two moles of ideal gas 38. The heat energy absorbed by a system in going
perform process AB and CD. If the work done through a cyclic process shown in figure is
by the gas in the process AB is two times the
work done in the process CD then what is the
value of T1/T2? 30
T volume
(litres) 10
T1 A
C B
T2 10 30
D Pressure (KPa)
P
1) 1/2 2) 1 3) 2 4) 4 1)103 π J 2) 10 2 π J 3) 10 4 π J 4) 107 π J
35. A Sample of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken 39. A thermodynamic system is taken through the
round the cycle ABCA as shown in the figure. cycle PQRSP process. The net work done by
The work done during the cycle is the system is
B
(4P,3V) P
1) Zero
300kPa S R
2) 3PV
P A (P,V) C (P,3V) 3) 6PV
100kPa Q
V 4) 9PV P
36. In the given elliptical P - V diagram 100cc 300cc V
1) 20 J 2) – 40 J 3) 400 J 4) – 374 J
P2 40. A cyclic process performed on one mole of an
P1 ideal gas. A total 1000 J of heat is withdrawn
from the gas in a complete cycle. Find the work
done by the gas during the process B → C.
P T
V C
V1 V2 1) -1531 J
V
1) The work done is positive 400 K B 2) -1631 J
2) The change in internal energy is non-zero 300 K 3) -1731 J
A
π
3) The work done = − 4 ( P2 − P1 )(V2 − V1 ) V 4) -1831 J
41. An ideal gas is taken through A → B →C → A,
4) The work done = ( π )(V2 − V1 ) 2 = π ( P2 − P1 )2 as shown in figure. If the net heat supplied to
37. A system changes from the state (p1,v1) to the gas in the cycle is 5J, the work done by
(p2,v2) as shown in the diagram. The workdone the gas in the process C → A is
by the system is
(P2 ,V2 ) C B
5 2
P 4
V(m )
3
3
×10 Nm
5 −2 2 (P1,V1 )
1 A
1
1 2 3 4 5 3 -2 10
V(m ) P(Nm )
1)12x104J 2)12x108J 3)12x105J 4) 6x104 J 1) -5J 2) -10J 3) -15J 4) -20J
70 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
LEVEL - III - KEY system decreased in volume.
1) 1 2) 4 3) 2 4) 1 5) 4 6) 4 ∆ U = ∆ Q − ∆ W = 334 − ( − 9 × 10 − 3 ) = 334 J
7) 3 8) 2 9) 1 10) 2 11) 2 12) 2
10. dQ = nCVdT
13) 2 14) 1 15) 2 16) 1 17) 4 18) 2
19) 3 20)1 21) 3 22) 3 23) 3 24) 2 11. In a closed container, ∆V = 0
25) 1 26) 2 27) 3 28) 3 29) 2 30) 3 R
31) 1 32) 1 33) 4 34) 3 35) 2 36) 3 ∴∆Q = ∆U = nCV ∆T CV = γ − 1
37) 3 38) 2 39) 2 40) 4 41) 1
12. ∆QP = nCP ∆T ;
LEVEL - III - HINTS CP − CV = R ⇒ CV = C P − R
2
u ∆U = nCV ∆T
1. Maximum height attained, h =
2g 13. U = a + bPV ; But PV = RT
W = JH ⇒ mgh = J ( xLice ) dU CP
2. W = JH ⇒ W = JmS ∆θ
CV = ; CP = CV + R ; γ = C
dT V
11 2 14. ∆U = nCV ∆T
3. mv = JmS ∆ θ
22
R
τ ω t = JmS ∆θ ( ω = 2π n ) But CV = and PdV = RdT
4. γ −1
W JmS ∆θ 15. TV γ −1
= T2V2γ −1
5. P= = 1 1
t t
16. V = kT 2 ∴ 2kT .dT = dV
6. dQ = mL; dW = P (V2 − V1 ) ; dU = dQ − dW RT RT R
and p = = =
7. dQ = dU + dW = dU + PdV V kT 2
kT
∆Q = mS ∆θ
8.
9. Heat required to change the phase of a solid
dW = PdV = 2 RdT ; W = PdV ∫
γ −1
17. TV = constant
∆Q = mLf
Volume of a cylinder = V=AL
Work done by system at constant pressure,
∆W = P (Vliquid − Vsolid )
γ −1
T1 V 2
γ −1
AL2
= =
From first law of thermodynamics, ∆U =∆Q −∆W T2 V1 AL1
= mL f − P (Vliquid − Vsolid ) 18. TV γ −1
= T2V2γ −1
1 1
Latent heat of fusion of water, 19. T = kV 2
∴ dT = 2kVdV
L f = 3.335 × 10 J / Kg
5
dT nRT
or dV = ; p= ; W = ∫ PdV
∆Q = (1 × 10 −3
)( 3.335 × 10 ) = 334 J
5
2kV V
1
The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
20. W = JQ ⇒ m ( 2v ) = JnCV ∆T
2
1 × 10 − 3 2
V solid = = 1.09 × 10 − 6 m 3
920 ∆Q nC P dT ∆W 1
21. ∆U = nC dT = γ ⇒ ∆Q =1 − γ
Vliquid = 1 × 10−6 m3 V
Thus work done by the system in melting is 22. PT −3 = Constant ; P1−γ T γ = Constant
∆W = P(Vliquid −Vsolid ) PT γ /1−γ = Constant
γ 3
= (1.013×105 )(1×10−6 −1.09×10−6 ) = −9 ×10−3 J −3 =
1−γ
⇒ γ =
2
Work done by the system is negative because the ∴ Adiabatic bulk modulus K = γ P
NARAYANAGROUP 71
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
23. Cyclic process, ∆U = 0 ; Qnet = Wnet 38. From P-V diagram
Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q 4 = W1 + W2 + W3 + W4 work done by a system in cyclic process is
Efficiency η = equal to area of the loop then Heat absorbed
=Workdone = area of the loop
Total workdonein the cycle
× 100 2
30 − 10
Heat absorbed by the gas during the cycle =π r = π
2
= π ×102 J
2
W + W2 + W3 + W4
η= 1 ×100
39. Work done = Area between the cycle
Q1 + Q 4 40. In a cyclic process ∆U = 0
Qcycle = Wcycle ...........(1)
T2 T21 T2
24. η1 = 1 − η =1− 25.η = 1 − T Where as
T1 ; 2 T1
Wcycle = WA→ B + WB →C + WC →A .......... ( 2 )
1
1
T2 T T2 Process C → A is isochoric, hence WC → A = 0
26. η1 = 1 − ; η2 = 1 − 27. β = T − T
2
T1 T1 1 2 Process A → B is isobaric, as its T-V graph is a
W T2 T2 straight line passing through origin.
28. Q = 1 − T 29. η = 1−
T1
In an isobaric process, work done is
W = P (V2 − V1 ) = nR ( T2 − T1 )
1
T1 − T2 W1 T11
30. W = η × Q 1 = 1 31.
Q = WA→ B = 1× 8.31( 400 − 300 ) = 831 J → (3)
T1 W2 T1
WA→B is positive; expansion of gas takes place,
32. Work done = Area under rectangle
33. In AB - isochoric process From equation (1), (2), and (3),
P0 TA −1000 = 831 + WB→C + 0
PV = RT ⇒ 2 P = T ⇒ TB = 2TA WB →C = −1831 J
0 B
PV TA 41. dU=0 ; dQ = dWA→ B + dWB →C + dWC → A
From CA; 2 PV = T ⇒ TC = 2TA ∴ TB = TC
0 0
0 0 C
∴ BC is isothermal process LEVEL-IV
P11 MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
34. W1 = 2.303 nRT1 log
P1 1. Match the following
Column-I Column-II
P21 W1 T1
p) ∆U < 0
W2 = 2.303 nRT2 log ; W =2⇒ T =2 a) Cyclic process
P2 2 2
b) Isobaric process q) ∆Q = ∆W
1 c) Isochoric process r) ∆W = nR∆T
35. ∆W = Area of the loop = AC × BC
2 d) Adiabatic Process s) ∆Q = ∆U
36. The work done = area of P-V diagram 2. Match the following
V2 − V1 P −P Column-I Column-II
a= , b= 2 1
2 2 V
a) Isothermal process p) =constant
V −V P − P T
W = −π 2 1 2 1
2 2 b)Isobaric process q) PVγ =constant
But the cyclic process is anticlockwise. P
Hence, the work done is negative. c) Isochoric process r) =constant
T
37. W=Area of triangle + Area of rectangle d) Adiabatic process s) PV=constant
72 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
3. Read the following and write the correct pairs. Reason (R) : Due to various losses, it is
Pressure temperature graph of n moles of an impossible to convert total heat into mechanical
ideal gas is shown ( ρ - density). work
6. Assertion (A) : According to Joule, heat and work
are related
Reason (R) : For every 1 cal. of heat we can get
4P0 C 4.186 J of mechanical work.
7. Assertion (A) : Reversible systems are difficult
B to find in real world
2P0 D Reason (R) :Most processes are dissipative in
P0 A nature
8. Assertion (A): Thermodynamic process in nature
T0 2T0 are irreversible
Column-I Column-II Reason (R) :Dissipative effects can not be
eliminated
3 4 STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
A) ρ-V graph p) 2 Options :
1
1. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is true
2. Statement 1 is true and statement 2 is false
4 3. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is true
B) P-V graph q) 3
1 4. Statement 1 is false and statement 2 is false
2 9. Statement-1: First law of thermodynamics
specifies the conditions under which a body can
use its heat energy to produce the work.
1,3 Statement-2:Second law of thermodynamics
C) ρ-P graph r) states that heat always flows from hot body to
2,4
cold body by itself
10. Statement-1: Zeroth law of thermodynamics
3 4 gives us the concept of energy
D) V-T graph s) Statement-2: Internal energy is dependent on
2 1 temperature
11. Statement-1: Heat given to an ideal gas under
isothermal conditions is used completely to do
external work.
ASSERTION & REASON TYPE QUESTIONS Statement-2: The change in internal energy in a
1) Both assertion (A) and reason (R) are correct thermodynamic process is independent of the path.
and R gives the correct explanation 12. Statement-1:It is impossible to derive continuous
2) Both assertion (A) and reason (R) are correct supply of work by cooling a body to a temperature
but R does not give the correct explanation lower than that of the coldest of its surroundings
3) A is true but R is false Statement-2: Heat engine can convert whole of
4) Both A and R are false the heat energy supplied to it into useful work
4. Assertion (A) : Two systems which are in thermal 13. Statement-1:: Monoatomic, diatomic and
equilibrium with a third system are in thermal polyatomic gases are adiabatically compressed
equilibrium with each other.
Reason (R) : The heat flows always from a system P2
at higher temperature to a system at a lower such that compression ratio is P . Then
1
temperature monoatomic gas will have maximum final volume
5. Assertion (A) : According to the principle of out of these three gases.
conservation of energy total heat can be converted Statement-2:Monoatomic gas has least degree
into mechanical work of freedom.
NARAYANAGROUP 73
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
14. Statement-1: Two vessels A and B are PARAGRAPH TYPE QUESTIONS
connected to each other by a stopcock .Vessel A Read the question to answer Q. 18 to 21 :
contains a gas at 300K and 1 atmosphere pressure A monoatomic ideal gas sample is given heat
and vessel B is evacuated. The two vessels are Q. One fourth of this heat is used as work
thermally insulated from the surroundings. If the done by the gas and rest is used for
stopcock is suddenly opened, the expanding gas increasing its internal energy.
18. The molar specific heat for the gas in this
does no work.
process is
Statement-2:Since ∆ Q = 0 and as the gas
expands freely so ∆W = 0 and from the first law 3 R
1) R 2) 3) 2R 4) 3R
of thermodynamics it follows that ∆U is also zero 2 2
19. The equation of process in terms of
for the above process.
volume and temperature is
OTHER MODEL QUESTIONS
15. According to second law of thermodynamics V V
1) = constant 2) = constant
Statement - I:All heat can be converted into work T T
Statement - II: The efficiency of a heat 3) VT = constant 4) V T = constant
engine is always lesser than unity 20. The P V diagram for the process is
Statement - III: It is not possible to transfer
P P
heat from lower to higher temperature of it self
1)both I and II are true 1) 3)
2)both II and III are true V V
3)both I and III are true 4) I, II, III are true
16. The second law of thermodynamics is the P P
generalisation of the fact that
2) 4)
Statement - I:Heat always flows from hot body
to cold body by itself V V
Statement - II: Heat can flow from cold body to 21. An ideal gas under goes a thermodynamic
hot body itself cycle as shown in fig. Which of the following
Statement - III: It is impossible for a self acting graphs represents the same cycle?
machine unaided by any external agency to transfer
heat from cold body to hotter body V C B
1) I & II 2) II & III 3) I & III 4) I, II & III
A
17. The V–T diagram of an ideal gas for the process
A → B → C (straight lines) is as shown in the O T
figure. In the process A → B → C
A C
A B
B
v P P A
1) C 3) C
B
T O T O T
A) pressure is always increasing
B) for some interval pressure decreases but
finally pressure is more than initial pressure B
B P A
C) pressure first increases then remains P A
constant 2) 4)
C C
D) graph AB is unpredictable about pressure
1) A, B, C are correct 2) B, D are correct V
V
3) C only correct 4) B only correct
1) A, C 2) B,D 3) A,D 4) B,C
74 NARAYANAGROUP
JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI THERMODYNAMICS
Questions No. 22 to 23 26. If work done by the gas in cylinder B is WB &
The figure shows P–V diagram of a work done by the gas in cylinder A is W A then
thermodynamic cycle 1) WA = –WB 2) |WA| > |WB|
P
3) |WA| < |WB| 4) we can’t say anything
2P0 B
C 27. What will be the compressive force in
connecting rod at equilibrium
P0
O
A D 1) PS 2) 2 PS 3) 23/2 PS 4) zero
V0 3V0 Questions No. 28 and 29
22. The work done by the cycle is The dot in figure represents the initial state
1) 2P0V0 2) 3P0V0 3) P0V0 4) 6P0V0 of a gas. An adiabat divides the p-V
23. If TA, TB , TC and T D are the respective diagram into regions 1 and 2 as shown.
temperature at A, B, C and D. Then, choose p
the correct statement if T A = T0
1) The maximum temperature during the cycle
occurs at C.
2
2) T D = 3T0 3) T B = 2T0 4) all the above 1
Questions No. 24 to 27 V
Two cylinder A and B having piston connected
28. For which of the following processes, the
by massless rod (as shown in figure). The
corresponding heat supplied to the system
cross-sectional area of two cylinders are same
Q is positive
& equal to ‘S’. The cylinder A contains 'm' gm
1) the gas moves up along the adiabat,
of an ideal gas at Pressure P & temperature
2) it moves down along the adiabat,
T0. The cylinder B contain identical gas at
3) it moves to anywhere in region 1,
same temperature T 0 but has different mass.
4) it moves to anywhere in region 2.
The piston is held at the state in the position
29. As the gas moves down along the adiabatic,
so that volume of gas in cylinder A & cylinder
the temperature
B are same & is equal to V0. The walls &
1) increases 2) decreases
piston of cylinder A are thermally insulated,
3) remains constant
where as cylinder B is maintained at
4) variation depends on type of gas
temperature T0 . The whole system is in
LEVEL - IV -KEY
vacuum. Now the piston is slowly released and
Matching Type Questions
it moves towards left & mechanical equilibrium
1)a-q, b-r, c-s, d-p 2)a-s, b-p, c-r, d-q
is reached at the state when the volume of gas
3)A-r, B-q, C-p, D-s
V0 Assertion & Reason Type Questions
in cylinder A becomes . Then (here γ for
2 4) 1 5) 2 6) 1 7) 1 8) 1
gas = 1.5) Statement Type Questions
9) 3 10) 3 11) 1 12) 2 13) 1 14) 1
More than one option questions
15) 2 16) 3 17) 3
Paragraph Type Questions
B
A 18) 3 19) 2 20) 2 21) 1 22) 1 23) 4
24. The mass of gas in cylinder B 24) 2 25) 2 26) 3 27) 3 28) 4 29) 2
1) 2 2 m 2) 3 2 m 3) 2 m 4) m LEVEL - IV-HINTS
25. The change in internal energy of gas in Matching Type Questions
cylinder A 3. Process A - B is an isothermal process i.e
1) ( 2 – 1) PV0 2) 2( 2 – 1) PV0 T= constant
PV0 1
Hence Pα or P - V graph is rectangular
3) 4) zero V
( 2 − 1)
NARAYANAGROUP 75
THERMODYNAMICS JEE- ADV PHYSICS-VOL- VI
hyperbola with increasing 'P' and decreasing V. 8. Thermodynamic process in nature are irreversible due
1 to the dissipative forces like friction, viscosity etc.
ρα . Hence ρ - V graph is also a rectangular In nature dissipative forces are present every
V
where hence they can not be eliminated
hyperbola with decreasing V and increasing ' ρ '. Statement Type Questions
PM 9. 1)It does not tell any thing about the conditions
ρα P ⇒ P = . under which heat can be transformed into work.(I
RT
Hence ρ - P graph will be a straight line passing is false)
through origin with increasing ρ and P.. 2) According to to the statement of second law of
Process B - C is an isochoric process, because thermodynamics (II is true)
P-T graph is straight line passing through origin 10. 1) Zeroth law of thermodynamics leads to the
V = constant concept of temperature (I is false)
hence P - V graph will be a straight line parallel to 2) Except in some exceptional cases internal
P - axis with increasing P. energy is a measure of temperature (II is true)
Since V = constant hence ρ will also be constant. 11. 1)In isothermal expansion gas absorbs heat and
does work as there is no chan
You might also like
- DC Pandey Electricity and Magnetism (Crackjee - Xyz)81% (16)DC Pandey Electricity and Magnetism (Crackjee - Xyz)778 pages
- DC Pandey Optics and Modern Physics (Crackjee - Xyz) PDF92% (12)DC Pandey Optics and Modern Physics (Crackjee - Xyz) PDF559 pages
- Arihant 20 Years Chapterwise Topicwise JEE Main Solved Papers Physics-178% (32)Arihant 20 Years Chapterwise Topicwise JEE Main Solved Papers Physics-1545 pages
- FIITJEE Physics Study Package - For - JEE Main Advanced - Phase 188% (8)FIITJEE Physics Study Package - For - JEE Main Advanced - Phase 1506 pages
- Arihant 20 Years Chapterwise Topicwise JEE Main Solved Papers Chemistry80% (20)Arihant 20 Years Chapterwise Topicwise JEE Main Solved Papers Chemistry466 pages
- Arihant Objective Physics Volume 2 For Class 12 For Engineering PDF90% (10)Arihant Objective Physics Volume 2 For Class 12 For Engineering PDF849 pages
- Physics JEE Solved Papers 41 Years Disha PublicationNo ratings yetPhysics JEE Solved Papers 41 Years Disha Publication553 pages
- ARIHANT AP Chapterwise PYQs (Chemistry)No ratings yetARIHANT AP Chapterwise PYQs (Chemistry)214 pages
- A Problem Book in Physics 500 Selected Problems For IIT JEE Arihant by D C95% (21)A Problem Book in Physics 500 Selected Problems For IIT JEE Arihant by D C425 pages
- 1st Puc Physics Chapter1-Physical World Notes by U N SwamyNo ratings yet1st Puc Physics Chapter1-Physical World Notes by U N Swamy6 pages
- Problems in Physics For IIT JEE - Vol - 1 PDF76% (21)Problems in Physics For IIT JEE - Vol - 1 PDF777 pages
- Physical World, Unit & Dimension, ErrorNo ratings yetPhysical World, Unit & Dimension, Error39 pages
- JEE Main 2024 Important Formulas For Physics PDF 1100% (5)JEE Main 2024 Important Formulas For Physics PDF 1466 pages
- 8468 Grade 4 Rationalized Agriculture and Nutrition Schemes of Work Term 3No ratings yet8468 Grade 4 Rationalized Agriculture and Nutrition Schemes of Work Term 311 pages
- Hsslive-xi-physics-ayyappan-CHAPTER 1 - PHYSICAL WORLDNo ratings yetHsslive-xi-physics-ayyappan-CHAPTER 1 - PHYSICAL WORLD2 pages
- Class 11 Chapter 1 Physics World @cbseinfiniteNo ratings yetClass 11 Chapter 1 Physics World @cbseinfinite8 pages
- A Blog Plus One Physics Chapter 1 Physical World PDF NoteNo ratings yetA Blog Plus One Physics Chapter 1 Physical World PDF Note2 pages
- @bohring - Bot 001-PHYSICAL WORLD (01 - 05)No ratings yet@bohring - Bot 001-PHYSICAL WORLD (01 - 05)5 pages
- Narayana I and II - Pages-1546-1630-21-39No ratings yetNarayana I and II - Pages-1546-1630-21-3919 pages
- Laws of Physics Related To Technology:: Classes XINo ratings yetLaws of Physics Related To Technology:: Classes XI2 pages
- Phase-1 Jee-Main Gtm-6 Final Question Paper Narayana75% (4)Phase-1 Jee-Main Gtm-6 Final Question Paper Narayana28 pages
- Register Free: Syllabus Revision 20% Guaranteed Score Doubt Solving NasaNo ratings yetRegister Free: Syllabus Revision 20% Guaranteed Score Doubt Solving Nasa12 pages
- Chapter 1: Physical World: 10+1 Physics Study Material-Chapter 1 WWW - Rsnotes.InNo ratings yetChapter 1: Physical World: 10+1 Physics Study Material-Chapter 1 WWW - Rsnotes.In4 pages
- 235611507-Coimbatore-DB Qwerpdf PDF To ExcelNo ratings yet235611507-Coimbatore-DB Qwerpdf PDF To Excel13 pages
- The Global Seafood Revolution: George Chamberlain President Global Aquaculture AllianceNo ratings yetThe Global Seafood Revolution: George Chamberlain President Global Aquaculture Alliance37 pages
- Marketing of Banking and Insurance Products100% (1)Marketing of Banking and Insurance Products57 pages
- Neuro AI - Intelligent Systems and Neural Networks: PrefaceNo ratings yetNeuro AI - Intelligent Systems and Neural Networks: Preface14 pages
- Eth101 - Module 3 - Ethics and Universal ValuesNo ratings yetEth101 - Module 3 - Ethics and Universal Values6 pages
- Topics: Conjugal Partnership of Gains, Conjugal PropertiesNo ratings yetTopics: Conjugal Partnership of Gains, Conjugal Properties3 pages
- Consensus - Nih.gov 2010 LactosestatementNo ratings yetConsensus - Nih.gov 2010 Lactosestatement16 pages
- GI Strategic Leadership and Public GovernanceNo ratings yetGI Strategic Leadership and Public Governance3 pages